(     BERKILiY 

LISRARY 

UNIVEMifr  OF 
CALIFORNIA 


»r7CAf  TDy  mm. 


Comfoet's  Geemais"  Seeies. 


A   GERMAN  PRIMER.     Introductory  to  the  German  Series.     i2mo,  Half 
Leather,  50  cents. 

A   FIRST  BOO^  IN  GERMAN.     To  Precede  the  German  Course.     lamo. 
Half  Leather,  60  cents. 

A   FIRST  GERMAN  READER.     To  Succeed  the  First  Book  in  German. 
i2mo,  Cloth,  50  cents. 

A    GERMAN  COURSE.    Adapted  for  Use  in  Colleges,  Academies,  and  High- 
Schools.     i2mo,  Half  Leather,  $x  12. 

A    TEACHER'S  COMPANION  to  the  German  Course.     i2mo,  Cloth,  50  cts. 

A    GERMAN  READER.  _  With  Notes  and  Vocabulary.^    ;r2mo,.  Half  Leath- 
er, $1  12.  * 

A   MANUAL   OF  GERMAN  CONVERSATION.     lamo.  Half  Leather, 
90  cents.  .  .  . 


HARPER  &  BROTHERS,  PUBLISHERS,  NEW  YORK. 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1869,  by 

HARPER  &   BROTHERS, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States  for  the 

Southern  District  of  New  York. 


Add  to  Lib. 

GaFT 


<^-V>ClAju/ 


CONTENTS  OF  THE  GERMAN  COURSE. 


INTRODUCTION iii 


PART  FIRST. 

f 

PRACTICAL   LESSONS. 

Leaaon 

I.  Pronunciation U 

II.  Pronunciation  (continued) 14 

III.  Present  and  Imperfect  Tenses  of  the  Verb  fctll,  to  be 17 

IV.  Present  and  Imperfect  Tenses  of  Ilegular  Verbs.     The  Definite 

Article.     The  Accusative  Case 19 

V.  Present  and  Imperfect  Tenses  of  l^dtlCIt/  to  have.     Accusative 

Case  of  Personal  Pronouns 21 

VI.  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  Tenses  of  Regular  Verbs 24 

VII.  Prepositions  with  the  Accusative  Case.     Gender  of  Nouns 26 

VIIL  The  Genitive  Case 28 

IX.  The  Dative  Case 31 

X.  Prepositions  with  the  Accusative  and  Dative  Cases 34 

XI.  Personal  Pronouns.    Forms  of  Address.    Contractions  of  Prep- 
ositions with  the  Definite  Article 36 

XII.  The  Irregular  Verb  tocrbcn,  <o  6eco;/je.     Future  Tenses 39 

XIII.  German  Current  Hand 42 

XIV.  Conjugation  of  Irregular  Verbs 45 

XV.  Plural  of  Nouns  and  of  the  Definite  Article 48 

XVL  The  Indefinite  Article 61 

XVII.  Cardinal  Numbers 64 

XVIII.  Adjectives  used  predicativjely  and  attributively.     Old  Declen- 
sion of  Adjectives 67 

XIX.  Possessive  Pronouns GO 

XX.  New  Declension  of  Adjectives 63 

XXI.  Mixed  Declension  of  Adjectives 66 

XXII.  Comparison  of  Adjectives 69 

XXIII.  Ordinal  Numbers 73 

XXIV.  Irregular  Verbs  of  the  First  Class 77 

XXV.  Irregular  Verbs  of  the  Second,  Third,  and  Fourth  Classes 80 

XX  VL  Irregular  Verbs  of  the  Fifth  and  Sixth  Classes 83 

XXVII.  Irregular  Verbs  of  the  Seventh  Class.     Recapitulation  pf  Irreg- 
ular Verbs 86 


150 


IV  CONTENTS    OP 

Losson  Pa|^ 

XXVIII.  Verbs  with  fcin,  to  he,  as  Auxiliary 89 

XXIX.  The  Infinitive  Mood 92 

XXX.  Participles 96 

XXXI.  The  Potential  Verbs  !iJnnen  and  milffcn 99 

XXXII.  The  Potential  Verbs  tDoHcll  and  mOgCll 102 

XXXIIL  The  Potential  Verbs  fottCH  and  biirfeil 105 

XXXIV.  Separable  Compound  Verbs 108 

XXXV.  Inseparable  Compound  Verbs HI 

XXXVI.  Compound  Nouns 115 

XXXVII.  Derivative  Nouns 120 

XXXVIII.  Derivative  and  Compound  Adjectives 128 

XXXIX.  Cases  governed  by  Adjectives 135 

XL.  Use  of  the  Article 139 

XLI.  Personal  and  Possessive  Pronouns 141 

XLII.  Indefinite  and  Interrogative  Pronouns 147 

XLIII.  Demonstrative  and  Relative  Pronouns 147 

XLIV.  Reflexive  Verbs 150 

XLV.  Agreement  of  Verbs  with  Nominative.     Verbs  governing 

the  Accusative  Case.     Apposition 154 

XL VI.  Verbs  governing  the  Genitive  Case 158 

XLVII.  Verbs  governing  the  Dative  Case 161 

XLVIIL  The  Passive  Voice IGS' 

XLIX.  Construction  of  Prepositions 166 

L.  Adverbs.     Conjunctions.     Order  of  Words 168 

LI.  Imperative,  Subjunctive,  and  Conditional  Moods 170 


PART   SECOND. 
I.  Conversations. 


No.  Page 

1.  Salutation,  a  visit 175 

2.  At  Breakfast  in  a  Hotel 176 

3.  Dinner 177 

4.  In  a  Confectionery  Shop 178 

5.  The  Hotel 178 

6.  The  Railroad 179 

7.  The  Steamer 180 

8.  The  Custom-house 182 


No.  Pag« 

9.  The  Post-office 182 

10.  At  a  Banker's 183 

11.  In  a  Bookstore 183 

12.  At  a  Tailor's 184 

13.  In  a  Dry  Goods  Store 185 

14.  At  a  Shoemaker's 186 

15.  With  a  physician 187 

16.  At  a  Watchmaker's 188 


II.  German  and  English  Idioms. 

1.  Idioms  with  IjaftCn  and  to  have 189 

2.  Idioms  with  fetn  and  to  he 190 

3.  Idioms  with  ttJCtbCn  and  to  hecome 191 

4.  The  Potential  Mood  and  Future  Indicative  of  the  English  Verb ....   192 


THE    GERMAN   COURSE.  V 

Ko.  p,ge 

5.  Idioms  with  the  verb  loffCIt,  to  leave^  to  let 193 

6.  Idioms  with  the  Verb  to  yet 193 

7.  Idioms  with  Prepositions 104-197 

III.  Examples  of  Synonyms. 

1.  3I(fcr,  ^elb,  Sanb 198 

2.  ^MerSmann,  Sanbtotrt^,  33auer 198 

3.  5luf[tc^en,  erfte^cn,  auferfte^en 198 

4.  2lii«ftil^ren,  iJoUbringen,  t)ollfu^ren,  i)oU5ie(;cn,  bottftrecfen 199 

5.  3)?eer,  (gee 199 

6.  ^Jiafemetg,  neugierig,  Dortui^ig 200 

7.  2)li3gen,  tDoIIen 200 

IV.  Letters  and  Forms  of  Business. 

1.  (Sin  gjeffe  metbet  feinem  Onfel  ben  2:obe«taII  joiner  i£d;tDeper 201 

2.  ©liicfiDunfc^  jum  ©eburtstag  eiiies  Waters 201 

3.  (Seremomette  ^orm  bcr  (Sinlabuug 202 

4.  3lntirort  auf  biefelbe 202 

5.  t^evtraulid^e  gorm  ber  (Sinlabung 202 

6.  3lntwort  auf  biefelbe 202 

7.  §ofUd;e  gorm  ber  (gintabung 203 

8.  ^liitTOort  auf  biefelbe 203 

9.  3Bec^fetbrtef 203 

10.  5lnti?eifiing 203 

11.  Ouittung 203 

V.  Reading  Lessons. 

3)ic  beutfc^e  (S^rac^e 204 

5)er  ©tra^enjunge 205 

5)c8  2)eutfd)en  58atcrranb 205 

2)er  jung€  aWufiter 20G 

3)er  58ettlcr  unb  ber  ^dfer  griebric^.-. 207 

(5in  3lbenteucr 207 

3)ic§unnen 208 

(Sintritt  in  bie  beutfc^e  ©d^mcij 209 

Sobann  SlBoIfgang  ton  @i5tbe 209 

2)e8  ^entgg  @rab 211 

5lufrnf  beg  ti5nigg  toon  ^reugen 211 

Knrjinjetage  gragen 212 

a«eere§ftiae 213 

2)er  Sirfntt?er  ®ee 213 

2)er  borfid^tige  jlraumcr 214 

SKag  ber  aWonb  er^cif^It .'. 214 


VI  CONTENTS   OF 

PART   THIRD. 

COMPEND  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR. 

I.  Introduction. 

Nc.  l'«(5S 

1.  History  of  the  German  Language 217 

2.  Characteristics  of  the  German  Language 228 

3.  Extent  of  Use  of  the  German  Language 230 

4.  German  Dialects 231 

5.  Comparison  of  Words  in  the  Indo-European  Languages.... 234 

6.  Comparison  of  Words  in  the  Teutonic  Languages 236 

7.  Illustration  of  the  Historical  Development  of  Words  in  the  German 

Language  238 

II.  German  Grammar. 

I.  Orthography 240 

1.  Vowels  and  Diphthongs 241 

2.  Consonants 243 

3.  Division  of  Syllables 245 

4.  Accent 246 

5.  Capital  Letters 247 

6.  Comparison  of  German  and  English  Words 248 

II.  Etymology  and  Syntax 252 

1.  The  Article 253 

Syntax  of  the  Article 254 

2.  The  Noun 255 

1.  Accidents  of  the  Noun 257 

2.  Gender  of  the  Noun 258 

3.  Declension  of  the  Noun 261 

4.  Syntax  of  the  Noun 266 

3.  The  Adjective 269 

1.  Declension  of  the  Adjective 270 

2.  Comparison  of  the  Adjective , .•. 272 

3.  Syntax  of  the  Adjective 275 

4.  Numerals 276 

1.  Cardinal  Numbers 277 

2.  Ordinal  Numbers 278 

3.  Numeral  Nouns 280 

4.  Numeral  Adverbs 281 

5.  The  Pronoun 281 

1.  Personal  Pronouns 282 

2.  Possessive  Pronouns 283 

3.  Demonstrative  Pronouns... 284 

4.  Indefinite  Pronouns ^ 286 


THE    GERMAN    COURSE.  vil 

No.  Fin 

r>.  Interrogative  Pronouns 289 

6.  Relative  Pronouns 2"J0 

7.  Syntax  of  the  Pronoun 291 

6.    The  Verb 2'Jl 

1.  Conjugation 293 

1.  Moods 293 

1.  The  Indicative  Mood 293 

2.  The  Subjunctive  Mood 294 

3.  The  Conditional  Mood 29^ 

4.  The  Imperative  Mood 295 

5.  The  Infinitive  Mood 295 

2.  Participles 296 

1.  The  Present  Participle 297 

2.  The  Perfect  Participle 297 

3.  Tenses 298 

4.  The  Passive  Voice 299 

2.  Auxiliary  Verbs 300 

1.  Conjugation  of  f^obtn,  to  have 301 

2.  Conjugation  of  fcin,  to  be 303 

3.  Conjugation  of  tDCtbCIl^^o  become 305 

3.  Regular  Verbs 307 

Conjugation  of  the  Regular  Verb  licbCll,  to  love 307 

4.  Irregular  Verbs 310 

1.  Classified  List  of  Irregular  Verbs 311 

2,  Alphabetical  List  of  Irregular  Verbs 314 

3.  Conjugation  of  the  Irregular  Verb  f^IagCtt^  to  strike 822 

4,  Conjugation  of  the  Irregular  Verb  fomtttcn^  to  come 324 

6.  Compound  Verbs 326 

1.  Separable  Compound  Verbs 326 

Conjugation  of  the  Separable  Compound  Verb  annC^tltCtt^  to 
accept 328 

2.  Inseparable  Compound  Verbs 329 

Conjugation  of  the  Inseparable  Compound  Verb  tlCrftC^CQ^ 
to  understand. 332 

3.  Doubly-compounded  Verbs..^ 334 

6.  Reflexive  Verbs  (Conjugation  of) 835 

7.  Impersonal  Verbs 337 

8.  The  Passive  Voice 338 

9.  The  Potential  Verbs 340 

1.  The  Verb  foUCU 840 

2.  The  Verb  ttoKcn 343 

3.  The  Verb  fbnncn 345 

4.  The  Verb  mOHCn 347 

5.  The  Verb  biir fen 349 

6.  The  Verb  miiffen 352 


VIU        CONTENTS  OF  THE  GERMAN  COURSE. 

No.  PaK« 

10.  The  Syntax  of  the  Verb 354 

1.  Verbs  governing  the  Accusative  Case 354 

2.  Verbs  governing  the  Genitive  Case 35G 

3.  Verbs  governing  the  Dative  Case 358 

7.  The  Adverb 3G0 

1.  Classification  of  Adverbs 360 

2.  Comparison  of  Adverbs 368 

3.  Syntax  of  Adverbs £69 

8.  Prepositions 372 

1.  Construction  of  Prepositions 373 

2.  Prepositions  governing  the  Genitive  Case 375 

3.  Prepositions  governing  the  Dative  Case 380 

4.  Prepositions  governing  the  Accusative  Case 385 

5.  Prepositions  governing  the  Dative  and  Accusative  Cases 388 

6.  Remarks  upon  Prepositions 392 

9.  Conjunctions 394 

1.  List  of  Conjunctions 395 

2.  Co-ordinative  Conjunctions 396 

3.  Subordinative  Conjunctions 397 

4.  Remarks  upon  Conjunctions o 398 

10.  The  Interjection 404 

11.  Arrangement  of  Words 405 


PART  FOURTH. 
VOCABULARIES. 


L  Personal  Proper  Names 415 

IL  Geographical  Proper  Names 417 

III.  Abbreviations 420 

IV.  German  Moneys,  Weights,  and  Measures 422 

V.  Classified  List  of  Words 423 

VI.  German-English  Vocabulary 436 

VII.  English-German  Vocabulary 477 

VIIL  General  Index 495 


A  GERMAN    COURSE 


INTKODUCTION 

TO   THE 

GERMAN   COURSE. 


In  preparing  this  German  Course,  it  has  been  the  aim  of 
the  author  to  incorporate  the  most  advanced  views  and 
principles  of  linguistic  instruction,  as  held  by  the  best  wri- 
ters upon  philology,  and  the  best  practical  educators  in 
Europe  and  America.  Especial  preference  has  been  given 
to  those  features  of  approved  works  for  the  study  of  mod- 
ern languages  which,  in  Europe  more  especially,  have  stood 
the  test  of  practical  use.  A  few  other  features  have  also 
been  introduced,  which  have  been  adopted  with  eminent 
success  by  the  most  able  professors  of  modern  language  in 
their  personal  instruction,  but  which  have  not  heretofore 
found  their  way  into  text-books. 

Care  has  been  taken  to  give  due  relative  prominence  to 
each  of  these  tried  and  approved  principles,  and  to  mould 
them  into  a  homogeneous  system  adapted  to  the  wants  of 
classes  in  the  Colleges,  Academies,  and  other  high-schools 
of  learning  in  America.  Farther  than  this,  but  little  claim 
is  laid  to  originality,  and  none  is  laid  to  novelty  of  method. 

The  German  Course  consists  oifour  jparta  : 

Part  First;  containing  practical  lessons  for  learning  to 
read,  write,  and  speak  the  German  Language. 

Part  Second;  containing  familiar  conversations  in  Ger- 
man and  English,  models  of  lettei-s,  and  forms  of  business, 
and  selections  from  German  literature. 

Part  Third ;  containing  a  compend  of  German  Grammar, 


4  INTKODUCTION. 

with  an  introduction  upon  the  history,  characteristics,  and 
dialects  of  the  language. 

Part  Fourth;  containing  tables  of  German  moneys, 
weights,  and  measures,  abbreviations,  personal  and  geo- 
graphical proper  names,  and  German-Enghsh  and  English- 
German  vocabularies. 

In  Paet  FmsT,  the  Lessons  are  arranged  with  reference 
to  the  rapid  and  natural  learning  of  the  German  Language, 
both  for  the  purpose  of  understanding  and  of  using  the  lan- 
guage. 

A  person  thrown  suddenly  into  a  foreign  country,  the 
language  of  which  he  wishes  to  learn,  finds  himself  embar- 
rassed at  the  outset  by  '^ye  chief  wants.  He  needs  equally 
and  immediately  a  "Vocabulary  of  words ^  a  knowledge  of 
grammatical  forms  ^  of  syntactical  laws,  and  of  idiomatic 
construction,  and  of  the  laws  of  pronunciation. 

It  is  the  aim,  in  the  Lessons,  to  meet  these  wants,  in  such 
consecutiveness  of  order  as  to  make  the  knowledge  of  the 
language  a  natural  and  symmetrical  growth. 

The  points  of  contact  and  resemblance  of  the  German 
with  the  English  language  are  presented  first,  more  recon- 
dite, complicated,  and  divergent  principles  being  reserved 
till  later  in  the  lessons. 

As  far  as  possible,  every  word  and  grammatical  princi- 
ple is  presented  in  a  living,  natural  sentence,  before  it  is 
defined  or  explained.  The  concrete  thus  precedes  the  ab- 
stract. The  practice  precedes  the  theory.  The  principles 
of  the  language  are  presented  to  the  mind  of  the  learner  as 
the  result  of  his  deductions  from  the  examples,  which  are 
given  before  the  rules.  Many  expert  students  will  indeed 
detect  the  meaning  of  the  new  words  and  the  new  gram- 
matical laws  without  referring  to  the  vocabulary  or  to  the 
grammatical  part  of  the  lesson.  The  habits  of  scrutiny, 
of  investigation,  of  independent  analysis  and  classification, 
wliich  are  so  strongly  developed  in  translating  works  of  the 
classic  authors,  and  which  are  justly  esteemed  to  be  among 


INTRODUCnOI^  5 

the  most  important  results  of  linguistic  study,  are  by  this 
means  called  into  exercise  at  the  very  outset  in  the  study 
of  the  language.  Experience  shows,  also,  that  this  method, 
while  of  great  value  to  the  earnest  student,  at  the  same 
time  awakens  interest  and  even  enthusiasm  in  the  compar- 
atively listless  scholar. 

The  Lessons  are  usually  composed  oiJivepaHs.  In  the 
first  jpart  a  few  sentences  are  given,  with  English  transla- 
tion, and  containing  the  new  grammatical  principles  of  the 
lesson  ingrafted  wpon  words  already  known.  The  atten- 
tion is  thus  drawn  at  first  solely  to  the  new  principle. 

Secondly^  the  same  principles  are  applied  to  sentences, 
without  translation^  and  containing  new  words.  From 
similarity  to  corresponding  Enghsh  'words,  or  from  tlio 
connection  of  the  sentence,  the  meaning  of  these  new 
words  will  often  be  surmised. 

Thirdly,  the  Vocabulary  contains  the  new  words  used 
in  the  lesson.  These  are  not  arranged  alphabetically,  but 
tliey  are  grouped  according  to  their  logical  or  grammatical 
similarity  or  contrast  in  meaning  and  use. 

Fourthly  is  given  an  explanation,  with  appropriate  illus- 
tration, of  the  new  grammatical  principles  involved  in  the 
preceding  exercises.  Advantage  is  taken,  both  in  the  para- 
digms in  the  lessons  and  in  the  formal  grammar  of  Part 
Second,  of  heavier  type  and  of  spaced  letters,  to  attract  the 
eye  to  the  variable  jpart  of  the  inflected  word. 

Fifthly,  the  lesson  closes  with  an  exercise  of  English 
sentences  containing  the  new  words  and  principles,  to  be 
translated  into  German. 

The  exercises  in  pronunciation  contain  short  and  simple 
sentences  with  many  proper  names.  They  contain  no  words 
the  meaning  of  which  is  not  readily  discerned,  nor  do  they 
involve  more  difficulties  of  pronunciation  than  occur  in 
ordinary  discourse. 

In  the  exercises  of  the  subsequent  lessons  two  things  are 
avoided :  on  the  one  hand,  platitudes  and  unmeaning  or 


INTRODUOnON. 


unnatural  sentences ;  on  the  other  hand,  proverbs  and  sen- 
tences  of  recondite  meaning.  As  far  as  possible,  the  sen- 
tences are  such  as  would  be  used  in  ordinary  conversation. 
Facts  in  German  history,  geography,  biography,  literature, 
and  daily  life  are  frequently  introduced,  thus  assisting  the 
student  to  feel  that  he  is  learning  the  German  language. 

That  the  student  may  not  unconsciously  acquire  the  habit 
of  translating  every  thing  from  English  into  German  liter- 
ally, a  few  simple  idiomatic  expressions  are  introduced 
early  into  the  lessons.  But,  in  order  not  to  bewilder  the 
student,  idioms  are  not  given  extensively  until  after  the 
development  of  the  laws  of  etymology  and  syntax. 

As  it  is  desirable  to  introduce  the  difficulties  to  the  lan- 
guage gradually,  the  use  of  the  German  Current  Hand  is  re- 
served until  the  eye  of  the  student  shall  have  become  famil- 
iar with  the  printed  German  type.  The  formation  of  deriv- 
ative and  compound  verbs,  nouns,  and  adjectives  is  illustra' 
ted  with  much  fullness.  In  the  latter  part  of  the  Lessons, 
after  the  student  has  gathered  gradually  and  progressively 
a  partial  knowledge  of  the  grammatical  principles  of  the 
language  and  has  applied  these  principles  to  groups  of 
words,  he  is  referred  to  appropriate  portions  of  the  Com- 
pend  of  German  Grammar  in  Part  Third  for  the  further 
elucidation  of  grammatical  principles,  and  to  the  vocabula- 
ries in  Part  Fourth  for  new  words  that  may  occur  in  the 
Exercises.  In  order  to  familiarize  the  eye  with  different 
kinds  of  type,  various  sizes  and  styles  of  letters  are  intro- 
duced in  the  exercises  of  the  last  few  lessons.  That  the 
student  may  also  be  finally  thrown  entirely  upon  his  own 
resources,  the  English  exercises,  to  be  translated  into  Ger- 
man, are  omitted  from  several  of  the  last  lessons. 

Part  Second  can  be  used  by  travelers  and  others,  to 
whom  a  facility  in  conversing  and  in  using  forms  of  busi- 
ness is  an  immediate  necessity.  The  references  to  the  les- 
sons and  the  Grammar  will  assist  in  understanding  the 
construction  of  the  sentences.     The  conversations  will  also 


INTEODUCTION.  7 

serve  to  initiate  the  student,  who  has  passed  through  the 
lessons  of  Part  First,  more  fully  into  the  idiomatic  spirit  of 
tlie  German  language.  The  reading  lessons  will  suffice  to 
prepare  the  way  for  the  Gentian  Reader. 

Part  Third  contains  a  Compend  of  German  Grammar, 
which  is  sufficiently  comprehensive  to  meet  all  ordinary 
wants,  even  in  reading  classic  authors.  The  Grammar  is 
preceded  by  an  Introduction^  which  will  serve  to  show  the 
jiosition  tlie  German  language  occupies  among  its  cognate 
languages,  the  chief  epochs  of  its  history,  its  most  promi- 
nent characteristics,  and,  above  all,  to  show  that  the  Ger- 
man, like  all  other  living  languages,  has  been,  and  is  yet 
subject  to  growth,  development,  and  change.  In  the  body 
of  the  Grammar  itself  are  also  introduced  frequent  notes 
upon  the  history  and  development  of  grammatical  forms. 
To  the  earnest  student,  this  philosophical  and  historical 
method  of  studying  the  German  language  will  serve  as  a 
stepping-stone  to  higher  studies  in  the  broader  fields  of 
philology. 

Part  Fourth  contains,  in  addition  to  the  usual  vocabu- 
laries and  index,  a  list  of  the  most  important  abbreviations, 
and  tables  of  the  moneys,  weights,  and  measures  of  the  lead- 
ing states  of  Germany. 

In  conclusion,  the  author  commits  the  Gemnan  Course 
to  tlie  American  public,  with  the  hope  that  it  may  contrib- 
ute something  to  the  promotion  of  the  study  of  this  noble 
language,  with  its  rich  treasures  in  every  branch  of  litera- 
ture, science,  history,  and  criticism,  and  to  the  introduction 
of  a  more  practical,  and,  at  the  same  time,  of  a  more  truly 
philosophic  method  of  studying  the  living  languages  into 
our  Colleges  and  other  schools  of  learning. 


Part  JTirst; 


CONTAINING 

PRACTICAL    LESSONS 

FOB   LEARNING    TO    READ,  WRITE,    AND    SPEAK    THR 

GERMAN  LANGUAGE. 


Xl 


LESSON  I. 

PROJ 
E 

OJNCIATION. 

xercise  I. 

German 

Roman 

English 

English 

Letters, 

Letters. 

Pronunciation. 

Translation, 

tarl, 

Karl, 

Karl, 

Charles. 

'mitt, 

Yater, 

Fah'-ter, 

Father. 

^car, 

Paar, 

Pahr, 

Pair. 

^ctcr, 

Peter, 

Pay'-teVy 

Peter. 

©c^cn, 

Gehen, 

Gay'-en, 

Go. 

S3cffer, 

Besser, 

Bes'-ser, 

Better. 

m% 

Elisa, 

Ay-lee'-zah, 

Elisa. 

SBcrlin, 

Berlin, 

Ber-leen', 

Berlin. 

3ft, 

1st, 

Ist, 

Is. 

8inb, 

Sind, 

Zint, 

Are. 

mmt, 

Marie, 

Mah-ree\ 

Mary. 

©lU^a, 

Gotha, 

Go'-ta\ 

Gotha. 

^^olcn, 

Polen, 

Po'-len, 

Poland. 

@o^n, 

Sohn, 

Zone, 

Son. 

SDiorgcn, 

Morgen, 

Mor'-gen, 

Morning. 

Mubcng, 

Rubens, 

Roo'-hens, 

Rubens. 

SBrubcr, 

Bruder, 

Broo'-der, 

Brother. 

Sautter, 

Mutter, 

Moot'-ter, 

Mother. 

SBraun, 

Braun, 

Brown, 

Brown. 

9i^ein, 

Rhein, 

Rhine, 

Rhine. 

9)hi, 

Mai, 

My, 

May. 

(5uro<ja, 

Europa, 

Oy-ro'-pah, 

Europe. 

SBicn, 

Wien, 

Veen, 

Vienna. 

3o^ann, 

Johann, 

Yo-hann', 

John. 

3ult, 

Juli, 

Yoo'-Ue, 

July. 

^cftion, 

Lektion, 

Lek-tsee-oW , 

Lesson. 

(£ato, 

Cato, 

Cah'-to, 

Cato. 

Siccro, 

Cicero, 

Tsee'-tsay^o 

,  Cicero. 

Quotient, 

Quotient, 

Quo-tsee-ent' 

',  Quotient 

12 

PRONUNCIATION. 

Grammatical. 

1.  The  German  Alphabet  has  twenty- 

six  letters 

: 

German 

Roman 

Names  of 

German 

Roman 

Names  of 

Letters. 

Letters. 

Letters. 

Letters. 

Letters. 

Letters. 

9t,o, 

A,  a, 

Ah. 

%n, 

N,n, 

Enn. 

8,6, 

B,b, 

Bay, 

0,0, 

0,o, 

Oh. 

e,t, 

C,c, 

Tsay, 

?,<», 

P,P, 

Pay. 

3),b, 

D,d, 

Day, 

iD,q, 

Q,q, 

Eoo. 

6,c, 

E,e, 

Ay. 

%t, 

E,r, 

Err. 

t!f,f, 

F,f, 

Eff' 

S,f,(8) 

,8,8, 

Ess. 

®,9, 

G,g, 

Gay. 

%t, 

T,t, 

Tay. 

§,J), 

H,h, 

Ilah, 

U,u, 

U,u, 

Oo. 

ai, 

I,i, 

Ee. 

»,!», 

V,v, 

Fow. 

3,i, 

J,j, 

Tote. 

SB,tt, 

W,w, 

Vay. 

t,l, 

K,k, 

Kah. 

X,J, 

X,x, 

Jks. 

S,I, 

L,l, 

Ell. 

?),», 

Y,y, 

Ijj-see-lon 

SW,m, 

M,m, 

Emm. 

3,5, 

Z,z, 

Tset. 

Rem.  The  short  form  §  is  used  at  the  end  of  syllables:  SJu'sBcilS,  ^Ot§'« 

2.  The  Vowels  a,  C,  i,  0,  tt  are  pronounced  thus : 

1*  5(,  a,  like  «  \n  father:  33a^4er,^a"4o,^arl,®o'45a. 

2.  (g,  e,   "    a  "  mfl^zJ^.-    $e^4er,  ®e^4en,  (S'^ben, 

3.  3,  i,    "    ee  "  m^^jJ.-     ^.U^^fa,  3'^Tt^t)or,  35er4in^ 

4.  D,o,   "     o  ''  m^256.-    ©o'.t^a,  $o^4en,  ?ef4t^on^ 

3.  The  Diphthongs  au,  Ct,  Clt  are  pronounced  thus: 

1.   ^VifUVifWkQou'uimound:  53raun,  5lu'^guft,  ^au0. 

2*   ^iftX,    "    i  ''might:    9i^ein,  @tet'^er=^marf. 
((£t),ct)), "    "   "      "    .•    2^e^/^er4etm,  ^pe^'^en 
(li,  at),  "    "  «      "    ;    max,  3^ain^,  33at^.ern. 

3.   (£u,  cu,  "    o^  "  moist:    Su^ro'^pa, D^eu^engMant), 

i2em.  The  form  t^  is  used  only  in  a  few  proper  names ;  the  form  ai  is  used 
in  but  a  few  words. 


PRONUNCIATICN.  13 

4.  The  Vowel  is  long: 

1.  When  doubled  in  the  same  syllable:  ^aax,  (Spree. 
2.With  silent  §     "    "      "  "      :  @o^n,  9^ot^. 

3.  Wlien  it  closes  a  syllable  (especially  when  it  is  ao 
cented):  ^a'^tx,  dAV^^^a,  ^e'^ter,  $o'4en,  ba,  fo. 

Rem.  1.  3i/  followed  by  silent  C,is  long :  SBicn  (veen),  'JSla'tlt'* 
Hem.  2.  Diphthongs  are  always  long:  ^lu'sguft,  ^aV-ttn,  ©UstO's^fl. 
Retn.  3.  Great  care  is  necessary  not  to  give  a  short  sound  to  long  vowelB. 

6.  The  Vowel  is  short  when  followed  by : 

1.  Double  consonants:  2)^ut'4er,  ht\'^\tx,  3o4<^ttn'. 

2.  Two  consonants  (as  a  rule) :  ^iUtuon',  fRn'^htn^. 

3.  A  single  consonant  (in  a  few  monosyllables);  as: 
in,  mit,  ta^,  e^,  man,  wa^,  bin,  \)ai,  etc. 

Rem.  In  most  unaccented  syllables,  the  C  is  almost  suppressed;  ^e'-tCT, 
BC^'-en,  ^o'4en,  S3a'4cr,  mu'Mx,  SWut'4cr. 

6.  The  Consonants  are  pronounced  thus: 

1.  S3,  b,  f,  f^,  I,  I,  m,  n,  ^,  q,  r,  t  are  pronounced  like 
^,  ^,j^  h,  k,  I,  m,  n,^,  q,  r,  t  in  English, 

Exc.  1.  35,  at  the  end  of  a  syllable,  likep  in  deep:  ^tcb,  thief. 
-Exc.  2.  2),      "  "  "  "     t  ''   boat:  'idQ^,  hath. 

Exc.  3.  Sa,  not  beginning  a  syllable,  is  trilled  :    ©ru'=bcr,  5ya'-tCr. 
Exc.  4.  ^,  in  final  stiOtt  (not  preceded  by  g),  like  t^  :  Scfstisfltt'^ 

2.  E,  before  a,  0,  or  u  (or  before  a  conso- 

nant) is  pronounced  like  h  in  king :  (la'to^dor^jtca. 

S^,  before  other  vowels  "    ts'^  mits :  Si'cero^de're^. 

3.®^ "    g"  go:  ©o^t^a^ge^^em 

"  at  the  end  of  a  syllable (see  Less,  ii.,  2). 

4.  3?, like  y  "  yoke:  3o^ann^3u1i. 

6»  @,  before  a  vowel         "    z  "  s<?n^  /  <5o^n,  (SUTa. 

"   before  ^  or  t,  and  at  the  beginning  of 

a  radical  syllable,  like  sh  "  shi^ :  (Spree,  (Btein. 

"    otherwise "    «  "  ^«5  /  S^u'ben^,  ba^. 

6.  S  (in  native  words),     "   /  "  fine :  SBa^ter,  §a'»el. 

7.8B, "    V  "  vine:  2Bten, 2Borg(U 

8.3^, "    X  "  wax:  2^ar,  Selir. 

9.  3, . ''   ts  ''  mits :  SUiaina,  Si'om 


14 


PRONUNCIATION   (CONTINUED). 


Exercise  2. 


^arl  53rautt  tfl  in  IkxAxn', 
(^11^4^  53raun  tft  in  ®o^.t{)a, 
Tlame  mv^tx  ifi  in  mm, 
SBil'4^Ini  war  in  33a^^ben, 
Sr  ift  je^t  in  granf^urt, 
SBir  ma'^ren  in  ^iJJann'^^tm, 
2)iein  SSa^^ter  unb  mein  ^xn'^ 

ter  jtnb  in  ^aVAt, 
5l4e^ran'^ber  i?cn  ^um'^olbt, 
2BiF4elm  tton  ^um'^bolbt, 
$)e^4er  ?)aul  S^u'^en^, 
3a^4o^  unb  SiF^elm  ©rimm, 
^err  51.  D*  ?in^^be?mann, 
grau  »on  SGoP^fen^ftein, 
SWain^,  ^o'4>Ien^,  53re'==men, 

Sl'^t^en,  5l^4ri4a,  3n^=^bi.en, 
3^ta'4i^en,  (Spa^^^ni^en, 
^or4anb,  Un'^garn,  5>o'4en, 


Charles  Brown  is  in  Berlin 
Eliza  Brown  is  in  Gotha. 
Mary  Ritter  is  in  Vienna. 
William  was  in  Baden. 
He  is  now  in  Frankfort. 
We  were  in  Mannheim. 
My  father  and  my  brother 

are  in  Halle. 
Alexander  von  Humboldt. 
William  von  Humboldt. 
Peter  Paul  Rubens. 
Jacob  and  William  Grimm. 
Mr.  A.  D.  Lindemann. 
Mrs.  von  Wolfenstein. 
Mayence,Coblentz,Bremen. 
America,  Europe. 
Asia,  Africa,  India. 
Italy,  Spain. 
Holland,  Hungary,  Poland; 


LESSON  II. 

PBONUNCIATION   (CONTINUED). 

1.  The  Um'-lauts  i,  '6f  U,  M  are  pronounced  thus  : 
1*  %tf  a,  called  ah! -umlaut^  like  t  (see  Less.  L,  2,  2). 

2.  Dc,  b,  called  oh' -umlaut^  has  no  equivalent  in 
English.  It  is  like  the  French  eu.  Its  pro- 
nunciation may  be  approximated  by  producing 
a  sound  between  that  of  oo  in  hoon^  and  that  of 
UT  in  hum :  ^orfe,  Exchange,  f^on,  leautiful. 

3.  Uc,  it,  called  oo^-umlaut,  has  no  equivalent  in 
English.  It  is  like  the  French  u.  The  pronun- 
ciation of  ©itb  {south)  may  be  approximated  by 


PRONUNCIATION   (CONTINUED).  15 

placing  the  lips  as  if  to  whistle,  and  then  trying 
to  pronounce  the  word  seed:  !Duf  ^^fcl^torf, 

4.  ^CU,  au,  has  the  same  sound  as  CU  (Less.  I.,  3,  3) 
i.  e.^  that  of  oi  in  moist:  Wd\x'At,  inice. 

2.  There  are  two  Guttural  Sounds  in  the  German  that 
do  not  exist  in  the  English  language : 

1.  ^^,  ^  (and  g,  when  ending  a  syllable)  after  a,  O, 
tt,  or  an,  have  a  rough  aspirate  sound,  formed 
deeper  in  the  throat  and  much  stronger  than 
that  of  h  in  hope :  {)od^  (Jiohh)  high ;  Xu^  {toohh), 
cloth;  2^ag  {tahh),  day ;  mac^en  {ma'-hhen),  to  make. 

2.  After  other  letters  (and  in  the  diminutive  sylla- 
ble d)Cn),  they  have  a  softer  sound,  made  higher 
in  the  palate,  and  inclining  to  that  of  sh  in.  shall : 
\^  {ih'%1;  re^t  {rehH\  right;  ^int)'4en  Qcind'- 
h'^^en),  a  child  ;  3)Jun^jjd)en  (rnmV-h^^en),  Munich, 

Rem.  1.  In  words  of  Greek  origin,  ^  sounds  like  ki  (S^or,  choir. 
Rem.  2.  Also  before  ^  in  the  same  radical  syllable,  like  k: 


3.  The  Consonantal  Combinations  fd^,  tl^,  ng : 

1.  (3^,  like  sh  in,  shall :  ®^aU,  sound;  gif^,  Jish. 

2.  i^f    "     t  *'  tone:  Z^on, clay; Xi)o'^ma^, Thomas, 

3.  U%,    '*    ng''  sing:  [in^'^cn, to  sing;  %ino^'^cx,^nger, 

4.  The  Compound  Consonants,  or  those  joined  together 
in  printing,  are  H}  (ch),  rf  (c/c),  ft  (st),  §  (sz),  ^  (tz). 

1.  (f  is  pronounced  like  k  in  hake :  ber  ^ad'^tx,  haker. 

2.  g  "  "  "    s  *'  less:    (^t-.fa^\  a  vessel, 

3.  ^  "  "  "    ts  "  mits:  M^Mic^,  useful, 

5.  Doubled  Letters  are  named  separately  in  spelling : 

Rem.  The  vowels  i  and  n  are  never  doubled. 


aa    . 

.     ah-ah. 

ff, 

ff    .     . 

.     .     e/f-e/r. 

ee 

.     ay-ay. 

ff, 

S3     .       . 

.     .     ess-ess. 

00     . 

.     oh-oh. 

tt, 

tt     .       . 

.     c     tay-tay. 

16  PRONTTNCIATION  (CONTINUED"), 

6.  There  are  no  silent  letters  in  German,  except : 

1.  j)f  when  used  to  indicate  the  long  sound  of  a  vowel ; 
2    p       "       ''     ^'        "^        "      '^         "      '^      I* 

3.  tJOf  after  0  (occuring  in  a  few  proper  names). 

7.  The  Accent  may  be  understood  to  be  on  the  Jirst 
»2/llahle,when  not  otherwise  marked  in  the  vocabularies. 

8.  Capital  Letters  are  used  as  initials  to  aU  nouns,  and 
to  the  pronouns  <Sie  {i/ou)  and  3^t  ((your). 

Srittc  ^ufgaJc* 

|)crr  3Be'^ber  ifl  in  35er4tn',  Mr.  Weber  -s  in  Berlin. 

SBo  ijl  ^err  3)^e9'^er4cim?  Where  is  Mr.  Meyerheim? 

^r  ift  je^t  in  3)eutfd^'4anb,  He  is  now  in  Germany. 

Sir^elm  unb  ^arl  m^Atx  ftnb  William  and  Charles  Ritter 

nic^t  in  3}?ag'^be^burg,  are  not  in  Magdeburg. 

<Bte  ftnb  jegt  in  2)re^^^ben,  They  are  now  in  Dresden. 

^er4in^  ift  xw.  $reu^^f  en,  Berlin  is  in  Prussia. 

SBten  ift  in  De'^fter^reic^,  Vienna  is  in  Austria. 

2)re^^^ben  ift  in  <Sad^^4^tt^  Dresden  is  in  Saxony. 

Seip^ig  ift  in  ®a(^'^fen,  Leipsic  is  in  Saxony. 

SSar'4^cin  ift  in  $o'4en,  Warsaw  is  in  Poland. 

5)rag  ij^  in  ^o^'^men,  Prague  is  in  Bohemia. 

SStertc  ^ufgak* 

Sr':=fle,  ^wei'^e.brif  4c,  ^ier^^te,  First,  second,  third,  fourth, 

fiinf  ^te,  fec^^'4e  ?ef4t^on',         fifth,  sixth  lesson. 

;Drit'4e,  oier'^te  5lnf  ^ga^be,  Third,  fourth  exercise. 

SDZitn'^c^en,    ^(ug^'^burg    unb  Munich,  Augsburg,  and  Nu- 

Sfiitrn^^^berg  (tnb  in  33ai^^ern,       remberg  are  in  Bavaria. 

55rag,2Bien,Xri^ejl^unb3nn^^^  Prague,  Trieste,  and  Inns- 

brud  ftnb  in  De'^fter^reid^,         pruck  are  in  Austria. 

|)et'^beUberg  ift  in  53a^^ben,  Heidelberg  is  in  Baden. 

2)iif  ^fel^borf  ift  m  $reu^^f  en,  Dusseldorf  is  in  Prussia. 

2)eutf(^'^lanb,  3^ta^^li^en   unb  Germany,  Italy  and  Russia 

3fiup'4anb  ftnb  xxi  (Su^^ro^^pa,       are  in  Europe. 


PRESENT   AND   IMPERFECT   TENSES   OP   fclll,  TO   BE.      17 


LESSON  III. 

PRESENT  AND   IMPERFECT  TENSES   OP  THE  VERB  fCtll^  TO  BE. 


3fl  |)err  SD^eif^^^elin  S3er4in^? 
^txn,  er  ift  in  ^oln, 

SOBir  wa'^ren  in  ^aVAt, 
T)a^  53uc^  n)ar  nid)t  t^eu'^ev, 
(£^  ift  ^eu'4e  fe^r  tt)arm, 
^eu^4c  ift  e^  fe^r  warm, 


Is  Mr.  Menzel  in  Berlin? 
No,  he  is  in  Cologne. 
Where  were  you  yesterday  ? 
We  were  in  Halle. 
The  book  was  not  dear. 
It  is  very  warm  to-day. 


giinftc  ^ttfgafic* 

l»S©o  ftnb  $err  9^ein^arbt  unb  $crr  3)?en%l?  2.  ^crr 
SHein'^^^bt  ift  in  53er4in^  nnb  ^err  Tlcn'^^d  ift  in  ^ot^'^Mm. 
3*  ©a'^ren  ®ie  ge'^ftern  in  ^oln  ?  4.  ^Jlein,  i^  mar  ge'^ftem 
in  %xanV^fuxt  5.  3ft  gran  ^Reu^^mann  \)m'^k  in  ^er^in"? 
6.  3a,  fte  ift  in  ^cxAxn\  7.  3ft  grau'^ein  Sf^eu'^mann  aud^ 
in  ^er4in'?  8.  9^ein,  jte  ift  f)eu^4e  in  Dre^^^ben.  9.  2Bo  ijl 
ba^  33u^?  10.  §ier  ijl  e^.  11.  Da^  SBef^^ter  ift  je^t  fe^r 
warm.  12.  SSor'^ge^ftern  war  e^  fet)r  fait.  13.  ©e'^tern 
wa'^ren  wir  in  ^ot^'^bam.  14.  $>ot^'^bam  unb  S^ag'^be^urg 
ftnb  in  ?)rcu'4en.  15.  ''pxm'4^n,  33ai'^ern,  ©ad^'^^n,  ^a'^ 
ben,  Dl'^ben^burg  unb  Wlcd'Am-Mxg,  ftnb  in  2)eutf^'4anb, 

Vocabulary. 


^crrgfJ.,Mr.N. 

5d;>  I. 

SBann?  when? 

grou9fi.,Mrs.  N. 

(Sr,  he. 

3e^t,  now. 

grau'4ctn3fl.,MissN. 

@ic,  she. 

^eu'4c,  to-day. 

2)a8  33uc^,  the  book. 

(S§,  it. 

@c'*ftern,  yesterday. 

„    Xu6:^,  the  cloth. 

mix,  we. 

35or'*gc4tern,  day  before 

„    5Bet'4er,  the  weather. 

@ic,  you. 

yesterday. 

I3ir4i3,  cheap. 

@te,  they. 

^o(^,  still,  yet. 

%\)(n''tx,  dear.* 

Sa,  yes. 

@e^r,  very. 

SIBarm,  warm. 

^etn,  no. 

2Bo?  where? 

^cig,  hot. 

md}t,  not. 

§ier,  here. 

Mt,  cold. 

Unb,  and. 

2)a,  there. 

!JJot«'*bam  (^seepage  419). 

5luc^,  also. 

3n,  in. 

18      PRESENT  AND   IMPERFECT   TENSES   OF   fcttl,  TO    BE. 

Grammatical. 
1.  The  Present  and  Imperfect  Tenses  of  the  Irregulai 
Verb  fcin,  to  he,  are  conjugated  thus: 


Present  Tense. 

Imperfect 

Tense. 

X&l    Un,     I       am. 

i^ 

tear, 

I        was. 

©ie  ftnb,   you  are. 

@ie 

tt)ar%cn, 

you   were. 

cr    ift,      he     is. 

cr 

loar, 

he     was. 

tntr  filtb,    we     are. 

h)tr 

tt)ar'*cn, 

we    were. 

©tc   finb,    you    are. 

@ie 

t»ar'*cn, 

you   were. 

fie    (tub,    they  are. 

fie 

U)ar%en, 

they  were. 

Rem.  A  single  consonant  between  two  vowels  is  pronounced  with  the  last 
rowel.  The  vowels  are  divided  in  the  paradigms  so  as  to  show  the  termina- 
tions, not  as  the  words  are  pronounced. 

2.  Adverbs  of  time  usually  precede  those  of  place: 

©r  tear  gcflcrn  l^ter,  He  was  here  yesterday. 

(Sr  ift  je^t  in  33erlin,  He  is  now  in  Berlin. 

3.  Wlien  the  adverb,  adverbial  expressions,  or  adjective 
precedes  the  verb,  the  nomm&tiYe  follows  the  verb: 

^ier  i  fi  e  8 ,  Here  it  is. 

^eute  i  ft  e  §  febr  !att,  It  is  very  cold  to-day. 

^att  t  ft  e  8  t?cute,  It  is  cold  to-day. 

3n  S3erlin  tt)  a  r  e  r  nic^t,  He  was  not  in  Berlin. 

Rem.  This  inversion  is  much  more  common  in  German  than  in  English. 
It  is  especially  appropriate  where  emphasis  is  placed  on  the  adverb  or 
adjective. 

Exercise  6. 
1.  Where  is  Mr.  Hoffmann  to-day  ?  2.  He  is  in  Magde- 
biu-g  to-day.  3.  When  was  he  in  Berlin?  4.  He  was  in 
Berlin  day  before  yesterday.  5.  Mrs.  Weber  and  Miss  We- 
ber are  now  in  Franltfort.  6.  Yesterday  they  were  in 
Cologne.  7.  The  weather  is  cold  to-day.  8.  Yesterday  it 
was  very  warm.  9.  Where  is  the  cloth  ?  10.  There  it  is. 
11.  Is  the  cloth  cheap?  12.  Yes,  it  is  very  cheap.  13.  Is 
Mr,  Meyerheim  yet  in  Cologne  ?  14.  Yes,  he  is  there  yet. 
15.  Is  Breslau  in  Prussia?  16.  Yes,  Breslau,  and  also 
Magdebm-g,  Berlin,  and  Gottingen,  are  now  in  Prussia. 
17.  Mr.  Dietz  is  now  in  Halle.  18.  Mr. Weber  is  in  Frank- 
fort.    19.  Yesterday  I  was  in  Leipsic  and  in  Halle. 


PEE8ENT  AND  IMPERFECT  OF  EEGULAB  VERBS.      19 

LESSO:^  IV. 

PRESENT   AND    IMPERFECT   TENSES   OF   REGULAR  VERBS.        THE   DEFINITE 
ARTICLE.       THE   ACCUSATIVE   CASE. 

SSa^  faufen  (5ie?  What  are  you  buying? 

3c^  faufe  $apter^,  I  am  buying  paper. 

Der  (Sc^netber  fauft  Xud^,  The  tailor  is  buying  cloth. 

2Bo  tDO^nen  <2te  je^t?  Where  do  you  reside  now  ? 

2Btr  wo^nen  jc^t  in  33erlin^  We  reside  now  in  Berlin. 

^oren  ®ie  wa^  er  fagt?  Doyouhearwhathe  is  saying! 

3c^  f)ore  wa^  er  fagt,  I  hear  what  he  is  saynig. 

2Ba^  fauften  ®ie?  What  were  you  buying? 

3c^  faufte  $apter^,  I  was  buying  paper. 

dx  njo()nte  in  2)^agbeburg,  He  resided  in  Magdeburg. 

„       „      „  „  Hewas  residing  in  Magdeburg. 

ff       „      „  „  He  did  reside  in  Magdeburg. 

©icbcntc  Wufgak, 

1.  2Bo  ttjo^nt  §err  ^djnmamxT  2.  Qx  n?o6nt  jc^t  in  granf- 
furt.  3.  (Sr  n)oI)nte  friif)er  in  .g)ette(berg.  4.  5Gol)nen  (Sie  in 
§a(Ic  ?  5.  ^^etn,  mx  wo^nen  nic^t  in  ^alle,  n?ir  raol^nen  in 
€eipjtg.  6.  fauften  (Bit  ba^  Xu^?  7.  S^^ein,  tc^  faufte  e^ 
nic^t;  e^  n)ar  fe^r  t^euer  unt>  nid^t  fc^r  gut.  8.  ^ort  ber  (5^it^ 
ler,  voa^  ber  Se()rer  fagt?  9.  3a,  ber  (Sc^iiler  ^ort  tt>a^  ber 
€ef)rer  fagt.  10.  2)er  ^aufmann  ^orte  ma^  ber  ^^neiber  fagte. 
11.  Morten  Bit  n?a^  §einrid^  unb  SBtl^elm  fagtcn?  12,  3<J/ 
i(^  f)orte  wa^  fte  fvigten.  13.  ^Der  SBatcr  unb  bie  2D?utter  lieben 
ba^  tob.  14.  Da^  ^inb  liebt  ben  35ater  unb  bie  SJJutter.  15. 
2Bo  fauften  Bit  ba^  33u^?  16.  3^  faufte  e^  ijorgcftern  in 
Seipjig.  17.  Der  Bd^ixltx  faufte  ba^  ^ud^  unb  ba^  9)apter.  18. 
SBann  maren  @ie  in  5Iugeburg?  19.  3^  ttJar  t?orgcftern  in 
^i^ugi^burg.  20.  ^err  Wltt)txi)tim,  ^txx  SRofent^al  unb  ^err 
S{)rltd^  njol^nen  in  ^o(n,  $crr  8c^(etermac^er  unb  §err  5lucrbad& 
wo{)nen  in  SD^agbeburg,  grau  gorfter  unb  grdukin  (^ggcre  n)o&^ 
nen  in  ©ot^a,  unb  §err  Sinbemann  n^o^nt  in  Tlmd)tn. 

Rem.  These  sentences  can  of  course  be  multiplied  indefinitely. 


PRESENT   AND   IMPERFECT   OF   REGULAR   VERBS. 


Vocabulary. 


Xtt  3Jlann,  the  man. 

„   95ater,  the  father. 

„   ^aufmann,  the  merchant. 

„    Sefjrer,  the  teacher. 

„    ©^neiber,  the  tailor. 

„    @d;iller,  the  scholar. 
Xit  ^vaii,  the  woman. 

„    aJhttter,  the  mother. 
2)tt0  ^int),  the  child. 

„    ^a))ter',  the  paper, 
^etnrtc^,  Henry. 
SSil^elm,  WiUiam. 


§i}r*en,  to  hear, 
^auf^cn,  to  buy. 
2teb=en,  to  love. 
?o6*en,  to  praise. 
@ag=en,  to  say. 
22Bo^n=^cn,  to  reside. 
2Ber?who? 
2Ba8  ?  what  ? 
2l6er,  but. 
®ut,  good, 
griifjer,  formerly. 
9^eulic^,  lately. 


Grammatical. 
1.  The  regular  Yerb  lieben,  to  love,  is  conjugated  thus: 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


Present  Tense. 

X^  llt^'^tf       I      love. 

@ie  n  e  fe  '*cn,  you  love, 

er  nclj'4,    he    loves. 

•mix  1 1  e  b  '*cn,  we    love. 

®tc  H  e  b  '=cn,  you  love, 

fie  li c b '=cn,  they  love. 


Imperfect  Tense, 
i^  iitb'4tf  I  loved. 
@te  Iteb'^en,  you  loved, 
cr  (ieb':=tC,  he  loved. 
t»ir  tteb^tcn,  we  loved. 
@ie  ncb'4cn,  you  loved, 
fie    Ueb '4Cll,  they  loved. 


2.  That  part  of  the  simple  verb  which  precedes  the  ter- 
mination of  the  infinitive  (en)  is  called  the  stem,  as :  lielb^en, 
fauf^en,  fag^^en,  n)o^n^cn. 

Mem.  In  regular  verbs  the  stem  remains  unchanged  in  conjugation. 

3.  For  the  three  forms  of  conjugating  the  verb  in  Eng- 
lish, the  German  has  hut  one — the  smijpleform  : 

^^  !aufe,  I  buy,  I  am  buying,  or  I  do  buy. 

2Bir  fauften,  We  bought.  We  were  buying,  "  We  did  buy. 

^aufen  @te  ?  Buy  you?  Are  you  buying?  "  Do  you  buy? 

^aiiftcn  ®ic?  Bought  you?  Were  you  buying  ?  "Did  you  buy? 

^^  taufte  ntd^t,  I  bought  not,  I  was  not  buying,  "  I  did  not  buy. 

4.  The  German  language  has  four  Cases:  the  Nomina^ 
ti/ve^  the  Genitive,  the  Dative,  and  the  Accusative. 


PBESENT   AND    IMPEliFECT   OF    EEGULAB    VEKBS.  21 

1.  The  Nominative  corresponds  to  our  Nominative, 

2.  The  Accusative  is  rendered  by  our  Objective. 

5.  The  form  of  the  Definite  Article  varies  according  to 
the  gender  of  the  noun  which  it  limits.  The  form  of  the 
accusative  of  the  mjasculine  only  of  the  article  differs  from 
tliat  of  the  nominative : 

Nominative :  2Dcr  'Mam,  i)ic  ^rau  unb  bag  tinb  fmb  ^ier. 
*'  The  man,  the  woman,  and  the  child  are  her*. 

Acctisative :   ^d)  je^e  tcti  9JJann,  i)ic  grau  unb  liog  tinb. 
Objective :      I  see  the  man,  the  woman,  and  the  child. 

Exercise  8. 
1.  The  teacher  praises  the  scholar.  2.  The  father  praised 
the  child.  3.  Did  you  hear  what  "^"enry  was  saying?  4. 
No,  I  did  not  hear  what  he  said  3.  We  heard  what  he 
said.  6.  Did  he  not  hear  what  the  teacher  said  ?  7.  Yes, 
he  heard  what  the  teacher  was  saying.  8.  The  merchant 
w^as  buying  the  cloth.  9.  The  woman  did  praise  the  child. 
10.  The  child  loves  the  woman.  11.  Where  did  you  buy 
the  book  ?  12.  I  bought  it  in  Berlin.  13.  When  did  you 
buy  it  ?  14. 1  bought  it  day  before  yesterday.  15.  Do  you 
hear  what  Miss  Steffens  is  saying?  16.  I  hear  what  she  is 
saying.  17.  Where  does  Miss  StefFens  reside?  18.  She  is 
now  residing  here  in  Berlin.  19.  Formerly  she  resided  in 
Hamburg. 


LESSON  Y. 

PRESENT  AND  IMPERFECT  TENSES  OF  l^abett,  TO  HAVE.   ACCU8ATIVB 
OF  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

$aben  ®te  t»a^  53u(3^  ?  Have  you  the  book  ? 

3a,  ic^  ^abe  e^,  Yes,  I  have  it. 

^cinric^  ^at  ba^  SJlejTer,  Henry  has  the  knife, 

©tl^elm  fjatte  bai3  S3ud^,  WiUiam  had  the  book 
53cfud)tcn  (Sic  .?)crrn  5lraft,  a(^  Did  you  visit  Mr.  Kraft  when 

<Bk  in  Berlin  trarcn  ?  you  were  in  Rcilin ? 

3a,  wxx  kfud)tcn  t(;n  \d)X  oft,  Ye8,we  visited  liim  very  ofteo. 


PRESENT  AND   IMPEEFECT   OF   KEGULAE  VERBS. 


c^,  al^  er  l^ter  tear.  3*  2Ba^  ^aben  ®te  ba  ?  4.  2Bir  ^aben 
ba^  ^u(^  unb  ba^  9)apier.  5.  ^err  ©c^abe  befuc^te  un^  fe^t 
oft;  aU  mx  in  Q^ot\)a  n^aren.  6.  §err  Hoffmann  befu^t  ^errn 
fitter.  7.  S©a^  fuc^en  @ie  ?  8. 3^  fu^e  ba^  g^effer.  9.  §ier 
ifte^.  3c^Nee^.  10.  SBa^faufteber  ^o^?  ll.^rfauftc 
^rob,  gleifc^  unb  Dbft.  12.  Dae  3immer  ift  mel  p  fletn. 
13.  2)er  Si^w^^^J^^ttn  »erfaufte  ba^  ^au^.  14.  Der  ^auf:? 
mann  faufte  ba^  ^au^.  15.  355o  ftubirte  ^einric^  9^eumann, 
aB  er  in  2)eutf^lanb  n)ar?  16.  (Sr  ftubirte  in  ^eip^ig  unb 
Berlin.  17.  3Bof)nt  ^err  9liebner  in  ®otba?  18.  ^m,  er 
wo^nt  in  Dre^ben,  aber  er  wo^nte  frii^er  in  ®ot()a. 


Vocabulary. 


2)er  95a(fer,  the  baker. 

t,    ^od),  the  cook. 

„    3^^niermann,  the  carpenter. 
S)a^  S3rob,  the  bread. 

„    ^letfd;,  the  meat. 

„    2«e(;I,  the  flour. 

„    9}?eifer,  the  knife. 

n    Dhit,  the  fruit. 

„    3^inin^^f  the  room. 
S3efii(^'*en,  to  visit, 
©ud/*en,  to  seek,  look  for. 
@tubtr%en,  to  study, 
^ertauf  =»en,  to  sell. 


®X0^,  large,  great. 

^leilt,  small,  little. 

@(^on,  beautiful,  fi-ne. 

@(^Iec^t,  bad. 

^lei^icj,  industrious,  diligent. 

I^aul,  indolent,  lazy. 

5t(8  (conj.),  when,  as. 

9?iel  (adv.),  much. 

3u  (adv.),  too. 

Oft  (adv.),  often,  frequently, 

D^ioc^  (adv.),  yet,  still. 

©etten  (ac?y.),  seldom. 

3ut»ei'*Ien  (adv.),  sometimes. 


Grammatical. 
1,  The  Irregular  Verb  f^abtn,  to  have,  is  conjugated  thus: 


Present  Tense 

t(^  ^a¥''t,  I  have. 

©ic  ^  a  B  's  en.  You  have, 

er    ^at,  He  has. 

toxx  ^  a  b  '*  en,  We  have. 

©ie  ^  a  b  ^  en,  You  have. 

fie    ](?  a  b  '^  en,  They  have. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


Imperfect  Tense. 
td^    l^ttt'^tC,  I  had. 

®te  ^ at'* ten, 
er   ^at^tc, 
tDtr  (?at'=ten, 
@ie  ^at'^tcn, 
fie   ^at'^tcn, 


You  had. 
He  had. 
We  had. 
You  had. 
They  h»d 


PRESENT  AND  IMPERFECT  OP  l^abCll,  TO  HAVE.    23 

2.  Nominative  and  Accusative  cases  of  the  Personal 
Pronouns : 


8INGULAE. 

PLURAL. 

Nom. 

Nom. 

Ace. 

Ohj. 

Nom. 

Nom. 

Ace. 

Ohj. 

\^, 

I. 

m\^, 

me. 

toir, 

we. 

un^f 

us. 

©ie, 

you. 

Sic, 

you. 

©ie, 

you. 

<Stc, 

you. 

er, 

he. 

m^ 

him. 

fie, 

they. 

ftc, 

them. 

fte, 

she. 

ftc, 

her. 

rr 

they. 

u 

them. 

c«, 

it. 

e«, 

it. 

rr 

they. 

tt 

them. 

3.  The  word  §crr  takes  -Xi  in  all  cases  of  the  singular 
except  the  Nominative : 

C>err  ^raft  befuc^te  ^err^n  ^lein,     Mr.  Kraft  visited  Mr.  Klein. 

4.  The  conjunction  al§,  when  (called  in  English  Gram- 
mar a  conjunctive  adverb),  refers  only  to  past  time.  It 
requires  the  verb  following  it  to  be  placed  at  the  end 
of  the  (subordinate)  sentence: 

^einrid;  !aufte  bag  S3ud^,  aU  er  in    Henry  bought  the  beck  when  he  was 
§etbclbcrg  mar,  in  Heidelberg. 

5.  The  adverb  tllt^t  (not)  is  generally  placed  after  the 
object  of  the  verb : 

Sr  bejuc^te  un8  ni(^t.  He  did  not  visit  us. 

Exercise  10. 

1.  Did  the  merchant  sell  the  cloth  ?  2.  Yes,  and  the 
tailor  bought  it.  3.  The  baker  buys  flour  and  sells  bi*ead. 
4.  Where  did  William  Diez  study  when  he  was  in  Ger- 
many ?  5.  He  studied  in  Heidelberg  and  Berlin.  6.  Did 
you  call  upon  (visit)  Mrs.  Hoffmann  when  you  were  in 
Magdeburg?  7.  Yes,  we  called  upon  her.  8.  What  are 
Henry  and  William  looking  for  ?  9.  They  are  looking  for 
the  book.  10.  There  it  is.  11.  The  scholar  is  very  indus- 
trious to-day.  Sometimes  he  is  not  very  industrious,  and 
he  does  not  study  very  much.  12.  Is  the  weather  very  hot 
in  Germany  ?  13.  No,  the  weather  is  rarely  very  hot  iu 
Germany,  but  in  Italy  it  is  often  very  hot.  14.  Berlin  m 
very  large  and  beautiful.  15.  Who  has  the  book  and  the 
paper  ?     16.  The  scholar  has  them. 


24 


PEEFECT  AJ^D   PLUPEKFECT   OF   BEGULAiJ   VEBBS. 


LESSOK  YI. 

PERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  TENSES  OF  REGULAR  VERBS. 

SBcr  \)ai  ba^  53uc^  gefauft"?     Who  has  bought  the  book? 

3^  ^abe  e^  gefauft',  I  have  bought  it. 

i>abtn  ^k  ge^orf ,  )x>a^  |)err  Have  you  heard  what  Mr.Wt^ 

2Beber  gefagt'  ^at  ?  ber  said  ? 

(^r  ^at  Qefagt^  t»af  |)err  Si^e^er  He  said  that  Mr.  Meyer  has 

ba^  ^au^  gefaufr  ^at,  bought  the  house. 

dx  ^attt  ben  <3dbuler  gelobf,      He  had  praised  the  scholar. 
^^  ^atte  lange  gereg^net,  It  had  been  raining  long. 

6Ifte  Wufgak. 

1,  ^err  ^(umenbacS^  \)attt  ba^  $au^  fc^on  gefauft.  2.  Rax\ 
fagt,  bag  er  bae  33uc^  in  Setp^tg  gefauft  ^at  3.  |)eute  ^at  e^ 
fe^r  ftarf  gebon'nert  unb  gereg'net  4.  d^  ^at  geftern  fe^r  ftarf 
gereg'net,  al^  irir  in  $ot^bam  maren,  5.  ^err  ^edfer  ^atte  ba^ 
©emdPbe  fc^on  ijorgeftern  iJoUen'tet  6.  (Sr  malte  e^,  al^  mir 
i^n  befu^^tem  7. 3©a^  ma^t  ba^  ^inb?  8.  (S^  fpielt  9. 
(S^net'et  e^  je^t  ?  10. 5^etn,  e^  ^at  ^eute  ml  gef^nei'et,  aber  je^t 
fc^neiet  e^  ni^t  me^r.  11.  $aben  ®ie  ba^  SD^ufe'um  oft  befud^t', 
al^  (5ie  in  Berlin  maren?  12.  3a,  n)tr  befu^ten  e^  fe^r  oft. 
13.  d^  ift  mxtiii^  fe^r  grog  unb  fe^r  f^on.  14. 1)a^  9)^ufeum 
in  2)re^ben  ift  auc^  fe^r  fc^on.  15.  Der  Siittntermann  i)ant  ba^ 
$au^  fc^on  gebaut".  16.  I)a^  ^au^  ift  toirfli^  fe^r  grog,  abcr 
fef)r  fc^on  ift  e^  ni^t* 


S3ait'*cn,  to  build. 
3JJad;'*en,  to  make,  to  do. 
SDZal'^en,  to  paint. 
@^icr*eii,  to  play. 
SSottenb'^en,  to  complete. 
S3{itj'*cn,  to  lighten. 
S)on'ner=n,  to  thunder. 
^CiQtUn,  to  hail. 
9Jcg'*nen,  to  rain. 
@(^nei'*cn,  to  sno^r. 


Vocabulary. 

5luc^  (adv.),  also,  too. 
2)a^(r.-o/y'.),  that. 
?an'^C|e(rtr/i'.),  for  a  long  time. 
3)?e^r(rtc/y.),  more. 
@C^on  (adv.),  already. 
@tar!(ac?y.),  hard,  severely. 
2Girr4trf)  (ac?y.),  really. 
^Cr  ^a'4tx,  the  painter. 
^aS  ®cmar*be,  the  picture. 
„     2P'Juje'*um,  the  museum. 


PERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  OF  REGULAR  VERBS.    25 

Grammatical. 

1.  The  Perfect  Participle  of  Regular  Verba  is  formed  by 
prefixing  gc=,  and  adding  -A  to  the  stem : 

X\^' *t%  to  hve  ;  ^t4kh4' ,  loved.  havC ^ttl,  to  build ;  ^t»^aU't ,  built. 

2.  Verbs  with  inseparable  prefixes  (as  be,  ent,  tx,  gc,  t>cr, 
Itx),  and  those  ending  in  ^^iren,  do  not  take  gc= : 

b  c '  f  u  d^  '*  en,  to  visit.  b  c  4  u  d^  *  t',  visited. 

|lu*bir%ctt,to  study.  jlu*bir*f, studied. 

3.  The  Yerb  has  three  principal  parts,  as  in  English : 

Present  Infinitive.  Imperfect  Indicative.         Perfect  Participle. 

1 1 C  b '*  cn,  to  love.  Iteb'stc,  loved.  gC  =  H e b '==  t,  loved. 

^  a  'g  c  t  *  n,  to  hail.  1^  a  'g  e  I  ==  tC,  hailed.  0C  *  M  'S  S  I  *  t,  hailed. 

bc*fud;'*cn,  to  visit,  b  e  =  f  u (^ %  tc,  visited.  b  c  ^  j  u  d^ '^  t  visited, 

loer^f auf'^ctt, tosell.  i3cr==!auf 'stc,sbld.  to cr«!auf'*t,sold. 

ft  u  *  b  i  r ':» Ctt,  to  study,  fi  u  *  b  i  r  '*  te,  studied,  jl  u  *  b  i  r '-- 1,  studied. 

4.  The  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  Tenses  of  Transitive  and 
Impersonal  Verbs  are  formed  by  the  use  of  the  auxiUary 
Jakn,  to  have,  and  the  perfect  participle. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


Perfect  Tense. 

\^  l^obe     gelicfit',  I  have  loved, 
©te  ^ab'*cn      „       you  have  loved. 

er    l^ttt  n       he  has  loved, 

toir   ^ab' =Ctt       »       we  have  loved, 
©ie  ^ab'*cn       n       you  have  loved. 

fic    ^ab' *Ctt       f;       they  have  loved. 


Pluperfect  Tense. 

\^  l^at'stC   fiCliebt',  I  had  loved. 
@tc  ^at'*lcn       »       you  had  loved. 

er  (;at'*te  rr  he  had  loved. 
tt>ir  ^at'^tCtt  It  we  had  loved. 
@tC  i)<xi'4tn       n        you  had  loved. 

fie    ^at^tCtt       rf        they  had  loved. 


5.  The  Participle  is  placed  at  the  end  of  main  sentences: 

3d^  ^be  bag  S3uc^  ficfottft,  I  have  bought  the  book. 

Rem.  In  subordinate  sentences,  the  auxiliary  of  compound  tenses  is  placed 
after  the  participle: 

@r  fagte,  ba§  cr  baS  S3ud^  fd^on  gefauft  l^at 
He  said  that  he  has  already  bought  the  book. 

6.  The  Perfect  Tense  is  often  employed  where  in  English 
the  Imperfect  Tense  would  be  used : 

Sr  ^at  baS  33ud^  gcjlcrn  gcfttttft,       He  bought  the  book  yesterday. 

7.  When  the  stem  ends  in  =cl  or  =cr,  usually  only  =11  (in- 
stead of  =cn)  is  added  for  the  termhiation  of  the  Infinitive : 
&a'gcl»n,  to  hail.  2)on'ner=n,  to  thunder.         SScrbej'fcr^ll,  to  unprove. 

B 


26  PREPOSITIONS   WITH   THE   ACCUSATIVE   CASE. 

Exercise  12. 

1.  It  rained  very  hard  when  we  were  in  Dtisseldorf. 
2.  Mr.  Euprecht  says  that  it  snowed  yesterday  in  Bran< 
denburg.  3.  It  has  not  snowed  here  yet.  4.  The  cook  has 
already  bought  the  bread,  the  flour,  and  the  meat.  6.  The 
merchant  has  not  sold  the  cloth  yet.  6.  The  painter  had  not 
finished  the  painting  when  we  were  in  Magdeburg.  7. 
Yesterday  John  had  not  yet  bought  the  book.  8.  It  has 
already  been  raining  a  very  long  time.  9.  What  is  William 
doing?  10.  He  is  not  here.  11.  Where  is  he?  12.  He  is 
visiting  Mr.  Lindemann.  13.  The  child  has  already  been 
playing  too  long.  14.  When  did  you  buy  the  painting  ? 
15.  We  bought  it  when  we  were  in  Berlin.  16.  It  is  really 
very  beautiful.  17.  Have  you  heard  what  Mr.  Niedner 
said  ?     18.  No,  I  have  not  heard  what  he  said. 


LESSON  yii. 

PREPOSITIONS   WITH   THE    ACCUSATIVE    CASE.       GENDER   OP   NOUNS. 

3ft  ba^  33uc^  fiir  ben  ^akx  ?   Is  the  book  for  the  painter  ? 
5fJein,  e^  ijl  fiir  ben  ^aufmann,  No,  it  is  for  the  merchant. 
Der  SBalb  ift  fefer  gro§,  The  forest  is  very  large. 

3)er  Sciger  fii^rte  ben  Scaler  The    hunter    conducted   the 
burc^  ben  2Balb,  painter  through  the  forest. 

"ttx  ^erg  ift  fe^r  ^od^,  The  mountain  is  very  high. 

dx  ift  au^  fe^r  fteil,  It  is  also  very  steep. 

T)k  ®tabt  ift  fe^r  grog,  The  city  is  very  large. 

(Bk  ift  auc^  fej)r  fc^on,  It  is  also  very  beautiful. 

Sretjc^tttc  ^ufgak* 

1.  $at  5ltbre^t  ben  ^ut  gefauft  ?  2.  5^ein,  er  ift  fitr  i^n  p 
grog.  3.  $aben  ®te  ba^  35anb?  4.  91ein,  e^  ift  urn  ben  $ut, 
5.  ^aben  ®ie  ben  ^leifttft  ?  6.  3*  H^t  ibn  ge^bt,  aber  i^ 
\)aU  ibn  je^t  nt^t.  7. 51*  (oh),  ba  ift  er  I  8.  X)k  m6^t  ift  fefjr 
mxm  unb  f^on,  aber  aud)  fe^r  bunfeL    9.  Die  £ird;e  id  fel)r 


PEEPOSITIONS    WITH    THE   ACCUSATIVE   CASE. 


27 


grog,  to$  fe^r  fc^on  ijl  ftc  ntd^t  10.  §at  bcr  ^lod)  bic  53uttcr 
fc^on  ge{)o(t?  11.  3fl,  er  ^at  fte  gcfteru  fc^on  gel^olt.  12.  §at 
bcr  ®d)uler  ba^  53ud)  unb  ba^  papier?  13.  3a,  er  f)at  ftc. 
14.  |)at  ^axk  ben  ^ut  gefauft?  15.  3^,  ftc  ^at  if)n  c^cfauft. 
16.  giir  wen  ^aben  (Sic  ba^  ^ud)  gefauft?  17.  3d)  l)abc  e^ 
fiir  ba^  ^inb  gefauft.  18.  ©cftern  tt)ar  e^  bi^  gegen  ^^benb  fcbr 
n?arm,  aber  bie  Dlac^t  war  ^iemlid)  fait.  19.  $eutc  ^Jiorgen 
(this  morning)  ^at  ^crr  5^cumann  un^  burd)  ba^  SJlufcum  ge^ 
fiiljrt.  20.  Dcr  3^od  ift  nid)t  fnr  mid)»  Dl;ne  Sweifcl  ift  er 
fitr  ^errn  Reefer, 


Vocabulary. 


^Cr  3l6cnb,  the  evening. 

tt    TloXQm,  the  morning. 

t,   33erg,  the  mountain. 

„    ^iigel,  the  hill. 

„    SSalb,  forest,  woods. 

n    ^ciger,  the  hunter, 

„   SBIciftift,  the  lead-pencil. 

„    §ut,  the  hat,  bonnet. 

t,    9?ocf ,  the  coat. 

„  3^^^^t*^^  the  doubt. 
Xic  ©tabt,  the  city. 

„   ^ird;e,  the  church. 

r,    ^liad^t,  the  night. 

„  SSuttcr,  the  butter. 
^OB  53anb,  the  band,  ribbon. 


5llbrcc^t,  Albert. 

^at^ari'ua,  Catharine. 

2)untel,  dark. 

^c6),  high. 

@teil,  steep. 

3temlid;,  quite,  somewhat. 

gilbrcu,  to  conduct,  to  guide. 

§dIcu,  to  procure,  go  and  get. 

S3i3,  until,  till. 

2)urd),  through. 

giir,  for. 

©cgen,  towards. 

O^nc,  without. 

Urn,  around. 

SBibcr,  against. 


Grammatical. 

1.  The  seven  prepositions  bi^,  bur^,  fitr,  gegcn,  ol^nc,  um, 
and  wiber  govern  the  Accusative  Case. 

2.  Many  nouns,  which  in  English  would  be  in  the  neuter 
gender,  in  German  are  in  the  mdsculine  or  in  the  Jerninine 
gender. 


^Cr  §ut,  the  hat.  ^tC  ®tabt,  the  city. 

t,    'dlod,  the  coat.  „    ^ird;c,  the  church. 

„    X\\^,  the  table.  „    S^iacbt,  the  night. 

Rem.  The  gender  of  nouns  is  one  of  the  most  difficult  features  in  the  stud; 
of  the  German  language.  At  the  same  time  it  is  one  of  the  most  important, 
idnce  the/onn  of  the  article  is  determined  by  the  gender  of  the  noun. 


$tt§  33uc^,  the  book. 
„  %\x^,  the  cloth. 
„    33rob,  the  bread. 


28  THE   GENITIVE   CASE. 

3.  Personal  Pronouns  must  have  the  grammatical  gendef 
of  the  nouns  for  which  they  stand : 

§aBen  @tc  tJen  SSIeifti^  ?  Have  you  the  lead-pencil  ? 

5^em,  tc^  ^abe  il^n  nic^t,  No,  I  have  not  it  (him\ 

4.  The  Accusative  of  the  Interrogative  Pronoun  toct  is 
tt)ttt»     The  Accusative  of  toa^  is  like  the  I^ominative : 

^iir  hJCtt  tft  ber  S'lod ?  For  whom  is  the  coat? 

2Ba0  ^abcn  @te  ba  ?  What  have  you  there  ? 

Exercise  14. 
1.  For  whom  is  the  coat  ?  2.  It  is  for  me.  3.  Is  it  not 
too  large  for  you  ?  4.  It  is  rather  large.  6.  When  did 
Catharine  buy  the  book  ?  6.  She  bought  it  when  she  was 
in  Dresden.  Y.  Without  doubt  Mr.  Ehrlich  has  already 
bought  the  painting.  8.  Yes,  Albert  says,  that  he  bought 
it  yesterday.  9.  Has  the  cook  been  to  get  (^oletl)  the  butter 
and  the  fruit  ?  10.  Yes,  he  got  them  this  morning.  11. 
The  hunter  conducted  us  through  the  forest.  12.  Have 
you  the  lead-pencil  ?  13.  Yes,  I  have  it.  14.  The  hill  is 
very  steep,  but  it  is  not  very  high.  16.  Did  Mary  buy  the 
bonnet?  16.  Yes,  she  boTight  it.  It  was  very  beautiful, 
and  not  very  dear.  lY.  Miss  E^euman  says  that  it  was  very 
warm  in  Potsdam  towards  evening,  but  she  says  that  it  did 
not  rain. 


LESSON   YIII. 

THE  GENITIVE  CASE. 

5lnftatt  be^  53uc^e0  ^at  ber  Instead  of  the  book,  the  schol- 
(Schiller  ba^  $apter  gefauft,       ar  has  bought  the  paper. 

^a0  ^au^  be^  ^aufmanne^  tft  The  house  of  the  merchant  is 
fe^r  grof  unb  impofant^  very  large  and  imposing. 

${er  ift  be^  (5c|uler^  ^U^,       Here  is  the  scholar's  book. 

Sr  ifl  be^  (S^wa^en^  tnube,      He  is  tired  of  the  chattering. 

$tcr  ifl  §etnrt^^  53u$,  Here  is  Henry's  book. 

2Co  tft  ba^  $au^  be^  |)ernt  Where  is  the  house  of  Prof  ess- 
^Jrofeffor  t)on  Solfenftein  ?        or  von  Wolf enstein  1 


THE   GENmVE  CASE.  29 

giinfjc^utc  ^ufga^c. 

1,  2Bo  ttJaren  ®ie  njd()renb  be^  ^Iriegee  in  Dcutfd^lanb?  2. 
2Btr  maren  in  Sctpjtc;.  3. 5Sd^rent)  be^  ^turme^  waren  ^err 
aBeber  unb  §err  ^raft  in  ?>ot^bam.  4.  3Barum  \)at  ^crr 
€c^u(^  ba^  .^aii^  nic^t  gefauft  ?  5.  SBec^en  bc^  ?»rcifee.  6. 
!Da^  ^aue  ift  fe^r  f^bn  unb  fe[)r  bequem,  aber  bcr  $rci^  ijl  mel 
ju  f)od^.  7.  Da^  $au^  be^  ^errn  ?>rofef[or  3}Jc\>erbcim  ift 
au§erhalb  ber  ®tabt  8.  3)a^  $er^  ber  5D^Jutter  ift  i^oU  Slnc^ft, 
n>cil  ba^  ^inb  fo  franf  x%  9.  Da(J  3)ac^  be^  ^aufc^  ij^  fc()r 
fteiL  10.  Die  ©efc^ic^te  ber  ®tabt  ift  fe^r  intcreffant^  11. 
1)tx  Xl)urm  be^  Dome^  in  SD'iagbeburg  ift  febr  \)o6)  unb  fe^r  im^ 
pofant.  12.  jDer  Xf)urm  be^  Dome^  in  3Bien  ift  auc^  fc^r  l)oc^ 
unb  fef)r  f^on.  13.  SBeffen  ^u^  ^at  ©eorg?  14.  Sr  l)at 
^einrid^^  53uc^.  15.  ^at{)arina  ^at  Tlaxitn^  ^uc^.  16.  J)er 
!eef)rer  ^at  be^  (Sc^iiler^  ^uc^  (or  ba(^  33u^  be^  (Bd^iilere). 


Vocabulary. 


!ter  2)oftor,  —6,  the  Doctor. 

„     ^rofef  for,  — S,  the  Professor. 

„     2)om,  — e«,  the  cathedral. 

„    ^ricg,  — c«,  the  war. 

„    ^reiS,  — c8,  the  price. 

„    @turm,  — C8,  the  storm. 

„    2^^urm,  — eg,  the  tower,  spire. 
^ic  2tngft,  — ,  the  anxiety. 

„    greubc,  — ,  the  joy. 

„    ©cfa^r',  — ,  the  danger. 

,;    ®cf(^id^'tc,  — ,  the  history. 

„     @^itjc  ,  — ,  the  point. 
^ttS  "Dac^,  — c«,  the  roof. 

»/    ^^^^  — (cn8),  the  heart. 


5lnftatt,  instead  of. 

%u^zx{)alh,  outside  of,  without. 

3nnerf»alb,  inside  of,  within. 

SSci^renb,  during. 

SSegcn,  on  account  of. 

©eroabr' ,  aware. 

SSoU,  fuU. 

SSequem',  convenient. 

3!ni|)ofant',  imposing. 

3ntere[fant',  interesting. 

^ranf,  sick. 

SSarum'?  why? 

SScit,  because. 

2)o(^,  still,  however. 


Grammatical 

1.  The  Genitive  Case  is  used  ^vith  the  prepositions  anflatt 
flufer^db,  inner{)alb,  njci^renb,  roegen,  etc. 

3ln[tatt  beS  ^aufmanncS,  Instead  of  the  merchant. 

2.  The  Genitive  Case  is  used  without  a  jpreposition  : 

1.  Instead  of  the  English  Possessive: 
2)a8  53u(!(^  bcS  Se^rcrS.  The  book  of  the  tcachw. 


MASCULINE. 

Nom,  Gen. 


NEUTER. 

iVbm.  Gen. 


30  THE  GENITIVE   CASE. 

2.  After  some  adjectives,  as  :  getoa^r,  tooll,  tnitbe,  etc. : 

(Sr  tft  t)C^  ®d>tDa^enS  milbe,  He  is  tired  of  the  chattering. 

3.  In  most  cases  where  the  relation  is  expressed  in  English  by  the  prep« 
osition  o/,  the  Genitive  is  used  in  Gennan  without  a  preposition, 
especially  where  limitation  is  indicated : 

2)te  ©efc^ic^te  bc^  ^riegeS,  The  histoiy  of  the  war. 

3.  As  to  the  form  of  the  Genitive  Case : 

1.  'With  feminine  nouns  it  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  nominative. 

2.  With  masculine  or  neuter  nouns,  usually  C^,  ^,  til,  or  n  is  added  to 
the  nominative. 

3.  TIk  Genitive  of  the  definite  article  (bcr,  btc,  ba«)  is  !>C^,  tlCr,  M* 

FEMININE. 

Nom.  Gen. 

S)icgrau,  2)er  grau. 
„  ®tabt,  „  <Stabt. 
„  Slngft,     „    Stngft. 

Rem.  The  Genitive  of  nouns  is  given  hereafter  in  the  Vocabularies. 

4.  As  in  English,  the  noun  possessed  may  be  placed 
without  its  article  after  the  name  of  the  possessor : 

3)er  SBruber  be§  2e^rer§,  or  be6  Setters  SBrubcr. 
The  brother  of  the  teacher,  or  the  teacher's  brother. 

5.  The  Genitive  of  Proper  Names  of  Persons  is  usual- 
ly formed  by  adding  §v  But  masculine  names  in  ft,  ft^,  l. 
If  and  feminine  names  in  C,  have  the  genitive  in  =cn§  : 

Nom.  §einric^,    SBil^elm,    §err    S^eumann,    granj,       2JJarie', 
Gen.  |)cinrtrf;8.  2BiU;eIm8.  |)errn  ?leumann8.  granjenS.  3Jiari*eng» 

6.  To  titles  of  office  or  dignity,  the  word  §crr  or  grail 
is  usually  prefixed  (especially  in  direct  address) : 

^err  ^rofeffor  33ecfer,  (Mr.)   Professor  Becker. 

§err  @raf  toon  S3i8mar(f,     (Mr.)   Count  von  Bismarck. 

%xavi  ©rcifin  toon  SBiSmard,  (Mrs.)  Countess  von  Bismarck. 
Rem,  Especially  in  the  oblique  cases,  the  definite  article  also  may  be  pre- 
fixed (the  ^  being  in  this  case  omitted  in  the  Genitive) : 
2)a8  ^au6  beg  §errn  2)o!tor  ^fZcumann,  or  ^crrn  S)o!tor  9^eumanng  ^auS, 

7.  Most  Geographical  Proper  Names  form  the  Genitive 
by  adding  § : 

2)ie  @ef  d;id;tc  SSerling,  The  history  of  Berlin. 

8.  The  Genitive  of  mx  (who)  is  tocffcn  (whose). 


THE   DATIVE   CASE.  31 

Exercise  16. 

1.  Doctor  Friedrich  resides  outside  of  the  city  {as  of  tlie 
city  walls).  2.  Professor  Lindeiier's  house  is  outside  of  the 
city.  3.  Wliose  book  have  I  ?  4.  You  have  Henry's  book. 
6.  The  history  of  the  war  in  Germany  is  very  interesting. 
6.  The  tower  of  the  Cathedral  in  Freiburg  is  very  imposing. 
T.  The  price  of  the  book  is  too  high.  I  did  not  buy  it 
8.  Were  you  in  Germany  during  the  war?  9.  Yes,  we 
were  in  Pnissia.  10.  The  roof  of  the  church  is  too  steep. 
11.  The  spire  of  the  church  is  very  beautiful.  12.  Why  did 
you  not  buy  the  coat?  13.  On  accoimt  of  the  price;  it 
was  much  too  dear.  14.  It  rained  quite  hard  during  the 
night.  15.  The  father  is  full  of  anxiety,  because  the  child 
is  very  sick.  16.  Where  is  Mary's  pencil?  17.  Catharine 
has  it.    18.  Mary  has  Catharine's  book. 


LESSON  IX. 

THE   DATIVE   CASE. 


^err  2Beber  tfl  ntd^t  p  §aufe,  Mr.  Weber  is  not  at  home. 

T)\t  ^^ac^ri^ten  »on  tern  ^Iriege  The  news  from  the  war  is 

ftnt)  l)eute  fef)r  intereffanf,  very  interesting  to-day. 

!Der.&unb  folgtbemScigernai^  The  dog  follows  the  hunter 

bem  3BaIbe,  to  the  forest. 

!Dte  9?a(^ric^tifl  bem  ^aufmann  The  news  is  very  disagreeable 

fe^r  unangene^m,  to  the  merchant. 

©ickn^cl^ntc  ^uftjak. 

1.  SOBem  gef)ovt  ber  ^(eiftift  ?  2.  Sr  ge^ort  bem  2)^aler.  3. 
$err  3^upre^t  ^at  ben  ^od^  nac^  ber  8tabt  gefd^icft.  4.  Dcr 
S5ater  ^at  ba^  53uc^  bem  ^tnbe  gefc^enft.  5.  $err  53ergmanu 
^at  bem  ^aler  ba^  ©emdlbe  ge^^eigt.  6.  $err  33ern^arb  wo^nt 
aufer^alb  ber  ^tabt.  7.  I)ie  53ibltotkf  ift  gegeniiber  bem  ^Jiu? 
feum  (or  bem  3JJufeum  gegeniiber).   8.  D<i^  ^^\x^  be^  §errn  'JJrov 


S2 


THE   DATIVE   CASE. 


?e|Tor  (Sber^arb  ifl  bem  ^aufe  be^  ^errn  ^eutner  fe^r  a^nlid^, 
9.  'Bm  ge^ort  bte  Settung?  10,  ©te  ge^ort  ^^rrn  ^(eim 
11.  iffio  ift  |)einric^  ?  12.  ^r  ift  au  ^aufe.  13.  mx  ^aben 
ba^  53ud^  nad)  $aufe  gefc^irft.  14.  Da^  ^u^  mx  i^m  fe^r 
nit^Ud^.  15.  |)err  ^ieba^n  ift  au^  2)reeben.  16.  3)a0  ^tnb 
fpielt  mit  bem  |)unbe.  17.  (S5eorg  fii^rte  un^  i)on  bem  2;iufeum 
nac^  ber  ^ibliot^ef. 

Vocabulary. 


5)er  ^unb,  — eS,  the  dog. 

I,  ^nabe,  — n,  the  boy. 

„  @orbat',  — en,  the  soldier. 
2)ie35tbItot^e!',  — ,  the  library. 

„  yia6)xx^t,  — ,  the  news, 

r,  B^^tung,  — ,  the  newspaper. 
Slef^nlic^,  similar,  like. 
Una^iilid),  dissimilar,  unlike. 
^n(^ene^m,  agreeable. 
Unangene^m,  disagreeable. 
^ii^Iid;,  useful. 
(2d.;ablid},  injurious. 


^ol^m,  to  follow, 
©e^o'ren,  to  belong. 
@(^enten,  to  present,  to  give. 
Betgen,  to  show. 
2lu8,  out  of,  from. 
Slu^er,  outside  of,  besides, 
©egenii'ber,  opposite. 
mt,  with. 
^ad:),  towards,  to. 
SSon,  from,  of. 
Bu,  to,  at. 
©era'be  (ac?y.),  directly,  just. 


Grammatical. 

1.  The  Dative  Case  is  governed : 

1.  By  some  Prepositions,  as ;  au0,  auf  er,  gegenitber,  mit 
m^,  »on,  p,  etc. 

2.  By  some  Adjectives,  as :  a^nltd^,  angene^m,  etc. 

3.  By  many  Verbs,  as :  folgen,  ge^bren,  fc^iden,  etc. 

Hem.  The  Dative  Case  frequently  corresponds  with  the  English  objective, 
preceded  by  to,  either  expressed  or  understood,  especially  when  it  is  the  indi* 
reel  object  of  a  verb. 

(gr  fc^tcfte  bem  ©(fitter  baS  33ud^,    He  sent  (to)  the  scholar  the  book. 

2.  Examples  of  the  declension  of  the  definite  article  and 
of  nouns  in  the  singular  number : 


Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Neuter. 

Norn. 

bcr    3Ji  a  n  n. 

bte  grau. 

U^  ^inb. 

Gen. 

bc^   9JZaitn-Cg. 

ber  ?5rau. 

be^  tinb*c§» 

Dot. 

bem  9DfJanit=*e» 

ber  ?5rau. 

bent  ttub^c. 

Abc.. 

bcu   aWanrt. 

bte  gfrau. 

bag  ^inb. 

THE   DATIVE   CASE.  33 

Rem.  1.  Some  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  are  declined  as  follows : 

ba^  Setter. 


Nom.  ber  SSatcr,       ^err,  @oIbat'. 

Gen.  be^  25aters^,   |>err*n,  ©olbat'seil. 

jDat.  bcm^ater,       |)crr*n,  @oIbat'*cn» 

^cc.  bcnSJatcr,      ©crrsn,  ©olbat'^Ctt. 


bc^  2i5etter.g« 
bent  ihJctter. 
bo«f  isOJetter. 


i2e;«.  2.  Feminine  nouns  are  unchanged  in  the  singular. 
Rem.  3.  The  C  is  often  dropped  from  the  termination  of  many  nouns  that 
have  C^  and  t  in  the  genitive  and  dative. 

3.  The  English  Cases  are  rendered  in  German  thus : 

1.  The  Nominative  by  the  J^ominative  in  German. 

2.  The  Possessive  by  the  Genitive  in  German. 

3.  The  Objective  by  the  Gen,,  Dat.,  and  Ace.  in  Germ. 

4.  Among  the  idiomatic  uses  of  the  Dative  Case,  the  fol- 
lowing may  be  noticed : 

1.  Adjectives /o//o?f7  the  noun  they  govern  in  the  dative : 

2)a'8  33u^  tft  bent  ®d;ttlcr  nii^lit^,  The  book  is  useful  to  the  scholar. 

2.  @e0Cnitbcr  may  precede,  though  it  usually  /o//ows  the  noun: 

2)er  ^irc^c  gcgenilber,  or  gegeniibcr  ber  ^rd^e,  Opposite  the  church. 

3.  With  two  personal  nouns  the  accusative  precedes  the  dative  case; 
a  personal  noun  precedes  one  referring  to  a  thing,  whatever  the 
case  of  either  may  be : 

(gr  ^at  ben  ^nttbcn  bem  Tlakx  gefdjicft,  He  sent  the  boy  to  the  painter. 
(gr  fc^icfte  htm.  WlaltX  baS  S3u^,  He  sent  the  book  to  the  painter. 

4.  9ltt^  ^flUfC  means  towards  home,-  ju  ^dUfe  means  at  home. 

6.  „^err  SBeber  ift  aitd  33erIin'V  means  that  Berlin  is  or  was  Mr.  We- 
ber's permanent  residence  or  his  native  place. 

6.  9lat^  indicates  motion  to  a  place ;  JU,  motion  to  a  person, 

(gr  fii^rte  un8  noc^  bem  3J2ufeum,  He  conducted  us  to  the  museum. 
(Sr  fil^rte  unS  ju  bem  3Jialer^         He  conducted  us  to  the  painter. 

5.  The  Dative  of  tocr  (who)  is  tocm  (to  whom,  etc.). 

Exercise  18. 

1.  To  whom  does  the  house  belong?  2.  It  belongs  to 
Mr.  Schumann.  3.  Did  the  boy  hear  what  the  soldier  said  ? 
4.  Wliat  did  the  merchant  send  to  tlie  tailor  ?  5.  He  sent 
the  cloth  to  the  tailor.  6.  The  professor  gave  the  boy  the 
pencil.     7.  The  coat  belongs  to  the  soldier.     8.  The  book  is 

B2 


34  PREPOSITIONS   WITH    ACCUSATIVE   Aim   DATIVE. 

very  injurious  to  the  child.  9.  The  child  is  following  hia 
father  to  the  citj.  10.  Mr.  Riegel  has  sent  the  book  to 
Professor  Kraus,  11.  The  book  belongs  to  Mr.  Riegel. 
12.  The  news  was  very  agreeable  to  the  soldier.  13.  Mr. 
Anerbach  is  from  Magdeburg.  14.  The  church  is  just 
opposite  to  the  house  of  Mr.  Dietrich.  15.  The  painter 
showed  Mr.  Krumm  the  painting.  16.  The  child  is  very 
unlike  the  father.  17.  To-day  the  newspaper  is  very  inter- 
esting. 18.  The  teacher  presented  the  book  to  the  scholar. 
19.  The  boy  was  playing  with  the  dog. 


LESSON  X 

PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE   AND  DATITB  CASES. 

'I)a^  33uc^  ift  auf  tern  Xif^c,    The  book  is  on  the  table, 
^einric^  legte  ee  auf  ben  Xifc^,  Henry  laid  it  on  the  table. 
3)er  8tu^(  ift  »or  t>em  £)fen,     The  chair  is  before  the  stove. 
(Ex  ftellte  i\)n  t>or  ben  Dfen,       He  put  it  before  the  stove. 
Da^  33uc^  ift  neben  bem  fa^The  book  is  close  by  the 

pux%  paper. 

dr  legte  e^  neben  ba^  papier',  He  laid  it  close  by  the  paper. 
Xtx  58rief  ift  in  bem  53uc^e,      The  letter  is  in  the  book. 
3c^  legte  i^n  in  bae  53uc^,         I  laid  it  in  the  book. 

D^eun^e^nte  ^ufgabe. 

1,  QrX  ^dngte  ba^  ©emdlce  iiber  ben  Xifc^.  2.  2^  fc^icfte 
ben  53rief  iiber  Hamburg  nad)  %mt'xifa,  3.  2)a^  2)orf  x^  ^wU 
fd^en  bem  SBalbe  unb  bem  33erge.  4.  2)er  53letfttft  ift  ^mifc^en 
bem  53u(^e  unb  bem  ^)apter.  5.  ^einrid^  legte  ben  33leiftift  jroi^ 
fi^en  ba^  ^ud^  unb  ba^  papier.  6.  2)er  ^unb  ift  in  bem  (3ax^ 
ttn.  7.  Da^  55oot  if!  unter  ber  Sriicfe.  8.  2)er  Sleiftift  ifl 
unter  bem  ^ud^e.  9.  2Ber  ^at  i^n  unter  ba^  ^uc^  gelegt?  10. 
C>err  5Ke^er  ^at  bem  SD^aler  gefagt,  bag  er  ben  53rief  uber  33re^ 
men  gefc^icft  i)at  11.  2Bir  ^aben  ba6  (^emdlre  an  tie  Sanb 
ge^angt.    (f^  wax  auf  bem  ^eten,     12.  ^err  2}?e5er  l)at  une  »ott 


PREPOSITIONS    WITH    ACCUSATIVE   AND   DATIVE.  85 

ter  ^trd^c  na^  ter  33i6liot^e!  gefit^rt.  13.  5tar(  bat  tad  53uc^ 
lancjc  cjefud)!.  14.  ^cutc  ^J^orgen  Ijabc  id)  ten  53ricf  unt)  tae 
5i3uc^  tern  ^crru  ?>rofcf[or  ^urdfbart  gefd)icft.  15.  ^o  wo^ut 
er  '<     16.  (^r  «?ol)nt  in  \icipjicj.     17.  Da^  ^oot  ijl  an  tern  Ufcn 

18.  3c^  f^tit^e  ta^  (S5emdlt»c  noc^  nid)t  an  tie  Sant»  gcjjdngt 

19.  Die  Sampe  ifl  auf  tern  2:if^e. 


Vocabulary. 


^er  SSricf,  — c8,  the  letter. 

„    SBobcn,  — 8,  the  floor. 

„    ©artcil,  — S,  the  garden. 

,,    Of  en,  — 8,  the  stove. 

„    ®tul;(,  — eOi,  the  chair. 

„  jlijd^,  — e^,  the  tahle. 
^iC  Syrilrfc,  — ,  the  bridge. 

„     SBaiit,  — ,  the  wall. 

„  Jvim^c,  — ,  the  lump. 
2)a^  53oot,  — ce,  the  boat. 

„    Ufer,  — «,  the  shore. 

«     IHd^t,  — CS,  the  caudle. 


3ln,  on,  to,  at. 
^uf,  upon,  on. 
Winter,  behind. 
3n,  in,  into. 
9icbcn,  near,  close  by. 
Uebcr,  above,  by  way  ofl 
Untcr,  under,  below. 
3>or,  before. 
3tvtfcf;en,  between, 
^ailgcn,  to  hang  {active). 
Vcgcn,  to  lay. 
©tcUcn,  to  place,  to  put. 


Grammatical. 

1.  The  nine  prepositlo7is  an,  auf,  \)\ntcx,  in,  ncbcn,  iibcr, 
unter,  »or,  jnnfc^cn,  govern  the  Accusative  Case  when  ^notion 
towards  the  object  they  govern  is  exj^ressed. 

They  govern  the  Dative  Case  when  rest  or  motion 

within  specified  limits  is  expressed: 

Sr  Icf^tc  ba6  33ud^  auf  ben  2;ifc^,    He  laid  the  book  on  the  table. 
2)aS  5Bud?  i|t  auf  bent  Xift^c,  The  book  is  on  the  table. 

2,  The  correct  use  of  prepositions  is  one  of  the  most  difficult  things  to  bb 
Required  iu  learning  any  foreign  language.  This  is  owing  largely  to  the  fact 
that  there  are  so  many  idiomatic  e.rpres.<fions  connected  with  their  use  which 
tan  not  be  literally  translated  from  one  language  to  another. 

er  (^e^t  ncid)  §aufc,  He  is  going  home. 

(Sr  ift  ju  ^aufe,  He  is  at  home. 

@r  c^ebt  llbcr  R'6\n,  He  goes  by  way  of  Cologne. 

!J)aS  33oot  ift  an  bem  Ufcr,  The  boat  is  by  the  shore. 

(5r  fttjt  an  bcm  Xtft^c,  He  is  sitting  at  the  table. 

(Sr  ift  au«  Berlin',  He  is  from  Berlin. 


3a 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


3.  This  difficulty  is  also  increased  to  the  English-speaking  person  in  learn- 
ing German  by  the  fact  that,  in  German,  prepositions  govern  three  cases,  the 
Genitive,  Dative,  and  Accusative  ;  and  by  the  fact  that  circumstances  deter- 
mine whether  certain  prepositions  shall  govern  the  Accusative  or  the  Dative, 


Genitive. 

Dative. 

Accusative. 

Ace.  or  Dat. 

Slnftatt. 

2lu§. 

S3ig, 

^n. 

%u^tx^ath. 

Slu^er* 

S)urd^. 

?luf. 

Sfnner^alb. 

©egenilber. 

Pr. 

§inter. 

SSa^renb, 

W\i, 

©egen. 

3n. 

SBegen 

9fia^, 

D^nc, 

SfieBen, 

(and  many 

55on. 

Urn. 

UeBer. 

Qtkers). 

3u 

SKibcr. 

Hitter. 

(cmd  some 

Sor. 

others^. 

Btutfcl;ett. 

Exercise  20. 
1.  Mr.  Bauer  has  not  yet  sent  the  book  to  the  teacher. 

2.  We  hung  the  painting  on  (an)  the  wall  yesterday  evening. 

3.  The  candle  is  on  (auf)  the  table.  4.  "William  placed  the 
chair  between  the  table  and  the  wall.  6.,  The  Cathedral 
is  between  the  Museum  and  the  Library.  6.  The  book  is 
on  (auf)  the  floor.  7.  The  painter  put  the  painting  on  the 
table.  8.  Where  is  the  letter  ?  9.  It  is  in  the  book ;  I  laid 
it  in  the  book.  10.  The  boy  took  (fit^rte)  us  from  the  Cathe- 
dral to  the  Museum,     11.  The  garden  is  behind  the  house. 

12.  The  bridge  is  between  the  village  and  the  mountain. 

13.  The  book,  the  pencil,  and  the  paper  are  on  the  table. 


LESSOIS"  XL 


PERSONAL   PRONOUNS.       FORMS   OF  ADDRESS.      CONTRACTIONS   OP 
PREPOSITIONS   WITH   THE   DEFINITE  ARTICLE. 


;j)er  35rtef  ift  ntc^t  »on  t^m, 
^err  ^ranjler  l)atte  3^nen  tie 

3ettung  fd^on  c^efc^idft, 
^einri^  xoca  m6)i  mtt  tl)nen, 
^aft  bu  bte  B^ttung  ge^abt  ? 
SBit^elm  ift  im  5^iifeum, 
granffutt  am  SJlain, 


The  letter  is  not  from  him. 
Mr.    Kranzler    had    already 

sent  you  the  newspaper. 
Henry  was  not  with  them. 
Have  you  had  the  newspaper  I 
William  is  in  the  Museum. 
Frankfort-on-tli©-Maine. 


PERSONAL   PRONOUNS. 


©nunbjtoanjigftc  ^ufgak. 


37 


1.  $ajl  bu  ten  ^(eiftift?  2.  9lein,  td^  {)abe  t^n  ni^t.  3. 
^afi  t)U  t)ie  ^lufgabe  fd)on  »oUenbet?  4.  3a,  ic^  l)abt  fic  »oU^ 
enbet  5.  ^einrtd),  I)aft  bu  ge()ort,  wa^  ber  ?ct)rer  gefagt  ()at? 
6  3a,  ic^  \)abt  e^  gc^ort  7.  $abt  i(}r  ge()ort  wa^  ber  ?et)rer 
ifagte?  8.  3a,  mx  ^aben  e^  gef)ort  9.  $ajl  bu  ba^  33u^  auf 
''ben  (Btu^l  getegt  ?  10.  S^ein,  ic^  \)aU  e^  auf  ben  Xif^  gelegt. 
IL  SBo^nt  ^err  SBeber  wett  (far)  jjon  ^errn  ^raft?  12.  S'lein, 
cr  njo^nt  \\)m  gerabe  (jecjenuber.  13.  Der  '^akx  getgte  mir  ba^ 
©emdibe  14.  T)a^  ©emdlbe  gel^ort  ^errn  9)?eper;  ber  Tla^ 
ler  f)at  e^  i^m  l)eutc  SOiorgen  i)er!auft.  15.  2)ie  53ibIiot^ef  ijl 
nid^t  n?ett  »om  2)^ufeum.     16.  Sr  legte  ben  33rief  in$  ^ud). 

17.  ^err  6^u^mac^er  ^at  un^  ^eute  burc^^  9)^ufeum  gefu()rt. 

18.  grau  5luerbac^  unb  grdulein  5Iuerba4  tt^aren  gcflern  unb 
ijorgeftern  in  5ran!furt  am  3JJain.  19.  ^einrid)  3^iemcn^ofci: 
tof>i)nti  fruf)er  in  granffurt  an  ber  Dbcr. 


Grammatical. 
1.  The  Personal  Pronouns  are  declined  thus: 


-.:^=z^ ^i^ 

FIRST   1 

'ERSON. 

SECOND    PERSON. 

Singular. 

Singular. 

Norn.  t(5, 

I. 

btt, 

thou.           (@te,     you.) 

Gen.  mcincr 

f  of  rae,  eic* 

beiner 

,  of  thee,  etc.  (3^rcr,  of  you,  etc.) 

Dat.  mir, 

to  me,  etc.* 

btr, 

to  thee,  etc.  (3^nen,  to  you,  etc.) 

Ace.  vax^f 

me. 

m^ 

thee.             (etc,      you.) 

PI 

ural. 

Plural. 

Norn.  »Dir, 

we. 

il)r, 

you.             (@ie,     you.) 

Gen.  m\tXf 

of  us,  e^c* 

cncr, 

of  you,  efc.  (3^rcr,  ofyou,  e/c.) 

Dat.  un^, 

to  us,  etc. 

tVi^f 

to  you,  e<c.  (3^nen,  to  you,  etc.) 

Ace.  11118, 

ns. 

vn^, 

you.            (@ie,     you.) 

THIRD   PERSON. 

Singu 

lar. 

Plural. 

Norn.  Ct, 

he.              fic, 

she. 

eg,        it. 

fte,       they. 

G^cn.  fctncr, 

of  him.*    t^re 

r,  of  her. 

f  cincr,  of  it. 

iftrtr,  of  them. 

z>a<.  i^m, 

to  him.       i^r, 

to  her. 

i^im,    to  it. 

I^ncn,  to  them. 

Ace.  i^n, 

him.            fte, 

her. 

C«,        it. 

fie,       them. 

*  For  the  use  of  the  cases,  see  Lessons  VII.,  VIII.,  and  IX. 


38 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


2.  The  forms  of  address  in  German  differ  from  those  in 
the  English : 

1.  In  ordinary  discourse  the  form  of  the  third  per- 
son plural  is  used  instead  of  the  regular  forms 
of  the  second  person  of  both  numbers.  When 
thus  used  the  pronoun  begins  with  a  capital 
letter. 

2.  Besides  using  bit  in  addressing  Deity,  the  regu- 
lar forms  \^Vi  and  i!^r  are  employed  in  speaking 
to  near  relatives  or  very  dear  friends,  and  also 
in  speaking  to  servants  and  often  to  children. 

Rem.  This  use  of  the  form  of  the  third  person  plm^al  for  the  second  person 
of  both  numbers  has  been  constantly  increasing  since  its  first  introduction  at 
the  beginning  of  the  eighteenth  century. 

3.  In  the  Pres.  and  Imperf.  Tenses  of  Regular  Verbs  : 

1.  The  second  pers.  sing,  adds  to  the  stemsft  or  't\U 

2.  The       "  "     plur.     "      "    "       ''     -4  or  =et 

Sing,  bu  1 1  e  b  '*ft,    thou  lovest ;    bu  1 1  e  B  '*tcft,  thou  didst  love. 
Plur.  t^r  U  e  b ' 4,    you  love ;      t^r  I  i  e  b  '4ei,  you  did  love. 
Rem.  1.  When  the  stem  ends  in  b,  t  (or  gn),  =Cft  and  sCt  must  be  added: 
Sing,  bu  tt)  a  r  t  *  eft,  thou  waitest ;     bu  h)  a  r  t  *  etCft,  thou  didst  wait. 
Plur.  t^r  tr)  a r  t  =  ti,  you  wait ;         x^xxoaxi^  titi,  you  did    wait. 
Rem.  2.  The  present  indicative  of  fcin  has  t)U  !&ift,  and  \^X  fCtb* 

The  present  indicative  of  IjatlCll  has  bU  ijiaft,  and  tl)r  l^atlt* 

4.  The  following  contractions  of  prepositions  with 
the  definite  article  are  allowable  and  are  sometimes 


necessary: 

\.WithDat.  Sing,  bcmt 

2.WithDat 

Sing. 

3.  With.  Ace.  Neut.  has : 

am         for  an  bem. 

Feminine  bCJ  t 

anS     for  an  bas. 

^cim       "  Mbem. 

m 

for  3U 

ber. 

a«f«      "  aufba«. 

^tntetm  *'  ^tntcr  bem. 

burd)g  "  burd>bas. 

im          "in  bem. 

fitrg      "  fiir  bag. 

Jinterui    "  unter  bem. 

inS       "  in  bag. 

t)om        "  i)on  bem. 

um§      "  um  baS. 

5Um        "  3U  bem. 

i^ranlfurt  am  Ttain  (an  bem  'Main),  Frankfort-on-the-Maine. 

(Sr  ift  tm  ^aufe  (in  bem  §aufe),  He  is  in  the  house. 

(Sr  fommt  Uom  3JJufenm  (t)on  bem  9Jluf.),  He  comes  from  the  Museum. 

S)aS  SSuA  ift  fiirg  tinb  (fiir  bag  tinb),  The  book  is  for  the  child. 

(Sr  Qti)t  inS  §aug  (in  bag  §aug).  He  goes  into  the  house. 


THE   IKKEGULAR  VEEB   ttCtbeit,  TO   BECOME.  39 

Exercise  22. 
1.  Charles,  hast  thou  not  had  the  lead-pencil?  2. 1  put  it 
into  the  book.  3.  What  art  thou  looking  for?  4. 1  am  look- 
ing for  the  pencil.  5.  What  are  you  looking  for?  6.  We 
are  looking  for  the  book.  7.  Hast  thou  been  to  get  (^olen) 
the  bread ?  8. 1  got  it  this  morning.  9.  Where  wast  thou? 
10. 1  was  in  the  garden.  11.  Did  you  {(Bk)  buy  the  paint- 
ing? 12.  No,  I  did  not  buy  it.  13.  When  did  you  (©tc) 
send  the  letter  to  Professor  Hoffmann  ?  14. 1  sent  the  let- 
ter to  him  yesterday.  15.  The  letter  is  in  the  book.  16. 
The  church  is  not  far  (n)eit)  from  the  Museum. 


LESSON  XII. 

THE    IRREGULAR  VERB   tOCtbCIt/  TO   BECOME.      FUTURE   TENSES. 

Da$  ^Better  wirb  fait,  The  weather  becomes  cold. 

©ie  n)ert»en  reic^,  They  are  becoming  rich. 

&  tt)urt>e  fe{)r  \)t\^,  It  became  very  hot. 

@6  mxt>  halt)  regnen,  It  will  soon  rain. 

(Sie  merben  in  53erlin^  wol^nen,   They  will  reside  in  Berlin. 

!Der  Tlakx  it)irb  ba^  ^tmaVU  The  painter  will  probably 
wa^rfc^ein^lic^  iibermorgen  have  finished  the  paint- 
»oUen^bet  ^aben,  ing  day  after  to-morrow. 

J)rchnb5toan5tgftc  ^ufpk* 

1.  ^eutc  rntrb  e^  gemig'  fe()r  f)eig  fein.  2.  2)a^  33ud^  mxt) 
(angweilig.  3.  ©egen  ^.benb  n^urbe  ba^  ^Better  fait,  nag  unb 
fe^r  unangene^m.  4.  ^Der  ^aufmann  ttjurbe  fe^r  rei^.  5.  ©^ 
anrb  f^mitl.  6.  d^  tt>irb  TOal)rfc^einlt(^  »or  ^benb  rcc^ncn.  7. 
9J^orgen  tt)irb  ber  Makx  ba^  (^emdlbe  gan^  c^emtf  »ollcnbct  ba^ 
ben.  8.  Der  Xtfc^ler  tt)irb  btc  ^ommo'be  morgcn  repari'ren. 
9.  3)cr  S3auer  anrb  ba^  ^om  ijerfau'fen.  10.  T)cx  SSater  wirb 
ba^  ^inb  lobcn,  meil  e^  fleigig  ifl  unb  well  c^  bie  5lufi^abe  fo 
fd)nell  ^oUenbet  l)at.  11.  ^tnk  5lbenb  (this  evening)  n?irb 
2©ill)elm  8d)rober  ben  Dircftor  H^  9)^ufcum^  bcfu^en.  12. 
9)^orgen  ^^benb  (to-morrow  evening)  n)crben  mx  ben  ^errn 


40  THE   IRREGULAR   VERB   toCtbClt,  TO   BECOME. 


^)rofeffor  (Siebert  m^  SBien  befuc&en*  13*  2Ba^renb  ber  ^a^t 
xmxU  e^  jiemlic^  fait,  aber  je^t  ift  ba^  ^Better  warm  unb  ange^ 
nebm»  14.  T)n  ^mht  mxt)  bie  Seftion"  balb  gelernt  ^abtn.  15* 
2Bir  werben  ba^  $au^  ni^t  faufen.  16*  d^  \)ai  gebon'nert;  e^ 
tpirb  balb  regnen. 

Vocabulary. 


^cr  Slrjt,  — e§,  the  physician. 

M    33oucr,  — 8,  the  peasant. 

„   SSibliot^efar',  — §,  the  librarian. 

„    2)tref'tor,  —8,  the  Director. 

„    2;i[ct>ter,  — 8,  the  cabinet-maker. 

„  SBeijen,  —8,  the  wheat. 

„   §»oggen,  — g,  the  rye. 
^te  ^ommo'be,  — ,  the  bureau. 
^00  ^orn,  — e8,  the  grain. 
S3c6au'cn,  to  cultivate,  to  till. 
Semen,  to  learn. 
2Jiietf?en,  to  rent,  to  hire. 
2;abein,  to  blame. 
^tpaxi'xzn,  to  mend. 


2lrm,  poor. 

^d6),  rich. 

greunbltd^,  kind,  friendly. 

^oftbar,  costly. 

Sangtx>etlig,  tedious. 

^a^,  wet. 

<Bd)tGiii,  sultry. 

iBalb,  soon. 

©oe'bcn,  just  now. 

2}lorgen,  to-morrow. 

Uebermorgen,  day  after  to-morrow. 

©c^nell,  fast,  quick. 

@ett>t^',  certainly. 

SSa^rfc^etn'Itc^,  probably. 


Grammatical. 

1.  The  Irregular  Verb  UJCrbcn,  to  become,  is  conjugated 
thus: 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


Present  Tense. 


3^   toCrb'^C,  I       become. 

2)U   tiJirft,  thou  becomest. 

@r     tDtrb,  he     becomes. 

SKtr  ft)  e  r  b  '*  en,  we     become. 

3br  tt)  c  r  b  '=  ct,  you   become. 

®ie   'VOi.x'O'^tUf  they  become. 


Imperfect  Tense. 
^6)  tourb'^C,  I  became. 
2)U  tD  U  r  b  '*  eft,  thou  becamest. 
@r  ti?urb'*e,  he  became. 
2Btr  tr>  u  r  b  '*  en,  we  became. 
3br  tDUrb^et,  you  became, 
®te   tDUrb'^en,  they  became. 


2.  The  Present  Tense  of  tocrbcil,  to  become,  is  used  in 
forming  the  Future  Tenses  of  all  verbs  : 

First    Future :  d^  totrb  regnett,  It  will  rain. 

Second  Future :  (S^  toirb  geregnet  ^aben,  It  will  have  rained. 

Re7n.  The  Future  Tenses  in  German  express  simple  futurity^  and  not  in- 
clination or  desire,  as  is  often  the  case  in  English. 


FUTURE  TENSES. 


41 


3.  The  Indicative  Mood 

Prc'^ut  Tense. 

X^    iXth'- 1,  I  love, 

bu  H  e  b  '*  ft,  thou  lovest. 

cr   Wt^^t',  he  loves, 

toir  n  e  6 '  *  en,  we  love. 

\^x  I  i  c  b  '*  t,  you  love. 

^c   I  i  c  b  '*  en,  they  love. 

Perfect  Tense. 
I  have  loved,  etc. 
\^  fail's  C       0CliCtlt\ 
bu  ^aft  gelicbt'. 

cr   ^ot  gcliebt'. 

toit  ^ab'^en  gcliebt'. 
i^r  jiab'st  gcliebt'. 
ftc  ^ab'*en  geliebt'. 

First  Future  Tense. 
I  shall  love,  etc. 

\&i  tterb'^c     Iteben* 
bu  tijirft  lie  ben. 

er   toirb  liebcn. 

tDir  hJcrb'^cnHeben. 
i^r  ttjcrb'^et  Hebcu. 
fie  toerb'^en  lie  ben. 


of  Hcbcn,  to  love. 

Imperfect  Tenm. 

id;  lieb'=  Xt,  I  loved. 

bu  I  i  e  b  '=  tcft,  thou  loved«t 

cr    H  c  b  '*  te,  he  loved. 

n?ir  H  c  b  '*  ten,  we  loved, 

i^r  I  i  e  b  '*  tCt,  you  loved, 

fie  H  c  b  '*  ten,  they  loved. 

Pluperfect   Tense. 
I  had  loved,  etc. 

\^  \i^i'it     gcliebt'* 

bu  ^at'steft  gcliebt'. 
cr  ^at'*te  gcliebt'. 
toir  ^at'stcn  gcliebt'. 
il;r  ()at'*tct  gcliebt'. 
fie  ^at'^ten  gcliebt'. 

Second  Future   Tense. 
I  shall  have  loved,  etc. 

\^  ttcrb'=e       gelicbt'     ^abcn* 
bu  toirft  gcliebt'  ^aben. 

er   totrb  gcliebt'  b^ben. 

tt?ir  tt)erb'=en  gcliebt'  fjaben. 
i^r  tt?crb'*et  gcliebt'  I)  a  ben. 
fie  n?  crb'<»  en  gcliebt'  ^  a  ben. 


Exercise  24. 
1.  The  physician  will  visit  Mr.  Meyer  to-day.  2.  The 
carpenter  is  building  the  house.  3.  The  peasant  is  till- 
ing the  field.  4.  The  merchant  is  becoming  very  rich. 
5.  The  tailor  became  very  poor.  6.  The  history  became 
very  tedious.  7.  It  is  becoming  sultry.  8.  It  will  soon 
rain.  9.  It  is  thundering  now  (focben).  10.  The  peasant 
will  sell  the  wheat  and  the  rye.  11.  The  director  of 
the  Museum  was  very  kind  towards  (fiCgen)  us.  12.  He 
took  (fu^ren)  us  through  the  Museum.  13.  The  librarian 
took  us  through  the  Library.  14.  The  Library  is  very 
large  and  costly.  15.  The  teacher  blamed  the  child 
because  it  did  not  learn  the  lesson.  16.  We  have  rent- 
ed the  house. 


42  GERMAN    CURRENT   HAND. 

LESSON  XIII. 
GERMAN  CURRENT  HAND. 

1.  Capital  Letters. 

a-^^aP"^  oT  ^  ^  qT 

A       B        0       D        E        F         G        S      1       J 
K      L       M       N       0        V  q         It        S       T 

u     y     w     X      Y      z 


2.  Small  Letters. 
a       h       c       d       e      f       g         h       i     j        k      I       m       n 

op       q      r      s       8      t      u      V       w      x     y      z 


<«-       -«'- 


3.  Umlaut  Vowels  and  Combined  Consonants. 


a        o        ii         au       ch        sch         st         sz         tz 


GERMAN  CURRENT  HAND.  43 


Berlin,  4)amburg,  !Eire«ben,  ililn, 


!Wund^en,  2Bten,  granffurt. 


iy 


StugSburg,  Sremen. 


©eutft^Ianb,  amerila,  ^Preu^en. 


$einrid^,  ^ol>antt,  ©eorg,  aibr«c{)t. 


^^^   ^L«.,     ^^1^.^    .^^ 

©op^ie,  ?Karic,  anna,  Kuguflc. 


^ert  Sd^mibt,  grau  SDietr 

J^raulein  SRu^lbacl^ 


44  GERMAN   CURRENT   HAND. 


(3.)    ,sz^l-y  ^^L.^,._  ^-;.  ^^^. 
(5.)    '^^^^    ^.;^£._.    yfy 

(6,)  ^^£.    ^^L^  -^^  a^L^.u'  ^ 

■*^-r».-^-*-*-^i^'Ui'      -t-'y^iC.  -^-rt-'^-At^  ■^-tjL--x^        ■*-*^»-*.-*/^ 


CONJUGATION   OF   IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


45 


LESSON  XIV. 

CONJUGATION   OP   lEKEQULAR  VERBS. 


8pred^en  <3{e  ll)eutfc()  ? 
S'^ein,  ic^  fpred)e  nur  Snglifc^, 
^err  ^(i)tx  fpricl)!  X)eutfd), 
^crr  Rkin  fprac^  mit  un^, 
dx  f)at  mtt  un^  gcfproc^'en, 
Slavic  ftngt  fef)r  fd)on, 


Do  you  speak  German  ? 
No,  I  speak  only  English. 
Mr.  Meyer  speaks  German. 
Mr.  Klein  spoke  to  us. 
He  has  spoken  to  us. 
Mary  sings  very  finely. 


©icknunbjttJonsiQftc  ^tujgak. 

1.  3pred^en  8ie  3)eutfd)?  2.  2Bir  fprec^en  nur  ^nc^Ufd^. 
3.  grau  Dietrich  fpric^t  Deutfc^  unb  granjo'jtf^.  4.  grdulein 
^afenclei^er  fpnd)t  graujbftfd),  3talid'nifd)  unb  Spanifd).  5. 
!Der  ^ud)biuf  ev  i)at  ta^  ^ud)  c^an^  gut  gebunb'en.  6. 2Go  ^aben 
(Bie  ben  ^rief  gefunb'en?  7. 3d)  fanb  ibn  im  33ud)e.  8.  grdu*' 
lein  ^ilbebraut)  i)at  ba^  ?{eb  fel)r  fd)5n  gcfung'en.  9.  3a,  (tc 
fang  e^  mxUid)  fcl)r  fd)cn.  10.  Der  Dicb  ^at  ba^  ®clb  geftol)'^ 
(en.  ll.Da^^inb()atmitbcm(Stodec;efptelt.  12. 3<t/Unbe^ 
^at  i^n  au^  gebroc^'en.  13.  3d)  \)aU  l)eute  33?orgcn  mtt  $errn 
S3raun  gefpro^'en.  14.  3<^  ^^be  ba^  ^u^  (ange  gefud^t,  aber  ic^ 
^aht  e^  nod^  nic^t  gefunbcn.    15.  3o^ann  \)at  e^. 

Vocabulary. 


^tX  S3uci;btnbcr, — ?,  the  bookbinder. 

„    !Dieb,—c§,  the  thief. 

tf    ®tocf,  — ce,  the  cane. 
SO'^  ®clb,  — C6,  the  money. 

,,    ?ieb,  — C9,  the  song. 
9?ur  (adv.),  only,  but. 
aUcnig  (a</y.),  a  little, 
©anj  (adv.),  entirely,  very. 

Present  Infinitive. 
Binb's  en,     to  bind, 
finb'*en,    to  find, 
ting'*en,    to  sing, 
f<)rc(^'*  en,   to  speak, 
b  r  e  (^  '*  en,  to  break, 
P  e  ^  I '  *  en,  to  steal, 


2)cutfc!),  Cerman. 
^oUviiibifd),  Dutch. 
(Sngtifd),  English, 
granjc'fifdj,  French. 
3tati*a'*nifd^,  Italian. 
@^anifd),  Spanish. 
Satei'nifd;,  Latin. 
®m6)'\]6:f,  Greek. 
Imperfect  Indicative.         Perfect  Participle, 

fianb,    bound,         gesbunb'sen,      bound, 
ge^funb^en,  found. 
gc*fung^cn,  sung, 
ge^fljro^'sen,      spoken, 
gc*brod)'*cn,  broken, 
ge*|lo^r*en,  stolen. 


fanb,    found, 
fang,    sung, 
\^Xa^,   spoke, 
brad;,  broke, 
fla^I,   stole. 


46 


CONJUGATION   OF   IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


Grammatical. 
1.  Irregular  Verbs  have  the  following  peculiarities: 

1.  They  have  the  ending  sen  instead  of  d  in  the  Perfect  Participle. 

2.  The  radical  vowel  of  most  Irregular  Verbs  is  changed  in  forming 
the  Imperfect  Indicative  and  the  Perfect  Participle. 

3.  The  Imperfect  Indicative  is  usually  a  monosyllable  (having  tha  first 
and  third  persons  singular  alike,  and  rarely  take  the  ending  stC)* 

4.  Most  verbs  with  C  in  the  radical  syllable  change  it  to  \  or  \t  in  the 
second  and  third  person  of  t\iQ  present  singular. 

oi\)^Xt^t\[,to  sj>eah: 

Imperfect  Tense. 
tc^  [^ra(!^,  I       spoke, 

bii  i ))  r  a  d;  c\i,    thou  spokest. 
cr  f^ra^,  he     spoke. 

hJtr  i  |)  r  a  d)  '^  en,  we  spoke, 
t^r  I ))  r  0  d)  '=  t,  you  spoke, 
fie  i  i)  r  a  c^  %  en,  they  spoke. 

Pluperfect  Tense. 
I    had   spoken,  etc. 

x^  W'it     gcf^roc^'em 

bu  ^  a  t  '*  teft  g  c  i  ^  r  0  d; '  c  n. 

er  ^at%tC    gef^ro  ci>' en. 

xoxx  ^  a  t  %  ten  g  e  j  i)  r  0  d; '  e  n. 

t^r  ^at'^tet  gej^roc^'cn, 

^  a  t  '*  ten  g  e  f ))  r  0  (^ '  c  n. 

Second  Future  Tense, 
I  shall  have  spoken,  etc. 

tocrb'^e      gef^rorfi'ctt  l^akn. 
totrft  gef^rod/en  ^aben, 

iDirb  gefproc^'en  ^aben. 

tuir  h)erb'*en  gef^rod/en  ^aben. 

i^r  t»  e  r  b  %  et  gef^roc^'en  b  a  b  e  n. 

fte  tuerb^en  gef)3voc^'en  ^aben, 


2.  The  Indicative  Mood 

Present  Tense. 

t(?^  f^ret^'^e,       I       speak, 

bu  f^ri(^=ft,         thou  speakest. 

er  fi)ric^=t,  he     speaks. 

XOXX  j ))  r  e  d^  '*  en,  we     speak, 

itjr  j:|)re(^'*t,    you  speak, 

fie  j  ^  r  e  d;  '*  en,  they  speak. 

Perfect  Tense. 
I  have  spoken,  etc. 

ie^  l^ab'-e     gef^rod^'em 
bu  ^aft         gcf^jro^'en. 
er  l^at  gej^roc^'cn. 

njtr  ^  a  b  ':*  en  g  e  j  i)  r  0  d; '  e  u. 
i^r  ^  a  b  '*  t  g  e  j  ^  r  o  d; '  e  n. 
fie  (;  a  b  '^  en  g  e  i  i)  r  0  c^ '  e  u. 

First  Future  Tense. 
I  shall  speak,  etc. 

tcb  toerb'^e      f^rcc^'em 
bu  totrft  f^rec^'en. 

er   toirb  f  ^  r  e  c^ '  e  u. 

h)tr  U)  e  r  b  %  en  j  :|)  r  e  c^ '  e  u. 
i^r  ti)  e r  b '* et  j:|)rec^'  en. 
fte  tD  e  r  b  '*  en  f  :^  r  e  d; '  e  u. 


fte 


i^ 
bu 
er 


3.  The  Indicative  Mood  of  ftc^lcn,  to  steal : 


Present  Tense. 
\^   fteljl'^e,       I       steal, 
bu   [ticlllsft,      thou  stealest. 
er    ftiCl^Ist,       he     steals, 
njtr  ft  e  {)  r*  en,  we    steal, 
t^r  ftebl'^t,   you   steal, 
fie   ft  e  ^  r*  en,  they  steaL 


Imperfect  Tense. 

\^  M\r  I        stole, 

bu  ft  a  ^  I  s  ft,    thou  stolest. 

er  ftc^l,  he     stole. 

tDtr  ft  a  b  t  '*  en,  we    stole. 

i^r  ftabl'^t,   you   stole, 

fie  ftabi'^en,  they  stole. 


CONJUGATION    OF    lUEEGULAR    VERBS. 


47 


Perfect  Tense. 

\^  ^o6e  gcftoljl'tn,  etc., 

I  have  stolen,  etc. 

First  Future  Tense. 

tci^  ttjcrbc  ftcl)rcn,e<c., 

I  shall  steal,  etc. 

4.  The  Indicative  Mood 

Present  Tense. 
trf>    binb'sC,       I       bind. 
bu    binb's  eft,     thou  Wndest. 
cr    binb'=Ct,      he      binds. 
tt)ir  b  i  11  b  '=  en,  we     bind, 
i^r  b  i  n  b  '*  et,  you    bind, 
fie   b  i  n  b  '*  en,  they  bind. 

Perfect  Tense. 

id)  I)ttbe  gcbnnb'en,  etc., 

I  have  bound,  etc. 

First  Future  Tense. 

id;  njcrbe  bittb'en,e<c., 

I  shall  bind,  etc. 


Pluperfect  Tense, 

ic^  l^ottc  ocftol}rett,  etc., 

I  had  stolen,  etc. 

Second  Future  Tense, 

ic^  tterbc  geftoljl'cn  Iiaben,e«c., 

I  shall  have  stolen,  etc. 

of  Mnbcn,  to  Und  : 

Imperfect  Tense. 
i(^    banb,  I        bound, 

bu    b  a  U  b  '*  eft,  thou  boundest. 
cr    banb,  he      bound. 

\o\x  b  a  u  b  '*  en,  we  bound, 
i^r  b  a  It  b  '*  et,  you  bound, 
fie   b  a  n  b  '*  en,  they  bound. 

Pluperfect  Tense. 

id;  ^tttte  gebunb'en,  e<c., 

I  had  bound,  etc. 

Second  Future  Tense. 

ic^  toerbe  gebunb'en  ^aben,  etc, 

I  shall  have  bound,  etc. 


5.  Adjectives  are  used  as  adverbs  without  change  of 
form. 


er  f^rid^t  pt, 
©ie  fmgt  f^iin, 


He  speaks  well. 
She  sings  beautifully. 


Exercise  28. 
1.  Do  you  speak  French?  2.  No,  I  do  not  speak 
French.  3.  Mr.  Kreutzner  speaks  German,  Dutch,  Italian, 
and  Spanish.  4.  Prof.  Schmidt  speaks  Latin  and  Greek. 
5.  You  have  broken  the  cane.  6.  The  thief  has  stolen 
the  hat  and  the  coat.  7.  Where  did  you  find  the  pencil? 
8.  I  found  it  under  the  book.  9.  George  had  tied  (bin^ 
ben)  the  band  on  (urn)  the  hat.  10.  Mary  sung  the  song 
very  well.  11.  Mr.  Neidner  is  speaking;  do  you  hear 
what  he  is  saying?  12.  I  was  looking  for  the  news- 
paper. 13.  Henry  will  sing  the  song.  14.  The  child 
had  broken  the  cane.  15.  John  will  find  the  book.  16. 
Mr.  Krause  will  buy  the  house. 


48 


PLURAL  OF  NOUNS. 


LESSON  XV, 


PLTJEtiL   OP  NOUNS   AND   OF   THE   DEFINITE   ARTICLE. 


I)ie  ?e^rer  loben  bie  ©driller, 

T)it  ®drten  jtnb  fe^r  gro§, 
2)te  ^erge  ftnb  fteil, 
2)te  ^unbe  fclgen  ben  Scigern, 
Die  m^^tt  ftnb  fait, 
5Ilbre^t  \)at  bie  33u^er, 
Die  ^irc^en  ftnb  fc^on, 
2Ber  \)at  bie  B^itnngen  ? 


praise 


the 


The    teachers 

scholars. 
The  gardens  are  very  large. 
The  mountains  are  steep. 
The  dogs  follow  the  hunt- 
The  nights  are  cold.     [ers. 
Albert  has  the  books. 
The  churches  are  beautiful. 
Who  has  the  newspapers  ? 


Sftcununbatoanjigfte  ^ufgak* 

1.  Die  ® chiller  '{)abm  bie  51ufgaben  iJoUenbet  2.  Die  $it^ 
gel  ftnb  nic^t  fe^r  l)oc^.  3*  '^k  Simmer  ftnb  ju  flein.  4.  Die 
©emdlbe  jTnb  fc^on,  aber  fe^r  t^euer,  5.  3ol)ann  l)at  bie  ^lei=5 
ftifte  anf  ben  ^ifd)  gelegt.  6,  Die  ^leiftifte  jtnb  neben  ben 
33it^ern.  7.  Die  Xifc^e  jtnb  in  ben  Bimmern.  8.  Die  Diebe 
&aben  ba^  ®elb  geftoblen.  9*  Die  Dd^er  ber  ^dnfer  in  ben 
Di3rfern  jtnb  fe^r  fteil.  10.  Die  Xljiirme  ber  ^ird)en  in  ben 
(Btdbten  ftnb  ^oc^  nnb  impofant.  11.  Die  "Makx  ^aben  bie  @e? 
mdlbe  an  bie  2Bdnbe  ber  Simmer  ge!)dngt.  12.  Der  SD^aler  ^at 
ba^  (i^emdlbe  an  bie  SGanb  be^  Simmer^  gebdngt.  13.  $err 
Dietri^  ^at  bie  33riefe  iiber  53remen  na^  ^Imerifa  gefc^icft.  14* 
^err  53lnmenbad)  unb  ^err  Dunder  l^aben  bie  Sieber  gan^  f^i)n 
gefungen. 

GrammaticaL 

1.  The  Definite  Article  is  declined  as  follows: 


SmOULAE. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Neuter. 

(The  man.) 

(The  woman.) 

(The  child.) 

Nom 

ber   3JJann. 

bic  ^rau. 

htL^  ^inb. 

Gen. 

m   aJlMttn* 

e8. 

ber  grait. 

bc^  ^inb.e 

Dat. 

bcm  aytann* 

e. 

ber  grau. 

htm  t  i  n  b » e. 

Ace. 

ben  aJiann. 

bit  grau. 

U^  ^inb. 

PLURAL    OF    NOUNS. 


49 


Masculine. 
(The   men.) 
Norn,  hit  2)2  a  It  n  *  e  r. 
Gen.  bcr  2Ji  a  linger. 
Dat.   ben  3}i  a  n  n  -  c  r  n. 
Ace.   bie   3)Zdnn>cr. 


PLURAL. 

Feminine.  Neuter. 

(The  women.)  (The  children.) 

bic  i!rau*cn.  bic  itinb*cr. 

bcr  grau^en.  bcr  Sinb^cr. 

bcngrau^cn.  bcn^tnb*crn, 

bic  S'^aU'C"-  bic  ^tnb*cr. 
i2em.  The  Definite  Article  has  the  same  form  in  the  plural  for  all  genders, 

2.  The  Plurals  of  Nouns  are  formed  in  several  ways : 

1.  With  .some  nouns  the  nom.  plural  is  like  the  nom.  singular. 

2.  Some  nouns  take  merely  an  umlaut  on  the  radical  vowel,  when  th* 
vowel  is  capable  of  it. 

3.  Some  nouns  merely  add  ct  to  the  singular. 

4.  Some  nouns  add  sC  and  also  take  the  umlaut. 

5.  Some  nouns  add  sCr  (with  the  umlaut,  when  the  vowel  is  capable  of  it). 

6.  Some  nouns  merely  add  sll  to  the  singular. 

7.  Some  nouns  merely  add  sCn  to  the  singular. 

3.  Nouns  that  add  =n  or  =cn  in  the  plural  (and  also  in 
the  gen.,  dat.,  and  ace.  sing.,  if  the  nouns  are  masculine) 
are  said  to  be  of  the  New  Declension. 

Those  that  take  ^n  or  =cn  in  the  plural,  and  =8  or  =C§ 
in  the  gen.  sing.,  are  said  to  be  of  the  Mixed  Declension. 

All  other  nouns  are  said  to  be  of  the  Old  Declension. 

Rem.  1.  The  Old  Declension  includes  by  far  the  greater  portion  of  nouns. 
Rem.  2.  No  neuter  nouns  belong  to  the  Neto  Declension. 
Rem.  3.  No  feminine  nouns  belong  to  the  Mixed  Declension. 

4.  Tabular  view  of  the  singular  and  plural  of  nouns : 


(Singular 

.)      (Plural.) 

(Singular.y    (Plural.) 

(Singular. )    (Plurc 

1. 

2. 

2:tf(^, 

Xifd^c. 

TlaUx, 

2«alcr. 

SSatcr,        SSSter. 

4. 

Scorer, 

Sel^rcr. 

©artcn,      ©arten. 

^oc^, 

«8d^e. 

©Wer, 

(Bcijillcr. 

Dfen,        Ocfen. 

5tr,^t, 

Slcrjte. 

SBacfer, 

SSarfcr. 

aj^uttcr,    matux. 

§ut, 

^ilte. 

Sacjer, 

3agcr. 

3. 

mod, 

SeiJcfe. 

a^efycr, 

SD^cffer. 

Slbenb,       3lbenbc. 

@tu^I, 

@tai)te. 

3immcr, 

Btuimer. 

Scrg,         SScrgc. 

9^ad?t, 

9?«d;te. 

ajJorgen, 

3J?orgen. 

Sleiftift,     SBIeiftifte. 

©tabt, 

@tabtc. 

Oiigel, 

^iigel. 

Sricf,        «ricfe. 
C 

SaJanb, 

SSanbe. 

50 


DECLENSION    OF   NOUNS. 


(Singula 

r.)    (Plural.) 

6. 

(Singular 

)      (P/«m/.) 

6. 

S3auern.* 

(Singular.)      (Plural.) 

mann, 

33auer,* 

2)oftor,* 

S)o!tor'en.* 

3BaIb. 

aScilber. 

^nabc, 

^nabcn. 

^err, 

§erren. 

53u^, 

SSiic^er. 

2lutgafec, 

Slufgaben. 

^rofefjor, 

^'^roteffor'cn.* 

®ort. 

3)orfer, 

33rii(fe, 

SSriicfen. 

©olbat', 

©olbat'en. 

©elb, 

©etber. 

^reube, 

greubcn. 

2)irertor,* 

2)tre!tor'en. 

§au9, 

§aufer. 

©efd^id^'tc 

@efd;tc^t'en. 

SSibliot^er 

SSibliot^cfen. 

3)a*, 

©ac^er. 

^rc^e, 

^irc^cn. 

grau, 

grauen. 

mnb, 

^tnber. 

^ommob'e 

,  ^ommo'ben. 

©efa^r', 

©efa^r'en. 

2i^t, 

2t(^ter. 

e^i^e, 

@))i^en. 

Seftton', 

2e!tion'cn* 

5.  Examples  of  the  Declension  of  Nouns: 


1.  Old  Declension. 


SINOULAK. 


1.  Painter. 

N.  bcr  maltx, 

D.  bem  makx, 
A.  ben  TtaUx, 


2.  Father. 

bcr  abater, 

beg  ^ater^g, 
bem  35ater, 
Den  ^ater. 


3.  Mountain. 

bcr  ^crg, 

beg  S3erg*c^, 
bem  93erg^c, 
ben  53erg, 


4.  City. 

btc  ©tabt, 

Der  @tabt, 
Der  ©tabt, 
&tc  ©tabt. 


5.  Man, 

bcr  Warn, 

be§  9)iann=cg, 
bem  2JZann*c, 
ben  2Jiann. 


iV'.  bic  maitv, 

G.ber  2«aler, 
Z>.  ben  mxkx^^n. 
A.  bie   gjialer. 


bic  S3atcr, 

ber  3Sater, 
ben  35ater*n, 
bie  SSater. 


bic  Scrg^c, 

ber  S3erg*c, 

Den  ^erg*cn, 

bie  53erg*c. 


bic  ©tabt=c, 

ber  @tabt*c, 
ben  @tdbt*cn, 
Die  @tabt*c. 


bic  Wdnn-tx, 

ber  2Hdnn»cr, 
ben  2Jiantt*crrt, 
bie  9Jiann=cr. 


2.  New  Declension. 


3.   Mixed  Declension. 


SINGULAR. 


SINGULAR. 


6.  Boy. 

N.  bcr  ^nabc, 
G.  bee  ^nabe=n, 
D.  bem  ^nabe^n, 
A.  ben  ^nabe^n, 


7.  Woman. 

bic  ^rau, 

ber  i^rau, 
ber  gran, 
bie  gran. 


8.  Peasant. 

bcr  ©aucr, 

beS  33auer*g, 
bem  5Bauer, 
ben  33auer. 


9.  Doctor. 

bcr  hotter* 

beS  ©oftor^g, 
bem  2)oftor, 
ben  Softer. 


PLURAL. 


N.  bic  ^mU'tt, 

G.  ber  ^nabe^n, 
D.  ben  ^nabe^n, 
A.  bie   ^nabe^n. 


bic  ^rauscn, 

ber  grau*cn, 
ben  grau^cn, 
bie  i^xau'tn* 


bic  ^autx-Uf 

ber  S3auer*n, 

ben  S3auer*n, 

bic  S3auer*n. 


bic  2)oftor'sCtt, 

ber  2)D{tor'*cn, 

ben  2)o!tor^cn, 

bie  jDottor'*  en. 


Rem  1,  The  genitive  and  accusative  of  the  plural  number  have  the  same 
form  as  the  nominative  plural. 

Re7n.  2.  An  sji  is  always  added  in  the  dative  plural  if  the  nominative 
plural  does  not  already  end  in  that  letter. 

*  In  the  Mixed  Declension. 


THE   INDEFINITE   ARTICLE.  51 

Exercise  30. 
1.  The  scholars  have  bought  the  books.  2.  The  books 
of  the  painters  are  on  the  tables.  3.  The  cabinet-makers 
have  mended  the  tables.  4.  The  stoves,  the  chairs,  and 
the  tables  are  in  the  rooms.  5.  Miss  Neumann  sang 
the  songs  very  beautifully.  6.  The  nights  are  now 
very  cold.  7.  The  towers  of  the  churches  in  the  city 
are  very  high.  8.  The  news  (^l.)  in  the  newspaper  is 
to-day  very  interesting.  9.  The  gardens  are  not  very 
large.  10.  The  soldiers  are  in  the  city.  11.  Where  did 
you  find  the  pencils?  12.  The  pencils  were  under  the 
books.  13.  The  tailors  have  mended  the  coats.  14. 
The  children  are  playing  with  the  dogs.  15.  We  sent 
the  letters  by  way  of  Hamburg. 


LESSON  XVI. 

THE   INDEFINITE   ARTICLE. 

Sr  \)<xi  m  $au^  gefauft,  He  has  bought  a  house. 

3^  fu^e  einen  ^leiftift,  I  am  looking  for  a  pencil. 

^aben  ®ie  eine  3<^itung  ?  Have  you  a  newspaper? 

(Sr  faufte  ein  *35funb  X^ee,  He  bought  a  pound  of  tea. 

@r  faufte  ein  5^aar  (Sttefel,  He  bought  a  pair  of  boots. 

:Da^  Xuc^  foftet  einen  X^aler  The  cloth  cost  a  dollar  a 

tie  @Ue,  yard. 

^a^  Xuc^  ijl  eine  SUe  breit,  The  cloth  is  a  yard  wide. 

ginunbbrcigigftc  5lufgak» 

1.  $err  Sluerbad^  ^(li  ^eute  ein  ©emdlbe  gefauft  2.  ^ein^ 
ri<^  ^at  l^eute  einen  !Horf,  einen  $ut,  ein  ^aar  (Btiefel  unb  ein 
?>aar  8c^ul)e  gefauft.  3.  2)er  ^oc^  f)at  ein  ^funb  'S>Vidtx,  em 
^)funb  ^affee  unb  ein  $funb  X^ee  gef)olt.  4.  2Ciinfcben  (Sic 
cine  Xaffe  taffee  ober  eine  Xaffe  2:f)ee?  5.  3^  n>iinfcbe  nur 
ein  ®la^  5Baffer.  6.  Dae  ^inb  tt)itnfrf)t  ein  ©la^  2)?ild)  unb 
ein  ©tiicf  53utterbrob  (bread  and  butter).    7.  Die  Xa|[en 


52 


THE   INDEFINITE   ARTICLE. 


ftnb  fe^r  f^on*  8»  2Bcrben  (Sie  ein  33u^  papier  ober  ein  Mt^ 
fapkx  faufen?  9.  3(^  tDerbe  ein  S^ltee  papier  faufen.  10. 
2)a6  Xuc^  {ft  etne  (Slle  brett  11.  (S^  foftet  einen  3:{)aler  bic 
(SUe.  12.  2)er  X^ee  foftet  einen  X^akx  ba^  $funb.  13.  Die 
©ier  foften  ^e^n  (ten)  @rcfc^en  ba^  3)u^enb.  14.  |)einric^  i)at 
einen  Xbaler  unb  ^e^n  ©rofc^en  fiir  ba^  53ud)  be^a^lt.  15. 2)a^ 
S3anb  ift  einen  3^11  breit;  e^  foftet  ^tt)ei  (two)  ©rof^en  unb 
fec^^  (six)  Pfennige  bie  ^lle.  16.  33or  einem  Sci^re  (a  year 
ago)  maren  mx  in  3)eutf^lanb.  17.  3d^  mitnfc^e  ein  Quart 
WIM),  ein  5^funb  Z^ct  unb  ein  2)ugenb  Sier. 


Vocabulary. 


2>Cr  ^^atcr,  — §,  pZ.  — ,  dollar. 

©rofc^cn,  — ^,pL  — ,  groschen. 

pfennig,  — id,  pi.  — e,  pfennig. 

5uf3,— e^;/>^.  p^e,foot. 

3oII,  — e§,  ;)Z.  — e,  inch. 

^0(^en,  — Q,pL  — ,  sheet. 

®ct;u^,  — t^,pl.  — e,  shoe. 

§anbfd;nb,  — c§,  joZ.  — e,  glove. 

@tiefe(,  — g,  />/.  — ,  boot. 

^antof'fel,— 3,/>/.  — n,  slipper. 

^affec,— §,/j/.  — ,  coffee. 

S()CC,  — §,  ijZ.  — ,  tea. 

3u(fer,  — g,  sugar. 

9^ei6,  —eg,  rice. 
Dber,  or. 
33eja^ren,  to  pay. 
SBiinic^cn,  to  wish,  desire. 
@rDf3,  large,  tall. 


'^it  etie,  — ,  pi.  — n,  yard,  ell. 

„    Saffe,  — ,  p/.  — 11,  cup,  cup  and 
saucer. 

„     3«ird),  — ,  milk. 
l)aS  3a^r,  —t^,pl.  — c,  year. 

„    S)u^enb,  — cS,  /?/.  — e,  dozen. 

„    ei,— c§,y.  — er,egg. 

„    ^ar ,  —eg ,  pi.  — c,  pair. 

rf     9?ic§,  — c§,  ream. 

r,     S3ud;,—e6,  quire. 

„    ^fimb,  — e§,  ;>Z.  — e,  pound. 

t,     ©tilcf,  — cg,^)/.  — e,  piece. 

„    ©lag,  —t^,pl.  ©(cifer,  glass. 

„     SBaff  cr,  —^,pl.  —,  water. 

„    Ouart,  —eg,  />/.  — e,  quart. 
S3reit,  broad,  wide. 
Sang,  long. 
%\z\,  deep. 


Grammatical. 
1.  The  Indefinite  Article  ctn,<3^  or  «^n,is  declined  thus: 


MASCULINE. 

(A  man.) 
Norn,  ein       SJiann. 
Gen.  ein'se^  9Jianne8. 
Dat.  etn'^cm  SD^anne. 
Ace.  ein'^cn  3)iann. 


FEMININE.  NEUTER. 

(A  woman.)  (A  child.) 

Cttt'-C   f^rau.  cin        ^inb. 

ein'^cr  %xau,  etn'«e^  ^inbeS. 

ein'*cr  ?^rau.  ein'^cm  tinbc. 

ein'^c    ^rau.  ein        ^tnb. 
Rew..  The  Indefinite  Article  takes  the  gender  and  case  of  the  noun  with 
which  it  is  employed. 


THE   INDEFINITE    ARTICLE.  53 

2.  The  following  Idioms  are  used  with  nouns  of  weighty 

measure,  quantity,  and  Jt>/•^6•^  : 

1.  Nouns  of  weight,  measure,  and  qitajititj/  are  in  apposition  with  the 
nouns  they  limit.     Those  in  the  feminine  gender  alone  take  the  pi.  form^ 
the  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  retaining  the  singular  fonn  in  the  plural. 
®r  !aufte  ein  ^^funb  3wder  unb  ymzx    lie  bought  a  pound  of  sugar  and 

^Unb  Xl^ec,  two  pounds  of  tea. 

®ic  faufte  mir  cine  (SHc  Xud^  unb    She  bought  only  one  yard  of  clotli, 
nid^t  gmci  ©Ucn  2:utf>,  and  not  two  yards  of  cloth. 

2.  Verbs  and  adjectives  indicating  weight,  measure,  quantity,  and  price 
require  the  noun  expressing  the  weight,  etc.,  to  be  in  the  accusative  case-. 
e«  tvic^t  ein  ^^funb,  It  weighs  a  pound. 

©8  foftet  Cincn  Xbalcr,  It  costs  a  dollar. 

2)a8  aBaffer  i[t  cinCH  ^u§  ticf,  The  water  is  a  foot  deep. 

3.  Nouns  expressing  the  quantity,  following  nouns  expressing  price,  are 
preceded  by  the  dejinite  article  : 

©8  toftct  einen  Zhakx  ha^  ^funb,       It  costs  a  dollar  o  pound. 
(S9  tcftct  eincn  Z^ahx  bit  (^Ut,  It  costs  a  dollar  a  yard. 

3.  Prussian  Money  is  the  standard  in  North  and  Central 
Germany. 

1  X^akr  =  30  ©rofc^en  =  360  $fcnmgc=73    cents  in  gold. 
1  @rofcl)en—   12  $fenntge=  2-^  cents  in  gold. 
1 'J^fennig  =    \  of  a  cent. 

Rem.  Foreign  Exchange  to  all  Germany  is  usually  made  in  Prussian  thlrs. 

Exercise  32. 
1.  Have  you  a  pencil?  2.  There  is  a  pencil  on  the 
table.  3.  William  bought  a  pair  of  shoes  and  a  pair  of 
slippers.  4.  The  cook  will  go  and  get  (j)oIcn)  a  dozen 
eggs,  a  pound  of  sugar,  and  a  quart  of  milk,  and  a  pound 
of  rice.  5.  The  book  will  cost  a  dollar  and  twenty 
(jmanjig)  groschens.  6.  William  wishes  a  glass  of  wa- 
ter. 7.  Do  you  wish  a  cup  of  tea  or  a  cup  of  coffee  ? 
8. 1  wish  a  cup  of  coffee.  9.  The  cloth  is  a  yard  wide. 
10.  It  costs  a  dollar  a  yard.  11. 1  paid  a  dollar  and  ten 
(^ebn)  groschens  for  the  book.  12.  The  ribbon  is  a  yard 
long  and  an  inch  wide.  13.  It  cost  ten  groschens  a  yard. 
14.  The  tea  cost  a  dollar  a  pound.  15.  Have  you  a 
sheet  of  paper?     16.  He  has  a  ream  of  paper. 


54  CARDINAL   NUMBERS. 

LESSON  XVII. 

CARDINAL   NUMBERS. 

^te  ^trd^e  ^at  ^wd  X^nxmt,  The  church  has  two  towers. 
Der  3ager  ^at  mer  $unt)e,  The  hunter  has  four  dogs. 
2)er  ^0^  ^at  fe^^  ^^funb  fRd^  The  cook  got  six  pounds  of 

unt>  ac^t  $funb  3«^^^  9^=^       J'ice  and  eight  pounds  of 

l^olt,  sugar. 

Raxl  ift  »ieqe^n  ^a^xt  alt,  Charles  is  fourteen  years 

old. 
§err  Dietrtc^  ift  f)eute  merunb^  Mr.  Dietrich  is  to-day  sixty- 

fec^^ig  3a^re  att,  four  years  old. 

3m  3ci^re  a^t^e^nf)unbert  mer^   In  the  year  eighteen  hun- 

unbfec^gig  war  |)err  $rofeffor      dred  and  sixty-four  Pro- 

^ef)r  in  Deutfd)lanb,  fessor  Behr  was  in  Ger- 

many. 

2)rciunbbrcipgftc  ^ufpk* 

1.  ^crr  Sy^e^er  ^at  brei  ^dufer  in  @ot^a  gefauft  2.T)a(> 
Xu^  ift  erne  (5 He  brett  unb  neun  ^Uen  lang*  3.  2)er  ^o^  ^at 
^wei  Du^enb  Sier,  fiinf  $funb  Qudtx  unb  jteben  ^funb  3^et6  ge== 
^oh.  4.  3)a0  ^ud)  foftet  ac^t  ^^aler  unb  fiinfunb^ujan^ig 
^rofc^en.  5.  3cl)  \)aht  fitr  bae  ^anb  fiinfunbjtt)anjtg  ©rof^en 
unb  fec^^  ^fennige  hqa^t  6.  ^einric^  ift  mx  gup  unb  elf 
Soil  grop.  7,  Die  ^riidfe  ijl  yierunbad^tjtg  5ug  lang.  8.  Der 
X^urm  be^  Dome^  ^it  (at)  ^D^agbeburg  ijl  brei^unbert  unb  breiptg 
gup  ^o(^.  9.  T)tx  X^urm  be^  3)ome^  p  SGten  ijl  merl)unbert 
fe^^unbbreipig  gug  \)o6^.  10.  3)ie  33tbltot()e!  ^u  33erlin  ^at 
fec^^^unbert  unb  fiinf jtg  taufenb  33iic^er.  1 1 .  53erlin  ^at  iiber  jie^ 
ben^unbert  taufenb  dinm^ntx  (inhahitants).  12.  !Dre^ben  ^at 
bunbert  unb  ijierjtg  taufenb  Sinwo^ner.  13.  S[)?agbeburg  ^at  neun^ 
gtgtaufenb  (Stnmc^ner.  14.  3m  3a^re  a^t^el)n^unbert  (or  tm 
3a^re  eintaufenb  ac^t^unbert)  breiunbfei^^tg  m^nttn  §err  gneb== 
lanb  unb  ^err  2Bolf  in  |)eibelberg.  15.  ^err  ^raun  war  geftern 
ad^tunbfitnfaig  3al)re  alt  (old). 


CARDINAL   NUMBERS. 


55 


Grammatical. 
1.  The  Cardinal  Numbers  are  formed  as  follows  : 


1.  (gins. 

2.  3tt>ct. 

3.  !J)rci. 

4.  25tcr. 

5.  Sanf, 

6.  ®cc^8. 

7.  (Sicbcn. 

8.  %6)t, 

9.  g^cun. 

10.  3c^n. 

11.  (Slf. 

12.  3»6If. 

13.  2)rctjc^n. 

14.  ^icrje^n. 

15.  pnfjcbn. 

16.  ®ed^«je^n. 

17.  ©icbcnjc^n  or  ©ieBjc^n. 

18.  mdnscbn. 

19.  ^^eunjc^n. 

20.  B»«njtg. 

21.  ©inuntsmanjig. 

22.  3tt3eiunbjtt)aniitg,  etc. 

30.  2)rei^tg. 

31.  (Sinunbbrei^ig,  etc. 


40.  SSierjig. 

50.  gilnfjig. 

60.  ©cci^jtg. 

70.  ®tebcnjtg  or  ©icbjtg. 

80.  Slt^tgig. 

90.  ^^eunjig. 

100.  §iinbcrt. 

101.  §unbcrt  unb  cms. 
110.  §iiiibert  unb  gc^n. 

120.  .t>unbcrt  unb  jttjanjtg. 

121.  ^unbert  einunb;;tt)an5ig. 
125.  §unbcrt  fuufunbjmanjig. 
136.  §unbert  fed^sunbbrei^ig. 
150.  §unbert  unb  filnfjig. 
200.  3n3ei{>unbcrt. 

225.  3n)eil?unbert  filnfunbjwanjtg 

500.  giinff^unbcrt. 
1,000.  ©tntaufcnb. 
1,005.  (Sintaufcnb  unb  fiinf. 
1,025.  (Sintaufcnb  filnfunbjnjanjig. 
1,500.  etntaufcnb  fiinf bunbert. 
2,000.  3roeitaujcnb» 
20,000.  3^anjigtaufenb. 


200,000.  3^ci^unbcrt  taufcnb. 
1869.  ^^Id^tje^n^unbcrt  unb  neununbfed?5tg, 

(or)  eintaufenb  ac^t^unbert  neununbfcc^jig. 

2.  When  used  with  a  noun,  and  not  preceded  by  a 
definite  article,  6in,  one  is  declined  like  the  indefinite 
article  {see  Less.  XVI.). 

Rein.  1.  The  numeral  tin  takes  a  stronger  emphasis  than  is  given  to  the  In- 
definite article. 

Rem.  2.  The  indefinite  article  b  in  fact  only  a  modification  in  signification 
and  use  of  the  numeral  Cttl, 
Rem.  3.  The  form  Cill^  is  used  in  counting  and  in  multiplying : 
StnS,  ymd,  brei,  tier,  etc.,  One,  two,  three,  four,  etc. 
Sinmal  SinS  ift  (SinS,         Once  one  is  one. 

3.  The  Cardinal  Numbers  are  usually  undeclined. 

Rem.  This  is  especially  the  case  when  they  are  joined  to  nouns  and  art 
preceded  by  prepositions. 

©r  ^at  jcbn  53ogen  !}3a^ier,    He  has  ten  sheets  of  paper. 
SKit  ge^n  ^ogen  ^o^ier,         With  ten  sheets  of  paper. 


56  CARDINAL   NUMBERS. 

4.  Single  words  are  usually  formed  of  units  and  tens^ 
of  midtijples  of  a  Mtndred,  and  of  multi/ples  of  a  thousand 
up  to  a  hundred  thousand. 

23ierunbsn3anjtg,         Twenty-four. 

5ld;t^unbert,  Eight  hundred, 

2[d;tje^n^unbert,         Eighteen  hundred. 

Slc^tjicjtaujenb,  Eighty  thousand. 

§unberttaufenb,         A  hundred  thousand. 

SBier^unbert  taufenb,   Four  hundred  thousand. 
Rem,  1.  Some  writers  put  no  divisions  between  numbers : 

(Stntaufenbad}t^unbertunbfe(^§unbjtt)anjig(l826). 
Rem.  2.  @in,  one{a)  is  not  used  before  ](|UnbCrt  and  tflUfCUb* 

2)a«  SSuc^  ^at  ^unbert  (Seiten,    The  book  has  a  hundred  pages. 

5.  i3ni  3(J5^^C  is  inserted  before  the  number  of  the  year. 
3nt  ^aijxt  1868  ii?ar  er  in  tijln,    In  1868  he  was  in  Cologne. 

6.  The  ic  is  short  in  ticrjel^n  and  Dierjtg^ 

Exercise  34. 
1.  The  cook  has  bought  two  pounds  of  sugar  and  six 
pounds  of  rice.  2.  Mr.  Friedland  paid  fifteen  dollars 
for  the  books.  S.William  is  five  feet  and  seven  inches 
high.  4.  The  tower  of  the  Cathedral  at  Strasburg  is 
four  hundred  and  thirty-six  feet  high.  5.  The  two  low- 
ers of  the  Cathedral  at  Munich  are  three  hundred  and 
thirty-six  feet  high.  6.  The  bridge  on  the  Elbe,  in  Dres- 
den, is  one  thousand  six  hundred  and  fifty  feet  long  and 
fifty  feet  wide.  7.  The  castle  ((3d)lof)  in  Berlin  is  six 
hundred  and  twenty-six  feet  long,  three  hundred  and 
seventy-three  feet  wide,  and  a  hundred  and  one  feet 
high.  8.  It  has  six  hundred  rooms.  9.  Bremen  has  sev- 
enty-eight  thousand  inhabitants  (@intt)ol^ner).  10.  Ham- 
burg has  a  hundred  and  ninety-six  thousand  inhabit- 
ants. IL  The  Library  at  Munich  is  two  hundred  and 
fifty  feet  long  and  eighty-five  feet  high.  12.  It  has  eight 
hundred  and  fifteen  thousand  books.  13.  In  1865  (im 
3<l^te,  etc.)  Mr.  Kohner  was  in  Germany. 


OLD   DECLENSION   OP   ADJECTIVES.  57 


LESSON  XVIII. 

ADJECTIVES   USED   PREDICATIVELY   AND   ATTRIBUTTVELT, 
OLD   DECLENSION   OF   ADJECTIVES. 

t)a^  ^u^  ifl  fel)r  fein,  The  cloth  is  very  fine. 

^Siinfc^en  ©ie  fcine^  Xu^  ?       Do  you  wish  fine  cloth  ? 

3^  \)aht  jn?ei  neue  ^uct)er,         I  have  two  new  books. 

Xtx  Xifc^Ier  ^ai  ben  Xifc^  mit  The  cabinet-maker  has  cov< 
griinem  Seber  bebecft,  ered  the  table  with  green 

leather. 

^abcn  2)k  bcutfd^e  53ud^er  ?       Have   you   (any)   German 

books  ? 

3a,  tt)ir  \)cihcn  beutfc^e,  englifc^e,  Yes,  we  have  German,  En- 
franjofifc()C,  italidnifd^e,  lattu  glish,French,Italian,Lat- 
mfd)e  unb  griec^ifc^e  33u(^er,       in,  and  Greek  books. 

giinfunbbrci^igftc  Wufgabc^ 

1,  Da^  2Baf[er  ifl  fait.  2.  SCunfc^en  eie  falter  Staffer? 
3.  3c3^  miinf^e  ttjarme^  2GajTer.  4.  2)er  ^oc^  \)at  etnen  Rvn^ 
»oU  f)ei§en  SGaffer^  (gen.).  5.  Der  53uc^binber  ])at  bae  ^u^  mit 
rot()em  ?et>er  gebunben.  6.  Der  Sd^neiter  bat  ben  ^od  mit 
fc^warjem  Xuc^e  gefuttert.  7.  ^atbarina  i)at  im  ©arten  jmci 
tt)eige  unb  brei  rotbe  9^ofen  gepfliirft.  8.  grdulein  $i(bebranbt 
bat  geftern  ^2lbenb  jmei  fc^one  beutfd)e  ?ieber  gefungen.  9.  ^er^ 
lin  unb  2Bien  jtnb  groge  unb  fd)!Jne  8tdbte.  10.  $err^)rofef^ 
for  Sber^arb  \)ai  beute  ^n?et  ttaltenif^e  unb  ttier  fpanifc^e  53u(^er 
gefauft.  11.  SBunfc^en  Ste  graue^  ober  griine^  Xuc^?  12. 
3^  tt>unfc^e  braune^.  13.  Sebrreic^e  53iic^cr  jtnb  gua^eilen  fcbr 
langweilig.  14.  'Dcx  Dom  p  SD'Jun^en  bat  groci  b^b^  Xburme, 
15.  Berlin  f)at  breite  ®tra§en.  16.^raunfc^n?eig  (Brunswick) 
^at  enge,  frumme  ^tra§en.  17.  2)ie  ^dufer  in  33raunfc^n?eig 
l^aben  fteilc  Ddd^er.  18.  Da^  §au^  iji  grog  unb  bequem,  abcr 
e^  ijl  p  tbeuer.  19  Der  <Sattler  lj)at  fc^warje^,  gelbc^  unb 
braune^  Sebcr  gefauft. 

C2 


58 


OLD    DECLENSION   OF   ADJECTIVES. 


Vocabulary. 


2)eutf(i?  (?er;  *c,  *e8),  German. 
(Sngltfc^  (*er,  *e,  *e«),  English, 
granjb'fifd;  (^er,  *e,  =eg),  French. 
^oUdnbifd;  (^er,  *e,  ^e^),  Dutch. 
Italia  nifd;  (*er,  *e,  *eS),  Italian, 
©panifd;  (*er,  *e*,  *C8),  Spanish. 
Se^rreid;  (*er,  ==e,  *eg),  instructive, 
glei^tg  (*er,  *e,  *c8J,  industrious, 
^equem'  (*cr,  *c,  *c«),  convenient. 
^oftbar  (^er,  ^c,  ^es),  costly. 
®ut  (*er,  ^c,  *c§),  good. 
®rau  (*er,  *e,  ==eg),  gray. 
^o{)  (*cr,  *C,-eg),  high  (§  89,  Rem.  9\ 
@ng  (=er,  *e,  *eg),  narrow. 
Srumm  (*er,  ^c,  *e§),  crooked, 
^ein  (*er,  ^e,  *eg),  fine. 
@rob  (*er,  =»c,  *e8),  coarse. 


SSeig  (*er,  :=c,  eS),  white. 

©c^toarj  (*er,  *e,  ^es),  black. 

9iot^  (*er,  ^e,  ^e§),  red. 

53ku(*er,  *e,  =e8),  blue. 

@elb  (*er,  =e,  *e§),  yellow. 

©riin  (*er,  *e,  *e«),  green. 

53raun  (scr,  =e,  ==e§),  brown. 

%tx  trug,— e8,jo/.  trilgc,  thepitchef 

„    ©attier,  — 8,jo/.  — ,  the  saddler. 
%Xt  9?ofc,  — ,pl.  — n,  the  rose. 

„    @tra^e,  — ,pl.  — n,  the  street. 
2)a^  gutter,  —%,pl.  —,  the  lining. 

„    Seber,  — §.  pi.  — ,  the  leather. 

„    SBaffer,  — ^,pl  — ,  the  water. 
^ebccE'en,  to  cover. 
^uttern,  to  line, 
^flilcf en,  to  pluck,  pick. 


Grammatical. 

1.  Adjectives,  when  used  to  complete  the  statement 
or  predication  of  fcin,  tocrbCH,  and  some  other  intransi- 
tive verbs,  are  said  to  be  M^edi  predieatively  : 

2)aS  SBctter  tft  ^Ci^,  The  weather  is  hot. 

2)a§  SSetter  toirb  ^Ci^,  The  weather  is  becoming  hot. 

Rem.  1.  When  thus  used,  they  are  frequently  tQriu&di  predicative  acpectives. 
Rem.  2.  Adjectives  used  predicatively  are  indeclinable. 

2.  Adjectives,  when  used  before  nouns  to  directly 
modify  them,  are  said  to  be  used  attributively. 

Rem,  When  thus  used,  they  are  frequently  termed  attributive  adjectives. 

3.  Adjectives  used  attributively,  and  not  preceded  by 
other  qualifying  words,  are  declined  as  follows  : 


SINGULAR. 

Masculine. 

Feminine, 

Neuter. 

(Good  man.) 

(Good  woman.) 

(Good  child.) 

Norn 

gut  =  Cr    Tlam. 

gut  ?  e     %xan. 

gut  =  eg    ^tnb. 

Gen. 

gut^Ctt  2J?anncS. 

gut^'CI?  i!rau. 

gut^cn  tinbe« 

Dat. 

gut* cm  Tlamt. 

gutter  ^rau. 

g  u  t  *  cm  ^inbe. 

Ace. 

gut^cn  2«ann. 

gut=»c    i5r.u. 

gut*c8  ^nb- 

OLD    DECLENSION    OF   ADJECTIVES.  69 


PLURAL. 


Norn,  g  u  t  *  c    3Kanncr. 
Gen.  g  u  t  *  cr  2J?anncr. 
Dat.  g  u  t  *  cn  2)iannern. 
Ace.  autsc    2J2anner. 


g  u  t » c  5^nbcr, 

gutter  itiubcr. 

gut*cii  ^nbcm. 

g  u  t  *  c  ^nbcr. 


g  u  t  *  c  ^''"^uen. 
gut'^cr  i^raucn. 
gut^Ctt  graucn. 
g  u  t  *  c  i^rauen. 
Ref/i.  The  plural  of  the  adjective  is  the  same  for  all  genders. 

4.  Adjectives  declined  as  above  are  said  to  be  of  the 
Old  Declension. 

5.  The  same  termination  is  given  to  the  adjective 
when  the  noun  is  understood  as  when  it  is  expressed : 

(Sr  ^at  Uant^  ^a^icr  unb         He  has  blue  paper  and 
ic^  l^abe  ttlCi^C^  (^a^Jtcr),  I  have  white  (paper). 

6.  In  German,  proper  adjectives  formed  from  names 
of  countries  do  not  begin  with  capital  letters : 

$aben  ®ie  beutfc^c  33iic^er  ?  Have  you  German  books? 

Rem,  \ .  Titular  epithets,  however,  usually  begin  with  capitals : 

2)er  ^fiorbbeutfd^c  33unb,  The  North  German  Confederation. 

Rjem.  2.  Proper  adjectives  formed  from  names  of  cities  or  of  persons  begin 
with  capital  letters : 

2)ie  ^clnifd;c  3<^tun3f  The  Cologne  Gazette. 

2)ic  ^antjcVe  ^(;ilofoi)^ie',  Kant's  Philosophy. 

Exercise  36. 
1.  Professor  Lindemann  has  two  Italian   and  three 
French  newspapers.     2.  Have  you  (any)  Dutch  books  ? 

3.  No,  but  we  have  German,  French,  and  Spanish  books. 

4.  Mr.  Meyerheim  has  laid  two  beautiful  and  expensive 
books  on  the  table.  5.  The  saddler  has  been  buying 
yellow  and  black  leather.  6.  The  bookbinder  has  not 
bound  the  books  with  green  leather.  7.  He  has  bound 
the  books  with  red  leather.  8.  The  tailor  will  line 
the  coat  with  brown  cloth.  9.  The  child  has  picked 
three  white  roses.  10.  Costly  books  are  sometimes  not 
very  instructive.  11.  The  Cathedral  at  Cologne  will 
have  two  very  high  towers.  12.  They  will  be  four  hun- 
dred and  seventy-six  feet  high.  13.  Mr.  Rieger  bought 
two  large  and  beautiful  paintings.  14.  He  paid  for  the 
paintings  eight  hundred  and  ninety  dollars. 


60  POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS. 

LESSON  XIX, 

POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS. 

S^ein  ^ruber  ^at  mm  53u(^,  My  brother  has  my  book. 

2Ber  ^at  meinen  ^(eiftift  ?  Who  has  my  pencil  ? 

3o^ann  ^at  3^ren  ^leifttft,  John  has  your  pencil. 

Wldn  33ruber  ^at  fetne  ^iii^er,  My  brother  has  his  booka 

SBo  finb  betne  ^U($er  ?  Where  are  your  books  ? 
2Go  fmb  eure  33uc^er  ?  „       „      „         „ 

2Bofmb3()re53ucl)er?  „       „      „ 

®{e  ^aben  i^re  ^iic^er,  They  have  their  books. 

8ie  i)at  i^re  33uc^er,  She  has  her  books. 

dx  ^ai  feine  ^itc^er,  He  has  his  books. 

2Bir  \)abin  unfere  53uc^er,  We  have  our  books. 

SicBenunhbrct^igfte  ^titfpk. 

1.  2Ba0  fuc^en  @te?  2.  3c^  Me  nteine  53itc^er.  3.  S^em 
SSater  ift  nic^t  ju  ^aufe.  4.  9)^ein  @ro§»ater  ^at  memem  ^ru^ 
ber  em  53uc^  gef^enft  5,  ^err  Dte^,  feine  gran  unb  feine 
Xod^ter  ^at^arina  ftnb  f)eute  in  9>ot^bam,  6.  2)fJein  SBetter  l^al 
tjorgeftern  feine  ^Itern  in  3ena  befud)t»  7,  ^axl,  \)afi  bu  bei^ 
nen  33Ieiflift  gefunben  ?  8,  ^inber,  |)abt  i^r  eure  5lufgaben  t)oIl^ 
enbet  ?  9.  Die  @d)it(er  {)aben  if)re  ?eftionen  fe^r  gut  gelernt 
10«  9i)^arie  ^t  gefagt,bag  fte  il^re  Xante  ^eute  tt)a{)rf(|einlic^  be^ 
fu^en  mx'o.  11,  |)aben  ®ie  meinen  53ruber  l^eute  gefe^en? 
12.  3a,  ic^  fa^  3^ren  33ruber  f)eute  Sl^^orgen  im  SD^ufeum.  13* 
(Be^en  ®ie  nic^t  ben  X^urm  be^  2)ome^  ?  14.  5ld^  ja,  ic^  fel^e 
i^n!  15.  ^aben  ^k  bie  9lad)nc^ten  l^eute  S^orgen  gelefen? 
16.  3a,  i(^  M  fte  in  3^rer  Seitung.  17.  5Ba^  lefen  (Sie  ?  18. 
3c^  lefe  bie  ©ef^ic^te  Deutfd)lanb^.  19.  Tldn  £)^eim  i)ai  mei^ 
ner  (Sd^mefter  ba^  ^u^  gegeben.  20.  |)err  S^^ieme^er  ^at  mix 
geftern  5lbenb  gefagt,  ba§  er  i^orgeftern  meinen  ®ro5»ater  unb 
meine  ©ro^mutter  in  SD^agbeburg  gefe()en  ^at.  21»  SD'leine  ^U 
tern  finb  beute  in  SD^agbebur^. 


POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS. 


61 


Vocabulary. 
^Cr2J?ann,— cg,;j/.3Wanncr,theinan,  2)iC  ^xau,  —,  pi.  —en,  the  woman, 


the  husband 

„   SSater,  —§,;>/.  33ater,  the  father. 

u   ®of;n,  — i?>,pl.  @i5f;nc,  the  son. 

„   S3ruber,  — §,  ;>/.  33rubcr,  brother. 

„    O^etm,  — §,/;/.  — e,  the  uncle. 

„   ^Setter,  — ^,pl.  — n,  the  cousin. 

r   9^effc,  — n,  pi  — n,  the  nephew. 

,t    ©ro^Dater,  the  grandfather. 

„   Urgro^toater,  the    great-grandfa- 
ther. 

„    6ntc(,  —§,pl.  —,  the  grandson. 
3)iC  ©(tern,  the  parents  (has  no  sine/.)- 
2)Cr  @c^n?iegeri?ater,  father-in-law. 

„   ®c^h)iegerfo^n,  son-in-law. 

„   ®(^tt)ager,  —3,  pi.    @d;tr>agcr, 
brother-in-law. 

„   ©ttcftoater,  stepfather. 

„   ®tieffo{)n,  stepson. 

Present  Injinitive. 
gcfi'*  en,  to  give, 
\t\''  en,  to  read, 


wife. 

aJJuttcr, —,;>/.  abutter,  mother. 

%Q6.)izx,—,pl.  Xoc^ter,  daughter. 

@d;njefter,  —,pl.  — n,  the  sister. 

2;antc,  — ,  pi.  — n,  the  aunt. 

(Soufi'ne,  —,pl.  — n,  the  cousin. 

Silx&iit,  —,pl.  — n,  the  niece. 

©ro^muttcr,  the  grandmother. 

Urgro^muttcr,  the  great -ijrand' 
mother. 

©ntelin  —,pl.  — nen,  the  grand- 
daughter. 

®d;tr>tegermutter,  mother-in-law. 

@c^tt>iegcrtod;ter,  daughter-in-law 

®d;tx>agerin,  — ,  pi.  —nen,  sister- 
in-law. 

©tiefmutter,  stepmother. 

@tieftod;ter,  stepdaughter. 


!c^'*en,  to  see, 


Imperfect  Indicative. 

gad,  gave, 

fa  § ,  read, 

fa^,saw, 


Perfect  Participle. 
ge*0Cb'*  en,     given. 
ge^Ief^en,  read, 
ge  *  j  c  ^  '*  en,  seen. 


Grammatical. 
1.  The  following  are  the  Possessive  Pronouns  : 


Masc. 

mein, 

bein, 

fein, 

i^r, 

fein. 


Fein. 
mcin^c, 
bein*e, 
fetn^e, 
i^r-e, 
fein*e. 


Neut. 

mein, 

betn, 

fein, 

i^r, 

fein. 


my. 
thy. 
his. 
her. 
its. 


Masc. 
unfer, 
cuer, 
\hx, 


Fern. 
unfer*e, 
eur*e, 
it;r*c. 


Neut. 
unfer, 
euer, 
i^r. 


our. 
your, 
their, 
your.) 


2.  The  Possessive  Pronoun  mcilt,  'yny,  is  declined  ofis 
follows : 


Masculine. 
(My  brother.) 

Norn,  mein       Sruber, 
Gen.  mtxvi'ti   SBruberS. 
Dat.  mcin^cm  33ruber. 
Ace.   mciUsCU   SSruber. 


SINGULAR. 

Feminine. 

(My  sister.) 

mctn^c  ©djwefler. 
mcin^cr  ©d^mefter. 
mcin^cr  Sd^trcfier. 
mcinsC   (Sdbnjcficr. 


Neuter. 
(My  book.) 

mctn      93u^. 
mcin=c§  S8uc^e«. 
tncin=cm  S3u(i^e. 
mein      S3uc&. 


62 


POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS. 


Norn.  mcin=C    SSrilber. 
Gen.  nictn=cr  ^riiber. 
Dat.   mcin^cn  SSriibern. 
Ace.   vxtxW't    33ruber, 


PLUEAL. 

mcin=C    @d;ti?eftern. 


mcin=cr  SSitc^er 
tttein=cn  53ilc^em 
mcitt^c    ^iic^er. 


nictn=cr  ®d?n)eftern. 
ittCin^cn  ©c^meftern. 
mcillsC    ®cl;tt)eftern. 
Rem.  The  plural  is  the  same  for  all  genders. 

3.  Possessive  Pronouns  are  declined  like  mctll* 

Rem.  1.  In  declining  ViVi\tXf  t  is  sometimes  dropped  from  the  terminations 

cti,  '-m,  =cn. 

Rem.  2.  In  declining  CUCt,  the  t  after  tU  is  usually  dropped. 


SINGULAR.  PLUEAL. 

Norn,  unfer,     unfere,    unfer ;       unferc. 
Gen.  unferg,  unferen,  unferg  ;     unjercr. 
Bat.  unferm,  unfercr,  unjcrm ;    unjern. 
Ace.   unjcrn,  unfcre,    unjer;       unfere. 

Rein.  The  same  laws  that  govern  the  use  of  bU  and  tl^t  (see  Lesson  XL) 
govern  the  use  of  their  derivatives  bcill  and  tUtX* 

4.  The  Indicative  Mode  of  gcbcn,  to  give : 

Imperfect  Tense, 


BINGULAE.         PLUEAL. 

euer,     eure,    euer;  cure, 

eureg,   curer,  eureS;  eurcr. 

eurem,  curer,  curent;  curen. 

eurcn,  cure,    euer;  cure. 


I  gave, 
thou  gavest. 
he  gave, 
we  gave, 
you  gave, 
they  gave. 


Present  Tense. 
ict>  gCtl'sC,  I  give, 
bu    gibft,  thou  givest. 

er    %\\sif  he     gives. 

h)tr  gcfe'»=Ctt,  we  give, 
i^r  gcb'st,  you  give, 
fie   g  C  b  '^  en,  they  give. 

Perfect  Tense. 

\&i  l^ak  gegeb'cn^eic, 

I  have  given,  etc. 

First  Future  Tense. 

\^  tucrbc  9cb'cn,eic., 

I  shall  give,  etc. 

5.  The  Present  Tenses  of  Icfen,  to  read,  and  of  fel^CK,  to 

see : 


bu  gob  ft 
er   ^^\s, 
tctr  g  a  b  %  en, 
t^r  g  a  b  %  t, 
fie  gab'* en, 

Pluperfect  Tense. 

id)  ^atte  gegcb'en,  etc., 

I  had  given,  e?c. 

Second  Future  Tense. 

tc^  tocrbe  ocgeb'en  ^aben,e<c., 

I  shall  have  given,  etc. 


Uyc  e,       I       read, 
liefeft,       thou  readest. 
lieft,  he     reads. 

let'*  en,  we  read. 
1  e  f  *  tf  you  read, 
tef'^en,  they  read. 


bu 
er 
totr 
it;r 
fie 

Rem.  The  compound  tenses  of  lefen  and  fe^^en  are  formed  in  the  sam« 
manner  as  those  of  geben« 

^^  ^abc  gelcfcn,  etc.    3d^  \^a^t  gefe^en,  etc. 


ic^  fe^'=e,  I       see. 

bu  \\t\)\\,  thou  seest. 

er  fie^t,  he     sees. 

XOXX  StY'VXf  we     see. 

t^r  feV^t,  you  see. 

fie  j  e  V^  tn,  they  see. 


NEW   DECLENSION   OP   ADJECTIVES.  68 

Exercise  38. 

1.  Have  you  seen  my  gloves?  2.  Yes,  your  gloves 
are  on  the  table.  3.  The  child  sees  its  father  and  its 
mother.  4.  Have  you  read  the  letter  from  your  uncle 
in  Bonn  ?  5.  I  have  not  read  it  yet.  6.  Our  teacher 
says  that  we  have  learned  our  lessons  very  well.  7. 
John,  hast  thou  finished  thy  exercise?  8.  Children, 
have  you  found  your  books  ?  9.  The  news  {j>l.)  from 
America  in  your  newspaper  is  very  interesting.  10. 
William  Meyer  says  that  his  parents  are  now  in  Dres- 
den. 11.  Henry  Rauh  says  that  his  aunt  is  very  sick. 
12.  John  Meyer  says  that  his  uncle  has  sold  his  house 
and  his  garden.  13.  My  sister  has  not  yet  read  the 
book.  14.  My  father  gave  me  {dat.)  the  book.  15.  The 
tailor  has  mended  my  coat.  16.  William  is  visiting  his 
great-grandfather.  17.  Miss  Weigand  is  my  cousin.  18. 
Mr.  liichter  is  my  brother-in-law. 


LESSON  XX. 

NEW   DECLENSION   OP   ADJECTIVES. 

!iDcr  grogc  Xif^  ijl  in  bent  gro^  The  large  table  is  in  the 

Jen  Bintmer,  large  room. 

1)\t  teutfc^e  iSprac^e  ijl  mirllic^  The  German  language  is 

fe^r  fd^roierig,  really  very  difficult. 

3^  legte  ba^  groge  33uc^  auf  I  laid  the  large  book  on 

ben  grofen  Xifd^,  the  large  table. 

!Die  beutfc^en  ^u(^er  jtnb  auf  The  German  books  are  on 

ben  gropen  Xif^en,  the  large  tables. 

91cununbbrcigigftc  ^ufgal^e* 

1.  t)\t  ^lu^fprac^e  ber  beutfc^en  (Sprac^e  ifl  fe()r  frafti^oU, 
aber  jic  ifl  ni^t  fe()r  njeic^.  2.  2Bem  9cf)oren  biefe  neucn  33u^ 
Acr?    3. 6ie  gc^oren  jenem  reic^cn  ^aufmanne.    4.  9lic^t  atlc 


64 


NEW   DECLENSION   OF   ADJECTIVES. 


te^rretc^en  55u^er  ftnb  intereffaitt.  5.  5^{^t  jebee  53u(^  tj^  le^r^ 
reic^,  6.  |)err  ©c^auer  n)o(;nt  in  jenem  gro§en  $aufe  gegen^ 
uber  bem  ^mtn  2^ufeum,  7*  S5or  einigen  Xagen  (some  days 
ago)  ^abe  tc^  einige  beutf^e  unb  fran^ofifc^e  33u^er  in  ^eip^ig 
gefauft  8.  |)err  ^rofeffor  ©c^auer  ^at  i)iele  italtemfcl)e  53ud)er 
in  feiner  33ibUot{)ef.  9.  3ener  fc^n)ar3e  Ueberrorf  ift  p  grog 
fur  mi^.  10.  Diefe  amerifanifd^en  ©ummifc^u^e  fofteten  brei 
Z\)aUx.  11.  Die  garben  ber  preufifc^en  ga^ne  ftnb  fc^marj 
unb  tt?eig.  12.  3)ie  garben  ber  amerifanifd^en  5a()ne  ftnb  rot^, 
tt)eig  unb  bku.  13.  Die  5lrmee  be^  5^orbbeutfc^en  ^unbe^  f)at 
jte^t  ac^t^unbert  taufenb  ©olbaten.  14.  3n  n^elc^en  ^taWn 
Deutfc^lanb^  maren  8ie?  15.  3Bir  waren  in  mebreren  grofen 
©tabten,  befonber^  in  S3er(in,  Dre^ben,  2Bien,  2}^iinc^en,  ^mu 
gart  unb  ^oln.  16.  ^5(n  x^i  auf  ber  linfen  (Bdtc  unb  Diiffel^ 
borf  if^  auf  ber  rec^ ten  <Bdtt  M  S^^ein^.  17.  §err  ^^iibemann 
tt)o^nt  auf  ber  re^ten  ©eite  ber  ©trage,  ber  neuen  ^ir^e  gegen^ 
itber.  18.  ©ad^fen  ge^ort  je^t  ^um  9brbbeutf^en  53unb.  19* 
Diefer  Ueberroc!  ge^ort  |)errn  Dr.  S^ejjerf^mibt 


Mer,  — e,  — c§,  all. 
Slnbercr,  — e,  — eS,  other. 
S)tcfcr,  — e,  —eg,  this. 
@tntger,  — e,  — eS,  some,  any. 
(Stitrfjer,  — e,  — eS,  some,  any.         [ed. 
@rft)a^it'ter,  — e,  — e§,  before  mention- 
f^olgenber,  — e,  — e§,  following. 
3eber,  — c,  — e8,  each,  every. 
3cner,  — e,  — e8,  that. 
2J?anrf>er,  — e,  — c§,  many  (a). 
2Jie^rere  (only  injil),  several. 
@oIc^er,  — e,  — e8,  such. 
93erf(^ie'Dener,  — e,  — ei^,  various. 
23ieler,  — e,  — CS,  much,  many. 
SSeldjer,  — c,  — eS,  which  ?  what  ? 
SSeniger,  — e,  — e§,  little,  few. 
9fZorbbeutf(^,  North-German 
^^reu^tfc^,  Prussian. 
S3atrifd;,  Bavarian, 
©ac^flfc^,  Saxon. 


Vocabulary. 

2)er  33unb,  —eg,  Confederation. 

„    Ueberrocf,  —eg,  pi.   UeberriJcfc, 
overcoat. 

„    @ummtfd)ub,  -eg,  pi.  — e,  Indij» 
rubber  over-shoe. 
2)iC  5lrmee',  —,pl.  Slrme'en,  army. 

„    ga^ne,  — ,  pi.  — n,  flag. 

„    f^arbe,  —,pl.  — n,  color. 

n     ®eite,  — ,pl.  — n,  side,  page. 

„    (Bpxa6)C,  — fpl.  — u,  language 

t,    5lugf^rad;e,  pronunciation. 

3irt,  old. 

9fJeu,  new. 

^raftiJoH,  full  of  power,  energetic. 

2Beid),  weak,  soft. 

9te^t,  right  (right  hand,  adj.). 

Stnt,  left  (left  hand,  adj.). 

befon'berg,  especially. 

Stmertfa'utfd;,  American, 

Gnglijd;,  English. 


NEW   DECLENSION   OP   ADJECTIVES. 


65 


Grammatical. 

1.  Adjectives  are  declined  in  the  New  Declension  as 
follows : 

SINGULAR. 

Feminine,. 
(The  good  woman.) 
bic  pt  =  C  grau. 
bcr  gut* en  grau. 
ber  gut* en  grau. 
bic    g  u  t  *  c    grcu. 

PLURAL. 

bic  g  u  t  *  en  ^raucn. 
bcr  g  u  t  *  en  graucn. 
bcu  g  u  t  *  en  ^raucn. 
bic  gut* en  grauen. 

2.  Adjectives  are  declined  according  to  the  New  De* 
dension  when  preceded  by  : 

1.  The  definite  article  ter,bie,  ba^. 

2.  Any  adjective  pronoun  that  is  declined  accord- 
ing to  the  Old  Declension,  as  biefcr,  jcber,  jcncr, 
ttianc^er,  fold^er,  n?eld^er  (including  all  except  pos- 
sessive pronouns) ;  see  §  89,  Rem.  1,  Obs, 

Rem.  After  thQ plurals  altc,  aubcrc,  cinige,  ct(id;c,  fcine,  manege,  folt^c,  tt)ct(^e, 
mel^rcrc,  toicic,  toenigc,  the  adjective  usually  drops  sn  in  the  nom.  and  ace. 

PLURAL. 


Masculine. 
(The  good  man.) 
Nom.  bcr    gut  =  e     2Jtann. 
Gen.  bc3   gut* en   2Jianne6. 
Dat.  bcm  gut*cn   aJiannc. 
Ace.   ben  gut* en  SD^ann. 

Nom.  bic  g  u  t  *  en  9JZanner. 
Gen.  ber  g  u  t  *  en  2Jianncr. 
Uat.  ben  g  u  t  *  en  9)ianncrn. 
Ace.  bic  gut  sen  3)?anner. 


Neuter. 
(The  good  child.) 
bag  8nt  =  e     5einb. 
be§   gut*en  tinbe«. 
bcm  gut* en  .tinbe. 
baS  g  u  t  *  e    itinb. 

bic  gut* en  ^inbcr, 
ber  gut* en  ilinber. 
ben  g  u  t  *  en  5linbcrn. 
bic  gut*en  tinber. 


Nom.  oUc   gut*c    S5ilc^cr. 
Gen.  alter  gut*en  33iid;er. 
Dat.  alien  gut=en  33ad;ern. 
Ace.   aUc  gut=c    S3Ud;er. 


i)icle   gut*c    S5ii(^cr. 
toielcr  gut*en  33iic^cr. 
ijideu  gut*en  S5iid;em. 
Dicic   gut*e   33iic^er. 


einige    gut*e    Siic^er. 
ciniger  gut*en  S3iid;er. 
cinigen  gut*en  33iid)ern. 
ciuige   gutst    S3ilc^cr. 

3.  If  several  adjectives  succeed  the  words  aller,  tcr, 
biefer,  ete.j  they  all  follow  the  New  Declension  : 

€r  ^at  biefe  neu*en  beut j(!^sen    He  has  bought  these  new  German  books. 
S3itc^er  getauft, 

4.  The  preposition  JU  is  used  after  gCprCH  when  this 
verb  signifies  to  helong  to,  in  the  sense  oito  be  apart  of: 

©ac^fen  get^ort  jnm  ^^iorbbcut*     Saxony  belongs  to  (is  a  part  of)  the 
fd)cn  S3unb,  North  German  Confederation, 

(but)  2)a8  S3uc^  QC^ort  bcnt  Se^rcr,      The  book  belongs  to  the  teacher. 


66  MIXED   DECLENSION   OP   ADJECTIVES. 

Exercise  40. 
1.  The  pronunciation  of  the  Italian  language  is  soft, 
but  still  (t)0^)  energetic.  2.  To  whom  does  this  new 
hat  belong  ?  3.  It  belongs  to  Mr.  Behr.  4.  Frankfort 
belongs  now  to  Prussia.  5.  The  New  Museum  in 
Berlin  is  very  large  and  imposing.  6.  It  is  340  feet 
long.  7.  The  Old  Museum  is  not  so  large.  8.  It  is  276 
feet  long,  170  feet  deep,  and  83  feet  high.  9.  The  New 
Museum  is  behind  the  Old  Museum.  10.  The  colors  of 
the  Austrian  flag  are  black  and  yellow.  11.  The  col- 
ors of  the  Italian  flag  are  red,  white,  and  green.  12. 
On  which  side  of  the  street  do  you  live  (reside)?  13. 
We  live  on  the  right  side  of  the  street,  just  opposite 
the  new  house  of  (the)  Mr.  Kranzler.  14.  What  does 
this  cloth  cost  a  yard?  15.  The  blue  cloth  costs  five 
dollars  a  yard.  16.  The  black  cloth  costs  four  dollars 
and  twenty  groschens  a  yard.  17.  The  Austrian  army 
has  eight  hundred  thousand  soldiers.  18.  The  tower  of 
the  new  church  is  a  hundred  and  forty  feet  high.  19. 
I  bought  a  few  (eintge)  German  books  this  morning.  20. 
I  have  not  many  (mele)  German  books.  21.1  have  read 
many  (manege  or  mele)  German  books.  22.  I  have  only 
a  few  (nur  ttJenige)  German  books. 


LESSON  XXI.  '^' 


MIXED   DECLENSION   OF   ADJECTIVES. 

^m  neuer  3^ocf  tft  ^u  gro§,  My  new  coat  is  too  large. 

^arl  \)^i  meinen  neuen  S^locf,  Charles  has  my  new  coat. 

3)a^  ^inb  ^at  ein  neue^  ^uc^,  The  child  has  a  new  book. 

Berlin  tft  eine  grofe  unb  eine  Berlin  is  a  large  and  very 

fe^r  fc^one  ©tabt,  beautiful  city. 

C)aben  (Ste  unfer  neue^  ^<xyx^  Have  you   seen  our  new 

gefc^en  ?  house  ? 

2B5?  i|l  3^r  neuer  53(eiflift  ?  Where  is  your  new  pencil  ? 


MIXED   DECLENSION   OF   ADJECTIVES. 


67 


©ittunbDicrjigftc  5(ufoak» 

1.  $akn  ^xc  metne  beutfc^e  ©ramma'tif  ^cute  gefc()en?  2» 
3^r  teutf^e^  ?efebu^  ift  auf  meinem  Xif^e,neben  meincr  fran^ 
jofifc^en  ©rammatif,  aber  3{)re  t)eutfd)e  ©rammatif  babe  id) 
^eute  ntc^t  gefct)en.  3.  SP^arie  bat  i^re  ttalienif^c  ©rammatif 
»erlcgt;  ^abcn  8ie  fie  gefeben?  4.  3c^  ^abe  fte  \)tutt  ni^t 
gefeben.  5.  Die  Slcrmel  3bi^^^  neuen  gracfe^  fmt)  gu  (ang.  6. 
9iein,  ter  ^djndux  \)at  i{)n  gan^  (exactly)  nad)  Hx  neuen 
2)Jote  gemac^t.  7.  ^einri^  Dietrich  \)at  einen  fd)n)arjen  Ueber^ 
rod  beftellL  8.  Der  ^ragen  meiner  wti^m  SBefte  ift  ju  brcit. 
9»  5lber  bie  SBefte  )pa^t  3()nen  ganj  gut.  10.  Der  SSatcr  f)at 
fcem  ^inbe  ein  fc^one^  neue^  Sud)  »erfprod^en,  weil  e^  feinc 
Deutf^en  5lufgaben  fo  gut  unb  fd)nell  gelernt  \)at,  1 1 .  ^err 
53e^erlein  be^auptet,  baf  $err  ©etiert  fitr  feine  neuen  ©emcilbe 
^weitaufenb  ad^t^unbert  unb  i^ierjig  X^aler  beja^lt  l^at.  12.  ^in 
!Dieb  ^at  mir  f)eute  ba^  Xafc^entu^  au^  ber  ^afc^e  geftoblen. 
13.  2Cilbelm  ^at  ben  neuen  ^rug  serbrod)en.  14.  Xa^  Tln\kx 
^\)xt^  neuen  ^leibe^  ift  fe^r  fc^on.  15.  5(nna  'fyat  ^eutc  ein 
fc^war^e^  ^(eib,  einen  9fJegenfd)irm,  etnen  ^onnenfd)irm  unb  cv 
nen  btauen  ©c^Ieter  gefauft.  16.  Da^  gormat'  biefer  fran^ofti' 
fc^en  ©rammatif  ij^  ^u  grof . 


Vocabulary. 


Xcx  ^lermcl,  — 8,  pi.  —,  sleeve. 

„    ^rageii,  — «,  pi.  — ,  coUar. 

„   ^xad,  — c8,  pi.  ^racfc,  dress  coat. 

„    @d)Ietcr,  — 8,  pi.  — ,  veil. 

,;  9?egcnfd)irm,  — e«,  pL  —t,  um- 
brella. 

„  ©onncnfd^irm,  — eS,  pi.  — c  para- 
sol. 
S)ie  ajJobc,  —,pl.  —n,  fashion. 

«r    Tli\i}c,  —,pl.  — n,  cap. 

„    !j:af^c,  —,  pi.  —n,  pocket. 

n    fScfle  — ,  pi.  — n,  vest. 

n    ©ramma'tif,  — ,  pi  —en,  gram- 
mar. 
t)crjpre'djcnri7T^<7.),  to  promise. 


2)a8  ^ormaf ,  — c«,  pi.  — c,  the  form 
and  size  (as  of  a  book). 

,f     aJiuficr,— S,  pi.  — ,  the  pattern. 

u    ^leib,— e8,/>/. — cr,  dress. 

(;>/.  ^(ciber,  dresses,  clothes.) 

,t     ?cfcbu(^,  reading-book,  reader. 

„    Safc^cntud^^pocket  handkerchief, 
^f^ad^,  according  to,  after. 
SBc^au^'tcn  assert. 
S3cTTtcr'fcn,  obser\-e,  notice. 
S?cftCi'(cn,  order,  engage. 
SScrlc'gcn,  to  misplace, 
^affcn  {tvith  dat.),  to  fit,  become. 
3crbrc'c^''n  {irreg.\  to  break  in  (o. 

into)  pieces. 


68 


MIXED   DECLENSION    OP   ADJECTIVES. 


Grammatical. 
1.  Adjectives   are  declined  according  to  the  Mixed 
Declension  when  preceded  hj  a,  possessive  pronoun,  hj 
Cin  (one,  a,  an),  or  by  fctll  {no,  not  any) : 

SmOULAK. 
Masculine. 
(My  new  coat.) 
Norn,  mein     neu=cr  9tocf. 
Gen.  meines  neu*cn  9Jorfe8. 
Dat.  meinem  neu*en  dtodt. 
Ace.  tneinen  neu*cn  died. 


Norn,  meinc    ncu^en  9tbcfc. 
Gen.  tnemer  neu^en  9to(fe. 
Dat.  tneinen  neu^cn  9Ji3(fen. 
Ace.   metne    neu^ctl  9Jo(fe. 


Feminine. 
(My  new  vest.) 
metne  neu*e    2Befte. 
metner  neu^cn  3Be[te. 
metner  nen^cil  2Befte. 
meine   neu=e    2Be[te. 

PLURAL. 

tnetnc  nen^cn  SSeften. 
metner  neu*cn  SBeften. 
meinen  neu^cn  SBeften. 
mehte   neu=cn  SBeften. 


Neuter. 
(The  new  book.) 
mem     neu*c^  S3ud^. 
meineg  neu*cn  S3ud)c8. 
metnem  nen=cn  S3ud^e. 
mein     neu*c^  53ud^. 

meinc    neu=^cn  33u(i;er. 
meincr  neu=cn  33ilrf)er. 
meinen  nen^cti  S3itd)ern. 
meinc    neu*cn  33ii(^cr. 


2.  Table  of  the  terminations  of  the  three  Declensions 
cf  adjectives  : 

1.  The  Old  Declension :  Adjective  alone  before  the  substantive. 

2.  The  New  Declension :  Adjective  preceded  by  bCt^  btCfCf,  etc. 

3.  The  Mixed  Declension :  Adjective  preceded  by  Ctlt,  IttCtll,  etc. 


LOldDeclen- 

2.  New  Declen- 

S.MixedDeclen- 

K 

sion. 

sion. 

sion. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Masc.  Fern.      Neut. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

<X, 

sC, 

*e8. 

<^t,        ^c,        *e. 

<X, 

<, 

-eg. 

<n, 

=cr, 

*en. 

==en,      *cn,      *en. 

-en, 

-en, 

-en. 

s 

*em, 

=er, 

*em. 

^en,      ^en,      «=en. 

-en, 

-en, 

-en. 

^ 

^en, 

<f 

<^, 

^cn,      ==c,        =e. 

-en. 

^c, 

5e3. 

'^, 

'^, 

^c. 

.en(e),.cn(e),.en(e). 

-en, 

-en. 

-en. 

?^ 

<x, 

<x, 

==er. 

*cn,      *en,      ^en. 

-en. 

-en, 

-en. 

« 

<n, 

*en, 

*en. 

=cn,      sen,      *en. 

-en, 

-en. 

-en. 

<, 

'^, 

*e. 

*en  (e),  "cn  (e),  ^'cn  (e). 

-en. 

-en, 

-en. 

Rem.  1.  In  the  seventy-two  endings  of  these  three  declensions,  -Cll  occurs 
forty-four  times,  -C  fifteen,  -cr  seven-,  t^  four  times,  and  -eUl  twice. 

Rem.  2.  The  mixed  declension  is  like  the  old  in  the  nominative  and  accusa* 
tive  singular ;  in  the  other  cases  it  is  like  the  new  declension. 

Rem.  3.  The  similarity  between  the  new  declension  of  nouns  and  the  new 
declension  of  adjectives  is  very  striking. 

Rem.  4.  The  dative  plural  of  all  articles,  nouns,  adjectives,  and  pronouns 
Ccxcept  nitS  and  CU(!^),  ends  in  -tl» 


COMPARISON    OF   ADJECTIVES.  69 

Exercise  42. 
1.  I  have  mislaid  my  German  Reader;  I  have  been 
looking  for  it  a  long  time,  but  I  have  not  found  it  yet. 

2.  There  it  is  on  the  table  under  my  German  Grammar. 

3.  Have  you  read  your  German  newspaper?  4.  No,  I 
have  not  yet  read  it;  do  you  wish  it?  5.  Have  you 
noticed  the  new  cap  of  the  child?  6.  Yes,  it  fits  him 
very  well.  7.  Have  you  found  your  umbrella  ?  8.  Have 
you  seen  my  German  Reader?  9.  Have  you  ordered 
a  pair  of  boots  ?  10.  No,  I  ordered  a  pair  of  shoes.  11. 
The  collar  of  his  overcoat  is  too  wide.  12.  The  child 
has  broken  the  cup  and  the  saucer.  13.  Charles  bought 
this  morning  a  dozen  pocket-handkerchiefs,  a  new  vest, 
an  umbrella,  and  a  pair  of  India-rubber  over-shoes.  14. 
Breslau  has  a  hundred  and  fifty  thousand  inhabitants. 
15.  The  Cathedral  at  Freiburg  is  three  hundred  and 
twenty  feet  long  and  a  hundred  feet  wide.  16.  The 
tower  is  three  hundred  and  ninety-six  feet  high. 


LESSON  XXII. 

COMPARISON   OF   ADJECTIVES. 

!Diefe  ^ir^e  i|l  fd)on,  jene  ift  This  church  is  beautiful, 
fd)oner,  unt'  jene  bort  ift  bie  that  (one)  is  more  beauti- 
fc^onfte  »on  alien,  ful,  and  that  (one)  yon- 

der is  the  most  beauti- 
ful of  all. 
grdulein    33raun  jtngt   fc^on,  Miss  Brown  sings  beauti- 
grduletn  ^tein  jtngt  f^oner,       fully.  Miss   Stein   sings 
aber  grdulein  ?ange  ftn^t  am       more    beautifully,    but 
fc^onfkn,  Miss  Lange   sings  most 

beautifully. 
|)eute  trerben  tt)tr  beffere^  2Bet^  We  shall  have  better  weath- 

ttx  ()aben,  er  to-day. 

Sr  wiinf^t  ba^  befte  Xud&,         He  wishes  the  best  cloth. 


70 


COMPARISON   OF   ADJECTIVES. 


2)munbDtcrji9ftc  ^tufgak^ 

1,  3)iefe^  ^emdlbe  ift  ml  f^oner  al^  jene^*  2»  ^eute  ijl 
ba^  ^Better  milber  al^  e^  geftern  tt)ar*  3.  ^ahtn  6ie  tie  neue^ 
ften  9^ac^ric^ten  ge^ort  ?  4,  ^aben  ^ie  bte  le^ten  5^ad^ri^ten 
gelefen?  5»  X)er  X()urm  be^  3)ome^  ^u  2Bten  ift  ber  ^o^fte  in 
ber  2Belt  6.  3)ie  ©d)neefoppe,  ber  ^o^fte  33erg  in  9lorb^  unb 
2)^ittel:^Deutfd)lanb,  ift  4960  Sug  ^o^.  7.  2)ie  3)onau  ift  bei 
Idngfte  glug  in  3)eutf^lanb*  8,  i)tx  fiiqefte  2Beg  i)on  Berlin 
nac^  ^ari^  ift  iiber  ^IRagbe'bnrg  unb  ^oln.  9*  $eute  ift  ber 
fiir^efte  Xag  be^  3ci^re^»  10.  53aron  »on  9^ot^fd)i(b  war  ber 
rei(|fte  SJiann  in  ber  2Be(t*  IL  ^Ibre^t  2)itrer  tt)ar  ber  berii^m^ 
tefte  beutf^e  makx  bee  ^ittelalter^.  12,  3n  9liirnberg  befon^? 
bere  b^t  er  mele  f^i?ne  ©emdlbe  gemalt.  13.  Der  Heine  gri$ 
(Freddy)  ift  ein  aUerliebftc^  ^inb,  14.  §einric^  ift  ni^t  fo 
alt  tt)ie  3o^ctnn,  aber  er  ift  ^mi  3a^re  alter  ale  3Bill;elm.  15. 
$err  General  »on  granfenftein  war  in  ber  @^la^t  me^r  tapfer 
ale  ijorft^tig.  16.  2)ie  (^efc^ic^te  bee  breigigjd^rigen  ^riegee 
ift  bod^ft  intereffant.  17.  S^ein  jiingfter  ^ruber  ift  fe^e  3a^rc 
alt.  18. 9?liin^en  ift  bie  grcgte  (Btabt  in  ^aierm  19.  @ie  ift 
ijiel  grof er  ale  ^^^iirnberg  ober  5lugeburg.  20.  ^aben  ift  ein  we^ 
nig  grower  ale  6ad) fen.    21.  53aiern  ift  i^iel  grower  ale  33aben. 


Vocabulary. 


©cr  S3aron',  —§,/>/.  — c,  baron. 

53eru^mt',  famous,  renowned. 

„    ©encrat',— §,/>/.  Generate,  gen- 

Sieb, dear,  cherished. 

eral. 

2)rei^tgja^rtg,  thirty  years'  (war). 

„    Ober[t,  —en,  pi.  —en,  colonel. 

<Stebenia(;rtg,  seven  years'  (war). 

t,     gluB,— eg,  7>/.§m[fe,  river. 

mih,  mild. 

„    2Beg,  —t§,pl.  — e,  way,  road. 

©tiirmifd;,  stormy,  tempestuoug 

S)ic  ©c^tac^t,  —,pl.  —en,  battle. 

Sa^fer,  valiant,  brave. 

„    SCelt,  —,pl.  —en,  world. 

3Sorfid;ttg,  prudent. 

S)a3  filter,  —«,/>/.  — ,  age. 

^ung,  young. 

„  '  HJJittelalter,  Middle  Ages. 

^urj,  short. 

2JJittcI==2)CUtjc^Ianb,  Central  Germany. 

S^reu,  true,  faithful. 

SSenig  (adj.  and  adv.),  little. 

®ang(ac//.),  entire,  whole 

?ll§,  as,  than. 

!i!e^t,  last,  latest. 

SBte,  as,  than. 

5Borig,  last,  preceding. 

SSietteid^t',  perhaps. 

2)ort,  there,  yonder. 

COMPARISON    OF   ADJECTIVES. 


71 


Grammatical. 
1.  Adjectives  are  compared  by  adding  to  the  positive 
degree  -tX  for  the  co77iparative  degree,  and=ft  or  ^cft  for 
the  superlative  degree. 

Rem.  When  the  positive  ends  in  *b,  *t,  *§,  '^f  ^J,  *f4l,  Ai,  A,  or  *U,  the 
Bupeilative  is  formed  by  adding  't\\* 


Positive. 


Comparative. 


fein, 

rcid;, 

fc^i5n, 

milb, 

laut, 

\m), 

fret, 
treu, 


fine, 

rich, 

beautiful, 

mild, 

loud, 

hot, 

false, 

happy, 

free, 

true. 


fein-er, 

reic^'Cr, 

fd;bn*cr, 

mtlb^cr, 

laut^cr, 

falfd;.cr, 
\xqHx, 
fret*er, 
treu^Cr, 


Superlative. 


finer, 

richer, 

more  beautiful, 

milder, 

louder, 

hotter, 

falser, 

happier, 

freer, 

truer. 


reid;.ft, 

milb*c[t, 
Iaut*c|t, 


finest. 

richest. 

most  beautiful. 

mildest. 

loudest. 

hottest. 


faIfd;^Cft,  falsest. 
fro(;*cft,     happiest. 
frei^cft, 
trcu^cft, 


freest, 
truest. 


2.  When  the  positive  is  a  monosyllable,  the  radical 
vowel,  if  C,  0,  07'  Vif  usually  takes  the  umlaut  in  the  com- 
parative  and  superlative  degrees  : 

alt,  old,  alt*cr,       older,  olt^Cft,  oldest. 

tDarm,  warm,  Warm*Cr,  warmer,  tDarm^ft,  warmest, 

lani],  long,  tang^Cr,     longer,  ISng^t,  longest, 

grob,  coarse,  grob*Cr,     coarser,  9i^'^^A^f  coarsest, 

furg,  short,  fiirj*cr,      shorter,  lilq^Cft,  shortest, 

jung,  young,  jiing'Cr,    younger,  jttng=ft,  youngest. 

3.  Adjectives  ending  in  t\  or  ^CIl  reject  the  C  of  this 
syllable  in  the  comparative  degree  : 

cbel,       noble,  ebl'-cr,       nobler,  ebel^ft,       noblest, 

trocfcn,  dry,  trocfn*cr,  dryer,  troden-ft,  dryest. 

4.  The  following  adjectives  are  compared  irregularly  : 

gut,       good,  bcffer,        better,  bcft,  best, 

^oc^,      high,  ^bfjcr,        higher,  ^Uc^ft,        highest, 

na^c,      near,  ua^cr,        nearer,  nac^ft,        nearest. 


toict, 


much, 
great. 


mcbr, 
greyer, 


more, 
greater. 


ntcift, 


most, 
greatest. 


5.  Adjectives  in  the  comparative  and  superlative  de- 
grees are  subject  to  the  same  laws  of  declension  as  ad 
jectives  in  the  positive  degree. 


72  COMPARISON   OF   ADJECTIVES. 

6.  The  regular  superlative  form  (as  htX  ficftc)  is  only 
used  attributivelf/,  i.  e.,  with  a  noun  expressed  or  under- 
stood : 

2)iefe§  ift  ba§  bejie  ^^uc^,  This  is  the  best  cloth. 

2)ieie§  Suc^  ift  bag  befte  (2;ud?),    This  cloth  is  the  best  (cloth). 

7.  To  express  the  sm^erlsitiYe predicatively,  the  dative 
preceded  by  am  (an  bem)  may  be  employed : 

3)tefeg  Xu^  ift  am  Ibcften,  This  cloth  is  the  best. 

S)iefc  S3Iume  ift  am  fcdiJIlftClt,       This  flower  is  the  most  beautifuL 
Rem.  This  predicative  for7n  of  the  superlative  is  also  used  adverbially: 
Wlaxk  fmgt  am  kftcn,  Mary  sings  the  best. 

8.  By  way  of  emphasis,  the  genitive  plural  of  aflcr  is 

frequently  prefixed  to  the  superlative  : 

S)icfe  33Iume  ift  bie  a'tterfcI;onfte,    This  flower  is  far  the  most  beautiful 

2)ieje  Slume  ift  am  atlerfc^onften,      of  all. 

„(£r  ift  eiit  attediebfte^  tinb/'        "  He  is  a  dear  little  child." 

9.  The  absolute  superlative  is  expressed  by  prefixing 

to  the  positive  degree  such  adverbs  as  fcl^r,  p^ft,  dui^crft : 

S)ie  g^tac^ric^t  ifl  ^i5d;ft  intereffant,  The  news  is  extremely  interesting. 
„       n        „auBerft     „ 

10.  When  two  qualities  are  compared  together  in  the 
comparative  degree,  the  adverb  VHtf^X  is  used  instead  of 
the  ending  ^tX : 

(£r  ift  mti^X  ta^fer  aU  tJorfic^tig,   He  is  more  brave  than  prudent. 

Exercise  44. 

1.  My  oldest  brother  is  twelve  years,  and  my  young- 
est brother  is  six  years  old.  2.  Do  you  wish  finer  cloth? 
3.  No,  this  cloth  is  fine  enough.  4.  To-day  is  the  long- 
est day  in  the  year.  5.  Charles  is  five  years  older  than 
his  brother.  6.  Mr.  Krause  sings  very  well  (ganj  gut), 
but  Mr.  English  sings  much  better,  and  Mr.  Eberhard 
sings  the  best  of  all  (i?on  alien).  7.  The  weather  is  very 
disagreeable  to-day,  but  it  is  more  stormy  than  cold. 
8.  The  Colonel  was  not  less  prudent  than  courageous 


ORDINAL    NUMBERS.  73 

in  the  battle.  9.  Mary  Kranzler  sang  the  German  songs 
extremely  beautifully.  10.  William  Friedliinder  is  just 
(gera^be)  as  (fo)  old  as  {mt  or  al^)  Frederick  Schnaase. 
11.  This  paper  is  not  so  good  as  that.  12.  That  book 
is  larger  than  this.  13.  The  Oder  is  the  longest  river 
in  North  Germany.  14.  It  is  longer  than  the  Elbe. 
15.  Have  you  read  the  last  news?  16.  Albert  Diirer 
was  among  (unter)  the  most  distinguished  painters  of 
Germany.  17.  The  shortest  road  from  Berlin  to  Trieste 
is  by  way  of  Dresden,  Prague,  and  Vienna. 


LESSON  XXIII. 

ORDINAL   NUMBERS. 


Der  erjle  Xag,  m  Tlonat^,        The  first  day  of  the  month. 

Der  gmeite  Xag  bee  SJJonat^,      The    second   day    of  the 

month. 

2)ie  brttte  Seitc  be^  53uc^ee,      The  third  page  of  the  book. 

2)er  merte  3ult  1776,  The  fourth  of  July,  1776. 

5lm  neun^e^nten  5lugufl,  On  the  nineteenth  of  Au- 

gust. 

Dk  brciunb^roanjtgfle  ^eftion,     The  twenty-third  lesson. 

3)ie  funfunbinerjii3flc  ^lufgabe,    The  forty-fifth  exercise. 

Sr  ftarb  am  brittcn  2^at,  He  died  on  the  third  of 

Cor)  Sr  i^arb  ben  britten  Tlax,       May. 

gUnfunbtJicrsiofte  ^ufrjak* 

1.  3c^  ^(ih^  ^eute  »om  ^errn  $rofeffor  ^tetnme^er  ben  er^ 
flen  33anb  ber  ©ef^id^te  ber  beutfc^en  Stteratur  »on  ^einrid^ 
^urj  geborgt.  2.  $err  ©d^onberc^  n)of)nt  xrn  gweiten  (Btorf  bc^ 
fiinften  §aufee  auf  ber  rc(^ten  (Bdtt  ber  grtebrtc^e^6tra§e.  3. 
3)ie  ^n.^etgen  jtnb  auf  ber  ftcbenten  unb  ad)ten  8eitc  ber  3ei^ 
tung.  4.  3)ie  te(ec^rap()tfc^e  Dcpe'fcl)e  ijon  5lmcrifa  ijl  ungefci^r 
in  ber  SJiitte  ber  »ierten  (5pa(te  auf  ber  britten  <Btitt  ber  Mcjtgcn 

D 


74  ORDINAL   NUMBERS. 

I^euttgen  3^ttung;  bie  I)epefc^e  tjl  »on  fe^r  gro^em  3ntereffe, 
5*  3)en  Urfprung  te^  2Borte^  „2i)^e]Ter"  tt?ert)Ctt  @te  im  jwei^ 
ten  ^anbe  t>er  Written  3luflage  be^  teutfc^en  SGorterbud^e^  i)on 
„@c^mittt)enner",  auf  ber  ^unbert  ac^tunb»teqigften  ®ette,  in 
ber  neununb^wanjtgften  3^tk  i)on  unten,  finben*  6*  d^rtftopl^ 
dolumbu^  ^at  ^Imerifa  am  llten  Dftober  1492  entbecft,  7. 
griebrii^  ber  3«?eite,  gett)5{)n1t^  ber  ©rope  genannt,  ftarb  am 
17ten  ^(ugufl  1786.  8.  (Sr  tear  ber  britte  ^onig  »on9)reufem 
9.  griebri^  2Bill)elm  ber  SSierte,  ber  fec^fle  ^omg  »on  5)reu^en, 
flarb  am  2ten  Scinuar  1861.  10.  (^bti)t  ftarb  in  SGeimar  am 
22ften  ^ax^  1832.  11.  ©chiller  ftarb  in  SBeimar  am  9ten 
max  1805.  12.  5llbred}t  Diirer  mx  ber  grogte  beutf(^e  SJJaler 
be^  16ten  unb  I7ten  3al^r^unbert^.  13.  3?lontag  n^ar  ber  erfte 
Sanuar.    14.  Dtenjlag  toax  ein  fe^r  ^ei^er  Xag. 

Vocabulary. 


S>et  S3anb,  —t^,pl.  Sanbe,  volume. 

„    ^ontg,  — §,;>/.  — e,  king. 

„    ^aifer,  — ^,pl.  — ,  emperor. 

„  ^reu33ug,  — e8,p/.  ^rcusjilgc,  cru- 
sade. 

„    @to(f ,  — e§,  story  (of  a  house). 

f,  ^&Uofo:|)^',— en, /»/.—cn, philos- 
opher. 

„    Urf^jrung,  — g,  origin.  , 
S)ie  Slnjctge,  — ,;»/.  — n,  advertisement 

„    Stuftage,  — ,  pi.  — n,  edition. 

„    S)e^e'f(^e,  — ,/>/.  — n,  dispatch. 

„    Siteratur'  ,—,pl-  —en,  literature 

„     9}Zttte,  —,pl.  —n,  middle. 

„    @^o(te,  — ,pl  — n,  column. 

„    ^txh  —,  pi  — n,  line. 


2)a8  (5nbe,  —%,pl.  —n,  end. 

„    Snteref  fe,  — g,  interest. 

„    SBort,  — eS,  pi  Shorter,  word. 

„    2Bi5rterbud^,  dictionary. 
55orgen,  to  borrow. 
2)auern,  to  last,  endure, 
(gntbed'en,  to  discover. 
@terben  (irreg.\  to  die. 
©enonnt',  named,  called. 
@ett)0^n'(id^,  usual. 
Ungcfa^r  {adv.),  about,  nearly. 
3Son  oBen,  from  above,  from  the  top. 
35on  nnten,  from  below,  from  the  hot 

tom. 
§eutig  {adj.\  of  to-day,  to-day's, 
^tejtg   {adj.)^  of  this  place. 


Grammatical. 
1.  The  Ordinal  Numbers  are  formed  from  the  Cardirud 
lumbers : 

1.  By  suffixing  4c,  from  StDCi  to  ncunjcl^n* 

2.  "  ''         4tC,    "     Jtoanjig  upward. 

'Re.m.  In  compound  numbers  onhj  the  last  one  takes  the  suflSx. 


ORDINAL  NUMBERS. 


75 


Ist  2)er 

crftc* 

40th  !2)ei 

•  toicrjig^tC, 

2d      „ 

50th 

n 

titnfiifl'ftC* 

3d       „ 

60th 

II 

fccl)5ic5=ftC. 

4th     „ 

mer-tc. 

70th 

II 

fiebcnjicj^tC,  or    fieb* 

5th     „ 

faiif'^c. 

Sifl'ftC. 

()th     „ 

jed^S^tC. 

80th 

n 

ad;tjig.ftc. 

7th     „ 

ficbeu*tC» 

90th 

It 

ncunjig^tC* 

8th     „ 

ad;t^C, 

100th 

II 

^unbert'ftc. 

9th     „ 

neun^tC* 

101st 

II 

^unbert  iinb  crftt. 

10th     „ 

je^n^tCv 

125th 

II 

^uiibcrttilnfunbjwan* 

nth    „ 

t\\'M. 

m-Mt. 

12th     „ 

ivo'iMu 

200th 

II 

jtrct{)unbcrt*ftc» 

13th     „ 

breijcl;u4C. 

500th 

II 

fiiiifljimbcrt^tC. 

14th     „ 

Uieqel^u^C* 

1,000th 

II 

taufcnb^te* 

15th     „ 

fiintse^n^tC* 

1,001st 

II 

taufcnb  unb  crftc. 

16th     „ 

\t&llt\i\\4u 

1,026th 

11 

taufcnb  fcc^SunbjU^an* 

17th     „ 

fiebenjc^n^tC,  or  ficbjc^n-tc* 

aiS'ftC. 

18th     „ 

ad;t5C^n*tC» 

1,626th 

II 

tviufcub     fcd;e^iinbcrt 

19th     „ 

ncun5c(;u4c» 

unb  fcd;6unb5H?an* 

20th     „ 

jioonsig^tc* 

m-Mt. 

21st      „ 

einuub,:ittjau5i3'ftc» 

2,000th 

II 

jtt?citaufcnb4tC. 

25th     „ 

tihituiibsTOausig^tC* 

20,000th 

II 

jlvanjigtaujcnb'-ftc. 

30th     „ 

brcitji^^tc- 

100,000th 

II 

i^unbcrttaujcnb^tC. 

35th     „ 

tiinjuubbrciBta^tC, 

500,000th 

II 

filnf()uubcvttau]enb;ftc 

Rem.  1 

.  The  forms  brit=tC  and  a(^ 

t=t  are  euphonic  variations  from  the 

rule  for  forming  ordinal  numbers. 

Rem.  2 

.  Ordinal  numbers  are  subjec 

t  to  all  the  laws  of  declension  of  adjec- 

tives  {see 

Lessons  XX.. ,  XXI. ,  and  X 

XII.). 

2.  Names  of  the  seasons^  oi  m.ontlLS,  and  of  the  days  of 
the  week,  are  masculine  : 

1.  The  Seasons  (hit  ^a^rcSjcitCll) : 


S)Cr  Sinter,  — g,  pi.  —,  winter 
„  griil^ring,   — S,  /;/.    — c, 
spring. 
{Exc.  %ai  i^ril^iabr,  — c8,/>/. 


2)Cr  Somnicr, — ^,pl.  — ,  summer. 
„    ^crbjl,  — ce,  pi.  —i,  autumn. 


spring.) 


2.  The  Months  (bic  5}lonatc) : 


2)er  (^a'niiar,  — §,  January. 
„     ^c'bruar,  — §,  February. 
„     aJJaq, —eg,  March. 
„     Slpril',  — e8,  April. 
„     9)?ai,  — e8,  May. 
/,    3unt,  —'8,  June. 


2)er  ^iili,  —'8,  July. 
„    Siuguft',  —eg,  August. 
„    ©c^tem'ber, — g,  September, 
„    Otto'ber,—g,  October. 
„    SSiQ'Gtm'htx,  — g,  November. 
„    2)ejem'ber,  —8,  December. 


76  ORDINAL   NUMBERS. 

3.  The  Days  of  the  Week  (bic  Xa^t  ber  SBo^c) 


2)cr  @onntag,  — g,  pi.  — e,  Sun- 
day. 

If  SJJontag,  — ?,  jo?.  — e,  Mon- 
day. 

„  2)tenftag,— §,/)Z.  — e,  Tues- 
day. 


25er  9HittttJoc^,  — ,7^^.  —e,  Wednesday 
„    2)onnerftag,  — S,  ;?/.  — c,  Thurs- 
day. 
„  ?^rettag,  — S,  ;?/.  — e,  Friday. 
„   ©amftag,  — g,  /./.  — e,  Saturday. 
(„  ©onnabenb,  — g,j9Z.  — e,     *'     .) 

3.  Present  and  imperfect  tenses  of  ftcrkn,  to  die  : 


Present  Tense. 

id?   fterb'^C,  I       die. 

bu  ftirbft,  thou  diest. 

er    fttrfit,  he     dies. 

n)ir  fterb'^cn,  we    die. 

t^r  ft€i*b'*t,  you   die. 

fie   ft  e  r  b  '*  en,  they  die. 


Imperfect  Tense. 
\^    \iOXbf  I       died, 

bu   ftarllft,  thou  diedst. 

cr    ftarti,  he     died. 

tDtr  ftarb^Ctt,  we  died, 
i^r  ftarb'*t,  you  died, 
fie  ft  a  r  b  '==  CIl,  they  died. 


4.  In  German  the  verb  is  often  removed  to  the  end 
of  very  long  sentences  {see  sentence  5  in  Exercise  45). 

5.  When  the  adverbial  expression  of  time  is  very 
long,  it  md^j  follow  that  of  place  {see  Less.  III.^  2). 
©critter  ftarb  in  SSeimar  am  9ten  Wiox  Schiller  died  in  Weimar  on  the  ninth 

1805.  of  May,  1805. 

Exercise  46. 
1.  I  am  now  reading  the  third  volume  of  the  history 
of  Germany  by  K.  A.  Menzel.  2.  On  what  page  are 
you  reading?  3.  I  am  reading  on  the  hundred  and 
fifty-third  page,  seventeen  lines  {in  the  seventeenth  line) 
from  the  top  (»on  oben).  4.  The  advertisement  of  the 
sale  of  the  house  is  in  the  third  column  of  the  fourth 
page  of  to-day's  paper.  5.  Francis  the  Second,  em- 
peror of  (5?on)  Austria,  and  the  last  emperor  of  Ger- 
many, died  in  Vienna  on  the  second  of  March,  1835.  6. 
Charlemagne  (^arl  ber  (S5rofe),the  first  emperor  of  Ger- 
many, died  in  Aix-la-Chapelle  January  28th,  814.  7. 
The  Crusades  lasted  from  the  end  of  the  eleventh  till 
towards  the  end  of  the  thirteenth  century.  8.  Friday 
will  be  the  first  of  January.  9.  Saturday  was  the  cold- 
est day  of  this  month.     10.  Wednesday  will  be  the 


raREGULAB   VERBS    OP   THE   FIRST    CLASS.  77 

shortest  day  of  the  year.  11.  Immanuel  Kant,  tho 
greatest  philosopher  of  the  eighteenth  century,  died  in 
Konigsberg  on  the  twelfth  of  February,  1804.  12.  He 
was  eighty  years  old  when  (al^)  he  died. 


LESSON  XXIV. 

IRREGULAR   VERBS   OF   THE   FIRST   CLASS. 

Gicbenunbijicrjigftc  5(ufoabc, 

1.  X)tx  (Solbat  btnbet  fein  Xaf^entud)  urn  fcincn  5lrm.  2. 
SBerlin  unb  Hamburg  ftnb  burd)  eine  ^ifenba^n  i^crbunbcn.  3* 
2)er  SKunbar^t  \)at  bie  5Gunben  be$  ©olbatcn  »erbunben 
(dressed).  4.  IDer  53ud)binber  l)ai  ba^  ^ud^  t?crbunbcn.  5. 
3c^  \)ciht  bie  ijorle^te,  aber  ntc^t  bie  le^te  Shiflagc  be^  SCorter^ 
bu^e^  in  ber  33uc^f)anblung  »on  §errn  2)?e^er  gcfunben.  6. 
C^()riflop^  ©ottlieb  (Sd^rbter,  (an)  Drc;ani|l  in  9^orbbaufcn,  ^ai 
im  3a^re  1717  ba^  Plainer  erfunbcn.  7.  Xrinfen  ^ic  licber 
(do  you  prefer)  X^ee  ober  ^affce?     8.  3^  trinfc  licbcr  X[)cc. 

9.  X)k  8d)iiler  ()aben  x\)xt  beutfd)en  ^lufcjabcn  fd)on  be,qonncn. 

10.  $err  ^trad  \)cit  ba^  ^au^  im  »origen  3al;re  fitr  8500 1()(r« 
gefauft ;  er  ^at  e^  »orgeftern  fiir  9100  Xblr.  t?crfauft.  11.  Sr 
\)C[i  babei'  600  X()(r.  gemonnen.  12.  3)ie  33ducrtn  bat  ba^ 
(^arn  (^anj  (jut  cjefponnen.  13.  2)cr  S5erbre^er  l>at  bie  ©efc^e 
bc^  ?anbc^  gebroc^en.  14.  5ld),  lieber  griebrtd^I  !Du  ^aft  biefc 
fd)one  neue  SSafe  ganj  jcrbrod)cn.  15.  ^err  9^icbner  fprid)t  ju 
3f;nen.  16.  Die  5lu^gaben  ber  S^tecjierung  waren  ml  ju  grog ; 
jtc  cntfprad^en  gar  nid^t  ber  5lrmut^  bee  Sanbe^.  17.  3)cr 
53auer  brifd)t  ben  3Ceijen.  18.  Da^  ^inb  t)at  bae  beutfc^c 
SSbrtcrbud)  »on  bem  Xifd)e  genommen.  19.  SBir  f)aben  ^:errn 
^ir^t)off  ^cute  2)^orgen  auf  ber  (Btrage  getroffen.  20.  2Bir 
treffen  ibn  fe()r  oft  im  2)?ufeum.  21.  Der  3ager  (>at  ben  ^afen 
ni^t  getroffen.  22.  T)a^  ^inb  ^at  ben  53aU  iiber  ba(J  .?)aug  ge^ 
tt>orten.  23.  :Der  ^aumeiftcr  ^at  einen  fc^r  fd^bnen  ?»Ian  fiit 
ba0  neue  3'lat^l)aue  enttrorfen.  24.  (£o?  ^abm  <Bk  ibn  gefe^ 
^en  ?    25.  'Hfltin,  aber  ^err  23op  f)at  gefagt,  bap  er  fe^r  fc^on  ijl 


78 


IRREGULAR   VERBS   OF   THE   FIRST   CLASS. 


2)er  %xm,  —t5,pl.  —t,  arm. 
„    33att,— e§,7>^.  mtte,baU. 
„    33aumeifter,  — ^,pl  —,  architect 
„    Organift',  —en,  pi  —en,  organ- 
ist. 
„    Pan,  — eg,jo/.  ^tSnc,  plan. 
t,    Siclcgra^^',  — en,  pi.  —en,  tele- 
graph. 
n    SSerbre'c^er,  — 8,  pi  — ,  criminal. 
M    SBetjen,  — §,  wheat. 
„    3Bunbarjt,  — e8,  surgeon. 
2)te   ?trmut^,  — ,  poverty. 
,1    3ln§gabe,  — ,pl  — n,  expense. 
,/    ^ciuerin,  — ,  pL  — nen,  peasant 

woman,  peasant's  wife. 
„    9Jegte'rung,  — ,  pi.  — en,  govern- 
ment. 


Vocabulary. 

2)ie  (SifenBa^n,  —,pl.  —en,  railroad, 

"     SSafe,  — ,pl.  — n,  vase. 

„    SBunbe,  — ,pl.  — n,  wound. 
2)a8  @in!ommen,  —8,  income. 

„     ®arn,  — t^,pl.  — e,  yarn. 

„    @eje^',  —i^fpl.  — e,  law. 

„    torn,  —t^,pl.  tijrner,  grain. 

„     2anb,  —t^,pl.  Scinber,  land,  coun- 
try. 

„    9Jat^^au9,  — eS,  pi.  9iat^^aufer, 
city  hall, 
©abet',  thereby. 
Oar  (adv.),  at  all. 
©Ictd),  immediately. 
SteBer,  rather. 
(Slef'trifc^,  electric. 
SSorlet^t,  next  to  the  last. 


Rem.  It  will  have  been  noticed  that  most  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  be- 
long to  the  Old  Declension,  and  that  most  feminine  nouns  belong  to  the  New 
Declension. 

Grammatical. 

1.  Irregular  verbs  are  divided  into  seven  classes,  ac- 
cording to  the  changes  which  the  radical  vowel  under- 
goes in  forming  the  jprincijpal  ^arts  : 

2.  In  the  irregular  verbs 
of  the^/'<§^  class  each  princi- 
pal part  has  a  different  rad- 
ical vowel.     Thus : 

3.  Irregular  verbs  of  ihQ  first  class  : 

Present  Indicative, 


Pres.  Inf. 

Imp.  Ind. 

Perf.Part. 

{or)t, 

a, 
a, 

0* 

Present  Infinitive. 

Stnb^cn,  to  bind, 
toerbinb'^en,  to  unite,  to  tie  up, 
finb^en,  to  find,  [to  bind  wrong, 
erftnb'^cn,  to  invent, 
[ing-en,  to  sing. 
trin!<=en,  to  drink. 
ibcginn'=en,  to  begin. 
gctT3tnn'=en,  to  gain. 
ft)inn*citf  to  spin. 


2d  and  Sd  Persons. 
(formed  regularly.) 


(formed  regularly.) 


Imperf. 
Indicat. 

^anb, 

berbanb, 
tanb, 
erfanb, 
fving, 
tranf , 

geir>ann, 
f^ann, 


Perfect 
Participle, 

gcbunbcn* 

berbunben. 

gefunben. 

erfunben. 

gefnngen. 

getrunlen. 

getx>onnen. 
gcf))onnen. 


IRREGULAR    VERBS    OF   THE   FIRST    CLASS. 


79 


tirC^'Cn,  to  break.  • 
jcrbred;'*cn,  to  break  to  pieces, 
fprccb^en,  to  speak. 
tnt\pxcd)''tn,  to  correspond  to, 
or  with  (governs  the  dative^. 
V)crf^rec^'*en,  to  promise. 
brcjc^^cn,  to  thresh, 
iic^m^en,  to  take, 
flcrb^cn,  to  die. 
treff*cn,  to  meet,  hi*,  shoot. 
tDcrf»en,  to  throw, 
cntrcerf =en,  to  project. 


bu    brit^ft,  er  Bridit, 

„  jerbrid^jl,  „  *lHid)t, 
„  f^rid?fl,„  f^nd;t, 
„cntj^r^|l,„*fpric^t, 


Scrbvad;, 
cntf^}rac^, 


gclirodicn* 

jcrbroc^cn. 
gcjpro^en. 
entf^rod?cn< 


„i)erj^rid^fl,  M*f^ri(^t,  tocrf^rad^,  bcrf^rod^cn 
brifc^fl,,,  brifc^t,  brajd^,      gcbrofc^en. 
nimmj^  „  nimmt  na^m,       gcnommcn. 
ftirfcjl,  „  fiirbt,   j^arb,        gefiorben. 
triffft,    „  trifft,    traf,         getroffcn. 
h?trfjl,  „  tvirft,   xoax\,        gctDorfcn. 
„  cnttt?irfjl,   „*h)irtt,  enttuarf,    cntworfcn. 
Rem.  1.  The  first  class  contains  jTorfy-^^ye  verbs. 

Rem.  2.  The  inseparable  prefixes  !bC/  QC^  VXif  'QtXf  %ttf  etc^  give  modifica- 
tions to  the  significations  of  verbs  analogous  to  those  given  in  English  by  the 
■yllables  be  and /or  : 

To      have^  holdj  speak,  come,  give,  get. 

To  behave,       behold,       bespeak,       becovie,    forgive,     forget. 

Exercise  48. 

1.  The  child  is  tying  the  ribbon  on  (um)  his  hat.  2. 
The  surgeon  has  been  dressing  the  wounds  of  the  sol- 
diers. 3.  The  bookbinder  has  bound  this  German  Dic- 
tionary wrong.  4.  Professor  Morse  invented  the  Elec- 
tric Telegraph  in  1838.  5.  Do  you  prefer  tea  or  coffee  ? 
6. 1  prefer  (trinfe  lieber)  coffee.  7.  The  peasant's  wife  is 
spinning  the  yarn.  8.  That  old  criminal  has  often 
broken  the  laws  of  his  land.  9.  His  expenses  did  not 
at  all  correspond  to  his  income.  10.  The  peasant  is 
threshing  the  grain.  H.  Have  you  taken  my  umbrel- 
la? 12.  Willidm  says  that  .Henry  took  it.  13.  I  met 
your  uncle,  Mr.  Rahn,  yesterday  in  Leipsic.  14.  The 
hunter  has  shot  the  hare.  15.  The  child  has  thrown 
his  ball  into  the  water.  16.  The  architect  has  designed 
(enttverfen)  a  very  fine  plan  for  the  new  church.  17.  Karl 
Friedrich  Schinkel,  the  most  distinguished  architect  of 
the  nineteenth  century,  drew  (entmerfen)  the  plan  for  the 
Old  Museum  in  Berlin*  18.  Potsdam  and  Berlin  are 
connected  by  (»crbunt>en  burc^)  a  railroad. 


80 


IRREGULAR   VERBS    (CONTINUED). 


LESSON  XXV. 

IREGULAR  VERBS   OP   THE   SECOND,  THIRD,  AND  FOURTH   CLABSEB. 

1.  $akn  ®te  bte  l^euttge  B^ttung  gelefen?  2,  ^^Zein,  ic^  ^aU 
ftc  nci^  nic^t  gefe^en,  3*  3)er  ^aufmann  l^at  ba^  Zn^  gemef^ 
fen.  4*  Der  3}^effer  mtft  ba^  gelb*  5.  ©ffen  (5ie  gem  (do 
you  like)  Dbjl  ?  6.  D^,  ic^  effe  e^  fe^r  germ  7.  Da^  ^inb 
ift  einen  5lpfeL  8.  (S^  |)at  ba$  ^utterbrob  gegeffen  unb  bte 
2)^{l^  getrunfen,  9.  Da^  9)ferb  frtft  ba^  $eu.  10.  ^arl  ^at 
fein  33u($  mgeffem  11.  51^,  gri^,  bu  trittft  auf  bie  fi^onen 
5ReI!en  unb  Xulpen.  12.  ®raf  »on  ^ern^borf  ^at  ben  ^cnig 
»on  $reupen  im  (Suropciif^en  ^ongreg'  p  faxi^'  yertreten.  13. 
!Der  53auer  grdbt  einen  neuen  53runnen.  14.  Der  Sciger  fc^ldgt 
fetnen  $unb,  tt)eil  er  ben  Si^iann  gebiffen  (bitten)  b^t.  15. 
2}^ein  Diener  mirb  bie  5lepfel  unb  bie  53irnen  na^  |)aufe  tra^ 
gen.  16.  grdulein  granj  b^it  gejlern  5lbenb  ein  fd)waqe^  feibe^ 
ne^  ^leib  getragen.  17.  ^ine  |)anb  m\6^i  bie  anbere  (one 
good  turn  deserves  another).  18.  §eute  2)^orgen  ^ben 
mx  breije^n  gorellen  gefangen.  19.  ^txx  ©teinbac^er  l^at  un^ 
febr  freunblic^  empfangen.  20.  3c^  ^tte  x^n  fiir  (I  consider 
him)  einen  c^rlic^en  ^am.  21.  Der  £ommi^'  i)at  fein  (3t^ 
\)alV  er^alten.  22.  3)ie  33ibliot^e!  p  2)re^ben  ent|)a(t  300,000 
«Bdnbe  unb  2800  ^anbfc^riften.  23.  2Bo  ijl  |)einri^?  24. 
(Sr  f^laft  noc^.  25.  (Sr  ^at  f^on  au  lange  gef^lafcn.  26. 
S©o  iji  ^il^elm?    27.  (Sr  ijl  im  (Garten;  ic^  tt)erbe  i^n  rufen, 


Vocabulary. 


S)er  Wc'^f  —Q,pl.  Sle^fel,  apple. 

„  53runnen,  — §,  />/.  — ,  Avell. 

n  2)tencr,  — 8,jo/.  — ,  servant. 

„  ^omtntS',  — ,  pi.  — ,  clerk. 

„  ^ongre^',  — e8,  Congress. 

„  SD^effer, — §,pl.  —,  surveyor, 

^ie  S3irne,  — ,  />/.  — n,  pear. 

„  goret'te,  —,pl.  —n,  trout. 

„  9^elfe,  —,pl.  — n,  pink. 

„  Xulpt,  — ,pl.  — n,  tulip. 

„  ^anb,— ,p/.  ^Snbe,  hand. 


2)ie  ©d^rtft,  — ,j»/.  — en,  writing. 

„     §anbf(^rtft,  manuscript. 
2)a§  §elb,  —t^,pl.  — er,  field. 

„    ©efjalt',  — e§,  /jL  — e,  salary. 

„    §eu,  — e§,  hay. 

„    ^ferb,  — eS,  7?/.  — e,  horse. 
®ern  (adv.),  gladly,  willingly. 
Slnber  (aflf/*.),  other. 
(S^rlid;  (adj.),  honest,  honorable. 
@etben,  silken,  silk. 
@uro^)a'tfd;,  European. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS    (CONTINUED). 


81 


Grammatical. 
1.  In  irregular  verbs  of  the  second^  third,  diXidi  fourth 
classes,  the  radical  vowel  of  the  imperfect  only  variei 
from  that  of  the  present : 


Pres.  Inf. 

Imp.  Ind. 

Perf.Part. 

No.  of  Verbs. 

Second  Class, 
Third  Class, 
Fourth  Class, 

a  (n,  0), 

ic(i), 

a, 
a(u,o), 

U. 
10. 
14. 

2.  Irregular  verbs  of  the  second  class 

Present  Indicative^ 


Present  Infinitive. 

2d  and  M  Persons. 

^th'-tn,  to  give. 

bu      gibft, 

cr  gibt, 

tocrgeb'^en,  to  forgive. 

V  »crgib[t, 

M  ==g^t>t, 

fe^^cn,  to  see. 

.       fie^ft, 

„   fie^t, 

Icf^en,  to  read. 

„       liefeft, 

„   Hcj't, 

tne[f*en,  to  measure. 

n       ntiffeft, 

It   ntiBt, 

e[[*cn,  to  eat.             [inals). 

.       i[feft, 

u   ifjt, 

freff^Cll,  to  eat  {said  ofani- 

r.       friffcjl, 

f/    tnf3t, 

i>ergc[f'*en,  to  forget. 

„  toergiffcft, 

u  *g^i3t, 

trct^en,  to  tread,  step. 

trittft, 

„   trttt, 

tertret'^cn,  to  represent. 

„  tocrtrittfl, 

„  4ritt, 

jertret'^cn,  to  tread. 

V   sertrittft, 

„  -tritt, 

Imperfect 
Indicat. 

gab, 

toergab, 

las, 
mag, 

tocrgag, 
trat, 
t»ertrat, 
jcrtrat, 


Perfect 
Participle. 

gcgcbcn. 

ttergebcn. 

flcfc^cn. 

gclcfcn. 

gemcffen. 

gcgeffcii. 

gcfvefi'cn. 

vjcrgcffen. 

gctrctcn. 

tocrtrctcn. 

jcrtrctcn. 


3.  Nearly  all  irregular  verbs  with  a,  0,  or  au,  as  the 
radical  vowel,  take  the  umlaut  in  the  second  and  third 
persons  singular  of  the  present  indicative. 


Present  Tense. 

Imperfect  Tensi 

J. 

t^    f(^(ag'=C,          I       strike. 

\^    WWC^f              I        struck. 

bu   f(^ldg=ftf          thou  strikest. 

bu    f(ftlun=ft,           thou  struckest. 

cr    ft^Iiigst,          he     strikes. 

cr    fd)IU(|,              he     struck. 

Xm  tc^lag%cit,  we     strike. 

h>ir  f  c^  I  u  g  '*  en,  we     struck. 

i^r  jd?lag%ct,  you  strike. 

ibr  fd)(ug'*et,  you   stnick. 

fie   f  d)  t  a  g  %  en,  they  strike. 

fie    f  ^  ( u  g  '*  en,  they  struck. 

4.  Irregular  verbs  of  the  third  class  : 

Present  Infinitive. 

Present  Indicative^ 
2d  and  Sd  Persons. 

Imperfect 
Indicat. 

Perfect 
Participle 

j^raftscn,  to  dig. 

bu  nrcibft,  er  grobt, 

grub, 

flcprabcn. 

|c^lag*cu,  to  strike. 

„  fd^Iagft,  „  fdUcigt, 

fcbhig, 

gcfc^Iagcu. 

trag-en,  to  carry,  wear. 

„  tragft,     „   tragt, 

trug, 

gctragcn. 

teajd^*cn,  to  wash. 

,  tt?5fd)fl,  „  n)a[(^t, 

ttjufc^, 

gewafrf^en. 

D 

2 

82 


IRREGULAR   VERBS    (CONTINUED). 


5.  Irregular  verbs  oi  the  fourth  class  : 


fang-en,  to  catch. 

bu      fiiiigft,  er     fiingt, 

ftng, 

gcfangciu 

em^fanf\en,  to  receive. 

„  em^faugft,   „etn)}fangt, 

em^fing, 

em^fangeiu 

^alt*en,  to  hold. 

{?dtt[t,     „      mt, 

mtr 

ge^alten. 

Cnt^alt*en,  to  contain. 

„    cnt^dltft,    ,,     4alt, 

entt)ielt, 

eut^alteu* 

er£)alt=en,  to  receive. 

„     ert>alt[t,    „     ^alt, 

ert;tett, 

er{;alten. 

bc^alten,  to  retain,  keep. 

„     be^dltft,    „     mt, 

bc^ielt, 

fee^aiten. 

fd;Iaf*eu,  to  sleep. 

fd^Idfjl,  „      fd;Idft, 

fd;Iief, 

gefc^laten. 

ruf^en,  to  call. 

(fonned  regularly. ) 

rief, 

gerufen. 

jio^*en,  to  hit,  bump. 

„    PMi,  II    mt, 

m, 

geftogcn. 

6.  Many  foreign  words  retain  their  original  pronunci- 
ation.    Thus  the  final  §  is  silent  in  ^ommi^^ 

Exercise  50. 
1.  Have  you  read  the  history  of  the  German  litera< 
ture  by  Heinrich  Kurz  ?  2.  I  bought  it  a  few  months 
ago  ('OCX  eintgen  3)Zonaten),  but  I  have  not  yet  read  it.  3. 
Have  you  measured  the  cloth?  4.  Yes,  it  is  thirty 
yards  long.  5.  What  are  the  boys  eating?  6.  John  is 
eating  an  apple,  and  William  is  eating  a  pear.  7.  The 
horse  has  eaten  the  hay.  8.  The  scholars  have  forgot- 
ten their  lessons.  9.  You  have  stepped  on  the  tulip. 
10.  The  peasant  has  dug  a  deep  well.  11.  The  boy  has 
struck  the  dog.  12.  The  servant  has  carried  the  apples 
and  the  pears  home.  13.  William  wore  yesterday  even- 
ing a  black  coat  and  a  white  vest.  14.  I  caught  five 
tro'^.t  yesterday.  15.  Professor  Bauer  received  (empfan^ 
gen)  them  very  kindly.  16.  The  library  at  Vienna  con- 
tains   over  300,000  volumes   and  16,000  manuscripts. 

17.  Have  you  received  (er{)a{ten)  your  to-day's  paper? 

18.  Mr.  Kraus  received  a  letter  this  morning  from  his 
brother-in-law,  Mr.  Blumenthal.  19.  Mr.  Friedlander 
says  that  he  will  sell  his  new  house.  20.  Why  will  he 
not  keep  the  new  house?  21.  The  old  house  is  more 
convenient,  and  warmer  than  the  new  house.  22.  Is 
the  child  sick?  23.  Yes,  but  the  doctor  says  that  it 
has  slept  long  enough. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS    (CONTINUED).  83 

LESSON  XXVI. 

IBBEOULAR  VERBS   OF   THE   FIFTH   AND   SIXTH   CLASSES. 

(ginunbfiinfjigftc  ^ufgabc. 

1.  Dc0  3ager^  |)unt)  \)at  bte  ^u^  be^  53auer^  gebtffen.  2. 
(Einc  ^Iappcrfd)lan3e  \)at  ben  (5o()n  be^  33auer^  tjorgepcrn  gc* 
biiTen,  al^  er  auf  bem  33erge  ^eibelbeeren  pfliidte.  3.  Xa$ 
^iub  greift  nac^  fctncm  ^tlbe  m  epiec^el  4.  3)er  foliiti'tk^ 
ner  ^at  ben  Xafc^enbieb  ergriffen,  glei^  nad)bem  er  bae  ®elb  gc^ 
fto^len  ^atte.  5.  3^  begreife  ni^t,  n^arum  gdebri^  noc^  ntc^t 
an  une  gefc^rieben  bau  6.  Ser  bat  gcpftffen?  7.  3Ber  ^at 
in  ba^  ^ud^  gefc^nitten?  8.  Der  ©c^neiber  fc^neibet  bae  2:ud^. 
9.  $err  ^arfunfel  ^at  bent  ^aufmann  800  Xblr.  gelieben.  10. 
^err  $)?aumcr  bat  in  feinem  53riefe  fetne  9kife  nac^  bem  3fiiefen^ 
gcbirgc  gan^  lebbaft  befc^rieben.  11. 1)cv  ^auer  treibt  ba^  35ie^ 
auf  (to)  bie  SBeibe.  12.  Sie  gie^en  Del  in^  Seucr  ("  you  add 
fuel  to  the  flame").  13.  3Der  ^eUncr  bat  ben  SSein  in  bie 
©Icifer  gcgoffen.  14.  ®ie  l^aben  ba^  3ict  ni^t  getroffen,  ®ic 
l^aben  p  bo^  gef^offen.  15.  $eute  ift  ba^  SJ^ufeum  gefd)lofiJ 
fen.  16.  ^err  53urdbarbt  bat  geftern  fein  ^ortemonnaie  i^erlo^ 
ten.  17.  35ier  $ferbe  jieben  ben  SBagen.  18.  $err  ^raun  f)at 
beute  eincn  SBccbfcl  »on  600  Xf)Ir.  auf  ^errn  2)ietri^  gc^ogen. 
19.  Die  Solfen  jieben  (move)  na^  (Siiben.  20.  Die  (Solbai? 
ten  baben  febr  tapfer  gefo^ten.  21.  Der  ^orbmad)er  flid)t  tu 
nen  ^orb.  22.  Wlaxk  bat  einen  febr  fd)onen  ^ranj  gefloc^ten. 
23.  dx  bob  ben  ^orb  auf  feine  (^^ulter.  24.  dx  er^ob  bie 
(Etimme  unb  f^rie  urn  (for)  ^iilfe.  25.  Der  Dieb  ()at  gelogcn 
unb  ben  ^aufmann  betrogen. 

Vocabulary. 


S)cr  ^crb,  —t^,pl.  ^i5rBe,  basket. 
,,    Sorbmad^cr,  — 6,  basket-maker. 
,t    ^ran5,  — §,  />/.  ^ranjc,  crown, 

garland,  wreath. 
n    ^olijci'biener,  — 9>,  pi  — ,  police- 
man. 
II     ©pieQCl,  — 9i,pl.  — ,  mirror. 


Xer  2:afd;enbtcb,  — c§,  pickpocket. 

„  ©ilbcn,  — §,  south. 

„  gfJorbcn,  —8,  north. 

„  SBagcn,  —8,  pi  —,  wagon. 

„  SBcc^fcI,  — «,  pi.  —  biU  of  ex- 
change, draft. 

„  5Bcin,  — 0,  i)/.  — e,  wine. 


84 


IRREGULAR   VERBS    (CONTINUED). 


S)ic  93ccre,;)/.  — n,  berry. 

"  ^etbelbeere,  — ,  whortleberry. 

„  ©(flange,  —,pl.  — n,  snake. 

r,  ^k^^erf^Iange,  rattlesnake. 

„  ^u^,  — ,  pi.  ^uf)e,  cow. 

f,  9^eife,  — ,pl.  — en,  journey,  trip. 

n  @d>lt{ter,  — ,pl.  — n,  shoulder. 

Tt  @timme,  — ,pl.  — n,  voice,  [ure. 

f,  SSeibe,  — ,pl.  — n,  meadow,  past- 

*j  SSolf e,  — ,  pi.  — n,  cloud. 


2)aS  S5ilb,  —t^,pl.  — cr,  image. 

„    geucr,  — g,  pi.  — ,  fire. 

„    £)el, — e8,7>/.  — e,  oil. 

„  ^ortemonnate',  —^,pl.  —8  {pro* 
nounced  port-mo-nay'),  purse, 
pocket-book. 

,;     SStei>,  —t^,pl.  —t,  cattle. 

tt     S^^h  — ^^f  P^-  — ^r  mark. 
Seb^aft  {adj.  and  adv.),  lively,  spirited. 
9^ad^bem  (conj.\  after. 


Grammatical. 

1.  Irregular  verbs  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  classes  have 
the  same  vowel  in  the  hnperfect  tense  as  in  the  j>er- 
fect  jparticiple. 

2.  The  radical  vowel  in  verbs  of  the  fifth  class  is  al- 
ways Ct ;  in  those  of  the  sixth  class  it  is  usually  ic  or  C. 

3.  The  following  table  shows  the  vowel  changes : 


Present 
Infinitive. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Perfect 
Participle. 

No.  of 
Verbs. 

Fifth 
Class. 

ie, 

h 

it, 

40. 

Sixth 
Class. 

ic, 

%etc. 

52. 

4.  Irregular  Verbs  in  the  fifth  class  : 


Present  Indicative, 

Imperf. 

Perfect 

Present  Infinitive. 

2d  and  Sd  Persons. 

Indicat. 

Participle 

tcif ^cn,  to  bite. 

(formed  regularly.) 

mr 

gcbiffcn* 

greifsen,  to  grasp,  seize  (after). 

U                          (( 

grtff, 

gegriffcit. 

begreif  sen,  to  comprehend. 

((                          (C 

begriff, 

begrtffcn. 

crgretten,  to  seize^lay  hold  of. 

((               il 

ergriff, 

ergriffen. 

^feif^cn,  to  whistle. 

((                  a 

m. 

ge^flffcn. 

fd;netb*en,  to  cut. 

((                  t( 

fd;mtt, 

gef(^nitten« 

j^Iei^^cn,  to  split. 

((                  (( 

m% 

gef|3ttffen. 

Icif)icn,  to  lend,  loan. 

(formed  regularly.) 

im, 

gcHei^Ctt* 

fd^reib^en,  to  write. 

((              (( 

fc^rieb, 

gef^riebeii. 

befc^reib'=en,  to  describe. 

11              (( 

bef^rieb, 

befc^rieben. 

fd)ret«=en,  to  cry  (out). 

li              (( 

f^rie, 

gefd^rieen. 

treib»en,  to  drive. 

((              it 

trieb, 

gctrieben. 

IRREGULAR   VERBS    (CONTINUED^. 


B5 


5.  Irregular  verbs  of  the  sixth  class  : 


Present  Infinitive. 

Present  Indicative^ 
2d  and  M  Persons. 

Imperfect 
Indicat. 

Perfect 

Participle. 

giC^=en,  to  pour. 

(formed  regularly.) 

0Of?. 

Ocooffcn. 

fc^ie^*cn,  to  shoot. 

u                  n 

fd^og, 

gefd)o[|en. 

fc^Iie^^eii,  to  close,  shut. 

((               {( 

W^% 

gcfd^Iojfcn. 

»erlier'*en,  to  lose. 

((                          (C 

ijcrlor, 

bcrlorcn. 

jic^^en,  to  draw. 

((                  (( 

m. 

gcjogcn. 

\t^Uv[,  to  fight. 

bufiOT,     crftt^t, 

mt, 

gCfOt^tCtt* 

ftec^t^en,  to  braid. 

„  fltc^tft,     „  flic^t, 

fTod^t, 

gcflod;tcii. 

^eb*en,  to  lift,  raise. 

(formed  regularly.) 

^ob, 

gc^obcn. 

lilg^en,  to  lie. 

((             (( 

M, 

gelogen. 

fectriig^en,  to  deceive. 

(t              (( 

betrog, 

bctrogcn. 

6.  The  definite  article  is  omitted  Jjefore  names  of  the 

points  of  the  compass  {see  §  55,2, 2) : 

S)ic  SSoIfcn  gie^cn  gegen  9^orbcn,     The  clouds  are  moving  towards  the 

north. 

7.  Some  foreign  words  retain  much  or  all  of  their 
original  declension : 


Singular. 
jDaS  ^ortemonnaic. 
S)e8  ^ortemonnatc*g» 
2)cm  ^ortemonnaic. 
S)a8  ^ortemonnaie. 


Plural. 
2)ie  ^ortcmonnaie*^* 
2)cr  ^ortcmonnaic*^* 
2)cn  ^ortcmonnate*^» 
2)ic  ^ortemonnaic*^* 


Exercise  52. 
1.  The  dog  has  bitten  the  child.  2.  A  rattlesnake 
bit  the  peasant-woman  this  morning.  3.  The  policeman 
seized  (ergreifen)  the  pickpocket  immediately  after  he 
had  stolen  the  pocket-book  from  Mr.Wieland.  4.  There 
goes  the  whistle  I  (e^  pfetft !)  5.  The  cook  is  cutting  the 
bread.  6.  Professor  Hiiusser,  in  his  History  of  Germany, 
has  described  the  battle  of  Leipsic  in  a  very  spirited 
manner  (leb^aft).  7.  The  peasant  has  driven  the  cattle 
to  the  pasture.  8. "  He  has  only  added  fuel  to  the  flame." 
9.  The  hunter  has  shot  four  hares  this  morning.  10. 
The  Library  and  the  Museum  are  closed  to-day.  11. 
John  lost  his  German  Grammar  yesterday.  12.  Yes, 
but  he  found  it  this  morning  on  his  brother's  table.    13. 


86  IRREGULAR   VERBS    (CONTINUED). 

Only  one  horse  is  drawing  the  wagon.  14.  I  shall 
make  a  draft  (eineu  2Ged)fe(  iki)tn)  on  Mr.  Niedner  to-day 
for  five  hundred  and  seventy-five  dollars.  15.  The  bas- 
ket-maker has  made  (flec^ten)  two  baskets  this  morning. 
16.  Mary  has  made  (flec^ten)  a  beautiful  garland.  17. 
They  are  crying  for  help !  18.  The  pickpocket  has  sto- 
len three  thousand  and  five  hundred  dollars  from  the 
merchant.  19.  The  German  soldiers  have  fought  very 
bravely  in  the  battle. 


LESSON  XXVII. 

IRKEGULAR  VERBS  OF  SEVENTH  CLASS.  RECAPITULATION  OF  IRREG.  VERBS. 

Srciunbfiinfsigftc  ^ufgak* 

1.  SBiffen  (Bte,  tt)o  $err  33rin!ett^ofer  ttjo^nt?  2.  9^ein,  ic^ 
tt)ei§  nxdjt,  tt?o  er  mo^nt  3.  3c|  wu^te  nic^t,  bag  $err  ©c^one^ 
berg  in  53erlm  ift.  4.  ^ennen  (Sie  §errn  ^rofeffor  Xrautmann  ? 
6.  5^^  ja,  mx  fannten  ii)n  f^on,  al^  tt)ir  in  !I)eutfc^lant)  tt)aren, 
6»  3Bte  nennen  <£te  btefe  ^lumen  ?  7.  3)tefe  ift  eine  ^^actnt^e,* 
unb  jene  ift  dn  35ergigmeinmd)t»*  8.  2Bu^  brennt?  9.  !Da^ 
$au^  gegenitber  un^  brenitt  (is  on  fire).  10*  2)er  ^o^  ^at  ben 
^affce  gebramtt  (roasted).  11.  |)err  2Beigmanbel  ^at  3^nen 
einen  S3nef  »on  ^errn  Cramer  in  ^kn  gebrai^t.  12,  $err 
|)eibel  brac^te  9lad^rtc^t  »on  unferm  D^eim  in  SiRagbeburg,  13, 
tarl,  tt)e{§t  bu,  n)0  mein  ^leiftift  ift  ?  14.  9^ein,  i^  ^abe  i^n 
^eute  ni^t  gefe!)en,  15.  ^aben  (5ie  bie  5^ac^rid)t  »on  ^merifa 
in  ber  ^entigen  ^ieftgen  3eitung  gelefen  ?  16.  ^dn,  ii^  ^aU  bie 
i^eutige  3^itung  noc^  ni^t  gefe^en. 

Grammatical. 

1.  Irregular  verbs  of  the  seventh  class  follow,  in  con- 
jugation, partly  the  laws  of  regular,  and  partly  those 
of  irregular  verbs. 

2.  Present  and  imperfect  tenses  of  totffcil,  to  know  : 

*  See  page  436. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  (CONTINUED). 


87 


Present  Tense. 
Id^    iDCif,  I        know, 

bu  VitX^tf  thou  knowest. 

cr   toei^,  he     knows. 

t»ir  n>  i  j  f  *  Cn,  we  know, 
i^r  tD  i  i  f  *  Ct,  you  know. 
flC  teifi^Cn,    they  know. 


Imperfect  Tense. 
id;  lUU^=tC,        1       knew. 

bu  tt?u^*tC|'t,  thouknewest 
cr  tt)Ut3*tC,     he     knew. 
n?ir  t»  u  ^  '  ten,   we     knew, 
i^r  ID  u  {3  *  tCt,    you    knew, 
fie  tt)  U  ^  *  ten,  they  knew. 


3.  Irregular  verbs  of  the  seventh  class : 


Present  Infinitive. 

Present  Indicative, 

Imperfect 

Perfect 

2d  and  Sd  Persons. 

Indicative. 

Participle, 

bring-cn,  to  bring. 

(formed  regularly.) 

hta^'At, 

qt'hta6^''t 

ben!*cu,  to  think. 

U                          (( 

bad;4e, 

ge*ba(^4. 

brenn*cn,  to  burn. 

<(              (( 

Brann4c, 

gc*bronn*t. 

!cnn*cn,  to  know. 

((               (( 

!ann4e, 

ge-fann*t. 

nenn*cn,  to  name. 

((                      n 

nann4c, 

ge*nann*t. 

n)iff*en,  to  know. 

bu  njetgt,  cr  tceifj. 

n}u^4e, 

ge^lDufj't. 

4.  To  know,  meaning  to  he  acquainted  with,  is  rendered 

by  Icnncn. 

5.  General  view  of  the  changes  the  irregular  verbs  in 
all  seven  classes  undergo  in  forming  the  principal  parts : 


Class. 

Present.    Imperf.    Partic. 

Examples. 

No. 

Ist 

i  (or  C),     a,             U  (or  O). 

btnb=»cn,    banb,      gc^bunb^en. 

45. 

2d 
3d 
4th 

c,           a,         c. 
0,          It,         a. 

a,           tc  (or  i),  0. 

gcb^cn,     gab,        gc*gcb*cn. 
fd;(ag*en,  fc^tug,    gcfd^tag^cn. 
l)alt»cn,    ^ielt,       ge^alt^en. 

14. 
10. 
14. 

6th 
6th 

ci,            i  (or  it),  i  or  (it). 
it(t,etc.),0,             0. 

bci§=cn,    bi^,        ge*bi[f=cn. 
gicg^en,    gofi,       gc*goff*cn. 

40. 
52. 

7th 

anomalous. 

bring*en,  brat^*te,  gc*bra(!^*t. 

16. 

Total  number  of  i 

rrftgiilar  verbs  ... 

191. 

6.  Examples  of  the  seven  classes  of  irregular  verbs : 

1.  First  Class.  ]6rc^*cn,  itttt^,  gc^bro(!^*cn. 

Binb^en,        5anb,        ge^Blinb^cn.  f^rcd^-cn,  f^rad;,  gc^^ro^^cn. 

ftub^cn,         fcinb,         ge*fitnb*cn.  brefc^^cn,  brafcft,  gc^brcfci^-en. 

fmgscn,         fang,         gc*fung*cn.  net)m»en,  na^m,  gc*nomm*cn. 

bc*Qtnn*cn,    be^jiann,    bc*gonn*cn.  fterb^cn,  flarb,  gc*fiorb*en. 

gc*n>inn*en,   gc*tt>ann,   gc*tt)onn=en.  trcff^en,  traf,  ge4roff«en. 

lpinn»en,       ij>ann,       gc*f))onn*cn.  tt)erf<cn,  tuarf,  gc»n>orf*en. 


88 


IREEGULAR   VERBS    (CONTINUED). 


2.  Second  Class. 


e[f*en, 
frei>en, 
meff  sen 
Derge[f==cn, 
tret=en, 


ga0, 

kg, 

mag, 

tergag, 

trat. 


ge^gc6-eu. 

ge4ef*en. 

ge^fed^en. 

geg-eff^en. 

ge^freff-en. 

ge*me[f*en. 

»erge[f^en» 

gctret*en. 


jrai^en, 

fd;Iag:=en, 

trag*en, 

tt)af(^^en, 


fant|<en, 
l^altsen, 
fd^Iaf-cn, 
ruf*cn, 


3.  Third  Class. 

grufi,  ge^grab=en. 

fd;Iug,  ge.fcl;lag*en. 

trug,  ge4rag=en. 

n?u[^,  ge*iT?afd;*en. 

4.  Fourth  Class. 

fing,  gc^ang^cn. 

l^ielt,  ge^alt^en. 

fc^Itef,  ge*f(^laf*en. 

ricf,  ge*ruf=en. 


5.  i'T/i^A  aass. 


^ei^'-en, 

gretHn, 
j^netb*en, 
f(^reib*en, 
treib^en, 


fctjnitt, 
jc^rteb, 
trieb. 


ge=]biff=en. 

ge-griffsen. 

ge*fd;mtt*en. 

ge4c^rieb*en, 

ge*trieb*en. 


6.  Sixth  Class. 


gic^^en, 

fec^t^en, 


Mr 

toc^t, 


ge^goff=en. 

ge>fc^o[[.en. 
ge=5og*en. 
ge*foc^t*en. 
ge^ob^en. 


7.  Seventh  Class. 

bad;4e,     ge*ba^*t. 
brann^te,  ge^brann^. 
faunae,    ge^fann4. 
nann4e,   ge=nann*t 
n)ug4c,    ge*iT)uj3t. 


bent^en, 

brenn*cn, 

fcnn*en, 

itcuiven, 

tDiff^en, 


With  most  irregular  verbs,  the  original  length  of  the  radical  vowel 
is  preserved  in  all  the  principal  parts : 
1 .  Vowel  long. 


Iej*en, 
trag*en, 


lag, 
trug. 


gc-ftolOI^^n. 

ge4ef*en. 
gc4rag*en. 


2.  Vowel  short. 

f^tnn-en,    f^jann,       ge-f^onn'cn. 

freff^en,      frag,  ge^reff^en. 

brenn^en,    brann4c,     ge*brann4. 


Rem.  2.  With  some  verbs  the  length  of  the  radical  vowel  is  changed  in  one 
j)r  more  of  the  derived  principal  parts.  The  change  is  more  frequently  from 
iong  to  shorty  than  it  is  from  short  to  long  : 

htxpm,      Uf^,      ge*Mff-en.     I  nC^ttt^en,    nal^nt,       gc^notttnt^en. 

fd;neib*en,    fc^nitt,  ge^c^mtt^cn.  |  trcff-en,      traf,  gc4roff=en. 

Rem.  3.  In  the  sixteenth  century  the  participle  of  cffClt  was  formed  regu- 
larly gccfftn*  This  was  then  contracted  into  (JCffCll*  In  the  seventeenth  cen- 
tury another  gc=  was  added,  by  false  analogy,  and  hence  the  double  prefix 

ill  geocffen. 

Exercise  54. 
1.  Are  you  acquainted  with  General  von  Lichten- 
stein?  2.  No,  I  do  not  know  him.  3.  What  do  you 
call  {mt  nennen  'Bit)  this  fish?  4.  That  fish  is  a  trout. 
5.  The  fire  does  not  burn.  6.  The  cook  has  not  yet 
roasted  (kennen)  the  coffee.     7.  The  house  of  Mr.  Kraft 


VERBS    WITH  fcill;  TO    BE,  AS    AUXILIARS".  89 

is  on  fire  (brfnnen).  8.  Do  you  know  where  Mr.  Ruprecht 
is?  9.  He  is  now  in  Munich.  10.  Charles,  dost  thou 
know  when  Alexander  von  Humboldt  died  ?  11.  Alex- 
ander von  Humboldt  died  in  Berlin  on  the  sixth  of 
May,  1859.  12.  Children,  do  you  know  how  old  Schil- 
ler was  when  he  died  ?  13.  He  was  forty-five  years  and 
six  months  old.  14.  When  did  you  meet  Mr.  Rosen- 
berg? 15.  We  met  him  this  morning  in  (auf)  the  street. 
16.  Where  didst  thou  find  the  German  grammar?  17. 
I  found  it  on  my  brother's  table. 


LESSON  XXVIII. 

VERBS   WITH   fcin,  TO   BE,  AS   AUXILIARY. 

Sr  ifl  fe^r  retc^  gewefen,  He  has  been  very  rich. 

@r  {ft  arm  gen^orten,  He  has  become  poor. 

dx  ift  md)  ^aufe  gegangen,  He  has  gone  home. 

Sr  ttJar  nac^  ^aufe  gcgangen,  He  had  gone  home. 

©r  tt)irb  n)a^rfd)einli^  md)  fcer  He  will  probably  have  gone 
©tabt  gegangen  fein,  to  the  city. 

giinfunbfiinfjigftc  ^(ufgak* 

1.  Sr  ijl  ju  ^aufe.  2.  dx  wax  ^u  ^aufe.  3.  dx  ift  p 
^aufe  gewefen.  4.  dx  wax  ^u  §aufe  getrefen.  5.  dx  mirb  ^u 
^aufe  getrefen  fein.  6.  Da^  ^Better  ij^  je^t  fcfjr  ()etg  gctrortcu. 
7.  ^err  ^altfd^mtbt  ijl  ^aufmann  gca^orben.  8.  Da^  2Bct^ 
ter  wax  \d)on  fe^r  f)eig  gcn?orben,  al^  wix  nad^  3talien  gingen. 
9.  2Bie  jtnb  8ie  »on  ber  (Stabt  gefommen?  10.  2Bir  fmb  gc= 
fa^ren.  11.  griebrt^  i|l  ^u  gug  (on  foot)  na^  bcr  (5tabt  gc^ 
gangen,  aber  2Bi(^elm  ifl  gcritten.  12.  Da^  ^>fcrb  ift  iibcr  ben 
©raben  (ditch)  gefprungen.  13.  3)er  33leiftift  lag  auf  bent 
^if^.  14.  X)k  33u^cr  tiegen  auf  ben  Xifd)en.  15.  3)a^  ^int» 
wax  f^on  geftorben,  d^  ber  33ater  nac^  ^aufe  fam.  16.  Dent 
3dger  ijl  fein  .?)unb  nac^  bem  2i5albe  gefolgt.  17.  3c^  werbc 
nac^  bem  SJiufeum  ge^en,  aber  §err  ^ranjler  wirb  waljrf^ein;* 
li^  f^on  na^  $aufe  gegangen  fein. 


90 


VERBS   WITH   fCtn,  TO  BE. 


Grammatical. 

1.  Most  'intransitive  verbs  take  {ciu,  to  he,  instead  of 
l^aben,  to  have,  as  their  auxiliary. 

Rem.  1.  The  greater  part  of  intransitive  verbs  are  primitive  or  derivative 
irregular  verbs. 

Rem.  2.  Nearly  all  regular  verbs  and  many  irregular  verbs  are  transitivf^ 
and,  as  such,  take  !(iaben  for  their  auxiliary. 

Rem.  3.  All  impersonal  verbs  take  l^atJCll  as  their  auxiliary. 

Rem.  4.  It  will  be  indicated  in  the  vocabularies  hereafter  when  the  verbs 
take  fcill  as  their  auxiliary. 

2.  Indicative  mood  of  fciH,  to  he: 

Imperfect  Tense. 

i^  toar,         I      was. 

bu   matsft,  thou  wast, 

cr    toar,  he     was. 

tt>tr  tD  a  r  *  en,  we    were, 

t^r  XoaX'^i,  you  were, 

fte   marten,  they  were. 

Pluperfect  Tense. 
I  had  been,  etc. 

\^  toar        gcttjcfcn. 
bu  toarft       gctDcjen. 
cr   toar  gctuefen. 

\x>\x  xoaX'tVL  g e n? e i e n, 
\{)X  Xoax*i  getr^ejen. 
fic   ti)  a  r  *  cil  g  c  tt)  c  i  c  n. 

Second  Future  Tense. 
I  shall  have  been,  etc. 

\^  tocrbe  gctocfeit     fein* 

bu  totrft  getocfcu  fcin* 

cr   totrb  gemcfeu  [cm* 

ttJtr  tr>  c  r  b  *  en  g  c  tu  c  j  c  u  jctn^ 

i^riDcrb^et  gchjcfen  \tvx* 

fie   tt>  e  r  b  *  en  g  e  UJ  e  j  e  u  f  ein* 

3.  Indicative  mood  of  tterbcil,  2^o  hecome: 


Present  Tense. 

i^ 

IVX,    I       am. 

bu 

(lift,    thou  art. 

er 

tft,      he     is. 

XQXX 

finb,  we     are. 

i^r  fcit),  you  are. 

fic 

finb,  they  are. 

Perfect  Tense. 

I  have  been,  etc. 

ic^  bin  ncttJCfcn^ 

bu 

(lift  gctDcfeu. 

cr 

tft     g  e  n?  e  j  e  u. 

ir»ir 

ftnb  gciDcfeu, 

i^r 

fctb  gcujcjcu. 

fie 

fmb  gciDcfcu. 

First  Future  Tense. 

I  shall  be,  etc. 

^ 

tocrbe        fctn* 

bu 

loirft          fcin* 

cr 

ttirb          fcin* 

vcir  ti3crb*en  fcin* 

i^r 

n)erb==et   fctn. 

fic 

h>crb*en  fein* 

Present  Tense. 
\6}  toerbsC,         I       become, 
bu  tUttft,  thou  becomest. 

cr  tDttb,  he      becomes. 

Wir  h)  c  r  b  *  en,  we  "  become, 
t^r  n)  c  r  b  =  et,  you  become. 
<ic  »crb*en,   they  become. 


Imperfect  Tense. 
tcf)  ttnrbsC,  I       became, 

bu  tD  u  r  b  *  eft,  thou  becamesL 
cr  ix>  u  r  b  *  e,     he     became. 
tt>ir  iD  u  r  b  *  en,  we    became, 
i^r  tDurb^et,    you    became, 
jic  tt>urb*en,  they  became. 


VEJIBS   WITH   (Cin,  TO    BE,  AS   AUXILIARY. 


91 


Perfect  Tense. 
I  have  become,  etc, 

tt^  bin  gettjorbcn* 
bu  t)tft  gctijorben. 
er  ift  gctDorben. 
totr  ftnb  gctDorbcn. 
ifjr  f cib  g  c  tt>  0  r  b  e  n. 
fte  finb  gctt)orben. 

First  Future  Tense. 
I  shall  become,  etc. 

i^  tocrb=c      ujcrbcn* 
bu  toirft  tDcrben. 

cr  iDirb  tcerben. 

tDtr  t»  c  r  b  ^  en  tocrbcn* 
i^r  h)crb  =  ct  tt)erben. 
fie  tDcrb^cn  n?crbcn. 


Pluperfect  Tense. 
I  had  become,  etc. 

id?  tear  ficttorbcn* 
bu  toarft  gctDorbcn. 
er  tear  gemorben. 
toir  n?ar==cn  gen?  or  ben. 
i^r  h)ar*ct  gehjorben. 
fte  n)  at*  en  geh)  or  ben. 

Second  Future  Tense. 
I  shall  have  become,  etc. 

\^  mxh't  gcttjorbcn  fefn. 
bu  ttirft  getDorben  feim 

cr  toirb  g  e  tD  0  r  b  e  u  fcin. 

n?ir  tt>  e  r  b  *  en  g  c  n?  o  r  b  e  n  fctn. 
i^r  werb*ct  geh)orben  jcin» 
fie  tt)  e  r  b  *  en  g  e  ti)  o  r  b  e  n  jcin* 


4.  The  indicative  mood  of  lottllticn,  to  come 


Present  Tense, 

id)  fomnt=C,  I       come, 

bu  f  0  m  m  *  ft,  thou  comest. 

er  fomm  =  t,  he     comes, 
ttir  fomm  =  cn,  we     come, 

ibr  f  oiiim*t,  you  come. 

fie  1 0  OT  m  ==  en,  they  come. 

Perfect  Tense. 
I  have  come,  etc. 

{6}  bin  oefommem 
bu  bift  get  0  mm  en. 
cr  ift  getommeu. 
trir  finb  gefommeu. 
i^r  fcib  gefommeu. 
fie  finb  gefommeu. 

First  Future  Tense. 
I  shall  come,  etc. 

id;  toerbse       fommen. 
bu  toirft  fommen. 

er  toirb  f  c  m  m  e  u. 

iTjtr  ii^  e  I  b  *  en  fommen. 
i&r  n?  e  r  b  *  ct  fommen. 
fie  tt)crb*en  fommen. 


Imperfect  Tense, 
id;  fant,  I         came, 

bu  fam*ft,    thou  camest. 
er  fant,  he      came. 

n?ir  f  a 411  *  en,  we  came, 
ibr  fam*t,  you  came, 
fie  fam^en,  they  came. 

Pluperfect  Tense. 
I  had  come,  etc. 

\6}  tear        gefomnten* 

bu  n)ar*ft  gefommen. 
er  ttar  gefommen. 
trir  tt?  a  r  *  en  gefommen. 
\[)x  xoax't  gefommeu. 
fie  tt)ar*cn  gefommen. 

Second  Future  Tense. 
I  shall  have  come,  etc. 

id)  tocrb-c  oc^ow^^f" 
bn  toirft  gefommen 

er  toirb  gefommen 

tinr  ujcrb^en  gefommen 
ibr  n3crb*et  gefommen 
fie  tuerb* en  gefommen 


fctn. 
fein, 
fein. 
fetn* 
fein. 
fciiu 


92 


VERBS   WITH   fcln,  TO    BE,  AS   AUXILIARY. 


Imperf.  Indie. 

Per/.  Part. 

ttJar, 

getoefen. 

tDurbc, 

gett)orben. 

fid, 

gefaflen. 

fu^r, 

gefa^rcn. 

m^, 

gegangen. 

tarn, 

getommcn. 

log. 

getegen. 

t^rang, 

gef^rungen 

ftarb, 

geftorben. 

folgte, 

gcfolgt. 

5.  Some  intransitive  verbs  (having  f ellt  as  auxiliary) : 

Class.  Present  Infinitive. 

2.  fetit,  to  be. 
I.  toerb^^en,  to  become. 
4.  faH-en,  to  fall. 

3.  fa(;r^en,  to  ride. 

4.  ge()=en,  to  go. 

1.  !onim*en,  to  come. 

2.  lieg^etT,  to  lie, 
1.  ||3rttTg*en,  to  leap,  spring. 
1.  fterB^en,  to  die. 

Heg.      folg^en,  to  follow. 

Rem.  1.  fatten  and  fa^rCU  take  the  umlaut  in  the  2d  and  3d  persons  of  the 
present  singular. 

Bern.  2.  ^a^ttll  means  to  ride  in  a  carriage  or  other  means  of  conveyance. 
QliCttCn  means  to  ride  on  a  horse. 

Exercise  56. 
1.  Has  Mr.  Franz  been  here  ?  2.  No,  he  has  not  been 
here.  3.  The  weather  has  become  very  cold.  4.  Where 
is  Mr.  Stromberg?  5.  He  has  gone  to  Magdeburg  to^ 
day.  6.  Did  Mr.  Meyerheim  go  to  Potsdam  in  his  car. 
riage  (fa^ren)  ?     7.  No,  he  went  on  horseback  (retten). 

8.  We  went  to  Charlottenburg  on  foot  this  morning. 

9.  Mr.  Wiedner  has  not  come  home  yet.  10.  Cologne 
lies  on  the  left  bank  of  the  Rhine.  11.  Your  German 
newspaper  is  lying  on  the  table.  12.  The  daughter  of 
Mr.  Friedlander  had  already  died  before  (e()e)  he  came 
home.  13.  Whom  do  you  wish?  14. 1  am  looking  for 
Mr.  Wiegand.  15.  He  has  gone  to  Dresden  to-day  j  he 
will  be  here  to-morrow. 


LESSON  XXIX. 

THE    INFINITIVE    MOOD. 


2)cr  53rtef  tft  f^wer  p  (efen, 

SBaeiftpt^un? 

2)a^  ^au0  ift  au  t)erfaufen, 


The  letter  is  hard  to  read. 
He  wishes  to  see  the  book. 
What  is  to  be  done? 
The  house  is  for  sale. 


THE   INFINITIVE    MOOD.  93 

3t^  V^xtt  jte  (tncjcn,  I  heard  them  sing. 

@ie  mac^en  mid)  lac^en,  You  make  me  laugh. 

2Bir  iie()cn  fpa^ie'rcn,  We  are  going  to  take  a  walk, 

^r  ift  fpa^ieren  gefal)ren,  He  has  gone  to  take  a  ride. 

©icknunbfiinfsigftc  ^ufpk« 

1.  Der  6c^neit)er  ^at  i)erfpro^en,  mtr  ten  ^od  \)cntc  Tlox^ 
gen  ju  fc^icfen.  2,  d^  ift  mcine  5lbftd)t,  iibcrmorgcn  nac^  (Sr^ 
langen  ^u  ge{)en.  3.  3^  ttJiinfc^e  mit  ^errn  (2d)norr  ^u  fpre^ 
c^en.  4.  (Sr  ift  augenblidlid)  md)t  gu  §aufe»  5.  S^  mxt  fpdt ; 
e^  ift  bie  (;od)fte  3ctt  (high  time),  na^  $aufe  ju  get)en.  6, 
2)icfe^  §au^  ift  fogleid^  ju  »er!aufcn.  7.  ^ier  jtnb  mcr  mo^ 
blirte  Binimcr  ^u  »ermictl)en.  8.  Sine  ^errf^aftlic^e  2Bo()nung 
nebft  ©a^  unb  SBafferleitung  ifl  in  ber  Seip^iger  <Stra§e  gu  »cr^ 
mietl)en.  9.  2Bir  f)aben  feine  Qdi  ju  »erlieren.  10.  Slnftatt 
ba^  $au0  ju  befallen,  {)at  $err  ©igel  e^  i?er!auft.  11.  gdeb^ 
ri^  £raft  ift  na^  2Sien  gegangcn,  urn  fcincn  ©rogi?ater  ju  bc:* 
fuc^en.  12.  ®ufia»  3)Zii^l^cimer  ift  nad)  53crlin  gegangcn,  urn 
auf  (at)  ber  bortigen  Uniycrfitdt  gu  ftubiren.  13.  2)a^  ^an^ 
d^en  ifl  eine  fd)le^te  @cn)cf)nbeit.  14.  3Ba^  ift  ju  t^un? 
2^eine  beutfd)e  ©rammatif  ift  ni^t  ^u  finben.  15.  Tlaxk  unb 
^at^arine  lerncn  je^t  ba^  ^lamer  fpielcn.  16.  (£inb  8ic  ^eute 
5D^orgen  fpa^icren  gegangen  ?  17.  D^iein,  ic^  bin  geritten.  18, 
^cute  n?erben  unr  fpagieren  fa^rcn.  19.  3Barum  bleibft  bu 
ft^en  ?     20.  (ix  lobt  ba^  33ud),  o()ne  e^  gelefcn  ^u  ^laben. 

Vocabulary. 


S)ie   ^tftrf^t,  —,pl.  —en,  intention. 
„    33en)e'cjung,  — ,pL  — en,  motion, 

exercise. 
„  ®Q.\voi)n'  \)C\t,  — ,  pi.  — en,  habit. 
„  Unitjcrfitat' ,  — ,  pi.  — en,  univer- 
sity, [ter- works. 
w  SSafferleitnng,  — ,  pi.  —en,  wa- 
I,    SlSojjnung, — ,pl. — en,  residence, 

suite  of  rooms,  apartn»ents. 
„    ^t\t, — ,pl. — en,  time. 
2)a8  ®a8,  — e8,i>/.  — c,  gas. 


5(ngenbn(flid),  for  the  moment. 
3)orticj,  of  that  phice.        [noblemen). 
^crrfAaftlid?,  fine  and  spacious  (fit  for 
^KobUrt',  furnished. 
(Sclig,  blessed. 
e(^Ied;t,  bad. 

©oglcic^  (adv.),  immediately,    [with. 
^fJebfi  (prep,  with  dat.),  with,  together 
9?and)cn  (rer/.),  to  smoke. 
(S^ajic'ren  (see  6, 2,  p.  9r>). 
25ermie't^en  (reg.X  to  rent,  let. 


i^4 


THE   INFINITIVE   MOOD. 


5. 

SSIeiben  (fein  aux.),  to  remain. 

blicB, 

getlietjen, 

2. 

®i^en  (fein  aux.),  to  sit. 

faB, 

gcfe[fen. 

6.» 

2;^un,  to  do. 

t^at, 

get^an. 

Grammatical. 
1.  In  German,  as  in  English,  the  Infinitive  Mood  has 
two  tenses,  the  Present  and  the  Perfect : 


Present  Tense. 
Wtl'trX,  to  love. 
bau=en,    to  build, 
finb^en,   to  find, 
ge^^en,    to  go. 
njerb^en,  to  become, 
fein,        to  be. 


Perfect  Tense. 
gcKcit     \i^tXif  to  have  loved, 
gebaut      ^aben,  to  have  built, 
gefunben  ^aben,  to  have  found, 
gcgangen  fctlt,     to  have  gone, 
genjorben  fein,      to  have  become, 
gettjefen    fein,      to  have  been. 


2.  The  Infinitwe  is  usually  preceded  by  JU,  to  : 

3^  tDilnfcE)e  nttt  t^m  y\  f:^rec^en,     I  wish  to  speak  with  him. 
S)er  33rief  ift  fc^tuer  yx  tefen.  The  letter  is  hard  to  read. 

SBir  fatten  genug  ju  t^un,  We  had  enough  to  do. 

3.  While  in  English  both  the  present  participle  and 
the  infinitive  mood  are  used  as  verbal  nouns,  in  German 
only  the  Infinitive  is  thus  used  : 

2>a^  9lCtlCtt  tjl  etne  angene^me    Riding  is  an  agreeable  exercise. 

SSetDegung, 
®C5Ctt  ift  feliger  at§  nel)men,  It  is  more  blessed  to  give  than  to  re- 

ceive. 
Rem.  The  Infinitive,  used  as  a  noun,  takes  the  neuter  gender :  S)(I§  dtcttCtt* 

4.  The  Infinitive  (with  JU)  may  be  preceded  by  the 
prepositions  auftatt,  of)nc,  Utti: 

Slnftatt  gU  ge^en,  bleibt  er,  Instead  oi  going,  he  remains. 

(Er  lobt  baS  Su(^,  o^ne  eg  gelefen    He  praises  the  book,  without  having 
P  ^aben,  read  it. 

Rem.  The  preposition  Uttt  is  used  before  the  Infinitive :  (1),  to  express 
purpose  or  desire ;  (2),  after  adjectives  which  are  preceded  by  JU  {too),  or 
which  are  followed  by  gCltUg  {enough) : 
@r  ift  nac^  ber  @tabt  gegangen, 

Ultt  ein  S3ud;  ju  faiifen, 
S)a§  tinb  ift  ju  jung,  UJtt  allein  in 

ben  2SaIb  ju  geben, 
©r  ift  ni^t  alt  OCttUfj,  UVX  atlein 
in  ben  2Balb  p  geljen, 


He  has  gone  to  the  city  to  buy  a 

book. 
The  child  is  too  young  to  go  into  the 

woods  alone. 
Pie  is  not  old  enough  to  go  into  the 

woods  alone. 


.  THE   INFINITIVE   MOOD.  95 

5.  The  Infinitive  is  sometimes  used  in  a  passive  sense: 

2Ba8  ip  ju  t^un?  What  is  fo  6e  done? 

2)a6  S3u(^  ift  nic^t  ju  ^aben,  The  book  is  not  to  be  had. 

6.  ^n  is  omitted  when  the  Infinitive  is  preceded: 

1.  By  the  verbs  ma(^cn,  ^clfcn,  prcn,  fii^Icn,  fc^cn, 
^cigcn,  ncnncn,  Ic^rcn,  Icrncn : 

©if  ~>id;en  mid?  lac^en,  You  make  me  laugh. 

2Bir  {;Drtcn  i^n  fmgcn,  We  heard  him  sing. 

(Sr  lebrte  mic^  baS  0at)ier  f^icten,  He  taught  me  to  play  the  piano. 

@ic  Icrncu  ba3  ^Iat>icr  f^ielcn,  They  are  learning  to  play  the  piano. 

2.  By  the  verbs  bkibcH,  QC^cn,  ftc^en,  Ucgcn,  rcitcn, 
faljrcn,  l^aien,  fcin,  in  certain  idiomatic  expres- 
sions : 

(Sr  Bteibt  ft^Cn,  He  keeps  his  seat. 

er  ge^t  f^JOjicrCn,  He  is  taking  a  walk. 

(5r  fa^rt  j^ajiercn,  He  is  taking  a  ride  (in  a  carriage). 

(5r  rcitet  f^ajieren,  He  is  taking  a  ride  (on  horseback). 
Rem.  1 .  3u  is  also  omitted  after  other  verbs,  as  will  be  hereafter  explained. 

Bern.  2.  <BHh\tttn  (used  with  gC^CH,  tCitCn,  fa^ICH)  means   to  go  {to 
walk  or  ride)  Jbr  pleasure. 

Exercise  58. 
1.  The  merchant  promised  to  send  us  the  cloth  yes- 
terday. 2.  It  is  his  intention  to  go  to  Augsburg  to- 
morrow. 3.  I  wish  to  buy  a  German  Dictionary.  4. 
The  large  house  opposite  us  is  for  sale.  5.  Here  is  a 
large  and  elegant  suite  of  rooms  (eine  ()crrfd)aftHd^e  SSo^^ 
nunc;)  to  let.  6.  The  large  house  in  Wilhelms  Street, 
with  gas  and  water  (nebft  ®a^  unb  SOBafferleitung),  is  for 
sale  immediately.  7.  Instead  of  coming  by  way  of  Co- 
logne, he  came  by  way  of  Frankfort.  8. 1  have  no  time 
to  lose  ;  I  am  going  to  Leipsic  this  evening.  9.  **  It  is 
more  blessed  to  give  than  to  receive."  10.  Why  does 
Charles  keep  his  seat?  (6,2,  above.)  11.  What  is  to  be 
done  ?  12.  It  is  high  time  to  go,  and  the  tailor  has  not 
yet  sent  me  my  overcoat.  13.  Mr.  Dietrich  has  gone  to 
take  a  walk.  14.  I  am  going  to  take  a  ride  (on  horse- 
back).    15.  They  have  gone  to  ride  (in  a  carriage). 


96  PARTICIPLES. 

LESSON  XXX. 

PARTICIPLES. 

!Der  folgenbe  Xag  tt)ar  fe^r  ^eif  The  following  day  was  very 
unb  fc^wiil,  hot  and  sultry. 

3)a^  ^ilb  ift  rei^eub,  The  picture  is  charming. 

2)er  Don  alien  feinen  greunben  Professor  Behr,  who  was 
fef)r  geliebte  unb  geet)rte  §err  greatly  beloved  and  re- 
5)rofejyor  ^e^r  ift  geftern  spectedby  all  his  friends, 
5lbenb  an  ber  ©^minbfuc^t  died  suddenly  yesterday 
plo^li^  geftorben,  evening  of  consumption. 

2)ic  33ereimgten  ©taaten,  The  United  States. 

9lcununbfiin{5igftc  ^ufgaBe* 

1.  5lm  folgenben  Xage  gingen  mx  m^  2Bten.  2.  S5on  un^ 
ferm  $aufe  \)ahm  mx  etne  gan^  rei^enbe  5tu^ft^t  3.  SS^ten  ift 
bie  grogte  unb  bie  bebeutenbfte  ©tabt  in  Oefterrei^.  4.  S^iirn^ 
berg  ^at  tm  5[??tttela(ter  eine  gldn^enbe  (15ef^td)te  ge^abt.  5.  3n 
inbuflriellen  53e^te^ungen  ift  Mrnberg  jegt  bie  bebeutenbfte  (Btabt 
in  53atern.  6.  Die  bret^e^nte,  »ermej)rte,  unb  »5lltg  neu  bear^ 
beitete  5lu^gabe  ber  ©ef^ic^te  ber  beutf^en  ^iteratur  ift  je^t  in 
alien  ^u^^anblungen  p  I)aben*  7.  9^eue  unb  gebrauc^te  33it^ 
c^er  in  alten  unb  mobernen  ©prac^en  jtnb  in  ber  53uc^^anblung 
»on  ^reif^ner  unb  SfJobenberg  billtgft  ^u  »erfaufen.  8.  2)er 
S5ertrag  jnnfc^en  ben  SSereinigten  (Staaten  unb  bem  5^orbbeut^ 
fc^en  Sunbe  ift  je^t  abgef^loffen  (concluded).  9.  iDie  im 
Sa^re  1809  geftiftete  Uni^erfttdt  in  Berlin  ift  je^t  bte  befuc^^ 
tefte  unb  bie  befte  in  Deutfc^lanb.  10.  T)it  3a\)l  ber  $rofef? 
foren  ift  ^unbert  unb  tjierunbneun^tg ;  bte  3^^l  ber  ©tubiren^ 
ben  ift  itber  3000.  11.  1)it  im  3al)re  1818  geftiftete  Untm^ 
fttdt  ju  53onn  ift  bie  jitngfte  in  Deutf^lanb.  12.  Die  34^  '^^^ 
©tubirenben  ift  iiber  1000 ;  bie  3<^^l  ber  ^rofefforen  ift  f)unbert 
unb  fed)^.  13.  $err  ^rofeffor  (Sc^mibt  ift  5)rofeffcr  ber  mober=^ 
nen  (Bprac^en  an  ber  ^ieftgen  Uni^erfttdt.  14.  Sllbre^t  3)urcr 
xonx  ber  berii^mtefte  beutf^e  ^akx  be^  SDlittelalter^. 


PARTICIPLES. 


97 


Vocabulary. 


S5cr  Qfreunb,  —t9,pl.  — e,  friend. 

„    @taat,  —eg,  pi  —en,  state. 

„    55ertrag',— e«,/j/.  SSertragc,  treaty 
2)ic  SluSfid^t,  — ,  pi.  —en,  prospect. 

„    SSegiel/ung,  — ,  jo/.  —en,  relation. 

„    S3ud;^anbtung,  — ,  pi.  —en,  book 
store. 

„    ©c^minbfuc^t,  — ,  consumption. 

w     S^^^f  — tP^'  — ^^t  number. 
2)aS  S3ilb,  — cg,;>/.  —er,  picture. 
S3ear'beiten,  to  revise,  work  over. 
9?eijen,  to  charm. 
53ebeu'ten,  to  signify. 
©Icinjen,  to  shine. 
SBraud^en,  to  use. 


5t(t,  old,  ancient. 
3Jiobern',  modern, 
^nbufiriett',  industrial 
^Ib^Iid^,  sudden. 
SBoUig,  full,  complete. 
S3crii^mt',  famous,  distinguishbd. 
@i>ren,  to  honor,  respect, 
©riinbcn,  to  found, 
©tiften,  to  endow,  found. 
SSerein'igen,  to  unite. 
9$erme^'rcn,  to  increase,  enlarge. 
9tcijenb  (adj.\  charming. 
SScbcu'tenb  {adj.),  important. 
©ISnjenb  {adj.),  brilliant. 
Oebraud^t'  {adj.),  second-hand. 


Grammatical. 
1.  In  German,  as  in  English,  the  verb  has  two  Parti- 
ciples :  the  Present  and  the  Perfect. 

1.  The  Present  Participle  is  formed  by  adding  sCllb 
to  the  stem  of  the  verb. 

2.  The  Perfect  Participle  is  formed,  by  (1)  adding  A 
to  the  stem  of  regular,  and  =cn  to  the  stem  of  irreg- 
ular verbs ;  and  (2)  prefixing  sQC  to  tlie  stem  of 
all  verbs,  except  those  having  an  inseparable  prefix 
(k=,  ent=,  cm^)=,  ^^c.),and  those  with  sircn  (4eren)  in 
the  infinitive. 

Rem.  The  radical  vowel  of  many  irregular  verbs  is  changed. 


Present  Infinitive. 
Ixthtn,     to  love. 
bttU'en,     to  build, 
finb^en,    to  find. 
crfinb'*en,  to  invent. 


Present  Participle. 
U  e  b  *  Cnb,        loving, 
b  a  u  *  cnb,        building, 
f  t  n  b  *  Cnb,       finding, 
e  r  f  i  n  b  '#  cub,  inventing. 


Perfect  Participle. 
QC  *  H  e  b  *  t,    loved, 
ge  *  b  a  u  *  t,     built. 
gC'funb*  en,  found. 
erfunb'^CU,   invented. 


2.  Participles  are  often  used  adjectively.  They  are 
then  subject  to  all  the  laws  of  declension  and  compar- 
ison that  apply  to  adjectives : 

8lm  folgcnben  Sage,  On  the  following  day. 

2)tc  SJercinigten  ©taatcn.  The  United  States. 

E 


90  PARTICIPLES. 

Rem.  The  participle  often  takes  a  purely  adjective  signification : 
2)a8  retjenbe  33ilb,  The  charming  picture. 

©ebrau^tC  S3ilc^er,  Second-hand  books. 

2)er  beril^mtefte  2JiaIcr,  The  most  famous  painter. 

3.  The  j)resent  participle  is  used  much  less  in  German 
than  in  English.  It  is  rarely  used  after  fciH,  to  he,  ex. 
cept  when  it  has  an  adjective  signification. 

2)a§  S3Hb  tft  reijenb,  The  picture  is  channing. 

4.  The  perfect  participle,  on  the  other  hand,  is  used 
much  more  than  in  English. 

5.  Participles  are  frequently  translated  into  English 
by  the  verb,  with  a  relative  pronoun  for  its  subject: 

2)ic  im   3abre   1809    gegriiubetC     The  University  of  Berlin,  which  was 
UniJjerfitat  ju  35erltn,  founded  in  1809. 

Exercise  60. 
1.  On  the  following  day  they  went  by  way  of  Frank- 
fort to  Cologne.  2.  (The  in  1520  completed  cathedral 
in  Magdeburg  is  among  the  most  beautiful  churches 
in  Germany.)  3.  From  the  tower  of  the  cathedral  we 
have  a  most  (gctn^)  charming  prospect.  4.  Breslau,  the 
largest  and  the  most  important  city  in  Silesia  C^c^le^ 
jten),  has  160,000  inhabitants.  5.  The  university  in 
Prague,  founded  in  1348,  was  the  first  university  in  Ger- 
many. 6.  The  university  in  Leipsic,  which  was  (en- 
dowed) in  1409,  was  the  second  university  in  Germany. 
7.  (The  twenty-second  enlarged  and  fully  revised  edi- 
tion of  the  German  Grammar  of  Mr.  Dr.  Heyse  is  now 
to  have.)  8.  Second-hand  books  in  all  languages  are 
for  sale  here  cheap.  9.  (The  on  the  twenty-fourth 
March  on  the  consumption  suddenly  died  Mr.  Prof,  Behr 
was  the  oldest  professor  on  the  here  [^cftge]  univer- 
sity.) 10.  The  treaty  between  the  United  States  and 
Austria  is  not  yet  concluded.  11.  Peter  von  Cornelius, 
who  died  in  the  year  1867,  was  the  most  distinguished 
painter  of  the  nineteenth  century. 


THE  POTENTIAL   VERBS    fOIHlCn  AND  muffCn*  99 

LESSON  XXXL 

THE   POTENTIAL   VERBS   fOnnCtt  AND  IttiiffCtt* 

3^  fann  e^  nic^t  lefcn,  I  can  not  read  it. 

5tannfl  t)U  e^  lefen  ?  Canst  thou  read  it? 

dx  fann  e^  lefen,  He  can  read  it. 

2Bir  fonnen  e^  ni^t  lefen,  We  can  not  read  it. 

(Bk  fonnen  e^  lefen,  They  can  read  it. 

(Sie  fonnten  e^  lefen.  They  could  read  it. 

dx  ^at  e^  lefen  fonnen,  He  has  been  able  to  read  it. 

dx  mxt)  e^  lefen  fonnen,  He  will  be  able  to  read  it. 

^r  ^at  e^  ni^t  gefonnt.  He  has  not  been  able  to 

do  it. 

$err  53raun  fann  X)eutf^,  Mr.  Braun  knows  German. 

ginunbfct^jioftc  ^lufgalbc* 

1.  3^  fann  feinen  ^rief  c^ar  ni^t  lefen.  2.  ^arl  fagt,bag 
cr  feine  teutfc^e  ©rammatif  ni^t  ftnben  fann.  3.  fonnen  (Sie 
mit  un^  fpajieren  c^el^en?  4.  9]ein,  ^eute  fijnnen  wix  nic^t  fpa? 
jieren  c^e^en.  5.  ^err  Cramer  fagt,  bag  er  ben  ^rief  nid)t  lefen 
fonnte  (or  bag  er  ben  ^rief  nic|t  \)ai  lefen  fonnen).  6.  $err 
^arl  |)artmann  fann  2)entf^  unb  (Spanif^.  7.  Sffiarum  l)at 
Wlax'it  bae  beutf^e  ?ieb  nid)t  gefungcn?  8.  (Sie  l)at  e^  nic^t 
c^efonnt  (or  jie  l)at  e^  nic^t  ftncjen  fonnen).  9.  dx  nnrb  ben 
58rief  nic^t  lefen  fonnen.  10.  3^  inug  ^eute  einen  ^rief  an 
^errn  2)^agmann  fc^reiben.  II.  ^err  JDietnd)  l)at.mir  iiefac^t, 
ba§  er  ^eute  nac^  ^amburc^  c^eljcn  mug,  urn  einic^e  J^reunbc  au^ 
3(merifa  p  treffen.  12.  2Bir  fonnten  md)t  lanc^er  bletben;  mix 
mugten  na^  $aufe  9el)en.  13.  §eute  SJ^orc^en  \)aU  ic^  fo  inelc 
^viefe  f^reiben  mitffen,  bag  ic^  nid)t  nad)  bent  5>?ufcum  babe  c^e^ 
ben  fonnen.  14.  Wlox^tn  werben  mx  nac^  3)re^ben  unb  libera 
morc^en  nac^  $rag  9cf)en.  15.  $err(5c^norr  n>unfd)t  einen  Web- 
ref fiir  feine  ^wei  ^inber  ;  ber  ?ebrer  mug  Snglifc^,  X)cutfcb  unb 
gran^ofifc^  Selciu'ftg  (fluently)  fpred)en  fonnen.  16.  3d)  habt 
bie  britte  ^lu^gabc  ber  @efd)id)te  »on  Deutfc^lanb  in  ber  gan^en 
©tabt  nic^t  finben  fijnncn. 


100         THE   POTENTIAL  VERBS  UmtVL  AND   mUffCH. 

Grammatical. 

1.  The  German  verb  has  no  potential  mood.  The  po- 
tential mood  of  the  English  verb  is  in  most  cases  trans- 
lated into  German  by  the  use  of  the  verbs  fiinucn,  can  ; 
ltiVi\\t\if  7nust ;  etc. 

2.  The  Potential  Verbs  (liinncn,  ttliiffcn,  etc.)  have  a  com- 
plete  conjugation.  They  take  l^abctt  as  their  auxiliary. 
They  belong  to  the  seventh  class  of  irregular  verbs  : 


Present  Infinitive. 
!ijnn*en ,  to  be  able. 
mil  If  *  en ,  to  be  obliged. 


Imperfect  Indicative,     Perfect  Participle. 

tomtit  e,  gc^fonn^t. 

Rem.  The  use  of  the  Potential  Verbs  is  much  more  extensive  than  that  of 
the  auxiliaries  of  the  potential  mood  in  English  {may,  can,  must,  etc.).  They 
are  often  translated  by  circumlocutory  phrases,  as  tiJuntlt^  to  he  able  ;  lUiifs 
fen,  to  be  compelled,  to  be  obliged  (to  have  to). 

8.  The  Potential  Verbs  (called  in  German  the  aux- 
iliaries of 'mode)  are  never  used  as  independent  verbs. 
They  are  only  used  to  limit  or  qualify  the  infinitives 
of  other  verbs  (though  the  limited  verb  is  frequently 

understood) : 

3c^  !flnn  e§  nic^t,  I  "an  not  (do)  it. 

Sd;  :^ak  eg  nic^t  ijcfonttt,  J  was  not  abje  (to  do)  it. 

(5r  \^(d  e§  gcmu^t,  Be  was  compelled  (to  do)  it. 

4.  Siinncn  {to  he  able,  can)  indicates : 

1.  Moral  or  physicial  possibility : 

@r  fann  lefen  unb  fd;reiBen,        H(»  ^san  read  and  write. 

2.  A  possibility  or  contingency : 

<Sic  fiinncn  mid;  ertvarten,         You  may  expect  me. 

3.  ^bnnen  is  frequently  used  with  th^  verbs  IcfCH,  fagCll,  f^reifiett, 
Uerfte^en  (to  understand),  and  tt}\lH  (*o  do),  understood: 

§err  9^ot^  fann  ^tnt]6),  Mr.  Bo^h  knows  German. 

6.  Indicative  mood  of  lijuncn,  to  be  able,  can  : 


Present  Tense. 

Imi^er/ect  Teme. 

t(^  !ann,         i      can. 

\6>  fOttn=tC,         I        could. 

bu  !ann=[t,      thou  canst. 

\SVL  !oitn  =  tC^^   thoucouldat. 

er  !ann,            he     can. 

er  fonn^tc,     he     could. 

tcir  t  c  u  n  *  cn^  we    can. 

tr)tr  !  0  u  n  :=  ten,  we    could. 

tt)r  ViiMW^if      you   can. 

i^r  foun^tCt,    you  could. 

tic  f  5  n  n »  en,  they  can. 

fie  fonu^tcn,  they  could. 

THE   POTENTIAL  VERBS   fonnCH  AND   milffCU.  101 


Perfect  Tense. 
I  have  been  able,  etc. 

i6f  f^ah't  gcfonttt 
bu  iaft  gefount. 
cr  iat  gcfonnt. 
n)it  ^ab^Ctt  setonut. 
i^r  i)ah^t  gctonnt. 
^ab*cn  gctonnt. 

First  Future  Tense. 
I  shall  be  able,  etc. 

tocrbsc      fiinncn* 

toirft  f  0  u  n  c  n, 

toirb  f5nnen. 

toir  tt)erb*cn  f5nnen. 

i^r  n)erb*ct  fonnen. 

fic  tcerb^cn  !onnen. 

Rem.  ^bnncn^  to  he  ablcj  is  derived 

can  is  from  the  same  root. 


flc 


bu 
er 


Pluperfect  Tense. 
I  had  been  able,  etc 

x^  Wt't     gefonut 

bu  ^at^tcft  gctonnt 
cr  i)at»tt  gctonnt. 
tt)ir  ^at'tcn  gctonnt. 
i^r  ^at*tct  gctonnt. 
fie  ifat^ttn  gctonnt 

Second  Future  Tense. 
I  shall  have  been  able,  etc. 

i6f  tocrb=c  gcfonttt  f^aiittu 
bu  toirft  gctonnt  i^ahtn* 
cr  ttjirb  gctonnt  i^ahttt^ 
n)ir  tocrb^cn  gctonnt  f^ahttt* 
i^r  tr>crb*ct  gctonnt  ^abcn* 
fic  tDcrb* en  gctonnt  i)a^tn* 
from  tcnnCIl,  to  know.     The  English 


6.  531uffcn  (mtcst)  is  frequently  rendered  into  English 
by  such  expressions  as  to  be  obliged,  to  be  corripelled. 

7.  Indicative  mood  of  mitffcn^  to  be  obliged,  must : 


Present  Tense, 

id}   mn^f  I       must, 

bu   mu^t,  thou  must, 

er   mu^,  he     must. 

n)ir  milf  j*cn,  we    must, 

i^r  milff'tf  you  must, 

fie   m  il  n '  en,  they  must. 

Perfect  Tense. 

^  ^ttbe  gemu^t,  etc, 

1  have  been  obliged,  etc. 

First  Future  Tense. 

ie^  toerbcmuffcn^cfc, 

I  shall  be  obliged,  etc. 


Imperfect  Tense, 

i^  mu^ste,  I       was   obliged, 

bu  m  u  5  *  tCft,  thou  wast  obliged, 

cr  mu^^tC,  he     was   obliged, 

loir  m  u  §  *  ten,  we     were  obliged, 

t^r  tn  u  0  *  ttt,  you  were  obliged, 

fic  m  u  ^  *  ten,  they  were  obliged. 

Pluperfect  Tense. 

t^  ^otte  gemu^t,  etc., 

I  had  been  obliged,  etc. 

Second  Future  Tense. 

td^  ttjerbe  gemu^t  ^aben,  etc., 

I  shall  have  been  obliged,  etc. 


8.  The  participial  form  is  only  used  when  the  principal 
verb  is  understood.  The  infinitive  form  is  used  for  the 
participle  when  the  principal  verb  is  expressed: 

3d>  ^bc  nid^t  bcren  tbnnen,  I  could  not  hear. 

3c^  ^attc  gc^cn  miiffcn,  I  had  been  obliged  to  go. 

(but)  3^  ^iibc  c8  md)t  gctonnt,  I  could  not  (do)  it. 

(Sr  ^vit  C3  gcmu^t,  lie  has  been  compelled  (to  do)  it 


102         THE   POTENTIAL  VERBS   mUtU  AND   mOgCH* 

9.  The  Potential  Verbs  follow  the  same  laws  of  posi- 
tion in  the  present  and  imperfect  tenses  as  the  auxilia- 
ries ^abtn,  fcin,  and  UJCrbcn*  In  the  compound  tenses 
the  infinitive  form  of  the  potential  verb  is  placed  after 
the  infinitive  of  the  modified  verb : 

(Sr  toirb  eg  (efcn  fiinilCll,  He  will  be  able  to  read  it. 

@r  f^at  eg  lefen  fiiltttett/  He  has  been  able  to  read  it. 

Exercise  62. 
1.  I  can  not  find  my  pencil.  2.  Freddy,  canst  thou 
bring  me  my  German  Dictionary?  3.  The  teacher  can 
not  hear  what  we  are  saying.  4.  We  could  not  hear 
what  he  said.  5.  They  will  not  be  able  to  read  this 
letter.  6.  (Charles,  thy  father  says  that  thou  imme- 
diately [glet(^]  home  go  must.)  7.  We  must  send  this 
letter  to  America  by  way  of  Liverpool.  8.  I  could  not 
go  to  walk  with  them;  I  had  to  remain  at  home  and 
write  my  German  exercise.  9.  Mr.  Kraft  will  have 
(miiffen)  to  sell  his  new  house.  10.  We  will  not  be  able 
to  go  to  Augsburg  to-morrow ;  we  will  go  to  Nuremberg 
to-morrow,  and  day  after  to-morrow  we  must  {1st  Fut.) 
go  to  Augsburg.  11.  Mr.  Krahn  wishes  a  clerk;  he 
must  be  able  to  write  and  speak  German  with  fluency 
(gelauftg).  12.  Why  did  you  not  read  the  letter?  13. 
We  could  not  (it). 


LESSON  XXXII. 

THE   POTENTIAL   TERES    ^DOUttt  AND  Ittli^Ctt^ 

3d^  mU  gletc^  ge^en,  I  will  go  immediately. 

3c^  werbe  gtei^  ge^en,  I  shall  go  immediately. 

2BoUen  @ie  mit  m^  ge^en  ?  Do  you  wish  to  go  with  us  ? 

2Bir  tt)olIten  ba^  ^uc^  faufen,  We  wished  to  buy  the  book. 
2Bir  ^aben  ba^  53u^  f  aufen  n)olIen, 

^u  magft  mit  un^  ge()en,  Thou  mayst  go  with  us. 

3c^  mao,  biefe^  Xuc^  ni^t,  I  do  not  like  this  cloth. 

dx  mag  fagen  toa^  er  n?iU,  He  may  say  what  he  will. 


THE   POTENTIAL   VERBS    tOOUCIt    AND    mOgeil*  103 

1.  SBoUcn  ©ie  mit  un^  nac^  ber  ©tabt  fa^ren?  2.  $eutc 
SD^orgen  \)ciht  id)  feine  B^tt,  nad)  ter  ^tat)t  ^u  fa^ren,  i^  mu§ 
einen  53ricf  an  (to)  meine  dUcxn  fc^retben.  3»  3^  n)iU  ^ier  in 
geipjicj  nid)t  langer  bleiben,  t>a^  ^Setter  ift  je^t  fo  fait,  nag  unt> 
unangcnel^m  ;  id)  n?ert)C  iibermorgen  nac^  ^eitelberg  ge^en.  4. 
2Gir  rooUten  geftern  nac^  ?>otet)am  get)en,  urn  tie  gro^e  5^ara'te 
gu  fe()en,  aber  e^  ^at  ben  gangen  Xag  geregnet,  unt)  n>ir  finb  t)cn 
gangen  2:ag  ju  ^aufe  gebliebcn.  5.  SBarum  ^abcn  (Sie  geftern 
*^bent)  ba^  ?iet)  nic^t  fmgen  n^oUen  ?  6*  3c^  f)<ibe  e^  gen?oUt, 
aber  ic^  ()abe  e^  nic^t  gefonnt ;  ic^  f)abe  ta^  ^iet)  noc^  md)t  ge^ 
lernt.  7.  ^err  5lraft  njirb  ta^  ^au^  gemig  nic^t  faufen  n?oUem 
8.  Tlutkx,  ic^  moc^te  fe^r  gem  (would  like  very  much)  mit 
^einri^  ^urj  nad^  bem  Tln\cnm  geben.  9.  D  ja,  bu  magji  mit 
i^m  ge^en,  wenn  (if)  bu  m\i\t,  aber  bu  mu^t  nic^t  p  lange  blei^ 
ben ;  bu  ^aft  beine  beutfc^e  5tufgabe  ()eute  nod^  nid)t  gefd^rieben. 

10.  2)iefe^  Xu^  i^  ml  gu  tt)euer ;  n?ir  werben  e^  nic^t  faufen, 

11.  Sr  mag  fpajieren  ge^en,  n?enn  (if)  er  will,  aber  n>ir  n^erben 
ju  §aufe  bleiben.  12.  SBiinfc^en  ®ie  biefe^  ^ud)?  13.  5lcin, 
ic^  mill  jene^  ne^men.  14.  3c^  ttjerbe  e^  3f)nen  fc^iden,  roenn 
(Bk  tt)ollen.  15,  5Bo  tt)ol)nen  (Bie?  16.  2Bir  njo^nen  in  ber 
3immer>®tra§e,  gegeniiber  bem  neuen  ^aufe  be^  |)errn  dikf^ 
ftabl.  17.  ®ie  fonnen  t^un  wa^  ®ie  woUen  (you  may  do 
what  you  like). 

Grammatical. 

1.  The  Potential  Verb  toollcn  usually  indicates  wiUing- 
neS8,  mclinationj  desire,  intention,  or  determination : 

3rf)  toitt  S^cid;  gebert,  I  will  go  immediately. 

SBoUcn  ©ie  ben53rief  lejen  ?  Do  you  wish  to  read  the  letter? 

2.  The  indicative  mood  of  tooflen^^o  he  willing,  to  wish: 

Imperfect  Tense, 

\^  ttJOKstC,  I        was   willing 

bu  h)  0 1 1  *  tCft,  thou  wast  willing, 

er  to  oil' it f  he      was    willing. 

n)ir  tD  0 1 1  *  ten,  we     were  willing, 

i^r  tt)  0  H  *  tCt,  you    were  willing, 

fie  tt>  0  H  *  ten,  they  were  willing. 


Present  Tense. 

t^  tDttt,  I        am  willing, 

bu  lDiU*ft/  thou  art  willing. 

CT  toifl,  he      is    willing, 

tuir  tt)  0 1 1  *  cn,  we     are  willing. 

\\)X  h)  0  n  *  t,  you    are  willing, 

fie  toon*ett,  they  are  willing. 


104  THE   POTENTIAL   VERBS   UJOttetl   AND   ItlligCn, 


Perfect  Tense. 

id)  i^alie  gettJoUt,  etc., 

I  have  been  willing,  etc. 
First  Future  Tense. 

\^  tocrbc  tooflcn,  etc., 

I  shall  be  willing,  etc. 


Pluperfect  Tense. 
tc^  l^attC  gCttJOttt,  etc., 
I  had  been  willing,  etc. 

Second  Future  Tense. 

i^  tocrbe  gcttoKt  l^akn,  e<c.. 

I  shall  have  been  willing,  etc. 


3.  The  Potential  verb  mbgcrt  (may)  indicates  j>ermi8* 
sion,  concession,  and  sometimes  desire  or  liking : 

(Sr  Utttg  gf^cn,  He  may  go.  [soldier. 

@r  mag  ein  ta^jferer  @oIbat  jetn,       (I  concede  that)  he  may  be  a  brave 
3fc^  mog  biefeg  %,yx^  nid^t,  I  do  not  like  this  cloth. 

4.  Indicative  mood  of  ItlSgCtl,  may,  to  he  jpermitted  : 

Imperfect  Tense. 

\^   VM^^Atf  I        might, 

bu  m  0  d^  =  tCft,  thou  mightst. 

cr    nto^^tC,  he     might. 

tt)tr  ntod;^tcn,  we     might, 

il^r  moc^^tCt,  you  might, 

[ic    m  0  d^  *  ten,  they  might. 


Present  Tense. 
X^   wag,  I       may. 

bu   lttag==ft,        thou  mayst. 

cr  mag,        he 


may. 

ttJir  mi5g  =  cn,  we    may. 

i^r  tltog^f^      you  may. 

fie    m  0  g  *  en,  they  may. 

Perfect  Tense. 

I  have  been  permitted,  etc. 
First  Future  Tense. 

\^  toerbc  mijgc«,efc., 

I  shall  be  permitted,  etc. 

5.  Time  how  long  is  put  in  the  accusative  case: 

(Sr  blieb  bcn  ganjCn  ^ag.  He  remained  the  whole  day. 


Pluperfect  Tense. 

td>  l^attc  gcmoc^t,  e^c, 

I  had  been  permitted,  etc. 
Second  Future  Tense. 

id^  loerbc  gcmoc^t  fjabcn,  e^c, 

I  shall  have  been  permitted,  et: 


Exercise  64. 
1.  Shall  you  go  to  Potsdam  to-day?  2.  Do  you  wish 
to  go  to  Potsdam  to-day?  3.  Would  you  like  (tDoUen 
(5te)  to  read  this  letter?  4.  From  whom  is  it?  5.  It 
is  from  our  friend  Mr.  Diez ;  he  is  now  in  Kome.  6. 
Why  will  (ttJoUen)  you  not  go  with  us  to  the  Museum? 
7.  I  must  stay  at  home  and  write  a  letter  to  my 
brother.  8.  Can  you  not  write  it  this  evening?  9. 
No,  this  evening  I  must  call  upon  (befuc^en)  Mr.  Behr. 
10.  Did  you  go  to  the  Museum  this  morning  ?     11.  Yes, 


THE   POTENTIAL    VERBS    foUCtl    AND    biirfCt!.  105 

but  we  could  not  see  the  paintings  (because  [trctl]  the 
museum  closed  was).  12.  What  paintings  did  you  wish 
(woUen)  to  see?  13.  I  wished  to  see  the  famous  paint- 
ing by  (yon)  Holbein.  14. 1  have  often  wished  to  see  it, 
but  I  have  never  been  able  to  see  it  yet.  15.  Charles, 
thou  mayst  go  with  us  to  walk,  if  thou  wishest.  16. 
I  do  not  like  this  book ;  it  is  not  at  all  interesting.  17. 
Mr.  Beyerlein  says  that  from  his  house  he  can  see  the 
spire  of  the  Cathedral  of  Freiburg. 


LESSON  XXXIII. 

THE   POTENTIAL   VERB   fottCtt  AND  tlUtfeQ* 

SBcr  foil  gc^en  ?  Who  shall  go  (is  to  go)  ? 

2)u  foUft  @ott,  bctncn  ^errn   Thou  shalt  love  the  Lord 
IkUn  con  ganjem  §ergen,         thy  God  with  all  thy 

heart. 
2Btr  foUten  nac^  ^aufe  ge^en,    We  ought  to  go  home, 
©r  foil  fe[)r  franf  fein,  They  say  he  is  very  sick, 

^err  ^ul)u  foil  im  3<J^re  1842  Mr.  Kuhn  is  supposed  to 
nac^  ^merifa  gegangen  fein,       have  gone  to  America  in 

1842. 

giinfunbfc^jigftc  ^ufgalbc* 
1.  SCa^  foUen  mx  t^un?  2.  2Ber  foil  nac^  ber  (Stabt  gel^en, 
urn  ba^  ^u^  gu  l)olen,  ^einrtd^  ober  ic^?  3.  ^einrt^  foil  ge^^ 
^en,  bu  l)afl  betne  beutfd^e  5tufgabe  no^  nid^t  gcfc^rieben.  4, 
3c^  foUtc  einen  ^rief  an  |)errn  $ut!ammcr  fc^on  geflern  gc^^ 
fc^rickn  ^aben.  5.  $err  dia^n  ijl  im  Scil^re  1845  nad^  %nK* 
xita  gegangen ;  er  foil  bort  »or  ungcfdl)r  »ier  3a^ren  geftorben 
fein.  6.  ^err  "pren^ler  foil  febr  reid^  fein.  7.  2Bie  ijl  3^r  ge^ 
cljrter  9^ame  (name)  roenn  id)  fragen  (ask)  barf?  8.  2)?cin 
9Mme  ijl  ©uftao  33enbler.  9.  Tlcint  ^erren  (gentlemen), 
bier  biirfen  Sie  nic^t  raud^en.  10.  (£r  barf  ni^t  fommen  obnc 
bie  (grlaubnig  (permission)  feine^  35ater^.  11.  ?iebc  Tlntkx, 
barf  ic^  mit  5!Bill;elm  5lcfermann  unb  ^einrid;  ^ul)ner  fpajieren 

E2 


106  THE   POTENTIAL   VERBS    fottCIl   AND    burfeil^ 

ge^en?  12.  |)afl  bu  alle  beine  5lufgaben  gefc^rieben?  13» 
Wlcint  beutfd)e  5lufgak  ^abe  x^  gef^rieben,  aber  bie  frangoftfc^e 
Slufgabe  ^abe  ic|  no^  nic^t  gan^  iJoUenbet ;  i^  fann  fie  boc^ 
I;eute  5lbenb  »olIenben.  14.  3a,  bu  magft  ge^en,  aber  bu  mu§t 
^ettig  (early)  nac^  ^aufe  fommen.  15.  2)a^  ^Better  mar  in 
5lleranbrien  fo  i)d^  geworben,  bag  n^tr  bort  nic^t  langer  bleiben 
burften.  16.  ^on  Slier anbrien  gingen  tcir  bireft'  (directly) 
nac^  (Bmprna. 

Grammatical. 

1.  The  Potential  Verb  foUcil  indicates  : 

1.  Moral  obligation  or  duty : 

@r  follte  ge^en,  He  should  (ought  to)  go. 

2.  Obligation  or  duty  dependent  upon  the  will  of  another : 
2Ber  folt  ge^cn  ?  Who  shall  go  ?  —  is  to  go  ? 

2)u  fottft  @ott,  betnen  ^erni,    Thou  shalt  love  the  Lord  thy  God 
Ucbcn  i3on  ganjem  ^erjen,  with  all  thy  heart. 

8.  A  report,  rumor,  or  general  impression  : 

@r  foil  fe^r  franf  jetn,  They  say  he  is  very  sick, 

^err  ^iibn  foil  nad;  %mmta    Mr.  Kuhn  is  supposed  to  have  gonf 
gegangcii  feiit.  to  America. 

2.  Indicative  mood  of  foUctl,  shall,  shoidd,  ought : 


Present  Tense. 

X^   foil,  I        ought, 

bit  folt=ft,  thou  oughtest. 

cr   fotf,  he     ought. 

to'vc  f  0  n  =  Cn,  we     ought, 

i^r  fon*t,  you  ought, 

fie  foU^cn,  they  ought. 

Perfect  Tense. 

tc^  ^aibc  gcfollt,  etc., 

I  have  been  obliged,  etc. 
First  Future  Tense. 

id;  tocrbc  fottcn,  etc., 

I  shall  be  obliged,  etc. 

3.  The  Potential  Verb  biirfen  indicates : 

\.  Permission  (by  law,  or  by  the  will  of  another) : 
3etJt  biirft  i^r  jpieleii,  You  may  play  now, 


Imperfect  Tense. 

\^  fOlI4C,  I        should, 

bu  f  0  n  =  it%  thou  shouldest. 

er   joII^tC,  he      should. 

\x>ir  f  D  n  =  ten,  we     should, 

t^r  fon=^tCt,  you   should. 

flC  j  0  n  =<  ten,  they  should. 

Pluperfect  Tense. 

tc^i^atte  gcfoHt,  e^c, 

I  had  been  obliged,  etc. 

Second  Future  Tense. 

\^  ttjcrbe  gcfottt  i^akn,  etc. 

I  shall  hav«  been  obliged,  etc. 


THE   POTENTIAL   VERBS   foflCH   AND   bUrfCH.  107 


2.  With  a  negative,  bilrfCO  is  usually  translated  by  "  mu$t  not." 
^icr  biirfcn  ^ic  nicl;t  raud;en,      You  must  not  smoke  here. 

3.  It  sometimes  has  the  signification  of  "  <o  dare:" 

er  barf  nic^t  tomnien,  o\)nt  tie    He  dares  not  come  without  his  fu- 
(Srlaubni^  feineS  25atcrg,  ther's  permission. 

4.  Indicative  mood  of  biirfcn,  to  be  permitted: 

Present  Tense. 
i(^  bfltf,  I       am  permitted, 

bu  barfsft^        thou  art  permitted, 
cr    borf,  he     is    permitted, 

loir  b  it  r  f  *  cll/  we    are  permitted. 


i\)X  b  ii  r  f « t/     you  are  permitted. 

fie   b  ii  r  f  *  en,  they  are  permitted. 

Perfect  Tense. 

i(^  ^abc  ofburft,  etc., 

I  have  been  permitted,  etc. 
First  Future  Tense. 

\6)  tocrbe  biirfcn,  etc., 

I  shall  be  permitted,  etc. 


Imperfect  Tense. 
i(i)  burfstC,  I  was  permitted, 
bu  b  U  r  f  *  tCft,  thou  wast  permitted, 
cr  burf*tC,  he  was  permitted. 
tDir  b  u  r  f  =  tCU,  we  were  permitted, 
tl)r  b  U  r  f  =^  tCt,  you  were  permitted, 
fie  b  u  r  f  *  ten,  they  were  permitted. 

Pluperfect  Tense. 

id)  fjattt  ocburft,  etc., 

I  had  been  permitted,  etc. 
Second  Future  Tense. 

id)  tterbc  geburft  ^aben,  etc., 

I  shall  have  been  permitted,  etc. 


5.  Principal  parts  of  all  the  Potential  Verbs: 


Present 

Imperfect 

Perfect 

Infinitive. 

Indicative. 

Participle, 

fotf'Cn  (ought), 

foK^tc, 

fie4oU*t. 

iDOlI'Cn  CwiU), 

tooU'te, 

gc*njl)tt*t. 

lonn^en  (can), 

!onn4e, 

ge-fonn't. 

mbg-'Cn  (may), 

ntO(^"te, 

ge=^mo(^=t. 

burf'-en  {dare), 

burHc, 

ge-'bnrf-t. 

mtiif'Cn  (must). 

mn§4c, 

ge^nwH 

6.  The  explanation  of  the  many  uses  of  the  potential 
verbs  in  the  subjunctive  and  conditional  moods  must  be 
reserved  until  these  moods  are  gi^en. 

Exercise  66. 
1.  What  shall  (foUen)  I  say  to  him  ?  2. 1  shall  (wcrbe) 
say  that  I  can  not  go  to-day.  3. 1  ought  (foUte)  to  write 
a  letter  to  my  brother  this  evening.  4.  Mr.  Kelle  is 
said  (foil)  to  be  the  richest  man  in  the  city.  5.  Mr. 
Berghaus  went  to  Texas  in  1858  ;  he  is  supposed  to 
have  died  during  the  war.     6.  May  (biirfen)  I  ask  what 


108  SEPARABLE    COMPOUND  VERBS. 

this  book  cost  ?  7.  The  price  of  this  book  was  seven 
thalers  and  twenty  groschens.  8.  He  may  (mogen)  say 
what  he  likes  (tt)oUett),  I  shall  not  buy  the  painting ;  I 
do  not  like  (mogen)  it  at  all.  9.  What  is  your  (honored) 
name,  if  I  may  take  the  liberty  to  ask  ?  10.  Children, 
you  must  (biirfen)  not  play  here  ;  you  may  (fonnen)  go 
into  the  garden,  and  there  play  as  much  as  you  like. 
11.  He  can  not  have  the  book  to-day;  it  is  not  yet 
bound.  12.  Will  (tt)0llen)  you  go  with  us  to  Potsdam  to- 
day? 13.  The  doctor  says  that  I  must  stay  in  the 
house  (p  |)aufe)  to-day. 


LESSON  XXXIV. 

SEPARABLE   COMPOUND   VERBS. 

(5r  tt)trb  e0  ntd^t  anne^mcn,  He  will  not  accept  it. 

^r  nimmt  e^  an,  He  accepts  it. 

dx  na^m  e^  an,  He  accepted  it. 

^r  ^at  e$  angenommen,  He  has  accepted  it. 

©r  ^atte  e^  angenommen,  He  had  accepted  it. 

^r  mxt)  e^  angenommen  ^aben,  He  will  have  accepted  it. 

©icficmtnbfe^Sigftc  Wufgak* 

1.  3d^  mug  ben  53rief  abfc^reiben.  2.  ^art  ^at  fetnc  beutfi^c 
5lufgabe  abgef^rieben.  3.  T)xl  ntugt  beine  51ufgabe  abfci^reikn, 
ebe  bu  au^gebeft.  4.  dx  fc^rieb  fdne  ^^ufgabe  ab,  ti)t  er  au^^ 
ging.  5.  ^r  fagt,  bag  er  feine  Slufgabe  ni^t  abgefd^rieben  ^at 
6.  3c^  ^attt  feine  ^dt,  ben  33rief  gejlern  ab^uf^reiben.  7.  Dic^ 
fe^  $Sort  tft  febr  fc^wer  au^pfpre^en.  8.  $err  £(etn  ^ai  feine 
SJ^einung  (opinion)  ganj  beutUd^  (plainly)  au^gefproc^en.  9. 
Der  Wakx  bat  feine  ©emalbe  ait^geftellt ;  er  mill  jte  »erfaufen. 
10.  2Ber  bcit  meine  (15rammatt!  ttjeggenommen  ?  11.  2Btr  ge^j 
ben  je^t  nad^  bem  3)?ufeum;  woUen  <Bk  mitgeben  (or  n)olIen 
eie  ntit)?  12.  SBoUen  @te  ba^  33u(b  mitnebmen?  13.  2)er 
beriibmte  ^aumeifter  unb  Tlakx,  (pyc^infel,  i)at  bie  grogen  (3t^ 


SEPARABLE    COMPOUND    VERBS. 


109 


malbc  in  ber  35or^aIlc  (vestibule)  be^  Tln\c\m^  in  53crlin  cnt^ 
iDorfeu,  aber  fein  ® filler,  dorneliu^,  ^at  fte  au^gcful;rt,  14, 
a^  fing  an  gu  regnen,  15.  (S^  l^atte  angcfangen  gu  regnen, 
f()e  tt)ir  au^ginc^en.  16.  <Bk  gtngen  au^,  e{)e  e$  ^u  rcgnen  an^ 
gefangen  t)atte.  17.  3d^  mupte  mc|t,  baf  er  ben  ^rtef  abfc^rei^ 
ben  woUte.  18.  SBann  tfl  J£)err  53raun  angefommen?  19.  @r 
fam  geftern  5lbenb  an.  20. 3Sann  fommen  (Sie  n?teter?  21. 
2©ir  tcerbcn  iibermorgen  mieberfommen.  22.  Die  2Bat)l  (elec- 
tion) ^at  geftern  jtattgefunben.  23.  @ie  ^aben  i^n  freigefpro:? 
d^en. 

Grammatical. 
1.  Separable  Compound  Verbs  are  formed  by  prefixing  cer- 
tain prepositions,  adverbs,  nouns,  or  adjectives  to  simple 
verbs  : 


@r  ttjirb  ben  SBrief  abfd^rciBen, 
@ic  TOcrbenmorgcn  h?tebertommen, 
2)ic  SSa^I  trirb  [tattfinbcn, 
©ie  ttjcrben  i^n  treij^rcd?cn, 


He  will  copy  the  letter. 
They  will  return  to-morrow. 
The  election  will  tuke  place. 
They  will  acquit  him. 


Rem.  By  far  the  greater  number  of  prefixes  of  compound  verbs  are  prep- 
ositions. 


2.  Principal  parts  of  some  separable  compound  verbs : 

Present  Injinitive. 
OUS'*  fil^ren,       to  execute. 


an^''  ftcUen, 
ah''  fc^reiben, 
an''  fangen, 
ttn'*  iicbmcn, 
mit'-'  nel)mcn, 
m%''  ne^mcn, 
au^''  ge^en, 
mif'  gc^cn, 
ttcg'-  gebcn, 
an'^tommcn, 


to  exhibit, 
to  copy, 
to  commence, 
to  accept, 
to  take  with, 
to  take  away, 
to  go  out. 
to  accompany 
to  go  away, 
to  anive. 


toic'  bCt'tommen,  to  return. 
flU^''  fbrcc^cn,      to  pronounce. 
\iait''  fiiiben,        to  take  place, 
frci'-' jpre^en,      to  acquit. 

Rem.  It  will  be  noticed  that 
the  primary  accent. 


(With  p). 

auS'jufteUen, 

ab'jufc^rciben, 

an'jufangen, 

an'3ime(;men, 

mit'5une(;men, 

n>cg'3une^men, 

au^'gugc^en, 

mit'jugeben, 

iDcg'jugcbcn, 

an'gufommcn, 

tuie'bcrjutommcn, 

aug'jujprcc^cn, 

ftatt'juftnben, 

frci'suf^rec^en, 


Imp.  Ind. 

auS'fu^rte, 

aus'ftellte, 

ab'fc^ricb, 

an'fing, 

an'na^m, 

mit'im^m, 

tt)eg'na(;ni, 

aus'ging, 

mit'ging, 

ttjeg'ging, 

an'tam, 

ttjie'berfam 

au^'fprad^, 

ftatt'fanb, 


Per/.  Participle. 

auS'gcfii^rt. 

au^'geftcttt. 

ab' gefc^riebcn. 

an'gefangcn. 

an'gcnommcn. 

mit'genommcn. 

tr»eg'gcnonimen. 

au8'gcgangen. 

mit'gegangen. 

tucg'gegangcn. 

an'gctommen. 

tDiebergetommcn 

au«J'gef^roc^en. 

ftatt'gcfunbcn. 


frei'j)3roc^,  ifrei'gcf^rod^cn. 


the  pvfjix  of  separable  compound  verbs  takes 


no 


COMPOUND  VERBS. 


Rem.  2.  When  JU  is  used  with  the  infinitive  mood,  it  adheres  to  the  simple 

verb:  aursufjjvtdjcu, tteo'sugc^cu* 

Rem.  3.  In  the  perfect  participle  the  syllable  QCs  is  retained,  and  is  placed 
between  theprejix  and  the  verb:  aU^'gcf^rOt^en,  tOCg'gCgaiigen* 

Rem.  4.  It  will  be  noticed  that  many  verbs,  which  are  compound  in  German, 
are  translated  into  English  hy  simple  verbs:  atl'ft^tCitJCn,  to  copy. 

3.  Indicative  Mood  of  aniicl^men,  to  accept  : 

Present  Tense.  Imperfect  Tense. 

i(^  na^nt— an/    i     accepted. 

bu  na^mft — an^  thou  acceptedst. 

er  na^m — ail/  he     accepted, 

ttjtr  na^men— an,  we    accepted, 

t^r  na^mt — atl,  you   accepted, 

fic  na^men— aU/  they  accepted. 

Pluperfect  Tense. 
I  had  accepted,  etc. 

\^  ))(iiit  an'gcttommen* 

bu  ^atteft  ott'genommem 
er  Wte  an'genommen. 
xoxx  fatten  an'g  e  :t  o  m  m  c  m 
t^r  ^attct  an'g  e  n  0  m  m  c n, 
fie  fatten  an' g  c  n  o  m  m  e  n. 

Second  Future  Tense. 
I  shall  have  accepted,  etc. 

x^  toerbc  an'gcnontmcn     l^aBem 

bu  njtrft  cn'geuommen  ^aben. 
er  tDtrb  an'genommeu  l^abeu, 
ttjtr  ttjcrbcn  an'g  e  n  o  m  m  e  n  \)abtn. 
t^r  tDerbct  an'genommeu  ^Beu. 
fie  ttjerbeu  an'g  e  u  o  m  m  e  u  ^abcu. 


\^  Vit%VXt—m,'  I       accept, 

bu  nimmft— an,  thou  acceptest. 

er  utmmt— an,  he    accepts, 

tcir  ue^meu — an,  we    accept, 

t^r  ne^mt— an,  you  accept. 

fie  ne^meu— an,  they  accept. 

Perfect  Tense. 
I  have  accepted,  etc. 

\^  l^atie  an'gcnontmcn. 

bu  ^a[t  an'genommeu. 
er  ^at  an'geuommeu. 
voir  ^aBeu  an'g  e  u  o  m  m  e  u. 
t^r  I;abt  an'genommeu. 
fie  ^abeu  an'geuommeu. 

First  Future  Tense. 
I  shall  accept,  etc, 

t(^  ttjcrbc  an'nc^mcn* 
bu  tt)irft  an'uebmeu. 
er  totrb  an'ne^meu. 
UJir  tcerben  an'u  e  ^  m  e  u. 
i^r  tcerbet  an'ne^meu. 
fie  U)erbeu  an'u  e  ^  m  e  u. 

Rem.  The  prefix  adheres  to  the  verb  except  in  the  simple  tenses  when  used 
in  direct  or  leading  sentences.  In  such  cases  it  is  separated  from  the  verb 
and  placed  after  it  (and  also  after  the  object  of  the  verb,  if  the  verb  is  transi- 
tive) : 

9^a^m  er  eS  an  ?  Did  he  accept  it  ? 

-3?a,  er  ua^m  eS  an,  Yes,  he  accepted  it. 

<bat)  SEBer  f agt,  ba§  er  e8  auua^m  ?  Who  says  that  he  accepted  it  ? 

4.  The  indirect  object  may  be  omitted  after  mitgel^CIl, 

mitncl^men : 


SBoHen  ©te  mttge^en  ? 
SSotteu  @te  c8  mttue^mcu  ? 


Will  you  go  with  (us)  ? 
Will  you  take  it  with  (you)  ? 


INSEPARABLE    COMPOUND    VERBS.  Ill 

Exercise  68. 
1.  Have  you  copied  your  exercise  ?  2.  (No,  I  have  it 
yet  not  copied,  but  I  shall  it  this  evening  copy.)  3. 
These  words  are  hard  to  pronounce.  4.  When  will  you 
return  ?  5.  We  will  return  to-morrow  or  day  after  to- 
morrow. 6.  We  can  not  go  out.  It  is  beginning  to 
rain.  7.  Mr.  Kranzler  says  that  the  architect  will  ex- 
hibit the  plan  of  the  new  city  hall.  8.  We  are  going 
to  Potsdam  to-day ;  can  you  go  with  us  ?  9.1  can  not 
go  to-day  ;  the  physician  says  that  I  must  not  go  out 
to-day.  10.  When  will  the  election  (tie  SGa^l)  take 
place  ?  11.  It  will  take  place  day  after  to-morrow.  12. 
Who  has  taken  my  German  Dictionary  away  ?  13.  He 
was  not  willing  to  accept  the  book.  14.  If  you  go  to 
walk  now,  you  will  have  (mitffen)  to  copy  your  exercise 
this  evening.     15. 1  have  already  copied  it. 


LESSON  XXXV. 

INSEPARABLB   COMPOUND   VERBS. 

3^  »erflc]^'e  e^  nid^t,  I  do  not  understand  it. 

Sd)  »erftant)'  e^  nid^t,  I  did  not  understand  it. 

3d)  \)ahc  ei3  nic^t  ^crjlanb^cn,      I  have  not  understood  it. 

3^  ^citte  e^  nid)t  ^erflanb'en,     I  had  not  understood  it. 

3^  tt^erbe  e^  i^crfle{)'en,  I  shall  understand  it. 

3c^  trcrbe  e^  »erjlanb'cn  l^abcn,  I  shall  have  understood  it. 

S0  ift  f^mer  p  i?erfte^'en,  It  is  hard  to  understand. 

2Bir  ^abcn  ben  ^erg  umgang^en,  We  have  avoided  the  moun- 
tain. 

Sir  ttJerben  ben  53erg  umge^'en,  We  shall  avoid  the  moun- 
tain. 

5Btr  umgin^cjen  ben  33erg,  We  avoided  the  mountain. 

(Sr  bolte  ba^  53uc^  mieber,  He  got  the  book  again. 

dx  tt>tcber^ol'te  ^eute,  tt)a^  cr  He  repeated  to-day  what  he 
i)orgeftern  fagte,  said  day  before  yester- 

day. 


112 


INSEPARABLE    COMPOUND    VERBS. 


1.  SStr  ^alm  gar  nic^t  »erfte^'en  fonnen,  tt)a$  er  fagtc.  ,  2, 
3^  ^abe  ba^  ^u^  ni^t  gelefen,  i^  ^abe  e^  nur  fef)r  flit^ttg 
burc^'gefe^en,  3*  2)ret  (Solbaten  fmb  ^um  geinbe  itbergegangen. 
4.  3)ie  Sonne  mirb  balb  un^terge^en ;  mx  muf  fen  glet^  m6) 
$aufe  (ge^en),  5»  (Sie  ift  fc^on  un'tergegangen.  6*  Sic  ^aben 
bte  9tec|nungen  be^  ^aufmanne^  gan^  genau  unterfuc^t',  aber  ftc 
fjaben  gar  feinen  Seller  gefunben.  1.  Der  SBunbarjt  l)at  btc 
SS5unbe  be^  Solbaten  unterfuc^f  (probed).  8.  $err  ^rau^ 
l^at  feinen  (Garten  mit  einem  fe^r  f^onen  Bctune  umgeb'en.  9. 
^err  ©enerd  »on  53ernftein  ^at  ben  53efe^l  tt)iberru^fen.  10. 
©r  1)ai  alle  feine  5lufgaben  burc^gefef)en.  11.  Sie  woUen  ntor^? 
gen  tt)ie'ber!ommen.  12.  (Sr  n)ieber^olt'  ma^  er  un6  geftcrn  ge^^ 
fagt  ^al  13.  Sinb  Sie  iiber  ^anno'cer  unb  Sraunfd^weig 
gefom^men?  14.  3a,  aber  ic^  bin  nur  bireft'  burc^'gereift,  n^eil 
ic^  meinen  SSater  ntorgen  in  |)eibelberg  treffen  muf.  15.  2Bir 
l^aben  2)eutfc^lanb  buri^reift".  16.  3)er  gifd^er  Ixit  un^  ii'bergcjs 
fe^t.  17.  ^err  3)ietri^  bat  bie  ©efc^id^te  »on  2)eutfd)lanb  itber^ 
fe^t.'  18.  ^err  $rofeffor  Diefenbac^  \)at  un^  ben  gan^en  5lbenb 
ntit  einer  ^oc^ft  intereffanien  ^efc^reibung  feiner  legten  9?eife  in 
Spanien  unterl^arten.  19.  3^  ntuf  ba^  ^ud^  mie'ber^olen. 
20. 2Bie  gefdllf  3^nen  bie  neue  ^ird^e?  21.  Sie  ^at  mix  ganj 
gut  gefallen.  22.  ©ie  jtnb  fe^r  um^gegangen.  23.  2Bir  ttJoU^ 
ten  ben  ^erg  umgel^'en.  24.  3c^  ^<i^^  tjerfuc^t",  ben  ^rief  p 
lefen,  aber  ic^  l^abe  e^  nic^t  gefonnt.  25.  ^err  ginfenftein  i)at 
un^  yorgeftern  5lbenb  befud^t.  26.  §aben  Sie  ^^xt  beutfc^en 
5lufgaben  iiberfegt?    27.  2)er  ^aum  tvax  um'gefallen. 

Vocabulary. 


2)er  SBcfc^r,  — e?,  pi  — e,  command. 

„  ^einb,  — e8,  pi.  — e,  enemy. 

„   ^e^to,  — ,pl.  — ,  fault,  mistake. 

„    ^tfc^er, — ^fpl — ,  fisherman. 

„  ^aun,—t9,pl.  ^CiUm,  hedge. 

„    Tlon'O,  —t^,pl.  — e,  moon, 
gliidbtig,  hasty,  fleeting. 
2)irc!t',  direct. 


S)te  S5e|(^retb'iing,--,i)/.— en,  descrip- 
tion. 

„  5Re(^nung,  — ,  pi.  —en,  account. 

f,  9?etfe,  — ,  pL  — tt,  journey,  trip. 

„  3ltc^tung,  —,pL  —en,  direction. 

„  @onne,  — ,  pi.  — n,  sun. 
9?etfen,  to  travel,  journey. 
@enau',  exact,  carefuL 


INSEPARABLE    COMPOUND    VERBS. 


113 


Grammatical. 

1.  Compound  verbs,  having  as  prefixes  the  Inseparable 
Particles  bc=,  tnU,  tX-,  gC=,  tJCr=,  ItX-,  are  Inseparable  in 
all  their  tenses : 

Present.  ^6:f  Ux  *\tt^' t  eS  nid^t, 

Imperf.  ^(^  UCt  *  fi  a  n  b '  e«  nid^t, 

Perfect.  3t^  ^abc  c8  nid^t  Uct  *  jt  a  n  b '  c  n , 

Pluperf.  3!d;  ^atte  cs  nid;t  Ucr  *  fi  a  n  b '  e  n , 

l*f  /W.  3c^  tuerbc  eS  Ucr  *  ft  e  t) '  ^  n , 

2rf  /W.  3d;  trerbe  c8  Ucr  *  ft  a  nb '  e  n  ^abcn,  I  shall  have  understood  it. 

Infinit.    (S«  ift  \&)XOtX  3U  UCr  =  ft  e  V  e  n  ,  It  is  hard  to  understand. 

Rem.  The  principal  parts  of  the  irregular  verb  ftcllCn^  to  stand,  are  ftC^^CB; 

ftanb,  gcftaubcn* 

2.  Of  compound  verbs  having  the  prefixes  burc^,  ^ttttcr, 
illbcr,  unter,  urn,  micber,  toibcr,  some  are  Separable  and 
others  are  Inseparable: 


I  do  not  understand  it. 
I  did  not  understand  it. 
I  have  not  understood  it. 
I  had  not  understood  it. 
I  shall  understand  it. 


Separable. 
!?Ur(!^'  f  e  ^  C  n  ,  to  look  through. 
Uc'bcr  *  g  e  ^  e  n  ,*  to  go  over,  desert. 
Un'tcr » g  e  ^  e  n  ,*  to  go  down,  set. 
Urn''  f  a  It  e  n  ,*  to  fall  down. 
SBiC'bCr  =  b  r  i  n  g  e  u  ,  to  bring  back. 
SBic'bcr  *  f  0  m  m  e  n  ,♦  to  return. 
2BiC'ber  *  r  u  f  C  n  ,  to  call  again. 


Inseparable. 
3)  u  r  d^  *  rci'fcn,  to  traverse. 
U  e  b  c  r  =  trcf'fCll,  to  surpass. 
U  n  t  e  r  <  fud)'cn,  to  examine. 
U  m  =  OC'bcn,  to  surround. 
2B  i  b  e  r  ^  fprc't^Cn,  to  contradict. 
2B  t  e  b  c  r  =  l)0'lcn,  to  repeat. 
2B  t  b  c  r  *  ru'fcn,  to  revoke. 


3.  Many  of  these  compound  verbs  having  the  prefixes 
bur(^,  iibcr,  urn,  unter,  toicbcr,  are  used  both  as  Separable 
or  Inseparable,  according  to  the  signification  they  re- 
ceive : 


Separable. 
^ViX^''  r  e  t  f  c  n ,  to  travel  through. 
Uc'bcr  *  f  e  t3  c  n ,  to  put  over. 
Unt'*  g  e  ^  e  n  ,*  to  go  out  of  one's  way. 
Un'tcr  *  M 1 1  c  n  ,  to  hold  under. 
2BiC'bCt  *  ^  0 1  e  n ,  to  bring  back  again. 


Inseparable. 
3)  U  r  d^  *  rcif'cn,  to  traverse. 
U  e  b  c  r  *  fC^'CIt,  to  translate. 
Um*gcI)'Cn^  to  avoid. 
U  u  t  e  r  *  ^aU' Cn,  to  entertain 
as  i  C  b  c  r  *  ^oren,  to  repeat. 


4.  Inseparable  compound  verbs,  having  the  particlea 
be,  Ctlt,  er,  bur(^,  iikr,  etc.,  as  prefixes,  do  not  take  gc^  in 
the  perfect  participle. 

♦  With  f Citt  as  auxiliary. 


114 


INSEPARABLE    COMPOUND    VERBS. 


Imperfect 

Perfect 

Indicative. 

Participle, 

bejuc^'tc, 

befud)t'. 

cntbecf'tc, 

entbedt'. 

cm^)ftng', 

cm^^fang'en. 

crfanb', 

crfunb'en. 

gcfier, 

gefatt'en. 

berftanb', 

bcrftanb'cn. 

ltX\>XOi^', 

jcrbroc^'cn. 

burc^retf'tc, 

burd^reift'. 

itbertraf, 

ilbertroff'en. 

untging', 

utngang'cn. 

h)tberf^ra(^', 

tutberfprod^'en. 

tt)ieber^ortc, 

ttjiber^olt'. 

Present  Infinitive. 

Be  *  f  U  ct) '  C  n ,  to  visit. 

cut  *  b  e  cf '  e  n ,  to  discover. 

Cm^  *  t  a  It  g '  c  u ,  to  receive. 

Cr  *  f  t  n  b '  e  n ,  to  invent. 

gc  *  f  a  U '  e  It ,  to  please. 

iJCt  *  ft  C  ^ '  e  It ,  to  understand. 

jCt  *  b  r  e  c^ '  e  It ,  to  shatter. 

burt!^  *  r  C  t  f  e  It ,  to  traverse. 

Ukr  'txt\\'  tVl,io  surpass. 

lira  *  g  C  V  C  " »  to  avoid. 

ttibcr  sy:|)re(^'cit,to  contradict. 

tijiCbCr  *  ^  0 1 '  e  It ,  to  repeat. 

5.  Some  verbs,  as  rcttcH,  rcifen,  laufcn,  f^jringcn^  etc. 

(§  135,  2,  Rem.  1),  take  fctll  as  the  auxiliary,  when  indi- 
cating a  motion  towards  a  particular  ^lace  ^  otherwise 
they  have  l^a^CH  for  the  auxiliary: 

@r  tft  itad)  ^Berlin  gcrcift',  He  has  gone  to  Berlin, 

(but)  er  \f^i  biel  OCrCift',  He  has  traveled  much. 

6.  Verbs  that  are  intransitive  when  simple  often  form 

transitive  compounds  : 

@r  tft  na(^  bcr  @tabt  gcpng'eit,      He  has  gone  to  the  city. 

®ic  l^akn  ben  geinb  urapng'Cn,     They  have  outflanked  the  enemy. 

7.  The  inseparable  particles  k,  tViif  tX,  %t,  t>tt,  ^tX, 
burd),  ixbtX^  etc.,  are  unaccented. 

Rem.  The  dissyllables  it^r,  UUtCr,  tO'ltHXf  tOlhtVf  however,  take  a  light 
or  secondary  accent. 

8.  The  verb  gefaflcil  governs  the  dative  case : 

SKtC  gCf attt'  eg  ^l^lteil  ?  How  does  it  please  you  ? 

Exercise  70. 
1.  I  have  only  glanced  through  (burd^fe'^en)  the  letter 
very  hastily.  2.  The  soldiers  are  deserting  to  the  en- 
emy. 3.  Has  the  moon  gone  down  ?  4.  The  sun  had 
already  set  when  they  arrived.  5.  The  merchant  has 
examined  the  accounts  of  the  tailor.  6.  Mr.  Kranz  and 
Mr.  Meyerheim  have  traveled  through  (burc^reif  en)  many 


COMPOUND  NOUNS.  115 

lands.  7.  The  fisherman  took  us  over.  8.  Mr.  Konig 
has  translated  the  history  of  the  German  literature. 
9.  Mrs.  Friedliinder  entertained  us  with  a  description 
of  her  trip  from  Hamburg  to  Heidelberg.  10.  How  do 
you  like  (^.  e.  how  pleases  you)  the  new  cathedral  ?  11. 
The  garden  is  surrounded  with  a  beautiful  hedge.  12. 
Why  did  you  go  so  much  (fef)r)  out  of  your  way  (um^gc^ 
IS)cn)  ?  13.  We  wished  to  avoid  the  high  mountain  be- 
tween Schcinfeld  and  Liebeneck.  14.  He  attempted  to 
translate  the  book,  but  he  was  not  able  to  do  it  (e^  nid^t 
fiiriinen). 

LESSON  XXXVI. 

COMPOUND   NOUNS. 

^'m  ftnt  S^rc  ^anbf^u^e,  Here  are  your  gloves 

^aben  <3ic  ein  getermeffer  ?  Have  you  a  penknife? 

!Da^  !l)ampffc^tff  ifl  ancjcfom^  The  steamer  has  arrived. 

men,  [mu()(e, 

§crr  $Rot^   \)ai  eine  Dampf^  Mr.  Roth  has  a  steam-mill. 

2)a^  ^ferb  ift  ein  ?aftt^ier,  The  horse  is  a  beast  of  bur- 

3c^  'S>abe  ta^  ga^rgclt)  be^a^lt,  I  have  paid  the  toll.  [den. 

1.  $aben  8ie  ba^  neue  (Sc^ulljau^  gefe^en?  2.  SKd^rcnb  ber 
Ic^ten  jtranjig  3a^re  ^at  ba^  ?anb  au§erorbentltc^e  (extraordi- 
nary) gortf^ritte  gcmacfct.  3.  ^m  ifl  bcr  5lu^(^ang  (way 
out).  4. 3d^  fann  fcinen  5litc^enbHcf  Icinger  bleiben  ;  i^  mug  glei^ 
m6)  §aufe.  5.  Dcr  merte  55anb  bcr  ®cfd)t^te  ber  53aufutifl 
»on  Dr.  gran^  ^uc^ler  ift  jcftt  in  aUcn  53ud)banbhingen  ju  ^a^ 
ben.  6.  ^aben  (Sic  btc  berii^mte  SBinbrnitble  in  5)ot^bam  f;e^ 
fcbcn  ?  7.  3)^arte,  ()afl  bu  meinen  gingerbut  gefe^en  ?  8.  ^err 
Dr.  (Sc^mibt  ift  ^rofeffor  ber  beutfc^en  ©pra^e  an  (in)  einer 
^bd)tcrfc^ule  in  i>ttt^burg.  9.  Da^  Dampffd)iff  „®ermanta" 
ift  c^cflern  5lbenb  anc^efommen.  10.  Da^  Earned  ift  ein  ?a|l^ 
tbter,  unb  ber  Xiger  ift  ein  3^aubt^ier.    11.  Da^  3Kort  „®ram^ 


116  COMPOUND   NOUNS. 

matif"  ijl  em  Srembwort.  12. 3fi  ba^  grii^iluc!  ferttg  (ready)? 
13-  3a,  ba^  grit^ftiicf  ift  fc^on  fertig.  14.  3)ie  golbene  $o^^ 
^eit  mxt)  ^eute  ^orgen  ftattfiinben.  15.  Der  ©^nell^ug  »on 
Seip^ig  ift  foeben  angefommen.  16.  ^onnen  @te  mix  tint 
Otecfnabel  geben?  17.  |)eute  SO^orgen  f)aben  tt)tr  etnen  fe^r 
fc^onen  ^pa^ter'gang  gemac^t  18.  :^er  ©ciulengang  be^  ^n\t^ 
\m^  in  33erlin  ift  tin  ^auptwerf  ber  mobernen  ^aufunft.  19. 
2)ie  ^auptfeber  meiner  ^^afc^enu^r  ift  gebroc^en.  20.  Berlin  ift 
bie  §auptftabt  »on  preufen.  21.  Tltin  @ro^»ater  vcio\)ntt  frii^er 
in  3?lagbeburg ;  er  wo^nt  je^t  in  ^oln.  22.  34  ^abe  mein 
gebermeffer  geftern  SD^orgen  »erloren»  23.  „3tt>an^tg"  ift  ein 
3a{)ln)ort. 

Grammatical. 

1.  While  compound  verbs  are  mostly  formed  by  pre- 
fixing prepositions  to  simple  verbs,  Compound  Nouns  are 
mostly  formed  by  prefixing  to  nouns  other  nouns. 

Re7n.  1 .  The  prefix  noun  has  an  adjective  signification,  as  it  modifies  oi 
limits  the  signification  of  the  noun  to  which  it  is  prefixed. 

Rem.  2.  Adjectives,  numerals,  pronouns,  verbs,  adverbs,  prepositions,  and 
conjunctions  (including  thus  all  parts  of  speech  except  the  article  and  inter-> 
jection)  may  also  serve  as  prefixes  of  compound  nouns. 

2)aS  @£^ur*^au§,  school-house  (bic  @rf)ulc,  school ;    ba§  §au6,  house). 

2)a6  i^rcmb'-tDort,  foreign  word  (fremb,  foreign ;  bag  5ffiort,  word). 

S)er  3!oct'-'!am^f,  duel  (^ttjet,  two ;  ber  ^am^jf,  battle). 

2)er  ©cltift'-morb,  suicide  (felfeft,  self ;  ber  9}?orb,  murder). 

SDaS  ^ttl^t'=gelb,  toU  (fa^ren,  to  ride ;  ba§  ®elb,  money). 

2)er  ^ort'*jd;ntt,  progress  (fort,  forward ;  ber  @c^rttt,  step). 

SDer  3lu^'^gang, exit  (au8, out;  ber  @ang, passage). 

2)er  3l't)Cr*gIauBe,  superstition  (aBer,  but ;  ber  ©laitfec,  belief. 

2.  The  primary  accent  falls  upon  the  prefix. 

3.  With  but  very  few  exceptions,  Compound  Nouns 
take  the  gender  of  the  last  noun  (§  67). 

2)Cr  3lu'genl6It(f ,  moment  (ba§  3luge,  eye ;  ber  SSIicf,  glance), 

ff  S3au'metfter,  architect  (ber  33au,  building ;  ber  9JJet[ter, master). 

„  S3Iu'men!o^I,  cauliflower  (bie  SSIume,  flower ;  bcr  ^O^I,  cabbage). 

rr  S3iir'gertrteg,  civil  war  (bie  33ilrger,  citizens ;  ber  ^rteg,  war). 

V  ©am^f'fcffel,  boiler  (ber  SDam^jf,  steam ;  ber  ^effct,  kettle). 


COMPOUND  NOUNS. 


117 


Scr 


5)ic 


(baS  Si«,  ice ; 
(bcr  ginger,  finger ; 
(bic  §anb,  hand; 
(ber  9Jcgen,  rain ; 
(bie  ®onuc,sun; 
(bic  2;af(^e,  pocket ; 
(bcr  33au,  building ; 
(bcr  S3aum,  tree ; 


GiS'bar,  polar  bear 

gin'gcr^ut,  thimble 

^anb'fc^u^,  glove 

Ste'genfc^irm,  umbrella 

@ou'ncnfd;irm,  parasol 

2:a'fc^enbicb,  pickpocket 

Sau'tunft,  architecture 
„    SSaum'woUc,  cotton 
„    SBerg'fette,  mountain  range   (ber  Serg,  mountain ; 
„     2)ampf  miible,  steam  mill     (ber  2)am^f ,  steam ; 
„    @i'fcnba^n,  railroad  (ba6  (Sifen,  iron  ; 

„    gtil'gcltbilr,  folding  door      (ber  i^lilgcl,  wing ; 
„     2;od/terfc^uIe,  girls'  school  (bic  SiJC^tcr,    daugh- 
„    ^olt^'\6}uk,  common  school  (baS  5>oIf, people;  [ters 
„    Xa'jc^cuut^r,  watch  (bie  2:;afd;e,  pocket ; 

„    SBanb'ubr,  clock  (bic  2Banb,  wall ; 

„    Sffiinb'mublc,  windmill  (bcr  5i!Sinb,  wind ; 

2)a^  33utter6rob,bread  and  butter  (bic  Sutter,  butter 


tJCr  535r,  bear), 
bcr  §Ut,  hat). 
bcr  @d;u^,  shoe). 
bcr  ©c^irm,  screen), 

bcr  2)ieb,  thief). 
bic  ^un[t,  art). 
bic  2i5oUe,  wooU 
bic  ^Ctte,  chain). 
bic  TmU,  mill). 
bic  53af)n,  road). 
bic  Xl)ilr,  door). 
bic  @d;uic,  school). 

;      "         "   ) 
bic  U^r,  clock). 

"    ) 

bic  Tt^U,  mill). 
btt^Srob,  bread). 
ia^  53oot,  boat). 

bag  ©c^iff,  ship). 

bag  aj?e[f cr,  knife). 

ba0^eifd;,meat). 

((  "    ^ 

((  ((      \ 

bog  X^ier,  animal). 

U       ) 

bag  §au9,  house). 
bag  33ud;,  book). 
bag  SSort,  word). 

4.  Examples  of  Compound  Nouns  with  adjectives  as 

prefixes  : 

!J)cr  6'bclflein,  jewel  (cbet,  noble;  bet  ©tcin,  stone). 

!J)er  j^rci'maurer,  freemason  (frei,  free;  bcr  SJiaurer, mason). 

3)a8  j^remb'TOort,  foreign  word  (frcmb,  foreign ;  baS  5Bort,  word). 

2)aS  ^rU^'ftticf ,  breakfast  (frii^,  early ;  ba8  @til(f,  piece). 

2)er  @lcid)'mut(),  equanimity  (glctc^,  like ;  bcr  9JJutb,  mood). 

3)er  ®rot?'t»ater,  grandfather  (gro^, great;  bcr  3Sater,  father). 

3)ie  ©ro^'mutter,  grandmother  (    "      "  bic  3Jhttter,  mother) 

3)cr  ^od^'mutb,  haughtiness  (^0(!^,  high-;  bcr  3Jhltb,  mood). 

2)ie  ^cd)',^cit,  wedding  (    *'      "  bic  "^^X,  time). 

2)cr  ©d^ncir^ug,  express  train  (fd^nctf,  fast;  bcr  ^uflf  train). 

2>er  ^oU'monb,  full  moon  (tjoU,  full ;  bcr  aJJonb,  moon). 


!J)ampf'boot,  steam-boat 
2)ampn^?iftr  steamer 
ge'bermeffer,  penknife 
^am'melficijc^,  mutton 
^alb'f(cifcf>,  veal 
9tinb'fleifd),  beef 
©cbnjei'neflcifc^,  pork 
Saft't^ier,  beast  of  burden 
SRaub'tbier,  beast  of  prey 
3ug'ti)ier,  draught  animal 
@d;urbau§,  school-house 
SBiJr'terbuc^,  dictionary 
3abrtt)ort,  numeral 


(bcr  2)ompf ,  steam ; 

(bic  geber,  pen ; 
(ber  §ammel,  sheep ; 
(ba6Mb,  calf; 
(baS  $Rinb,  cattle, 
(bag  ©rf^tDcin,  hog ; 
(bic  Saft, burden; 
(bcr  $Raub,  prey ; 
(ber  3ll9f  draught ; 
(bic  @d?ule,  school ; 
(bie  SSorter,  words ; 
(bic  3^^^f  number ; 


118 


COMPOUND  NOUNS. 


5.  Examples  of  Compound  Nouns  with  verbal  prefixes 


3)ag  S3renn'f)otj,  firewood  (brennen,  to  burn ; 

2)a§  ^abr'gelb,  toll  (fa^ren,  to  ride ; 

2)a§  ^ef)rjat)r,year  with  bad  crops  (fe^ten,  to  mistake; 
2)a§  Se'febud;,  reader  (tefcn,  to  read ; 

3)a§  Se'festninier,  reading-room     (  "  " 

2)ie  9Mt/mafd;ine,    sewing-ma- (nci^en,  to  sew; 

chine 
2)tc  9^a^'nabet,  needje  (na^cn,  to  sew ; 

S)te  ©tedf'nabei,  pin  (ftecfcn,  to  stick ; 

2)ic  ©tricE'nabct,  knitting-needle  (ftricfen,  to  knit ; 
S)a§  ®  d)reib':|)a^tcr ,  writing  paper  (f  d^reiben,  to  write ; 
2)er  3^i'9^fi^S^^/  index  finger       (jetgen,  to  point ; 


bag  §0(5,  wood). 
ba§  ®elb,  money). 
bag  3at;r,  yearj. 
bag  S3u^,  book), 
bag  3^ttt^ei^r  room), 
bie  2}Jafd;tne,     ma- 
chine), 
bic  9^abel,  pin). 
"      ) 

bag  ^a^ter,  paper), 
ber  finger,  finger). 


6.  Examples  of  Compound  Nouns  with pre^positions  as 
prefixes  : 

(aB,  away ; 
(out,  up; 
(aug,  out ; 
(burd^,  through ; 
(fiir.for; 
(gegen,  against ; 
(tn,  in ; 
(mtt,  with ; 

(nac^,  after; 
(ilber,  over ; 

(i3or,  before ; 

(3U,  to ; 

2)er  3»f«ni'men^ang,  connection  (jufammen, together;  ber  §ang, hanging). 
2)er  B^^i'f^cu^oum,  interstice      (jtutfc^en,  between ;     ber  diaum,  space). 

7.  Compound  Nouns  are  formed  much  more  exten- 
sively in  German  than  in  English,  as  is  shown  by  the 
following  examples : 

1.  Compound  Nouns  formed  by  adding  prefixes  to 
ber  ®ang,  a  noun  derived  from  gC^Ctt  {to  go),  and 
meaning  a  going,  a  passage. 

Stb'gang,  departure  (ab,  away). 

Sluf'gang,  rising  (auf,  up). 

?Xug'gang,  exit  (aug,  out). 

JBaum'gang,  shady  avenue         (S3aum,  tree). 


2)te  216' reifc,  departure 
2)er  2lufgang,  rising,  ascent 
S)te  2lug'gat>e,  edition 
2)er  S)urd/fd;nttt,  average 
3)ag  ^ilr'lDort,  pronoun 
2)ag  ©e'gengift,  antidote 
S)er  3n'^citt,  contents 
jDer  aJiit'bilrger,  fellow-citizen 
2)te  9}Ztt' gift,  dowry 
S)tc   5^ac^'frage,  demand 
2)er  Ue'berrocf,  overcoat 
2)er  Ue'berbau,  superstructure 
2)te  3>or'flabt,  suburb 
S)er  Bu't^tt,  accident 


btc  Sletfe,  journey), 
ber  @ang,  passage), 
bic  ®abe,  gift), 
ber  ©c^nttt, cutting), 
bag  SBort,  word), 
bag  ®ift,  poison), 
ber  ^a(t,  holding), 
ber  ^iirger,  citizen), 
bic  ®tft,gift). 
bie  ^rage,  question), 
ber  dtod,coat). 
ber  S3au,  building), 
bie  @tabt,  city), 
ber  gall,  falHng). 


COMPOUND  NOUNS. 


119 


53o'gengang,  arcade 
2)ur^'gang,  thoroughfare 
©tngang,  entrance 
©rj'gang,  veinof  ore 
gort'gang,  progression 
^cr'gang,  event 
^ingang,  death 
2JJiB'gang,  failure 
SKor'gengang,  morning  walk 
JRitcf'gang,  retreat 
©du'Iengang,  colonnade 
©^ajier'  gang,  walk  for  pleasure 
©d^at'tcngang,  shady  walk 
Ue'bcrgang,  transition 
Um'gang,  intercourse 
Un'tergang,  destruction 
33or'gang,  precedence 


(33ogcn,  arch). 

(Durd;,  through). 

(ein,  in). 

((Srj,  ore). 

(fort,  forth). 

(^er,  hither). 

(^in,  thither). 

(mi[fen,  to  miss). 

(morgeu,  morning). 

(riid ,  back). 

(@aulc,  column). 

(f^ajtc'reu,  to  walk  for  pleasure;. 

(®d;attcn,  shadow). 

(iibcr,  over). 

(urn,  around). 

(unter,  under). 

(toor,  before). 


2.  Compound  Nouns  with  ta^  ^ClU^Jt,  t/te  head,  as 
prefix : 


S)er  ^aupt' attar,  high  altar 
2)er  §au^t'an!er,  sheet  anchor 
2)ie  §au^t'armec,  main  army 
2)er  §aupt'artifel,  leading  editorial 
S)er  ^aupt'balten,  architrave 
2)cr  ^aupt'ba^,  thorough-base 
2)er  |)aupt'begrtff,  leading  idea 
S)ic  §au^t'fefcer,  main-spring 
3)er  §aupt'ic{)lcr,  chief  fault 
SJ)ie  ^au^t'fragc,  main  question 
2)ie  ^au^t'!ird)c,  cathedral 
2)cr  §aupt'mann,  captain 
2)er  §aiipt'maft,  mainmast 
jDtC  ^au^Jt'roUc,  principal  part 
!Die  §au^t'fad;e,  principal  thing 
2)te  ^aupt'fangerin,  i)rima  donna 
2)aS  §au)3t'fegel,  mainsail 
S)ic  §aupt'ftabt,  capital 
2)te  §au^t'[tra^e,  main  street 
2)er  ^au^t'ton,  key  note 
2)ie  ^au^t'tugenb,  cardinal  virtue 
2)a8  §au^t'n?crf,  masterpiece 
2)a8  ipau^t'ttJort,  noun 
2)tc  ^aiipt'jeile,  head-line  (of  a  page) 
2)er  ^au^t'jeuge,  principal  witness 


(bcr  mtax',  altar), 
(ber  5liiter,  anchor), 
(bie  2lrnicc',anTiy). 
(bcr  ?lrti'tel,  article), 
(bcr  33atfen,  beam), 
(ber  ©a^,  base), 
(bcr  S3egriff',  idea), 
(bie  gebcr,  feather), 
(ber  ?^el}ler,  fault), 
(bie  ^rage,  question), 
(bie  ^xd^t,  church), 
(bcr  2}kun,  man), 
(bcr  2)ia[t,  mast), 
(bie  9iotte,  part), 
(bie  @ad;c,  thing), 
(bie  -Scingeriu,  singer) 
(baS  <SegeI,  sail). 
(bie  Stabt,  city;, 
(bie  Strafe,  street), 
(bcr  2;on,  tone), 
(bie  2;ugenb,  virtue). 
(ba«  ©erf,  work). 
(ba§  ©ort,  word), 
(bie  ^nU,  line), 
(ber  Beugc,  witness). 


120  COMPOUND  NOUNS. 

Exercise  72. 
1.  Have  you  ever  (je)  seen  a  polar  bear?  2.  The 
pickpocket  has  stolen  my  gloves.  3.  Mr.  Grein  is 
teacher  in  the  common  school  in  Elberfeld.  4.  I  can 
not  find  my  penknife.  5.  The  school-house  is  opposite 
the  church.  6.  Mr.  KirchhofF  has  bought  a  clock  and 
a  sewing  machine.  7.  Can  you  give  me  a  needle?  8. 
Here  is  the  entrance,  and  there  is  the  exit  (way  out). 
9.  The  contents  of  the  book  are  (tft)  very  interesting 
and  instructive.  10.  The  word  „$au^"  is  a  noun,  and 
„n.nr"  is  a  pronoun.  11.  Charlottenburg  is  a  suburb  of 
Berlin.  12.  The  main  army  arrived  in  Leipzig  yester- 
day evening  ;  it  will  arrive  in  Berlin  to-morrow.  13. 
The  express  train  from  Hamburg  has  not  yet  arrived. 
14.  Mr.  Auerbach  is  in  the  reading-room.  He  is  read- 
ing the  newspapers.  15.  I  wish  a  quire  of  writing-pa- 
per. 16.  Did  you  read  the  leading  editorial  in  to-day's 
paper?     17.  Vienna  is  the  capital  of  Austria. 


LESSON  XXXVII. 

DERIVATIVE    NOUNS. 

1.  ©inb  6ie  au^  ®ot^a?  2. 5Rein,  i^  bin  cin  53erUner  (or 
i^  bin  au$  53erltn).  3.  3ft  "^err  3)tetr{(^  au^  Sranffurt  (or 
ift  $err  Dietrich  etn  5ranffurter)  ?  4.  ^m,  er  ift  tin  ^am^ 
burger,  aber  §err  Diefenbac^  ift  etn  granffurter,  $err  ^raufc 
ift  etn  5!}lec!lenburger"^  unb  §err  ^Sc^norr  tfl  etn  £)It)enburcjer« 

5.  ©eftern  '^benb  ^aht  i^  etnen  ^nglcinber,  einen  |)olIdnber  unb 
einen  ©^njctjer  bet  (at  the  house  of)  §errn  ©tetn  getroffen* 

6.  Unfere  ^ebrertn  in  ber  beutfc^en  (Sprad^e  ift  etne  3)?edf{enbur^ 
gerin,  au^  ^d^merin^  7.  grau  ^ernboff  ifl  au^  33erltn  (or  ifl 
cine  ^erltnertn),  grciuletn  ©dbmtbt  ifl  etne  §amburgertn,  unb 
grau  ^an  Dorn  tft  etne  §oUdnberin.     8.  t)a^  3)?dbcben  ^at  etn 

*  For  words  not  found  explained  in  the  lessons  hereafter,  see  the  Dictirn^ 
ary  in  Part  Fourth. 


DERIVATIVE   NOUNS.  121 

fe^r  f^5ttee  fceutf^ee  ?tebd)en  gefungen.  9. 3c^  ^abc  ein  f^onee 
S3lumd)en  im  Garten  gcpfliicft.  10.  Die  ©lite  cinc^  ©etic^te^ 
^dngt  nic^t  blo^  »on  ber  9Mnt)eit  fcer  9ieime  ab  (ab^angcn).  11. 
3)ie  (Sonne  erreic^t  tf)re  gropte  ^o()e  unb  bie  Xage  erreic^en  t{)rc 
Qro^te  ^cinge  am  22.  3um.  12.  Dtx  giug  f)at  l)ier  etne  Xiefc 
»on  60  gug  unt>  eine  ^reite  i)on  800  gu§.  13.  Da  ©utc 
liebt  ba^  ©ute,  ber  SBeife  fu^t  ba^  SBa^re,  ber  ^iinftler  Mt 
ba^  (Sc^bne,  unb  ber  n)a()re  5>^i(ofopt)  fuc^t  ba^  ©ute,  ba6  2Ba()rc 
unb  ba^  Sc^one.  14.  3Bd^renb  fetner  langen  ^ranft)eit  ^at 
S®il()e(m  gar  nic^t  aue  bem  $aufe  ge^en  fonnen.  15.  Die 
<Sc^on()eit  ber  ?anbf^aft  in  ber  91d{)e  »on  Dre^ben  f)at  un^  fo 
fe^r  entpcft,  bag  anr  ben  ganjcn  (£ommer  in  Dre^ben  gebliebcn 
ftnb.     16.  Der  ©eneral  ^at  bie  Xapferfeit  ber  ©olbaten  gelobt. 

Grammatical. 

1.  Derivative  Nouns  are  formed  by  adding  prefixes  or 
suffixes  to  verbs,  adjectives,  or  other  nouns. 

Rem.  In  some  cases  the  umlaut  is  also  added  to  the  radical  vowel. 

2.  Some  suffixes  form  concrete  nouns,  as  scr,  dVi  (or 

4nn),  =(^cn  (or  =lcin). 

1.  The  suffix  -cr  usually  denotes  male  per soois^  as  : 

2)Cr  33aucr,       peasant      {from  bauen,  to  cultivate). 

„     2)tencr,      sen  ant      (    "    biencn,         to  serve). 
II     3fcigcr,       hunter      (    "     jagen,  to  hunt). 

„    Secret,      teacher     (    "    le^rcn,         to  teach), 
r,     Scaler,       painter      (    "     malen,  to  paint). 

r,    ©d^nciDer,  tailor       (   "    fc^netbcn,     to  cut). 
„    i^Icifdjcr,    butcher    (    "    ba8  gtcifd^,  meat). 
„    ©artncr,   gardener  (   '*    ber  ©arten,  garden). 
,/     ®att(cr,     saddler    (    "    ber  battel,  saddle). 
Rem.  1.  Nouns  in  sCt  are  formed  from  both  nouns  and  verbs. 
Rem.  2.  The  suffix  sCr  (or  sncr)  is  added  to  the  names  of  many  countries 
and  cities  in  forming  masculine  national  and  civic  nouns ;  with  some  nouns 
tlie  umlaut  is  added,  with  others  it  is  omitted  ;  as  : 

2)cr  Serli'ner,      citizen  of  Berlin      {from  53erUn,         Berlin). 
„    hamburger,  citizen  of  Hamburg  (    "    Hamburg,    Hamburg). 
„     ^tnerifa'ner,  the  American  (    "     Omenta,      America). 

t,     (Snglcinbcr,    the  Englishman        (    "     Suglanb,      England). 
r,    ^oUdiiber,     the  Dutchman  (    "     ^oUaiib,       Holland). 

IT     Sc^tweiser,     the  Swiss  (    *'     bie  ©d^Weij,  Switzerland). 


122 


DERIVATIVE   NOUNS. 


2.  The  suffix  =tlt  forms  feminine  from  many  mascu 
line  personal  nouns,  as : 


2)te  33auertn, 

peasantess       )         ,. 
peasant's  wife^        ^-^"^^^ 

I  ber  53auer, 

peasant). 

V 

©tenerin, 

female  servant         ( 

ber  2)iencr, 

servant). 

tt 

grcunbtn, 

female  friend           ( 

ber  greimb, 

friend). 

u 

^atjerin, 

empress                   ( 

ber  ^'aifer, 

emperor). 

11 

^Kmgtn, 

queen                       ( 

ber  ^onig, 

king). 

» 

^oc^in, 

female  cook 

ber  ^oc^, 

cook). 

tt 

Se^rertn, 

female  teacher        ( 

ber  $?et)rer, 

teacher). 

tl 

©d^iilerin, 

female  scholar         ( 

ber  @d;utcr, 

scholar). 

tt 

SSerlt'iterin, 

the  Berlin  lady 

ber  33erltner, 

Berlin). 

tt 

^amburflerin, 

the  Hamburg  lady  ( 

ber  hamburger,  Hamburg). 

It 

^frita'nertn, 

the  Africaness         ( 

ber  5lfri!aner, 

African). 

tt 

2lmerifa'nenn 

,  the  American  lady  ( 

ber  Stmeritaner 

American), 

It 

Sngtcinberin, 

the  English  lady 

ber  ©ngtcinber, 

Englishman). 

It 

^oUanberin, 

the  Dutch  lady       ( 

ber  §oHanber, 

Dutchman). 

ft 

©d^treijertn, 

the  Swiss  lady         ( 

ber  (gdjiceijer, 

the  Swiss). 

Rem.''\.  Formerly  the  termination  sill 

tl  was  much  used ;  the  plural  ending 

of  nouns  in  sin  is  siltllCn,  as  : 

2)te  ^ontgin  (^ontginn),  queen ;  pi.  bte  S5ntgtnnen,  queens. 
Mem.  2.  "With  some  nouns  the  umlaut  is  added :  ber  ^  o  (^,  biC 


3.  Diminutive  nouns  are  formed  by  adding  the  suf- 
fix =^cn  or  4citl  to  many  nouns ;  the  umlaut  is 
added  when  the  radical  vowel  is  capable  of  it : 


!I)a§  SSciumc^en,  the  small  tree 

,;    ^nablein,  the  small  boy 

53Iiimc^en,  the  little  flower 

®tabtdj>en,  the  small  city 

SD^abd^en,  the  girl 

^routetn,  the  young  miss 

S3r6bc^en,  the  small  loaf  of  bread 

§au8c^en,  the  small  house 

„    Siebdjen,  the  sonnet 

„    ^ferbd^en  the  little  horse 

Rem.  2.  These  diminutive  nouns  all  take  the  neuter  gender,  whatever  may 
be  the  gender  of  the  nouns  from  which  they  are  derived. 

Rem.  2.  These  diminutive  terminations  often  express  affectionate  feeling 
or  regard : 

2)ag  ^Sciterd^en,     "father  dear"    (from  ber  93ater,    father). 
„    9}itttterd(^en,  "  mother  dear"  (   "    bte  SDJutter,  mother). 


from  ber  53aum,  tree). 

f,  ^nabe,  boy). 
bie  S3lume,  flower). 

„   ®tabt,  city). 

„   9Kagb,  maid). 

,t   '^xau,    woman), 
ba^^rob,    bread). 

„   ^ait&,    house). 

„  Sieb,      song). 

„  ^ferb,    horse). 


DERIVATIVE   NOUNS.  123 

4.  The  suffixes  =e,  =5cit  (or  =!cit),  m^,  =ft^ait,  'A^nm, 
sUiig  form  mostly  abstract  nouns. 

1.  The  suffix  =C  (with  umlaut  to  the  radical  vowel) 
forms  nouns  from  adjectives: 

^iC  ©ilte,  goodness  (from  gut,  good). 
„  ^O^C,  height  (  "  \)o6},  high). 
„  Scingc,  length  (  "  lang,  long). 
„  Siefc,  depth  (  "  tief,  deep). 
„   SBreitC,  breadth    (  "     breit,  broad). 

Rem.  Noans  thus  formed  are  not  to  be  confounded  with  adjectives  used 
Bubstantively,  and  referring  to  persons,  as : 

^Cr  @ute,        the  good  man ;  bic  @utc,         the  good  woman. 

„    SBeifc,      the  wise  man ;  „  5l8eife,        the  wise  woman. 

„    2)eutfc!^C,  the  German  (man) ;    „  2)eutf(^e,  the  German  (woman). 

Nor  with  the  neuter  of  adjectives  when  used  to  indicate  the  quality  of  the 
adjective  regarded  as  a  concrete  thing,  as : 

2)0^  @utc,  the  good        (from  gut,         good). 

„    2Bat)re,  the  true        (   "    \vai)V,      true). 

„    @d;i3nc,  the  beautiful  (    '*     jd^iju,       beautiful). 

„    gr^a'beuc,  the  sublime   (    "    erl^a'bcn,  sublime). 

2.  The  suffix  =5cit  or  {4tit)  forms  both  abstract  and 
concrete  nouns  from  adjectives: 

2)iC  ^rantl?eit,  sickness  (from  Iran!,        sick). 

„  ©c^en^cit,  beauty  (    "  fd;i3n,        beautiful). 

„  SSa^r^cit,  truth  (   "  tva^r,        true). 

„  aJeinbcit,  purity  (   "  rciu,  pure). 

„  2)untel(?eit,  darkness  (   "  buntet,       dark). 

„  3lebnlic^feit,  similarity  (  "  dbulid;,      similar). 

„  I'^rcuubUd^tcit,  friendliness  (   "  frcunblid;,  friendly). 

„  33iaigfcit,  cheai)ness  (   "  biUig,         cheap). 

„  ^oftbarfeit,  de.imess  (   "  f  oft  bar,       dear). 

„  ^urd;tfaniteit,  fearfulness  (   "  furd;tfam,  fearful). 

„  Xa^fcrfcit,  bravery  (   "  ta^fer,        brave). 

„  (Sitelteit,  vanity  (    "  citcl,  vain). 

Rem.  1.  The  suffix  sfctt  is  added  to  adjectives  ending  in  ={g,  4i(!^,  -lam, 
ftX,  and  stL 

Rern.  2.  The  suffix  cf^tit  is  also  added  to  some  personal  nouns,  as : 
2)iC  tinb^cit,      childhood        (from  ba«  ttnb,      child). 
tt    2JJcnfd)bett,  humanity        (   "    bcr  3J?cnfd;,  human  being). 
n    S^riftcu^eit,  Christendom  (    "    bcr  C^rifl,    Christian). 


124 


DERIVATIVE   NOUNS. 


3.  Derivatives  ending  in  =ni§  are  usually  formed 
from  verbs,  but  they  are  sometimes  from  nouns 
and  adjectives,  as: 

^ie  ^enntni^,        knowledge       (from  !enncn,  to  know). 

S)a^  ^inbcrni^,       impediment      (    "     ^inbern,  to  hinder). 

2)a§  ^erftcinb'ni^,  understanding  (   "    ber  35erftanb',  reason). 
2)iC  ^infierni^,      darkness  (  *'    finfter,  dark). 

4.  Derivatives  ending  in  '\6)(i\t  are  formed  from 
nouns  and  adjectives,  as: 

2)iC  g^reuiibfd;aft,  friendship  (from  ber  greunb,  friend). 

„    Saiibfc^.ift,      hmdscape  (     "     bag  Sanb,  land). 

„   58auernfd;aft,  peasantry  (    "    btc  S3auern  (jo/.),  peasants^. 

„    Ortfd^.ift,        neighborhood  (    "     ber  Ort,  place). 

„   53ereit'fc^aft,  readiness  (    "    berett,  ready). 

5.  Derivatives  ending  in  ^t^nm  are  formed  from 
nouns,  adjectives,  and  verbs,  as: 

2)a^  ^eiligt^um,    sanctuary  (from  ^eilig,  toly). 

„    ^aifert^um,    empire  (    "     ber  ^aifcr,  emperor). 

„    "iprieftert^um,  priesthood  (   "    bte  ^riefter  (/>/.),  priests). 

2)Cr  9teic^t(?um,     richness  (    "     retc!^,  rich). 

6.  Nouns  formed  from  verbs,  by  adding  the  suffix 
sUUg,  usually  denote  a  condition,  what  produces 
a  condition, or  a  thing  put  into  a  certain  condition: 


S)ie  ?ld;tiing, 

respect 

(f> 

-om  ad;ten, 

to  respect). 

„   S3ilbung, 

formation,  culture  ( 

11 

bilbeit, 

to  form). 

„   53ebiug'ung, 

condition 

u 

bebiu'gen, 

to  stipulate). 

„    (Sntfaftung, 

unfolding 

(( 

entfd'ten, 

to  unfold). 

„    (Srfa^'rung, 

experience 

11 

erfa^'ren, 

to  experience). 

„    @ro'6erung, 

conquest 

CI 

cro'bern, 

to  conquer). 

„    gorfd;ung, 

investigation 

li 

forfc^cn, 

to  investigate). 

„    ^anbluitg, 

trading-house 

11 

l^anbeln, 

to  handle). 

„    Sanbung, 

landing 

(( 

tanben, 

to  land). 

„    2JJeinung, 

opinion 

11 

tneincit, 

to  think). 

ff    ^viifung, 

examination 

li 

^riifen, 

to  examine). 

„    9tic^tung, 

direction 

11 

rtc^ten, 

to  direct). 

„    (Sammlung, 

collection 

u 

fammein, 

to  collect). 

„    (Strung, 

session 

(( 

fifecn, 

to  sit). 

„    SSerfamm'tung,  assembly 

{( 

ijerfam'tneln 

,  to  collect). 

„    SBert^et'biguno 

\,  defense 

(( 

bert^ei'bigen. 

,  to  defend). 

„    SSarnung, 

warning 

(( 

warnen, 

to  warn). 

„    3etd;iuing, 

drawing 

a 

5etd)ncn, 

to  draw). 

M   3«fto'runfl, 

destruction 

(< 

gerfto'ren, 

to  destroy). 

DERIVATIVE   NOUNS. 


125 


Rem.  1 .  Nouns  ending  in  cUntJ  naay  be  formed  from  nearly  all  verbs,  both 
simple  and  compound. 
Rem.  2.  A  few  collective  nouns  in  sUng  are  formed  from  nouns : 
2>ie  §oIjung,    forest        (from  baS  ^olj,    wood). 
„    ^leibung,  clothing    (    "    ba§  ^Icib,  garment). 
„    ©tatlung,  stabling    (    "    bcr  ©tail,  stable). 
„    SSJalbung,  woodland  (    "    bcr  ilSalb,  forest). 

5.  (1),  Personal  nouns  ending  in  =cr  are  masculine. 
(2),  Nouns  ending  in  =in,  -tX  (=ret),  =^eit  (:\txi)f  =ff^)nft, 

=ung  are  feminine. 
(3),  Nouns  ending  in  s(!^ens  (Icin),  A^WVX  are  neuter. 

^rc.  The  nouns  bcr  ^frrt^um  (€rror)and  bcr  9Jetd;t^um  (richnessj 
riches)  are  masculine. 
Rem.  Some  of  the  nouns  ending  in  sni^  are  feminine  and  some  are  neuier. 

6.  The  most  important  jprefixes  in  forming  derivative 
nouns  are  9C=,  mi§=,  un^  ur=,  Cr5=* 

1.  The  prefix  gc^  to  nouns  formed  from  verbs  or 
from  other  nouns,  denotes  coUectiveness,  union, 
completion,  or  repetition: 

Sser  ©efa^r'tc,  companion  (from  btc  '^^\)X\.,        journey). 


„    ©eljiU'fe,  assistant  ( 

„    ©efpie'Ie,  play-mate  ( 

^iC  ©ebrii'bcr  (;>/.),  brothers,  brethren  ( 


bie  §iUfc,  help). 
ba8  (S^ict,  play), 
ber  33rubcr,     brother). 


» 

©ejd^wi'ftcr  " 

brothers  and  sisters  (  " 

btc  ©^njcftc 

r,  sister). 

tt 

©cbulb', 

patience 

(  " 

die  dult. 

patience). 

n 

©cfa^r', 

danger 

(  '• 

diefahr, 

fear). 

tt 

©cfc^ic^'tc, 

history 

(  " 

gcfd?e^en, 

to  happen). 

)ai 

?  Ocbciu'bc, 

edifice 

(  " 

baucn, 

to  build). 

It 

@cbid?t', 

poem 

C" 

btd^tcn, 

to  write  poetry). 

It 

®t\m', 

fate 

( " 

fd)icfcn, 

to  send). 

11 

(Scrid^f, 

court  of  law 

( " 

rtd;ten, 

to  direct). 

It 

®erid)t', 

dish,  plate 

( " 

li 

to  order). 

It 

©cfct?', 

law 

( " 

Wn, 

to  establish). 

It 

©efidn', 

sight,  face 

(" 

fe^cn, 

to  see). 

It 

©ebir'gc, 

mountain  range 

(" 

bcr  S3crg, 

mountain). 

II 

©cfic'bcr, 

plumage 

( " 

bie  f^cber, 

feather). 

n 

(^etrciu!', 

potation 

( " 

bcr  Sranf, 

drink). 

It 

©cmit'ter, 

thunder-storm 

( " 

bag  ^Better, 

weather). 

Rem.  Most  nouns  with  the  prefix  gCs  are  of  the  neuter  gender.    Nearly  all 
nouns  with  the  prefix  gc*  also  take  the  umlaut. 


126 


DERIVATIVE   NOUNS. 


2.  The  prefix  nii§=  denotes   negation,  perversion  or 
incompleteness,  or  negation  of  quality  : 


^cr  iDZtBbegrift, 
„   3Jit^brauci^, 

u  3«iOgeftatt, 
n  TlxU^n% 
„   2Jii|3t)anbIung, 


misconception 

misuse,  abuse 

discord 

bad  harvest 

deformity 

disfavor 

ill  treatment 


(fromber  S3egnff', 


bcr  S3rauc^, 
ber  jTon, 
bie  (Srntc, 
bie  ©eftalt', 
bie  @unft, 


conception). 

use). 

sound). 

harvest). 

form). 

favor). 


bie  §anblung,    treatment). 
bag  35er^alt'm§,  proportion). 


2)(l^  3)Zi^ter^altni^,  disproportion 

3.  The  prefix  Ult=  denotes  negation  or  perversion  of 
quality  : 

^Cr  Unban!,  ingratitude 

,;    Unfatt,  misfortune,  disaster 


(fromber  2)an!, 
( 


„   UngeI;orjani,   disobedience 
„    Unmenfc^,       inhuman  being 
„   Unfinn,  nonsense 

2)iC  Unef;rltd^feit,  dishonesty 
„    Unenb'lid;feit,  infinity 
„    Unfaijtgfett,     incapacity 


„  Ungebulb, 
„  Unorbnung, 
„  Unrut^e, 
„   Untreue, 
2)a«Ungmcf, 
„   Unfraut, 


thankfulness), 
ber  %aU,  chance,  fall), 

ber  @el;orfam,  obedience), 
ber  9JJenf^,        human  being), 
ber  @inn,  sense), 

bie  (Sf)rli^tett,  honesty), 
bie  ©nblic^feit,  finiteness). 
bie  ga^igfeit,    capacity). 


bie  ©ebulb', 
bie  Orbnung, 
bie  9tn(;e, 
bie  2:reue, 
bag  ©liicf , 
bag  ^raut, 


patience). 

order). 

rest). 

faithfulness). 

fortune). 

herb). 


impatience 
disorder 
disquietude 
faithlessness 
misfortune,  calamity  ( 
noxious  weeds  ( 

Rem.  The  prefix  Urt'  can  be  used  especially  to  the  nouns  in  sl^Cit  and  sfcit 

4.  The  prefix  UX-  denotes  source,  origin  or  cause,  or 
a  thing  in  its  original  condition: 

tJ)Cr  UrbetDO^ner,  aboriginal  inhabitant  (from  ber  SSetno^'ner,  inhabitant). 

„    Itrquetl,  primary  source  (  "  ber  duett,  source). 

„    Urf^rung,  origin,  source  (  "  ber  (Sprung,  spring). 

„     Urn^arb,  primeval  forest  (  "  ber  SBalb,  forest). 

1J)te  Urfunbe,  document,  record  (  "  bie  ^unbe,  knowledge). 

„    Urfac^e,  origin,  cause  (  **  bie  @ac^e,  thing). 

„    Urj)3rad;e,  primitive  language  (  "  bie  ©^ra(^e,  language). 

Sa^Urbilb,  prototype  (  "  bag  S3itb,  form). 

„    Uri)oIf,  aboriginal  people  (  "  bag  35oI!,  people). 

5.  The  prefix  crj^  denotes  the  first  or  greatest: 

2)Cr  @rjbijd>of,       archbishop  (from  ber  33ifd;of,        bishop). 


©rjbieb, 


arrant  thief 


„     (SrjmarfdjaU,  lord  high-marshal 
2>iC  (Srjtugenb,       cardinal  virtue 


(  "    ber  2)ieb,  thief). 

(   "    ber  max\6)aU\  marshal). 
(  "    bie  Slugenb,      virtue). 


DERIVATIVE   NOUNS.  127 

6.  Many  words  in  the  German,  as  in  the  English  lan- 
guage, have  undergone  great  changes  in  form  during  the 
known  history  of  the  language.  Some  derivatives  have 
also  been  formed  from  words  that  are  no  longer  used. 

Thus:  the  word  @  e  b  u  It)  (from  an  old  word  die  </«/<  =  patience)  has  un- 
dergone the  following  changes  of  form :  kidult,  yidult,  gedult,  @  e  b  u  I  b.  The 
word  ®  c  f  a  {>  r  is  from  an  old  word  t/ie/aAr=:fear. 

Exercise  74. 
1.  The  first  session  of  the  Assembly  will  take  place 
to-morrow,  at  ten  o'clock.  2.  Have  you  seen  the  new 
drawings  of  the  artist?  3.  The  collection  of  antiquities 
from  Egypt  in  the  Museum  of  Berlin  is  very  large.  4. 
Mr.  Breitkopf  has  just  bought  the  first  five  volumes  of 
the  German  dictionary  of  the  brothers  Grimm.  5.  How 
many  brothers  and  sisters  have  you?  6.  I  have  two 
brothers  (53riit)er),  and  one  sister.  7.  It  is  very  sultry, 
we  will  probably  have  a  thunder-storm  before  night.  8. 
This  book  contains  the  best  poems  of  Goethe,  Schiller, 
and  Heine.  9.  Did  you  notice  the  disproportion  between 
the  height  and  the  breadth  of  the  building?  10. 1  have 
never  heard  such  nonsense.  11.  The  papers  on  this  table 
are  lying  in  the  greatest  disorder.  12.  His  dishonesty 
was  a  much  greater  misfortune  than  his  incapacity  for 
the  work.  13.  The  aborigines  of  America  were  the  In- 
dians. 14.  Have  you  ever  seen  a  primeval  forest?  15. 
Do  you  know  the  origin  of  the  word  „ Unenbltd^f eit"  ?  16. 
Do  you  know  the  cause  of  his  disquietude  ?  1 7.  The  arch- 
bishop of  Mayence  has  gone  to  Cologne  to-day.  18.  The 
beauty  of  these  drawings  is  very  extraordinary.  1 9 .  Miss 
Kreutzer  is  from  Germany,  but  Miss  Robelli  is  an  Italian. 
SO.Mr.Flander  is  a  Swiss,  but  his  wife  is  a  German.  21. 
The  teacher  (y^m.)  has  in  her  school  twenty-two  scholars 
(fern.).  22.  Maria  Theresa,  Empress  of  Austria,  died  on 
the  thirteenth  of  April,  1807.  23.  Louise  Auguste,  Queen 
of  Prussia,  died  on  the  nineteenth  of  July,  1810. 


128  FORMATION   OF   ADJECTIVES. 

LESSON  XXXVIII. 

©ERIVATIVE   AND    COMPOUND   ADJECTIVES. 

giinjunbftcBatgftc  Wufpk* 

!♦  3n  biefer  |){njtc^t  tft  er  gegen  feine  SSorgcinger  nic^t  banf^ 
hax.  2.  3)er  ^oben  urn  53erUn  ift  fanbtg  imb  ntcfct  fe^r  fru(|t^ 
bar.  3.  3c|  weig  nic^t  ob  bie  53rudEe  f^on  gangbar  ifl.  4.  Der 
$lan  ifl  gan^  unau^fii^rbar.  5.  Sir  b^iben  ben  gan^en  Xag 
!ein  trinfbare^  Staffer  gefunben.  6.  |)err  3)orn  leibet  an  einer 
un{)eilbaren  ^ranfbcit.  7.  §erv  ^tefen^etter  ^at  feine  neue  gol^ 
bene  Ul)r  l^eute  Tlox^m  »er(or«i.  8.  ^^^ur  in  bem  geenlanbc 
ber  Sieber  lebt  no^  beine  fabel^afte  (Spur."  9.  Der  ^^^aler  bat 
eine  au^erorbentUc^  leb^afte  ^inbilbung^fraft.  10.  ^Diefe  felftge 
©egenb  ift  i)olI  ijon  ^lapperfc^langen.  11.  |)eute  b<^ben  njir 
fe^r  fd)5ne6,  fonnige^  ^Better.  12. 2Barum  (tnb  ^ie  fo  traurig? 
13.  |)aben  (Sie  bie  malerifc^e  ^anbfc^aft  in  ber  fdc^ftfc^en 
©c^weij,  jmifc^en  2)re^ben  unb  ^rag  gefe()en?  14.  2)ie 
fldbtif^en  ^el)orben  ^aben  befd)loffen,  eine  neue  5lnlei^c  i?on 
600,000  Z^lx.  ^u  madden,  urn  eine  neue  ^tra^e  yom  griebric^^:? 
flai^  bi^  pm  (^abonjar^pia^  buri^^ufiibren.  15.  S5on  bem 
©rimm'fc^en  5G5rterbuc^  ftnb  U^  je^t  erft  fec^^  ^dnbe  erf^ic^* 
nen.  16.  Die  „5(ug^burger  5lUgemeine  Beitung"  ift  bie  gropte 
unb  befte  poUtifd^e  3eitung  in  6iibbeutfc^lanb. 

Grammatical. 

1.  De7'wative  Adjectives  are  formed  from  nouns,  adjec- 
tives, numerals,  pronouns,  verbs,  adverbs,  and  preposi- 
tions, by  adding  the  suffixes  =tiar,  =cr  (=crn),  =§aft,  =ig, 
4f  ^  {^tX)fA\^f  and  ''\m\f  according  to  the  following  rules : 

1.  The  suffix  =tJar,  added  to  a  noun  or  to  a  verbal 
stem,  indicates  ability  or  possibility  of  a  quality 
or  of  an  action : 

©anfbar,     thankful  (from  ber  2)anf,      thank), 

bicnftbar,     semceable  (    "    ber  S)teufl,     service), 

trud^tbar,    fruitful  (   "    bie  grud^t,    fruit). 


FORMATION   OP   ADJECTIVES. 


129 


furc^tbar, 

fearful 

(from  bic  gurd^t, 

fear). 

gangbar, 

passable 

bcr  @ang, 

passage). 

foftbor, 

costly 

bie  Soften  (p/.)j  expenses). 

fd;einbar, 

apparent 

ber  Serein, 

appearance). 

ftreitbar, 

contestable 

ber  ©treit, 

contest). 

tcunberbar 

,  wonderful 

bag  2i^unbcr, 

miracle). 

brcunbar, 

combustible 

brcnncn, 

to  burn). 

bcntbar, 

conceivable 

benfen, 

to  think). 

c^ar, 

edible,  fit  to  eat 

cffen, 

to  eat). 

ausfii^rbar,  practicable 

auSfii^ren, 

to  execute). 

^altbar, 

tenable 

^altcn, 

to  hold). 

^eilbar, 

curable 

^cilen, 

to  heal). 

^iJrbar, 

audible 

^oren, 

to  hear). 

ertlar'bar, 

explainable 

(  " 

crtla'rcn, 

to  explain). 

lesbar, 

legible 

(  " 

lefcn, 

to  read). 

toertneib'bar,  avoidable 

(  '* 

ijerinet  ben, 

to  avoid). 

nennbar, 

that  may  be  named  (  " 

ncnnen, 

to  name). 

flcnie^'bar, 

enjoyable 

(  " 

gcnic^en, 

to  enjoy). 

crreic^'bar, 

attainable 

(" 

erreic^en, 

to  attain)i 

trennbar, 

diWsible 

(  " 

trennen, 

to  divide). 

trtntbar, 

fit  to  drink 

(" 

trinfen, 

to  drink). 

2.  The  suffix  ^cn  (=crn) 

is  added  only 

to  nouns  de- 

noting  material : 

®oIbcn, 

golden,  gold 

(from  ba«  ©olb, 

gold). 

fttbern, 

of  silver 

(  " 

bag  ©ilbcr, 

silver). 

fu^fern, 

of  copper 

(  " 

baS  ^u^fcr, 

copper> 

Blcicrn, 

leaden 

(  " 

bag  23lci, 

lead). 

Icbern, 

of  leather 

(  " 

bag  Sebcr, 

leather). 

^oljcrn, 

wooden 

(  " 

bag  ^clj, 

wood). 

Qlajern, 

of  glass 

(  " 

bag  ©lag, 

glass). 

Hem.  When  the  noun  (as  S  U  ^  f  e  r)  ends  in  sr,  only  sH  is  added. 

3.  The  suffix  ^aft  denotes  possession  of  or  inclina- 
tion toward  the  quality  of  the  noun  to  which  it 
is  suffixed: 


2)auer^aft, 

durable 

(from  bie  jDauer, 

duration). 

crnftbaft, 

earnest 

( " 

bcr  (graft, 

earnestness). 

fabclbaft, 

fabulous 

( " 

bic  gabcl. 

fable). 

fc^lcr^att, 

faulty 

(" 

bcr  getter. 

fault). 

Icbbaft, 

lively 

( " 

bag  !i!ebcn, 

life). 

mangel^att, 

defective 

C" 

ber  2JJaiiger, 

lack). 

riefcn^ft, 

gigantic 

(  " 

bcr  aeicfc, 

giant). 

jtt?cifelbaft, 

dubious 

(  " 

bcr  Broctfel, 

doubt). 

id;mct(^cll?aft,  flattering 

(  " 

bic  ©d^ntctd^clei' 

',  flattery). 

F2 

130 


FORMATION   OF   ADJECTIVES. 


4.  The  suffix  =tg  denotes  the  possession  of  the  qual- 
ity or  relation  that  is  expressed  by  the  noun, 
adjective,  numeral  pronoun,  verb,  preposition,  or 
adverb,  to  which  it  is  suffixed : 


5rrttg, 

polite,  well-behaved     (frc 

)m  bte  Slrt, 

way). 

bcirtig, 

bearded                         (    ' 

'    ber  93art, 

beard). 

bergtg, 

mountainous                 (    ' 

'    ber  53erg, 

mountain). 

blutig, 

bloody                           (    ' 

'    ba§S3Iut, 

blood). 

eifrtg, 

zealous                         (   * 

'    ber  (gifer, 

zeal). 

eiftg, 

icy                              (   ' 

'    bas@i8, 

ice). 

Mig, 

rocky                           (   ' 

'    ber  gelg, 

rock). 

ftet§tg, 

industrious                    (    ' 

'    ber  gleti 

industry). 

Pc^tig, 

fleeting                          (   ' 

'    bte  etuc^t, 

flight). 

Seifttg, 

referring  to  the  spirit  (    ' 

'    ber  @et[t, 

spirit). 

mm, 

avaricious                      (    ' 

'    ber  ©etj, 

avarice). 

gtfttg, 

poisonous                      (   ' 

'    bag®tft, 

poison). 

gilnftig, 

favorable                       (    ' 

'    bie  @mt[t, 

favor). 

^orjig, 

woody                           (    ' 

'    ha^mh 

wood). 

frciftig, 

powerful                       (   ' 

'    bie  Sraft, 

power). 

madjttg, 

mighty                          (   ' 

*    bte  9}iad)t, 

might). 

inSBig, 

moderate,  temperate    (    ' 

'    baggjla^, 

measure). 

nm'^f 

necessary                      (    ' 

'    bte  g^ot^, 

want). 

ru^tg, 

quiet                              (   ' 

'    bte  mni)t, 

rest). 

ric[tg, 

gigantic                        (   ' 

'    ber  9?iefe, 

giant). 

Wq, 

salty                              (    * 

'    bag@al5, 

salt). 

fanbtg, 

sandy                            (    ' 

'    ber  @anb, 

sand). 

{c^ulbtg, 

guilty                            (    ' 

'    bie  @d)utb, 

guilt). 

fonnig, 

sunny                             (    ' 

'    bte  ©onite, 

sun). 

traurig, 

sad,  sorrowful              (    ' 

'    bte  2:rauer, 

sorrow). 

berbcic^ttg, 

suspicious                     (    ' 

'    ber  S3erbad;t' 

suspicion). 

tciirbtg, 

worthy                           (    ' 

'    bte  SBitrbe, 

worth). 

bum^fig, 

damp                              (    ' 

'    bum^f, 

damp). 

Icben'big, 

lively,  active                 (   ' 

'    leBenb, 

living). 

Qtitig, 

good                              (    ' 

'   gut, 

good). 

i)i3mg, 

fully                               (    ' 

'    Dolt, 

full). 

einig,  crnstg, 

sole,  single                    (   ' 

'    etit, 

one). 

bei^ig, 

biting                            (    ' 

'    beifeen, 

to  bite). 

crgiebtg, 

productive                    (    ' 

'    erge'ben, 

to  yield). 

borttg, 

of  that  place                 (    ' 

'    bort, 

there). 

^ieftg, 

of  this  place                 (    ' 

'    ^ter, 

here). 

^eutig, 

of  to-day                      (    ' 

'    ^eute, 

to-day). 

ntcbrtg, 

low                               (  ' 

'    titeber, 

down). 

bortg, 

former                         (   ' 

'    toor, 

before). 

iibrtg, 

remaining                    (   ' 

'    iiber. 

over). 

FORMATION    OF    ADJECTIVES.  131 

5.  The  suffix  =ifc|l,  attached  to  personal  common 
nouns  (and  to  a  few  verbs),  denotes  similarity  or 
inclination  to  a  quality ;  and  often  conveys  also 
the  idea  of  contempt  or  unworthiness : 


53aurif(^, 

referring  to  the  peasantry  (from  bev  33auer, 

peasant). 

bid)terifd;, 

poetical 

bcr  2)ic^ter, 

poet). 

biebifd;, 

thievish 

ber  2)icb, 

thief). 

^immlifd^, 

heavenly 

ber  §immel, 

heaven). 

irbifd;, 

earthly 

bie  (Srbc, 

earth). 

fanfmcinnifd;,  mercantile 

ber  taufmani 

,  merchant). 

finbifd;, 

childish 

ba«  mnh, 

child). 

malerifd^, 

picturesque 

ber  TtaUx, 

painter). 

ftSbtifd,, 

civil 

bic  @tabt, 

city). 

ncibifc^, 

suspicious 

neiben, 

to  envy). 

Rem.  1 .  The  umlaut  is  usually  added  when  the  vowel  is  capable  of  it. 

Re?n.  2.  In  many  adjectives  derived  from  the  Latin  and  Greek  languag '«, 
the  ending  sift^  in  German  corresponds  to  the  English  ending  -ic  or  -ical. 


^(ji(ofo>bijc^,  philosophic  (al). 

brama'tifd;, 

dramatic  (al). 

t^eolo'gifd^,      theological. 

c^ifd^, 

epic  (al). 

^fpc^olo'gtjc^,  psychological 

itfxm, 

lyric  (al). 

Qto{o'o^\\<i),        geologic  (al). 

^>oe'tifd>, 

poetic  (al). 

^^i)fifrf?/            physical. 

tritijd;, 

critical. 

^eniifd^,           chemical. 

^ifto'rij^, 

historic  (al). 

Rem.  3.  The  suffix  sift^  (=*f(!^)  is  added  to  personal  proper  names : 
2)ie  ?utbe'rtfd;e  ,^rd;c,  The  Lutheran  church. 

S)te  9ien)to'nijd;e  X^corie,  The  Newtonian  theory. 

25a6  @rimm'fd;e  SSiJrtcrbuc^,  Grimm's  dictionary. 

2)ie  ^ant'ft^e  ^bi^ojo^^ie,  Kant's  philosophy. 

Rem.  4.  National  and  civic  adjectives  usually  take  the  ending  sff ^ : 

STmerifa'nijd?,  American.  Scrli'nifd^,        of  Berlin, 

afrifa'nifd;,      African.  ^cimburgifc^,     of  Hamburg, 

italia'mjc!^,       Italian.  ^chiifd?,  of  Cologne, 

^ortugie'fijd;,  Portuguese.  SD^agbeburgtfd^,  of  Magdeburg, 

ruffifcb,  Russian.  ^allifdb,  of  Halle, 

bairifc^,  Bavarian.  ©c^Icfij(!(^,  Silesian. 

Ohs.  Many  adjectives  are  formed  from  names  of  cities  by  adding  the  suffix 
•tt  *i  this  ending  has  the  remarkable  quality  of  not  being  capable  of  inflexion  : 


The  Magdeburg  Cathedral. 
Nom.y  ber    2J?agbcburger  2)om. 
Gen.^  beS   9J?agbeburgcr  S)Dme8. 
Bat.^   bcm  aJJagbeburgcr  !I)om. 
Ace,   ben  aJiagbeburger  2)om. 


The  Augsburg  Journal. 
Norn.,  bie  Sluggburger  Seitung. 
Gen.,  ber  3lug8burger  B^itw^fl* 
Dat.,   bcr  ?lug«burger  3eitung. 
Acc.^   bie  2lug«burger  Bfitwna* 


132 


FORMATION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


6.  Adjectives  with  the  suffix  4i$  are  formed  from 
nouns,  other  adjectives,  and  verbs: 


5lfeenbU^, 

evening 

(fromber  Slbenb, 

evening). 

morgenlic^, 

morning 

ber  aJiorgen, 

morning). 

taglid;, 

daily 

ber  XaQ, 

day). 

tDod;ent(ic^, 

weekly- 

bie  SBoc^e, 

week). 

ntonatlid^, 

monthly 

ber  SJZonat, 

month). 

jafjrli^, 

yearly 

ba§  3a^r, 

year). 

uitm, 

figurative 

bag  S3tlb, 

figure). 

bnefli(^, 

by  letter 

ber  ^riei 

letter). 

brilberUc^, 

brotherly 

ber  33ruber, 

brother). 

biirgertic^, 

pertaining  to  a  citizen  (  " 

ber  33iirger, 

citizen). 

c^rltd^, 

honest 

(  " 

bie  @E;re, 

honor). 

cnbii(^, 

final 

(  " 

bag  (gnbe, 

end). 

freunbiic^, 

friendly 

(  " 

ber  greunb, 

friend).      ' 

Q\Mm, 

fortunate,  happy 

(  " 

bag  mM, 

fortune). 

j^au^lic^, 

domestic 

(  " 

bag  §aug, 

house). 

v^m, 

courteous 

(  " 

ber  §of, 

court). 

taiferltc^, 

imperial 

(  " 

ber  Saifer, 

emperor). 

finblid^, 

childlike 

(  " 

bag  ^inb, 

child). 

fonigltc^, 

royal 

(" 

ber  ^onig, 

king). 

inenfd;Iid^, 

human 

(  " 

ber  2«enfd;, 

man). 

fc^merjU^, 

painful 

(  " 

ber  @d;iner3, 

,  pain). 

fdjrecflid?, 

terrible 

(  " 

ber  ©c^recfen,  terror). 

ttjunberlic^, 

wonderful 

(  " 

bag  2Bunber, 

wonder). 

m\^l\6^, 

whitish 

(  " 

tt>ei^, 

white). 

rot^Ud;, 

reddish 

<  " 

rot^, 

red). 

filttic^, 

oldish 

(" 

att, 

old). 

fro^Uc^, 

happy,  cheerful 

C  " 

tro^, 

happy). 

franfltc^, 

sickly 

(  " 

franf, 

sick). 

offcntltd^, 

public 

(  " 

often, 

open). 

mc^Uc^, 

rich 

(  " 

reic^, 

rich). 

treulid), 

true 

(  " 

treu, 

true). 

au§fil{)r'(td?,  comprehensive 

(  " 

augtii^ren, 

to  execute). 

begretfUd;, 

comprehensible 

(  " 

begrei'fen, 

to  comprehend). 

betceg'Iid), 

movable 

(  " 

beitje'gen, 

to  move). 

etn^finb'lic^ 

,  sensitive 

(  '' 

em^fin'ben, 

to  feel). 

crflar'lid^, 

explicable 

(  " 

ertlci'rcn, 

to  explain). 

fterbli^, 

mortal 

(" 

fterbett, 

to  die). 

toermctb'Ud^ 

,  avoidable 

(" 

ijermet'ben, 

to  avoid). 

gerbrec^'Iic^, 

,  fragile 

(  " 

Serbre'c^en, 

to  break  in  pieces). 

jRem.  Some  adjectives  ending  in  4it^  are  closely  allied  in  signification,  and 
are  almost  interchangeable  in  use  with  adjectives  derived  from  the  same  word 

and  ending  in  star :  compare  erf  Ifirbar  and  er!Iartic^,tjermcibbar 
and  b  e  r  m  e  i  b  H  d?. 


FORMATION   OF   ADJECTIVES. 


133 


7.  Adjectives  with  the  suffix  -^aiXt  (formed  from 
verbs  or  verbal  nouns)  indicate  the  possession 
of  or  inclination  to  the  quality : 


Slufmcrffam,  attentive 


btegfam, 
bulDfam, 
geniig'fam, 
tt)ir!fam, 
arBcitfatn, 
Bcbac^t'jam, 
bctrteb'fam, 
furd;tfam, 
genjalt'i'am, 
graufam, 
^cilfam, 
mii^fam, 
forgfam, 
tounberfam, 
Rem.  1.  Two  adjectives  ending 
©emein'fam,  mutual 
langfam,        slow 


pliable 

patient 

sufficient 

efficient 

laborious 

mindful 

diligent 

fearful 

violent 

ferocious 

wholesome 

toilsome 

solicitous 

wonderful 


from  aufmerfen, 
"    btegen, 
"    bulben, 
"    geniig'cn, 
"    tt)tr!en, 
"    bie  Arbeit, 


to  pay  attention), 
to  bend), 
to  tolerate), 
enough), 
to  have  effect), 
work), 
bcr  33ebac^t',  considerateness). 
ber  58etrteb',  driving), 
bic  gurc^t,     fear), 
btc  ©en^alt',  violence). 
baSOrauen,  horror), 
bag  §eil,        healing), 
bie  2)^u^e,      toil,  pains), 
bie  (gorge,      care). 
ba§  SSunber,  wonder), 
in  sf ant  are  formed  from  other  adjectives  : 
"    gemein',         common). 
"    lang,  long). 

JRem.  2.  The  adjective  f  e  1 1  f  a  m  (rare)  was  formerly  spelled  seltsan. 

Rem.  3.  The  adjectives  ending  in  sfaw  are  few  in  number  compared  to  those 
ending  in  sig,  stfc^,  and  A\^*  A  few  are  similar  in  signification  to  those  of 
the  same  derivation  ending  in  sftat,  as:  tDUnberfam,  ttJUttberbar. 
The  adjectives  ending  in  s^Ittt  have  usually  a  passive,  those  in  sfflju  usually 
an  active  signification : 

(Sine  ^eilbare  ^anf^eit,  A  disease  that  can  be  cured. 

@ine  ^eilfame  Slrjnei',  A  healing  remedy. 

2.  Nearly  all  derivative  adjectives  can  receive  the 

negative  prefix  sUlt,  as : 

Unbanfbar,        ungratefuL  unneibtf^,         unenvious. 

unleSfcar,  illegible.  unenbli(i>,  infinite. 

unfef)ter^aft,      faultless.  unmenjd(>Itd^,     inhuman, 

unjc^ulbtg,        innocent.  unaufmerffam,  inattentive. 

3.  Compound  Adjectives  are  formed  by  prefixing  to  an 

adjective  a  noun,  a  preposition,  or  another  adjective,  as : 

53ettetann,   beggarly  poor  (ber  33ettel,  begging ;    arm,  poor), 

fingerbitf ,     thick  as  one's  finger  (ber  finger,  finger ;      bid,  thick), 
feuerfefi,       fireproof  (bag  ^^euer,  fire ;  fcft,  fast). 

^immei^O(i(^,  high  as  heaven  (ber  ^immel,  heaven ;  ^od^,  high). 


134 


FORMATION   OF   ADJECTIVES. 


ticfengro§,  gigantic 
[teinijart,  hard  as  rock 
ei^talt,  cold  as  ice 
baumleer,  destitute  of  trees 
bartloS,  beardless 


(ber  3?tcfc,  giant ; 
(ber  ©teiit,  stone ; 
(bag  (Sis,  ice ; 
(ber  S3aum,  tree ; 
(ber  Sart,  beard ; 


c^arafterloS,  without  character  (ber  (Sfjarafter,  character; 
regelmd^ig,  regular  (tit  dtza,d,  rule; 

gwecfmci^ig,  practical  (ber  ^^zd,  purpose ; 

te^rrei^,  instructive  (bie  Se^re,  learning ; 

ja^Ireid),  numerous  (bie  Ba^I,  number; 

bli^fc^nett,  quick  as  lightning      (ber  33Iit5,  lightning ; 
tcunberfd;i)u,extremely  beautiful(ba8  SSunber,  wonder ; 


ItebeiJoII,  affectionate 
:^rac^ti)ott,  magnificent 
metlentt)ett,  miles  distant 
Ite'benSlDiirbig,  amiable 
aKgemein,  general 
atlmac^ttg,  almighty 
bunfelblau,  dark  blue 
^ellMau,  light  blue 
gelbtotf;,  orange 
taubftumm,  deaf  and  dumb 


(bie  Siebc,love; 
(bie  ^ra^t,  splendor ; 
(bie  alette,  mile ; 
(baS  Sieben,  loving ; 
(aa[erJ,aU; 

(   "     " 

(bun!et,  dark ; 
(^ell,  light; 
(gelb,  yellow ; 


gro^,  large). 
^art,  hard). 
talt,  cold), 
leer,  empty). 
Io8,  destitute  of). 

"     [to;, 
mci^ig,  confoiming 

retdt>,  rich). 

fc^nell,  quick). 
fc^i)n,  beautiful), 
ijott,  full). 

njett,  distant), 
toiirbig,  worthy), 
gemeiu',  common), 
inac^tig,  mighty), 
blau,  blue). 


rot^,  red), 
fiumm,  dumb). 
jd^ulbig,  guilty). 


(taub,  deaf; 
mitfc^ulbig,  accessory  to  a  crime  (mit,  with ; 

4.  It  is  becoming  customary  in  Germany  to  print  books  and  journals  of  a 
high  scientific  and  critical  character  in  the  Roman  instead  of  in  the  German 
type.  It  is  greatly  to  be  desired  that  this  custom  may  become  general,  and 
that  thus  an  unnecessary  ban*ier  to  the  beginning  of  the  study  of  the  German 
language  may  be  removed.  We  give  below  a  German  exercise  in  Roman 
type. 

Sechsundsiebzi^ste  Aufgabe. 
l.Das  Litera^rische  Centrarblatt,  die  beste  kritische 
Zeitung  in  Deutschland,  erscheint  wochentlich.  2.  Die 
Leipziger  Illustrir^te  Zeitung  erscheint  auch  wochent- 
lich. 3.  Herr  Hagemeyer  ist  ein  ehrlicher  Mann.  4. 
Ich  wiinsche  Ihnen  eine  gliickliche  Eeisel  5.  Bei  dem 
schrecklichen  Unfall  in  den  Bergwerken  zu  Freiberg 
sind  vierzig  Menschen  urn's  Leben  gekommen  (have  lost 
their  lives).  6.  Das  Grimm'sche  Worterbuch  wird  das 
ausfiihrlichste  undvollkommenste  Worterbuch  der  deut- 
schen  Sprache  sein.  7.  Alle  ofFentlichen  Schulen  sind 
wahrend   der  Ferien  geschlossen.     8.  Die  konigliche 


CASES    GOVERNED    BY   ADJECTIVES.  135 

Bibliothek  in  Berlin  ist  in  einem  Theile  des  konig- 
lichen  Palastes.  9.  Die  Lehrerin  sagt,  dass  die  Schiiler 
sehr  aufmerksam  sind.  10.  Dieser  Brief  von  Herrn 
Tiedemann  ist  fast  unlesbar.  11.  Das  Museum  ist  ein 
feuerfestes  Gebaude.  12.  Ich  finde  diese  neue  Ma- 
schine  sebr  zweckmassig.  13.  Der  prachtvolle  Kolner 
Dom  ist  das  Meisterstuck   der  deutschen  Baukunst. 

14.  Frau  Bernsdorf  ist  eine  sehr  liebenswiirdige  Dame. 

15.  Ich  werde  drei  Ellen  von  diesem  dunkelblauen 
Bande  und  sechs  Ellen  von  jenem  breiten,  gelbrothen 
Band  nehmen. 


LESSON  XXXIX. 

CASES  GOVERNED  BY  ADJECTIVES. 

©icbcnunbficbjigftc  5(ufgak* 
1.  ^^  ifl  unbefc^reibli^,  irelc^e  ^c^nfu^t  x^  empfanb,  nur 
eine^  SD^enfc^en  anfid)tig  ju  merben  (^^.)*  2.  ®raf  Sulenfel^ 
n?ar  reic^  an  ®ut,  bod^  arm  an  Seben^freuben,  3.  (5te  ftnb  allc 
i^re^  35erfprec^en0  cingebenf  gewefen  (X.)»  4.  (Sr  ift  jeber  5luf^ 
opferung  fd^tg  (or  er  ift  ^u  jeter  ^ufcpferung  fdt)ig),  5.  Sr  tjl 
fci^on  besi  ©iege^  gett)i§.  6.  8ie  finb  aller  (Borgen  frei  (or  jtc 
jtnb  frei  »on  alien  (Sorgen).  7.  §err  X^ompfon  ift  ni^t  ber 
beutf^en  8prac^e  funbii3.  8,  Di^nt  ^erj  ift  bie  3BeIt  ber  greu^ 
ben  leer.  9,  Die  ^dume  ftnb  je^t  »on  grii^ten  leer.  10. 
2)a^  ©ebi^t  ift  »oU  boc^trabenber  $^rafen,  aber  leer  an  tiefen 
©ebanfen.  11.  Diefe^  2Birtl)^^au0  ift  nie  leer  i?on  ©dften. 
12.  §err  SBilliam^  l;at  ben  33rief  gan^  gelduftg  gelefen ;  er  ift  ber 
beutfc^en  ©pra^e  ijoUfommen  mdi^tig.  13.  3^  bin  be^ 
(S^ma^en^  mitbe.  14.  3d)  bin  miibe  t)on  fo  »ielen  uergeblid^en 
Slnfirengungen.  15.  dx  ift  fatt  ber  SBelt  unb  i^re^  Dergdnglic^cn 
3^ut)mee.  16.  dx  ift  feine^  Sibe^  quitt.  17.  5luc^  bu  bdltft 
mic^  ber  fc^weren  (Sitnbe  fc^ulbtg  (6c^.)?  18.  2)ort  ftnb  fte 
ibrc^  ?ebene  nid)t  ftd)er.  19.  Die  (Srbe  ift  i)olI  ber  ®iite  bc^ 
^crrn  O^falm  33,  5).  20.  Da^  53uc^lein  ift  »olI  allerliebfter 
^cmerfungen  (©.).    2L  2)a  ift  tin  ^orb  »oU  reifer  ^^epfcl. 


13^ 


CASES   GOVERNED   BY   ADJECTIVES. 


Grammatical. 

l.Many  adjectives  govern  substantives  in  the  oblique 
cases  (i.  e.,  the  genitive,  dative,  and  accusative  cases) 
without  the  use  of  a  preposition  between  the  adjective 
and  the  substantive. 

2.  The  following  adjectives  govern  the  genitive  case '. 


3ln[ic^tig(trerben),  to  get  a  view  (of), 
arm  (antiquated  with  gen.'),  poor, 
bar,  bare,  destitute  (of), 
bebiirfttg,  destitute,  in  need  (of). 
Begte'rtg,  desirous,  anxious  (for), 
beno't^igt,  in  need  (of). 
BeiDU^t',  conscious  (of), 
blo^,  free  (from), 
ctn'geben!,  mindful  (of), 
eintg,  agreed  (concerning). 
ctn8,      " 

cril'brigt,  dispensing  (with), 
crfa^'ren,  experienced  (in), 
fa^ig,  capable  (of), 
fret,  free  (from), 
fro^,  happy  (about), 
gebenf,  conscious  (of). 
geftau'Dtg,  confessing  (to). 
gettJa^r',  conscious  (of). 
gctDcir'tig,  awaiting. 
gettJi^',  certain  (of). 


geiDO^nt',  accustomed  (to). 

^ab^aft,  in  possession  (of) . 

funb  (or  funbtg),  acquainted  (with). 

lebig,  free  (from). 

leer,  empty  (of). 

log,  free  (from). 

tnac^ttg,  in  command  (of). 

miibe,  tired  (of). 

miljjig,  free  (from). 

quitt,  free  (from). 

fatt,  satiated  (with). 

jc^urbtg,  guilty  (of). 

fidt^er,  sure  (of). 

t^eill;aft'  (or  4g),  participating  (in). 

iiberbriif fig,  weary  (of). 

t»erba(f>'tig,  suspected  (of). 

terlu'fttg,  deprived  (of). 

DoU,  full  (of). 

icert^,  worth. 

tuilrbig,  worthy  (of). 

jufrie'ben,  contented  (with) 


Rein.  1.  Some  of  these  adjectives  can  take  the  negative  prefix  sjlltf  ^s: 


Unbegte'rtg,  undesirous  (of), 
unbenjujjt,  unconscious  (of), 
unerfa^ren,  inexperienced  (in). 


unfc^utbig,  innocent  (of), 
unfi^er,  not  sure  (of). 
unttJttrbtg,  unworthy  (of). 


Rem.  2.  Of  the  above  adjectives,  the  following  are  frequently  employ  «d,  in 
ordinary  discourse,  with  the  accusative  case,  viz  :  Slnjtd^ttg,  betDU^t,  fa^tg,  ge* 
ftanbtg,  getca^r,  gemo^nt,  ^ab^aft,  Io8,  milbe,  fatt,  j(^ulbig,  ilberbrilffig,  toix^, 
jufiiebeii : 

^&l  bin  t^m  cincn  ^^alcr  fc^utbtg,    I  owe  him  a  thaler, 
eg  t[t  fctncn  pfennig  rnert^,  it  is  not  worth  a  penny. 

Rem.  3.  Many  of  these  adjectives  may  be  followed  by  certain  prepositions^ 
Khich  prepositions  govern  their  own  cases  (§  81,  §  82,  §  83),  as : 


(1)  33egterig,  by  m^  or  auf* 
(2)berett,Wg,bygm 

(3)  arm,  genjobnt,  leer,  by  m* 

(4)  fro^,  getoi^,  eintg,  by  Ukr» 


(5)  fret,  (ebig,  Io8,  leer,  Jjott,  etc.,  by 

(6)  eintg,  erfa^ren,  fro^,  by  in* 

(7)  5uf  rieben,  by  mit,or  tJDn,or  iiJer. 


CASES   GOVERNED    BY  ADJECTIVES. 


137 


O65.  Only  afew(asBcnot^igt,  gett)arttg,  t^ctt^aft,  ilbctbriif* 
fig,  »  e r I U ft i g)  rnust  be  used  as  governing  the  genitive  case. 

3.  Many  of  the  adjectives  that  govern  the  genitive 
Q9>de  frequently  can  not  be  translated  into  English  by 
adjectives,  but  must  be  rendered  in  the  English  idiom 
by  verbs  or  nouns,  as : 


(Siuet  ®ac^c  an[id;tig  ju  tocrbcn, 
(Siner  Sac^e  eingebenf  ju  fein, 
(5r  ift  ber  beutfc^en  @^raci;e  mac^^ 

tig, 

eincr  @ad)c  gcftanbig  ju  fcin, 
er  ift  be«  3Sege8  tunbig, 
er  ift  fciues  (SibcS  quitt, 

SBir  toaren  biefcg  5lu8gangeS  ber 

^a<i)t  nid^t  gewartig, 
Cr  ift  atlcr  SSortbcite  auS  bicfcm 

©cfc^aftc  tocrluftig, 


To  get  a  view  of  a  thing. 

To  bear  a  thing  in  mind. 

He  is  master  of  the  German  lan- 
guage. 

To  confess  to  a  thing. 

He  knows  the  road. 

He  is  free  from  tlie  obligation  im- 
posed by  his  oath. 

We  did  not  anticipate  this  termina* 
tion  to  the  affair. 

He  lost  all  the  profits  that  came  from 
this  business. 


4.  A  large  number  of 

casey  as : 
SlbtrUnnig,  faithless  (to). 
ii^nlic^,  similar  (to), 
angcborcn,  hereditary  (to), 
ongelcgen,  adjacent  (to), 
angenc^m,  agreeable  (to), 
anjtij^ig,  offensive  (to), 
befannt,  known  (to), 
bangc,  apprehensive  (of). 
Bequent,  convenient  (to), 
betuu^t,  known  (to), 
bantbar,  thankful  (to), 
bicnlic^,  serviceable  (to), 
bicnftbar,      " 
eigen,  peculiar  (to). 
cigent^iim'Iid),  peculiar  (to), 
crgc'ben,  addicted  (to), 
feinb,  hostile  (to), 
ftrn,  distant  (from), 
gcmein',  common  (to), 
gcmein'jam,  mutual  (with), 
geiteigt' ,  favorable  (to), 
getreu', faithful  (to). 
getDo'gen,  well  disposed  (toward) 


adjectives  govern  the  dative 


gleid^,  like,  similar  (to), 
gnabig,  gracious,  merciful  (to"\ 
gram,  averse  (to), 
gut,  good,  kindly  (to), 
nafje,  near,  close  (to), 
neu,  new  (to), 
notf^ig,  necessary  (to), 
offen,  open  (to), 
offcnbar,  plain,  open  (to). 
^affcnb,  fitting  (for), 
^jeinlid;,  painful  (to). 
re(^t,  right  (to), 
fd^ablicb,  injurious  (to). 
jc^meic^el^att,  flattering  (to> 
fc^merjlid;,  painful  (to). 
fd;ulbig,  in  debt  (to). 
fc^roer,  difficult  (for), 
filfj,  sweet  (for), 
tbeuer,  dear  (to), 
trcu,  true  (to), 
libel,  offensive  (to), 
ilberle'gen,  superior  (u>\ 
untert^an,  subject  (to). 


138  CASES   GOVERNED   BY   ADJECTIVES. 


ijcrberB'Itd^,  destructive  (to). 
tertoanbt',  related  (to). 
i)ort^etI^aft,  advantageous  (to). 
h)e^,  painful  (to), 
tuert^,  worth  (to). 


txJtcfjttg,  important  (to). 
tDtberiic^,  offensive  (to). 
tt)ilItom'men,  welcome  (to). 
tt)of)I,  fortunate  (to). 
3tX)citel^aft,  doubtful  (to.) 


5.  The  idiomatic  spirit  of  the  English  language  often 
requires  that  a  verb  or  a  noun  shall  take  the  place  of 
&n  adjective  which  in  German  governs  the  dative  case  : 

(Stner  ^artei'  abtriinmg  tuerben,      To  desert  a  party. 
@r  ift  feinem  3Sater  jetjr  ci^nlic^,        He  resembles  his  father  very  much, 
^ann  id)  3(;tien  be^iilfltd^  jein?         Can  I  be  of  any  service  to  you? 
(g§  ift  mir  nid;t  erinnerlic^,  It  has  escaped  my  memory. 

SBie  biel  bift  3)u  tfjm  jd;ulbtg  ?         How  much  do  you  owe  him  ? 

6.  Adjectives  expressive  of  value,  weight,  measure,  or 
age  govern  the  accusative  case : 

@g  tDar  f Cincn  pfennig  tt?  e  r  t  ^,  It  was  not  worth  a  penny. 

(Sg  ift  nur  CinCn  3^^  b  r  e  i  t,  It  is  only  an  inch  wide. 

(S§  ift  Cin  ^fnnb  f^tr>er,  It  weighs  a  pound, 

er  ift  JC^n  ^aI)rC  alt,  He  is  ten  years  old. 

Achtundsiebzigste  Aufgabe. 
1.  Herr  Eitelberg  ist  seiner  Partei^  abtriinnig  gewor- 
den.     2.  Diese  Kinder  sind  ihren  Eltern  sehr  ahnlich. 

8.  Es  ist  mir  unbegreiflich,  wie  er  solchen  Unsinn  ver- 
tragen  kann.  4.  Kann  ich  Ihnen  auf  irgend  eine  Weise 
behiilflich  sein  ?  5.  Der  Zustand  des  Kranken  ist  dem 
Arzte  heute  sehr  bedenklich.  6.  Die  Umstande  des 
Verlustes  des  Dampfers  sind  uns  bis  jetzt  noch  nicht 
bekannt.  7.  An  welchem  Tage  die  Schlacht  bei  Jena 
stattgefunden  hat,  ist  mir  augenblicklich  nicht  erinner- 
lich.  8.  Unter  solchen  Umstanden  war  seine  Gegen- 
wart   natiirlich  der  Gesellschaft  sehr  unwillkommen. 

9.  Der  Kaufmann  ist  dem  Banquier  800  Thlr.  schuldig. 

10.  Seine  Mitwirkung  war  ihnen  mehr  hinderlich  als 
forderlich.  11.  Er  ist  seinem  Eide  treu  geblieben. 
12.  Die  deutsche  Sprache  richtig  auszusprechen  ist  den 
Amerikanern  im  Anfang  sehr  schwer.  13.  Wir  fahren 
sehr  langsam,  weil  der  Wind  und  die  Fluth  uns  widrig 


USE   OF   THE  ARTICLE.  139 

sind.  14.  Dieser  Rock  ist  mir  zu  gross.  15.  Mir  ist  es 
sehr  kalt  hier.  16.  Das  Tuch  ist  eine  Elle  breit  und 
dreissig  Ellen  lang.  17.  Diese  Kugel  ist  nur  68  Pfund 
scliwer,  aber  jene  Kugeln  sind  120  Pfund  schwer.  18. 
Er  ist  fast  einen  Kopf  grosser  als  ich.  19.  Wilhelm  ist 
zwolf  Jahre,  einen  Monat  und  einen  Tag  alt. 


LESSON  XL. 

USE     OF    THE     ARTICLE. 

SWcununbricbjigftc  ^lufgak* 

1.  :Der  2)?enf^  ift  fterbli^.  2.  Da^  Seben  ift  fur^  3.  Da0 
®olb  ift  t)a^  foftbarfte  detail.  4.  3)a^  geuer  unb  ba^  SBaffer 
ftnt)  gate  Diener,  akr  bofe  2J?etfter.  5.  §err  ^raumiiller  ijat 
ten  ^mittn  53ant)  5?on  ^uc^lcr'^  ®efc^id)te  ber  2)^ilcrct,  uno  ten 
merten  53anb  i^on  Duncfer'^  ©efc^id^te  be^  3tltert()um^  l)eute  ge^ 
fauft.  6.  Dcr  ©ebrauc^  ift  ber  ©efefec^cber  ber  ©prqd^en.  7, 
grietvid)  dla^w  ftubirt  ^Pbilologie,  unb  3BiI^elm  2Ceibmann  ftu^* 
birt  SJiebicin.  8.  ?>rofeJTor  gricbrid)^  ift  ^rofeffor  ber  flafft> 
fd)en  ^^vc^dologie  an  ber  Um»erfttdt  ju  33erlin.  9.  ^err  ^raun 
mirb  i)tn\t  %btn^  eine  3Sor(efung  itber  ben  Urfprung  ber  gott)i^ 
fd)en  53aufunft  balten.  10.  2)er  griebe  ber  (Beele  gilt  me^r  al^ 
3flei(^t()um.  11.  Da^  Sriibftiid  ift  no^  nid)t  fertig.  12.  ^a6^ 
bem  ^Ibenbejfen  tuerDen  mir  in^  Concert  ge^en.  13.  X)a^  fefte 
3}iagbeburg  ()at  Xill^  am  lOten  '^ai  1631  mit  ©turm  genome 
men ;  auger  ^wei  ^irc^en  unb  130  ^dufern  t)at  er  bie  ganje 
(Stabt  niebergebrannt  unb  30,000  »on  ben  ^inwo^nern  ermor^ 
bet ;  biefe  ©rduel  ^at  er  bie  „?D^agbeburc;er  ^o^jeit"  genannt* 
14.  Der  »orige  Slpril  wax  \d)x  fait  unb  unangene^m,  15.  §err 
(S5ie^ler  unb  feine  gamilie  fmb  je^t  in  ber  ©^wei^ ;  mx  wtxUn 
aud^  in  ac^t  Xagen  nac^  ber  (3d)n?eig  ge{)en.  16.  ^onftanti^ 
nopel  ift  bie  ^auptftabt  ber  Xiirfei.  17.  Diefe^  Xud)  foftet  ^m\ 
Xbaler  bie  (SUe.  18.  Sr  ftanb  mit  bem  $ut  auf  bem  ^opf, 
19.  Qx  roar  bee  ©efitbl^  nid)t  mdc^tig.  20.  Die  dlM)^m\amm^ 
lung  ^u  5!>rag  errod&lte  griebri^  ben  giinften  jum  ^onige,    21. 


140  USE   OP   THE   ARTICLE. 

SBtr  fcgelten  gegcn  ©iiben,  itnb  bann  gegcn  2Bej^en.  22.  |)err 
Wlanxtx  l^at  einen  5lrtt!el  uber  bte  ffit^^tt  ber  grauen  gefc^rieben. 
23*  Der  SSater  unb  bie  (So^ne  ftnb  fpa^ieren  gegangen* 

Grammatical. 

1.  One  of  the  most  marked  differences  between  the 
English  and  the  German  languages  is  in  the  use  of  the 
Article.  This  difference  arises  in  many  cases  from  the 
fact  that  the  German  idiom  often  requires  the  noun  to 
be  conceived  as  concrete,  where  the  English  idiom  re- 
quires it  to  be  conceived  in  a  general  or  abstract  sense. 
Thus,  in  the  sentence 

S)cr  WJenfc^  tft  fterblic^  (Man  is  mortal), 

if  we  translate  ber  SD^enfc^  by  "  the  human  heing^  we  will 
have  the  spirit  of  the  German  idiom. 

2.  The  most  important  points  in  which  the  German 
varies  from  the  English  in  the  use  of  the  Article  are 
given  on  page  254. 

Rem.  The  variations  to  the  rules  there  given  (especially  those  to  the  first 
rule,  §  55,  1,  1),  must  be  learned  by  practice.  Their  exposition  here  vi^ould 
only  cause  confusion. 

Exercise  80. 
1.  Platinum  is  the  heaviest  metal,  and  lead  is  the 
softest  metal.  2.  William  Pressnitz  is  studying  philos- 
ophy, and  John  Pressnitz  is  studying  astronomy.  3. 
What  are  you  reading  ?  4. 1  am  reading  Jahn's  History 
of  Astronomy.  5.  Mr.  Preu  is  studying  theology  at  (an) 
the  University  of  Halle.  6.  Prof.  Hoffmann  is  professor 
of  chemistry  in  the  University  of  Berlin.  7.  The  good 
fear  not  (the)  death.  8.  (The)  virtue  leads  to  (the)  hap- 
piness. 9.  (The)  pride  is  contemptible.  10.  (The)  last 
summer  was  very  hot.  11.  (In  the)  next  winter  we  will 
probably  go  to  Italy.  12.  After  breakfast  we  will  go 
to  (auf)  the  market.  13.Dinneris  not  yet  ready.  14.  The 
ruins  of  old  Greece  are  among  the  most  interesting  in  the 
world.  15.  Switzerland  lies  between  Germany  and  Italy. 


PERSONAL   AND   POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS.  141 

16.  Smyrna  is  the  largest  city  in  Turkey  in  Asia  (in  the 
Asiatic  Turkey).  17.  Bucharest  is  the  capital  of  Wal- 
lachia.  18.  We  take  lessons  (^aben  ©tunten)  in  music 
four  times  a  week  {§  105).  19.  He  stands  there  with  his 
hat  in  his  hand.  20.  They  elected  him  president  unan- 
imously. 21.  The  defendant  admits  that  he  was  an  ac- 
complice in  the  crime.  22.  The  ship  will  sail  toward 
the  North,  and  then  it  will  sail  toward  the  East. 


LESSON  XLI. 

PERSONAL    AND    POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS. 

ginunbatJ^tjigftc  5lufgak* 
1.  Qx  ^at  e$  meinet^alben  gct()an.  2.  (S^  warm  unfer  ^wan^ 
gig  in  ter  ©efellfc^aft ;  mer  »on  un^  jtnb  um  3c()n  U^r  nac^ 
^aufe  gegangen ;  bie  iibrtgen  biteben  bi^  2??ttterna(^t.  3.  d^ 
tt)ar  einmal  eine  gro^e  ^unger^notl)  im  ?anbe.  4. 2Ber  ift  ba  ? 
5.3c^  bin  ba.  6.  2Ber  mar  mtt  3f)nen?  7.  d^  wax  mein 
33 ruber  unb  meine  ©^raejler.  8. 3c^  lobe  mid)  (or  ic^  lobe 
mic^  fe(bft),  9.  3Barum  lobft  bu  bid^  felbfl?  10.  ^aben  mx 
un^  gelobt?  IL  3a,tl)r  ()abt  eud)  gelobt.  12.  (Sr  lobt  ft^ 
felbjl.  13.  ®te  lobt  ftd)  ni^t.  14.  Ste  loben  ftd).  15.  ^r 
felbfl  ^at  e^  get^an.  16.  3^  felber  fann  c^  tf)un.  17.  ©elbjl 
feine  geinbe  ad)ten  i^n.  18.  2Btr  scrfte^en  etnanber  (or  un^ 
einanber)  ganj  gut.  19.  dx  ^at  ba^  ^au^  fiir  2,000  X^aler 
»erfauft ;  er  l)atte  bafiir'  1,500  X^aler  gegcben.  20.  d^  mren 
125  <Stimmcn  bafiir^  unb  87  ©timmen  bage'gen.  21.  3)iefe 
neue  geber  ^aht  ic^  ^eute  gefauft ;  i^  l)abc  ben  ^rief  bamit' 
gefc^rieben*  22.  3^  l)iibe  ben  Xifc^  in^  3tntmer  gebrac^t  unb 
bie  33it^er  barauf  gelegt.  23. 1)a^  Xvni)  ^at  i()m  fel;r  gefallen ; 
er  ^at  baijon"  einen  fHod  unb  eine  3Befte  mad)en  lajjen.  24. 
®e^en  (Sie  morgen  mtt  un^  nad^  2)re^ben?  25.  3(%  tt^erbe  mit 
3l)nen  {)eute  5lbenb  barit'ber  fprec^en.  26.  3^r  53rubcr  ift  mit 
bem  SJlcinigcn  fpa^ieren  gegangen.  27.  dx  \)at  feine  53ud)cr  ein^ 
gepadt  unb  m^  5Imerifa  gefc^idt,  i^  werbe  bie  2}2einigen  audft 


142  PERSONAL  AND   POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS. 

na^  5lmer{fa  f^icfen ;  tt)a6  ttjerben  @te  mtt  ben  S^ngen  mac^cn? 
28,  3^  ttJerbe  bic  Sil'ieimgen  ^ier  in  Berlin  laffen,  bi^  ic^  t)on 
Stalten  prudffomme.  29,  Du  ^aft  ba^  Deinige  get^an  ;  bit 
5lnbern  mujyen  je^t  ba^  S^tige  t^un* 

Grammatical. 

1.  The  most  important  rules  with  reference  to  the 
use  of  Personal  Pronouns  are  given  on  pages  282  and 

283. 

Rem.  1.  The  reflexive  use  of  the  personal  pronoun  is  illustrated  in  the  foL 
lowing  paradigm : 

^d^  loBc    Vaxiif  I       praise    myself. 

bu    lobft   bt^^  thou  praisest  thyself. 

cr     (obt    ftC^,  he     praises  himself. 

fie     lobt    fi^,  she  praises  herself. 

e8     lobt    fi^,  it      praises  itself. 

XQXX  toben  Ult^^  we    praise    ourselves. 

i^r    lobet  CU^,  you  praise    yourselves. 

fie     loben  fi^,  they  praise    themselves. 

(@te  loben  fi^,  you  praise    yourselves.) 
Rem.  2.  The  reciprocal  use  of  the  personal  pronoun  is  necessarily  confined 
to  the  plural  number : 

SBir  loben  ViVi^,  We  praise  each  other. 

t^r     tobt    tM^f  you  praise  each  other. 

fie      loben  ft^,  they  praise  each  other. 

(@ie  loben  ft^,  you  praise  each  other.) 

2.  The  dative  and  accusative  cases  of  personal  pro- 
nouns, when  not  referring  to  persons,  are  rarely  used 
with  prepositions.  In  their  stead  are  usually  employed 
compound  adverbs,  formed  by  uniting  the  adverb  ba 
{there)  with  the  preposition,  as : 

2)abei'    (for  bet     i^m,  ibr,  i^m ;  i^nen),  by  or  through  it  or  them, 

baburc^'  (  "  burc^  i^n,  fie,  eg  ;     fie),  by  or  with  it  or  them, 

bafilr'     (  "  fiir     ibn,  fie,  eg  ;     fie),  for  it  or  them, 

bage'gen  (  "  gegen  t^n,  fte,  eg ;     fie),  against  it  or  them, 

bauiif    (  "  mtt    i^m,  i^r,  tbm ;  t^nen),  with  it  or  them. 

barin'     ("in    |  j^";  |- f,» '  j^- j  In  U  „.  in  .W 

Rem.  1.  When  the  preposition  begins  with  a  vowel,  the  original  t  of  btt 
(formerly  written  bat)  is  retained,  as:  baran',  barauf,  barin',  baril'ber,  etc 


PERSONAL   AND   POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS. 


143 


Rem.  2.  Similar  compound  adverbs  formed  with  !^tcr  (here)  and  a  preposi- 
tion are  sometimes  employed : 

§ierbei'  (for  bei  i^m,  \\)x,  tl^m ;  t^nen),        with  it  or  them, 
^iermit'  (  "  mit  i^m,  i^r,  i^m  ;  i^nen),       with  it  or  them. 

Rem.  3.  These  compound  adverbs  are  frequently  used  instead  of  the  de- 
monstrative pronouns  also  (see  §  188,  Rem.  1  and  Rem.  2). 

3.  When  the  absolute  possessive  pronoun  is  used  pred- 
icatively  (not  being  the  emphatic  word  in  the  sen- 
tence), like  other  predicate  adjectives,  it  is  undedined: 

2)er  §ut  i^  mein,  The  hat  is  mine. 

2)enn  2)cin  i[t  bie  e^re,  For  Thine  is  the  Glory. 

Rem.  1.  When  the  stress  of  voice  falls  upon  the  absolute  possessive  pro- 
noun, it  takes  the  termination,  as  shown  in  the  first  colimin  in  §  110: 
2)icfer  $ut  ift  meiiicr,  nic^t  jeiiicr,    This  hat  is  mine,  not  his. 
Re:m.  2.  Frequently  the  definite  article  precedes  the  posessive  pronoun: 
2)icfer  §ut  ifi  ber  2Jieine,  iener    This  hat  is  mine,  that  one  is  his. 
ijl  ber  Seine. 

Rem.  3.  More  usually,  in  modem  Grerman,  the  form  ending  in  stg  is  em- 
ployed : 

2)tefer  ^ut  ifl  bcr  3J2einige,  jcner    This  hat  is  mine,  that  one  is  his. 
ijl  ber  @eimge, 
Rem.  4.  The  form  ber  3J?eintgc  (mine)  is  declined  thus: 


SINGULAR. 

PLUEAL. 

Masculine. 
2)er  aJJcinige, 
bes  a«cinigen, 
bem  3J2einigen, 
ben  2J?einigen. 

Feminine. 
2)te  aWeintge, 
ber  2JJcinigen, 
ber  aJieiuigen, 
bie  aJieinige. 

Neuter. 
2)a8  2JJctmge, 
beS    3Jieimgcn, 
bcm  3JJeinigcn, 
baS   iKcimge. 

All  Genders. 
2)ic  aJieintgen, 
ber  SUieintgcn, 
ben  3Jicintgen, 
bic    3}2cimgcn. 

Rem.  5.  The  neuter  singular  of  the  absolute  possessive  pronoun  is  frequently 
employed  as  meaning  the  property  of,  the  duty  of,  etc.  : 

(Sr  i)at  ba6  (Setnige  i)ertoren,  He  has  lost  his  property. 

Sr  ^at  bag  ©einige  get^an,  He  has  done  his  duty. 

Rem.  6.  The  plural  frequently  refers  to  the  family,  friends,  followers^ 
dependents,  etc. : 

2)ic  a}?etntgen  tciffen  ntd^t,  toann    My  relatives  do  not  know  when  I 

\6)  ^urildftommen  trcrbe,  will  return. 

2)er  (Seneral  jog  mit  ben  ©etnigen    The  general  retreated  with  his  forces. 
iurM, 


144  INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS. 

Exercise  82. 
1. 1  did  it  on  his  account.  2.  They  did  it  on  our 
account.  3.  There  were  ten  of  them ;  four  of  them  came 
with  us ;  the  rest  remained  at  Leipzic.  4.  There  was 
once  a  very  rich  man — .  5.  Who  was  in  the  room  ? 
6.  It  was  I.  7.  There  are  many  large  trees  in  this 
forest.  8.  I  understand  myself.  9.  He  injures  him- 
self. 10.  We  understand  ourselves.  11.  They  under- 
stand themselves.  12.  They  understand  each  other. 
13.  Even  his  enemies  acknowledge  his  worth.  14.  Mr. 
Dietrich  has  sold  his  horse  for  360  Thlr. ;  he  paid  400 
Thlr.  for  it  last  j^ear.  15.  The  Government  will  im- 
mediately make  a  new  loan  of  150,000,000  Thlr. ;  there 
were  250  votes  in  favor  of  (for)  it  in  Congress,  and  only 
36  votes  against  it.  16.  Will  Mr.  Eitelberg  go  with  us 
to  Gotha?  17.  He  will  come  here  and  speak  with  you 
about  it  this  evening.  18.  Why  did  you  not  tell  William 
that  he  must  not  go  out  in  (bet)  this  bad  weather?  19. 
I  did  tell  him  so  twice. 


LESSON  XLII. 

INDEFINITE    AND    INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUITS. 

1.  Sinige  ijon  ben  53uc^ern  Inb  m\)l  gut  gebunben,  akr  bie 
meiften  (most  of  them)  fmb  fe^r  fc^lec^t  gebunben.  2.  3)er 
@ine  ^at  feine  5(ufgabe  gan^  o^ne  %t\)kx  gef^rieben,  ber  Slnbere 
\)at  mele  Seller  barin  gemac^t.  3.  Stnige  ttjemge  (S5ebt^te  ber 
(^ammlung  jinb  gut,  mand^e  jtnb  fd^lec^t,  mk  ober  bie  meiften 
finb  mittelmcigig.  4.  35on  dtohn'o  fang  er  unb  manc^em  fronts 
men  ^elb  (@d^0-  5*  ^^  ^ft  ^'^^  mand^em  ^ofjen  53aum  bie 
2Bur^e(  fauL  6.  $err  3)iefenba^  ^at  me^rere  3a^re  (§  83, 4) 
in  !iDeutf^lanb  gt ^.ebt.  7.  dx  ^at  mtr  fetn  53ud^  gefdbttft.  8, 
®etn  (Sbrgetj  fennt  feine  ©ren^en.  9.  "^ix  gefdtlt  fetne^  »on 
alien  biefen  ^iic&ern,    10,  d^  fann  feiner  baritber  entfcfeieben 


INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS.  145 

urt^tlen,  11«  S^  war  met  ?arm  urn  ^idjt^ ;  otcl  ©cfd^rci  unb 
wenig  SoUe.  12.  (Sr  Ijat  e^  nur  bur^  mel  (or  mele)  5lrbcit 
Qct^an.  13.  3c^  f)abe  e^  mit  mel  (or  »iclem)  35ergnugen  get^an. 
14.  2)?an  fann  bet  melem  ®elbe  ungliicflid^,  unb  ot)ne  mel  (^elb 
fe^r  gliirflic^  fern.  15.  Du  f)a|l  »tel  gelefen,  aber  trentg  gelernt. 
16.  (Sr  ^at  met  gereijl  nnb  S3ieB  gefcl^en.  17.  SSiele  ^oc^e 
»erfal^en  ben  33rei.  18.  (Stubiren  je^t  i?iel  (or  mete)  Slmerifa^ 
ner  in  Berlin?  19.  S'Zur  tt^enig  2)^enfd)en  ftnb  fo  ungemein 
gtiidfli^.  20.  3c^  mug  etn  wenig  3^ut)e  fu^en.  21.  3^  ^abc 
ta^  ^u^  fur  nur  n^enige  ©rofc^en  gefauft.  22.  d^  jtnb  n^ent^ 
ger  5Iu^nal)men  al^  bu  benfjl.  23.  SBenige  t)aben  e^  »erfuc^t, 
unb  noc^  SCenigern  ifl  e^  getungen.  24.  Tlit  SSielem  ^dtt  man 
^an^,  mit  2Benigem  fommt  man  au^.  25.  Sr  t)at  tt?eniger 
(comparatwe)  S5orft^t  al^  $;apferfeit.  26.  !iDa^  ©ebcimnif 
ift  im  53eft0e  nur  ujcniger  {gen. pi.)  5)erfonen.  27.  ^r  bat  ba^ 
ttjenigfle  ©elb  unb  bie  wenigften  ^^orgen.  28.  ^lur  bei  ben  n^e^ 
nigften  X^ieren  ftnbet  man  fold^e  (S5en)ol)n^eiten.  29.  5D?it  ac^t 
SUen  njerben  fie  Xuc^  genug  fitr  einen  9f?oc!  unb  eine  SBcfte  l)a^ 
ben,  30.  3c^  ):)(iht  genug  oon  feiner  Xapferfeit  gct)brt.  31. 
5Bomit  ^aben  ®ie  ben  53rief  gef^rieben?  32.  3^  ^^^t  il)n 
mit  cinem  53teiftift  gefc^rieben,  n^eit  id^  feine  geber  bei  mir  \)(i\it. 
33.  Sffioriiber  ()at  §err  ^c^norr  gefprod^en?  34.  (£r  fprac^ 
liber  feine  3fieife  na^  3tatien. 

Grammatical. 
1.  For  the  general  rules  governing  the  use   of  the 
Indefinite  Pronouns,  see  page  286. 

Rem.  1.  When  ntdlt^Ct  is  used  before  an  adjective  without  its  termination 
(§  112,  2,  Rem.  3),  the  adjective  follows  the  old  declension: 

2J2anc^  ta^t^^cr  §elb,  or   manc^er  ta^fre  §ctb. 

2Jian(^  Ucb*c^  ^inb,  *'  "mand^eS  Itebe  ^inb. 

3Jtit  manc^  ta^fr^cnt  §clben,    "    mit  mant^em  ta^frcn  ^elbcn. 

aJianc^  ta^t^^^C  ^clbcn,  '*    manege  to^frcn  ^elbcn. 

Rem.  2.  SSttl  and  tOttltg  can  be  used  with  or  without  inflection,  according 
AS  the  idea  of  coUectiveness  or  individuality  is  made  more  prominent : 

(g§  ^t  toicl  SDiii^e  gefoftct,        or   c8  ^at  \)tclc  Tli\i)c  gcfoftet. 

SOBic  toiel  ncue  ^ctnbe  1  (®d^.)  "    text  toiete  neue  ^thiht  1 

(g8  fmb  tuenig  Wkn\d}tn,         "    c6  fmb  tDCuige  aJienfd^eiu 

a 


146  INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS. 

Ohs.  The  comparative  of  UJClttO  (ttJClttgCr)  is  more  usually  uninflected : 
(Sr  ^at  ttJemgcr  35orfic^tigt'ett  alS    He  has  less  prudence  than  valor. 
2;a^3fertcit, 

Rem.  3.  The  indefinite  pronoun  man  (§112,  6)  is  used  in  most  general  ex- 
pressions ;  it  is  translated  by  one^  people^  etc.  : 

2Jian  fagt,      one  says,        they  say,        people  say,        it  is  said. 
3Jian  glaubt,  one  believes,  they  believe,  people  believe,  it  is  believed. 
Obs.  9Jlan  is  indeclinable.  When  oblique  cases  are  required,  they  are  formed 
from  tVXtt*     When  a  possessive  pronoun  referring  to  lUflU  is  required,  \t\VL 
is  employed  (see  Sentences  5  and  G  in  Exercise  84). 

Rem.  4.  {^itsii^  (§112,  8)  and  SHx^t^  (§112,  9)  are  frequently  used  in  ap- 
position with  the  neuter  of  adjectives  used  substantively  (Sent.  19  and  20). 

Obs.  The  first  syllable  (ct=)  of  Cttott^  is  frequently  dropped  in  common 
conversation. 

Rem.  2.  In  asking  questions,  the  indefinite  pronoun  soine  or  any  is  in  many 
cases  not  translated : 

^abtn  @ic  SSutter  gefauft?  Did  you  buy  any  butter? 

^abcn  <Bk  Sle^fel  ge!auft  ?  Did  you  buy  any  apples  ? 

Obs.  In  some  cases  soiyie  is  translated  by  CttOH^  (see  §  112,  8,  Reyn.  1). 

2.  For  the  chief  rules  with  reference  to  the  use  of 
Relative  Pronouns^  see  page  289. 

Rem.  For  the  compound  adverbs  toonttt/  tiJOtJOn^etc.,  see  §  188,  Rem.  3. 

Vierundachtzlgste  Aufgabe. 

1.  Man  reist  von  Berlin  nach  Koln  mit  der  Eisenhahn 
in  einem  Tage.  2.  Bei  uns  sj>Ticht  man  auch  von  Ge~ 
spenstern  /  aber  in  der  Reg  el  Jidben  nur  "  die  Leut^''  und 
das  seTJber  unsichtbare  und  sj>uJchafte  "  man^^  sie  gesehen. 
3.  Was  sagt  man  in  der  Stadt  uber  die  neue  Anleihef  4 
Man  ist  daruber  sehr  unzufrieden^  5.  Man  lacht  ge- 
wbhnlich,  wenn  einem  etwas  Ldcherliches  hegegnet.  6. 
Man  ist  froh^  wenn  man  eine  Arbeit  geendet  hat.  7. 
Jemand  hlojpft.  8.  Es  ist  Herr  Wedel.  9.  Kennen  Sie 
Jemand  {or  Jemanden)  aus  der  Gesellschaft?  10.  leh 
kenne  Niemand  {or  Niemanden)  ausser  Ilerrn  Ruprecht 
und  seiner  Frau.  11.  Hat  Jemand  es  Ihnen  gesagt  f  12. 
Nein,  Niemand  hat  es  mir  gesagt^  ich  habe  es  selbst  heute 
Morgen  in  der  Zeitung  gelesen.     13.  Seine  Hand  wird 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS.  -  147 

wider  Jederman,  uiid  Jedermanns  Hand  wird  wider  ikn 
sein  (1.  Mo8. 12, 16).  14.  Man  soil  se-ln  Ilerz  nicht  Jeder- 
mann  offenbaren.  15.  Ilahen  Sie  etwas  von  dem  neuen 
UnfaU  in  den  Bergwerken  gehbrt?  16.  Nein^  ich  habe 
Niclits  davon  geJtort.  17.  Wimsehen  Sie  nock  etwas  f  18. 
Ich  werde  noch  etwas  Butter  nehmen.  19.  Dieses  Tuck 
ist  etwas  gam  Neues.  20.  Er  hat  etwas  gam  Arideres  ge- 
meint,  {^\,IIier  ist  gam  was  Neues).  22.  Ilahen  Sie 
noch  Gold?  23.  Ja^  ich  habe  noch  welches.  24.  Ilahen 
Sie  heute  Morgen  Aejofel  auf  (in)  dem  Markt  gesehen  ? 
25.  </«,  ich  habe  welche  gesehen,  aber  sie  war  en  schlecht  und 
sehr  theuer.  26.  Ich  weiss  nicht,  wovon  Sie  sprechen.  27. 
Konnen  Sie  mir  sagen,  woruber  Professor  Schmidt  heute 
Abend  sprechen  wird  ?  28.  Er  wird  uber  die  Geschichte 
der  Stadt  Berlin  vor  dem  vierzehrden  Jahrhundert 
sprechen. 


LESSON  XLIII. 

DEMONSTKATIVE   AND   RELATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

giiutunbor^tjigftc  ^ufgok. 

1.  3c^  ^^^^  ^cute  2)^orc;en  biefe  ^n^ei  53u^er  ^efauft ;  btefe^ 
mar  fel)r  bitlig,  jene^  n>ar  fe^r  theuer.  2.  2)a^  (jene^)  ^ud^ 
l)abe  ic^  fc^on  gclefen.  3.  X)iefen  ^errn  fenne  id)  fef)r  gut,  aber 
jeuen  ^errn  bort  \)Ci,ht  i^  nie  sorter  9efe()en.  4.  jDie  Diuinen 
yon  ^ompeji  ftnt)  grower  unt)  interejfanter  al^  t>ie  »on  ^ercula^ 
neum.  5.  2)er  ift  ein  fet)r  9elc()rter  2)?ann.  6.  SBann  xoix^  ^crr 
3^ot^  imet^crfommen  ?  7.  2)a^  tt)eig  ic^  nic^t.  8,  Da^^  ift  tc^ 
^aifer^  ^anb  unb  (Siegel  (ec^.).  9.  Dae  fmb  SlUce  nciie 
^dufer  in  fciefer  (Btra^e.  10.  Sr  malte  feinen  5>ettcr  unt  bcffcn 
(2o()n.  11.  Der  3^u^m  beffen,  ber  liigt,  bauert  nid)t  lange. 
12.  Sr  ift  nid)t  »on  benen,  bie  mit  3Borten  tapfer  ftnb.  13, 
2)ic0(^ee)  (tnb  reife  5(epfel.  14.  Da^jenige  58ud),  melc^e^  bu 
tt)itnfd^efi,  ^at  ber  53uc^binbcr  noc^  nid^t  ^uriicfgebracbt.  15. 
Derjenige  ^txx,  ben  (or  n^eld)cn)  mx  geftern  im  SDiufeum  faf)en, 


148 


RELATIVE   PRONOaNS. 


{ft  ber  ^ruber  be^  ^errn  ^xtbxt^l  16.  ^a  ift  berfelBe  §err, 
ben  (or  welc^en)  mx  geftern  ^^benb  bet  |)errn  ^ritnott)  trafen. 
17.  ®er  md)t  f)5ren  will,  muf  fii^len  (or  ber  muf  fii^len).  18. 
3Ba^  bu  !)eute  t()un  fannfi,  fotlft  bu  ni^t  auf  morgen  ^erf^ieben 

(or  ba^  follft ).    19.  Mt^,  m^  mx  l)mtc  in  9>ot^bam 

gefc^en  b^ben,  i)at  une  \t^x  gefallen.  20.  ^ier  i)aht  id)  etrna^ 
in  biefem  53uc^e  gefunben,  ma^  ic^  gar  ni^t  t^erfle^en  fann. 
21.  3)ie  ©efc^i^te  ift  im  ®an^en  rid)tig,  boc^  ^abt  ic^  ^iJian^e^ 
gefuuDen,  wa^  i^  ni(^t  biUtgen  fann.  22.  SBeffen  33rob  bu 
iffeft,  beffen  Sob  bu  ftngeft  (<5prid)it)ort).  23.  @^  n)ar  eine 
fold5e  |)t^e  in  ber  <Stabt,  t>a^  mx  faft  alle  franf  bat^on  n)urben» 
24. 53ei  fol^  einer  |)it3e  (or  einer  fold)en  |)i^e)  fann  man  letc^t 
fran!  werben.  25.  (Sold^  einen  S^ienfc^en  (or  einen  fold^en 
9J^enfd)en)  ^attc  i^  nie  gefeben.  26.  „2)a^  miffen  voix,  bic 
tt)tr  bte  ©emfen  jagen"  (^d).).  27.  Da^  mi^  ic^,  ber  i^  felbfl 
e^  gefeben  ^abz.  28.  Da^  ftnb  bie  |)dufer,  n)o»on  i^  gefpro^en 
l)aht.    29.  ^ier  ifl  bie  geber,  tt)omit  id)  ben  ^rief  gefdjrieben 

Grammatical. 

1.  The  chief  rules  governing  the  use  of  Demonstrative 
and  Relative  pronouns  are  given  in  §  111,  and  §  114. 

2.  The  demonstrative  pronoun  bcrjcnige  ifhaf)  is  de- 
clined thus : 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Masculivu           Feminine.              Neuter. 
Nom.  S)crjenige,           btejcmge,          baSjemge, 
Gen.    be^ieuigen,          berjenigen,        bemjentgen, 
Dat.    bemjeittgen,         berjenigen,        bemjenigen. 
Ace.    benjcnigen.          biejcntgc.          bagjenigc. 

All  Genders. 
biejentgen, 
berjenigen, 
benjenigen, 
biejenigcn. 

Rem.  1.  2)CriCni9C  is  employed  only  when  a  relative  follows  the  demon- 
strative pronoun. 

3)erjcnige  §err,  ben  iDir  ja^en,         The  gentleman,  whom  we  saw. 
Rem.  2.  XctiCllifit  has  usually  a  more  indefinite  signification  than  jCllCr/ 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


149 


3.  The  pronoun  bcrfelbc  (^/^  same)  is  declined  thus 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAT, 

Masculine.           Feminine.             Neuter. 
Norn.  SDcrfcIbc,             biefelbe,            ba«felbc, 
Gen.    bcsfelben,           bcrfelben,         besfelben, 
Dat.    bcmfelben,           bcrfelben,         bemfelbcn, 
Ace.    benfclben.           bicfclbc.           basfclbe. 

All  Genders. 
biefelbcn, 
berfelben, 
benfclben, 
biefelben. 

4.  The  singular  of  the  neuter  gender  of  the  demon- 
strative pronoun  2)a§,  S)icfcg  (2)ic§),  3cnc«,  Mt^,  etc., 
is  used  in  an  indefinite  way,  without  distinction  of  gen 
der  or  number,  like  the  neuter  of  the  third  person  of 
the  personal  pronoun  C^;  thus  used,  these  pronouns  do 
not  control  number  and  person  of  the  verb : 

^a^  ftnb  31UC§  neuc  §aufer.  Those  are  all  new  houses. 

^\t§  fmb  reifc  (Srbbceren,  Those  are  ripe  strawberries. 

5.  Instead  of  relative  pronouns  (not  referring  toper- 
sons)  preceded  by  prepositions,  compound  adverbs  are 
usually  employed  (see  also  §  188,  Ide7n.  3) : 

-     ^ter  tfl  ba«  S3uc^  ttJODon  (or  bon  Here  is  the  book  of  which  I  spoke. 
Wctd^cm)  id;  gef^roc^en  ^aU, 

^tcr  ift  ber  33lci[ttft  (or  bic  gcber)  Here  is  the  pencil  (or  the  pen)  with 

toomit  ic^  ben  S3rtef  gefd^rieben  which  I  wrote  the  letter. 

Exercise  86. 
1.  This  cloth  which  you  bought  to-day  was  much  too 
dear.  2.  The  cloth,  from  which  the  tailor  made  these 
coats,  was  very  good,  but  it  Was  very  dear.  3.  Here  is 
the  book  of  which  I  spoke.  4.  There  are  the  books  of 
which  I  spoke.  5.  The  Cathedral  of  Cologne  is  much 
larger  than  the  one  (bte)  at  Ulm.  6.  These  books  are 
new,  but  those  (jene)  books  are  not  new.  7.  These  are 
all  new  books.  8.  How  much  did  this  house  cost?  9. 
(That)  I  do  not  know.  10.  (That)  I  can  not  say.  11. 
There  is  the  same  carriage  that  we  saw  this  morning. 
12.  Did  you  find  any  thing  that  you  do  not  understand? 


150  REFLEXIVE   VERBS. 

13.  No,  I  have  so  far  (W  jegt)  found  nothing  that  is  not 
very  easy  to  understand.  14.  What  he  said  about  the 
battle  is  indeed  (tt)ol)l)  possible,  but  it  is  not  probable. 
15.  I  can  not  write  with  such  a  pen  as  (tt)ie)  this.  16. 
There  is  the  man  in  whose  (be[fen)  house  we  reside. 
17.  There  is  the  physician  with  whom  I  made  the  trip 
through  the  Riesengebirge  (mit  njel^em  or  mit  bem  i^  etne 
did\t  bur^  ba^  Dtiefengebirge  gema^t  ^ak).  18.  That  man  is 
the  one  whom  we  saw  at  the  (im)  concert  yesterday 
evening. 


LESSON  XLIV. 

REFLEXIVE  VERBS. 

Sicknunba^tjtgftc  5(ufga6c* 

1.  2Ste  lan^e  \)ahtn  ©ie  ftc^  in  2)lun(^en  aufge|)a(ten?  2, 
3m  »ortgen  3a^re  ^aben  mx  un^  nur  bret  SBoc^en  in  S^itnc^en 
aufge^alten ;  aber  »or  mx  ^a^xtn  ftnb  mx  iiber  mer  Tlomtt 
in  Tlixmi^tn  gebltekn*  3.  2Sie  beftnben  ^te  jt^  (how  do  you 
do)?  4.  3c^  beftnbe  mic^  ganj  tt)o|)l,  i^  banfe,  5,  ^err  2)ie^ 
fenbac^  unb  fetne  gan^e  gamilie  ^aben  ftc^  nac^  ^clgolanb  bege^? 
ben,  urn  bort  ©eebciber  ju  ne^men,  6. 353arum  beliimmern  ®te 
ft^  fo  febr  urn  feine  ^Ingelegen^etten  ?  7,  3^  ^(^^^  mid)  enblic^ 
entfd^loffen,  na^  3talien  ^n  ge^en.  8,  ^u^  bem  (Bamtn  tnU 
n)ic!elt  jtc^  bie  $flanje,  9*  35on  ber  3ett  an  enttt)ic!elte  ftc^  bte 
(Smporuttg  fe^r  raf^,  10.  %m  1.  9^o»ember  1755  ereignete  ftd^ 
ba^  Srbbeben  in  igifTabon.  11.  dx  i)at  ftc^  iiber  feine  ^nt^ 
becfung  fe^r  gcfreut.  12.  9la$  etner  (angen  ^elagerung  ^at  bie 
geftung  ftc^  auf  (15nabe  unb  Ungnabe  ergeben  miiffen.  13.  (Sr 
l^at  ftd^  burc^  (Stunbengeben  ernd^ren  miiffen.  14.  Tlan  tx^ 
funbigte  ftc|  unter  ber  ^anb  fe^r  fc^atf,  m  jte  jt(^  tt)d^renb  ber 
2)^orbt^at  befanben.  15.  3^  fur^te  mi^  »or  feiner  dia6^t 
nic^t  (or  {(^  fitrd^te  feine  9fla^e  ni^t).  16.  (S^  ift  fe^r  fc^mer, 
ftc^  an  eine  gan;^  neue  Seben^art  ju  gemobnen.  17.  3rren  ®tc 
it4  ni^t,  mein  ^err,  ^aben  @ie  ni^t  mdnen  $ut  genommen? 


BEFLEXIVE   VERBS.  151 

Grammatical. 

1.  For  the  chief  rules  that  govern  the  use  oS.  Reflexive 
Verbs,  and  for  the  paradigm  of  these  verbs,  see  §  158, 
and  §159. 

2.  Most  reflexive  verbs  are  intransitive.  Those  that 
have  the  reflexive  pronoun  in  the  dative  case  govern 
an  object  in  the  accusative  case.  Some  govern  an  in- 
direct object  in  the  dative  case.  Some  are  followed 
by  a  substantive  in  the  genitive  case.  Some  are  fol- 
lowed by  a  preposition. 

3.  The  following  are  among  the  most  commonly  em- 
ployed of  the  reflexive  verbs. 

Rem.  1 .  See  also  those  verbs  below  which  require  the  reflexive  pronoun  to  be 
in  the  dative  case. 

@id^  argern  (ilber),  to  be  offended  (at). 

fi(^  anfd;tcfen  (ju),  to  prepare  (for). 

fic^  aiif(;atten,  to  remain,  stay. 

fic^  aiiffd;n?ingcn,  to  mount,  to  soar. 

fic^  au^ern,  to  express  one's  self. 

\\&}  bcbantcn  (fUr),  to  give  thanks  (for). 

fic^  befinbcn,  to  find  one's  self  (to  be,  to  do). 

fi(^  bebenfen  {gen.),  to  deliberate  about,  to  devise. 

fic^  befteigcu   >        '  .  ,,,.,. 

fic^  beflei^igenl  ^^""-^^  ^^  ^PP^^  °°®  *  ^^^^ (^°)' 

ftd^  begcbcn,  to  resort  to,  to  repair  to,  to  betake  one's  self  to. 

fic^  befjelfcn  (mit),  to  resort  to,  to  help  one's  self  by  means  of. 

fid^  beflagen  (ilbcr),  to  complain  (of). 

fic^  befttmnicrn  (um),  to  trouble  one's  self  (about) ;  (ttbcr),  to  grieve  for. 

fic^  bcmdc^tigcit) 

fic^  bemciftern   \  C^^^-)'  *<*  ^^^^  possession  (of),  to  seize. 

fid^  bcftnncn  {gen.,  or  auf  or  fiber),  to  recollect,  to  try  to  remember. 

fic^  cntaugcrn  {gen.\  to  dispose  of,  to  part  with. 

fic^  entijaltcn  {gen.),  to  restrain  one's  self  (from). 

\\&l  cntfd;Iic^en,  to  resolve,  to  determine,  to  decide. 

fic^  entfmncn  (gen.),  to  recollect. 

fic^  entwicfeln,  to  expand,  develop. 

fic^  crbarmeu  {gen.,  an  or  iiber),  to  have  mercy  (upon). 

fic^  ereignen,  to  happen,  to  take  place. 

jl(t>  crfreuen  {gen.  or  iibcr),  to  rejoice,  to  be  glad  (at). 

fl4>  crgebcn  (jdat.),  to  surren,der,  to  addict  one's  self  (to). 


152  EEPLEXIVE   VERBS. 

V 

f!d^  erna^rcn,  to  gain  one's  livelihood. 

fic(>  erinnern  {gen.  or  an),  to  remember. 

fi(^  er!alten,  to  take  a  cold. 

ft^  eriunbtgen  {gen.,  nad^  or  an  or  iiber),  to  make  inquiries,  to  inform 

ft(^  freuen  (iiber),  to  rejoice  (at).  [one's  self. 

fic^  jiird^ten  (»or),  to  be  in  dread  (of). 

ftc^  getrSften  {gen.),  to  hope  (for). 

fi(^  get»oi)nen  (an),  to  accustom  one's  self  (to). 

\\6^  gramen  (iibcr  or  uni),  to  grieve  (over  or  at). 

iic(>  irren,  to  make  a  mistake. 

fic^  Itci^ern  {dat.),  to  approach. 

ftc^  rii^men  {gen.),  to  boast  (of). 

\\6)  fc^amen  {gen.,  iiber  or  tcegen),  to  be  ashamed  (of). 

ft(^  in  bte  Umftanbe  fd;t(fen,  to  adapt  one's  self  to  circumstances. 

ftc^  j^euen  (t)or),  to  stand  in  fear  (of). 

ftc^  jetjnen  (nac^),  to  long  for. 

ftc^  je^en,  to  take  a  seat. 

jic^  troften  {gen.  or  mit),  to  console  one's  self  with. 

fic^  nntcrfjatten,  to  converse,  to  amuse  one's  self. 

ftc^  i)erge{)en,  to  go  astray,  to  lose  one's  way. 

fi^  i)enrren,     "       "         "  " 

fid^  i>erlaffen  (auf),  to  rely  (upon). 

fit^  i3Crj:j)ve(^en,  to  misspeak. 

\\&l  ijerfeiicu  {yen.),  to  expect:  (an), to  be  frightened  at. 

fiA  terfic^ern  {gen.  or  tor),  to  make  sure  (of). 

fid^  ijerf|)aten,  to  come  too  late. 

\\&f  ijerftellen,  to  disguise  one's  self 

\\^  ijorbereiten  (auf  or  p),  to  prepare  one's  self. 

jtc^  n?etgern,  to  object,  to  refuse. 

ftcj)  tciberfe^en  {dat.),  to  oppose,  to  withstand. 

fi(^  tcunbern  (iiber),  to  wonder  (at). 
Rem.  2.  Many  other  transitive  verbs  besides  those  that  are  included  in  the 
above  list  are  often  used  reflexively,  as : 

^&}  i)erftef)e  ba§  ntc^t,  I  do  not  understand  that. 

^(^  i)er[te^e  m\6),  I  understand  myself. 

2)aS  ijerfte^t  ji^,  That  is  a  matter  of  course. 

Rem.  3.  Eeflexive  verbs  take  l^aBttt  for  the  auxiliary. 

4.  The  following  reflexive  verbs  require  the  reflexive 
pronoun  to  be  in  the  dative  case : 

@ic^  anma^en,  to  presume,  to  arrogate  to  one's  self. 

ftc^  au§bebtngen,  to  reserve  to  one's  self. 

jtd^  au^bttten,  to  ask  for. 

ft(^  benfen,  to  imagine. 

jlc^  einbitbcn,  to  imagine,  to  fancy. 


REFLEXIVE   VEEB8.  153 

fi6f  gctroucn,  to  dare,  to  venture, 
ftc^  eriauben,  to  indulge  one's  self  (in). 
fic^  fc^meic^eln,  to  flatter  one's  self. 
f\d)  Dcrfc^affen,  to  provide, 
fid^i  ijernebmcn,  to  propose  to  one's  self, 
fic^  t)or[tcUen,  to  imagine,  to  place  before  one's  selfl 
Jtem.  1.  These  verbs  govern  an  object  in  the  accusative  case: 

25a8  ^aft  bu  bir  eingcbilbet,  Thou  hast  imagined  that. 

Rein.  2.  Reflexive  verbs  that  have  the  reflexive  pronoun  in  the  dative  case 
fire  conjugated  thus : 

Infinitive :  ©i^  ttnbtlbCtt/  to  imagine. 
Present  Indicative. 
X6f  HIbe    C8  mir  ein,  I       imagine  it. 
bu  bilbejl  C8  bir   ein,  thou  imaginest  it. 
et   bilbct  e8  fi^  ein,  he     imagines  it. 
»ir  bilben  e8  un^  ein,  we     imagine  it. 
t^r  bilbet  eS  CU(^ein,  you   imagine  it. 
fte  bilben  c8  fi(^   ein,  they  imagine  it. 
(®ie  bilben  c«  ft(^  ein,  you   imagine  it). 
Imperfect  Indie. :    \6)  bilbcte  CS  mir  ein,  etc.,  I  imagined  it,  ere. 

Perfect  Indie. :       \6}  ^abe  C8  mir  eingcbitbet,  etc.,    I  have  imagined  it,  etc. 
Pluperfect  Indie. :  \6}  ^atte  e8  mir  Ctngcbtlbct  etc. ,     I  had  imagined  it,  etc. 
First  Fut.  Indie. :  i6)  toetbe  eS  mir  einbilben,  etc.,    I  shall  imagine  it,  etc. 
Sec.  Fut.  Indie. :    \6)  ttJCrbc  C8  mir  etngebilbet  ^aben,  I  shall  have  imagined  it. 

5.  For  the  use  of  reflexive  verbs  governing  the  geni- 
tive and  dative  cases,  see  Lessons  XL VI.,  and  XLVII. 
Exercise  88. 

1.  How  long  shall  you  remain  in  Berlin  ?  2.  We  will 
probably  remain  there  two  months.  3.  Good  morning  I 
How  do  you  do?  4.  I  am  very  well,  I  thank  (you). 
5.  During  the  hot  weather  we  usually  betake  ourselves 
to  Stettin  or  Danzig,  for  the  purpose  of  taking  sea-baths, 
and  of  escaping  the  bad  air  of  this  large  city.  6.  We 
have  concluded  to  return  to  Berlin  in  October.  7.  The 
conspiracy  developed  itself  with  astonishing  rapidity. 
8.  A  great  freshet  (overflowing)  of  the  Rhine  took  place 
last  spring.  9.  He  rejoiced  over  the  arrival  of  his  broth- 
er. 10.  The  entire  army  was  forced  to  surrender  at 
discretion.     11.  He  had  to  earn  his  livelihood  by  work- 

a2 


154  AGREEMENT    OF   VEBB. 

ing  with  his  hands  (^anbarkit)  until  he  could  get  a 
better  situation.  12.  It  is  not  easy  to  accustom  one's 
self  to  the  usages  and  customs  of  other  lands.  13.  We 
are  mistaken  {or  we  have  made  a  mistake)  ;  that  is 
Mr.  Rahn's  house.  14.  We  can  not  rely  upon  his  help. 
15. 1  long  to  see  my  native  land  (35aterlant))  once  more. 

16.  May  I  rely  upon  your  standing  by  me  in  this  affair? 

17.  Of  course  you  can.  18.  It  is  often  necessary  for  ua 
to  adapt  ourselves  to  circumstances. 


LESSON  XLV. 

AGREBMENT  OP  VERB   WITH    NOMINATIVE.      VERBS   GOVERNING   THE   ACCU* 
SATIVE  CASE.      APPOSITION. 

9lcununba^t3tgftc  ^ufgaSc* 

1, 3o^ann  ge^t  na(^  ter  ^tabt.  2»  3o()ann  unb  2B{l()e(m 
ge^en  nac^  ber  (Stabt.  3.  (i^  ftnb  mele  fc^one  ©ta^lftic^e  in 
biefem  53u^.  4»  5Bir  roaren  e^  ntc^t,  bte  auf  bte  ^lumen  gc^ 
treten  ^aben.  5,  Die^  )tnb  5ltle6  neue  ^itc^er  auf  biefem  ^if^e, 
aber  ba^  jtnb  'Mt^  33ui^er  au^  ber  jmeiten  |)anb.  6.  ®eine 
SD^ajeftdt  3Bil()elm  ber  SSterte,  ^onig  »on  ^reu^en,  l^aben  aller? 
gndbtgfl  gerui)t,  au  befe^len,  bag,  etc.  7.  ©te,  3{)r  33ruber, 
mein  SSater  unb  ic^  fonnen  (b.  ^.  tt)tr  fonnen)  in  biefem  ^oup^ 
fa^ren.  8»  2)u,  3)ein  53rubcr  unb  Detne  (S^wefter  merbet  (b» 
^.  i^r  ttjerbet)  $la§  in  bem  nd^ften  SBagen  ftnben.  9,  2)u  unb 
2)ein  33ruber  ftnb  »on  $errn  ^obel  eingelaben,  mtt  i^m  unb  fei^ 
ner  grau  nad^  Xegel  p  fafjren,  urn  ba^  ®rab  ber  @ebru^ 
ber  ^umbolbt  unb  bte  ^unftfc^dge  tm  f  alaft  ju  fe^en,  10. 
Da^  faltc  5Better,  welc^e^  xoxx  je^t  ^aben,  ^at  f^on  Idnger  al^ 
einen  5Dlonat  gebauert.  11*  2Bie  »iel  tt)iegen  ®tc  (or  xoa^  tfl 
3^r  ©ewi^t)?  12.3^  mege  ^unbert  unb  breigig  ^)funb; 
mein  53ruber  3of»ann  tt)iegt  ^unbert  merunbmer^tg  $funb.  13. 
I)iefe^  Xuc^  foftet  einen  unb  einen  ^alben  3:baler  (or  anbertl^alb 
Stealer)  bte  SUe.  14.  |)amburg  liegt  ungefd^r  breigtg  beutfd^e 
(b.  6*  ^unbert  unb  jwan^tg  engUf^e)  Wltxlm  norbmellli^  "om 


AGREEMENT    OK    VERB.  155 

©erltn.  15.  $crr  $Rot^  trtrb  mit  fciner  ^amxlk  wal^rfd^ctnlic^ 
ticfcn  ^^beut)  (or  f)eute  ^2lbent))  »on  Diiffeltorf  aufommeu.  16, 
^err  3)ictri^  fam  frii^cr  urn  10  U^r  SSormittag^,  urn  un^  beut^ 
fd)en  Untcrrid)!  ju  ert()eilen ;  je^t  fommt  er  urn  brct  Uljx  'iHlcid^^ 
mimc^^,  17.  2Bir  [1111?  nur  gegen  Slbenb  ben  SScfuD  l)inauf  gc? 
Qangen,  mil  voir  ben  l)errli^en  (Botinenuntevgang  »on  ber  @pt^c 
be^  33ulfan^  fef)en  nJoUten.  18.  ^db  nad)bcm  bic  Sonne  unter^ 
ging,  fam  ber  SBoUmonb  l)erauf :  aber  ber  §immel  l)at  jtc^  gleid^ 
barauf  mit  2Bolfen  bebedt,  fo  bag  e^  fe{)r  bunfel  a^ar,  al^  mx  ben 
53erg  l)erunterfamen.  19.  ginben  Sie  e^  fait  l)ier?  20.  ^a, 
mic^  friert  e^.  21.  (S^  freut  mid^,p  pren,  ba§  3&re  ©efunb^ 
^eit  ttJieberljergefleUt  ifl.  22.  S^  cje^t  x\)n  gar  md)t^  an,  ob  mx 
ba^  ^au^  faufen  oter  ni^t.  23.  S^  giebt  mele  ungebilbetc 
€eute  in  3)eut|*d^lanb,  befonber^  auf  bem  ?anbe,  bie  an  (Spufen 
unb  ©cfpenfter  glauben.  24.  D^ne  SBeitere^  ju  fagen,  ging  er 
feinen  2Beg.  25.  ^err  S3ern|lein  leljrt  mic^  bie  Tln^xf  unb  ba^ 
Beic^nen.  26.  SBifTcn  'Bk  mann  $err  53ei)r  »on  SBeimar  mt^ 
berfommen  mirb?  27. 9iein,  id^  i)ahc  i^n  ^n?ar  barnac^  gefragt, 
aber  er  fonnte  e^  mir  ni^t  genau  fagen.  28.  (Sr  nennt  i()n 
feinen  greunb,  unb  bod^  l)at  er  i^n  in  biefer  unfreunblic^en  2Beifc 
be^anbelt.  29. 2)ie  Sinraol^ner^af)!  be^  ^onigreid^e^  $rcu§cn  be^ 
Iciuft  ftc^  auf  etttja  24,000,000.  30.  ^^iac^  ber  SSerbannung  be^ 
^aifere  S'^apoleon  \)at  ^Jreufen  eincn  me()r  al^  fiinf^ig  ^a\)Xt 
bauernben  grieben  genoffen.  31.  Dur^  ben  grieben^t?ertrag  ^u 
9)ari^,  tm  3af)re  1815,  l)at  ^reufen  bie  3^^ein^5)ro»injen  bcfcm^ 
men.  32.  S3om  5Infang  be^  2Jionate  5lugufl  U^  i^um  Snbe  be^ 
2)?onat^  September  (or  »on  5lnfang  5lugu|l  bi^  Snbe  Septem< 
ber)  ^aben  wir  fe^r  trodene^  SBetter  ge()abt.  33.  Der  (B6^nf)^ 
mac^ergefetl  i|l  mit  ^mi  5>aar  S^u^en  unb  brei  ^aar  Stiefein 
nad^  ber  Stabt  gegangen.  34.  SJiit  bem  beflen  SBiUen  fonnten 
bie  Stiller  fo  lange  ?eftionen  ni^t  lernen.  35.  Der  97ame  ber 
Stabt  $otebam  ifl  flatsifc^en  Urfprung^  unb  bebeutct  „unter  ben 
Si6en."  36.  3)ie  3Berra  unb  gulba  er()alten  nac^  i^xtx  SSereini^ 
gung  ben  S^^amen  Scfer. 


156  ^  AGREEMENT   OP  VERB. 

Grammatical. 

1.  For  the  chief  rules  with  reference  to  the  agree, 
liient  of  the  subject  with  the  verb  in  number  and  per- 
son, see  §  115  and  §  175. 

Rem.  ] .  The  use  of  a  plural  verb  with  courtly  titles  in  the  singular  numbef 
ig  customary  in  official  documents  and  in  direct  address ;  but  in  speaking  of 
the  persons  having  these  titles,  it  is  common  to  put  the  verb  in  the  singular 
number : 

3ft  (Seine  (S^cettenj  ju  ^aufe  ?        Is  his  Excellency  at  home? 

2.  The  third  person  singular  of  the  verb  geben  {to  give) 
is  frequently  employed  impersonally  in  the  signification 
of  there  is,  there  was,  etc. : 

(S8  gtebt  Scute,  bic  an  ©ef^enjler    There  are  people  that  believe  in 
glanben,  ghosts. 

3.  For  the  use  oi  Dimidiative  I^umeralsy  see  §  103,  2. 

4.  For  the  chief  rules  of  Ajpjposition^  see  §  85. 

B.em.  1 .  If  one  of  two  nouns  in  apposition  is  a  proper  name,  the  proper 
name  is  not  inflected : 

2)ie    ©renjen    beS    ^5ntgret(^8    The  boundaries  of  the  kingdom  of 

^rcu^en,  Prussia. 

S)te  35erbannnng  be8  ^aifcrS  9Ja^    The  banishment  of  the  Emperor  Na- 
))okon,  poleon. 

(but)gia(^  bem  Xobe  Sarl§  be§  ®ro^en,    After  the  death  of  Charlemagne. 
"  9^a(^  2BiI^ctm  bem  25terten,  After  William  the  Fourth. 

Rem.  2.  The  name  of  the  month  is  not  inflected  when  the  word  9)70U0l 
(month)  precedes  the  name  of  the  month  : 

%m  ^nfang  be§  2JZonat8  2l)5rit    At  the  beginning  of  the  month  of 
(or  am  3lnfang  Sl^ril^),  April  (or  at  the  beginning  ofApril). 

Rem.  3.  The  non-inflection  of  nouns  indicating  weight,  measure,  and  num- 
ber (see  Lesson  X  VI. ,  2),  when  they  are  of  the  masculine  or  neuter  gender 
is  explained  by  some  German  grammarians  by  considering  them  as  cardinal 
numbers ;  the  case  is  sometimes  indicated  by  the  limited  noun : 
WxX  (jtDct  S5u^enb)  (Stern,  With  two  dozen  eggs. 

SDJit  (brei  ^aar)  ®^u^en,  With  three  pairs  of  shoes. 

Ohs.  The  limited  noun  is  itself,  however,  also  more  usually  not  inflected  : 
9Ktt  jtuet  2)ut3enb  (Sier,  With  two  dozen  eggs. 

Wxi  stDci  ^aar  ©tiefet,  With  two  pairs  of  boots. 

3tuger  etnem  Sru.q  SBajf er  toiinf^t    He  wishes  nothing  except  a  pitcher 
et  ni^tg,  ot  water. 


AGREEMENT   OP   VERB.  157 

f).  The  article  is  usually  used  before  names  of  moun* 
tains  (see  §  61,  7) : 

2)cr  ^arj ;  ber  25cfu\5 ;  bcr  SQtda,    The  Hartz ;  Vesuvius ;  Hecla. 
6.  The  following  nouns  formerly  ended  in  -tn  ;   the 
*n  of  the  nominative  is  now  usually  dropped  : 
$cr  grtebe,  peace.  bcr  §aufe,  heap,      ber  ©ante,  seed. 

„    guntc,  spark.  „  tor^fc,  carp.        „  @d}abe,  damage. 

„   Oebante,  thought.         „  'iflaxnt,  name.       „  SBille,  will. 
,t    @Iaube,  belief,  faith. 
SBci^renb  beS  gvicbeii^,  During  the  peace.    - 

Exercise  90. 
1.  William  and  his  father  will  soon  go  to  Stuttgart 
2.  There  are  in  this  album  many  beautiful  photographs 
of  the  most  important  cathedrals  and  other  public 
buildings  in  Germany.  3.  Those  are  all  photographs  of 
paintings  in  the  museums  (§  77)  of  Berlin  and  Dresden 
4.  My  brother  and  I  went  to  Potsdam  yesterday.  5.  You 
and  youi:  brother  are  invited  by  (»on)  Mr.  Niemeyer  to 
go  with  him  to-morrow  to  (um — ^u)  see  the  collection 
of  German  and  Scandinavian  antiquities  which  Count 
von  Eitelberg  has  just  brought  from  Pomerania  to  Ber- 
lin. 6.  The  hot  weather  which  we  had  last  year  lasted 
almost  a  month.  7.  Weber's  History  of  the  World 
(SBeltgefcbt^te)  costs  two  thalers  and  a  half  a  volume, 
unbound  ;  such  binding  as  this  will  cost  a  thaler  and 
a  half  a  volume  ;  that  binding  is  very  strong  and  good  ; 
it  costs  only  half  a  thaler  a  volume.  8.  The  express- 
train  from  Frankfort -on -the -Oder  arrives  at  eight 
o'clock  in  the  morning  ;  the  freight-train  1  eaves  at  four 
in  the  afternoon.  9.  The  concert  will  take  place  at 
eight  o'clock  this  evening  (§  2S4:,I^emA).  10.  We  went 
up  the  mountain  very  slowly,  but  we  came  down  the 
mountain  very  fast.  11.  We  are  very  glad  (§  177,  3)  to 
hear  that  his  health  has  almost  entirely  been  restored 
(that  his  health  itself  almost  entirely  restored  has). 
12.  It  surprises  me  to  hear  that  he  has  not  yet  arrived 


158      VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  GENITIVE  CASE. 

13.  There  are  many  beautiful  houses  in  the  neighbor- 
hood of  the  Thiergarten.  14.  It  is  none  of  his  business 
(it  does  not  concern  him  at  all)  whether  we  sell  the 
house  or  not.  15.  Mr.  Kuhn  taught  my  sister  music, 
when  we  were  in  Berlin.  16.  Soon  after  the  death  of 
Alexander  the  Great,  the  Greek  empire  fell  into  pieces 
(^U  (S5runbe  o^t^m).  17.  We  will  remain  in  Munich  from 
the  beginning  of  the  month  of  November  till  toward 
the  end  of  the  month  of  March  (or  from  the  beginning 
of  November  till  toward  the  end  of  March).  18.  The 
name  of  the  city  of  Cologne  is  of  Latin  origin  ;  it  sig- 
nified originally  "  Colony."  19.  Do  you  know  the  name 
of  that  river  (miffen  ©ie  ten  ^amtn  jene^  gluffe^,  or  tt)iffen 
®ie  mt  iener  gluf  ^d^i)  ?    20.  That  is  the  Havel. 


LESSON  XL VI. 

VERBS   GOVERNING   THE    GENITIVE   CASE. 

©nunbneunjigfte  ^ufgabc* 

1.  3)a6  SSeiB  Beborf  in  ^riegeSniJt^en  beg  33efc^ii^er§  (®(^.).  2.  ®r  Be* 
burfte  je^t  me^r  al«  jemats  beS  guten  SStEenS  ber  ©taaten  (@c^.).  3.  (gin 
(£{;arlatan  bebarf  nur  9Ju^m  ju  ^aben.  4.  2Ber  ber  ©efa^r  f^ottet,  gebenft 
t^rer ;  ber  tDa\)xt  §elb  aber  bentt  gar  nic^t  an  bie  ©efa^r.  5.  Qi)Xix  S)ienjic 
!ann  id}  entrat^en  (®cl;.).  6.  2lu^  bag  gtiicflid;fte  Xalent  fann  ber  @inn)ir* 
!ung  einer  guten  ©c^ule  nid;t  entrat^en  (©.)♦  7.  5llg  t»ir  auf  baS  ©d^iff 
famen,  fanben  trir,  bag  bie  ®(^iffgleute  auc^  ber  ni5t^ig[ten  Sebengmittel  erman* 
gelten.  8.  S^  f^otte  feiner  S)ro^ung  ;  fie  fc^recft  mic^  gar  nid^t,  tceil  id;  mid^ 
tm  9fJot^fatl  gu  ijcrt^eibigen  xod^.  9.  @ie  f^otten  meiner,  ^rinj  (®c!^.).  10. 
eg  finb  nic^t  atte  frei,  bie  itjrer  ^etten  f^otten.  11.  @in  f(i>ti?an!enbeg  ©ebciube 
braud^t  beg  (Srbbebcng  ni^t,  urn  itber  ben  ^aufen  ju  fatten  (®(^.).  12.  @ie 
!5nnen  bag  ^ud}  mitne^men ;  ic^  brau^e  eg  jetjt  nic^t.  13.  S)er  §abfii(^tige 
a6)td  iebeg  SBort^eitg  (b.  ^.,  ber  ^abfiic^tige  ^at  Std^t  auf  jeben  SSort^eit).  14. 
(Sinen  iiJiigner  !ann  man  nid^t  ac^ten  (b.  ^.,  nic^t  e^ren).  15.  ^err  @d)norr  ifl 
fo  grogmiit^ig,  bag  er  biefcr  SBeleibigung  bergeffen  h)irb  (b.  ^.,  bog  er  biefc  S3e* 
leibigung  mit  5lbfid;t  aug  bem  ©ebcic^tnig  entfernen  n)irb).  16.  ^6)  ^abt  bie 
Sa^rcgga^I  gang  bergeffen  (b.  ^.,  o^ne  2lbfi(^t  aug  bem  ©ebSc^tnig  toertoren). 
17.  Sltte  la^en  ilber  feine  Sl^orbeit.  18.  S)eg  @uten,  tt)ag  man  ^at,  fottte  man 
flcnicgen ;  unb  man  fottte  beffen  cntbe^ren  lernen,  ttjcffen  man  ntc^t  bebarf 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  GENITIVE  CASE.      159 

(more  usually  with  accusative  cases,  thus :  2)aS  @utc,  tnaS  man  ^at,  follte 
man  gcnie^en ;  hod}  man  foUte  baS  cntbe^ren  lenien,  tt)aS  man  nic^t  bebarf). 
19.  3c^  bin  ber  aJlcinung,  ba§  trir  tor  jc^n  U\)x  bcS  ?lbenbs  nicf^t  antommcn 
tDcrbcn  (or  mciner  2J?einung  nac^  n^erben  tt^ir  not  jc^n  U^r  bc6  ?lbenb6  nid;t 
anfommcn).  20.  33ci  alien  bicjcn  Unfdtten  ift  cr  ganj  guteS  3JJut^c«  (or  gutcn 
aJiutM,  see  §  89,  Rem.  1).  21.  ^c^  War  SSittenS  (or  trf^  ^atte  ebcn  bie  Slbfid^t) 
einen  33rief  an  i^n  ju  fd;rciben,  alg  er  ganj  uncrtoartet  in  mein  3tmmcr  ^ercin^ 
fam.  22.  ©elig,  bie  rcineS  ^erjenS  (§  78,  Rem.  1)  finb,  benn  fie  ttjcrben  @ott 
fd;aaen  (Matt.  5,  8).  23.  ^rau  SSiebemann  ift  eines  ^U>^lid;cn  2;obeS  geftor' 
ben.  24.  3ft  fie  cineS  natilrlid^en  !i;obeS  geftorben  ?  25.  yidn,  fic  ijl  am  ge* 
brod^enen  ^eqcn  gcjlorben,  tt>eil  i^rc  jn^ei  <So^ne  eine  2Korbt^at  beriibt  ^aben 
unb  bafiir  jum  Xobe  tserurt^eilt  fmb.  26.  2)er  arme  SBettlcr  ijl  beS  §unger8 
(or  i)or  hunger  [§  252,  Rem.  2],  or  am  hunger)  gcflorben.  27.  j£)er  ^o6)* 
altar  jianb  an  ber  ©teUc,  too  Gilbert  toon  Oeftreit^  be8  2:obc«  terblic^.  28.  SSa« 
fiir  2anb8leute  fmb  bie  taufleute  ?  29.  (Einer  ijl  ctn  S)CHtfd^er,  ber  Slnberc  ijl 
cin  .^oUdnber. 

Grammatical. 

1.  For  the  chief  rules  relating  to  the  government  ol 
the  Genitive  Case  of  substantives  by  verbs,  see  §  178. 

Rem.  1.  Some  of  the  reflexive  verbs  given  in  §  178,  3,  may  also  have  the 
reflexive  pronoun  in  the  dative  case,  and  be  followed  by  the  complementary 
object  in  the  accusative  instead  of  in  the  genitive  case : 

3d;  majje  mtt^  bcffcn  md;t  an,  )      ,  ,       ^  *    *v  * 

y  \  ;-4,  v««fi»^;»  f.«^  «;^f  ««   c      1  <5o  "ot  presume  to  that, 
(or)  id;  mane  mir  Da&  nicpt  an,  >  ^ 

Hem.  2.  The  preposition  that  is  to  follow  the  verb  (see  §  178,  3,  Rem.)  will 

oftba  depend  upon  the  shade  of  meaning  given  to  the  verb : 

3d;  frcue  mid;  auf  feinen  33cfud),     I  am  glad  of  his  visit. 

6r  frcut  fic^  iibct  ben  @d;abcn    He  rejoices  over  the  misfortune  of 

SInberer,  others. 

2.  Many  compound  nouns,  having  ^mantt  for  the  last 
component,  have  two  forms  in  the  plural  (^manner  and 
^leutc) : 

2)er  ^aufmann,  merchant ;         pi  btc  ^aufm^nner,  or  bie  ^anflente. 
$Rcic^c  ftauf*  unb  ^anbelSmanner    Rich  merchants  and  traders. 

(see  §  50,  2). 
3»ei  ^iiirnbcrger  ^anfleute,  Two  Nuremberg  merchants. 

Rem.  1 .  Sometimes  the  plural  ending  4CUte  refers  to  a  class  of  persons, 
the  prefix  ha^-ing  an  adjective  signification  (see  Lesson  XXX  VI.,  1 ,  Rem.  1) : 
2)er  (S^cmann,  husband,  married  man ;  pi.  bie  S^cmanner,  married  men. 
S)ie  e^cfrau,  wife,  married  woman ;  pL  bie  e^efraucn,  married  women, 
2)ie  S^eleute  ipL),  married  people. 


160  VERBS   GOVERNING  THE    GENITIVE   CASE. 

Rem.  2.  With  some  nouns  the  ending  sJtt5nntt  is  rarely  or  never  used,  but 
the  ending  slCUtt  is  the  usual  plural  termination,  as  : 
2)Cr  (Sbelmann,  nobleman ;  pi.  bic  (Sbelleute,  the  nobility. 

„   ^au))tmann,  captain ;  "  tie  §au|)tleute,  captains. 

M   ^aufniann,  merchant ;  "  bte  ^aufleute,  merchants. 

r;   Sanbmann,  countryman,  farmer ;    *'  bie  Sanbleute,  country  people. 

,;    SanbSmann, (fellow) countryman;  **  bteSanbSlcute, (fellow) countrj'men 

„    3ittlJ^2l^ttt^l^"r  carpenter ;  "  bie  3iinin^l^'^Sllte,  carpenters. 

Zweiundneunzigste  Aufgabe. 

1.  Man  hat  den  General  von  Fischel  des  Hochverraths  angeklagt.  2.  In 
der  letzten  Nacht  ist  ein  Dieb  durch  das  Fenster  in  Herm  Roths  Zimmer  ge- 
drungen  und  hat  ihn  seiner  goldenen  Uhr  und  seines  Portemonnaies  (mit 
460  Thalern  und  werthvollen  Papieren  darin)  beraubt.  3.  Herr  Klein  hat 
seinen  Kutscher  des  Diebstahls  beschuldigt.  4.  Man  hat  den  Polizeidiener 
wegen  oft  wiederholter  Betrunkenheit  seines  Amtes  entlassen.  5.  Nichts 
kann  ihn  seines  Eides  entbinden  {or  nichts  kann  ihn  von  seinem  Eide  ent- 
binden).  6.  Ich  versichere  Sie  meiner  Hochachtung  und  Freundschaft  (or 
ich  versichere  Ihnen  meine  Hochachtung  und  Freundschaft).  7.  Ich  bin  sei- 
ner Unschuld  iiberzeugt  (riiore  usual  at  present — ich  bin  von  seiner  Unschuld 
iiberzeugt).  8.  Man  hat  den  Angeklagten  der  Theilnahme  am  Morde  frei- 
gesprochen  (or  von  der  Theilnahme,  etc.).  9.  Welcher  Siinde  zeiht  dich  dein 
Gewissen?  (Sch.)  10.  Die  Richter  haben  den  Verbrecher  des  Landes  ver- 
wiesen.  11.  Der  Bischof  hat  den  Priester  seines  Amtes  entsetzt,  12.  Der 
Gerechte  erbarmt  sich  seines  Viehes.  13.  Wir  konnten  uns  kaum  des  La- 
chens  enthalten.  14.  Was  ist  der  Mensch,  dass  Du  sein  gedenkest  und  das 
Menschenkind,  dass  Du  Dich  sein  (§  107,  Rem.  1)  so  annimmst  {Psalm  viii,  4). 
15.  Ich  bediente  mich  der  Gelegenheit,  die  zwei  neuen  Gemalde  von  Kaulbach 
zu  sehen.  16.  Deiner  heiligen  Zeichen,  o  Wahrheit,  hat  der  Betrug  sich  an- 
gemasst  (Sch.).  17.  Wahrend  der  letzten  zwei  Jahre  hat  Wilhelm  Zahn  sich 
der  Rechtswissenschaft  beflissen  (d.  h.  das  Recht  studirt).  18.  Ich  bin  nicht 
der  Archaologie  beflissen  (d.  h.  ich  studire  sie  nicht).  19,  Die  Armee  hat 
sich  nach  einem  langen  blutigen  Kampfe  der  Festung  bemachtigt.  20.  Ein 
tiefer  Schmerz  bemachtigte  sich  meines  Herzens.  21.  Ich  kann  mich  seines 
Namens  nicht  entsinnen  (or  ich  kann  mich  nicht  auf  seinen  Namen  besinnen). 
22.  Ihre  Majestat  besinnen  sich  vielleicht  noch  des  Vorfalls  (Sch.).  23.  Ich 
hoffe  mich  lange  seiner  Bekanntschaft  zu  erfreuen.  24.  Wir  erinnern  uns 
seiner  recht  gut  {or  wir  erinnern  uns  an  ihn  recht  gut).  25.  Jetzt  erinnere 
ich  mich  ganz  genau  der  Umstande.  26.  Ich  erinnere  mich,  dass  ich  ihn 
dort  gesehen  babe  (or  ihn  dort  gesehen  zu  haben).  27.  Du  darfst  dich  deiner 
Wahl  (or  iiber  deine  Wahl)  nicht  schamen.     28.  Er  trostet  sich  des  Verluetew 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE  CASE.       161 

seiner  Mutter  (or  uber  den  Verlust  seiner  Matter).  29.  Wie  kann  ein  Mensch 
sich  einer  solchen  Schandthat  riihmen  (or  iiber  eine  solche  Schandthat  riih- 
men)  ?  30.  Ich  riihine  mich,  ihn  meinen  Freund  nennen  zu  diirfen.  31.  Ich 
freue  mich  auf  seinen  Besuch.  32.  Man  soil  sich  nicht  Uber  den  Schaden 
Anderer  freuen.  33.  Ich  schame  mich  wegen  meiner  Nachlassigkeit  (oi'  dsma 
ich  so  nachliissig  gewesen  bin,  or  so  nachlassig  gewesen  zu  sein). 


LESSON  XLVII. 

TEBBS    GOVERNING    THE    DATIVE    CASE. 

Dreiundneunzigste  Aufgabe. 

1.  Ich  danke  Ihnen  herzlichst  fiir  das  Buch,  welc!ies  Sie  mir  vorgestem 
geschickt  haben.  2.  Man  kann  nicht  zweien  (§  101,  ^evi.  1)  Herren  dienen. 
3.  Ich  habe  der  hispanischen  Monarchie  gedient,  und  der  Republik  Venedig, 
und  dem  Konigreich  Napoli  (Sch.),  4.  Diese  Zeitworter  folgen  in  ihrer  An- 
wendung  dem  Paradigma.  5.  Diese  Medizin  hat  ihm  in  seiner  Krankheit 
nicht  viel  geholfen.  6.  Der  Knabe  hat  mir  iiber  den  Strom  geholfen.  7.  Es 
mangelte  ihm  nicht  an  Ausdauer,  sondern  es  mangelte  ihm  an  Gesimdheit 
nnd  Kraft.  8.  Als  wir  der  Stadt  naheten  (or  als  wir  uns  der  Stadt  naherten), 
fing  es  plotzlich  an  zu  regnen.  9.  Dieser  Kock  passt  Ihnen  sehr  gut.  10. 
Wie  schmeckt  Ihnen  dieser  Schweizer  Kiise?  1 1.  Die  Su])pe  schmeckt  nach 
Kauch.  12.  Seine  Art  und  Weise  den  Gegenstand  zu  behandeln  scheint  mir 
ganz  meisterhaft.  13.  Man  kann  ihm  tranen  ;  er  ist  treuherzig.  14.  Man 
Sicht  vergebens  diesem  Uebelstande  abzuhelfen,  so  lange  die  Quelle  des  Uebels 
/licht  verstopft  ist.  15.  Seme  Aehnlichkeit  mit  seinem  Briader  fiel  mir  sehr 
auf.  16.  Das  ist  ein  sehr  auffallendes  Gleichniss.  17.  Ich  bin  Ihrem  Brudet 
heute  Morgen  auf  der  Strasse  begegnet.  1 8.  Wir  stimmten  ihnen  bei.  19. 
Der  Dieb  ist  dem  Polizeidiener  entflohen,  ehe  man  ihn  ins  Gef  angniss  brin- 
gen  konnte.  20.  Dem  Tode  kann  man  nicht  entgehen.  21.  Diese  Insekten 
Bind  so  klein,  dass  sie  dem  blossen  Auge  entgehen.  22.  Die  Unsrigen  gingen 
dem  Feinde  muthig  entgegen.  23.  Oesterreich  schien  seinem  Zerfall  entge- 
genzugehen.  24.  Er  wird  Ihnen  auf  dem  halben  Wege  entgegenkommen. 
25.  Falsch  ist  der  Inhalt,  wenn  er  der  Wirklichkeit  widerspricht ;  wahr, 
wenn  er  ihr  entspricht.  26.  Das  erste  Haus  hat  uns  sehr  gefallen,  aber  das 
zweite  Haus  gefallt  uns  gar  nicht.  27.  Man  soli  Gott  mehr  als  dem  Men- 
schen  gehorchen.  28.  Es  ist  ihm  endlich  gelungen,  seinen  vortrefflichen  Plan 
durchzufuhren.  29.  Es  gelang  ihnen  nur  einen  kleinen  Theil  der  Hauser  in 
dieser  Strasse  vor  den  Flammen  zu  retten.  30.  Der  Affe  ahmt  dem  Men- 
schen  nach.  31.  Der  Landschaftsmaler  ahmt  die  Natur  nach.  32.  Dieser 
Maler  eifert  vergebens  den  grossen  Kiinstlem  des  Mittelalters  nach ;  aber  er 
steht  wirklich  auch  den  Kunstlern  zweiten  Ilanges  unseres  Zeitalters  bei 
weitem  nach.  33.  Dieses  Wort  kommt  schon  in  der  gothischen  Sprache  vor. 
34.  Das  ist  dir  gewiss  im  Traume  vorgekommen.  35.  Das  kommt  mir  sehr 
komisch  vor  (d.  h.  das  scheint  mir  sehr  komisch). 


162       VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE  CASE. 

Grammatical. 

1.  For  the  chief  rules  with  reference  to  the  govern- 
ment of  the  Dative  Case  by  verbs,  see  §  179. 

Rem.  In  some  cases,  verbs  that  are  transitive  in  English  are  rendered  into 
German  by  intransitive  verbs ;  by  reason  of  this,  the  direct  object  of  some  En- 
glish verbs  is  made  the  indirect  object  of  corresponding  German  verbs,  as :      ' 

3c^  banfe  3^nen,  I  thank  you  (or  I  am  thankful  to  you). 

^ann  id;  ^f^nen  btenen?     Can  I  serve  you  (or  he  serviceable  to  you)  ? 

(Sr  folgt  feincm  33ruber,      He  follows  (or  is  a  follower  to)  his  brother. 

(Sr  j)alf  mir,  He  helped  me  (or  was  of  help  to  me). 

(S^  fc^abet  i^m,  It  injures  him  (or  is  injurious  to  him). 

2.  Some  personal  verbs  in  English  are  rendered  into 

German  by  impersonal  verbs : 

@8  tt)trb  i^m  ntd^t  geltngcn,  He  will  not  succeed  in  it. 

(g^  mangeit  i^m  an  9^td;t8,  He  lacks  for  nothing, 

©c^mecft  eg  3^nen?  Do  you  like  (the  taste  of)  ii? 

3.  Upon  a  more  intimate  knowledge  of  the  German 
language,  it  will  be  found  that  some  verbs  are  used  in 
several  constructions,  according  to  the  different  shades 
of  meaning  that  may  be  given  to  the  same  verb. 

Rem.  1.  Various  constructions  with  the  same  verb  from  the  different  dia- 
lects of  Germany  (§  23)  have  from  time  to  time  risen  up  into  the  language 
of  literature  (§  86).  Many  constructions,  that  were  formerly  in  common 
use,  have  now  become  antiquated  (§11  and  §  14). 

Rem.  2.  The  various  constructions  of  some  verbs  may  be  illustrated  by  the 
examples  of  the  use  of  the  verb  lO^nCll,  to  reward^  that  are  given  in  senten- 
ces 7,  8,  9,  and  10,  in  Exercise  94. 

4.  There  are  several  examples  in  the  German  lan- 
guage of  two  nouns  of  analogous  significations  being 
followed  by  a  verb  in  the  singular  number,  as: 

2)er  ^anbcl  unb  SSerlC^r  Jt»tf c^en    The  traffic  between  Berlin  and  Ham- 
S3erlin  unb  Hamburg  ift  je^r       burg  is  very  active. 

©eine  %xi  linb  S95ctf C  ben  @cgen*  His  manner  of  treating  the  subject 
ftanb  \u  ^e^anbeln,  ift  %u  lofecn,        is  to  be  praised. 

(3;(!^  \yx%t  e§  an  jOtt  Unb  ©tCttC  I  have  seen  it  in  the  place  itself.) 
Sefe&en, 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE  CASE.      163 

Vierundneunzigste  Aufgabe. 

1.  Wilhelm  hat  mir  den  Brief  gebracht.  2.  Frau  Reichenbach  hat  ihrer 
Nichte  Schillers  Gedichte  als  Weihnachts-Geschenk  gegehen.  3.  Unser  lan- 
(jer  Aufenthalt  in  der  Schweiz  hat  uns  keine  Zeit  gelassen^  um  nach  Italien 
zu  gehen.  4.  Die  Ilandwerker  iiefern  selten  die  Arbeit  zur  versprochenen 
Zeit.  5.  ZH'e  russische  Armee  hat  dem  Feinde  cine  Schlacht  geliefert.  6. 
Das  Werk  erscheint  in  monatlichen  Lieferungen  von  je  zehn  Bogen.  7.  Der 
Acker  lohnt  dem  iMndmann  seinen  Fleiss  init  reichem  Segen.  8.  In  Amerika 
lohnt  (bezahlt)  man  die  Arbeit  besser  als  in  Deutschland.  9.  Das  lohnt  sich 
nivMfur  meine  Miihe.  10.  £s  lohnt  sich  der  Muhe  nicht,  dass  man  davon  redet. 
11.  Mein  Freund  meldet  mir  in  seinem  Brief  die  Ankunft  meines  Bruders 
in  Wien.  1 2.  Dieser  Unfall  hat  ihm  alle  Hoffnung  genommen.  13.  Der  Ta- 
schendieb  hat  mir  das  Portemonnaie  genommen.  14.  Der  Arzt  nahm  ihm  die 
Binde  von  den  Augen.  15.  Der  Hausknecht  hat  Herrn  Lippard  eine  goldene 
Uhr  und  300  Thaler  gestohlen.  16.  Herr  Siegel  hat  sein  letztes  Werk  iiber 
die  Geschichte  der  Inset  Beroland  seinem  Grossvater  gewidmet.  17.  Der 
Brief  irdger  hat  mir  den  Brief  um  10  Uhr  abgegeben.  18.  Die  Schrift  lehrt 
unsy  dem,  der  uns  auf  die  rechte  Wange  einen  Streich  giebt,  auch  die  andere 
darzubieten ;  wahrend  wir  gewohnlich  ihm  Gegenschlage  anbieten,  und,  wenn 
ufir  stark  genug  dazu  sind,  auch  verabreichen.  19.  Man  hat  ihm  den  Dolch 
entrissen.  20.  Ich  Juhle  mich  sehr  krank ;  mir  schwindelt.  21.  Fs  ahnt 
mir,  dass  wir  uns  nie  wieder  sehen  werden.  22.  Es  ist  mir  heute  nicht  wohl; 
ich  habe  ein  heftiges  Kopfweh.  23.  Wie  geht  es  Ihnen  hier  in  Berlin  ?  24. 
Wie  sitzt  mir  dieser  Rock  ?  25.  Es  thut  mir  sehr  leid,  dass  sie  nicht  longer  in 
Berlin  bleiben  konnen.  26.  Ilei'r  Prell  hat  seinen  Bruder  in  der  Gemiania 
Lebens-Versicherungs-Gesellschaft  (§  50,  Rein.  3)  versichert,  27.  Ich  ver- 
sichere  Ihnen  meine  Hochachtung. 


LESSON  XL VIII. 

THE    PASSIVE   VOICE. 

tJiinfunbncunjtgftc  ^ufgak* 

L  Da^  SBetter  mirt)  fe^r  I)cig.  2.  3)aiJ  Setter  wurbe  fc^r 
^eif.  3.  Da^  SBctter  ift  fe()r  ^ct§  geroorben.  4.  I)a^  Setter 
trirt)  ()eig  werben.  5.  Da^  §au^  anrb  je^t  gebaut.  6.  X){e 
53uc^ev  werben  gebrudft.  7.  Die  53uc^er  murben  gebrudft,  M 
tt)ir  in  ber  58ud^brucferei  n?aren.  8.  3e^t  finb  bie  33iid^er  alle 
gcbrudft.  9.  §ier  mirb  beutfd^  gefproc^en.  10.  Sine  prac^t^ 
»oUe  neue  ^ir^e  tt?irb  je^t  in  ©(mer^borf  gebaut,  IL  2)a^ 
57cue  5)?ufeum  in  33erlin  murbe  im  3^^re  1853  »olIcnbet.    12» 


164  THE   PASSIVE   VOICE. 

3)ie  Unbcrfttat  in  53crlin  wurbe  im  3a^re  1809  gegriinbet.  13. 
X>k  ^u^brudferfunft  ttJurbe  im  14ten  3a!)r^unt)ert  erfunben, 
14.  5llle  faiferlt^en  (Solbaten,  tt)eld)e  bem  pommerfc^en  Sanb»olf 
in  bie  ^dnbe  ftelen,  tt)urben  o!)ne  ^armf)eqtgfeit  ermorbet  15. 
Untev  biefem  S5ortt)anb  wurbe  Mt^  »er^eert  unb  gepliinbert. 
16. 2)te  geftung  ift  mit  ©turm  genommen  tt)orben.  17. 3)er  ©e? 
neral  5)on  3^iegel  ift  be^  ^o6^uxxat^^  angeflagt,  aber  er  ift  »on 
ber  5In!iage  freigefproc^en  worben.  18.  3)ie  S^ac^ric^t  5)on  bem 
Xobe  be^  $errn  53inbemann  ift  feiner  grau  no^  nic^t  mitge^^ 
t^eilt  worben.  19.  SBann  n)irb  ba^  Serf  »oUenbet  ttjerben? 
20.  Da$  2Ber!  mirb  erft  nac^  brei  3a^ren  »ollenbet  ttJerben.  21. 
So^ann  SBolfgang  »on  ®5t^e  wurbe  am  28. 5luguft  1749  gebo^ 
ten.  22. 3oi  (I^riftop^  Srieb. ».  ©chiller  ttJurbe  am  10.  9loijem^ 
ber  1759  geboren.  23.  (So  wirb  jejt  fe^r  mel  gerebet  »on  einem 
neuen  |)anr)e(^s3ertrage  ^n:)ifd^en  bem  5f^orbbeutfd)en  53unb  unb  ben 
S5ereintgten  ^Btaatm.  24.  $ier  n)irb  ni(^t  geraud^t.  25.  2)a^ 
Sf^auc^en  ift  ()ier  nic^t  geftattet.  26.  &  tt)irb  jegt  im  ©aale  gC:? 
fungen.  27.  d^  wtrb  fc^on  gegeffen.  28.  d^  wurbe  i^m  »om 
Slrjte  nic^t  erlaubt,  in^  Bi^^^i^/  ^^  f^iu  33ater  am  Xppbw^  '^^^^ 
nieberlag,  ^inein  ^u  geben.  29.  ^an  erlaubte  i^m  nic^t,  in^ 
3tmmer  ^inein  p  ge^en.  30.  Dtefe^  9ldt^fel  loft  ft^  fel)r  lei^t 
(or  ift  fe^r  leici)t  ^u  lofen).  31.  Da^  mfte^t  fi^.  32.  2Ba^ 
ift  p  t{)un?  33.  2)ae  ifi  nic^t  leic^t  ^u  fagen.  34.  §err  fxt^^ 
ler  fagt,  bag  biefe^  ^pital  im  ijorigen  3a^r^unbert  gegriinbct 
tt)urbe.    35. 3)a^  ^au^  war  gan^  unb  gar  abgebrannt. 

Grammatical. 

1.  For  the  chief  rules  concerning  the  use  of  the  Pas- 
sive Voice,  see  §  134 ;  for  the  paradigm  of  the  Passive 
Voice,  see  §  161. 

Rem.  As  is  indicated  by  the  auxiliary  tDCrbCtt  (to  become),  the  action  is 
considered  as  becoming  accomplished,  that  is,  as  taking  place  at  the  time  al- 
luded to : 

Sa?  §au6  WirS  S*™t,  ^J^'^r' ''  ^'"""^^  l^^';'/  % ''  ^7  *•""*• 

((or)  The  house  becomes  built  (or)  is  built. 

t       r  (Thehouse  was  becoming  built,  i.e.  was  being  built. 


THE   PASSIVE   VOICE.  165 

2.  The  passive  voice  is  much  less  employed  in  Ger- 
man than  it  is  in  English : 

Rem.  1.  When  the  active  agent  is  indefinitely  alluded  to,  the  active  voice 
of  the  verb  (with  in  (111  as  the  nominative)  is  frequently  employed : 
3Jian  jagt ;  man  gtaubt,  It  is  said ;  it  is  believed. 

Rem.  2.  When  the  active  agent  is  not  specified,  the  reflexive  form  of  tho 
verb  is  frequently  employed  instead  of  the  passive  voice : 

!Da8  erflart  fid;  fc(;r  Icid^t,  That  is  very  easily  explained. 

3)a8  t)erftebt  fid;,  That  is  a  matter  of  course. 

Rem.  3,  The  infinitive  of  the  passive  voice  in  English  is  often  translated 
into  German  by  the  infinitive  of  the  active  voice  (§  J  28,  3,  Rem.  2): 
SSag  ift  \}X  t^uu  ?  What  is  to  be  done  ? 

2)a6  i[t  Iciest  ^u  Dcrfte^en,  That  is  easy  to  be  understood. 

3.  The  verbs  that  govern  the  dative  case  (§  179,  1), 
though  intransitive  in  their  nature,  may  still  be  used 
impersonally  in  the  passive  voice : 

©S  tcurbe  i^m  criaubt,  He  was  permitted  (it  was  permitted 

@S  ttJirb  il^m  ni^t  geglaubt,  He  is  not  believed.  [to  him). 

Exercise  96. 
1.  The  book  is  now  being  printed.  2.  The  houses  of 
which  he  spoke  are  not  yet  finished  ;  they  are  now 
being  built.  3.  The  books  which  I  bought  are  not 
bound  ;  they  are  now  being  bound.  4.  The  University 
of  Prague  was  founded  in  1348.  6.  The  corner  stone 
of  the  Cathedral  of  Cologne  was  laid  in  the  year  1248. 
6.  These  poems  have  never  been  translated  into  (tn^) 
English.  7.  French  and  German  are  spoken  here.  8. 
The  fortification  will  probably  be  taken  by  storm.  9. 
America  was  discovered  by  Columbus  in  the  year  1492. 
10.  Mr.  Eberhard's  design  of  the  new  bridge  will  prob- 
ably be  accepted  by  the  city  authorities.  11.  There  is 
no  smoking  here  (or  smoking  is  not  allowed  here).  12. 
They  are  singing  in  the  church.  13.  We  will  not  be 
permitted  to  see  the  engravings  without  permission 
from  the  Director  of  the  Museum.  14.  This  question  is 
very  easy  to  solve.    15.  The  key  has  been  found  {reflex.). 


166  CONSTRUCTION   OF  PREPOSITIONS. 

LESSON  XLIX. 

CONSTEUCTION  OP  PREPOSITION^. 

Stcknunbneuuaigftc  ^ufgaSe* 

1.  Duffelborf  liegt  bie^feit  unb  ^oln  jenfett  be^  fH^tin^.  % 
.&err  ©totlberg  ift  ©efunb^eit^  ^dber  nac^  ©aftein  gegangen. 
3.  9^urnberg  |)at  inner^alb  unb  aufer^alb  ber  2)^auern  mele  ftatt^ 
It^e  ®ebdube.  4.  SBorm^  Itegt  ober^alb  unb  ^ingen  liegt  unter^ 
^alb  ber  33unbe^feftung  2)iain^*  5,  €dng^  be^  S??ttte(r{)em^ 
fte^en  mele  alte  ^urgen*  6.  3Bir  fatten  ben  gan^en  Xag  gejagt 
cntlang  be^  3Balbgebtrge^  (®^-)-  '^^  ^<^ut  friiberer  35ertrdgc 
mac^te  griebric^  ber  ®ro§e  feine  ^Infpritd^e  auf  (Sd^lejten  geltenb. 
8.  Dampff^iffe  werben  je^t  mtttel^  (or  »ermittelft)  etner  ©c^raubc 
bewegt,  9.  SInftatt  ber  ©dnfeftele  bebienen  mx  un^  gegenwdrttg 
meift  ber  (Sta!)lfebern.  10.  %x^%  be^  feinblic^en  ©ef^it^e^ 
ttjugten  ft^  bie  ^roijiantf^iffe  ^a^n  ^u  ber  ©tabt  ^u  mad)en. 
11.  Urn  be^  grteben^  2BilIen  ^at  er  ee  ni^t  get^an.  12.  2)a0 
(Sternbilb  ber  ?eier  fte^t  unfern  (or  unweit)  ber  9)^tldt)ftra§e. 
13.  5llle  ^orper  ftreben  ijermoge  ibrer  ©c^mere  nac^  bem  3}^itte(^ 
punft  ber  (Srbe.  14. 2)urd^  ba^  ©c^erbengerii^t  fonntc  3emanb 
au^  5ltben  »erbannt  n^erben,  unbefc^abet  feine^  SSermcgen^  unb 
feiner  Sf)re.  15.  S^d^renb  meiner  ^ranlbeit  l)at  ^err  ^un0 
mid^  bfter^  befuc^t.  16.  3)ie  gepan^erten  (S^iffe  ftnb,  t^rer 
(Bc^were  tt)egen,  nic^t  rec^t  feetii^tig.  17.  3ufoIge  gemagter 
0pefulationen  ift  fd)on  2)^anc^er  (xv.  ben  35ettelftab  gefommen. 
18.  3)en  neueften  5^ac|ri^ten  pfolge  i(t  ber  Dampfer  no^  nic^t 
angefommen.  19.  ^Ingeft^t^  ber  @efabr  ttJoUte  ber  ^apttdn 
bet  bem  beftigen  ©turm  nic^t  abfegeln.  20.  2)a^  weig  i^  felbjl 
au^  (Srfabrung.  21.  ©r  war  au§er  ftc^  »or  greube  (he  was 
besides  himself  for  joy).  22.  ^innen  im\  3a^ren  wirb  ba^ 
neue  SfJatbb^u^  »ollenbet  n^erben.  23.  2Bir  fubren  fe^r  langfam, 
ttJeil  ber  2Binb  un^  entgegen  war.  24.  3Bir  ftanben  mtt  Xage^^ 
anbrud^  auf.  25.  S^  ge^t  nicbt  immer  na^  unferen  SBiinf^en. 
26.  Der  ^ronprin^  ritt  bem  ^onige  pnd^ft.  27.  ^te  ®tabt 
fab  ben  hunger  nebft  feinem  gan^en  ©efolge  jtd^  nd^ern  (©^.)* 


CONSTRUCTION    OF    PREPOSITIONS.  1G7 

28.  3)a^  6cftiff  fammt  feiner  gan^en  SD^annfc^aft  unb  Sabung 
ttjurt'e  ein  dlauh  t)er  Snellen.  29.  Sffiie  lange  ftnt  (§  132,  2) 
©ic  in  2)eutf^lant)  ?  30.  2Bir  fmt)  feit  bem  crften  ^^pril  in 
Deutfc^lanb.  31.  2Bill)eIm  dlotl)  ijl  flein  »on  (S5eftalt.  32. 
$eutc  ^abe  id^  ba^  2?^ufeum  gum  erften  3i)^al  befuc^t.  33. 3Ba^ 
er  fagt  ift  ber  gefunben  35ernunft  guwiber. 

Grammatical. 
1.  The  chief  rules  governing  the  use  of  Prepositions 
are  given  in  §  197-§  258. 

^(^tunbncunjigftc  ^ufgak* 

1.  Von  Ostern  bis  Pfingsten  sind  sieben  Wochen.  2. 
Wir  werden  heute  bis  Prag  reisen.  3.  Ich  halte  Herrn 
Roth  fur  einen  Mann  von  Ehre.  4.  Es  waren  gegen 
fdnfhundert  Personen  in  der  Versammlung.  5.  Es  wa- 
ren sechszig  Personen  an  Bord,  ohne  die  Kinder.  6. 
Die  Sonne  geht  jetzt  um  sechs  Uhr  auf.  7.  Hier  ist  ein 
Gedicht  an  den  Mond.  8.  Herr  Gellert  arbeitet  jetzt 
an  einer  Geschichte  seiner  Vaterstadt.  9.  Es  waren  an 
fiinfhundert  Menschen  versammelt.  10.  Ich  erkannte 
ihn  an  der  Stimme.  11.  Ist  Herr  Cohn  zu  Hause?  12. 
Nein,  er  ist  heute  auf  die  Jagd  gegangen.  13.  Marie 
sitzt  neben  ihrer  Schwester.  14.  Hedwig  hatte  sich 
neben  ihre  Cousine  gesetzt.  15.  Heute  iiber  vierzehn 
Tage  werden  wir  nach  Dresden  abreisen.  16.  Der 
Brief  ist  iiber  Triest  und  Wien  gekommen.  17.  Unter 
solchen  Bedingungen  kann  ich  natiirlich  das  Amt  nicht 
annehmen.  18.  Sie  weinte  vor  Freude.  19.  Das  Darapf- 
schifF  wird  wahrscheinlich  heute  Abend  zwischen  acht 
und  neun  Uhr  ankommen.  (Here  may  be  translated 
the  verses  of  poetry  found  under  §  197,  i?^m.  2  ;  §  199, 
J^em.;  §  2m, Rem,;  §  235,  Ohs.;  §  243,  Obs,;  and  §  253, 
Ohs.) 


168  ADVERBS. — CONJUNCTIONS. 

LESSON  L. 

ADVERBS. — CONJUNCTIONS. — OKDEE   OP   WOED8. 

Wcutt»nbneiin3tgftc  ^ufgak* 

1.  SDie  ?crc^c  ftngt  fd^on  (§  181,  i).  2.  2)er  3$crfa[fer  jcneS  SBer!eS  ^at  ben 
©egenftanb  fet>r  tciffenjc^aftlic^  Be^anbelt  3.  2)er  ^anarienijoget  fingt  tiel 
fd^ouer  (§  190)  al8  bte  Serene.  4.  3ii  biefem  SBorterBud^  ift  bie  et^motogtc 
n)t[feuf(^aftlt(l;er  be^anbelt  alg  in  ienem.  5.  Unter  (§  257,  Rem.  3)  alien  ®ing* 
togein  ftngt  bie  9flad,;tigatt  am  fc^onften.  6.  „W\i  §oc^ac^tnng  bin  x&i  ergc* 
benft  (or  ge^orfamft)  ber  S^rige....  SBil^elm  9tot^."  7.  S)iefe8  SSUrterbud^ 
ifl  torn  3Serfa[fer  toottig  unb  aufg  getciffen^aftefte  umgearbeitet.  8.  5d^  n^eig 
nic^t,  ob  ttJir  ^eute  inS  2Knfeum  ge^en  fonnen,  aber  n?ir  t»erben  tuenigftenS  ben 
SSerfuc^  madden.  9.  2)ie  @tabt  ^at  je^^t  minbefteng  60,000  (Sintco^ner.  10, 
28ann  ift  ^err  Sinbemann  jn  j^re(^en  ?  li.  @eine  ®t)red;ftunbe  ift  ton  neun 
bi§  ge^n  U^r  be8  2JJorgeng.  12. 2Bir  n?oEtcn  ^eute  SBormittag  (§  177,  Rem.  2) 
abreifen,  aber  ungliicflic^erioeife  giebt  cS  !einen  ©c^nettjug  nad;  ©tuttgart  tor 
brei  U^r  be§  ^flac^mittagg.  13.  3Sor  jtootf  ^a^ren  tuaren  toir  in  33erlin ;  ba* 
ttial§  ttjar  bie  9iingmauer  urn  bie  ®tabt  nod;  nic^t  niebergeriffen.  14.  @ic 
tt)urbe  erft  im  3ci^re  1867  niebergeriffen.  15.  SDie  ^atmen  ^aben  geringelte, 
bi^weilen  (or  jntueilen)  jtod^elid^te  ©d^afte  (§  188,  5).  16.  Sir  toerben  bei* 
j^iet§tt)eije  (or  gum  SSeif^iel)  ben  Urf^rung  beg  3^ittt)orte8  „fein"  nad^fe^en 
(§  137).  17.  (Sg  fangt  bereitg  (or  jc^on)  an  gu  regnen.  18.  ^^  §err  tlein 
prucfgefommen?  19.  3ci,  er  ift  fd;on  ijorgeftern  guritrfgefommen  (§  155, 5). 
20.  Soift  SBil^elm?  21.  (Sr  ift  oben  (§  187, 1)  in  feinem  Bimmer,  22.  (ir 
ftilrgte  t^au^tlingg  bie  2;re^^e  ^immter  (§  188, 8).  23.  3*  glaube  fd;toerIic^, 
ba^  xoxc  bie  Beit  baju  ^aben  tcerben.  24.  2)er  S3oben  er^ebt  fi(^  ^ier  ftufen* 
tceife  (§  188),  big  ba§  er  eine  §o^e  i)on  2500  gu^  iiber  ber  2JJeeregfIac^e  er* 
reid;t.  25.  2)ieg  finb  griJ^tent^eilg  beutf^e  33il(^er.  26.  §err  3.  g.  @c^mibt, 
bierfelbft  njo^n^aft,  i)on  etoangetijd^er  (or  fatf)otij^er,  ot  jiibifc^er)  tonfeffion, 
ift  tcegen  eineg  am  20.  5fuU  i^eriibten  S)iebfia^Ig  ftedbrieflic^  berfolgt  tcorben. 
27.  (Sr  ift  bur^aug  (§  188, 9)  bafiir  (§  189, 3,  Rem.  1),  ba^  h?ir  bor  Sagegan* 
bruc^  abreijen  fotten.  28.  Sngtiinftige  (or  ing  ^itnftige,  or  toon  nun  an)  n^erben 
bie  2«ufeen  toier  2:agc  ber  SSo^e  unentgeltlid^  geoffnet  fein.  29.  3Son  ba  an 
ging  bie  5Re^ubli!  SBenebig  na^  unb  nac^  bem  SSerfatt  entgegen.  30.  SortoortS 
(§  189, 2)  mu^t  bu  (ge^en),  benn  riidfmartg  faimft  bu  nic^t  (@d^.).  31.  SSer 
^at  3^nen  gefagt,  ba^  eg  toorgeftern  in  $^ei^)jig  jo  ftarf  geregnet  ^at?  (§  154, 2). 
82.  2)ag  2)am^tf(^iff  toon  Hamburg  ift  erft  ^eute  2«orgen  (§  195, 2)  angefom* 
xmi,  33.  @ic  ttoerben  \a  mit  ung  ing  (Soncert  ge^en.  34.  ®ei  er  nod)  fo  ge* 
le^rt,  boc^  ttoei^  er  nid^t  Meg.  35.  ®ie  ^abcn  ttJo^l  bie  2)e^ef^en  toon  Slmerifa 
in  ber  ^eutigen  B^iti^i^fl  gelefen? 


ORDER    OF   WORDS.  169 

Orammatical. 
1.  For  the  chief  rules  with  reference  to  the  use  of 
Adverbs,  see  §  181-195.     For  the  rules  governing  the 
use  of  Conjunctions,  see  §  259-274.     For  the  order  of 
words  in  sentences,  see  §  276-284. 

Hundertste  Aufgabe. 

1.  Da  (§  260)  er  gestern  nicht  zu  Hause  war,  habe  ich  es  ihm  erst  heute 
Morgen  sagen  konnen.  2.  Wahrend  Sie  den  Brief  schreiben,  werde  ich  ein- 
packen  {or  die  Sachen  in  die  Keisekoffer  einpacken). 

8.  Da  nooh  alles  lag  in  weiter  Feme, 
•  Da  hattest  Du  Entschluss  und  Muth  ; 

Und  jetzt,  da  der  Erfolg  gesichert  ist, 
Da  (§  195, 1, Hem.)  fangst  Du  an  zu  zagen  (Soh.). 

4.  Wie  kann  Herr  Flint  nach  Italien  gehen,  ohne  seine  Frau  mitzunehmen  ? 
(§  264,  Rem.)  o.  Der  Strauss  hat  Flugel,  er  kann  aber  nicht  fliegen  (§  263, 
1,  Rem.).  6.  Von  zwei  bis  sieben  Uhr  wurde  der  Stunn  immer  heftiger 
(§  263,  Rem.).  7.  Wir  hofften,  dass  mit  Sonnenuntergang  die  See  ruhiger 
warden  wUrde  (§  263,  2),  allein  wir  fanden  uns  getauscht  (§  263,  2).  8.  Da- 
gegen  um  10  Uhr  wurde  die  Gefahr  so  gross,  dass  der  Hauptmann  die  Ret- 
tungsboote  mit  Nahrungsmitteln  versehen  Uess.  9.  Er  ist  zu  klug,  als  dass 
er  an  Gespenster  glauben  sollte  (§  266).  10.  Wer  sonst  ist  Schuld,  als  Ihr 
in  Wien?  (Sch.)     11.  Sei  klug  wie  die  Schlangen  und  ohne  Falsch  wie  die 

Tauben. 

12.  Wir  fahren  zu  Berg, 
Wir  kommon  wieder, 
Wenn  der  Kukuk  rufl, 
Wenn  erwachen  die  Lieder  (Soh.). 

13.  Du  Bollst  deinen  Vater  und  deine  Mutter  ehren,  auf  dass  du  lange  auf 
Erden  lebest.  14.  Er  ist  zu  edelraiithig,  um  sich  zu  rachen.  15.  Obgleich 
der  Lehrer  mit  den  Aufgaben  der  Schiiler  im  Ganzen  sehr  zufrieden  war,  so 
war  doch  in  einigen  Aufgaben  Manches  zu  tadeln.  1 6.  Wenn  Herr  Stolberg 
auch  sehr  alt  ist,  so  hat  sein  Geis^  dennoch  die  Frische  der  Jugend.  17. 
Der  Schnee  auf  dem  Gebirge  fangt  an  zu  schmelzen,  daher  werden  die  Fliisse 
im  Thale  wahrscheinlich  bald  anschwellen.  18.  Es  gefiel  ihm  nicht  mehr 
unter  den  Menschen,  daher  (or  deshalb,  or  deswegen)  hat  er  sich  in  die  Ein- 
samkeit  zuriickgezogen.  19,  Er  hat  es  selbst  gethan,  daher  kann  er  Nie- 
mand  als  sich  selbst  tadeln.  20.  Wilhelm  ist  wirklich  fur  sein  Alter  sehr 
king,  Ubrigens  ist  er  alter  als  man  glauben  sollte.  21.  Ich  besuche  ihn  jetzt 
mehr  als  Freund,  denn  als  Arzt. 

H 


170  IMPERATIVE   AND   SUBJUNCTIVE   MOODS. 

LESSON  LI. 

IMPERATIVE,  SUBJUNCTIVE,  AND   CONDITIONAL   MOODS. 

^unbertunbcrftc  ^ufgabc. 

1.  ^ellner,  brmgen  ^ie  mir,  ic^  him,  no(^  eine  Za^t  ^affec* 
2.  3emanb  flopft.  3,  (^ommen  @ie)  f)ereml  4,  (3^)  bittc, 
ne^men  6ie  $la^I  5*  ®u^en  (Sie  etn  33u^  au^,  ba^  3^nen 
gefdllt.  6.  ©c^wetge  (bu)  [till!  7.  (^xth)  (S^re, bem  @^rc  ge-^ 
bit^rt  8.  ^ater  Unfer  I  ber  bu  Mfi  im  ^immeU  9.  ©e^eiliget 
werbe  ;Detn  9^ame!  10*  'Dm  didd)  fommel  11*  Unfer  t% 
lic^e^  53rob  gieb  un^  ^eute!  12.  Unb  fit^re  un^  ntc^t  in  35er^ 
fu^ung!  13.  ©onbern  erlofe  un^  son  bem  Uebel!  14.  ^arl, 
bletbe  bu  ^ier,  bi^  ic^  mieberfomme.  15.  greue  1)i6^  ni^t  iiber 
^nberer  6c^aben.  16.  SD^ad^e  bie  X^iire  auf.  17.  ^inber, 
fc|tt)etgt  (i^r)  [till.  18.  3e6t  ge^e  3eber  fetne^  2Bege^  (@^.)  I 
19.  ^letben  mx  ^ter,  bi^  |)etnnc^  bie  ^iUet^  ^olt.  20.  Du 
iibernimmft  bie  fpanifc^en  S^egtmenter,  mai^ft  immer  Slnftalt 
unb  bift  niemal^  fertig,  unb  tnihtn  fte  bid^,  gegen  mi^  ^u  ^iebn, 
fo  fagft  bu  3ci,  unb  Wih\t  gefeffett  fie^n  (®^.).  21.  Die 
Xrommel  gerii^rt!  22.  (5ie^  in^^uc^  ^inein ;  nur  nic^t  lefen, 
immer  ftngen  (©.).  23.  §err  Siibemann  fagt,  bag  bie  5lrmec 
fd^on  in  ^Bewegung  fei.  24.  3t^  f^^agte  $errn  (Sberlein,  wann 
er  nac^  3)^iinc^en  abreifen  tt)erbe ;  er  fagte  mir,  bag  er  S^orgen 
frii^  abreifen  tt)irb.  25.  3d^  bepeife%,  bag  fte  fd^on  in  2Bten 
angefommen  fei.  26.  Du  fotlft  2)einen  33ater  unb  Deine  WnU 
ter  e^ren,  auf  bag  (§  267,i?6m.*4)  bu  lange  (ebefl  auf  ^rben. 
27.  3c^  rat^e  bir,  bag  bu  fleigiger  n^erbeft  28.  51^1  n^are 
mein  53ruber  bo^  mtUx  gefunb!  29.  Wod^k  er  balb  genefeni 
30.  2Ba^  bie  ^eulenbe  Xiefe  ba  unten  ^erl^e^le,  ba^  er^d^lt  feinf 
lebenbe,  menf^lic^e  (5eele  (^S^*)*  31.  2)er  2)?enfd)  crfd^rt,  er 
fei  a\i6^,  mx  er  mag,  tin  le^te^  ®IM  unb  einen  legten  Xag  (@.). 

Grammatical. 
1.  For  the  general  rules  governing  the  use  of  the 
Imperative,  the  Conditional,  and  the  Subjunctive  Moods, 
aee  pages  294  and  295. 


CONDITIONAL  MOODS.  171 

2.  One  of  the  greatest  difficulties  which  the  English- 
speaking  student  encounters  in  learning  the  German 
language  is  in  the  use  of  the  Moods  of  the  verb. 

Rem.  1.  The  chief  difficulty  is  in  the  use  of  the  Subjunctive  Mood.  To  the 
general  principles  laid  down  in  §  124  there  are  many  modifications  and  ex- 
ceptions that  can  not  be  introduced  into  an  elementary  grammar,  as  they 
would  require  too  much  space,  and  they  would  also  only  cause  confusion  in 
the  mind  of  the  student. 

Rem.  2.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  SubjunctiveMood  is  often  used  when 
the  Indicative  Mood  would  be  employed  in  English. 

Rem.  3.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  Potential  Mood  of  the  English  verb  is  ren- 
dered into  German  partly  by  the  Potential  Verbs  (§  162),  partly  by  the  Con- 
ditional Mood  (§  125),  and  in  some  cases  by  the  Subjunctive  Mood  (§  124, 
3,  and  Rem.). 

3.  The  chief  rules  governing  the  position  of  words 
in  sentences  are  given  in  §  276-284,  §  194,  and  §  255. 

Rem.  1.  In  poetry  and  other  dignified  styles  of  composition,  some  varia» 
tions  from  these  rules  are  allowable. 

Rem.  2.  As  the  syntax  of  the  High-German  Language  (§  6)  has  only  been 
established  during  the  last  one  or  two  centuries,  many  variations  from  the  laws 
at  present  prevailing  in  the  arrangement  of  words  are  to  be  met  with  in  Lu« 
ther's  translation  of  the  Bible  and  other  works  that  date  from  the  earlier  pe- 
riods of  the  language. 

Hundertzweite  Aufgabe. 

1.  Melde  ihm  die  Nachricht,  ehe  er  sie  durch  Andere  erfahre.  2.  Thut, 
als  wenn  Ihr  zu  Hause  waret.  3.  Darum  eben  leiht  er  keinem,  damit  (§  267) 
er  stetazu  geben  habe  (Less.).  4.  Ziele  gut,  dass  du  den  Apfel  treffest  (Sch.). 
f).  Bleibt  nicht  in  England,  dass  der  Britte  nicht  sein  stolzes  Herz  an  Eurem 
Ungliick  weide  (Sch,).  6.  Nimm  dich  in  Acht,  dass  dich  die  Rache  nicht 
verderbe  (Sch.).  7.  Willst  du,  dass  alle  Chefs  zugegen  seien  ?  (Sch.)  8.  So 
willst  du,  dass  es  gleich  voUzogen  werde?  (Sch.)  9.  Ich  gebe  nicht  mein  Ja 
dass  es  geschehe  (G.).  10.  Befiehl,  dass  man  von  Neuem  untersuche.  11. 
Es  war  nicht  zu  erwarten,  dass  er  so  bald  nach  Hause  kommen  werde.  1 2, 
Darauf  schrie  er  in  die  Gassen  hinab,  er  sei  der  Bosewicht,  der  Maria  falsch- 
lich  angeklagt  habe,  er  sei  ein  falscher  Zeuge  (Sch.).  13.  Auf  die  Versiche. 
rung  der  Kegentin,  dass  die  Provinzen  einer  voUkommenen  Ruhe  genossen, 
und  von  keiner  Seite  Widersetzung  zu  fiirchten  sei,  liess  der  Herzog  einige 
deutsche  Regimenter  auseinander  gehen  ^3ch.).  14.  Der  Prinz  von  Oranien 
hatte  die  Vorsicht  gebraucht,  die  BriicKe  abbrechen  zu  lassen,  damit,  wie  ei 


172  CONDITIONAL  MOODS. 

vorgab,  die  Calvinisten  der  Stadt  nicht  versucht  werden  mochten,  sich  zu  dem 
Heere  des  Toulouse  zu  schlagen ;  wahrscheinlich  aber,  damit  die  Katholikea 
den  Niederlandern  nicht  in  den  Riicken  fielen,  oder  auch  Lannoy,  wenn  er 
siegen  wiirde,  nicht  in  die  Stadt  eindrange  (Sch.).  15.  Herr  Weber  sieht 
aus,  als  ob  er  gar  nicht  wohl  sei  (§  274,  Rem.  5).  16.  Ich  kann  dir  den  Apfel 
nicht  geben,  indem  ich  ihn  deinera  Bruder  versprochen  habe(§  274,  Rem.  8). 
17.  AUe  Nachrichten  von  der  Sprache  der  Chinesen  sagen,  dass  sie  zur  Ge- 
staltung  dieses  Volkes  viel  beigetragen  babe.  18.  Der  Habsiichtige  wird  nie 
sagen,  er  habe  genug.  19.  Zu  spat  wird  er  einsehen,  er  habe  Unrecht  gethan. 
20.  Manche  Menschen  handeip^  so,  als  ob  sie  nie  sterben  miissten.  21.  Bel 
solchen  Umstanden  wiirde  ich  es  nicht  thun  (or  thate  ich  es  nicht).  22.  Das 
wiirde  ich  nicht  gethan  haben  {or  das  hatte  ich  nicht  gethan).  23.  Wenn  du 
fleissig  warest,  wiirdest  du  Etwas  lernen  {or  lerntest  du  Etwas).  24.  Wenu 
du  fleissiger  gewesen  warest,  wiirdest  du  mehr  gelernt  haben  (or  hattest  du 
mehr  gelernt).  25.  Wenn  mancher  Mann  wiisste,  wer  mancher  Mann  war', 
that'  mancher  Mann  manchem  Mann  manchmal  mehr  Ehr' !  26.  Hattest  du 
von  Menschen  stets  besser  gedacht,  du  hattest  auch  besser  gehandelt  (or  wenn 
du  stets  besser  von  Menschen  gedacht  hattest,  so  wiirdest  du  auch  besser  ge- 
handelt haben).  27.  In  seiner  Lage  hatte  ich  das  Haus  nicht  gekauft.  28. 
Wenn  mein  Grossvater  noch  am  Leben  ware,  so  wiirde  er  jetzt  90  Jahre  alt 
sem.  29.  Ich  habe  Herrn  Gerold  um  Rath  gefragt  (§  279,  Rem.  1).  30.  Ich 
irug*Herrn  Gerold  um  Rath.  31.  Man  hat  den  Kaufmann  des  Diebstahls 
angeklagt  (§  279,  Rem.  2).  32.  Um  zehn  Uhr  des  Abends  kommt  der 
Schnellzug  von  Miinchen  (§  280,  3).  33.  Ich  war  zu  sehr  gewohnt,  mich  mit 
mir  selbst  zu  beschaftigen,  als  dass  ich  mit  Aufmerksamkeit  hatte  ein  Kunst- 
ft^erk  betrachten  konnen  (282,  Rem.  1). 

*  Antiquated  and  provincial  for  f ragte. 


Part  Scconb; 


CONTAINING 

FAMILIAR  CONVERSATIONS  IN  GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH, 

IDIOMS  AND  SYNONYMS; 

LETTERS  AND  FORMS  OF  BUSINESS; 

AND 

SELECTIONS   FROM   GERMAN  LITERATURE. 


I.  CONVERSATIONS. 
((Scf^radicO 

Rem.  These  Conversations  are  arranged  for  the  purpose  of  presenting 
the  most  familiar  expressions  and  idioms  of  ordinary  discourse.  This  neces- 
sitates, of  course,  frequent  and  abrupt  interruptions  in  the  connection  of  tlio 
sentences  with  each  other. 

1.  Salutation,  a  visit. 
(Dad  (iJrupen,  etn  ©e[u(^.) 


®utcn  aJJorgen,  §err  Sf?.  I 

^if  trilnfc^e  3^ncn'  einen^gutcn^  2Jior« 

gcii,  %o.%,  ^bcnb,  eine  gute  3^ac^t, 
2Bie  befiubcn  ®ic  ftd^  ?* 
3c^  befiube  mic^  fe^r  njo^I,  tci^  ban!c* 

SSie  ftet)t«  c8  mit^^^rcr  ©efunbbeit? 
@c^r  gut ;  fo  jiemlic^ ;  nic^t  jc^r  gut, 
®ie  fcfaen  ttjo^l  auS," 
SSic  flc^t  c8  3^rer  grau  ©cma^Iiu? 
©eit^  eiuigeu  iageu  ift  fie  nic^t  rcd^t 

tt>obI, 
2)a8  t{>ut  mir*  fe^r  leib, 
2Ba§fe^Ui^r? 
@ie  !?at  fid;*  ftarf  erfaltet, 
3lc^  boffe,  ba^  fie  balb  tcicber  ^ergc« 

ftcttt  fein  mirb,^ 
3c^  banfe  3^nen  ret^t  fe^r, 
mt  befiubet  fid;  3bre  grau  3Jhittcr? 
SBic  gemo^ulic^ ;  fie  mu§'°  immer  baS 

3immcr  ^ilteu, 
(58  (or  inau")  tlingelt,  flo^ft, 
@cbe  uiib  fie^,  njcr  e8  iji, 
Oeffneu  ®ie  bie  Xbilr, 
©uteu  ajiorgcn,  §err,  ^xau,  f^rSuIcin 

SBIautcu^off, 
^ommen*  ®ie  ^crcin  (tretcn  ^Sic  nS^cr), 
S3ittc,  ue^mcn  ®ie  ^tatj, 
©etjcn  ®ic  fic^*  gefattigft  auf   ba« 

<Sie  lafjcn  fic^  fcltcn  fe^en," 
3c^  bin  lange  terreift  genjcfen, 


Good  morning,  Mr.  N.  1 

I   wish   you  a  good  morning,  day, 

evening,  a  good  night. 
How  do  you  do  ? 
I  am  very  well,  I  thank  you. 

How  is  your  health? 

Very  well ;  pretty  well ;  not  very  well. 

You  are  looking  well. 

How  is  your  wife  ? 

For  some  days  she  has  not  been  very 

well. 
I  am  very  sorry  to  hear  that. 
What  is  the  matter  with  her? 
She  has  taken  a  heavy  cold. 
I  hope  that  she  will  soon  recover. 

I  thank  you  very  much. 

How  is  your  mother? 

As  usual ;  she  is  still  confined  to  her 

room. 
Somebody  is  ringing,  knocking. 
Go  and  see  who  it  is. 
Open  the  door. 
Good    morning,    Mr,,    Mrs.,    Mias 

Blankenholf. 
Come  in. 
Take  a  seat. 
Please  take  a  seat  on  the  sofisu 

You  are  quite  a  stranger. 

I  have  been  away  a  long  time. 


J  Lesson  XI..  5  lOT. 
a  L.  XVI.,  §  53. 
3L.  XXII..  588,3. 


♦L.  5108. 

*L.  IX.,  5  82, 3,  2. 

6  5 144, 6. 


'L.  IX..  5  82. 
8L.  XXXIV. 
•L.XII. 


'OL.XXXI. 

>' 5112,8. 
13L.XXIX. 


176 


CONVERSATIONS. 


^6}  bin  geftcrn  f)icr  gcVDcfcn,'  urn  3^* 
lien  cineii  53efu(I;  abguftatten,^  or 
(urn  meine  ^^lufmartung  ju  mad;en), 

^a,  e8ti)ut  mtr  ki'o,  bafj  id;  eben  aug* 
gcgangeu  ttjar,^' 

^onnen  @te*  nid;t  ^eute  bet  un§  gu 
9}Zittag  j^eifen? 

^c^  banfe  -S^nen  tjerj^ltd;, 

(S8  ift  mtr*  ^eute  unntoglic^, 

2JJeinc  Xante  au§  S3re8lau  ijl  jc^t  bet 
ung  jum  33efu(^, 

^ontmen  @ie  balb  tDteber, 

Slbieu  I  Seben  @te  tno^I ! 

^omttten  ®te  gliicflid^  na^  §aufe,* 

2luf  3Bieber|e^eu  I 


I  was  here  yesterday  to  call  upon 
you. 

Yes,  I  am  sorry  that  I  had  just  gone 

out. 
Can  you  not  stay  and  dine  with  us 

to-day  ? 
I  thank  you  very  much. 
It  is  impossible  for  me  to  do  so  to-day. 
My  aunt  from  Breslau  is  visiting  us 

now. 
Come  again  soon. 
Good-by!  {May  you  live  well! 
May  you  get  home  safely. 
Au  revoir  !) 


2.  At  Breakfast  in  a  Hotel. 

(Scim  gru"^|^u(f  in  einem  ®ajl|of.) 


®uten  Sl^orgen,  ^txx  Wrangler  I 
§aben  @ie  fdjon  gefrii^ftiidt?^ 
9?Dd;  md;t  f  id;  f ontmc,  urn  mit  ^(;nen 

i^u  triif)[tiicfen, 
^abeii  ®ie  gut  gef d;Iafen  ? 
©anj  gut,  ic^  ban!e, 
3)er  ^eltner  !ommt  gteid;, 
(5r  ^olt  mtr  eine  Xa\\t  ^affce, 

2Sotteu®ie^affee,2:^eeoberSf)ocotabc, 
SSitte,  bringen  @ie  mir  ^affee, 
2Bag  tt)iinfd)en  ®ie  uoc^  I^ 
S3ringen  ®ie  mir  },'mt\  ti^eic^' '  gefod^te 

(Sier  uub  ein  Mbg^Sotelctte, 
SKie  fc^mecft  3^uen  ber  ^affee? 
@r^^  ift  ijortrefflidt), 
^ellner,  bringen  @ie  mir  einen  (Sier* 

fud;en, 
^ier  ift  bie  Wlild)  (ber  Bi^^^i^/  ^^c  @em* 

mel^ber  3^^^^^^^  ^^^  SBei^brob, 

bie  SSutter  uub  ber  tafe), 
SBitnjd;en  @ie  nod)  etft>a§?     [taffee, 
93riugen  @ie  mir   nod^  eine  S^affe'^ 


Good  morning,  Mr.  Kranzler! 

Have  you  had  breakfast  ? 

Not  yet;  I  am  coming  to  breakfast 

with  you. 
Did  you  sleep  well  last  night  ? 
Very  well,  I  thank  you. 
The  waiter  will  come  soon. 
He  has  gone  to  bring  me  a  cup  of 

coffee. 
Do  you  wish  coffee,  tea,  or  chocolate. 
Bring  me  some  coffee,  if  you  please. 
What  do  you  wish  besides  ? 
You  may  bring  me  two  soft-boiled  eggs 

and  a  veal  cutlet. 
How  do  you  find  the  coffee? 
It  is  excellent. 
Waiter,  bring  me  an  omelet. 

Here  is  the  milk,  sugar,  rolls,  biscuit, 
wheat  bread,  butter,  and  cheese. 

Do  you  wish  any  thing  else  ? 
Bring  me  another  cup  of  coffee. 


'  §  15T,  2,  Bern.  3. 
8  §  194,  2,  Hem. 
»  5 195,  4. 


•  L.  III.,  5 137. 
2  { 150,  3. 
3L.VL.6,  iZew. 


4L.  XXXI. 
5L.IX.,1. 
6  L.  IX.,  4, 4. 


10  5  184, 1. 
"L.Vni.,3. 
"  5  80. 1. 


CONVERSATIONS. 


177 


3.  Dinner. 

(!Dad  5Ritta0effcn.) 


©tc  toerben'  ^offcntlic^  mit  un8  ju 

2}?tttag  f^^eifcnV 
Um  wie  mcl  U^r  f^eifen  ®ic? 
3n  ciner  !(cincn  fjatben  ®tunbc, 
25a§  aJJittagcffen  ift  fcrtig, 
^er  %\\d}  ift  gcbccft, 
2)aS  effeu  ift  aufgctragen, 
©e^eii  WW  in'  ben  ®^eife*@aal, 
©ejjen  ®ie  fic^  gefciUigft  ba^in, 
3ft  3^ncn'  cttDa§  9iei§fu^^c  gefallig, 

obcr  sie^en  <Bk  ^'^ubelju^^e  Dor? 

©in  wenig  3^ubelfu^^c,  tocnn  it^  bitten 

barf/ 
2)arf  ic^  3^nen  ein  @tii(f  toon  biefem 

SRinbftei jc^  anbicten  ? 
3[c^  filrcf^te,  ba^  eS  3^ncn  nici^t  gar 

genug  ijt, 
3(^  mag*  c8  nic^t  ju  ftar!  gcfod^t, 
93ringcn  Bit  mir  cin  2)lcffer,  baS  gut 

fd^ncibet, 
©ieb"  bem  ^erm  ettt)a«  S3rob, 
SSed^fcIe  bie  Xeller, 
9Zimm'  bid;  in  5ld;t,  bu  ^aj!  @auce 

auf  ba«  iifc^tuc^  gcgoffen,* 
53ringe  mir  eine  Seri?ictte, 
SSaS  filr  ©cmiife  ift  5^ncn  gcfattig? 
Scfe^len  Sic  ^artoffeln  (Srbfcn,  ^0^== 

ncn,  Bwiebeln,  9tuben,^o^l,  9Jettig, 

e^inat)? 
2)arf  id)  um  ben  @enf  (^feffer,  3JJcer* 

rettig,  Sjfig,  ba8  ©alg,  Oel)  bitten? 

©ie  ^aben  nod^  teinen  gifd^  gefoflet, 
2Ba8  sicken  @ie  bor/"  Sad^S  ober  §cd;t  ? 

9fJc^men"  ®ie  ettt)a8  9Je^braten(§am* 
melfleifc^,"  ednnfen,  ^alb«bratcn, 
9iinbcrbratcn,  9Jeb(jii^ner  *  ^^jaftete, 
^il^ner^^aftcte)? 


Will  you  not  stay  and  dine  with  us? 

At  what  hour  do  you  dine? 

In  a  little  less  than  half  an  hour. 

Dinner  is  ready. 

The  table  is  set. 

The  dinner  is  on  the  table. 

We  will  go  into  the  dining-room. 

Take  a  seat  there  if  you  please. 

Will  you  take  some  rice   soup,  or 

would  you  prefer  some  vermicelli 

soup? 
A  little  vermicelli  soup,  if  you  please. 

May  I  offer  you  a  piece  of  this  roast 

beef? 
I  fear  that  it  is  not  done  enough  to 

suit  you. 
I  do  not  like  it  overdone. 
Bring  me  a  knife  that  will  cut. 

Give  (Mr.  N.)  some  bread. 

Change  the  plates. 

Take  care ;  you  have  spilt  some  gravy 
on  the  table-cloth. 

Bring  me  a  napkin.  [you  ? 

What  kind  of  vegetables  shall  I  give 

Shall  I  give  you  some  potatoes  (peas, 
beans,  onions,  turnips,  beets,  rad- 
ishes, spinage)? 

I  would  thank  you  for  the  mustard 
(pepper,  horseradish,  vinegar,  salt, 
oil). 

You  have  not  tried  any  fish  yet 

Which  do  you  prefer,  some  salmon 
or  some  trout  ? 

Will  you  have  some  venison  (^mutton, 
ham,  roast  veal,  roast  beef,  par- 
tridge pie,  chicken  pie)  ? 


»L.XII. 

«  L.  XXXIII. 

75146. 

10  L.  XXXIV. 

a  L  VII.,  S  83. 

5  L.  XXXII. 

8  §144. 

I'LL 

'896,1. 

«§145. 

•L.VI. 

»  L.  XXXVL 

178 


CONVERSATIONS. 


S)arf  tc^  3^ncn  cttcaS  9tctg*^ubbtng 
(Sf;arIottc*^uff  e,  ^ud^en)  anbtetcn  ? 

SSoUen  @te  biefc  Sle^jfel  (33trnen) 
terjuc^cn? 

SBitte,  bebtencn  @ie  fic^, 

SSotten  @tc  nod^  ctt»aS  S3rob  ? 

^c^  banfc/ 


May  I  offer  you  some  rice  pudding; 

Charlotte  russe,  cake  ? 
Will  you  try  some  of  these  apples, 

pears  ? 
Help  yourself,  if  you  please. 
Will  you  take  some  more  bread  ? 
No,  I  thank  you. 


4.  In  a  Confectionery  Shop. 

(3tt  etner  A^nbttoret.) 
SBaS  tj!  3^nen  gef atttg,  tnetnc  §errcn ?"    What  will  you  have,  gentlemen  ? 
^aben  @ic  frtf c^c  (grbbcercn  ? 
3<i,  fie  fmb  ^eute  9JJorgen  erft  ge^pcft 

ttjorben,' 
SBxingcn  ®te  un6  bret  ^orttoncn^  (Srb* 

beeren  ntit  @a^ne  unb  bret  ^ortio* 

nen  ©efrorneS, 
Settncr,  bringen  Bk  un3  anftatt  bret 

^orttonen@efrorne8,  etn  @efrorne8, 

cin  ®Ia§*  Simonobe  unb  einc  j^affe* 

2;^ee, 
^eEner ,  ^aben  ®te  beutfc^e  3ettiingen  ? 
3a,  h)tr  ^aben  bie  9^attonaI*3eitung, 

bte  ^iJInifd^c  Beitung  unb  bie  Stugg* 

burger  3lttgemeiuc  3eitung, 
§abcn  ®te  bte  @ilte,  mein  §err,  mtr 

bie*  3eitung  ju  geben,  uati^bem  ®ie 

fie  gelefen  ^aben  (trerben), 


Have  you  fresh  strawberries? 

Yes,  they  were  only  picked  this  morn- 
ing. 

Bring  us  strawberries  and  cream  for 
three,  and  ice-cream  for  three. 

Waiter,  instead  of  three  dishes  of  ice- 
cream, bring  us  one  ice-cream,  one 
glass  of  lemonade,  and  one  cup  of 
tea. 

Waiter,  have  you  any  German  papers? 

Yes,  we  have  the  National  Zeitung, 
the  Cologne  Gazette,  and  the  AU- 
gemeine  Zeitung  of  Augsburg. 

Please  be  so  kind,  sir,  as  to  give  me 
the  paper,  when  you  have  finished 
reading  it. 


5.  The  Hotel. 

(2)er  ®ajl|of.) 


^Bunen  @te  uuS*  eiuen  guteu  ©aft^of 

in  SKien  cm^fc^Ien  ? 
2)aS  „§ote(  sum  ©c^tvarjen  ^bter" 

unb  ber  ,3airifc^e  ^of"  finb  beibe 

fc^r  gut  unb  nic^t  jc^r  teener, 
©ie  fmb  nur  fiinf^  9}2inuten  i)om= 

SSa^n^of, 
S)ie  „®olbenc^ronc"  i[t  ettvaS^  tceiter 

entfcrnt, 
2Biei)ieI  fojiet  c8  tagtid^  in  ber  ©olbe* 

nen  ^rone? 


Can  you  recommend  to  us  a  good  ho- 
tel in  Vienna  ? 

The  hotel  of  the  Black  Eagle  and 
the  Bairischer  Hof  are  both  very 
good,  and  are  not  very  dear. 

They  are  only  five  minutes  from  the 
railroad  station. 

The  Golden  Crown  is  somewhat  far- 
ther off. 

How  much  does  it  cost  a  day  in  the 
Golden  Crown  ? 


1 L.  XLVII.,  1. 
«  5  76,  4,  Rem.  I, 


3L.XLVin.,§161. 
*L.XVL,2,1,§85. 


6  L.  IX.,  1,  3,  §  82, 3. 
6  L.  IX.,  1, 2,  Bern. 


1  L.XVII. 

8  5 112, 8,  iJem.  2. 


CONVERSATIONS. 


179 


Ongcfabr  brci  Z^akt, 

aSa«  fiir'  Bimmer  njilnfd^cn  ®ic  ? 

aSir  tuilnfd;cn  einen  @aal  mit  jtDci 
anfto^enbeit  (Sd^Iaf^immern  unb 
ixvd  ^d;Iafgimmer  oi^ne^  <Baa\, 

SSJir  babcn  jc^t  nur  gttjei  ©ale  frei,  jc* 
ben  mit  jwei  ^abinctten, 

3n  njctc^cm  ©tod? 

(Stner  ift  eine  unb  bcr  anbcre'  ifl  jtt)ct 

2;rc))^cn  ^oc^, 
^ellner,  bringcn  ®ic  unfcrc  3lcd^nung, 
^icr  ift  fie  :* 


About  three  dollars. 

What  kind  of  rooms  do  you  wish  ? 

We  wish  a  parlor  with  two  bedrooma 
opening  into  it,  and  two  bedrooms 
without  any  parlor. 

We  have  now  unoccupied  only  two 
parlors,  each  with  two  small  sleep- 
ing-rooms. 

In  which  story  ? 

One  is  in  the  second,  the  other  is  ta 
the  third  story. 

Waiter,  bring  our  account. 

Here  it  is : 


SJeci^nung  filr  §errn  (grUnger. 

Thlr.  Or. 

3met  3imtner  ncbft  Sabtnettcn,  4  Xagc 8  -— 

grii^ftttcf  filr  5  ^crfonen „    „    7  20 

Table  d'hote  fiir  5  ^crjonen..    3    „     22  15 

3lbenbe[fcu  fiir  5  ^erfonen 4    „    6  — 

Sit^t „     „     3  10 

S3ebienung „    „    4  — 

(gqui^age  (9  ©tunben,  1  X^akx  pro  (Stuube) 9  — 

giater  (t)om  SSa^n^of  unb  na(!^  bcm  33a^n^of) 3  ^ 


§oteI  jur  „®oIbcnen  Sroue", 
as i en,  ben  14.  September  1869. 


Summa  Thlr.  63  15 


SBeja^Iung  bantenb  em^fangen. 
%  @d/neiber. 


6.  The  Railroad. 

(!Die  gifcnba^n.) 
§aben  @ie  einen  (Sifenba^nfa^r^Iau  ?*    H^ve  you  a  railroad  time-table  ? 


9'ietn,  aber  ^ier  i[t  §cnbjc^ett'8  (£our8* 

buc^,  toorauS  @ie*   2lllc8   erfe^en 

fiJnncn, 
SBiffen^  @ie,  urn  tote  totel  U^r  bcrerjie 

Bug  abge^t? 
2)cr  erfte  Bu3  fl^^t  urn  ^alb  ficben 

bes  5Worgen«," 
2)cr  nad^fte  Bug  ifl  ein  ©^nellgug, 
®tetgen  tt)ir  ein, 
68  ift  Icine  ^dt  ju  toerlieren, 


No,  but  here  is  Hendschell's  Railroad 

Guide,  which  tells   all  about  the 

trains. 
Do  you  know  at  what  hour  the  first 

train  leaves  ? 
The  first  train  leaves  at  half  past  six 

in  the  morning. 
The  next  train  is  an  express  train. 
Let  us  get  into  the  carriage. 
There  is  no  time  to  lose. 


a  5  83,2. 


M  112,1. 
♦L.VU.,3. 


*  L.  XXXVI. 
•MOT.iJem.C 


-  L.  XXVIL 
»fi81,2,4. 


180 


CONVERSATIONS. 


§tcr  fmb  h)tr  fc^oit  ont  S3a^n'^ofe, 
§oIen  @ie  bie  S3iUet§,  ic^  tr>evbe  filr 

ba§  ©e^cicf  jorgen, 
2BaS  foftet  eiu  S3iEet  toon  3Bten  itac^ 

^rag? 
(Srfte.^   aaffc.  .  .  X^Ir.  10  10  ®gr. 
Bweite  tlaffe.  ,  .     „       7  25     „ 
'2)ntte  Ilaffe.  .  .      „       5  20     „ 
Saffen  tt>ir  gefd^ttoinb  unjere  Coffer 

etnfc^retben, 
^ier  finb  bie  ©e^adffc^etnc, 
@s  tuirb*  jum  smeiten  3JJat  gctautct, 
2lIIe8  etngeftiegeu  ? ' 
S)tefer  SSaggon  t)at  fiinf  (Souses, 
3n  btefem  Sou^e  tt)trb=^  nt^t  geraud;t, 
(g^  tDirb=^  jur  Slbfa^rt  ge^fiffen  I 
SBtr  fa'^ren*  fel;r  fd;nelt, 
2Bir  ^ben  f(^on  brei  TldUn  gurild* 

gelcgt, 
Um  tDie  totel  U(;r  l^alt  man  an,  um*  gn 

frii^ftiicfeu? 
§ter  i[t  bie  grii^ftiicfftation, 
2Bie  lange  bait  ber  3^9  ? 
^tDanjig  2Jiinuten  ;  benn  trir  n^arten 

^ier  auf  einen  3ug  ton  ber  B^^^S* 

babn, 
3c^  ^ore  bie  Sofomotibe  i^feifen,^ 
SDie  Sotomotitoe  fte^t  auf  einer  2Beid;e, 
(gg  finb  ferf)g  ©eteije, 
S)ie  @d;ienen  finb  mit  @ta^I  belegt, 
©e^ort  biefe  (gifenba^n  bcm  @taate  ? 
SfJein,  fie  ge^5rt  ciner  2l!tien*@efelt* 

fc^aft, 
<^err  33raun  tfl  SlftionSr'  bicfcr  ©cs 

Ieltfd;att, 


Here  we  are  at  the  station. 

Get  the  tickets,  I  will  look  out  fof 
the  baggage. 

What   is  the  price  of  a  ticket  from 
Vienna  to  Prague? 

First     Class.  .  .  .  Thlr.  10  lOSgr. 

Second  Class.   ..."        7  25     " 

Third   Class.  ...     "        5  20    " 

Let  us  hurry  and  get  our  trunks  reg- 
istered. 

Here  are  tickets  for  your  baggage. 

The  second  bell  is  ringing. 

All  aboard! 

This  car  has  five  coupds. 

This  is  not  a  smoking  coupe. 

There  is  the  whistle  for  starting  ! 

We  are  going  very  fast. 

We  have  already  gone  twelve  (En- 
glish) miles. 

At  what  hour  do  we  stop  for  break- 
fast? 

Here  we  stop  for  breakfast. 

How  long  does  the  train  stop  ? 

Twenty  minutes ;    for  we  wait  here 
for  a  train  on  the  branch  road. 

[coming. 

I  hear  the  whistle  of  the  train  that  is 

The  locomotive  is  standing  on  a  side 

There  are  six  tracks.  [track. 

The  rails  are  covered  with  steel. 

Does  this  railroad  belong  to  the  state? 

No,  it  belongs  to  a  stock  company. 

Mr.  Brown  is  a  shareholder  in  this 
company. 


7.  The  Steamer. 

(!Dft«  ^am^jffc^tff.) 
3i3ann  ge^t  bag  !5)am^ffd;tff  toon  ^zto^    When  does  the  steamer  leave  New 

9)or!  nad;  ^ambnrg  ah  ?^  York  for  Hamburg  ? 

Seben  ©onnabenb  um  12  U^r  ge^t  ein    A  steamer  leaves  every  Saturday  at 

2)am^ff(^iff  db,^  noon. 


1  L.  XXIII. 

2  L.  XLVIII. 


3  §  150,  3. 

*  L.  xxvin. 


5  L.  XXIX. 

6  L.  XXIX. 


7§55,8 

8  L.  XXXIV. 


CONVERSATIONS. 


181 


SSic  tancjc  baucrt  bic  UeBerfa^rt  ? 
3n  ber  kegel  fed;3e^n  Sage, 
2)ie  ^rcife  finb  : 

pr  bie  erfte  ^ajiite.  .  .  2:^tr.  150 

pr  bic  jtDcitc  ^ajiitc.  .  X\)h,   90 

3ti?ifcl;enbecf Stblr.   40 

2Bte  bid  ©e^acf  taun  mon  frei  ntit* 

nc^mcn?' 
2)rci  ,tcffcr, 

2)ic  Sefoftigiinc}  ift  integriffen,* 
Jpabcn  ®ie  tide-  ^affagierc? 
ein  X^eil  ber  grad;t  ift  nod(>  nici^t 

gdaben, 
SBanu  fabren  <Sic  ab  ? 
2«it  ber  uac^[ten='  glut^, 
Urn  trie  i^id  U^r  tritt  bic  ^ut^  cin?^ 
2Jiit  jlageSanbruc^. 
S)ic  (Sbbc  ift  ftar! , 
SBir  fabren  fd;ndl, 
2Bir  trerben*  iiic^t  fo  fd^nett  fa^rcn, 

tt)enn  trir  aiif  bober  ®ee  fmb, 
2)a8  aJJcer  ift  fcbr  ru^ig, 
2)a8  2J?cer  ift  fturmifdb, 
®e^cn  toir  oiif  baS  ^crbecf, 
^6)  tuerbc  bic  ®ee!ranfbeit  betomtnen, 

trenn  id;  Icinger*  in  ber  ^ajiitc  bleibe, 
SSaS  mid;  betrifft,  id;  bin  nie  fecfranf, 
®ie  fmb  fe^r  gliicflicb, 
S33ic  baben  ®ic  bic  9^ac^t  gugebradbt  ? 
©dblccbt  genug, 
2)ie  3Jiafd)inc  bat  m\6)  gar  nid;t  fdbia* 

fen  laffen,* 
SSic  tide  ^notcn  fcgdn  toir  in  eincr 

©tunbc? 
i^ragcn  trir  ben  3J?ann  am  9?iiber, 
SWan  barf^  mit  ibm  nid;t  fprcc^en, 
^6)  glanbe  bic  Mjlc  ju  fcben, 
®ic  b^iben  9icd^t, 
!g8  fmb  bic  ®ciat?*3nfdn, 
SSir  trcrben  bcute  Stbcnb*  ben  ?eud;t* 

tburm  r>on  SanbSenb  febcn, 
SJlorgen  2lbenb  fommcn  trir  in  ®out§* 

ampton  an, 


How  long  does  the  passage  last? 
Usually  sixteen  days. 
The  prices  are : 

In  the  first  cabin  .  .  .  .  Thlr.  150 

In  the  second  cabin   .  .  Thlr.    *J0 

For  deck-passage.  .  .  .  Thlr.    40 
How  much  baggage  can  one  take  free 

of  charge  ? 
Three  trunks. 

You  do  not  pay  extra  for  your  meals. 
Have  you  many  passengers  ? 
The  freight  is  not  yet  all  on  board- 
When  do  you  start  ? 
At  the  next  high  tide. 
At  what  time  is  high  tide  ? 
At  daybreak. 

The  tide  is  going  out  very  strong. 
We  are  going  very  fast. 
We  will  not  go  so  fast  when  we  are 

on  the  open  ocean. 
The  ocean  is  very  quiet. 
The  ocean  is  stormy. 
Let  us  go  upon  deck. 
I  shall  be  seasick  if  I  stay  any  longer 

in  the  cabin. 
As  for  me,  I  am  never  seasick. 
You  are  very  fortunate. 
How  did  you  pass  the  night  ? 
Badly  enough. 
I  could  not  sleep  at  all  on  account  of 

the  engine. 
How  many  knots  do  we  make  an 

hour? 
Let  us  ask  the  man  at  the  helm. 
It  is  not  permitted  to  speak  with  him. 
I  think  I  see  the  coast. 
You  are  right. 
It  is  the  Scilly  Islands. 
We  shall  see  Land's  End  light-honse 

this  evening. 
To-morrow  evening  we  shall  arrive  at 

Southampton. 


1  L.  XXIV,,  4. 
a  §112,4. 


3  5  92. 
*L.VU. 


5  591. 

•  Page  19a 


'L.  XXXIII. 
eL.VII. 


182 


CONVERSATIONS. 


8.  The  Custom-liouse. 

(3)a^  3oUamt) 
§abcn  @tC  CttuaS^  ©teuer^fltd^tigeS?^     Have  you  any  thing  that  is  liable  to 

duty  ? 
S6)  tDcrbc  btc  Coffer  aufma^en,  I  will  open  the  trunks. 

2ld^,  bttte,  njcrfen  @ic  mtr  m(^t  3lEe8'    Pray,  do  not  turn  every  thing  upside 

unter  etnanber,  down. 

2)iefe  Slicker  finb  gaitj  ncu,*  nic^t    These  books  are  new,  are  they  not? 

3d;  ^abe  fte  fiir  meinen  Bo^n  gefauft,  I  bought  them  for  my  son. 

2)a8  tft  einerlci,^  ba8  (§efe^  ift   be*  That  makes  no  difference ;  the  law  is 

[ttmmt,  explicit. 

2)iefcn  Sabaf  wcrbe  t^  in  S3cfd^Iag  I  shall  have  to  seize  (attach)  this  to- 

ne^men  miiffen,  bacco. 

SBittc,  3^rc  ^dff  e,  metne  §erren,  Your  passports,  if  you  please,  gentle- 
men. 

§icr  finb  (SnH)fanggfd)etne  bafiir/'  Here  are  receipts  for  them. 

2)er  ^olijcibtener  tr>irb  fie  3&neii  bal=  The  policeman  will  deliver  them  to 

bigft  nac^  3^i^em  @aPof  bringeit,  you  very  soon  at  your  hotel. 


9.  The  Post-offlce. 


3ft  bo3  ^oflamt  »ett  ton  ^ier  ? 

e§  tft  ganj  in  ber^  '>ilai}t, 

@inb  S3rtefe  filr  mtcb  angetomnten  ? 

^ic  ift  3^r  ttjert^er  9^ame?« 

Sd^  ern^arte^"  einigc  23rtefe*^  poste 

restante,* 
Od>  tT3ilnfd;e  etnige  S3riefmar!en, 
aSann  ge^t  bte  ^oft  nac^  33re6tau  ab  ? 

2)er  SBrief  ift  noc^  nt(^t  gefiegelt, 
SBoiftber  ©iegcEacf? 
§ter  ift  ba8  ^etfc^aft, 
^6)  ^abe  bte  Slbreffe  gefc^riebcn,*' 
2)er  SSrief  mu§  franttrt  tucrben, 
2)te  ^oft  tft   angetomnten,  aber  bie 
33nefe  fmb  no(^  nt(^t  tert^eilt, 


oftamt.) 

Is  the  Post-office  far  from  here? 

It  is  right  near  by. 

Have  any  letters  come  for  me  ? 

What  name,  if  you  please. 

I  am  expecting  some  letters  "postt» 

restante. " 
I  wish  some  postage-stamps. 
When  does  the  mail  leave  for  Bres- 

lau? 
The  letter  is  not  sealed  yet. 
.Where  is  the  sealing-wax? 
Here  is  the  seal. 
I  have  addressed  the  letter. 
The  letter  must  be  prepaid. 
The  maU  has  arrived,  but  the  letters 

are  not  yet  distributed. 


*  Letters  addressed  ^^  poste  restante"  are  to  remain  in  the  post-office  till 
called  for. 


1  §  112,  Rem.  1. 

2  §  89,  Rtm.  10. 
s  i  111. 


*  L.  XVIIL,  1. 

6  Lit.,  not  true? 
e  5  103, 3. 


^  §  188, 10,  Rmi.  1.      lo  §  155, 3. 
8L.X.,1.  11574,3,4. 

»  §  49,  3.  la  L,  XX. 


CONVERSATIONS. 


183 


10.  At  a 

(23 ei  eincm 
SSo^nt  l^icr  §err  iyjcumann,  bet  53au* 

quicr  ? 
@te  tcerbcn  i^n  tm*  Som^totr  finben, 
2)art  ic^  fragcn,  mit  teem'  id;  bic  S^re 

^abc  ju  f^rec^en  ?^ 
3J2cin  S^iamc  ift  ^ilbebranbt, 
3^  bin*  au8  SSien, 
^6)  i)aH  ctnen  (Sm^fef)IungSbrief  an 

(Sie  con  ^errn^  ^ranjter, 
^6}  freue  mid;  fefir,  3^re  ^efannifd^aft 

JU  maci^en, 
^err  ^ransler  \)at  mir  eincn  SSed^jel 

auf  3^r  §auS  gegeben.* 
25er  !iC3ed;feI  ift  ja^Ibar  naci?  @ic^t,' 
3t^  tDerbe  if)n  3^nen  jofort  in  S3anf* 

noten  augja^len,  t»enn  eS  3Jl;ncn^ 

red;t  ift, 
Si3nnten  @ie  mir  einen  X^eil  bai)on' 

in  ®o(b  geben  ? 
©ie  fijnntcn  ba«  5lgio  bisfontircn, 

3)aS  ijl  ntir  einerlei,'** 
3ft  bag  3nboffement  barauf  ? 
^a,  er  ift  auf  meine  Orbre  inboffirt, 
©c^on,  ^ier  fmb  jh)ei  S3anfnoten,  jcbe'* 
toon  fiinf^unbert*'  X^alern,  :preu^i* 
fc!^c«  Sourant,  eine  ton  taufenb/' 
ein^unbert"  griebric^gb'or,  unb  ber 
JReft  in  ©ilber  unb  ^up\tx, 


Banker's. 

Sianquter.) 

Does  Mr.  Neumann,  the  banker,  re- 
side here  ?  [room. 

You  will  find  him  in  the  counting- 
May  I  ask  with  whom  I  have  the  hon- 
or to  speak  ? 

My  name  is  Hildebrandt. 

I  am  from  Vienna. 

I  have  a  letter  of  introduction  to  you 
from  Mr.  Kranzler. 

I  am  very  glad  to  make  your  ac- 
quaintance. 

Mr.  Kranzler  gave  me  a  letter  of  credit 
on  your  house. 

The  bill  is  payable  at  sight. 

I  will  pay  it  to  you  immediately  in 
paper  money,  if  you  desire  it. 

Could  you  give  me  a  part  of  it  in 
gold? 

You  could  discount  the  premium  (on 
the  gold). 

It  is  all  the  same  to  me. 

Is  it  indorsed  ? 

Yes,  it  is  indorsed  to  my  order. 

Very  well ;  here  are  two  bank-notes, 
each  of  five  hundred  Prussian  tha- 
lers,  one  of  a  thousand,  a  hundred 
Friedrichs  d'ors,  and  the  odd  mon- 
ey in  silver  and  copper. 


11.  In  a  Bookstore. 

(3n  einer  Sui^^anblung.) 


§abcn  @ie  ein  SScrjei(^ni§  toon  ^^xtn 

S3il(^crn? 
§icr  ift  cinS,  n^etd^eS  crfi  toor  cinigen 

jtagcn  crfd^iencn  ift, 
@ie  n?erben  barin  mcinc  35ertag8njer!c 

unb  cine  ?!lu8tt)a^I  in*  unb  auSldn* 

bifd^cr  SKerte  finben, 


»L.XI.,4. 
»  5  113,1. 
'fil3& 


Have  yon  a  catalogue  of  your  books  ? 

Here  is  one  thiat  was  published  only 
a  few  days  ago. 

You  will  find  in  it  the  books  I  pub- 
lish, and  a  selection  of  German  and 
foreign  books. 


*§137. 

6  5  76,  Rem.  1. 

6  L.  XXV.,  2. 


T  5  66, 2. 

8  5107. 

»5188,10,iJcm.l. 


JO  5  108,  8. 
"  5  111. 


184 


CONVERSATIONS. 


SBoIIcit  @te  mix  gefaHtgft  btc  neucften 
beutfc^en  2Ber!e  jetgen  ? 

.^ier  i[t  a)Zommfen'§  9Jomifc^e  ®e^ 
jd^ic^te,  bie  jii?eite^  Sluflage  ber 
tmtftgefd)td;te*  toon  ®d;naafe,  bie 
te^te  %n^ahe  ber  ©d^itter'jc^en* 
©ebiAte, 

^al6en@te  feine  :|3:^iIofo:|jI)tf(^en  2Ber!e? 

©te  [te^en  am  (Snbe  be§  Catalogs/ 

3^  ^abe  ^ier  auf  biefem  Xx\^z  etntge 
fe^r  feitene  33iid^er  au§  giueiter 
§anb  (or  geBrauc^te  SSiid^er), 

2Bag!oftetbtefegS3u(^? 

2)ag  ift  fet;r  t^euer, 

SDie  5lufiage  ift  langft  ijergrtffen, 

^aben  @ie  ein  5lntiquar  ==  (g jem:|)tar 
beS  ©rimm'fc^en*  2Bi3rterbuc^e§  V^ 

9^ein,  a6er  ie^  ^abe  ©aiiber'g  beutjc^eS 
SSorterBuc^,  Suca§'*  beutfc^^engli* 
f(^e§  unb  engtijc^*beutjd?eg  SBbrter* 
buc^  in  tier  33anben,  8vo,  unb  9JJo* 
3in'§  beutf(^=fransi)ftjd;eg  SBcrter:= 
bu^,  an6)  in  i^ier  ^anben,^ 

^aben  @ie  eine  Sifenba^n^^arte  ijon 
Suro^a? 

$ier  ift  §enbfc^eG'8  (SourS^SSuc^ ;  e§ 
entf)alt  eine  siteifefarte  i)on  (Suro^a, 
unb  ^^otijen  iiber^  aEe  (Sifenba^n* 
unb  2)am:|)fjc^tff*Sinien, 

^aben  @ie  9^eife^anbbuc^er  ? 

Sffiir  ^aben  S3abefer'S  f^ii^rcr  burd^ 
SDentfd^Ianb,  granfrei^,  ^tatieuuub 
(Snglanb ;  fie  [tub  tt>o^t  bie  beften,^ 


Will  you  please  show  me  the  latest 

German  books  ? 
Here  is  Mommsen's  Roman  History, 

the  second  edition  of  Schnaase's 

History  of  Art,  the  last  edition  of 

Schiller's  poems. 

Have  you  no  philosophical  works  ? 
They  are  at  the  end  of  the  catalogue. 
I  have  here  on  this  table  some  very 
rare  second-hand  books. 

What  is  the  price  of  this  book  ? 

That  is  very  dear. 

It  has  been  out  of  print  a  long  time. 

Have  you  a  second-hand  copy  of 
Grimm's  Dictionary  ? 

No,  but  I  have  Sanders's  German  Die- 
tionary,  Lucas's  German  -  English 
and  English  -  German  Dictionary, 
in  four  volumes  8vo,  and  Mozin's 
German-French  Dictionary,  also  in 
four  volumes. 

Have  you  a  railroad  map  of  Europe  ? 

Here  is  Hendschell's  Railroad  Guide ; 
it  contains  a  traveling  Map  of  Eu- 
rope, and  information  about  all  the 
lines  of  railroads  and  steam-boats. 

Have  you  guide-books  ? 

We  have  Badeker's  Guide  for  Ger- 
many, France,  Italy,  and  England ; 
they  are  the  best. 


12.  At  a  Tailor's. 

(S3et  einem  ©c^neiber.) 


SQ3a§'ifl  3^ncn  ge^atftg,  utein  ^err? 

^c^  njiinfc^e  einen^"  ^od,  einen  ^racf, 
eine^'  feibene  SBefte,  ^'mzx^^  ^aar 
S3einfleiber,  unb  einen  @omnier= 
Ueberro(f, 


What  can  I  serve  you  with,  sir  ? 

I  wish  a  coat,  a  dress-coat,  one  silk 

vest,  two  pair  of  pantaloons,  and  a 

summer  overcoat. 


1  L.  XVIII. 

4  L.  XXXVIL,  5. 

7  §  83, 1. 

a  L.  XXXVI. 

6  §  74,  3,  3. 

8  §92. 

3  L.  XXXVI. 

6  §  69,  5  80, 2. 

9  §  113. 

"  §  54. 

11  §  98, 

12  {  101. 


CONVERSATIONS. 


18T5 


t)on'  biefem  ^tu^'f 
2)iefe8  fc^warjc  Znd}  frf^eint  furs  9^* 

fc^oren  unb  feiu  ju  jein, 
(gg  ift  an6)  fe^r  bauer^att,' 
^J^ebmen  @te  mir  baS  2Jia§  ju  ^od, 

§ofc,  SSeftc  Miib  Ueberrocf, 
SSilnfc^en  @ic*  fie  nad^  ber  neucjten 

3Kobe? 
SD^an*  mad)t  bie  ZaxUt  giemli^  lang, 

bic  ®c^i3^e  reicf^en  faft  big  an  bie 

^nice,  bie  Slermel  finb  jiemtic^  tT?eit, 
©ammet'tragen  fiub  je^t  ganj  au«« 

ber  2Jtobe, 
^rofeiren  @ie  ben  3Jocf  an, 
Sr  ift  ju  eng  unter^  ben  airmen, 
S)a8  Ici^t^  fid;  Ieid;t  anbern, 
3c^  tperbe  ben  Uefcerrocf  aud^  anjie^en, 
Sann  er  sugetno^ft  werben? 
3ie^en  ®ie  fa9onirte  ober  glatte  Wlu^tx 

fttrbieSSeftetor? 
2)ie  feibene  SBefte  foil  fa^ontrt,  bie 

@ammct^2Sefte  foU'  einfac^  fein, 
23erbleid}t  biefc  gvirbe  nid;t  fel)r  fd^ncll? 
^df  tann  fie  al6  cid^t  garantiren, 
SSann  tritnfd)cn  @ie  bie  tteiber? 
ajiitttrod?'"  gjJorgcu  um  jc^n  U^r,  benn 

id;  reife  um  jwblf  U^r^'  nai)  2Bien 

©ie  fSnnen  fid^  barauf  tocrlaffen,  ba§ 
SlUeS  fertig  fein''  tcirb, 


Do  you  wish  a  complete  suit  from  this 
piece  of  cloth? 

This  black  cloth  seems  to  be  fine  and 
of  a  short  nap. 

It  is  very  durable  also. 

Take  my  measure  for  a  coat,  panta- 
loons, vest,  and  overcoat. 

Do  you  wish  them  in  the  latest  fash- 
ion? 

The  waist  is  made  rather  long,  the 
skirts  reach  almost  to  the  knees, 
the  sleeves  are  made  rather  wide. 

Velvet  collars  are  now  all  out  of 
fashion. 

Try  the  coat  on. 

It  is  too  tight  under  the  arms. 

That  can  be  easily  changed. 

I  will  try  on  the  overcoat  also. 

Can  it  be  buttoned  ? 

Do  you  prefer  figured  or  plain  pat- 
terns for  the  vest? 

The  silk  vest  may  be  figured,  the 
velvet  vest  may  be  plain. 

Does  not  this  color  fade  very  easily? 

I  can  warrant  it  not  to  fade. 

When  do  you  wish  the  clothes? 

Wednesday  forenoon  at  ten  o'clock, 
for  I  leave  for  Vienna  at  noon. 

You  may  rely  upon  their  all  being 
ready. 


13.  In  a  Dry  Goods  Store. 

(3n  cinem  3;ud^Iabcn.) 


2Sa9  filr  ©etbcujcuge  ^aben  @ie  ? 
SSir  ^abcn  ®eibe  in  alien  ©(^ottirun* 

flen, 
5Braud;eu  ®ie  @eibe  gu  einem  Sleibe 

ober  JU  cinem  SDZautel  ? 
2)ie^e  garben  fmb  jet?t  2J?obe, 
2)a8  2JJuftcr  gefdllt  mir  uid;t,  e6  ifl  ju 

bunt, 


What  kind  of  silks  have  you  ? 
We  have  silks  of  all  colors. 

Do  you  wish  silk  for  a  dress  or  for  % 

cloak  ? 
These  colors  are  now  in  fashion. 
I  do  not  like  that  pattern :  it  is  too 

gaudy. 


••  L.  XXXII. 
a  L.  IX.,  1. 
M  86,  2, 3. 


*  §  107,  Rem.  6. 
5  §  112, 6. 

•  5  82,  2. 


7  5  82,  1. 

8  144,  4. 

» L.  xxxin. 


JO  L.  xxm.,  3. 

"  Twelve  o'clock. 
12  L.  XXVIII. 


186 


CONVERSATIONS. 


SSic  ftnbcn*  <Bk  btcfc  ^junttirtc  ©cibc? 

3d^  gte^e*  bteje  geftrcifte  tor, 

2Bie  brett  ift  biefer  3ltla8  ? 

(Sr  ift  etne  ©He  breit, 

@ie  tDcrben  tntt  oc^tje^n  ©Hen  au8* 

retc^en, 
§aben  @te  aud^  guttcrfctbc  ? 
SBottcn  @te  cinen  fcibencn^^ut  obcr 

ctnen  ©tro^^ut  ? 
S)teje§  ift  bic  ncueftc  aTiobe, 
2)er  33oben  biefe§  §ute«  ift  ju  Kcin, 
S)ie  ©arnirung  gefdttt  mir  ni(^t, 
®ott    ic^    ijiettetc^t    anbereS    S3anb 

barauf*  fe^en  ?* 
^aben  @ie  ®:|)i^enfd)Ieier  ? 
^(^  ^abe  tt)elt^e  toon  ^riiff elcr  ©^)i<5cn, 

bic  auggejeic^net  finb, 
^ier  fiiib  auc^  @(^leicr  toon  gefticftem 

OJiuffelin, 
^(^  n?ilnfc^e   ein  ^aar   ©tace'^anb* 

fc^u^c  toon  ber  beften  Cualitat,  ein 

S3rief^  ^M^nabeln,  ein  53rief  @te(f== 

nabein,  ein  S)uljenb^  2^af(^entii(^er, 
.    cine  ^ratoatte,  f ed;§  ^^aar«  ©triimi^fc, 

©eife,  eincB^^nbiirfte,  einen^Jegen* 

fd;irm,  ^zuq  gu  33etttud^ern,  ^at* 

tnn,  einen  <B\)avol, 


How  do  you  like  this  spotted  silk  ? 

I  prefer  this  striped  piece. 

How  wide  is  this  satin  ? 

It  is  an  ell  wide. 

Eighteen  ells  will  be  all  you  will  need. 

Have  you  also  silk  for  lining  ? 

Do  you  wish  a  silk  hat,  or  a  straw 
hat? 

This  is  the  latest  fashion. 

The  crown  of  this  bonnet  is  too  small. 

I  do  not  like  this  trimming. 

Shall  I  put  another  kind  of  ribbon  on 
it? 

Have  you  lace  veils  ? 

I  have  some  of  Brussels  Lace  that  are 
extremely  fine. 

Here  are  also  veils  of  embroidered 
muslin. 

I  wish  also  a  pair  of  kid  gloves  of  the 
best  quality,  a  paper  of  needles, 
a  paper  of  pins,  a  dozen  pocket- 
handkerchiefs,  a  cravat,  six  pairs 
of  stockings,  soap,  a  tooth-brush, 
an  umbrella,  cloth  for  sheets,  calico, 
a  shawl. 


14.  At  a  Shoemaker's. 

(Set  einem  (Sc^u^mad^er.) 


^aben  8ic  fcrtigc  ©tiefel? 

^ier  ift  ein  ^aar  ba8  3^ncn  ttJo^I 

^affcn  tt)irb/ 
^ier  ift  ber  ©tiefctfnccbt, 
Sfie^men  @ie  lieber  bag  3JJa§  fiir  ein 

neucg  ^aar, 
©ie  biirfen  nid;t  ju  eng  fein  unb  bic 

?lbfa^e  nid)t  ju  ^oc^,« 
SBunjd^en  <Bk  bicfe  ®o^Ien? 
3a,  unb  baS  Dberleber  jiemlic^  ftar!, 


Have  you  ready-made  boots  ? 

Here  is  a  pair  that  I  think  will  fit 

you. 
Here  is  the  boot-jack. 
I  would  rather   have  you   take  my 

measure  for  a  new  pair. 
Do  not  make  them  too  tight,  nor  the 

heels  too  high. 
Do  you  wish  the  soles  thick  ? 
Yes,  and    the   upper-leather    rather 

heavy. 


J  L.  XXIV. 
3  L.  XXVII. 


3  §86,  2,  2. 

*  5 188, 10,  Rem.  1. 


6  §  163. 
6L.XVL.2. 


'L.XII. 

8  592. 


CONVEUSATIONS. 


187 


S3i^'  wann  fBnnen  ®ie  mir  ctn  ^aar 

@c^u^e  mac^cn  ? 
@ie  tonnen  bie  @d^u^e  biS  iKorgcn 

Slbcnb  ^aben, 
2)ic  ®c^ubc  briidcn  mir^  bie  B^^^"^ 
2Df^ad;en  Ste  mir  ein  ^aar  ^antoffeln 

»ou  Saffian, 


When  can  you  make  me  a  pair  of 
shoes? 

You  can  have  the  shoes  by  to-morrow 
evening. 

These  shoes  pinch  my  toes. 

Make  me  also  a  pair  of  morocco  slip- 
pers. 


16.  With  a  Physician. 

(Set  einem  Slrjte.) 


§abcn  ®ie  ben  ^Irgt  rufen  la[fcn? 

@r  ioirb  fogteic^  fommen, 

^oran^  leiben  ®ie  ? 

^6)  l)abc  f>eftige8  ^o^fwe^, 

aJiir  ift  ganj  fc^tDinblid^, 

S^  fann  mid^  faum  auf*  ben  giifeen 

^alten, 
gilfjlen  @ie  ©d^merjen  tm'  SRitdcn? 
ilaff en  ®te  mic^  bie  3it"3c  je^en— fie  iji 

ctwaS  betegt, 
?affcn  ®ie  micij  ben  ^ul8  fil^Icn, 
(Sr  ift  jiemtic^  ftar!  unb  gefc^winb— 

gc^t  fetir  unru^ig— @ie  ^aben  gie* 

ber, 
fatten  <Sie  tncine  ^ranf^cit  fiir  ge* 

fa^rlic^? 
9^cin,  aber  ne^men  ®ie  [i6)  in  3ld^t, 

ba^  fie  e8  nic^t  toerbe/ 
3(!^  tt)erbe  3§nen  Slrjnei  t>erf(f>reibcn, 
S3Ieibcn  ®ie  ru^ig  im  S3ett  bi§  ic^ 

tciebertomme,' 
SBie  ^aben  @ie  bie  SRa6)t  jugebrad^t? 
3d?  ^abc  ettt?a8  gefc^Iafen— (ic!^  ^abe 

fein  ?luge  gcft^toffen),* 
$aben  ®ie  einen  bitteren  ©efd^marf  im 

aWunbe? 
36)  \)abt  fiets  einen  bitteren  ©efd^madf 

im  3Jiunbe,  njenn  ic^  aufwad^c, 
2)a8  gieber  {jat  flart  na(^gelaffcn— ^at 

faft  aufgebiJrt, 
3c^  \)a^t  mid^jiarterfaitet, 


Have  you  sent  for  the  doctor  ? 
He  will  come  immediately. 
What  is  the  matter  with  you  ? 
I  have  a  great  headache. 
I  am  very  dizzy. 
I  can  hardly  stand  up. 

Do  you  feel  pain  in  your  back  ? 

Let  me  see  your  tongue — it  is  some- 
what coated. 

Let  me  feel  your  pulse — it  is  quite 
strong  and  rapid — is  very  flurried 
— you  have  a  fever. 

Do  you  consider  my  sickness  danger- 
ous? 

No ;  but  be  very  careful,  lest  it  become 
so. 

I  will  write  out  a  prescription  for  you. 

Keep  quietly  in  bed  till  I  come  again. 

How  have  you  passed  the  night? 

I  have  slept  some — (I  did  not  close  my 

eyes). 
Have  you  a  bitter  taste  in  your  mouth  ? 

My  mouth  is  always  bitter  when  I 
wake  up. 

The  fever  has  subsided  a  good  deal- 
has  almost  ceased. 

I  have  taken  a  bad  cold. 


»5  237. 

«  5  66, 1,  Rem.  1. 


>  5  188, 10,  Rem.Z. 
«§24& 


5  L.  XI.,  4. 

6  5138. 


^  L.  XXXIV.,  8. 
8L.XXVL 


188 


CONVERSATIONS. 


fc^mcrsen— ict)  ^abe  Slugenleiben, 
@g  U)dre  gut  etn  gupab  ju  ne^men/ 

@r  teibef^  an  9^^eumati8mu8— an  bcr 

§err  IR,  ift  an  ber  ©d^hJtnbfud^t  gc* 
[torBen,^— am  Z\}pi)U^  geftorBen, 

$err  3Jl.  ift  i)om  ®d(>lag  geril^rt  tx>or= 
ben. 


I  have  a  cold — I  have  a  sore  throat 
— my  eyes  pain  me. 

It  would  do  you  good  to  take  a  foot- 
bath. 

He  has  the  rheumatism — the  gout. 


Mr.  N.  died  of  consumption — of  ty- 
phus-fever. 

Mr.  M.  has  had  a   stroke  of 
plexy. 


apo- 


16.  At  a  Watchmaker's. 

(Set  etnem  U'^rmac^er.) 
§tcr  ift  bc8  U^rtnac^crS  Saben— ge^en    Here  is  the  watchmaker's  shop — let 


tr>tr  f)inetu,* 
Q6)  mod;te^  etue  gute  U^r  faufen, 
SBotlen    Sie  eine  <S:|)inbeIur;r— einc 

5ln!erut)r— etne    (Sl^Iinberu^r,  mit 

com^enfirtcr  S3etr»egung  ? 
3c^  n)iinf(^e  etne  9?e^ettru^r, 
§ier  ift  eine  ang  einer  ber  Beften  ©enfer 

gaBrifen, 
©ie  ift  ju^  !tein, 
(gntfd^ntbigen  @te,  eS  ip  jeljt  3Jiobe, 

fe^r  Heine  UI)ren  gu  tragen, 
S)a6  ift  mir  gteic^gilltig,  id;  n^iinfc^e 

eine  gri5J3ere/ 
S&}  njerbe  biefe  ne^men,  unter  ber 

SBebingnng,  ba^  8ie  fiir  jttjei  3a^re 

garantiren,^ 
2J?einc  U^r   gc^t  nic^t  ridtjtig— ge^t 

jeben  2:ag  eine  ^IBe  @tunbe  ijor^— 

eine  3SierteIftunbe  na^, 
Q6)  hjerbe  nac^jeBen,— eg  ift  etn?ag  jer* 

Brod^en— id^  gtauBe  bie  ^ette  ift  jcr* 

f^rengt— bie  geber  ift  geBro(^en, 
<£ic  mn^  re^jarirt  (or  anSgeBeffert) 

tDerben — gereinigt  tDcrben, 
53i§  n)ann  fonnen  @ic  bie  U^r  fertig 

BaBen  ? 
S3i8  morgen  urn  neun  U^r  Sormit^ 

tags, 


us  go  m. 

I  wish  to  buy  a  good  watch. 

Do  you  wish  a  lever  watch,  an  an> 
chor  watch,  a  cylinder  watch,  with 
a  compensation  balance  ? 

I  wish  a  repeating  watch. 

Here  is  one  from  one  of  the  best  GCf- 
neva  manufactories. 

It  is  too  small. 

Excuse  me,  it  is  now  the  fashion  to 
wear  very  small  watches. 

I  do  not  care  for  that ;  I  wish  a  larger 
one. 

I  will  take  this  one  under  the  con- 
dition that  you  will  warrant  it  for 
two  years. 

My  watch  does  not  go  right — gains 
half  an  hour  every  day — loses  half 
an  hour. 

I  will  look  at  it — something  is  broken 
— the  chain  is  broken — the  main- 
spring is  broken. 

It  must  be  repaired — be  cleaned. 

When     can     you    have    the  watch 

rea  dy  ? 
By  nine  o'clock  to-morrow  forenoon. 


1  L.  XXIV. 

8 144, 5. 


3  L.  XXVI. 

*U57, 1. 


5  L.  XXXII. 

6  Adverb.    . 


7  §92. 

8  5  139. 3. 


11.  GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  IDIOMS. 

Rem.  For  the  purpose  of  showing  the  difference  between  the  idiomatic 
structure  of  the  German  and  English  languages  more  at  length  than  was  i>08- 
sible  in  theles«oiis:f  Part  Fi' st,  there  are  given  below  a  few  classified  lists  of 
such  idioms  as  are  in  most  common  use  in  both  languages. 

To  correctly  apprehend  the  idiomatic  spirit  of  a  language,  it  is  necessary, 
in  the  first  place,  to  have  an  accurate  idea  of  the  primary  and  fundamental 
signification  of  the  words  of  the  language  ;  secondly,  to  know  the  modifications 
of  meaning  to  which  the  words  have  been  subjected,  and  the  figurative  signi- 
fications in  which  they  are  employed  ;  and,  thirdly,  to  know  how  far  expres- 
sions, phrases,  and  sentences  (especially  set  phrases  and  proverbs)  are  ellip- 
tical. 

1.  Idioms  with  ^aben  and  to  hxive. 

3(^  ^abe  bic  5lbfic^t,  morgen   nad;    I  intend  to  start  for  Munich  to-mor- 
aJiiliid^en  abjureifen,'  row. 


^aben  Sie  %&)i !  or  ^abc  (bu)  %6^\.  I 

2)a§  tjat  unfern  33cifaII, 

SSir  t^aben  g^iAtS*  bagegen,' 

m  ^at  gro^e  (Silc, 

e«  ^at  teine*  Stic, 

2Bir  ^aben  ibii  febr  gcrn, 

@ie  ^aben  gut  lad^en, 

3d;  ^abc  2)urft ;  tc^  ^abc  §ungcr, 

^aben  ®ie  Sangetceile  ? 

er  ^at  feinc  Suft  e8  ju*  t^un, 

^^  ^atte"^  Suft  c8  i^m  ju  jagen, 

2)^orgcnftunbc  ^at  ®olb  im  2Jiunbe 

(®prid?tt>ort), 
(gr  ^at  ®clb  jebr  niJt^tg, 
3d)  a^erbe  c8  t^un,  obtoot^r  i^  c8  ntd^t 

not^ig  \:iabt, 
(Sr  ^at  feinen  ^^^u^en  ba\3on, 
©ic  ^aben  Sicc^t,  er  ^at  Unred^t, 
S)a8  ^at  ^titd^tS  ju  jagcn, 
2Bcr  ben  @d?aben  bat,  brauc^t  fiir  ben 

@pott  nic^t  %\\  forgen  (@pr.), 
SSJer  ^t  ©c^ulb  bar  an,  bag  bcr  S3ricf 

nic^t  nac^  ber  ^ojl  gefc^tcft  tourbc?* 
(Sr  ^at  fcine  @c^ulb  baran, 


Take  care  I  look  out  I 

That  meets  our  approval. 

We  have  no  objection  to  that. 

It  admits  of  no  delay. 

There  is  no  haste  about  it. 

We  like  him  very  much. 

You  may  well  laugh. 

I  am  thirsty ;  I  am  hungry. 

Have  you  ennuie  ? 

He  has  no  desire  to  do  that. 

I  should  like  to  tell  it  to  him. 

Early  to  bed  and  early  to  rise,  makes 

a  man  healthy,  wealthy,  and  wise. 
He  is  hard  pushed  for  money. 
I  will  do  it,  although  I  am  in  no  way 

obliged  to. 
He  derives  no  advantage  from  it. 
You  are  right ;  he  is  wrong. 
That  is  of  no  consequence. 
He  who  loses  may  be  sure  of  being 

laughed  at  in  the  bargain. 
Whose  fault  is  it  that  the  letter  waa 

not  sent  to  the  post-oflSce  ? 
It  is  not  his  fault. 


1 5 160, 3. 
2  5112,9. 


»§188,item.L 
*  J 112. 3. 


5  5  127,  Exc.  4. 
•5126. 


'5268 
61184. 


IDO 


IDIOMS. 


SSir  ^aben  fetncn  Umgang'  mtt  i^nen, 
@ie  t;abcii  t)ie  2Ba^t, 
SSir  ^abeu  ntc^t  toeit  nac^  ^aufe, 
3c^  mu^  ^eute  btele  33efuc^e  mac^en, 
^d;  tt)erbe9}Jorgen  nad;2)resben  ge^en 

nuiffen,* 
^d;  (;abe  fiinf  sBriefc  fc^rcibcn  miiffen, 

betoor  i^  gcfjen  fonnte, 
^(^  er^ielt  toon  mciuem  33ruber  einen 

33net  ^eute  9JJorgen, 
2Bir  trerben  i)or  Slbenb  ein  ©emitter 

befommen, 
^6)  ^abc  eg  toon  i^m  fetbft^  gebort, 
^c^  benfe*  baran,  mir   einen  ^ocf 

mac^en  ju  laffen, 
©laube  mir,  ba§  bein  2Bo^l  beinem 

3Sater  am  ^ergen  liegt, 
(Sr  tt)ei§  feine  Slufgabe  au§ltoenbig, 
2ln  gveunben  fe^lt  e8  i^m  nid^t, 


We  do  not  associate  with  them. 
You  may  take  your  choice. 
We  have  not  far  to  go  home. 
I  have  many  visits  to  make  to  day. 
I  have  to  go  to  Dresden  to  morrow. 

I  had  to  write  five  letters  before  I 

could  go. 
I  had  a  letter  from  my  brother  this 

morning. 
We  shall  have  a  thunder-storm  before 

evening. 
I  have  this  from  his  own  mouth. 
I  am  thinking  of  having  a  coat  made. 

Believe  me,  your  father  has  yom*  wel- 
fare at  heart. 
He  has  his  lesson  by  heart. 
He  has  friends  enough. 


2.  Idioms  with  fcitl  and  to  he. 


@o  toiel  an  mir  ifl, 

S)er  9}ionb  war  noc^  nic^t  auf,» 

S)ag  genfter  ift  auf, 

ajJir  ift  fait ;  mir  ift  warm, 

mix'  ift  nic^t  ttoo^I, 

S)a§  §aug  ift  mir  nid^t  feil  (or  3Wein 

§au8  ift  nic^t  ju  toerfaufen), 
^6)  bin  i^m  berjtic^  gut, 
^^  bin  ber  SD^einung/ 
@eien  ®ie  (or  @ei)  gute§  2J?ut^c3  I« 
Sin  ©ebulbiger  ift  beffer  benn  ein 

@tarfer;  unb  ber  feineg  9Jiut^eg 

§err  ift,  benn  ber  ©tabte  gettoinnet 

(®^riid?e  16,  32), 
Ttix  xcax  babei  nic^t  too^I  ju  9Kut^e, 
SSeriftec^uIbbaran? 
(Sr  ift  nic^t  ®d)ulb  baran, 
2Bie  toiet  finb  @ie  ibm  fc^utbig? 
3c^  bin  i^m  500  Scaler  fc^ulbig, 
@inb  @ie  im  @tanbe  e8  i^m  ju  beja^ten? 
SSorlaufig  bin  ic^  eg  nic^t  im  @tanbe, 
(Sr  ift  mUixiQ  etltoaS  gu  geben, 


As  far  as  is  in  my  power. 

The  moon  had  not  yet  risen. 

The  window  is  open. 

I  am  cold  ;  I  am  warm. 

I  do  not  feel  well. 

My  house  is  not  for  sale. 

I  love  (or  like)  him  very  much. 

I  am  of  the  opinion  (or  I  think). 

Be  of  good  courage  (or  cheer) ! 

He  that  is  slow  to  anger  is  better  than 
the  mighty ;  and  he  that  ruleth  his 
spirit,  than  he  that  taketh  a  city 
(Proverbs  XVL,  32). 

My  feelings  upon  that  occasion  were 

Whose  fault  is  it  ?         [not  agreeable. 

It  is  not  his  fault. 

How  much  do  you  owe  him  ? 

I  owe  him  five  hundred  thalers. 

Are  you  able  to  pay  him? 

At  present  I  am  not  able  to  do  it. 

He  intends  giving  something. 


'  §  68, 1. 

^i  162,  Rem.  2. 


3  5 108,  Rem.  3. 
*  i  139. 


5  §  ISl,  1. 

6  §  179, 2,  Rem.i. 


'  $  178, 1,  Rem.  f 
8  §  89,  Ren\  1. 


IDIOMS. 


191 


Qx  ip*  jd;on  angcfommen, 
(Sr  n)ar  fc^on  angetommen, 
aiJenn  cr  nur  liinger  geblieben'  tt)arc, 
I  was  at  the  meeting,  but  I  did  not 

see  you, 
He  is  beside  himself. 
He  is  in  love  with  her, 
He  is  engaged  to  (be  married  to)  her, 
He  is  of  a  robust  constitution, 
I  am  out  of  that  book  at  present, ) 
I  have  not  that  book  at  present,  > 
He  is  not  yet  of  age, 
To  be  sure. 
Let  that  be ! 


He  has  already  arrived. 

He  had  already  arrived. 

If  he  only  hud  remained  longor. 

3(^  tDo^nte  ber  ^crjammlung  bei,' 

(gr  tft  i>erril(ft.* 

@r  ifi  mit  i^r  tcrlicbt.* 

(Sr  ift  mit  i^r  bcrlobt. 

(5r  ifi  Don  [tarfcm  ^i5r^crbau. 

3d?  ^ciU  bag  Suc^  augcublicflic^  nid)t 

toorrcit^ig. 
(Sr  ift  nod}  nic^t  milnbtg. 
2)ag  toerftet^t  fic^. 
diii^xt  baS  nic^t  an  I« 


3.  Idioms  with  ttJCrbcn  and  to  hecome. 


SGBil^cIm  ^n^n  ift  %xii  gctoorbcn, 
@ie  njurbc  ^iiJ^Uc^  fet>r  bla^, 
(S8  n)irb  balb  ^ricbc  tDcrbcn, 
2)a8  ®ebrange^  wurbe  ju  grog, 
2)urc^  @c^aben  mirb  man  Hug, 
2)ie  Xagc  werben  longer, 
2)te  3cit  tt)irb  mir  lang, 
®ott  f^rac^  :  e8  tocrbc  Sid^t !  unb  c8 

njarb  Sid^t ! 
@te  TOurbe  rot^  (or  crriJt^etc), 
2)er  aiabc  »irb  fc^r  alt, 
Sllfo  njarb  ber  Mtn\&i  cine  tebenbigc 

®cele  (bag  (Srfte  SSucb  2«ofe,  2,  7), 
3c^  werbe  fc^trinblic^  (ic^  fd;n?inble, 

c8  fc^roinbcit  mir,  mir  fd^winbelt), 
3fc^  bin  feineS  @d;nja^cn8  ilberbriiffig, 
25aS  ift  bet  unS  jum  S^ric^tDort  gc* 

n>orben, 
35er  33aum  ift  ju  ©tein  gcworben, 
3)a8  foil  2)ir  jur  @trafe  ttjcrbcn, 
2)er  ^anfc  tt)irb  njiebcr  gefunb, 
2Ba8  foil  bamit  merben  ? 
SaJir  acrben  morgen  abreifcn, 
2)cr  ©runbftcin  ber  ^rc^c  tt)irb  ilber* 

morgen  gelegt  trerben," 
©inc  neuc  33rilcfe  toirb  je^t  gebaut. 


William  Kuhn  has  become  a  physi- 
She  suddenly  turned  very  pale,  [eiaii. 
We  shall  soon  have  peace. 
The  crowd  (press)  became  too  great. 
By  experiencing  evil  one  becomes  wise. 
The  days  are  becoming  longer. 
Time  hangs  heavy  on  my  hands. 
God  said,  Let  there  be  light,  and  there 

was  light. 
She  bluslied. 

The  raven  lives  to  a  great  age. 
And  man  became  a  living  soul  (Gen. 

11.,  7). 
I  am  getting  dizzy  (I  am  dizzy). 

I  am  tired  of  his  chattering. 

That  has  become  a  proverb  with  us. 

The  tree  has  become  petrified. 

That  shall  be  your  punishment. 

The  patient  is  recovering. 

What  shall  be  done  with  it  ? 

We  shall  leave  to-morrow. 

The  corner-stone  of  the  church  will 

be  laid  day  after  to-morrow. 
A  new  bridge  is  now  being  built. 


» U35,  2. 

»  %  125,  2,  Rtm.  2. 


3  $  160,  2. 

♦  5  134,  Bern.  1. 


5  5156. 
e  { 150,  2. 


7  §  66, 3. 

8  5134. 


VJ2 


IDIOMS. 


4.  The  Potential  Mood  and  Future  Indicative  of  the 
English  verb. 


We  can  go  to-day, 

We  can  not  go  to-day, 

We  can  go  to-morrow. 

We  could  not  go  yesterday, 

We  could  have  gone  yesterday, 

He  may  say  what  he  will. 

He  may  go,  if  he  likes, 

He  says  that  he  can  go  to-day. 

He  might  go,  if  he  would, 

(It)  may  be  it  will  rain. 

We  must  go  early,  that  we  may  get 
a  good  place  {or  so  as  to  get  a  good 

As  fast  as  may  be,  [place), 

If  I  may  ask, 

We  must  go  to-day. 

We  would  have  been  obliged  to  go 
yesterday. 

We  shall  leave  to-morrow, 

Shall  you  leave  to-morrow  ?    Yes. 

Shall  you  be  able  to  visit  us  to- 
morrow ? 

I  hope  I  shall, 

Shall  I  bring  the  book? 

Shall  he  be  rewarded  ? 

He  should  go  immediately. 

Should  he  go  immediately  (or  if  he 
should  go  immediately), 

I  should  like  to  know, 

I  should  not  have  done  that, 

I  will  bring  the  book, 

I  will  try  it, 

I  would  go  with  you,  if  I  had  time. 


I  would  not  have  given  it  to  him, 

I  would  rather  not  go, 
Would  that  I  had  not  done  it! 


SBtr  fijnnen  ^eutc  gc^cn. 
§eutc  fiJnnen  xoxx  nid^t  ge^cn. 
2Btr  toerben  morgen  ge^en  fonneu.* 
©eftern  !onnten  xoix  nic^t  ge^cn. 
SBir  fatten'  geftern  ge^en  f5nncn. 
@r  mag  fagen,  tuaS  er  toill.^ 
@r  taitn  gc^cn,  t»enn  cr  tt)itt. 
@r  fagt,  ba^  er  ^eute  ge^en  fann. 
©r  tonnte  ge^en,  trenn  er  ge^en  tuoUtc. 
©8  fonnte  regnen  (ijtelleic^t  voixh  e8 

regnen). 
SSir  miiffen  fril^  ^tnge^en,  bamtt  xoxx 

einen  guten  ^la^  betommen.* 
(So  gefc^n^tnb  (or  fc^nett)  aU  mSgtid^. 
2Benn  i^  fragen  barf. 
SGBir  ntiiffen  ^eute  ge^en. 
2Btr  fatten  geftern  ge^en  miiffen. 

SStr  hjerben  morgen  abretfen. 
2Serben  ®ie  morgen  abreifen?    ^a. 
SSirb  es  3^nen  mogU(^  fetn,  un8  mor^ 

gen  ju  befuc^en  ? 
^d?  ^offe  eg,  ja. 
®oEMd^ba§^uc^^oIcn? 
(Soil  er  belo^nt  njerben? 
(Sr  follte  glei(^  ge^en. 
(goltte  er  gleid^  ge^en  (or  tuenn  er  gleid^ 

ge^en  follte). 
S^d;  mijc^te^  gem  tviffen. 
3f(^  tDilrbe  ba§  nic^t  get{;an  ^abcn  (or 

tc^  ^atte  bag  nic^t  get^an). 
^<i)  tuerbe  ^a^  S3ud;  boten. 
^d)  h)tH  e§  berfuc^en. 
3fci  n?ilrbe  mitge^en''  (or  t(^gtnge^mxt, 

h)enn  id)  bte  ^dt  ha^u  ^citte  (or  ^citte 

id)  bte  ^eit  bap). 
^d)  tt)iirbe  e8  tbm  nic^t  gcgcbcn  ^aben, 

(or  ic^  ^citte  eg  i^m  ntc^t  gegeben), 
^d)  mo(^te  Iteber  ntc!^t  ge^en. 
SSenn  id^  e8  nur  ntc^t  get^an  battel 


1  5  162,  Rem.  2. 
»  $  124, 3. 


3  §166. 

4  §124. 


5  §  163. 
«  §  124,  3. 


'§126. 
8  §126. 


IDIOMS. 


193 


5.  Idioms  with  the  verb  Iflffcn,  to  leave^  to  let. 


SSer  ^at  tie  Xl^iirc  offen  gelaffen  ? 

i!a6  mid)  in  9iu^'  I 

SSo  ^at  er  baS  ^ud)  gclaffen  ? 

(5r  ^at  bic  ©ele^eu^eit  au8  bcu  ^5n=» 

ben  gelafi'en, 
(Sr  licjj'  feiiieii  ©efii^Icn  freicn  2auf, 
(Sr  ^at  fie  ge^cn  laffcn, 
3d;  werbc  cS  i^m  iDiffen  taffcn, 
er  trirb  [ic^  nid;t  batjon  abfc^rccfcn 

laffeji, 
3c^  trerbe  mir  bei  bent  ©(i^ncibcr  ct* 

nen  9iocf  mad;en  laffen, 
3(^  ^abc  metnen  Ucbcrroct'  ausbeffcrn 

laffen, 
gr  wirb  cin  ^au8  baucn  laffcn, 
2)cr  ^au^ttnann  lie^  bic  ga^nc  aut* 

jic^en, 
er  lieB  bic  Slnfil^rcr  crj^ie^en,' 
SWcin  33rubcr  ta^t  2)id;  grii^cn, 

er  lieg  bic  altcn  ©cjc^c*  wiebcr  in 

^raft  trcten, 
^&l  laffc  mid;  nid;t  bamit^  tdujd^cn. 
asir  muj'fcn  \\)\\  nid;t  trartcn  kffen, 
2)a8  Ici^t  fid;«  leid^t  bcgrcifen, 
2)ag  la^t  fic^  bcnfcii, 
^ierauS  la^t  fid^  folgem, 
Gr  miifjte  fid;  bic  33elcibigung  gcfallcn 

laffcn,  [^orcn, 

©9  Iii§t  fic^  ^ier  ^fhcmanb  fc^cn  unb 
e«  ISfJt  fit^  ^«r  angcnc^m'  Icbcn, 


Who  has  left  the  door  open  ? 
Leave  me  alone !  (leave  me  in  peiice  I) 
Where  did  he  put  the  book  ? 
He  has  let  the  opportunity  slip. 

He  gave  free  vent  to  his  feelings. 

He  let  them  go. 

I  shall  let  him  know  it. 

He  will  not  let  himself  be  frightened 

from  it. 
I  shall  have  the  tailor  make  me  a 

coat. 
I  have  had  my  overcoat  mended. 

He  will  have  a  house  built. 

The  captain  ordered  the  flag  to  be 

raised. 
He  ordered  the  leaders  to  be  shot. 
My  brother  wishes  to  be  remembered 

to  you. 
He  had  the   old  laws  put  in  force 

again.  [that 

I  do  not  let  myself  be  deceived  by 
We  must  not  keep  him  waiting. 
That  can  be  easily  imagined. 
That  can  be  imagined. 
From  this  may  be  deduced. 
He  had  to  put  up  with  the  offense. 

Nobody  is  to  be  seen  or  heard  here. 
It  is  agreeable  living  here. 


6.  Idioms  with 

I  must  get  (procure)  the  book, 

He  could  get  (find)  no  employment 

in  the  city, 
The  cook  has  gone  to  the  bakery  to 

get  some  bread, 
I  shall  get  a  new  suit  of  clothes  made, 

I  must  get  my  photograph  taken, 


the  verb  to  get. 

3c^  tnu^  X}a%  33u(i^  anfd^affen. 

Sr  tonnte  feinc  S3cfc^aftigung^  in  ber 

@tabt  finbcn. 
2)cr  So(^  ifl  m&i  bcr  535(fcrci  gcgan* 

gen,  urn  33rcb  gn  ^olcn. 
3^  ttjcrbc  mir  ctncn  neucn  Slnjug  ma« 

^cn  (affen. 
3c^  mu^  mic^  ^^Qtogra^^ircn  laffcn. 


15144,4. 

^{58. 


3  5 158,  3. 
*567,3,1;  566,3. 


5  6  188, 10,  Rem.  1. 
C5120;  5134,2. 


7  5  174, 1. 

8  557,2,8;  566.8. 


194 


IDIOMS. 


I  must  get  my  hair  cut, 

I  must  get  my  boots  mended, 

lie  must  get  his  lesson  by  heart, 

The  cook  is  getting  dinner  (ready), 

I  must  get  ready  for  my  journey^ 

He  has  not  got  back  yet, 

We  shall  get  home  before  evening. 

Why  don't  you  get  married  ? 

They  have  not  got  (moved)  into  their 

new  house  yet, 
He  has  got  possession  of  the  house, 
They  could  not  get  the  ship  off, 

He  got  all  the  money  out  of  him  he 
could,  and  then  he  left  him, 

William  is  getting  along  well  in  his 
studies, 

Mr.  Schmidt  is  getting  along  well  in 
business, 

1  could  not  get  free  from  him. 

He  has  got  out  of  debt. 

We  can  not  get  through  here. 

We  did  not  get  to  the  top  of  the 

mountain, 
We  did  not  get  quite  to  the  top  of 

the  mountain, 
They  got  together  at  seven  o'clock. 
It  is  high  time  to  get  up, 
I  can  not  get  up  there, 
Get  down  from  there  immediately. 
It  is  getting  late. 
The  days  are  getting  longer, 


^6)  tnu^  tntr  baS  §aar  jd^ttctbcn  laff  en. 
S6)  ntu^  nictne  ®tief  d  relpartren  taff  en. 
@r   mu§  feinc   Slufgabe   augtoenbig 

ternen. 
2)ci:  ^0^  bercitet  bag  2J?ittageffcn,  - 
^c^  mu^  mid;  fllr  bte  9Jeif  e  borberctten,  - 
@r  ift  no(^  nid;t  jurildgetommen, 
a5ir  ttjerben  i)or  3lbenb  na6)  ^au  je  tom^ 
SBarum  ^eirat^en  @te  md;t  ?       [men. 
@ie  finb  noc^  nic^t  in  i^r  neues  §au8 

gejogen.^^ 
(Sr  ift  in  ben  S3e[i^  be§  §aujeg  gelangt. 
^lan  !onnte  bag  @c^iff  nid^t  n^iebet 

ftott  mad;en. 
@r  er^re^te  i^m  fo  ijtel  ®etb  aU  er  nur 

tonnte,  unb  bann  terlte^'  er  i^n. 
SBil^elm  maci^t  gute  gortfc^ritte  in  bcr 

$err  (Sd^mibt  ma6)i  gute  ®t\6)a\tt. 

S6)  !onnte  mic^  i)on  i^m  ntd^t  losma* 
@r  ^at  feine  ©d^ntben  beja^It.  [(^cn* 
^ier  ift  !ein  S)nr(^gang  (or  ^ier  f onnen 

tDtr  nic^t  burc^fommen). 
SSir  Ijaben  bie  @^i^e  beg  33ergeg  nic^t 

erreid;t. 
2Bir  finb  ntd^t  gan^  big  an  bic  ®^)i^c 

beg  S3ergeg  f)inanfge!ommen.* 
©te  terfammelten  fic^  um  fieben  U^r. 
@g  ift  bie  ^i5c^fte*  ^dt  aufjufte^en. 
3d)  fann  ba  nic^t  ^inauffommen. 
'3Jla^\  ba^  bu  g(ei(^  ^erunter*  fommji. 
(gg  tcirb  fd^on  f^cit. 
S)ie  2:age  toerbcn  langer. 


7.  Idioms  with  prepositions. 

1.  2luS  (§  220),  au%et  (§  221). 


36)  Dertor'  i^n  aug  ben  3lngen, 
^ug  feinem  ^riefe  erfe^e  ic^— 
^err  5Brann  ift  aug  Berlin, 
Sr  ftammt  ang  einer  alten  ^amttie,^ 
@inb  biefe  53iid;er  aug  ber  ^tceiten 
§anb? 


I  lost  sight  of  him. 
I  perceive  from  his  letter — 
Mr.  Braun  is  from  Berlin. 
He  comes  from  an  old  family. 
Are  these  second-hand  books 


1  5  157,  2,  Eem.  3. 

2  5 144,  6. 


3  §155,  5. 
*§157;  §150,3. 


6  §90. 
6  §188, 


7*144,6. 
•§37. 


IDIOMS. 


195 


Jtus  ttjctc^em  ®runbe  Be»etfcn  @ic 

bas? 
Qx  Icbt  au«  ber  ^anb  in  ben  2JJunb, 
2)aS  tann  man  natiirtic^  nic^t  au3  bcm 

i^o^fe  fagcn, 
WUn  \)at  \\)n  au8  blofeem  35erbad^t  ber* 

(;aftet, 
Sr  ^at  c«  au8  35orfa^  Qct^an, 
S)aS  ttJei^  i(^  au8  erfa^rung, 
2Ba8  njtrb  au8  i^m  trerbcn  ? 
3c^  bin  bcgicrig  5U  ipiffen,  Xoa9  ou8 

ber  @ad;c  n?irb, 
2)a  njarb  au«  9D?orgcn  unb  Slbenb  bet 

er|tc»  Xag(l.2«of.  1,5), 
2)ie  Beit  ift  au8  (§  181, 1), 
2:rinte  bu  e8  ganj  au8, 
e«  ift  au8  mit  \\)m, 
3Son  §aufe  au8  ift  ei=^  conferbati», 
(Sr  ift  au^er  fic^  »or  grcube, 
2)iefe«  SGBort  ift  je^t  au^er  ©ebraud^, 
(gr  mirb  e«  tiid^t  t^un,  au^er  (§  260) 

»enn  ®ie  mit  i^m  barilber  \pxt<i)m, 


How  do  you  prove  that  ? 

He  lives  from  hand  to  mouth. 

Of  course  one  can  not  hold  all  the 
paiticulars  of  that  in  one's  head. 

They  arrested  him  upon  mere  sus- 
picion. 

He  did  it  intentionally. 

That  I  know  by  experience. 

What  will  become  of  him? 

I  am  curious  to  know  how  the  matter 
will  turn  out. 

And  the  evening  and  the  morning 
were  the  first  day  (Gen.  I.,  5). 

The  time  is  up. 

Drink  it  all  up  (down). 

It  is  all  over  with  him.        [servative. 

He  is  originally  (and  naturally)  con- 
He  is  beside  himself  from  joy. 

This  word  is  now  obsolete. 

He  will  not  do  it  unless  you  speak  to 
him  about  it. 


2.  Set  (§  222). 


53ei  %\it  bem,  ijl  er  ein  Wtann  i)on 

e^re, 
S3eim'  erften  3lnbli(f  ^attc*  ic^  nic^t  gc* 

glaubt — 
(gg  ift  nic^t  me^r  ®itte  bei  un8, 
i8ei  ben  9ii5mern  n?urbe  e8  @ittc, 
^err  Oia^n  ift  beim  (Sffen  (bei  Xifc^e), 
@ie  fi^t  beim  offenen  genfter,* 
S3ei  biefer  ©elegcnbeit, 
S3ei  SebenSjeit  meineS  SSaterS, 


For  all  that,  he  is  a  man  of  honor. 

At  first  sight,  I  would  not  have  be- 

Ueved — 
It  is  not  the  custom  with  us.    [mans. 
It  was  custom  with  (among)  the  Ro» 
Mr.  Rahn  is  at  the  table. 
She  is  sitting  at  an  open  window. 
Upon  this  occasion. 
During  my  father's  life-time. 


8.  ?Drit  (§  227) 

3c^  ^abt  es  mit  eigenen  ?lugcn  gefe^en," 
er  i)at  ba8  §au8  mit  baarcm  ®etbe 

@r  ^at  e8  mit  ©ctuatt  genommen, 
2Jiit  einem  2J?aIe  ging  e§  Io«/ 
(Sin  ^err,  mit  ^amen  3o^.  @c^mibt, 
S^  ^abe  mit  9iitcftebr  ber  ^^oft  einen 
S3rief  toon  i^m  betommen,^ 


I  saw  it  with  my  own  eyes. 
He  paid  for  the  house  in  cash. 

He  took  it  by  force. 
All  of  a  sudden  it  exploded. 
A  man  by  the  name  of  John  Smith. 
I  received  a  letter  from  him  by  return 
mail. 


1592. 

'{40,2;  i' 


),S,Renu 


^i  54,1,  Rem.  2, 3. 
♦§126. 


5{68. 
6  5144.2. 


7 162,  3. 
8  5 165,1. 


196 


IDIOMS. 


©r  ^at  c8  mtt  SBorfa^  get^an, 
@r  iiat  eg  mtt  leifer  ©timme  gelefcn, 
ma  ber  Beit  ^fliicft  man  Seojen, 
2)ic  Sf^cta  tt)urbe  mtt  ^^Jroteft  jitriicf* 

gefe^icft,^ 
2)te  3njcl;rift  t[t  mit  golbcnen  S3uc^* 

ftaben  gefd;rieben, 
SKtr  ge^en  nac^  bem  3J2ufeiim ;  tDoEeit 

©iemtt? 
ai3oUeit=^  @tc  bag  SSud^  mit  (fid;)  net)* 

men? 

S^iad^  get^anev  Slrbeit  ift  gut  ru^en, 

[fd;et;en, 
@S  foil  gang  nad^  i^rem  53elieben  ge* 
(gg  ^at  je^t  fec^S  jtage  nac^  einanber 

geregnet, 
3m  3a^re  1820^  nac^  (S^tt  ©eburt, 
2)aS  ^leib  ift  nid^t  nad;  meinem  @e^ 

fc^mad, 
S)a§  £)bft  n?irb  in  2)eutf(^lanb  nact> 

bem  ®en)id;t  berfauft, 
SfJac^  meiner  U^r  ift  e«  je^t  brei  3Siertet* 

auf  ®ec^8,  • 

2)ag  2)am^ffd?iff  ift  nac^  Hamburg 

beftimmt, 
2)er  3Jlaler  ^at  biefe'*  Sanbfd;aft  nad^ 

ber  SfJatnr  gejeid^net, 


lie  did  it  designedly. 
He  read  it  in  a  low,  soft  voice,  [about. 
Time  and  patience  bring  every  thing 
The  note  was  returned  under  protest. 

The  inscription  is  written  in  golden 

letters. 
We  are  going  to  the  Museum ;  will 

you  go  along  ? 
Will  you  take  the  book  with  you  ? 

(§228). 

Sleep  is    sound   when    the  work   is 

done. 
It  shall  be  done  exactly  as  you  desire. 
It  has  now  been  raining  six  days  in 

succession. 
In  the  year  of  our  Lord  1820. 
The  dress  is  not  to  my  taste. 

In  Germany  the  fruit  is  sold  by  weight. 

By  my  watch  it  is  now  a  quarter  ro 

six. 
The  steamer  is  bound  for  Hamburg. 

The  painter  drew  this  landscape  from 
nature. 


§err  Slein  ift  ein  2)eutfc^er°  toon  @e= 

burt, 
SBag  toerlangen  @ie  toon  nnS  ? 
^err  9^ot^  ift  ein  5lrjt  toon  ^rofeffion, 
Sr  ift 'ein  2Jiann  toon  etnja  fiinfjig 

SSon  ^ergenS  ©runbe, 

(£r  h)urbe  toon  c^rlid^en  ©ttern  ge* 

borcn, 
dx  njurbe  toon  Men  getiebt, 
©r  lebt  toon  feinen  (gin!itnften, 
S)a§  ttoar  fe^r  freunblic^^  toon  ifjm, 
e§  voax  fe^rllnred^t  toon  ibm  ba^,e^r., 
SBtr  njo^nen  je^n  Wltikn  toon  ^ier,* 


5.  ason  (§  234). 

Mr.  Klein  is  a  German  by  birth. 


What  do  you  ask  (wish)  of  us  ? 
Mr.  Roth  is  a  physician  by  professioh 
He  is  a  man  about  fifty  years  old. 

From  the  bottom  of  my  heart. 
He  was  born  of  honest  parents. 

He  was  beloved  by  all. 

He  lives  upon  his  income. 

That  was  very  kind  in  him. 

It  was  very  wrong  in  him  that,  etc. 

We  reside  ten  miles  from  here. 


'5134;  5161. 
*5  118,3;  §166. 


3599. 
*  5 104.  2. 


55111,1. 

«  5  89,  Rem.  10. 


■'5  86,2,6. 
8  §266. 


IDIOMS. 


197 


6.  3tt  (§  235). 


Sir  toerben,  jum  93cif^iel'— 

§cutc  tuirb  in  bcr  ^rd;e  einc  8amm* 

lung-  sum  33eficn  bet  2lnncn  in  ber 

@tabt  ge^altcn,^' 
S8  irirb  i^m  nid^t  jur  Sbrc  gcrcic^cn, 
2)er  ^icg  wirb  balb  ju  Snbe  fein, 
3nm  crften,  i^um  anbcrn,*  jum  brit* 

ten  (aHal) ! 
(5r  \a\)  sum  ^^ufter  ^inau8, 
3c^  babe  bas  Xn^  ju  brei  Scaler  bie 

(Stte  getauft, 
2)a8  9ieid^  ift  ju  ©runbc  gcgangcn, 
§ier  ifi  ciu  aJiufttftilcf  gu  tier  §dnbcn 

(or  filr  tier  ^anbe), 
2)cr  33aumei[ter  bat  bicfcS  ^au8  jum 

3J?obctt  genommen, 
3ur*  felbcn  3eit, 

(Sr  ift  jum  ^au^tmann  ernannt  toorben," 
3u  trelc^cm  3^ccf  e  bat  er  baS  get^an  ? 


We  will,  for  example — 

A   collection   will   be  taken    in   the 

church  to-day  for  the  benefit  of  the 

poor  in  the  city. 
It  will  not  redound  to  his  honor. 
The  war  will  soon  be  at  an  end. 
Going,  going,  gone  !  (at  an  auction). 

He  was  looking  out  of  the  window. 
I  paid  three  thalers  a  yard   for  the 

cloth.  [to  ruins). 

The  empire  has  fallen  to  pieces  (gone 
Here  is  a  piece  of  music  arranged  for 

four  hands. 
The  architect  has  taken  this  house 

for  his  model. 
At  the  same  time, 
lie  has  been  appointed  captain. 
For  what  purpose  has  he  done  that  ? 


».  nn  (§  245). 


SScnn  idb  an  ^ijx^x  ©telle  ttjSrc, 

3ln  rocm  ift  c8  ju  lejen  ? 

2)ie  9ietbe  ift  an  mir,  ju  lefen, 

S«  ift  an  ^viebridb, 

2)er  aJiann  gcbt  an  triidcn, 

dx  fi^t  am  genfter,^ 

(Ss  ift  nic^tS  an  ber  @a^c, 

(Sine  9Jebe  an  ben  ^i5nig, 

?(n  unb  filr  fid^,  [njcfenb. 

S8  warcn  an  tilnfbunbert  ^erfonen  an* 

^6f  babe  micb  an  ibn  gewcnbet, 


If  I  were  in  your  place. 

Whose  turn  is  it  to  read  ? 

It  is  my  turn  to  read. 

It  is  Frederick's  turn. 

The  man  goes  on  crutches. 

He  is  sitting  at  the  window. 

There  is  nothing  true  in  it. 

An  address  to  the  king. 

In  and  of  itself  (per  se).  [sons  present. 

There  were  toward  five  hundred  per- 

I  applied  to  him. 


8.  9luf  (§246). 


aWein  53rubcr  ifl  auf  ber  3agb, 

(Sine  2lnttt?ort  auf  einen  SBrief, 

@ic  n?ar  bcfe*  auf  ibn^ 

(Sr  bat  biel  ®elb  auf  Sild^er  gewanbt, 

SBilbelm  gcbt  auf  ben  3)?artt, 

i©i«  auf  tteiteren  ^Bcfcbt,  [ten, 

Sluf  bie  (Sefunbbeit  ciner  ^erfon  trin* 

2Bir  babcn  lange  auf  ibn  gewartct, 


My  brother  has  gone  hunting. 

An  answer  to  a  letter. 

She  was  angry  at  him. 

He  has  spent  much  money  in  books. 

William  is  going  to  market. 

Until  further  orders. 

To  drink  to  a  person's  health. 

We  have  waited  for  him  a  long  time. 


'5  58. 
»457.2.& 


35104. 

*  5 102,  iJem.  5. 


*  5  M,  Reni.  2. 
6  5  131,  Jiem.  3. 


"  J  08,  Exc 
«»5288. 


in.  KXAMTLKS  OF  SYNONYMS. 

|ol4t»bttmit  ^IViffet  KKHft  ftwt*,  unb  cbnc  ^)iJUffut)t  auf  fetiicn  unvtbjAaft- 
IMIm  Siu^cn  ((VvllUub,  (.»\\Mv;ilanb,  ^umvfUuib,  ^I  icjlaub).  ^-  c  1  b  ift  ^^anb, 
H  Wig  g^t  ^lUgtad^tc*  tva.Ku  obcv  nid^t  O-i^v^^cl^tcIb,  ^ilMntcvfclb,  ^i\>ci3cn. 
frfbX    Htftt  }^  nut  mrflut?  jjcbautcx^  ^-clb  (.^atcvacfcr,  iilccarfcr,  i^alfU 

9ii  ItftTf  ttiAttn  ijl  bcrieuuK,  bcjlcii  ^aiipt^Mcbaft  bcv  '^IJcvbau  \%  n 
Wtg  tlvigort  itt  bet  ^tdbt  o«(Y  auf  bcm  V^anbc  ivcbnciu  ^  a  ii  b  tv  i  r  t  b  unb 
S  ft  net  fil^lelni'  w^  tei  SRectmal  ein,'  bag  cin  folder  nicbt  in  ber  «8tabt, 
fN^bcoi  wf  blM  ^Mte  IM|«t«*  Uutcv  ft(b  ftnb  V?aubtvtrtbc  uub  Waiter  barin 
lRt|<|tou^  Wt» »l^  bm  it^tgo^  O^cbraucb,  bav^  Ic^tcrc  ^llnnt  nicbt  blct^  ba^ 
9(|^  fMltni  «w|  b«i  eisuib  C«  bet  bflrcjcrltd^ni  (S^c jcU jcbaft),  bav^  crfterc 
Kt|  b«l  9^^^  oaieigt  mib  btn  etanb  gar  ni*t  anbcutet.  &n 
I  fttirt  DHtttr^itt  bcfitjt,  auf  bcmfcttMUi'  Icbt  unb  e8  felbfi  be* 
1(1  da  Saxboiit^ ;  abcr  a  ifl  fcin  ;^^cr,  bcnn  cr  gcbcrt  nid^ 
|Mi«MKnfMbc.  C^aa^.) 


S.  Viffltlci,  erpt^cn,  aufcr^c^cn* 

S^  SiclEt  |a^  c^nlftd^ :  ast  bcc  aegenbcn  cber  ft^enben  in  He  f^^ 
€Mteg  HgylaL  ^gii^  tbec^a^ :  fOf  rdfebta.  (pon  tuiem  ennben* 
frik  «iik|oi»  eMow  tifafk|ai>  S)ie  CdPcamug  in  He  ^fft  n>irb  in 
«Kf{le|ca  b«4  bit  9«f  bcfteKt  nibmQiDc&catig  bqet^  grin 
*¥flclta  bdMfc  bfeftftc  i—r «rtb wt», dte aail enKrarttiluMuiteii  ^Beife, 
tcn^TlHHiflBibllat  lilcHlBi(eT»abUK^d|^  tn«n>ablen).  ^er« 
«  Gi)9l  btx  QoB*^ »««»  an  |K  t  X  t  cb  ea,  todibcd  He  froberc 
w^iiaf  tiMl" ^>i .  m  bk  gwdbcrtigteit^  ja  >auieibca,  unb  auf  Hefe  SBkifc 
aaferflelesfibflt.  Deftfi^ali  g^CT^yfcwaib  bcjtinnnte  baan  He* 
|eb  SaMni^  miMljliil  imK  cr  baxdb  bit  gi9§ui  %Uk  lac^  %aBtSdftS  \a 
Mmi  fiwa^ laf ilnliil  pr  bt  mafcrflc|ca  cat  bcai  Onibe, mib  umI^ 
«i|r  bai  ^ai^pfeMat  Safetflclaas^bcii^ei^  ia  bie|er  ^pDna  »on  tx* 
tc|eam%aBlbaaamafflebaa§9iraid|t§etaB4tiBab.  (GrifliMa 
pK  ai^  aaf  jcflaabea  [or  exf  «abea3.  @eiae 
iaikrttibcaab|nntbaSafeT|lebaag.*)  (SRooe.) 


'fS^Jkii.t.  UBi.1.  *f=Ci.  -^isi^^s. 


mxAMnokc^  wtwnma. 


vn 


iPmlM^ 


fWffrJbpri 


atm 

'jer  Am^Unmf  4m  Watmwth  Star  Amtt 

>  .frfwt,  tt^rMm  inn  |M<»  «fei  Ar 

iCiiiifirL,i<frrif  V< 


2)kfScltr  6ce 


5-  WUtt,  Btt. 
Ittx 


200  EXAMPLES  OF  SYNONYMS. 

^ctf^t  and)  ba§  Scutfc^e^  3Jiecr  (mare  Germanicum),  unb  bte  Oflfce  ba§  SBaltifc^e^ 
3JJeer  (mare  Balticum).  5lu(^  Die  2^^eile  beg  Oceans,  tnit  benen  tr>ir  iu  ber 
neuercn  ^txt  burd;  bie  ©nglanber  betannt  gett)orben  fhib,  ti?erben  @  e  e  unb 
ni^t  2Ji  e  e  r  genannt  (tcie  bie  @  ii  b  j  e  e,  bie  tcir  am  beften  bur(^  (£oofS"  unb 
gorfterg  @eereifen  fennen).  SSenn  ber  ganje  Ocean  beibeg,  ©  ee  unb  9}iecr 
gcnannt  h)irb,  fo  gefc^ie^t  ba§  uac^  toerfc^iebenen  Slnfid^ten.  @  e  e  tctrb  e8 
nac^  feiner  2)Merie,  3JJccr  nad^  feiner  gorm  genannt  2)ie  @ee  ift  ber 
Ocean,  ober  ber  2:^eil  ber  OBerflad^e  ber  @rbe,  ber^  nid;t  ^efteS  2anb  ift ;  bag 
9)1  e  e r,  fo  fern  eg  ijon  biefem  feften  Sanbe  eingefc^Ioffen  ift.  (9Jian  fagt :  f  ee== 
tcartg,entgegengefet5t  bon  lanbtcartg  ;  ©eeminb,  entgegengefeljt  bem  i^anbnnnb ; 
@ecmad;t,  ©eefolbaten,  ©eereifen,  ®eerauber,  jc,  entgegengefe^t  ber 
Sanbmac^t,  !i!anbfoIbaten,  Sanbreifen,  9Jauber  auf  bent  feften  Sanbe,  :c,  @fcen 
fo  fagt  man  ®  c  e  njaffer,  @  e  e  baber,  jc. ;  ^ingegen  fagt  man  2Ji  e  e  r  bnfeu, 
aJieerenge),  ((gber^arb.) 

6.  Naseweis,  neugierig,  vorwitzig. 

Der  Naseweise  verlangtEtwas  zu  wissen,  und  fragt,  um  zu  zeigen,  dass  er 
Verstand  und  Erfahrung  geniig*  besitzt,  von  einer  8ache,  die  noch  iiber  seiner 
Sphare  ist,  mitzusprechen,  Man  nennt  Personen  naseweis^  und  besonders 
kleine  Knaben  und  Madchen,  weijn  sie  iiber  viele  Dinge  urtheilen,  die  sie 
nicht  verstehen,  um  ihren  Witz  und  Verstand  zu  zeigen,  insonderheit*  wenn 
sie  durch  ihre  voreiligen  Urtheile  Personen,  denen  sie  Achtung  schuldig^  sind, 
beleidigen,  oder  sie  durch  ihre  unbescheidenen  Fragen  in  Verlegenheit  setzen. 
Die  Neugierde  ist  die  leidenschaftliche  Begierde  eines  Menschen,  das  Neue 
zu  wissen,  bloss  weil  es  ihm  neu  ist ;  der  Vorwitz  ist  die  Begierde,  das  zu 
wissen  und  zu  erfahren,  was"'  er  nicht  wissen  kann,  und  niclit  zu  erfahren 
suchen  soil.  Zu  dem,  was  uns  zu  wissen  vorenthalten  ist,  gehort  besonders 
die  entfernte  und  ungewisse  Zukunft.  Diese  ist  es  gerade  am  meisten,  welche 
den  Vorwitz  unwissender  und  schwacher  Menschen  reizt.         (Eberhard.) 


7.  Mogen,  woUen. 

Was  wir  thun,  das  miissen  wir  wollen,  selbst  alsdann,  wenn  wir  es  ungem 
thun.  Sollen  wir  es  so  wollen,  dass  wir  es  gern  thun,  so  muss  es  entweder 
gar  nicht  missfallen,  oder  doch  in  betrachtlichem  Grade  mehr  wohlgefiillen, 
als  missfallen.  So  fern  nun  das,  was  wir  wollen  gefallt,  so  fern  es  uns  Lust 
und  Vergniigen  macht,  mogen  wir  es.  So  wie  wir  Manches  wollen,  was  wir 
nicht  rnochten,  wenn  wir  miissten,^  so  mogen  wir  auch  Manches,  was  wir  nicht 
wollen.  (Eberhard.) 

1  L.  XVIII,  3,  Mem.         3  §  114,  2.  5§  ng,  12.  7  §  114,  4,  /jem. 

2JT7.  4§ii2,5,  iZcm.  1.  6  §  96, 1  85124. 


IV.  LETTERS  AND  BUSINESS  FORMS. 

1.  Ein  Neffe  meldet  seinem  Onkel  den  Todesfall  seiner  Schwester. 

Berlin,  den  9.  April  18G9. 
Lieber  Onkel. 

Eine  ausserordentlich  schmerzliche  Begebenheit  zwingt  mich  heute  Dir 
zu  schreiben.*  Nuch  neuntagigem  schweren  Leiden  ist  gestern  meine  liebe 
Schwester  Adelheid  am  Typhus  gestorben.'  Wie  gross  der  Schmerz  im 
Hause  und  die  Theilnahme  aller  Bekannten  ist,  kannst  Du  Dir  denken,  da 
Du  ja  wohl  weisst,'  wie  sehr  sie  der  Liebling  aller  derer  war,  mit  denen  sio 
in  Beriihrung  kam. 

Wenn  ich  mich  auf  diese  kurze  traurige  Mittheilung  beschranke,  ohne 
irgQ;id  welche  Nebenumstande  zu  erwahnen,  so  schreibe*  das  dem  tiefen 
Schmerze  zu,  der  mich  bewegt.  Alles  Andere,  so  mittheilenswerth  es  auch 
son  St  sein  mag,  erscheint  mir  diesem  Ereignisse  gegeniiber  bedeutungslos  und 
unwesentlich.  Mit  herzlichem  Gruss 

Dein  treuer  NefFe 

Gottfried  Forster. 


Hamburg,  ben  7.  3uni  1869. 
2JZcin  Itcber  3Satcr. 

SBie  gcrue  trarc  ic^  {jcutc  in  ber  2J?ittc  unferer  ^amiftc,  urn  2)ir  ^erfUnttd^ 
meincn  @(ilcfn?unfd;  barbringcn  ju  fbnnen.  3""^  crftcn  9)?alc  tjl  c8  mir  t?cr=> 
fagt,  bcii  ^cfttag  mit  (Sud;*  ju  fcicrn,  unb  c§  trirb  mir  ganj  ttjcl?  s"  3J2utl;e, 
tDcnn  ic^  baran  benfc.  9Jioc^tc  bcr  f(^onc  %ac^  noc^  rec^t  oft  tricbcrtcbrcn  unb 
un3  5lUe  um  2)id;  tjereinigt  jc^en.  !S)amtt  id;  abcr  nid^t  ganj  in  bem  l;cimiid)cn 
^rcifc  nm  ben  gefd;miic!tcn  gi^ilbftild^tifc^  mit  ber  grogcn  @eburt8tag«tcvtc 
feble,*  fo  fd^icfe  it^  2;ir  mcin  33i(b,  bcnn  id;  tt?ciO  ja  bod;,  ba§  3)u  mid;  fclbft 
— tt)enn  c8  auc^  nur  mctn  58ilb  ift— licbcr  nimmft,  al8  ?lllc«,  tuaS  id;  3)ir 
fonft  fd;icfen  tcnnte.  2?ictlcid;t  fcUtc  id;  ba«  md;t  fo  grabe  ^erauSfagen/  aber 
roavum  bcnn  am  (Snbe  nic^t  cbrlid;  augfprcrf;cn,  njaS  man  bcnft  unb  fii(;U. 

2)cr  Sag  ift  nod)  faum  angcbroc^cn.  5lUein  id;  hJoUtc  nic^t  fc^on  gcficrn 
fd;rcibcn,  tocil  ic^  bann  gar  nic^t  fo  rcc^t  in  ^eftftimmung  gettjcfen  toarc.*  3c<?t 
tragc  \6)  ben  Sricf  glcid;  fclbft  auf  bic  ^oft,  bann  gc^t  cr  mit  bem  S^ti^jug  ab 

1  8  127.  ^3  5 144, 7^^  * «  107~ Rem^.  ^67^^ 

2  5  !35,  2.  ♦5151,1.  6  ?  124.  «  §  282. 


202  LETTERS   AND    BUSINESS   FORMS. 

unb  !ommt  gerabe  an,'  toenn  ^^r  @ud^  an  ben  grii^ftiid gttfd^  fc^t  unb  ^^ia^Bat 
@d;mibt  nad;  getDo^nter  2Beife  jum  ©ratuUren  t;eriiber!ommt.  ^enn  ic^  ijon 
ber  ^o[t  juriid  bin,  bann  tcerbe  id;  mir  felbft  in  meinem  ®tiibc^en  ba§  alte  Sieb 
torfingen,  mit  bem^  mx  ®efd;n)ifter  2)id;  jebeg  Qa^x  an  3)einem  ©^rentage 
aufgemecft  ^aben.  2)er  ©ebante  mag  ettt)ag  ^u  linbifc^^  fiir  einen  fo  gro^en 
^nngen  fein ;  aber  e8  i[t  gar  fo  fd;bn  ftc^  in  bie  tinberja^re  suriicfsnbenlen, 
namentlic^  an  folc^en  ^eiteren  gamiliengebenftagen. 

©rii^e  SJiutter  unb  bie  ©efc^wifter  re^t  je^r 
unb  fei*  felbft  ^erjlic^  umarmt  unb  gefii^t  ijon  2)cinem  @o^nc 

Otto, 

3.  Ceremonielle  Form  der  Einladung. 

Herr  und  Madame  Eberhard  versichern  Herrn  und  Madame  Prenzler  ihrer 
ganzlichen  Hochachtung  und  bitten  Sie,  ihnen  die  Ehre  zu  erweisen,  Mitt- 
woch  um  5  Uhr  bei  ihnen  speisen  zu  wollen.* 


4.  Antwort  auf  dieselbe. 

Herr  und  Madame  Pretzler  beeilen  sich,  der  ihnen  so  freundlich  geworde- 
nen  Einladung  Folge  zu  leisten,  und  empfehlen  sich  Herrn®  und  Mad^ne 
Eberhard  auf  das  Ergebenste. 


5.  Vertrauliche  Form  der  Einladung. 

Lieher  Herr  Reichert. 
Wenn  Sie  nicht  f  iir  Morgen  Mittag  bereits  versagt  sind,  so  sind  Sie  freund- 
lichst  eingeladen,  mit  uns  um  4  Uhr  zu  speisen.  Herr  Professor  Bernhard 
und  Dr.  Runge  haben  uns  versprochen  zu  kommen.  Dr.  Runge  fi-eut  sich 
besonders  darauf,  Ihre  Bekanntschaft  zu  machen.  Sie  sollten  die  Gelegen- 
heit  nicht  voriibergehen  lassen,  da  er  schon  in  drei  Tagen  nach  Berlin  zu- 
riickzukehren  gedenkt.  Mit  freundschafthchem  Gruss 

Michaels  Strasse  No.  1 26.  Ihr 

Mittwoch,  den  6.  October  1869.  Joh.  Wilh.  Engelmann. 


6.  Antwort  auf  dieselbe. 

Lieher  Herr  Engelmann. 
Leider  bin  ich  schon  seit  mehreren  Tagen  fUr  morgen  Mittag  versagt,  und 
kann  daher  Ihrer  freundlichen  Einladung^  nicht  nachkommen,  so  sehr  ich  be- 
dauere,  Dr.  Runge  nicht  sehen  zu  konnen.^ 

Brandenburger  Strasse  No.  89.  Ihr 

Mittwoch,  den  6.  October  1869.  Fried.  Wilh.  Reichert. 

'  5 150, 2.  3  5  Se,  2. 5.  6  §165.  '§179,1.  ' 

*ilU,2.  *§161.  '  «§75, /Jem.  1.  8§16T. 


LETTERS    AND    BUSINESS   FORMS.  203 

?♦  §bf!i^c  gorm  bcr  (Sinlabung^ 

^crr  utib  3Wabamc  SDietrid;  bitten  §erni  unb  SJiabamc  iltefett^ettcr,  ge^aUi^ft 
nac^fteii^  S^ieuftag  urn  6  U{;r  bet  i^ncn  f))eifen  ju  ttJoUen,  unb  cm^fe^len  fid^ 
3^ncn  bci  btefer  ©elegcn^eit  aufs  grcunblit^ftc' 


S.  %\\imxt  auf  bicfclbc^ 


^err  unb  aJlabame  ^icfcttjetter  iccrben  baS  SBergniicjcn  ^abcn,  ber  (ginlabung* 
toon  §errn  unb  2JJabamc  2)ietric^  ^^olge  p  leiftcn,'  unb  em^fe^Icn  fid^  3^nen* 
freunbfd;attlic^ft. 


9.  Wechselbrief. 

Gut  fur  1500  Thlr.  Pr.  Cour. 
An  die  Disconto-Gesellschaft  zu  Berlin. 

Nach  Sicht,  belieben  !Sie,  auf  diesen  Prima-Wechsel,  an  Herm  Fr.  Wilh. 
Lindemann  die  Summe  von  fiinfzehnhundert  Thaler,  Preusisch  Courant, 
auszuzahlen.  Werth  empfangen,  den  Sie  in  Rechnung  stellen  wollen  laut 
Bericht.  JoH.  W.  Eitelberg, 

Wien,  den'  12.  August  1869.  Banquier  in  Wien. 


10*  Wntocifitng* 

Out  fiir  800  S^tr. 
3n  toier  SD'Jonotcn  (ober  ouf  3Scrtangen)  t3cr^[(id?te  ic^  mid;,  an  ^crrn  ^arl 
SIctn  ober  bcffen"  Drbre,  bie  <2umme   ton   ad;tbunbcrt   X^aler,  ^reu0i|d(^ 
Sourant,  auSguja^Icn.    SScrt^  in  SSoaren  (ober  baar)  empfangen. 

gricbric^  2luguftSroni^» 
©tuttgort,  ben  7,  ©ejcmbcr  1869. 


IL  £lmttung» 

500  Xf)\x. 
©m^fangcn'  toon  ^crrn  S.  ^au8,  filnf^unbert  Stealer,  ^rcu^ifd?  (Sourant, 
al«  53eja^Iung  in  boU.^  2B  i  I  ^  e  I  m  ^  r  a  n  S. 

Oot^a,  ben  4.  Oftobcr  1869. 

'§02.  3  §  179, 2.  » 5  83, 4.  ^ }  144, 4.  ' 

»  5  190,  2,  2.  ♦5179,1.  •5111,2.  »  i  188, 12,  Rem. 


V.  READING  LESSONS. 
2>tc  beutfdjc  ^^xa6)U 

2)te  beutfd^e  <Bpxa^t  tft  eine^  ber  atteften,^  retnften  unb  gcbtlbctjlen  umet 
ben  lebenben  @^rad^cn.  ^bre  58ilbung§gefc^id;te  umfa^t  ungefal^r  jti^eitaufenb 
5a^re.^  @te  ift  bie  urj^riingltd^c  eineg  alten,  in  toerfc^tebcne  ®tamme*  get^eil* 
ten,  gro^en  3?oI!eg,  njeld^eg  fc^on  fe^r  frii^  an6^  jetnen  alten  SBo^nfi^en  in  §o^- 
afien  nact>  (Suro^a  toanbcrte,  unb  befonberS  beffen  norblic^en  unb  uiittleren 
2;^eit  beijotferte. 

3)er  9^ame  „bcutfc^''  ftammt  nic^t  ton  bent  angeMi(^en  ®otte  unb 
©tammDater  biefeg  5BoIfe§,  Z^ui^to,  ab/  fonbern  toon  bem  got^ifd>en 
SSorte  thiudu—aithzui\6)  Sot,  diet—ha^  ^ei^t  Sol!,  unb  bebeutet  eigenttid; : 
„3um3SoHe  ge^orenb",  „bem3[^ol!e  eigen".  Unter bem  Sf^amcn 
©crmanen  tt)nrben'  bie  3)entfd;en  juerft  ben  ^omern Befannt. 

©ro^en  (Sinflu^  auf  bie  2)eutj(^en  unb  i^re  B)f)xadi)t  ^atte  bie  SSi5Ifertr>an=» 
berung  (375—^00)  unb  bie  Slugbreitung  ■  ber  d;ri[tlid;en  ^leligion.  2)er 
S3ifd;of  Utfifa§  (360—380)  toax  ber  (Srfinber  ober  boc^  ber  SSertoItfommner 
einer  beutfdjen  S3nc^ftaBenfc^rift,  unb  Ueberfe^er^  ber  S3ibel  in§  ®otf)ifd;e. 

^arl  ber  @ro§e  (768—814)  n?ar  ein  t^atiger  33eforberer  ber  beutfc^en  @^rad^» 
bilbung.  Unter  ben  §o(;en[taufen  er^ob  fic^  bie  Memanifc^e  ober  @(i>n?abifd;e 
9}Junbart  (9J?itte(f)Dd;beutfc^e  @^ra(^e),  beren=*  fic^  bie  2Jlinnefanger  bebienten. 

S)ie  :^rofaifd^e  Bpxadjt  getrann  an  ^2lu&bel)nung,  ^Jeic^t^um  unb  9JegeI^ 
mafjigfeit  burc^  ben  ^ergro^erten  SBo^Iftanb  ber  @tabte  unb  bie  er^i5^te  aflge* 
meine  S3ilbung,  auf  n)eld;e  ijor^iiglici)  folgenbe  Uniftcinbe  bort^eilfjaft  eintoirften: 
bie  Srric^tnng  ber  Unitoerfitcit  gu  ^'rag  (1348),  2Bien,  ^eibelbcrg,  ^i3In,  2C.; 
bie  (Srfinbung  beg  2um^en^a^ier§  unb  ber  S3nd;bru(ferfunft  (1446) ;  bie  Sr* 
obernng  ^on[tantino)3eI§(i453);  bie  @ntftebung  ber  3eitungen ;  bie  (gntbedung 
i)on  ^merifa  (1492) ;  ijorjiiglic^  aber  bie  9leformation  (1500). 

Sutler  (1483—1546)  begriinbete  burc^  feine  SSibeliiberfet^ung  unb  bnrd;  feine 
iibrigen  @d;ri[ten,  befonberS  ^rebigten  unb  Sieber,  bie  ^eutige  angemcine 
@c^viftf))rad;e  unter  bem  ^fZamen  bes  §D(^beutf(^en  (genaner  '^tuf^odj' 
beutfd;  genannt). 

@g  finb  in  bem  langen  SebenSlaufe  unfercr  <Bipxa6)t  i)icr  §au:|)t=@^)od)en 
ju  unterfd;eiben,  in  benen  ber  ®trom  if)rer  fortuj^^renben  33eranberung  fiir 
eine  B^iti^ins  ge^emmt  unb  fie  aU  @d;riftfpra(^e  ju  me^r  ober  tceniger  feftcr 
©eftalt  gebie^en  ju  fein  fd;eint.    2)iefe  bier  (S|)od^en  finb  : 

i§100.  3  5  74, 3, 4,1.  5  §220.  'L.XXXVI.,6» 

*5  91.  *  5  74,3,4,1.  « 5151,1.  8114,2. 


READING    LESSONS.  205 

1.  baS  ®  0 1 1;  i  f  ci^  c ,  Bi8  gum  4.  ^a^r^unbert  unfcrer  3citre(i^nung ; 

2.  baS  Sllt^od^bcutfc^e,  i)om  7. bis  gum  11.  3a^rl;uiibcrt ; 

3.  baS  3J?  i  1 1  e  H;  0  d;  b  e  u  t  f  d^  c ,  toom  12.  bis  jum  14.  ^a^r^unbert ; 

4.  ba«  S*?  e  u  1;  0  d;  b  c  u  t  j  d;  c ,  feit  bcm  ^2lnfang  bc8  16.  3at)r^unbcrt6  ;  be- 
fonber«J  ourd;  Sutler  bcgriinbet,  aber  crft  mit  bem  5lufblil(;en  unfcrer  ncueren 
claffifd;en  iJitcratur,  feit  ber  2)2ittc  be«  18.  ^a^r^uubcrt,  allmalig  ju  jciner 
f^cutigcn  ©eftalt  gebie^en. 

(S.  SS.  2.  §ei?jc,  1797—1855.) 


2)cr  (©tragenjungc* 

Sin  @tra§enjungc,  ber  toon  eincm  anbcrn  cine  SJJauIfd^eKc  cr^altcn  ^atte, 
tDurbe  gcfraijt/  n?arum=^  er  biejelbe  nid;t  juriicfgcgcbcn  (;dttc.  „^arum";  ant* 
trortcte  er,  „tDciI  id;  bad;tc,  tt)ir  tt?dren  unfer  nur  jtr'ci,  unb  banu  njilrbe'  bie 
iRei^e  boc^  gleid;  tt>ieber  an  mid;*  tommen." 

(3ul.  SSilb.  3in!grcf,  1591—1635.) 


2)c«  S>cutfd)cn  Satcrlanb* 

SKa«  ifl  be«  2)eutfd;cn*  SBatcrtanb  ? 
3fi'«  ^reu^enlanb,  ift'e  ®d;tt)abentanb? 
Sft'8  tDo  am"  9?f?ein  bie  SRebe  blil^t? 
3ft'S  tDo  am  58clt  bie  3RoDe  jie^t?' 

O  nein  !  nein  !  ncin  I 

©cin  SBaterlanb  mufj  grower  jctn. 

2Ba6  ifi  bc6  2)cutf(^en  S5atcrtanb? 
Sft'S  SBaicrlanb,  ift'«  @tcierlanb  ? 
3ft'S  tDO  ber  2Rarfen  5Rinb  fic^  ftrccft? 
3ft'e  tro  ber  aWarfcr  gifen  rccft? 

O  nein  I  ncin  !  neiul 

*Scin  SSatcrlanb  mu^  gri3^er'  fcin. 

SBaS  iftbeS  2)eutfd;en  2?atcrlanb? 
3ft'§  ^^cmmcrnlanb,  ^eftfalcnlanb  ? 
3ft'8  wo  ber  ®anb  ber  2)ilnen  we^t? 
Sft'S  tro  bie  !J)onau  braufenb  ge^t  ? 

O  nein !  nein  I  nein  I 

@ein  33aterlanb  mu§  Qx'6^tx  jein. 


*{134:161.  35125.  » 5  89, /2«m.  10.  '5144,6. 

« 6 113.1, /tern.  2,  2.     ♦6107.  «  5  64,  t, /tern.  2, 1.        8{91. 


206  READING   LESSONS. 

SSo8  tji  beg  ©eutfe^en  23atcrranb? 
@o  nemte  mir  bag  gro^e  8anb, 
5f[t'g  8anb  ber  @ct)tt)et3er,  ift'g  2:i?roI? 
S)ag  8anb  unb  33oIf  gefiel^  tnir  iuo^l ; 

O  nein  I  netn  1  netn  I 

©ein  SSaterlanb  tnu^  grB^cr  fein. 

2Ba§  i[t  beg  S)eutf djeu  25aterlanb? 
@o  nenne'^  mir  bag  gro^e  lOanb  1 
®ctt)iB  ift  eg  bag  Oefterretc^, 
2ln^  @^ren  unb  an  ®iegen  rei(^? 

O  netn  I  nein  I  nein  I 

@ein  3>aterlanb  mu^  griJ^cr  jetn. 

SOSag  ift  beg  2)eutfd)en  SSaterlanb  ? 
©0  nenne  enbli(^  mir  bag  2anb  I 
@o  h)eit  bie  beutfc^e  Bunge  !lingt, 
Unb  @ott*  im  §immel  Sieber  fingt, 

S)ag  foa^  eg  jein  I 

S)ag,  tuacfrer  S)eutfc^er,  nenne  bcinl 

S)ag  ift  beg  S)entjc^en  SSaterknb  : 
SSo  @ibe  fd;n)ort  ber  3)ru(f  ber  §anb, 
SSo  Serene  ^ett  t»om  ^uge  Uxi^t, 
Unb  !i!iebe  tuarm  im  ^erjen  fit^t, 

S)ag  foil  eg  fein  1 

S)ag,  tuacfrer  2)eutfc£)er,  nenne  bcin  I 

S)ag  gan^c  ©eutfc^tanb  foE  eg  fein  1 
O  @ott  I  ijom  §immel  fie^^  barein  I 
Unb  gieb  ung  rec^ten  beutjc^en  2}?ut^, 
2)a^  toir  eg  UeBen  treu  unb  gut  1 

2)ag  foU  eg  fein  I 

S)ag  ganjc  ©eutfd^Ianb  foil  eg  fein. 

(@rnft  movii^  5lrnbt,  1769—1860.) 

Scr  jungc  ^wfifcn 

(Sine  ©efeUfc^aft  toon  ®^ottern  tuoUte  fi^  ilber  einen  jungen  9Wuft!cr,  bet 
t^nen'  borf^ielte,  tuftig  mad;en  unb  rief :  „(Sr  \puU  fo  liebfid;  wte  Dr^fjeug !" 

f,3a'\anttt)ortete  ber  tiinjiler,  „barum*  §abe  ic^  aud;  einen  §aufen  S3aren 
unb  ^ant^er  urn  mtd^  ^er.^'  O.  2B,  Binlgref.) 

»«144,4.  3§245.  6§163,  '§107. 

'5144.7.  *574,2,4.  6§144,2.  e  5  188, 10, /Jem.  L 


READING   LESSONS.  207 

S)cr  S3cttlcr  unb  Saifcr  grtebridi* 

2118  etncs  XageS'  ju  ^fZiirnberg  cin  33ettler  ju  ^aijcr  griebrid^  tarn  unb  ibn 
um  ein  5tlmofcn  aiifprac^,  mit  bem  3"f«fef  ^^  n>are'  tatjerlid;er  9Kaicftat^  33ru« 
bcr,  trcil  atte  3Jienfci^en  ijon  etnctn  25ater  —  bem  2lbain  —  abftammten,  dfo  uii- 
ter  eiuanber  SBrilber  h?aren,  Iie§  i^m  ber  ^atfcr  nid;t  nte^r  al8  cincn  ^cujcr 
gcben.  2)er  SBettlcr  trottte*  fid?  befd^treren,  ba^  eS  fiir  cineu  ^aifer  ju  irenig 
Vccirc.  ^Ittcin'*  ^^^cbric^  ttJteS  tl;n  mit  ben  2Bortcn  ah :«  ,3enn  bir  cin  iebcr 
©ruber  fo  tici  gibt,  tt>ir|l  bu  rcic^er  fcin  als  ic^  jelbft." 

(3.  2B.  Sinfgrcf.) 


r,93effer  gtoa8" 

@))ra(^  bcr  ^olf,  „benn  g^Jic^tS," 
51IS  er  nad^  einem  (gc^afc  fd;na^^te, 
Unb  bafilr  eine  WIM'  txta^ptt. 

Tlan6)ix  fount'  bic  ^a^^c  fparen : 

Wlan  erfcnnt  i^n  |o  fc^on  filr  einen  S^arren. 

(Sin  5(kntcucr« 

SGJtr  berogcrten,  i(^  ttjci^  nid;t  me^r,  ti^elc^c  ®tabt,  2)cm  gcIbmarfd^aU  trat 
ganj  erjiaunlic^  i)icl  on  genauer  ^unbfd^aft  getcgcn,  tok  bie  ©ac^cn  in  ber 
^cftung  ftiinbcn.  (56  jc^ien  au^crft  fc^tuer,  ja  fa[t  unmbglic^,  bur(^  atte  SSor* 
:>)o[ten,  SSad;en  unb  ge[tuugSn?erfe  ^inein  ju'  gclangen.  3Sor  SDZutt)  unb 
2)ienfteifer  faft  ein  t»enig  attju  rafc^,  ftette  \6)  mic^  nebcn  eine  ber  gro^ten 
^anonen,  bie  foeben  na6)  ber  ^^eftung  afegefeuert  tr>arb,®  unb  f^rang  im  §nt  auf 
bie  5fugel,  in  ber  ?lbfid;t,  mid;  in  bie  ^eftung  ^ineintragen  ju  laffen.'  3II6  \^ 
aber  ^dbroegS  burc^  bie  Suft  geritten  tt?ar,  fticgen  mir  aUerlei  nid>t  uner^eb* 
Iid)e  SBebentlid^feiten  ju  ^o))fe.  ^m  I  bad^te  id;,  ^inein!ommcn  tannft  bu  nun 
Hjo^l,  attein  mt  ^ernad;  fogleic^  n)ieber  ^eraus  ?  Unb  tt?ie  fann  bir'«  in  ber 
geftung  erge^en?  a«an  toirb  bid;  fogleic^  al8  @^ion  crtennen  unb  an  ben 
nad;ften  ©algen  bangen  I 

ein  fetches  S3ette  bcr  d^xt  ttjotttc  x6)  mir  bemt  bodb  njo^l  loerbittcn.  '?flad^ 
biefen  unb  ci^nlic^cn  SBctradjtungcn  entfdjlo^  xd/m^)  fur3,nabm  bie  gtilctiic^c 
©elcgcn^eit  n>a^r,  aU  cine  ^anonenfugel  au8  ber  5^1^""^  einigc  ©djritt  t?on 
mir  ijorilber  nad;  unferem  Sagcr  flog/"  f^rang"  toon  ber  SD^ieinigen  auf  biefe 
biniiber,  unb  fam'^  itoax  uutocrrid;tetcr  ®ac^e,  jebotb  troblbc^altcn  bci  ben  lie* 
ben  Unfrigen  tcieber  an.  (Saron  toon  2Jittuc^^aufcn,  1720—97.) 

'  L.  III.,  4 137.  ♦  L.  XXXI.  '512T,£«c.4  »o  L.  XXX.  ' 

«}1W.  6L.IX.,1.  8  5138.  11 5 167,1. 

*L.\L,  5,  Rem.  6L.IX.,4,4.  » 5 144, 4.  "5  80.1. 


208  READING   LESSONS. 

Die  Hunnen. 

Der  Geschichtschreiber  Ammianus  Marcellinus  ^A.D.  410)  macht  vou 
den  Hunnen  folgende  Beschreibung :  "Sie  sind  bartlos  und  hasslich  von  An- 
gesicht,  scheusslich  von  Gestalt  und  krummbeinig.  ^  Sie  bediirfen  keine* 
Feuers  noch  schmackhafter  Speisen  ;  ihre  Nahrung  besteht  aus  Wurzeln  von 
Kiautern  des  Feldes  und  halbrohem  Fleische  von  jedwedem  Vieh.  Hauser 
haben  sie  nicht  und  meiden  sie  wie  die  Graber,  selbst  Hutten  von  Kohr 
findet  man  bei  ihnen  nicht.  Unstat  durch  Gebirg  und  Wald  umherstreifend, 
lernen  sie  von  Kindheit  an,  Hunger  und  Durst  und  den  Wechsel  der  Wit- 
terung  ertragen.  Ihre  Kleider  sind  von  Leinwand,  oder  aus  Fellen  von 
kleinem  Wild  zusammengenahet.  ^  Mit  gebogenen  MUtzen  decken  sie  den 
Kopf,  mit  Bocksfellen  den  Korper,  ihre  unformlichen  Schuhe  hindern  sie  an 
freiera  Gang,  desshalb  sind  sie  zu  Fussmarschen  untUehtig.  Aber  auf  ihren 
Pferden,  die  zwar  hasslich,  jedoch  dauerhaft  sind,  hangen^  sie  wie  angewach- 
sen  und  verrichten  auf  denselben  ihre  gewohnlichen  Geschafte.  Bei  Tag 
und  Nacht  ist  jeder  zu  Pferde,  kauft  und  verkauft,  isst  und  trinkt  und  schlaft 
auf  den  Nacken  des  Thieres  gelehnt.  Zu  Pferde  halten*  sie  die  Versamm- 
lungen  und  Berathungen.  Kein  strenges  Herrscherthum  fesselt  sie;  sie 
folgen  ihren  Hauptlingen  ohne  festes  Band.  In  den  Kampf  gehen  sie  keil- 
fiirmig  geordnet  und  mit  grasslich  lautem  Gaschrei.  Gewandt  und  behende 
wie  sie  sind,  sprengen  sie  dann  absichtlich  mit  einem  Male  auseinander  und 
zerstreuen  sich  zu  wiistem  Morden. 

Aus  der  Feme  kampfen  sie  mit  Wurfspeeren,  deren  Spitzen  kiinstUch  aus 
scharfen  Knochen  gefertigt  sind,  in  der  Nahe  mit  dem  Schwert.  Pfluge 
haben  sie  nicht.  Ohne  Hof  und  Herd,  ohne  festen  Sitz  und  Gesetz  schwei- 
fen*  sie  unstat  gleich  Fluchthngen  mit  ihren  Wagen  umlier ;  dies  sind  ihre 
Wohnungen,  wo  sich  ihre  Weiber  und  Kinder  befinden,  bis  sie  erwachsen 
«nd.  Anderswo  geboren,®in  femen  Landen  aufgezogen,  weiss  keiner  anzu- 
geben,  woher  er  stammt.  Treulos,  wankelmiithig,  jeder  neuen  HofFnung' 
hingegeben,  folgen  sie  ganz  dem  Drang  des  Triebes.  Wie  das  unverniinftige 
Vieh  kennen  sie  keinen  Unterschied  zwischen  Tugend  und  Laster.  Von 
Glauben  und  Religion  haben  sie  keinen  Begriff.  Nach  Geld  sind  sie  so  aus- 
nehmend  liistern  und  so  leicht  gereizt,  dass  sie  wohl  mehrmals  an  demselben 
Tage  sich^  entzweien  und  wieder  versohnen. 

(Weber's  Weltgeschichte.) 


SBenn'S  ntc^t  ge^t,  Vok  man  ix»itt, 
3JJu^  man  tf)un  n)tc  man  !ann. 


1L.XTI.  3L.xXXin.  «>5  15T,1.  '  l.  XXXIV. 

2  L.  VII.,  §  83.  4  L.  XXXII.  «  §  112,  8.  '  §  158. 


READING    LESSONS.  209 

gintritt  in  bic  bcutf^e  ®$toct5, 

greier*  at^mct  jd^on  bie  58ruft, 
^o^tv^  jd/Iagt  cinfame  !i!u[t, 
griebc  ifi  c8,  tt)a8  l;ier  tt?e(;t, 
©anft  5U  inncrm  ^crjcn  gc^t, 
2)a^  tein  ©corners  ba  nimmcr  jKlrmt 
SBtc  fid;  SBcrg  auf  Scrg  antprnit, 
^o^eS  @d;wcigen  iinS  ergrcift,^ 
SSilbeS  Strebcn  nid;t  mcbr  jd^metft. 
^ier  aiif  [tiller  mptni)^\* 
SSo  bcr  ferncn  ®i))fel  ®c^ncc, 
@o  bic  Solten  golben  malt, 
@rn[t  ju  iin8  ^crniebcr  ftra^tt. 
@clig,^  trer  ba  .^iltten  baut, 
(Sinjam  ber  ^fJatur  i)crtraut, 
S)cr  (Srinnerung  luir  lebt, 
©aug  fic^  felbft  in  fie  toergrSbt, 
(Siujig  auf  ba8  2ieb  nur  bentt, 
S)as  ibm  ®ott  inS  ^erg  gefenft; 
2)er  ben  2)id;tcr  auSertor, 
2)ag  cr  brid;t  an'S  2id;t  ^erijor* 
Sirten  §elbengei[te«^  <Bpnx  1 
©titter  Sd^en^eit  33Iumenflor, 
gern  toon  j;encr  tt)il[ten  SEBclt, 
2)ie  uns  ^tt'  in  ^e[feln  ^att. 
SIH5d;t«  ici>  einft  jo  gtildlid;  fein, 
@old;en  griebenS  mic^  gu  treu'n ; 
2)iefer  fd^onen  33crge  §i3^'n 
9fiod;  al8  §eimat^  n^ieberfefin. 

(gricbric^  toon  ©d^Iegel,  1772—1829.) 


Johann  Wolfgang  von  Goethe. 

Job.  Wolf,  von  Gothe  wurde  geboren  den  28.  August  1 749  zu  Frankfurt 
am  Main,  woselbst  sein  Vater  kaiserlicher  Rath  war.  Im  Jahre  '  705  ging 
er  nnch  Leipzig,  wo  er  die  Rechte  studiren  sollte,  sich  aber  am  mei«ten 
mit  Dichtkunst  beschaftigte,  und  auch  Versuche  im  Kupferstechen  macbte. 
Von  1768  lebte  er  wieder  in  Frankfurt  und  studirte  chemische  Werke.     Im 

Tj  184, 1.  3  5  155,  3.  5  L.  XVm.  '68,1. 

3  592.  ♦{57,2,1.  6  157,1.  8124,8. 


210  READING  LESSONS. 

Jahre  1770  bezog  er  die  Universitat  Strassburg,  dort  lernte  er  Herder  ken- 
nen'  und  ward  Doktor  der  Rechte.  In  das  vaterliche  Haus  zuriickgekehrt, 
waren  Shakspeare's — des  grossen  englischen  Dramatikers — Werke  Gegen- 
stand  seiner  eifrigsten  Studien.  Im  Jahre  1773  schrieb  er  das  Schauspiel 
"Gotz  von  Berlichingen,"  und  1774  den  Roman:  "Leiden  des  jungen 
Werther."  Beide  Werke  begriindeten  des  Dichters'*  Ruf.  Im  Jahre  1776 
ernannte  ihn  der  Herzog  Karl  August  von  Weimar,  mit  dem  er  personlieh 
bekannt  geworden,  zum  Legations-Rath.  Der  Aufenthalt  in  Weimar,  dem 
Mittelpunkt  der  deutschen  Dichtkunst,  hatte  auf  sein  Leben  und  dichterisches 
Wirken  den  entschiedensten  Einfluss.  Im  Jahre  1786  reiste  er  nach  Italien, 
wo  er  zwei  Jahre  verweilte  und  sich  meistens  in  Rom  aufhielt.  Wahrend 
dieser  Zeit^  schrieb  er  seine  vollendetsten  dramatischen  Werke:  "Iphigenie 
in  Tauris" — "Egmont" — "Torquato  Tasso."  Im  Jahre  1792  machte  er 
mit  dem  Herzoge  von  Weimar  im  preussischen  Heere  den  Feldzug  gegen  die 
Franzosen  mit.  Um*  sich  ganz  der  Poesie  und  Wissenschaft  widmen  zu 
konnen,  liess  er  sich  seines  Staatsdienstes  entheben,^  doch  wurde  er  spater 
zum  ersten  Minister  (Minister-Frasident)  in  Weimar  ernannt.  Nach  dem 
Tode  des  Herzogs  im  Jahre  1 826  zog  er  sich  zuriick. 

Gothe  gilt  als  Haupt-Representant  unserer  zweiten  classischen  Periode. 
Er  ist  einer  der  grossten  deutschen  Dichter,  wenn  nicht  der  grosste.  In  fast 
alien  Zweigen  der  Dichtkunst  hat  er  das  ausgezeichnetste  geleistet.  Er  ist 
gross  in  jeder  Gattung,  am  grossten^  aber  in  Drama  und  Roman.  Seine 
Tragodien:  "Gotz  von  Berlichingen,"  "Egmont,"  "Iphigenie  in  Tauris," 
"Tasso,"  e<c.,  werden  allgemein  bewundert.  Seine  Tragodie  "Faust"  aber 
ist  als  sein  hochstes  Werk  in  der  Poesie,  als  die  Krone  seiner  Dichtungen 
betrachtet.  Seine  Lieder,  Elegien,  Balladen,  gelten  als  Muster.  Grosses'* 
leistete  er  im  Epos  durch  eine  Bearbeitung  des  "Reineke  Fuchs"  und  durch 
"Hermann  und  Dorothea,"  im  Roman  durch  "  Werthers  Leiden,"  "  Wilhelm 
Meisters  Lehrjahre,"  und  "Wilhelm  Meisters  Wanderjahre. " 

Bis  zu  seinem  Tode  hatte  er  sich  einer®  ungewohnlichen  geistigen  Frische, 

der  voUkommensten  Gesundheit  und  der  heitersten  Gemiithsstimmung  zu 

erfreuen.     Er  starb  nach  kurzem  und  schmerzlosem  Krankenlager  am  22. 

Marz  1833,  fast  vom  ganzen  Volke  als  der  "deutsche  Dichterfurst"  verehrt, 

von  etlichen  angefeindet,  von  mehreren  zum  Gott  gemacht. 

(Davin.) 


^cingt  ntc  cin  ©c^af.  |        SStrb  mmmer  toeif. 


i§144,7.  3  §75, 1,1.  55144,6.  T  §  89, /Jem.  10. 

a§74, 1,1,1.  4  §  267,  iJem.  6.  «§  93,  iJcm.  2.  8  §88. 3. 


READING   LESSONS.  211 

2)ie  SScfigot^cn  vooUUn  burd^  ^talien  nad^  ^Ifrifa  tcanbcrn,  untcrtocgS*  jlarB 
^)Iofelic^  5llan(!^,  i^r  ^8nig,  ben  fie  ilber  bie  Tla^t  (tebten.  2)a  ^uben  fie  an,' 
unb  leitetcn  ben  glu^  33arent,  bcr  neben  ber  ®tabt  Sofentia  Dom  gu^e  bc« 
S3crge8  flie^t,  ou8  jeinem  33ette  ab.^  aJiitten  in  bcm  33ett  lie^en  fie  nun  burd) 
einen  ^aufen  ©cfangener  ein  ®rab  graben,  unb  in  ben  ®d^o^  ber  ©rube  be* 
flotteten  fie,  nebft*  melcn  ^cftbarteiten,  i^ren  ^onig  5llarid>.  SSie  baS  gefci;e(;en 
tear,  (eitcten  fie  bag  iBaff cr  mieber  in8  alte  58ette  guriicf ,  unb  tijbteten,  bamit  bie 
©tcitte  i3on  niemanb  t)erratl;en  iriirbe,  aUe  bie,  welc^e  ba«  @rab  gegraben  fatten. 

(<Sage,  ton  ben  53rilbern  ©rimm.) 


Aufruf  des  Konigs  von  Preussen. 

An  mein  Volk. 
So  wenig  f  iir  mein  treues  Volk  als  f  iir  Deutsche  bedarf  es  einer  Rechen- 
Bchaft  uber  die  Ursachen  des  Kriegs,  welcher  jetzt  beginnt :  klar  liegen  sie 
dem  unverblendeten  Europa  vor  Augen.  Wir  erlagen^  unter  der  Uebermacht 
Frankreichs.  Der  Friede,  der  die  Halfte  meiner  Unterthanen  mir  entriss, 
gab  uns  seine  Segnungen  nicht,  denn  er  schlug  uns  tiefere  Wunden,  als  selbst 
der  Krieg.  Das  Mark  des  Landes  ward  ausgesogen.  Die  Hauptfestungea 
blieben  vom  Feinde  besetzt,  der  Ackerbau  ward  gelahmt,  sowie  der  sonst  so 
hochgebrachte  Kunstfleiss  unserer  Stadte.  Die  Freiheit  des  Handels  ward 
gehemmt  und  dadurch  die  Quelle  des  Erwerbes  und  des  Wohlstandes  ver- 
stopft.  Das  Land  ward  ein  Raub  der  Verarmung.  Durch  die  strengste  Er- 
fullung  eingegangener  Verbindlichkeiten  hoiFte  ich  meinem  Volke  Erleiehte- 
rung  zu  verschaffen,  und  den  franzosischen  Kaiser  endlich  zu  iiberzeugen, 
dass  es  sein  eigener  Vortheil  sei,  Preussen  seine  Unabhangigkeit  zu  lassen. 
Aber  meine  reinsten  Absichten  wurden  durch  Uebermuth  und  Treulosigkeit 
vereitelt,  und  nur  zu  deutlich  sahen  wir,  dass  des  Kaisers  Vertrage  mehr 
noch  wie  seine  Kriege  uns  langsam  verderben  mussten.  Jetzt*  ist  der  Augen- 
blick  gekommen,  wo  alle  Tauschung  iiber  unsern  Zustand  schwindet.  Bran- 
denburger,  Preussen,  Schlesier,  Pommem,  ^  Litthauer !  Ihr  wisst,  was  ihr  seit 
sieben  Jahren  erduldet  habt ;  ihr  wisst,  was  euer  trauriges  Loos  ist,  wenn 
wir  den  beginnenden  Kampf  nicht  ehrenvoll  enden.  Erinnert  euch  an  die 
Vorzeit,  an  den  grossen  Kurfiirsten,  an  den  grossen  Friedrich.  Bleibet*ein- 
gedenk®  der  Giiter,  die  unter  ihnen  unsere  Vorfahren  blutig  erkampften  :  Ge- 
wissensfreiheit,  Ehre,  Unabhangigkeit,  Handel,  Kunstfleiss  und  Wissenscliaft. 
Gedenkt  des  grossen  Beispiels  unserer  machtigen  Verbiindeten,  gedenkt  der 
Spanier  und  Portugiesen  ;  selbst  kleine  Vcilker  sind  fur  gleiche  Gtiter  gegen 
~^k  188,  6.  3  5  151, 1.  6  §  144,  2.  '  5  75,  4.  ' 

'an^cben.  *5  230.  ««148.  » 1 96,1. 


212  READING   LESSONS. 

m'achtigere  Feinde^in  den  Kampf  gezogen  und  haben  den  Sieg  errungen;' 
erinnert  euch  an  die  heldenmiithigen  Schweizer  und  Niederlander.  Grosse 
Opfer  warden  von  alien  Standen  gefordert  werden,=^denn  unser  Beginnen  ist 
gross,  und  nicht  gering  die  Zahl  und  die  Mittel  unserer  Feinde.  Ihr  werdet 
jene  lieber  bringen  fiir  das  Vaterland,  fiir  euren  angeborenen  Konig,  als  fiir 
einen  fremden  Herrscher,  der,  wie  so  viele  Beispiele  lehren,  eure  Sohne  und 
eure  letzten  Krafte  Zwecken  widmen  wurde,  die  euch  ganz  fiemd  sind.  Ver- 
trauen^  auf  Gott,  Ausdauer,' Muth  und  der  machtige  Beistand  unserer  Bun- 
desgenossen  werden  unserm  redlichen  Anstrengen  siegreichen  Lohn  gewahren. 
Aber  welche  Opfer  aueh  von  einzelnen  gefordert  werden  mogen,  sie  wiegen 
die  heiligen  Giiter  nicht  auf,  fiir  die  wir  sie  hingeben,  fiir  die  wir  streiten  und 
siegen  miissen,  wenn  wir  nicht  auf  horen  woilen,  Preussen  und  Deutsche  zu 
sein.  Es  ist  der  letzte  entscheidende  Kampf,  den  wir  bestehen  fiir  unsere 
Existenz,  unsere  Unabhangigkeit,  unsern  Wohlstand.  Keinen  andern  Aus- 
weg  gibt*  es,  als  einen  ehrenvoUen  Frieden  oder  einen  ruhmvollen  Untergang. 
Auch  diesem  wiirdet  ihr  getrost  entgegengehen,  weil  ehrlos  der  Deutsche  nicht 
zu  leben  vermag.  Allein  wir  diirfen  mit  Zuversicht  vertrauen,  Gott  und  un- 
ser fester  Wille  werden  unserer  gerechten  Sache  den  Sieg  verleihen,  mit  ihm 
einen  sichern  glorreichen  Frieden  und  die  Wiederkehr  einer  gliicklichen  Zeit. 
Breslau,  den  17.  Marz  1813.  Friedrich  Wilhelm. 


@tn  SJiilMftctn  unb  ctn  SJJenjd^en^erj 
SBirb  [tet§  kriimgetrteben  ;^ 

SKo  S3eibe§  ^fiid^tg  1511  reiben  ^at, 
SSirb  33eibe8  jelbft  gcmeben/ 


!♦  2Ba8  tjl  ntc^t  rec^t  unb  bod;  teine  @iinbe  ? 

2.  2Benn  filnf  ©cifte  [inb  unb  filnf  @ier  aufgetragen  tt»crben,  ttjtc  fann  jcber 
ctn  (Si  nebmen  unb  bod)  jule^t  nod)  eineS  in  bcr  @d^il[fet  bleiben  ? 

3.  SBeldje  finb  bte  {)cirteften^  gfJiiffe  ? 

4.  2Bte  !ann  man  au8  etnem  ©ad  t)ott  ^orn  jtDct  folder  @a(fe  pgtetd^  toott 
ntflc^en  ? 

5.  2Barum  ijl  in  Ulm  etu  ®ro jd;enbrob  grower  benu  in  ©d^aff^aufen  ? 

6.  2Ba8  fte^t  jmif^en  S3erg  unb  %^oX^ 

7.  SBann  t^un  bem  §afen  bte  3^^^^^  ^^^  "^^ 

8.  SBetd^e  gjienfc^en  gel;en  auf  ^o^fen? 

9.  (Sin  SBUnber  fat)  einen  §afen  laufen,  ctn  Saf>ntcr  f^rang  t^m  uac^,  unb  ciu 
9lacfter  ftedt  ttjn  in  bic  Stafc^e ;  tt)ag  ift  baS  ? 

10.  gSelc^er  ift  ber  f^tperfte  @tab? 

1  §  144, 1.  3  §258.  55157,1.  7  §91. 

a  5161.       .  *L.XLV,2.  6  §  144, 5.  85149. 


READING    LESSONS.  213 

51  n  t  to  0  r  t  c  n» 

1.  !J?cn  Itnfcn  ^anbf(^u^  auf  bie  recite  ^anb  jie^en. 

2.  Der  i!f&tc  nimmt  einc(3  fammt  ber  ®c^u[fel. 

3.  ©etrubniffe  unb  ®efan^ni[fe. 

4.  Ttan  mup  jwei  ®dcfe'  iibcr  einanberjtc^cn  unb  ben  innerflen  fuHeu. 

5.  2Beil  man  c^  grower  iadU 

6.  2)Q^  SBortlcin  „unb." 

7.  SBenn  bie  ^unbc  it)n  bet§en. 

8.  Die  MQti^  in  ben  ©ticfcln  ^aben.  • 

9.  (Sine  Siige. 
10.  25er  2)ettelflab. 


Zk\t  etitte  t)errfd;t  im  2Baf[er, 

O^ne  $Regung  rubt  baS  9Jieer, 
Unb  betilmmert  fie^t  ber  ®(^if|ct 

©lattc  glad;c  rings  um^er. 
^eine  Suft,  »on  feincr  ®eitc  1 

StobeSftitte,  filrd;terlic^  I 
3!n  ber  unge^euren  2Beite 

SJcgct  teine  SBctte  fid;.^  (®8t^e.) 


Der  Cirknitzer  See. 

An  den  julischen  Alpen  liegt  in  Krain  der  berUhmte  Cirknitzer*  See,  von 

jeher  das  Wunder  und  Rathsel  der  Gegend.     Oestlich  von  Adelsberg,  da  wo 

die  Geheiranisse  der  Unterwelt^  in  hundert  Gewolben  und  Kalkfelsen  ver- 

schlossen  sind,  breitet  sich  der  wunderschone  See  von  Cirknitz  aus,  wie  ein 

Spiegel  von  drei  Quadratmeilen.     Aus  ihm  ragen  hei'vOr'  f  iinf  Inseln  und 

sine  derselben  tragt  selbst  das  Dorfchen  Ottok.     Mehrere  Fliissehen'  fallen 

hinein.     Er  ist  sehr  reich  an  Fischen  und  Wasser>'ogeln,  und  die  ganze 

Thalgegend  umher  ist  romantisch  schon.     Niirdlich  erhebt  sich  das  Silvi- 

nitza-Gebirge,  westlich  und    sudlich  der  grosse  Javornik.     Neun  Dorfer, 

zwanzig  Kirchen  und  zwei  Schlosser  reiheh  sich  um  den  See.     Bei  vielem 

Kegen  gewinnt  er  an  Umfang,  aber  bei  sehr  trockenera  Wetter  verschwindet 

sein  Gewasser  und  zieht  in  den  geheimen  Schooss  der  Unterwelt,  begleitet 

vom  Wassergefliigel  und  alien  Fischen.     Tritt  diese  wunderbare  Erscheinung 

ein,  dann  lauten  die  Dorfglocken  umher,  um  noch  zu  fischen  so  viel  als  mcig- 

lich.     Von  Stunde  zu  Stunde  sinkt  tiefer  der  Spiegel,  denn  eine  Menge  von 

Lochem  im  Grunde  des  Sees  verschluckt  sein   Gewasser.     Unterirdische 

Hohlen  von  unermesslichem Umfang,  die  nie  ein  menschliches^Auge  geschaut, 

nehmen  es  auf.     Jetzt  schaut  der  Grund  des  Sees  zum  heiteren  Himmel 

1 5  74,  Vficnu  3  5168.  »5  68,  L  ^7, 1, 1. 

«ST4.1,1,1.  ♦586,2,6,ite»n.2.  6§167,1.  8586,2,4. 


214  READING   LESSONS. 

hinauf,  er  trocknet  ab;  und  der  riihrige  Mensch  erntet  Gras,  wo  er  sonst 
fischte,  er  wagt  zu  saen  und  erndtet  Hirse  und  Buchweizen,  er  nimrat  statt 
des  Netzes  das  Feuerrohr  und  erlegt  Wildpret.  So  ist  der  wunderbare  See 
mit  Recht  in  dem  Rufe,  dass  man  in  ihm  fischen,  jagen  und  emdten  kann ; 
bis  die  Zeit  sich  wendet,  haufige  Regengiisse  und  starke  Gewitter  sich  ein- 
stellen.  Dann  tritt  das  Gewasser  aus  den  Grundlochern  gewaltsam  herauf. 
Es  speiet  die  Unterwelt  Gewasser  und  Fische  und  Seevogel  herauf,  so  dass 
binnen  vierundzwanzig  Stuftden  der  See  gleichsam  wieder  neu  geschafFen  ist. 
Der  Zusammenhang  dieses  Sees  mit  unterirdischen  Wasserhohlen,  die  theils 
unter  ihm,  theils  hoher  als  er  liegen,  giebt  die  Erklarung  des  Wunders.  Man 
hat  selbst  Modelle  erfunden,  welche  den  Vorgang  versinnlichen. 

(J.  C.  F.  Guts  Muths.) 


3n  bem  ©tabtc^en  2Btt(t§l6ad;  im  (Santon  S3ern  voax  einmal  ein  grembcv  itBer 
'^a^t,  unb  aU  er  tn§  33ett  get;en  WoUU,  jog  er  iioc^  ein  ^'aar  ^antoffetn  au8 
bem  ^ilnbet,  legte  fte  an,  Banb  fie  mit  ben  @trum^f6anbern  an  ben  gii^en  feft, 
unb  legte  fic^  alio  tn8  33ett.  2)a  fagte  ju  i^m  ein  anberer  2Banbergmann,  ber 
in  ber  ncimlid^en  hammer  ilBernad;tet  luar  :  „®uter  greunb,  n?arum  t^ut  t^r 
bag  ?"  2)arauf  ermiberte  ber  (Srftc :  „2Begen  ber  SSorfic^t.  2)enn  ic^  bin  ein* 
mat  im  Xraum  in  eine  ©tagfc^erfee  getreten.  @o  ^aBe  id)  im  @c^laf  foId;e 
©c^merjen  batoon  em^funben,  ba§  x6)  um  feinen  ^rei8  me^r  barfu^  fc^lafen 
mijc^te."  (3,  %  $ebet,  1760-1826.) 


28a§  ber  9Jlonb  tx^'d^t 

§i5re,  traS  ber  SJJbnb  mir  ergcif^It  I  ^d)  tjabe  ben  ^abettenofftjier  tocrben  nnb 
fid;  jum  erften  2JiaIe  in  feine  ^rad;tige  Uniform  Heiben  fe^en ;  x6)  ^abe  ba§ 
junge  aJlcibdjen  in  i^rem  33rautftaat  gefet^en  unb  beg  gilrften  junge  SBraut 
gliicflic^  in  i(;rem  ^rac^tanjuge ;  aber  nie  \)abz  ic^  eine  @elig!eit  erbtirft,  ci^n* 
lic^  ber  eineg  fleinen  Dierjci^rigen  9Jlabd^eng,  tr>eld)eg  id;  {jente  Slbenb  beob* 
ad;tete.  @te  ^atte  ein  neueS  btaueg  ^leib  erbalten  unb  etnen  neuen  9iofa*§nt; 
ber  @taat  ttjar  eben  angelegt  unb  Wit  riefen  nac^  Sic^t,  benn  be8  3Jfonbe8 
©tra^Ien,  bie  burc^  bag  genfter  brangen,  tuaren  ntc^t  ^ell  genug,  ganj  anbere 
Sic^ter  mu^ten  angebrannt  tt)erben.  S)a  ftanb  bag  !Ieine  SJJab^en,  ftetf  trie 
eine  ^u^^e,  bie  ?lrme  angftlic^  ton  bem  ^letbe  ah  augftrecfenb,  bie  ginger  treit 
augeinanber  gef^reijt.  £)  ttetc^e  ©eligfeit  ftra^Ite  aug  i^ren  Slugen,  aug  i^rem 
ganjen  ®efid;t !  „3JJorgen  foEft  2)u  in  bem  tieibe  augge^en  I''  jagte  bie  3J?ut* 
ter,  unb  bie  ^(eine  blicfte  auf  ju  i^rem  §ut  unb  toieber  nieber  ju  i^rem  ^leibe 
unD  Iad;elte  feltg.  „2J?utter  I"  rief  fte,  „tt?ag  n?erbeu  tooi)\  bie  fletnen  ^iinb* 
t^en  benfcn,  wcnn  fie  mic^  in  biefem  ©taatc  erblid en  ?" 

(^an^  e^r.  3lnberfen.) 


IP  art  ®l)irb: 

A   COMPEND   OP 

GERMAN    GRAMMAR; 

WITH    AN 

OTTRODUCTION  UPON  THE  HISTORY,  CHARACTERISTICS. 

EXTENT  OF  USE,  AND  DIALECTS  OF  THE 

GERMAN  LANGUAGE. 


INTRODUCTION. 


1.  History  of  the  German  Language, 

§  1.  Indo-European  Historians  are  united  in  the  opin- 
Languages.  ion  that  the  greater  portion  of  the 

present  inhabitants  of  Europe  and  Ilindostan  are  descend- 
ed from  one  common  stock,  which  had  its  early  home  in 
the  western  part  of  the  Himalaya  Mountains.  From  this 
mountain  region,  one  portion  of  this  original  stock  moved 
down  to  the  rich  plains  of  India,  and  developed  the  San- 
scrit language  and  literature,  and  the  Buddhist  religion. 
Anotlier  part  went  to  Persia,  and  there  developed  the  Bac- 
trian  language  and  the  Parsee  religion.  Successive  migra- 
tions passed  also  to  the  west  or  northwest,  and  settled  in  the 
different  parts  of  Europe.  From  these  western  migrations 
have  sprung  the  chief  groups  of  European  nationalities 
and  languages.  The  most  important  of  these  are  the  Gre- 
cian^ Italic^  Keltic^  Teutonic^  and  Slavic. 

Wlien  classed  together,  the  inhabitants  of  Europe  and 
India  are  called  the  Tndo-Eurojpean  branch  of  the  human 
family.  Their  languages,  termed  the  Indo-European  lan- 
guages, are  more  perfectly  developed,  and  are  richer  in  lit- 
erary treasures,  than  any  other  languages  in  the  world. 
Upon  the  study  of  them  has  been  based  essentially  the  very 
important  modem  science  of  Philology. 

§  2.  Teutonic     The  Teutonic  was  one  of  the  largest  of 
Languages,     these  migrations.     Moving  through  cen- 
tral Europe,  it  divided  into  three  branches.     One  portion 

K 


218  mTEODUCTION.  [§  2. 

passed  over  to  the  Scandinavian  peninsulas  of  iNTorway  and 
Sweden,  and  of  Denmark.  Another  part  moved  westerly 
and  settled  in  Germany.  The  third  division,  composed  of 
the  Gothic  tribes,  passed  through  Poland  and  Kussia  down 
to  the  Black  Sea,  and  then  moved  up  the  Danube.  Urged 
by  their  restless  spirit  of  conquest,  the  Goths  pushed  for- 
ward into  Western  and  Southern  Europe,  and  estabhshed 
two  brilliant,  but  short-lived  kingdoms  upon  the  ruins  of 
the  Roman  empire.  That  of  the  East  Goths  covered  Italy, 
Switzerland,  and  parts  of  Bavaria,  Austria,  and  European 
Turkey.  That  of  the  West  Goths  covered  most  of  France 
and  Spain.  In  the  eighth  century  the  Goths  disappeared 
completely  and  finally  from  history.  Of  their  language 
and  literature,  the  only  monuments  extant  are  parts  of  the 
translation  of  the  Bible,  made  by  Bishop  Ulfilas  in  the 
fourth  century,  a  fragment  of  an  almanac,  and  two  short 
bills  of  sale.  These  meagre  remains  of  the  Gothic  lan- 
guage furnished  the  starting-point  for  the  comparative 
study  of  the  Teutonic  languages. 

The  same  principles  of  linguistic  science  that  were  ap- 
plied by  the  brothers  Grimm  and  others  to  the  Teutonic 
languages,  were  applied  by  Bopp  and  his  colaborers  to  the 
wilder  field  of  the  Indo-European  languages.  And  thus  has 
arisen,  within  the  last  fifty  years,  the  new  and  interesting 
science  of  Comparative  Language. 

By  the  ninth  century  after  Christ,  the  great  majority  of 
tlie  Scandinavian  and  German  tribes  had  settled  down 
within  their  present  dominions,  and  they  have  there  devel- 
oped their  separate  nationalities,  languages,  and  literatures. 
The  Germans  pressed  back  to  the  west  of  the  River  Rhine 
the  Kelts,  whom  they  found  extending  their  dominion  as 
far  east  as  the  present  cities  of  Berlin  and  Vienna.  The 
Germans  were  in  turn  pushed  forward  to  the  west  by  the 
Slavic  tribes  as  far  as  to  the  River  Elbe  and  the  city  of 
Coburg.  A  reflex  movement  afterward  set  in.  The  Ger- 
man language,  which  lias  already  spread  to  the  eastward 


§  3.]  niSTOKY    OF   THE   GERMAN    LANGUAGE.  219 

as  far  as  the  Baltic  provinces  of  Russia,  to  tlie  city  of  Bree* 
lau  in  the  Prussian  province  of  Silesia,  and  to  Vienna  in 
Austria,  is  still  gaining  ground  over  the  Slavic  dialects  in 
the  Prussian  provinces  of  East  and  West  Prussia,  Posen, 
and  Silesia,  and  in  the  Austrian  provinces  of  Bohemia,  Mo- 
ravia, and  Galicia.  On  the  other  hand,  the  French  lan- 
guage is  gaining  on  the  Gennan  in  the  regions  bordering 
on  the  Rhine,  and  especially  in  the  French  provinces  of 
Alsace  and  Flanders,  and  in  Belgium. 

The  Teutonic  languages  have  thus  three  chief  divisions : 

1.  The  GOTHIC,  which  in  the  ninth  century  entirely 

disappeared  from  history. 

2.  The  SCANDINAVIAN,  covering  Sweden,  Norway, 

Denmark,  Iceland,  and  Greenland. 

3.  The  GERMANIC,  covering  Germany,  Holland, parts 

of  Switzerland  and  Belgium,  England,  tJie  United 
States,  British  America,  aTid  Australia. 

§  3.  Germanic  Differences  in  the  dialects  of  the  Ger- 
Languages.  man  tribes  are  noticeable  as  early  as 
when  the  Romans  first  came  in  contact  with  them.  Ab 
these  tribes,  still  in  the  rudeness  and  ignorance  of  barbar- 
ism, became  permanently  settled  in  their  present  localities, 
and  thus  ceased  to  have  much  intercommunication,  the  dia- 
lectic differences  in  language  were  rapidly  increased.  And 
now  almost  every  pro\^nce,  city,,  village,  valley,  and  moun- 
tain district  has  its  distinctive  dialect.  The  difference  be- 
tween the  dialects  has  become  so  great,  that  a  peasant  from 
Bavaria  or  Wirtemberg,  in  passing  through  Hamburg  oi 
Bremen  on  his  way  to  America,  can  only  with  the  greatest 
difficulty  converse  with  his  fellow-emigrant  from  Bremen, 
Hamburg,  Holstein,  Mecklenburg,  or  Pomerania. 

From  this  multitude  of  dialects  have  arisen  several  of 
the  most  cultivated  languages  of  modem  times,  as  the  Ger- 
man, Dutch^  and  English  languages.     The  German  dialects 


220  INTRODUCTION.  [§  4r-6. 

are  divided,  by  a  line  running  from  Aix-la-Chapelle  to 
Berlin,  into  JJpj)er- German  2^x1^  Lower- German  dialects. 

§  4.  Lower-German  The  Lower  -  German  dialects  (and 
Dialects.  the  languages  that  have  sprung  from 

them)  occupy,  or  originally  occupied,  the  low  sandy  plain 
which  lies  between  the  German  Ocean,  Denmark,  and  the 
Baltic  Sea  on  the  north,  and  the  line  above  indicated  on 
the  south.  They  extend  also  from  the  French  province 
of  Flanders  on  the  west,  to  the  Russian  confines  on  the 
Baltic  on  the  east.  From  Lower -German  dialects  have 
sprung  the  Dutch  and  the  English  languages. 

Dm-ing  the  early  Middle  Ages  the  Friesan  language,  spo- 
ken on  the  coasts  and  in  the  islands  off  the  shores  of  Hol- 
land and  Hanover,  rose  to  a  perfection  nearly  equal  to  that 
of  any  contemporaneous  Teutonic  language.  But  it  has 
long  since  sunk  back  into  mere  local  dialects. 

§  5-  Upper-German  The  Upper-German  dialects  occupy 
Dialects.  the   high   mountainous   region   ex- 

tending from  the  line  above  indicated  on  the  north,  to  the 
Alps  on  the  south,  and  from  the  French  province  of  Al- 
sace on  the  west,  to  Hungary  and  Poland  on  the  east. 

§  6.  The  High-German     In  the   fifteenth   century  com- 
Language.  menced  a  chain  of  circumstances 

beginning  with  the  translation  of  the  Bible  by  Luther,  which 
has  resulted  in  the  formation  of  a  national  German  Lan- 
guage. This  High  -  German  Language^  more  commonly 
called  in  English  simply  the  German  Language^  was  based 
primarily  on  one  of  the  dialects  of  Saxony,  in  Central 
Germany,  which  was  intermediate  both  in  character  and 
in  geographical  position  between  the  Upper  and  the  Lower 
German  dialects.  Both  the  Upper  and  the  Lower  German 
dialects  have  contributed  to  the  grammatical  features  as 
well  as  to  the  vocabulary  of  the  national  language. 


§  7-9.]  HISTORY   OF   TIIE   GERMAN   LANGUAGE.  221 

§  T.  History  of  the  German     The  history  of  the  German 
Language.  language  is  divided  into  four 

chief  periods ;  the  Pre- Historic^  the  Old- German,  the  Mid- 
dle-Ger7nan,  and  the  Nefw-GevTrian, 

§  8.  Pre-Historic  Period,  The  Pre-IIistoric  period  is  so 
till  7tli  Century.  named  because  no  remains  of 
the  German  literature,  and  but  a  few  proper  names  in  the 
language  of  that  time,  have  been  preserved.  From  this 
period,  which  ends  with  the  seventh  century  after  Christ, 
there  are  extant  Uterary  works  in  several  of  the  other  Teu- 
tonic languages,  as,  the  translation  of  the  Bible  into  the 
Gothic  language,  made  by  Bishop  Uliilas  (A.D.  360-388) ; 
tlie  Anglo-Saxon  poem,  Beovulf^  the  earliest  Teutonic  epic, 
evidently  of  heathen  origin  and  composed  at  a  very  early 
date,  though  the  earliest  manuscript  of  it  extant  is  from 
the  eighth  century ;  and  the  Scandinavian  Edda^^  also  of 
very  early  and  unknown  date,  and  of  heathen  origin. 

§  9.  Old-German  Period,  The  earliest  literary  remains  in 
7th  to  11th  Centuries.  the  German  language  that  are 
extant  consist  almost  entirely  of  translations  of  ecclesiasti- 
cal documents  from  the  Latin  and  the  Greek.  The  oldest 
of  these  date  from  the  seventh  century.  They  are  of  but 
little  literary  ment,  but  they  are  of  great  im}X)rtance  in 
studying  the  literary  development  of  the  German  lan- 
guage. The  oldest  preserved  German  poem  is  the  Song 
of  Rildebrandt  (^iltebranbt^^^ieb),  dating  from  about  the 
eighth  century.  It  is  written  in  a  Lower-German  dialect, 
but  it  contains  many  Upper-German  words.  Tlie  next  im- 
portant poem  is  the  ^elianb,  a  religious  poem  of  about  the 
ninth  century,  written  in  the  Old-Saxon  dialect.  The  SBclt^ 
53cfc^rcibun9,  composed  in  the  eleventh  century,  is  the  old- 
est preserved  German  poem  that  does  not  treat  of  a  relig- 
ious subject. 

Like  all  new  languages,  the  German  dialects  were  orig- 


222  INTBODUCTION.  [§  10 

inally  very  poor  in  words.  They  were,  however,  much 
richer  than  the  modern  German  in  grammatical  forms. 
During  the  Old-German  period,  the  dialects  were  enriched 
from  the  Latin  and  Greek  by  many  words,  whose  use  was 
made  necessary  by  the  introduction  of  Christianity  and  of 
a  higher  civihzation.  From  this  period  date  many  such 
words,  as  ^ngel  (Gr.  ayyeXog),  ^irc^e  (Gr.  KvpiaKti),  ^i)xdhtn 
(Lat.  scrihere),  bitten  (Low-Lat.  dictare),  ^lofttx  (Lat.  claus- 
trum),  ^riefter  {7rpea(5vTiQog). 

§  10.  Middle-German  Period,  Before  the  Middle-Ger- 
12tli  to  16tli  Centuries.  man  period,  no  dialect  had 

acquired  any  great  predominance  over  the  others.  In  the 
twelfth  century,  German  commerce,  manufactures,  chival- 
ry, and  poetry  flourished  most  luxuriantly  on  tlie  Lower 
Rhine,  and  especially  in  and  around  Flanders.  At  this 
time  the  Lower-German  dialect  of  Flanders  became  the 
most  cultivated  in  Germany.  Soon,  however,  the  Flemish 
poetry  was  eclipsed  by  the  songs  of  the  Minnesingers 
(S^innefdnfier)  of  Allemania  and  Suabia,  on  the  Upper  Ehine 
(A.D.  1150-1250).  These  were  sung  so  widely  through 
the  courts  of  Germany  that  they  almost  made  a  national 
language  from  the  dialects  of  Allemania  and  Suabia.  With 
the  last  of  the  Crusades  (A.D.  1250)  the  spirit  of  chivalry 
died  out  of  Europe,  and  with  it  perished  the  poetry  it  had 
nourished.  During  this  period  of  the  Minnesingers  arose 
the  ^tolanb^^^ieb  :  the  great  German  epic — the  S^ieklungen^ 
€teb  :  and  many  other  popular  legends  and  romances. 

In  the  latter  part  of  the  thirteenth  century,  clubs  of  lyr- 
ic poets,  called  Master -singers  (9)^eifterfanger),  were  organ- 
ized in  many  parts  of  Germany.  These  had  their  terms 
and  rules  of  membership,  like  the  many  trades-unions  of 
the  Middle  Ages.  The  spirit  of  their  poetry  spread  to  the 
people.  From  this  period  date  the  great  mass  of  the  beau- 
tiful popular  songs  (35ol!^>^tefcer)  of  Germany.  Under  the 
influence  of  tliese  Master-singers,  the  vocabularies  of  many 


§  11,12.]      HISTORY    OF   THE    GERMAN    LANGUAGE.  223 

dialects  were  greatly  enriched,  but  still  no  one  dialect  gain- 
ed any  great  supremacy  over  the  others. 

The  universities  that  were  established  in  Germany,  on 
the  model  of  those  in  Italy  (the  first  in  Prague,  A.D.  1348) ; 
the  commercial  prosperity  of  the  free  cities,  and  the  conse- 
quent flourishing  condition  of  the  fine  and  useful  arts ;  the 
conquest  of  Constantinople  by  the  Turks  (A.D.  1453),  and 
the  consequent  dispersion  of  Greek  scholars  over  all  Eu- 
rope ;  the  invention  of  printing  (A.D.  1450) ;  the  estab- 
lishing of  newspapers  (A.D.  1488) ;  and,  finally,  the  Refor- 
mation in  the  sixteenth  centur}^,  were  all  additional  influ- 
ences that  greatly  enriched  the  more  cultivated  dialects 
during  the  latter  part  of  the  Middle-Gennan  period,  and 
prepared  the  way  for  the  last,  the  New-German  period. 

§  11.  Changes  in  the  Language    During  the  fifteenth  cen- 
during  the  15th  Century.  tury  the  poetic  side  of  the 

language  lost  much  in  purity,  beauty,  pathos,  and  power. 
On  the  other  hand,  the  dialects  were  greatly  enriched  by 
the  addition  of  technical,  scientific,  metaphysical,  and  theo- 
logical terms,  as  was  required  by  the  advance  of  science, 
invention,  commerce,  and  pulpit  eloquence,  of  prose  in  pre- 
dominance over  poetic  literature,  and  by  the  increase  in 
the  general  intelligence  of  the  people. 

§  12.  New-German  Period,  The  extensive  circulation 
16th  Century  till  present  time,  throughout  Germany  of 
the  translation  of  the  Bible  made  by  Luther  (1522),  and  of 
the  sermons  and  hymns  published  by  Luther,  Jonas,  Speng- 
ler,  and  others,  soon  made  the  new  High-German  Lan- 
guage (§  6)  in  which  they  were  written  very  widely  known 
in  all  the  German  states.  Additional  impetus  was  given 
to  the  High-German  language  by  the  publication  in  it  of 
humorous  and  satirical  poems  and  fables,  collections  of 
proverbs,  works  of  history  and  of  natural  history,  transla 
tions  of  works  of  classical  writers,  and  other  books  that 


224  INTRODUCTION.  [§  13. 

were  read  largely  by  the  people.  Above  all,  a  foundation 
was  laid,  by  the  publication  of  grammars  and  dictionaries, 
for  a  critical  and  scientific  knowledge  of  the  language. 
The  High-German  has  added  to  its  vocabulary  from  the 
local  dialects  (§  6)  and  from  ancient  and  modem  foreign 
languages,  and  has  become  the  sole  language  of  literature, 
of  official  intercourse,  and  of  polite  society  throughout  all 
Germany.  It  has  not,  however,  displaced  any  of  the  local 
dialects.  These  retain  their  vitality  with  great  tenacity, 
especially  among  the  peasantry. 

§  13.  Foreign  The  use  of  Latin  in  scientific  writings,  in 
Influences.  lectures  at  the  universities,  and  as  the  lan- 
guage of  intercourse  among  literary  men  of  different  na- 
tions during  the  Middle  Ages,  greatly  retarded  the  develop- 
ment of  the  German  as  a  cultivated  language.  The  polit- 
ical predominance  of  France  during  the  reign  of  Louis 
XIY.,  the  spread  of  the  French  as  the  language  of  tlie  court 
throughout  all  Europe,  and  the  immigration  from  France 
of  the  banished  Huguenots  after  the  revocation  of  the  Edict 
of  Nantes,  1685,  caused  the  introduction  of  many  French 
words  and  idioms  into  the  German  language. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  eighteenth  century,  some  bold 
German  scholars,  as  Gessner  and  Leibnitz,  ventured  upon 
the  great  innovation  of  lecturing  in  the  universities,  and 
publishing  their  scientific  writings  in  the  German  language. 
A  general  movement  soon  set  in  to  rescue  the  language 
from  the  corruptions  that  had  crept  in  during  the  preceding 
century.  This  movement,  so  ably  begun  by  Gessner,  Leib- 
nitz, Opitz,  and  others,  and  afterwards  so  greatly  strength- 
ened by  the  pure  style  in  German  prose  and  poetry  of  such 
writers  as  Klopstock,  Wieland,  and  Lessing,  received  a  great 
check  by  the  second  invasion  into  Germany  of  French  man- 
ners, morals,  literature,  and  philosophy,  which  was  led  on 
by  Frederick  the  Great  during  the  latter  part  of  the  eight- 
eenth century. 


§  14.]  HISTORY   OF   THE   GERMAN   LANGUAGE.  225 

The  brilliant  and  numerous  constellation  of  writers  in 
every  branch  of  literature,  science,  philosophy,  and  criti- 
cism, which  arose  in  Germany  during  the  first  half  of  the 
present  century,  including  such  names  as  Goethe,  Schiller, 
Schlegel,  Humboldt,  Fichte,  Hegel,  Kanke,  Heyne,  Grimm, 
etc.,  have  made  this  tlie  second  classic  period  of  the  Ger- 
man language  and  literature.  The  present  purity,  richness, 
and  elegance  of  the  language  are  also  owing  in  no  small  de- 
gree to  the  fact  that  the  German  has  displaced  the  French 
as  the  language  of  court,  and  tlie  Latin  as  the  language  of 
scientific  and  pliilosophical  literature. 

§  14.  Grammatical  Changes  in  the    During  its  develop- 
Language  during  its  History.  ment  from  the  sev- 

enth century  after  Christ  till  the  present  time,  the  German 
language  has  undergone  many  and  very  radical  changes. 
In  the  Old-German  there  was  a  much  more  complete  and 
complex  system  of  grammatical  forms  in  the  inflection  of 
the  verb,  noun,  pronoun,  and  adjective  than  there  is  in  the 
New-German. 

The  Old-German  had  twenty-five,  and  the  Gothic  forty 
endings  in  the  inflection  of  the  noun,  while  the  New-Ger- 
man has  but  seven  (e,  e^,  $,  en,  n,  er,  em).  There  was  an  in- 
strumental case ;  three  forms  for  the  three  gendei-s  of  the 
plui-al  of  the  pronoun  jte,  they  (in.  sie,^  sio,  n.  siu) ;  and 
tlu-ee  forms  for  the  plural  of  the  adjective  (as,  for  blinte, 
Hind;  in.  plinte,y!  plinto,  n.  plintu). 

The  very  extended  conjugation  of  the  verb  gave  tlie 
Old-German  more  musical  beauty  and  more  adaptation  to 
poetry,  while  on  the  other  hand  the  Old-German  is  infe- 
rior to  the  New-German  in  its  capacity  to  express  thought 
and  scientific  truth.  Wliile  some  radical  words  disap- 
peared during  the  Old  and  Middle  -  German  periods,  the 
vocabulary  of  the  New-German  has  been  enriched  by  many 
new  derivatives  and  compounds  of  native  words,  and  by 
the  addition  of  many  foreign  words. 

K2 


INTRODTJCTION.  [§  16, 

§  15.  History  of  the    No  critical  work  on  the  German 

Critical  Study  of  the  language  appeared  until  several 
German  Language.  centuries  after  grammars  had  been 
written  upon  some  of  the  other  languages  of  Europe,  as  the 
Itahan,  Spanish,  French,  and  Anglo-Saxon.  The  lirst  Ger- 
man grammar  was  written  (1540)  hj  Ickelsamer^  a  contem- 
porary of  Luther.  The  first  treatise  on  German  prosody  was 
by  Oj>itz  (1624) ;  the  first  German  dictionary  was  by  Ge- 
nisch  (1616) ;  and  the  first  work  on  German  synonyms  was 
by  Gottschedd  (1758). 

The  wrong  principles  of  grammatical  analysis,  which 
had  crept  into  the  German  grammars  during  the  seven- 
teenth and  eighteenth  centmnes,  were  checked  and  correct- 
ed hj  Adelung,v^\io^e  great  German  grammar  and  diction- 
ary (1793-1801)  marked  an  epoch  in  the  critical  study  of 
the  German  language.  It  was  reserved  to  the  present  cen- 
tury, however,  to  develop  the  true  principles  of  compara- 
tive and  historic  study  of  language.  And  within  the  last 
fifty  years  have  appeared  the  great  comparative  and  histor- 
ical grammars  of  Grimm,  Ileyse,  Becker,  Kehrein,  Kelle, 
and  others ;  and  the  dictionaries  oiHeyse,  Weigand,  Meyer, 
Sanders,  Schmitthenner,  and  Grimm.  That  of  the  broth- 
ers Grimm,  when  complete,  will  fill  about  twenty  octavo 
volumes,  and  will  be  the  most  complete  dictionary  ever  yet 
produced  of  any  language.  Many  noted  philologists  in  Ger- 
many and  many  learned  societies  are  constantly  adding,  by 
their  researches,  to  the  knowledge  of  the  German  language 
and  its  dialects. 

Dm-ing  the  history  of  the  language,  letters  have  been  ex- 
changed, added,  and  dropped ;  nouns  have  passed  from  one 
gender  to  another,  and  from  one  declension  to  another. 
Within  the  last  fifty  years  uniformity  has  been  introduced 
into  the  spelling,  and  the  complicated  construction  of  sen- 
tences, which  formerly  prevailed,  has  to  a  degree  been  re 
placed  by  the  original  simplicity  of  German  syntax. 


§  16.]  HISTORY   OF    THE    GERMAN    LANGUAGE.  227 

§  16.  Resume.  We  thus  find  the  history  of  the  German 
language  to  be  di\d(led  into  four  chief  periods,  with  subdi- 
visions as  follows : 

1.  The  FEE-HISTORIC  FERlOJ),e7iding  with  the  Sev- 

enth Century  /  with  no  remains  of  the  language 
extant  except  a  few  proper  names. 

2.  The  OLD-GERMAN  PERIOD,//'^?/i  the  Seventh  to 

the  Eleventh  Century ;  translations  from  Latin  of 
legal  and  ecclesiastical  documents,  ^tltebrantt^? 
?iet),  Reliant);  2Belt^53efc^reibun9. 

3.  The  MIDDLE -GERMAN  PERIOD, //"^m  tJie 

Twelfth  to  the  Sixteenth  Century : 

1.  Flemish  poetry,  in  the  Twelfth  Century. 

2.  Minnesingers,  SRoIant)^  ^  ?iet),  ^iiebelungen  ^  ?ieb, 
legends  and  romances ;  the  First  Classical  Pe- 
riod oi  the  German  language  (1150-1250). 

3.  Master -singers,  popular  songs;  decadence  of 
poetry  and  prose  (1250-1500). 

4.  The  NEW -GERMAN  VEVAOJ),  from  Luther's 

transition  oftheBible  (1522)  to  thejpresent  time  : 

1.  Sixteenth  Century ;  religious  hymns,  sermons, 
universities,  public  schools,  printing ;  introduc- 
tion of  many  technical  terms  in  science,  art, 
and  philosophy. 

2.  Seventeenth  Century ;  decadence  of  the  lan- 
guage through  French  influence. 

3.  Eighteenth  Century;  purifying  of  the  lan- 
guage from  foreign  elements,  and  foundation 
of  the  language  as  it  now  exists ;  German  dis- 
places Latin  in  the  imiversities. 

4.  Middle  of  the  Eighteenth  Century  ;  second  de- 
cadence of  the  langu^Lge  under  French  influ- 
ence. 

5.  Nineteenth  Century:  Adelung,  Lessing,  Goethe, 
Schiller,  Grimm,  Bopp,  Humboldt,  etc. ;  Second 
Classical  Period  of  the  German  language. 


rNTKODUCTION.  [§17-19. 


2.  Characteristics  of  the  Germam,  Language. 

§  17.  First  Impression.  To  most  foreigners  who  go  to 
Germany  without  an  acquaintance  with  the  language,  and 
especially  to  those  speaking  English,  French,  Italian,  or 
Spanish,  the  German  language  has  an  energetic  but  harsh 
sound.  This  is  owing  mostly  to  the  great  predominance  of 
consonants  over  vowels,  and  to  the  frequent  recurrence  of 
the  sharp  diphthong  CI,  of  the  \^^  of  gutturals,  and  of 
double  consonants.  The  energy  of  the  language  is  greatly 
increased  by  the  accent  falling  so  frequently  upon  the  first 
syllable,  as  is  the  case  even  in  very  long  words.  The  ca- 
dence and  intonation  of  the  sentences  in  the  German  are 
very  different  from  the  same  in  the  English  language. 

§  18.  Fullness  of  A  nearer  acquaintance  shows  that  the 
the  Vocabulary.  German  language  is  extremely  rich  in 
words ;  that,  though  full  of  energy  and  force,  the  language 
has  also  an  abundance  of  words  expressive  of  the  most  del- 
icate sentiments  and  emotions ;  that  it  successfully  express- 
es the  deep  feeling,  the  warm  friendship  and  hospitality,  the 
humor,  wit,  and  pathos,  and  the  brilliant  and  highly  poetic 
imagination  of  the  German  people  ;  and  that  its  vocabula- 
ry is  sufiiciently  extensive  to  meet  all  the  requirements  of 
modem  civilization. 

There  is  in  the  language  an  unlimited  power  of  multi- 
plying words,  by  forming  compounds  from  simple  words. 
Indeed,  the  very  great  majority  of  German  words  can  be 
traced  back  to  a  very  small  number  of  primitive  roots,  na- 
tive to  the  language  itself. 

§  19.  Purity  from    In.  the  German  language  there  are 

Foreign  Elements,     about  forty  thousand  words  of  foreign 

origin,  which  are  not  so  fully  naturalized  but  that  their  for- 

eignness  is  still  felt.   Many  of  these  are  but  rarely  used,  and 

most  of  them  may  be  replaced  by  words  of  German  origin. 


§  20.]    CnABACTERISTICB   OF  THE   GERMAN   LANGUAGE.         229 

Some  thousands  of  words,  however,  which  have  been  intro- 
duced since  the  seventh  century  (as  fd)re{ben,  Pfert),  (SUi^el, 
^irc^e),  are  so  completely  incorporated  into  the  language 
that  their  foreign  origin  is  now  "  no  longer  felt."  Still  there 
are  but  few  languages  in  which  foreign  words  are  so  httle 
used  as  in  the  German.  The  rigidness  witli  reference  to 
the  exclusion  of  foreign  words,  wliich  tlie  so-called  "pur- 
ists" introduced  into  the  language  in  the  early  part  of  the 
present  century,  has  of  late  very  greatly  relaxed. 

§  20.  Comparison  of      The  German  grammar  is  far  more 
German  and  English     complicated  than  the  English.   The 
Grammar.  definite  article, and  every  adjecti\e, 

or  adjective  pronoun,  have  six  forms,  while  in  English  each 
has  but  one  form.  In  the  declension  of  the  noun,  seven 
terminations  may  be  used  (besides  the  umlaut  on  the  radi- 
cal vowel),  while  in  English  there  are  but  two  terminations, 
and  no  modification  of  the  radical  vowel.  Adjectives  and 
adjective  pronouns  may  be  declined  in  three  ways,  or  may 
be  used  without  declension,  while  in  English  they,  are  al- 
ways without  declension.  The  gender  of  nouns  is  arbi- 
trary and  not  natural,  many  nouns  that  are  neuter  in  En- 
glish being  masculine,  and  others  being  feminine  in  Ger- 
man. In  the  conjugation  of  the  verb,  the  radical  vowel  oft- 
en takes  the  umlaut.  The  past  participle  generally  adds 
a  prefix  syllable,  and  always  has  a  participial  termination. 
In  compound  verbs,  the  prefix  to  the  verb,  which  in  En- 
glish can  not  be  removed  farther  than  to  immediately  after 
the  object  of  the  verb,  in  German  may  be  placed  at  the 
close  of  even  a  long  sentence.  One  or  more  long  quali- 
f}dng  clauses  may  intervene  between  the  article  and  its 
noun.  The  order  of  sequence  of  auxiliary  verbs  is  entire- 
ly reversed  in  conjunctive  sentences.  Prepositions  and 
verbs  govern  three  cases  of  the  substantive  instead  of  a 
single  one,  as  in  English.  The  object  precedes  the  verb 
more  frequently  than  in  English. 


230  INTRODUCTION.  [§  21. 

The  German  has  the  advantage  over  the  English  lan- 
guage in  several  respects.  The  infinitive  of  verbs  is  always 
indicated  by  a  termination  (-en).  The  past  participle  is 
marked  by  a  termination  (-t  or  -en),  and  generally  also  by 
a  prefix  syllable  (ge-).  The  termination  of  the  article,  ad- 
jective, or  adjective  pronoun  often  indicates  the  gender, 
case,  or  number  of  the  qualified  noun.  The  additional 
cases  (the  Genitive  and  Dative)  diminish  the  use  of  prepo- 
sitions. Somewhat  more  inversion  in  the  position  of  words 
is  allowed,  giving  rather  more  freedom  of  style  in  express- 
ing emphasis  or  shades  of  meaning.  The  freedom  with 
which  compound  words  are  formed  gives  great  terseness  of 
expression.  Owing  to  the  method  of  forming  compound 
words  and  the  comparatively  rare  use  of  foreign  words, 
there  are  but  few,  even  of  the  longest  words,  that  can  not 
be  immediately  understood  by, persons  of  comparatively 
limited  education. 


3.  Extent  of  Use  of  the  German  Language. 

§  21.  Extent  of  Use.  The  German  language  is  the  ver- 
nacular of  the  entire  population  of  the  smaller  German 
states ;  of  all  the  inhabitants  of  Prussia,  except  the  small 
Slavic-speaking  population  of  Prussian  Poland ;  of  about 
one  fourth  the  inhabitants  of  Austria  (being  spoken  mostly 
in  the  western  part  of  that  empire) ;  of  tw^o  thirds  the  inhab- 
itants of  Switzerland ;  of  the  province  of  Alsace  in  France ; 
of  the  German  colonists  of  Courland,  and  other  provinces 
and  cities  in  Russia ;  and  of  the  German  immigrants  in  the 
United  States,  Brazil,  and  some  other  countries  of  the  Old 
and  New  World.  It  is  thus  spoken  by  about  seventy  mil- 
lions of  people.  This  is  nearly  equal  to  the  English-speak- 
ing population  of  the  entire  world,  and  is  greater  than  the 
number  that  speak  any  other  language  of  European  origin. 
These  two,  the  German-speaking  and  the  English-speaking 
branches  of  the  Teutonic  division  of  the  Indo-European 


§  22,  23.]  GERMAN   DIALECTS.  231 

portion  of  the  human  race,  represent  to-day  more  of  the 
active,  intellectual,  political,  religious,  artistic,  commercial, 
and  industrial  forces  of  the  world  than  any  other  family 
of  the  nations  of  Europe  or  of  the  world. 

§  22.  Literary  Treasures.  The  number  and  value  of  the 
works  in  every  branch  of  human  learning  in  the  German 
exceed  by  far  those  in  any  other  language.  The  German 
beUes-lettres  Hterature  rivals  that  of  any  other  nation.  Ger- 
many is  the  home  of  modem  music  and  art-criticism.  The 
German  language  is  therefore  studied,  both  as  a  means  of 
education,  of  culture,  and  of  enjoyment  by  the  scholars,  art- 
ists, educators,  and  travelers  from  all  civilized  lands.  A 
knowledge  of  the  language  is  also  essential  to  success  in 
many  branches  of  domestic  and  foreign  industiy  and  com- 
merce. 

4.  Germcm  Dialects, 

§  23.  Formation  of  Dialects.  When  the  tribes  of  the  Ger- 
man branch  of  the  Teutonic  family  first  settled  in  Ger- 
many, there  were  probably  but  few  difPerences  in  their  lan- 
guage. As  these  ignorant  and  almost  barbarous  tribes 
became  permanently  settled,  intercommunication  between 
them  soon  almost  entirely  ceased.  In  every  province,  city, 
secluded  valley,  or  mountainous  region,  dialectic  changes 
immediately  began  to  be  developed.  Words  rapidly  be- 
came modified  in  pronimciation  and  in  meaning.  Kew 
words  grew  out  of  old  roots.  With  some  tribes  words 
passed  out  of  use.  Different  vowel  and  consonant  sounds 
gained  a  predominance  in  certain  regions.  Grammatical 
forms  were  dropj^ed,  modified,  or  added.  New  words  from 
foreign  sources  were  added  to  one  dialect  without  being 
adopted  by  its  neighbors.  Thus  within  a  short  time  were 
formed  a  great  number  of  dialects  in  all  parts  of  Germany. 

Otlier  influences,  on  the  other  hand,  soon  set  in  to  retard 
the  growth  of  dialects  and  to  permanently  fix  their  fonns,. 


232  INTRODUCTION.  [§  24. 

There  has,  indeed,  been  less  change  in  the  character  of  the 
local  dialects  of  Germany  since  the  seventh  century,  than 
there  has  been  in  that  of  the  cultivated  High-German  lan- 
guage since  the  sixteenth  century. 

As  we  have  seen  above  (§  12),  one  of  the  Upper-German 
dialects  in  Saxony  became  the  grammatical  basis  of  the 
present  German  language  (§  6),  which  is  spoken  by  the  edu- 
cated classes  in  all  parts  of  Germany.  But  the  great  mass 
of  the  people,  and  more  especially  of  the  peasantry,  still 
speak  their  own  local  and  provincial  dialects.  Even  the 
educated  classes  are  but  rarely  entirely  free  from  provincial- 
isms, both  in  pronunciation,  in  the  intonation  of  sentences, 
and  in  the  use  of  words. 

The  dialectic  differences  between  the  languages  of  the 
tribes  of  North  and  those  of  South  Germany  (which  were 
indistinctly  marked  in  the  proper  names  handed  down  to 
us  by  Roman  wiiters)  have,  in  the  course  of  time,  been  suf- 
ficiently developed  to  give  a  basis  for  a  classification  of  the 
dialects  of  Germany. 

They  are  divided  by  a  line  running  nearly  from  Aix-la- 
Chapelle  to  Berlin  (§  3)  into  two  chief  groups,  the  Ujpjper- 
German  and  the  Lower- German  dialects. 

§  24.  Upper-Grerman  The  dialects  of  Upper  or  South 
Dialects.  Germany,  extending  south  as  far 

as  the  Alps,  are,  like  all  languages  of  mountainous  districts, 
full  of  terse  and  short  words  and  expressions.  The  words 
are  apparently  clipped  off  or  contracted,  and  are  strength- 
ened by  doubling  the  consonants.  The  Upper-German  dia- 
lects are  fuller  of  consonants  and  of  harsh  guttural  sounds 
than  is  the  cultivated  national  language,  and  much  more  so 
than  are  the  dialects  of  North  Germany,  or  than  ai-e  any 
other  of  the  Teutonic  languages.  They  are  thus  both 
harsh  to  the  ear  and  difi3cult  of  pronunciation. 

They  are  subdivided  into  four  groups:  the  Bavaro- 
Austrian,  the  Sudbian,  the  Allemanian,  and  the  Franhish 


§  25-27.]  GERMAN   DIALECTS.  233 

§  25.  Lower-German  The  Lower-  German  or  North-  Ger- 
Dialects.  man  (called  also  the  Flatt-Deutsdi) 

dialects,  like  all  languages  in  low  and  plain  countries,  are 
softer  to  the  ear,  freer  from  consonants  and  guttui-als,  and 
fuller  of  vowels  and  liquids,  than  those  of  South  Germany. 
The  Lower-German  dialects  are  in  many  respects  inter- 
mediate in  character,  as  they  are  in  geographical  position, 
between  those  of  South  Germany  and  those  of  Scandinavia. 

They  are  also  subdivided  into  four  chief  groups:  the 
Lower-Saxon^  the  Westphalian,  those  of  the  Lower-Rhine, 
and  the  Friesan  (§  4). 

§  26.  Characteristic    In  a  large  number  of  words  where 
Differences.  the  Upper-German  dialects   have 

f,  f,  ^  or  g,  fd),  b,  ci  or  c,  the  same  words  in  the  Lower- 
German  dialects  have  t,  ^J,  f,  f,  tl,  and  o*  From  the  fre- 
quent rccun-ence  of  the  t  for  the  f ,  some  writers  call  the 
Lower-German  the  ,,bat"  dialects,  and  the  Upper-German 
the  ff\sii^**  dialects. 


§  27.  Tables  in  For  the  purpose  of  presenting  to 

Comparative  Language,  the  eye  at  a  glance  a  few  of  the 
verbal  analogies  upon  which  the  theory  of  the  relation- 
sliip,  and  of  the  history  of  the  development  of  languages  ifi 
to  a  large  degree  based,  we  give  the  three  following  tables, 
presenting : 

1.  Comparison  of  words  in  the  Indo-European  languages. 

2.  "  "  "  Teutonic  " 

3.  Illustrations  of  the  liistoric  development  of  words  in 

the  German  language. 
Tlie  intricate  and  subtle  laws  of  vocal  changes,  a  knowl- 
edge of  which  is  necessary  for  the  complete  understand- 
ing of  these  tables,  must  be  resen-ed  for  explanation  in 
more  advanced  works.  In  these  tables  the  vowels  are  pro- 
nounced as  in  German. 


234 


INTRODUCTION. 


English. 

Father, 

Mother, 

Son, 

Daughter, 

brother. 

Sister, 

Sun, 

Star, 

Day, 

Yesterday, 

Night, 

Month, 

Eye, 

Knee, 

Salt, 

Name, 

Bed, 

To  hear, 

Am, 

Art, 

Is, 

r, 

Me, 

Thou, 

Thee, 

One, 

Two, 

Three, 

Six, 

Ten, 

Over^ 


Sanscrit. 

pitar, 

matar, 

sunis, 

duhitar, 

bhratar. 


swasar, 

Byona, 

stri, 

hyas, 

nakta, 

mas, 

akshi, 

jano, 

naman, 

rohita, 

bhri, 

asmi, 

asi, 

asti, 

aham, 

mam, 

tvam, 

tvam, 

dwi, 

tri, 

shash, 

da9an, 

upari, 


§  28.  Comparison  of  Words  in 

Bactrian.      {New-Persian.^       Greek. 

padar,  waTrip, 

mata,  mader,         fimvp, 


datar, 
bratar. 


ahmi, 

as-si, 

acta, 

azem, 

mam, 

tum, 

thwam, 


doktarah,      Ovyarrip, 
brader,         (l>paTrip, 
hhaher, 


sitarah. 


di-ruz. 


am, 


nam, 
surkh, 

em, 

h 

est, 

man, 

mara, 

tu, 

tara, 

yak, 

du, 

sih, 

shesh, 

dah, 

bala, 


riXiog, 


vv^{vvkt6c;), 

OKog, 

yovv, 

u\q, 

ovofjia, 

ipvOpog, 

tlfXl, 

icrri  (v), 
eyoj, 

TV, 

vwip, 


COMPARATIVE   TABLE. 


235 


the  Indo-European  Languages. 

Latin. 

Keltic. 

Slavic. 

(Lithuanian.) 

Gothic 

pater. 

aithar. 

patr, 

fadar. 

mater. 

matliair. 

matka, 

sin, 

decra, 

mota. 

modar. 

dear, 

DlLLLUo, 

dukt^. 

D  Ull  Ub. 

dauhtar. 

frater. 

brathair. 

bratr, 

brolis, 

brothar. 

cf\-t^r\Ti* 

piuthar. 

sestra. 

s\dstar. 

burur, 

sol, 
Stella, 

slun, 
hwezda, 

sauil. 
stiarno. 

dies. 

dia, 

den, 

dags. 

liestenius. 

wcera. 

(gestren). 

nox  (noctis),nochd. 

noc. 

nahts. 

mensis. 

mios. 

m^sje. 

aids. 

menoths. 

oculus, 

oko, 
koleno, 
soly, 
gmeno, 

augo. 
kniu. 
salt, 
nomo. 

sal 

salann, 

flinm 

Deli, 

iiomPTi 

JiUXXlCll, 

tllLllllj 

(rutilus). 

ruadh. 

cerwenij, 

rauds. 

■fprrp 

beir. 

(brati). 

bairan. 

XCl  1  tJ. 

sum. 

is, 

gsem. 

esmi. 

im. 

es. 

is, 

gsi, 

esi. 

is. 

est, 

is, 

gest. 

esti. 

it 

ego, 

mi, 

azu. 

az*, 

ik. 

me, 

mi. 

me. 

mane. 

mik. 

tu, 

thu. 

ty, 

tu. 

thu. 

te, 

thu. 

ti. 

tave, 

thuk. 

unus, 

un, 

gedno. 

venas. 

ains. 

duo. 

do. 

dwa, 

dwi. 

tvai. 

tres. 

tri, 

tri. 

Ir^s, 

threis. 

GOV 

shestj. 

szessi. 

saihs. 

Dt>A, 

decern. 

deich. 

deset. 

deszimt, 

tailiun. 

super, 

08, 

pres, 

ufar. 

'^'dtl 

INTEODUCnON, 

§  29.  Compa] 

rison  of  Words 

(1.)  Gothic, 

(2.) 

Scandinavian. 

English. 

Gothic. 

Icelandic. 

Swedish. 

Danish. 

Father^ 

fadar. 

fadir, 

fader. 

fader. 

MotJier, 

modar. 

modhir, 

moder, 

moder. 

Son, 

sunus. 

sonr, 

son. 

son. 

Daughter, 

dauhtar. 

dattir, 

datter. 

dotter. 

Brother, 

brothar. 

brodliir. 

broder. 

broder. 

Sister, 

svistar. 

systir. 

syster, 

soster. 

Man, 

man. 

madlir. 

man, 

mana. 

Sun, 

sauil. 

sol. 

sol. 

soel. 

Moon, 

mena. 

mani, 

mane. 

moane. 

Star, 

stairno. 

stima, 

stjerna. 

stierne. 

Day, 

dags. 

dag, 

dag. 

dag. 

Night, 

nahts. 

nott. 

natt. 

nat. 

Good, 

gods. 

godr. 

god. 

god. 

Better, 

batiza. 

betra. 

battra. 

bedre. 

High, 

hauhs. 

ha, 

liog. 

hoi. 

Bitter, 

baitrs. 

bitr. 

bitter. 

bitter. 

Sweet, 

sntis. 

sotr. 

sot. 

sod. 

One, 

ains. 

einn. 

en. 

een. 

Two, 

tvai. 

tvein, 

tva, 

to. 

Three, 

threis. 

thrir. 

tre, 

tre. 

Ten, 

taihun. 

tin, 

tio, 

ti. 

To  have. 

haban. 

hafa, 

hafva, 

have. 

To  come. 

quiman. 

koma. 

•  komma, 

konmie. 

Togo, 

gahan. 

sia, 

ga, 

goa. 

In, 

in. 

i, 

h 

i. 

Out, 

ut. 

lit, 

nt. 

ud. 

Over, 

nfar. 

yfir. 

ofver. 

over, 

m, 

n^. 

nei. 

nej, 

nei. 

Yes, 

ja. 

ja, 

js 

ja. 

COMPARATIVE   TABLE. 


237 


in  the  Teutonic  Languages. 

(3.)  Germanic, 

German. 

Lower-German 

.    Friesan. 

Dutch. 

Anglo-Saxoa. 

SBatcr, 

fadder, 

fader. 

vader. 

fader. 

Wluiitx, 

mudder, 

moder. 

moder. 

moder. 

©p()n, 

san, 

son. 

zoon. 

sunn. 

Xoc^ter, 

dochter, 

dochter. 

dochter. 

dohter. 

53rut'er, 

broder, 

broder, 

broeder, 

brodner. 

(Bc^wcfter, 

Bwester, 

swester. 

zuster. 

swyster. 

aJ^vinn, 

man, 

man. 

man, 

man. 

6onnc, 

sunne, 

sunne. 

zoen, 

sunna. 

SJ^onb, 

moand, 

mond. 

maan, 

mona. 

(Stern, 

steern, 

stera. 

ster. 

steorra. 

^ag, 

dag, 

dei. 

dag. 

daeg. 

5^a^t, 

nacht, 

nacht, 

nacht,  • 

niht. 

9«t, 

god, 

god,. 

good. 

god. 

beffcr, 

bater, 

beter. 

beteren. 

beterian. 

^0^, 

hoch, 

hag. 

hoog, 

heah. 

bitter, 

bitter, 

bitter. 

bitter. 

biter. 

fue, 

sot, 

swet. 

zoet, 

swete. 

tin, 

een. 

an. 

een. 

ain. 

mh 

twee, 

tw^ne. 

twee. 

twa. 

trei. 

dree, 

thre. 

drie. 

thi-i. 

^cf)n. 

tein, 

tian,     . 

tien. 

t6n. 

^)aben. 

hebben, 

hebba, 

hebben. 

habban. 

fommen, 

koainen. 

kuma, 

komen, 

cuman. 

gcben, 

goaen. 

gan. 

gaan. 

gangan. 

in, 

in. 

in. 

in. 

in. 

au^, 

nut, 

lit, 

utt, 

iit. 

liber, 

over, 

over, 

over. 

over. 

nein, 

ne. 

na. 

ne. 

na. 

ia. 

joa, 

ie. 

ja, 

gese. 

238 


IKTRODUCTION. 


§  30.  Illustration  of  the 

Words  in  the 

English. 

{Gothic,) 

Old-German. 

Middle-  German 

.    New- German. 

Father, 

fadar, 

fatar, 

vater. 

SSater. 

Mother, 

modar, 

muotar, 

muoter. 

SJluttcr. 

Son, 

sunus, 

sunu, 

sun. 

®o^n. 

Daughter, 

dauhtar, 

tohter. 

tobter. 

Slo^ter. 

Brother, 

brothar, 

bruodar, 

bruoder, 

S3ruber. 

Sister, 

svistar, 

suestar, 

swester. 

(^^wefter. 

Man, 

man, 

man. 

man, 

3)iann. 

Friend, 

frijonds, 

friunt. 

vrimit, 

greunb* 

House, 

hus. 

bus. 

bus. 

^m^. 

Sun, 

snnno, 

sunna. 

smme. 

©onne. 

Moon, 

menoths. 

manoth. 

manot. 

S^onb. 

Star, 

stairno. 

stemo, 

stem. 

(Stern. 

Day, 

dags, 

tac, 

tach. 

3:ag. 

Night, 

nahts, 

nabt. 

nabt. 

'^<[6^\. 

Good, 

gods. 

guot, 

guot. 

gut. 

Better, 

batiza. 

beziro. 

bezzer. 

kffer^ 

Best, 

batists, 

bezist. 

bezzist, 

lt% 

High, 

hauhs. 

hob. 

hoch. 

^od^. 

Bitter, 

baiti-s, 

bittar. 

bitter. 

bitter. 

Sweet, 

sutis. 

suazi. 

suze. 

m^ 

To  hear. 

hausjan. 

horan, 

hdren. 

^oren* 

To  come. 

quiman. 

cbuman, 

komen. 

fommen. 

Togo, 

feaban). 

gen, 

gen, 

ge^en. 

To  see. 

saihvan, 

sehan. 

sehen. 

fe^en. 

To  eat, 

itan, 

ezzan, 

ezzen. 

effen. 

/, 

ik. 

ih, 

ich. 

ic^. 

Me, 

mik. 

mib, 

mich, 

mtc^» 

Thou, 

thu. 

du, 

du. 

bu. 

Thee, 

tbiik. 

dih. 

dich, 

bi*. 

HISTORICAL  TABLE. 


239 


Historical  Development  of 
German  Language. 


Enylish. 

(Gothic.)  Old- German. 

Middle-German. 

New-  German^ 

Jle, 

is, 

ir, 

er. 

cr. 

She, 

si, 

siu, 

siu  (sie). 

ftc. 

It, 

it, 

iz. 

Bi, 

ee- 

We, 

veis, 

wir. 

wir. 

wir. 

You, 

jus, 

^, 

ir, 

x% 

They, 

eis, 

eis. 

sie. 

fte. 

MTio, 

livas,  hvo, 

hwer. 

wer. 

tt)cr. 

Which, 

hvelciks, 

liwiolililier,  welher. 

weld^ct. 

One, 

aiiis. 

eines, 

eines. 

ein^. 

Two, 

tvai. 

zwene. 

zw^ne, 

iml 

Three, 

threis. 

dri^, 

dri^. 

tret 

Four, 

fidvoreis. 

fiori, 

viere, 

»tcr. 

Five, 

fimf. 

fimfi. 

viinve, 

fiinf. 

Seven, 

sibiin, 

sibun, 

siben. 

(tebcn. 

Fight, 

ahtau. 

ahto. 

aht. 

a^t 

Nine, 

niun, 

niun, 

niun. 

neutt. 

Ten, 

tailiiin. 

zehan, 

zehen, 

yt^n. 

No, 

ne. 

ne-ein. 

nein, 

nein. 

Yes, 

ja, 

js, 

ja, 

ia. 

To  write, 

(L.  9cribere), 

scripan. 

scliriben, 

fc^reiben. 

Boundari 

/,  (Fol.ffranigc 

0,gremtz, 

grenitz, 

©renje. 

Cabbage,  (Ital.  cacoZo),  cholo,  kol. 

Nation,  (L.  natio,  Fr.  Tiatim),  nation,  S^iation. 

Excepted,  uzgenommen,  au^genommen. 

Muscle,  {L.musculu8), Tlu^kL 

Museum,  {L.  museum), SJ^ufeum. 

Coke,  (English),    (EoaU, 

Coffee,  CA.rab.  ioAwoA,  Fr.ca/e),  ^affec. 


GERMAN  GRAMMAR. 
(2)cutf(^c  ^xammatit) 

§  31.  GEEMA:N"  grammar,  like  that  of  aU  cultivar 
ted  languages,  is  divided  into  four  parts : 

Orthography,  Etymology,  Syntax,  and  Prosody. 

Rem.  In  this  work  prosody  is  omitted  entirely.  Syntax  is  not  treated  sep- 
arately, but  the  etymology  and  syntax  of  each  part  of  speech  are  given  in 
the  same  chapter.  Many  portions  of  the  German  grammar  are  omitted 
where  the  same  laws  prevail  as  in  the  English  language. 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 

§  32.  The  German  Alphabet  has  twenty-six  letters 


51,  a 

at. 


Bay. 
,  Tsay. 
Day, 
Ay. 

.  Gay. 
,JIah. 

,Ee. 


3,i Tote. 

^,f Kah. 

%\ Ell. 

SD^,  m Emm. 

5^^,11 Enn. 

£),  0 Oh. 

9>,P Pay- 

D,  q Koo. 

9^,  r Err. 


'^,\{^)..Ess. 

Z,X Tay. 

U,u Oo. 

35,  i) Fow. 

2B,tt) Yay. 

'&,x Ihs. 

g),9 Ijpseelon, 

3,a Tset. 

(See  Lesson  I.,  1.) 


Rem.  The  German  Alphabet,  like  those  of  all,  other  European  nations,  was 
developed  from  the  Latin.  Under  the  influence  of  the  artistic  spirit  of  the 
times,  during  the  thirteenth  and  fourteenth  centuries,  when  in  architecture  the 
pointed  arch  took  the  place  of  the  round  arch,  pointed  letters  took  the  place  in 
manuscripts  of  the  round  Latin  letters.  The  pointed  letters  were  adopted 
also  in  the  first  books  that  were  printed  both  in  English,  French,  and  Lat- 
in, as  well  as  in  the  German  language.  With  the  revival  of  classical  tasto 
there  was  a  return  to  the  use  of  the  Latin  alphabet,  first  in  Italy,  then  in 
France,  England,  Holland,  Poland,  and  other  European  countries.  The 
Latin  letters  are  now  also  used  in  many  German  books  and  periodicals. 


§  33-37.]  VOWELS  AND   DIPHTHONGS.      ^  241 

l.YOWELS  AND  DIPHTHONGS. 

OQolak  unb  2)i^^t^ongc0 
§  33.  1.  There  are  seven  simple  Vowel  Sounds: 

2.  And  three  Diphthongal  Sounds :  ci,  an,  en. 

Rem.  1 .  All  the  seven  vowels  have  both  /on^  and  short  sounds. 

Rem.  2.  The  three  umlaut  vowels  a,  ij,  ii  (also  written  at,  OC,  UC)  represent 
distinct  vowel  sounds,  not  modifications  of  the  vowels  a,  0,  U* 

Rej/i.  3.  The  d  and  ii  first  appeared  in  the  eleventh  and  twelfth  centuries ; 
the  j)  and  ou  (also  CU)  first  appeared  during  the  Middle-German  period. 

§34.  The  Vowel  is  long: 

1.  Wlien  doubled  in  the  same  syllable:  $aar,  ©pree. 

2.  With  silent  1^  in  the  same  syllable :  <Bo\)n,  ffioi^. 

3.  When  it  closes  a  syllable  (especially  if  it  is  accented) : 

4.  In  radical  syllables  and  monosyllables  wliich  end  with 

a  single  consonant :  $ab '^fuc^t,  le^^^bar,  trag'^bar ;  er, 

torn,  ber,  bem,  ben,  bar,  »or,  fitr. 

£xc.  The  vowel  is  short  in  ab,  an,  bt§,  in,  mit,  um,  V)on :  ob,  ^tn,  ttjcg ;  cs, 
man,  ttjaS ;  bag,  beS,  im,  bom,  jum ;  bin,  tjat. 

§  35.  The  Vowel  is  short: 

1.  When  followed  by  a  double  consonant :  faVAtXi,  bcf  ^fcr, 
mv^t,  mam,  53ctt,  foil,  ^luU. 

2.  Or  by  two  or  more  consonants :  53anb,  biC^benb,  tfl. 

£xc.  1.  The  vowel  is  long--  in  the  contracted  words,  9Jiogb,  SD'Jonb,  2J?on* 
tag,  Objl,  Oftcrn,  ^a^ft,  5Rofl,  Zxo%  g'rbgt,  bbd^ft,  nac^jl,  trofien,  and  tviifl 
{from  Mid.-Ger.  maget,  manot,  obez,  ostanln,  b&best,  groezest,  hoehest,  etc.). 

Exc.  2.  Also  in  some  conlf  actions  of  verbs,  as  :  fjabt  (^abet),  tebfl  (Icbet). 

Exc.  3.  And  before  r  in  ^rt,  ^Irjt,  53ar8,  S3art,  Cuar^,  jart ;  ©rbc,  ^crbe, 
^erb,  ^fcrb,  ©c^teert ;  SBorb  ;  ©cburt. 

§  36.  Diphthongs  are  always  long :  gaufl,  leijlen,  fcud^t 

§  37  Vowels  belonging  to  different  syllables  must  be  pro- 
nounced separately:  geenbet  (ge^en'^bet),  5lrmecn  (^Ir^^me'^en), 
^inie  (Si'^ni^e),  Canaan  (^a'^na^an),  B^ologie  (3i'^o4o?gie'). 

L 


242  ^  ORTHOGRAPHY.  [§  38. 

§  38.  Vowels  and  Diphthongs  are  soiuided  thu& ; 

1.  %f  a*    1.  The  long  sound,  like  a  in  father  :  33atcr,  la0. 
2.  The  short  sound  is  shorter  and  sharper,  but  not  as 

flat  as  in  hat :  \)<i\,  ba^,  laffen,  SiJlann. 

2.  ^ftf  has  three  sounds : 

1.  Long^  like  a  in  7nate :  (S^nee,  me^r,  bctt,  bem. 

2.  Short,  like  e  in  helt^  let :  bellt,  ^ett,  beffer,  beft,  2Bem 
bung,  Xrennung. 

3.  It  is  almost  suppressed  in  terminations  and  pre- 
fixes :  ^aben,  meine,  (g^netber,  gelobt,  (^ebdube. 

3.  3,  t>  1.  The  long  sound,  like  e^  in  meet :  Wlm,  t^m. 
2.  The  short  sownd,  like  ^  in  hit :  bitter,  mibe,  in,  ift. 

Rem.  ^  is  never  doubled ;  when  followed  by  silent  tf  it  has  a  long  sound : 
tie,  2)iener,  tier.    But  \t  is  short  in  DtcrjC^n,  ^icrStg,  llicrtcl. 

4.  D,  0*  1.  The  long  sound,  like  o  in  note  :  Sf^otl),  33oot. 
2.  The  short  sound  is  intermediate  between  that  of  o 

in  zone  and  that  of  t^  in  sun  :  (Sonne,  SSolf,  boppelt. 

5.  Vif  !!♦  1.  The  long  sound,  like  oo  in  moot :  ^\x\\),  t^un. 
2.  The  ^Ao/*^  sound  is  intermediate  between  that  of  oo 

in  pool,  and  that  of  u  in  pull :  5)ult,  ^unb,  fur^. 

6.  ?),  l|,  sounds  likeii(§  38, 9) :  5leg5)pten,  (Syntax,  ®^ftem. 

^em.  In  all  words  of  Geraian  origin,  where  ^  was  formerly  used,  as  well 
as  in  foreign  words  that  are  fully  naturalized,  it  is  now  replaced  by  i  (§  38, 10). 

7.  ^e,  if  sounds  like  C  (§  38,  2). 

Rem.  Strictly  speaking,  a  somewhat  more  open  sound  than  that  of  a  in 
mate,  one  intermediate  between  that  of  a  in  vary  and  that  of  e  in  very,  is  given 
to  a,  and  also  to  e  in  some  words  (as  ftlCr,  bet,  (£rbC ;  \tUVi,  gCtlCU,  ItttVif 

gcgcn,  ©(!^ncc,  etc.). 

8.  Dc,  i)  [ph-umlaut),  has  no  equivalent  in  English. 

iJem.  It  is  like  the  French  eu.  Its  sound  may  be  approximated  by  pro' 
ducing  a  sound  intermediate  between  that  of  a  in  hane  and  that  of  ar  in  hum: 
SBiJrfe,  S3i5^men,  @c^5n,  Sbffet,  getojc^t. 

9.  Uc^  ii  {oo-umlaut),  has  no  equivalent  in  English. 

Rem.  It  is  like  the  French  u.  Thus  @ilb  may  be  approximately  pro- 
nounced by  placing  the  lips  as  if  about  to  whistle,  and  then  trying  to  sa^ 
seed:  ©lib,  milbc,  2Jiiltter,  @d;lu[fel. 


§38-40.]  CONSONANTS.  243 

10.  Wl,  ai  (or  &,  ci),  like  i  in  ynuj/it :  mein,  W^txw,  3cit. 

Rem.  Of  the  four  forms  at,  ttt),  Ci,  C^,  which  have  contested  for  supremacy 
in  the  German  language  since  the  fourteenth  century,  the  form  Ci  has  come 
otr  the  victor.  At  present  a^  is  dropped  entirely ;  CI)  is  used  only  in  some 
pro])er  names  (^c^nc,  lUiei)er,  etc.);  antl  fli  is  used  in  but  few  words  (as 
msixwh  iUiailanb,  ^aifer,  2)kt). 

11.  5(u,  m,  like  ou  in  mound :  3)?auer,  laut,  $au^, 

12.  (gu,  cu  (or  Wcu,  iiu),  like  oi  in  7/i<?^5^  .•  ?eute,  9}^aufe. 

^ew.  oi,  used  only  in  a  few  proper  names,  has  the  same  sound :  33roiban. 

§  39.  In  the  development  of  all  languages,  vowels  (and  also  the  liquids, 
I,  ttt^  Vi,  X)  are  more  subject  to  change  than  are  consonants. 


2.  CO]S[SO]>TANTS. 
(tonfonantcn.) 
§  40.  The  Consonants  are  sounded  as  follows  : 

1.  S3,  b.  1.  Beginning  a  syllable,  like  h  :  53i(b,  53rett. 

2.  Ending  a  syllable,  nearly  like  p  :  T)kh,  ()alb,  <ih,  ob. 

Exc.  It  has  the  sound  of  6  before  6  or  b :  Sbbc,  ©cliibbe. 

2.  K,  C»  1.  Before  a,  0,  or  U  (or  before  a  consonant)  is 
pronounced  like  k  in  king  :  dato,  diivo* 

2.  Before  other  vowels,  like  ts  in  mits :  dicero,  dere^, 

3.  2),  b.  1.  Beginning  a  syllable,  like  d :  2)om,  brci,  ba. 
2.  Ending  a  syllable,  nearly  like  t :  $anb,  ^ab,  SHab, 

-Etc.  The  sound  of  b  is  given  in  bb :  3tbbcr,  SSibbcr. 

4.  g,  f  (»,  tJ,  or  ^^,  »)b),  like/in >i^  .•  fetn,  ^reuubf^aft ; 
mcr,  baoon ;  pbilofopbte. 

Rem.  1.  In  foreign  words  b  sounds  like  v  in  ever:  @t(abe,  ^i^ctcl,  brat>. 

i?c7/i.  2.  For  a  long  time  f  and  U  were  used  interchangeably.  Their  use 
ha.s  finally  become  settled,  but  in  a  purely  arbitrary  way  ;  the  f  largely  jne- 
domiriates. 

Rem.  3.  The  ^!^  only  occurs  in  words  of  Greek  origin,  as  in  ^^i(ofo^(;ic,  and 
in  a  few  German  proper  names,  as :  5lboIp^  (or  ?lbolf),  9JuboI)>^  (f),  ^cft^^a* 
Icn. 

5.  %f  g»  1.  Before  a  vowel,  like  g  in  gay :  gcben,  ©ritnb. 
2.  After  a  vowel  (and  not  before  n),  see  §  40,17. 


244  ORTHOGRAPHY.  [§  40. 

6.  §,  Ij,  Like  h  in  house :  ^au^,  l^od^,  er^eben,  3o^ann. 

Exc,  The  letter  ||  is  silent :  (1)  in  the  combination  t!^,  as  in  %^i)y\,  9^ot^  ; 
(2)  after  a  vowel,  as  in  @o^n,  So^n  ;  (3)  after  r  in  9i^ebe,  9i^cin,  Sftfjabarbcr ; 
(4)  after  X  in  some  proper  names,  as  33o(f^. 

7.  3r  i*  I^ike  2/  in  yoke:  So^ann,  3uU,  3aBr,  3anuar. 

8.  ^,  !♦  Like  7c  in  ^m^  /  ^ontg,  fommen,  $>unft,  ^otn. 

Rem.  In  those  foreign  words  that  have  become  fully  naturalized,  {  has  al- 
most entirely  displaced  C :  ^un!t,  Songre^,  ^ollt. 

9.  ^f  \f  9Jl,  VXf  ^Xf  Mf  '^f  )^f  £l,  (\f  have  the  same  sound  as 
Z,  m,  n,p,  q  in  English :  ^amm,  ^eimpinfel,  QuaL 

i2em.  Before  !,  It  takes  the  sound  of  ng  (§  40, 10) ;  S)an!,  bcnten,  Itn!§. 

10.  9J,  r*  1.  At  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  X  has  a  sound 
somewhat  rougher  and  deeper  in  the  throat  than  in 
English:  SfJot^, runb, 3fi^etn* 

2.  In  other  positions  it  is  trilled :  53rob,  33art,  ber,  XOtx. 

11.  @,  g  (ff  or  g).  1.  Like  s  in  Z^^^  ;  ba^  3[^c(Ter,  ift,  ba^, 

2.  But  a  single  f  before  a  vowel  sounds  like  s  in  zone : 
(Sot)n,  fte,  (Slifa,  gelefen* 

3.  When  before  ^J  or  t  and  at  the  beginning  of  a  radi- 
cal syllable,  f  sounds  like  sh  in  shall :  ^pree,  @tein, 
tjerfte^en,  au^gefpro^en. 

Rem.  1.  In  former  periods  of  the  language,  f^  ff,  and  ^  were  very  largely 
interchanged.     Even  yet  authorities  vary  in  the  use  of  ff  and  ^. 

Rem.  2.  The  short  g  is  used  at  the  end  of  syllables :  2)re8ben,  ^otSbaitl, 
laS,  auSetnanber,  S)onner§tag. 

12.  %f  t  (or  %^f  i\)).  1.  Like  t  in  tone :  ^on,  %\)m,  3}?ilt(). 
2.  Like  ts  in  mits,  in  final  Ax^n,  ^tial,  AxiXii,  not  pre- 
ceded by  { ;  ^eftion,  Quotient* 

Rem.  1.  The  sound  of  t  is  preserved  when  the  accent  is  on  the  tt,  as  in 
S)emotratte,  ^artte,  9JJiUiabeg. 

Rem..  2.  Also  when  i\  is  preceded  by  f :  Oueftion',  33aftton'. 

Rem.  3,  In  the  history  of  the  language  there  have  been  many  interchanges 
between  t,  b,  and  tl^.  Some  modern  writers,  called  "  purists,''  reject  the  ti^ 
entirely,  and  write  tCil  (2:^ei0,  tUlt  (S^un). 

13.  S,  to*  Like  v  in  vine :  2Bein,  2Bien,  jn?et,  n?arum. 

iJem.  2SJ,  after  0^  occurring  in  a  few  proper  names,  is  silent :  ^au!ott). 


§  40-43.]  CONSONANTS.  246 

14.  3^,  j»  Like  x  in  lox:  53orar,  (^rempct,  'S.txxt^,  §ere,  fir. 

Rem.  The  letter  f  is  used  mostly  in  words  of  foreign  origin. 

15.  3f  5  (^  and  33)»  Like  ts  in  fits:  3eit,  pu^en,  (5%c. 

Rem.  The  use  of  J,  ^,  JJ  has  varied  greatly  in  the  different  periods  of  the 
language. 

16.  ^%f  ng»  Like  ng  in  sing :  ftngctt,  ginger,  brdngen. 

Rem.  A  slight  k  sound  is  given  after  n(J  when  it  follows  a  vowel :  ^WX% 
Crane/'),  Slnfift  (ang^sO. 

17.  ^^,  d),  and  (J  liave  ^i(?6)  guttural  sounds: 

1.  (T^,  (^  (and  g^  when  ending  a  syllable),  after  a,  0, 
U,  or  au,  have  a  rough  aspirate  sound,  formed 
deeper  in  the  throat  and  much  stronger  than 
that  of  A  in  hope :  ^od)  (hohh)  high  ;  %\x6:)  {toohh), 
cloth;  Xag  {tahh),  day ;  mac^en  {ma^-hhen\  to  make, 

2.  After  other  letters  (and  in  the  diminutive  sylla- 
ble t^cn),  they  have  a  softer  sound,  made  higher 
in  the  palate,  and  inclining  to  that  of  sh  in  shall: 
td^  {ih'%1;  rec^t  (reh'H),  right ;  ^inb'^en  (kind'- 
h^^en),  a  child  ;  Tlnn'^6)tn  (mwi'-h^^en),  Munich  ; 
WAxg,  {hil'lih'%  Beug  {tsoyh%  33er9  {berh'^). 

Rem.  1.  In  words  of  Greek  origin,  ^  sounds  like  k:  Sbor,  choir. 

Rem.  2.  Also  before  §  in  the  same  radical  syllable,  like  k:  SSac^S,  wax. 

§  41.  Many  foreign  words  retain  their  original  pro- 
nunciation, as  :  53ureau,  $alai^,  5^9on,  Tlajox,  @ou»erneur, 
Qticu,  5lt)»erb,  from  the  French  ;  ^Jloaftbeef,  dlub,  from  the 
English  ;  ^olo,  Xrto,  from  the  Italian. 

Rem.  In  a  few  words  the  foreign  pronunciation  is  retained  in  only  a  part 
of  the  word  :  ^enfion  {pon^^-si-dne). 

§  42.  The  pronunciation  of  the  educated  classes  and  in  polite  circles  in  the 
city  of  Berlin  is  at  present  the  standard  of  good  pronunciation  throughout 
Germany.  The  above  rules  are  given  in  accordance  with  the  usages  now 
prevailing  in  Berlin. 


3.  DIYISIOK  OF  SYLLABLES. 
(StjIbcntrcnnungO 
§  43.  In  Pronouncing,  the  following  laws  prevail : 


246  oRTiioGRAPirY.  [§  43-45. 

1.  In  simple  words :  (1.)  A  single  consonant,  between 

two  vowels,  is  pronounced  with  the  last  vowel,  as  in : 
SSa^^ter,  ^ru'^fcer,  le'==ben,  ^a'^ben,  mei'^ner,  gu'4en» 
(2.)  Of  two  or  more  consonants,  the  first  is  pronounced 
with  the  preceding,  and  the  remainder  with  the 
following  vowel :  "MxVAt,  fc^im'^pfen,  Deuf  4^^* 

2.  In  derivative  words,  prefixes,  and  suffixes  not  begin- 
ning with  a  vowel,  are  pronounced  in  separate  sylla 
bles:  ©e^talf ,  cingftMic^,  t)ult)'^fam ;  ©tant^'^^aft^g^eit, 
but  giirf  4tn,  ^lei'^^bung,  gdrbe^vei^  ©ii'^te. 

3.  The  parts  of  convpound  words  are  pronounced  sepsr. 
rately :  au^^ein^^an'ber,  ;Don'ner^4ag,  ^m'^\)6itn,  l^er^um^ 

Rem.  Some  writers  mark  the  division  of  syllables  according  to  the  pro- 
nunciation, others  according  to  the  roots  of  words.  The  latter  method  is 
more  convenient  in  paradigms :  Kieb'^en,  mcin'^cr,  gut'^cr,  gut'*e,  breit'^eft. 


4.  ACCEl^T. 
(5lcccntO 
§  44.  The  Primary  Accent  is  on  the  radical  syllable  of 
simple  words,  w^hether  primitive  or  derivative ;  inflectional 
endings,  and  most  prefixes  and  suffixes  (§  45, 3,  Rem.),  are 
unaccented:  lieb'^en,  mein^^en,  (iebMid^eren,  S5a'4er,  ©e^talt^ 
ge4tebt':^eften,  ge^a^r^^ic^ften* 

Exc.  The  accent  is  not  on  the  radical  syllable  in  Icben'^btg. 

§  45.  In  Compound  Words,  the  radical  syllable  of  the  most 
emphatic  component  takes  the  primary  accent : 

1.  The  first  or  modifying  word  of  compound  nouns  and 
adjectives,  and  of  separable  compound  verbs,  takes  the 
primary  accent :  ^auf  ^manu,  SSor'^f^rift,  gelb^^rot^,  avi^'^ 
ge^en,  ein'^fii^ren,  um^er^^ge!)en,  mi^^^^trauen* 

Exc.  1.  The  nouns  3a^r^un'*bert,  3a^rtau'*fenb,  9^orbh)eft',  ©iiboff,  etc 
Exc.  2.  The  adjectives  ijottfom'^men^ttotbrnen'^big,  tr>a^r^af  4tg,  teibbaf^ig, 

barmber'^jtg,  gtii(ffe'4tg,  teibet'^gen ;  allwei'^fe,  aUmac^'4tg,  gro^mad^''tig, 

^oc^ab'-clig  (and  some  otlier  titular  ei)ithets). 


§  45-48.]  ACCENTS.  247 

2.  Tlie  accent  is  on  the  last  syllable  of  adverbs  com- 
pounded with  prepositions,  and  of  those  compounded 
with  ^in,  ^cr,  all,  and  tiicl:  wo^on^  womtt',  ba»on';  ^er? 
ein',  ^eraue',  i^ollauf ,  njo^lan",  allein^  mellei^t',  melmet)r'. 

3.  Insej>arable  prefixes  are  not  accented :  bewei^^^^/  ^^f ^ 
jle^'^^en,  mi^fal'^en,  Unterl)al'4ung. 

Exc.  1.  3lut'4i^,  and  2lnt'=tDort  (and  its  compounds). 
Exc.  2.  All  words  compounded  with  Ct J=  and  Uls,  and  many  of  those  com- 
pounded with  mt^=  and  un^:  (Sr5'*bijd;of,  Ur'^jac^e,  mi^'^anbcln,  un'^glcid; 
(but  mi|3far4en,  uncnt>'4id;,  etc.). 

Rem.  1.  Some  long  words,  however,  have  several  subordinate  accents: 
(5rcunb'fd;aftad)teit'en,  i5cu'cr*toerfic^'erung«*ge|cE'fd;att, 
©tQat^'*|rf?urbcn4irgung«"faj'fen*buc^'baIter  (§  :A,Rem.  1). 
Rem.  2.  Such  very  long  words  as  the  last  are  only  tolerated  in  oflScial  lan- 
guage, and  even  there  they  had  better  be  avoided. 

§  46.  Most  Foreign  Words  retain  their  original  accent. 
This  is  generally  on  the  last  syllable  in  words  from 

1.  The  French:  Dffeier^  douijerr,  SJiufir,  Smajefidr. 

2.  The  Latin  and  Greek:  S'^atur",  (Stubent",  ^()eologie'. 

Rem.  1.  The  foreign  terminations   sCt,  =tCr,  sift,  AxtVi  (tCrCH),  =Ur,  ^aft, 

e/c,  take  the  primary  accent,  whether  in  words  of  German  or  in  those  of  for- 
eign origin ;  garberei',  S3arbter',  ^Bhimift',  :>?olt'rcn,  ©lafur',  aJJoraft'. 

Rem.  2.  The  accent  is  changed  in  the  inflection,  and  in  the  derivatives  of 
some  foreign  words:  !J)ot'4or  (2)otto'*rcn),  (S^araf'^ter  (S^aratte'^re),  3Jiufif' 
mufitaMifd;),  @ramma'*tit  (grainmatita'4ifd;). 

Obs.  Differences  in  the  position  of  the  accent  upon  words, 
and  in  the  position  of  emphatic  words  in  sentences,  are 
among  the  chief  causes  of  the  great  difference  existing  be- 
tween the  intonation  and  the  cadence  of  the  English  and 
of  the  German  languages. 


5.  CAPITAL  LETTERS. 
(@ro§e  ^nfang^liuf^ftatiea.) 
§  47.  Capital  Letters  are  used  as  initials  to: 
1.  All  Nouns,  other  parts  of  speech  used  as  nouns,  and 
nouns  used  adverbially :  tcr  !D?ann,  tie  (Statt,  ba^  ^aue ; 
ter  @ute,  t»a^  Sefen ;  2>^orc;eu«J,  ^2lbeut^,  SBormittag^. 


248 


OETHOGBAPHY. 


[§48-49. 


2.  The  Indefinite  Pronouns :  Semanb,  S^ltemanb,  3eter^ 
mann  ;  also  ^\Xii<x^  and  5^t^t^,  when  not  before  nouna 
or  adjectives ;  and  5llle,  Wt^,  (Sinige,  SDiattd^er,  SSielc, 
when  used  substantively. 

3.  The  NumeTol  ^in,  when  used  in  contrast  to  winter* 

4.  The  Absolute  Possessives :  ber  SJ^einige,  ba^  S^rige,  bic 
SD^einigen,  bie  ©einigen,  etc. 

6.  Adjectives y  derived  from  proper  names  of  persons  or 
cities :  bie  ^antif^e  $>^i(ofop^ie,  ber  tolner  Dom. 

Rem.  Other  proper  adjectives  do  not  begin  with  capital  letters :  bie  beutfc^C 
©^rac^e,  ber  beutfc|e  S3unb,  eine  amerifamfc^e  Beitung. 


6.  COMPARISON  OF  GERMAK  A^D  ENGLISH 
WORDS. 

§  48.  Great  changes  have  taken  place  in  the  words  of 
the  German  and  English  languages  during  the  fourteen 
centuries  especially  that  have  passed  since  their  separa- 
tion. 

1.  A  few  words  only  have  the  same  radical  form,  or,  with 
different  spelling,  are  pronounced  alike,  as : 


SJ^ann,  man. 
§anb,  hand. 
®ra§,  grass. 
®(a§,  glass. 
$Ring,  ring, 
ginger,  finger, 
hunger,  hunger, 
^uf,  hoof. 


§au6,  house. 
2)?au§,  mouse. 
Braun,  brown, 
fauer,  sour, 
trarm,  warm, 
bitter,  bitter, 
blinb,  blind, 
mtlb,  mild. 


tnilb,  wild, 
feiu,  fine, 
metn,  mine, 
in,  in. 
bet,  by. 
dfo,  also. 
:()ier,  here. 
f(^ter,  sheer. 


faE^en,  to  fall, 
^ang^^eu,  to  hang, 
binb^^en,  to  bind, 
ftnb^en,  to  find. 
bring=en,  to  bring. 
fing*en,  to  sing. 
fin!*en,  to  sink, 
j^tnn^en,  to  spin. 


2.  The  following  examples  illustrate  the  most  striking 

variations  in  the  development  of  letters  and  of  sounds : 

alt,  old. 
galte,  fold, 
^alt,  hold. 


(1.)  tt. 
(5rab,  grave. 
'Stoi^t,  raven. 
©flabe,  slave, 
^nabe  (knave), 
^la^,  place, 
^ra^n,  crane. 
tCtox,  was. 


§aor,  hair. 
^aar,  pair. 
odf)t,  eight, 
grad^t,  freight, 
^al,  eel. 
moiji,  meal. 
@tabt,  steel. 
®aat,  seed. 


@c^aof,  sheep. 
@ci)Iaf,  sleep. 
9^abel,  needle. 
Wax,  clear. 
§anf,  hemp. 
©aft,  guest, 
ttjaren,  were, 
.^amm,  comb. 


!att,cold. 
^atfe,  hoe. 
S^afc,  nose. 
§a!en,  hook. 
®an8,  goose. 


CXDMPARISON   OF    GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH    WORDS.        249 


(2.)e.a. 

SRcc^en,  rake. 
brect;cu,  break. 
Scij,  way. 
2tni,  lance. 
Tlcxt,  mark, 
^cr,,  heart, 
©d^mcrj '  smart), 
fterbcii  (starve), 
fd^mecfen  (smack), 
feft,  fast, 
fett,  fat. 
febcn,  see. 
ftc(;Icn,  steal, 
cffeit,  eat. 
nteffen,  mete. 
gclb,  field, 
gebn, ten. 
@pbcu,  ivy, 
gcbcn,  give, 
lebcn,  live, 
bcnten,  think, 
fcjifeii,  sink, 
^ed;,  pitch, 
fcc^^,  six. 
tttclfcn,  milk. 
Iccfen,  lick, 
gcben,  go. 
(nc),  no. 
©d^ncc,  snow, 
©ccic,  soul. 
^IDcrt,  sword, 
frf^cltcn,  scold. 
^Icc,  clover. 
SBertb,  worth. 
2Ber,  who. 
dlc%d,  rule, 
ii^rabc,  crow, 
mci^cn,  mow. 
faben,  sow. 
fp'abcn,  spy. 
Wdxt,  were. 
Ici^t,  lets. 
SScitcr,  fathers. 
fSy^cn,  saw. 
2Sdffer,  waters. 


(3.)  tie. 

S3ienc,  bee. 
n?tr,  we. 
Pj,  felt. 
@innc,  sense. 
i?irfd;e,  cherry, 
^infct,  pencil, 
fteben,  seven, 
irren,  err. 

licgen,  lie. 
licben,  love, 
fc^ieben,  shove, 
fteben,  sift, 
fc^ie^cn,  to  shoot, 
f^rie^en,  sprout, 
fpielen,  play, 
^irc^e,  church, 
^iffcn,  cushion. 

(4.)  5,  0. 

^ocfc,  flake. 
groJ3,  great, 
rof^,  raw. 
®tro^,  straw. 
%0(i}ttx,  daughter. 
O^r,  ear. 
53o^ne,  bean. 
9^ot^,  need, 
rot^,  red. 
S8rob,  bread, 
^oc^,  high. 
9Joj]gcn,  rye. 
@onimcr,  summer. 
2)onucr,  thunder. 
©onne,  sun. 
Sobn,  son. 
tooU,  full. 
®^orn,  spur, 
bl^ren,  hear. 
fci^TOeren,  swear. 
jn)i5(f,  twelve. 
khuo,,  king. 
9Wi)rtcI,  mortar. 
Del,  oil. 

aJJiJrber,  murderer. 
I 


(5.)tt,u. 

unb,  and. 
§ut,  hat. 
^uc^e,  beech, 
fucbcn,  seek. 
^u^,  kiss, 
^ruft,  breast, 
©coulter,  shoulder 
gitd;4<,  fox. 
^u^fcr,  copper. 
®turm,  storm, 
^nirm,  worm. 
33Iume,  bloom, 
t^un,  do. 
33uc^,  book. 
S3rubcr,  brother. 
aWutter,  mother, 
^ub,  cow. 
U^r,  hour. 
Orunb,  ground. 
ajJuitb,  mouth, 
■ill^tiinb,  pound, 
runb,  round. 
@unb,  sound. 
SSunbe,  wound, 
genug,  enough. 
fii^Ien,  to  feel, 
griln,  green. 
fii§,  sweet, 
^ilgc,  feet, 
libel,  evil, 
^ttlfe,  help, 
filnf,  five. 
Jitgcn,  lie. 
§il^icl,  hill. 
mibk,  miU. 
®iinbe,  sin. 
glilben,  glow. 
Mfte,  coast. 
l^ilrft  (first), 
briltcn,  brood, 
bil^fen,  hop. 
33ad;fe,  box. 
®ilb,  south, 
^ilbc,  cows, 
©ril^c,  broth. 
2 


(6.)flu. 

grau,  gray, 
lllaub,  leaf, 
taub,  deaf, 
^aufe,  heap. 
@aiim,  seam. 
i!aiid^,  leek. 
§aupt,  head, 
^iluge,  eye. 
^raut,  bride. 
jc^Iau,  sly. 
gauft,  fist. 
Sau,  tow. 
jlaube,  dove.    • 
9iaum,  room. 
blau,  blue. 
%\)an,  dew. 
^aucn,  hew. 

(7.)ei. 

2J2cifter,  master, 
bcil !  hail ! 
i^reifcu,  praise, 
brei,  three, 
frci,  free. 
bleid;cn,  bleach, 
tr>eic^,  weak. 
^ei{eii,  heal. 
SSBeijen,  wheat. 
Sirctg,  twig, 
ein,  one. 
attcin,  alone, 
bcibc,  both, 
cigcn,  own. 
(Sid^c,  oak. 
@^>ci(be,  spoke, 
^leiber,  clothes. 
®cift,  ghost. 

„     (ghastly). 

ft  (gas), 
leiben,  loan, 
mcift,  most. 
SReibc,  row. 
@cife,  soap, 
reibcn,  rub. 
jtt>ci,  two. 


250 


CO]VIPAEISON    OF    GERMAN    AND   ENGLISH    WORDS. 


(8.)  cu,  m, 

^m,  hay, 
§euer,  fire, 
lieun,  nine, 
^reunb,  friend, 
neu,  new. 
ftreuen,  strew, 
treu,  true, 
^reufjeu,  Prussia, 
^reug,  cross. 
(Sule,  owl. 
^eulen,  howl. 
SJiaufe,  mice. 

(9.)&. 

&aben,  to  have. 
f^hm,  to  heave, 
leben,  to  live, 
cben,  even. 
dlaht,  raven. 
Xauht,  dove. 
SBlber,  beaver, 
flieben,  cleave, 
fieben,  seven. 
@teb,  sieve, 
oben,  over, 
©rab,  grave. 
S)ieb,  thief. 
Seben,  life, 
[ieben,  sift. 
SBeib  (wife), 
©rfjnjalbe,  swallow 
SSirnc,  pear, 
tli^pe,  cliff. 
mppt,  rib. 
®to))|)eI,  stubble. 
$au))t,  head. 

(10.)  b. 

ber,  bie,  ba§,  the. 
biefe,  these, 
bu,  thou, 
betn,  thine, 
bann,  then, 
betin,  than. 
iBruber,  brother. 


^ebcr,  feather. 
i!eber,  leather, 
fieben,  seethe. 
2)aumen,  thumb, 
benten,  think. 
2)ing,  thing. 
3)oru,  thorn. 
brefd;en,  thresh, 
bret,  three, 
bur^,  through, 
betbe,  both. 
©lib,  south. 
(Srbe,  earth, 
^ilrbe,  worth. 

®(^aaf,  sheep. 
@c^Iaf,  sleep. 
@(^tff,  ship, 
^anf,  hemp, 
reif,  ripe, 
^etfen,  help. 
@aft,  sap. 
fd;arf,  sharp, 
aitf ,  up. 
offen,  open, 
filnf ,  five. 
Ofen,  oven. 
t>ier,  four. 
bet»or,  before, 
ijergeffen,  forget, 
(g^tjeu,  ivy. 

(12.)  8. 

Stag,  day. 
tnag,  may. 
lag, lay. 
fagen,  say. 
31[uge,  eye. 
Qfloggen,  rye. 
gitege,  fly. 
§cntg,  honey, 
^^fcnnig  (penny), 
®aru,  yarn, 
gcfb,  yellow, 
geftern,  yesterday. 


fci^Iagen  (slay), 
^agel,  hail. 
•Jiagel,  nail. 
@egel,  sail, 
glegel,  flail, 
^egen,  rain. 
©iegel,  seal. 
9tege(,  rule. 
§ugel,  hill, 
fagen,  to  saw. 
gleic^,  like, 
genug,  enough. 
gen?af)r,  aware. 
Seig,  dough. 
^4)pug,  plough. 
33ogen,  bow. 
borgen,  borrow, 
morgen,  morrow, 
forgen,  sorrow, 
folgen,  follow. 
33alg,  bellows, 
©algen,  gallows. 
@(o(f  e,  clock, 
nagen,  gnaw. 

(13.) «. 

toann,  when. 
VOtX,  who. 
tuetc^e,  which. 
Vok,  how. 
h)0,  where. 
tt)ei(  (while). 
tt>et^,  white. 
SSetjen,  wheat, 
tccber  (whether). 

(14.)  i. 

ja,  yes. 
Qai^x,  year. 
3od;,  yoke. 
3a!ob,  Jacob, 
jung,  young. 
3a(fe,  jacket. 
3Dt)ann,  John. 
3ubc,  Jew. 
3unt,  June. 


3^uno,  Juno. 
3ua,  July. 
3uft>el,  jewel. 
Tiapx,  major. 

(15.)tif,qc 

fauen,  chew. 
^afe,  cheese, 
^inn,  chin. 
^inb,  chUd. 
^ifte,  chest, 
^irc^e,  church. 
^irf(^e,  cherry. 
@tarfe,  starch. 
©tlatoe,  slave. 
Tlaxl,  marrow. 
(Scfe  (edge). 
§e(fe,  hedge, 
^riidfe,  bridge. 
Buder,  sugar. 
OueEe  (well). 

(16.)  I. 

dg,  as. 
fold;,  such. 
tt)eld),  which. 
9}?i5rtel,  mortar. 
(^effcl,  fetter. 
@abel,  sabre. 
Bii^illtng,  twin. 
@td;er,  acorn. 
fd;Ieic^en,  sneak. 

(17.)  m. 

^atnm,  lamb, 
flimmen,  climb, 
^tatnm,  comb. 
2)aumen,  thumb 
<B6)\xm,  screen. 

(18.) «. 

S3efen,  broom. 
Sttaun,  alum, 
felten,  seldom, 
Orbcn,  order, 
2)egen,  dagger. 


COMPARISON  OF  GERlVtAN  AND  ENGLISH  WORDS.  251 


@tcrn,  star, 
fern,  fur. 
^peni,  spur, 
^irne,  pear. 
33ieiie,  bee. 
@ait!f^,  goose. 
B^iljn,  tooth, 
fiinf,  five, 
aiifccv,  other. 
Stiiit),  child. 

(19.)  r. 

furen  (choose), 
friereii,  freeze, 
toerlieren,  lose. 
xoix,  we. 
n>er,  who. 
\t>artcn,  wait. 
tt)ar,  was. 
*»rcd)en,  speak, 
^cifer,  hoarse. 

(20.)f,ff,§. 

OUS,  out, 

effcn,  eat. 
meffcn,  mete. 
Ijaffcn,  hate, 
laffcn,  let. 
gro§,  great. 
?coe,  lot. 
%n^,  foot. 
9iu6,  nut. 
fli§,  sweet. 


Sifen,  iron, 
^afc,  hare, 
niefen,  sneeze, 
fra^jen,  scratch. 

(21.)tt§. 

XaQ,  day. 
2;raum,  dream. 
2:od;tcr,  daughter, 
tobt,  dead. 
jll;aler,  dollar. 
%l)aii,  dew. 
t^un,  do. 
%i)nxc,  door, 
t^cuer,  dear. 
58ett,  bed. 
33Iut,  blood. 
33art,  beard. 
Tlnti),  mood. 
^hit\),  flood. 
@d;u  Iter,  shoulder 
leitcn,  lead, 
reitcn,  ride, 
fllcitcii,  glide. 
3?ater,  father. 
aJJutter,  mother, 
taucn,  thaw, 
taufenb,  thousand 
SlntttJort,  answer. 

(22.)  to. 

©CttJinn,  gain. 
I  'Sc^ttJcftcr,  sister. 


(23.)  J,  ^. 

ga^m,  tame. 
3a^n,  tooth, 
ge^n,  ten. 
Binn,  tin. 
SoU,  toll 
ju,  to,  too. 
gmei,  two. 
jlt)aii3tg,  twenty. 
gtlj,  felt. 
§erj,  heart. 
'Ball,  salt. 
^a^c,  cat. 
^i^,  kid. 
5)u^enb,  dozen. 
^teu^,  cross, 
^'la^,  place. 
3u(fer,  sugar. 

(24.)  (^. 

9Jad;t,  niglit. 
9Jiad;t,  might. 
Ieid;t,  light. 
!l'id;t,  light. 
fcd;tcn,  fight. 
tncd}t  (knight). 
grad;t,  freight, 
madden,  make. 
brcd;cn,  brake, 
fud^cn,  seek. 
53uc^,  book, 
glcid;,  like, 
^uc^cn,  cake. 


?crd(>c,  lark. 
fed;«,  six. 
?5ud;«,  fox. 
Oc^S,  ox. 
d^a^^,  flax. 
3Bad;«,  wax. 
jteid;,  ditcli. 
burd^,  through, 
lad^cn,  laugh, 
mand^,  many. 

(25.)  f* 
©d^micb,  smith, 
fd^mal,  small. 
®tein,  stone. 
®d;mert,  sword, 
grofd;,  frog. 
flatfd;en,  clap. 

(26.)|if. 

3t))fcl,  apple, 
^il^fen,  hop. 
^u^fcv,  copper. 
O^fcr,  offering, 
^^feffer,  pepper, 
^fctfc,  pipe, 
•il^firfid;,  peach, 
^flange,  plant, 
^flaume,  plum, 
^flaflcr,  plaster. 
Vflitdfen,  pluck, 
^flug,  plow. 


3.  In  a  few  cases,  foreign  words  retain  their  original 
forms,  or  have  developed,  in  both  languages,  into  the  same 
modification  of  form : 


Heb.  saraph,       @e'ra^b,     seraph.       Lat.  natio, 

Or.     fifTtujpov,   2Ketcor',       meteor.       LowL.  parens, 

Lat    studens,      @tubent',    student.     Ital.  solo, 

4.  More  usually  the  forms  vary : 


Gr.     dyyiWoQ, 
Lat.  Johannes, 

"     Colonia, 
LcwJ..  missa. 


engcl, 
3obann, 


angel. 
John. 
Cologne, 
mass. 


Arab,  masjid, 
'*     laimun, 
Fers.  mdmija, 
Ind.     tabaco, 


^fiatton', 


aJiofd^cc', 
?imo'nc, 
SD^u'mie, 
2:a'baf, 


nation. 

park. 

solo. 


mosque, 
lemon, 
mummy, 
tobacco. 


ETYMOLOGY  AND  SYNTAX, 
(©t^mologic  unb  S^ntaj.) 

§  49.  Etjrmology  treats,  (1.)  Of  the  origin,  development, 
changes,  decay,  and  death  of  words  and  grammatical  forms. 
(2.)  Of  the  classification  of  words  into  jparts  of  speech, 
and  of  tlie  changes  w^ords  undergo  hy  inflection. 

(3 .)  As  to  their  origin,  words  are  primitive  or  derivative. 
As  to  composition,  words  are  sirryple  or  convpound. 

\.  Primitive  or  radical  words  are  either: 

1.  Original  root-words,  as:  id;,  bu,  ettl^  tit,  gut,  gro§,  ^otj,  SBud^e. 

2.  Or  they  have  added  the  verbal  ending  tU  I  ^ab^eu,  binb'*en,  fel?'*cn. 
Rem.  By  far  the  greater  number  of  primitive  Avords  are  verbs. 

2.  Derivative  words  are  formed  from  primitive  words: 

1.  By  modifying  the  original  root :   (Mtttlsen),  S3anb,  33unb. 

2.  By  adding  prefixes  and  suffixes :  (  „  „  ),  S3tnbcr,  S3tnbc,  33iinbel, 
©ebinbe,  58anbe,  Sanbd;en,  bcinbig,  bSnbigen,  SScinbiger,  S3anbigung, 
biinbeln,  biinbig,  SBilnbtgfeit,  S3iinbnt§. 

Hein.  Many  derivative  words,  the  derivation  of  which  is  "  no  longer  felt," 
are  usually  called  primitive  words,  as  :  3)lann,  from  Old-Germari  menan  (or 
Gothic  minan),  to  think;  rot^,  from  Sanscrit  rudhira,  blood;  Oel,  from  Latin 
oleum,  oil;  ^otjl,  from  Italian  cavolo,  cabbage. 

§  50.  Compound  words  are  formed  by  joining  two  or  more 
simple  (or  single)  words  into  one  word. 


i^ebcrtneffer,  Penknife. 

33aunttr>oUe,  Cotton. 

%\^^^^m,  To  go  oat. 

©tattftnbett,  To  take  place. 


^immelblatt,  Blue  as  the  sky. 

©elbrot^,  Orange-colored. 

SBomtt?  Wherewith? 

35tet[etd^t,  Perhaps. 


Rem.  1.  Sometimes  very  long  compound  words  are  formed : 
@taat€[(^utbcntUgung§!a[[enbuc^^a(ter,  The  keeper  of  account  of  the  fdo* 
devoted  to  the  payment  of  the  national  debt  (§  45,  3,  Rem.  2). 

Rem.  2.  Two  or  more  compound  words  of  the  same  kind  may  be  united 
bj  a  hyphen : 
5elb==,  ©arten*  unb  Hdferbau,  Drainage,  horticulture,  and  agriculture. 

Rem.  3.  Parts  of  long  words  are  often  united  by  hyphens  : 
^euer^35erfi(^erungg*@efellfc^aft,         Fire  Insurance  Company. 

Rem.  4.  Compound  words  are  much  more  largely  used  in  German  than  in 
EngUsh.     New  combinations  may  be  formed  indefinitely. 


§  51-54.]  THE   ARTICLE.  258 

§  51.  There  are  ten  parts  of  speech  in  German : 

1.  Flexible :  the  Article,  Noun,  Adjective,  Numeral, 

Pronoun,  Yerb. 
2   Inflexihle :  the  Abverb,  Preposition,  Conjunction, 

Interjection. 

§  52  Syntax  treats  of  the  power  certain  words  or  parts 
of  speech  have  in  determining  the  forms  and  position  of 
other  words,  or  parts  of  speech. 


THE  ARTICLE, 
(^er  «rtircl.) 

§  53.  In  all  languages  where  the  Article  exists,  the  Def 
inite  Article  is  derived  from  a  Demonstrative  Pronoun ; 
tlie  Indefinite  Article  is  derived  from  the  Numeral  One. 

In  German  there  is  no  difference  between  the  forms : 

1.  Of  the  Def.  Article  bcr,  and  the  Dem.  Pron.  bcr. 

2.  Or  of  the  Indef.  Article  ctlt,  and  the  Numeral  cln^ 

Rem.  The  Article  is  distinguished  from  the  Pronoun  or  Numeral :  (1.)  By 
never  receiving  a  strong  emphasis.  (2.)  By  never  being  used  without  a  noua. 

§  54.  Declension  of  the  Article: 


1.  Definite,  bcr,  the 

2.  Indefinite,  Clll, 

a,  an, 

8INGULAB. 

PLURAL. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc.     Fern.     Neut. 

All  Gen. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Norn,  bcr,    hit,     ha^* 

bic* 

Ci«, 

ein=c, 

cin. 

Gen.  m,    bcr,    bc«« 

bcr. 

etn=c«, 

efn-cr, 

cin'C^* 

Dat.  bcm,   bcr,    bent. 

bcm 

ctn=cm, 

cinder, 

cin=cm 

Ace.  ben,    bic,     bofil. 

bic. 

cin=cn. 

cin=c. 

cin* 

Rem.  1.  The  vowel  is  short  in  baS,  bc8,  and  long  in  bcr,  bcm,  bcn. 

Rem.  2.  When  no  obscurity  of  meaning  or  harshness  of  sounds  is  thereby 
produced,  the  following  contractions  of  prepositions  with  the  definite  article 
are  allowable  (Lesson  X.,  2) : 

1.  With  Dat.  sing.(7n.  and  «.)  bCHt :  ant,  Bctm,  ^intcrm,  im,  i?om,  jum,  iinterm 

(an  bcm,  bet  bem,  t^intcr  bcm,  in  bcm,  ijon  bcm,  gu  bem,  untcr  bem). 

2.  With  Dat.  sing,  (/em.)  httl  lUX  (^U  bcr). 

Z.  With  Ace.   "    (netit.)  ba^  X  an8,  aufs,  burets,  filrS,  tnS,  um«  (an  ba9 
auf  ba«,  burd?  ba«,  fUr  bas,  in  bas,  urn  ba8). 


254  SXNTAX    OF   THE    ARTICLE.  [§  55. 

§  55.  Syntax  of  the  Article.  The  following  are  some  of 
the  most  important  points  in  which  the  German  varies  from 
the  English  in  the  use  of  the  Article. 

1.  The  Definite  Article  is  employed : 

1.  Before  nouns  used  in  a  general  or  abstract  sense: 
%tX  SJJenfc^  \\i  fterblid),  Man  is  mortal. 
3)ic  ©efcfjic^te  bcr  ^unft,               The  history  of  art. 
S)a^  ®olb  \\i  foftbar,  Gold  is  costly. 

2.  Before  some  individual  concrete  nouns : 

2)a^  ^rii^ftitcf  ift  fertig,  Breakfast  is  ready. 

^^^  bCItt  5lbcnbe[fen,  After  supper. 

3.  When  a  proper  name,  or  the  name  of  a  division  of  time,  is  preceded 
by  an  adjective : 

2)a^  fe[te  2)Jagbeburg,  Strong  Magdeburg. 

2)Cr  toorige  3Jiat  tt>ar  fatt,  Last  May  was  cold. 

4.  Before  feminine  geographical  names : 

%\t  @d;weis  ift  fe^r  fc^on,  Switzerland  is  very  beautiful. 

Saren  @ie  in  bcr  Siirfet?  Have  you  been  in  Tm-key  ? 

6.  Before  nouns  of  number,  weight,  and  measure  (while  in  English  the 
Indefinite  Article  would  be  used) : 
3tt)et  X^aler  \s^^  ^t""^/  Two  dollars  a  pound. 

SSiermat  bie  ©O^e,  Four  times  a  week. 

Rem.  1 .  The  Definite  Article  is  often  used  where  in  English  the  Personal 
Pronoun  would  be  employed : 

aJiit  bcm  §ut  in  bcr  §anb,  With  his  hat  in  his  hand. 

Rem.  2.  The  dative  of  the  definite  article,  contracted  with  the  preposition 
\Xif  is  used  to  express  promotion  or  election  to  office  or  rank : 
@r  iuar  juitt  ^rafibenten  getua^It,  He  was  elected  President. 

2.  The  Definite  Article  is  omitted : 

1.  Before  many  legal  terms  and  some  words  in  ordinary  life: 
Stp^ellant,  33eflagter  fagt—  The  plaintiff",  the  defendant  says— 
Ueberbringer  biefeS,  The  bearer  of  this. 

2.  Before  names  of  the  points  of  the  compass  : 

©ie  fegelten  gegen  S^Jorben,  They  sailed  towards  the  north. 

3.  The  Article  must  be  added  if  the  case  of  the  noun  cannot  be  deter, 
mined  withput  it : 

£)ie  9iec^te  bcr  graiien,  The  rights  of  women. 

4.  With  two  or  more  nouns  of  diff'erent  genders  or  numbers,  the  Article 
must  be  repeated : 

2)er  S3ruber  unb  \At  ©c^tuefter,    The  brother  and  sister. 


§  56, 57.]  THE  NOUN.  255 


THE    NOUN. 

§  56.  Nearly  all  Nouns  may  be  traced  back  to  verbal 
roots  (§  49,1,  Rem.).  With  the  exception  of  the  very 
small  number  that  are  radical  words,  German  nouns  are 
formed : 

1 .  By  the  modification  of  a  verbal  root  (§  48, 2, 1). 

2.  By  adding  prefixes  or  suffixes  to  other  words  (§  57, 58). 

3.  By  compounding  noims  with  other  words  (§  58). 

Rein.  The  formation,  inflection,  and  syntax  of  the  German  are  far  more 
complicated  than  those  of  the  English  noun.  On  the  other  hand,  as  the 
German  nouns  are  mostly  formed  from  native  roots,  they  are  more  easily 
understood  than  English  nouns,  which  are  so  largely  imported  from  foreign 
languages. 

§  57.  In  forming  Derivative  Nouns,  the  chief  suffixes  are  .• 
1.  Those  that  form  concrete  nouns,  d^Clt,  cl,  cr,  in,  ling  : 

1.  5(^Cn  and  sicin — with  umlaut  to  the  radical  vowel,  where  possible 
— form  diminutive  nouns  : 

§auSd;cn,  a  little  house.  SBad^Icin,  a  small  brook. 

ajJUtter^en,  dear  mother.  ©c^Weftcrc^en,  dear  sister. 

2.  sCl  usually  denotes  material  instruments  : 

^tM,  a  lever  (from  ^cbcn,  to  heave,  lift). 
2).ccfcl,  a  cover  (from  bccfen,  to  cover). 

3.  str  denotes  (1)  male  persons:  Scorer,  a  teacher,  ©Snger,  a  singer, 
SSittnjer,  a  widower,  @cf>tt>ctjcr,  a  Swiss. 

(2)  animals :  <S>ptxhtX,  a  sparrow-hawk,  ©djriJtcr,  a  beetle. 

(3)  instruments :  SSo^rcr,  an  auger,  Scrfer,  an  alarm  clock. 

4.  sin  (or  sinn)  forms  feminine  from  masculine  nouns : 

^i5ntg,  a  king.  ^onigin,  a  queen. 

Scl?rcr,  a  male  teacher.      Sebrcrin,  a  female  teacher. 

©c^tDcijer,  a  Swiss.  ®(^tt)Ctjcrin,  a  Swiss  lady. 

6.  sifnn  modifies  the  meaning  of  nouns,  often  indicating  dependence^ 
contempt,  or  low  valuation  : 

3ilngling,  a  youngster.      iD^iet^Iing,  a  hireling. 
Sc^rling,  an  apprentice.     2)id;terling,  a  poetaster. 


256  THE   NOUN.  [§  57. 

2.  Suffixes  forming  mostly  abstract  nouns,  C,  ci  (rct), 
l^ett  (felt),  nig,  fal,  f(^aft,  t^um,  ung : 

1.  sC  (with  umlaut  to  radical  vowel)  forms  nouns  from  adjectives : 
©lite,  goodness,  §i3^e,  height,  ^cinge,  length,  %\i\t,  depth. 

2.  sCi  (or  iltX),  in  nouns  formed  from  verbs,  denotes  a  repeated  or  con- 
tinued action,  often  with  the  idea  of  contempt :  ©d^meic^elei,  flattery, 
@:|)teleret,  foolish  sport. 

3.  c^tii  (or  sfCit)  forms  (1)  abstract  nouns,  from  adjectives  or  participles : 
@(^on^ett,  beauty,  ©etuanb^eit,  dexterity,  2)antbar!eit,  thankfulness; 
(2')  concrete  nouns,  from  adjectives  :  ^letnigfctt,  trifle  ;  (3)  nouns,  from 
personal  nouns :  @ottt)eit,  Godhead,  ^inb^ett,  childhood. 

4.  sHt^  denotes  (1)  condition  or  completion  of  a  quality  or  action:  ^^tn* 
fternt^,  darkness,  ^enntm^,  knowledge,  35ert)altnt^,  relation ;  (2)  in 
concrete  nouns,  the  accomplishing  agent  or  the  accomplished  object : 
©efangni^,  prison,  SSerjet^nt^,  catalogue. 

6.  cfal  denotes  (1 )  a  condition :  S^rilbjal,  sadness,  @c^t(f fat,  fate ;  (2)  the 
cause  of  a  condition :  ©c^eufat,  a  monster  (causing  horror). 

6.  sf^aft  denotes  (1)  relationship  or  condition  of  persons :  ^reunbfd;aft, 
friendship,  S3erettfd)aft,  readiness ;  (2)  a  collection  of  persons  of  a 
certain  grade  or  calling:  9?ttterfd)aft,  knighthood,  S3auernfd^aft, 
peasantiy;  (3) a  collection  of  things  of  the  same  kind:  ®eratf;fd;aft, 
tools  ;  (4)  collective  appellations  of  places :  Ortfd;aft,  neighborhood. 

7.  =tl^unt,  (1)  to  adjective  or  verbal  roots,  denotes  quality  or  condition, 
or  that  to  which  this  quality  adheres :  9tetd;t^um,  richness  or  riches, 
SBad;gt^Utn,  growth,  ^cittgtbum,  sanctuary ;  (2)  to  personal  nouns, 
it  denotes  condition,  office,  or  dominion :  ^atfert^um,  empire. 

8.  =Ung,  (1)  denotes  condition,  what  produces  a  condition,  or  a  thing 
put  into  a  certain  condition:  S^rcnnung, division,  9}2ifd)Ung,  mixt- 
ure ;  (2)  forms  collective  nouns :  Salbung, forest,  tteibung,  clothing. 

3.  The  most  im^ortMit prefixes  are  gc,  VXX^f  lltl,  Ur,  crj: 

1.  gCs  denotes  collectiveness,  union,  completion,  or  repetition:  ©ettrgc, 

mountain  range,  ©efa^rtc,  companion,  ©eBaubc,  edifice,  @erauf(^, 
a  continued  noise  (as  of  rivers,  arms,  machinery,  etc."). 

2.  ttlifs  denotes  negation,  incompletness,  or  negation  of  quality :  9JJt^* 
ton,  discord,  SJJt^Begrtff,  misconception,  SJJi^gunfl,  disfavor. 

3.  nils  denotes  negation  or  perversion  of  quality :  Ungtiidf ,  misfortune, 
Untncnfd),  inhuman  person,  Unjdjulb,  innocency. 

4.  ttt*  denotes  source,  origin,  or  cause,  or  a  thing  in  its  original  con- 
dition: Urf^rung,  origin,  Urfac^C,  cause,  UrtDalb,  primeval  forest. 

5.  tX%'  (arch)  denotes  the  first  or  greatest :  (SrjBtf^of,  archbishop, 
(Srjbicb,  arrant  thief.  @r3tnar jc^att,  lord  high  marshal. 


§  58,  59.]  ATTRIBUTES   OP   THE   NOUN.  257 

§  58.  Compound  Nouns  (L.  XXXVI.)  are  formed: 

1.  By  prefixing  to  nouns  inodifying  words,  which  may 
be  of  any  part  of  speech,  except  an  article  or  interjec- 
tion: 

'^a^  ©d^uI^auS,  schoolhouse.  2)er  ^aufmann,  merchant. 

„    grembroort,  foreign  word.  S)ic  ^ertunft,  origin. 

2)er  3i^^eitam^f,  duel.  2)er  Singang,  entrance. 

„   ©clbftmorb,  suicide.  2)er  ^berglaubc,  superstition. 

2.  By  uniting  the  words  of  some  familiar  expressions : 

2)aS  SBcrgi^meinnic^t,  the  forget-me-not. 

2)cr  STaugenic^tS,  the  good  for  nothing  fellow. 

S)a8  ^elangerjeltebcr,  the  honeysuckle. 

!Der  ®^ringin8felD,  the  romp.    • 

Rem,  1.  In  a  few  cases  the  first  word  is  in  the  gen.  sing,  or  the  gen.  pi. : 
2)a«  !£ageglid;t,  the  daylight.        2)aS  SSbrtcrbud;,  the  dictionary. 

Rem.  2.  By  a  false  analogy,  some  nouns  take  on  the  gen.  ending^  g  (t^)  J 

2)cr  9te(igion8frteg,  war  having  its  origin  in  reUgions  feuds. 

2)ic  5cuer52>crfi(^crungS*@ejcEjd;aft,  Tire  Insurance  Company. 
Rem.  3.  In  a  few  compound  nouns  the  adjective  also  is  declined: 

Nom.9ing.,\)tx  §o()c^riefter.      Nom.pl.,'ok  §o^en^ricfter. 

Gen.     "     beS  ^p^cn^rieftcrS.   Gen.   "    bcr  ^o^enpriefter. 

Bat.    "     bem  §D{;en^ricjter.    .Dat.    "    ben  |>c(;en)>neftern. 

Ace.     "     ben  §o^cn^rtcftcr.    Ace.    "    bic  |)o^en^)ncftcr. 


1.  ACCIDENTS  OF  TIIE  NOUlSr. 
Wtxitntt  m  ^ammxtti,) 

§  59.  The  Attributes  of  the  Noun,  as  well  as  of  all  other 
flexible  parts  of  speech  (§  50),  except  the  verb,  are : 

1.  Two  Numhers:  Singular  and  Plural. 

2.  Three  Genders :  Masculine,  Feminine,  and  Neuter. 
Z.  Four  Cases:   Nominative,  Genitive,  Dative,  and 

Accusative. 

Rem.  Substantives,  whether  nouns  or  pronouns,  control  the  gender,  number, 
person,  and  case  of  all  other  flexible  parts  of  speech.  Hence  a  knowledge 
of  the  attributes  of  the  noun,  while  one  of  the  most  difficult,  is  at  the  same 
time  one  of  the  most  important  things  in  the  study  of  the  German  language. 


258  GENDER   OF   NOUNS.  [§60,61. 

2.  GENDER  OF  NOUNS. 
(2)a^  ^tWt(^t  htv  |)auj)tttiiirterO 
§  60.  1.  Only  in  nouns  referring  to  persons,  and  in  the 
names  of  some  animals,  is  the  natural  gender  observed : 

%tl  3J2ann,  the  man.     %\t  %x<m,  the  woman.     2)Cr  SottJe,  the  lion. 

2.  Of  names  of  animals,  some  are  masculine,  others 
are  feminine,  and  a  few  are  neuter: 

2)Cr  3lbter,  the  eagle.     %\t  ^^liege,  the  fly.     2)ag  ^ferb,  the  horse. 

3.  Of  names  of  inanimate  ohjects  and  abstract  nouns, 
all  of  which  are  neuter  in  English,  some  are  masculine, 
some  feminine,  and  some  neuter : 

2)Cr  2:ijc^,  the  table.  «  ^ic  ST^re,  the  door.     2)a^  ^au%,  the  house. 
„     Mwi^),  courage.  „   ©lite,    goodness.        „     @nbe,  the  end. 

Rem.  The  Gender  of  German  nouns  can  only  be  learned  by  long  practice. 
During  the  history  of  the  language,  many  nouns  have  passed  from  one  gender 
to  another.     Of  a  few  nouns  the  gender  is  not  yet  settled. 

4.  The  following  will  serve  as  general  rules  in  fixing 
the  gender  of  nouns : 

§  61.  Nouns  Masculine  by  meaning  are  the  names  of: 

1.  Male  Beings:  tlCt  3JJann,  ,tl3mg,  Si)n?e;  the  man,  king, lion. 

2.  Deity  and  Angels:  bCt  (Sott,  @itgel,  S^erub,  @era^^,  %tVi\z\ ; 

God,  angel,  cherub,  seraph,   devil. 

3.  Seasons:  Jjct  SStitter, ^ru^Itng  (but  ba^  grii^ja^r),  ©ommcr,  §crBfl; 

"Winter,  Spring  (Spring),  Summer,    Fall. 

4.  Months:  kt  ^anuar,  geBruar,  W<xxi,  %)i?x\\,  2JJat,  Sunt,  ^u\\,etc. 

January,  February,  March,  April,  May,  June,  July,  etc. 

5.  Days  of  the  Week:  bCt  SJiontag,  S)ienftog,  aJJitttt)o^,  2)onnerftag,  efc 

Monday,  Tuesday,  Wednesday,  Thursday,  etc. 

6.  Points  of  the  Compass:  bcr  ^f^orb,  ©lib,  Oft,  SBeft ;  North,  South,  etc. 

7.  Mountains:  bCt  ^cix^,  SScjut),  ?tctna,  the  Harz,  Vesuvius,  Etna. 

8.  Large  Birds:  bCt  Slbler,  §al6tdf)t,  @eter;  the  eagle,  hawk,  vulture. 

9.  Fishes:  htX  "^0.1,  §cc^t,  Sac^S;  the  eel,  pike,  salmon. 

10.  Bugs  and  Worms:  ttX  ^a\U\iX,  SSIutcgcI;  the  May-bug,  leech. 

11.  Fruit-trees,  Grains,  Shrubs,  and  wild  Plants:  bCt  Sl^tctbaum,  SBetjCn, 
§ot(unber,  Sauc^;  the  apple-tree,  wheat,  elder,  leek. 

12.  Winds:  htt  ©amuitt,  ®trot!o,  Orfan;  simoom,  sirocco, hurricane. 

13.  Mineral  Substances  (except  metals,  §63):   bCt  2)iatnant,  @d^»efcl, 
@tein,  2}Jarmor ;  diamond,  sulphur,  stone,  marble. 


§  62-66.]  GENDER   OF   NOUNS.  259 

§  62.  Nouns  feminine  by  meaning  are  the  names  of: 

1.  Female  Bdnys:  btC  S^an,  MoiUvjiil,  l'i3win,  woman,  queen,  lioness. 

2.  Smaller  Birds  and  Insects :  biC  9Zad)tigaU,  2)roffcI,  (^IJC^C,  'BailJC, 

tlie  nightingale,  thrush,      fly,       bug. 

3.  Forest-trees,  Fruits  and  Flowers,  especially  if  ending  in  C  J  biC  Slci^C, 
33irnc,  9iofc,  the  oak,  pear,  rose. 

4.  Most  Rivers:  hit  2)onau,  SIbe,  ®^)rcc,  the  Danube,  Elbe,  Spree. 
Exc.  bcr  dti)tm,  3}?aiu,  etc.,  the  Rhine,  Maine,  etc. 

§  63.  Nouns  neuter  by  meaning  are  the  names  of: 

1.  Most  Countries  and  Places:  hai  beifjc  3talien,  hot  Italy,  btt^  fc^i)ne 
Berlin,  beautiful  Berlin,  bttCf  fcfte  2)iaijbcburg,  strong  Magdeburg. 

2.  Collective  Nouns:  ba^  l^olf,  §ccr,  the  people,  army,  ba£(  @ra8,  <B(i)\l\, 
'3to\}X,  grass,  sedge,  reeds. 

3.  Metals:  baS  ®ilber,  ®oIb,  53(ci,  Sifcn,  silver,  gold,  lead,  iron. 
Fxc.  bcr  ®ta^(,  3i"f/  Cobalt,  steel,  zinc,  cobalt. 

§  64.  Nouns  masculine  by  form  are : 

1.  Most  vionosylLibic  nouns  not  ending  in  t  (§  Go):  bCt  S3rU(J(>,  2)an!, 
^att,  ^a^,  CucU,  the  breach,  thanks,  fall,  hatred,  source. 

2.  All  nouns  endiny  in  \^,  \^,  ing,  lino,  HI :  bct  @tid),  §cnic\,  faring, 
Jc^rling,  ^elni,  the  sting,  honey,  herring,  apprentice,  helmet. 

Exc.  ba^  SJZcffing,  brass,  hni  2)ing,  the  thing. 

§  65.  Nouns  feminine  by  form  are: 

1.  All  dissyllabic  nouns  ending  in  C^  and  not  denoting  male  beings: 
bit  ^irc^c,  Sirfd^c,  ®onne,  (Srbc,  the  church,  cherry,  sun,  earth. 
Exc.  1 .  bfl^  ^wgc,  (Snbc,  ©rbc,  the  eye,  end,  inheritance. 

Exc.  2.  bcr  yiamz,  SGLMUc,  the  name,  will. 

2.  Most  nouns  ending  in  ^ilji,  U(^t,  Ulb,  MHft:  btC  3^ac^t,  ^UC^t,  ®C* 
bulb,  25ernunft,  night,  flight,  patience,  reason. 

3.  All  derivatives  ending  in  l)Cit,  fcit,  fdiaft,  Ci,  tn  (inn),  Ung,  Otl),  Mi%X 

hit  ^rci^eit,  !J)anfbarfcit,  ^i^cunbjd^att,  33acfcrei,  ^Iniiginn,  ^offnung, 
^cimat^,  ^Irmutb,  freedom,  thankfulness,  friendship,  bakery,  queen, 
hope,  home,  poverty. 

Exc.  bcr  (or  btt^)  Bierrat^,  the  ornament,  ba^  ^etfc^aft,  ©cfd^rct, 
the  seal,  the  cry. 

§  66.  Nouns  neuter  by  form  are : 

1.  Diminutives  (in  ^Ctt,  Icitt,  see  §  o7,  1,1),  whatever  may  be  the 
natural  gender :  hti^  t^fcrbc^cn,  33ild;kin,  the  little  horse,  little  book,- 
h^^  ^raulcin,  SJicibc^cn,  ^inblcin,  the  young  lady,  girl,  child. 


260  THE  NOUNS.  [§  67-69. 

2.  Derivatives  ending  in  f al,  f Cl,  t^ltnt  t  H^  <B6)\d\a\ , '31'dt^d ,  ^(d\tx* 
t^utn,  (Si;riftentt)Utn,  fate,  riddle,  empire,  Christendom. 

£xc.  1.  bcr  2Be(i)feI,  ^i^rttium,  3ieic^tt)um,  the  change,  error,  riches. 
£xc.  2.  biC  2lc^fel,  %m\d,  2)et(^fet,  the  shoulder,  blackbird,  adze. 
Uxc.3.  hit  (or  ba^)  9}?ii^fat,  2^riibfal,  the  distress,  sorrow. 

3.  Nouns  with  the prejix  get  tJtt^  ©ebciubc,  ®efe^,  the  building,  law. 
IJxc.  1.  bcr  ©ebraud?,  ©ebanfe,  ©e^orfatn,  @enu^,  ©efang,  @efd;ma(f , 
@ett?tnn ;  the  use,  thought,  obedience,  enjoyment,  song,  taste,  gain. 
Exc.  2.   hit  ®tbui)X,  @eburt,  (Sebulb,  @efal;r,  ©emeinbe,  ©eniige, 
@ejd>id;te,  ©eftalt,  the    duty,  birth,  patience,  danger,  community, 
satisfaction,  history,  form. 

§  67.  Compound  Nouns  take  the  gender  of  the  last  noun : 
bcr  B^uUdjXtv,  the  school-teacher  (bte  ®^ule,  bcr  Se^rer). 
btC  §offirc^e,      the  court  church    (ber  §of,       hit  tirrf;e). 
ha^  ®d;u(^aiig,  the  school-house    (bte  @c^ute,  ha^  §aug). 
Uxc.  1.  2)cr  5lbjd^eu  (bte  @^eu),  bcr  SJlittoo^  (bte  2Sod?e). 
£xc.  2.  2)ic   ?lnmut^,  2)emiit(),  ©ro^mut^,  Sangtnut^,  ©anftmut^, 
@cf)tT)ermut^,  3Se^mutt)  (htt  3JJut^,  §od;mut^,  e^c);  Mc  5lnt- 
ttjort  (bag  2Bort). 
-EJxc.  3.  2)ag  @egentt)eU,  bag  (or  ber)  33orbert^ei(,  etc.  (htt  Z^tW), 
Exc.  4.  Names  of  cities  are  neuter,  whatever  the  compound  may  be : 
^ag  fefte  aJiagbeburg  (bie  33uvg),  strong  Magdeburg. 

§  68.  Foreign  Nouns  usually  retain  their  original  gender: 

2)iC  2;f;eoIogie,  theology  (from  Gr.  t}  BeoXoyia,  theology). 
£xc.  But  some  foreign  words  have  been  drawn  out  of  their  original 
gender :        htt  ^or^er,      hit  9^ummer,       ha^  ^enfter ; 
Jroyji  Lat.  (neut.)  corpus,  (masc.)  numerus,  (/em.)  fenestra. 

§  69.  A  number  of  nouns  have  two  genders,  with     dif* 
ferent  signification  for  each  gender,  as : 

2)er  53anb,  the  volume.  S)a8  S3anb,  the  ribbon. 

„   SBauer,  the  peasant.  „   S3auer,  the  cage. 

„   SSunb,  the  alliance.  n   SSunb,  the  bundle. 

„   dhox,  the  chorus.  r;   (S^or,  the  choir. 

„   @rBe,  the  heir.  „   @rbe,  the  inheritance. 

S)te  (Sr!enntni^,  knowledge.  r,   ©rfenntni^,  the  sentence. 

S)er  ^axi,  the  Harz  Mountains.  „   ^arj,  the  resin. 

„   ^eibe,  the  heathen.  2)ie  §eibe,  the  heath. 

„  ^efer,  the  jaw.  „  liefer,  the  pine. 

„   ^unbe,  the  costumer.  n   ^unbe,  the  knowledge 

„   Setter,  the  leader.  „   Setter,  the  ladder. 

I,   TtanQd,  the  want.  „  WlaxiQii,  the  mangles. 


§  70-72.]  DECLENSION   OP  NOUNS.  261 

Xk  9J?arf,  the  markgraviate.  2)a8  Tlaxi,  the  marrow. 
XtX  3)2cf|'cr,  the  measurer.  „   SDicffcr,  the  knife. 

„   @d;ilb,  the  shield.  „    ©c^ilb,  the  sign. 

„   (Sd;wulft,  the  bombast.  ©ic  ®d^n?ulft,  the  swelling. 

„   <Scc,  the  lake.  „   @ce,  the  ocean. 

„   (S^^rcffe,  the  sprout.  „   ©prcffe,  round  of  a  ladder. 

!Dic  Stcuer,  the  tax.  2)a«  ©tcucr,  the  rudder. 
2)cr  ©tift,  the  handle.  „   ®tift,  the  endowment. 

„  Xljor,  the  fool.  „  Zbox,  the  gate. 

„  SScrbicnft,  the  reward.  „  33crbicuft,  the  merit. 

3)ie  2Bc^r,  the  bulwark.  „   SBe^r,  the  wier. 

§  70.  During  the  history  of  the  language  some  nouna 
have  passed  from  one  gender  to  another: 

Gothic^        der  luftus,  der  sidus,  das  leik, ,  , 

Old  Ger.,    der  luft,  der  situ,  die  lech,  das  saf,  die  ribba, 

Mid.  Ger.,  der  luft,  der  site,  die  lich,  das  saf,  das  rippe, 

New  Ger.,  He  ?uft,  bic  (Sitte,  bie  2cid;c,  bcr  eaft,  bic  mppt, 

the  air.  the  custom,  the  corpse,  the  sap.  the  rib. 


3.  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 
(2)cfIination  bcr  ^au^ittoortcrO 
§  71.  The  influences  which  have  produced  the  great 
variety  now  existing  in  the  declension  of  German  nouns 
are  still  at  work.     The  most  important  of  these  are: 

1.  The  increasing  use  of  the  umlaut. 

2.  The  tendency  of  terminations  to  lengthen  root  vowels. 
8.  The  passing  of  nouns  from  one  gender  to  another. 

4.  The  increasing  number  of  masculine  nouns  with  stt  in  the  plural. 

§  72.  The  many  different  ways  in  which  common 
nouns  are  declined  may  be  most  conveniently  grouped 
into  three  classes  or  Declensions: 

1.  The  Old  Declension,  containing  masculine,  feminine,  and  neuter 
nouns,  and  having  three  forms  in  the  plural. 

2.  The  New  Declension,  containing  masculine  and  feminine  nonns,  and 
having  one  form  iVi  (iVX)  in  the  plural. 

8.  The  Mixed  Declension,  containing  masculine  and  nenter  noons,  and 
having  one  form  =11  (=Cn)  in  the  plural. 
Rem,  The  following  table  illustrates  these  three  declensions: 


♦    ...    'Tt'  V  V  V 

/— N 

-^^jQjS      ,/=>S./^j3 

5^ 

-S  42    5    2     :«  :nJ  :«  :« 

TJ 

oa     ♦          S3  «  «  tt 

^ 

^®®®  (S®®S 

^    «->    <^              O    Ci    «.*    o 

_J 

■JS~.S>^^    sCS- >.S>  •.S3~  ^ 

^ 

J=i  j:i  J=>  J=»    j=t  J^  J=>  J^ 

N 

QQQQ  QQQQ 

r 

♦ 

^^ 

'2<«>S'2    <^:-»««u 

^ 

as»     ♦             ♦     ♦  tS     ♦ 

a  <i>  C   cs   .♦-  o   ^  .2i 

^    «^             c>   O    c>   o 

d 

iC»jC)jO.O     vOjOjQjQ 

N 

«->&«■  "6-  «^>e>e>& 

o 

O    «     «     «     :«:«:«:« 

'«> 

S?^^^  SP^^^ 

s 

(A 

o 

tJ  S  §  g  .Si  ^  g  .$i 

O) 

g  «  «  « 

<^5>                  ^   «j   ««>   o 

fS 

JQJOJQJQ     .iS^jQjO 

p 

^  :^  }j  s.:  "i*  C  V  V 

^  *>  Y    ^    «>  *J  S  «J 

>> 

«    «     «     «       «    «     «     o 

ii 

>*(gS«^c*w«^ 

s  s  i  g  .^  tj  g  .£i 

CO 

vOjQjQjQ     ^uajQjQ 

o 

js  j=t  j^  j:»    ,/SjQjaja 

g 

^"^  "2  §  <g  .Si  g  g  - 

j=^  jz»  J2,  j^    >»jajajQ 

?!  «  «  « 
♦    ...    ^  Y  V  V 

-rj 

^ 

^                fcj     ♦  «     ♦ 

.Si  U  b  .2i  .Si  tJ  g  .Si 

s 

^•~y 

«5»      ♦             f*    J^    V»    M 

^  «k>  ^>           ^  <a  *>j  <a 

^-N 

^^j:»ja    ^jojc»jo 

1-i 

1 

«S    «S     <S     «     jg  -<3  :CJ  I'S 

C 
c3 

a 

t3  S  §  g  .Si  tJ  g  .Si 

JS  Xi  j:i  j:^    .«jajQj:i 

s 

.  tt  «  «    «  tt  tt  « 
SfifiB    BSBfi 

•*^  :Q  «>  :q     :o  Ki  to  X5 

•"?                   .         B 

.1 

S->tS>H$:i      ^>:->g<u 

/^ 

<3J 

^^JoJo    i5^./=>^ 

^* 

ji»aoBc     <as->S<L> 

S 

13 

O    eu    eu    <u     .*->«>    S>  .^ 

n 

«  «  «  g  «  «  « 

««><a«i>      »«.>«>«>> 

Si 

^¥  g  g"  5  §"«"§" 

^ 

«t>   a>    <u    o    .M   <i>    S  .Si 

S  S  §  g   .Si  a  g  -Si 
j^  j=»  .a  j=»    j=i  xi  j=)  j=» 

1-^ 

S    8  •<-■   o     S    si  -t-*    o 

i  f^ « H  1 H  IS  ,"* 

O     i«     S      o      .O     <D     Q      o 

'dvjnBui^       'ivunjj 

•unjnButg          'jvunu 

§  73,  74.]  DECLENSION    OP   NOUNS.  203 

Rem.  1.  All  feminine  nouns  remain  unchanged  in  the  singular. 
Rem.  2.  All  nouns  have  sH  in  the  dative  plural — as  do  also  all  articles^  ad' 
jertives,  and  pronouns  (except  UH^,  CU^,  fi(^). 

Rem.  3.  The  umlaut  is  used  only  in  the  Old  Declension, 

§  73.  The  Old  Declension  includes  by  far  the  greater 
jjart  of  all  German  nouns,  especially  of  those  of  the 
masculine  and  neuter  gender. 

Rem.  \.  It  includes  the  greater  part  of:  (1)  masculine  and  neuter  primi- 
tive nouns ;   (2)  derivatives   in   Cr,  C^Cn,  Iciu,  \^,  it^t,  tO,  inQ,  Ung,  ni^, 

fal,  U)um. 

Rem.  2.  Where  no  harshness  of  sound  is  thereby  produced,  the  C  may  be 
dropped  from  the  ending  of  the  genitive  and  dative  (especially  of  the 
dative):  (l)of  nouns  not  ending  in  ^,  f^,  f(^  or  nO,  ('^)  of  nouns  preceded 
by  prepositions:  ten  Ort  ju  Ort  (but  ju  ^aufe);  (3)  of  the  word  (J^ott  (in 
dat.,  but  not  in  gen.);  mit  ®ott  (but  um  ©otteS  2BiUen). 

§  74.  Nouns  of  the  Old  Declension  are  divided  into 
three  classes,  according  to  the  way  in  which  their  plurals 
are  formed : 

First  class  -'     plural  like  singular  (but  sometimes  takes  the  umlaut). 
Second  class:  plural  adds  sft  (and  always  "      *'        "     ). 

Third  class:    plural  adds  s^  (and  generally       "      '*        "     ). 

1.  To  the  first  class  belong: 

1.  Masculine  and  neuter  nouns  in  cl,  CH,  tlX 

1.  Tlie  masc,  mostly  with  umlaut  in  jdural:  bcr  33ater,  pi.  3S5ter. 

2.  The  neut.,       "     without  "      "       "    ;  ba«  gaffer/'  SSaffcr. 

2.  Neuter  diminutives  in  ^tU,  Icin :  baS  ^Wabd^cn,  grciulcin,  Slilmd^en. 

3.  Neuter  derivatives  with  the  prefix  JC,  and  the  sufl^x  e :  baS  ©cbaubc. 

4.  The  two  feminine  nouns,  bic  2)?uttcr,  Slod^tcr  {pi.  2}2ttttcr,  2:od;tcr). 

2.  To  the  second  class  belong  mostly  neuter  nouns,  as : 

1.  ^0«  3tmt,  S3ab,  53Iatt,  33ud),  2)a*,  2)orf,  (gi,  gad),  %<x%  gclb,  ®elb, 
©laS,  @licb,  @rab,  ©rag,  (^\\X,  ^au^t,  ^auS,  ^uhn,  ^alb,  ^inb, 
Sleib,  .^crn,  traut,  ?amm,  ?od),  a«aiil,  9?cfl,  ^^fanb,  ^iab,  9?eim, 
SRinb,  edjloi^,  ©d^mcrt,  2?clf,  SSeib;  ba«  ©emllt^,  ®cfd;Icdit. 

2.  All  words  in  t^um :  bo^  Gbriftentl^um,  .taifcrtbum,  bcr  9?cid;t^um,  etc 

3.  A  few  foreign  words :  bo^  §oj^itaI,  9?cgtmcnt,  etc. 

4.  Also  a  few  masculine  nouns,  as:  bCr  @cifl,  @ott,  2eib,  2)?ann,  SBalb. 

3.  To  the  third  class,  which  includes  nouns  of  all  gen- 
ders, belong : 

1.  All  derivatives  in  ni|,  fal:  bIC  ^enntnitj,  ba^  SBUbnig,  @d;tcffal; 


264  THE    NOUN.  [§  75. 

2.  Masc.  and  neut.  derivatives  in  atlb,  flt,  Wf  X^,  llig,  Htig,  rid^  X  htX 

^eilanb,  Wlomt,  ^biiig,  bungling,  ga^nrid;;  ba^  ®en)id;t,  2)ing. 

3.  Some  foreign  nouns:  htX  5lbt,  ?tltar,  ©enerot;  ba^  Concert,  Soncit. 

4.  Many  others  of  all  genders,  as:    (1),  bet  Slat,  ^rjt,  33aum,  33ttt}, 
(Sib,  ^ifc^,  §aim,  ^irfc^,  §unb,  ^nec^t,  9?aum,  ©al?,  2:i)eit,  Sifd^. 
(2),  bic  Stjt,  53raut,  ^ru[t,  grud>t,  §anb,  ^raft  2«a^t,  ma<i)U 

(3),  ba^  ^eil,  53etn,  2oog,  HJioog,  ^ult,  ©c^iff,  2:^or,  SSerf,  ©cicnf; 

i2cm.  The  umlaut  is  added  to  the  plural  of  all  feminine  nouns  that  are 

aapable  of  it,  to  most  masculine  nouns,  but  only  to  three  neuter  nouns  (baS 

§  75.  No  neuter  nouns  belong  to  the  New  Declension. 
This  declension  includes : 

1.  Most  feminine  nouns:    (1),  monosyllables;    btC  5tjt,  S3af)n,  i^^ur, 

ghitf),  3agb,  ^o[t,   2a[t,  ^flid)t,  Cual,  ®aat,  ®d;aar,  'Bc^kc^t, 

©d;rift,  ©e^ulb,  @^eer,  S^at,  ^^r,  U^r,  2Bc(t,  Ba{)I,  e^c. 

(2),  derivatives  in  C,  Cl,  et  (except  9i)Jutter,  2:o(^ter,  §  74, 1,  4),  ^^^ 

et,  cub,  ^eit,  fctt,  in  (n),  fdjaft,  unrj:  bie  9^ebe,  @d;ii[fet,  ©d^njefter, 
§eimat^,  garberet,  ^ugenb,  SBa^r^eit,  S)an!bar!eit,  ^ontgin,  greunbs 
jd^aft,  Orbnung. 

2.  Many  masculine  nouns :  (1),  monosvUables  :  bcr  S3ar,  Shrift,  ^tnf, 
Prft,  ®raf,  §efb,  ^err,  §irt,  9}?enf(^,  5mot;r,  9fJarr,  0*8,  Sf)or. 
(2),  polysyllables  ending  in  sC:  bcr  ^ffe,  S3ote,  SSiibe,  @rbe,  @attc, 
^afe,  3ungc,  ^nabe,  gfJeffe,  5Rabe,  S^tefe,  gran!e,  ©rie^e,  9Jii[fe. 
(3),  personal  nouns,  with  prefix  gc^:  bCt  ©efcibrte,  ©e^ulfe,  ©efcfic. 

3.  Many  masc.  and  fern,  foreign  nouns :  bCt  ^bi)ofat,  ^anbtbat,  SJJonard^, 
^rcifibent;  biC  gacultcit,  2JieIobte,  O^er,  ^erfon,  3Jege(. 

4.  Names  of  nationality,  as:  bCt  S3aier,  ,^affer,  Ungar,  %oX^x,  ^oja!. 
/2em.  1.  The  termination  sll  is  added  to  nouns  ending  in  C,  or  in  unaccentea 

sCl,  'tit  =ttt  t  to  other  nouns  sCtt  is  added : 

N.  Sing.,  bcr  SiJtDC,   Ungar,    3)Jenj^     (earc.  §err);    bte  9lebc,    ^^rau. 

6^.  ^»n5'.,be8  25tr>en,  Ungarn,  aJlenjd^enC  "   §errn);  ber  9tebc,   grau. 

N.  Plur.,  bic  SbtDcn.  Ungarn.  3JJenjd()en  (  "  ^erren);  bic  9lcbcn,  grauen. 

i2em.  2.  Relics  of  the  former  declension  of  feminine  nouns  in  the  singula* 
are  retained  in  some  familiar  expressions,  and  in  some  compound  words : 
aiif  (Srbcn,  ju  ©unftcn,  ton  @ottc8  ©nabcn,  bag  @onncnltd;t. 

Re7n.  3.  The  monosyllabic  masculine  nouns  of  this  declension  (§  75, 2). 
are  contracted  from  longer  original  forms,  as : 

Old    German:  der  bero,   cristani,   fiiristo,  gra,vee,  (helid),  herro,  hirti, 

Mid.  German :  der  ber,     kristen,    viirste,  grave,      helt,     herre,  hirte, 

New  German:  bCt SScir.   (Shrift.     Prft.    @raf.      §elb.   $err.  §irt. 


§  7G-78.J  DECLENSION   OP   NOUNS.  265 

§  76.  The  Mixed  Declension  contains  a  few  masculine 
and  neuter  nouns  which  follow  the  old  declension  in  tJie 
Angular ^  and  the  new  declension  in  the  plural,  as  : 

1.  Masculine :  ^tt  5l^n,  SSaucr,  2)orn,  gor[t,  (iJauI,  OeDatter,  ^alm, 
Sorbcer,  aj^aft,  9^ac^bar,  ^falm,  ©c^mcrj,  @cc,  ©porn,  @taat,  @ta* 
c^cl,  8tra^t,  %\)xon,  SScttcr,  Untcrt^an,  Bici^<it^« 

2.  Many  foreign  nouns  in  or:  2)cr  2)oftor,  3icftor,  %>rofe||or,  ^aftor. 

3.  Neuter:  2)a^  2tuge,  33ett,  enbe,  §emb,  §erj,  2eib,  O^r,  3nfeft. 
i2cm.  1.  S)a8  ^erj  is)  S.  ba8  ^erj,    bc8  §erjcn^,  bcm  §crjcn,  ba8  ^erj ; 

irregular.  >  P.  bie  §erjcn,  ber  §erjen,    ben  ^erjcn,  bic  ^crjen. 

Rem.  2.  2)cr  9lac^bar,  ber  Untert^an,  usually  follow  the  new  declension  in 
the  singular,  as  sometimes  does  ber  (SeiJattcr. 

§  77.  Some  Foreign  Nouns  which  have  not  yet  been 
fully  naturalized  are  irregular.  Some  of  them  retain 
very  much  of  their  original  modes  of  declension,  as: 

Nom.  Sing.,  ajhifeum,    ©t^mnafium,    $R^t^t(;mu6,  eponbcuS,  gcffil, 
Gen.  Sing.,  SD^ufcumS,  ®t?mnafmm8,  9e^i^t^mu«,  ®ponbeu8,  goffilS, 
Nom.  Plur.j  SD^ujeen,     ©t^mnafien,     9e^i^t^men,  @ponbeen,  goffilien, 
iJat.  Plur.,  2)?u{een.     ©t^mnafien.     dti)tfi\)mm.  @lponbeen.  gofiuicn. 
Nom.  Sing.,  Sorb,    ?abi^,    @enie,    5lfteur,    ^ajc^a,    @oIo,    ^afmo, 
Gen.  Sing.,  2orb8,  ?abi^,    ©enieS,  ?ltteur«,  ^afcbaS,  (2oIo8,  ^afmoS, 
Nom.  Plur.,  2orb8,  2abte8,  @enie§,  ^IfteurS,  ^ajc^aS,  ®oIo8,  ^a[mo9, 
Bat.  Plur.,  Sorbs.  2abie«.  ©enieS.  5lfteur8.  ^ajdjaS.  @oIo8.  ^afinoS. 

Nom.  Sing.,    5lbicctit),  Capital,      SBcrbum,  SD^ufihie,  X^cma, 

Gen.  Sing.,    2lbiccti»«,  Capitals,    SBerbumS,  aJiufihig,  %\)ma9, 

Nom.  Plur.,)  %t)itctx>oa,  ^apitcile,     53erba,  2Jtufici,    %i)tmata, 

*'    I  Slbjectitjen.  ^apitalien.  SSerbcn.  SKufifer.   X^cmen. 

§  78.  The  Declension  of  Proper  Nouns  differs  greatly  from 
that  of  common  nouns  (§  72). 

1.  With  names  oj^ persons  : 

1.  The  genitive  is  usually  formed  by  adding  sg, 

2.  But  masc.  names  in  ft,  ^,  f(^,  f,  J,  and  fern,  names  in  C^  take  itH9* 

3.  The  plural  of  all  names  is  formed  according  to  the  old  declensioq 
except  feminine  names  in  C,  which  follow  the  new  declension : 

Nom.  Sing.,  ^cmxx6),     Subwifl,  ©emitter,    ©iJtlje,    ^^ranj, 

Gen.  Sing.,  |)ctiirt(^3,    SubmigS,  SdjittcrS,  (MotbcS,  ^xanitn9, 

Nam.  Plur.,  ^cinrid^e,    SubttJtge,  ©critter,    @ot^e,    5^anjc, 

Ikit.  Plur.,  ^einric^en.  Subiuigen.  @d;ittern.  @'6ti)in.  granjen. 
M 


266  THE  NOUN.  [§  79, 80, 

Norn.  Sing.,  SBert^a,     (Smma,     2lbet^etb,     §cbtDtg,     SD^arie', 
^en.  Sing.,  53ert^a§,    ®mma§,    Slbel^etbg,    §ebn)tg3,    3}?art*en8, 
Norn.  Plur.,  ^ertl;a§.    (gmma§.    5lbel^eib§.   ^ebtt)igg,    2}ian*en. 
Rem.  Proper  nouns  are  not  inflected  when  preceded  by  the  article  or  an 

adjective  pronoun :  bte  53tlbjaulc  bes  ?)orf ;  bte  SSerfe  beg  ^o^ann  ©ebaftian 

SBac^  (or  ^o^ann  @ebaftian  33a^g  SlSerfe). 

2.  Names  of  cities  or  countries,  not  ending  in  <?,  J,  or 
If  take  §  in  the  genitive :  ^erlin^  Umgebungen ;  t)te  ©tdbte 
2)eutf^lant)$, 

i2em.  Those  in  §,  J,  and  J  must  be  (and  others  may  be)  preceded  by  iJOn, 
bc^,  or  a  qualifying  noun  :  bte  (Stntt)o^ner  ijon  9J?ains  (or  ber  ®tabt  aJiainj). 

§  79.  The  chief  irregularities  in  the  plural  are  these  : 

1.  Nouns  indicating  weight,measure,  and  number  retain 
their  singular  form,  even  when  used  in  the  plural. 

S)rei  ^l^funb  ^ucfer ;  fec^S  guj3  ^oc^ ;  i^ieqig  2Jiann  9ieiteret. 
Exc.  But  feminine  nouns  in  t,  and  nouns  indicating  divisions  of  time,  take 
the  plural  form ;  tier  2Jieileu  entfernt ;  ixotx  2:age  lang. 

2.  Some  nouns  have  two  forms  in  the  plural,  as  : 

S)er  S)orn ;  pi.  2)ornen,  or  2)orner,    2)ag  Sid^t ;  pi.  Std^te,  or  Stc^ter. 

S)ag  Sanb ;  pi.  Sanbe,  or  Sanber.        2)aS  2;^al ;  i?/.  %^a[t,  or  2:^aler, 
J?em.  1.  With  some  nouns  one  form  (as  Satlbe,  S^ale)  is  poetical. 
Rem.  2.  Sometimes  the  different  forms  have  different  meanings,  as : 

SDer  S3anb,  volume,  pi.  S3dnbe.    2)a3  @efid;t,  eyesight,  pi.  (wanting). 

2)a6  S3anb,  ribbon,  pi  S3anber.      „         „      face,       pi.  (Seftc^ter, 

(no  sing.)    fetters,  pi.  5Sanbe.        ,;  ,f      vision,    pi.  Oejtd^te. 

3.  Some  nouns  have  no  singular  number,  as  : 
2)iC  Sl^nen,  (SItern,  ©ebrilber,  ©efc^toifter,  Seute,  Wla\txn,  mptn. 

4.  Some  nouns  have  no  plural  number,  as : 

^cr  93egitin,  S)ru(f ,  jammer,  @anb,  ®trett,  Unterridjt. 

2)iC  2(f(^e,  @^re,  gtud;t,  gurdjt,  ®nabe,  SteBe,  ^rac^t,  ©anftmut^, 

2)a^  Slnfe^n,  (Sintommen,  entsMen,  (grenb,  ©liicf,  Seben,  Sob. 


4.  SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN. 

(Sijntay  beg  ^au^itttjortcg.) 
§  80.  The  Nominative  Case  in  English  corresponds 
in  use  to  the  same  case  in  German.     The  Possessive  is 


§81,82.]  SYNTAX   OF   THE   NOUN.  267 

usually  translated  by  the  Genitive  in  German,  and  the 
Objective  by  the  Genitive,  Dative,  or  Accusative. 

Rem.  1.  The  original  idea  of  the  three  oblique  cases,  which  exist  in  all  the 
Teutonic  languages  (§  2),  including  the  Anglo-Saxon,  appears  to  have  been : 

1 .  Of  the  Genitive :  whence,  from  what  place — origin  ; 

2.  Of  the  Dative :  where,  in  or  at  what  place — position  ; 

3.  Of  the  Accusative :  whither,  to  what  place — direction. 

Rem.  2.  In  the  development  of  the  different  Teutonic  languages,  the  uses 
of  the  cases  have  undergone  so  many  modifications  that  their  correct  appli- 
cation in  passing  from  one  language  to  another  has  become  very  difiicult. 

§  81.  The  Genitive  Case  is  used : 

1.  After  the  derivative  prepositions  onftatt,  au^crljalb, 

toii^rcnb,  locgcn,  ienfeit,  liingg,  tro$,  jufolgc,  etc.  {§  202) : 

?lnftatt  beg  33ruber8,  Instead  of  the  brother. 

SBa^rcnb  bc6  ^ricgcS,  During  the  war. 

2.  Without  a  preposition  : 

1.  After  nouns  of  limitation,  possession,  etc.  (for  the  English  possessive) . 
2)ic  ®ejd^id;tc  2)eutj(^lanbg,    The  history  of  Germany. 

2)e8  ©chiller?  S3u(^,  The  scholar's  book. 

2.  After  the  adjectives  anfi(!^tt(|,  bCOtCrta,  miibC,  UOU,  etc.  (§91): 
95oU  bcr  greube,  Full  of  joy.     9iJJube  be8  Scbeng,  Weary  of  life. 

3.  After  the  verbs  at^tCH,  CUtbC^rCH,  IttC^Cn,  ftCrbCH,  etc.  (§  178): 
3lUc  lad^cn  jeiner  ©iteltcit,       All  laugh  at  his  vanity. 

4.  In  many  adverbial  expressions  : 

3)e§  9J2orgcn6,  beS  ?lbenb8,     In  the  morning,  in  the  evening. 

©liicflid^crnjcifc,  Happily. 

Rem.  1.  By  fiilse  analogy,  the  form  bC^  ^d^i^  ife^n.)  is  used. 
Rem.  2.  The  genitive  case  was  formerly  used  much  more  than  it  is  at  pres- 
ent, 

§  82.  The  Dative  Case  is  used  : 

1.  After  the  prepositions  an,  auf,  ^intcr,  in,  etc.  (§  244), 
when  signifying  rest,  or  motion  within  certain  limits  : 

2)a8  Sinb  ifl  im  ©arten,  The  child  is  in  the  garden.  [den. 

2)aS  ^inb  lauft  im  ©artcn,     The  child  is  running  about  in  the  gar- 

2.  Always  after  the  prepositions  m^f  m^tXfetc.  (§  220) : 

(2r  f  ommt  au8  bcm  ©artcn,     He  is  coming  out  of  the  garden. 

3.  Without  a  preposition  : 

1.  After  the  adjectives  abltlit^,  angCHCbnt,  tiJlbrifi,  etc.  (§  95) : 
(Sr  ift  fciuem  ^ruber  al^ulid;,  lie  is  like  (or  resembles)  his  brother. 


268  THE  NOUN.  [§  83-85. 

2.  After  the  verbs  allien,  antttorteii,  banfcn,  folgcn,  etc.  (§  i7uj: 

(Sr  folgt  f eintnt  ^ruber,  He  follows  his  brother. 

3.  As  the  indirect  object  of  many  verbs  (§  179,  2): 

(gr  a^Oih  ttlir  bag  S3u(^,  He  gave  me  the  book. 

§  83.  The  Accusative  Case  is  used: 

1.  After  the  prepositions  an,  auf,  M§,  ill,  t)Or,  etc. 
(§  82,  1),  when  signifying  motion  towards  an  object: 

(Sr  ging  in  bcn  ©arten,  He  went  into  the  garden. 

2.  Always  after  the  prepositions  burcl),  fiir,  etc.  ( 237) : 

(Sr  giug  burc^  bCtt  ©arten,  He  went  through  the  garden. 

3.  To"  express  the  direct  object  of  transitive  verbs: 

@r  faufte  bcIl  ^Iciftift,  He  bought  the  pencil. 

@r  gab  mir  i)a^  ^M^f  He  gave  me  that  book. 

4.  After  verbs  and  adjectives,  expressing  price,  weight, 
measure,  definite  time,  age,  etc.  (§  177,  2 ;  §  96) : 

(Sg  !o[tet  Cincn  %%^\tXf  It  cost  one  dollar. 

^6  tDtegt  Cin  ^funb,  It  weighs  a  pound. 

@r  blicfe  cincn  O^nSCn  Ita^f  He  remained  an  entire  day. 

(S8  ift  nut  cincn  B^M  breit,  It  is  only  an  inch  wide. 

§  84.  Some  verbs  are  followed  by  two  nouns  in  the  same  case ;  others  by 
two  nouns  in  different  cases ;  and  some  by  a  substantive  whose  case  is  deter- 
mined by  the  signification  of  the  verb,  while  the  practice  of  good  writers  varies 
as  to  the  case  that  should  follow  some  verbs  (see  syntax  of  the  verb,  §  175). 

§  85.  In  addition  to  the  rules  of  Apposition  which  pre- 
vail in  the  English  language,  the  German  has  the  fol- 
lowing : 

1.  Nouns  expressing  weight,  measure,  and  number  (when  not  used  parti- 
tively)  are  in  apposition  with  the  nouns  they  limit : 

(Sin  ^funb  ^ndtx,  A  pound  o/ sugar. 

(but)  (Sin  ^tunfe  bicf  C^  S^l^^^^f  ^  pound  of  this  sugar. 

(Sin  (Stag  Staffer,  A  glass  o/"  water. 

2.  Proper  names  of  countries,  cities,  etc. ,  and  of  months  are  in  apposi' 
tion  with  the  specifying  common  noun : 

S)a§  ^bntgrci^  ^rcu^en,  The  kingdom  o/ Prussia. 

3?tc  ®tabt  S3erltn,  The  city  o/ Berlin. 

3m  2Jionat  3luguft,  In  the  month  o/*  August. 


86.]  THE   ADJECTIVE.  261) 


THE  ADJECTIVE. 

C^a^  e-igcufc^aft^ujort) 
§  86.  Adjectives  are  primitive,  derivative,  or  compound. 

1.  Vfiih. pri7nitive  adjectives  are  also  reckoned  many, 
of  which  the  verbal  origin  is  "no  longer  felt"  :  gUt,  alt. 

2.  Derivative  adjectives  are  formed  by  adding  the  suf- 
fixes =bar,  =cr  (=ern),  =^aft,  =ig,  =ifd)  (=er),  =Ii(^,  =or  =fam,  to 
words  of  any  part  of  speech,  except  the  article,  con- 
junction, or  interjection: 

1.  sdor  {Old  German:  beran,  to  bear),  added  to  the  noun  or  a  verbal 
root,  indicates  ability  or  possibility  of  a  quality  or  action : 
frud^tbar,  fruit-bearing,  bienftbar,  serviceable,  c^bar,  eatable. 

2.  sCn  (sCrn)  is  added  only  to  nouns  denoting  material : 
golbcn,  filbcrn,  tebern,  biJIjern,  gldfern. 

3.  if)(l\t  (Oltl  Ger. :  haft,  holding)  denotes  possession  of  the  quality  of 
the  noun,  or  inclination  towards  it :  tUijcnb(;aft,  virtuous,  fd^mcid/el^aft, 
flattering. 

Rem.  sbaft  is  added  to  but  three  adjectives :  boSfjaft,  franf^aft,  Icdcrl^aft. 

4.  stg  denotes  possession  of  the  quality  or  relation,  expressed  by  the 
noun,  adjective,  numeral,  pronoun,  verb,  preposition,  or  adverb,  to 
which  it  is  suffixed  :  mac^tig,  mighty,  Iebcnbi(^,  lively,  bcr  mctnigc, 
mine,  eimg,sole,  cinjig,  single,  bijfig,  biting,  je^ig,  present,  tjorig,  pre- 
ceding, nicbrig,  lowly. 

6.  sift^  (scr)  denotes  origin,  similarity,  or  inclination:  ^rcu^ifd?, Prus- 
sian, irbifc^,  earthly,  ncibifd),  envious. 

Rem.  1.  The  A\^  takes  the  place  of  ic  or  tea/ in  many  English  adjectives: 
bramatifc^,  ^octifd?,  logifd),  ^iftorifc^. 

Rem.  2.  In  proper  adjectives  frequently  the  termination  ctt  is  preferred  to 
sif^ ;  the  scr  takes  no  inflection :  ber  aJiagbcburger  2)om,  bic  2ci^jigcr  ^t\* 
tung,  ba8  33ranbcnburgcr  2:bor  (gen.  be8  2)?agbeburger  2)om8). 

6.  slic^  (compare  English  likejy)  forms  adjectives  from  nouns,  and  di- 
minutive adjectives  from  adjectives :  ftnblic^,  childlike,  taglid;,  daily, 
riJtblid^,  reddish. 

7.  sfam  (related  to  i^ufammcn,  Lat.  semper,  Greek  afia,  Eng.  some),  add- 
ed to  verbs  and  verbal  nouns,  indicates  possession  of  of  inclination  to 
the  quality:  arbcitjam,  laborious,  mil^jam,  wearisome. 


270  THE   ADJECTIVE.  [§87,88. 

3.  Compowid  adjectives  are  formed  by  prefixing  to  ad« 
jectives  a  noun,  preposition,  or  other  adjective  : 

S)uu{elbtau,  dark  blue.  Stebeiigmilrbtg,  amiable. 

Saubftumm,  deaf  and  dumb.     9}Jitfc^uIbig,  accessory  to  a  crime. 

§  87.  Adjectives  are  called  predicative  when  they  are 
used  to  complete  the  predications  of  the  verbs  fcin, 

tijerbcH;  Meikn,  f^etnen  (au^fe^en),  biinfcn,  Iftcigcn  : 

2)ag  Sebeit  ift  furS,  Life  is  short. 

S)ag  ^Better  toirb  Vjix^f  The  weather  is  becoming  hot. 

Rem.  1 .  Adjectives  used  predicatively  are  not  declined. 
Rem.  2.  Some  adjectives  are  used  onli)  predicatively,  as :  aitgjl,  Berett,  fctnb, 
gram,  \)t\\,  irre,  !unb,  quer,  quit,  fdjulb,  abiDenbig,  anfic^tig,  eingcbcn!,  gctroft, 
gett)a^r,  ^a6()att,  t^eil^afttg,  terluftig. 

Rem.  3.  The  following  are  rarely  or  never  used  predicatively :  (1),  the 
simple  form  of  superlatives  (§  93,  Rem.  2)  ;  (2),  adjectives  in  sCH,  golbeit,  fil* 
bcrn,  etc. ;  (3),  some  other  adjectives,  as :  bortig,  ^tefig,  f))anifc^,  bcrgcben. 


1.  DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 
(^clUnatioit  ber  (£igcnf^aft^toiirtcr*) 
§  88.  Adjectives  used  attributively,  that  is,  when  placed 
before  the  noun  to  express  some  of  its  well-known  at- 
tributes, are   subject  to   three   modes   of  declension, 
termed  the  Old.,  New.,  and  Mixed  Declensions. 

1.  The  Old  Declension  is  employed  when  no  article 
or  adjective  pronoun  precedes  the  adjective  (§  89,  Rem.  2): 

©ut^cr  ayjamt,  gut-c  i^rau,  gut-c^  ^iub, 

Good  man.  good  woman.  good  child. 

2.  The  New  Declension  is  employed  when  the  adjec- 
tive is  preceded  by : 

1 .  The  definite  article  bCf* 

2.  All  adjective  ■pronouns  that  are  declined  according  to  the  Old  De- 
clension, as  btCfCr,  jCbcr,  jCncr,  foIC^Cr,  toCll^Cr,  thus  including  aU 
adjective  pronouns  except  the  possessives  (§  88, 3) : 

2)er  gut^c  3Jtann,       bte  gut=e  grau,  ba§  gut*c  ^nb, 

The  good  man.  the  good  woman,         the  good  child. 

Rem.  1.  The  compound  adjective  pronouns  bcrlcittgc,  bcrfclbe,  cause  an 

adjective  following  them  to  be  in  the  New  Declension,  by  the  force  of  the  i)er» 

Rem.  2.  Many  writers  give  the  New  Declension  to  adjectives  foUowin^t 

certain  participles  that  have  a  determinative  signification,  as :  f  OlgCnbCt/  tt^ 

toa()ntcr,  ucrft^iebencr* 


§89.] 


DECLENSION   OF   ADJECTIVES. 


271 


3.  The  Mixed  Dedension  is  used  when  the  adjective 

is  preceded  by  a  possessive  pronoun,  by  cill,  or  by  fciu : 

ein  flutter  2Rann,  einc  gut*c  ($rau,         ein  gut^c^  S^nb, 

A  good  man,  a  good  woman,  a  good  child. 

§  89.  Table  of  the  three  Declensions  of  Adjectives. 


SINGULAB. 

PLURAL. 

^* 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Neuter. 

All  Genders. 

^1 

N, 

gut'-er, 

gut*e, 

gut*e«. 

gut*e. 

G. 

gut*  en  (eg), 

gut*er, 

gut*  en  (eg). 

gut*er. 

^ 

D. 

gut^cm, 

gut*cr, 

gut*  era. 

g  u  t  *  en. 

— 

A. 

gut^ctt, 

gut*e, 

gut*eg. 

gut*c. 

N. 

ber  gut*c, 

bic  gut*e, 

ba§  gut*c. 

btc  gut* en (e). 

rp 

G. 

be3  gut* en, 

ber  g  u  t  *  en, 

bes  gut* en. 

bcr  gut* en. 

'1 

D. 

bemgut*en, 

ber  g  u  t  *  en, 

bcm  g  u  t  *  en. 

ben  g  u  t  *  en. 

A. 

ben  gut* en, 

bic  gut*e, 

bag  gut*e. 

bic  gut*en(e). 

>♦  i 

N. 

mein     gutter, 

mcine  gut*e, 

mcin     gut*efl!. 

meinc   gut*en. 

^1 

G. 

meineS  gut*en, 

meincr  gut*en, 

meiucs  gut*en. 

meincr  gut*en. 

D. 

mcincm  gut*en. 

mcincr  gut*en, 

mciucm  gut*en. 

mcincn  gut*en. 

A. 

mctncn  gut*en, 

meinc  gut*e, 

mcin      gut*eg. 

meinc   gut*cn. 

Rem.  1.  The  former  termination  sCg  of  the  genitive  singular  in  the  mascu 
line  and  neuter  genders  of  the  Old  Declension  is  now  generally  rejected  hy 
most  writers,  but  it  is  yet  retained  in  many^arec?  expressions: 
®cicn  vgic  gutcS  2Jiut^c8,  Be  of  good  courage. 

ScincSrocgS,  By  no  means. 

Ohs.  The  tei-mination  *c9  is  also  retained  in  the  masculine  and  neuter  sin- 
gular of  all  pronouns,  whether  used  atljectively  or  suhstimtively,  which  are 
declined  according  to  the  Old  Declension  {see  §  1()!>~1  K')  : 

2)a8  2)ac^  bicfeS  ^aujeS,  The  roof  of  this  house. 

Rem.  2.  Adjectives  take  the  Old  Declension  when  preceded  by  the  following 
undeclined  words:  etttttg,  ni(^tg,  tJtCl,  ttiemg  ;  fOl(^,  ttclt^,  raan(^  ;  car- 
dinal numbers;  britt^ttlb,  einerlet,  bergteit^en, etc. .- 

2)rct  cbic  Orafen  folgcn  (U^.),    Three  noble  counts  follow. 
<SoIc^  g^o^c  @c^atjc,  Such  great  treasures. 

Tlit  CttDaS  TOcifecm  ^o^icr,  With  some  white  paper. 

^Ucrlei  gutcS  2^uc^,  All  kinds  of  good  cloth. 

Rem.  3.  After  the  plurals  attc,  anbcrc,  cinigc,  ctlic^c,  fcinc,  mand^c,  fot^c. 
tDClc^C,  me^rcrc,  \)icle,  njcnigc,  tlie  adjective  usually  drops  sn  in  the  nom.  and  ace. 

Rem.  4.  The  similarity  between  the  new  declension  of  nouns  and  the  ne\t 
declension  of  adjectives  is  very  striking. 


272  THE   ADJECTIVE.  [§  89,90. 

Rem.  5.  The  Mixed  Declension  is  like  the  Old  in  the  nominative  and  ac- 
cusative singular ;  in  the  other  cases  it  is  Uke  the  New  Declension. 

Rem.  6.  After  the  personal  pronouns  i(^,  bu,  tSSXXf  S^Xf  the  adjective  takes 
the  Old  Declension  in  the  Nom.  Sing.  ;  in  the  other  cases  it  takes  the  Neu> 
Declension : 

3)U,  guteS  tinb  I  Thou,  good  child ! 

3^r,  armen  Scute  I  You,  poor  people ! 

Rem.  7.  In  poetic  language  the  termination  may  be  dropped  from  the  nam. 
and  ace.  sing,  neuter  of  adjectives  of  the  Old  and  Mixed  Declensions : 
^alt  3Ba[f er ;  alt  (Sijen,  Cold  water ;  old  iron. 

(Sin  gut  siBort,  A  good  word. 

Rem.  8.  When,  in  poetic  composition,  two  or  more  adjectives  are  joined 
to  the  same  noun,  only  the  last  one  is  declined : 

25crtalj^,t>errat^ertfc^e9Jat^,  The  false,  treasonable  counsel. 
Rem.  9.  An  attributive  adjective,  following  the  noun,  is  not  declined : 

ein  9liefe,  grog  unb  n>ilb,        A  giant,  large  and  fierce. 
Rem.  10.  Adjectives  used  substantively  retain  their  adjective  terminations r 

(Sin  S)CUtfc^er,  bie  S)eutf(^en,  A  German,  the  Germans. 
Rem.  11.  Participles  used  adjectively  are  declined  like  adjectives : 

^m  folgenbcn  Sage,  On  the  following  day. 

Rem.  12.  Adjectives  ending  in  sCl/  -tVif  or  ctx,  when  declined,  usually  drop 
an  t  either  before  or  after  I,  n,  1 1 

(Sr  tfl  ein  ebler  SJJcnf^,  He  is  a  noble  man. 

SBir  ^aben  trotfllCS  JBetter,     We  are  ha^-ing  dry  weather. 
Rem.  13.  The  adjective  !^0C^  drops  C  when  it  is  declined: 

(Sin  fe^r  J^OJ^cr  S3erg,  A  very  high  mountain. 

Rem.  14.  If  two  adjectives  stand  in  equal  logical  relation  to  the  noun,  thoy 
both  follow  the  Old  Declension  :  if  the  second  adjective  stands  in  more  inti-* 
mate  relation  to  the  noun  than  the  first,  it  follows  the  Mixed  Declension : 

^a6)  guter  (unb)  alter  @itte,  According  to  good  old  custom. 

25on  aitem  [blauen  ^a^ier],     From  old  [blue  paper]. 


2.  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

(©tcigcrung  bcr  ©tgcnftl^aft^toiirtcrO 
§  90.  In  the  German,  as  in  all  Teutonic  languages, 
the  comparative  degree  is  formed  by  adding  =cr,  and  the 
superlative  by  adding  =ft  (or  =cft)  to  the  positive  degree. 

Rem.  1.  When  the  positive  degree  ends  in  sb,  st,  s^,  -^f  =5^  =f(|l^  -^f  Af  or 
^,  the  superlative  usually  takes  =e[t  J  otherwise  it  takes  sft* 


§91.] 


COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVES. 


273 


Rem.  2.  The  few  adjectives  ending  in  *tf  take  only  sf  in  the  comparative. 


Positive. 

Compar. 

Superl. 

Positive.        Compar. 

Superl. 

fcin,  fine. 

fcin*er, 

fCtn::ft 

^ei^,  hot,       ^ciB^er, 

^eiii'Cft 

faul,  lazy, 

faul*cr, 

faul.ft 

falfd;,  false,    fatfd;=cr, 

fai^.cft 

rcid^,  rich. 

reic^-cr, 

reid;4t 

frob,  happy,  frol^^cr, 

frob'Cft. 

fci;en,  fine, 

Wincti, 

Ww'At 

frei,  free,       frciscr, 

frcinft. 

milb,  mild, 

milbscr, 

milb^Cft 

treu,  true,      trcu^cr, 

treu^cft 

laut,  loud. 

laut*er, 

Iaut=cft 

milbc,  weary,  iniibc*r, 

miibc»ft. 

Rem.  3.  Adjectives  ending  in  sti,  stUf  or  sW,  reject  the  t  of  this  syllable  in 
the  comparative  degree : 

Sbel,  noble,  Cbl-cr,  nobler,  ebcl'1^,  noblest. 

§  91.  When  the  positive  is  a  monosyllable,  the  radical 
vowel,  if  a,  0,  or  U,  usually  takes  the  umlaut  in  the  com- 
parative and  superlative  degrees: 


Positive.         Compar.     Superl.  Positive.         Compar.      Superl. 


alt,  old,  alUx,       Oltscjl. 

toaxm,  warm,  ttorm^cr,  ttormscft. 
lang,  long,      loitg'Cr,    Io«8*jl. 


grob,  coarse,  griJli=er,  groi^jl. 
furj,  short,  fiirs^cr,  !i!rj=cfl. 
iung,  young,   jUng-cr,    iilng^ji. 


i2em.  1.  The  umlaut  is  not  used  in  the  comparison  of: 

1 .  Adjectives  with  the  diphthong  an  in  the  radical  syllable : 

taut,  loud,  lout^cr,  Iaut:=cft. 

2.  Derivative  adjectives  (ending  in  -hat,  ^tl,  '^aft,  sfant,  etc.): 

banfbar,  thankful,  bantbar»cr,  bantbar^t 

8.  Adjectives  having  the  participial  prefix  Qf  I 

gcwaiibt,  dexterous,  gctt)anbt*cr,  gctvanbtsCft 

4.  Some  adjectives  of  foreign  origin : 

brat),  falfd?,  matt,  )?Iatt,  gart,  nobct,  flolj,  etc. 

5.  The  following  monosyllabic  adjectives  of  German  origin : 

1.  With  a :  barjc^,  blant,  faM,  falb,  flarf),  farg,  tnaipp,  (abm,  ta^, 
nacft,  raf(^,  jac^t,  fanft,  ftatt,  fd;Iaff,  fd^Iant,  jlarr,  flat!,  ttja^r. 

2.  With  0 :  fro^,  ^0^1,  ^olb,  to8,  morfc^,  ro^,  fc^roff,  tott,  boll. 

3.  With  u :  bunt,  bum^f,  ^lum^  runb,  jtumm,  ftum^)f,  ttjunb. 

Rem.  2.  The  use  of  the  umlaut  continues  to  extend  more  and  more,  both 
in  the  language  of  the  common  people  and  in  the  works  of  good  writers. 
Thus,  Goethe  uses  flot^cr,  flarcr;  Klopstock  uses  jartCt;  Kinkel  uses  glijt* 
tCftCn*     The  use  also  varies  with  fiann,  Mtt^,  frOUtm,  HO^,  OCfUUb,  etc. 

M2 


274  THE   ADJECTIVE.  [92, 93. 

§  92.  A  few  adjectives  are  irregular  and  a  few  are 
defective   in  comparison: 


Positive. 

Coviparative. 

Superlative. 

gut,      good. 

beffer, 

better. 

beft,          best. 

'mi,      much. 

tnef)r, 

more, 

tncift,       most.           1 

{)0(^,     high, 

^i5^er, 

higher. 

bcd;ft,      highest. 

natje,     near. 

n<x\}vc, 

nearer, 

liad;ft,      nearest. 

(auj3en  {adv.\  without), 

ciu^er, 

exterior. 

(iujjerft,    extreme. 

(innen  \adv.\  within). 

tnner, 

interior. 

innerft,     innermost. 

(toor  [>rep.],  before), 

t»orber, 

anterior. 

toorberft,  foremost. 

(^inten  \_adv.\  behind). 

Winter, 

hinder. 

f)interft,    hindmost. 

(oBen  \adv.\  above), 

ober, 

upper, 

oberft,      uppermost. 

(unten  {adv.\  below, 

unter, 

lower. 

iinterft,    lowermost. 

(min  \_adj.\  adv.\  little), 

mtnber, 

less. 

miubeft,   least. 

(er  '[Old  German  for  the 

(erer  [Old  Ger.  for 

adverb  ei)e],  early). 

the  adv. 

e()er],  earlier). 

erfte,       first. 

(laz  {Old  Ger.\  lazy). 

le^te,       last. 

(erft,      first), 
(le^t,     last), 

erfter, 
tester, 

former 

latter, 



§  93.  Adjectives,  especially  if  they  are  polysyllables, 
are  sometimes  compared  by  placing  before  the  positive 
the  adverbs  mcl^r,  more,  and  am  mciftcn,  most : 

@ett)anbt,  dexterous,    meftr  gewanbt,    am  mciftCtt  getcanbt. 
Rem.  1.  In  comparing  two  adjectives  with  each  other,  ntcl)t  must  be  used: 
@r  i[t  mcl)r  ta^fer  al^  i?orfid^tig,  He  is  more  brave  than  prudent. 

Rem.  2.  To  express  the  superlative  predicatively,  the  dative,  preceded  by 
am  (an  bcm),  may  be  employed: 

3)tefe  58Iume  i[t  am  fd/Onftcn,  This  flower  is  most  beautiful. 

Rem.  3.  By  way  of  emphasis,  the  genitive  plm-al  of  attCt  is  frequently  pre- 
fixed to  the  superlative : 

2)teje  SStume  tft  bte  attcrfci^onfte,  This  flower  is  far  the  most  beautiful. 

Rem.  4.  The  absolute  superlative  is  expressed  by  prefixing  to  the  positive 
such  adverbs  as  fe^jt,  \}'6^^t,  aU^Ctft,  etc.  : 

2)tC  9^a(^rtd>ttft^i3(^ftintereffant,  The  news  is  extremely  interesting. 

Rem.  5.  Adjectives  in  the  comparative  and  superlative  degrees  are  subject 
to  the  same  laws  of  declension  (§  90)  as  though  in  the  positive  degree : 
3)er  befte  ^reunb,  The  best  friend. 

SJiein  befter  greuub,  My  best  (in  Engl,  my  good)  friend. 


§  04-9O.J  SYNTAX    OF   THE    ADJECTIVE.  275 

3.  SYNTAX  OF  THE  ADJECTIVE. 

§  94.  Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns, and  participles, 
when  used  att?'ibutively,  take  the  gender,  number,  and 
case  of  the  substantive  which  they  qualify  (L.  XVIII). 

§  95.  The  following  adjectives  govern  the  genitive  case 
without  the  use  of  a  preposition  (§  81,  2,  2) : 

1.  ^Infid^tig,  arm,  bar,  bebiirfttg,  bcgierig,  beni3tt)igt,  betou^t,  blc^,  ctn- 
gcbent,  einig,  ein§,  crilbrigt,  erfa^rcn,  fa^tg,  fret,  frob,  gebent,  gcftau* 
big,  gettja^r,  geirartig,  gen?t|,  genjo^nt,  ^ab^aft,  tune,  funb,  fiiubtg, 
lebig,  leer,  Io«,  mad^tig,  miibe,  nntjfig,  quitt,  fatt,  jd;ulbtg,  fied;en, 
t^cil^aft  (*ig),  ilberbriifftg,  i>erbad?tig,  toerluftig,  tjott,  tucrttj,  toilrbig. 

2.  Such  of  these  adjectives  as  take  the  negative  prefix  un=/  as : 
Uiibcgierig,  uucrfatiren,  immad;tig,  unfd;ulbig,  uufid;er,  untDiirbig. 

@r  ift  atlcr  ®orgen  ftet,  He  is  free  from  all  cares. 

Sr  ift  bC^  2Bcge8  tunbig,         He  is  acquainted  with  the  road. 
@S  ift  nid;t  bcr  2Jiul)e  wert^,  It  is  not  worth  the  trouble. 
(gr  ift  bcr  ^d;tung  unttJilrbig,  He  is  unworthy  of  respect. 
Rem.  1 .  Some  of  these  adjectives  may  be  followed  by  certain  prepositions 
''which  govern  their  own  cases),  as : 

(1)  begierig,  by  ntttft  or  auf  ♦  (5)  frei,  Icbtg,  tccr,  lo8,  bofl,  efc, 

(2)  bercit,  fabig,  by  gu.  by  Uon, 

(3)  arm,  gcmo^nt,  leer,  by  an.  (6)  einig,  erfabrcn,  Jro^,  by  iiu 

(4)  fro^,  gcmi^,  einig,  by  iibcr,        (7)  jufncbeu,  by  mit 

er  ift  frei  tjon  atleu  ®orgcn,  He  is  free  from  all  cares. 

@r  lit  arm  an  @elb,  He  is  poor  in  money. 

Rem.  2.  Some  of  these  adjectives  are  used,  though  rarely,  as  governing  the 
uccusative  case,  as :  anfid^tig,  betDu^t,  fabig,  gcftanbig,  gema^r,  gctDol;nt,  ^ab* 
^aft,  Io8,  miibc,  fatt,  fc^ulbig,  ilberbriifftg,  trert^,  jufriebcn. 

(gg  ifi  nid;t  bic  3)Zil^e  trcrt^,  It  is  not  worth  the  trouble. 

§  96.  Many  adjectives  govern  tlie  dative  case  without 

the  use  of  a  preposition  (§  82,3,1),  as: 

^  1.  5tbtrilnnig,  o^ulic^,  angeboren,  angctegcn,  angcnebm,  anfto^ig,  be* 
faniit,  bangc,  bequcm,  betru^t,  bi^fc,  bantbar,  bienlid;,  bienftbar,  cigen, 
cigent^iimlid?,  ergebcn,  feil,  fcinb,  fern,  folgfam,  fremb,  ge^orfam,  gc» 
mein,  gemeinfam,  geneigt,  gctrif?,  gctrogen,  gleicb,  gnSbig,  gram,  gut, 
nabe,  ncu,  ni5tbig,  offcn,  offeubar,  ^affcnb,  ^cinlid),  red;t,  fd^citlid), 
fdjmeic^el^aft,  fd)merjlid;,  fdjulbig,  fc^trer,  fiif?,  ttjeuer,  treu.  ilbd, 
ilberlcgcn,  untertban,  »erbad>tig,  i^erberbli^,  ftermanbt,  toortl)eiJb..fl 
tt)c^,  t»ert^,  toidptig,  tuibertic^,  tinUtommen,  wo^l,  itceifel^aft. 


276 


NUMERALS. 


[§  97,  98. 


2.  The  negatives  of  these,  formed  by  adding  the  prefix  itn*  or  ah-X 

1.  With  un:  una^ulid;,  unangene^m,  unbefannt,  uitnot^tg,  unfd^ul* 

2.  With  ati :  abgeneigt.  [big,  unsn^eifcl^aft,  etc. 
Sd}  bin  3^nen  je^r  banfbar.      I  am  very  grateful  to  you. 

(S§  i[t  i^m  jcfjciblid^,  It  is  injurious  to  him. 

@r  ift  mir  unbetannt,  He  is  a  stranger  to  me. 

Bern.  1.  It  is  usually  a  personal  noun  that  takes  the  dative  after  these  ad- 
iectives,  and  which  maybe  treated  as  the  ^'indirect  object"  of  the  adjective: 
C2§  wax  il^m  ntc^t  ber  Wi^^  irert^,     It  was  not  worth  to  him  the  trouble. 
(Sr  ift  mir  je^n  Xijakx  fd;utbtg,         He  is  ten  dollars  in  debt  to  me. 
Rem.  2.  Many  of  these  adjectives  may  be  followed  by  prepositions : 
^d)  bin  mit  t^ra  toermanbt,  I  am  related  to  him. 

2)er  tbnig  tear  ii:)m  (or  gegCtt  t^n)     The  king  was  not  merciful  to  him 
nic^t  gnabig,  (or  towards  him). 

§  97.  The  AcGiisative IB  govemedh J Sidjectiyes  ex^res^" 
ing  value,  weight,  measure,  or  age  {see  §  94,  liem.  2) : 

(S8  toax  Itintn  pfennig  n^ert^,  It  was  not  worth  a  penny. 

(SS  ift  nur  Cincn  3"^^  hxdt,  It  is  only  an  inch  wide. 

@r  ijl  JCl^n  ^a^xt  alt,  He  is  ten  years  old. 


NUMERALS. 
(Ba^ItoiJrtcr.) 
§  98.  The  primitive  Numerals  are  cin,  Jtoet,  brci,  tJtcr, 
fiinf,  \t^^f  fickn,  m^if  ncim,  JC^n*     All  other  numerals 
are  derivatives  or  compounds  of  these  primitive  words. 

Rem.  1.  The  apparently  primitive  numbers  Clf/  Stoiolf^  l^UllbCtt,  and  tfltt* 
f  Cnb  have  been  thus  developed : 


Gothic. 

Old- German. 

Mid.-Ger. 

N.-Ger. 

11, 

ainlif,  one  over  (ten), 

einlif, 

eilf,  elf. 

erf. 

12, 

tvalif,  two  over  (ten), 

zwelif, 

zwelef,  zwelf, 

jttjBIf. 

100, 

taihuntaihund)   ten  times 
or  hunt          >        ten, 

huntarot ) 
or  hunt,) 

hundert, 

^unbert. 

1000, 

thusundi,  ten  hundred, 

dfisunt, 

tfisent, 

taufcnb*. 

Rem.  2..  The  high  numbers  2JJtEton,  SStUton,  etc.,  are  fi*om  the  French. 

Rem.  3.  Numerals  are  either  adjectives,  nouns,  or  adverbs.  It  is  more  con^ 
venient,  however,  to  treat  them  as  forming  a  separate  part  of  speech. 

Rem.  4.  There  are  three  classes  of  Numeral  Adjectives:  (1),  Cardinal  Nunsr 
berg;  (2),  Ordinal  Humbors;  (3),  Compound  Numeral  Adjectives. 


§  99.]                                CARDINAL   NUMBERS.                                    277 

§  99.  The  Cardinal  Numbers  are  formed  as  follows; 

L  Sins. 

60.  ©ed^gtg. 

2.  3wci 

70.  ©tcbcnjig  or  ©iebjig. 

8.  S)reu 

80.  ^d^tjig. 

4.  3Sicr. 

90.  Sf^eunsig. 

6.  gttnf. 

100.  §unbcrt. 

6.  ©cd^S. 

101.  §unbcrt  unb  ctn«. 

7.  ©icbcn. 

110.  ^unbcrt  unb  jc^n. 

8.  ac^t. 

120.  ^unbcrt  unb  jtranjig. 

9.  5Reun. 

121.  §unbcrt  cinunbjtpanjig. 

10.  3ct?n. 

125.  ^unbcrt  filnfunbjtt?anjtg. 

11.  eif. 

136.  §unbcrt  fec^«unbbreij3ig. 

12.  3n?elf. 

150.  ^unbert  unb  fiinfjig. 

13.  ©reije^n. 

151.  §unbert  einunbfilnfjig. 

14.  Isieqe^n. 

200.  Bujeibunbert. 

15.  gunfje^n. 

225.  Btt?eit;unbertfiinfunbjn)an3\ft 

IG.  8cd;je^n. 

500.  giint()unbert. 

17.  ©icbenjc^n  or  ©iefcje^n. 

1,000.  Sintaufcnb  or  S^aufcnb. 

18.  3lc^t5cl;n. 

1,005.  (Sintaujenb  unb  filnf* 

19.  ^Jeunse^n, 

1,025.  (Sintaufenb  fiinfunbjwanjig. 

20.  B^^ansivj. 

1,500.  eintaufcnb  filnf^unbert. 

21.  (Siuuntstuansig. 

2,000.  B^eitaujcnb. 

22.  3tt)ctunb5n?an3ig,  etc. 

10,000.  3et;ntaujenb. 

30.  Srci^iij. 

20,000.  3n?ansigtaufcnb. 

31.  (Sinunbbrcigig,  etc. 

100,000.  ^unbcrt  taufcnb. 

40.  SSierjig. 

200,000.  B^ci^unbert  taufenb. 

60.  ganf^ig. 

1,000,000.  (Sine  miUxon. 

65.  ^Untunbfttnf^ig. 

2,000,000.  B">ct  SmiUioncn. 

1869.  ^tc^tje^n^unbert  unb  ncununbfec^jig,  or 
Sintaujcub  ac^t^unbcrt  ncunuubjcd^jig. 

Rem.  1 .  Single  words  are  usually  formed  of  units  and  tens,  of  multiples  of 
a  hundred,  and  of  multiples  of  a  thousand  up  to  a  hundred  thousand.  Bat 
writers  vary  greatly  as  to  the  method  of  dividing  compound  numbers. 

Rem.  2.  All  the  other  numerals,  whether  numeral  nouns,  adjectives,  or  ad- 
verbs, are  formed  from  cardinal  numbers. 

Rem.  3.  From  their  constant  and  universal  use,  cardinal  numbers  retain 
a  fixedness  of  form  not  surpassed  by  that  of  any  other  words  in  a  language. 
They  are  therefore  of  great  value  in  tracing  the  relationship  of  allied  lan- 
guages {see  §  28-30,  and  §  106,  Rem.  3). 

Rem.  4.  When  used  as  abstract  nouns,  cardinal  numbers  take  the  feminine 
gender,  being  in  apposition  with  bit  ^(i\ii  understood  : 

%\t  (gicbcn  ift  bei  ben  3uben  einc    Seven  is  a  sacred  number  with  the 
^eiltge  Ba^I,  Jews. 


278 


NUMERALS. 


[§  100-102. 


§  100.  The  numeral  tin  usually  receives  a  strong 
emphasis  in  pronunciation  (see  §  b2>^Iiem.). 

1.  Used  with  a  noun,  tVX  is  declined  like  the  indefinite  article  (§  54). 

2.  In  the  expression  Ctlt  UUb  bCtfCldC,  t\\\  may  be  undeclined. 

3.  When  used  joithout  a  noun,  it  begins  with  a  capital  letter  (^tllCt,  etc.). 

1.  Not  preceded  by  htt^  it  follows  the  old  declension  of  the  adjective. 

2.  Preceded  by  t)Ct,  it  follows  the  new  declension  of  the  adjective, 
and  is  used  both  in  the  singular  and  plural  numbers  (ber  ©illC, 

bie  Sine,  bag  (gtnc;  bte  @incn)* 

Rem.  It  is  thus  used  (as  the  one,  the  ones)  in  opposition  to  htt  ^lltbCtC, 
hit  Slnbcrn  (the  other,  the  others). 

4.  The  form  ^m§  is  used :  (1),  in  counting,  Ctn§,  Jtoet,  bret,  Uter,  e<c. , 
(2),  in  multiplying,  etc.,  ciltmal  etng  tft  cinS; 

(3),  in  giving  the  time  of  day,  when  the  word  U^r  is  omitted : 
@g  ^at  ©ing  gejc^Iagen,  It  has  struck  one. 

§  101.  The  other  Cardinal  Numbers  are  declined  like 
the  plural  of  adjectives  of  the  Old  declension.  But 
jltJCi  and  brci  take  no  termination  in  the  nominative 
and  accusative: 

Rem.  1.  ^'mti  and  2)rct  are  only  declined  when  not  preceded  by  an  ar- 
ticle, adjective,  or  adjective  pronoun : 

5lug  ivumx  ober  breier  ^tViO^tn      Out  of  the  mouth  of  two  or  three 
2JJunb,  witnesses. 

Rem.  2.  The  other  numbers  are  rarely  declined,  except  when,  in  the  dative 
case,  they  are  used  without  a  noun : 

2Iuf  alien  33icrett  !ne(^en,  To  creep  on  all  fours. 

3Jiit  ©C^fcn  fa^ren,  To  ride  in  a  "coach  and  six." 

Rem.  3.  ^UltbCtt  and  ^ttUfCllb  are  sometimes  used  as  collective  nouns,  and 
as  such  are  declined  after  the  third  form  of  the  old  declension. 

Rem.  4.  The  foreign  words  hit  9JliIIiOtt',  ^ittiOll',  etc.,  are  declined  like 
feminine  nouns  of  the  new  declension. 

§  102.  The  Ordinal  Numbers  are  formed  from  the  Car< 
dinals : 

1.  By  suffixing  4t,  from  jUiet  to  nCUHJC^n* 

2.  By  suffixing  '\ttf  from  JttJanjtg  upwards. 


Norn.  5tr>et, 

bret, 

toter=c, 

yed^g.c, 

ge^n^e, 

Gen.    gtt)et^Cr, 

bretscr, 

bier^cr, 

fe4)§^er, 

ge^n^cr, 

Bat.    stDet^cn, 

bret^cn, 

bter^etl, 

ted;g.cn, 

i^W'tn, 

Ace. .  jttjet. 

bret. 

i5ter=e* 

fe(^§:=C» 

ge^n^^C* 

§  102.] 


ORDINAL   NUMBERS. 


279 


1st  2)er  crftc*                                ' 

50th: 

S)er  fflnf  jtg-jle. 

2d     „ 

5U)Ct=tC» 

55th 

11 

tiiutunbtilufjig^ftC. 

3d      „ 

Drit=tc* 

60th 

It 

feci?5^g4tC. 

4th     „ 

mx'M* 

70th 

n 

fiebeujigsftC  or  fieb* 

5th     „ 

filnf^C. 

jifl'-ftC. 

6th     „ 

fcd^c^tC. 

80th 

11 

ad}t5ig4te» 

7th     „ 

fieben^tC. 

90th 

II 

ueuiijig4tC» 

8th     „ 

a(^t*C» 

100th 

II 

^unbcrt'-ftc. 

9th     „ 

ncun*tC^ 

lOlst 

II 

^unbcrt  unb  erftc. 

10th     „ 

IzhMt. 

125th 

II 

^unbertjiiiifmibjmar* 

nth    „ 

zMt. 

Si94tC. 

12th     „ 

lxo'i\Ht* 

200th 

11 

jtT)ct^unbert"ftC^ 

13th     „ 

brci3e(;n4e» 

500th 

11 

fttuff?unbert4tC» 

14th     „ 

tiersc^n-tC* 

1,000th 

11 

taujenb^ftC* 

15th     „ 

funfsel;n4C* 

l,00l8t 

II 

toujenb  unb  erftc. 

16th     „ 

\z&llt\)n4t* 

1,025th 

II 

taufenbfiinfuubsiDan* 

1 7th     „ 

fiebenjc^n*tC,  or  fictJjc^n^C* 

m4t* 

18th     „ 

ac^t5e(;n*tC. 

1,626th 

11 

taujenb  jec^S^unbert 

19th     „ 

ncunje{;n*tC» 

unb  fcd;gunb* 

20th     „ 

Stt)anjig4tC* 

jtt)an3ig4tC, 

2l8t       „ 

einunbjTOanjtg^ftC* 

2,000th 

II 

jtreitaufcnb^ftC* 

25th     „ 

filufunbsmansig^ftC. 

20,000th 

11 

3n?an5igtaufcnb*ftC» 

80th     „ 

brei^ig^ftc. 

100,000th 

II 

i^unberttaufcnb*ftc* 

35th     „ 

filntunbbrcigtg*ftC» 

500,000th 

II 

tilnff)unbcrttaujcnbftC 

40th     „ 

ticqig^tC. 

1,000,000th 

11 

miUion^ftC, 

45th     „ 

filntunb»icrjtg*fte» 

2,000,000th 

II 

jtt)eimittion*ftC, 

Rem.  1 .  The  forms  trtt^tC  and  ati^Ut  are  euphonic  variations  from  the  rule 
for  forming  ordinal  numbers. 

Rem.  2.  Ordinal  numbers  are  subject  to  all  the  laws  of  declension  of  ad- 
jectives. 

Rem.  3.  ^tftc  is  the  superlative  of  the  obsolete  adverb  tX  (§  92). 

Rem.  4.  All  the  ordinals  were  probably  originally  super latives^  formed  after 
the  analogj'  of  tt\tt* 

Rem.  5,  ^ttCttC  was  first  used  in  the  sixteenth  century.  Before  that  time 
bcr  dttbCCC  meant  the  second  of  any  number,  as  it  now  means  the  second  o^ 
iut  two. 

Rem.  6.  Since  the  Old-German  period,  the  termination  stC  or  sjtC  is  added 
only  to  the  last  one  of  compound  numbers. 

Rem.  7.  Examples  of  the  historic  development  of  ordinal  numbers : 


Gnthic:                  , 

anthar, 

thridja. 

saihsta, 

taihnnda, 

tvalfta. 

<  >/(l-  German :     eristo, 

andar. 

dritto, 

sebsto, 

zehanto. 

zweliftc^ 

Mid.-German:  erste. 

ander. 

dritte, 

sehste. 

zehende. 

zwelfte. 

New-German:   tX^t. 

onber. 

brittc. 

fcc^Ste. 

jc^ute. 

gwblfte. 

280 


NUMERALS. 


[§  103,  104. 


Gothic : 
Old- German: 
Middle-German , 
New- German: 


tTaig3*6sta, 

zweinzicosto, 
zweinzegoste, 


drizegeste, 
drizugosto, 
brei^igfle. 


fijorzugosto, 
vierzegeste, 

xnerjigftc. 


thusundgosta, 
dfisuntosto, 
tiisentste, 
t-.xufenbftc. 


§  103.  There  are  three  classes  of  Compound  Numeral 
Adjectives: 

1.  Distributives ^mdiic^tm^  how  many  at  a  time: 

3tDet  unb  StDCi,  je  iXOtX,  JU  %\om\\,     Two  at  a  time,  by  twos. 
3e^n  unb  ge^n,  je  yt^n,  ju  ge^nen,     Ten  at  a  time,  by  tens. 

2.  Dimidiatives,  indicating  the  whole  of  all  up  to  the 
number  mentioned,  with  a  half  of  that  number  : 


Slnbert^alb, 
S)ritte^alb, 
SBierte^alb, 
Pntte^alb, 

Rem.  1.  The  t  is  often  dropped 


One  and  a  half 
Two  and  a  half 
Three  and  a  half 
Four  and  a  half 


(one  and  a  half  of  the  second). 
(two  and  a  half  of  the  third). 
(three  and  a  half  of  the  fourth). 
(fom*  and  a  half  of  the  fifth). 


Rem.  2.  Dimidiatives  higher  than  btittl(|fllb  are  rarely  used. 
Rem.  3.  The  fuller  forms  Ctll  unb  Ctll  W^,  etc.,  are  also  used. 

2)ag  Suc^  !oftet  CtnCll  unb  etnen     The  cloth  costs  a  dollar  and  a  half 
l^alktt  skater  bic  @IIe,  a  yard. 

3.  Variatives^  indicating  of  how  many  kinds  : 
(Stner4et,  iXomX'lti,  Of  one  kind,  of  two  kinds. 

Rem.  1.  Since  the  Mid.- Germ,  period  the  syllable  let  has  been  attached  to 
the  numeral.  It  is  from  Lat.  lex,  Provengal  ley.  Middle- German  leige,  leie. 
Thus,  SnncrlCt  was  in  the  Middle- German  einer  leige,  einer  leie. 

Rem.  2.  Distributives^  Dimidiatives,  and  Variatives  are  indeclinable. 

Rem.  3.  Many  compound  adjectives  have  cardinal  or  ordinal  numbers  for 
the  first  or  modifying  component,  as  : 

(Sinfad^  or  einfcitttg,  simple.  3^^i^^Utig,  of  double  meaning. 

3tt)etfac^  or  stceifattig,  twofold.         ©rei^filnbig,  weighing  three  pounds, 
©tnfttmmtg,  unanimous.  (Singeboren,  only  begotten, 

©injci^rtg,  one  year  old.  ©rftgeboren,  first  bora. 

§  104.  Numeral  Nouns  are  of  two  kinds  : 

1.  Those  with  the  suffix  ^tX  or  Ain^  {masculine  nouns): 

Sin  ®  ret|3tgcr ,  ,  A  man  from  thirty  to  forty  years  old. 

Sin  Ureter,  A  three-pfennig  coin  (worth  about  a 

Pnfunbyed)jtger,  Wine  made  in  1865.  [cent). 

(Sin  3^ittil^3;  Ctll  2)riIiKna^  A  twin,  a  triplet. 


§  105,  106.]  THE   PRONOUN.  281 

2.  Those  with  the  suffix  ^tcl  {neuter  nouns),  as  : 

(Sin  2)1^1161  "ipfimb,  A  third  of  a  pound. 

(Sin  2ld;tel  2:^aler,  An  eighth  of  a  dollar. 

2)rci  3ld;tel  ^^^,  Three  eighths  of  an  inch. 

Rem.  1.  The  syllable  s(cl  is  an  abbreviation  of  ^^eil,  a />ar<.     Thus  25nt« 
tcl  is  abbreviated  from  2)nttl)cil  (for  2^ritttl)eil),  Middle- Germ  an  dritteil. 
Rem.  2.  "A  half'  is  rendered  by  the  noun  biC  ^iilftC,  usually  followed  by 

Uon;  or  by  the  adjective  Ijalb  (citt  ^ttltjcr,  ctuc  I)alt)c,  cin  I)aliic^): 

2)ic  ^alftc  l?on  ber  ®tabt,  A  half  of  the  city. 

@S  fcftct  cincn  ^albcn  X^alcr,  It  costs  half  a  dollar. 

Ohs.  When  before  neuter  names  of  cities  and  countries,  and  not  preceded 
by  an  article  or  a  pronoun,  \)^\h  (and  gflnj)  are  undeclined : 
§alb  33crUn,  ^alb  (ganj)  !2)eutjd;Ianb,    Half  Berlin,  half  (all)  Germany, 
(but)  bae  tjalbe  2)eutjc^(anb,  Half  Germany. 

§  105.  Numeral  Adverbs  are  of  two  kinds  : 

1.  Reiteratives,  formed  by  compounding  Cardinal  Num- 
hers  with  55lal,  a  time  : 

(Sinmal,  once.  3^^"^^^  twice.  ^t^ivmOiX,  ten  times. 

2.  Ordinal  Adverbs,  indicating  in  what  place  or  order: 

(Srj^cnS,  crftlid;,  or  Jiicrjl,  In  the  first  place,  firstly. 

3^citen§,  brittcnS,  etc.  In  the  second,  third  place,  etc. 

Rem.  The  form  erjl==cn^  (Middle- German  ersten),  etc.,  has  been  devel- 
oped in  the  New- German  period  by  adding  *§  to  the  genitive  singular,  after 
the  analogy  of  such  nouns  as  ^IdtttCtt^,  by  name  of. 


THE  PRONOUN. 
(Xa«  PrtDort) 
§  106.  Pronouns  are  divided  into  six  classes:  Personal, 
Possessive,  Demonstrative,  Indefinite,  Interrogative,  and 
Pelatiwe. 

Rem.  1.  All  the  Personal  Pronouns,  the  Demonstratives  bCt,  bicfcr,  jCllCr, 
the  Indefinite  Pronouns  attCt,  Uicl,  and  the  Intcrrogatives  tSStX,  ttJa^,  are 
primitive  words.     All  other  pronouns  are  derivatives  or  compounds. 

Rem.  2.  The  pronouns  are  much  simpler  in  declension  as  well  as  fewer  in 
number  in  the  New-German  than  they  were  in  the  Old  and  Middle- German. 

Rem.  3.  Pronouns,  from  their  constant  and  universal  use,  have  great  fixed- 
ness of  form,  and  therefore  they  are  of  great  value  in  tracing  the  relationship 
of  alliefl  languages  (§  28-30,  and  §  99,  Rem.  3). 


282 


THE    PRONOUN. 


[§  107. 


1.  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 
§  107.  The  Personal  Pronouns  are  declined  as  follows 


FIRST   PERSON. 

SECOND   PERSON.                                [ 

Singular. 

Singular. 

Norn,  i^,          I. 

bu, 

thou.            (@ie,      you.) 

Gen.  rnciuer,  ofme,  eic* 

bcincr 

,  of  thee,  etc.  (3^nen,  of  you,  etc.) 

Dat.   mx,       tome,  eic* 

bir, 

to  thee,  etc.  (S^nen,  to  you,  etc.) 

Ace.    m\^,      me. 

mr 

thee.             (@te,      you.) 

Plural. 

Plural. 

Nom.  toir,        we. 

i^r, 

you.              (®ic,      you.) 

Gen.  Unfcr,     of  us,  etc.* 

cuer, 

of  you,  e^c.  (3^i^cr,  ofyou,  e<c.) 

Dat.  un^,       to  us,  etc. 

eu(5, 

to  you,  etc.  (3^nen,  to  you,  etc.) 

Ace.  un0,        us. 

CU(^, 

you.              (@ic,      you.) 

THIRD   PERSON. 

Singu 

lar. 

Plural. 

Nom.  Cr,           he.               flC, 

she. 

C^,        it. 

ftC,       they. 

Gen.  fctncr,    of  him.*     t^re 

r,  of  her. 

fctner,  of  it. 

t^rcr,  of  them. 

Dat.  i^m,        to  him.        \\)X, 

to  her. 

i^m,    to  it. 

t^ncn,  to  them. 

Ace.  \\iUf        him.            fie, 

her. 

C^,        it. 

fiC,       them. 

Rem.  1 .  The  old  genitive  forms  IllCilt,  bClll,  \t\Vi,  are  now  obsolete,  except 
in  poetry  and  in  some  expressions : 

SBergt^  mcin  nic^t,  Forget  me  not. 

Rem.  2.  The  genitive  of  the  personal  pronoun  and  the  prepositions  l^alfiCtt, 
tDtgCn,  tUtficn,  are  often  united  into  one  word,  t  or  tt  being  added  as  letters 
of  union : 

9JZetnettt»egen  or  metnet^atbcn,  On  my  account. 

Rem.  3.  The  genitive  plural  of  the  personal  pronoun  is  only  used  when  all 
of  the  persons  alluded  to  are  included ;  the  partitive  genitive  is  expressed  by 
UOIl  with  the  dative: 

@g  traren  unfer  5h)blf ,  There  were  twelve  of  us. 

(3h>i)If  toon  un§  gincjen),  (Twelve  of  us  went). 

Rem.  4.  Besides  using  bu  in  addressing  Deity,  the  Germans  employ  bU  and 
t^r  in  speaking  to  near  relatives  or  very  dear  friends,  and  also  to  servants  or 
children. 

Rem.  5.  The  use  of  the  form  of  the  third  person  plural,  ©ic  (beginning  with 
a  capital  letter),  for  the  second  person  of  both  numbers,  was  introduced  into 
the  German  language  in  the  eighteenth  century.  The  use  of  this,  as  the  form 
of  address,  has  been  constantly  increasing  since  that  time, 

*  For  the  use  of  the  cases,  see  §  8 1  -83. 


§108,109.] 


POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS. 


283 


Rem.  G.  The  nominative  neuter  t§  is  used  for  the  expletives  t7,  there^  and 
for  w.     Thus  used,  t^  does  not  control  the  number  or  person  of  the  verb 
(S9  War  ein  3Jiann,  There  was  a  man. 

SS  ftnb  oielc  I'cutc,  bic —  There  are  many  people  who — 

2Ber  ift  c«  ?  3d;  bin's,  Who  is  it  ?    It  is  I. 

®cib  aujrid;tig  I  2Sir  futb  C3,  Be  honest !  We  are  (so). 

Rem.  7.  To  prevent  unpleasantness  of  sound  or  ambiguity  of  meaning,  tXf 
flC,  C^  are  often  replaced  by  bCrfClDc,  bicfclbc,  boffclbc: 

(gobalb  bic  SJJuttcr  iljrc  2:od;tcr    As  soon  as  the   mother  saw  her 
fa^>,  fragte  fie  btcfttbt,  daughter,  she  asked  her. 

§  108.  When  the  personal  pronouns  are  used  reflex- 
ively  or  recij)rocally.)  the  regular  forms  are  employed  in 
t\\e  first  and  second  persons.  But  in  the  third  person 
fid)  is  employed  in  the  dative  and  accusative  of  all  gen- 
ders and  in  both  numbers  : 


3d;  erinncrc  mid;  baran, 
2)a8  »crftc^t  fic^, 

©ie  tocrflc^eu  fid;, 

©rinncrn  (Sie  fic^  ? 


I  remember  it. 

That  is  a  matter  of  course. 
(They  understand  themselves,  or 
(They  understand  each  other. 

Do  you  remember  ? 


Ran.  1.  To  avoid  ambiguity,  tittanbtt  may  be  used  in  reciprocal  expres- 
sions, either  with  or  without  the  reflexive  pronoun : 

SSir  tcrftet;en  cinanber,  or   >  iir        i     .     i         i 

£„,.    ^    I  /  o    •       w      r  We  understand  ourselves. 

SSir  tcrfte^cn  unS  einanbcr,  S 

Rein.  2.  When  mijself.,  himself.,  etc.,  are  only  emphatic  repetitions  of  the 
nominative,  they  are  translated  by  fclbft  or  fcIDct  I 

Sr  tbat  C8  fclbjl,  He  did  it  himself. 

Qx  jclbcr  fann  c§  ttjun.  He  can  do  it  himself. 

Rem.  3.  Sclbft  (or  fclbct)  is  often  translated  by  the  adverb  even  : 

©clbft  jeine  gcinbc  ad;tcn  i^n,  Even  his  enemies  respect 


2.  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 
(©cfi^anscigcnbc  prtoiirtcrO 
§  109.  The  following  are  the  Possessive  Pronouns : 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

mcin, 

mcin*c, 

mcin. 

mv. 

unfcr. 

unfcr*c. 

iinfcr, 

our. 

bein, 

bein«c. 

bcin, 

thy. 

cucr, 

eur*c. 

cucr. 

your. 

fcin, 

fcin»c. 

fcin. 

his. 

ibr, 

i^r*c. 

i^r. 

their. 

ibr. 

ibt-e. 

ibr. 

her. 

(3^r, 

3^r-e, 

3^r, 

your) 

fcin. 

fcin^c. 

fcin. 

its. 

284 


THE    PRONOUN. 


[§110,111. 


The  Possessive  Pronouns  are  declined  in  the  singular 
like  the  indefinite  article  cttl  (§  54),  and  in  the  plural 
like  adjectives  of  the  Old  Declension  (§  88.     8ee  also 

Lesson  XIX.,2). 

Rem.  1.  In  declining  ItUfCt/  C  is  sometimes  dropped  from  the  terminations 

sc^,  'tm,  =cn* 

In  declining  tVitXf  the  t  after  CU  is  usually  dropped  {see  Less.  XIX.  ^  3). 

Rem.  2.  As  they  are  used  only  adjectively,  possessive  pronouns  agree,  like 
all  other  adjectives,  with  the  noun  to  which  they  belong  (i.  e. ,  the  noun  pos- 
sessed), in  gender,  case,  and  number. 

Rem.  3.  In  the  German,  as  well  as  in  all  other  Teutonic  (and  also  in  the 
Latin  and  Greek)  languages,  the  Possessive  Pronouns  are  formed  from  the 
genitive  case  of  Personal  Pronouns. 

§  110.  There  are  three  ways  of  rendering  into  Ger- 
man the  Absolute  Possessive  Pronouns  (as  mine,  thine,  ours, 
yours,  etc.) : 


tnetner,  meinc,  metneS, 

ber,  bte,  bag  9JJetmgc, 

ber  aJletnc, 

mine. 

beiner,    bcinc,    beine6, 

„      „      „    2)etmge, 

„  S)einc, 

thine. 

feiuer,     jeine,     jetneg, 

„      „      „    ©etntge, 

„  ©eine, 

his. 

i^rer,      i^re,      i^reS, 

n       n        n     ^WWt 

n  S^rc, 

hers. 

feiner,     jetne,     fcineg, 

„      „      „    ©etntge, 

„  @etnc, 

its. 

unferer,  unfere,  unjereS, 

„      „      „    Uttfrtgc, 

„  Unfere, 

ours. 

curer      eiire,     eureS, 

„      „      „    eurige, 

„  (Sure, 

yours. 

SWx,    3(;re,    3^reg, 

f/      11      n    3^rige, 

„  -S^re, 

yours. 

il;rer,      t^re,      t^reS, 

n      n      It    -S^nge, 

,f  Sfjre, 

theirs. 

Re7n.  1.  Tltinttf  Seiner,  e^c.  (in  the  first  form),  are  declined  like  adjectives 
of  the  Old  Declension. 

Rem.  2.  2)er  SDletntge,  ber  Wtxnt,  etc.  (of  the  second  and  third  forms),  are 
declined  like  adjectives  of  the  New  Declension  (see  Less.  XLL). 

Rem.  3.  ^tX  SJletlttge,  Settltge,  etc.  (of  the  second  form),  are  frequently 
used,  not  as  referring  to  nouns  already  spoken  of,  but  having  certain  conven- 
tional meanings : 

2)ie  aJieinigen  laff en  ftc^  3^nen  unb    My  family  send  their  compliments 

ben  3^rtgen  etn^fe^Ien,  to  yourself  and  your  family. 

(Sr  ^at  bag  ©etnige  get^an,  He  has  done  his  part. 


3.  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

(|)titU)etfenbe  ^iirtoorter*) 
§  111.  There  are  nine  Demonstrative  Pronouns.     They 
may  all  be  used  either  substantively  or  adjectively. 


§111J 


DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


285 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAf,. 

Masculine.     Feminine.     Neuter. 

All  Genders. 

biefcr,          bicfc,          bicfcS, 

this. 

bicfc,           these. 

jcncr,           jcnc,           jcncS, 

that. 

jenc,           those. 

bcr,              bic,            baS, 

that. 

bic,             those. 

bcrjcnigc,      biejcnigc,     baSjcnigc, 

that. 

bicjenigcn,  those. 

bcrfclbc,        bicfclbe,       baffelbc. 

the  same. 

biefelbeu,     the  same. 

fammttic^cr,  fdmmtlid;c,  fammtlic^cS, 

entire. 

fdmratlic^c,  all. 

jcbcr,           jebc,           jebcS, 

every. 

jo(d;er,          \o\6.}t,         fotd;e6, 

such. 

fold^e,         such. 

allcr,            allc,            atteS, 

all. 

atte,            aU. 

1.  Siefer,  jcncr,  fiimmtlit^cr,  jcbcr,  folc^cr,  and  aUcr  fol- 
low the  old  declension  of  adjectives  (see  page  149). 

2.  ^cr  is  usually  translated  by  that,  though  it  some^ 
times  is  rendered  by  this  : 

Rem.  1.  The  relative  bcr  and  the  definite  article  bCt  are  but  the  demon- 
Btrative  pronoun  bCr,  with  modified  meanings : 

^tl  ift'«  bcm  W^  terfpod;en  ^abc,   It  is  this  one  to  whom  I  have  prom- 
unb  bcr  it>iU  c8  ^abcn,  ised  it,  and  that  one  wishes  to 

have  it. 
Rem.  2.  Used  as  a  demonstrative  pronoun,  bcr  receives  a  /«//,  strong  em- 
phasis ;   as  a  relative,  a  medium  emphasis ;  as  a  definite  article,  no  emphasis. 
Rem.  3,  3cr,  used  adjectively,  is  declined  like  the  definite  article  (§  54); 
used  substantively,  it  is  declined  as  follows ; 


BENGUT.AR. 

PLURAL. 

Masculine.              Feminine.          Neuter. 

Nom.  bcr,             bic,             bo^. 

Gen.   bcffcn,              bCtCH,               bcffctl, 

Uat.  bent,            bcr,             bcm, 
Ace.  bctt.             bic.              ha^. 

All  Genders. 

bic, 
bcrcr, 
bcncn, 
bic. 

3.  Both  parts  of  bcrjctttgc  (compounded  from  bcr  and 
jcncr)  are  declined,  the  latter  part  following  the  new 
declension  of  adjectives   see  Less.  XLIIL). 

4.  Both  parts  also  of  bcrfclbc  (bcr  and  fclbc)  are  de- 
clined  (see  Less.  XLIII.). 

Rfm.  '^tT  9{antItt^C  (the   same)  is   more   emphatic  than  bcrfcltc,  and 
dlCnberfcUlC  0"*^  <^<^  same)  is  still  more  emphatic  than  either. 


28G 


THE    PRONOUN. 


[§  112. 


5.  For  3cbcr,  the  forms  jeglt^Ct  and  jcbtocbct  are 
sometimes  used.  All  three  are  employed  in  the  sin* 
gular  only. 

6.  <Bol^tt  usually  follows  the  article.  When  it  pre- 
cedes the  article,  it  drops  its  termination : 

/-  fi        cm    fi     f-  Such  a  man. 

7.  Before  the  definite  article  or  a  pronoun,  all  drops 
its  termination,  especially  if  it  does  not  receive  an 
emphasis: 

SSaS  jott  all  ber  ©d^merj?  What  means  all  this  sorrow? 

(gr  toei^  toon  all  bem  SfZid^tS,  He  knows  nothing  of  it  all. 

Bern.  1.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  have  heen  developed  thus: 


Gothic:        sa,    so,  thata. 
Old-Ger.:    der,  diu,daz. 
Mid.-Ger. :  der,  die,  daz. 
New-Ger.!  ber,  bic,  ba8. 

Gothic:         

Old-Ger.:     

Mid.-Ger. :  (der  jener). 
New-Ger. :  berjtenige. 


(Gen.)  thizuh, ,  thizuh.  Ijains,  jaina,  jainata. 

deser,  deisu,  ditzi.     |  jener,  genu,  genaz. 

diser,  disiu,  ditze.     jener,  jeniu,jenez. 

biefcr,  biefe,  biefeg,  I  jener,  jene,  jene?. 


der  selpo, 
der  selbe, 
berfelbe. 


svaleiks, 

aUs, 

solihher. 

aller, 

solicher, 

aller, 

folc^er. 

otter. 

4.  INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 
(Unticfttttittite  prtoiirtcr.) 
§  112.  Some  Indefinite  Pronouns  can  be  used  both  sub- 
stantively and  adjectively ;  others  can  be  used  only  as 
substantives. 


As  substantives  or  adjectives. 
9lnber=er,  other. 
(Stnicj^er,  some,  any,  a  few. 
etlid).er,     "       "       " 
2)?and;*cr,  many  a  (pi  many). 
Tld)Xtx<,  pi.  several 
^ein^er,  no,  not  any,  Aot  any  one. 
2SteI»er,  much  (pi.  many). 
SBenig^er,  little  (pi.  few), 
©enufl,  enough. 


Only  as  substantives. 
'3Ran  (they,  people,  etc.). 
3etnanb,  somebody,  any  body. 
iRientanb,  nobody,  not  any  body, 
^ebermann,  every  body. 
(Sttr)a§,  something,  any  thing. 
3Bag,  "  " 

^f^td^tg,  nothing,  not  any  thing. 
2Belc^e  (p/.),  some. 


§  112.]  INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS.  287 

1.  ^(nbcrc,  -t,  =C§  (contracted  atlbrcr,  't,  =C§),  may  be 
used  in  all  the  three  declensions  of  adjectives. 

Hem.  1.  9lnbCr  and  Ctll  may  be  joined  into  one  indeclinable  word,  Ctnait^ 
bcr,  each  other  (.see  §  108,  Rem.  1). 

Rem.  2.  The  German  attbCt  {Gothic  anthar,  Old-Ger.  andar,  Mid.-Ger. 
nnder),  the  English  other,  and  the  Latin  alter ,  are  all  comparatives,  from  a 
positive  which  is  now  found  only  in  Sanscrit  (anya,  not  the  same). 

2.  (Sinigcr,  ctlirfjcr,  mc^rcrc,  and  tocl(l)c,  follow  the  old 

declension  of  adjectives. 

Rem.  1.  GiniOsCr  {Old-Ger.,  einie;  compare  English  any;  formed  from 
Cin,  one)  disappeared  during  the  Mid.-Ger.,  but  reappeared  in  the  New-Ger. 

Rem.  2.  Gtli^sCr  (0/(/-6?er.etalih;  Mid.-Ger.  etelih)  is  compounded  from 
ilie  obscure  root  eta,  and  lih,  like. 

Rejn.S.  yjlail^'tx {Goth.,  manags;  0.-6^.,manag  ;  M.-G.,  maneg ;  Enfj., 
many ;  alliec'  to  Old  Slavic  mnog,  much,  but  of  obscure  origin,  and  i)robably 
derived  from  SWantl),  when  not  emphasized,  or  when  used  before  CiU^does  not 
take  the  terramation : 

Tlan6}  ta^frcr  §ctbl  Many  a  brave  hero! 

Retn.  4.  SWc^rCrC  {plur.),  a  double  comparative  (from  mC^r),  is  used  by 
■ome  writers  also  in  the  singular. 

3.  ^Cin,  used  as  an  adjective,  is  declined  like  tticilt 
{Less.  XIX.^  2) ;  used  substantively,  it  is  declined  like 
an  adjective  of  the  Old  Declension  (fcin=cr,  =C,  ^e^). 

Rem.  ^cin  {O.-G.,  nih-ein  ;  M.-G.,  nechein,  nekein,  enkein,  chein,  kein) 
meant  originally  nit^t  Cill. 

4.  33icl  and  tDCnig  are  not  declined  when  they  refer  to 
individuals  collectively ;  referring  to  individuals  taken 
separately .,  and  especially  if,  used  substantively,  they 
refer  to  persons,  they  are  declined  like  adjectives  of 
the  Old  Declension. 

Rem.  1.  55iCl  and  tOttlig  are  also  used  adverbially. 

Rem  2.  33icl  {Goth.,  filu ;  O.-G.,  filu,  vil ;  Jf.-G^.,  vil,  viel)  is  allied  to 
the  Greek  -itoXvq  and  the  Latin  plus. 

Rem.^.  ©cnig  {O.-G.,  wenag ;  M.-G.,  w6nec)  is  from  UJCinCH,  to  weep^ 
M'.d  meant  originally  what  causes  sorrow,  unfortunate,  small. 


288  THE   PRONOUN.  [§  112. 

6.  ®cnU9  is  used  as  a  substantive,  an  adjective,  or  an 

adverb. 

3f<^  WBe  gcnug  gejel^cn,  I  have  seen  enough. 

(Sr  \}at  md)t  %ud}  genug,  He  has  not  enough  cloth. 

2)ag  Xn6)  ift  breit  genug,  The  cloth  is  wide  enough. 

Rem.  1.  As  an  adjective  or  adverb,  it  follows  the  modified  word. 

Eem.  2.  ©CHUg  (Goth.,  ganohs  ;   O.-G.,  kinuoc  ;  M.-G.,  genuoc)  is,  liksJ 
the  English  enough,  from  ga-nahan,  to  suffice. 

6.  9Jlan  is  used  only  in  the  nominative  singular  {see 
Lesson  XLII). 

Rem.  SJJail  is  from  311(11111,  man  (compare  with  French  on,  from  Lat.  homo'). 

7. 3emanb,  9Wcmanb,  and  ^cbermann  are  used  only  in 

the  singular.     They  are  declined  thus  : 


No7n.  3emanb, 

Gen.  3emanb*^,  or  3emanb*e^, 
Dat.  3entanb,  or  3enianb*cm, 
Ace.   ^emanb,     or  5cmanb*en* 


5^teinanby  ^ebcnnann, 

9^ienianb*g,  or  *c^,  S^ebermanusg, 

S^temanb,    or  *cm,  ^ebermann, 

9^temanb,    or  ^tVi*  5febermann. 

Rem.  1.  ;3iCni(Ittb  (O.-G.,  eoraan,  iaman,  ieman ;  M.-G.  ieman,  imande)  1« 
compounded  of  jc,  ever,  and  SJJaitn* 

Re?n.  2.  ^ItCIUHnb  (O.-G.,  neoman,  niamen,  niemand ;  M.-G.,  nieman)  Is 
compounded  of  ni-eoman  (not  any  man). 

Rem.  3.  ^Cbcrmatin  first  appeared  in  the  M.-G.  (ieder  man,  jeber  9JZann). 

8.  Kttua§  is  indeclinable.     (Lesson  XLII,  1,  Bern.  4.) 

Rem.  I.  (5ttt)(l§  is  often  used  in  apposition  with  a  noun: 

SBoIlen  @te  tttoa§  S3rob  ?  Do  you  wish  some  bread? 

Rem.  2.  (BttOd^  is  often  used  adverbially,  meaning  somewhat: 
(Sr  Xoax  tttoa^  aufgeregt,  He  was  somewhat  excited. 

Rejn.  3.  ^ttoa^  is  formed  from  ttJaS  and  the  root  Sta  (§  112,  2,  Rem.  2). 

9.  9H^t§  is  indeclinable. 

Re7n.  y^iic^t^;  originally  a  genitive  of  tttC^t,  first  appeared  in  the  1 5th  cent. 

10.  The  nominative  and  accusative  cases  of  locl^er 
are  sometimes  used  in  familiar  language,  meaning  some : 

3(^  ^abc  nod;  tt)elc^e§,  I  have  some  yet. 

^ci)  babe  tretc^e  geje^en,  I  have  seen  some. 

Rem.  '$Sit\^ttf  when  thus  used  in  a  contraction  of  the  antiquated  pronoun 

ettoel(^er. 


§113.]  INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS.  289 

6.  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

§  113.  There  are  three  Interrogative  Pronouns: 
ttcr?  who?     toaS?  what?     toclt^cr?  which?  what? 

1.  2Bcr  and  toc^  are  used  only  substantively:  tilcr  re- 
fers only  to  persons;  toa§  only  to  things.  They  are 
thus  declined: 


too^  ?  what? 
tocffcn?*(ttc^?o6s.) 

toag?  what? 


Norn.  tPCr?       who? 
Gen.  UJCffCn  ?  whose?  of  whom?  etc* 
Dat.   U)Cnt?     to  whom?  efc* 
Ace.   UJCn?      whom?* 
Rem.  1.  The  antiquated  genitive  lot^  is  still  used  in  some  compound  words : 

SSc^njcgen?  weji^alb?  On  what  account? 

Rem.  2.  SBfl'S  can  not  be  used  after  prepositions  (except  Olftllt,  tOtbcr,  and 
cometimes  uni)»  In  its  stead  is  used  the  adverb  tOO,  where,  compounded 
with  the  preposition  into  one  word,  a«;  ttJOmit,  ttJOUOH,  ttJOJU,  tOOburd). 

1.  The  original  t  of  tOO  (.Gothic,  huar;   Old-Ger.,  huar;    Mid.-Ger., 

war;  New-Ger.,  tDO)  is  yet  retained  when  the  preposition  begins 

with  a  vowel,  as:  toortn,  loorau^,  looran* 

2.  The  original  a  also  is  retained  in  loaritnt  (Mid.-Ger.j  war  umbe). 
Rem.  3.  SStt^  is  sometimes  used  for  toatUItt  I 

SBaS  jittevn  @ie  bcnn?  WTiy  do  you  tremble? 

Rem.  4.  3Bcr  and  ttaS  have  been  developed  thus  : 

Gothic,  hvas,  hvo,  hva ;    Old-Ger.,  hwer,  hwiu,  hwaz  ;  Mid.-Ger.,  wer, 
was;  New-Ger.,  tOCt,  ttfl^. 

2.  ^el(^er,  -t,  =C^,  used  both  adjectively  and  substan- 
tively, is  declined  like  an  adjective  of  the  Old  Declen- 
sion.    It  may  refer  to  persons  or  things. 

Rem.  1.  When  tOClt^Ct  is  followed  by  till,  the  ending  tX  is  dropped. 

SSelc^  ciii  SRicfc  I  What  a  giant ! 

Rem.  2.  SS^dd^Ct  was  originally  a  compound  word  :  Gothic,  hveleiks,  "what 
like;"  Old-Ger.,  hwiolihher;  Mid.-Ger.,  welher;  New-Ger.,  fiJClt^Cr. 

3.  SSo§  fiir?  i^whxit  hind  off)  maybe  treated  as  an  un- 
combined  indeclinable  pronoun,  referring  to  both  per- 
sons and  things : 

SBa^  filr  2)tnte  ^aben  ®ic  ?  What  kind  of  ink  have  you  ? 

W\i  roa^  fiir  2)inte  ?  With  what  kind  of  ink  ? 

•  For  the  use  of  the  cases,  see  §  81-83. 

N 


290  PRONOUNS.  [§1U 

Rem.  1 .  When  the  particular  individual  is  referred  to,  Cttt  is  added : 
9©a^  fiir  Cin  aJJann  i[t  er  ?  What  kind  of  a  man  is  he? 

Rem.  2.  (gin,  if  used  substantively,  follows  the  Old  Declension  (tlttCt): 
SSaS  fiir  Cincr  ?  What  kind  of  a  one? 

Rem.  3.  The  vi^ords  loa^ — fiit  are  sometimes  separated: 
2Bag  ift  oas  fiir  einc  2:^or^ett  I       What  a  folly  that  is! 


6.  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS, 
(^cjiigltt^e  prtoiirtcrO 
§  114.  There   are  no  primitive  Relative  Pronouns ; 
but  with  the  power  of  Relative  Pronouns  {i.e.  as  relat- 
ing to  antecedent  substantives)  are  employed: 

1.  The  Interrogative  Pronouns,  tOCI,  tttt^^and  tOtl^tt  ] 

2.  The  Demonstrative  Pronoun,  bCt* 

1.  The  same  laws  that  govern  the  use  of  tocr  and  toaS 
as  Interrogatives,  apply  to  them  when  they  are  employ- 
ed as  Relative  Pronouns. 

Rem.  1 .  l©tr  and  ttJtt^,  as  relatives,  can  be  used  only  in  general  or  indefi- 
nite expressions,  never  when  a  particular  person  or  thing  is  referred  to : 
SBcr  nic^t  ^i3ren  XoxU,  tnu^  fii^Ien     "Who  will  not  hear,  must  feel." 

(or  ber  mu^  filbten), 
JBa^  t»U  ^eute  tl;un  !annft,  ter*     What  you  can  do  to-day,  put  not  of! 
fd^iebe  nic^t  auf  2JZorgen  (or  ^(ii       till  to-morrow. 
toerfci^ieBc  nid;t  auf  3)?orgen), 
Rem.  2.  The  antecedent  of  ttJCt  or  tt)(l§,  when  in  the  same  case  as  the  rel- 
ative, is  thus  often  omitted. 

2.  Euphony  alone  determines  whether  tDCl^Ct  or  bcr 
should  be  used,  except  in  the  three  following  cases : 

1.  When  the  relative  is  used  adjectively,  ttlCl(!^tr  must  be  employed: 
®5t^C,  ttlClt^CS    gro^en    2)t(^ter9     Gothe,  with   the    works   of  which 

2Ber!e  tc^  fenne,  great  poet  I  am  acquainted. 

2.  When  the  genitive  of  the  relative  is  used  substantively,  the  genitive 
of  bCr  {sing.  bCffen,  bcrcn,  t^tWt^Xfplur.  bercn)  must  be  employed: 

2)er  3)Jann,bCff Cn  @o^n  fo  !ran!tft,    The  man,  whose  son  is  so  sick. 

3.  After  personal  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  person,  bCf  must  be  em- 
ployed (§  115,  3, /2em.  3) : 

3d),  bcr  (or/e7?i.  blC)  t^n  fa^,        I  who  saw  him. 

3.  The  antiquated  relative  fo  is  now  used  only  in 
poetry  or  other  dignified  styles  of  composition. 


§  115.1 


SYNTAX  OP  THE  PRONOUN. 


291 


4.  Antecedent  and  relative  pronouns  are  used  cor- 
relatively  as  follows : 


Antecedent. 


oer 

bcr 

berjcnigc .  . 
bcrjcnigc  .  . 
ictcr  .... 
Relative. 
trcr  .... 
tt>a«  .... 


he-who,  the  one-who,  that-which. 


every  (one)  who  (or  which). 

whoever  (or  who), 
whatever  (or  what). 


Re7n.  The  following  neuter  indefinite  pronouns  and  demonstratives  used 
indefinitely,  CtttO^,  ni(^t^,  UtClC^,  UJCnigC^,  IWan^t^,  tJa«(,  baifjCniflC,  are 
followed  by  the  relative  tDH^  I 

5tUc«  tta^  ic^  t?abc,  All  that  I  have. 

3)a8  i[t  ctWaS,  toa^  i^  n\6ft  bcr*    That  is  something  that  I  do  not  un^ 
jic^e,  derstand. 


7.  SYNTAX  OF  THE  PRONOUN. 
(Stjntaj  bc^  pmottc^.) 
§115.    1.  Personal  pronouns   take   the   person,  the 
number,  and  the  grammatical  gender  of  the  nouns  for 
which  they  stand. 

2.  Adjective  pronouns  follow  the  laws  of  syntax  that 
govern  adjectives  (§  94). 

3.  Relative  pronouns  take  the  gender  and  number  of 
the  antecedent. 

Tlein.  1.  The  relative  pronoun  can  never  be  omitted: 

3)cr  ^Kann,  bcn  ic^  flcftcrn  fa^,         The  man  I  saw  yesterday. 
Ram.  2.  (5S  used  expletively,  and  \^a^  and  btC^  used  in  a  collective  sense 
-ee  Less.  XLIII.,  4),  do  not  control  the  number  or  person  of  the  verb: 
(SS  finb  *it\\\z,  tic —  There  are  people  that — 

2)06  fmb  3)inge,  bic —  Those  are  things  that — 

Rem.  3.  The  personal  pronoun,  if  in  the  first  or  second  person,  is  usually 
repeated  after  the  relative : 

S)a§  njiffcn  trir,  btC  tttr  bie  ®cm«    That  know  we,  who  the  chamois 

fen  jagcn  (Sd».),  hunt. 

3t>r,  bic  i!)r   ^ricv^  fil^ret   gegcn    You,  who  make  war   against   mj 
meincn  '2o()ii  C®d?.)»  »on. 


292  THE  VERB.  [§  116-118. 


THE  VERB. 

(2)a^  Bcittoort) 
§  116.  VerUs  may  be  classified  in  several  ways: 

1.  By  derivation  into  prhnitive,  derivative,  and  compound. 

2.  By  use  "    independent,  auxiliary,  and  potential. 

3.  By  meaning       ' '    transitive  and  intransitive. 

4.  By  inflection      ' '    regular,  irregular,  and  defective. 

§  117.  Classification  of  Verbs  by  their  derivation: 

1.  Primitive  or  radical  Verbs  are  such  as  can  be 
traced  for  their  origin  to  no  other  radical  words : 

|)a^*en,  to  have.  ^rinf^en,  to  drink.  Sat^^en,  to  laugh 

Rem.  The  constancy  of  their  use  gives  many  primitive  verbs  a  fixedness  of 
form  that  is  of  great  value  in  tracing  the  relationship  of  languages  (§  28-30). 

2.  Derivative  Verbs  are  formed  from  verbs,  nouns,  or 
adjectives,  the  radical  vowel  usually  taking  the  i^m- 
lautf  when  capable  of  it : 

Sa^el=n,  to  smile    (from  \a^itn,to  laugh). 
SBcittttsen,  to  warm  (fiom  toaritl,  warm). 

^^fliigsen,  to  plow    (from  ^<)5flu8,  plow). 

3.  Comjpound  Verhs  are  formed  by  prefixing  to  a  verb 
a  preposition  (separable  or  inseparable),  a  noun,  an  ad- 
jective, or  an  adverb: 

5lu^5ge6en,  to  go  out.  I  ^w^^c^oS^tn,   to  l^ndle.  I  ^^ortsge^en,  to 
©rsfinben,   to  invent.    |  %n\A''pXt^iX[,  to  acquit.     |       go  forth. 

§  118.  Classification  of  Verbs  as  to  their  use i 

1.  Independent  Verbs  can  be  used  without  other  verbs : 

er  la^  bag  S3urf?,  He  read  the  book. 

2.  Auxiliary  Verbs  include  the  three  (fctll,  ^C^Ctl,  tiJCt- 
bcn)  that  are  employed  in  forming  the  compound  tenses 
of  all  verbs: 

®r  liat  ba§  5Bud^  getefen,  He  has  read  the  book. 

Sffiir  tocrbcn  baS  ^iic!^  lefen,         W^e  will  read  the  book. 
Rem.  They  may  also  be  used  as  independent  verbs. 
Sr  %^X  bag  S3uc^,  He  has  the  book. 


§119-123.]  CLASSIFICATION   OP  VERBS.  293 

3.  Potential  Verbs  (fottcn,  tooflcH,  fbnncH,  mbgcH,  biirfcH, 
miiffcn)  are  employed  to  limit  or  qualify  the  meaning 
of  the  infinitive  of  independent  verbs  : 

Sr  mu^  bag  33u(^  lefen,        He  must  read  the  book. 

Rem.  SajfCtt  is  also  often  used  as  apotentiai  verb. 

§  119.  Classification  of  Verbs  by  their  meaning: 

1.  Verbs  which  govern  an  object  in  the  accusative 
case  are  called  Transitive  by  German  grammarians  : 

@r  Ucft  baS  Su(^,  He  is  reading  the  book. 

2.  Other  verbs  are  called  Intransitive  : 

1.  Some  intransitive  verbs  govern  no  object : 

(5r  fc^laft,  Iviuft,  gcfjt,  He  sleeps,  nms,  goes. 

2.  Others  govern  an  object  in  the  genitive  or  dative  case : 
©ie  f^cttcn  ntCtncr,  ^ring  !    You  deride  me,  prince ! 
(gr  folijt  fcincm  ^rutJcr,        He  follows  his  brother. 

§  120,  When  the  subject  and  object  of  the  verb  denote  the  same  person  of 
thing,  the  verb  is  termed  reflexive : 

^i^  bcftcifetge  VOX^—  I  apply  myself— 

Rem.  When  the  action  is  mutual  between  the  individuals  that  form  the 
subject  of  the  verb,  the  verb  is  termed  reciprocal : 

©lit  fd^meid^eln  Cinanbcrf      They  flatter  each  other. 


1.  CONJUGATION. 

(^onjuQotion.) 

§  121.  The  Accidents  of  the  Verb  are  (as  in  EngMsh) 

Moods,  Tenses,  Persons,  Numhers,  Particij^les,  and  Voices. 

1.  Moods  (3Wobi). 

§  122.  The  German  Verb  has  five  Moods;  the  Indicor 

t'lve,  Subjunctive,  Conditional,  Imperative,  and  Infinitive. 

Rem.  The  Potential  Mood  in  EngUsh  is  translated  into  German  partly  by 
the  potential  verbs,  and  partly  by  the  subjunctive  and  conditional  moods. 

§  123.  The  Indicative  Mood  is  used  in  expressing  or  de- 
nying that  which  is  conceived  by  the  speaJcer  to  be  certain  : 
6r  \^tii  bae  ^au8  bertauft,     He  has  sold  the  house. 
Rem.  The  indicative  may  be  used  in  some  conditional  sentences  where  in 
I "iiglish  the  subjunctive  would  be  employed : 

3ift  cr  reid^,  fo  fann  cr  ttct  gcbcn,    If  he  be  rich,  be  can  give  much. 


294  CONJUGATION.  [§124,125. 

Rem.  2.  The  present  indicative  may  be  used ybr  the  imperative  m  express^ 
ing  a  command  which  is  conceived  as  ah'eady  carried  into  execution : 

2)u  ilbernimmft  bte  f^anif^en  9ie*    Take  charge  of  the  Spanish  reg> 
gimenter  (@c^.)^  ments. 

§  124.  The  Subjunctive  Mood  is  employed: 

1.  In  repeating  statements  of  other  ^persons,  without 
vouching  for  their  accuracy,  or  about  which  there  may 
be  some  doubt  in  the  mind  of  the  speaker : 

(gr  fagte,  ba^  bie  Slrmec  fc^on  in    He  said  that  the  army  is  already 

SSettjegung  fct,  in  motion. 

2J2an  fagt,  er  fci  geftorben,  It  is  said  that  he  is  dead. 

2.  In  indirect  questions,  treated  as  quotations: 

3d;  fragte  tfjn  ttjann  er  nac^  33er*    I  asked  him  when  he  will  go  to 
lin  ge^en  tocrbc,  Berlin. 

3.  In  expressing  what  is  problematical,  hypothetical, 
desired,  or  what  is  conceived  of  as  possible,  without 
having  really  transpired: 

^iirc  er  bod^  gefunb  I  Oh !  that  he  were  well! 

SJlb^tC  er  genefen  I  Oh!  that  he  might  recover! 

^&j  tDiinfc^te,  ba^  er  fame,  I  wished  that  he  might  come. 

Revi.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  thus  often  used  in  subordinate  sentences, 
especially  after  verbs  expressing  doubt,  uncertainty,  fear,  hope,  purpose,  sup- 
position, exhortation,  advice,  etc. : 

3d)bestr»eifclte,  ba^er  f^onin33er*    I  doubted  that  he  had  already  ar- 

Itn  angefommen  fci,  rived  in  Berlin. 

2)U  ^oflft  2)eiucn  3?ater  unb  S)eine    Thou  shalt  honor  thy  father  and  thv 
abutter  e^reu,  aiif  ba^  bu  lange       mother,  that   thou   mayest   live 
av\  (Srben  Ickft,         [ttlCrbeft,        long  in  the  land. 
3d>  rat^e  2)tr  ba^  !5)u  flei^iger    I  advise  you  to  be  more  diligent. 
Obs.  The  imperf,  and  pluperf  tenses  of  the  subj.  mood  are  often  used  in- 
stead of  the  present  and  perfect  tenses  of  the  conditional  mood  (see  §  125). 

§  125.  The  Conditional  Mood  is  used  to  express  a  result 
dependent  upon  certain  conditions.  It  corresponds  in 
general  to  the  Potential  Mood  in  English,  when  used 
with  the  auxiliary  would  or  should : 

SBenn  ba«  SSetter  j(^5ner*n?areA  ^^^^^  ^^^^^^^  ^^^^  g^^,^  I  ^^^^ 
ttiirbc  t^  auggefjen  (cotic?.),  (or)  ">     ^^  ^^^ 
ginjie  id?  au8  (««6;.),  ) 

S)ag  ttjttrbc  id)  ni^t  tbun  {cond.\\  j  ^^^j^  ^^^  ^^  ^^^^^ 
(or)  bag  tptC  id?  ind;t  {snhj.\  S 


§  126-128.]  IMPERATIVE   MOOD.  295 

§  126.  The  Imperative  Mood  is  used  as  in  English.  But 
with  an  imperative  signification  may  also  be  used : 

1.  The  present  indicative  (§  123,  Rem,  2). 

2.  The  perfect  particvple,  the  action  being  regarded  as 
already  completed : 

2)ie  2:romracI  gcrii^rt !  Beat  the  drums ! 

3.  The  infinitive  present^  in  expressions  of  childish  or 
of  highly  excited  passion  : 

(Sief>  iu8  S3ud;  t^inein  :  itur  nid;t    Keep  looking  into  the  book :   only 

Icfcn,  immer  ftngCn  (©.),  do  not  read,  keep  singing. 

^\^i  janfcn,  2JZutter  1  Do  not  scold,  mother! 

§  127.  The  Infinitive  Mood  is  always  dependent  upon 
another  verb  (except  in  the  cases  given  below) : 

(guc^e  JU  fcin,  toaS  bu  yx  ftljCiltCn    Seek  to  be  what  thou  wishest  to  ap- 
toUnfci^ej't,  pear. 

Exc.  1 .  When  there  is  a  manifest  ellipsis,  as : 
(®oU)  3^  mcineS  S3ruberS  ^in*    (Should)  I  not  recognize  my  broth- 
bcr  nit^t  erfcnncn  I  er's  children ! 

Exc.  2.  When  used  for  the  imperative  (1 26,  3). 
Exc.  3.  When  used  as  a  verbal  noun : 

jDaS  ©c^Iafen  crquicft,  Sleep  is  refreshing. 

Rem.  The  infinitive  of  any  verb  may  be  used  as  a  (neuter)  verbal  noun 
when  there  is  no  corresponding  substantive  already  existing.  The  infinitive 
is  often  used  substantively  even  when  it  does  not  take  the  article : 

©Ctnen  ^etnben  tlCtSei^tn  ijl  cbcl,     To  forgive  one's  enemies  is  noble. 
Exc.  4.  The  infinitive  is  used  after  certain  nouns  and  adjectives : 

S8  ift  ^txi  JU  ge^cn,  It  is  time  to  go. 

(5r  ^ot  3Wutft  JU  tSm^jfen,  He  has  courage  to  fight. 

2)er  33ricf  ift  ft^tiJCr  Ju  Icfcn,  The  letter  is  hard  to  read. 

3c^  bin  tcgictig  Ju  toiffcn,  I  am  curious  to  know. 

§  128.  The  use  of  JU  as  a  sign  of  the  Infinitive  Mood 
has  been  constantly  increasing  since  the  sixteenth 
century.    It  is  now  omitted  only  in  the  following  cases : 

1.  After  the  potential  verbs  foUcn,  tooflcn,  fonnCH,  mO' 

gen,  biirfcn,  miiffcn  (and  loffcn): 

3ci?  fann  C8  nic^t  Icfcn,  I  can  not  read  it. 


296  THE  VERB.  [§  129. 

2.  After  the  verbs  fii^ICH,  l^Ct^CH,  ^Clfcn,  ^orcn,  Ic^rCH, 

lernen,madjen,fe^en: 

®a6  mac^t  mx6^  jittevn,  That  makes  me  tremble. 

2Btr  prten  fie  fingen,  We  heard  them  sing. 

3.  After  the  verbs  MciBcH,  fasten,  gc^cn^  licgen,  rcitcn, 

fteljen,  and  ^afien  and  \tiUf  in  certain  expressions: 

(Sr  bletfet  fi^Cn,  He  keeps  his  seat. 

2Btr  gcl^en  f^ajtcren,  We  are  going  to  take  a  walk. 

Rem.  1 .   The  infinitive  with  JU  is  used  after  the  prepositions   dttftdtt^ 

of)nt,  uni : 

Slnftatt  JU  gcl^en,  Hteb  cr,  Instead  of  going,  he  remained. 

£)t}nt  bag  3U  hJtffen—  Without  knowing  that— 

Rem.  2.  The  infinitive  of  the  active  voice  is  often  translated  into  English 
by  the  infinitive  of  the  passive  voice : 

SBoe  ift  pt  t%n  ?  What  is  to  be  done? 

Rem.  3.  In  iae  German  only  the  infinitive  can  be  used  as  a  verbal  noua 
(and  not,  as  in  English,  the  present  participle  also) : 

©r  ift  bCS  @(!^toa^Cll§  ntiibe,  He  is  tired  of  the  chattering. 

2.  Participles  (^artisi^jtcn). 
§  129.  There  are  two  Participles,  the  Present  and  the 
Perfect. 

Rem.  1.  Participles  are  used  attributively  in  German  to  a  far  greater  ex- 
tent than  in  English.  When  thus  used  they  are  subject  to  all  the  laws  of 
declension  of  attributive  adjectives : 

2)er  am  5.  ©e^tember  UerftoriCllC    The  mayor  of  Kronfeld,  who  died 
^ilrgermeifter  i)on  ^ronfelb,  on  the  fifth  of  September. 

Rem.  2.  Participles  are  frequently  preceded  by  the  case  they  govern,  by 
6  modifying  adverb,  or  a  limiting  clause  : 

2)ie  ^onig  fOtntttClnbC  SStene,  The  honey-gathering  bee. 

®a§  un8  DCrfOlgcntJC  ®efd;t(f,  The  fate  that  is  pursuing  us. 

S)er  foeben  i3on  Sei^jig  cngcfOttls    The  express  train  that  has  just  ar- 

JltCnC  ©^nettjug,  rived  fi-om  Leipsic. 

jDer  ©c^neWsug  i)on  Sei^jig  ift  fo*    The  express  train  has  just  arrived 
eben  anOCfOntmcn,  from  Leipsic. 

Rem.  3.  The  adverb  and  the  direct  object  (if  a  noun)  is  often  joined  to  the 
participle  into  a  compound  Avord : 

2)ic  gcfc^gebcnbe  SerfatnmTimg,      The  legislative  assembly. 
2)ic  nCUgeBitnbetten  S3iid)er,  The  newly-bound  books. 

Rem.  4.  Participles,  like  adjectives,  may  be  used  as  nouns  or  aiS  adverbs  • 
(S§  giebt  toiete  ©ClC^rtCn,  bie —         There  are  many  learned  men,  «^ho— 
SKit  ftebenb  ^ei^em  staffer.  With  boiling-hot  water. 


§  130,  131.]  PABTICIPLES.  291 

§  130.  The  Present  Participle  is  formed  by  adding  =b  to 
the  present  infinitive  : 

^a^=Cn,  to  have ;  f^ah-tub,  having.     ®C^*Cn,  to  go ;  gC^=Cnb,  going. 

Rem.  1.  If  preceded  by  gu,  the  present  participle  takes  a  passive  significa- 
tion (compare  the  Latin  passive  participle  in  andm,  or  endus). 

(Sin  JU  UCrmcibCnbcr  ge^Ier,  A  fault  that  should  be  avoided. 

Rem.  2.  The  particii)le  thus  used  was  not  declined  before  the  last  century. 

Rem.  3.  The  present  participles  of  many  verbs  are  used  mostly,  and  in  some 
cases  only,  with  adjective  significations : 


SlbfHmmcnb,  discordant. 
5tbmejenb,     absent. 
5lini)cicnb,     present. 


S3ebeutenb,  important. 
2)rtn0enb,  urgent. 
9teijenb,      charming. 


§  131.  The  Perfect  Participle  is  formed  (1)  by  adding  4 
to  the  root  of  all  regular  verbs,  and  =cn  to  the  root  of 
all  irregular  verbs ;  and  (2)  by  prefixing  =gc  to  the  root 
of  all  verbs,  except  the  inseparable  compounds  (§  154), 
and  those  with  =ircn  (=iercn)  in  the  infinitive : 

Infinitive.  Perfect  Participle. 

Itebscn,       to  love,  9C=Iieb*t,   loved. 

gcb=cn,       to  give,  OC*geb;Cn,  given. 

tJCrocb=en,  to  forgive,  tercjebscn,  forgiven. 

bcbcrf'Cn,    to  cover,  bebc(f«t,     covered. 

ftUbirsen,    to  study,  ftubtrst,     studied. 
Hem.  1 .  In  separable  compounds  gC^  adheres  to  the  root  of  the  verb : 

flU^sf  pxt6f  stn,  to  pronounce,  au§=gCsfprod^*cn,  pronounced. 

Rem.  2.  When  the  verbs  foflCH,  tDOMCH,  fonnCH,  mbgCH,  biitfCH,  lUiiffcn, 
lajlcn,  bCi^Cn,  fCbcn,  biircn,  bdfCn  are  preceded  by  the  infinitive  of  another 
verb,  they  take  the  form  oi  t\\Q  present  iujinitive  for  that  of  the  past  participle. 
The  participial  form  of  the  potential  vei'bs  is  only  used  when  they  are  era- 
ployed  as  though  independent  verbs  (the  independent  verb  which  they  modify 
being  understood): 

3*  ^abc  c§  ni^t  Icfcn  fbnncn,         I  could  not  read  it. 
3in  \)abz  i^n  fmcjen  bbrctt^  I  have  heard  him  sing. 

^6)  \)abt  C8  nic  gcfotint,  I  have  never  been  able  (to  do)  it. 

Rem.  3.  In  forming  the  passive  voice.,  tOCtbCtt  drops  QCs; 
(Sr  ift  beftraft  toorbcn,  He  was  fined, 

(but)  @r  ijl  xt\&i  ({CtOOtbtn^  He  has  become  rich. 

Rem.  4.  Many  perfect  participles  have  almost  lost  their  verbal  signification, 
and  are  used  as  adjectives : 

N  2 


298  THE  VERB.  [§  132,133. 

1.  From  active  verbs:  16 elannt,  well-known ;  gcle^rt, learned. 

2.  From  reflexive  verbs :  Bejc^etben,  modest ;  betrunletl,  drunken ;  bCs 
triibt,  sad;  gefd^tcft, skillful ;  gebraitd)t,  second-hand. 

3.  From  o6so/e^e  verbs :  aitgefeffeit,  resident ;  berjc^tebeit,  different. 

4.  Participles  from  nouns,  with  no  corresponding  verbs:   gefttefelt,  "in 
boots;"  gefttrnt,  starry;  beja^rt,  full  of  years. 

Rem.  5.  The  perfect  participle  of  some  verbs,  as  laufCll,  fa^tCH,  tCitCIl,  etc., 
is  used  after  tomntett  (the  present  participle  being  used  in  English): 
(Sr  tarn  gcIaufCll,  He  came  running. 

3.  Tenses  (Bcttformcn). 

§  132.  The  Present  Tense  is  used  in  German  more  fre- 
quently than  in  English  instead  of  other  tenses. 

1.  Instead  of  they^^i^^^  tense: 

3^  fontntC  balb  tuieber,  I  shall  come  back  soon. 

Rem.  Until  as  late  as  the  fourteenth  century  future  time  was  always  ex- 
pressed by  the  present  tense. 

2.  Instead  of  the  perfect  tense  in  speaking  of  the 
length  of  a  period  of  time  not  yet  completed : 

2Bie  lange  finb  ®ie  m  S3erltn?         How  long  have  you  been  in  Berlin  ? 
3c^  bin  jc^on  ac^t  ^a^re  ^ier,  I  have  been  here  eight  years. 

3.  For  the  imjperfect  tense,  in  lively  narration: 

■3(^9t^C  geftern  tnit  metnem  ^tnbe  I  went  yesterday  with  my  child  to 
um  bie  ^arabe  ju  fetjen,  lietUcrC  see  the  parade ;  I  lost  sight  of 
eg  au6  tneinen  5lugen—  it— 

§  133.  The  Imperfect  and  Perfect  Tenses  are  employed 
as  in  English,  under  the  following  limitations : 

1.  The  perfect  \^  often  employed,  when  in  English  the 
imperfect  would  be  used : 

■Sd;  ]^ak  t^n  ge[tent  gCfC^Cn,  I  saw  him  yesterday. 

2.  The  progressive  form  of  the  imperfect  in  English 
must  be  rendered  by  the  imperfect  in  German. 

3d)  Ia§  bie  B^^^^^S  ^^^  ^^  herein*  I  was  reading  the  newspaper  when 
fam,  he  came  in. 

Rem.  The  imperfect  is  always  employed  after  the  adverb  al^» 


.^  134.J  PASSIVE   VOICE.  299 

3.  The  imperfect  is  frequently  used  in  general  ex- 
pressions, in  which  the  jjerfect  would  be  employed  in 
English : 

2BorCn  @ic  fd^on  in  SBien ?  Have  you  been  in  Vienna? 

4.  When  the  speaker  wishes  to  convey  the  idea  that 
he  was  personally  cognizant  of  an  event,  the  imperfect 
is  usually  employed: 

^orgeftcrn  ftarl)  tei  mir  unfer  ge*  Day  before  yesterday  our  dear  friend 

ticttcr  (^reunb,  ^err  91. —  Mr,  N.  died  at  my  house. 
Rem.  With  the  perfect  (and  also  \vith  the  pluperfect)  the  auxiliary  may  be 
omitted  in  subordinate  sentences : 

2)a8  §au8,  trelc^eS  ic^  bcutc  gC*  The  house  which  I  saw  to-day  is 

fe^en,  ift  fe^r  bcqucm,  aber  e6  very  convenient,  but    it   is    too 

ift  gU  t^cuer,  dear. 

4.  The  Passive  Voice  (^tc  ^^afftUform). 

§  134.  The  Passive  Voice  is  formed  by  joining  the  auxil- 
iary tPCrbcn,  to  become,  to  t\iQ  perfect  participle  (seeparor 
digm,%U\): 

^icr  toirb  2)cutfd^  0Cf^rO(!^en,         German  is  spoken  here. 
2)er  geinb  tiJUrbC  gcft^IttOCn,  The  enemy  was  defeated. 

Rem.  1.  The  action  is  considered  as  becoming  accomplished^  that  is,  as  talcing 
place  at  the  time  alluded  to.  When  the  action  is  considered  as  completed  the 
verb  fcin  is  used,  and  the  participle  is  usually  treated  as  a  predicative  ad- 
jective. 

'j^a^f  ^au3  xoax  fd^cn  abgcbrannt,    The  house  was  already  burnt  down 
alS  bic  ^^cuertccbr  anfam,  when  the  fire-company  arrived. 

Rem.  2.  In  the  Gothic  fcill  was  always  employed.     In  the  Old-Ger.,  tOtt' 
ben  was  frequently  used  for  the  futttre  tenses.     In  the  Mid.-Ger.,  tOtXhtU 
was  frequently  used  in  the  past  tenses.     In  the  New-Ger.^  fctn  was  some- 
times used  as  auxiliary ;  in  the  imperative  mood  it  is  always  employed. 
2)tc  ®d>Iac^t  toax  bcrtorcn,  The  battle  is  lost. 

®ott  fci  gclobt  I  God  be  praised! 

1.  When  the  active  agent  is  indefinitely  alluded  to, 
the  active  voice,  with  man  as  nominative,  is  employed: 

M§eut'  nimmt  man  ntd;t  gcfangen,"     "  Xo  prisoners  will  be  taken  to-day. " 

2.  When  an  intransitive  idea  is  expressed  by  a  transi 
tive  verb,  the  reflexive  form  is  employed: 

^a?  UCrftC^t  ft(^,  That  is  a  matter  of  course. 


300  THE   VERB.  [§  135. 

3.  When  the  object  of  the  action  is  made  the  subject 
of  the  verb,  and  the  agent  is  not  alluded  to,  the  reflex- 
ive form  is  usually  employed: 

(Sine  neuc  Orbnnng  ber  S)inge    A  new  order  of  things  is  established, 
fiiljrt  (i^  ein, 


2,  AUXILIARY  VERBS. 

§  135.  There  are  three  Auxiliary  Verbs,  ^ohtn,  \tin,  and 
tOCrbtn*     They  are  employed  as  follows: 

1.  Transitive,   Heflexive,  Im/personal,  and  Potential 

Verbs  take  l^aBctl  as  the  auxiliary: 

■Set;  f^abt  i^n  geje^en,  I  have  seen  him. 

©r  l^at  fic^  gefreut,  He  has  rejoiced. 

©8  i)at  ^eute  geregnet,  It  has  rained  to-day, 

(Sr  f}at  eS  gemu^t,  He  has  been  compelled  (to  do)  it. 

2.  Intransitive  Verbs  denoting  a  dmnge  of  condition^ 
or  a  motion  from  one  particular  place  to  another,  take 
fcin  as  the  auxiliary : 

@r  {(t  angefommen,  He  has  arrived. 

(gr  ift  tia^  §8erlin  gereifl,  He  has  gone  to  Berlin. 

(but)  (Sr  l^at  iJiel  rereift,  He  has  traveled  much. 

Rem.  1.  The  verbs  cilcii,  fa^tCH,  fltcfcn,  i^infeit,  jogcH,  !(ettcrn,frtc(^cit, 
lanbcn,  laufcn,  quetten,  reifcn,  rcitcn,  rtnncn,  fcQCln,  fc^tffcn,  ft^totmmcn, 

f^rtngCn,  ftO^Cn,  trcibcn,  toanbCrn,  when  not  indicating  a  motion  to  or  from 

a  particular  place,  have  l^atlCll  as  the  auxiliary : 

(Sr  l^at  i)iel  gercift,  He  has  traveled  much. 

Rem.  2.  (Scin,  tiJCrbcn,  and  Hci^Cll  take  fctlt  as  the  auxiliary: 
©r  ift  in  S3erlin  gCtoCfCll^  He  has  been  in  Berlin, 

(Sr  ift  Saufmann  getoorbctt^  He  has  become  a  merchant. 

3.  6^iJA(gr  Intransitive  Verbs  take  l^aBcn  as  auxiliary: 

1.  Those  governing  an  indirect  object  in  the  geni- 
tive  or  dative  case : 

2Btr  l^attcn  i^m  gef)otfen,  We  had  helped  him. 

Me  l^attcn  fetner  (gitelfeit  geta(^t,    All  had  laughed  at  his  vanity. 

2.  Those  expressing  absolute  rest: 

€v  Tjat  jetjr  lange  gefianbcn,  He  has  been  standing  very  long. 


§  136.] 


AUXILIARY   VERBS. 


301 


Rem.  3.  Some  verbs,  with  two  or  more  significations,  take  ^aBCtl  or  fcin^ 
according  to  the  signification  with  which  they  may  be  used  : 
©r  mar  toon  bcr  >8tabt  fortgefa^ren,    He  had  driven  out  of  the  city. 
(Sr  IjattC  fortgcfa^rcn  im  Scfen,  He  had  continued  to  read. 

3.  SScrbcn  is  used  in  forming  the  future  tenses  of  the 

active  voice,  and  in  forming  the  passive  voice. 

§  136.  The  verb  ^abcil,  to  have,  is  conjugated  thus: 
Principal  Parts:  ^ab'=cn,  ]^at'=tC,  gc^^abt^ 

INDICATIVE   MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.* 

Present  Tense. 


l^   ftab=C,        I       have. 

id;  ^ab=e, 

I      have. 

bu   ^ttft,           thou  hast. 

bu  ^ab^eft, 

thou  hast. 

cr    I)Ot,            he     has. 

cr   ^ab^e, 

he     has. 

toir  ^ ab *cn,   we     have. 

toir  i^ah'- en, 

we    have. 

i^r  ^ab*(c)t,you   have. 

i^r  ^ab^et, 

you  have. 

fie  ^ab*en,   they  have. 

fie  ^ab*en, 

they  have. 

Imperfect  Tense. 

Ic^  W'itf        I       had. 

ic^  muitr 

I        had. 

bu   iiat'-  teft,  thou  hadst 

bu  ^at^teft, 

thou  hadst. 

er   ^at*te,     he     had. 

cr  t>dt'^te, 

he      had. 

wir  ^  at*  ten,  we     had. 

toir  ^ at* ten, 

we     had. 

i^r  ^at^tct,  you   had. 

i^r  ^cit* tet, 

you    had. 

fic  ^  a  t  *  ten,  they  had. 

flc  ^dt*ten, 

they  had. 

Perfect  Tense. 

I  have  had,  etc. 

I  have  had,  etc. 

t(^  ftab=c      flc^iabt 

\ii  !^ab=e 

gc^abt 

bu  Iiaft         ge^abt. 

bu  ^ab^eft 

gcM-^t* 

cr  i^^t          gebabt. 

^    cr   ita^'t 

5  c  ^  a  b  t. 

toir  ^  a  b  *  en  g  c  ^  a  b  t. 

toir  ^ab*en  gc^abt. 

i^r  ^ab««t     gc^abt. 

tbr  ^ab*et 

g  c  ^  a  b  t. 

fte  ^ab*en  gebabt. 

fie   ^ab^cn  gc^bt. 

Plvpetfei 

zt  Tense. 

I  had  had,  etc. 

I  had  had,  etc. 

\^  Hi'it     ge^aftt 

t(^  W'-it 

getiaat 

bu  bat»teft  gel^abt. 

bu  ^at^tcft 

gebabt. 

cr  ^at  =  te     ge(>abt. 

cr  Mt*te 

gebabt. 

toir  Mt*ten  gebabt. 

toir  ^5t*ten 

gebabt. 

i^r  ^at-tet  gebabt. 

i^r  Ht*tet 

gebabt. 

fie  bat*ten  gebabt. 

fie  Ht^'ten 

gebabt. 

*  See  Subjunctive  Mood,  §  124. 


302 


THE   VERB. 


[§  136. 


I  shall  have,  etc. 

t^  tocrb=c      l^akn* 
bu  toirft  ^aben. 

er  iDtri)  I;  a  ben. 

h)tr  tt>erb*en  ^aben. 
t^r  iverb^ct  ^aben. 
fie  tt)erb  =  en  ^aben. 


FtVs^  Future  Tense. 

I  shall  have,  e<c. 

tc^  toerbsc  ^akn* 

bu  iuerb^eft  ^aben. 

er   tt)erb*e  ^abcn. 

tt)ir  tt3erb*cit  ^aben. 

t^r  ttjcrb^ct  ^abem 

fie  njerb^cn  ^aben. 
Second  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  have  had,  etc. 

\^  tocrb^c  gc^abt  ftakm 
bu  lotrft  ge^abt  ^akm 
er  toirb  ge^abt  ^abCtt* 

tctr  t»erb*cn  ge^abt  ^alicil* 
i^r  h)erb*ct  ge^abt  l^abcn* 
fie  ttjerb^ctt  ge^abt  l^abcn* 


I  have  had,  etc. 

\^  iDcrb^c  gel^ait  l^abcm 
bu  totrft  ge^abt  j^akm 
er  toirb  ge^abt  l^alictt* 
tcir  toerb^en  ge^abt  l^abcn* 
t^r  njerb^ct  gc^abt  ^akn. 
fie  tt>erb*cn  ge^abt  ^aktt« 


id;  toiirb=c 

bu  iDiirb^cft  ^aben, 
er  toitrb^c  ^aben, 
njir  tt)  il  r  b  =  en  ^  a  b  e  n , 
i^r  tuiirb^ct  ^abeu, 
fie  Voiirb^eu  ^abeu, 


i^  toiirb=c 

bu  tD  it  r  b  ^  eft  g  e  ^  a  b  t  l^akn, 
er  iriirb^e  gel;abt  l^aticn, 
n?ir  tt)ilrb^en  ge^abt  iaben, 
i^r  njurb==et  ge^abt  I)abeu, 
ftc  njilrb^en  gel;abt  ^aticn, 


CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 
Present  Tense. 
I  would,  or  I  should  have,  etc. 
leaden,         or  ic^    :^at=te       (Imperf.  Subjunc.) 

"  bu  ^dt=teft 
"  er  ^at-te 
"  h)ir  Ht^ten 
*'i^r  ^at-tCt 
"  fie  ^cit^teil 
Perfect  Tense. 
I  would,  or  I  should  have  had,  etc. 

OcI)afit    t}aUn,    or  id?  Ijot^te     gci^afit   (Piup.Suhj.) 

'  bu  ^(it^teft  ge^abt 

'  er    ^cit^te    ge^abt 

'  tDir  ^cit^tcn  ge^abt 

'  i^r  ^cit^tct  ge^abt 

'  fic   iat^ttn  ge^abt 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


f^aht  (bu),  have  thou. 
i^ah't  (er),  let  him  have. 


I^afi^en  h)ir,  let  us  go. 
i^ahtt    X^X,  have  (you). 
]^atl=en    fie,    let  them  have. 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 
Pres.   5afi=en,  to  have.  i  Per/,  ge^ttfit  ](iakn,  to  have  had. 

Participles. 
Pres.  l^atl^Cnb,  having.  |  Per/,  gcl^ttbt,  had. 

JRein.  ^a6cn,  Gothic  hahan,  is  allied  to  the  Latin  habere  (to  have),  from 
which  are  derived  the  Spanish  haber.  Port,  haver,  Ital.  avere,  French  avoir. 


§  137.J 


AUXILIARY   VERBS. 


303 


§137.  The  verb  feilt,  to  J<?,  is  conjugated  thus: 
Principal  Parts:  fcin,  ttJar,  gc=U)cf  cn* 

INDICATIVE   MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD, 

Present  Tense. 


id?  tin,  I      am. 

bu   btft,  thou  art. 

tr    \\\,  he     is. 

XD\x  finb,  we     are. 

i^r  fcid,  you  are. 

fl«  fml),  ihey  are. 

\^  tear,         I     was. 

bu   toar^^ft,        thou  wast. 

cr  tear,  he  was. 
trir  XoaX'tVi,  we  were, 
i^r  tD  a  r  =  (C)t,you  were, 
fic    war*  VXf  they  were. 


it^   fCi,  I       am. 

bu  f  e  i  *  eft,  thou  art. 
er  fci,         he    is. 
tt)ir  fei^cn,  we     are. 
i^r  fei^ct,  you  are. 
fic  jet*  en,  they  ai-e. 


I  have  been,  etc. 

id?  bin  gettcfcn* 

bu  Mft  g  croc  fen. 
er  ifi  g  croc  feu. 
n?ir  fmb  g  c  ro  e  f  c  n. 
i^r  fcib  getDcfen. 
fie    fmb  gcVDcfeu. 


I  had  been,  etc. 

id?  toor  gctijcfcn. 
bu  totttsCt  gctuefen. 
er  tear  ge  roe  fen. 
tt»ir  roar* en  geroefen. 
i^r  roar*t  geroefen. 
fic  roar* en  geroefen. 

I  shall  be,  etc. 

id?  iDcrb=c  fcin. 

bu  ttirft  fcin. 

er    toirb  fcin. 

roir  rocrb*cn  fcin. 

ibr  rocrb*ct  fcin. 

fic  roerb«en  fcin. 


Imperfect  Tense. 

\^  ttar^e,      i     was. 

bu  roSr*cft,  thou  wast, 
er   rodr*e,    he     was. 
roir  roar* en,  we     were, 
i^r  roSr*et,  you    were, 
fic  XO^X'tVLf  they  were. 

Perfect  Tense. 

I  have  been,  etc. 

id^  fei  gcttjcfen* 
bu  fei* eft  geroefen. 
er  fei  geroefen. 
roir  fei*en  geroefen. 
i^r  fei*et  geroefen. 
fic  fei*cn  geroefen. 

Pluperfect  Tense. 

I  had  been,  etc. 

\^  \Mi't      octt'cfcn. 

bu  roSr*cft  geroefen. 
er  rodr*e  geroefen. 
roir  roSr*en  geroefen. 
i^r  roar*et  geroc  jen. 
fie  roar*en  geroc  'en. 

First  Future  Tense. 

I  shall  be,  etc. 

\^  toerb^e       fein. 

bu  ro  e  r  b  *  eft  f  c  i  n. 
cr  ro  c  r  b  *  e  fcin. 
roir  ro  e  r  b  *  en  fcin. 
i^r  roerb*et  fcin. 
fic  roerb^en  fcin. 


304 


THE    VERB. 


[§  137. 


Second  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  have  been,  etc. 


X6)    tOtth't 

bu  toirft 
cr  totrb 


gctoefcn  fctn, 
gett)ejeit  fcin* 
geti?eien  fcin* 


tt?ir  tr)  c  r  b  =»  c«   g  e  h?  e  f  e  it  fcitt, 
i^r  h)  e  r  b  *  ct    g  e  tt)  e  j  e  n  f cin* 


I  shall  have  been,  etc. 

id;  mt^i't       gctijcfcn  fcin* 

bu  h)  e  r  b  ='  eft  g  e  n?  e  j  e  n  f ctn* 

ertuerb^C    getoefen  f ctn* 

t»tr  h3erb*en  gettjejen  fein* 

if)r  n)  e  r  b  *  ct  g  e  m  c  j  e  n  f ctn* 

fie  tDcrb^cn  getoefcn  fcm^ 


fie  tD  e  r  b  *  en  g  c  n?  e  f  e  n  f  ein» 

CONDITIONAI.   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

I  would,  or  I  should  be,  etc. 

fetll,      or   tc^    tO'dV't        (Imperfect  Subjunctire). 
"  bu  tuSr^eft         "  *' 

"    er  tDcir^e  "  " 

''  U)tr  tear* en         "  " 

"  i^r  U)ar*et  "  " 

"  fie  tDcir^en  '*  " 

Perfect  Tense. 
I  would,  or  I  should  have  been,  etc. 


id?  toiirb=e 
bu  t»  it  r  b  *  eft  f  ein, 
cr  ujilrb^e  fein, 
n?ir  t»  it  r  b  *  en  f ctn, 
i^r  TOilrb^et  fetn, 
fie  tt)  il  r  b  ^  en  f ein, 


i(^  loilrb^e  getoefen  fetn, 
bu  hjilrb^eftgettjefen  f etn, 
er  ttjitrb^e  getuefeu  fetn, 
iDtr  tr)iirb*en  geiucfeu  fetn, 
i^r  tt3itrb*et  gett)efeu  fein, 
|te  vciirb^en  getDcfcu  fein, 


or  x6)  to'dt't  gemefen  (Php.Sub.) 
"  bu  U)ar*eft  gett?efcu 
"  er  iBcir^e  gett)cfen 
"  ttJtr  trcir^en  gen?efcn 
"  t^r  todx^tt  getr>efen 
*'   fte  tucir^en  gcttjefen 


IMPEEATIVE 


fei  (bu),  be  thou. 
fet    er,    let  him  be. 


MOOD. 

fet=en  h)ir,  let  us  be. 
fei=et  i6r,  be  you. 
fet=en  fic,  let  them  be. 


Pres.  fein,  to  be. 
Pre9.  fei=enb,  being. 


mFINlTlVE  MOOD. 

I         Perf  getoefen  fetn,  to  have  been, 
PARTICIPLES. 

I  Perf  getoefen,  been. 

p^m.  The  different  parts  of  fetn  are  to  be  traced  to  three  roots: 

1.  S5tn;  llift  (and  Engl,  be,  been),  are  probably  related  to  banen,  to  build. 

2.  @ein,  fet,  feib,  ftnb,  and  tft  (with  Engl,  are,  art,  is)  are  from  a  verb- 
al root  that  is  now  only  found  in  Sanscrit  as  and  Latin  esse  (to  be). 

3.  ©etiiefen,  ttJUt,  tO'iXt  (and  Engl.  was,  were),  are  from  an  obsolete 
vei-b,  in  Sanscrit  was  (to  reside),  in  Gothic  vivian  (to  remain,  to  be), 
Old-Ger.  wesan,  Mid.-Ger.  wesen.  The  former  present  participle 
wesend  is  now  only  used  in  the  adjectives  dnttJefenb/  (I^tOefenb« 


§  138.] 


AUXILIARY  VERBS. 


305 


§  138.  Conjugation  of  tDtxhtrtfto  become: 

Principal  Parts:  tocrb'=cn,  tourb'=c  (toarb),  gc=toorb'=cn* 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 


Present  Tense. 


\6f  tDtthstf  I  become. 
bu    loitft,  thou  becomest. 

cr    toitb^  he     becomes, 

tpir  tDcrb^cn,  we  become, 
i^r  tt)erb*et,  you  become. 
fte  trcrb^cn^  they  become. 


ic^   tOtth'tf        I       become, 
bu   tt>  e  r  b  *  eft,  thou  becomest. 
cr   n>crb*C,     he     becomes, 
hjir  tt>  e  r  b  *  cn,  we     become, 
tbr  tt)crb*Ct,   you    become, 
fie  t»crb*cn,  they  become. 


Impeifect  Tense. 


tc^  tOlirb=C/  I  became, 
bu  to  u  r  b  =^  eft,  thou  becamest. 
cr  W  u  r  b  =  C,  he  became. 
tt)ir  tr>urb  =  cn,  we  became, 
i^r  t»urb*Ct,  you  became, 
fie  tD  u  r  b  =  en,  they  became. 

Perfect  Tense. 
I  have  become,  etc. 

i(^  bin  gettiorbcn  or  njorbcn, 
bu  bift  getrorben  "  n?orbcn, 
cr  ift  geworbcu  "  ttjorben. 
toir  ftnb  getDorbeu  "ttjorben. 
t^r  fcib  gett)orbeu"tt)orbcn. 
fic  ftnb  gettjorben  "  tDorbeu. 


id;  iDUrb-e,  I  became, 
bu  tDlirb^eft,  thou  becamest. 
cr  tDlirb^e/  he  became. 
tt>ir  triirb^eit,  we  became, 
i^r  tt)ilrb>et,  you  became, 
jte  toiirb*en,   they  became. 


I  have  become,  etc. 

tdd  fei  o^^i^i^^^it    ortoorbeui 

bu  fciscft  gctt)orbcn  "  ttjorben. 

er  fei  getvorbcn  "  tDorben. 

tDtr  jciscn  gc\Dorbcn  "  tt)orben. 

i^r  fei*et  getuorben  "  h)orben. 

fte  fei^ctt  gctDorbcn"  ttjorben. 


Pluperfect  Tense. 


I  had  become,  etc. 

\^  tear  8Cioorbenorti)orben» 
bu  toarft  genjorben  "  morbcn. 
cr  ttjar  gen?orbcn  "  trorben. 
»ir  toax'tVL  genjorben  "  trorben. 
ibr  tt)ar  =  t  gcroorbeu  "  tuorben. 
fie  tt)ar«en  getDorben  "  tDorben. 


I  shall  become,  etc. 

i^  tDcrb=e      tterben. 
bu  ttjirft         tr^erben. 
er  toirb  njcrben. 

XQxx  tt)erb*eiltucrben. 
ibr  toerb*et  tnerbcn. 
fte  tt)  c  r  b  *  en  tp  e  r  b  e  n. 


I  had  become,  etc. 

\6)  ttar=e     getoorbcn  or  toorbcn* 

bu  ft)  d  r  *  eft  getDorbeu  "  trorben. 
er  tudr^e  gctt?orben  "  toorbeu. 
hjirti)  d  r  *  en  getporben  "  ttjorben. 
ibr  n)  d  r  *  et  gcnjorbeu  "  tuorbcn. 
fie  xoAx'tn  geworben  *'  toorbcn. 
First  Future  Tense. 

I  shall  become,  etc. 

it^  toerb^e      toerben* 

bu  njerb^eft  h?erben. 
cr  tDcrb^e  tt>erbeu. 
tcir  n?  c  r  b  *  en  to  e  r  b  e  n. 
i^r  tt)crb*et  tDcrbcu. 
fie  tt)erb*en  tt>erben. 


*  In  the  singular  of  the  Imperfect  Indicative  the  forms  i(^  ttiarb,  \SXi  tDCrbft, 
er  tontb  are  sometimes  employed. 


306 


THE   VERB. 


[§  138. 


Second  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  have  become,  etc 


x^  toert)=e  gcttorbcn     fein. 

bu  iDirft  g  e  tx)  0  r  b  e  n  \tm* 

er   ttirb  g  e  n?  o  r  b  e  n  f cin* 

tt)ir  toerb^Ctt  gemorben  fcin* 

t^r  to  tvh^tt  getcorben  f citi* 

fie  ttjerb^cn  getuorben  fcin* 


I  shall  have  become,  etc. 

i^  mth't       Qtmxhtn     fcin» 

bu  ttjerb^cft  g  etc  or  ben  fctn* 
er  tt)erb*c  getuorben  \t\n* 
tt)irtt)erb^C«  getDorben  f ciii, 
t^rtr)erb==ct  getDorben  \tm* 
fie  t»erb  =  cn  getoorben  feitt. 

CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

I  would,  or  I  should  become,  etc. 


x6)  ti)itrb=e      mttitn 

bu  tt?ilrb*cft  t»erbeu 
er  miirb^c  werben 
tDirtx)ilrb^cn  merben 
i^r  tt)iirb  =  ct  tuerben 
fie  toiirb^Ctt  tcerbcn 


tOiitbsC       (Imperf.  Subjunctive^ 

ft)  it  r  b  =  eft 


I  would. 


or  tc^ 

"  bu 

"  er   tDitrb^c 

"  U3ir  tDiirb^cn 

"  if)r  iDiirb^ct 

"fie   tt)ilrb  =  cn 

Perfect  Tense. 

or  I  should  have  had,  etc. 


x6)  toiirb=e      gcttorbcn     fcin 

bu  tDiirb^cft  gemorbeu  fcin 
cr  iDitrb^c  gett^orbeu  fcin 
toir  n)itrb*cn  gemorbcu  fcin 
i()r  wilrb^ct  gem  orb  eu  fcin 
fie  njitrb^cn  gett>orbeu  fcin 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


i^  ti)ar=c  gcttjcrbcn  (Pi.  Sub.) 
bu  toar«=eft  gemorben  "  " 
er  njcir^c  gemorbeu  "  " 
tt)tr  tocir^cn  g  eh)  orb  en  "  *' 
i^r  hjcir^ct  gett)orbeu  "  " 
fie   njcir^cn  gehjorben  "     " 


tOCrbsC     (bu),  become  thou, 
to  e  r  b  =  C  (er),  let  him  become. 


lOCrbsCn      hJtr,  let  us  become. 

t»  e  r  b  =  Ct  i^r,  become  you. 

to  e  r  b  ==  cn  fie,  let  them  become. 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 
Pres.  ti)Crb?Cn,  to  become.  [  Per/.  gCttJOtbCn  fCin,to  have  become. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  ttJCrbsCnb,  becoming.  ]  Per/.  gC=tt)Orb'Cn,  become. 

Rem.  2BctbCn  (Middle-German  werden,  to  take  a  direction)  is  allied  to  the 
Latin  vertere  (to  turn). 


§iiiy,  14U.] 


REGULAR   VERBS. 


307 


3.  REGULAR  VERBS. 

(Bcitiodrtcr  htt  fdimadjcn  tonjugationO 
§  139.  Under  Regular  Verbs  (termed  by  German  gram- 
marians verbs  of  the  Weak  Oo?iJugation)  are  included: 

1.  All  derivative  verbs^  as:   tt>drmen,  {)dmmern,  pfliigen, 
Icgcn,  fe^en,  flellen,  trdnfen. 

2.  A  few  primitive  verbs,  as :  fagen,  retten,  fud)en. 

3.  Foreign  verls  (except  pfeifen,  preifen,  fd)reikn)* 

Rem.  1 .  Most  regular  verbs  are  transitive. 

Rem.  2.  Regular  verbs  never  take  the  umlaut,  nor  do  they  change  the  radi- 
cal vowel  in  inflection. 


irarm'en,   to  warm     (  from  tcarm).  ftctt*en, 
^ammer*n,  to  hammer  (  "  §ammcr).  tran^cn, 
bab^cn,       to  bathe      (  "      93ab).      fag^en, 
^>ftilg*cn,    to  plough    (  "     ^flug).    rctt^cn, 
ICiV-en,        to  lay         (  "      licgen).    ftubir'^en, 
fe^cn,       to  set         (  ♦'     fifecn).      taftei'*en, 


to  place      (from  jle^en). 
to  water     (  *'    trinfen). 
to  say         (primitive), 
to  save        (        "      ). 
to  study      (from  Latin), 
to  chastise  (  "         "    ). 


§  140.  Conjugation  of  the  Regular  Verb  Ikhcn,  to  love 
Principal  Parts:  lic^^cn,  Ucb  =tc,  gC^licbt^ 

INDICATIVE   MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 


i6)   Uc6=C,        I       love, 
bu  I  i  c  b  *  ft,    thou  lovest. 
er   Iieb*t,     he     loves, 
teir  Iieb*cn,  we     love. 
i^>c  Iicb  =  t,     you   love, 
fie  Iicb*cn,  they  love. 


id^   lith't,        I       love, 
bu    1 1 C  b  *  eft,  thou  lovest. 
cr   ttcb*C,     he     loves. 
tDtr  Iteb^cn,  we    love, 
i^r  Hcb^ct,  you  love, 
fie  U  c  b  *  CH,  they  love. 


Imperfect  Tense. 


id?  Ixthtt^  I  loved, 
bu  I  i  e  b  =  tcft,  thou  lovedst. 
et  Iteb*te,  he  loved, 
trit  licb^tcn,  we  loved, 
i^r  Iteb=»tCt,  you  loved. 
flc  I  i  C  b  *  ten,  they  loved. 


id?  Iieb=te,  I  loved. 
bu  H  e  b  *  tCft,  thou  lovedst. 
er  lieb'te,  he  loved. 
"mix  I  i  e  b  *  ten,  we  loved, 
i^r  lie b^tet,  you  loved, 
fie    tieb^tCn,  they  loved. 


308 


THE    VERB. 


[§  140. 


I  have  loved,  etc. 

bu  ^aft  geticbt. 
er  i^at  geHcbt. 
t»tr  M'&^cn  gcItcBt. 
t^r  ^abst  gelicbt. 
fie  ^ab^cn  gelicbt 


I  had  loved,  etc. 

bu  ^at==tcft  geliebt. 
tx  i)ot'tt  geliebt 
n)tr  i^aX'ttn  geliebt 
i^r  i)at'ttt  geliebt 
fie  i)at'itn  gelicbt 


I  shall  love,  etc. 
id)  mxh't       IteiCtt* 
bu  toirft         liebcn. 
er  totrb  liebcn. 

tt)ir  tDcrb^^cn  liebcn. 
i^r  tDcrb^ct  liebcn. 
ftc  tocrb^cn  liebcn. 


Perfect  Tense. 

I  have  loved,  etc. 
ic^   \}aht       QClicfit 

bu  ^ab^cft  geliebt 
er  i}ah't  gelicbt 
tt»ir  ^ab* en  geliebt 
i^r  ^absct  gelicbt 
fte  ^ab^cn  geliebt 

Pluperfect  Tense. 

I  had  loved,  etc. 

x^  W'tt     gclicfit 

bu  ^at^tcft  gelicbt 
er  i)  at 'it  geliebt 
tcir  ^at'itn  geliebt 
i^r  i^at'tti  gelicbt. 
fie  ^cit^tcn  gelicbt 

First  Future  Tense. 

I  shall  love,  etc. 

i^  tticrb=e      Utbtn* 

bu  njcrb^eft  liebcn. 
er  tDcrb^e  liebcn. 
irir  ttjcrb^ctt  liebcn. 
i^r  Ujcrb^ct  lieben. 
fie  totxh'tn  liebcn. 


Second  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  have  loved,  etc. 

ic^  mth=t  (itlitht  f^abtn* 
bu  ttjirft  geliebt  l^aben. 
er  tuirb  geliebt  i^aUn^ 

h)ir  ttjcrb^cn  gelicbt  iabtu* 
i^r  tBcrb^et  gelicbt  i}aUn* 
fie  tt)crb*cn  geliebt  l^abcn. 


I  shall  have  loved,  etc. 

ic^  mtht      gelicbt    i^aieiu 

bu  tt)erb==eft  geliebt  ^aben. 

er  tDcrb^e    geliebt  l^oben. 

hjir  ivcrb^en  gelicbt  iabtn*^ 

i^r  iucrb^et  geliebt  l^abeit. 

fie  t»  c  r  b  ^  en  g  c  I  i  e  b  t  l^abett. 


tc^  toilrb=e 

bu  ti?ilrb==eft  lieben 
er   tx)ilrb^e    liebcn, 
t»ir  tx)itrb*en  lieben, 
i^r  toiixh^tt  liebcn, 
fie   n>ilrb*en  lieben. 


CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 
I  would,  or  I  should  love,  etc. 
lieben,  or  ic^  lieb-te        {Imperf  Suhjunc.') 

bu  lieb  =  teft 
er   licb^te 
tuir  lieb  =  ten 
i^r  lieb'^tet 
fie  lieb«=ten 


§  141.] 


REGULAR   VERBS. 


309 


Perfect  Tense. 
I  would,  or  I  should  have  loved,  etc. 

OCIicH    ^abcn,     or  id;  \)iiAt      oclicftt 

"  bu  Ht^tcft  geliebt 
"  cr  ^at*tc  geltcbt 
"  njir  ^at  =  tcn  gcHcbt 
"  i^r  I;at*tCt  gelicbt 
"    fic  ^dt^tcn  gcHcbt 


bu  trUrb^cft  geliebt  Iiabcn, 
er  TOilrb^c  gelicbt  Ijabcn, 
roir  tvilrb^cn  gctiebt  ^aben, 
i^r  trilrb*ct  geliebt  babcn, 
fie  wiirb^cn  geliebt  babcn, 


(^Pl.Subj.) 


IM1»ERATIVE   MOOD. 


licbsC  (bu),  love  thou. 
lith't    er,    let  him  love. 


licbsCn  tt>ir,  let  us  love. 
lith'tt   i^x,  love  you. 
licbsCn  fie,  let  them  love. 


mFLNTTIVE   MOOD. 
Pres,  Iicb=Cn,  to  love.  |  Per/,  gclicbt  f^ahtU,  to  have  loved, 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  licb'Cnb,  loving.  |  Per/,  gclicbt,  loved. 

§  141.  Table  of  endings  of  Regular  Verbs: 


Present  Tense.                  | 

Imperfect  Tense. 

1     Indie. 

Subj. 

Imperat. 

Indicative. 

Subjunctive. 

.en, 
.et, 
«en. 

4e,    *ete, 
At\i,  .cteft, 
4e,    ^ete, 

4en,  ^eten, 
4ct,  ^etet, 
*tcn.  *cten. 

At,    -etc, 
'^efi,  .etcfl, 
At,    <% 

Atn,  scten, 
*tet,  *etet, 
*ten.  *cten. 

2  Pers.  Sing. 

3  Pers.  Sing. 

1  Pers.  Plur. 

2  Pers.  Plur. 

3  Pers.  Plur. 

<%  'ft, 

-et,  4, 
*cn.  *cn. 

.=en,  .en, 
.et,  A, 
«en.*en. 

In/init.  *en,  *n.  ||       Pres.  Part.  *cnb,  *nb.      ||    Per/.  Part,  gc— Ct,  gc— t. 

For  the  sake  of  euphony,  or  of  the  metre  in  poetry, 
the  first  C  of  terminations  is  frequently  dropped. 

Rem.  1.  It  can  never  be  dropped,  however,  when  the  stem  of  the  verb  ends 
in  sb,  iif  or  sgn  (contracted  from  sQCll)* 

Rem.  2.  The  contraction  always  takes  place  in  ctXi,  'tllb,  when  the  stem 
ends  in  scl  or  sCt*  (In  the  1st  Pers.  Sing,  of  the  Pres.  Ind.,  and  in  the  2d 
Pers.  Sing,  of  the  Imperative,  the  C  of  the  stem  is  dropped.) 

Rem.  3.  When  the  stem  ends  with  a  vowel,  sC  from  sCH  is  frequently  dropped. 

Rem.  4.  In  sCft,  the  C  is  not  dropped  when  the  stem  ends  b,  i,  ^,  ^,  j,  f(^» 

Rem.  5.  The  contraction  rarely  takes  place  in  the  subjunctive  mood. 


10 

THE 

VERB. 

[§  14ii,  14 

lieb^eu, 

to  love, 

tieb'-e, 

'fl,    ''t, 

4e, 

geaeb4. 

fuc^^eu, 

to  seek, 

ju(^*e, 

4t,  -t, 

4c, 

geju(^4. 

reif^en, 

to  travel, 

reif-e, 

.eft,  4, 

4c, 

geret*ft. 

fifd;*en, 

to  fish. 

»^e, 

.ejl,  4, 

4c, 

gefijd;4. 

bab*en, 

to  bathe. 

bab^e, 

.e[t,  .et, 

.etc, 

gebab==et. 

leit^en, 

to  lead. 

leit^c, 

-eft,  =^et, 

.etc, 

geleit^et. 

fegn^en, 

to  bless, 

fegn:=e, 

*eft,  .et, 

.ete. 

gcfegu^ct. 

tabel.n, 

to  blame, 

ta(bl).e, 

-fi,  't, 

4c, 

getabeI4. 

tuonbcr^n 

,  to  wander, 

t»an(br) 

=e,  4t,  4, 

4e, 

gen)anbcr4. 

4.  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 
(Bcittobrtcr  ber  ftarfcn  toniugattonO 

§  142  The  Irregular  Verbs  (called  by  German  gram- 
marians verbs  of  the  Strong  or  Old  Conjugation)  are  all 
native  German  verbs  (except  the  verbs  ^ifcifcil,  !|Jrcifcn,  and 
fl^ireibcn,  which  are  derived  from  the  Latin;  5^<?  §  145). 

Rem.  There  are  one  hundred  and  ninety-one  Irregular  Verbs. 

§  143.  Irregular  Verbs  are  divided  into  seven  classes. 
The  classification  is  based  upon  the  changes  which  the 
radical  vowel  undergoes  in  forming  \k\.e,  jprincijpal  j[)arts : 


1.  Verbs  of  the  first  class  have 
vowel  in  each  jprincijpal part. 


a  different  radical 


2.  With  verbs  of  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  classes, 
the  radical  vowel  of  the  im,jperfect  only  varies  from  that 
of  the  present. 

3.  Verbs  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  classes  have  the  same 
vowel  in  the  iTwperfect  tense  as  in  the  perfect  participle. 

4.  Verbs  of  the  seventh  class  are  anomalous.  They 
follow  in  conjugation  partly  the  laws  of  regular,  and 
partly  those  of  irregular  verbs. 

Rem.  The  following  table  represents  the  changes  the  radical  vowels  under* 
go  in  forming  the  principal  parts  of  the  seven  classes  of  irregular  verbs. 


§  144.] 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


311 


§  144.  Classified  list  of  the  Irregular  Verbs: 


Class. 

Present.     Imperf.    Partic. 

Examples. 

No. 

1st 

i(orC),      a,              U(orO). 

btnb*cn,   banb,      gc*bunb*en. 

45. 

2d 
3d 
4th 

C,             0,           c. 

0,           u,         a. 

a,           ic  {or  \),  a» 

gcb*cn,     a^ah,        ge*gcb*en. 
fd?Iag*en,  fd^Iug,    ge«f(^Iag.en. 

14. 
10. 
14. 

r)th 
6th 

ci,           i  (or  ic),  i  or  (ic), 

\t{t,etc.),fS,             0- 

bei§=en,    bi^,        ge*bi[f*cn. 
gie^^cn,    gofi,       gc^gof^en. 

40. 
52. 

7th    j                 anomalous. 

brtng*cn,  brac^4e,  gc4rad;*t. 

16. 

Total  number  of  irregular  verbs 

191. 



1.  Irregular  verbs  of  the  first  class 


hintm, 

finbcn, 
fcbrotnbcn, 
njinbcn, 
brin^cn, 

fl'm^en, 
rinv^cn, 

fcfewingcn, 

flnflcn, 

fpringcn, 

jwingfn, 

flnfcn, 

flinfcn, 

trinfen, 

gririnncn, 

rinncn, 

ftnncn, 

ftinncn, 

fAmtmmen, 

tfommen. 


fleben, 

Iffcn, 

flfncfen. 

effcn, 

frcffen, 

mcfffn, 


baitb^ 

fanb, 

fd)Wanb, 

tt)anb, 

brang, 

fielang, 

Hang, 

rang, 

f*lang, 

fc^wang, 

fang, 

fprang, 

jwang, 

fanf, 

jlanf, 

tranf, 

bef^ann, 

gcwann, 

rann, 

fann, 

fpann, 

fc^n^amnt, 

ifam. 


gebunben. 

gefunbcn. 

gcic^wunben. 

gerounbcn. 

gebrungcn. 

gelungen. 

geflungen. 

gcrungen. 

gcfc^Iungen. 

gcWhJungen. 

gcfungen. 

gcfprungen. 

gcfungen. 

gejunfen. 

gcjlunfen. 

getrunfcn. 

begonnen. 

gcttjonnen. 

gcronncn. 

gefonncn. 

gcfponncn. 

gefc^wommcn. 

gefommen). 


brec^en, 

fprec^en, 

flec^cn, 

brefci^en, 

flerbcn, 

Perbcrbcn, 

Jrcrben, 

ttjcrbcn, 

ttcrbcn, 

bcrgcn, 

bcrflcn, 

gcbdrcn, 

bclfcn, 

wcrfen, 

treffen, 

jlcdfen, 

fc^rccfen, 

ilc^len, 

befe^lcn, 

cwtpfc^lcn, 

nc^men, 

geltcn, 

fc^elten, 


brac^, 

fprac^, 

f^a(^, 

brafd^, 

jlarb, 

perborb, 

tDarb, 

tt)arb, 

wurbc, 

barg, 

barjl, 

gebar, 

balf, 

warf, 

traf, 

Pact, 

fcbradf, 

mi 

befabl, 

cmpfa^I, 

nabm, 

gait, 

fcbalt 


2.  Irregular  verbs  of  the  second  class 

Ia«, 

genaa, 

ai 

fra§, 

ma§, 

»crga§, 


flCflcbcti. 

trctcn, 

trat. 

gelcfcn. 

fe^cn, 

fai 

gencfen. 

gcfcbe^cn, 

gef(^a^, 

gegcffen. 

(bitten. 

bat. 

gefreffcn. 

(licgcn. 

lag. 

gemeffcn. 

mtn, 

fa§, 

Pergeffen. 

(fein, 

t»ar, 

gebroc^en. 

gefprocbcn. 

gejioc^cn. 

gcbrofdjen. 

gcflorbcn. 

Perborbcn. 

gettjorbcn. 

gen)orben  (or 

geworbcn). 

gcborgen. 

gcborjlcn. 

gcboren. 

gebolfen. 

gctt)orfen. 

gctroffen. 

gejlocbcn. 

gcfcbrocfcn. 

gcflobtcn. 

bcfoblcn. 

empfoblcn. 

gcnommen. 

gegolten. 

gcfcboUcn. 


gctretcn. 

gefcbcn. 

gef(bcb"n. 

gcbetcn.) 

gelcgcn.) 

gefeffcn.) 

gejDcfcn.) 


312 


THE    VERB. 


L§  144. 


3.  Irregular  verbs  of  the  third  class: 


boefctt, 

buF, 

gcbocfcn. 

fcl)logcn, 

fcl)lug, 

gcfd)logcn, 

fftlren, 

Mr, 

gefa^ren. 

tragen. 

trug. 

gctragcn. 

eraben, 

0ru&, 

gegraben. 

fc^affcn. 

fc^uf. 

gefc^affcn. 

laben, 

lub, 

gelaben. 

toa^\tu, 

tt)UC^3, 

geioaci^fen. 

ma^len, 

(ntu^l), 

gcma^len. 

t»af(^en. 

t»Uf(^, 

getcafd^eiu 

4.  Irregular  verbs 

oit\iQ  fourth  class : 

inVitn, 

m, 

gcfaUen. 

fangcn, 

fing, 

gcfongm. 

^olten, 

^ielt, 

ge^alten. 

^angen, 

^tng, 

ge^angen. 

brotcn, 

briet, 

gebratcn. 

(ge^en, 

gtng, 

gegangen.) 

ratten, 

net^, 

gerat^en. 

laufeit. 

lief, 

gelaufen. 

yc^Iafen, 

f^Uef, 

0cf(^lafett. 

Jauen, 

^ieb. 

ge^auett. 

blafen. 

Hiea, 

geblafen. 

ftopcn. 

m, 

gejlo^en. 

la[fen, 

lie^, 

gelaffen. 

rufen. 

rief. 

gerufcn. 

5.  Irregular  verbs 

oitheffth  class 

bd^cn, 

bi#, 

gcbiffcn. 

Ictben, 

litt, 

gclttten. 

kfletien, 

bcflip, 

bcfliffcn. 

fc^neiben, 

f(^nitt. 

gefc^nittcn. 

ret§en, 

n§, 

ficvtffen. 

fnetpen. 

fnipp, 

gefnippen. 

f^lci^en. 

fc^U§, 

Qcfc^Uffen. 

blcibcn, 

blicb, 

gcblieben* 

f^mei§cn, 

fc^mip, 

gefc^mtffem 

retben, 

rieb, 

gerieben. 

fplet^en, 

fpli§, 

gefpliffen. 

j^rctbcn. 

fc^rieb, 

gefc^riebctto 

Hcic^en, 

bltc^, 

gebli(^cn 

treiben. 

tricb, 

getrieben. 

gleid^en, 

0ltc^, 

gegltd^cn. 

lei^ert. 

lie^, 

gcUefcn. 

f^leic^cn, 

f*I{*, 

0ef(^Ud^en. 

fc^reien, 

fc^rie, 

gefc^rieen. 

flrctc^cn, 

ftrtt^, 

geflttc^en. 

jpeten. 

fpie, 

gefpteen* 

rt»ctc^cn, 

tt)t(^, 

getvic^en. 

jet^cn. 

Jic^' 

gejie^en. 

greifcn, 

griff, 

gegriffen. 

gebet^cn, 

gebie^, 

gcbic'^en. 

fcifen, 

«ff, 

Sefiffen. 

nietbcn. 

ntieb. 

gemicbcn. 

fncifcn, 

fniff. 

gefniffen. 

fc^eiben. 

f^icb, 

gefc^ieben. 

^fetfcn, 

l^f^ff, 

Seppffen. 

preifen. 

prte^, 

gcprtcfen. 

fAletfcn, 

f*Iiff. 

gefcbltffett. 

iweifen. 

toica. 

getriefen. 

glettcn, 

9Htt, 

gcglitten. 

fdbtoetgett. 

fcbtrieg, 

gefc^triegm.: 

rdtcn, 

ritt, 

gerttten. 

flctgen. 

jiieg. 

gcfticgen. 

fii^retten, 

f*rttt. 

0ef(^rttten. 

f^cinett. 

fc^ien, 

gefc^ienen 

(beiten, 

flrttt. 

gejlritten* 

(^eiien, 

m> 

geidpen.) 

6.  Irregular  verbs  < 

3f  the  sixth  class : 

«tc#cn, 

90ftf 

gcgoffen. 

liigen. 

log, 

gelogett. 

0cnte§en, 

gcnof. 

genoffen. 

trugen. 

trog, 

getrogen. 

flte§en, 

flo§, 

gefloffett. 

^ftegen. 

^flog. 

gepflogen. 

f*te§cn, 

f(*o^. 

gef(^offen. 

'^eben. 

^ob, 

ge^obcn. 

f*ltc§en, 

f*lo§. 

gef^loffen. 

weben. 

tt)ob, 

gctt)oben. 

fprtc§en, 

iproi, 

gefproffen. 

fdboren, 

fdbor, 

gefcboren. 

serbrie^en, 

t»erbro§, 

perbroffen. 

gfi^ren, 

go^r, 

gegobren. 

flieben, 

flob, 

gefloben. 

((^njfirett, 

fcbtDor, 

gefcboren. 

fdjieben, 

f*ob. 

gefc^oben. 

wdigen, 

toog, 

gcTOogctu 

§144.] 

IRREGULAR    VERBS. 

31 

f*ntcbcn. 

fc^nob, 

gffdinoben. 

bewegcn, 

betoog. 

bcJDogen. 

flicbcn, 

flob, 

Qcflobcn. 

fcc^ten. 

fo*t, 

gefoc^tcn. 

btelen. 

hot, 

geboten. 

Pcc^tcn, 

fIod)t, 

gcfloc^ten. 

i!cbcn, 

fott, 

gefotten. 

mclfen. 

molf, 

gcmolfen. 

itcgcn, 

bog, 

gcbogen. 

fc^meljcn. 

fd)moIj, 

gefc^moljoi. 

flicflcn, 

flog, 

ficflogen. 

fc^weaen 

fc^woU, 

gcfc^teoflen. 

ttjicgcn, 

»og. 

gettjogcn. 

queUen, 

quoll' 

gequoUen. 

friccbcn, 

fro(^. 

gefroc^cn. 

f(^aUen, 

fc^on. 

gcfcfcoHcn. 

riccbcn, 

roc^. 

gcroc^en. 

faufen. 

foff, 

gefoffen. 

flic^cn, 

M, 

geflo^en. 

faugcn, 

fog, 

gefogcn. 

Jie^cn, 

iH' 

gejogen. 

{(^rauben, 

fd^rob, 

gcfc^roben. 

fricren, 

fror, 

gefroren. 

fc^ttoren. 

fc^ttor, 

gcfd)tt5oren. 

ttcrliercn, 

sjcrlor, 

Sjerloren. 

crlofc^cit. 

erIof(^, 

crlofc^cn. 

tricfen, 

troff. 

gctroffcn. 

(btngen. 

bung, 

gebungcn.) 

flimmen, 

flomm, 

geflommen. 

(fc^mben. 

fc^unb, 

gcfc^unbcn.) 

glimmcn, 

glomm, 

gcglommen. 

(i^e^en, 

jlanb, 

gcftanbcn.) 

kllcmmen, 

beflomm. 

bcflommen. 

(t^un, 

t^ot, 

fiction.) 

7.  Irregular  verbs  of  the  seventh  class 

,' 

habm, 

ffattt, 

gcl^abt* 

bringen^ 

bracl)te, 

9cbra*t. 

foUcn, 

foflte. 

gefoOt. 

bcnfcn, 

bac^tc, 

gcbac^t. 

iDoflen, 

tooUtc, 

gcttollt. 

brcnncn, 

bronntc, 

gcbrannt. 

fonncn, 

fonntc. 

gefonnt. 

fenncn, 

fanntc, 

gcfannt 

mofltn, 

moc^te. 

gemoc^t 

nenncn, 

nanntc, 

gcnannt. 

burfcn, 

burftc, 

geburft. 

rcnncti. 

ranntc, 

gerannt. 

muff  en, 

mu§tc, 

gemugt. 

fenbcn. 

fanbtc, 

gcfanbt. 

©iff  en, 

wuite. 

gettju^t. 

ttenbcn. 

tranbte, 

gettanbt. 

Rem.  1 .  To  avoid  the  necessity  of  multiplying  the  classes,  the  verbs  font* 
men,  bitten,  Uegen,  fitjcn,  fein,  ge^en,  ^ei^en,  blngcn,  fd^inbcn,  ge&cn,  t^un,  are 
placed  under  those  of  the  above  seven  classes,  where,  by  the  analogy  of  vo- 
cal changes  in  forming  the  principal  parts,  they  seem  most  appropriately  to 
belong. 

Rem.  2.  The  simple  verbs  from  which  the  compound  verbs  given  in  the 
above  list  (be^ginnen,  be^fleigen,  Bc*ncmmen,  bc^tuegen,  tmp'-\t{}k\\,  er4LM;d)en, 
ge4ingen,  gc^tDinnen,  gc*baren,  gc^nefcn,  gc*fd;e^cn,  ge*bei^en,  gc^nie^en,  \?er=» 
berben,  bcr=gcffen,ber*brie^cn,  "otxStxtn)  are  derived,  are  now  either  antiqua- 
ted, or  provincial  (as  tDtnttCn),  or  are  entirely  obsolete  (as  O.-G.  nesan). 

Rem.  3.  Some  of  the  irregular  verbs  are  also  used  as  regular  in  the  whole 
conjugation  (as  labCH,  brotCll)  or  in  part  of  the  conjugation  (as  brtttCH,  gii^s 

ttn). 

Rem.  4.  Many  of  the  German  verbs  are  allied  to  words  in  other  branches 
of  the  Indo-European  languages,  as  the  Latin,  Greek,  and  Sanscrit. 

Rem.  T).  For  these  and  other  features  of  the  individual  verbs,  see  the  notes 
•o  the  following  alphabetical  list  of  irregular  verbs: 

o 


814 


THE    VERB. 


[§  145. 


§145.  Alphabetical  List 


No.of\ 
Class.  I 


Present  Infinitive. 


2d  anddd  Pers.  Sing. 
of  Present  Indicat. 


Iriiperfect 
Indicative. 


25acfen,^  to  bake. 
23efeBlen,^  to  command. 
^efleiien,  to  apply. 
53e3iunen,^  to  begin. 
33ci§en,  to  bite. 

*  23enemmen,  to  press. 

*  53ergen,*  to  conceal. 

*  23eri1en,  to  burst. 

*  Setuegen,*  to  induce. 
Stegen,'^  to  bend, 
^teten,  to  bid. 
^inben,  to  bind. 
33itten,  to  beg. 
Slafen,Uo  blow, 
©letben,^  to  remain. 
33Ietc^en,^  to  fade. 
33raten,  to  roast. 
23rei^en,'°  to  break, 
©rennen,  to  burn. 
Sringcn,  to  bring. 

*  2)cnfcn,  to  think. 
3)ingen,  to  hire. 
2)refc^en,^^  to  thrash. 
X)rin3cn,  to  press. 
X)urfen,  to  be  permitted. 
©mpfcfjicn,  to  recommend 
^ffen,^^  to  eat. 
Sa^rcn,  to  ride. 
gaUcn,  to  fall. 
^^angen,^*to  catch, 
gec^ten,  to  fight, 
^inben,  to  find. 
§Iec^ten,iUo  braid. 
^Ucgen,  to  fly. 
§liei)en,  to  flee. 
§Ue|en/«  to  flow. 
^re[fen/Uo  devour, 
t^neren/^  to  freeze. 
^dtjrctt/  to  ferment, 
©ebdrcn,  to  bear. 
®eben,  to  give. 
®ebei^en,  to  thrive. 
®et)en,  to  go. 
©elingen,^^  to  succeed, 
©elten,  to  be  worth. 
®enefen,  to  recover, 
©enief en,  to  enjoy. 
®efc()el)en,^^  tc  happen, 
©enjinncn,*"  to  win. 

©icpcn,^^  to  pour.  . 
®leid)cn,^^  to  resemble. 
®leiten,"  to  glide. 


bdcffl,     bdcft, 

.fie^Ill,     =fte|It, 
\iwt  giveii  when 
formed 
regularly. '\ 


birgjl,     btrgt' 


bldfejl,    bldf(e)t 


*brdt|l,  brcit, 
h-td)fl,    bnd)t, 


brifd)ejl,  brif^t 


(t(^  barf),  barf jl,  barf, 
;ficf!ift,    sftel)lt, 

fdljrfl,     fdljrt, 

fduft,     fdat, 

fdngiX     fdngt, 
fic^t(e)il  ftd)t, 


flic^t(e;fl,fli(^t(et), 


friffefl,    fript. 


=Herejl,  =btcrt, 
fiiebj^,     Qtebt, 


m%      Qtlt, 


gefc^ic^t. 


buJ, 

befall, 

beflip, 

be^ann, 

bt$, 

beflomm, 

barg, 

ba(o)rfl, 

betoog, 

bog, 

bot, 

banb, 

bat, 

bliea, 

blteb, 

blic^, 

*  brtet, 
brac^, 
brannte, 
brac^te, 

bung, 

bra(o)fc^, 

brang, 

burfte, 

cmpfafjl, 

a^, 

ftel, 

ftng, 

foi^t, 

fanb, 

flod)t. 

gog, 

flob, 

floi 

frag, 

fror, 

*  goftt, 
gebar, 
gab, 
gebte^, 
Sing, 
gelang, 
gait, 
gena^, 
0eno§, 
9efd)a^, 
gettjann, 

gitd), 
8«tt, 


Imperfect 
Hubjunctive. 


befoile, 

bcfliffe, 

begd(or  o)nnfc 

biffc, 

bctlcmmete, 

bdrgc, 

bd(b)rjle, 

bej»bge, 

bogc, 

bote, 

-bdnbe, 

bdte, 

blicfe, 

bliebe, 

bltc^e, 

briete, 

brdd)e, 

brennete, 

brddyte, 

tdci)tc, 

bitnge, 

brdcojfc^e, 

brdlitjnge, 

biirftc, 

cmpfdl)lc, 

d§e, 

fuljrc, 

ftcle, 

ft'nge, 

fodUe, 

fdnbe, 

fIod)te, 

floge, 

flo^e, 

flofl'e. 

frdpc, 

frore, 

goitre, 

gebdre, 

gdbe, 

gebie^e, 

atnge, 

gcldnge, 

gdlte, 

gendfe, 

genoffe, 

gef*d|)c. 

gewdnne. 

lioffe, 

gUd)e, 

glitte. 


*  The  asterisk  indicates  that  the  whole  verb  (or  the 


§  145.] 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


315 


of  the  Irregular  Verbs. 


1^ 


Imperative. 
Mood.      I 

bacfe, 

bcvjtnnc, 

bctp, 

bctlemme, 

birij, 

biril, 

bctvc^c, 

bii'vj  ih 

bietc), 

bin  be, 

bittc, 

blaf(c). 

bleibvc), 

Hi'ii^c, 

jrat^e), 

ircnne, 
i»riiKj  c), 
ttnU, 
bina, 

britta'c), 

{voantiivi), 
etin>fcljie^ 

i§' 

faf)r(c), 
faa  c), 

fi*t, 
ftnb(c), 
fli*t,. 
flicq 
flii'b'  c), 

trip, 
jricrre), 

gcbicr, 
flicb- 

8ebci^(e;), 
flcbc, 

(irayiting), 

gilt, 

flcncfc, 

gcnicpie), 

{tpantiiiij), 

iU'.vi'.iuc, 

flleite. 


Perfect 
Participle. 


Remarks. 


f^ebarfcn. 

befo^len. 

bfflin'en. 

bev^Diincn. 

ijebiffen. 

bcflommen. 

geboriien. 

gcborjlcn. 

bejvoijcn. 

dcbovjen. 

ijcbotcn. 

gebunben. 

gebcten. 

gcblafcn. 

gcbliebcn. 

ijcbliibm. 

flebraten. 

gebroc^en. 

ijebrannt. 

vjebrvid)t. 

gebungen. 

0ebrof(^cn. 

gebrungcn. 

geburft. 

empfoljlen. 

gcfat)ren. 

vjcfaflcn. 

ijefanijcn. 

flcfoittcn. 

gcfunbcn. 

vjcflodnen. 

vjcflov^n. 

geflobcn. 

gcfloi'i'cn. 

gefrei'fen. 

gefroren. 

gcqobrcn. 

geborcn. 

gegebcn. 

flcbicben. 

gcgangen. 

gelungen. 

flCijoltcn. 

gcncfcn. 

gcnoffcn. 

gefdjcbcn. 

gcrconncn. 

ijciipficn. 

gcglid)en. 

gelttten. 


Rem.  1.  The  following  verbs  in  the  sixth  class,  bicvjen, 
bictcn,  fltcgcn,  fliel)en,  flicpcn,  gcnicpcn,  t^icpen,  fricdjcn,  liiiivA, 
f4)ltepcn,  fpricpcn,  tricfen,  serbricpcn,  ((ict)cn,  formerly  had 
parallel  forms  in  cu  in  the  2d  and  3d  pers.  sing,  of  the 
pres.  ind.,  and  in  the  imperative  (as  tu  bcutfl,  cr  bcut; 
bcutj ;  these  forms  are  now  only  used  in  poetry. 

Rem.  2.  Final  c  of  the  imperative  of  some  verbs,  as  bics 
flrn,  bictcn,  blafcn,  is  dropped  by  some  writers. 

Rem.  3.  Some  verbs  (as  bcrflcn,  tircfd)cn,  etc.)  have  two 
or  more  forms  in  the  imperfect  indicative  or  subjunctive. 


Remarks  on  the  Individual  Verba. 

*  23acfcn  is  also  regular  except  in  participle;  it  is  allied 
to  Gr.  (pdyyEiVjio  roast,  and  ha,tiu  focus  {a  Jii'qjluce). 

'  First  appeared  in  the  15th  century;  from  Gothic  lilhan, 
3  From  O.-G.  kiuan,  to  yawn,  open.  [O.-G.  felahan. 

*  From  bergcn  are  derived  fccr  ^crg,  bic  ^urg. 

'  Regular  when  meaning  "  to  move  from  a  place." 

*  Allied  to  Sans,  hhug,  Gr.  <ptuytiv,  ha.t.  fugere ;  from  it 
are  derived  33oocn>  bow;  ^u^t,  bight  (and  the  French 
bouger,  English  budge). 

'  Compare  English  blast,  blaze. 

*  Related  to  Gr.  XEi-n-tiu,  Lat.  liiiqucre  ;  comp.  Eng.  leave. 
'  The  derivative  blcic^cn,  to  bleach,  is  regular. 

°  Allied  to  hat.  frayigere,  Gr.  p/jyvvfu. 

^  Sometimes  used  as  regular,  except  in  the  participle. 

^'  M.-(}.ezzen,0.-(i.Uan,  Ang.-Sax.e<a;/,Eng.etti (allied to 
Lat.  «fer€,Gr.  e^eii/,  Sans. a(/,  Kelt,  ith) ;  comp. Eng.  etch. 

''  In  the  16th  cent.,  the  participle  was  formed  regularly, 
gccfTcn  (yet  existing  in  some  dialects);  this  was  con- 
tracted gcffcn ;  in  the  l7th  cent,  another  gcs  was  added 
by  false  analogy,  hence  the  double  prefix  in  gcgeffcn. 
Comp.  Eng.  fatig  (and  the  obsolete  verb  tofaitg). 

^*  Allied  to  Lat.  plectere  (plicare),  Gr.  ttXikhu  ;  from  the 
root  of  flec^tcn  comes  also  ^la<iii,Jlax. 

'*  From  the  same  ultimate  root  (beginning  with^)  as  flic* 
gen,  flie^en,  etc.;  allied  to  lia,t. Jliiere  (pltiere),  Jluvium 
(pluvium),  Gr.  TrXvvsiv  (to  wash).  Sans,  plu  (to  Jlow). 
From  fliepen  comes  5l«ft  (compare  English ^osi). 

^^  Contracted  from  ocricffcn. 

^^  The  original  *  (fricfcn)  is  yet  preserved  in  some  dia- 
lects ;  it  appears  in  Srofl. 

*'  Only  used  in  the  third  person  (c^  gclingt,  etc.). 

^x*  The  simple  form  (M.-G.  winnen,  O.-G.  winnan)  is  obso- 

''  Allied  to  Gr.  xvuv^to pour.  .  [let». 

^'^  From  filcid),  a  contraction  of  g'letd^  (from  lih,  like). 

"  From  the  same  root  comes  glatt  (smooth)  ;  and  En< 


part  to  which  it  is  attached)  is  also  conjugated  regularly. 


316 


THE    VERB. 


[§  145. 


Alphabetical  List  of  the 


No.  of 
Class. 


Present  Infinitive. 


*  ®limmen/  to  glimmer. 
®raben,*  to  dig. 
®reifen,  to  grasp, 
-^abcn,^  to  iiave. 
|>alten,*  to  hold, 
^angcn,  to  hang. 
*-^aucn,^  to  hew. 
^ebeh,®  to  heave,  lift. 
•|)eiRcn,  to  command. 
Iitlfcn,^  to  help. 

*  ilcifcn,  to  chide. 
^"enncn,^  to  know. 

*  ^licben, '  to  cleave. 
5tlimmcn,  to  climb. 
JftUn^cn/"  to  sound. 

^ommen,  to  come. 
Jlonncn,^^  to  be  able  (can). 
5lrtC£^en,  to  creep. 
:SaJ?cn/3  to  load. 
:^affcn,  to  let. 
\!aufen/*  to  run. 
!Sicit>en,  to  suffer. 
Scil)en,  to  loan, 
l^cfen,  to  read. 
2ieii|en/^to  lie. 
*!Cofc^en,^*  to  extinguish. 
Sii^icn,  to  lie. 

*  aJloI)Icn,^^  to  grind. 
9J?ciben,  to  avoid. 
*9;?elfen,^no  milk. 
5)?c[fen,'^  to  measure, 
^jioi^cn,^*"  to  be  permitted, 
2}?u[fen,  to  be  obliged. 
SJJcIjmcrt,^'  to  take. 
5fcnnen,^^  to  name. 
'i^JfcJfcu,^^  to  whistle. 

*  ''J^flegen,  to  cherish. 
9)rcifcn,^^  to  praise. 
i3ucUcn,'*  to  spring  forth 
9?atl)cn,  to  advise. 
D^eiben,  to  rub. 
9tei§en,^^  to  tear. 
9teiten,'''^  to  ride. 
0tennen,  to  run. 
^fiiec^cn,^'^  to  smell. 
9thigen,^^  to  wrestle. 
Oiinncn,'''^  to  run. 
Diufen,  to  call. 
^nufcn,^"  to  sonk. 

*  ©augen,^^  to  suck. 

*  ©d^affen,^^  to  create. 

*  ©c^ailen,"  to  resound. 


2d  and  3d  Pers.  ISimj.     Ivuperfect 
of  Present  Indicat.       Indicative. 


Imperfect 
Subjtinctive. 


groibll    groibt, 


m]X   pit, 

^dngfl,    ^oingt, 


m%    W% 


(t(^  fann),  fannjl,  fantt 


Idufjl,     Iduft, 


Itefeft,     Ue|l, 


Itfc^efl,    lifc^t, 


tniHcft,  miliii, 

miffeji,    mi^t, 
(i(^  mag),  magj^,  mag, 
(ic^  muB>,  mu§t,  mu^, 

ntmmfl,  nimmt, 


quiUfl,    quiOt, 
tdtiyftf    tdtl), 


fauffl,    faiift, 


glomm, 
grub, 

Jjattc, 

l)tclt, 
Mng, 
l)ieb, 

m, 

fanntc, 

flob, 

flomm, 

Hang, 

fnift, 

fntpp, 

fam, 

!onnte, 

frod), 

lub,* 

HcB, 

lief, 

Iitt, 

Ite^, 

la^, 

log, 

mieb, 

molf, 

ma^, 

mod)te, 

mu§te, 

nahm, 

nanntc, 

Pflog, 
priest, 
quott^ 
tictf), 

riebf 

rt§, 

rttt, 

rannte, 

roc^, 

rang, 

rann, 

rtef, 

foff, 

fog, 

r*uf, 

f(^oU, 


glommc, 

gritbe, 

gegrtffen, 

i)dtte, 

l)iclte, 

^tnge, 

^icbe, 

^obe, 

^dlfc, 

fennete, 

flobe, 

flommc, 

flange, 

fniffe, 

fntppe, 

fame, 

fonntc, 

frod^e, 

liibe, 

Itc§e, 

liefc, 

litte, 

lie^e, 

Idfe, 

Idge, 

lofc^e, 

Ibge, 

ma()tcti^ 

mtebe, 

molfe, 

md§e, 

mbd)te, 

mu§te, 

naljmer 

nenneter 

pfloge, 
priefe, 

rictlje, 

riebe, 

rtffe, 

ritte, 

renncte, 

roc^e, 

range, 

rd(o)ttnP 

rtefe, 

foffe, 

fbge, 

fitiifc, 

fc^oUc, 


§  145.] 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


317 


Irregular  Verbs  (continued). 

iinp^'ratii 


Mood. 


Firfect 
Participle. 


Jiemarks. 


flUmme, 
firabe, 

ftabe, 

^aiivj  e ', 
i)ci\i  c », 
beb  c), 

fennc, 

fliebvO, 

flimme, 

nin^e, 

Inciter 

fneipc, 

fomm(c), 

{wanting), 
!rte(^(.c), 

lat{t), 

lauf(c), 

umt)> 
m, 

luge, 

mcib(e), 
milf, 
mt§, 
(u/anting) 

nimm, 

nrnner 

prciUc), 

quia, 

tatht, 

rcib  e), 

rctBvO, 

reit  c^, 

rrnne, 

xitd^.e), 

xinit), 

tinn(c), 

ruf(c), 

faufiO, 

faua  c), 

fd)aUc, 


gc^lommcn. 

^cvjrabcn. 

vjcvjrin'en. 

gcf^abt. 

gc^altcn. 

kjeljaucn. 
^ebobcn. 

^ebolfen. 

flcfitfcn. 

^efomit. 

flcflobcn. 

^eflommen. 

lU'flun^cn. 

vjefniffcn. 

ijefnippen. 

^cfommen. 

gefonnt 

^efroc^ctt. 

gelaben. 

flelaffcn. 

gelaufen. 

dcUtten. 

gclic^en. 

gelcfcn. 

flelcacn. 

gcbfc^en. 

gelogcn. 

gemal)len. 

gemieben. 

gemolfen. 

flcmcn'en. 

gemo^t. 

gcmu§t. 

Ofnonttnctt 

flcnannt. 

flfpflo^en. 

gepricicn. 

gcquoUrn. 

qttattftn, 

gcricbcn. 

geriffcn. 

gcritten. 

*  geronnt. 

gcroc^cn. 

gcrungcn. 

geronncn. 

gerufcn. 

gcfoffen. 

gcfogcn. 

gcfd^affen. 

gcfc^oUen. 


glish  (/lad  {smooth^  brig/U)  and  glade,  opening  in  th6 
woods. 

'  The  provincial  glum,  gluntig,  Eng.  gloom,  gloomy,  glum 
(and  Anglo-Saxon  gl6m,  twilight),  a.Te  from  the  same 
root  as  glimmen,  to  glimmer. 

'Allied  to  Gr.  yf)d(pttv,  to  vurite ;  from  graben  are  de- 
rived ^aiiSxab, grave;  tev&raben, ditch;  iiei!9rubc,pit. 

'  llenco  bie ^abe, posseasion  ;  bet ^aUnt  haven ;  l)anbljabcn 

*  From  ^alteu  is  the  interjection  ^alt!  halt!  stop!  [is  reg. 

*  Hence  bie  ^ade,  hoe ;  bai  ^cii,  hay  ;  bet  ^icb,  blow. 

*  Hence  btx  ^cbcl,  lever ;  fcer  ^MbtX,  plan^. 

''  Hence  ^lifcrdJjclfcr ;  bic^ilfc,  l)ilf[o&,  befiolfen,  etc. 

8  Allied  to  hai. garni;  Gr.  yiwav. 

9  Mostly  provincial.  From  fUeben  are  derived  bet  $t\o* 
bm, pulley;  bic  ^Xuit,  cUft ;  bit  ^\wv^t,in7icers. 

'"  Allied  to,  if  not  der.  from  Lat.  clamjere  (Gr.  KXuyy^iv). 
'•  ^neifen  has  come  into  the  High-German  from  the  Up* 

per-German,  Cncipcit  from  the  Lower-German  dialects. 
1'  Allied  to  fcimeu.     From  the  same  root  are  funb,  bie 

^unfi,  fcoS  ^inb,  bcr  Siom^, 
»'  £aben,  to  itivite,  is  regular,  is  from  a  different  root,  and 
'♦  Compare  English  leap,  lope.       [is  allied  to  Gr.  KaXiiv. 
»*  Hence  Ugcn,  to  lay ;  bie  it  age,  site  ;  bad  i'ager,  the  camp. 
'*  Now  used  mostly  in  compounds. 
1^  SRatilen  is  regular  except  in  the  participle.     The  im- 

perf.  is  reg.  in  the  N.-G.     The  irreg.  form  mu()l  (from 

M.-G.  muol)  is  now  only  provincial. 
*"  Now  generally  regular.     From  the  same  root  are  bie 

IBtildf,  milk,  and  tie  SRoKe,  whey. 
''  Hence  baft  Vtaft,  measure.     !l}?effen  is  allied  to  Sans. 

md  ;  Gr.  fitTpov ;  Lat.  metrum  (meter),  from  metire  (to 

measure) ;  also  to  Lat.  modus.     Compare  English  mete. 
««  From  moaen  are  mo^MA^,  possible  ;  bie  ^SUdd^t,  mig/d. 
'^  92cbnten  and  nennen  are  from  the  same  ultimate  root 

as  btt  9iame,  7iame  (allied  to  Lat.  nomen  ;  Gr.  ovofia  ; 

Slav,  imja ;  Sans,  ndman). 
"  Not  found  before  Mid.-Ger.  j  derived  from  Latin  pi- 
pare  {to  peep  [said  of  birds],  in  Low  Latin  to  whistle). 
"  From  Low  Latin,  prcciare  (from  It&im  pretium,  price). 
'*  ©inquctten  is  regular. 

"  Hence  btv  Wcii,  charm;  ber  9?if|,  rent;  bit  Wxi^e,  rift. 
'*  Sereiten,  to  ride  ovei;  is  regular  (not  to  be  confounded 

with  bcreitcit,  to  prepare — from  bereit,  ready). 
»^  From  ried)cn  come  ter  iSctudf,  odor;  ber  ^aud),  mioke. 
•*  From  ber  Wing;  it  signifies  also  to  wring  (clothes). 
*'  As  of  fluids.     Hence  rennen,  to  run;  bie  9Iinne,  gutter. 
'"  Hence  bie  (Suppe,  soup;  compare  English  sop. 
'^  Allied  to  Latin  sugere  {to  f:urk)  and  succrn  (juice). 
"  With  other  significations,  fitaffcn  is  regular.     From  it 

is  derived  fd)bpfcti,  to  create  ;  compare  English  shape. 
"  Hence  bie  <Zd}e\ie,  a  small  bell,  and  ber  <Sc^iUing^  sfiU' 

ling  (sounding  metal). 


318 


THE    VERB. 


[§  145. 


Alphabetical  List  of  the 


No.  of  I 
Class. ! 


Infinitive. 


2d  and  3d  Fers.  Sing, 
of  Present  Indicat. 


Imperfect 

Imperfect 

Indicative. 

Subju7ictive. 

fc^ieb, 

f^tebe, 
fc^iene, 

fc^ien, 

fc^alt, 

f^di  o;ltt, 

(^or, 

fc^ore, 

fc^obe, 

d)o[[e, 
^iiiibe, 

f(^unb, 

*Uef, 

d)Uefe, 

c^lug, 

f^liige, 

d)ltd), 

fd)lid)e, 

f*Hff. 

fd^liffe, 

\m^' 

f^Ulfe, 

fd)Iaiii],^ 

fc^ldnge, 
fdjmtjje, 
fd)mDljer 

fd)mt§, 

■d)n{tt, 

fd)nittc, 

fc^nob, 

fd)nobe, 

fd)rDb, 

fd)rDbe, 

(^raf, 

fc^rdfe, 

d)riel), 

fc^vtebe, 

d)ne, 

fd)rice, 

(^ritt, 

fc^ritte, 

($it)or, 

fd)tt)Dre, 

fd^trieg, 

f(^mtcge, 

d)tt)oU, 

d)n>5Ue, 

c^tt)(tntni/ 

c^tt>dmme, 

d)tt)aub, 

fd)tt)dnbc. 

d)iDang, 

f*U-»dnge. 

d)n?0(,u)r, 

fd)n)o(u'irif 

tai 

\m 

toar, 

todre, 

fanbte, 

fenbt'te. 

fctt, 

fotte, 

fang, 

ange, 

anF, 
ann, 

jdnfc, 
dnne, 

aP, 

fci^e, 

mt, 

foUte, 

pie, 

ptee, 

pann, 

pdnnc, 

mr 

pKff^, 

\m^> 

prdc^e, 

fprof, 

fprbffe, 

fprang, 

fprdnge, 

^a6:i, 

jldc^e, 

jlaf, 

n«fe, 

flanb 

f!dnbc, 

m^> 

fiddle, 

ilteg, 

fliege, 

jlarb, 

f^urbe, 

jlob, 

flobe, 

ftan!, 

|!dnfe, 

W% 

flte^e, 

flrid), 

fh-t(^c, 

5. 
5. 
1. 
6. 
6. 
6. 
6. 
4. 
3. 
5. 
5. 
5. 
1. 
5. 
6. 
5. 
6. 
6. 
1. 
5. 
5. 
5. 
6. 
5. 
6. 
1. 
1. 
1. 
6. 
2. 
2. 
7. 
6. 
1. 
1. 
1. 
2. 
7. 
5. 
1. 
5. 
1. 
6. 
1. 
1. 
1. 
6. 
1. 
5. 
1. 
6. 
1. 
4. 


©c^etben/  to  separate. 
©d^etnen,  to  appear. 
©d)elten,  to  scold, 
©c^cren,^  to  shear. 
©d>itbcn,^  to  shove. 
(Sd)ie§eu,  to  shoot, 
©c^luben,*  to  flay. 
©d)Iafen,  to  sleep. 
<3d)(a3en,^  to  strike. 
<Sd)leid)en,  to  sneak. 

*  ocbkiten,^  to  whet. 
*©i^lei^cn,''  to  slit. 
(3d)Ungcn,  to  swallow. 
©4nteipen,  to  smite. 

*  tod^meljen,^  to  melt. 
©i^neiben,  to  cut. 
©c^nieben,  to  snort. 

*  ©d)rauben,  to  screw. 
*©i'^rc(fen,'no  frighten. 
©i^reiben,^^  to  write. 
©d)reten,  to  cry. 
(Sd)reiten,  to  stride. 
©c^tDdren,  to  fester. 
<3d)tt)etgen,  to  be  silent. 
®d)it)eUen,^2  to  swell. 
(Si^tx)tmmen,^^  to  swim. 
©(^lijmbcn,^*  to  disappear 
(Sd)iDingen,^^  to  swing. 
(Sd)n)oren,^Ho  swear. 
(5et)cn,^Uo  see. 

©ein,^**  to  be. 

*  3enben,  to  send. 
©ieben,  to  seethe,  boil. 
Singert,  to  sing, 
©infen,  to  sink. 
(Stnncn,  to  muse. 
©iBcn,iHo  sit. 
©Olleu,  to  be  obliged. 
(Speien,  to  spit. 
(Sptnncn,^°  to  spin. 
<Splei§en,2t  to  split. 
(5pre4en,22  to  speak. 
©prieBen,'^^  to  sprout. 
©prtngen,^*  to  spring. 
<Sted)en,''^  to  stick. 

*  ©tecfen,'«  to  stick, 
©te^en,"  to  stand. 
©tcl}ten/to  steal. 
©teigen,  to  mount. 
©terben,^^  to  die. 
©tteben,"  to  fly  (as  dust), 
©tinfen,  to  stink. 
©to§en,  to  hit. 
©trdd}ett,  to  stroke. 


fc^terjl,  ft^iert, 


mm'  \m]u 

f(^ldgfl,  fd)ldgt, 


fc|m{lje|l,f£^mtlj(e)t 


fc^ricfjl,  fc^ricft. 


f(^n)tUjl,  fd)n)tUt, 


(tc^  bin),  bifl,  if!, 


(i^  foil),  foUjl,  foU, 


fprtc^fl,     fpri^t, 


flic^fl,      flii^t, 


flie^ljl,    flie^lt, 
jlirbfi,      fiirbt. 


jlofefl,     floret, 


§  145.] 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


319 


Irregular  Verbs  (continued). 


lmperative\      Perfect 
Mood,      i  Purlioiple. 


Remarks. 


|d>eit>c, 
jd)dne, 
fcbilt, 
fd)icr, 

i*tcb  e), 
d)icp(e)- 
cbinl)  e), 
*laf(e), 
fcblai^  t), 
fit>li-id»(c), 

j*ldp  c), 

fdJlu•i^(c), 
|*mcb,e) 
f*raub  e), 

fcbreib,c), 
{d)rci, 
|*rcit  c  V 
*  fdJirare, 

fdJivill, 
fcbirimme, 
jcbtvint'vC 
fcbiiMiujc, 

fcnbc, 

fieb(e), 

ilnn  c), 

{wanting), 

fpeie, 
finnnc, 

(pri*, 
tpricp  e), 

m*, 

ftccff, 
rtcbf, 
mcbl, 

ftcrbcie), 
llicbi  c ', 

fimf  c), 
\\m  c  I, 


^cfc^icben. 

c|cf*icnen. 

gt'l'cborcn. 

gefcbobcn. 

3cid)o[[en. 

^cfdmnt»cn. 

ijcfcblafcn. 

^efcbla^cn. 

!lJcfd^lid)en. 

j  ^cid>lin  en. 

;^cfd)ltncn. 

!9cid>liin0en. 

^cfd>mi[]en. 

I^eidniioljen. 

ijcfd)nittcn. 

i^efdjnobcn. 

vjeidn-oben. 

i^cid)rocfen. 

Igcfdwben. 

U3cfd)rifcn. 

IgcfArittcn. 

ijff*n?orcn. 

I^cid)irit\jcn. 

i^cfd>tvomracn 

;3cfd>n?uni3cn. 

;9iid)n)oren. 

igcfctjcn. 

gcrocicn. 

gcfanbt. 

gcfotten. 

^efun^cn. 

ijefunfen. 

flefonncn. 

gcfcfi'en. 

tjefoUt. 

jacfpicen. 

I^ciponncn. 

iflilpliffcn. 

ijciprc*cn. 

gefproffen. 

^efprun^cn. 

^e|1o*en. 

flcilocfcn. 

geflanben. 

^cfloblcn. 

giMliccien. 

^cflorbcn. 

geflobcn. 

gcilunfcn. 

i^cflppcn. 

|de|lrid)cn. 


*  Regular  as  an  active  verb;  allied  to  Latin  8ci{n)do, 
Gr.  o-xt^ttf.  From  fcbeiben  is  derived  bet  <2ittfeiUl,  top 
of  the  head  (where  the  hair  is  parted). 

'  From  fd)Crcn  are  bie  <2idjaav,  division^  troop;  bic  <Z<iiav, 

{plough)  share  ;  allied  to  fd)orf ,  sharp. 
3  Hence  bie  (Sd)uppc  (and  bie  <3d)aufctj^  shovel. 

*  Compare  English  skin. 

*  Hence  bcr  ®c^lag,  blow;  bic  <S(^Iac^t,  haitle;  compare 
English  slay. 

*  Reg.  when  meaning  todra^r  along^  demolish  ;  comp.  Eng. 
dip;  fc^leifcn  is  allied  vin  li)  to  fc^lei(^en,  flleic^en,  gleitcn. 

^  Regular  when  intransitive. 

*  Hence  bic  <Zdt\anQi,  stiake. 
'  Regular  when  active. 

'°  Reg.  when  trans. ;  irreg.  when  intransitive  {to  he  alarm- 
ed); more  usually  employed  in  compounds,  as  crfd)recfcn. 

»*  From  Lat.  scribere  (to  write  i ;  hence  bic  (^djrift,  writing. 

^»  Hence  bcr  ^duoall,  swelliruj  {of  t/ie  sea) ;  bic  ^dtwctte, 
{door)  sill;  bcr  (Sd)touIfl,  bombast. 

'3  Hence  bcr  <Zdmamm,  sponge;  bcr  ®umpf,  swamp. 

'*  Hence  bic  3d)iDiubfud)t,  consumption. 

"  Hence  bic  ®d)n>in(^c,  winnow. 

'^  Hence  bcr  (Zdjtour,  oath. 

»'  Hence  bic  (Zidft,  sight ;  bad  ©cf!(^t, /ace. 

'»  See§138ifc/n. 

*^  Hence  I'ci^cn,  to  set;  bcr  ®cffcl,  chair;  bet  ®ilj,  seat; 
bcr  <Ba^,  sentence.  Allied  to  Latin  sedere  ;  Greek  '/^tti;  ; 
Russian  s:idjeV ;  Sanscrit  sad. 

»o  Hence  bie  <25pinbcl,  spindle,  distaff;  baS  OcfpinnfJ,  7jarn 
(whatever  is  spun ) ;  bic  (S^piunc,  spider  ;  fpanncn,  to  span. 

'^  Hence  bcr  <25plittcr,  splinter ;  bic  <Spattc,  column. 

"  Hence  bic  (2prad)c,  language;  bcr  (Sprud),  acZa^e. 

»=•  Hence  bcr  (Sproffc,  sprout;  bic  (25proffc,  round  of  a 
ladder. 

'*  Hence  bic  ®pringqiicflc,  spring ;  bcr  Sprung,  /cap,  bcr 
Urfprtinfl,  origin. 

25  Hence  ^cr  3tid),  sfa6;  bcr  ®tid)c(,  htirin  ;  bcr  (Stadiel, 
««»«(/  (bic  (atadjclbccrc,  gooseberry)  ;  bad  ® tiicf ,  jaiccc ; 
bcr  (Stocf ,  ca7tc ;  bic  flange,  stake  ;  flcc^cn  is  allied  to 
fiicfcn,  to  embroider. 

>«  Regular  when  transitive;  regular  or  irregular  when 
intransitive. 

'^  Hence  bcr  ©tanb,  condition;  bie  ©tunbc,  hour ;  bie 
Statt,  stead;  bic  ©tabt,  city;  bcr  (gtabcl  (StaU  , 
stable;  bcr  (StoUcn,  supjxn't ;  bcr  (£tuhl,  c//air;  ftiii^cn, 
to  mpport ;  flcUcn,  to  place;  flat,  .sfearf//;  flctd,  con«/<M- 
oZZy.  ©tC^cn  is  allied  to  Latin  stare;  Greek  iarravai.; 
Slavic  s<«/i  ,•  Sanscrit  stha. 

2«  Compare  English  to  starve. 

i=»*  Hence  bcr  Staub,  dust. 


320 


THE   VERB. 


[§145 


Alphabetical  List  of  the 


No.  of 
Class. 


Present  Infinitive. 


©treiten,  to  contest. 
Xfjun,*  to  do. 
Zxaatn,^  to  carry. 
3:reffen,  to  hit. 
Streiben,  to  drive. 
Xxtkn,  to  tread. 
2;riefen,2  to  drop. 
Srinfen,*  to  drink. 
Slriigen,  to  deceive. 

*  ajcvbcrbm,*  to  spoil. 
SSerbrie^en,  to  vex. 
a^ergeffen,^  to  forget. 
a5erlieren,Uo  lose. 
aBaci>fcn,»  to  grow. 
2Baaen,  to  weigh. 
2Baf^en,^  to  wash. 

*  SBeben,  to  weave. 
2Betd)en,^Ho  yield. 
2Beifen,"  to  show. 
*2Benben,^^  to  turn. 
2Berben,  to  sue  for. 
^erten,'^  to  become. 

2Berfen,  to  throw. 
SBiegen,  to  weigh. 
SBinben,  to  wind. 
2Btffen,^*  to  know. 
^oUen,  to  be  willing. 
3cif)cn,  to  accuse. 
3te^en,'Ho  draw. 
Swtngen,^*  to  force. 


2d  and  M  Pers.  Sing.     Imperfect         Imperfect 
of  Present  Indicat.      Indicative.      Subjunctive. 


trdgfl,    trcigt, 
trirff^,    trtfft, 


trittjl     tritt, 


sbitbfl,  sMrbt, 


todf^efl,  todf(|t, 


luirbjl,   Wirbt, 
tt)ir|l,     h)irb, 

toirfll,    toirft, 


(t(^  wei§),  wei^t,  tt)ci§ 
(ic^  wiU),  h)iU)l  will, 


ftritt, 
tijot, 

trua, 

traf, 

trieb, 

tr  at, 

troff, 

tranf, 

trog, 

oer&orb, 

e^  »crbro^ 

»erga§, 

ijerlor, 

tt>og, 

tooht 
toid), 

wanbte, 
iDavb, 
tt)urbe  (or 
n>arb), 
tt)arf, 
tt)og, 
tranb, 
tt)u^te, 
woUte, 

m> 

Strang, 


[h-itte, 
ti)att, 

triiae, 

trdfe, 

triebc, 

trdte, 

troffc, 

trdnfe, 

troge, 

ocrburbe^ 

ed  ijerbroffc, 

sergd^c, 

seriore, 

KDoge, 

toijbe, 

t»ic^e, 

wiefe, 

wenbetc, 

toiirbe, 

tt)iirbe, 

toiirfe, 
woge, 
JDditbe, 

iDottte, 

ioge, 
jhjdnge, 


§  146.  Table  of  endings  of  Irregular  Verbs. 


Present  Tense. 

Imperfect  Tense. 

'^" 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Imperat. 

Indicative. 

Subjunctive. 

1  Pers.  Sing. 

2  Pers.  Sing. 

3  Pers.  Sing. 

1  Pers.  Plur. 

2  Pers.  Plur. 

3  Pers.  Plur. 

.et,  4, 
^ct,  4, 

.cfi, 

=»cn, 
*cn, 

=cn,  *cn, 
*cn,  *cn. 

-  -tc, 

-  -tc, 

^cn,    4cn, 
4,      4ct, 
*cn,    *tcn, 

^e,      4c, 
.fl,      4cjl, 
^ct,     4c, 

?cn,    4cn, 
.et,     4ct, 
*cn,     4cn. 

Tnfinit.  *cn,  *n. 

Pres.  Part.  =cnb,*nb.        ||  Perf.  Part.  QC— cn,  gc— t. 

i^em.  1.  The  C  is  dropped  from  the  terminations  sCft,  and  sCt  of  the  second 
and  third  person  singular  of  the  present  indicative,  when  the  radical  vowel  is 
changed  (e  to  i  or  \t;  or  a  to  a) :  t(fi  f^te^C,  titt  f^JtiC^ft,  tX  \^tx6iU 


§  146.] 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


821 


Irregular  Verbs  (continued). 


Imperative 

Perfect 

Mood. 

Participle. 

flTCit(Cj, 

^fllrittcn. 

tt)U(« 

gctljan. 

trance), 
trifT» 

getra^cn. 

getroTtcn. 

trcib.e), 

flctricben. 

tritt, 

getreten. 

Vinf  e), 

getroffen. 

getrunfen. 

tru^e, 

getrogen. 

oetbirb, 

Dcrborben. 

(obmlete), 

*  serbroff  en 

»erai§, 
©CTiierc, 

ftergeffen. 
^erlorcn. 

»a*fr, 

gewac^fen. 

gcwc^en. 

gewQId^cn. 

tDcbe, 

*  gewoben. 

wei£^(c), 

gett)ict)en. 

toeife, 

getDicjen. 

tt>cnbc, 

gewanbt. 

toirb, 

geworben. 

tocrbe, 

geworben. 

ttlrf, 

gelDorfcn. 

toieac, 
totnbe, 

gcwogcn. 

gewunben. 

»»if[c, 

ge»u§t. 

»oUe, 

gewoUt. 

jeilie. 

gejicljcn. 

iwtngc, 

gcjogcn. 

gejtDungcn. 

Remarks. 


^  Hence  bie  Ztfat,  deed;  bet  liyaUv,  doer;  tffixtie,  active; 
tl)unUdf, feasible.  In  many  dialects  t^un  is  used  as  auxilia- 
ry, as  in  English  :  &x  tfjat  nid)t  f  omtncn,  ?i€  did  not  come. 

'  Hence  bic  Ztadyt,  costume,  and  ta^  ©cttcibc,  grain.  The 
derivative  verbs  bcantragcn,  and  bcauftvagcn  (from  bcr 
3lntrag  and  bcr  5luftrag;  are  regular. 

3  Hence  bi<  Zroufc,  trough  ;  bcr  Xro^fcn^  drop,  \drunken. 

*  Hence  bcr  Srant,  drink  ;  crtrinCcn,  to  drown  ;  bctruntctw 

*  The  simple  verb  bcrbcti  is  yet  used  in  theBavar.  dialect. 

*  Compare  the  English  verb  get. 

'  The  original  S  of  »erlicren  ( Goth. /raZiwsan;  O.-G./ar- 
liosan;  M.-G.  veiiiesen  ;  N.-G.  verliei-en)  appears  in  the 
adjective  loi,  loose;  and  the  noun  bcr  3$erlufl,  loss. 

^  Compare  the  English  verb  to  wax  (and  wane). 

'  Hence  bic  SBdfc^c,  washing. 

'°  Hence  toctd),  weak  (whence  tocic^cn  [reg.],  to  soften), 

'*  From  the  adjective  toctfc^  wise. 

' '  Hence  bic  SBanb,  wall ;  bad  @cn>anb,  raiment ;  qttoanbtf 
dezteroits;  bic  £cinn>anb,  linen;  bic  9Binbc,  windlass; 
iDcnben,  to  turn  ;  toatittvn,  to  wander;  bic  SBunbc,  wound. 

"  Allied  to  Latin  i;<?r<e7'e,  and  to  stodrtd  (Ei  glish  -ward). 

»♦  Allied  to  Lat.  videre  ;  Gr.  'i6i\v ;  Sans.  wid.  From  triffen 
are  derived  flctoi^,  certain;  tai  ©croiffcn,  conscience; 
bic  SBiffcnfcfjaft,  science ;  bcr  SBiif ,  toit. 

'5  Hence  bcr  3ufl,  draft,  train;  bcr  3ugcl,  reins,  bridle; 
bic  Suc^t,  rearing  ;  iwStti,  to  jerk  ;  jiicfcn,  to  draw  {as  a 
siDord) ;  cntiticfcit,  to  charm ;  bcr  J^crjog  (bcr  mit  bcm 
^ccrc  au^jicbt  =  ^cerfii^rer),  duke.  [nials). 

>«  Hence  bcr  3toang,  violence;  bcr  3n)tngcr,  cage  (for  ani- 


(Endings  of  Irregular  Verbs — continued). 
Exc.  The  C  is  usually  retained  in  it\i,  when  the  radical  syllable  ends  in  sg, 

4f  «ff/  A^,  =5 :  as  t(^  Ic[c,  bu  licfcft,  cr  licft 

Rem.  2.  The  full  forms  sCft  and  =Ct  must  be  used  in  the  indicative  when  tha 
Item  ends  in  b  orU     With  other  verbs  also  the  full  forms  are  often  used. 

Rem.  3.  The  t  is  dropped  from  the  imperative  of  all  verbs  that  in  that 
mood  change  the  radical  vowel  C  to  i  or  Ci :  inf.  ttCl^ntCn ;  imp.  ntOtin* 

Rem.  4.  Some  of  the  best  German  grammarians  prefer  that  the  final  st 
should  always  be  dropped  from  the  imperative  of  many  verbs  that  do  not 
change  the  radical  vowel.  But  the  general  usage  is  in  favor  of  its  retention, 
though  it  is  often  dropped  in  poetry. 

Rem.  5.  The  C  of  =cn  and  =cnb  can  only  be  dropped  when  these  endings 
follow  a  vowel  or  a  silent  ^  :  UCtftC^n,  gCfe^n* 

02 


822 


THE    VERB. 


[§  147. 


§  147.  Conjugation  of  the  Irregular  Verb  fil^Iagcn,  to 
strike  (having  l^aficit  for  its  auxiliary) : 

Principal  Parts:  f (^Iag=cn,  f ^lug,  gc=ft^Iag=cn» 

INDICATIVE   MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 
\6)    fC^Iagse,         I        strike, 
bu   ((^liigsft,        thou  strikest. 
er    f^Iiigst,         he     strikes. 


XOXX  f  (^  I  a  g  ^  en,  we  strike, 
il^r  fc^tag^t,  you  strike, 
fie  j  (^  I  a  g  *  en,  they  strike. 


id)    W^ptf         I       strike.* 
bu   i  (^  I  a  g  *  eft,  thou  strikest. 
cr    id;Iag*c,    he     strikes. 
XOXX  fd^tag^cn,  we     strike, 
i^r  fc^tag^ct,  you  strike, 
fie   fc^tag^en,  they  strike. 


Imperfect  Tense. 


X^    f^Iug,  I        struck, 

bu    ft^Iugsft/        thou  struckest. 
er    fC^Iug,  he     struck. 

XO\x  j  d)  I  u  g  =  Cll,  we     struck. 


tf)V  fc^Iug^t,     you  struck. 
fie   f  dj)  I U  g  =<  en,  they  struck. 

I  have  struck,  etc. 

ic^  ^ob^e  gefi^Iagen* 

bu  l^aft  gefc^tagen. 

cr   ]^at  gefdjUgeu. 

njtr  ^ab^en  gefc^Iageu. 

i^r  ^ab^t  gefd;(ageu. 

fic   ^ab==en  gefc^tagen. 


\6)  fi^Iiigse,      i      struck. 

bu  j  d;  I  ii  g  ^  eft,  thou  struckest. 
er  fcj)Iiig*e,  he  struck. 
Xoxx  j  (^  t  it  g  =  en,  we  struck, 
i^r  jc^Iiig  =  et,  you  struck, 
fie  j  d^  I  it  g  =^  en,  they  struck. 
Perfect  Tense. 

I  have  struck,  etc. 

x^  ^at)=e     nefcilagcn* 

bu  t)  a  b  ==  eft  g  e  f  c^  t  a  g  e  u. 
cr  ]^aB  =  e  gefc^Iageu. 
XOXX  ^  a  b  *  en  g  e  f  c^  I  a  g  e  u. 
i^r  i^id^^ti  geid)lageu. 
fie  ^  a  b  ^  en  g  e  i  (^  1 0  g  e  n. 


Pluperfect  Tense. 


I  had  struck,  etc. 

\^  l^at^te  gcfdjiatjen* 
bu  ^at^tcft  gefd;lagcn. 
er  ^  a  t  *  te  g  e  f  c^  I  a  g  e  u. 
ttJtr  ^ at* ten  gefd;tagen. 
t^r  ^at*tet  gefc()Iageu. 
fic  ^at^ten  gefd^Iagen. 


I  shall  strike,  etc. 

\^  tijerb^e      fi^Iagen* 
bu  ttirft         j^Ugeu. 
er    ti)iri>  f  c^  I  a  g  e  u. 

tctr  ti3  e  r  b  *  en  f  d?  I  a  g  e  n. 
t^r  iD  e  r  b  *  et  f  c^  t  a  g  e  u. 
jtc  tDcrb^enjc^Iagen. 


I  had  struck,  etc. 

td^  W4t     9ef(^Iagen» 

bu  ^cit^teft  gefc^Iagen. 
er  ^  a  t  *  te  g  e  f  d;  t  a  g  e  u. 
XOXX  {)at*ten  gefd;lageu. 
ibr  ^cit^tet  gefd^iagen. 
fie  ^at=^ten  gefd^Iagen. 
First  Future  Tense. 

I  shall  strike,  etc. 

tc^  toerb^e      f^Iagen* 

bu  tr>  e  r  b  *  eft  f  d;  t  a  g  e  n. 
er  trerb^e  jd^Iagen. 
ir»tr  n)  e  r  b  :=  en  j  c^  I  a  g  e  n. 
ibr  tt>erb*ct  jd^Ugcn. 
fie  tuerb^en  fc(>Iagetu 


*  See  Subjunctive  Mood,  §  124. 


147.] 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


328 


I  shall  have  struck,  etc. 

bu  tuirft  gefd^Iagen  ^abcn, 
cr    ©irb  gefd;Iagen  ^at)ClU 

Xoxx  m  e  r  b  -  en  gefd;Iagcn  ^akn. 
tbr  'a^crb-ct  gejd?tagen  ^ttbciu 
ftc  tDcrb-cn  gcfc^Iogcn  ^abcm 


Second  Future  Tense. 

I  shall  have  struck,  etc. 

\^  tocrbsc      flcfc^lagcn  tiabcn. 

bu  tD  e  r  b  ^  eft  {jcfd^Iageii  ^aben, 
er  tuerb^e  gefd;Iagcii  ijabttt^ 
xoix  ti)  c  r  b  *  en  gcfc^Iagcn  ^aDcn* 
il;r  tr)crb*ct  gcfd^tageu  l^aben* 
fie  n)crb*cn  gefc^Iagen  ^abcn. 


CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

I  would  or  should  strike,  etc. 


i^  toiirb^e  ftftlagcn,  or 
bu  tt)iirb*eft'fd;Iagen,  " 
er  tt>iirb*e  fc^Iagen,  " 
ttjir  trilrb«en  fd)Iageu,  " 
ibr  U)ilrb*et  fd^Iageu,  " 
fic  n3ilrb*Ctt  fci^lagen,   " 


(Itnper/.  Subj.). 


i^  ft^liig^e 
bu  fd^Iiig.eft 
er   fd;Iiig*e 
h)ir  fc^Iitg^en 
ibr  fd;tilg-et 
fie  f^Iilg^Ctt 

Perfect  Tense. 
I  would  or  should  have  struck,  etc. 

idf  toiirb-e      geft^Iagen  baben,  or  id;  I)at4e     ocft^lofjcn  (Pi.  Sub 

bu  wilrb^eft  gefd;(agen   ^aben,  "  bu  b ci  t * teft  gcfc^Iageu 

cr   tt)iirb*e    gcfdjiagen   bflben,  *'  er  b^t^te    gef^tagcu 

tDtr  njiirb^en  gefc^Iagen  bnben,  "  trir  ^  ci  t  *  ten  gcfc^Iagcn 

i^r  njilrbset   gefc^Iagen   b^ben,  "  ibr  ^dt*tet  gefc^tageu 

fie  tviirb^en  gefc^Iagcn  bflben,  "  fie  ^ S t  =  ten gcfc^Iageu 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


((blOQse  (bu),  strike  thou. 
jc^lag-e    er,    let  him  strike. 


ftblflg^Cn  ton,  let  us  strike. 
f(bl08=et  (i^r),  strike  you. 
ftftlagsen  fte,  let  them  strike. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Pres.  \^laptn,  to  strike. 


^er/.  gef^Iagen  ^abcn,  to  havt 

struck. 


PAKTICIPLES. 
Pres.  ft^IagsCnb,  striking.  |      Per/,  gefj^lttgen,  struck. 


324 


THE   VERB. 


[§  148. 


§  148.  Conjugation  of  the  Irregular  Verb  fomiticn,  te 
eome  (having  f  ein  for  its  auxiliary) : 

Principal  Parts:  lommcn,  !am,  gefommcn* 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 


Present  Tense. 


t(^  fomm=C,  I  come, 
bu  !  0  m  m  =  ft,  thou  comest. 
er  fomm  =  t,  he  comes. 
Xovc  !otnm==cn,  we  come, 
i^r  fomnt^t,  you  come, 
^e  !  0  m  m  ^  en,  they  come. 


x6)   !0ttlTtt=C,       I        come.* 
bu   f  0  m  m  =  eft,  thou  comest. 

er  fonim  =  et,  he     comes. 

XOVC  fomnt^en,  we  come, 
t^r  !otntn==et,  you  come, 
fie  fomm^en,  they  come. 


Imperfect  Tense. 


ic^   !ttin,  I       came, 

bu   fam^ft,    thou  camest. 
er    fdttt,  he      came, 

totr  !  a  tn  *  en,  we  came. 
\i)X  fam^t,  you  came, 
[ie  fam*en,  they  came. 

I  have  come,  etc. 

\^  Bin  gefommen* 
bu  t)tft  i5e!ommen. 
cr  ift  gcfoutmeu. 
^tr  finb  gefontmeu. 
i^r  feib  gefommen. 
fie  finb  gefommen. 

I  had  come,  etc. 

\^  tear  gefommen. 
bu  njar=ft  gefommen. 
cr  tear  gefommen. 
tt)tr  toar=' en  gefommen. 
i^r  tr>ar^t  gefommen. 
fie  n?ar*en  gefommen. 


ic^  !am=e,  I  came, 
bu  f  a  m  ^  eft,  thou  camesfc 
er  fam==e,  he  came. 
XOVC  fcim^en,  we  came, 
i^r  fam  =  et,  you  came, 
fie  f  ci  m  =  en,  they  came. 
Perfect  Tense. 

I  have  come,  etc. 

ic^  fei       gefommen* 

bu  fei^eft  gefommen. 
er  fei  gefommen. 
ti?ir  jet^en  gefommen. 
i^r  fei^et  gefommen. 
fie  fei^en  gefommen. 

Pluperfect  Tense. 

I  had  come,  etc. 

i^  niar:=e  gefommen. 
bu  tuar^eft  gefommen. 
er  tr>ar^e  gefommen. 
XOVC  tr>Sr=»en  gefommen. 
i^r  Xo'dx^ti  gefommen 
fte  xoax^tvi  gefommen 


First  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  come,  etc. 

id^  mxt't      fommen. 
bu  totrft         fommen. 
er   toirb  fommen. 

taxx  to  e  r  b  *  en  fommen. 
tl^r  toerb^et  fommen. 
fie  h)  e  r  b  *  en  f  0  m  m  e  n. 


I  shall  come,  etc. 

\^  toerb^e      fommen. 

bu  iuerb^eft  fommen. 
er  tt>erb  =  e  fommen. 
Xoxx  tDerb^en  fommen. 
i^r  tx)erb  =  et  fommen. 
fie  n)erb==en  fommen* 


*  See  Subjunctive  Mood,  §  124. 


§  148.] 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


325 


Second  Future  Tense. 


I  ghall  have  come,  etc. 

id}  tocrb-c  offommcn  fcin* 
bu  ttirft  getcmmeu  fcin, 
cr   toirb  gefommcn  fcin, 

iDtr  tvcrb^cn  getommeu  fcm» 
i^r  tt>erb*ct  gctommeu  fcin* 
fic  tDerb*cn  getonimcn  fcin» 


I  shall  have  come,  etc. 

tc^  mtt't  (\ttomnmi  Uin* 
bu  tt)erb=^cft  gefonmicu  feiiu 
cr  tt)erb*c  getommeii  fetn* 
ttJir  h)crb*cn  gctommeu  feiit* 
il;r  tverb^ct  gcfcmmcn  fcin, 
fie  ttjerb*Ctt  gctommeu  fciiu 


bu  tt)iirb*cft  tommeu, 
er  ttjilrb^c  tommcu, 
toir  ttJilrb*cu  tommcu, 
t^r  ttjiirb*ct  tommcu, 
flc  tcilrb^eil  fommen. 


CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 
Present  Tense. 
I  would  or  should  come,  etc. 
fommen,  or      \6)    i'dnUt       {Imperf.  Suhj.). 


bu  tom^cft 
cr  tcim^c 
h?xr  tam^cn 
itjr  tam*ct 
fic  lam  =  Ctt 

Perfect  Tense. 

I  would  or  should  have  come,  etc. 

t(^  toifrb^c      gctommcn  fctn,  or 

bu  tt?ilrb*cft  gctommeu  fctn,  " 
cr  tt)iirb*c  gctommeu  fcin,  " 
totr  tt>ilrb='Cn  gctommeu  fcin,  " 
t^r  tt)itrb*ct  gctommeu  fcin,  *' 
fic  tt>ilrb*cn  gctommeu  fcin,  " 


id)  to'dV't     gefommcn  (P/./S'ttft.) 

bu  U3  a  r  *  eft  gctommeu  " 
er  h)  S  r  #  c  gctommeu  " 
toir  tD  S  r  s  en  gctommeu  " 
t^r  tt)ar*ct  getommeu  *' 
fic  tt)  a  r  ^  en  gctommeu     •* 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


fomm=e  (bu),  come  thou. 
lomm^^e  cr,    let  him  come. 


f  OmmsCn  trir,  let  us  come, 
f  Omm^t   (i^r),  come  you. 
f  omm^Cn  fie,    let  them  come. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 
Pres.  f omm^en,  to  come.  I     Per/,  gcf OmmCn  fcin,  to  have  ccma 

TAETICIPLES. 
Pres,  loramsCnb,  coming.  |     Per/.  gefommCn,  come. 


326  THE   VERB.  [§149-151, 


5.  COMPOUND  VERBS. 
(Bufammcngcfc^tc  BtitttbrtcrO 
§  149.  Compound  Verbs  are  formed  by  iprefixmg  prep- 
ositions, adverbs,  nouns,  or   adjectives  to   simple   verbs. 
They  are  either  Separable  or  Inseparable. 

§  150.  With  Separable  Compound  Verbs: 

1.  The  prefix  takes  the  primary  accent: 
^ug'^ge^en,  to  go  out.  Sluf =gcben,  to  give  up. 

2.  The  prefix  is  separated  from  the  verb,  and  is  placed 
after  the  verb,  and  often  at  the  end  of  the  sentence, 
when  the  verb  occurs  in  main  sentences,  and  is  in  the 
present  or  imperfect  tense  of  the  indicative  or  subjunc- 
tive mood,  or  in  the  imperative  mood : 

©r  nimmt  bag  S3u(^  att,  He  accepts  the  book. 

Sr  noI)m  bag  33uc^  an,  He  accepted  the  book. 

9limm  bag  ^uc^  an!  Accept  the  book ! 

9la:^nt  er  to.%  S3ud;  an  ?  Did  he  accept  the  book? 

Rem.  In  the  compound  tenses,  and  in  the  simple  tenses  when  occurring  in 
subordinate  sentences,  the  prefix  is  not  separated  from  the  verb : 
@r  toirb  bag  33ud;  an'ncfimcn,        He  will  accept  the  book. 
@()e  er  bag  33ud^  an'na^m,  Before  he  accepted  the  book. 

3.  The  p  of  the  infinitive,  and  the  prefix  ge=  of  the 

perfect  participle,  adhere  to  the  verb : 

Slnftatt  bag  33ud;  an'^nnc^mcn—     Instead  of  accepting  the  book— 
(gr  ^t  bag  33uc^  an'QCnommcn,       He  has  accepted  the  book. 

§  151.  The  Separable  Prefixes  are: 

1.  The  particles  aB,  an,  auf,  kt,  H  (bar),  m,  cnHior, 
fort,  gegen  (entgcgen),  ^cim,  ^cr,  ^in,  mtt,  na^,  totcbcr,  ob, 

JJOn,  tocg,  p,  priid,  pfammcn  (together  with  the  com- 
pound separable  prefixes  l^cretn,  ]^erau0,<??^c.,§  157),  which 
are  ahoays  separable. 

2.  The  particles  burt^,  ^intcr,  iikr,  urn,  unter,  and  iotc- 

ber,  when  they  receive  the  primary  accent  (§  154). 


§  152.] 


COMPOUND    VERBS. 


327 


3.  Some  nouns  and  adjectives  used  as  prefixes  are 
separable  (§154,5,3). 

§  152.  Sometimes  compound  verbs  take,  in  addition 
to  their  literal  meaning,  also  a  modified  or  figurative 
meaning : 

Sluf'gcben,  to  give  up,  deliver,  surrender,  abandon. 
2lug'fii^ren,  to  carry  out,  achieve,  accomplish. 

1.  Examples  of  compound  verbs  with  prefix  particles  always  separable: 


Prefix. 

ab,  off,  down ; 
on,  on,  to,  at ; 
aiif,  up ; 

au§,  out,  out  of; 
bei,  by,  with ; 
ta,  there; 
(tav, there) ; 
emvor/  up ; 
gecjcn,  against; 
cnti^ecjcn,  against; 
fcvt,  forth ; 
^cini,  home; 
bcr,  hither; 
bin,  thither; 
mit,  with ; 
nad),  after; 
nicbcr,  down ; 
ob,  over ; 
tor,  before; 
tUCCJ,  away; 
iiU,to; 

jnriicf ,  back ; 
jnjammcn,  together; 


Simple  verb. 

fd;reibcn,  to  write ; 
f ommcn,  to  come ; 
gcben,  to  go ; 
fud;en,  to  seek ; 
tragen, to  carry ; 
bleibcn,  to  remain ; 
ftellen,  to  place ; 
^cbcn, to  heave ; 
reben,  to  speak ; 
ttJtrten,  to  work ; 
fe^en,  to  set ; 
fti^tcfen,  to  send ; 
fommen,  to  come ; 
gcben,  to  go ; 
nebnicn,  totake; 
folgen,  to  follow ; 
legen,  to  lay ; 
fiegcn,  to  conquer; 
fcblagcn,  to  strike; 
nctjmen,  to  take ; 
mac^cn,  to  make ; 
nifcn,  tocall; 
jicf)Cn,  to  draw  ; 


Compound  verb. 

ab' fc^retben,  to  copy, 
an'tommen,  to  arrive, 
auf  geben,  to  go  up,  rise. 
au«'fud;en,  to  select, 
bei'tragen,  to  contribute, 
ba'bleiben,  to  remain. 
bar'fteUen,  to  exhibit. 
em^or'(;cben,  to  elevate, 
ge'genreben,  to  rejoin, 
entge'  genn)irten,  to  counteract 
fovt'fe^cn,  to  continua 
^eim'fd;t(fcn,  to  send  home, 
^er'fommen,  to  come  hither, 
^in'ge^en,  to  go  thither, 
mit'nebmcn,  to  take  with  (one) 
nac^'folgen,  to  follow  after, 
me'bcrlegen,  to  deposit, 
ob'fiegen,  to  vanquish, 
t'or'fcblagen,  to  propose, 
trcg'nebmen,  to  take  away. 
i\n'mad?cn,  to  close, 
jurilcf'rufen,  to  recall, 
jufam'mcnjiebcn,  to  contract 


Compound  verbs  with  prefixes  which  are  separable  when  accented : 


bnrd),  through ;  reifen,  to  travel ; 

ilbcr,  over ;  fet3en,  to  place ; 

um,  around ;  geben,  to  go ; 

untcr,  under  ;  l^altzn,  to  hold ; 

toicbcr,  again ;  ^olen,  to  get ; 

3.  Compound  verbs  with  nouns  or  adjectives  as  separable  prefixes  • 

gtatt,  place;  pnbcn,  to  find;  ftatt'finbcn,  to  take  place 

frei,  free ;  f^Jtec^cn,  to  speak ;       frei'f^rerf)cn,  to  acquit. 

*>oU/  full :  flic^cn,  to  pour ;  t>oU'gic{3en,  to  pour  full. 


burd^'rcif  en,  to  travel  througl- 
il'berfe^en,  to  place  over, 
um'geben,  to  go  around, 
un'terbalten,  to  keep  under. 
tr>ie'berbo(en,  to  get  again. 


328 


THE  VEKB. 


[§  153. 


§  153.  The  Separable  Comp.  Verb  att'nc^tticn,  to  accept 

Principal  Parts:  an'nel)men,  anna^tti,  arGcnommcn^ 


INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  Tense.        Imperfect  Tense. 
I  accept  (it),  etc. — accepted  (it),  e«c. 

id;  nc^mc  (eg)  an*— ita^m  (e§)  an* 


bu  nimmft  „ 

cr  nimmt  ,, 

tt3irne(;men  „ 

t^r  ne^mt  „ 

fie  ne^men  „ 


an*— nal;m[t 
an*— na^m 
an*— na^men 
an*— na^mt 
an*— na^men 


an* 
an* 
an* 
an* 
an* 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Present  Tense.        Imperfect  Tense. 
I  accept  (it),  etc. — accepted  (it),  e^c. 

ic^  nc^ntc  (e§)  an*— naf)mc  (e§)  an* 


bu  net;me[t 
er  ne^me 
xoxx  ne^men 
i{;r  ne^met 
fie  nc^men 


an*- 
an*- 
an*- 
an*- 
an*- 


-nci^meft 

-na^me 

-nci^men 

-na^tnet 

-nci^imen 


an. 
an* 
an* 
an* 
an« 


I  have  accepted  (it),  etc, 

\^  ^abc  (cv^)  angcnommcn* 


Perfect  Tense. 


bu  ^aft  „  augeiiommen.  bu  ^abeft  „  augenommen. 

er  ^at  „  angenommeu.  er  ^abe  „  angenommeu 

tt)tr  iiaben  „  angenommeu  Xoxx  ^abeu  „  angenommeu* 

i^r  ^abt  „  angenommeu.  t^r  l^abet  „  angenommeu. 

flc  ^aben  „  angenommeu.  fie  ^abeu  „  angenommeu* 

Pluperfect  Tense. 

I  had  accepted  (it),  etc. 

\^  Wtt  (eg)  angcnommcn. 


I  have  accepted  (it),  etc. 

id)  i^abc  (eg)  anrjenommcn^ 


I  had  accepted  (it),  etc. 

\^  Ijattc  (eg)  angcnommcn* 


bu  ^atteft 
cr  ^atte 
tt)ir  fatten 
i^r  ^attet 
fie  fatten 


I  shall  accept  (it),  etc. 

\6)  tijcrbc  (eg)  annci^ntctt* 


angenommeu.  bu  ^dtteft  „  angenommeu, 

angenommeu.  er  l^citte     „  angenommeu. 

angenommeu.  hjir  ()atteu  „  augenommen. 

angenommeu.  i^r  ^attet    „  angenommeu. 

angenommeu.  fie  fatten  „  augenommen. 

First  Future  Tense. 

I  shall  accept  (it),  etc, 

\^  ttcrbe  (eg)  anncf)nicn> 

bu  ttjerbeft  „  anuef)meu. 

er  ttjerbe    „  auneWeu* 

loir  toerben  „  annebmeu. 

i^r  ujerbet   „  anne^meu. 

fte  tuerben  „  anne^meu* 


bu  totrft  „  anue^meu. 
er  tt)irb  „  anue^meu. 
toir  tcerben  „  anne^meu. 
i^r  toerbet  „  anne^meu. 
fie  toerbeu  „   anne^meu. 

Second  Future  Tense. 
I  shall  have  accepted  (it),  etc. 

A^n  toerbc  (eg)  angcnommcn  i^aficn 
bu  tt)trft  „  angenommeu  ^aben. 
cr  toirb  „  angenommeu  ^abeu. 
Xoxx  tcerbeu  „  angenommeu  i:fOibixi, 
tl^r  tr^erbet  „  augenommen  ^abeu. 
fie  toerbeu  „    angenommeu  i:jabtu. 


I  shall  have  accepted  (it),  etc. 

x^  mxU  (eg)  angcnommen  ^abcm 

bu  ttjerbeft  „  augenommen  ^ahiix, 
cr  trcrbe  „  augenommen  babeu. 
Xoxx  UJcrbcu  „  augenommen  \:)Oihtn, 
i^r  hjerbet  „  angenommeu  i^dltn. 
fie  toerben  „    augenommen  ^aben. 


§  153,  154.]  COMPOUND   VERBS.  329 

CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

I  would  or  should  accept  (it),  etc. 

\^  loilrbc  (es)  annc^men,  or     id;  iial)mc  (e6)  an  {Imperfect  Svbj.\ 

bu  na(;meft  „  an 
cr  nci^mc  „  an 
tuir  na^mcn  „  an 
i^r  ncibmet  „  an 
fte  iici^mcu  „    an 

Perfect  Tense. 
I  would  or  should  have  accepted  (it),  etc. 

\^  toiirbc  (c^)  angcnommcn  ^aticn,  or  id;  ^iittc  (c«)  anocnommcn(P/.-S'o 

bu  n?iirbe[t  „  amjeuommeu  i;aben,  "  bu  t;atteft  „  angcuommen  "  " 
cr  miirbe  „  angenommen  ^aben,  "  cr  ^citte  ,,  angeuommeu  "  " 
toir  trarben  „  augeuommen  ^abcn,  "  n)tr  fatten  „  angenommeu  "  " 
i^r  tt)iirbct  ,,  angenommen  ^abcn,  "  i^rt^cittet  „  angenommen  "  " 
ftc  TOiirbcn  „    angenommen  ^abcn,  "   fie  i>dtten  „  angenommen    "  " 


bu  ttjilrbefl 

» 

annebmen, 

cr   wilrbe 

II 

anne^men, 

toir  ttjiirbcn 

II 

anne^men, 

i^r  tt>ilrbet 

II 

anne^men, 

fic  ttjilrben 

II 

anne(>men, 

mmm  (bu)  (c«)  an,  accept  (it). 

BCl)mC    er      „    an,  let  him  accept 
(it). 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 

ncOmcn  tinr  (c«)  an,  let  us  accept  (it). 

ncl)met  H)r    „   an,  accept  (it),  [(it). 

ncl)mcn  ftc     „    an,  let  them  accept 


INFINITR^E   MOOD. 

Pres.  (e6)  anjnnc^mcn,  to  accept  I  Perf.  (e8)  anocnommcn  ju  ^aben,  to 

(it).  I      have  accepted  (it). 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  (cS)  annc^mcnb,  accepting  I  Peif.    (e§)   an(JCnommCn,  accepted 

(it).  I    (it). 

§  154.  With  Inseparable  Compound  Verbs: 

1.  The prima?^  accent  falls  upon  the  verb: 

35cr4te^'*cn,  to  understand.  Ueber*fc^'*en,  to  translate. 

Exc.  With  some  verbs  the  prefix  nti^  (§  155,  7)  is  accented,  as  are  all 
prefix  nouns  and  adjectives  except  UoU« 

2.  The  prefix  is  neoer  separated  from  the  verb. 

3.  The  participial  prefix  gc=  (§131)  is  not  added. 

Exc.  Compounds  of  nouns  and  adjectives  (except  tJOK)  take  QC^. 

4.  With  the  infinitive,  JU  precedes  the  verb,  and  is 
written  separately. 


330  THE  VERB.  [§  154, 155. 

5.  The  Inseparable  Prefixes  are : 

1.  The  particles  Jje=,  ttlU  (Cttl^J^),  Cr^  QC^,  m--,  itX'  (and  rai^=), 
which  are  always  inseparable. 

2.  The  particles  burt^,  IttlCr,  «m,  UtttCt,  and  tolthttf  when  the  primary 
accent  falls  upon  the  verb  (§  151,  3). 

3.  Some  nouns  and  adjectives  used  as  prefixes  are  inseparable  (§  151,  3). 

§  155.  The  Inseparable  Particles  be,  ent  (emp),  er,  ge,  »er, 
jer,  are  obsolete  prepositions.     They  are  used  as  follows : 

1.  S3c=  expresses  a  more  intimate  relation  to  the  ob- 
ject than  the  preposition  bet,  from  which  it  is  derived: 

53ei'*fil5*en,  to  sit  near.  S3e4i^'*en,  to  possess. 

1.  SCs  forms  transitive  from  many  intransitive  verbs: 

S3e*[i^'*en,  to  possess  (from  ft^ert,  to  sit). 

2.  Prefixed  to  transitive  verbs,  it  changes  the  relation  of  the  verb  to  its 
object : 

*  S3aumC  ^flanjen  :  eine  ®tcGe    To  plant  trees:  to  plant  a  place  with 
mit  33aumen  tJC^flanjcn,  trees. 

3.  It  is  prefixed  to  some  nouns  and  adjectives  in  forming  verbs : 

S3e*gab'*en,  to  endow.  S3e*frei'^en,  to  set  free. 

2.  ©nt=  (originally  signifying  against)  usually  denotes 

negation,  contradiction,  deprivation,  or  sejparation  : 
©nt^bccfen,  to  discover.  (Sntsge^en,  to  escape, 

(gntstab'en,  to  unload.  (Sltt-rei^'en,  to  snatch  away. 

Bjem.  1.  It  forms  verbs  by  being  attached  to  some  nouns  and  adjectives : 
(Snt^^aU^Jt'-en,  to  behead.  (gnt=f(^urbi9==en,  to  excuse. 

Rem.  2.  (^uU  sometimes  denotes  origin : 

(gtttsfte^'en,  to  arise  from.         (&nt'\\>xm(\''tn,  to  spring  from. 

Rem.  3.  It  sometimes  has  the  meaning  of  lit  (cilt) : 
6nt=^alt'*en  (tnfjatten,  etn^alten),  to  contain. 

Rem.  4.  Before  f,  Cltt  is  changed,  for  euphony,  to  tlll^  in  the  three  verbs 
cm:|3fangcn,  em:^tef;Ien,  em))finben. 

3.  ©r=  usually  denotes  a  motion  outward  or  upward: 

^rsgie^'en,  to  pour  out.  ^X'^th'm,  to  lift  up. 

1.  It  sometimes  denotes  the  passing  to,  or  returning  to  a  condition, 
in  compounds  formed  from  adjectives  and  verbs : 
@r*ri)tl)'en,  to  bhish.  @r*fc^'cu,  to  replace. 


§  155.]  COMPOUND  VERBS.  331 

2.  It  frequently  denotes  acquisition  by  the  subject : 

(Sr^ilCtt'eln,  to  gain  by  begging.     (Sr*rci(^'cn,  to  attain  to. 

4.  ®C=  gives  a  modification  of  the  meaning  of  most 

verbs  to  which  it  is  prefixed ;  it  frequently  indicates 

the  duration  or  consequence  of  an  action : 

©Cbraiid^'en,  to  npply   (braut^cn,  to  need,  use). 
(9c*fte(/en,       to  .Jmit  (ftel^en,  to  stand). 

5.  SBcr=  indicates  primarily  motion  away : 

S3cr*treib'en,  to  drive  away,      S3cr*f(icJ3'en,  to  flow  away. 

1 .  It  frequently  denotes  loss,  error ^  spoiling^  destruction,  end: 

SJcr*fcI;JDcnt)'cu,  to  waste,         S5cr*b(il(/en,  to  lose  blossoms. 
S8er*icit'en,  to  mislead.  93cr*sef;r'en,  to  consume. 

2.  It  sometimes  denotes  passing  to,  or  being  placed  in  a  condition,  espe- 
cially when  prefixed  to  verbs  from  nouns  and  adjectives : 

SJct'A'-'tt'ern,  to  idolize,  deify.    S3cr*anb'er*n,  to  change. 
SJcr-waij'en,  to  make  orphan.   S3tr*bef  jcr-n,  to  improve. 

6.  3cr=  denotes  separation,  dissolution,  or  destruction : 

^tX''\ixz\\'zx[,  to  disperse.  ^Cf'^^tt'en,  to  fall  into  ruins. 

3cr'tci§'cn,  to  tear  in  pieces.     !^tx\^Mo^'^\\,  to  break  in  pieces 
Rtvi.  The  Inseparable  Particles  have  been  developed  as  follows : 
Gothic ;         bi-,       and-,     us-,       ga-,       fair-,      dis-, 
Old-Ger. ;     bi-,       int-,      ur-,       gi-,        far-,       zir-, 
Mid.-Ger.  ;  be-,      ent-,      er-,       ge-,       ver-,       zer-, 
New-Ger.;   be*.      cnt=.     er*.      ge*.      t>er*.      jer*. 

Obs.  1.  lor  examples  of  compound  verbs  with  bUtt^,  l^ttttCt^  iibCt,  UtttCt^ 
Uni,  and  toicbcr  as  separable  and  as  inseparable  prefixes,  see  Less.  XXXV., 
2.  The  two  forms  U)iCbCt  (again)  and  tUtbCC  (against)  are  employed  to  dis- 
tinguish the  adverb  from  the  preposition. 

Obs.  2.  Inseparable  compound  verbs  wfth  nouns  or  adjectives  as  prefixes 
have  the  accent  on  the  prefix  and  take  Qt-  in  the  perfect  participle: 

9{cd)t'sfcrtigen,  to  justify ;       ijnp.,  red^t'fcrtigte ;  per/.part.,  gercd;t'fcrtigt. 

9Kut^'=ma^cu,  to  conjecture ;    "     mut^'ma^te;    "      "     gemutl;mofjt. 
Exc.  Some  compounds  with  Uolls  as  prefix:    tooUjie^'en,  to  execute; 
part.,  ttoUjogcn. 

Obs.  3.  The  prefix  mifs  (related  to  mi[fcn  =  <o  mm)  is  always  inseparable; 
it  has  the  same  meaning  as  the  English  })refixes  mis-,  ill-,  dis-,  des-.  In  some 
cases  the  accent  is  on  the  prefix  mi^*,  in  others  it  is  on  the  verb.  In  some 
( asi's  (]Cs  is  omitted  altogether  from  the  participle;  in  others  it  is  inserted 
bcfoie  the  prefix  mifj*;  in  others  it  is  inserted  between  the  prefix  niifj*  and 
the  verb;  in  some  cases  gC?  may  be  employed  or  omitted  with  the  same  veib. 


332 


THE    VERB. 


[§  156. 


§  15G.  Conjugation   of  the  Inseparable  Compound 
Verb  tJCrftel^en,  to  understand: 

Principal  Parts:  tjcrftc^'en,  tJcrftanb',  tJerftanb'cn* 

INDICATIVE   MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 


X^   UCrftCl^e,  I        understand, 
bu   iJerfte^ft,    thou  understandest. 
er    ijerfte^t,    he      understands. 
Xoxt  ijerfte^en,  we     understand. 
ii)r  ijerfte^t,    you    understand, 
fie  i^erfte^en,  they  understand. 


ic^    UerWC,  I        understand.* 
bu   ijerfte^eft,  thou  understandest. 
cr    iserfte^et,  he     understands. 
XOVC  ijerfte^en,  we     understand, 
i^r  i)er[te^et,  you    understand, 
fie  ijerfte^en,  they  understand. 


Imperfect  Tense. 


t^  DCrftanb,    I       understood, 

bu  i)erftanb[t,  thou  understoodest 

er  t»er[tanb,     he     understood. 

U)ir  Derftanben,  we    understood. 

t()r  terftaubet,  you  understood, 

fie  toerftanbeu,  they  understood. 


I  have  understood,  etc, 

\&i  Ijabc  ucrftanbcm 

bu  t)aft  berftaubeu. 

er   ^at  i)er[tanben. 

tDtr  \:)ai)tx\.  toerftaubeu. 

itjr  ^bt  terftanbeu. 

fie  ^aben  terftanbeu. 

I  had  understood,  etc. 

x6)  !(iattc  uerftanben* 

bu  batteft  tjerftanbeu, 

er  t)atte    toerftanbeu. 

hjtr  ^tten  toerftanbeu. 

t^r  t)attet  t^erftanbeu. 

fie  fatten  toerftaubeu. 


\^    UCrftanbe,  I       understood. 

bu  tjerftciubeft,  thou  understoodest 
er  berftaube,  he  understood. 
tx*ir  t>erftauben,  we  understood, 
t^r  terftciubet,  you  understood, 
fie  toerftanbeu,  they  understood. 
Perfect  Tense. 

I  have  understood,  etc. 

x^  ]^ak  uerftanbcn* 

bu  ^abeft  i)erftanben. 
er  \:)a^t  toerftanbeu. 
tt)tr  \)aktxx  berftanbeu. 
t^r  ^bet  terjitauben. 
fie  \:)ahtx\.  berftaubeu. 
Pluperfect  Tense. 

I  had  understood,  etc. 

tc^  pttc  ucrftanbcn* 

bu  ^cittcft  berftanbcn. 

cr  batte    toerftaubeu. 

Xoxx  fatten  i)erftanbcn. 

i^r  '^attet  berftauben. 

fie  fatten  berftanben. 
First  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  understand,  etc. 

I  shall  understand,  etc. 

id^  toctbc  Dcrftc^cm 

tc^  iDcrbc  Dcrftc^en* 

bu  tt)irft     tocrfte^eu. 

bu  hjerbeft  berftebeu. 

er  tt)trb     tocrftc^eu. 

er  U)erbe    terfte^eu. 

tuir  tverben  toerfte^eu. 

xoxx  tDerbeu  ijerfte^eu. 

t^r  tuerbet  ijcrftefjeu. 

i^r  tDcrbet  i?erftcbeu. 

fie  tDcrbeu  i^erftel^eu. 

fie  n^erben  berftel;cu. 

*  See  Subjunctive  Mood,  §  124. 


§  15G.] 


COMPOUND   VERBS. 


333 


Second  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  have  understood,  etc. 

x6}  mvht  bcrftanbcn  f^ahtiu 

bu  irirft  t>cr[taubcn    ^abcn. 

cr  tt)irb  terjitanben    (labcn. 

xo'xx  tDcrben  »er|'tanbeu   ^abcn. 

i^r  toerbet  tocrftaiiben   ^aben. 

fic  werbcn  ijcrftanbeu   ^abcn. 


I  shall  have  understood,  etc. 

ic^  ujcrbc  ucrftaubcn  ^abcn. 

bu  tDcrbeft  berftanbeii  ^aben. 

er   tv^erbe    terftanbcn  ^aben. 

n)ir  ttjerbcn  Derftaiibcu  i)dbtn. 

xljx  werbet  tjcrftanben  ^aben. 

[ie  iDcrbcn  tocrftanben  ^abcn. 


CONDITIONAJL  MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

I  would  or  should  understand,  etc. 

\<i)  toiirbc  licrftcl)cn,  or  id)  uerftonbe  (Jmperf.  Subj."), 

"  bu  ijerftcinbeft        " 

"  er  toerftanbe  " 

"  tinr  tjcrftcinben        " 

"  i^r  i^erftcinbet         *' 

"  fic  tocrftanben        '* 

Perfect  Tense.  • 

I  would  or  should  have  understood,  etc. 

\(f)  toiirbc   ucrftaubcn  ftobcn,  or  id;  i^attc   ucrftanbcn  (Plup.  Sub.), 

"  bu  ^citteft  toerftaubcu 

"  er  ^attc    berftaubcu 

"  h?ir  j)atten  i>er[tanbeu 

"  i^r  ^attet   ijerftanbeu 

"  fie  fatten  i)er[tanbcu 


bu  n?ilrbe[t  »erflc(;cn, 

cr  triirbe    tjerftcben, 

tt>ir  tDuvbcu  l^crftcl;cn, 

i^r  roilrbet  t»erftcben, 

fie  wiirbcn  loerfte^en, 


bu  anirbcft  t>cr[tant>cu  ^aben 

cr  tt>ilrbe    berftaubeu  ^aben, 

irir  tfiirbeu  t>crftauben  ^aben, 

i^r  triirbet  berftanben  l>aben, 

fie  toiirben  berftanben  ^aben, 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


tJCrftC^C  (bu),  understand. 
tlCCftC^C     er,   let  him  understand. 


UCr[tcl)cn  Unr,  let  us  understand. 
UCrftcM      i(;r,  understand  you. 
UCrfte^Cn    fie,  let  them  understand. 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

Pres.  UCrfte^Cn,  to  understand.      1    Per/.  UCtftonbCU  f^ahtn,  to  hava  uu- 

I  derstood. 

TARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  UcrftC^Cnb/  understanding.    |    Per/.  m\ianhtn,  understood. 


334 


THE    VERB. 


[§  157. 


§  157.  There  are  two  classesof  Doubly-compounded  Verbs: 
1.  Those  having  as  prefixes  Separahle  Compoimd Par- 
ticles (mostly  compounded  with  btt,  l^Cr,  l^ilt,  and  tJOr) : 

Mcidcn,  to  remain;  bttki'llletlien,  to  persist  in  (it), 

fasten,  to  drive ;      bat)er'ta()ren,  to  drive  along 

brtngen,  to  bring ;   ba{;in'l)vingen,  to  bring  ihe  e. 

tuerfeu,  to  throw ;    bame'beriuerfen,  to  prostrate. 

fel^en,  to  place ;       baran'fe^en,  to  hazard. 

jef)en,  to  see ;  bareiu'fefjcn,  to  look  into. 

laff Cn,  to  let ;  l^Crab'laffCU,  to  let  down. 

fommen,  to  come;  ^eran'fommeu,  to  advance. 

Blicfen,  to  look ;       fecrauf  bitden,  to  look  upwards. 
;^te^en,  to  draw ;       berau8'sie{)en,  to  draw  out. 
rufen,  to  call;         berbei'rufen,  to  call  near. 
tafjen,  to  let ;  bereiu'Iaffen,  to  admit. 

!ommen,  to  come ;   ^eru'berfommen,  to  come  over, 
gcben,  to  go ;  ^erutn'ge^en,  to  go  around, 

iie^men,  to  take ;     fjerun'temeljmcn,  to  take  down. 
{;eben,  to  lift ;  J)erbor'l;eben,  to  make  prominent 

treiben,  to  thrive ;    umber' treiben,  to  roam  idly  about 
fa^ren,  to  drive ;     l)ina(l'fal)rcn,  to  travel  down, 
fommeit,  to  come  ;  ^inan'fommen,  to  get  near  to. 
gel^en,  to  go ;  btnaiif  geben,  to  go  up. 

fe^en,  to  see;  binau^'fefjen,  to  look  out. 

ge^en,  to  go;  ^tnein'geben,  to  enter. 

faf)ren,  to  drive;      ^inu'bcifal;ren,  to  cross  over. 
jd;retten,  to  stride ;  ^iutDeg'fc^reitett,  to  stride  away, 
fiigen,  to  join ;         ^tnsu'filgen,  to  add  to. 
fC^ideil,  to  send  ;     Doran'ft^irfCll,  to  send  ahead, 
tioraug'fagen,  to  predict, 
ijorbei'fa^ren,  to  drive  past, 
border' je^en,  to  foresee, 
borii'bereiten,  to  hasten  past. 


Hht'l'  (tliere-by); 

baf^er'  (there-hither); 

bafietm'  (there-thither) ; 

banie'ber  (there-down) ; 

barati'  (there-on) ; 

bareiu'  (therein) ; 

l^Cmb'  (hither-down) ; 

l^eran'  (hither-to) ; 

^erauf  (hither-up) ; 

^erail§'  (hither-out) ; 

l^erbei'  (hither-near) ; 

I;erein'  (hither-in) ; 

^erii'ber  (hither-over); 

tjerum'  (hither-around) ; 

l^erun'tev  (hither-under) : 

^ert>or'  <hither-forward) 

Uinf;er'  (around-hither) ; 
I)tuat)'  (thither-down)  ; 
biuvin'  (thither-up) ; 
^tnauf  (thither-up); 
t)iuau§'  (thither-out) ; 
ijltnetn'  (thither-in)  ; 
^iuii'ber  (thitlier-over); 
t)tntDeg'  (thither-away) ; 
l^injU  (thither-to) ; 
DOran'  (before-to) ; 
t»orau8'  (before-out) ; 
borbei'  (before-by) ; 
toorber'  (before-hither) ; 
toorii'ber  (before-over); 


fagen,  to  say ; 
fasten,  to  drive ; 
feben,  to  see ; 
eilen,  to  hasten ; 

Rem.  The  compound  separable  particles  are  placed  after  the  verb  in  the 
game  way  as  simple  separable  particles  (§  150,  2)  : 

(Sr  ging  um  bie  9J?auern  lucrum,  He  went  around  the  walls. 

2.  Verbs  having  prefixes  compounded  of  (simple  or 
compound)  separable  with  inseparable  prefixes,  as : 

an'-er;        erten'nen,  to  recognize;  an'ertennen,        to  acknowledge. 
bor^er'*er  ;  erten'ncn,  to  recognize;  borl^er'ertcniicn,  to  recognize  beforehand 
Rem.  1 .  The  first  of  these  particles  is  sei)arable : 

(Sr  CrfanntC  e?  an,  He  acknowledged  it. 

6r  eiiaUUtC  t(;n  DOr^lCr,  He  recognized  him  beforehand. 


§158,159.]  REFLEXIVE    VERBS.  335 

Rem.  2.  Some  verbs  thus  compounded  drop  the  first  prefix,  however,  when 
the  position  of  the  verb  in  a  sentence  would  require  the  separation  of  the  par- 
ticle from  the  verb : 

SSaS  mid;  anbctrtfft,  As  far  as  it  concerns  me. 

(but)  (58  ftctrtfit  mid;  nid;t,  It  does  not  concern  me. 

Rem.  3.  Some  verbs  which  are  formed  from  nouns  and  adjectives  with  a 
simple  prefix  have  the  appearance  of  being  doubly  compounded : 
3>erab'fd;eiieu,  to  detest,  abhor  (from  bev  ^2lb'fd;cii,  the  horror). 
S3cur't^eilen,  to  judge,  form  an  opinion  of  (from  baS  Ur't^cil,  judgment). 


6.  REFLEXIVE  VERBS. 

(^unicfjiclcnbc  ^citioiirtcrO 
§  158.  The  number  of  verbs  that  are  used  only  reflex- 
ively  is  much  larger  in  German  than  in  English,  as  : 

3ci)  befinnC  mit^,  I  remember.         ^^)  fc()nC  mid),  I  long. 

Rem.  1.  The  reflexive  use  of  tnmsitive  verbs  also  is  much  more  extensive 
than  in  English ;  many  verbs  take  a  modification  of  their  meaning  when 
thus  used  reflexively,  as : 

3d;  UcrlaffC  mi(ft  auf  i(;n,  I  rely  upon  him  (Derlttffcn,  to  leave,  abandon). 

3rf?  CrinnerC  mid)  barauf,  I  remember  it  (erinUCm,  to  remind). 

3(^  frCUC  mitft  barauf,        I  rejoice  at  it  (frcueil,  to  make  glad). 

Rem.  2.  Some  transitive  verbs  used  reflexively  require  the  reflexive  pronoun 
to  be  in  the  dative  instead  of  the  accusative  case,  as: 


flt^  Onma))cn,  to  assume. 
,f   Cinbilbcn,  to  imagine. 


fi(^  fd)mcit^Cln,  to  flatter  one's  self. 
n    Dorftcllcn,  to  imagine. 


Rem.  3.  Son.e  intransitive  verbs  also  are  used  reflexively,  without  change 
of  meaning : 

3d)  eile  (or  cilC  mid)),  I  hasten.     3cl)  na^C  (or  na^C  mi(^),  I  approach. 
Rem.  4.  Transitive  verbs  often  take  a  reflexive  instead  of  a  passive  form: 
2)cr  ^immcl  bcbctft  ftj!^  mit  2Sotfcn,  The  sky  is  covered  with  clouds. 

§  159.  The  Reflexive  Verb  fictj  frcuen,  to  rejoice: 

INDICATIVE   MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 


id)   frCUC    mi(5,  I       rejoice, 
bu  treuft  bid),   thou  rcjoicest. 
cr    frcut    fi(^,    he     rejoices, 
trir  freiien  un^,  we    rejoice. 
\hx  frcut    cnc^,  you  rejoice, 
ftc  freucn  fi(^,    they  rejoice. 


id)   frCUC   mi^fl       rejoice.* 
bu   frcueft  bid),  thou  rejoicest. 
er   frcuct  fid),    he     rejoices. 
mx  frcueu  un{^,  we    rejoice. 
it)r  frcuct  CU(^,  you   rejoice, 
fie  freucn  fic^i,    they  rejoice. 


Subjunctive  Mood. 


336 


THE   VERB. 


[§i5a 


Imperfect  Tense. 


\^  frCUte  m\^,  I        rejoiced, 

bu  freuteft  bid),  thou  lejoicedst. 

er  freute  fi^,    he     rejoiced, 

tuir  freuten  un^,  we    rejoiced, 

i^r  freutet  cutft,  you  rejoiced. 

fie  freuten  fl^,    they  rejoiced. 


ic^   frCUete  mi(^,  I       rejoiced, 

bu  freueteft  bic^,  thou  rejoicedgt 

er   freuete  fi(^,    he     rejoiced. 

njtr  freueten  un^,  we    rejoiced. 

i^r  freuctet  CU(^,  you  rejoiced, 

fie  freueten  fi(^,    they  rejoiced. 


Perfect  Tense. 


I  have  rejoiced,  etc. 

x^  l^ade  mir^  gcfrcut 

bu  ^aft     Mc^  gefreut. 

er   bat     fi(^  gefreut. 

xo\x  l;aben  itn^  gefreut. 

i^r  ^abt    cu^l  gefreut. 

fie  ^aben  ft(^  gefreut. 


I  have  rejoiced,  etc. 

id;  l)otic  mx^  gefreut 

bu  ^abeft  "^x^   gefreut. 

er   i)abe  fic^    gefreut. 

tuir  b^ben  mt^  gefreut. 

ibr  ^oSid  euc^  gefreut. 

fie  ^abeu  fi^    gefreut. 


Pluperfect  Tense. 


I  had  rejoiced,  etc. 

x^  l^attc  mic^  gefreut 

bu  b^ttcft  bic^    gefreut. 

er   b<itte  fid)     gefreut. 

tDtr  fatten  uu^    gefreut. 

ibr  battet  eu(^  gefreut. 

fie  batten  fit^    gefreut. 


I  had  rejoiced,  etc, 

icb  l^Stte  mid^  gefreut 

bu  b^itteft  ^sx^  gefreut. 

er   ^atte    fid)  gefreut. 

n)ir  batten  un^3  gefreut 

i^r  b^ttet  eu(^  gefreut. 

fie  batten  fic^  gefreut 


First  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  rejoice,  etc. 

icb  toerbe  mx^  fr eueu. 
bu  tt)irft  \sx^  freuen. 
er  n)irb  fi^  freuen. 
to'xx  n^erben  un^  freuen. 
ibr  n^erbet  eu(!^  freuen. 
fie  tuerben  ft(^    freuen. 


I  shall  rejoice,  etc. 

\^  toerbe  mit^  freuen* 

bu  n^erbeft  bi^  freuen. 

er   tuerbe  fit;^   freuen. 

tuir  ujerben  uu^  freuen. 

ibr  merbet  tVi^  freuen. 

fie  tuerben  \x^  freuen. 


Second  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  have  rejoiced,  etc. 

xHf  ttjerbe  ntir^  gefreut  %^U\x* 

bu  njirp     bi(^  gefreut  b^ben. 

er   h?irb     fic^   gefreut  b«ben. 

njtr  tverben  un^  gefreut  b^ben. 

ibr  n^erbet   euc^  gefreut  b^ben. 

fic  toerben  fi^)  gefreut  b^ben. 


I  shall  have  rejoiced,  etc. 

icb  toerbe  vxx^  gefreut  ^a^em 

bu  teerbeft  biti^  gefreut  b^ben. 

er  werbc    \x^    gefreut  b^ben. 

tt>ir  twerben  uu^  gefreut  b^ben. 

ibr  werbet  eu(^  gefreut  b^^^i^* 

fie  toerben  \x^   gefreut  b'lben. 


§  159,  160.]  IMPERSONAL   VERBS.  337 

CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 
Present  Tense. 
I  would  or  should  rejoice,  etc. 
\^   tOiirbC    mit^  frCUCn,  or     ic^   frCUCtC    m\^    {imperfect  Subj.y 


bu  toilrbcft  btl^  frcuen, 

cr   toUrbe    fic^  fvcueii, 

H)ir  tt)iirben  un«f  fveucn, 

i^r  toiirbet  CU(^  freuen, 

fie  toilrbcn  ftd^  freuen, 


bu  freueteji  \^\^ 

er  freuetc    fi^ 

h)ir  freucteu  un^ 

i^r  frcueten  CU(^ 

fie  ti^cucten  ftt^ 

Perject  Tense. 

I  would  or  should  have  rejoiced,  etc. 

\&i  toilrbc  m\^  gcfrcut  Ijafien,  or   id;  ^iittc  mid)  gcfrcut  {PI  Sub.), 

bu  ii)ilrbc[t  bid)  gcfreut  ^abcn,  "    bu  ^vitteft  hid:^  gcfreut 

er   toiirbe    fic^    gcfrcut  I^abeu,  *'     er  ^citte    fid)    gefreut 

toir  tt?ilrbcu  uui^  gcfveut  ^abcn,  "  tt?ir  fatten  iin§  gcfrcut 

t^r  wtirbct  cud)  gcfrcut  ^abcn,  "  t^r^attet  cud)  gcfrcut 

fic  tDttrbcn  fi(^    gcfrcut  ^abcu,  "     fie  l;dttcu  fi(^   gcfrcut 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


frCUe  (bu)  bi(^,  rejoice  thou. 
frene    er  fi(^,  let  him  rejoice. 


frCUCn  n^ir  un^,  let  us  rejoice. 
frCUCt  (ibr)  cud),  rejoice  ye. 
freuca  fie  fl(^,     let  them  rejoice. 

INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

Pres.  frCUCn  Mf  to  rejoice.  I      Per/.  fi(^  [JCfrCUt  ^ttkn,  to  have 

I  rejoiced. 

PARTICIPLEa 
Pret,  ft(^  frCUCnb,  rejoicing.  |      Per/.  ft(^  gCfrCUt,  rejoiced. 


7.  IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 
(Un^crf(JnIid)c  Stitioiirtcr.) 
§  160.  Verbs  which  express  natural  phenomena  are 
impersonal,  having  the  pronoun  C^  {it)  for  their  nomi- 
native : 

SS  bonnert,  it  thunders.  (ge  fc^nctct,  it  snows. 

Hem.  1.  Some  intransitive  verbs  are  used  impersonally,  the  logical  subject 

of  the  verb  being  put  in  the  accusative  or  dative  case ;  in  such  cases  C^  is 

often  dropped  if  another  word  opens  the  sentence : 

(?vl  fricrt  mic^  or  mic^  fricrt,  I  feel  cold,  (but  \6f  friers,  I  am  freez- 

es^ mongclt  i^m  QU  Sfiid^tS,  or  i^m     He  lacks  nothing.  [ing). 

manncK  nid^ts, 
(but)  i^x  UiaUQCU  baaren  ®elbe«,  He  is  in  need  of  ready  money. 

P 


338 


THE    VERB. 


[§  161. 


Rem.  2.  The  passive  and  reflexive  form  of  many  active  verbs  are  frequently 
used  impersonally : 

@§  mxh  »tel  babon  gerebet,  Much  is  said  about  it, 

§ier  t»irb  nic^t  geraud^t,  "Smoking  is  not  allowed  here." 

@3  fragt  fic^,  ob—  It  is  questionable  whether — 

Rem.  3.  ©^  is  often  used  expletively  (like  the  English  expletive  there): 
(S8  brennt  etn  §au^,  there  burns  a  house  (for  ein  ^au^  brennt,  a  house 
is  burning). 

Rem.  4.  ©g  gicllt,  etc.,  is  frequently  used  for  C5  i[t,  ftllb,  etc.  (§  107,  5). 
(S§  gtebt  ttele  Seute,  bte —  There  are  many  people,  who — 


8.  THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 
(^ie  ^affttjform  ijcr  S^itttiirterO 
§  161.  Conjugation  of  the  Passive  Voice  of  the  tran- 
sitive verb  lickn,  to  love  (§  134) : 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


I  am  loved,  etc. 

id;  tocrb^e  oelictit 
bu  tiJtrft  geltebt. 

er   ttJtri)  geliebt. 

xoxx  tuerb^cn  geltebt. 
i^r  tuerb^et  geltebt. 
fie  tt>erb*cn  getiebt. 

I  was  loved,  etc. 

td^  ttjurb=c      gcltcfit 

bu  trurb*c[t  getiebt. 
cr  ttjurb^c  geltebt. 
h)ir  n)urb  =  en  geliebt. 
i^r  n?urb*ct  geliebt. 
fie  tt>urb*cn  geliebt. 

I  have  been  loved,  etc. 

\^  5iii  gcUebt  loorbcn* 

bu  tjtft  geliebt  toorbcn* 

cr  ift  geliebt   toorbcn* 

ttjir  ftnb  geliebt   toorbcn* 

i^r  fcib  geliebt  toorbcn* 

fie  finb  geliebt   toorbcn* 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 
Present  Tense. 

I  am  loved,  etc.* 

x^  tocrb=c      gcltctit 

bu  h?erb^cft  geliebt. 
er  toerb^c  geliebt. 
xoxx  tt)erb  =  cn  geliebt. 
t^r  ttjerb^ct  geliebt. 
fie  toerb^cn  geliebt. 
Imperfect  Tense. 

I  was  loved,  etc. 

x&)  ttiirbsc      gcIicH, 

bu  U)  ii  r  b  *  eft  geliebt. 
er  tr>  it  r  b  ^  e  geliebt. 
toir  t»  il  r  b  *  en  geliebt. 
ibr  tuiirb^et  geliebt. 
fie  to  it  r  b  ^  en  geliebt. 
Perfect  Tense. 

I  have  been  loved,  etc. 

\^  fei  gclietit  morben* 
bu  fei* eft  geliebt  toorben* 
er  fei  geliebt  morbcn* 
xoxx  fei* en  geliebt  ttjorben* 
t^r  fei^et  geliebt  toorben* 
fic  fet^en  geliebt  loorben* 


*  See  Subjunctive  Mood,  §  124. 


§  161.] 


PASSIVE   VOICE. 


339 


Pluperfect  Tense. 


I  had  been  loved,  etc. 

id;  toar  ^tWthX  tuorbcn. 
bu  tijarft  geiiebt  ttiorbcn* 
cr  xaax  cjdiebt  loorbcu. 
tvir  war* en  gelicbt  UJOrbClU 
i^r  tDar*t  geliebt  toorbcm 
fie  tt)  a  r  *  en  geliebt  toorben* 


I  had  been  loved,  etc 

id;  todr-e     n^Hcbt  morben* 

fcu  tt)  a  r  *  eft  ^clicbt  ujorben, 
er  trai>*c  gclicbt  toorben* 
tt)ir  ir>  a  r  :=  en  gclicbt  toorben* 
i^r  xo'dx'ti  gclicbt  teorben* 
fie  w  a  r  ^  en  gclicbt  tiJOrbcn. 


First  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  be  loved,  etc. 

id;  tt)erb=c  gcUebt  tocrbcn. 
bu  iDirft  gcUcbt  toerben, 
er   tiJirb  gctiebt  toerben. 

irir  n?crb*en  gclicbt  ttierben. 
ibr  TOerb>et  gclicbt  loerben* 
fie  werb^cn  geliebt  ttierben. 


I  shall  be  loved,  etc. 

id;  tterb^e  jjeliebt  ttjcrben, 

bu  n)crb:=eft  gclicbt  tticrbcu* 

cr   tt)erb*c  gclicbt  tticrbcn. 

XQxx  trerb^en  gclicbt  mcibciu 

it;r  tt)crb*et  gclicbt  mcrbcu* 

fie  tt?erb*eu  gclicbt  lyerbcn. 


Second  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  have  been  loved,  etc. 

tc^  ttjerbe  gcUeDt  U)orben  fctn. 

bu  trirft     gclicbt  trcrbcn   fein. 

er   mirb      geliebt  trorbcu  fein. 

xo'xx  irerben  geliebt  trorben  fein. 

i^r  trerbet  gclicbt  trorben  fein. 

fie  ttjcrben  gcUebt  trorben  fein. 


I  shall  have  been  loved,  etc. 

id;  toerbe   nc^cbt  ttiorben  fein. 

bu  u?erbcft  geliebt  ivorbcn   fein. 

er  tDcrbe    gclicbt  trorbcu  fein. 

trir  trcrbeu  gclicbt  irorbcn  fein. 

i^r  trcrbet   gclicbt.  trorbcn  fein. 

fie  trerben  gclicbt  n^orbcn  join. 


Perfect  Tense. 
I  would  'or  should  be  loved,  etc. 

td>  ttiiirbe  geliebt  ttierben. 

bu  iDiirbeft  geliebt  ttierben. 

cr   Mrbe  geliebt  ttierben. 

u?ir  iriirbeu  geliebt  ttierben. 

il;r  iDiirbet  gclicbt  ttierben. 

fic  tt)ilrbeu  geliebt  ttierben. 


CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 
I  would  or  should  have  been  loved,  etc 

ic^  ttiiirbe  geliebt  ttiorben  fein. 

bu  n?ilrbe[t  geliebt  trorbeu  fein. 

er  triirbe  geliebt  u?orbcu  fein. 

trir  trilrben  geliebt  trorbeu  fein. 

i^r  tuiirbet  geliebt  trorbeu  fein. 

fie  tcilrben  geliebt  ujorben  fein. 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


fei  (bu)  geliebt,  be  (thou  loved). 

fei    er    geliebt;  let  him  be  loved. 


feien  n?ir  geliebt,  let  us  be  loved. 

feib  (ibr)  geliebt,  be  (you;  loved. 
feien   fie  geliebt,  let  them  be  loved. 

INFINITrVE   MOOD. 

Pre*,  geliebt  ttierben,  to  be  loved,  i     Perf.  geliebt  ttiorben  fein,  to  have 

been  loved. 


Prcs. 


PAKTICirLES. 

I     Pc-rf  geliebt,  loved. 


340  THE  VERB.  [§  162, 163. 

9.  POTENTIAL  VERBS. 

§  162.  The  Potential  Verbs  (called  by  German  gram- 
marians the  Auxiliaries  of  Mode)  are  foUcu,  tDOitcil,  !ons 
ucn,  mogcn,  biirfcn,  miiffen*  They  are  used  only  to  limit 
or  qualify  the  meaning  of  the  infinitive  of  independent 
verbs  (§120,3): 

(Sr  ttlll^  bag  3Sud;  tejen,  He  must  read  the  book. 

Rem.  1.  The  Umited  or  quaUfied  independent  verb  is  often  understood? 

Sr  ^at  eg  gemujjt,  He  was  compelled  to  do  it. 

Rem.  2,  The  Potential  Verbs  are  inflected  in  all  the  moods  and  tenses  like 
independent  verbs,  with  the  exception  that  ttiollctt  alone  is  used  in  the  im* 
perative  mood. 

Rem.  3.  In  the  compound  tenses  the  participial  form  is  employed  only 
when  the  independent  verb  is  omitted;  when  it  is  not  omitted,  the  infinitive 
form  of  the  potential  verb  is  used  instead  of  the  participial  form  : 

Sr  ^at  bag  33uc^  lefen  miiffCll,        He  was  compelled  to  read  the  book, 
(but)  (gr  {)qX  eg  gemU^t,  He  was  compelled  (to  do)  it. 

Rem.  4.  They  all  belong  to  the  seventh  class  of  irregular  verbs  (§  143-145). 
Rem.  5.  All  Potential  Verbs  but  foIlCU  and  lOOlIen  take  the  umlaut  in  the 
imperfect  subjunctive. 

Rem.  6.  The  Potential  Verbs  have  been  developed  thus : 

Gothic;  skulan,  viljan,     kunnan,     magan,  thuarban,  motan, 

Old-Ger.;     scolan,   wellan,  chunnan,  mugan,  durfan,       muozan, 
Mid.-Ger. ;  suln,       wellen,  kiinnen,     mugen,  diirfen,       muezen, 
New-Ger.;   fotten,    tDotteit,  !i5nnen,     mogeit,  biirfen,      niilffen, 
{English);     (shall),  will.        can.  may.       (dare).       must. 

§  163.  The  verb  fofieit  indicates : 

1.  Moral  ohligation  or  duty : 

(Sr  fotttC  eg  t^un,  He  ought  to  do  it. 

SKir  fatten  eg  t^un  foUcn,  We  ought  to  have  done  it. 

2.  Obligation,  duty,  or  necessity  (usually  dependent 
upon  the  will  of  another) : 

2)u  foUft  ®ott  betnen  §errn  lieben  Thou  shalt  love  the  Lord  thy  God 

ton  ganjem  ^erjen,  with  all  thy  heart. 

2)iefe  ^^urd^t  foil  enbigen  (®c^.)  I  This  fear  shall  end ! 

%n  tnetner  S^ufmerffamfeit  fott  eg  There  shall  be  no  lack  of  attention 

titd}t  \t^tn,  on  my  part. 


§  164.1 


POTENTIAL   VERBS. 


341 


3.  A  report,  rumor,  or  general  impression : 

Sr  foU  fcbr  frant  fein,  They  say  he  is  very  sick. 

Sr  foU  tm  ijortijen  3al;re  na6)    He  is   supposed  to  have  gone  to 
^Imerifa  ^ei^ancjeii  fein,  America  last  year. 

Rem.  1.  @0UCtt  is  used  in  many  hypothetical  and  conditional  sentences: 

@ie  foUcn  ciud;  nod;  fo  rcid;  feiu —      Should  they  be  ever  so  rich — 

SScnii  cr  morgeu  fterben  foUte—     If  he  should  die  to-morrow— 
Rem.  2.  ©ottttt  is  sometimes  employed  to  express  iu  past  time  an  action 
that  was  beginning  when  another  action  took  place : 

3)ae!   "i^iiferb   foMtC   cbcn  ijerfviuft    The  horse  was  just  to  be  sold  when 
trcifcii,  ba  ftarb  e8,  it  died. 

Rem.  The  independent  verb  (as  tbun,  ge^en,  bebeuten)  is  often  understood : 

SBaS  foU  id;  tjier  ?  What  shaU  I  (do)  here  ? 

©OU  bie  X^ilr  au\  ober  JU?  Shall  tiie  door  stay  open  or  shut? 

SSoju  foil  bag  ?  What  is  the  use  of  that  ? 

2)aS  \)at  cr  gcfolft,  He  ought  to  have  done  it. 

§  164.  Conjugation  of  the  verb  fottcn* 

Rem.  The  Translation  to  be  given  to  the  Potential  Verbs  varies  greatly- 
according  to  circumstances,  as  is  seen  in  the  remarks  on  foIICIl*  The  defini- 
tions given  in  the  paradigms  are  therefore  to  be  understood  simply  as  being 
among  the  more  usual  ones. 

Principal  Parts:  fottcn,  folltc,  gcfottt* 

INDICATIVE   MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 


^  foil, 

I       ought. 

t^  fo«=c, 

I        ought.* 

bu  foU=ft, 

thou  oughtest. 

bu  foH^cft, 

thou  oughtest. 

cr   foil, 

he     ought. 

cr    foH*e, 

he     ought. 

tt)ir  foil- en, 

we     ought. 

toix  foil* en, 

we     ought. 

i^r  foH.(c)t, 

you   ought. 

i^r  foU^ct, 

you   ought. 

fic   folI^'CII, 

they  ought. 

flc  foil* en, 

they  ought. 

x6)   foliate,  I       should, 

bu   foil*  tCft,  thou  shouldest. 

cr    foU*te,  he     should. 

tt?ir  foil*  ten,  we    should, 

i^r  foll*tet,  you  should, 

fie   foil*  ten,  they  should. 


Imperfect  Tense. 

id)   fottste,        I  should- 

bu   foil*  teft,  thou  shouldest. 

cr    foll*te,     he  should, 

trir  foil*  ten,  we  should, 

ifjr  foll*tet,  you  should. 

flC    foil*  ten,  they  should. 


♦See  Subjunctive  Mood,  §  124. 


342 


THE    VERB. 


[§164. 


Perfect  Tense. 


I  have  been  obligee 

I,  etc. 

\^  ^obe    gcfoUt  (or  fotten)* 

tu   (>a|i      cjefoUt  (' 

'  folten). 

er    {;at      gefoUt  (' 

'  foUenJ. 

tDtr  ^aben  gejoUt  (' 

'  foEeii). 

i^v  ^abt     gefoUt  ("fatten). 

fie  ^aben  gefottt  (' 

'  foUen). 

I  have  been  obliged,  etc. 

\^  ^at)C  gefoUt  (or  joltcn)* 

bu  l;akft  gefoUt  ("joUcii). 

er    ^ak  gefoUt  ("  foUeii). 

tt)ir  (;aben  gefottt  (  "  foUeu). 

t^r  tjabet  gefoUt  ("foUen). 

fie  l;akn  gefoUt  C'foUeu). 


Pluperfect  Tense. 


I  had  been  obliged,  etc. 

\^  ^attc  gcfoUt  ( or  follenX 

bu  l;atteft  gefoUt  (  "  fotten). 

er-  ^atte  gefoUt  ("  foUen). 

h)ir  fatten  gefoUt  ("  foUen). 

i^r  ()attet  gefoUt  (  "  foUen) 

fie  fatten  gefoUt  (  "  fotten) 


I  had  been  obliged,  etc. 

\^  I)ottc  gefoUt  (or  foUcnX 

bu  I;atteft  gefoUt  (''  foUen). 

er  i)atte    gefoUt  ("  fotten). 

\CAX  fatten  gefottt  ("  fotten). 

i^r  ^attet  gefottt  ("  fotten). 

fte  batten  gefottt  ("  fotten). 


First  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  be  obliged,  etc. 

\^  ttjei'bc  fotten* 

bu  hJtrft  fotten. 

er  ttjirb  fotten. 

tDtr  irerben  fotten. 

i^r  trerbet  fotten. 

fie  tt?erben  fotten. 


I  shall  be  obliged,  etc, 

\^  ttjcibc  fotten* 

bu  tuerbeft  fotten. 

er  tt)erbe    fotten. 

tctr  n^erben  fotten. 

i^r  tcerbet  fotten. 

fie  trerben  fotten. 


Second  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  have  been  obliged,  etc. 

i^  tocrbc  gefottt  Ijahtn* 

bu  tt)irft  gefottt  ^aben. 
er  n?irb  gefottt  baben. 
totr  h)erben  gefottt  ^aben. 
t^r  tDerbet  gefottt  ^aben. 
fte  njerbcn  gefottt  ^aben. 


I  shall  have  been  obliged,  etc^ 

\6)  toerbe  gefottt  Iiaben. 

bu  n?crbeft  gefottt  ^abcn. 

cr  njerbe  gefottt  ^aben. 

h)ir  n^erben  gefottt  ^aben. 

t^r  njerbet  gefottt  ^aben. 

jte  tuerben  gefottt  ^aben. 


CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

I  would  or  should  be  obliged,  etc. 

x6)    ttJiirbe    fotten,  or  id;  fottte  (Imjyerfect  Subjunctive). 

bu  tDitrbeft  fotten,  "  bu  fottteft 

cr   ttjiirbe    fotten,  "  er  fottte         " 

n>ir  n)ilrben  fotten,  "  tuir  fottten       " 

t^r  iDiirbet  fotten,   "  i^r  fottteit        " 

fte  tDiirben  fotten,   "  fie  fottten 


§  1G4-1G6.]  POTENTIAL   VERBS.  343 

Perfect  Tense,. 

I  would  or  should  have  been  obliged,  etc. 

id^   toiirbC    OCfoUt  I)ttben,  or       id^    I)attC    ^tWi  {Pluperfect  Subj.), 

bu  murbeft  gefoUt  ^abeii,  "  bu  ^dtteft  gefoUt 
cr  miirbe  gefoUt  ^aben,  "  cr  ^attc  gcjoUt 
tpir  tt?ilrben  gefoUt  ^abcn,  "  n)ir  fatten  gejottt 
i^r  wilrbct  gcjoUt  ^viben,  "  it^r  ^iittct  gcjottt 
fie   tpUrbcn  gejoUt  ^aben,   "       fie  t^dttcn  gejottt 

INFESriTIVE   MOOD. 
Pres.  foUcn,  to  be  obUged.  I      Perf.  OCfoflt  ^allCH,  to  have  been 

1  obliged. 

PABTICIPLE8. 
Pres.  foUcnb,  being  obliged.  |       Perf  (JcfoMt,  been  obUged. 

§  165.  The  Potential  Verb  toottcit  usually  signifies  wil- 
lingness, i7iclination, desire,  intention,  or  determination: 
©r  UJiU  nit^t  mit  un«  gc^cn,  He  is  not  willing  {or  does  not  wish) 

to  go  with  us. 
3^  toill  gieic^  gc^cn,  I  will  go  immediately, 

©ie  ti5nnen  t{;mi  n?ae  oie  tOOQCtt^    You  may  do  what  you  like. 
Rem.  1.  SSBottcn  frequently  denotes  that  an  action  is  about  to  take  place: 

2)te  U^r  toottte  eben  jd;Iagen,  The  clock  was  about  to  strike. 

Rem.  2.  It  may  be  used  to  indicate  that  an  assertion  has  been  made  by 
another  person : 

(Sr  lOiU  ben  ^ometcn,  tvcld^cr  er«     He  asserts  that  he  has  already  seen 
trartct  \r>irb,  fd^ou  gcfebcn  ^ben,        the  comet  that  is  expected. 
Rem.  3.  The  independent  verb  is  often  omitted : 

SSaS  tooUcn  @ic  (babcn)?  What  do  you  wish? 

^a8  ^at  er  gCtOOUt  (or  l^aben  tool*    What  did  he  wish  ? 
len)? 

§  166.  Conjugation  of  the  verb  tooltcn  {see  %  1^4:,  Bern), 
Principal  Parts:  ttJOttCH,  UloUtC,  gctoollt* 

INDICATIVE   MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 


id;  ttiU, 

I       am  willing. 

id;   ttJoUsC, 

I        am  willing. 

bu  ttitlft, 

thou  art  willing. 

bu  roott^cft, 

thou  art  willing. 

er  ttitt, 

he      is    willing. 

cr  rooU-c, 

he      is     willing. 

trir  n)oil*cn, 

we     are  willing. 

roir  roott^cn, 

we     are  willing. 

ibr  xoo\\*{t){, 

you    are  willing. 

ibr  roott^ct 

you   are  willing. 

fie  root  I*  en, 

they  are  willing. 

fie  roott^cn, 

they  are  willing. 

♦  See  Subjunctive  Mood,  §  124. 


344 


THE    VERB. 


[§166 


Imperfect  Tense. 


\^  ttlOttstC,    I        was    willing, 

bu  tt)olt^tCft,  thou  wast  willing, 

er  tDott^tt,     he     was    willing. 

tOXX  toott^tCU,  we     were  willing, 

t^r  ttJott*tCt,   you   were  willing. 

flC  tooE^tcn,  they  were  willing. 


bu  njoE-tcft, 
er   xoQii'ttf 
to\x  iDoU^cn, 

fie  iDott^cn, 


I  was  willing, 
thou  wast  willing, 
he  was  willing, 
we  were  willing, 
you  were  willing, 
they  were  willing. 


Perfect  Tense. 


I  have  been  willing,  etc. 

^atie  getoottt  (or  njollcu)* 


bu  ^aft  getDoUt 
cr  ^at  i5en)oEt 
Xovc  ^aBen  cjetDoUt 
il)r  ^fet  gemottt 
fie  ^aben  gewoEt 


("  iuoUen). 
("  tt)oIIen). 
("  tDoHen). 
("  tcotten). 
("  XQoUtn). 


I  have  been  willing,  etc. 

\^  ^atic  gcttJoUt  (or  ttJoHcn), 

bu  f)abeft  getDoIlt    ("  tootten). 
er   babe    gehjollt 
tt)tr  l^abeu  getrottt 
i^r  bcibet  geiDotIt 
fie  ^aben  getDoUt 


C'  ttJoUen). 
("  tt)otten). 
("  iroEen). 
("  tooEen), 


Pluperfect  Tense. 


I  had  been  willing,  etc. 

t(^  ^attc  o^tooEt  (or  tooKcttX 

bu  ^atteft  gett)oEt  ("  it>oEen). 
er  l;atte  gewoEt  ("  tuoEen). 
Xoxx  fatten  gemoEt  (''  tvoEen). 
i^r  ^attet  geiDoEt  ("  tDoEen). 
fie  l^atten  getuoEt  C'  »oEen). 


I  had  been  willing,  etc. 

\^  Wit  gctuoEt  (or  tooEcn). 

bu  ^atteft  genjoEt  ("  h)oEen). 
er  ^atte  getuoEt  ("  n^oEen). 
n^tr  fatten  gemoEt  ("  tt)oEen> 
t^r  !)attet  getuoEt  ("  h)oEeu> 
fie  tiatten  genjoEt  ("  tDoEcu). 


First  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  be  willing,  etc. 

\^  tocrbc  toottcn* 

bu  trtrft  troEen. 
er  tDtrb  ti^oEcu. 
Xoix  hjerben  tcoEeu. 
t^r  U)erbet  u?oEeu. 
fie  tcerben  UJoEeu. 


I  shall  be  willing,  etc. 

tc^  tocrbe  mUvx* 

bu  n^erbeft  iroEeu. 
cr  ttjerbe  h)oEeu. 
h)tr  toerben  ttsoEcu. 
t^r  U)erbet  tt)oEen. 
fie  toerben  U)oEen. 


Second  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  have  been  willing,  etc. 

\^  tijcrbc  octtjottt  l^abcn. 

bu  ttjtrft  getcoEt  fjaben. 
er  tt)trb  getroEt  ^aben. 
n)tr  toerbeu  getr»oEt  iiabtxx, 
i^r  njerbet  getcoEt  iiabtn, 
fie  toerben  getooEt  ^aben. 


I  shall  have  been  willing,  etc, 

x^  lucrbc  gctooHt  l^aficiu 

bu  ujerbeft  getooEt  baben. 
er  iuerbe  geh?oEt  ^abeu. 
UJtr  tcerbeu  geiuoEt  i:i(Ata, 
x^x  U)erbet  getuoEt  ^aben. 
Tie  h)erben  gettJoEt  ^abcn. 


§  166,  167.] 


POTENTIAL   VERBS. 


345 


CONDITIONAL    MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

I  would  or  should  be  willing,  etc. 

i^    tollrbC    tOOtlCn,  or         ic^    tOOlItC    (imperfect  Subjunctive'). 

bu  troUteft 
cr    tocUU 

tt)tr  hjotttcn         "  " 

i^r  tDoUtet 
fie  tDoUten 

Perfect  Tense. 
I  would  or  should  have  been  willing,  etc. 

i6f  totirbe  qtmUt  f}abtn,  or  id;  pttc  gcujottt  (Piup.  Subj.) 

"  bu  ^citteft  getroUt 

*'  er  ^citte    getrollt 

"  tt)ir  fjatten  gewoUt 

"  ibr  ^attet   gcn?oIIt 

"  fie  fatten  gctuoEt 


bu  tDilrbeft  woUen, 
er  tDiirbe  n?oUcn, 
n)ir  trilrben  njottcn, 
i^r  miirbet  tt»oUen, 
fie   tDilrben  tcollen, 


bu  toUrbcft  gcwottt  ^aben 

er   tr>iirbe   getDoIlt  ^abcn, 

toil  trilrbcn  gctDoUt  ^aben, 

ibr  tDiirbct  gemoUt  ^aben, 

fie  tpiirben  gctoottt  ^aben, 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


toOttC  (bu),  be  willing. 

toOKc  cr,      let  him  be  willing. 


tOOKcn  tDir,   let  us  be  willing. 

tOOUtt  (ibr),  be  willing. 

tOOttcn  flC,      let  them  be  wilUng. 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

Pres.  toOttCn,  to  be  willing.  1      Perf  gCttJOttt  ^obCB,  to  have  been 

I  willing. 

PAETICIPLES. 
Pres.  tOOKcnb,  being  willing.  |      Perf.  gCtOOttt,  been  willing. 

§  167.  The  Potential  Verb  liinnctt  indicates: 

1.  Moral  or  physical  possibility  : 

Sr  fonn  lefeu  unb  fc^reibeu,  He  can  read  and  write. 

2.  A  concession  or  contingency  : 

@te  !i)nntn  mit^  crtrarten,  You  may  expect  me. 

3<^  !ann  uii^  getrrt  bciben,  I  may  have  been  mistaken. 

3.  The  independent  verb  (as  t^un,  fagen,  lefen,  fpre^en, 
t)erflet)en,  etc.)  is  frequently  omitted : 

2Ba«  fonn  icb  bafilr  (tbun)  ?  How  can  I  help  it  ? 

3(^  fflnn  nicbt  treiter,  I  can  do  nothing  more. 

Sr  bat  c§  gctDoIIt,  aber  er  ^at  c3  lie  wished  (to  do)  it,  but  he  was  not 
nid^t  gCfonnt,  able  (to  do)  it. 

P2 


346 


THE    VERB. 


[§  168. 


§  168.  Conjugation  of  fiinncn  (see  §  164,  Bern.): 

Principal  Parts:  fiinncn,  lonnte,  gefonnt* 

SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 
Present  Tense. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


\^    fCttn,  I        can. 

bu  fann=ft,      thou  canst, 
cr   fann,         he     can. 
tojir  tonn^cn,    we    can. 
i^r  fi)nn<c)t,  you   can. 
fie  !5nn*cn,     they  can. 


i^  loniiste,  I  could, 
bu  !  0  n  n  *  tcft,  thou  couldst. 
cr  !onn*tC,  he  could. 
Xaxx  !onn*tcn,  we  could, 
i^r  !onn  =  tct,  you  could, 
fie  !onn*tcn,  they  could. 


I        can.* 
bu   fonn^cft,  thou  canst, 
er    !i)nu*e,    he     can. 
tt)tr  !bun^cn,  we     can. 
i^r  tiJnn^ct,  you   can. 
fie   fonu^ca,  they  can. 

Imperfect  Tense. 

i^  fiinn^te,  i  could, 
bu  Jonn^tCft,  thou  couldst. 
er  fi5nn^tC,  he  could. 
h)ir  fonn^tcn,  we  could, 
i^r  !i)nn  =  tet,  you  could, 
fie  !onu  =  ten,  they  could. 


Perfect  Tense. 


I  have  been  able,  etc. 

\^  l^atic  QCfonnt  (or  ibuncn), 

bu  i)Ci\i     gefount  ("  fi5nnen). 

er  ^at     gefonnt  ("  tcnnen). 

n?tr  ^ben  gefonnt  ("  fi5nnen). 

t^r  ^abt    gefonnt  ("  fonnen). 

fie  ^aben  gefonnt  ("  fbnncu). 


I  had  been  able,  etc. 

x^  \\^iit  gc!onnt  (or  fbnncn)* 

bu  ^attcft  gefonnt  ("  fonnen). 

er  ^tte   gefonnt  ("  fonnen). 

totr  ^tten  gefonnt  ("  fSnnen). 

t^r  ^attet  gefonnt  ("  fonnen). 

fie  fatten  gefonnt  ("  fBnnen), 


I  shall  be  able,  etc. 

tc^  tocrbc  fiinnen* 

bu  tDtrft  fonnen. 
cr  tt>irb  fbnuen. 
t^r  trerben  fijnnen. 
fie  tuerbet  fonnen. 
tr>ir  hjerben  fbnnen. 


I  have  been  able,  etc. 

id;  \faU  gefount  (or  fijnnctt)* 

bu  fjabeft  gefonnt  ("  fonnen). 
er  ^abe  gefonnt  ("  fonnen). 
U?ir  ^aben  gefonnt  ("  fonnen;. 
i^r  ^abet  gefonnt  (''  fonnen). 
fie  ^aben  gefonnt  ("  fonnen). 

Pluperfect  Tense. 

I  had  been  able,  etc. 

i^  pttc  gefonnt  (or  fijnnctt). 

bu  ^citteft  gefonnt  ("  fijnnen). 
er  {;atte  gefonnt  ("  fi5nnen). 
XQ\x  fatten  gefonnt  ("  fonnen). 
i^r  ^attet  gefonnt  ("  fonnen). 
fie  l^citten  gefonnt  ("  fonnen). 

First  Future  Tense.     . 

I  shall  be  able,  etc. 

xd)  mxH  Imntn* 

bu  tt»erbeft  fonnen. 
er  h^erbe  fonnen. 
n^ir  h)erben  fiJnncn. 
i^r  trerbet  fonnen. 
fie  iuerben  f9nnen. 


*  See  Subjunctive  Mood,  §  124. 


§  168,  1G9.J 


POTENTIAL    VERBS. 


347 


I  shall  have  been  able,  etc. 

id;  uicrDc  Qctonnt  f^ahtn* 

bu  wirft     getonnt  ^aben. 

er  TOirb     gefonnt  ^aben. 

tT?ir  tt>€rben  gcfonnt  ^abcn. 

i^r  tverbct  gcfonnt  ^aben. 

fte  tcerbcn  getonnt  ^aben. 


Second  Future  Tense. 

I  shall  have  been  able,  etc. 

\6)  ttjcrbc  gcfount  i^ahtvu 

bu  tt)erbcft  getonut  ^aben. 
er  tTJcrbe  gcfonnt  ^aben. 
tt)ir  trcrbcn  gcfonnt  ^aben. 
i^r  n^erbet  gcfonnt  ^aben. 
fic  JDcrbcn  gcfonnt  ^aben. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 
Present  Tense. 
I  would  or  should  be  able,  etc. 
\6)   toilrbC   fiinncn,  or     ic^   fbnntC    (imperfect  Subjunctive). 

bu  tt)ilrbc[t  fonncn,    "    bu  fi5nnteft         "  " 

cr   tuUrbe    tonnen,    "     cr  fSnntc  *'  " 

tt)ir  tt?ilrbcn  fiJnncn,    "    toit  fBnnten         *'  " 

i^r  tDttrbct  fiJnnen,    *'    i^t  fiJnntet  "  ** 

fic  tt)ttrbcn  tonnen,    "     flc  tbnntcn         *'  ** 

Perfect  Tense. 
I  would  or  should  have  been  able,  etc. 

ttilrbc  gcfonnt  ^abcn,  or    ic^  ^dttc  gcfonnt  (PL  Subj.). 


bu  trilrbcft  gcfonnt  ^abcn, 

er  tt)ilrbc   gcfonnt  ^aben, 

loir  wilrbcn  gcfonnt  ^aben, 

i^r  tDilrbct  gcfonnt  ^aben, 

fie  njiirben  gefonnt  ^abcn, 


bu  ^ttcft  gcfonnt 
er  ijatte  gcfonnt 
ton  fatten  gefonnt 
i^r  ^dttet  gcfonnt 
fte  fatten  gcfonnt 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

/>.«.  UmtUf  to  be  able.  |      Per/,  gctonnt  f^ahtn,  to  have  been 


Pres.  fiinnCttb,  being  able. 


able. 
PABTICIPLE8. 


I      i'erf.  gcfonnt,  been  able. 


§  169.  The  Potential  Verb  miigcn  indicates: 

1.  Permission  or  concession  (like  way  in  English): 

2)U  magft  gcfjen,  Thou  mayst  go. 

Sr  mog  cin  tapfcrer  <Boi'bat  fein,      (I  concede  that)  he  may  be  a  brave 

soldier. 

2.  Desire  or  liking  (especially  in  the  imperf.  subj.) : 

3(^  VXi^Xt  miffen,  - 1  should  like  to  know. 
9)lb(^tC  C8  boc^  gcfd^c^en,  Oh,  that  it  might  happen! 

^c^  ^abc  eS  nic^t  t^nn  miigcn,  I  did  not  like  to  do  it. 

3c^  mog  c9  i^m  nic^t  fagen,  I  should  not  like  to  say  it  to  hint 


348 


THE   VERB. 


[§  170. 


§  170.  Conjugation  of  ttlOOCn  {see  §  164, 7?^m.): 
Principal  Parts:  mijgcn,  VX^^itf  geuiOC^t* 

INDICATIVE   MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 


id^   mag,  I        may. 

bu   mag  ft,        thou  may  St. 
er   mag,         he     may. 
toir  mijg^cn,      we     may. 
i^r  Tni3g<c3t,  you    may. 
fie  mog^cn,     they  may. 


tc^    miig-C,    I        may.* 
bu  mbg^^Cft,  thou  mayst. 
er    inog=C,     he      may. 
XOXX  mog^Cn,  we     may. 
t^r  tni5g*Ct,   you    may. 
fie  mCg^Cn,  they  may. 


Imperfect  Tense. 


\^   mOC^=tC,  I        might, 

bu  mod}*tCft,  thou  mightest. 

cr    mo(^=tC,  he      might, 

toir  Tnod)<tCn,  we     might, 

ibr  tnD(^4ct,  you   might, 

fie  ntO(^4cn,  they  might. 


ic^   mij^-te,  I        might, 

bu  tn8(^4cft,  thou  mightest. 

er    moc^^tC,  he     might, 

tutr  nTi5c^4cn,  we    might, 

i^r  mi5c^4ct,  you  might, 

fie  uibc^4cn,  they  might. 


Perfect  Tense. 


I  have  been  permitted,  etc. 

x^  i^abe  gcmo^t  (or  mbgen). 

bu  f)a[t  gemod;t  ("  mogen). 
er  ^t  gemDct)t  ("  mi5gen). 
xoxx  ^aben  gemoc^t  ("  mbgen). 
i^r  babt  gemoc^t  ("  mbgen). 
fte  ^aben  gemoc^t  ("  mbgen). 


I  have  been  permitted,  ete. 

ic^  l^abe  gemot^t  (or  mbo^ttX 

bu  ^beft  gemod;t  ("  mbgen), 
er  ^aBe  gemoc^t  ("  mbgen). 
Xoxx  ^ben  gemoc^t  ("  mbgen). 
i^r  ^abet  gemoc^t  ("  mbgen). 
fie  ^abeu  gemoc^t  ("  mbgen). 


Pluperfect  Tense. 


I  had  been  permitted,  etc. 

id?  ^attc  gcmo(^t  (or  miigcn). 

bu  ^atteft  gemod;t  ("  mbgen). 
cr  ^atte  gemoc^t  ("  mbgeit). 
n?tr  ^tten  gemoc^t  ("  mbgen). 
t^r  ^attet  gemoc^t  ("  mbgen). 
fte  fatten  gemo(^t  ("mbgen). 


I  had  been  permitted,  etc. 

tc^  pttc  gcmoc^t(ormiigcn)^ 

bu  ^atteft  gemo^t  ("  mbgen). 
er  ^citte  gemoc^t  ("  mbgen). 
n)tr  fatten  gemDd)t  ("  mbgen). 
i^r  ^attet  gemod;t  ("mbgen). 
fte  fatten  gemo^t  ("  mbgen). 


First  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  be  permitted,  etc. 

t^  toerbc  miigcn* 

bu  toirft  mbgen. 
er  tcirb  mbgen. 
tt)ir  toerben  mbgen. 
t^r  njerbet  mbgen. 
fie  i»erben  mbgen. 


I  'shall  be  permitted,  etc. 

x6)  ttjcrjje  mbgcn^ 

bu  hjerbeft  mbgen. 
er  toerbc  mbgen. 
XQxx  tt)erben  mbgen. 
it)r  njerbet  mbgen. 
fte  iDcrben  mbgen. 


See  Subjunctive  Mood,  §  124. 


§170,171.] 


POTENTIAL   VERBS. 


349 


Second  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  have  been  permitted,  etc. 

\&i  ©erDe  ocwotJ)^  l)abcn, 

bu  tt)ir[t    gemoci;t  ^abcn. 

cr  trirb     gcmod^t  ^abcn. 

tcir  tvcrben  gemoc^t  l^abcn. 

i^r  ttJcrbet  gemod;t  ^abcn. 

fie  ttjerbcn  gemoc^t  iiaben. 


I  shall  have  been  permitted,  etc. 

id;  tterdc  ofi«otl)t  !)aDcu, 

bu  ircrbeft  gcim'd;t  l^abeii. 
cr  n?erbe  gcmod^t  ()aben. 
xo'vc  TOerbeu  gcmod;t  ^aben. 
t^r  tverbet  gemod;t  ^abcn. 
fic  tDcrben  gemoc^t  ^abcn. 


CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

I  would  or  should  be  permitted,  etc 

\^    tDiirDC   ntbgcn,   or     ic^    mbt^tC    {imperfect 

Subjunctive). 

bu  tDiirbcfi  mi3gen,    "     bu  mod^teft         " 

et  tt?ilrbe   mogcn,    "     cr   tni5c^tc           " 

teir  ttjUrben  mi3gcn,    "    toir  mod;ten         " 

t^r  tDiirbct  mogcn,    *'    i^r  mod;tet          " 

fic  tDilrbcn  miJgcn,    *'     flc  moc^tcn         " 

Perfect  Tense. 

I  would  or  should  have  been  permitted, 

etc. 

t^  toiirbc  gcmot^t  ^abcn,  or 

bu  trilrbeft  gemod^t  ^aben, 
cr  tciirbc  gcmod^t  ^aben, 
toir  trilrbcn  gcmoc^t  ^aben, 
i^r  »iirbct  gemod^t  ^abcn, 
fie  tollrben  gcmo(^t  ^abcn, 


id;   \}'dttt  gcmO(^t  {Plup.Suh.\ 

bu  ^atteft  gemod;t  "  " 
cr  ^citte  gemod;t  "  " 
n>ir  fatten  gemo^t  *'  " 
t^r  ^attet  gemot^t  *'  " 
fic  ^tteu  gcmod^t      "       " 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 
Pres.  miigcn,  to  be  permitted.         I      Perf.  gcmot^t  ^tt^Cll,  to  have  been 

I  permitted. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  miiocnb,  being  permitted.       |      Perf.  gcillOtl^t,  permitted. 

§  171.  The  Potential  Verb  biirfcn  indicates: 

1.  Permission  (by  law,  or  by  the  will  of  another) : 

Oebcrmanu  barf  2s5affen  tragcn,  Every  body  can  Gegally)  bear  arms, 
aber  nic^t  jcber  barf  baS  SSilb  but  not  every  body  is  permitted  to 
fc^ic^en,  shoot  wild  game. 

3et5t  biirft  i^r  f^iclcn,  You  may  play  now. 

Rem.  With  a  negative  biitfCtt  is  usually  translated  by  ^^must  {not):" 

^'itx  biirfcn  ®ic  nic^t  raud;cn,  You  must  not  smoke  here. 

2.  !Durfen  sometimes  has  the  signification  of  "  to  take 
the  liberty','  " to  dare .•" 

Sr  borf  nid^t  fommcu  o^nc  bic  (Sr*  lie  dares  not  come  without  the  per- 
Iaubni§  fcineS  ^ater*,  mission  of  his  father. 


350 


THE    VERB. 


[§  171,  172 


3.  It  sometimes  has  the  signification  of  may  or  can: 
2Btr  biirf en  auf  unferen  33ruber    We  may  be  proud  of  our  brother. 

ftols  fein, 
2)arf  ic^  tttic^  barauf  berlaffeu  ?       Can  I  rely  upon  that  ? 

4.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  often  signifies: 

1.  A  logical  possibility : 

(S8  biirfte  je^t  ju  f^at  jetn,  It  may  now  be  too  late. 

2.  It  may  be  used  as  a  polite  manner  of  making  a  statement  under  the 
form  of  a  hypothesis : 

SS  bitrftC  ntd;t  jc^tuer  jetn,  bag    It  might  not  be  hard  to  prove  that. 
nac^jutDcifen, 

5.  The  independent  verb  is  often  omitted: 

@r  ^at  nic^t  auSge^en  biirf Cn,  He  did  not  dare  go  out. 

(but)  @r  ^at  e8  nic^t  gcburft,  He  did  not  dare  (do;  it. 

§  172.  Conjugation  of  biirfcn  (see  §  164,  ^^m.): 

INDICATIVE   MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 


\^   bfltf,  I       am  permitted, 

bu   borfsft,  thou  art  permitted, 

cr    barf,  he     is    permitted. 

\X>\X  biirf'Clt,  we     are  permitted, 

t^r  biirf<c)t,  you  are  permitted, 

fie  bitrf*cn,  they  are  permitted. 

Imperfect  Tense. 


ic^  biirf=e,        I       am  permitted.* 

bu  b  it  r  f  *  eft,  thou  art  permitted, 

cr  b  ii  r  f  *  e,     he      is    permitted. 

tOXX  b  ii  r  f  =^  en,  we     are  permitted, 

i^r  b  ii  r  f  *  et,    you   are  permitted, 

fie  biirf*  en,  they  are  permitted. 


t^  bnrfste,  I  was  permitted, 
bu  b  U  r  f  =  teft,  thou  wast  permitted, 
er  b  u  r  f  *  te,  he  was  permitted. 
h?tr  b  u  r  f  *  ten,  we  were  permitted, 
t^r  b^urfstet,  you  wei'e permitted. 
ftC   bur  f=»  ten,   they  were  permitted. 


t£^  biirf=te,  I  was  permitted, 
bu  b  it  r  f  *  teft,  thou  wast  permitted, 
er  b  ii  r  f  *  te,  he  was  permitted. 
ft)tr  b  ii  r  f  =  ten,  we  were  permitted, 
i^r  bilrf^tet,  you  were  permitted, 
fie  b  ii  r  f  =  ten,  they  were  permitted. 


Perfect  Tense. 


I  have  been  permitted,  etc. 

\^  ^abe  gcburft  (or  biirfen). 

bu  ^aft  geburft  ("  biirfen). 
er  ^at  geburft  ("  biirfen). 
xoxx  ^aben  geburft  ("  biirfen). 
t^r  ^aBt  geburft  ("  biirfen). 
fie  \fabtn  geburft  ("  biirfen). 


I  have  been  permitted,  etc. 

\^  ^abe  geburft  (or  biirfen). 

bu  ^beft  geburft  ("  biirfen). 

er  ^abe   geburft  ("  biirfen). 

Xoxx  ^aben  geburft  ("  biirfen). 

t^r  ^abet  geburft  ("  biirfen). 

ftc  ^aben  geburft  ("  biirfen). 


*  See  Subjunctive  Mood,  §  124. 


§  172.] 


POTENTIAL   VERBS. 


351 


Pluperfect 
I  had  been  permitted,  etc. 

\^  l)ottc  gciJurft  (or  Mirfcn)» 

bu  l)attcft  gel^urft  ("  bilrfen). 

■  cr    ^attc  geburft  ("  biirfcn). 

ttjir  fatten  geburft  ("  biirfen). 

i^r  ^attct  geburft  ("  biirfen). 

fic  t^atten  geburft  ("  biirfen). 


Tense. 

1  had  been  permitted,  etc. 

id;  l)attc  geburft  (or  Mirfcn), 

bu  ^vitteft  geburft  ("  biirfen). 
er  ^citte  geburft  ("  biirfen). 
tt)ir  t^atten  geburft  ("  biirfen). 
i^r  ^dttet  geburft  ( "  biirfen). 
fie  ijatten  geburft  ("  biirfen). 


First  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  be  permitted,  etc. 

id)  tDcrde  biirfen^ 

bu  n)ir[t     biirfen. 

cr  ttjirb      biirfen. 

tt)ir  ujerben  biirfen. 

i^r  toerbet  biirfen. 

fie  t»erben  biirfen. 


I  shall  be  permitted,  etc. 

id;  toerbc  biirfen* 

bu  tt?erbe[t  biirfen. 

er  tDerbc    biirfen. 

ton  ujerben  biirfen. 

t^r  n?erbet  biirfen. 

fie  tt)erben  biirfen. 


Second  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  have  been  permitted,  etc. 

id;  toerbe  geburft  ^aben. 

bu  n?irft     geburft  (;aben. 

er  tt)irb  geburft  i)aben. 
tt)ir  roerben  geburft  j>aben. 
i^r  n?crbct  geburft  ^aben. 

fie  njerben  geburft  ^aben. 


I  shall  have  been  permitted,  etc» 

id;  toerbe  geburft  ^aben« 

bu  njerbefi  geburft  ^aben. 

er  icerbe    geburft  ^aben. 

n)ir  merben  geburft  ijaben. 

iE>r  werbet  geburft  ^aben. 

fie  ttjerben  geburft  ^aben. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 
Present  Tense. 
I  would  or  should  be  permitted,  etc. 
X^    toiirbe    biirfen,  or       ic^    biirfte       {imperfect  Subjunctive'). 


bu  n^iirbeft  biirfen, 

cr  tuiirbe    biirfen, 

ttjir  toiirben  biirfen, 

i^r  tt)ilrbet  biirfen, 

fie  »ilrben  biirfen, 


bu  bilrftefl 

er  biirfte 

tt)ir  biirftcn 

i^r  bilrftet 

fie  biirften 


Perfect  Tense. 
I  would  or  should  have  been  permitted,  etc. 


ic^  ttiiirbe  geburft  ^aben,  o 

bu  tt)iirbefl  geburft  babcn, 
er  tt»iirbe  geburft  ^aben, 
ton  »ilrben  geburft  ^aben, 
ibr  tt»ilrbct  geburft  ijaben, 
fic  wilrben  geburft  baben, 


ic^  DdttC  geburft  (Pluperfect  Subj.] 
bu  ^attcft  geburft 
cr  ^atte  geburft 
n)ir  batten  geburft 
i^r  ^cittet  geburft 
fie  fatten  geburft 


352 


THE    VERB. 


[§  173,  174. 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 


Pres.  bitrftn^  to  be  permitted. 


Perf.  gebUrft  fallen,  to  have  been 
obliged. 


PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  Mirf enb,  being  pennitted.        |      Perf.  ge&Urft,  p«»nnitted. 

§  173.  The  Potential  Verb  miiffcil  corresponds  in  signi, 
fication  with  the  English  verb  must. 

Rem.  It  indicates  physical^  moral.,  or  logical  necessity.,  and  in  other  tenses 
than  the  present  indicative  it  must  be  rendered  by  such  circumlocutions  as 
to  he  obliged  to,  to  he  forced  to,  to  have  to. 


§  174.  Conjugation  of  the  verb  milffcit  {see  %  164,  Ee7n.)\ 
Principal  Parts:  miiffcri,  mupe^  Otmugt* 

INDICATIVE   MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 


cr  ntu0, 


I  must, 
thou  must, 
he     must. 


XOXt  miljf^cn,  we  must, 
i^r  milff*(c)t, you  must, 
fie  m  ii  i  f  =  cil,  they  must. 


tc^  mitff=e,  I     must." 

bu  m  il  { f  -  eft,  thou  must, 

er   miifj^^C,  he     must. 

Xovc  m  it  i  i  *  en,  we    must, 

i^r  tniijf^et,  you  must, 

fie  m  il  j  f  *  en,  they  must. 


Imperfect  Tense. 


X^  ntnfte,    I       was    obliged, 

bu  mu^teft,  thou  wast  obliged, 

cr  ntu^te,     he     was    obliged. 

XOXX  tuu^ten,  we     were  obliged, 

t^r  mu^tet,    you  were  obliged, 

fie  mu^ten,  they  were  obliged. 


t(^  ntit^te,  I  was  obliged, 
bu  tnii^teft,  thou  wast  obliged, 
er  ntit^tc,  he  was  obliged. 
lt>tr  tnit^ten,  we  were  obUged. 
t^r  mii^tet,  you  were  obliged, 
fie  mii^ten,  they  were  obliged. 


Perfect  Tense. 


I  have  been  obliged,  etc. 

tc^  l&aie  gemu^t  (or  miiffenX 

bu  ^aft  gemuj^t  ("  mitffen). 
er  i)at  gemu^t  ("  ntiiffen). 
UJtr  ^abeugemu^t  ("  ntiiffen). 
i^r  i)aU  gcmn^t  ("  ntiiffen). 
fie  babcn  gentu^t  ("  mitffen). 


I  have  been  obliged,  etc. 

idf  j^afie  gemu^t  (or  miiffcn), 

bu  ^abeft  gemu^t  ("  miiffen). 

cr  i}abt   gentugt  ("  ntiiffen). 

ton  i}abzn  gentn^t  ("  tnitffen). 

i^r  ^aBet  gentu^t  ("  ntiiffen). 

fie  ^aben  gemu^t  ("  ntiiffen). 


See  Subjunctive  Mood,  §  124. 


§174.] 


POTENTIAL   VERBS. 


353 


Pluperfect 
I  had  been  obliged,  etc. 

\6^  ^ittttc  gcmu^t  (or  mlijfcn)* 

bu  ^atteft  gcmuf^t  ("  miiffen). 
cr  ^attc  gemugt  ("  mu(fen). 
tt>ir  fatten  gemu^t  ("  miiffen). 
it)r  ^attet  gemufit  ("  miiffen). 
fie  fatten  gcmufjt  ("  miiffen). 


Teme. 

I  had  been  obliged,  etc. 
\^  \^UXt  QCttiu^t  (or  millTcn). 

bu  ^citteft  gemufit  (''  miiffen). 
er  bcitte  gemufet  ("  mUffen). 
h)ir  flatten  gemufet  ("  miiffen), 
i()r  Ijcittet  gemufjt  (''  miiffen). 
fie  l;atten  gemu^t  ("  miiffen). 


First  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  be  obliged,  etc. 

ic^  ttjcrbe  miiffen. 

bu  ivirft     miiffen. 

er  tr>trb     miiffen. 

tt)ir  werben  miiffen. 

ibr  trerbet  miiffen. 

fie  toerben  miiffen. 


I  shall  be  obliged,  etc. 

ic^  tocrbc  miijlcn. 

bu  t»erbeft  miiffen. 

er  n?erbe   miiffen. 

n?ir  n^erbcn  miiffen. 

i^r  n^crbet  miiffen. 

fic  ttjerben  miiffen. 


Second  Future  Tense. 


I  shall  have  been  obliged,  etc. 

ic^  kocrbe  gemu^t  l^abcn. 

bu  irirft  gemufjt  ^aben, 
cr  trtrb  gemn^t  i;abcn. 
xovc  tt?crbcn  gcmufet  ^abcn. 
t^r  trcrbet  gcmu^t  ^aben. 
fie  toerben  gcmu^t  i:iOi^t\\. 


I  shall  have  been  obliged,  e<c. 

\^  ttjcrbc  acmu^t  ^abcm 

bu  tt>crbeft  gemn^t  t)aben. 
er  trterbe  gcmn^t  baben. 
n?tr  tterben  gemn^t  ^aben. 
iOr  n^erbet  gemu^t  ^aben. 
fie  trerben  genui^t  ^abcn. 


CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

I  would  or  should  be  obliged,  etc. 

t^   iOilrbC  ntUffcn,   or         ic^   mii^tC     {imperfect  Subjunctive). 

bu  n^iirbeft  miiffen,    "        bu  mii^tefl 
er   tDiirbc  miiffen,    "        er   mii^te 
toir  n)iirbcn  miiffen,    "       h)ir  mii^ten 
i^r  tt?iirbet  miiffen,    *'        i^r  mii^tet 
fie  toilrben  miiffen,    '*        fic  mii^ten 

Perfect  Tense. 
I  would  or  should  have  been  obliged,  etc. 

\^  tDiirbe  gcmit^t  Dabcn,  or       id?  ^iittc  gcmit^t  {PI  Sub.). 


bu  tcilrbcj't  gemu^t  ^aben, 
er  tt)ilrbe  gemuf^t  baben, 
ton  tciirben  gemu^t  ^abcn, 
i^r  tciirbct  gcmu^t  ^aben, 
fie  iDiirben  gemu^t  ^aben, 


bu  bvitteft  gemu^t 

er  ^vitte   gemnf^t 

trir  fatten  gcmugt 

ibr  ^cittet  gemu^t 

fic  fatten  gemufjt 


354  THE  VERB.  [§  175-177. 

INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

Pres.  mujfen,  to  be  obliged,  etc.      I      Perf.  OCmu|^t  ftttku,  to  have  been 

I  obliged. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres,  mitffenb,  being  obliged.  |      Perf.  gtlttUp,  obliged. 


10.  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB. 

§  175.  The  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  in  person  and 
number : 

(£r  gcl^t  nad^  bcr  @tabt,  He  is  going  to  the  city. 

Exc.  \ .  The  pronouns  e^,  H^f  btC^  (bicfc^)^  iua§,  ttllC^,  when  used  indef- 
initely as  the  subject  of  the  verb,  do  not  control  the  number  or  person  of 
the  verb : 

:3^  Mn  eg,  (Sic  finb  e§,  It  is  I,  it  is  they. 

S)a6  finb  metne  9ffic^ter  (@(^.),        Those  are  my  judges. 

2BefentItd;e  gef)Ier  bicfe^  (^effOf      Important  mistakes  these. 

Exc.  2.  Courtly  and  official  titles,  though  in  the  singular  (as  SJZajefiat, 
^o^eit,  SjccettensX  have  a  plui-al  verb : 

(Slier  3)Zaieftat  gerukn,  Your  Majesty  is  graciously  pleased. 

Rem.  1 .  When,  of  two  or  more  subjects  in  different  persons,  one  of  them  is 
in  the  first  person,  the  verb  should  be  in  the  first  person  plural: 

2)U,  bein  S3ruber  unb  ic^  iDolIcn    Thou,  thy  brother  and  I,  will  (i.  e.j 
(n)ir  iDotten)  f))a3ieren  gebeu,  we  will)  take  a  walk. 

Bern.  2.  When  one  subject  is  in  the  second  and  the  others  are  in  the  third 
person,  the  verb  should  be  in  the  second  person  plural: 

®U,  bein  SSruber  unb  betne  @^tr)C*    Thou,  thy  brother  and  thy  sister, 
fter  feib  (i^r  jeib)  eingetabcn,  are  (i.  e.,  you  are)  invited. 

§  176.  Some  verbs,  that  are  transitive  in  English,  and, 
as  such,  govern  the  objective  case,  are  rendered  by  in- 
transitive  or  reflexive  verbs  in  German,  and  govern  the 

genitive  or  dative  case  (§178, 179). 

§  177.  The  following  verbs  govern  the  Accusative  Case: 

1.  All  transitive  verbs  (§  118, 1 ;  §  83, 1) : 
@r  licft  baS  S3ud^,  He  reads  the  book. 


§  177.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  355 

2.  Verbs   used  in   expressing  weighty  measure^   cost, 
time  when,  and  time  how  long : 

68  bauertc  etnCll  Xag,  It  lasted  a  day. 

eg  triegt  tin  ^j^fuub,  It  weighs  a  pound. 

^ot«bam  liegt  Uicr  3JlCtIcn  toon    Potsdam  lies  four  (German)  miles 
53crlin  from  Berlin. 

eg  !oftet  etncn  X^alCr,  it  costs  a  thaler. 

Sr  fommt  bicfcn  2it)Cnb,  He  comes  this  evening. 

Rem.  1.  When  the  time  of  the  occurrence  of  an  event  is  particularly  speci- 
fied, it  is  put  in  the  accusative  case;  when  it  is  indicated  in  a  general  way,  it 
is  put  in  the  genitive  case : 

(Sr  fommt  biCfCIl  5(bcnb,  He  comes  this  evening. 

Gr  fommt  oft  bC^  SJJorgcn^,  He  often  comes  in  the  morning. 

Rem.  2.  The  accusative  case  is  used  (mostly  in  connection  with  such  ad- 
verbs as  tntlattHf  ^inflUf,  l^Crab)  to  express  the  direction  given  to  the  action 
indicated  by  the  verb : 

er  gc^t  ben  ©erg  l^tuauf,  He  goes  up  the  mountain. 

3.  Many  impersonal  verbs,  as : 

2)iirftcn,  to  make  thirsty.  ongefien,  to  concern, 

bungcrii,  to  make  hungry.  jammern,  to  grieve, 

fricrcn,  to  make  cold.  toerbrte{3en,  to  vex. 

fd;Icifern,  to  put  to  sleep.  fc^merjen,  to  pain, 

frcuen,  to  make  happy.  hMinbern,  to  surprise. 

(5^  fricrt  mid;,    I  am  cold.  ©g  ttunbcrt  mid;,  it  surprises  me. 

4.  The  reflexive  pronouns  of  most  reflexive  verbs  is 
put  in  the  accusative  case : 

^6)  freue  mic^,  I  rejoice.  @ic  frcucn  fi(^,  you  rejoice. 

Rem.  1.  Some  intransitive  and  impersonal  verbs  are  sometimes  used  with 
a  transitive  signification,  taking  an  object Jn  the  accusative  case: 
Sr  ging  fcincn  9Bcg,  He  went  his  way. 

eg  regnet  ©tcinc,  It  rains  stones, 

er  ttjcinte  bittcrc  ^^^rancn,  He  wept  bitter  tears. 

Rem.  2.  The  verbs  Ic^rCIt  and  frcgCIl  may  govern  two  accusatives,  one  of 
the  person,  the  other  of  the  thing: 

er  le^rte  mid;  bic  2J?ufif,  He  taught  me  music. 

2)ag  fragc  ic^  bi^,  I  ask  you  that. 

Rem.  3.  The  verbs  ncnnCH,  ^ICi^CH,  ft^CltCH,  [(^in^jfcn,  taufCH,  govern 
two  accusatives,  both  referring  to  the  same  person  or  thing : 

er  nanntc  mid)  fcincn  ^reunb,  He  called  me  his  friend. 

2)ag  ncnnft  bu  arbcitcn  ?  Do  you  call  that  working  ? 


356  THE    VERB.  [§  178. 

Rem.  4.  For  verbs  governing  the  accusative  and  genitive  cases  see  §  178,  2: 
for  those  governing  the  accusative  and  dative  see  §  179,  2. 

§  178.  The  following  verbs  govern  the  Genitive  Case: 

1.  The  following  intransitive  verbs: 

5l(^ten,  to  regard.  entratben,  to  do  without,   ^^ftegcn,  to  foster. 

bebilrfen,  to  need.  cjeme^en,  to  enjoy.  fc^onen,  to  spare. 

bege^ren,  to  desire.  gefc^toeigen,  to  pass  by    j:|3otten,  to  mock. 

brauc^en,  to  want.  in  silence.  tierfe^Ien,  to  fail. 

gcbraud^en,  to  use.  getca^ren,  to  observe.       ijergeffen,  to  forget. 

gebenfen,  to  think.  barren,  to  wait  upon.       tca^ren,  to  guard. 

tenfen,  to  think.  lad^en,  to  laugh.  tr)al^rne^men,toobser\'e. 

€ntbet;ren,  to  do  without,   (o^nen,  to  reward.'  XooXXtn,  to  nile. 

/vmangeln,  to  fail.  tnangetn,  to  fail.  luarten,  to  attend. 

2)a§  2Betb  bebarf  tn  SrtegegnotI;en    In  the  horrors  of  war  woman  needs 

bC^  ^eft^ii^Cr^  (®c^Of  a  protector. 

(^te  f^otten  mcincr,  ^rinj  I  You  deride  me,  prince! 

Rem.  1.  Of  these  verbs  only  ertttan0Cltt  and  JJCfC^tOCtgCll  are  used  exclu- 
sively with  the  genitive  case.  The  others  were  also  formerly  used  only  with 
the  genitive  case,  and  are  yet  used  with  it  in  poetry  and  other  dignified  styles 
of  composition.     They  are  at  present,  however,  generally  used  as  follows  : 

1 .  Transitively,  and  followed  by  the  accusative  case  (the  verb  generally 
receiving  a  different  signification  when  used  transitively  from  that  which 
it  has  when  used  intransitively) : 

filter  S3clctbtgung  tergeffcn,  To  forget  (intentionally)  an  injury. 

(Sine  S^a^rC^Sa^I  DCrgCffCn,  To  forget  the  number  of  a  year. 

2.  Or  they  are  used  intransitively  and  are  followed  by  certain  prepositions, 
which  govern  their  appropriate  cases,  as:  benfen  (geben!en),  by  aHJ  ad^ten, 
barren,  tralten,by  auf ;  lac^en,  j:|)otten,  toalten,  by  iidcr: 

SSer  bcr  ®Cfal^r  l^ottet,  gebenft  Who  scoffs  at  danger  is  mindful  of 
il^rcr ;  ber  tocAixt  §elb  aber  bcnft  it ;  but  the  true  hero  does  not 
gar  nidjt  an  biC  ®tf 0|ir,  think  at  all  of  danger. 

2lEe  lac^en  itbcr  fcine  %\]^x\)t\if      All  laugh  at  his  folly. 
Rem.  2.  The  verbs  fcttt,  ttCrbCll,  ICbCH,  ftcrbcn,  UxbltX^tXl,  are  followed 
by  the  genitive  in  some  expressions,  as : 

3c^  bin  bcr  SJlCtnung,  ba^—  I  am  of  the  opinion  that- 

@r  ftarb  cineS  ^ti5^It^en  ^XobC§,       He  died  a  sudden  death. 

2.  The  following  transitive  verbs  require,  in  addition 
to  the  accusative  of  the  person,  the  genitive  of  the  thing  : 
5ln!tagcn,  to  accuse.        befc^etben,  to  inform,  crtaffeit,  to  discharge, 
bele^ren,  to  inform.         bejd;ulbtgcn,  to  accuse.      crlebigen,  to  release, 
berauben,  to  rob.             bcjei^en,  to  accuse.            entlaffen,  to  free  from 
berk^tcn,  to  inform.         entbtnben,  to  free  from,      enttebigen,  to  free  from. 


§  178.] 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB. 


357 


(oSf^rcd^cn,  to  acquit, 
niai^nen,  to  remind. 
ilberful;ren,  to  convict, 
ilber^cbeu,  to  exempt, 
iibermeifeu,  to  convict, 
iiberjcu^en,  to  convince, 
terjagen,  to  drive  out. 
ijevflagen,  to  accuse. 

Nothing  can  free  him  from  his  oath. 


bcrftd^crn,  to  assure, 
ijcrtrbften,  to  delude. 
toern?eifcn,  to  banish, 
tuiirbigeu,  to  deem  worthy. 
lt\i)tn,  to  accuse. 
(^and  others.) 


cntblc^cii,  to  strip. 
ciitbeben,to  exonerate, 
cntflciteu,  to  disrobe, 
cntlaben,  to  disburden, 
cntfe^en,  to  displace. 
entanM^ncn,  to  wean, 
frcijpred^cn,  to  acquit, 
gcmal^licn,  to  remind. 

gad^ts  tanu  i^n  feinc^  6(^»)Ur^ 
entbinbcn, 

Tlan  ^at  i^n  bC^  §0(^l)Crrat5S     They  have  charged  him  with  high 
angc!(agt,  treason. 

Rem.  1 ,  Some  of  these  verbs  may  be  followed  by  the  dative  of  the  person 
and  the  accusative  of  the  thing  (§  1 79,  2) : 

2)0^  tocrfid;ere  irf^  3I)ttCn,  I  assure  you  of  that. 

Rein.  2.  The  genitive  is  often  replaced  by  a  preposition  (as  UOIl,  ilttt^ 
auf,  Qlt),  which  is  followed  by  its  appropriate  case  : 

'D'cidUS  faum  i^n  jeineS  ®d)tDur8     Nothing  can   release  him  from  his 
(or  toon  fcincm  <Sd)triir)  entbinben,       oath. 
Rem.  3.  If  the  verb  is  placed  in  the  passive  voice,  the  genitive  construc- 
tion still  remains  unchanged: 

(Srwurbe  ht^  ^Od)UCrrat!(|^  ange*     He  was  charged  with  high  treason, 
flagt, 

3.  The  following  reflexive  verbs  take,  in  addition  to 
the  reflexive  pronoun  in  the  accusative,  a  complement- 
ary object  in  the  genitive: 


(gid;  anma^cn,  to  assume. 

„  annc(;mcn,  to  take  interest  (in). 

„  bebenfcn,  to  deliberate  (upon). 

„  Bcbiencn,  to  use. 

„  bcflcifjcn,  to  apply  (to). 

„  teflci^igcn,  to  apply  (to). 

„  begeben,  to  forego. 

„  bcmdc^tigeu,  to  master. 

„  bemeiftcrn,  to  master. 

t,  befc^eibcn,  to  acquiesce  (in). 

„  l^efimtcn,  to  recollect. 

„  cntaufiern,  to  renounce. 

„  cntbred^cn,  to  forbear  (from). 

„  cnt^altcn,  to  refrain  (from). 

„  cntjd;Iagen,  to  get  rid  (of). 

„  cittfinuen,  to  recollect. 

0  erbariiien,  to  pity,  be  merciful. 


<B\di  erfreuen,  to  rejoice  (at). 

„  erinncrn,  to  remember. 

„  crtilf;nen,  to  venture. 

„  crtrc^rcii,  to  ward  off. 

„  frcucn,  to  rejoice  (at). 

i,  gctrUften,  to  hope  (for). 

„  riif;men,  to  boast  (of). 

„  fd;amen,  to  be  ashamed  (of). 

„  trbften,  to  console  one's  self  (for). 

„  ilberbeben,  to  take  pride  (in) 

„  unterfangen,  to  attempt. 

„  unterftc^en,    "      " 

„  unterttoinben, "      " 

-  bergetrtiffern,  to  ascertain. 

„  toermcffcn,  to  boast  (of). 

„  toerfefjcn,  to  expect. 

„  i)erfid[;ern,  to  assure  (of). 


358 


THE    VERB. 


[§  179. 


@td?  tocrmunbern,  to  wonder  (at).         @td^  irunberu,  to  wonder  (at). 
„     tDeigern,  to  refuse.  (^and  others.) 

2)er  ©erec^te  erbarmt  fic^  fctne^    The  just  man  is  merciful  to  liis 

23ie^CCf,  beast, 

(gr  tann  fid;  laum  M  Sac^en^    He  can  scarcely  keep  from  laughing, 
ent^olten, 

Rem.  After  many  of  these  verbs  the  genitive  case  may  be  replaced  bj-  a 
preposition  (as  an,  ttUf,  iltlCr) : 

2)u  barfft  bic^  htxntt  ^af^l^or    Thou  needest  not  be  ashamed  of  thj 
liber  beine  Sa^I)  tiic^t  fc^cimen,       choice. 

§  179.  The  following  verbs  govern  the  Dative  Case: 
1.  Many  (simple  and  compound)  intransitive  verbs: 


2lef)neln,  to  resemble, 
banfen,  to  thank, 
bienen,  to  serve. 
brof)en,  to  threaten. 
ftud;eu,  to  curse. 
folgen,  to  follow, 
gtcic^cn,  to  resemble, 
telfen,  to  help. 


tnangetn,  to  fail.  trauen,  to  trust, 

ita^en,  to  approach.  troijen,  to  defy, 

itilljen,  to  serve.  tce^ren,  to  ward  off. 

:^a[fen,  to  fit.  tretc^en,  to  yield, 

jc^aben,  to  injure.  tt)in!en,  to  hint. 

fc()etnen,  to  seem.  jtemen,  to  become. 

fc^mecEen,  to  taste.  giirnen,  to  be  angry, 

fteuern,  to  tax.  (and  others.) 

^^  ban!c  ^j^neil  ^erjU^ft,  I  thank  you  with  all  my  heart. 

2Btr  folgen  i^m  burd^  ben  SSalb,      We  follow  him  through  the  forest. 
3lbt?elfen,  to  remedy.        eittgegcngel^en,  to  go  to-   tnt^trauen,  to  distrust. 

ward  (to  meet).  Itacijal^nien,  to  imitate, 

cntgegenfommen,  to  come  uadjeifern,  to  rival. 

to  meet.  na(^fte^en,tobe  inferior  to. 

cntf))re(^en,to  correspond,  nac^ftelten,  to  waylay, 
eriiegen,  to  succumb.        unterliegen,  to  succumb, 
gcfallen,  to  please. 
ge^Bren,  to  belong, 
ge^ordjen,  to  obey, 
getingen,  to  succeed, 
mi^fallen,  to  displease. 


an^angen,  to  adhere. 

auffatlen,  to  strike. 

aug^elfen,  to  supply. 

begegnen,  to  meet. 

be!ommen,  to  agree. 

beifallen,  to  occur. 

beiftef)en,  to  assist. 

einfallen,  to  occur. 

entflte^cit,  to  escape. 

cntge^en,  to  avoid. 

2)ag  \}at  mir  fe^r  gefaEen, 
(Ss  i[t  mir  eben  t>orgefommen 


toorge^en,  to  outstrip. 

ijortommen,  to  occur. 

t»iberf;|)red;en,  to  contra- 

gu^bren,  to  listen  to.  [diet. 
(and  others.) 
It  pleased  me  very  much. 
It  has  just  occurred  to  me. 

2.  Many  (simple  and  compound)  transitive  verbs  gov- 
ern, in  addition  to  a  direct  object  in  the  accusative 
case,  an  indirect  object  in  the  dative  case : 
33orgen,  to  borrow.  Iciffett,  to  leave.  tnetben,  to  announce, 

bringen,  to  bring.  lei^en,  to  loan.  ne^men,  to  take, 

gebcn,  to  give.  Uefern,  to  dehver.  rauben,  to  rob. 

flagen,  to  complain.  lol^nen,  to  reward.  f^Sen,  to  sav. 


§  179,  180.]      SYNTAX  OP  THE  VERB.  359 

fd;cnfen,  to  present.  fie^tcn,  to  steal.  i^Wn,  to  pay. 

ft^icfcn,  to  send.  trcigern,  to  refuse.  jcigcn,  to  show, 

fc^reibeil,  to  write.  tt)ibmen,  to  dedicate.  (and  many  others.') 

(5r  brad;te  mir  ben  53ricf,  He  brought  me  the  letter. 

3c^  fc^icfte  il)m  baa  33uc^,  I  sent  him  the  book. 

^J)ian  raubtc  i^m  ba6  ®clb,  They  robbed  him  of  his  money. 

:io.v]eben,  to  deliver.  eiflaren,  to  explain.      uutevfageii,  to  forbid, 

aubietcn,  to  offer.  cr^ablcn,  to  relate.         toertrerfeii,  to  reproach. 

aiijcigen,  to  announce.  (je]'tc(;cn,  to  confess.       Dorjcigcu,  to  show, 

barbicten,  to  proffer.  mitt^cilen,  to  impart,     jufagcu,  to  promise, 

cntrei^en,  to  wrest.  nac^fagcu,  to  repeat,      jufdjreiben,  to  ascribe. 

cnipfcl;Icn,  to  recommend,     nac^fe^en,  to  indulge.         (and  many  others.) 

3c^  erja^Ite  i^m  bic  ®ef(^i(^te,  I  related  the  story  to  him. 

(Sr  ^attc  un^  bie  9^ad;rid;tcn  mit*    He  had   communicated  the   news 
gct^cilt,  to  us. 

Rem.  1.  If  the  verb  is  placed  in  the  passive  voice,  the  indirect  object  still 
remains  in  the  dative  case : 

2)ic  ^'Jad^rid^teu  tuurbeu  un^  utit*    The  news  was  communicated  to  us. 
gct^eilt, 
Rem.  2.  Some  reflexive  verbs  (§  158,  Rejn.  2)  have  the  reflexive  pronoun 
(:i.s  the  indirect  object)  in  the  dative  case(§  174,  4): 

^df  bilbete  e§  mir  ein,  I  imagined  it  (to  myself). 

Rem.  3.  Some  impersonal  verbs  are  followed  by  the  dative  case : 

(53  a[;iict  mir,  I  have  misgivings.     3JJir  fd;annbeU,  I  am  dizzy. 
Rem.  4,  The  dative  of  the  person  is  used  after  many  verbs  (as  jeilt,  tucrbeit, 
gc^en,  crge^en,  ftebcn,  fi^eii)  and  after  many  verbal  expressions  (as  letb  t^un, 
wci}  tbun,  iBovt  ^vilten,  ju  §illfe  tommcii),  thus: 

SS  iff  mir  nid;t  n?o^(,  I  am  not  well. 

@S  get^t  i^m  ganj  gut,  It  goes  very  well  with  him. 

9Bie  fi^t  mir  baS  S?Ieib  ?  How  does  the  dress  fit  me  ? 

2)a8  tbut  mir  fc^r  leib,  I  am  very  sorry  for  that. 

§  180.  Some  verbs  are  followed  by  the  dative  or  the 
accusative  case,  according  to  the  signification  with 
which  they  are  used: 

( 3c^  toerfic^crte  itjit,  I  insured  him. 

(3c^  i)erfid;crte  i^m,  I  assured  him. 

( Xxaut  m6)t  bcm  du^crcn  ©d^ctn,        Do  not  tmst  outward  appearances. 

( Dcr  '^rcbigcr  traut  ha^  ^raut^aar^  The  preacher  marries  the  couple. 
Rem.  A  few  verbs  may  be  used  mth  the  dative  or  accusative  without  differ- 
ence of  signification : 

(5r  le^rtc  mi(^  bie  9Jiufif,  He  taught  me  music. 

Sr  Ic^rte  mir  bie  aKufi!,  "      "       '*      " 


360  THE   ADVERB.  [§  181-183. 

THE  ADVERB. 

(Sag  %hmhmnu) 

§  181.  There  are  but  few  primitive  adverbs.    The  chief 
of  these  are : 

1.  The  following  particles  (all  of  which,  however, 
except  ah  and  till,  are  used  also  as  prepositions) : 

%f)f  down,  downward,  htl,  about,  nearly.  um, about, past,  at  an  end. 

an,    on,  up,  forward,     burc^, through,  thoroughly.  Dor,  forward,  formerly, 
auf,  up,  upward.  tU  (tin)  in.  JU,  too,  also  in  the  direc- 

au^f  out,  at  an  end.       m^f  after,  afterward.  tion  of. 

2Bir  toerben  ah  unb  ju  ge^en,  We  will  go  to  and  fro  (up  and  down). 

3Son  mm  an,  From  this  time  forward. 

Sa^X  au^f  Qai)X  Cin,  From  one  year  to  another. 

3c^  fenne  i^n  tJUrd)  unb  burt!^,  I  know  him  most  thoroughly,  [merly. 

S'ia^  tt)ie  \iOVf  (Afterward  as  before)  now  as  for- 

2.  The  adverbs  ja,  C^e,  oft,  tiun,  ^^c./ 

^df  jc  Cl^Cr,  je  Ueber,  Yes,  the  sooner  the  better. 

2)a§  tft  oft  gefd;e^en,  That  has  often  happened. 

35on  nun  an,  From  this  time  forward. 

§  182.  Most  Adverbs  are  formed  (by  inflection,  deriva- 
tion, and  composition)  from  nouns,  adjectives,  numerals, 
pronouns,  verbs, prepositions,  and  adverbs. 

Mem.  Of  some  adverbs  the  derivation  is  "  no  longer  felt"  (§  49,  2,  Rem.  1 ),  as  : 

6 alb,  soon  (from  the  Goth,  and  O.-G.  adj.  hald=hold ;  M.-G.  hald=rapid). 
tannt^ scarcely :  M.-G.,  kume ;  O.-G.,  ehumo (from the  adj . kum = sick,  weak). 
fCl^r,  very:  M.-G.,  ser;   O.-G.,  sero  (from  the  adj.  ser=painful,  which  is 
from  the  Old-German  noun  das  ser  =  the  sore,  the  pain). 

§  183.  Adverbs  are  formed  from  Nouns: 

1.  The  genitive  case  of  some  nouns  is  used  adverbi- 
ally (§  81,  2,4),  as: 

SWorgcn^  (beS  2JJorgeng),  in  the  morning  (gen.  of  bcr  2Rorgcn,  morning). 
5((JCnb^  (be§  5lBenb§),  in  the  evening        (gen.  of  ber  5lbenb,  evening. 
anf  ang§,  in  the  beginning,  at  first  (gen.  of  ber  Slnfang,  beginning). 

tljCil^,  partly,  in  part  (gen.  of  ber  ^(;eil,  part). 


§  183.]  FORMATION  OF  ADVERBS.  361 

Rem.  1.  Sometimes  the  genitive  of  an  adjective  or  an  adjective  pronoun 
and  the  genitive  of  a  noun  are  joined  together  into  one  word  (§  89,  Rem.  1) : 

!cinc«<lOC0^^  by  no  means  (nom.  fcin  SSccj,  gen.  {einc«  SSefje?). 

gliitflidjcrtDCifC,  fortunately  (nom.  gliicflid;c  SBeife,  gen.  j^Iiicflidier  2Bctfe). 

bCrgcftalt,  in  such  a  way  (nom.  bic  @e[talt,  gen.  t»cr  (Scftalt). 

jcbcrjcit,  at  any  time,  always  (nom.  jcbe  ^i\i,  gen.  jebcr  ^t\i). 

Rem.  2.  In  some  compound  adverbs  the  new  declension  has  replaced  the 
old  in  the  genitive  of  the  adjective  or  adjective  pronoun,  as : 

ttttcnfall^^  in  any  case.  ttiDrigcnfall^,  in  the  contrary  case. 

jebcnfallCS,  at  all  events  grbf^tClU^CilJl,  for  the  most  part. 

Rem.  3.  In  forming  some  compound  adverbs,  feminine  nouns  take  the 
genitive  termination  (=0)^  as : 

abf Cit^,  aside,  apart ;      mctnctf Ctt^,  for  my  part  (from  hit  ®eite,  side). 
beifCit^,  at  one  side ;      fcincrfcit^,    on  his  part       "       "       "        " 

Rem.  4.  The  termination  of  the  genitive  singular  (s^)  is  given  to  some  ad- 
verbs that  have  been  formed  from  the  genitive  plural,  as  : 

OUcrbing^  (from  alter  binge),  by  all  means ;  neUCrbiUO^r  lately,  recently. 

Rem.  5.  After  the  analogy  of  ti^tintil^ ,  fonnerli/  (in  Mid.-Ger.,  e  mdles= 
({foretime),  are  formed  in  the  New-German  the  following  adverbs : 

bantttl^,  at  that  time.  tticmal^,  never. 

jcntal'^,  ever,  at  any  time.  iJOriUal^,  fonnerly,  once  on  a  time. 

na(^mal€(,  afterward.  C^Cmal^,  formerly,  heretofore. 

Rem.  6.  Very  many  adverbs  take  the  genitive  ending  (s^),  after  the  analogy 
of  the  adverbs  that  are  formed  from  the  genitive  singular  of  masculine  nouns, 
as  will  be  noticed  below  (§  184,  2  ;  §  187,  2 ;  §  188,  2,  4,  and  5). 

2.  Adverbs   are   formed   from  the  datwe  of  nouns, 
either  alone  or  in  composition,  as: 

roorgcn^  to-morrow  (M.-G.,  morr/en,  morne;  O.-G.j  morgane,  which  is 

the  dative  singular  of  the  noun  inorgen,  morning). 
bt^toetlen^  at  times  (2BciIcn,  dat.  plur.  of  bie  SSeile,  a  while). 

3.  Adverbs  are  formed  from  the  accusative  of  nouns, 
either  alone  or  in  composition,  as : 

toCg^away  (ace.  sing,  of  ber  2Beg,  the  way). 

QllCtOtgC^  every  where  (ace.  pi.,  alle  SBegc,  all  ways). 

Ctnmal,  once  (ace.  sing.,  ein  2Jia(,  one  time).     ^ 

gCitlcbcn^,  as  long  as  one  lives  (ace.  sing.,  biC  }^tit  bc8  ScbenS). 

bcif^licl^lOCifC,  by  way  of  example  (ace.  sing.,  bie  SBcifc). 

Q 


362  THE   ADVERB.  [§  184-186. 

§  184.  Adverbs  are  formed  largely  from  Adjectives: 

1.  All  adjectives,  whose  nature  permits  them  to  be 
used  adverbially,  are  so  used  without  change  of  form: 

2)a§  S3u(^  ift  gut  gebunben,  The  book  is  well  bound. 

SSir  fa^ren  fe^r  f(^nctt,  We  are  traveling  very  fast. 

@ie  fatten  ta^fCr  ge!ani))ft,  They  had  fought  valiantly. 

Rem.  1.  Some  words,  that  are  now  used  only  as  adverbs,  were  originally 
adjectives  (§  182,  Rem.). 

Rem.  2.  Participles,  like  adjectives,  may  be  used  adverbially  (§  129,  Rem.  4; : 

Wilt  ftcbeub  ^et^em  SBaffer,  With  boiling-hot  water. 

2.  A  large  number  of  adverbs  are  formed  from  ad- 
jectives by  taking  a  genitive  ending,  =§  (after  the  anal- 
ogy of  the  adverbs  formed  from  the  genitive  of  nouns) : 

@8  fcingt  htltit^  an  JU  regnen,  It  is  beginning  to  rain  already. 

©e^eix  @te  tt^t^,  unb  bann  linl^,     Go  to  the  right  and  then  to  the  left. 

(Sr  ^at  eg  anbCr^  gemcint,  He  meant  it  differently. 

Rem.  1.  Adverbs  thus  formed  belong  mostly  to  the  New-German  period. 
Rem.  2.  Some  adverbs,  and  especially  superlatives  (§190, 3),  take  the  genitive 
termination  sCJl^^  after  the  analogy  of  such  nouns  as  ^ttlftlt^  gen.  33a{fen§,  as : 

Unb  iibrigen^  tCoUte  er—  And  moreover  he  wished  to— 

Rem.  3.  By  this  last  analogy  are  formed  the  ordinal  adverbs,  tX^ttuSf  ^tOtU 

tens,  irittcn^,  etc.  (§  105, 2). 

Rem.  4.  A  few  adverbs  have  added  an  unorganic  ::t  to  the  genitive  form, 
and  thus  they  have  the  appearance  of  being  superlatives,  as : 

(S8  toax  Ctnft  Ctn  ^iJntg—  There  was  once  a  king  - 

UnlSngft,  alg  tuir  in  S3crltn  toa*    Not  long  since,  when  we  were  in 
ren—  Berlin— 

§  185.  For  the  formation  of  adverbs  from  Numerals, 
see  §  105. 

§  186.  The  chief  simple  adverbs  that  are  formed  from 
Pronouns  are  the  following: 

]^icr,here.  ha,       there.  toann,when. 

j^er,  hither.  baitll,  then.  too,     where. 

Jljin,  thither.  hOtt,    yonder.  fo,       thus. 

Rem.  1 .  These  pronominal  adverbs  have  been  developed  thus : 

Goth. :     thar,   thana,  hvan,       hvar,      siwi, 

O.-G. :   hiar,      hera,  hina,   dar,     danna,  doret,    huanne,  haur^     so, 

M.-G. :  hier,      her,  hin,     da,       danne,  dort,      wanne,     wa,        so, 

N.-G.:  ^cr.     ^er.  &in.    ba       bann«  bort.     tcann.     n?o.       fo. 


§  186-188.]     FORMATION  OF  ADVERBS.  3G3 

Rem.  2.  ^Xtt,  ))tXf  and  %\Vl  are  formed  from  a  demonstrative  pronoun  that 
is  now  found  only  in  the  Gothic  (his,  hija,  hita  =  t>er,  bic,  bag  =  this,  thatj. 

Rem.  3.  ^a,  bdntt^  and  bOtt  are  formed  from  the  demonstrative  pro- 
noun htXf  bic,  bflif  {Gothic  sa,  so,  thata;  accusative  thana,  tho,  thata). 

Rem.  4.  SBfllin  and  tOO  are  formed  from  ttCf,  who. 

Rem.  f).  The  indefinite  pronouns  UiCl^  tOCntg,  O^^Ug^  and  CtlOd^  are  often 
used  adverbially  (§  112)  : 

(Sr  ift  UiCi  gri5^cr  alg  t(^,  He  is  much  taller  than  I  am. 

:^ie  ®cfd;id;te  bcr  @tabt  ijt  nur  The  history  of  the  city  is  only  a  little 

ttCnijJ  befauut,  known. 

2)a8  Xud;  ift  md;t  breit  gCnitO^  The  cloth  is  not  wide  enough. 

@r  tear  Cttoa^  aufgerecjt,  He  was  somewhat  excited. 

§  187.  Derivative  Adverbs  are  found  by  means  of  the 
terminations  =cn,  =ling§,  =U(^» 

1.  The  termination  =cn  is  employed  in  forming  adverbs 
from  a  few  other  adverbs: 

3lu§cn,  without,  outward  (from  auS).      oBcn,  above,  aloft  (from  ob). 
inncn,  within,  inward  (from  in).  l^intcu,  behind  (from  (;in^. 

untcn,  under,  below  (from  unter).  born,  before  (from  bor). 

2.  A  few  adverbs  are  formed  by  adding  =Itng§  to  ad 
jectives,  nouns,  or  verbs: 

SBIinblingS,  blindly,  rashly,  at  random  (from  bitnb,  blind). 
^au^tlincjS,  head  foremost,  head  over  heels  (ba6  ^au^t,  head), 
rittlingg  (reitliiugS),  astride,  astraddle  (veiten,  to  ride).  [back). 

ril(fling§,  backward,  from  behind  (ber  Slilcf,  ohs.  from  §iu(fen, 

meud^Iingg,  insidiously,  like  an  assassin       (nieiic^eln,  to  assassinate). 

3.  Many  words  with  the  termination  Ax^  are  used 
only  adverbially  (§  86,  2,  6),  as : 

grcilic^,  certainly,  indeed.  fd^trerlid^,  scarcely,  hardly, 

cnblic^,  finally,  at  last.  jfld^crlic^,  certainly,  surely, 

filrjlic^,  shortly,  recently.  tt)a^rlic^,  truly,  really. 

§  188.  Of  the  many  ways  in  which  Compound  Adverbs 
may  be  formed,  the  following  are  most  important : 

1.  By  uniting  two  nouns  (especially  with  SBcifc,  a 

way  or  manner,  for  the  last  noun) : 

©c^er^trcife,  jocosely,  in  fun,  in  jest  (bcr  ©d^crj,  joke,  bte  SSeifc,  way). 
f^Otttrcifc,  mockingly,  derisively       (ber  ©pott,  derision,  bic  SBcifc,  way) 
tro^>feuttjeijc,  in  drops,  by  drops       (ber  Slro^jfen,  drop,  bic  SSeifc,  way). 


364  THE   ADVERB.  [§  188. 

2.  By  uniting  an  adjective  and  a  noun: 

©lei^taUS,  likewise,  also  (§  183,  1)    (gleid;,  like ;  ber  ^aU,  case). 
grb^tent^eil§,  for  the  most  part  (gri3|3ten,  greatest ;  ber  X^cil,  part;. 

gerabeStregS,  straightway  (gerabe,  straight;  ber  SBeg,  way). 

3.  A  numeral  and  a  noun  (especially  9Jlal,  see  §  105) : 

@inmal,  once,  once  on  a  time.  breimat,  three  times. 

4.  By  uniting  an  adjective  pronoun  and  a  noun: 

Menfallg  (§  1 83, 1,  Hem.  6),  at  all    metnerfeitS  (§  183,  1 ),  for  my  part. 
jebenfattS,  in  any  case,      [events,     jeberjeit  (§  183, 1  ^Rem.),  at  all  times. 

5.  By  uniting  a  preposition  and  a  noun : 

^IbfeitS  (§  183,  1),  apart,  to  one  side. 

beijetten(§  183,  1,  2),  betimes,  in  good  time,  earh',  soon. 

bi^toeilen,  at  times,  at  intervals,  occasionally,  now  and  then. 

l)interriicfg,  from  behind,  behind  one's  back,  underhandedly. 

iiberijau^t,  in  general,  on  all  occasions,  in  the  main,  at  all. 

ilbermorgeu,  day  after  to-morrow. 

gUiDeileil,  at  times,  sometimes,  occasionally. 

6.  By  uniting  a  preposition  and  a  pronoun: 

3nbef[en,  in  the  mean  time.  iiberbieg,  besides,  moreover. 

7.  By  uniting  a  noun  and  an  adverb  (or  preposition) : 

SSergauf,  up  the  mountain.  jabreiu,  )  year  in,  year  out. 

bergab,  down  the  mountain.  ja^rauS,  )  from  one  year  to  anothsr. 

ftromauf,  up  stream.  !o:|3fitber,  head  foremost, 

ftromab,  down  stream.  fo^funter,  headlong. 

8.  By  uniting  two  adverbs: 

Sllgbalb,  immediately.  ebenfojust  so. 

t>ter[elbft,  exactly  here.  jogteid;,  immediately. 

bafelbft,  exactly  there.  fobalb,  as  soon  (as), 

bennoc^,  however.  i)tet(ei(t)t,  perhaps, 

^ier^er,  hither.  bort^tn,  thither, 

herein,  in  (hither).  ^inein,  in  (thither). 

l^erauS,  out  (hither).  ^tnau«,  out  (thither). 

9.  By  uniting  two  prepositions  : 

2)urc^aug,  entirely.  t>orbet,  past,  over  (finished). 

tnjtDtfc^en,  in  the  mean  time.  toriiber,  "      *'  " 

10.  By  uniting  an  adverb  and  a  preposition : 

^terburd;,  by  this  means.  baburdb,  thereby, 

bieruad;,  according  to  this.  tDoburd;,  whereby. 


§  188.]         FORMATION  OP  ADVERBS.  365 

Rem.  1.  Compound  adverbs,  formed  by  xmiting  the  adverb  b (I  and  a  prepo- 
sition, are  usually  employed  instead  of  the  dative  and  accusative  of  the  de- 
monstrative pronoun  bCf,  biC,  bfli?  (§  ll-»  2,  -^ew.  3),  when  used  absolutely, 
and  not  referring  to  a  person ;  if  the  preposition  begins  with  a  vowel,  the 
original  X  (bflt,  see  §  18G,  Rem.  1)  is  retained: 

2)abci,         thereby,  by  that,  by  it,  by  them       (Jor  bet  bem,  bei  ben). 
baburd^,      thereby,  by  this  or  those  means         (  "  burd;  bag,  biird;  tie), 
bafilr,         for  that,  for  this,  instead  of  that        (  "  fUr  ba«,  fiir  bic). 
bagcgcn,     against  this,  against  that  (  "  gegen  ba«,  gegcii  bie). 

bamit,        therewith,  with  that,  with  them        (  "  mit  bem,  mit  ben), 
baton,        thereon,  thereby,  by  it,  by  them        (^  "  an  betn,  an  bie). 
barauf,        thereupon,  thence,  from  that  (  "  auf  bcm,  auf  ben). 

barau3,       therefrom,  thence,  out  of  this  (  "  aug  bem,  au§  ben), 

barin,         therein,  within,  in  it,  in  that  (  "  in  bem,  iii  ben). 

bariiber,      thereover,  thereupon,  over  that  (  "  iiber  ba§,  ilber  bic). 

barum,       for  that  reason,  therefore,  for  that     (  "  um  bag,  um  bie). 
barunter,    thereunder,  among  it,  among  them    (  "  unterbem,unterben), 
bai)cn,         therefrom,  thence,  from  it,  from  them  (  "  ton  bem,  toon  ben), 
battoiber,     against  this,  that,  or  them  (  "  ttoiberbas,  ttoiber  bie). 

bajU,  thereto,  from  that  purpose,  to  that   (  "  jU  bem,  JU  ben), 

bajttoifd^en,  there  between,  between  them  (  "  jttoifc^en  ben). 

Rem.  2.  Compound  adverbs  are  formed  in  the  same  manner  with  the  ad- 
verb \\\tX  nnd  prepositions,  instead  of  the  dat.  and  ace.  of  the  demonstrative 
pronoun  bitfcr  (§111),  when  used  absolutely  and  not  referring  to  persons: 
^ierbei,  hereby,  by  this,  by  these  (J(n'  bei  biefem,  bei  biefen). 

bierburc^,    "      "    "     *'     "  (  "  burd)  biefcS,  bnrd;  bicfe). 

^iermit,  herewith,  with  this,  with  these  (  "  mit  biefem,  mit  biefen). 
etc.,  etc.,  etc.,  etc.,  etc. 

Rem.  3.  Compound  adverbs  are  formed  in  the  same  manner  with  the  ad- 
verb too  and  prepositions,  to  take  the  place  of  the  dative  and  the  accusative 
of  the  absolute  inten-ogative  and  relative  pronoun  tofl^  (§113,  1,  Rem.  2): 
SSarum,  why,  on  what  account,  for  which,  for  what  {for  um  n)a§). 
ttoobei,      whereby,  at  which,  at  what,  during  what    (   "  bei  tt'g/w). 
ttoobnrc^,  whereby,  by  what  means,  through  what      (  "  burd;  tt)ag). 
toofilf,     wherefore,  for  which,  for  what  (  "  filr  tcaS). 

ttoogcgcn,  against  which,  against  what  (   "  gcgen  ttoaS). 

ttoomit,     wherewith,  with  or  by  which  or  what  (   "  mit  wZm), 

toonad^,    whereupon,  after  or  for  which  or  what        (  "  nad^  w'dm), 
tooran,     whereon,  by  which  w  what,  on  what  (   "  an  tr»ag). 

ttooranf,    whereupon,  upon  which,  upon  what  (   "  auf  tt)ag). 

ttoorauS,  wherefrom,  whence,  out  of  which  or  what  (  "  ouS  whn). 
ttocrin,      wherein,  in  which,  in  what  (  *'  in  ttoaS). 

ttoorilbcr,  whereupon,  upon  or  at  which  or  what         (  *'  ilbcr  ttoaS). ' 
ttootoon,     whereof,  from  or  of  which  or  what  (   "  toon  wSm\ 

ttoogu,       whereto,  why,  to  or  for  which  or  what        (   "  JU  w'im\ 


36B  THE   ADVERB.  [§  188,  189. 

Obs.  The  dative  offtja^  (O.-G.,  hwerau;  M.-G.,  wem)  is  obsolete  in  the 
N.-G.  (§  1 13,  1).  For  the  dative  with  a  preposition,  the  compound  adverbs 
to  0  m  1 1,  10  0  n  a  c^,  id  o  g  u,  etc. ,  must  be  used. 

11.  Some  compound  adverbs  have  been  so  modified 
and  contracted  that  their  origin  is  ^'?w  longer  felt  ^"^  as  : 

^eute,  to-day  (il/.-6^.,hiute;  O.-G^.,  hiuto;  cow /r ./ro//i  hiu  tagfi,  on  this  day). 

immer,  ever     {M.-G.^  iemer;  O.-G.,  iomer=:jentC^r=ever  more). 

(JtDar  (truly)     (M.-G.,  zeware;  O.-G.,  zi  ware  :=  in  2!3abr^ett= in  truth). 

me,  never         (M.-G.,  nie;  O.-G.,  nio;  Goth.,  ni  aiv=:not  ever). 

nur,  only  (M.-G.,  neur,  neuver ;  O.-G.,  ni  ware=md^t  tocire,  or  tocnn  t9 

nic^t  toare). 
nein  I  no  !        (M.-G.,  nein  ;  O.-G.,  nein  [from  niein=md)t  ein§=not  once]). 
mmmer,never  (ilif.-G^.,  niemer ;  O.-G.,  niomeri^nte  it  me{)r=not  ever  more), 
trgcnb,  any  where  (M.-G. ,  iergent ;   O.-G. ,  io  wergin=at  any  place), 
nirgenb,  nowhere  (Jf.-(^.,  niergent ;  O.-G.,  ni  iowergin  =  not  ever  at-a-place). 

12.  Some  compound  adverbs  are  formed  by  joining 
several  words  into  one  word : 

3n§Befonbere,  especially,  in  particular  (in  baS  33efonbere). 

inSgefammt,    altogether,  collectively,  in  a  body  (in  bag  ©efammte). 

ingfiiuttige,      for  the  future,  henceforth  (in  bag  ^itntttge). 

infofern,  as  far  as,  in  as  much  as  (in  fo  fcm). 

Rem.  In  German,  as  in  English,  there  are  many  adverbial  expressions 
that  have  received  conventional  adverbial  meanings,  while  the  words  iiavo 
remained  separate : 

S)urd;  unb  burrf?,  entirely.  tn  ber  %f)at,  in  fact. 

nad;  unb  narf;,  gradually.  in  @tle,  in  haste. 

luv  §anb,  at  hand.  nttt  glei^,  industriously. 

toor  ber  §anb,  for  the  present.  ju  §auje,  at  home. 

O^ne  B^S^f^^f  without  doubt.  gur  gfJot^,  if  needs  be. 


1.  CLASSIFICATION  OF  ADVERBS. 
(©tnt^cUung  ber  %h\)txUtn.) 

§  189.  The  following  are  the  leading  classes  into 
which  adverbs  are  divided  with  reference  to  their  sig- 
nification : 

1.  Adverbs  of  time,  as: 
SBann  ?  when  ?  SSie  lange  ?  how  long  ?      2Bte  oft,  how  often  ? 

je^t;  now.  jc,  ever.  oft,  often, 

^eutc,  to-day.  nte,  never.  felten,  seldom, 

bann,  then.  tmmcr,  always.  jumeilcn,  at  times. 


H8<J. 


CLASSIFICATION   OF   ADVERBS. 


367 


ntmmcr,  never, 
nod^,  yet. 

lange,  a  long  time. 
[tetS,  continually, 
beftantig,  continually. 


gcficnt,  yesterday. 
iiculid;,  lately. 
nart;l^cr,  afterward, 
inorgcn,  to-morrow. 
balt»,  soon, 
cnblid),  finally, 
friil),  early. 

fpat,  late.  [ing. 

3i)iorgcn«J,  in  the  morn- 
SlbcnbS,  in  the  evening. 
^ladft^,  in  the  night. 

^CUtC  bin  id;  ^toeimal  imd)  ber 
@tabt  gegaugen, 


n>icbcr,  again. 

nod?maI,  again, 
eiiimal,  once, 
jtneinial,  twice, 
mel^rnial^,  several  times. 


jeitlebeiie,  as  long  as  one   mand^mal,  often, 

lives.  ftiinbiid;,  hourly, 

cwig,  eternally.  taglid;,  daily, 

eanglid;,  eternally.  n)i)d;entlic^,  weekly. 

i3oa  iiuii  an,  from  now  monatlid;,  monthly, 

forward.  jal^rlid;,  yearly. 

I  have  gone  to  the  city  twice 
day. 


to 


2.  Adverbs  of  place,  as: 

SSo  ?  where  ?  SKober  I  whence ! 


^icr,  here, 
ba,  there, 
bort,  yonder, 
ba^eim,  at  home, 
oben,  above, 
uiitcu,  below, 
^intcn,  behind. 
Vorn,  in  front, 
brau^cn,  without, 
brinnen,  within, 
gu  §viufe,  at  home. 
9iirgenb,  nowhere. 


^cr,  hither, 
herein,  (hither)  in. 
^crauS,  (hither;  out. 
i^crab,  (hither)  down, 
^cruuter,  (hither)  down, 
bon  oben,  from  above, 
toon  unten,  from  below, 
bon  ^inten,  from  behind, 
ton  born,  from  in  front, 
toon  fern,  from  afar, 
toon    oben   ^crab,  from 


SSo^in?  whither? 
^in,  thither, 
^inciu,  (thither)  in. 
^inau**,  (thither)  out. 
^inab,  (thither)  down. 
toorn^artS,  forward, 
rttcfroart^,  backward. 
^eimtricirtS,  homeward, 
fort,  forward. 
h)Ctter,  further. 
na(^  oben,  (toward)  above, 
nad)  unten,  (toward)  below, 
nad^  §aufc,  home  (-ward). 


above,  from  on  high 
2)0rt  ift  ber  3agcr,  Yonder  is  the  hunter. 

SSarum  ttJittft  bu  braU^CU  ftc^cn?     Why  will  you  stand  out  there? 

3.  Adverbs  of  manner  and  degree,  as  : 

2Bic?how?  ja,  yes.  fc^r,  very, 

fo,  thus,  80.  flCttoi^,  certainly.'  gang,  quite. 

cbenfo,just  80.  flcberlid),  certainly.  gtemtic^,  quite. 

anbcr8,  otherwise.  freilic^,  of  course.  toicl,  much. 

Iciest,  easily.  bocb,  certainly.  tt)Cntg,  little. 

\6)tDtx,  with  difficulty.       ttoirttid),  really.  genug,  enough. 

fc^ncU,  rapidly.  ttoa^rtjaftig,  really.  ctttoa,  somewhat, 

langfam,  slowly.  nctn,  no.  rcrf^t,  right, 

fd^riftlic^,  in  writing.         nid^t,  not.  ^Bd^ft,  extremely, 

brieflic^,  by  letter.  fetncSmegS,  by  no  means,  ttocnigften^,  at  last. 

35tc  3llpen  fiiib  fc^r  ^o6f,  The  Alps  are  very  high. 

30,  C8  ift  tDirflid)  fo,  Yes,  it  is  really  so. 

Rem.  Most  adjectives,  when  used  adverbially,  become  adverbs  of  manner. 


368  '  THE   ADVERB.  [§  189,  190. 

4.  Adverbs  expressive  of  cause^  means^  or  instrument 
(being  mostly  compounds  of  nJO,  t)a,  and  l^ier  with  prep- 
ositions), as: 

SSoran?  whereupon?  baran,  thereupon.  I^teran,  hereupon. 

tDobet  ?  whereby  ?  babet,  thereby.  ^terbet,  hereby, 

tpoburc^?  whereby?  baburc^,  thereby.  ^ierburc^,  hereby, 

icofiir  ?  why?  bafiir,  therefore.  l^ierfilr,  for  this, 

tcomit?  with  what?  bamit,  therewith.  ^ierttlit,  with  this, 

tconad;  ?  according  to  what?   banad;,  accordingly.  ^iernad;,  by  this, 

tcoriiber?  about  what?  bariiber,  about  that.         ^ieriiber,  about  this. 

tDotoon ?  from  what?  bat>on,  from  that,  ^terton,  from  this. 

tDarum?why?  barum,  therefore.  bterum,  about  this. 

iDoju  ?  for  what  purpose  ?         bap,  for  that.  ^ierju,  from  this, 

toe^toegen?  on  what  account  ?  be§tt)egen,on  this  or  that  account. 

5leg^:>5ten  h)trb  babur(!^  (burd;  ben     Egypt  is  thereby  (by  the  mud  of  the 
@c^(amm  be§  SkW^)  befruc^tet—        Nile)  made  fertile— 

2)ie  Umbrei)ung  ber  @rbe  h)irb  am    The  revolution  of  the  earth  is  best 
beften  barau^  benjtejen—  proved  by  that— 


2.  COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS, 
(©tciocrung  kr  5lbucrlitcn0 
§  190.  Adjectives,  when  used  adverbially,  are  compared 
in  the  same  way  as  when  they  are  used  adjectively: 

^OC^,  highly;  p^Ct,    more  highly;  p^ft,   most  highly. 

fC^iJU^  beautifully  ;    f C^bnCf^  more  beautifully ;  fc^onft^  most  beautifully. 

1.  The  relative  adverbial  superlative   is  formed  by 
uniting  am  (an  t)em)  with  the  dative  of  the  superlative : 

2)te  Serd;e  fingt  fc^blt,  The  lark  sings  beautifully.  [fully. 

S)er  5^anarientoogeI  fingt  fc^lbuct,      The  Canary-bird  sings  more  beauti- 
2)ie  9^ad)ttgaII  fingt  ttttl  f  dionften,    The  nightingale  sings  most  beautifully. 

2.  The  absolute  adverbial  superlative  is  indicated  in 
four  ways: 

1.  By  the  simple  superlative  form : 

(3c^)  ban!e  gc^rfamft,  "I  thank  you  most  obediently." 

Rem.  In  ttlCtftbietenb,  IbeftmiJgltd),  and  na(i^[tfotgenb,  however,  the  superla- 
tive has  a  relative  signification. 

2.  By  uniting  auf§,  pill,  im  (aiif  fca§,  gu  bem,  in  bem),  with  the  super- 
lative : 

@r  ^at  un6  auf^  frCUnbIi(!^[te  ge^^     He  greeted  us  in  the  most  friendly 

grii^t,  way. 

!Rt^t  ivx  geriltgftcn,  Not  in  the  slightest  degree. 


§  191-194.]  SYNTAX    OF    ADVERBS.  369 

3.  By  the  superlative  with  the  ending  sfH^  (§  184,  Rem.  2)  ; 
aWac^e  bod;  ttJCnigftCn^  ben  35erfud;I    Make  at  least  the  attempt] 

Hem.  The  use  of  this  form  is  mostly  confined  to  the  adverbs  bcflcnS, 
t>5d;ften8,  langftenS,  ftieiftenS,  ndd;ften8,  f^dteftenS,  tot* 
n  i  g  ft  e  n  8. 

4.  By  the  use  of  the  positive  degree  preceded  by  such  adverbs  as  fcl^t, 

linncmcin,  iiuDerft,  Ijbt^ft,  etc 

dx  war  iiu^crft  aufgcregt,  He  was  greatly  excited. 

§  191.  Of  words  that  are  not  used  otherwise  than  as 
adverbs,  the  only  one  that  is  compared  is  oft^bttcr^oftcft* 

Rem.  The  comparative  degree  with  a  genitive  ending  (OftCt^)  is  frequently 
used  in  the  signification  of  oft  (in  the  positive  degree).  For  the  superlative 
(bftcft)  the  word  ^Sufigft  is  generally  used. 


3.  SYNTAX  OF  ADVERBS. 

(<Si)ntaj  ber  ^Ibucrbicn.) 
§  192.  Adverbs  modify  the  signification  of  verbs,  ad- 
jectives, and  other  adverbs: 

(Sr  fd^reibt  feltCtt^  He  writes  seldom. 

@r  fc^reibt  fc^r  fcltcn,  He  writes  very  seldom. 

(gr  jc^rcibt  fc^r  laitQC  33rtefe,  He  writes  very  long  letters. 

§  193.  Many  adverbs  frequently  partake-of  the  nature 
and  perform  the  office  of  conjunctions  (as  ba,  t)at)er,  tenn, 
boc^,  nun,  mm\,  \d)x,  \m,  barauf,  ba^er,  bamit,  inbeffen,  n?o,  wo^ 
^er,  tt)obin,  etc.).  Such  words  are  called  by  some  writers 
conjunctive  adverbs,  by  others  adverbial  conjunctions 

§  194.  The  following  general  rules  apply  to  the  posi- 
tion of  adverbs : 

1.  The  adverb  is  placed  before  an  adverb  or  adjective 
which  it  modifies : 

25er  33crg  ift  fc^r   ^oc^,  The  mountain  is  very  high. 

SSir  fat^reu  fc^r  jd;nell,  We  are  going  very  rapidly. 

Rem.  @cnug  {enough),  however,  when  used  as  an  adverb,  and  modifying  an 
adjective  or  other  adverb,  is  placed  after  the  modified  adjective  or  adverb : 
Sr  ift  rci(^  genug,  He  is  rich  enough. 

(Sr  fotnmt  oft  genug,  He  comes  often  enough. 

Q2 


370  THE    ADVERB.  [§  195. 

2.  The  adverb  is  placed  after  the  verb  when  the 
verb  occurs  in  simple  tenses  and  in  main  sentences ;  it 
is  placed  before  the  verb  when  occurring  in  compound 
tenses  or  in  subordinate  sentences: 

®ie  fingen  \t\\X  Win,  They  sing  very  beautifully, 

©ic  ^aben  fc^r  fc^on  gefuitgcn,  They  have  sung  very  beautifully. 

2Jian  ^at  ung  gcfagt,  ba^  fie  \t\\X  We  have  been  told  that  they  sing 

j^on  fingen,  very  beautifully. 

Rem.  The  negative  particle  ni^t  {not)  follows  this  law  when  it  refers  to  the 
predicate  of  the  sentence  or  to  the  entire  expression,  taking  the  last  position 
when  there  are  several  adverbs  ;  if  it  refers  to  a  single  word  of  the  sentence, 
it  is  placed  immediately  before  that  word : 

(Sr  fommt  ^eute  ViX^i,  He  does  not  come  to-day. 

@r  ift  ^eute  ntc^t  gefommen,  He  has  not  come  to-day. 

Me  benfen  nid^t  tiliC  ©iC,  All  think  not  as  you  (i.  e.,  all  think 

differently  from  you). 
^xti^t  dUt  bcn!en  tote  @ie,  Not  all  think  as  you  do. 

§  195.  Many  adverbs  have  no  exactly  corresponding 
word  in  English,  or  they  are  frequently  used  in  signifi- 
cations that  vary  greatly  from  those  of  the  correspond- 
ing English  words.     Thus : 

1.  ^itXf  here;  bd,  here,  there,  now,  then;  bott,  there, 
yonder : 

1 .  ^XtXf  refers  only  to  the  place  of  the  speaker. 

2.  %^Xif  refers  only  to  a  place  at  a  distance  from  the  speaker. 

3.  But  bfl  may  refer  to  a  time  or  place,  near  or  distant. 

(gr  tDoGte  urn  brei  U^r  t)ter  fein,  He  was  to  be  here  at  three  o'clock, 
unb  ift  no(f>  ntctjt  ba,  and  he  is  not  here  yet. 

^err  5Bei^  ift  nad)  ^rag  gegangcn;  Mr.  Weiss  has  gone  to  Prague ;  he 
er  mn^  fc^on  ba  fein,  must  be  there  by  this  time. 

SSon  ba  an,  From  that  time  forward. 

Rem.  ^fl  is  often  used  as  a  conjunctive  adverb  (or  a  conjunction) : 

S)a  (cory'.)  noc^  5ttte§  lag  in  tt)et*     While  all  lay  in  far  distance,  then 

ter  ^erne,  you  had  decision  and  courage; 

2)a  {adv.)  ^atteft  bu  (Sntfd^tn^  unb        and  now,  when  success  is  insured, 

SDfJut^ ;  now    you    begin    to    faint    and 

Unb  jeljt,  '^d  (conj.)  ber  @rfoIg  ge*       tremble. 

ftcijert  ift, 
3)c  {adv.)  fangfi  bu  an  gu  jagen  (@c^.)# 


J  195.]  SYNTAX  OF  ADVERBS.  371 

2.  ©rft,  when  signifying  ^r^^  or  firstly^  and  indicating 
tiie  priority  of  one  action  to  another,  receives  a  full 
tone  of  voice  : 

©rft  2Borte,  unb  bonn  Strcid^c  (®  c^.)/   First  words  and  then  blows  ("  deeds"). 

Rem.  Signifying  only,  not  earlier^  not  further^  not  more^  Ctft  does  not  re- 
ceive a  full  tone  of  voice: 

er  ift  e  r  ft  gcftcrn  ongcfommcn,       He  only  arrived  yesterday, 
er  ift  C  r  ft  jciu  3tt^rC  alt,  He  is  only  ten  years  old. 

3.  The  affirmative  adverb  ja  {yes)  is  often  used  in  the 
signification  of  certainly  {I hojpe  that),  indeed: 

^at  er  e8  getf>an  ?  ^la !  Has  he  done  it  ?  Yes ! 

@ic  tt)Crben  ja  tommcn,  You  will  certainly  (I  hope)  come. 

(Sr  ift  ja  mein  35atcr  I  Why,  he  is  my  father ! 

4.  9Zo(^  {still,  yet),  used  before  numerals  or  indefinite 
pronouns, is  translated  by  more  or  another  in  English: 

3fd;  (?abe  nO(^  eine  Stttc,  I  have  another  request. 

Sr  bat  notft  StDei  33iic^er  gcfauft,      He  has  bought  two  books  more. 
Rem.  9lOC^  ffl  is  translated  by  however,  ever  so: 

@ei  er  aud;  noc^  fo  rcid^,  Be  he  ever  so  rich. 

5.  ©(^on  {already)  is  frequently  omitted  in  translat- 
ing into  English : 

@r  ift  ft^on  angctommeu,  He  has  already  arrived. 

(Sr  if!  f^on  gcftent  Slbenb  3Urii(f='     He    returned    (already)   yesterday 
gefommen,  evening. 

Rem.  @^0n  often  expresses  emphasis  (as  of  confidence  or  certainty)  : 

@ie  tuerben  tnid^  f(!^on  i)erjicl;en,      You  will  (I  hope)  have  understood 
©d^On  ben  folgenben  aJJorgen—        The  very  next  morning—         [me. 

6.  SBol^l  (-i^^ZZ)  frequently  expresses  logical jpossibility 
or  jyrohability  : 

^c^Iafcn  ®ie  ttO^I!  (May  you  sleep  well!)=good-nightJ 

@«  fann  too^I  fcin,  It  may  (indeed)  be. 

®ic  baben  cS  tool^I  S^tcfen,  You  have  read  it  (I  suppose). 

Rem.  SBoIll  sometimes  is  used  to  express  intensity  or  emphasis : 
3<^  mo(!bte  lOO^l  toiffcn,  I  should  really  Uke  to  know. 

3a  ttO^l !  Yes !  (Yes,  mdeed !) 


372  THE   PREPOSITION.  [196. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

(Sic  i8orU)orterj 

§  196.  Prepositions  are  either  primitive,  derivative^  oi 
comjpoimd: 

1.  The  primitive  prepositions  are:  art,  auf,  au^,  bet, 
burd),  fitr,  irt,  mtt,  ob,  urn,  »or,  i)ott,  p. 

jRem.  1 .  The  primitive  prepositions  were  originally  adverbs ;  all  except  iJOn 
are  yet  used  also  as  adverbs  ;  at  least  they  may  be  considered  ae  such  when 
used  as  prefixes  to  compound  verbs. 

Rem.  2.  The  primitive  prepositions  have  been  developed  thus : 


Goth.  : 

ana, 

iup,       ut, 

bi. 

(bi-az),      thairh. 

failr, 

in. 

O.-G.  : 

ana, 

uf,         uz. 

bi, 

biz. 

duruh, 

furi, 

in, 

M.-G.: 

ane. 

uf,         ^z. 

bi. 

biz. 

durch, 

vUr, 

in, 

N.-G.: 

an, 

auf,      oug 

,      bet, 

m, 

bur^, 

filr, 

in. 

Goth.  : 

(mith-),      nehv, 

(uf), 

(af-ana). 

faura, 

du, 

O.-G.: 

miti, 

nah, 

oba, 

umbi, 

vona. 

fora, 

zuo. 

M.-G.: 

mite. 

nach. 

obe, 

umbe, 

vone, 

vor, 

zuo, 

N.-G.: 

mtt, 

na^, 

oben, 

um, 

ton, 

ijor. 

5U. 

2.  The  derivative  prepositions  are  derived  as  follows: 

1.  From  nouns,  as ;  ^(dh  (^alber,  ^alben),  fraft,  taut,  [tatt,  trolj,  berntoge, 
tt>egen. 

2.  From  adjectives,  as :  gemci^,  Iang§,  nttttels  (mittdft,  termttlelSf  ijermtt» 
telft),  nad;ft,  fammt,  feit,  unfern,  untDett. 

3.  From  participles,  as :  tod^rcnb,  nnbefd^abct,  ungead)tet. 

4.  From  adverbs,  as :  au^en,  binncn,  bi6,  gema§,  Winter,  neben,  nebft,  o^ne, 
unter,  iiber, 

3.  Compound  prepositions  are  mostly  formed  by  pre- 
fixing a  preposition  or  adverb  to  a  noun  or  to  another 
preposition,  as : 

2ln[tatt,  binnen,  «m— tDtHen, 

an^er^atb,  entgegen,  pfotge, 

inner^atb,  biegjeit,  gntoiber. 

ober^alb,  jenfeit, 

unter^alb,  gegeniiber, 

Bern.  1 .  The  derivation  and  the  composition  of  some  prepositions  is  now 

"no  longer  felt"  (§  49,  Mem.  8  ;  §  223  ;  §  233). 

Rem.  2.  Most  prepositions  that  are  derived  from  nouns  and  adjectives,  and 

most  compound  prepositions,  have  had  their  origin  or  have  first  been  used  as 

prepositions  during  the  New-German  period. 


§  107,  198.]     CONSTRUCTION   OF   PREPOSITIONS.  373 

1.  CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  PREPOSITIONS. 

OJicction  bcr  SJonoiirter.) 
§  197.  Prepositions  do  not  govern  a  single  case  only 
(as  the  objective  in  Englisli),  but  they  govern  the  three 
oblique  cases,  the  genitive,  dative,  and  accusative  (§  80, 
liei'i.  1)  of  substantives,  whether  nouns  or  pronouns: 
Slnftatt  feiiieS  ^rubers  (yen.),  Instead  of  his  brother. 

2Jiit  jeiiicm  33iubcr       {dat\  With  his  brother. 

OI?ue  jciuen  33ruticr      (ace),  Without  his  brother. 

Rem.  The  primitive  prepositions  especiall}'  are  not  always  independent  gov- 
erning words,  in  the  same  sense  that  verbs  and  adjectives  are.    But  often  the 
preposition  that  is  to  be  employed,  as  well  as  the  case  it  is  to  govern  (as,  if 
accusative  or  dative),  is  determined  by  the  preceding  verb,  adjective,  or  noun : 
(Sr  fteigt  auf  ben  33erg,  He  is  climbing  up  the  mountain. 

(Sr  icibct  an  9J^eumatiSmu8,  He  is  suffering  from  rheumatism. 

@r  gebt  in  bcn  ©artcn,  He  is  going  into  the  garden, 

©r  ift  in  bcm  (im)  ©artcn,  He  is  in  the  garden. 

§  198.  The  following  prepositions  govern  the  genitive 
case: 

2)ic^fcit,  mittcIS  (mittclft,  utvxxU  ticrmogc, 

jcnfcit,  tcl^  or  ucrmittclft),  toafirciib, 

iatb(!)a(ficror^al6cn),  ftatt  (or  onftatt),  lucgcn, 

oufjcrijQib,  itnbcfdjabct,  urn— toittcn, 

innerl)alb,  ungcad^tet,  Xiw^^  {or  cntlang;, 

oticrl)Qlt),  unttjcit,  tro^, 

untct^alb,  unfcrn,  jufolge. 

Rem.  1.  The  last  three,  Idng^^  tro^,  and  JUfoIgt^  may  also  govern  the  da- 
tive case. 

Rem.  2.  The  following  lines,  containing.most  of  these  prepositions,  are  com- 
mitted to  memory  in  schools  in  Germany : 

Unweit,  mittelfl,  fraft  unb  tod^rcnb, 

laut,  sermoge,  ungeacfetet, 

ober^albunbuntcr^alb, 

innert)alb  unb  auper^aU, 

bte^feit,  jcnfeit,  ^alben,  wegcn, 

jlatt  unb  Ung^,  jufolge,  tro^, 

fle^en  mit  bcm  (Scnitio, 

obcr  auf  bie  ^^rage  „tt)cffen?" — 

3)o(^  t|l  ^ier  m*t  iu  »ergeffcnf 

ba§  bei  btefcn  lectern  brei 

au^  bcr  ^o^  rid^tig  fei. 

Rem.  3.  None  but  derivative  or  compound  prepositions  govern  the  gen.  caae. 


374  THE   PREPOSITION.  [§  199-201. 

§  199.  The  following  prepositions  govern  the  dative 

case: 

^n^f  OcntaSf  fammt, 

an^ttf  mit,  fcit, 

(tniten,  niic^ft;  su^ 

gcgcnii^er,  (o^),  jutoibcr* 

^em.  The  most  important  of  these  are  included  in  the  following  lines : 

©c^reib mit,  nad^,  ndc^ ft,  nelbfl/  fammt, 
bei,  fett,  »on,  ju,  jutwtber, 
entgegen,  au^er,  au^ 
fiet^  mit  bem  ®atio  nteber. 

§  200.  The  following  prepositions  govern  the  accusor 
tive  case : 

^\^f      Hx^f      fUr,      gcgcn,      o:^tie,      urn,      toibcr^ 
(0cn),   (foiibcr), 

^ew.  They  are  included  in  the  following  lines : 
S5ei  burd^,  fiir,  o^ne,  urn, 
bt^,  fottber,  gegen,  tuibcr, 
fc^reib  jlet<3  ben  ^Iccufatio, 
unb  nie  ben  ®atit)  nteber. 

§  201.  The  following  prepositions  govern  either  the 
accusative  or  the  dative  case,  according  to  certain  rules 
(§  244—253) : 

5(n,  in,  untcr, 

i2em.  1.  The  following  lines,  containing  these  prepositions,  contain  also  the 
rules  for  their  use : 

%n,  auf,  'Winter,  ncben,  in, 

iiber,  unter,  t)or  unb  jtoifd^en 

fie|en  mit  bem  3lccufatio, 

tsenn  man  fragen  fann ;  ^wol^itt  1" 

SWtt  bem  !^otit)  flel^n  fte  fo, 

Da^  man  nur  fann  fragen  „»oo  ?" 


.  202,  203.]    CONSTRUCTION   OF   PREPOSITIONS.  375 

2.  PREPOSITIONS  GOVERNING  THE  GENITIVE. 

(^i^oriobrtcr  mit  bern  (ScnitiuO 
§  202.  J)ie§fcit  {this  side  of)  and  jcufcit  {t?ie  other  side 
of  heyond),  refer  only  to  place : 

^iC^fcit  beS  glu[fe«,  On  this  side  of  the  river. 

^[Cnfcit  bcS  ©cbir^eS,  The  other  side  of  the  mountain. 

Rem.  1 .  They  are  both  used,  though  rarely,  with  the  dative  case : 

3  e  n  f  c  i  t  jencm  §iigel  {2>&i.),        The  other  side  of  that  hill. 
Rem.  2.  The  addition  of  s^  gives  an  adverbial  force  to  both  of  them : 

(gr  tDo^nt  bicSfeitS,  ic^  jenjeitS,         He  lives  on  this  side,  I  on  the  other. 
Rem.  3.  They  are  both  used  as  nouns,  especially  in  reference  to  this  world 
and  the  world  to  come : 

(Sin  3cnfeit,  baS  herein  tn8  2)ic«*    Another  life  that  extends  into  this 
fcit  retd^t,    "  life. 

§  203.  §alb,  §alkr,  ^dben  {on  account  of  for  the  sake^ 
as  regards)  always  follow  the  noun  they  govern : 

(5r  rcifte  nur  SSergniigenS  ^albcr    He  went  to  the  Springs  only  for  the 

in9  53ab,  sake  of  pleasure. 

2)e8  ©elbeS  ^altltr,  For  the  sake  of  money. 

Rem.  1 .  ^alfl  is  rarely  used  with  the  force  of  a  preposition  except  in  com- 
position with  a  pronoun : 

SBc^balb?  On  what  accoimt  ?  ^Sc^^alB,  on  this  account. 

Rem.  2.  ^dlbtt  is  preferred  to  !^a((lCn  when  the  noun  it  governs  ends  in  sCH  : 
(Sr  f)at,  feiner  toielc'n  ©c^ulbcn  l^dU    He  had  to  run  away  on  account  of 
bcr,  flicf^cn  milffen,  his  many  debts. 

Rem.  3.  ^Ql^Ctt  is  united  with  the  pronoun  it  governs  into  a  compound 
word,  taking  an  unorganic  t  or  tt  as  letters  of  union  (§  1 07,  Rem.  2) : 
'Mtmtthaihtn,  on  my  account.  Unfcrtijalben,  on  our  account. 

Rem.  4.  Feminine  nouns  in  sf^tit,  =!ctt,  ^Ultg,  when  followed  by  ]^a(5tr 
and  not  preceded  by  an  article  or  adjective,  often  take  an  unorganic  ending 
s£|  (after  the  analogy  of  some  compound  nouns,  see  §  58,  2,  Rem.  2): 

(5r  rcifte  ®cfunb^eit8  f^alhtt  tnS    He  went  to  the  Springs  for  the  sake 
Sab,  of  his  health. 

Rem.  4.  ^al6cr  is  sometimes  preceded  by  Ulll,  placed  before  the  noun : 

Um  bc8  gricbcuS  Ijalbcr^  For  the  sake  of  peace. 

Rejii.  5.  ^albCn  is  formed  from  the  dative  plural  hit  .^ttlbC  {the  half, 
side) ;  ^  a  I  b  c  r  is  an  irregular  form  ofbalbcn;  ^albisa  contraction  of 
the  accusative  singular  (M.-G.,  halbe^half). 


376  THE   PREPOSITION.  [§  204-206. 

§  204.  From  the  accusative  of  the  same  noun   (btc 
^aibe)  have  been  formed  the  four  following  prepositions : 

Slutcr^^alb,  outside  of,  witho.it,  beyond. 
tnnerfjall),    inside  of,  within. 
Ot)Cl*f)ttH)^      on  the  upper  side  of,  above. 
UntCr^dli),    on  the  lower  side  of,  below. 
9^iirnberg  bat  au^erljalb  unb  in=    Nuremberg  has  many  stately  edifices 
nerl)aifi  ber  2)^auern  t)iele  ftatt*        outside  of  and  inside  of  its  wails, 
tic^e  ©ebciube, 
SSormg    liegt  obtt^alll;   S3ingen    Worms  lies  above,  and  Bingen  be- 
UntCrljald     ber   SSunbegfeftung        low  Mainz,  a  fortification  of  the 
2)iain5,  (German)  Confederation. 

Rem.  1.  ^fnnCtl^dlfi  may  refer  also  to  a  specified  space  of  time: 
^fnucr^alt)  einer  ®tunbe,  eineg  Stages,    Within  an  hour,  a  day. 

§  205.  ®raft  (hy  the  jpower  of^  in  virtue  of),  denotes 
rather  a  moral  than  a  physical  cause  (compare  tJermiige, 

§215): 

^raft  feineg  Stmteg,  By  virtue  of  his  office. 

Rem.  1 .  ^rflft  has  become  a  preposition  by  the  dropping  of  the  preposition 
in^  which  formerly  preceded  it : 

„2)a  er  nic^t  in  ^raft  eineS  i)erlte^    As  he  does  not  rule  by  virtue  of  a 
(}enen  2lmte8  regiert,"  borrowed  office. 

Rem.  2.  ^tflft  (like  laut,  toertttijge,  and  bef)uf§)  has  come  from 
legal  language  (^ang(eiftl)t)  into  the  language  of  literature.  It  was  first  used 
by  good  writers  in  the  seventeenth  century. 

§  206.  Sdngg  or  entlang  {along,  lengthvme  of)\ 

Siing^  beg  2;^ale8,  Along  the  valley. 

Sntlang  beg  SBalbgebtrgeg,  Along  the  forest-covered  mountain. 

Rem.  1 .  Both  forms  are  frequently  used  with  the  dative  case : 
2  ci  n  g  g  bCttt  Ufer,  Along  the  shore. 

Sntlaitg  bCIlt  ©trome,  Along  the  stream. 

Rem.  2,  Sctltg^  is  occasionally  (CntlUltg  more  frequently  than  I  a  n  g  6), 
found  with  the  accusative  case : 

S  a  n  g  g  bcn  @aal  ^tltab,  Down  along  the  Saal. 

(gnttangbcn  gelfen^fai),  Along  the  rocky  path. 

Rem.  3.  ©ntlaitQ  frequently /oZ^ows  the  noun  which  it  governs : 

{Gen.)  2)eg  SBegeg  Clltlang,  Along  the  way. 

{Dat. )  ®em  33ect  entlang,  Along  the  parterre. 

IAcc.)  2)en  gan^^jen  Scrg  etttlattg/  Along  the  whole  mountain. 


207-209.]       CONSTRUCTION   OF   PREPOSITIONS.  377 

Rem.  4.  S'lltldng  is  sometimes  used  (with  the  accusative  of  noims)  indicat- 
ing time  Tmeaning  throwjh) : 

iJiaiid^cii   iucjeutlid^en  Xag   cnt=    Through  many  a  day  of  my  youtn. 

iano  (®.), 

§  207.  ^aut  {according  to^hy  the  wording  of)  refers  to 
something  spoken  or  written : 

iJaut  tie«  iBefc^le^,  According  to  the  order. 

2aut  be^  ^jertrageS,  By  the  wording  of  the  treaty. 

Rem.  1.  I^QUt  is  used  by  some  writers  also  with  the  dative  case :  it  is  es- 
pecially used  with  the  dative  plural  of  nouns  when  they  are  not  preceded  by 
an  article  or  by  an  adjective : 

{Cen.)  1*  au  t  friiljcrcr  ^SriCfC,  According  to  former  letters. 

{Dut.)  ^a\i\.  ^riCfeU  auS  meincr  §ei=     According  to  letters  from  my  home, 
niatb, 
Rem.  2.  Saut  has  passed  to  be  a  preposition  by  dropping  the  preposition 
not^  (formerly  written  nac^  2  aute=according  to  the  wording), 

§  208.  The  four  words  mxiXtU,  mittclft,  tjcrmitteig,  ter= 

mittclft  have  the  same  meaning  {through^  hy  means  of, 
through  the  instrumentality  of  ) — not  referring  to  per- 
sons ;  see  bur(^  (§  238) : 

ifijirtamcn  mittclft  (or  termittelft)     We  reached  the  shore  by  means  of 

eincS  ^'abneS  anS  Ufev,  a  skiff. 

2)am^tfd;iffc  trerbcn  ^aufitj  UCts    Steam-boats  are  frequently  driven  by 
mittclft  einer  ®d;raube  beirecjt,        means  of  a  screw. 
Rem.  I.  The  form  UCtmittClft  is  most  frequently  employed;  and  mittClft 
is  more  usual  than  either  UCrmtttCl^,  or  mittCl^* 

Rem.  2.  The  four  forms  are  derived  from  the  Genitive  of  the  adjective  mtt^- 
t  C  I,  which  was  first  used  adverbially  (§  107,  2)  and  then  as  a  preposition.  The 
form  to c r  ni i  1 1 e  1  ft  was  current  in  the  1 7th  century ;  mi 1 1  e I  ft  first  appears 
in  the  writings  of  Steinbach  (1734). 

Rem.  3.  The  st  is  added  unorganically  to  the  genitive  ending  (§  107,  2). 
Rem.  4,  The  provincial  use  of  these  prepositions  with  the  dative  case,  which 
has  occasionally  crept  into  the  works  of  even  such  writers  as  Goethe,  is  not 
approved  by  German  grammarians. 

§  209.  '^iaii  or  m\iiiii  {instead'  of  in  place  of)  : 

5lnftatt  (or  ftOtt)  fetncS  i8ruber8,     Instead  of  his  brother. 
Rem.  1 .  The  placing  of  ^Xtiit  after  the  noun  it  governs,  which  was  very 
general  in  the  Middle-German,  is  now  considered  antiquated: 

%n  feineS  33ruber8  Statt  (compare  in  English,  t«  his  brother's  stead). 
Rem.  2.  The  noun  @tatt  (stead)  has  become  a  preposition  by  the  dropping 
of  0n,  which  formerly  was  generally  employed  before  it. 


378  '  THE   PREPOSITION.  [§  210-215. 

§  210.  Sro^  (in  spite  of,  in  deficmce  of,  nothwithstand- 

ing) : 

^ro^  be§  9?egen§  gtngcn  xoxx  nac^  In  spite  of  the  rain  we  went  to  the 
bem  SJiufeum,  museum. 

RerA  1.  %IQ1^  indicates  more  active  opposition  than  ungeac^tet,  and  is 
therefore  perhaps  more  properly  to  be  construed  with  the  dative  case : 
%XQ^  bem  Serbote,  In  spite  of  the  prohibition. 

Rem.  2.  ^ro^  has  become  a  preposition  by  dropping  the  preposition  JU  (tti; 
in  jnm  %XiS^  (in  defiance  of). 

§211.  UnBef^ abet   {without  injury  to   or   detraction 

from) : 

®einer  (g^re  UnfiCf^abCt^  Without  detracting  from  his  honor. 

Rem.  1.  Unbejc^abct  may  precede  or  follow  the  noun  it  governs. 
Rem.  2.  It  is  sometimes  used  with  the  dative  case. 

§  212.  Um-U)illcn  {for  — 's  sake,  for  the  sake  of,  on  ac- 
count of) : 

Q6)  bitte  btd^,  Uttt  @otte8  tOiUtUf    I  entreat  you,  for  God's  sake,  not  to 

e8  uic^t  3U  t^un,  do  it. 

Um  beg  griebeng  tuttten,  For  the  sake  of  peace. 

Rem.  Occasionally,  though  rarely,  examples  are  met  with  where  one  par^ 
ticle  (um  or  tilitlcn)  is  omitted. 

§  213.  Uttgea^tCt  {notwithstanding,  in  sfpite  of,  without 
regarding) : 

Ungcac^tCt  be§  9?egcnS,  gingentoir  In  spite  of  the  rain  we  went  to  the 
nac^  bem  SKufeum,  museum. 

Rem.  Ultgeac^tet  may  precede  or  follow  the  noun. 

§  214.  UnttJeit  or  nnfern  (not  far  from,  near) : 

@r  Vooifnt  unftm  beS  Xljoxt^,  He  lives  not  far  from  the  gate. 

UntiJCit  be§  33erge8  Itegt  baS  S)Drf,    The  village  is  not   far  from  the 

mountain. 
Rem.  1.  The  parallel  forms  ol^niuett,  o^nferit,  are  now  rarely  used. 
Rem.  2.  U  n  tt)  e  i  t  and  U  n  f  e  rn  are  occasionally  found  used  with  the  dative. 
Rem.  3.  Both  words  have  had  their  origin  during  the  New-German  period. 

§  215.  Seriubge  (%  virtue  of  in  conformity  with,  by  the 

'power  of) : 

2ltte  SiJr^er  ftreBen  UcrmiigC  t^rer  All  bodies  tend  towards  the  center 
@c^n?ere  na(^  bem  9JJitteI:|)un!t  of  the  earth,  through  their  at- 
ber  @rbc  traction  of  gravitation. 

SJermiigC  beS  35ertrage8,  By  virtue  of  the  treaty. 


§210-219.]        CONSTRUCTION   OF   PREPOSITIONS.  379' 

Rein   1.  SJcriniJgt  mav  be  used  in  most  cases  where  froft  and  IflUt  are 
employed. 
Rem.  2.  33  c  r  m  i5  g  e  was  originally  a  noun  preceded  by  n  a  t!^. 

§  216.  SBd^renb  {dui^ng  the  time  of) : 
^ohrcnb  be«  ^riegcS,  Dui-ing  the  war. 

Rem.  1.  SBaftrCnb  (from  tt)  ci^ren,  to  endure)  was  first  used  as  a  parti- 
ciple or  adjective  (as  in  wcil^renbem  ^ricgc) ;  it  was  next  used  with  the  quali- 
Hed  noun  in  the  genitive  (a>a[)rcnbe8  itriegeS,  compare  be§  3)Jorgcn,  §81,3); 
it  was  first  used  as  a  preposition  in  the  last  half  of  the  eighteenth  century. 

§217.SBcgen  {on  account  of,  for  the  sake,  or  purpose  of) : 

SBCQCU  tea  5Hegeii§  (or  be§  9JegenS     On  account  of  the  rain  I  remained 

tr>egen)  biteb  ic^  ju  §aufe,  at  home.  [strife. 

9iid?t  StreitenS  U)C()Cn  tarn  '\6)  {>er,     I  came  not  here  for  the  purpose  of 

Rem.  1.  2B  e  g  e  n  can  thus  either  precede  or  follow  the  noun. 

Rem.  2.  2B  e  g  C  n  has  become  a  preposition  by  dropping  the  preposition 

ft  0  II  from  Don  SBcOCtt^  a  form  that  is  now  antiquated  except  in  some  fixed 

expressions,  as : 

SBon  5Rcc^t8  toeotn^  For  the  sake  of  justice. 

Rem.  3.  SBcgcn  is  suffixed  to  the  personal  pronoun,  taking  an  unorganic 
s{  or  sCt  as  letters  of  union  (§  107,  Rem.  2): 

9y?einctwegen,  on  my  account.  ©einctwcgcn,  on  his  account. 

§  218.  3wfol(JC  {in  consequence  of  in pursuanxie  of  in 
accordance  with) : 

(5r  that  bicfcS  JUfOlgC  mcincS  3luf*     He  did  this  in  accordance  with  my 

tragS,  commission.  [tions. 

Bufolge  gctragter  @^efuIationen,         In  consequence  of  rash  specula- 

Rem.  1.  When  the  noun  /o//ows  JufoIgC^  the  noun  is  put  in  the  dative  case : 

Bnfolgc  ber  neucften  ^ac^rtd)tcn,  }^      According  to  the  latest    intelli- 

(or)  2)cn  neueften  5^ad?ridjtcn  jufolQC,)  gence. 

Rem.  2,  Formerly  the  two  words  were  separated  (gu  iJ^IfiC)' 

§  219.  Many  other  words  are  used  as  prepositions, 
governing  the  genitive  case  (especially  in  the  language 
of  trade  and  commerce),  as : 

^InJiCfK^tS,  in  view  of  {from  baS  5lngertdjt,  face). 

tiC^Uf^,  in  behalf  of  (    "    ber  33e^uf,  behalf,  behoof). 

namcn^,  in  the  name  of      (    "    ber  Sfiamen,  name). 
fCitCn^,  on  the  part  of  (    "    bie  8cite,  side). 

ijtnftdjtltt^,  with  respect  to  (    "    bie  .^inftd)t,  respect). 
rii(fri(itli(^,  with  regard  to  (    "    bie  aiiicffic^t,  regard). 


'380                                  THE  PREPOSITION.                   [§  220, 222. 

5lngcft^t5  ber  ©efa'^r,  In  view  of  the  danger. 

9iamCU^  beg  2lmtmann6,  In  the  name  of  the  officer. 

©CttCn^  ber  (Slterit,  On  the  part  of  the  parents, 

^tnfic^tlt^  ber  ^otgen,  In  view  of  the  consequences. 

S{ii(lftt^tlt(^  beg  SSort^etlg,  With  regard  to  the  interest. 
iJem.When  used  with  personal  pronouns,  the  formfttt^  (instead  of  (citCU^). 
is  employed  (§  101))  : 

2)leincr  f  e  i  t  g,  for  my  part.  @etner  j  e  i  t  g,  on  his  side. 


3.  PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THE  DATIVE  CASE. 
(SBorioijrter  mit  bcm  2)attD.) 
§220.  Wu§  {put  of,  from)  primarily  refers   to  place, 
indicating  origin,  source,  or  the  place  whence  : 

5lU§  ber  @tabt  fommen,  To  come  out  of  the  city. 

(Sr  ftanmit  mi  einer  eblen  gamilie,    He  comes  from  a  noble  family. 
Rem.  1.  51  u  g  sometimes  is  used  as  referring  to  a  period  of  time: 

(Sin  2)td;ter  au§  bem  bretje^nten    A  poet  of  the  thirteenth  century. 
3a^rl;uiibert, 
Rem.  2.  It  often  refers  to  the  material  or  to  the  parts  of  a  thing : 

Stn  ®efa^  mi  2:f)on,  A  vessel  of  clay. 

2)er  SJJenjc^  Befte^t  mi  Setb  Ultb    Man  cdsnists  of  body  and  soul. 
®eele, 
Rem.  3.  It  may  refer  to  the  inner  motive  cause  of  an  action  : 

@r  ^anbeli  jo  au^  ®sij,  He  does  so  from  avarice. 

Rem.  4.  It  may  refer  to  the  material  or  parts  of  a  thing: 

Od)  erfe^e  mi  f einem  SSrtefe,  ba^    I  see  from  his  letter,  that  he  is  sick, 
er  Iran!  t[t, 

3)a8  tuei^  tcb  mi  ©rfa^rung,  That  I  know  from  experience. 

§  221.  Wu^cr  (pitt  of  outside  of  heyond,  excejpt)  refers 
only  to  position — not  to  motion : 

5lu|cr  bem  ^aiife  JU  fein,  To  be  out  of  the  house. 

(Sr  t[t  m^tX  ©efa^r,  He  is  out  of  danger. 

5lMf  Cr  t^m,  ^aben  5lt[e  t^re  ^flic^t    All    except  him   have    done  their 
get^an,  duty. 

Rem.  Stu^cr  (Mid.-Ger.,  ftzer;   Old-Ger.,tz&r)  is  from  the  Old-Ger., 
HZ  (aug),  the  ar  being  a  derivative  syllable. 

§  222.  S5ct  {near.^  at.,  with)  refers  only  to  position— not 

to  motion : 

S9ct  bem  §aii  je  [te^t  etn  S3aum,         Near  the  house  stands  a  tree. 
3n  ber  ©c^Iad^t  Iiei  Set^jig,  In  the  battle  of  (near)  Leipsic 


§  223-225.]  PREPOSITIONS  with  the  dative  case.       381' 

Rem.  1.  S3ci  may  indicate  approximation,  connection,  possession,  etc.  t 

(Sr  wo^nt  iJCi  mir,  He  resides  with  me. 

3d?  l;abe  tcin  @elb  bci  tnir,  I  have  no  money  with  me. 

S3ci  biefer  ^fiac^ric^t,  At  this  news. 

Rem.  2.  33ci  is  used  in  making  oaths  or  protestations : 

isBci  nieincr  (g^re,  Upon  (by)  my  honor. 

§  223.  JJ3inncn  {within,i7isideof)  refers  only  to  definite 
periods  of  time  : 

^innen  eiucr@tunbc  tocrbe  it^    Within  an  hom-  I  will  take  my  de- 

abreifcn,  parture. 

Sinncn  c  t  n  e  m  3  a  ^  r  C,  "Within  a  year. 

Rem.  1.  53inncn  (M.-G.,  binncn),  has  come  from  the  Lower- Gerjnan(^i) 
into  the  High-German  (§  6),  and  is  a  compound  of  be  innen  (bet  iuneil). 

Rem.  2.  The  reference  to  space  originally  indicated  by  btnn  C  n  is  now  re- 
tained only  in  such  compounds  as : 

2)cr  ^inncnfee,  inland  sea.  S)aS  JBinncntaub,  the  interior  part 

of  a  country. 

§  224.  (?ntgcgcn  (towards,  against)  expresses  a  direc- 
tion of  or  tendency  to  a  motion  toward  an  object,  either 
in  a  friendly  or  hostile  sense : 

2)er  2)lenfd;entieunb  fommt  bem    The  benevolent  man    meets    in  a 

33ittenben  freunblic^  CtttgCgCn,  kindly  way  one  who  asks  a  favor. 

2)cr  Sa^fcre  gcf)t  bem  gcinbe  mu*    The  brave  man  goes  courageously 

t^ig  entgegen^  to  meet  the  enemy. 

2)er  2Sinb  toax  unS  cntgcgttt^         The  wind  was  against  us. 
Rem.  1.  SntgCgCn  always  comes  after  the  noun  it  governs. 
Rem.  2.  When  motion  is  indicated,  CtttgCgCIt  may  perhaps  be  considered 
an  adverb  (i.  e.,  a  prefix  of  the  compound  verb,  as  e  n  t  g  e  g  e  n  g  e  ^  e  n). 
Rein.  3.  ^IttgCQCtt  is  sometimes  used  ^s  synonymous  with  guftlibcr  X 
@r  \)at  bem  33efe()Ie  cntgegCtt  (or    He  has  acted  contrary  to  the  com- 
gutoibcr)  ge^anbelt,  mand. 

Rern.  4.  The  word  CntgCfiCIl  (M.-G.,  eng^gen ;  O.-G.,  ingegin,  inkakan) 
was  formed  by  the  union  of  in  kakan=\n  gegen=:en4*gegen.  The  t  is  add- 
ed by  false  analogy,  after  imitation  of  ttlt  in  inseparable  compound  verbs. 

§  225.  ©cgcniiber  (over  against,  ojyposite  to)  refers  to 
the  relative  position  of  two  objects  (which  often  have 
a  hostile  relation  to  each  other) : 

53ei  3oniborf  flanben  bie  9fJuffen    At  Zomdorf  the  Russians  stood  ar- 
ben  ^reufeen  gegcniitJCr,  rayed  against  the  Prussians. 


k 


382  THE  PREPOSITION.  [§  226-228. 

Rem.  1 .  This  preposition  sometimes  precedes  the  noun  it  governs : 

(^egcniikr  bem  2JZufeum  i[t  bie     Opposite  the   Museum  is  the  new 
neue  33ibIiDt^ef,  Library-building. 

Rem.  2.  ©CQCltiitier  is  compound  of  gegen  iiber  —  toward  over  (or  over 
toward). 

§  226.  ®cma5  {in  conformity  with,  agreeablyi  to)  may 
precede  or  follow  the  noun  it  governs : 

©eiUiif  ttieinem  ^orfa^e  (or  met*     I  do  as  I  had  intended  (or  according 
Item    iBorfa^e    gcmti^),    ^anble         to  my  intention),  so  do  I  act. 

Rem.  @  em  a  ^  was  formerly  an  adjective  (in  M.-G.^  gemaeze  ;  in  O.-G., 
gimazi,  kimazi=na(i)  bem  9Jia^e). 

§  227.  Wit  {with,  in  connection  with)  : 
S)ei*  35ater  ge^t  mit  ben  ^inbern    The  father  goes  out  with  his  chil- 

aug,  dren. 

(Srtrage  beine  Setben  VXit  ©ebulb  I     Bear  thy  sorrows  with  patience ! 
Rem.  1.  SJJtt  is  often  used  to  denote  the  identity  of  time  of  one  event  with 
another : 

2Btr  [tanben  ntit  Xageganbruc^  au\,    We  arose  at  daybreak. 
Rem.  2.  QJltt  is  frequently  used  in  denoting  the  means  of  conveyance : 
©nen  S3rief  mit  ber  ^oft  jd^icfen,    To  send  a  letter  by  mail. 
SOltt  ber  (gtfenBa^n  fa^ren,  To  travel  by  railroad. 

§  228.  9ta(^  denotes  primarily  motion  or  direction  to 
or  toward  ajplace  {see  p,  §  235) : 

(Sr  ift  na(^  S3erltn  gegangen,  He  has  gone  to  Berlin. 

@ie  fegelten  Vi^^  S^orben,  They  sailed  toward  the  North. 

Rem.  1.  The  particle  gU  or  j^tll  is  frequently  added,  being  placed  after  the 
noun  that  is  governed  by  ttdC^)  X 

2)er  §afe  ttef  na(!^  ber  @tabt  git,      The  hare  ran  toward  the  city. 
(Sg  bonttert  nac^  bem  ©ebirgc  l^tn,     It  thunders  in  the  direction  of  the 

mountains. 
Rem.  2.  91(1^  is  used  inexpressing  a  motion  tOAvard  a  person  or  thing, 
for  the  purpose  of  reaching,  touching,  or  procuring  it : 

9la^  3emanb  f^tagen,  To  strike  at  a  person. 

9*1  ati  bem  %Xli  jc^iden,  To  send  for  a  physician. 

9la4l  Semanb  fragen,  To  ask  about  a  person. 

Rem.  3.  SSid^  frequently  signifies  *■'■  after,"  whether  referring  to  time  or  to 
place  : 

9la(^  bem  flinften  WoX,  After  the  fifth  of  May. 

(Siner  ging  Uttl!^  bem  ?lnbern,  One  went  after  another. 


§  229-233.]    CONSTRUCTION   OF   PREPOSITIONS.  383 

Rem.  4.  9Ifl(^  frequently  signifies  cwcording  to^  or  in  accordance  with ;  used 
in  this  signification,  n(l(^  may  be  ])laced  after  the  noun  it  governs  : 

(S8  gc^t  nic^t  immer  nat^  unfern     Everything  does  not  always  go  ac- 

SG3ilnfc^en,  cording  to  our  wishes. 

2)a«  fd^medt  na(5  SScin,  That  tastes  of  wine. 

(Sr  malt  nat^  bcr  ""Jiatur,  He  paints  from  nature. 

iUiciner  3)?cinung  nat^,  In  my  opinion. 

§  229.  9la^ft  or  3Und^ft  next  to  or  next  after) : 
iSr  \ci^  ndt^ft  niir,  He  sat  next  to  me. 

3)er  ^roii^rins  ritt  junarfjft  bem    The  Crown  Prince  rode  next   to 
tiJnige  (or  bem  Ii5nige  pndc^ft).        the  king. 
Rem.  1.  3  mi  ^  ^  ft  m3,y  precede  or  follow  the  nouns  it  governs. 
Rem.  2.  9i  a  d)ft ,  the  superlative  of  n  a  ^  e  (§  92),  was  not  used  as  a  pre- 
position before  the  New-German  period. 

§  230.  91cbft  (together  with)  refers  to  a  connection 
existing  in  thought  rather  than  in  reality : 

2)ic  @tabt  fa^  ben  hunger  ncftft    The  city  saw  famine,  ftogether  with 
fcinem  ganjen  ©e^olgc  mit  jdjrecf=        (or  and)  all  its  consequences,  ap^ 
lic!^en  ®c^rittcn  fid;  naljcrn  (<5d).),     proach  with  fearful  steps. 
Rem.  I.  9icbft  is  an  irregular  derivative  from  n  e  b  C  n. 

§  231.  Dhf  denoting  position  over  or  above,  is  obsolete, 
[except  in  poetry  or  in  legal  language : 

£)b  bem  Miliar  l()ing  eine  2)?utter    Over  the  altar  hung  a  picture  of  the 
OotteS  (@d;.),  Virgin  Mary. 

Rem.  For  ob  (M.-G.,  ob;   O.-G.,  obe,  oba)  in  New-Ger.,  it  b  e  r  is  used. 

§  232.  ^amntt  (together  with)  indicates  a  more  intimate 
[Or  natural  connection  than  is  expressed  by  nebft  and  mit: 

2)ag    (Sd)iff   fammt    ber    ganjen     The  ship,  together  with  the  entire 

2J2annfd;aft  unb  Sabung  trarb        crew  and  cargo,  became  a  prey  to 

ein  'Stauh  ber  SSeUen,  the  waves. 

Rem.  ©ammt  (M.-G.,samet]   0.-(?.,  samant)  is  derived  from  the  Old- 

I German  adjective  sam  (compare  the  English  ^^sarne"),  which  is  allied  to  the 

Latin  semper  (always)  and  the  Greek  (tvv  (with). 

§  233.  8cit  (since,  during)  refers  to  a  period  of  time 
that  is  specified  with  reference  to  the  moment  of  its 
commencement,  or  to  its  duration: 

<Bt\i  toorgeftern  l;abe  i^  i^n  nid;t    I  have  not  seen  him  since  day  before 

gefeben  (§  256),  yesterday, 

er  ift  fcit  eincm  3a^re  frauf,  He  has  been  sick  a  year. 

Rem.  @cit  CM.-G.,  sit;  O.-G.,  sid)  is  allied  to  the  Goth.  adj.  seithu=late. 


384  THE  PREPOSITION.  [§  234, 235. 

§  234.  S5ott  (from)  indicates  source  or  origin  in  the 
most  general  way : 

SBun  Berlin  gingeii  n)tr  nad;  ^onn,    From  Berlin  we  went  to  Bonn. 
5yon  btefem  Sage  an,  From  this  day  forward. 

Rem.  1.  83on  is  also  used  to  express  the  material  of  which  a  thing  is  made, 
or  the  contents  or  property  of  a  thing : 

2)er  %\\&)  ift  Uon  §0!^,  The  table  is  of  wood. 

(Sr  t[t  ein  3}Zann  ijon  (g^rc,  He  is  a  man  of  honor. 

Rem.  2.  It  often  denotes  separation,  and  is  also  frequently  used  for  the 
partitive  genitive : 

3e^n  Don  §unbert  objie^en,  To  take  ten  from  a  hundred. 

3^et  Don  meinen  ^reunben,  Two  of  my  friends. 

Rem.  3.  S30tt  may  denote  possession  : 

S)er  ^'onig  Uon  ^'reuBen,  The  king  of  Prussia. 

2)ie  Umgebungcu  Don  33erlin,  The  environs  of  Berlin. 

Rem.  4.  It  is  used  in  limiting  the  signification  of  some  adjectives  and  verbs : 
©r  ift  fleiit  Don  ©eftalt,  He  is  small  in  stature. 

^&l  fenne  t^n  Hon  ^nfe^en,  I  know  him  by  sight. 

Rem.  5.  23 Oil  may  be  used  to  express  the  originator,  the  instrument,  or 
the  cause  of  an  action  or  a  result : 

(Sin  ©emalbe  Don  9^nfeen3,  A  painting  by  Rubens. 

2)er  §unb  tDurbe  Uon  bem  §errn    The  dog  was  beaten  by  the  man. 

gefc^Iagen, 

§  235.  311  indicates,  primarily,  motion  to  a  person : 
@r  get;t  ju  feinem  ^ruber,  He  goes  to  his  brother. 

@ie  fang  p  il^m,  fie  f^jrac^  511    8he  sang  to  him,  she  spoke  to  him. 
i^m  (®.), 

Rem.  1.  3ll  indicates  also  position  or  rest  in  a  place  (being  used  in  this 
sense  before  names  of  cities  and  villages  especially)  : 

@r  njo^nt  JU  33erttn,  He  resides  in  Berlin. 

S)ie  Um^erfitat  JU  @i5tttngen,  The  university  in  Gottingen. 

Rem.  2.  ^U  indicates  motion  to  an  object  or  place,  in  many  fixed  expres- 
sions, that  were  established  during  the  Middle-German  period : 

@r  ge£)t  toon  Ort  JU  Ort,  He  goes  from  place  to  place. 

2)a8  ^inb  ge^t  JU  33ett,  The  child  goes  to  bed. 

Rem.  3.  3U  is  used  in  indicating  time  when,  especially  in  many  general 
expressions  (compare  also  a  n ,  §  245  ;  and  U  tn  ,  §  242  )  : 

^U  @nbc  bc§  3cit?re8,  At  the  end  of  the  year. 

^um  crften  SD^ale,  For  the  first  time. 


§  236-238.]    CONSTRUCTION    OP   PREPOSITIONS.  385 

Rem.  4.  3u  is  employed  in  expressing  many  relations  that  grow  out  of  the 
primary  meaning  of  motion  towards  (and  that  of  rest  in)  a  })lace,  as  : 
(5r  ge^t  JU  %U^,  JU  ^ferbc,  He  goes  on  foot,  on  horseback, 

^^^ommerii  getjort  511  '•^^reu^en,  Fomeraniu  belongs  to  irussia. 

(Sr  taufte  tud;  ju  eincm  3to(f,  He  bought  tloth  for  a  coat. 

Rem.  5.  3U  was  originally  an  adverb ;  it  was  first  used  as  a  preposition  in 
the  O.-Ger.  period.  Being  first  used  with  pronouns,  and  then  with  reference 
to  persons  in  the  Mid.-(jer.  period.  Its  use  was  then  extended  to  names  of 
things,  indicating  motion  or  position  with  reference  to  them. 

§  236.  3wioibcr  {against,  contrary  to)  indicates  a  mo- 
tion or  tendency  in  a  stronger  or  more  hostile  sense 
than  that  which  is  expressed  by  e  n  t  g  e  g  e  n  (§  224) : 
2)a6 ©liicf  iuar  unS  JUttlibcr  (Sd).),   Fate  was  against  us. 
2)ev  gejunbcn  33ernunft  JUttJibcr,      Contrary  to  sound  reason. 
Rem.  3  U  ID  i  b  e  r  always  follows  the  noun  which  it  governs. 
Ohs.  The  following  verses  contain  several  of  the  prepositions  that  govern 
the  dative  case. 

®a|>))ntd  an   bie  £2uenc. 

Wad)  bit  fd^mac^t'  \&i,  ju  btr  ctl'  id?,  bu  gcUcbtc  S^ucfle,  bu! 
2Iud  b  t  r  fc^opf  tc^,  bci  b  i  r  ru^'  ic^,  fe|'  bem  ©piel  ber  SBeUcn  ju ; 
a»it  b  i  r  fd^crj'  x^,  oon  b  t  r  lent'  ic^  fetter  burc^  ba^  Seben  waUen, 
Slngelad^t  oon  griilltnsablumen  unb  begrii^t  oon  S^ad^tigaUen. 


4.  PKEPOSITIONS  WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

(SBorttbrter  mit  bcm  3lccttfattu.) 
§  237.  S3i^  {till,  until,  asfa/r  as,  to)  refers  to  both  time 
[and  space : 

S3on  SSerltn  6t^  ^ot«bam  fmb  i)icr    From  Berlin  to  Potsdam  it  is  four 

beutfd^e  3JieiIcn,  .   German  miles. 

S3on  Oftcm  bi^  ^fingjlcn  jlnb  totcr    From  Easter   until  Whitsuntide  >^ 
3Bocl^cn,  is  seven  weeks. 

Rem.  1.  The  article  can  not  be  used  before  a  noun  governed  by  Bi5» 
Rem.  2.  Some  other  preposition  frequently  follows  M^  I 
S3iS  m^  SDIttternac^t,  Until  after  midnight. 

Si^  OUf  ben  le^ten  ^etlcr,  Down  to  the  last  farthing. 

§  238.  2)ur(^  {through,  by  means  of,  by) : 
SSir  fu^rcu  burtfl  bie  @tabt,  We  rode  through  the  city. 

^Ur(4  bag  ganjc  3a^r,  Through  the  entire  year. 

!J>uri  ^leij?  ^at  er  cS  erreidjt,  He  has  acquired  it  by  diligence. 

K 


386  THE  PREPOSITION.  [§  239-240. 

§  239.  gilr  {foT^  instead  of,  in  favor  of) : 
er  jlarB  fiir  baS  3SaterIanb,  He  died  for  his  country. 

(Sr  gtng  fiir  feinen  S3ruber  in  ben    He  went  to  the  war  instead  of  hig 

^rieg,  brother. 

@tn  @ejd;en!  fiir  eiuen  greunb,        A  present  for  a  friend. 

Rem.  1 .  5  il  r  is  used  in  many  expressions  where  a  noun  is  repeated  : 

©c^ritt  fiir  ®c^ritt ;  2^ag  fiir  S^og,    Step  by  step ;  day  by  day. 
Rem.  2.  ^il  r  is  used  before  a  noun  taken  as  the  equivalent  of  another  sub- 
stantive noun,  in  such  expressions  as : 

3ic^  ^alte  i^n  fiir  cinen  e^rttc^en    I  consider  him  to  be  an  honest  man. 
3JJann, 
Rem.  3.  glir  loses  its  prepositional  power  in  toa^  fiir  {see  §  113,  3). 

§  240.  @cgcn  {toward,  against)  indicates  motion,  direc- 
tion, or  tendency  in  either  a  friendly,  hostile,  or  indif- 
ferent sense  {see  natter,  §  243) : 

2Bir  fegelten  QCgctl  9^orben,  We  sailed  toward  the  North. 

(Sr  ttJar  fe^r  freunbtid^  Otgeil  un8,     He  was  very  kind  toward  us. 
2)ic  58erbiinbetcn  gogen  gCgcn  bie    The  Allied  forces  moved  against  the 
granjofen,  French. 

Revi.  1.  @  e  g  en  may  also  indicate  direct  contact  (against)-. 

(Sr  te^nte  ftc^  gCgcn  bie  SKanb,  He  leaned  against  the  wall. 

Rem.  2.  It  may  indicate  approximation  of  time  or  number : 

®COCn  fieben  U{)r  be6  9}?orgen§,        Toward  seven  o'clock  in  the  morning. 
®CgCn  ac^t^unbert  ^erfonen,  Toward  eight  hundred  persons. 

Rem.  3.  @  e  g  C  n  may  be  used  in  expressing  a  comparison  of  two  objects: 

@r  ift  gcgcn  2)i^  ein  $Rieje !  He  is  a  giant  compared  to  thee! 

Rem.  4.  @  e  g  C  n  may  be  used  in  expressing  exchange : 

SHux  gcgeu  baare  3<iMung,  Only  on  cash  payment. 

Rem.  5.  @  e  n,  an  abbreviation  of  g  e  g  e  n,  is  only  used  now  in  some  fixed 
expressions;  it  is  never  followed  by  the  article: 

®Cn  ^immel ;  Jjcn  Ojien,  Toward  heaven  ;  toward  the  East. 

§  241.  D^ne  {without)  is  in  general  the  opposite  to 
mit  in  signification : 

£)\)Vit  ®elb ;  O^nC  B^^if^^f  Without  money ;  without  doubt. 

Rem.  1 .  The  former  construction  of  0  !^  n  C  with  the  dative  (in  the  Middle- 
G-erman)  is  yet  preserved  in  the  adverb  o  1^  n  e  b  e  tn  (besides  thai). 
Rem.  2.  The  use  of  o  ^  n  e  in  the  sense  of  besides  (a  n  §  e  r)  is  antiquated  : 
@3  n^aren  fiiufjig  ^erfonen  D^tie    There  were  fifty  persons  without 
bie  ^inber,  (counting)  the  children. 


§  242,  243.]    CONSTRUCTION   OF   PREPOSITIONS.  387 

Rem.  3.  The  use  of  f Onbcr^  instead  of  O^llC,  is  now  antiquated,  or  poetic ; 
f  0  n  b  e  r  can  never  be  followed  by  the  article : 

SKcIc^  cin  SSitt^S^auS  jonber  @Iei=^    What  an  unequaled  inn! 

§  242.  Urn  {around^  ahout\  implying  either  motion  or 

rest: 

2Bir  gingcn  uni  bie  @tabt  lucrum,     We  went  around  the  city. 

3)ie  ®dftc  ja^cit  um  ben  2:ifd;,  The  guests  sat  around  the  table. 

Rem.  1 .  Before  the  hours  of  the  day  Ultt  denotes  a  specific  time  : 
2)ie  ®onnc  gc{;t  jc^t  unt  ^alb  fcc^S    The  sun  rises  now  at  half  past  five 
U^r  auf,  o'clock. 

Rem.  2,  Ufll  is  usea  before  some  other  divisions  of  time  to  express  approxi- 
mation of  time  {about) : 

@r  ttJxrb  um  3Jiittag  fommen,  He  will  come  about  noon. 

Rem.  3.  Uut  may  be  used  to  express  price,  reward,  etc.: 

2)a§tt)erbe  id;um  feineu'ipmSt^un,    That  will  I  not  do  for  any  price. 
Rem.  4.  Ultt  is  used  in  comparing  number,  size,  or  degree : 

@r  fam  um  Jtrci  %<x<^t  JU  f^at,  He  came  too  late  by  two  days. 

Rem.  5.  Um  frequently  signifies ybr,  concerning: 

Um  §ulfc  nifen,  To  call  for  help. 

^id;  um  etn?a8  betilmmern,  To  concera  one'  self  about  a  i'.ng. 

Rem.  6.  Um  in  some  figurative  expressions  signifies  loss,  overthrow,  de- 
letion, etc. : 
(Sr  ift  um  jein  3Sermi5gen  gcf ommen,    He  has  lost  his  property. 

§  243.  JBibct  (against)  implies  hostile  opposition : 

@S  mar  tiJtbCr  fetncn  SSiltcn,  It  was  against  his  will. 

SBcr  nid^t  \  il  r  mic^  ift,  bcr  ifi    Who  is  not  for  me^  is  against  me. 
toibcr  mid^, 

Rem.  The  adverb  TO  t  C  b  e  r  (again)  was  written  in  the  same  way  as  the 
preposition  ri)  i  b  e  r  (against)  until  the  beginning  of  the  last  century. 

Obs.  The  following  verses  contain  most  of  the  prepositions  that  govern  the 
accpsative  case : 

^f)iltmon  an  fetnen  ^reunb. 
®ur*  !Dt*  ijl  bie  2Belt  mir  fc^on,  ofjnc  25ic^  witrb'  t(^  fic  ^affcn; 
^iir  2)  i  d)  Icb  ic^  ganj  atlcin,  um  D  i  *  tt)ia  t*  gem  erblaff en ; 
®cgcn  Dtt^  foU  fetn  SOerloiumbcr  unijefhraft  ft*  je  scrgc^n, 
fflibcr  !Di(^  fcin  geinb  [\<i)  waffnen ;  ic^  ttiU  I)ir  jur  ©cite  jle^n. 


388  THE  PREPOSITION.  [§  244, 245. 

5.  PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THE  DATIVE  AND 

ACCUSATIVE  CASES. 

(S3orttJiJrter  mit  htm  2)attU  unb  5lccufatiu.) 

§  244.  The  nine  prepositions  an,  auf ,  \)inttx,  in,  neben, 

liber,  untev,  t)or,  ^tt)tfd)en,  govern  the  Accusative  Case  when 

motion  toward  the  object  they  govern  is  expressed. 

They  govern  the  Dative  Case  when  rest  or  motion 
within  specified  limits  is  expressed : 

(Sr  legte  bag  33uc^  auf  bCIt  S^tfc^,       He  laid  the  book  on  the  table. 
jDaS  53ud;  liegt  auf  bcm  2^if(^,         The  book  is  lying  on  the  table. 
Rem.  1.  In  general  when  these  prepositions  have  reference  to  place  or  to 
space,  they  govern  the  dative  if  they  answer  to  the  question  where  ?  — and 
the  accusative  if  they  answer  to  the  question  whither?  (see  §  80,  Rem.  1 ). 

Rem.  2.  Usually  even  when  fhese  prepositions  are  employed  otherwise  than 
with  reference  to  space,  the  above  general  rule  will  serve  as  a  key  to  the  cor- 
rect use  of  the  cases,  as : 

(gill  ©ebic^t  an  ben  Wlonh,  A  poem  to  the  moon. 

@r  arbeitct  an  einem  2Ber!e,  He  is  laboring  on  a  work. 

Rem.  3.  Where  the  use  of  the  prepositions  rests  upon  relations  that  are  too 
abstract  to  be  governed  by  the  above  laws,  the  following  general  rules  will  be 
^f  assistance : 

1.  5lUf  and  itfitt  are  generally  used  with  the  accusative  case. 

2.  Sin,  in,  nntcr,  UOr  and  JUlif^en  are  generally  used  with  the  dative  case. 

§  245.  ^tl  (on)  indicates  primarily  nearness  or  contact 
upon  the  upper  surface  of  a  body,  or  lengthwise  with 
a  body : 

(Sr  ^angte  ba«  S3ilb  an  bte  SBanb,    He  hung  the  picture  on  the  wall, 
(gincit  9ling  an  bem  finger  tragen,    To  wear  a  ring  on  the  finger. 
Rein.  1.  5ln  is  employed  in  expressing  definite  time  when  (especially  be- 
fore days  of  the  week  or  the  month  ;  see  nnt  §  243  ;  and  §  83,  4) : 

(Sr  ftarb  am  5,  Wlax  1847,  He  died  on  the  fifth  of  May,  1847. 

%m  iJorigen  3Jlttttt)0(^  urn  6  U^r,     Last  Wednesday,  at  six  o'clock. 
Rem.  2.  5ln  may  be  employed  in  expressing  a  number  or  measure  ap- 
proximately : 

(58  toaxm  an  jcc^s^unbert  ^crjo*    There  were  about  six  hundred  per- 
tten  toerfammelt,  sons  assembled. 

Rem.  3.  %n  may  be  used  in  expressing  grounds  of  proof  drawn  from  ex- 
ternal signs : 

5Btr  crfannten  t^n  an  bcr  ©ttmmc,    We  know  him  by  his  voice. 


§  245-247]     CONSTRUCTION   OF   PREPOSITIONS.  389 

Rem.  4.  ?(n  is  used  in  many  cases  to  express  the  direction  of  an  action  of  the 
mind  or  feelings  : 

^&l  glaube  an  cinen  ®ott,  I  believe  in  one  God. 

§ier  ift  ein  33rief  an  ®ie,  Here  is  a  letter,  directed  to  you. 

Rem.  5.  9tn  with  the  article  (am)  is  used  in  forming  the  relative  superla- 
tive of  adverbs  (§  190,  1). 

Rem.  6.  %Vi  is  used  to  express  the  relation  of  office  : 

@r  ij!  ^rofeff or  an  bcr  Unibcrfitat    He  is  a  professor  in  the  university 
ju  ©ottingen,  of  Gottingen. 

Rem.  7.  5ln  is  used,  instead  of  the  genitive  case,  in  completing  and  limit- 
ing many  predications : 

@r  leibet  an  9tbeumattgmu8,  He  is  suffering  from  rheumatism. 

@r  ift  jung  an  3al)ren,  He  is  young  in  years. 

§  246.  ^uf  {on.,  upon)  denotes  primarily  position  upon 
the  upper  surface  on  the  upper  part  of  a  body : 

@r  legtc  ba8  SBud;  auf  b  C  n  X\S^,     He  laid  the  book  upon  the  table. 
2)a8  33uc^  (icgt  anf  b  c  m  %\\^t,      The  book  is  lying  upon  the  table. 

Rem.\.  $(uf  often  indicates  position  or  direction,  in  a  very  general  manner: 
@r  njobnt  anf  bcr  rec^tcn  @ette  ber     He  resides  on  the  right-hand  side  of 

@tra^e,  the  street. 

@r  [tcigt  OUf  ben  %hViXm,  He  is  going  up  the  tower. 

(Sr  ift  auf  bcr  3aflb,  He  has  gone  a  hunting. 

@r  ift  bofc  anf  unS,  He  is  angry  at  us. 

@r  tuartct  auf  fcincn  SBrubcr,  He  is  waiting  for  his  brother. 

Rem.  2.  ?(uf  is  used  in  indicating  exact  expressions  or  limitations  of  time, 
measure,  or  number : 

©ci  OUf  b  i  e  @  t  U  n  b  e  ba  1  Be  there  at  the  hour. 

Sr  bat  feine  9?cd?nung  bi8  auf  ben    He  has  paid  his  account  to  the  last 
le^ten  fetter  bejablt,  ferthing. 

Rem.  3.  5luf  is  used  to  express  sequence  of  time  or  order : 
5luf  9^egen  folgt  @onncnfc^etn,        Sunshine  follows  rain. 
3;d>  babe  eS  anf  feinen  33cfe^l  getban,    I  did  it  by  his  order. 
Rem.  4.  51nf  is  used  in  some  adverbial  expressions  (especially  in  expressing 
the  absolute  superlative  §  190, 2). 

§  247.  §intcr  (behind,  hack  of)  almost  always  refers  to 
place : 

2)er  ^unb  Uef  Winter  b  a  S  ^au§,    The  dog  ran  behind  the  house. 
2)et  ©avten  ift  Winter  b  cm  ^aufc,     The  garden  is  behind  the  house. 


390  THE  PREPOSITION.  [§248-250. 

Rem.  1.  When  both  of  the  bodies  referred  to  are  in  motion,  ^  t  tt  t  c  r  gov-^ 
ems  the  dative  case,  and  the  adverb  ^  e  r  is  added : 

3tolanb  ritt  ^tntCrm  3Sater  ^er(U,),    Roland  rode  behind  (i.  e.  foUowingJ 

his  father. 

§  248.  3fn  (m,  into)  refers  especially  to  place,  time, 

condition,  manner,  material,  or  contents : 

2Sir  gingen  in  b  t  e  @tabt,  We  went  into  the  city. 

&r  nJO^nt  in  b  e  r  @tabt,  He  resides  in  the  city, 

er  ftarb  m  toorigen  Oftobcr,  He  died  last  October. 

@r  ^at  eg  tm  ©c^crj  gefagt,  He  said  it  in  a  joke. 

2)afiir  ^at  er  j^toei^unbcrt  Sl^aler  He  paid  for  that  two  hundred  tha- 
in  @o(b  beja^It,  lers  in  gold. 

§  249.  DIekn  (5?/,  near,  dose  to,  hy  the  side  of)  refers  al- 
most always  to  place: 

@r  fa^  neben  fetnem  S3ruber,  He  sat  near  (next  to)  his  brother. 

(Sr  je^te  fic^  net) en  feinen  SSruber,    He  seated  himself  near  his  brother. 

Rem.  When  both  objects  are  in  motion,  n  e  b  e  n  governs  the  dative  and  the 
adverb  ^  e  r  is  added  (see  ^  t  n  t  e  r  ,  §  247) : 

2)er   33ebtente    ghig   ncticn    bem    The  servant  went  along  at  the  side 
SBagen  \}tx,  of  the  wagon. 

§  250.  UcBcr  {over,  above,  across)  refers   primarily   to 
place: 

SSir  gingen  iidcr  b  t  e  SBrilcfe,  We  went  over  the  bridge. 

2)erl^nabel;atfetnen53aEiitlCrbaS  The  boy  has  thrown  his  ball  over 

§aug  in  ben  ©arten  gemorfen,  the  house  into  the  garden. 

2)a§   ©emcilbe    ^angt   \\htX   bcr  The  painting  is  hanging  over  the 

2:(;ure,  door. 

Rem.  1.  With  the  dative  case  iiber  denotes  position  above  an  object, 
without  coming  in  contact  with  it;  with  the  accusative,  it  denotes  motion 
over  or  across  an  object,  either  with  or  without  contact  with  it. 

Rem.  2.  U  e  b  e  r  may  also  signify  beyond,  or  the  other  side  of: 
Ucficr  bem  aJZeeve,  Beyond  the  sea. 

3)a§  ge^t  iiticr  feinc  ^rciftc,  That  is  beyond  his  strength. 

§eute  iider  ac^t  Slage,  A  week  (eight  days)  from  to-day. 

Rem.  3.  Ucfttt  signifies  also  hy  way  of  {via): 

3Btr  finb  ijon  ^art§  iibcr  ^otn  unb     We  came  from  Paris  by  way  of  Co- 

^annotoer  gefommen,  logne  and  Hanover. 

3fC^  hobt  ben  53nef  \\htX  33remen    I  sent  the  letter  by  way  of  Bremen. 

gejd^tdt 


§251,252.]        CONSTRUCTION   OF   PREPOSITIONS.  391 

Revi.  4.  Ucbcr  is  in  many  cases  used  before  the  object  to  which  a  feeling 
or  sentiment  is  directed : 

SlUc  U&jm  iibcr  feine  (Sitel!eit,      All  laugh  at  his  vanity. 

Sr  ift  bofe  \\htl  irgeub  ©tiraS,      He  is  angry  at  something  or  other. 

Rem.  5.  UebCf  (M.-G.,  Uber  ;   O.-G.,  uban ;   Gothic^  ufar)  is  derived  from 
the  same  root  as  ot)  (in  Gothic,  af=up),  see  §  231. 

§  251.  Unttt  {under,  below,  beneath)  refers  primarily  to 
place : 

2Bir  fafjen  lintcr  b  e  m  33aume,         We  were  sitting  under  the  tree. 
Sir  jctjten  unS  untcr  ben  53aum,    We  seated  ourselves  under  the  tree. 

Rem.  1.  Unter  is  also  used  in  many  figurative  expressions,  as  in  those 
Indicating  submission  or  subjection  to  superior  authority  : 

2)a8    ^aiib    wax    bamalS    unttX    The  land  was  at  that  time  under 

grenib^errfd^aft,  foreign  sway. 

Untcr  fold^en  53ebtngungen,  Under  (upon)  such  conditions. 

Rem.  2.  In  expressions  relating  to  time,  uiiter  usually  signifies  during: 

(Ss    tr>ar   unttX    bcr    9Jcgicrung    It  was  during  the  reign  of  Frederick 
griebric^g  beiJ  @ro{3cn,  the  Great. 

Rem.  3.  Unter  frequently  signifies  among,  between : 

S^  [a{j  untcr  ben  3iifcfA^usrn,  I  sat  among  the  spectators. 

^6)  rec^nei^n  nntcr  meine  greunbe,    I  count  him  among  my  friends. 

Re7n.  4.  Unter  {M.-G.,  under;    O.-G.,  and  Gothic,  undan)  is  probably 
allied  to  the  Latin  inter,  and  the  Sanscrit  antar— among. 

§  252.  S?or  (before,  in  front  of,  m  the  jyresence  of,  cmte- 

cedent  to) : 

(Sr  ftanb  Uor  bem  §aufe,  He  was  standing  in  front  of  the  house. 

(Sr  er  jc^ien  UOr  bem  9Jid;ter,  He  appeared  before  the  judge, 

©r  tarn  UOr  ©onnenaufgang,  He  came  before  sunrise. 

Rem.  1.  SSor  is  rarely  used  with  the  accusative,  except  with  its  primaiy 
signification  which  refers  to  space  (i.  e.,  before,  in  front  of)  : 

Sr  trat  Uor  fcinen  9tid;ter,  He  took  his  place  before  the  judge. 

Rem.  2.  S3or  is  frequently  used  (with  the  dative)  in  expressing  the  cause 
of  a  feeling  or  action : 

@ie  WetntC  UOr  ^'^^"i'C*  S^e  ^^pt  from  joy. 

Sr  Jttterte  Uor  5tngft,  He  trembled  from  fear. 

Rem.  3.  S3or  and  fiir  formerly  had  the  same  signification.    In  the  Lower- 
Germ«/i  dialects  »  0  r  is  yet  used  to  a  great  extent  for  f  ii  r. 


392 


THE   PREPOSITION. 


[§  253,  254. 


§  253.  3toif^^tt  (between^  hetwixt,  in  the  midst  of) : 


Belgium  lies  between  France  and 

Germany. 
He  arrived  between  nine  and  ten 

o'clock  in  the  morning. 
The  enemy  sowed  tares  in  (the  midst 

of)  the  wheat. 


SBelgien  Itegt  stDtf^Ctt  granfretd? 

unb  2)eutfc^Ianb, 
@r  fam  pifdjcn  iteun  unb  je^n 

U^r  beg  2)JovgeuS  an, 
„2)er  getiib  jciete  Unfraut  Jtoift^cn 
ben  aBetjen," 

Rem.  3l0tfd)Cn  is   a  contraction   from  the  Middle-German  en-zwischen 
(O.-G.,  in  zwis/cen,  which  is  from  theO.-G.  adj.  zui-ise=lX\)d\ad}=z twofold). 
Obs.  The  following  verses  contain  the  propositions  that  govern  the  dative 
and  accusative  cases : 

2In  bctt  SD^onb. 
STuf  X)  i  ^  Mid ct,  auf  2)  t  r  weilet  oft  metn  Slug'  in  f  ii  ^  c  r  Sujl ; 
ain  Tjtr  ^afr  ic^,  on  3)t^  fcttb'  t(^  ntanc^  ®efii|l  au^  fro^er  SSrujl! 
3tt  2)  t  (^  fe^et,  in  2)  t  r  ftnbet  mcine  9)^ntafte  »iel  ©cenen, 
Untcr  b  t  e  ftc  gerit  fid)  h-oiumet,  untcr  b  e  n  e  n  bort  bie  f^onen 
<Seelen,  libcr  b  i  e  f  e  (£rb'  erl)o^et,  iibcv  ®rdkrn  itoanbeln. 
»or  m  i  (^  tritt  bann,  oor  m  i  r  flet)t  bann  ber  (£ntfc^lu§  rcc^t  gut  ju  ^anbeltt* 
3«»ifcl)cn  b  t  e  f  e  n  ©troiuc^en  fi^'  id),  jroifd)cn  f  t  e  fiie:^U  fic^  2)ein  ©tra^U 
92ebcn  m  t  c^  finft,  ncbcn  m  i  r  rul)t  fie,  bie  ^reunbin  meiner  SGBaljl ; 
Winter  mic^  jlia  ^tngefc^Uc^en,  ftaub  fie  ladjenb  I)intcr  mtr, 
Unb  ttJtr  reben  son  ben  ©ternen,  unfren  Sieben  unb  »on  2)ir. 


6.  Remarks  upon 

(Semerfungen  iiber 

I  254.  The  following  is  an 
ositions,  with  their  primary 
they  govern : 

2tn  (ace.  and  dat.),  on,  at. 

anftatt  (see  ftatt). 

auf  (ace.  and  dat.),  on,  upon. 

au8  (dat),  out,  out  of. 

au^er  (dat.),  outside  of. 

au^er^alb  (gen.),  outside  of. 

bet  (dat.),  near,  by. 

binnen  (dat.),  within, 

big  (ace),  until. 

biegfeit  (gen.),  on  this  side  of. 

burc^  (ace),  through. 

entgegen  (dat.),  against. 

entlang  (see  Icingg). 

fttr  (ace),  for. 

gcgen  (ace),  against. 


Prepositions. 

bie  S5ortt)o:"ter.) 

alphabetical  list  of  prep- 
meanings  and  the  cases 

gcgenilber  (dat.),  opposite  to. 

^alb,  ^dben,  or  f)alber  (gen.),  in  be- 
half of. 

jointer  (ace),  behind. 

in  (ace.  and  dat.),  in,  into. 

tnnerf)alb  (gen.),  inside  of. 

jenfeit  (gen.),  on  the  other  side  of. 

jraft  (gen.),  by  the  power  of. 

lang^  (gen.  and  dat.),  along. 

laut  (gen.),  by  the  wording  of. 

mit  (dat.),  with. 

tnittetS,  tnittelft  (gen.),  by  the 
means  of. 

Itacf)  (dat.),  after. 

ncben  (ace  and  dat.),  near. 


255-257]  REMARKS   UPON   PREPOSITIONS.  393 

nebfl  {dat.\  together  with.  unter  {ace.  and  dat.\  under. 

ob  {dat.\  over.  unterbdb  (gen.),  on  the  under  side  of. 

ober^alb  (gen.),  on  the  upper  side.  unh?Ctt  (gen.),  not  far  from. 

obne  (ace),  without.  bermtttels,  tiermittetft  (see  mittclg). 

fammt  (dat.),  together  with.  terml\]e  (gen.),  by  means  of. 

feit  (dat.),  since.  t)on  (dat.),  from. 

fcnber  (ace),  without.  ijor  (ace.  and  dat.),  before. 

ftatt  (gen.),  instead  of.  tDO^reub  (ffen.),  during. 

trofe  (gen.  and  dat.),  in  spite  of.  tDCgcn  (gen.),  on  account  of. 

iiber  (ace  and  dat.),  over.  toiber  (ace),  against. 

urn  (ace),  around.  JU  (dat.),  to. 

um-tvitlen  (gen.),  for  the  sake  of.  jufolge  (gen.  and  dat.),  according  ta 

unbefc^abet  (gen.),  without  injur-  junad^ft  (c/a^),  next  to. 

Unferil  (gen.),  not  far  from.    [ing.  jUiDtber  (dat.),  against. 

ungead^tct(5'e«.),  notwithstanding,  jtrifc^eu  (ace.  and  dat.),  between. 

§  255.  With  the  following  exceptions  all  prepositions 
jyrecede  the  nouns  they  govern: 

£xc.  1 .  ^  a  I  b  (^  a  I  b  e  r,  ^  a  I  b  e  n),  and  ^  u  t»  i  b  c  r  always  follow  the  noun. 

Exe.  2.  (g  n  t  g  c  g  c  n,  (^  e  g  e  n  il  b  e  r,  and  5  u  n  d  c^  [t  usnallg  follow  the  noun. 

Exc.  3.  @  e  m  a  §,  n  a  c^,  u  n  g  e  a  (^  t  e  t,  » e  g  c  n,  and  5  u  f  0 1  g  c  may  pre- 
cede or  follow  the  noun. 

Bern.  When  5  u  f  0  (  g  e  follows  the  noun,  the  noun  is  put  in  the  dative  case. 

Exc.  4.  The  noun  stands  between  the  two  parts  of  u  m-tt»  i  H  e  n. 

§  256.  In  German,  as  in  English,  many  adverbs  of 
time  and  place  maybe  used  as  indeclinable  substantives, 
and  may  be  preceded  by  prepositions : 

@g  ift  ntd;t  tccit  toon  ^icr,  It  is  not  far  from  here. 

33  0  n  ba  an,  From  that  time  forward. 

@r  ift  a  u  f  \}tUtt  toerfagt,  He  is  engaged  for  to-day.  [morrow. 

SSon  gcftCrU  big  iibermorgcn,  From  yesterday  till  day  after  to- 

§257.  Some  prepositions  may  govern  an  entire  subor- 
dinate sentence  (instead  of  a  single  word) ;  when  thus 
used,  they  have  rather  the  character  of  conjunctions 
than  of  prepositions : 

@r  ging  if  eg,  o'^nc  un3  etlfag  ba*     lie  went  away,  without  saying  any- 

toon  ju  fagen,  thing  about  that. 

(5r  gcflanb  ?ltleei,  auf^Cr  Ifer  fcinc     lie  confessed  everything,  with  the  ex- 
3Jiitf  ^ulbtgen  ieiciii  ception  of  who  his  accomplices  were. 

(5r  lobte  mic^,  ftatt  mic^  JU  tabcln,     He  praised  me  instead  of  blaming  me. 

R2 


394  THE   CONJUNCTION.  [§  258-260. 

§  258.  Many  of  the  idiomatic  diiFerences  between  the 
English  and  the  German  languages  are  owing  to  the 
fact  that  many  verbs,  adjectives,  and  nouns  are  con- 
ceived in  such  different  ways  as  to  require  different 
prepositions  after  them  in  completing  predications : 
3c^  g  I  a  u  b  e  on  etnen  ®ott,  I  believe  in  one  God. 

(Srift  reid^  an@utern,aberartn    He  is  rich  in  landed  estates,  but 

an  baarem  @elbe,  poor  in  ready  money. 

@tn  9}J  a  n  g  C I  an  ®elb,  A  lack  of  money. 

S)er  ©efangene  ift  [tolj  anf  feme    The  prisoner  is  proud  of  his  inno^ 

Unfc^ulb,  cence. 

er  ift  fef)r  begtertg  anf  5lBenteuev,    He  is  very  desirous  o/ adventures. 
2Gag  tcirb  au^  i^m  tu  e  r  b  e  n  I         What  will  become  o/him  ? 
3?^  bin  ganj  e  r  ft  a  u  n  t  iitJCr  fetn    I  am  quite  astonished  at  his  be- 

33etragen,  havior, 

(gr  ift  g  r  0  ^  iJOn  ®eftatt,  He  is  large  in  size. 


THE  CONJUNCTION. 

(2)a^  S3tnbcU)ort) 
§  259.  Only  a  few  Conjunctions  are  primitive  words,  as: 

Unb,    and  (M.-G.,  unt,  unde;  O.-G.,  endi,  enti,  anti;  Anglo-Saxon,  and) 
5lt)er,  but  (Af.-G.,  aber,  afer  ;  O.-G.,  afur,  afar;  6^o<A.,  afar  [from  af^ab]). 
£)btr,  or    CM -6^.,  Oder;  O.-G.,  odar;  (?o<;^.,  aiththau). 

Re7n.  Of  a  few  conjunctions  the  origin  is  "wo  longer  feit"  (§  49,  2),  as: 
2BcbCr^  neither    (from  M.-G.,  en — weder,  ne — weder=not  of  the  two;  the 

negative  particle  ne  has  been  dropped). 
(SntttJCbtr^  either  (M.-  G.,  eintweder,  from  ein — de — weder=one  of  the  two). 

§  260.  Almost  all  conjunctions  are,  (1)  either  adverbs 
or  prepositions,  used  as  conjunctions:  or  (2),  deriva- 
tives and  compounds  of  adverbs  and  prepositions  with 
each  other  or  with  nouns  or  pronouns : 

2)a  er  nid;t  \  vtig  rear,  mu^te  er    As  he  was  not  ready,  we  had  to  go 

aHcin  gcbcii,  alone. 

233aJ)rcnb    ®ie    lefen,  »erbe    x6)    While  you  are  reading,  I  will  write. 

fc^reiben, 
(Sr  ging  nad;  ber  @tabt,  na(!^btnt     He  went  to  the  city  after  he  had 

er  ben  SSrief  gefd;riet)en  t)atte,  written  a  letter. 

Sfc^  fanb  t^n  ni^t,  obgletC^  i^  t^n    I  did  not  find  him,  although  I  look- 

lange  fud;te,  ed  for  him  a  long  time. 


§  261.] 


THE   CONJUNCTION. 


395 


Rem.  From  the  fact  that  they  serve  also  to  connect  subordinate  with  main 
sentences,  relative  pronouns  may  also  be  considered  as  conjunctions  : 

2Bo  ift  ba§  SBud^,  toelt^C^  ^ic  ^CUtC    Where  is  the  book  which  you  bought 
3)iorgen  gefauft  ^aben,  this  morning. 

§  261.  The  most  important  Conjunctions  are  the  fol- 
lowing^ 


m?x,  but. 

alleiu,  but. 

ol8,  as,  then,  when. 

dS  ob,  as  though. 

dfo,  consequently. 

aud^,  also. 

auf  ba^,  in  order  that. 

au^erbem,  moreover. 

betoor,  before. 

bis,  until. 

ba,  since. 

ba^er,  therefore. 

bagcgen,  on  the  contrary. 

bamit,  in  order  that. 

barum,  therefore. 

ba^,  that,  in  order  that. 

beiin,  for,  because. 

bennod;,  notwithstanding. 

beS^alb,  therefore. 

beffenungead^tet,  nevertheless. 

beStucgen,  therefore. 

boc^,  yet,  still. 

e^e,  before. 

faES,  in  case  that. 

fcmer,  further. 

folglid^,  consequently. 

glcic^wo^I,  however,  yet. 

l^ingcgen,  on  the  contrary. 

inbem,  while,  because. 

inbcften,  however,  yet. 

jc  nac^bem,  according  as. 

jcboc^,  however. 


niit^tn,  consequently. 

nac^bem,  after. 

nid)t8bcftotDcntgcr,  nevertheless. 

nur,  but,  only. 

nun,  therefore. 

ob,  whether,  if. 

obgleic^    (obfc^on,   oBttJo^t),   al- 

o^nc,  except,     [though,  though. 

feit,  since. 

jeitbem,  since. 

obngcad;tet,  notwithstanding. 

fo,  thus,  therefore,  if. 

fobalb  al§,  as  soon  as. 

fonft,  otherwise. 

ilberbie«,  besides. 

iibrigcnS,  furthermore. 

imgead;tct,  notwithstanding. 

um,  in  order  (to). 

)oteImef>r,  rather. 

tra^renb,  while. 

trann,  when. 

treil,  because. 

tDCnu,  when,  if. 

ttJenn  aud;,  although. 

tr>cnng(ei(^,  although. 

h?cnnjd;on,  although. 

iric,  as,  when. 

VDictrol)!,  although. 

Xca,  where,  when. 

tuofern,  in  case  that. 

ju  bem,  besides. 

j»ar,  indeed. 


Rem.  The  most  important  corresponding  conjunctions  are  the  foUowingj 
balb — balb,  sometimes — sometimes. 

Soft.      ^   ""^  ^^'') 

^^•^-Ibctio,    [  the-the. 

^'-     Me,       ) 

either — or. 


entwcber— obcr, 
nt(^t— tonbern. 


not — ^but. 


396 


THE    CONJUNCTION. 


[§  263. 


nicl;t  alletn—  I  fonbern  au^, 
nid;t  Uo^—  ) 
obg(eid> — fo  bod^, 

treber— no(^, 
ttJie— fo, 


not — but  rather. 

not  only — but  also. 

although — still, 
as  well — as. 
partly — partly, 
neither — nor, 
as — so. 


§  263.  Conjunctions  may  be  divided,  with  reference 
to  the  grammatical  office  they  perform  in  connecting 
sentences,  into  two  classes  : 

1.  Co-ordinative  Oo7ijunctions,  which  are  used  to  con- 
nect equally  independent  sentences : 

1.  The  following  seven  co-ordinative  conjunctions  cause  no  alteration  in 
the  position  of  the  verb  in  the  sentence : 

Unb,  abzv,  fonbern,  jott)o^l-at8. 

obcr,  attein,  benn, 

SSir  gingen  na^  ^aUe,  unb  i)ou  We  went  to  Halle,  and  from  there 
ba  gingen  t»ir  na^  Set^jig,  we  went  to  Leipzic. 

2Bir  gingen  nid;t  na6)  'i^rag,  fon*  We  did  not  go  to  Prague,  but  we 
bcrn  tt>ir  gingen  nad^  SJJiind^en,       went  to  Munich. 

Rein.  21  b  e  r,  however,  may  also  be  placed  after  the  subject,  or  after  the  verb : 
2)er  SSater  a  b  e  r  ^pxa6) —  But  the  father  spoke — 

2)cr  @trau§  ^at  ^liigel,  et  !ann  The  ostrich  has  wings,  but  he  can 
a  b  e  r  nic^t  fliegen,  not  fly. 

2.  The  following  co-ordinative  conjunctions  are  usually  placed  at  the  be- 
ginning of  the  sentence  or  clause ;  when  so  placed  they  cause  the  subject  to  fol- 
low the  verb  in  simple  tenses,  and  to  follow  the  auxiliary  in  compound  tenses 
(see  §  280) : 

besnjcgen, 
(je)— bcfto, 
(befto)— befto, 
bod^, 
enttoeber, 
fall§, 
ferner, 
totglid^, 

^tngcgcn, 
inbeffcn, 
infofern, 


mo, 

au^crbem, 
balb— balb, 
bagegen, 

barum, 

bemnad^, 

bennod^, 

beffenuttgead^tet, 

beg^atb, 

beggleirfjen, 


iebod^, 

mit^tn, 

nic^tgbeftotoemgcr, 

no(^, 

ntc^t  nur, 

nic^t  attein, 

nid^t  Uo% 

nur, 

o^ngea(^tet, 

t^cilg— t^cil«, 

itberbtes, 

ilbrigenS, 


'n,l 
h  ) 


§  263.] 


THE   CONJUNCTION. 


397 


i)ielmc^r,  (wtc)— fo,  jubcm, 

toci^renb,  (meber)— noc^,  gtrar. 

2)ic  <Sonne  fc^eint,  b  a  ^  c  r  ift  C^    The  sun  shines,  therefore  it  is  so  hot. 
fo  f;ci§, 

^  a  u  m  iattC  Cr  baS  g  e  f  a  g  t—       Scarcely  had  he  said  that— 

2.  Sitbordinative  Conjunctions^  which  are  used  to  con- 
nect subordinate  to  principal  sentences ;  they  cause  the 
verb  to  be  placed  at  the  end  of  the  subordinate  sen- 
tence : 

je  nac^bem, 

nac^bem, 

nun, 

Ob, 

obgteic^, 
obfc^on, 

ObtDO^t, 

feit, 

fcitbcm, 
fobalb  al8, 
fo  oft  al«, 
fo  lange  alS, 


ungeac^tet, 

trd^renb, 

toann, 

toetl, 

toenn, 

toenn  ntc^t, 

njcnn  oud^, 

tt)ic, 

tt)icmo^I, 

n?o, 

njofern, 

8trar. 


It  was  already  very  late    when  I 
came  home. 


<x\%  ob, 

ouf  ba§, 

betoor, 

bi«, 

ba, 

bamit, 

fans, 

im  ^all  ba0, 
inbem, 
gg  toar  fc^on  fe^r  f^at,  al^  id^  nad; 
§aufe  f  a  m, 

Rem.  1 .  In  subordinate  sentences  the  auxilaries  of  compound  tenses  and 
the  simple  tenses  of  the  potential  verbs  are  placed  after  the  main  verb : 

(5^|C  ioir  nad;  ^aufc  gefommcn    Before  we  had  come  home,  it  had 
ttJOrcn,  ^attc  C8  fc^on  angefangcn        ah-eady  begun  to  rain. 
\yx  regncn, 
Rem.  2.  When  the  compound  tenses  of  the  potential  verbs  are  used  in  sub- 
ordinate sentences,  the  auxiliary  of  these  verbs  is  placed  between  the  nomi- 
native and  the  infinitive  of  the  main  verb  (see  §  131,  Rem.  2,  §  282,  Rem.  1): 
(5r  fagt,  ba^  cr  cS  nic^t  ^ at  fin*    He  said  that  he  had  not  been  able 
ben  fiJnnen,  to  find  it. 

Rem.  3.  When  bd^  is  omitted,  the  natural  order  of  the  words  is  preserved : 
,  3(^  glaube  er  \\i  nod;  ntc^t  ange*    I  think  that  he  has  not  arrived  yet. 

tommen, 
Rem.  4.  If  tiJCntl  is  omitted,  the  order  of  words  in  the  subordinate  sentence 
is  the  same  as  in  interrogative  sentences  (see  §  280,  4): 

SScnn  ic^  bic  3cit  baju  ^dtte  (or    If  I  had  the  time  (or  had  I  the  time), 
batte  ic^  bie  ^cit  bagu),  fo  tt?iirbe       I  would  like  very  much  to  go  to 
ic^  fc^r  gem  mit  3^ncn  ^CUtC        Potsdam  with  you  to-day. 
nad^  ^ot«bam  ge^cn, 


398  THE  CONJUNCTION.  [264-266. 

Remarks  upon  Conjunctions. 

(©emerfungen  uhtx  bte  Sinbeworter.) 
Obs.  The  number  of  words  that  perform  the  office  of  conjunctions  is  very 
large,  and  their  correct  use  must  be  learned  mostly  by  practice.     We  give 
below  remarks  upon  the  signification  and  use  of  some  of  those  which  the 
English-speaking  person  would  be  most  apt  to  use  erroneously. 

§  264.  Uttb  (and)  is  employed  almost  entirely  as  in 
English : 

2)er  35ater  unb  ber  @o^n,  The  father  and  the  son. 

Rem.  In  a  few  cases,  however,  the  German  idiom  does  not  permit  the  direct 
translation  of  and  by  u  U  b,  as : 

How  can  you  go  out  and  not  take    2Sic  fijnnen   ®te    auSge^en,  0  ^  n  e 

him  with  you?  t^it  mttjune^men. 

He  became  better  and  better,  (Sr  ttJUrbe  t  m  m  e  r  beffer. 

It  became  hotter  and  hotter,  @8  tt)urbc  i  m  m  e  r  ^ei^er. 

§  265.  %htx,  allein,  fonbern,  melme{)r  (hut): 

Rem.  1.  5lttCtn  indicates  a  contradiction,  in  some  degree,  to  the  statement 
in  the  preceding  sentence,  or  of  the  consequences  which  might  follow  from  it ; 
dhtV  simply  indicates  something  different  from  the  preceding  statement; 
a  b  e  r  can  always  be  used  instead  of  a  H  e  i  u,  but  a  1 1  e  i  il  can  not  always  be 
used  instead  of  a  b  e  r  : 

^c^  tjoffte  e§,  attdlt  (or  ab  er)  ic^    I  hoped  for  it,  but  I  found  myself 
tanb  mic^  getciufc^t,  mistaken. 

Rem.  2.  ©OnbCllt  is  only  used  after  a  negative  sentence;  it  indicates  that 
the  second  sentence  corrects  an  error  in  the  first ;  dhtt  is  used  (after  nega- 
tive sentences  even)  when  no  contradiction  exists  between  the  two  sentences : 
(Sr  befie^It   e8   ntd)t,  fonbtrtt   er     He   does  not  order  it,  but  he  de- 

tt)iinfd;t  eS,  sires  it. 

(Sr  befie^It  e?  (^tDar)  nic^t,  ahtX    He  does  not  order  it  (it  is  true),  but 
er  n^ilnfc^t  eg,  he  desires  it. 

Rem.  3.  S5iClntC!(|C  is  closely  allied  in  signification  and  use  to  f  0  It  b  C  r  n, 
but  is  often  more  emphatic  or  definite  in  meaning : 

3d;  fiirc^te  tf>n  nic^t,  Uielmc^r  ber*    I  do  not  fear  him,  but  rather  I 
ac^te  ic^  i^n,  despise  him. 

§  266.  '^U,  tote,  tocnn,  mm,  are  used  as  follows: 

1.  As  an  adverbial  conjunction,  fili?  {v^hen)  refers  only 

to  past  time  : 

%\i  xoxx  in  33erUn  onfamen,  h)ar    Mr.  Kraft  had  already  left  for  Dres- 
^err  ^raft  fc^on  nac^  2)re§ben        den  when  we  arrived  in  Berlin, 
abgcreift, 


§  266.]  THE   CONJUNCTION.  399 

Rem.  1.  51 1 6  (jthan)  is  used  after  the  comparative  degree  of  adjectives  or 
adverbs : 

§eute  ijl    ba«   SSettcr    m  1 1  b  e  r    To-day  the  weather  is  milder  than 
a\i  eg  gcftern  toax,  it  was  yesterday. 

Rem.  2.  %\9>  b a fj  (preceded  by  jj u)  gives  a  negative  signification  to  the 
subordinate  sentence  which  it  introduces : 

(Sr  ift  5  u  fhii^  ali^  bo^  cr  an  @e*    He  is  too  intelligent  to  believe  in 
f^}cnfter  glaubeu  joUtc,  ghosts. 

Rem.  3.  After  a  negation  or  an  expression  equivalent  to  a  negation,  al)^ 
signifies  except  : 

9i  i  c^  1 8  nennt  cr  fcin,  al§  feincn    He  calls  nothing  his  own,  except  his 

Sftittermantel  (®ci^.),  knightly  mantle. 

2Ser  j  0  11  [t  ift  @d;ulb  barau,  al^    Who  else  is  to  blame  for  it,  except 
3^v*  ill  SSien?  (@c!^.)  you  in  Vienna? 

Rem.  4.  51 1  g  is  often  used  interchangeably  with  toic,  as  (see  No.  2,  below). 
Rem.  5.  %li  is  often  followed  by  o  b  or  tt)  e  n  n  : 

Sr  ficf)t  auS  al^  Ob  cr  fraiif  fci,        He  looks  as  though  he  is  sick. 

©r  fict>t  auS  al^  tOCnU  cr  trauf    He  looks  as  though  he  were  sick, 
toarc, 

2.  SBic  (as),  preceded  by  fo,  is  used  in  comparing  to- 
gether two  adjectives  or  adverbs  in  the  positive  degree : 

§cute  ift  bag  SSctter  md;t  fo  Ijci^    The  weather  is  not  so  hot  to-day 
IDic  CS  gcftcrn  n^ar,  as  it  was  yesterday. 

Rem.  1 .  In  German,  as  in  English,  f 0  (as)  is  often  omitted : 

„<Sci  !Iug  toie  bie  @d)Iangcn,  unb     "  Be  wise  as  serpents  and  harmless 
o^nc  falfd;  toic  bic  Zauhtn,"  as  doves." 

Rem.  2.  311^  is  often  used  instead  of  ID  i  C  : 
(gS  ifi  cbcn  fo  ^ci^  aU  (or  »te)  C«    It  is  just  as  hot  as  it  was  yesterday, 
gcftcm  mar, 

Rem.  3,  Used  as  an  adverbial  conjunction,  toit  signifies  "  how,"  as : 
^6}  trci^  ivivllid;  iud;t,  loiC  i^  bag    I  really  do  not  know  how  to  do 
niad;cu  jcU,  that. 

3.  SBann  (when)  refers  to  time  past,  present,  or  future  ; 
it  is  only  used  as  a  conjunction  in  introducing  indirect 
questions : 

^6)  tDci§  nod^  ni(3^t,  toattit  tore  ab*    I  do  not  know  yet  when  we  will 
rctfcn  tDcrbcn,  leave. 


400  THE    CONJUNCTION.  [§  267. 

4.  SScnn  {when),  when  referring  to  time,  applies  only 
to  indefinite  time : 

SSir  fal^rcn  gu  S3crg,  We  go  to  the  mountains,  we  return 

2Btr  fomtnen  tt)teber,  again,  when    the    cuckoo    calls, 

SScnn  ber  ^u!u!  ruft,  when  the  songs  awaken. 

2Bcnn  ermac^eu  bie  Siebcr  (@d^.)f 
Rem.  ^Cltn  is  more  generally  used  in  hypothetical  sentences,  signifying  if 

SBenn  bie  ©locf'  foU  auferfte^cn,        If  the  bell  is  to  come  forth,  the 
M\x^  btc  gorm  in  ©tiid e  ge^en  (8ci;.)     mould  must  be  broken  to  pieces. 

§  267.  ^mxif  urn  yiX,  auf  H^  {in  order  that,  in  order  to)-. 

Rem.  1.  2)  a  m  i  t,  originally  an  adverb  (signifying  therewith),  when  used  as 
a  conjunction,  usually  refers  to  the  means  of  accomplishing  a  purpose : 

3fd>  beftrafc  i^n,  bamit  er  fi^  bef*     I  punish  him,  that  he  may  become 
fcrc,  better  (by  it). 

Rem.  2.  When  especial  emphasis  is  to  be  laid  upon  the  causal  relation  of 
bamit,  barUItt  is  often  placed  at  the  opening  of  the  main  sentence,  which 
precedes  the  subordinate  sentence : 

S)arUtn  eBen  let^t  er  ^einem,  Just  for  that  reason  does  he  lend  to 

Samtt  er  ftcts  ju  geben  babe  (Seff.)        nobody,  that  he  may  always  have 

something  to  give. 

Rem.  3.  3)attttt  nt(^t  frequently  signifies  lest  or  that  not : 
3c^  fage  bir  e8  noc^malg,  bamit    I  say  it  to  you  once  more,  lest  you 
bu  eg  n  i  d;  t  bergiff eft,  should  forget  it. 

Rem.  4,  31 U  f  b  a  ^  is  now  rather  antiquated  : 

„@^re  3Sater  unb  SJJutter,  aitf  ba^     "  Honor  thy  father  and  thy  mother, 
eg  bir  ttJO^l  ge^e  auf  Srben/'  that  it  may  be  well  with  thee  in 

the  land." 

Rem.  5.  The  single  conjunction  btt^  is  frequently  used  for  a  uf  b  a^  : 
S3Ieibt  ntc^t  in  (gnglanb,  ba^  ber    Do  not  remain  in  England,  that  the 
SSrtte  m(i^t  fetn  ftoljeg  ^erj  an         Briton  may  not  feast  his  proud 
(Surem  Ungiilc!  tr>etbe  (®C^Of  heart  upon  thy  misfortune. 

Rem.  6.  When  a  shorter  expression  is  desired,  Ultl — Jtt  (with  an  infinitive) 
is  frequently  used  instead  of  a  U  f  b  a  ^  : 

3c^  beftrafe  i^n,  Ullti^n  yx  beffern.     I  punish  him  to  make  him  better. 
Rem.  7.  Ultl  p  is  also  used  after  an  adjective  or  adverb  preceded  by  JU  I 

(£r  tjl  ju  ebet,  unt  ft^  JU  rac^en,       He  is  too  noble  minded  to  avenge 

himself. 


i 


§  268,  269.] 


THE    CONJUNCTION. 


401 


whole  satisfied,  still   there   were 
many  things  to  be  found  fault  with. 
I  know  it,  though  no  one  of  you  in- 
formed me  of  it. 


§  268.  Q^id^,  o^ft^ou,  oBuio^I^  tocnnglei^,  tocnn  f(§on, 

toCUn  flU(^  {though J  although) : 

Rem.  1.  When  the  subordinate  sentence  precedes  the  main  sentence,  the 
latter  is  usually  introduced  by  fo,  followed  by  i)OC^  or  bcnilOC^  (stilf): 

DbglciC^  ber  ^ti)Xtx  tm  ©ansen  JU*    Although  the  teacher  was  upon  the 
fricben  irar,  jo  tt?ar  bO(^  man* 
d?e8  (Sinjelnc  ju  tabcin, 
3c^  tt?ciB  C8,  otiglett^  (or  obUJO^l) 
Reiner  ton  3^neu  niic^  baton 
benat^rtrf;tigt  ^at, 
Rem.  2.  O  h—Q \ti6)  and  tt)  c n u  g  I  e  t  d}  often  take  a  pronoun  or  other 
monosyllabic  word  between  their  parts : 

Ob  id)  glci^  Qcfagt  tjabe —  Although  I  have  said — 

i2e7n.  3.  2S5  c  u  n — a  n  c^  often  signifies  even  if;  the  two  words  are  often 
separated,  or  reversed : 

2)cr  3Scr  jnd)  tuar  noc^  tmmcr  rcid^* 
lid)  bclofjnt,  ttjcnn  an^  nur  ein 
STbeil  bes  3?erf^rcd)en8  erfttttt 
wurbe  (3d;.), 
S)a«  tonntc  gcfdjeben,  0U(^  tocnil 
®ufta»  5lbolt  2C.  (@d).), 
(but)g©enn  cr  au(i  a(t  i[t,,|o  ifl  bocf; 
fein  ©eift  jugcnblid;, 


The  attempt  was  still  richly  re- 
warded, even  if  only  a  part  of  the 
promise  was  fullfilled. 


That  might  have  taken  place,  even 
if  Gustavus  Adolphus,  etc. 

Although  he  is  old,  still  his  spirit  is 
youthful 


§  269.  Sajcr,  barum,  beS^alb,  bc^tocpn,  olfo,  folglt(§, 

bemnaf^,  mit()tn  {conseqitently^  therefore) : 

Rem.  I.  ^at)tt  has  reference  rather  to  the  physical  cause : 

2)cr  @d;uee  ift  auf  ben  ©ebirgen  The  snow  has  melted  upon  the 
gefd)moIjcn;  bal)Cr  fmb  bic  mountains;  therefore  the  rivers 
gliiffe  angefc^n?oUen,  have  risen. 

Rem.  2.  jDarum,  beS^atb,  beSttjegcn,  refer  more  to  the  moral  than 
to  the  physical  cause : 

es  gcfiel  i^m  nid)t  mc^r  untcr  ben 
SERenfdjen,  bo^Cr  (or  bC^ttJCrjcn) 
jog  er  fic^  in  bie  @tnjamteit  gu« 
riicf, 
@r  ifi  ju  Icid^tjtnnig,  bcSl^alft  !ann 
id)  gar  nid^t  mit  i^m  jufrieben 
fein, 
Rein.  3.  3)  a  r  U  m  is  used  in  a  most  general  way,  to  indicate  a  physical, 
moral,  or  logical  cause : 

SS  ift  fc^5nc8  ^Better  ;  barUQt  It  is  fine  weather,  therefore  I  will 
ge^c  i4>  f^ajieren,  go  and  take  a  walk. 


He  no  longer  enjoyed  human  so- 
ciety, therefore  he  retired  to  sol- 
itude. 

He  is  too  trivial,  therefore  I  can 
not  be  at  all  pleased  with  him. 


402  THE  CONJUNCTION.  [§  269-271. 

Ohs.  3)  a r  U  m  is  sometimes  contracted  into  br  U in  : 
@tne  S)urc^tau(^ttg!cit  Ici^t  er  fic^    He  has  himself  called  "his  Excel- 
nennen  ;  brum  mu^  er  @oIba==       lency,"  therefore  he  must  be  able 
ten  ^alten  fbitnen  (@^.),  to  have  his  soldiers. 

Rem.  4.  SllfO,  folglt^,  btHtltil^/  UtUl^tn^  indicate  rather  a  logical  conse- 
quence : 

(Sr  ^at  eS  fctbjl  get^ait,  Ultb  !ann    He  did  it  himself,  therefore  he  can 

alfo  9fitemanb  tabeln,  blame  nobody. 

2Bir  fiub  3Jienfc^en,  folglir!^  ftnb    We  are  men,  therefore  we  are  mor- 
\X)\x  [terblic^,  tal. 

Ohs.  I.  ^Cninfl(^  (bent  nad^)  is  frequently  equivalent  to  according  to  that: 
@r  ift  geftern  abgereift,  unb  fann    He  started  yesterday,  and  may  con- 
bcmna^  ^eute  anfommen,  sequently  arrive  to-day. 

Ohs.  2.  9)Zit^ill  indicates  that  the  consequent  is  included  in  or  grows  nat- 
urally out  of  the  preceding  statement : 

Witm  55rnber  fommt  ^eute  Slbenb    My  brother  does  not  come  this  even- 
nic^t,  mi^n  ftnb  Xqxx  aHetn,  ing,  so  we  will  be  alone. 

§  270.  SctJOr,  Cl^e  {hefore) : 

Rem.  1.  ScDor  refers  only  to  time ;  cl^C  may  also  express  a  preference  or 
choice : 

ScDor  (or  cT)e)  er  bte  @tabt  berlte^,    Before  he  left  the  city. 
@^C  t(^  ntir  ba§  gefaEcn  laffe,  toitt    Before  I  put  up  with  that,  I  will 
id;  Iteber  auf  jeben  ettDaigen  3?or=»        rather  renounce  every  possible  ad- 
t^eil  terjid^ten,  vantage. 

Rem.  2.  S^CUOr  is  now  much  less  used  than  t^t* 

Rem.  3.  The  comparative  degree  t^tX  {sooner)  is  sometimes  placed  in  the 
sentence  preceding  the  one  containing  t\\t  or  tJCUOt  X 

S)ir  yixM  C^er  IVL  fagen,  beijor    To  say  nothing  to  you,  before  twelve 

%XoU\  %a%t  gefd;n3unben  (finb),         days  are  past. 
2)o(^   C^ICr  fc^Itngc  Xellug   mid^    And  may  Tellus  swallow  me  down, 
^inab,  t^t  \^  ntetnen  (Sib  i)er*        rather  than  that  I  should  break 
le^te  (®(^.),  my  oath. 

Rem.  4.  Sometimes  n  t  d)  t  is  added,  pleonastically,  after  c||C  J  especially  is 
this  done  when  there  is  a  negative  in  the  preceding  main  sentence : 

a}ian  joU  ntc^t  frili)er  auf{)i5ren,     One  should  not  cease  before  the 
t\\t  bie  §anbe  nic^t  erla^men,  hands  become  weary. 

§  271.  gall§,  tm  gallC  (bag),  toofcrn  {in  case  that,  if) : 

Reju.  These  forms  are  especially  appropriate  when  their  use  would  prevent 
an  unpleasant  repetition  of  tD  e  n  n  (t/)  in  the  same  sentence. 

^&l  tDttt'g  2)tr  (ei^en,  fatt^  2)U     I  will  loan  it  to  you,  in  case  that 
mir'g  balb  tinebergcben  fannfl:,  you  can  soon  return  it  to  me. 


§  272-274.]  THE    CONJUNCTION.  403 

§  272.  88o  {where)  is  also  used  referring  to  time  {when) : 
^ennft  bu  ba§  2onb,  m  bic  Bitro*    Do  you  know  the  land  where  the 

nen  bltifjcn  (®.),  citrons  bloom  ? 

3n  bcr  ^eit,  too—  At  the  time,  when— 

Bern.  2Bo  was  formerly  much  used  instead  of  n)  e  n  n  ;  this  signification  is 
now  given  mostly  in  rather  short  and  in  fixed  expressions,  as : 

So  nid^t ;  too  ic^  nid;t  irre,  If  not ;  if  I  am  not  mistaken. 

§  273.  Hcbrigcn^,  iikrbicS,  p  bem  {moreover,  besides) : 
er  tft  fiir  fein  filter  flug,  iitirigcn^    He  is  shrewd  for  his  age ;  moreover, 
ift  er  alter  alS  'Bk  glaubcn,  he  is  older  than  you  think. 

Rem.  UckrMC^  and  ju  bClll  are  more  specific  than  iibrigenS. 

§  274.  Scnn,  H,  inbcm,  toeil  {because,  for,  as,  since) : 

Rem.  1.  ^cnn  gives  rather  the  explanation  of  a  statement: 
3c^  get;e  md;t  au8,  bcnn  e§  rcgnet    I  do  not  go  out,  for  {i.  e.,  as  you  see; 
fortwaf^rcnb,  it  keeps  raining  continually. 

Rem.  2.  SBcil  (because)  answers  to  the  question  tOOruni  ?  (why  ?)  : 
2B  a  r  u  m  ge^eu  ®ie  nid^t  au§  ?       Why  do  you  not  go  out  ? 
2Bcil  e8  fortwa^renb  rcgnet,  Because  it  keeps  raining  continually. 

Rem.  3.  2)  e  11  n  is  frequently  used  to  introduce  explanatory  sentences  that 
are  interposed  between  the  words  of  main  sentences : 

3cl;  bin  -bcnn  tvarum  foil  ic^  e8  I  have  been— for  why  shall  I  deny 
laugnen— fe^r  [Ici^ig  gctvefen,  it— very  industrious. 

Rem.  4.  2)  e  n  n  (meaning  than)  is  not  used  now  as  much  after  compara- 
tives as  it  was  formerly ;  its  present  use  in  this  signification  is  rather  con- 
fined to  dignified  composition  : 

„9JZetne  ®ilnbe  ift  greyer, bcnn  fie  "My  punishment  is  greater  than  I 
mir  i)crgeben  wcrbcn  mogc",  can  bear"  (Gen.  4, 13). 

Rem.  5.  2)  e  n  n  is,  however,  frequently  used  to  prevent  the  repetition  of  al^ : 
^&l  bcfuc^c    i^n    jctjt   nie^r    alG    I  \\s\t  him  now  more  as  a  friend 
^rcunb,  bCnil  al^  Sirjt,  than  as  a  physician. 

Rem.  6.  2)  C  n  n  is  often  used  expletively,  especially  in  questions : 

2Bcr  fann  cS  i^m  bCItn gcfagt  (;abcn?    Who  can  have  told  it  to  him? 
Ob$.  Thus  used,  bcnn  does  not  receive  an  emphatic  tone  of  voice. 
Rem.  7.  2)(I^  though  primarily  an  adverbial  conjunction  of  time  (signifying 
u'heti,  [see  §  200,  4,  and  al§,  §  203, 2]),  is  sometimes  used  to  express  the  logical 
cause,  especially  when  the  main  sentence  contains  a  question : 

^a  cr  nid^t  gefommcn  ift,  mn§  cr    As  he  has  not  come,  he  must  be 

trant  fctn,  sick. 

2Bie  !amet  \\)X  burc^  baS  SSaffer,  How  did  you  come  through  the  wa- 
bd  boc^  bcr  <Strcm  bic  SBrilcfc  ter,  since  the  stream  has  carried 
fortgcfil^rt  [^  a  t]  ?  (B^.)  the  bridge  away  ? 


404  THE   INTERJECTION.  [§  275. 

Rem.  8.  ^Itbcni,  Hke  btl,  is  primarily  a  conjunction  of  time;  it  also  is  used 
lo  express  the  logical  cause : 

^lUbcm  er  aber  aljo  gcbad^te,  fie^el  But  while  he  was  reflecting,  behold! 

ba  erfc^ien  t^m  ein  (gngel,  an  angel  appeared  to  him. 

5lc^  !ann  e§  bir  ntc^t  geben,  inbCttl  I  can  not  give  it  to  you,  for  I  have 

ic^  e8  i^m  fc^on  fril^cr  i)er j^ro*  already  promised  it  before  to  him. 
d?en  ^be, 


THE  INTERJECTION. 

(2)ag  ©tti^finbuno^ujort) 

§  275.  Among  the  principal  interjections,  or  words 
used  as  such,  are  the  following: 

1.  Of  joy,  as  :  a^  I— ^  I— et  I— jud;  (ju(^!>e  I  ^etfa  I  or  ^oc^  \)=hurrah! 

2.  Of  sorrow,  as  :  a<^  1— tue^  I  or  O  tcti)  I  =  aZas/— letbcr  \ = unfortunately  ! 

3.  Of  astonishment,  as :  ac^  I— a^  I— i§  I— ^ola  I— ^O^jtaufenb  I 

4.  Of  laughter,  as :  ^a^a  I 

5.  Of  aversion,  as  :  p\m  I  p\m'  \=pshaw!— fit  \=Jie! 

Bern.  1.  The  word  fo  !  is  used  in  a  great  variety  of  connections,  as,  for  ex- 
ample, to  indicate  astonishment,  inquiry,  assent,  or  satisfaction. 

Bern.  2.  Many  words  that  belong  to  other  parts  of  speech  are  frequently 
used  with  the  force  of  interjections,  as  : 

@ut !  good !  SSo^Ian  I  be  of  good  courage! 

§eil  1  hail !  ©ottlob  I  God  be  praised! 

5Bortt)drtg  I  forward !  ©ott  betra^re  I  God  forbid ! 

§alt  I  halt!  stop !  3lbtCU  I  Good-by ! 

Bern.  3.  The  interjections  l^eit  1  and  ttJO^l  I  and  others,  are  followed  by  the 
dative  case,  as : 

2Bot)I  (fet)  i^m  I  May  it  be  well  with  him! 

§eil  (jet  or  trerbe)  bir  I  Hail  to  thee ! 

Bern.  4.  Some  interjections  may  be  followed  by  the  genitive  case,  as : 
Oi},  be§  !£^oren  1  Oh,  the  fool !     ^fut,  bcr  ®^anbe  I  Pshaw !  the  shame ! 

Bern.  5.  Sometimes  the  genitive  is  replaced  by  the  preposition  il  b  C  r,  as ; 
^fui,  iiber  btc  ©c^anbe  I  Pshaw!  for  shame! 

Bern.  6.  As  most  interjections  are  elliptical  expressions,  some  of  them, 
may  be  followed  by  a  noun  in  either  of  the  cases,  as : 

O,  %\}ox  I  0,  ber  %\)0X  1  Oh,  the  fool  I 

£),  bem  S^oren  (!ann  cS  m(^t  fc^abcn)  I        "    "      " 
O,ben2^oren(!enncic^)!  "    "      " 


§  276-278.]  ARRANGEMENT   OF   WORDS.  405 


ARRANGEMENT  OF  WORDS. 

(2)ic  aCortfoIgeO 

§  276.  In  nothing  is  the  genius  of  a  language  more 

strongly  manifest  than  in  the  arrangement  of  words  in 

sentences.     The  two  following  are  among  the  most 

prominent  characteristics  of  the  German  sentence  :      » 

1.  The  order  of  words  in  main  sentences  differs  from  that  in  subordinate 
sentences : 

(Sr  ift  f  r  a  n  f ,  He  is  sick. 

(Sr  faiin  nid;t  auSgc^en,  toeit  cr    He  can  not  go  out,  because  he  is 
trauf  ift,  sick. 

2.  There  is  a  marked  tendency  to  present  the  sentence  as  a  unit — that  is, 
with  the  modifying  and  limiting  words  and  clauses  enclosed  between  the  copula 
and  predicate  in  main  sentences,  and  between  the  subject  and  copula  in  subor- 
dinate sentences : 

§crr  2Bei^  f^at  (fetncm   alteflcn  Mr.  Weiss  has  to-day  f/iven  to  his 

@o^n,  JBil^clm,  bic  le^te  2lu8*  son  William  the  last  edition  of  the 

gabc  ber  beutfd^en  ?keratur*@C=  History  of  the  German  Literature 

fc^id^te  4)011  ^ciiirici^  ^UVJ,  ^eutc,  by  Heinrich  Kurz,  as  a  Christmas 

al§  2Beil)iiad;t§gefd^enf)gc9et)Cn^  present. 

2Bir  irotttcn  cjeftcrn  wad)  ^otSbam  We  wished  to  go  to  Potsdam  yester- 

gc^en,  ireilba^SBcttCrCfiirbiefe  day,  because  the  weather  was  so 

3ii^rc§5cit  fo  ganj  au^erorbcnt*  very  unusualy  beautiful   for  this 

lic^  \6}'6n)  tear,  season  of  the  year. 

§  277.  The  essential  parts  of  a  sentence  are  the  subject, 
the  predicate,  and  the  copula. 

1.  The  subject  is  the  nominative  of  the  verb. 

2.  The  predicate  expresses  what  is  affirmed  of  the  subject. 

3.  The  copula  is  the  inflected  part  of  the  verb. 

Hem.  The  predicate  is  often  included  in  one  word  with  the  copula. 

§  278.  In  main  indicative  sentences  the  regular  order 
Is:  (1)  J  the  subject;  (2)^  the  copula;  (d),  the  predicate. 


Subject.  Copula.  Predicate. 
2)aS  :!E3etter        ifl  ^ci§, 

The  weather         is  hot. 

S)aS  SScttcr  tuurbc  ^ci§, 

The  weather  became  hot. 


Subject.  Copula.     Predicate, 

S)a8  SBcttcr  blcibt          ^cig, 

The  weather  remains         hot. 

^err  ^raft  tjl      cin  2)eutfd?cr^ 

Mr.  Kraft  hi          a  German. 


406 


ARRANGEMENT   OP   WORDS. 


[§  279. 


Subject. 

I 

Copula. 
^abe 
have 

Predicate. 

gelefen, 

read. 

Subject. 
2)a8  ^Better 
The  weather 

Copula. 
has 

Predicate. 

^eiB  gen?ejcn, 

hot  been. 

SBir 
We 

miiffen 
must 

hjarten, 
vi^ait. 

asir 

We 

^ben 
have 

h)arten  milffcn, 
wait  (must). 

He 

!am 
arrived. 

an, 

He 

has 

angefommcii, 
arrived. 

S)te  3Sogcl 
The  birds 

fingen, 
sing. 

SBtr 
We 

hjcrbcn 
shall 

getrcfen  fcin, 
(been,  be). 

§  279.  The  object  of  the  verb  is  placed  between  the 
copula  and  the  predicate : 

Subject.  Copula.  Object.         Predicate, 

2)er  taufmann  ^at  bag  ^aug       toerfauft, 

The  merchant  has  the  house  sold. 


He 

(gx 
He 


fc^retbt 
copies 

fc^retbt 
writes 


ben  S3rief 
the  letter. 

ben  33riet, 
the  letter. 


ab, 


3fti?  ^cibe         bag  Su(^         Qetefcn, 

I  have  the  book  read. 

Rem.  1 .  The  object  of  a  verb,  whether  direct  or  indirect,  stands  between 
the  copula  and  the  predicate  (or  after  the  copula  when  the  copula  and  the 
predicate  are  combined  into  one  word)  : 

Subject,        Copula,  Object,  Predicate,' 

(Sr  tjl  jetnem  53rubcr  fl^folgt, 

He  has  his  brother  followed. 


He 

ill 
has 

ctncg  aScrbred^enS 
with  a  crime 

angcKagt  tt?orben, 
charged  been. 

I 

have 

mctnen  ^^^cunb 
my  friend 

(nm  9iat^  gefragt), 
for  advice  asked. 

®tc 
They 

^abcn 
have 

their  scheme 

tng  Serf  gejefet, 
into  execution  carried. 

They 

fe^ten 
carried 

t^r  aSortjaben 
their  scheme 

ing  Serf, 
into  execution. 

®ie 
They 

^"teltcn 
held 

ben  S)ieb 
the  thief 

n, 

fast. 

Obs.  In  some  phrases  (as  um  9tatb  fragen,  iitg  2Bert  fe^en,  feji^artcn)  the 
Words  preceding  the  verb  follow  the  same  laws  of  position  as  the  prefixes  of 
se4)arable  compound  verbs. 


§  279,  280J  ARRANGEMENT    OF    WORDS. 


407 


Rem.  2.  When  there  are  two  nouns  governed  by  a  verb,  the  personal  noun 
takes  the  precedence : 

Personal  noun.  Object.  Predicate. 

feincm  <Sobne         ein  53ud^  gefc^entt, 

to  his  son  a  book  given. 


Copula. 
has 


Subject. 
®cr  SSater 
The  father 

2)cr  35ater     fc^enfte 
The  father    presented 

@ic  ^aben 

They  have 


feincm  ®o^nc 
to  his  son 


cin  33uc^, 
a  book. 


ben  ©eneral      beS  ^od^»erratb3     ancjettagt, 
the  general      with  high  treason     charged. 

Ohs.  But  when  particular  emphasis  is  placed  upon  the  personal  noun,  it  is 
placed  after  the  noun  referring  to  a  thing : 

3)er  33ater  ^at  cin  Suc^  fctncm  So^nc  gefc^enft. 
Rem.  3.  A  personal  noun  in  the  accusative  precedes  one  in  the  dative  case» 
3c^      babe      i{;ren  @o^n      meinem  greunbe        eni^foblcn, 
I        have        your  son  to  my  friend  recommended. 

Rem.  4.  The  oblique  cases  of  personal  pronouns  precede  other  substantives 
(nouns  or  pronouns)  in  the  oblique  cases  : 


3c^ 
I 

I 

I 


have 

have 

^abc 
have 


to  him 


i^m 
to  him 


your  son 

3^rcm  53rubcr 
to  your  brother 

bad 
that 


cm^fo^tcn, 
recommended. 

0cfd;i(ft, 
sent. 

said. 


Rem.  5.  OCtwo  personal  pronouns  in  different  oblique  cases,  the  one  in  the 
accusative  precedes  the  one  in  the  dative  or  genitive  case : 


3c^ 
I 

I 

3d) 

I 


have 

fagte 
said 

ttcrbe 
shall 


it 

cs 

it 

tbn 
him 


i^m 
to  him 

i^m, 
to  him. 

3bnen 

to  you 


gefagt, 
said. 


i)or|icttcn, 
introduce. 


§  280.  The  subject  is  placed  after  the  copula  in  the 
following  cases : 

1 .  In  interrogative  and  exclamatory  sentences. 

2.  With  the  imperative  mood. 

3.  When  an  adverb  or  adverbial  conjunction  introduces  a  main  sentenod. 

4.  When  tt)  e  n  n  is  omitted  (see  §  263,  2,  Rem.  4). 
6.  When  the  predicate  introduces  a  sentence. 


408 


ARRANGEMENT    OF   WORDS. 


§  280.] 


6.  When  th 
a  sonten( 

e  object  ( 
ze. 
Copula. 

Is 

^aben 
Have 

of  the  verb  (not  be 

Subject. 
ber  mtn\6) 

ing  a  relativ 

e  pronoun)  introduc 

Predicate. 
fterblic^? 
mortal? 

getefen? 
read? 

®te 
you 

bag  S3uc^ 
the  book 

©c^eint 
Shines 

2Barc 
Were 

bte  (Sonne? 
the  sun? 

er 
he 

bod^ 
(only) 

gefunb  I 
well! 

®eib 
Be 

^ommen 
Come 

t^r 
(ye) 

(Sic 
(you) 

oufmerf  jam  I 
attentive ! 

tDteber  I 
again! 

batb 
soon 

€>ter 
Here 

§eute 
To-day 

tft 

bag  S8uc^, 
the  book. 

bag  Setter 
the  weather 

ill 
is 

fe^r  j(^i5n, 
very  fine. 

2)a^er 
Therefore 

lonn 
can 

I 

him 

ntd^t  trauen. 
not  trust. 

^Predicate.) 

mt 

Cold 

(grnj^ 
Earnest 

<Sterben 
Die 

Slbtretben 
Drive  off 

SBare 
Were 

ttjar 

bae  Setter 
the  weather 

ber  ZaQ, 
the  day. 

bag  Seben, 
life. 

aU. 

ton 
we 

ntd^t 
not 

jo  ^et^, 

so  hot. 

{Object.) 

ill 

miiffen 

tuollen 
will 

V\rtvPi/^fifftvt    Ovy\>^v»/^ 

vvvv"|J«'^»^  ^J'-^vviiy, 

©eftcgt 
Conquered 

has 

ber  mm^, 
bravery. 

(Object).        t 
3)en  mam 
That  man 

Copula.         Subject. 
^abc             \^           mc 
have                I             never 

Predicate. 
ge!annt, 
known. 

3^n 
Him 

fenne            t^ 
know               I 

nid^t, 
not. 

§281.]  ARRANGEMENT    OF    WORDS.  409 

§  281.  There  is  more  definiteness  in  the  position  of 
adverbs  and  adverbial  phrases  in  the  German  than 
there  is  in  the  English  language : 

Rem.  1.  Adverbs  of  manner  stand  immediately  before  the  predicate  (or  at 
•lA  end  of  the  sentence,  if  the  predicate  is  included  in  the  copula): 

Adverb.  Predicate. 

toortreffltc^  gefungcn, 

admirably  sung. 

toortreffli^,  

admirably. 


Subject. 
@ic 
She 

Copula. 
t)at 
has 

Object. 
bag  2icb 
the  song 

®ie 
She 

fang 
sang 

bas  Sieb 
the  song 

I 

^abc 
have 

him 

I 

have 

it 

cmpiid^  gctDarnt, 

earnestly  warned. 

auf  bteje  SBeijc  get^an, 

in  this  way  done. 

Rem.  2.  Adverbs  of  time  or  place  precede  adverbs  of  manner: 

@ic       ^at       ba9  ?icb       geftcrn  Slbenb       toortvcfflid^       gcfungen, 
She        has        the  song    yesterday  evening     admirably  sung. 

SSir     babcn      in  33erltn       fe^r  angencbm       gclcbt, 

We       have        in  Berlin      .very  agreeably        lived. 

Rem.  3.  Adverbs  of  time  usually  precede  adverbs  of  place  (L.  XXIV.,  5)- 

SEBir  fmb       tor  totcr  S^agen       in  SBerlin       angctommen, 
We  have  four  days  ago  in  Berlin  arrived. 

Rem.  4.  Of  two  or  more  adverbs  of  the  same  kind,  as  of  time  or  place,  the 
more  particular  usually  follow  the  more  general : 
@ic  trcrben     ntorgen  Stbcnb  um  ac^t  U^r     anfommen^ 

They  will    to-morrow  evening  at  eight  o'clock     arrive. 

®ic  fatten     in  Berlin     in  l^iftoria*@tra(^e      9Jumero  20      gctcobnt, 
They  had      in  Berlin       in  Victoria-street    number  twenty     resided. 

2Bir  tl^nncn    baS  SBud^  nirgcnbS  im  §aufe         finben, 

We  can        the  book  nowhere  in  the  house  find. 

Exc.  The  adverbs  of  time  f  C^  0  n  {already),  Xia&i  (still),  c  r  ft  (Jirst)  may 
precede  or  follow  a  more  definite  adverbial  expression  of  time,  as  :  t^eutc  nod;, 
or  nod)  beute ;  morgcn  fd^on,  or  fc^on  morgen ;  crft  ^eute  morgcn,  or  ^eutc 
aJZorgcn  crft. 

Rejn.  5.  When  adverbs  have  more  special  reference  to  a  substantive,  they 
usually  precede  it : 

©ogar  f  c  i  n  c  ®  c  g  n  e  r  crfcnncn  fcincn  3Bcrt^  an, 
Even       his      opposers  recognize    hii    worth. 
S 


410 


ARRANGEMENT    OF   WORDS. 


281,282. 


Rem.  1.  This  inversion  of  the  subject  and  copula  takes  place  also  when  the 
personal  pronoun  C^  is  used  expletively  for  the  subject : 

(@^;  n)trbetn@e«>itter  f  om=»    There  will  a  thunder-storm  come. 

men, 
((S§)  finb  3Se\-brec^en  Began*    There  have  been  crimes  committed, 
gen, 
Rem.  2.  It  also  takes  place  when  a  relative  sentence  precedes  a  main  sen- 


2Ber  e§  t[t,  tD  e  i  ^  i  d?  nid?t,  I  do  not  know  who  he  is. 

Rem.  3.  Sometimes  the  subject  precedes  the  copula  in  interrogative  and 
exclamatory  sentences : 

@  0 1 1  f  e  i  bir  gncibtg  I  God  be  gracious  to  thee ! 

(Sr  m5ge  glilcflid^  fein  I  May  he  be  happy. 

§  282.  In  subordinate  sentences  the  general  order  is: 
(1),  the  subject;  (2),  the  predicate  ;  (3),  the  copula  : 


S^  XQt\%  bag 
I  know  that 

Suhject. 

ber  2«enj(^ 

man 

Predicate. 
fterbltc^ 
mortal 

Copula. 

ift, 
is. 

fd^  begreife  ntc^t,  tuarum 
I  understand  not  why 

er 
he 

fo  ungutrteben 
so  discontented 

tt)ar. 
was. 

S)er  2Rann, 
The  man, 

ber 
who 

fo  !ran! 
so  sick 

xt>ax, 
was. 

S)er  3lniert!aner, 
The  American, 

SSenn 
When 

ber 
who 

bie  ©d^ttjatfecn 
the  swallows 

^cutc  anfam, 
to-day  arrived. 

^cimtDcirtg  jtel^en. 
homeward  flv. 

Rem.  1.  When  the  compound  tenses  of  the  potential  verbs,  or  of  the  verbs 
laffen,  ^ei^cn,  fet;en,  ^bren,  ^elfen  {see  §  131 ,  Rem.  2),  are  used  in 
subordinate  sentences  with  the  infinitive  of  other  verbs,  the  copula  (auxiUary) 
is  placed  before  the  predicate  or  before  the  object  of  the  verb  : 


SSett  cr  eg  ntci^t  l^at  t  ^  u  n  !bnnen, 

Dbgleid^  tc^  i^m  ntdjt  I)at)e  a  r  b  e  t* 
ten  Belfen  bilrfen, 

©eringere  SSitrger,  tcetd^e  9^i(^t0 
befa^en,  toag  i^nen  SSaterlanb 
unb  §erb  \jiiitt  Heb  madden 
fijnnen  (@(^.), 

^6)  njar  ju  fe^r  getool^nt,  nttc^  mtt 
ttiir  felbft  ju  bejc^aftigen,  at8  ba^ 
ic^  mit  2lutmertfam!eit  pttC  ein 
^unfttoerf  betradt^ten  f  oUen  (@. ), 


Because  he  was  not  able  to  do  it. 

Although  I  was  not  permitted  to 
help  him  work. 

Citizens  from  the  lower  classes,  who 
possessed  nothing  that  could  make 
their  country  and  their  homes  dear 
to  them. 

I  was  too  much  in  the  habit  of  oc- 
cupying myself  with  my  own 
thoughts,  to  consider  a  work  of  art 
with  attention. 


§282-284.]  ARRANGEMENT    OF    WORDS.  411 

Rem.  For  the  sake  of  euphony,  the  copula  is  often  omitted  when  the  verb  in 
the  subordinate  sentence  is  in  the  perfect  or  pluperfect  tense : 

^&l  »erlor  ntd;t  Wit^,  ba  foId;cr  I  did  not  lose  all,  as  such  a  friend 
greuub  im  Unglitlf  mir  gebiic*  has  remained  to  me  in  my  misfor- 
ben  [i[t](vSd?.),  tune. 

2Ba8  tear  metn  2)anf  bafilr,  bo§  What  was  the  reward  to  me,  that  T, 
tc^,  ein  treucr  gitr[tcntncd;t,  ben  a  true  servant  of  the  prince,  who 
2>i5Iterfluc^  auf  mid;  gebilrbet  had  drawn  upon  myself  the  curse 
[^atte],  biefen  5^rieg,  bcr  nur  t^n  of  the  people,  had  made  tlie  princes 
gro^  gcmad;t  [bat],  bie  giti^ft^n  pay  for  the  war  which  has  made 
[^abe]  ^a^len  laffen  ?  (®d;.)  him  alone  great  ? 

§  283.  Attributive  adjectives  usually  precede  the 
noun  they  qualify : 

2)er  gutc  2Jiann,  The  good  man. 

Rein.  1.  Very  long  attributive  adjective  clauses  are  frequently  employed  in 
the  German  language  ;  these  are  usually  translated  into  English  by  subordi- 
nate relative  sentences : 

Sin  (ber  beutfd^cn  ®^rad;c  t)oU*    A  foreigner  (who  is)  well  acquainted 

!omnien  tuubigcr)  grcmbcr,  with  the  German  language. 

S)ie  (bcm  ^railten  fe^t  ^cUjanic)  The  medicine  that  is  very  beneficial 
3lrjnct,  to  tlie  sick  man. 

Rem.  2.  Sometimes  the  attributive  adjective  is  placed,  as  for  the  sake  of 
emphasis,  after  the  noun  which  it  qualifies  : 

9iiemanb  al9  25u,  fott  biefen  ^rieg,  Nobody  but  yourself  shall  end  this 
ben  filrd^terlic^en,  enben  (@d;.),        fearful  war. 

Rem.  3.  For  the  sake  of  euphony,  the  attributive  adjective  clause  may  be 
placed,  as  in  English,  after  the  noun  it  qualifies ;  in  this  case  the  attributive 
luijective  is  not  inflected  (§  84,  Less.  XVIII,  1): 

?lnd>  ntanc^en  3JJann,  Also  many  a  man  and  many  a  hero, 

Unb  mand;cn  §elb,  good  in  peace,  and  strong  in  war, 

Sm  ^rieben  gut  was  born  in  the  Swabian  land. 

Unb  ftarf  im  ge(b, 
©ebar  ba«  ©c^mabenlanb  (®^.), 

§  284.  For  the  prepositions  tho^i  follow  the  substantive^ 
instead  of  preceding  it,  see  §  255. 


Part  iTourtl); 


CONTAINING 


VOCABULARIES. 


Albert. 


I.  PERSONAL  PROPER  NAMES. 

Rem.  1 .  In  this  list  are  included  only  the  most  usual  of  such  names  as  h&ve 
different  forms  or  different  pronunciation  in  the  German  and  English  lan- 
guages. 

Rem.  2.  A  few  proper  names  from  the  Greek,  Latin,  and  Hebrew  languages 
are  also  added.  The  final  syllable  is  dropped  from  many  Latin  and  GreeK 
proper  names. 

(Sli'fa,  — «,  or  (Sli'fe,  — n§,/,  Eliza. 
S'mil,  — 0,  »!.,  Emilius,  Emil. 
Smi'lic,  — n8,/.,  Emily. 
S))i{ur',  —8, 7/i.,  Epicurus. 
S^ifurd'er,  — g,  m.,  Epicurean. 
tp'\tuxa'i)(i^,adj.,  Epicurean. 
@rnft,— ens,  m.,  Ernest. 
@ugen',— 8,  m.,  Eugene. 
(Suge'me,  — n:-,  /*.,  Eugenie. 
(S'toa,  — S,/.,  Eve  or  Eva. 
i^U'ttnh—tn^f  7/1.,  Florence, 
gloreu'tia, —§,/.,  Florence, 
^ranj,  — cn6,  w.,  PVancis. 
^ranjiS'ta, —§,/.,  Frances, 
^ricb'rid), — 8,  jn.,  Frederick. 
(San^mCb', — ^,  /«.,  Ganymede, 
©e'org,  — §,  m.,  George, 
©er'^arb,  — 8,  m.,  Gerhard,     [trade, 
©er'traub  or  ©er'trub,  —8,/,  Ger- 
©o'ltatb,  — 8,  7/1.,  Goliath, 
©ott'frteb,  — §,  /«.,  Godfrey, 
©ott'barb,  —8,  r//.,  Godard. 
©ott'Iteb,  — 8,  7«.,  Theophilus. 
Ore'ijor,  — 8,  tt?,,  Gregory, 
grcj^oria' nifd;,  ac?;.,  Gregorian. 
@ui'bo, — 8,  771.,  Guy. 
©u'ftatj,  — 8,  771.,  Gustavus. 
^On'nC,— n^,/.,  Jane. 
^an8,  — en8,  ni.,  John. 
§eb'tt)icj,  — 8,/.,  Edwiga. 
§cin'ri(^,  — 8, 7«.,  Henry.      [Helena. 
.t>cle'ne,-n8,  or  ^clcna,  -8,/.,  Helen, 
.^elicbor', — 8,  tw.,  Heliodorus. 
^cnrict'tc, — n8,/.,  Henrietta,  Harriet 
^cr'niann, — 8,  »7t.,  Hennan. 
ipero'beS,  — ,  //«.,  llerod. 
^crobot', — 8,  7/i.,  Herodotus. 


WMhttt,  (gen.— g),  774.,  Ethelbert. 

Slbe'fe  or  Slbeli'ne,  —8,/,  Adeline. 

Sl'belbeit,  —8,/.,  Adelaide. 

21'bolf  or  2l'boI^i>,  —8, 7/j.,  Adolphus. 

5le8tula))',  — 8,  ttj.,  Esculapius. 

Slefc))',— 8,  772.,  Esop. 

%a't^e,  — n8,/.,  Agathe. 

%i]'iK^,—,f.,  Agnes. 

21'Iarid;, — 8,77j.,  Alaric. 

3irbcrt  or  2llbrcd)t,  —8, 77i., 

mie'jiS,— ,/.,  Alice. 

5lIfcu'fo,  — 8,  771.  Alphonso. 

5lma'lie,  — n8,  /*.,  Amelia. 

5lnbre' a8,  — ,  m.,  Andrew. 

Slu'na,  —8,  ^    -    .        » 

5,.  ,  i  r/,  Ann,  Anna. 

Stn'ton,  — 8, 77i,,  Anthony. 
3lu'gufl,  —8,  m.,  Augustus. 
5luc|u'ftc, — n8,/,  Augusta. 
S^al'bUtn,  —§,  m.,  Baldwin. 
SBcIifar',  — 8, 771.,  Belisarius. 
93Ian'ta,  —8,/,  Blanche. 
SSonifaj',  —  en8,  or  — tu8,  »7^, 
^onxho' nm, pi.,  Bourbons. 
53rigit'te,  — cn8,/.,  Bridget. 
Sol'Uin,  — §,  7/1.,  Calvin. 
C^arlot'te,  — n8,/.,  Charlotte. 
Clob'irig,  — 8, 77i.,  Clovis. 
(£bri'ftu8,  — i,  77J.,  Christ. 
CIe'mcn8,  — ,  »7i.,  Clement. 
2)iont)^',  — ,  771.,  Dionysius,  Dennis. 

jorot()e'a,-8,  )^   D^,^,h 
2)orot()ce ,  — n8,r 

(5'5cr^arb,— ^,  tti.,  Eberhard. 

e'buarb,  —8,  771.,  Edward. 

©Icouo'rc,  — n8,  /.,  Eleonora. 

eii'a8,  —,1/1.,  Elisha. 


[face. 
Boni- 


416 


PERSONAL  PROPER  NAMES. 


^t'ot\  — S,  w.,  Job. 
§onier',  — §>,  m.,  Homer. 
^Oine'rifd;  (adj.),  Homeric, 
^ora^',  — ,  ?«.,  Horace, 
ipum'fneb, — §,  m.,  Humphry. 
3^n'nOCCn5,  — eu^,  m.,  innocence. 
3'faa!  O'^fa^a!),  — ,  ?/«.,  Isaac. 
3jCli'aS,  — ,  m.,  Isaiah. 
5§'inael,  — 8,  •/«.,  Ishmael. 
Stt'foil,  — §^  m.,  Jacob,  James, 
^a'jon, — §,  7/1.,  Jason. 
3evemi'a§, — ,  7n.,  Jeremiah. 
^e'jug,  — ,  m.j  Jesus. 
5to'ab,  — g,  m.,  Joab. 
^of)ann',  — g,  m.,  John. 
3Df)an'na,  — g,/.,  Joan,  Jane. 
3o'na§,  — ,  m  ,  Jonah. 
^o'fe|3l;, — 8,  rn.,  Joseph. 
^o'fua, — §,  m.,  Joshua, 
^u'liltg,  — ,  m.,  Julius. 
Sii'lia, —§,/.,  Julia. 
Julian', — §>,  m.,  Julian. 
Suftiman', — §,  ???.,  Justinian, 
iuftiuia'nifct)  (adj  ),  Justinian. 
^a'tn  (^a'4n),  — ^,  m.,  Cain, 
^art, — §,  ??*.,  Charles, 
^arl  ber  @ro^e,  Charlemagne, 
^aroli'ue,  — n§,/.,  Caroline, 
^a'ftor, — ^,  m.,  Castor, 
^at^ari'ne, — ii§,/.,  Catharine. 
Sc'on^arb,  —§,  m.,  Leonard, 
^eono're, — n§,/.,  Leonora. 
Si't'tu?, — ,  m.,  Livy. 
So'reitj,  — enS,  /«.,  Lawrence. 
Suci'e,  — ng,/.,  Lucy. 
Sub'wtc;,  — §,  7«.,  Lewis,  Louis. 
Sui'fc, — 8,/.,  Louisa. 
Su'faS,  — ,  ?H.,  Luke. 
Su!rej',  — eit8,  ?«.,  Lucretius. 
SWa'^Omcb,  — ^,  ??^•,  Mohammed. 
QJJari'a, — 8,/.,  Maria. 
Tla.xk\ — 1X8,/.,  Mary. 
2Jlar'tba,  — 8,/.,  Martha. 
2TJat^trbe,  — n8,/.,  Matilda. 
2}Jvitt^a'u8,  — i,  m.,  Matthew. 


Wax,  — cn8,  or  3J?ajimt'Itan,  — 8,  m., 

Maximilian. 
3JJertur', — 8,  w.,  Mercury. 
SJJet^u'falem,  — 8,  w.,  JSiethusaleh. 
3Jii'ci;ael  (3)ii^d;a*eO,— 8,  m., Michael 
SD^o'rij,  — en8,  7a<.,  Maurice. 
9}Jo'fe8  Q/en.  9}?ofi§),  w.,  Moses, 
gjiofa'ifd;  (adj.),  Mosaic. 
yfJa't^ait,  —0,  m.,  Kathan. 
9fle^emi'a8,  — ,  w.,  Kehemiah. 
^fie^JtUu',— 8,  w..,  Neptune. 
9^i'tolau8,  — ,  in.,  Nicholas. 
ObOtt'CCr, — §f  m.,  Odoacer. 
Oreft',  — 8,  w.,  Orestes. 
OiJtb',  —8,  m.,  Ovid. 
*^aul,— ^,  »w.,  Paul. 
^e'tev,  —8,  w.,  Peter. 
^^i'li^^,— 8,  w.,  Philip. 
^i(a'tu8,  — ,  m.,  Pilate. 
Pi'niuS,  — ,  7rt.,  Pliny. 
^i5om))e'jlt8,  — ,  7w.,  Pompey. 
^ro))er5',— en8,  ?«.,  Propertius. 
9{a'^Cl,— ^,/.,  Rachel. 
9?ai'munb,— 8,  m.,  Raymond. 
^Rebet'fa,  —8,/.,  Rebecca. 
9{u'bol^{)  or  9?u'botf,  —8,  w.,  Ralph, 
3?utf),— 8,/.,  Ruth.  [Rudolph. 

(SalomO,  — ^,  w.,  Solomon. 
@e'balb,  —8,  m.,  Sebaldus. 
©ieg'munb, — 8,  ?«.,  Sigismund. 
©int'fon,  — 8,  m.,  Samson. 
@ueton', — 8,  VI.,  Suetonius. 
%(i'iXiVi^r—,  m.,  Tacitus. 
Xatn^',  — en8,  7n.,  Terence. 
^{)e'obor,  — 8,  711.,  Theodore. 
2^^ere'fe,  — n8,/.,  Theresa. 
Xi)o'ma§,  — ,  7)1.,  Thomas. 
Si'tian,  — 8,  th.,  Titian. 
58CU,— g,  w.,  Vitus. 
SSirgir,  —8,  m.,  Virgil. 
Smarter,— ^,»i.,  Walter. 
SBil'^elm,  —8,  m.,  William. 
SBilfjelmi'na,  —8,/.,  Wilhelmina 
5lBolf'gang,  —8,  ?«.,  Wolfgang. 
3£a'UCr,  —^,  m.,  Xavier. 


II.  GEOGRAPHICAL  PROPER  NAMES. 

Rem.  In  this  list  are  given  only  those  names  that  are  most  frequently  em- 
ployed, and  which  differ  materially  in  form  and  pronunciation  from  the  cur- 
responding  names  in  English.  In  many  eases  the  personal  nouns  and  the  ad- 
jectives that  are  formed  from  names  of  places  are  also  given. 


Stfl'i^Cn, — ^f  Aix-la-chapelle.  [tains. 
jDic  "ilbruj'jeii,  j>l. ,  the  Abruzzi  Moun- 
Slb^ffi'uicn,  — ,  Abyssinia.       [sinian. 

(Sin  %h\)\\i'imx,—^,  pi. — ,  an  Abys- 

2(b^ffi'ntfci;  {adj.),  Abyssinian. 
S)a8  ^Dria'tifc^c  3)?eer,  —8,  Adriatic. 
3l'frita,  — S,  Africa. 

(Sin  ^Ifrita'ner,  —8,  pi.—,  an  Afri- 

2lfri!a'ntfc^  {adj.),  African,     [can. 
2)ie  3H>cn,  pL,  the  Alps. 
5)ie  3u'Hid;cu  3llpcn,  Julian  Alps. 
^2lme'rifa,  — 8,  America.    [American. 

2)cr  Stmcrita'ner,  —8,  pi.—,  the 

?lmerita'ni)c^  {adj.),  American. 
Xk  %n'tcn,  pi.,  the  Andes. 
Xk  %n'Qdn,pl.y  the  Angles.       [on. 
S)ie  5liu]elfad)'fen,  pL,  the  Anglo-Sax- 

^^ngelfad^'i'ifd;  {adj.),  Anglo-Saxon. 
Slntwer'pen,  — 8,  Antwerp. 
2)ie  2l^eniu'ncn,  ;>/.,  the  Apennines. 
5(ra'bieii,  —3,  Arabia. 

Sin  51'rabcr,  —9,  pi.  —,  an  Arab. 

Slra'bifd;  {adj.),  Arabian. 
21'fieu,  —9,  Asia. 

Sin  ^2lfiat',  — en,  pi.  —en,  an  Asiatic. 

^21[ia'tifd;  {adj.),  Asiatic. 
2l[fp'ricn,  — 8,  Assyria. 
^Itbcn',  — S,  Athens. 
3)a8  'iltlan'tift^c  SJiccr,  — g,  the  Atlan- 
^^uftra'Iien,  — 8,  Australia,  [tic  Ocean. 
S)ic  Sljo'rifc^en  Sn\dn,pl.  the  Azores. 
2)a8  '2ljo'toifd;c  Tlttx,  the  sea  of  Azof. 
©O'bCn,— ^,  Raden. 
^.li'ern,  — 8,  Bavaria. 

(Sin  ^^a'icr,  — n,/>/.— n,  a  Bavarian. 
2)ie  Scbui'ncn,;)/.,  the  Bedouins. 
33ergicn,  — 9,  Belgium, 
i^crbcrci',  — ,  Barbary. 

Sin  Ser'ber, — 9, pi.,  — ,  a  Berber. 


33erUn', — e,  Berlin.  [ner. 

(Sin  iBerli'ncr,  — 8,  pi-—,  a  Berli- 

S3erU'ni)C^  C«^(/'.),  of  Berlin,  [cay. 
(3)er  @oIf  toon)  ^Biofa'va,  Bay  of  Bis- 
ter ^Bo'bcnfec, — 8,  Lake  of  Constance. 
33el)'men,  — 8,  Bohemia.  [mian. 

Sin  ^i3^'me,  — n,  j>l.  — n,  a  Bohe- 
33o^'mtfd)  {adj.),  Bohemian. 
2)er  S3ot^'nifd)e  ^Zcci'luijcn,  Gulf  of 

Bothnia. 
5Braun'ld;wcig,  —8,  Brunswick. 
33riij'icl, — 8,  Brussels. 
53nrgnnb', — 8,  Burgundy. 
Slji'lia,  — ^,  China. 

(Sin  (Sbine'fe,  —n,pl.  —n,  Chinese. 

dbine'fifd;  {adj.),  Chinese. 
Sbur,  —8,  Coire. 
(SV>ern,  —8,  Cyprus. 
2)a'ncmarf,  —8,  Denmark. 

Sin  2)a'ne,  —  n,^;.  — n,  a  Dane. 

2)a'nif(^  {adj.),  Danish. 
2)eutfd/ianb,  Germany. 

Sin  2)cut'f(^er,  a  German. 

Sine  2)eut'fd;c,  a  German. 

2)eutjd;  {adj.),  German. 

9^orb'bcutfd;  {adj.),  North-German. 

@iib'bcutf(^  {adj.),  South-German. 
!3)ie  S)o'nau,  — ,  the  Danube. 
2)rc8'ben,  —8,  Dresden. 
2)ie  2)ii'nen  (/>/.),  the  Do^vns. 
2)iin'tird;cn,  —8,  Dunkirk. 
2)af'feIborf,  —8,  Dusseldorf. 
ggtj^'tcn,  — g,  Egypt.  [tian. 

Sin  SiJV^j'ter, — 8,  pi.  — ,  an  Egyp- 

Sgt^^'tifd;  {adj.),  Egyptian. 
Sl'fag,  Alsace. 
Sng'Ianb,  —8,  England,     [glishman. 

Sin  Sng'Ianber,  —9,pl.—,  an  En- 

Sng'lifc^  {adj.),  English. 


418 


GEOGRAPHICAL   PROPER   NAMES. 


S)te  (Stfc^,  the  Adige. 

(guro'pa, — §,  Europa. 
(gin  (guro^a'er,  — 6,  pi.  — ,  a  Euro- 
(Suro^^vi'ijd;  {adj.),  European, [pean. 

^((in'bCtn, — ^,  Flanders,  [of  Flanders 
@tn  glam'lanber, — §,pl.—,a  citizen 
gla'mifc^  (.adj.),  Flemish. 

glorenj',  Florence. 

granf'retd;,  France.  [Frenchman, 
(gin  granjo'fe,  — n,  plur.  — n,  a 
(Sine  grangb'fin,  — ,  pi.  — nen,  a 
gransb'fifd?,  French.  [French  lady. 

©alt'jicn,  — ^,  GaHcia. 

©at'Iien,  — g,  Gaul. 

©e'nua,  — §,  Genoa. 

(Seor'gien,  — g,  Georgia. 

2)te  ®ot^cn,i)/.,  the  Goths. 
(So't^tfc^  («^'0,  Gothic. 

@rie'd;eulanb,  — §,  Greece, 
(gin  ©rie'c^e,  — n,pl.  — n,  a  Greek. 
©rie'c^ifc^  (adj.),  Greek. 

©ropritan'nien,  — §,  Great  Britain. 

@ro|jgrie'd;enIanb, — g,  Grecia  Magna. 

2)Cr  ^aag,  — g,  the  Hague. 

^abS'burg,  — §,  Hapsburg. 

^am'burg,  Hamburg. 

^anno'i?er,  Hanover.  [Hanoverian. 
@in  §annot)era'uer,  — g,  pi.  —,  a 
§annoi?era'mfd),>  ,  ,. .  Hanove- 
^anno'iJerifd?,    >  ("^-^     rian. 

(gin  ^ebrci'er,  — ,i?/.  — ,  a  Hebrew. 
§ebra'if^  («<^'.),  Hebrew. 

^ol'Iaub,  —8,  Holland.  [man. 

©in  §orianber,  —^,pl.—,  aDutch- 
^orianbifd;  (adj.),  Dutch. 

S)ie  §un'nen,jo/.,  the  Hunns. 

i^n'btCll/  — ^f  India,  [ican)  Indian. 
@tn  Snbia'ner, — ^,pl. — ,  an  (Amer- 
ein  ^n'bier,  — g,  pi.  — ,  an  (East) 
3n'btf(^  (adj.),  Indian.        [Indian. 

3r'lanb,  — §,  Ireland. 

2)er  3r'Ianber,  — §,  pi.  —,  the  Irish- 
3'rtfd;  (adj.),  Irish.  [man. 

SfS'Ianb,  —8,  Iceland. 

3ta'Ucn,  — S,  Italy. 


@tn  ^tatiS'ncr,  — §,  ;>/.  — ,  an  Ttal- 

^taltd'nifc^  (adj.),  ItaUan.       [ian. 
^•a'^an,  — «*,  Japan.  [nese. 

(giu  3'a^ane'fe,  — u,  pi.  — n,  a  Japa- 

^a^ane'fifc^  (adj.),  Japanese. 
3uba'a,  — 8,  Judea. 

(gin  3u'be,  — n,pl.  — n,  a  Jew. 

@tne  3ii'bin, — ,pl. — nen,  a  Jewess. 

Sii't'ifc^  (adj.),  Jewish. 
^drn'tl)en,  —I,  CarintWa. 
S)a8  tag>if(^e  9Jieer,  — g,  the  Caspian 
Sij'fingen,  — §,  Kissingen.  [ISea. 

^ob'Ienj,  Coblenz. 
^otn,  — g,  Cologne. 
S)er  ^o'merfee,  Lake  Como. 
^onftanj,  Constance, 
^o^enba'gen,  — g,  Copenhagen, 
^orint^',  — g,  Corinth, 
^raiu, — g,  Carniola. 
^ra'fau,  — g,  Cracow, 
^rim,  — ,  Crimea. 
SCt^'jig,  —§,  Leipsic. 
Si'banon,  — g,  Lebanon. 
Sif  fabon,  — g,  Lisbon. 
Si'tbauen,  — g,  Lithuania. 
3)te  Sombarbei',  — ,  Lombardy. 
2)er  l^o'rcnsbufen,— g,  Gulf  of  St.Law- 
2otl;'ringen,  — g,  Lothaire.      [rence. 
Siit'tic^,  — g,  Liege. 
Sujern',— ,  Lucem. 
WWnn,  —^,  Moravia. 
2)^ai'(anb,  — g,  Milan. 
SJlainj,  Mayence. 
SJJavof'fo,  — g,  Morocco.  [Moor. 

(gin  aiJZarroffa'ner,  — 8,  pi.  —,  a 

9}Jaro!!a'mf(^  (adj.),  Moorish. 
2)ie  MaxX,  —,  the  Mark  (of  Branden- 
burg). 

ajJar'tifd;  (adj.),  of  the  Mark. 
S)ie  9Jfar'fen  (pL),  an  ancient  people 

of  North-Germany,  near  Ems. 
9}Je'^e(n,  — g,  Malines. 
2)ag  2«tt'tet[anbtfd;e  Mm,  — g,  the 

Mediterranean  See. 
2)ie  2)Jorbau,  — ,  Moldavia. 


GEOGRAPHICAL  PROPER  NAMES. 


419 


jDie  2J?ol'bau,  — ,  the  (river)  Moldavia. 

a)io'jcl.— ,  Moselle. 

3Jioe'iau, — ^,  Moscow. 

3)iiin'c^en,  — S,  Munich. 

9lamur'  —S,  Namur. 

9^ea'pcl,  — S,  Naples. 

2)ie  ^Jhc'bcrlanbe,;?/.,  the  Netherlands. 

9?ie'berIaiibifd;(ar/;'.),of  the  Nether- 
5^or'irCi]cn,  — S,  Norway.         [lands. 
9hirn'bercj,  Nuremberg. 
jDeft'crrCit^,  — fi(,  Austria. 

Sill  Oe'fterreid;er, — 8,  an  Austrian. 

Oe'fterreid;ifd;  (adj.),  Austrian. 
Oft'gctbcn,/?/.,  Ostrogoths. 
Oftin'bicn,  — 8,  East  India. 
*pari^',  Paris. 

^eIo)3onue6'  — ,  Peloponnesus, 
^cr'ficn,  — ^,  Persia, 
^o'lcn,  —9,  Poland. 

(Sin  ''^o'le,  —n,pl.,  — n,  a  Pole. 

^ormfd?(a^y.),  Polish, 
^om'nierii,  — ,  Pomerania. 

(Sin  '^Nom'mer,  —Q,pl.  — n,aPome- 
^or'tligal,  — g,  Portugal,        [ranian. 

Sin  ^^ortuvjie' je,  — n,  pi.  — n,  a  Por- 
tuguese. 

^ortugie'fifd;  («^"-),  Portuguese. 
^ot«'bam,  —§,  Potsdam, 
^reu'^en,  — 9,  Prussia.  [sian. 

(Sin  'ijSreu'^c,  — n,  pi.  — n,  a  Prus- 

^reu^ifc^  (adj.),  Prussian. 
JRc'gCnfilburg,  —^,  Ratisbon. 
S£)cr  5W^ein,  — S,  Rhine. 
2)a6  $Rie'fengcbirge,— 8,  the  Capathian 
9?om,  — S,  Rome.  [Mountains. 

(Sin  9ii5'mcr,  — 9,  pi. — ,  a  Roman. 

$Re'mifc^  (adj.),  Roman,  Romish. 
9?n|3'(anb,  —9,  Russia. 

Sin  9htj'ie,  — r\,pL  — n,  a  Russian. 

9inj'fifd;  (adj.),  Russian. 
6a(^'fcn,  —ip  Saxony. 

(gin  gac^'fe,  — n,  pi.  —n,  a  Saxon. 

©cid^'fifc^  (adj.),  Saxon. 
©c^Ie'ficn,  — «,  Silesia. 
©c^ctt'Ianb,  — 9,  Scotland. 


Sin  ©t^ot'te,  — n,  pi.  —n,  a  Scotch. 

ed^ot'tifd;  (adj.),  Scotch.       [man. 
^6)toa:hm,  — §,  Suabia.  [bian. 

(Sin  <Bd)Xoa'hi,  —n,  pi.  —n,  a  Sua- 

(Sd^n^a'bifd?  (adj.),  Suabian. 
<B6)\vt'bzn,  —8,  Sweden. 

(Sin  @d;nje'be,— n,f</.— n,aSwede. 

®d;tt)c'bifd;  (adj.),  Swedish. 
2)ic  ©d^meis,  — ,  Switzerland. 

(Sin  ©d^mei'ger,  —9,  pi.  —,  a  Swiss. 

(Sine  @c^n?ci'i;erin,  — ,  pi.  — nen,  a 

@d;n)ei'3erifd>  (adj.),  Swiss.  [Swiss, 
©ibi'rien,  —8,  Siberia. 
©tci'Uen,  —8,  Sicily. 
@^a'nten,  —8,  Spain.  [iard. 

(Sin  ©^a'nier,  —8,  ;>/.  — ,  a  Span- 

©pa'nifc^  («c&'.),  Spanish, 
©pci'er,  —8,  Spires. 
@tei?'crmar!,  —8,  Styria. 
2)tC  ^OtarCi',  — ,  Tartary. 

(Sin  Satar',  —8,  ;>;.  —en,  a  Tartar. 
2:()e'ben,  —8,  Thebes. 
2)ie  3:t;cm'fc,  — ,  the  Thames. 
jTbu'ringen,  —8,  Thuringia. 
2)ie  2:i'ber,  —,  the  Tiber. 
2)a8  Z\)XoV,  —8,  the  Tyrol 
2;o8fa'na,  — 8,  Tuscany. 
Strient',  —8,  Trent. 
Sri'er,— 8,  Treves. 
Xrieft',  —8,  Trieste. 
2)te  2;urtei',  — ,  Turkey. 

Sin  Xilr'te,  — n,  pi.  — n,  a  Turk. 

Xilr'tifd;  (adj.),  Turkish. 
Un'prn,  —^,  Hungary.  [rian. 

SinUn'gar,  — 8,;>»/.— en,a  Ilunga- 

Un'garifd;  (adj.),  Hungarian. 
%\t  ^mWXtVlfpl.,  the  Vandals. 
S?ene'big,  — 8,  Venice.  [netian. 

Sin  33enc;;ia'ner,  —8,  pi.  —,  a  Ve- 

^enejia'nifd;  (adj.),  Venetian. 
2^ie  33erei'ntgten  ©taa'ten  t>on  5lmc'* 

rita,  the  United  States  of  America. 
SSirgi'men,  — 8,  Virginia. 
2)iC  SSttUat^Ci',  —,  WaUachia. 
SSeft'got^en  (/>/.),  Visigoths. 


420  ABREVIATIONS. 


2>te  SSetc^'fcI,  — ,  the  Vistula. 
SBeftfa'Ien,— 8,  Westphalia, 
^ien,  — §,  Vienna. 
Sin  SSie'ner,  — 3,  pi.  — ,  a  Viennese. 


SBic'nertfd;  (adj.),  Viennese. 
2)ie  aiJol'ga,  — ,  the  Volga. 
SSormg,  Worms,  Bormio. 
ilBilr'temberg,— 8,  Wiitemberg. 


III.  ABREVIATIONS. 


Rem.  Abreviations  are  employed  in  German  to  a  far  greater  extent  than  thej 
are  in  English.     The  list  below  includes  only  the  most  usual  abbreviations. 

0.  a.  O .• am  anbera  Ortc at  the  other  place. 

a.  a.  O am  augefitljrten  Orte at  the  place  mentioned. 

2lbfd;n mf^uitt ;.  section. 

a.b an  ber  (Ober,  eic) "on  the  (Oder,  e<c.). 

a,  Wl,,  or  a/Wl.... amWlain on  the  Maine. 

Slnm 2lnmer!iing remark. 

%u\i, ,  or  2lu§g Stuffage,  or  Sluggabe edition. 

S3b.  (33beO 23anb  (33anbc) volume  (volumes), 

beb bebeutet signifies. 

bef.,orbefoiib bejonberg especially. 

S3r S3rette latitude  (lat.). 

(S.,  Sour Sourant currency. 

baj bafelbft there,  at  that  place. 

b.  @r ber  (§ro^c the  Great. 

bgl.,or  bergt bergtetd^en the  like,  such. 

b.  I) bag  ^ei^t that  is  to  say,  that  is. 

b.  t ba§  t[t that  is. 

2)i8f S)iS!onto discount. 

b.  3 btejeg  3a^reg this  year. 

b.  9}?.,orb§.  2)?§ btcfeg  3JJonat§ this  month  (inst.). 

b.  3> ber  35erfaffer the  author. 

f.  g^fS-f  tgg folgenb  (=er,  =e,  -e§) following. 

?^ortf.  f ^ortfe^ung  fotgt to  be  continued. 

fr. franco post-paid. 

%x ^rait Mrs. 

^rl g^rauletn Miss. 

?^rb'or griebrtc^Sb'or Frederick  d'or.    [schcn. 

®.,®r.,or@gr @rofc^en,or  @itbergrof(i)en  Groschen  or  Silvergro- 

gcB geboren born  {i.  e.,  the  maiden 

ge^. ge^eftet.., stitched.  [name). 

gcft geftorben dead,  late. 

§bl€f^r §anbel§f;prad^e language  of  commerce. 

^|3ttr). §au^ttt?ort noun. 

§^3tft |)an^tftabt.. capital. 

|)r.  (§§,) |)err(^crren) Mr.  (Messrs.) 

3.... 3a^r year. 


ABREVIATIONS.  421 

SaM) 3!flM"n^crt century. 

^aif . ,  or  ^aifcrl taiferlid; imperial. 

^ati).Si , fat^oafd;e  ^rd;c Catholic  Church. 

^cn.,orS5nigI t5nicj(ic^ royal. 

R.  ^ !aifer(ict)4i5ntgli(^ imperial  and  royaJ. 

^J ^reujer creuzer. 

? Scinge longitude  (long). 

fat lateimjd; Latin.  [(inst.). 

lauf.  aJioii laufcnben  3}ionat8 in    the    current   month 

?tg IMeferuiig number. 

Sftrl ^funb  Sterling pound  sterling. 

Wl  §.  (2K.  §.  p.) Mmx  §err  (SJk'ine  ^crrcn)  JSir  (gentlemen). 

ra.  Sr mittagltd^e  Sieite southern  latitude. 

n.  51.,  or  9^.  2tnb nad;  Slnbern according  to  others. 

9Jgr ^^ieugrofd^en New  Groschen. 

Sil,  33 ni5rbUd;e  53rcitc northern  latitude. 

9'io.,^r.,9iro.  (9^ro8.)  ^^umcro,  ^}htmmer(— n)...  number  (numbers). 

^,  ® 9fJad;fd?ritt Postscript  (P.S.). 

O.  ? oftUd^c  Sangc east  longitude. 

VirW ^^tciinig Pfennig. 

^fb ^funb pound. 

^b.  2) 2)ottor  bcr  ^f;Uofo^^te....  Doctor  of  Philosophy. 

:proteft ^roteftantifc^ Protestant. 

O.  (^ Ouvtbratgwf? square  foot. 

O.  "id Cuabrat  3)MIe square  mile. 

9i Sieaumur Reaumur. 

5Rab SJabatt abatement,  discount. 

9?()n 9i()cimfd; Rhenish. 

SRt^rr.,orrtb 9eeid;?tbaler Rix  dollar. 

@.  (@.,or  j.) @eite  (ficbe) page  (see). 

f.  b i£icbe  btcfcd see  this  (article). 

f.  g fogenannt so  called. 

^px <£prad;c  , language. 

f^r f)>nd; pronounce. 

ft ftarb  (ftatt).....' died  (instead  of). 

f.  3 feiner  ^di at  time. 

%^U.,Z\)l 2:Mer Thaler. 

U.  (u.) Ubr  (unb) o'clock  (and).  [ers. 

11.  51.  (u.  a.)... unter  anbcrn(unb  anbere).  among  others  (and  oth- 

II.  a.  a.  O unb  an  anbern  Ortcn and  at  other  places. 

u.  a.  ©t unb  anbern  (Stetlen and  other  places. 

u.  bergl.  OT unb  bergleid^cn  mebr  )  and  more  of  the  same 

u.  m.  bgt unb  mc^r  bcrgteic^en  j  *•••     kind. 

u.  j.  f unb  fo  ferncr  )  .      .    , 

u.f.tt) unbfon):itcr|  nnd  so  forth. 


422  MONEYS,  WEIGHTS,  AND   MEASURES. 

to.  3 bortgcn  3a^rS •  last  year. 

to.  9Ji toorigen  SJJonat^ last  month  (uU.). 

to.  0 i30U  oben from  above. 

to.  u toon  uuten from  below. 

2B SSeften west. 

3 S^ii,  (B^^^O inch  (line). 

J.  S3 sum  33eif))iel for  example. 


IV.  MONEYS,  WEIGHTS,  AND  MEASURES. 

Rem.  These  vary  greatly  in  the  different  states  of  Germany.  We  give 
only  some  of  the  leading  coins,  weights,  and  measures  of  the  principal  Ger- 
man states. 

1.  Prussian  Money  (used  in  North  Germany). 

(@oIb) @in  bo))))etter  5nebnd>§b'or=-10  2;Mer= $7.12 

„     @tn^reu^if^er5rtebn(^3b'or=5  2:^lr.2oegr.  =  ...  4.20 

(@tlkr) (Sin  Zi)akx=30  @trbergrojc^en=:360^fenmge= 71 

„       (gin@ilbergrojc^en=l2  ^fenntgc= 2| 

(^u^fcif) Sin  @cc^fer=6  ^fenmge= 1| 

„ (Sin  2)reter==3  ^tenmge= | 

f,       @in  ^tenmg= | 

2.  Bavarian  Money  (used  in  Southwestern  Germany). 

(®otb) dm  2)ufat=5  ©utben  40  ^reujer^ • $2.26 

C^ilber) (Sin  35ereingtMer=3|  @ulben=2  ^reu^.  Z^aUx=  1.42 

„      @tn3»^etgutbenftiicE  =  120  Sreujer^ 82 

„      @tn  @ulben=60  treu^er  = 41 

„      (Sin  §albgulben[tiicf =30  ^renjer^ 2o^ 

<tu^ter) @in  treuser=4§eEer= f 

„      (Sin§etter= i 

3.  Austrian  Money. 

(@oIb) (Sine  ^rone=i3  ©utben  75i  gfi^rcu5cr= $6.48 

„     @tne  ^albe  ^ronc=6  ©utben  87|  9fJ^ren3er= 3.24 

(@ilber) ©n  Bn)etgutbenP(f=200^treu5er= 96 

„      (Sin  ©utben  or  florin =100  5Rtreuser= 48 

„      (Sin  SSiertelflorinftM =25  9fJ^reuser= 12 

(^n:|)fer) @tn  35ier!reuserftii(f= 2 

„      (Sin  ^reujer= I 

„      (Stn§alb!reuserftii(f= i 

Rem.  3Ster  ^rcu^ifc^c  2;^akr=ftcbcn  33ainjd^e®ulben=fe(^9  Ocfterreidbifd^c 
gtovin=$2.84. 


MONEYS,  WEIGHTS,  AND   MEASURES. 


423 


4.  German  Weights. 

Ctn  3cIIcentncr  =  100  3ofl^funb=50  ^logrammcS  =  English  pounds  98.04 

(Sin  Boll;>fuub=i  kilogramme = "  "  98 

ein  ^J|3reu6ifc^e8  ^tuni'=32  Sot^=468  @ramme«  =  ...      "  "  97 

(Sin  2ot^  =  14.6  ®ramme8  = English  ounce*       48 

5.  German  Measures. 

1.  LINEAR   MEASURE. 

Gine  bciitfAe  (gcogra^^ifc(;e)  3J2eile  (15  2JieiIen=l°  gco* 

gra^l;ifc^e  33reite)= English  miles  4.06 

(Sine  "it>rcu|3if(i;e  2JJeile  =  24,000  9tl;cinifc^e  gufe  =  5372 

Metres^ "         *'      4.07 

(Sine  8tnnbe=eineHbebeutt^e  2)Me= "       "      2.03 

eine  5Rutf)e  =  12  9e(?eimfcl;e  gu^=3.766  Metres = English  feet   12.36 

(Sin  $»{)einifc^er  gu^  =  12  3oa=313  Millimetres^ "       "       1.03 

(Sin  3dII  =  12  ^inien=26.2  Millimetres^ Enghsh  inches  1.03 

2.  SURFACE   MEASURE. 

(Sine  Ouabratmeilc  (^reu^ifc^)= English  square  miles  21.09 

(Sine  Cuabratrut^e  =  144  Ouabratfug= English  square  feet  152.67 

(Sin  ajiorgcn  in  ijren§en=l80  Cuabratrut^en ;  in  53aicrn=400  Cuabrot* 
rut^en;  in  @ac^fen=2  5lcfer=l50Ciuabratrut^en. 

3.  MEASURE   OF   CONTENTS. 

(Sin  ^reu^if c^e«  Ouart = 64  tubitgoU  =  1.145  Litres  =  English  quarts     1 .  28 

(Sin  ^reu^iic^er  (Simer=60  Cluart=69.1  Litres^ English  gallons  19.00 

Sin  i^rcugiid^er  Sd;eftd=48  Ouart=55.38  Litres=..  English  bushel     1.92 
©ine  3JJet5C=fg  @c^cffcl=3  Cnart8=3.435  Litres =..  English  quarts     3.88 


V.  CLASSIFIED  LIST  OF  WORDS. 


3)ag  Scltatt.  !♦ 

S)er  ®ott,  --e«,j9/.  ©otter,  God,  gods. 

„    ®d;i5))'fer,  — «,  the  Creator. 
3;e'ju8  (S^ri'ftu?,  — fti,  Jesus  Christ. 
3)er  bei'fige  (5eift,  —eg,  Holy  Ghost. 
2)ie  2)reiei'nigfeit,  — ,  the  Trinity. 
2)er  (Sn'gcl,  —8,  the  angeL 

tf    2:eu'fei,  — 8,  devil. 

t,    §im'mel,  — §,  heaven. 
2)ie  ^ol'Ie,  — ,  hell. 
S)a!8  ge'gefcucr,  — S,  purgatory. 


The  Universe. 


2)ic  ^atux',  —,  Nature. 

^fiatiir'lid),  natural.  [ter. 

2)ie  aWate'rie,  — ,  ber  ®toff,  — c§,  ma^ 

2Katcriett',  tor'^erlid;,  material. 
2)a6?ltom',  — t^,pl.  — c,  atom. 
„    ^or'per,  — ^,pl.  — ,  body. 

(Sin  fe'fter  ^Br'^jer,  a  solid  body. 
2)ie  ^e'ftigteit,  — ,  solidity. 
2)a8  @a«,  —tQ,pl.  —t,  gas. 

n    ®t\6)'6pY,  —t9, pi.  — e,  creature. 


424 


LIST   OF   WORDS. 


S)cr  'Mann,  — e§,  pi.  Mannzx,  man, 
husband. 

„  ^a'ttx,—^,pl  SSci'ter,  father. 

„  <Bd^n,  — e6,  pi  ©o^'nc,  son. 

„  S3ru'ber, — §,/>/.  53rii'ber,  brother. 

„  D'tjeim,  — ^,pL  — e,  uncle, 

„  defter, — §,/>/. — n,  cousin. 

„  9fief  fe,  — n,pL  — n,  nephew. 

I,  ©ro^'bater,  grandfather. 

„  Ur'gro^iJater,  great-grandfather. 

„  (Sn'tel,  — ^,pL  — ,  grandson. 
2)te  S'ltern,  parents  (has  no  sing.). 
2)er  @d;tt)te'gerboter,  father-in-law. 

„  @c^n)ie'gerfo^n,  son-in-law. 

„  @d;n?a'ger,  —8,  pi.  @d;tt)a'fler, 
brother-in-law. 

f,  @tief' ijater,  stepfather. 

„  ©ttef'fot;!!,  stepson. 

„  S3rau'ttgam, — §,  bridegroom. 

„  2Bitt'n?er,  —6,  widower. 
S5)ag  Sll'ter,  —8,  old  age. 
2)er  ©reig,  — e§,  />/.  — e,  old  man. 

M  ^na'be,  — n,pl.  — n,  boy. 
S)ic®eburt',— ,  birth. 

„   a^erlo'bung,  — ,  betrothal. 

2)cr  tiir^er* 

®tc  H'ber,  —,pL  —n,  vein. 
S)et  3lrm,  —^^,pl.  — c,  arm. 
S)aS  Stu'ge,  —^,pl.  — n,  eye. 
3)er  5lug'a^fel,  —8,  jo/.  Slug'a^td, 

eyeball,  profile  of  the  eye. 
2)te  Slu'genBraue,  — ,pL  — n,  )  eye- 

„    ^u'gcnBraun,— ,i?^.— en,  f  brow. 
S)a8  3lu'genlib,  —§,pl.  — er,  eyelid. 
S)er  58a' ien,  —8,;?/.  — ,  cheek. 

„    S3art,  — c8,  _p/.  S3arte,  beard. 
S)ag  53ein,  —t^,pl.  — e,  leg. 

„    S3lut,  — e§,  blood. 
'^k  33ru[t,  — ,p/.  33rii[te,  breast. 
2)er  SSu'feu,  —^,pl.  —,  bosom. 

f,    2)au'men,  —8,  />Z.  — ,  thumb. 

"    (gtt'bogen,  —^,pl.  —,  elbow. 
S)ie  gauft,  —,pl.  gaufte,  fist. 


Man. 

2)te  %xan,  — ,pl.  — en,  woman,  wife. 

„  9)iut'ter,  — ,  pi.  ajJitt'ter,  mother. 

„  Xo&j'itx, — ,i?/.jlbct)'ter,daughter. 

„  @d;ti?e'fter,  — ,  pi.  —n,  sister. 

„  2^on'te,  —,pl.  —n,  aunt. 

„  Sou[i'ne,  —,pl.  —n,  the  cousin. 

„  9^iid;'te,  — ,  /;/.  — n,  niece. 

„  ©ro^' mutter,  grandmother. 

„  Ur'gro^mutter ,      great-grand- 
mother. 

„  (gu'Jeltn,  — ,  pi  —mn,  grand- 
daughter. 

„  @d)i»te'germutter,  mother-in-law. 

,;  iSc^tcie'gertod^ter,    daughter -in, 
law.  [in-law. 

„  (Sc^md'genn, — ,pl.  — nen,  sisterv 

,t  @ttef  mutter,  stepmother. 

„  @tief  totter,  stepdaughter. 

„  S3raut,  —,pl.  53raute,  bride, 

„  SBitt'me,  — ,  pi.  —en,  widow. 

„  ^u'geub, —,  youth. 
2)er  3^i^il'Iing,  —^,pl.  — e,  twin. 
2)a8  3)Zab'd;en,  —8,  pi  —,  girl. 
2)er  2:Db,  — e8,  death. 
S)ie  (S'I)e,  — ,  marriage. 

3*  The  body. 

®te  ^er'fe,  —,pL  — u,  heel. 
©er  ging'er,  — §,pl.  — ,  finger. 

„    guB,  — e8,  pi  p|3e,  foot. 

„    ©au'men,  —8,  pi.  —,  palate. 
S)a8  @el;trn', — t^,pl.  — e,  brain. 

„    ©elenf,  —t^,pl.  — e,  joint. 

„    @efi(i)t',  —8,  sight,  face.       [ber. 

„    ©Iteb,  — e8,  j9/.  — er,  hmb,  mem- 
ber §al8,  —m,pl  §alfe,neck. 
2)te  §anb,— ,/)^.  ^cinbe,  hand. 
S)a8  §au^t,  —t^,pl.  ^anp\cx,  head. 
S)te  §aut,  —,;>/.  §aute,  skin. 
S)a8  §erj|,  — en8,i)/.  —en,  heart. 
2)ie  §iifte,  — ,i?/.  — u,  hip. 

f,    Seb'Ie,  — ,  pi  — n,  throat. 
3)a8  ^ute,  — 8,i)/.  — e,  knee. 
2)er  ^uo'd?en,  —^,pl  —,  bone. 


LIST    OF   WORDS. 


425 


2)cr  ^ni5'cl;cl, 
2)te  !>Je'ber,— 

„  So'cfe,— 
„  Sung'c,- 
2)er  2Tia'gen, 
5Da8  ^laxl,  - 
2)er  2)?uub,  - 
2)ie  2)lu«'tel, 
S)cr  ^Jia'gel,  - 
!Eic  ^M'fe,  — 
S)er  gfJert),  — > 
2)ic  9iie're,  - 
2)a6  O^r,  — 
2)ie  $Ri))>e,  ■ 
2)cr  3til'(fen, 


— §,/»/.  — ,  knuckle,  an- 
,  pi.  — n,  liver.        [kle. 
-,pl.  — n,  lip. 
,  pi.  — n,  curl. 
-,pl.  — n,  lung. 
— Q,pl.  — ,  stomach. 
-^,  marrow. 

-eS,  pi.  SOiiinber,  mouth. 
— ,pl.  — n,  muscle. 
-^,pl.  ''M^^d,  nail. 
,  pi.  — n,  nose. 
m,pL  — Cll,  nerve. 
-,  pi.  — n,  kidney  (loins). 
i,pl.  — en,  ear. 
-,pl.  — n,  rib. 
— ^,pl.  — ,  back. 


Xtx  9?ilcf'grat,—c5,;>/.—C,  backbone, 

,;    @d;a'bel, — ^,pl. — ,  skull,  [spine. 

„    @d;en'fei,  —9, pi.  —,  thigh. 
2)ie  ®cl;ld'fc,  —,pl.  — n,  temple. 

„    ©c^lacVabcr,  — ,  pi.  — n,  artery. 
2)cr  @c^oo|,  —t%,pl.  — e,  lap. 
2)ic  S^ul'ter,  — ,pl.  — n,  shoulder. 

„    ®ei'te,  — ,pl.  — n,  side.     [brow. 

„    ®tirn,  — ,  pi.  — cii,    forehead, 

„    SBa'bc,— ,;>/.— n,  calf. 

„    SBang'c,  — ,pl.  — n,  cheek. 
S)er  3^^^"/  — t^ipl.  ^'d\)\\t,  tooth. 
2)a8  B^lJii'ft^^ifd^  — cS,  gum. 
2)ie  B^'^^/  ~t  P^'  ~""f  toe. 

n    B""3'^/  —t  pi'  —  n,  tongue. 


2)cr  Ster'mel,  — S,  pi.  —,  sleeve,  [let. 
S)a3  ^^rm'bant),  -«,;>/. -banber,  brace- 
S)cr  Satift',  — z^,pl.  — e,  cambric. 
S)te  53cin'neibcr  (;>/.),  pantaloons. 
2)er  Sefatj',  — eS,;>/. — fd^e,triraming. 
Xie  ^ril'Ie,  — ,  pi.  — n,  spectacles. 

„  33ru[t'nabe(,  — ,pl. — n,  breastpin. 

„   58itr'fte,  — ,pl.  — n,  brush. 
2)cr  '2)c'gcn,— g, pi.  —,  sword. 

„  ga'd;er,  — §,  pi.  —,  fan.      [ring. 

„  l^iiig'erring,  — e8,  />/.  — e,  finger- 

„   glor,  — CS,  7^;.  gli^ie,  crape. 

„   5^^^^  ~^f  pi-  ^^^^^t  dress-coat. 
2)tc  i^ran'fe,  — ,  pi.  —n,  fringe. 
S)a«  gut'tcr,  — «,  i?/.  — ,  lining. 

„  ®ejd;mei'be,  — §,  jewelry. 
!£er  ©iir'tel,  —9,  pi.  —,  belt,  sash. 

„   ©um'mijd^U^,  India-rubber  over- 
shoe. 
S)ic  ^aai'biirfie, — ,pl. — n,  hairbrush. 

„  ^aar'nabel,  — ,  pi.  — n,  hairpin. 
2)cr  §al.'fd;mu(f,  —eg,  necklace. 
2)a«  JpalS'tud), — e§,;>/.  4iic^cr,  cravat. 

„  ^emb,  — t^,pl.  — en,  shirt. 
2)ie  ^o'jen  (pi),  pantaloons. 

„  §o'tcntrdger  (pL),  suspenders. 
S)er  ^amm,  —t^,pl.  ^dmmc,  comb. 


Articles  of  Dress. 


25er  ^attun',  —i^,pl.  — e,  caUco. 
2)aS  ^Ictb,  —eg,  pi.  — er,  dress-coat 
S)tc  ^(ei'ber  {pL),  clothes. 
5)cr  ^o^f^u^,  —eg,  head-dress. 

„  ^ra'gen,  — g,  pi.  — ,  collar. 
'5)te  aJJutje, —,/>/.  — n,  cap. 

„  ^dl/nabel,—,^)/. —n,  needle. 
2)er  Ot;r'ring,  — e8,  />/.  — e,  earring. 
S)te  ^oma'be,  — ,i>/.  — n,  pomade. 
2)er  Oie'genfdjirm,  — g,  umbrella. 

„   9^lng,  —z^,pl.  — e,  ring. 

„  9iocf,  — c§,  i?;.  9?o(fe,  coat. 
2)ie  ®d;ee're, —,;>/.  — n,  shears. 
S)er  @d;Iaf'rocf,  -eg,  dressing-gown. 

rr   @d;Iei'er,  — g,  ;>/.  — ,  veil. 
2)ii»  @d;niir'bruft,  pi.  ^brilfte,  stays. 
2)er  ®c^ub,  —eg,  pi.  — e,  shoe. 
jDte  @d;Ur'5e,  — ,  z^^.  — n,  apron. 
!5)er  ©on'nenfc^irm,  — g,  parasol. 
2)ie  ®^i^en  (;>/.),  lace. 

„  ©po'ren  (;>/.),  spur. 
2)er  Stie'fel,  — g,/?/.  — ,  boot.  Qack. 

„  (^tre'felfnec^t,  — g,  pi  — e,  boot- 
2)ie  ®tie*felirtd;je,  — ,  shoe-blacking. 
2)cr  ®trnm^f,    -eg,  pi.  @trum>fe, 

stockmg. 
S)ic  Za\&f(,  — ,  /;/.  —en,  pocket 


426 


LIST   OF   WORDS, 


2)a«  ^o'f(^cntue^,  — e6,  pi.  ^iidjer, 
handkerchief.  [coat. 

S)er  Ue'berrod,  — e8,  pi.  ^xMt,  over- 
£)ic  Un'terl^ojcn  (pi),  drawers. 

2)cr  Hn'tatt,  — §,j3/.  -faltc,  fit. 
2)te  SSlat'tern  (p/.),  small-pox. 

„    53(tnb'^eit,  — ,  blindness. 
£)er  ^nic^,  —eg,  pi.  S3riid?e,  rupture. 
2)te  gaU'juc^t,  — ,  apoplexy. 
2)a^  gie'ber,  — §,  pi.  — ,  fever. 

„    beg'  arttge  gieber,  malignant  fever 

„    brei'tagige  gieber,  tertiary  fever. 

„    gel' be  gieber,  yellow  fever. 

„    ^i'l^tge  gieber,  burning  fever. 

„    iaViz  gteber,  fever  and  ague. 

„    itertoo'fe  gteber,  nervous  fever. 

„    @c^ar'kd;fteber,  scarlet  fever. 
S)er  jlt^'^^US,—, typhus  fever. 
2)ie  groft'beute,  —,pl  — n,  chilblain. 

„    @ef ^tDulft' ,  — ,  pi.  =iilfte,  swelling 
2)ag  @efd;tt)ilr',— eg,i?Z.— e, ulcer. 
3)ie  @td)t,  — ,  gout. 

„    §et'Iung,—,i)?.— en,  healing,  cure 

„    ^ei'ferfeit, — ,  hoarseness, 
^ei'fer,  hoarse. 
S)a§  §it^'nerauge,  —t^,pl.  — n,  corn. 


2)te  SBc'fte,  — ,  />/.— n,  vest. 
II   ^'^W^^'^^^'^i  — /  pl  — tt,  tooth- 
brush, [pick. 
2)er  3a^n'fto^cr,  —8,  /??.  — ,  tooth- 

Maladies. 

S)te  §unb8'tt)Ut^,  — ,  hydrophobia. 
2)er  §u'ften,  — g,  cough. 

l^u'ften,  to  cough. 
S)er  ^rebg,  — §,  cancer. 
3)ie  9)la'fcrn  (;>/.),  measles. 

„   9^ar'be,  — ,  pi.  — n,  scar. 

„    O^n'tnac^t,  — ,  fainting. 

„    ^ocfen  (;?/.),  small-pox. 

„  Ouet'fc^uiig,  — ,  pi.  —en,  contu- 
S)er  @c^nu':^fen,  — 8,  a  cold.     [sion. 

fid^  ertal'ten,  to  take  cold. 
2)te  (Sc^ttJci'^e,  — ,  faintness. 

„    @c^tt>inb'fud;t,  — ,  consumption. 
2)a8  @ei'ten[ted)en,  —8,  pleurisy. 

„    ©tam'meln,  — 8,  stammering. 
S)te  ©tnmm'^ett,  — ,  dumbness. 

„  (fal'Ienbe)  @ud;t,  — ,  epilepsy. 

„   S^aub'^ett,  — ,  deafness. 

„  Ue'belfett,  — ,  nausea. 

„  35erren'!ung,  — ,  pi  —en,  disloca- 

„    SBafjerfuc^t, —,  dropsy,      [tion. 

„   SBun'be,  — ,  pi  — n,  wound. 


1.  KINDS   OF    HOUSES. 

2)te  S3anf,  — ,  pi.  —en,  bank. 

„  S3tbIiot{;ef  —,pl  —en,  library. 

„  53or'fe,  — ,  pi  — n,  exchange. 

„  58rii'(Je,  — ,  pi  — n,  bridge. 

„  Sa^et'Ie,  — ,  pi  — n,  chapel. 

„  Safer'ne,  —,pl.  — n,  barrack. 
3)er  (gt'fenba^n^of,  — e§,  railroad  sta- 
tion. 
3)a§  ©efang'm^,  — e§,  joZ.  — e,  prison. 

„   ®ett)a(^8'bau§,—e§,  green-house. 
2)ie  §itt'te,  — ,  pi  — n,  hut. 

,f  ^r'd;e,  — ,  pi.  — n.  church. 
2)er  ^rc^'^of,  chiirch-yard,  cemetery. 

1/  ^ir(!^'t^nrm,  — eS,  church  tower. 


6»  The  House. 

2.  PARTS    OF   A   HOUSE. 

S)er  Garten,  —%,pl.—,  beam. 
S)a8  SBrett,  —z^,pl  — er,  board. 
2)er  S3run'nen,  —i,pl  — ,  well. 
S)a8  S)a(^,  —t%,pl  S)a(^er,  roof. 
3)ie  S)te'te,— ,i)/.  —en,  ceiling. 
S)a8  (Srb'gefc^o^,  —eg,  ground  floor, 
parterre.  [shutter. 

S)cr  gen'fterlaben,  —^,pl.—,  window- 
„   gu§'boben,—S,y.  =bi)ben,  floor. 
S)aS  @etr)brbe,  — g,;?/.  — ,  vault. 
3)er  ^anttn',  —eg,;?/.  — e,  chimney. 
S)ie  ^am'mer,  — ,i>/.  — n,  chamber, 
2)er  teller,  — g,  jo/.  — ,  cellar. 
2)ie  tii'c^e,  — , ;?/.  — n,  kitchen. 


i 


LIST   OF   WORDS. 


427 


■Die  ©afriflci',  sacristy,  vestry. 

25aS  ^lo'fter,  —8,  pi.  ^Ii3'fter,  cloister. 

„    Sanb'^auS,  country  house,  villa. 
2)te  SDWn'jc,  — ,  pi.  —n,  mint  (coin). 
2)a8  O'^ern^auS,  — e§,  opera-house. 
2)cr  ^43alaft',  —eg,  />/.  ^ald'fte,  palace. 
S)tc  ^oft,  — ,  i?/.  —en,  post-oflSce. 
2)a«  ®c^au'f^iel^au6,  theatre. 
2)ic  Sc^eu'ne,  — ,_p/.— n,  bam. 
25ae   (guitar,  — ,  pi.  @^italer,  hospi- 

„   2;rcib'^aii8,  hot-house.  [tal. 

It   S^Wfl'^^^u^f  arsenal. 

II  ^^^'^^'^^1  custom-house. 

2)er  SBe'd^er,  —8,  f»/.  — ,  tumbler,  cup. 
S)aS  53ett,  -e§,  />/.  —en,  bed. 
S)ie  SBctt'bccfe,  — ,  pi.  — n,  coverlet. 
2)a8  SBett'flefteU,  — §,  bedstead. 

„  S3ctt'tuci,— «,/>/.  4iid;er,  sheet. 
2)er  Stro^'facf,  — e§,  straw  bed. 
S)ic  aJZatra'fee,  — ,  pi.  —en,  mattress. 
:^aS  ^o^f  tiffcn,  — ,  pi.  — ,  willow. 

„  ge'bcrbctt,  feather  bed. 

„  53ii'd;crbrett,  book-shelf. 
jDer  33U'd;erfd;rant,  bookcase,  [goose. 
S)a8  SU'gcIeijcn,    flat    iron,    tailor's 

bil'geln,  to  iron. 
S)ic  Scmmobe,  —,/>/.— n,  bureau. 
2)er  ©i'rncr, —«,/>/.  — ,  bucket,  pail. 
2)a8  gaO,  — e«,  p/.  gaffer,  cask. 
2)ic  geu'erjange,  — ,  pi.  — n,  tongs. 
S)a8  (Semdrbe,— 8,  ;>/.  — ,  painting. 
„  $anb'tud^,—e8,i)/.  4ild^er,  towel. 
S)er  ^ef'fer,  —8,  pi.  — ,  kettle. 
!I)!e  ^er'je,  — ,  pi.  —v.,  wax  candle. 

„  i^'fte,  — ,  pi.  — n,  chest. 

„  ^o^'Ic,  — ,  pi.  — n,  coal. 

n  SBrann'fo^Ic,  lignite. 

„   ^olj'tofjle,  charcoal. 

,~i.  •  't  f  f  '       <■  mineral  coal. 

S)er  ,^ort\  — c8,  /?/.  .^Brbc,  basket. 
„  ^ron'Icud)tcr,  — 8,  chandelier. 
„  ^^rnj],  — e8,  ;>/.  ^riic^c,  pitcher. 


3)ie  ^um'^c,  —,;>/.  — n,  pump. 
2)er  9Jie'gel,— 8,i)/.— ,  bolt,  door-bar 

M    @aal,  — c8,/j/.  @dlc,  parlor. 
2)a8  @d;taf  jimmer,  —8,  />/.  — ,  bed- 
room.  [ney- 

2)er  ©c^om'flcin,  —8,  p/.  — c,  chim- 

„   @to(f,— e8,       (^ 
S)a8  etocf't»ert,-c8,)  ^^'''  '^*''7- 
2)ie  ©tu'be, — ,pl.  — n,  room,  [stepb. 

„    Sre^^C,  — ,  pi.   — n,    stairway, 
2)a8  jtre^'^engcldnber,  baluster. 

„    2;re^>cnbau8,  baluster,     [story. 

Sine  2;re^^e  ^od;,  in  the  second 


7. 


■^a8  ^u'd;engcrdt^,) 
„    ^ii'd;cnfd;irr,  ) 


Furniture. 

kitchen  utensils. 


'^tx  ^'d^cnroft,  kitchen  range,  grate. 
2)ie  Sani'pe,  —,;;/.— n,  lamp. 

„    Sater'ne,;>/. — n,  lantern,  [candle. 
2)a8  Sic^t,  — e8,  pi.  — e  or  — cr,  light, 
©ejo'^cnc  ?id;ter,  mould  candles, 
©cgcf'fcne  !k!id;ter,  dipped  candles. 
2)er  Sid;t'bod;t,  candle-wick. 
2)ie  Sid;t'^ut5e,  snuffers. 
S)cr  Seud/ter,  —8,  candle-stick. 
2)ie  ^43fan'ne,  — ,pl.  — n,  pan. 
2)er  ^fro^fen,  —8,  /^/.  — ,  cork. 

2)er  ^^frc'))fen3iel;cr,  the  corkscrew. 
2)ie  (gd^au'fcl,  p/.  — n,  shovel,  [board. 
2)er  ©d^rant,  —8,  p/.  ©durante,  cup- 
2)ie  @d)nb'Iabe, — ,pl.  — en,  drawer. 
'^a^  ®d^tr»e'teU;ol3'^en,  match. 
2)^r  @^)ie'gei,  —%,pl.  — ,  mirror. 
„    @tu^I,  — e8,  pi.  (gtii^Ic,  chair. 
'J)a6  @ieb,  — e8,7>/.  — c,  sieve. 
„     @o>(?a,  —8,  jo/.  —8,  sofa. 
2)er  2:e^>it^,  —z^,pl.  — c,  cai-pet. 

„    Xic'gel,  —8,  ;>/.  — ,  skillet. 
3)er  !J;ifc^,  — e8,;>/.— e,  table. 
'^a^  Xifc^'tud^  tablecloth. 
„    2;c^t,  — e8,  />/.  2;opfe,  pot. 
^ie  SSant'nbr,— ,/j/.  —en,  clock. 
jDa8  SSafd/becfen,  — 6,  washbowl 
2)ie  SSic'ge,  —,pl.  — n,  cradle. 


428 


LIST    OF    WORDS. 


2)lal)lsciten  unb  ©erlc^tc. 

1.  MEALS. 

2)ag  ^ril^'ftiid ,  —eg,  p?.— e,  breakfast 
grui)ftU(len,  to  breakfast. 
„     aJiit'tageffen,  —8,  dinner. 
3u  aJ^ittag  e[fen,  to  dine. 
„    5t'benbe[fen,-gJ 
„    5l'6enbbrob,  — g,>     ^"^ 

3u  Stbenb  e[f en,  to  take  supper. 
„    ©aft'ma^I,— eg,  joZ.^ma^ler,  ban- 
ker @aft,— eg,/>?.  ©cifte,  guest,  [quet. 

„     2lp:^etit',  —6,  appetite. 
©efeg'nete  Wla^'itit  I  (a  blessing  on 
the  meal !) 

2.  DISHES. 

2)a8  S3rob,  —t^,pl.  — e,  bread. 

SBei^'brob,  wheat  bread. 

©d^lDarj'brob,  brown  bread. 

3llt'bacfene§  3Srob,  stale  bread. 

S3ut'terbrob,  bread  and  butter. 
2)ie  tru'me,  — ,  pi  — n,  crumb. 

„   tru'fte,  — ,  pi.  — n,  crust. 

„    tiet'e,  — ,  bran. 
2)er  Seig,  — eg,  dough. 

„   S)ie  §e'fe,  — ,  yeast. 
S)ie  33uf  tcr,  — ,  butter. 
Sag  @t,  — eg,/»/.  — er,  egg. 
S)er  @t'er!urf)en,  — g,  omelet., 

©e^'eter,  poached  eggs. 

^Rii^r'eier,  scrambled  eggs. 

©etrctbe  unb  ©cmiifc* 

2)tc  33o{)'ne,  — ,  pi.  — n,  bean. 

„  Srb'fe,  — ,  pi.  — n,  pea. 
S)er  glac^g,  —eg,  flax. 
3)ie  ©er'fte,  — ,  barley. 
2)ag  ©rag,- eg,i)/.  (^ra'jer,  grass. 
S)te  ©ur'fe,  — ^jZ.  — n,  cucumber. 
S)er  §a'fer,  — g,  oats. 
S)ag  ^eu,  —eg,  hay. 
S)te  §ir'je,  — ,  millet. 

„  ^artoffel,  — ,  pi.  — n,  potato. 
2)er  ^tee,  — g,  clover. 

„   5lo^t,  —eg,  cabbage. 


8*  Meals  and  Dishes. 

®ag  @i'tt)et§,  the  white  of  eggs. 
2)er  S)ot'ter,  — g,  the  yolk. 
Ser  @f  fig,  — g,  vinegar. 
2)ag  gleijd),  —eg,  meat. 

§am'melf(eijd;,  mutton. 

^alb'flelfc^,  veal. 

^linb'fleifc^,  beef. 

®d?tt>ei'nefleifd),  pork. 

©ebra'teneg  gletfd^,  roast  meat. 

§am'melbrateii,  roast  mutton. 

^albg'braten,  roast  veal. 

9itnbg'braten,  roast  beef. 
2)ie  ^albg'cotelette,  — ,  pi.  — n, 
S)er  Wi'\t,  —^,pl.—,  cheese. 
®ie9Jiitc^,— milk. 
2)er  $fta^m,  — eg,1 
2)te  ©a^'ne,  — 
„    2}lol!en  (i)Z.),  whey. 

„    S3ut'termild;,  buttermilk. 
2)ag  ©bft,  —eg,  fruit. 

@tn'gemad;teg  Obft,  preserved  fruit. 
2)ag  2t>fetmu^,  apple-sauce. 

„    ^om^ot',  — g,  sauce. 
2)er  ^feffer,  — g,  pepper. 
'S^Oi^  Bail,  —eg,  salt. 
3)te  ©arbel'Ien  {pi.),  sardines. 
2)er  ®enf,  —eg,  mustard. 
S)xe  @u^>e,— , soup. 

M  S^or'te,  — ,pl.  — n,  tart. 

„    SSiirft,  — ,i?/.  SSiirfte,  sausage. 

9*      Grrains  and  Vegetables. 

S)er  58Iu'mcii!DbI,  cauliflower. 

„   93raun'tobr,  brown  cabbage. 

„  @au;er!o^I,     )    .^^-kraut. 
3)ag  @au  erf  rant,  i 
2)ag  ^orn,  —eg,  grain. 

„    traut,  —eg,  pi.  "trau'ter,  herb. 

„    Un'traut,  weed. 
2)ie^rej'fe,  — ,ij/.  — n,  cress. 

„  Sin'fe,  — ,  pi.  — tt,  lentil, 
3)er  aRatg,  —eg,  Indian  corn. 
S)ie  ^a'ftinafe,  — ,  pi  — n,  parsnip. 

„   ^eterfi'tie,  — ,  parsley. 


LIST    OF   WORDS. 


429 


T)tX  ^ilj,  — CS,  pi.  — e,  mushroom. 

„  9iei«,  — e«,  rice. 

„   SRet'tig,  — e6,  pi.  — c,  radish. 

„   3Jicer'rettig,  horseradish. 

„   9icg'gcn,  —8,  rye. 
2)ie  9iu'be,  —,/;/.  — n,  rape. 

„  gclbc  ^tii'bc,  carrot. 


Xk  rot^e  DUi'bc,  beet. 

„  tceifje  3iube,  tumip. 
2)cr  ®erierte,  — ,  celery. 
2)er  (Spar'gel,  — 6,  asparagus. 

„  ®^nnat',  — «,  spinage. 

„  SSeijen,  — S,  wheat. 
2)ic  3tt)ic'bel,  — ,  pi.  —n,  onion. 


Daft  unb  Ctiftaaumc.         10» 

2)ic  5l'naua§,  — ^ja/.  — ,  pine-apple. 
2)cr  3l>fel,  —9, pi.  %tp\d,  apple. 
2)ic  5l))fel|i'nc,  —,pl.  —n,  orange. 
„    Sl^iito'jc,— ,/>/.  — n,  apricot. 
2)er  33aiim,  — e8,  p/.  53dume,  tree. 

Sl^felbauni,  apple-tree. 

SBirn'bauni,  pear-tree. 

^flau'menbaum,  plum-tree. 

gci'gcubaum,  fig-tree. 

2)a«>  :i3latt,  —t^,]>l.  331attcr,  leaf. 

2)er  @tamm,  -c«,;>/.  8tcimme,  trunk 

S)ie  $){in'bc,  —,/>/.  — n,  bark. 

2)cr  B^^^iflf  —2^/  pl'  —^f  bough. 

2)ic  SBur'^el,  —,pl.  — n,  root. 
2)ic  SBee're,  — ,pl.  — n,  berry. 

S3rom'beerc,  blackberry. 

erb'bcerc,  strawberry. 

^ei'belbeerc,  bilberry. 

^im'beere,  raspberry. 

3!o^an'ni8bccrc,  currant. 


Fruits  and  Fruit-trees. 

2}Zaurbeerc,  mulberry. 

©ta'c^elbeerc,  gooseberry. 
2)ic  53irne,  — ,  pi.  — n,  pear. 
,,    (Sitro'ne,  — ,  pi.  — n,  lemon. 
„    ®at'tet,  — ,pl.  — n,  date. 
n    gei'gc,— jo^.— n,fig. 
„    Safta'nic,  — ,pl.  — n,  chestnut. 
„    ajian'bel,  — ,pl.  — n,  almond. 
„    aJJelo'nc,  — ,  pi.  — n,  melon. 
,,    5^uB,-/>/.  9Me,nut. 

Sut^'nu^,  beechnut. 

$a'fehuif3,  hazlenut. 

SBafl'nu^,  walnut. 
2)ic  OU'toe,  —,/>/.  —en,  olive. 
,,    ^fir'fid?,  — ,  pi.  — c,  peach. 
,,   ^flau'me,  — ,  pi.  —w,  plum. 
f,   Ouit'te,  — ,  pi.  — n,  quince. 
„    SBein'traube,  —,pl.  —n,  grape. 
2)er  SSein'ftocf,  —zQ,pl.  4tocfe,  grapo. 
vine. 


©taubcn  unb  Salbbaumt. 

S)er  Wbcxn,  — 9,  pi.  — c,  maple. 
S)te  S5ir'fe,  —,pl.  — n,  birch. 

„    53u'c^c,  — ,pl.  — n,  beech. 

„    (Se'ber,  — ,  pi.  —n,  cedar. 

„   (£l?)?rer|e,  —,pl.  — n,  cypress. 

„    @i'c^c,  — ,  pi.  —n,  oak. 

ft    (Sr'Ie,  — ,  pi.  —n,  alder. 

„    (S'fc^e,— ,/i/.  — n, ash. 

m    (S8>e,  — ,  pL  —n,  aspen. 


'2)te 


S5aS  ®ct8'btatt,  >  honeysuckle. 

„    ^elan'gericlie'bcr,)  woodbine. 
2)ic  ©olb'blumc,  marigold. 


12. 

!5)cr 
S)ic 


Shrubs  and  Forest-trees. 

^id)'tc,  — ,pL  —n,  pine. 
Sar'd)C,  — ,pl.  — n,  larch. 
Sin'be,  — ,pl.  — n,  lime-tree. 
2J?t^rtt)C,  —,pl.  — n,  myrtle. 
^a:p'))el,  — ,pl.  — n,  poplar, 
ian'nc,  — ,  pi.  — n,  fir. 
Ul'me,  — ,  pi.  —n,  elm. 
SSei'be,  — ,  pi.  —n,  willow. 


Flowers. 

3a§min',  — eg,  jasmine. 
^Vik,—, pl.  — n,  lily, 
ajiai'blumc,  lily  of  the  valley. 


430 


LIST    OF   WORDS. 


2)ic  SJiars'IteBc,  —,pl  —it,  daisy. 

„  2JJol)n'blume,  poppy. 

„   yitVli,  —,  pi.  —w,  pink. 

„  g^ef'fel,  — ,  pi  —w,  nettle. 
3)er  9iit'terf^orn,  larkspur. 
2)ic  9io'fe,  — ,  pi.  —u,  rose. 

„  ©cfyliif'felblume,  primrose. 


S)er  SSo'get,  —^,pl.  35i5get,  bird. 

„   9iaub'toogel,  bird  of  prey. 

„  ©ing'bogel,  bird  of  song. 

„  @um^f'i)ogeI,  wader. 

r    B^S'^'^S^^f  ^^''^  of  passage. 
,   ^b'ler,  — g,  jt>/.  — ,  eagle. 
SDte  5lm'fcl,  — ,  />/.  —n,  blackbird. 
S)cr  33uc^'finf ,— en,  />/.— en,  bullfinch. 
2)te  S)o^le,  — ,  jo/.  — n,  jackdaw. 

„  S)rof'fet,  — ,  pi  —n,  thrush. 

„  (Srfter,  — ,  pi  — n,  magpie. 

„  (Su'Ie,  — ,  /j/.  — n,  owl. 

„  (gn'te,  — ,  7?/.  — n,  duck. 
2)er  ^aCfe,  — n,  pi  — n,  falcon. 
S)er  ^afan',  —en,  pi  —en,  pheasant. 
2)ie  @an§,— ,jo/.  @anje,  goose. 
2)er  §a'btd;t,  — §,  ;>/.  — e,  hawk. 

„  §a^n,  — e§,  /?/.  C^a^K^^  cock. 
3)ie  §en'ne,  — ,  j»/.  — n,  hen. 
S)a8  §n^rt,  —8,  i?/.  ^it^'ner,  chicken. 
S)er  ^ana'rientoget,  Canary  bird. 
S)ie  ^rci'^e,  — ,  pi  — n,  crow. 


2)te  ©on'nenblume,  sunflower. 

2)er  @torc^'fd;nabeI,  crane's  bill  (ger* 

nium). 
2)a8  2;au' jenbfc^on,  pansy,  heart's  easG 
2)te  2:nr^e,  — ,  pi  — n,  tulip. 
S)a§  35ergiB'meinntd;t,  forget-me-not, 
„   2Binb'rog(^en,  anemone. 

13.  Birds. 

S)er  ^ra'nid),  — g,/>/.  — e,  crane. 

n    ^U'fuf,  — §,  cuckoo. 

S)ie  Ser'(!)e,— ,jo/.  — n,  lark. 

„  aJJo'ije,  — ,ij/.  — n,  gull.      [gale. 

„   SfJac^'ttgaU,  — ,  pi  —en,  nightin- 
2)er  ^a:paget',  —en,  />Z.  —en,  parrot. 

„   ^fau,  — en,  pi  — en,  peacock. 

„  ^fJa'be,  —en,  pi  —en,  raven. 
S)ag  9ieb'^ut;n,  partridge. 
S)er  9iet'^er,  — g,  jo/.  — ,  heron. 
S)a§  9iot^'fe^Ic^en,  robin  redbreast. 
®te  ©c^ne^fe,  — ,  pi  — n,  snipe. 

„  ©c^njal'be,  —,/>/.  — n,  swallow. 
2)er  @d)ft)an,  —6,  />/.  ©^tDcine,  swan 

„  (Sterling,  —6,  /?/.  — c,  sparrow. 

„  ©tord^,  —eg,  pi  ®tord)e,  stork. 

„  (Strang,  —en,  pi  —en,  ostrich. 
2)te  S^au'be,  — ,  pi  —en,  dove. 
2)er  jlrut'^ai^n  (bie  — ^enne),  turkey. 
2)te  3Ba(^'teI,  — ,  />/.  — n,  quail. 
2)er  3aun'!Dnig,  wren. 


2)er  3lf  fe,  — n,/>/.— n,  ape. 

„    S3ar,  —en,  joZ.  —en,  bear. 

„    SSi'ber,  —8,  /?/.  — ,  beaver. 

„  '^a^)^,  —eg, ;?/.  ®ac^'ie,  badger. 
3)ag  ®id/^ornc^en,  —^,pl—,  squirrel 
3)er  (S'ber,  — g, />?.  — ,  wild  boar. 

„    @' jel,  — g,  pi  —,  ass,  donkey. 

„    gud^g,  — g,  pZ.  giid^fe,  fox. 
2)te  ©em'je,  — ,pl  — n,  chamois. 
S)er  §a'fe,  — n,  }>l  —  n,  hare. 

„    ^ir jd),  —eg,  pi  — e,  stag. 

/,   t>wnb,  —eg,  i?;.  — e,  dog. 


14. 

S)er  3'gel, 


Mammals. 

g,i)/.  — ,  hedgehog. 
S)ag  ^anin'd;en,  — ^,pl  — ,  rabbit. 
2)ie  ^a'i^e,  — ,  /?/.  — n,  cat. 
S)ie  ^u^,— ,ij/.^il^e,cow. 
2)er  li!ud;g,  — eg,  jo/.  — e,  lynx. 
'Der  2o'tt)e,— n,/>Z.  — n,lion. 
S)te  ajJaug,  —,/>/.  9Kaufe,  mouse. 
2)er  Oc^g,  — en,/>/.  — en,  ox. 
2)ag  ^ferb,  — eg,^)/.  — e,  horse. 

S)tC  ©tu'te,  — ,  p/.  — n,  mare. 

2)ag  garien,  — g,  pi  —,  colt. 
S)ic  Siatte,  —,pl  — n,  rat. 


LIST   OP   WORDS. 


431 


2)00  dttf),  —t9,pl.  — C,  roe,  deer. 
„    ©citDein,  — cg,y.  — c,  hog. 
2)er  ©tier,  —iQ,pl.  — c,  bull. 


2)cr  Zx'Qtx, 
2)te  Bic'gc, 


—9,  pi.  — ,  tiger. 
-CS,  jy/.  2Bi5lfe,  wolf. 
-,pL  — n,  kid. 


SftftftC, 


15* 


Fishes. 


S)cr  ?lal,  —i^fpl.  — e,  eel. 
2)ie  ^ilu'fter,  —,pl.  — n,  oyster. 
2)cr  5?arfd/,  —t9,pL—t,  perch. 

„    ^ucf'Iing,—§,i>/.—c,  red  herring 
S)ic  ^orel'Ie,  —,/>/.  — n,  trout. 

„    ©arne'Ie,  —,;>/.  — n,  shrimp. 
2)er  §ai,  — «,/?Z.  — c,  shark. 

„    §a'ring,  —t^,pl.  —t,  herring. 

„    §ed;t,  — c8,  pi.  — e,  pike. 

„   ^um'mer,  —3,  /;/.  — ,  lobster. 

„    ^abcljau' ,  —8,  pi.  —,  codfish. 


2)et  ^ar'^fcn,  —9, pi.— ,  carp. 

„   ^rebS,  — es,  />/.  — e,  crawfish. 

,;    Sad;3, — ^,pl. — e,  salmon. 
2)ie  2JJu'|d;eI,  —,;>/.  — n,  shell. 
3)cr  @d;ett'fifd;,— eS,;>/— e,haddodk. 
2)ic  ©d^Ub'trctc,  — ,  pi.  — n,  turtle. 

„    @d;Iei't)e,  — ,pl.  — n,  tench. 
2)er  ®cbn3einfifd),  ) 

„    ®ti3r,  — §,  />/.  — c,  sturgeon. 
„    2Baa'fij(^,  — e«,  j^/.  — e,  whal«» 


(S^cmtfc^e  @utiftanseit*        16. 


Chemical  Bodies. 


S)eT  ©au'crftcff,  — e«,  oxygen. 
„    SSarjerftoft,  hydrogen. 
„    Sticf'ftoff,  nitrogen. 

3)tC  @ti(f'ft>^ffK"i"^C>  nitrous  acid. 
„    ©atpe'terfaure,  nitric  acid. 
S)a8  fdpe'terjaure  ©ilber,  nitrate 
„    ^otj'Icnftoff,  carbon.       [of  silver. 
2)ie  ^o()l'enjaure,  carbonic  acid. 
S)cr  tol/lcnfaurc  ^alf,  carbonate 
of  lime. 
„    <p^o8>()or,  — g,  phosporus. 
„    <Sd)We'fel,  — «,  sulphur,      [acid. 
2)ie  fcbiDe'fdigc  ®aure,sidphurous 
„    ®d^n)e'telfdurc,  sulphuric  acid 
2)er  fd^tDe'fcIfaure  ^alf,  sulphate 
of  lime.  [iron. 

2)a§  Sd^iDc'felcifcn,  sulphuret.  of 
„    (£^(or,  — «,  chlorine. 
5Dic  <Sau're,  — ,  pi.  — n,  acid. 
2)a8  vSalj,  —eg,  />/.  — e,  salt. 

©at'sig,  saline. 
S)t£  2utt,  — ,  air. 
2uf  tig,  aerial 


2uft'fi5rmig,  aeriform. 
2)aS  aJtetall',  — e§,  p^.  —t,  metal 
2)a8  @oIb,  gold. 
„    ©il'ber,  silver. 
„    ^u'^fer,  copper. 
„    S3Iet,  lead. 
„    3^""^  tin. 
,;    Si'fen,  iron. 
2)er  @taf;(,  steel. 
„    3inf,  zinc. 
„    ^o'balt,  cobalt. 
S)a8  aJierfing,  — s,  brass. 

©^5,  — e8,  pi.  — e,  ore,  bronze. 
S)er  2)iamant',  —«,/>/.— en,  diamond, 
r>    ©maragb', — 9>,  pi.  — c,  emerald. 
„    3lgat',  —t&,pl.  — c,  agate. 
„    9)?ar'mor,  —8,  marble. 
„    ®f)p9,  — e6,  gypsum. 
2)te  treib'e,  — ,  chalk. 
S)cr  tat!,  — cS,  lime, 
ff    S^on,  — g,  clay. 
rf    3ltaun',  — «,  alum. 
2)ie  2JJi'ne,  — ,  pi.  —n,  mine. 


432 


LIST    OF   WORDS. 


Stffcnf^aftcit*  17. 

2)ie  9^atur'iDiifeuf(^aft,  — ,  science.      ®te 
„    (Sfjcmie';  — ,  chemistry. 

S^e'mifc^,  chemical. 

3)er  S^e' miter,  chemist. 
^    ©eologie',  — ,  geology.       [ogist. 

©er  ©eolog',  — ^n,pL — en,  geol- 
„    3JltncraIogte',  — ,  mineralogy. 

®er  3JJtneraIog',  — en,  mineralo- 
„    SSota'ni!,  — ,  botany.  [gist. 

2)er  33ota'm!er,  botanist. 
„    3Jiati)ema'tif,  — ,  mathematics. 

S)ie  2![rit^me'tf)if,  — ,  arithmetic. 
,;    ^I'gebra,  — ,  algebra. 

^iinfte.  18- 

2)ie  fc^iJnen  ^ilnfte,  fine  arts.  2)ie 

„    Slcft^e't^it,  — ,  esthetics. 
„   ^iiuft,  — ,  pi.  tiinfte,  art. 
®er  ^iinft'Ier,— §,  artist. 

„    2lr(i)itettur  ,  — ,  J 

®^\^«":f5^^^'l  architect. 

,t   S3t(b'^auer!nn[t,  ] 

„    ^^'la'ftit,  — ,         t  sculpture. 

„    ©fnl^tur',— ,    ) 

S)er  53t(b'^auer,  — §,  sculptor. 
„    SJialeret',  — ,  painting. 

S)er  Tla'kx,  — ^,  />/.  — ,  painter. 

„   2;on'!unft, -,|  °^"^^^- 
S)er  3JJu'ft!er,  — §,  musician. 
t,    ©efang',— eg,  singing. 
„    ©ang'er,  —8,  singer. 

©rantmatif(^e  mmUt.       19* 

S)te  ©rammo'tt!,  — ,  pi. — en,)  gram-  2)te 
„    'Bpva6)'k\)xt,—,  pl.—n,i  mar.    '„ 


Slec^t'fc^retBung,  i 

rrrx    .,v  rr  T  ctymology. 

©atjle^re,  — ,1  ^^^  *^* 


Sciences. 

©eometrte',  — ,  geometry. 

©tern'tunbe,)  ^* 

®er  2lftronom',  astronomer. 
^^i'lojo^^te',  — ,  philosophy. 
2)er  ^fjtlofo:^^',  philosopher. 
^^t(ofo':|)^tjd^,  philosophical. 
S^eotogie',  — ,  theology. 
2)er  X^eolog',  — en,  theologian. 
X^eolo'gtfd;,  theological. 
^i;iIoIogie',  — ,  philology. 
SJiebij^in',  — ,  medicine.        [law. 
9Jec^t8'n)i[fenfd;aft,  — ,  science  of 

Arts. 

2)ic  'B'dn'Qtxm,pL  — nen,  singer. 
2)i(^t'funft,  — ,  poetry. 
S)er  2)id?'ter,  — §,  poet. 
3ie'be!unft,  — ,  rhetoric. 
S)te  9fie'be,  —,/?/.  — n,  oration. 
SDer  Dieb'ner,  — g,  /?/.  — ,  orator. 
SSer8'fun[t,  — ,  prosody. 
3etc^'nen!unft,— ,  art  of  drawing. 
I^U>ferfttd;tunft,  art  of  engraving. 
!iDer  ^u^ferftec^er,  engraver. 
„    ^u'^ferftic^,  engraving, 
©tetn'brucferfunft,  lithography. 
©c^reib'Jnnft,  — ,  chirography. 
S3u(^'bru(fer!unft,  art  of  printing. 
^rteg§'!unft,  military  art. 
^elb'tne^unft,  field  surveying, 
^ngenteur'funft,  engineering. 
^^oti)e'fer!unft,  pharmacy. 
2)er  ^))ot^e'ler,  apothecary. 

Grammatical  Terms. 


i'ftabe,  — n,  pi.  — n,  letter. 
®er  ^In'fanggbuc^ftaBe^initial  let- 
ter, [ital  letter. 
„    gro^e  ?lnfang§t)ud;ftabe,  cap- 

„    ®tiuim  laut,  —eg,  > 


LIST    OF    WORDS. 


433 


2)er  ^cnfonar.t',  — cit,)    conso- 
„    iWit'Iaut,  7^/.  — c,)"     nant. 
S)cr  $Hc'bctl)cU,— c«,;>/.— e,)  part  of 
2)ic  il?ort'form, — ,pl. — cn,j"  speech. 

2)a^  @efd;lecl;tS'TOort,     > 

2)cr  bcftimnite  5lrt.  ,definite  article 
„    uubei'ttmmte  'ilrt.,  indefinite 
2)ag  gjo'nien,  —^,pL  —,     )  [article 
„    §au|)t'wort,  —8,  .-  noun. 

„    ^knn'irort,;>/.  ^ivcrtcV;) 

2)cr  ©emcin'namen,  —^,pl.  —, 
common  noun. 
„    (Si'ijeimamen,  proper  noun. 
•i)ic  3)cfliiiatiou',  pi.  —en,  \  declen- 
„    %x)Xbk^\ix[o^,})L—tn,  >     sion. 
2)ie  [tarfc  2^etlin. ,  old  declension. 
„    fd;n)adje  S)etlin. ,  new  declen. 
„    gemtfd;tc  2)cn., mixed  declen. 
S)a8  ?lb'iettii\  — S,        j 
„    (Sfgciifd^aftSlrort,  i  adjective. 
„    Sei'wort,  ) 

2)ic  Stei'vjerung   bcr   ^Ibjeftttoa, 
comparison  of  adjectives. 
2/Cr  9?umcrar, — ^,pl. — en,)  numer- 
S)a8  Bubl'iport,  r      al. 

2)a§  Orunb' jaf^Iro. ,  cardinal  num. 
„   Drb'niing?3a^tn3ort,  ordinal 
number. 


S)a8^rono'mcn, —§,;?/.—,  \   pro- 
„    (ijur'iVDrt,  i  noun. 

S)a8  ^^crfeii'lid^e  giirn?.,  personal 
pronoun. 
„    be[i^'au5eigcubc  gilrw.,  pos- 
sessive pronoun. 
„    ^iu'weijeiite  giirtr.,  demon- 
strative pronoun. 
„    unbe[tinimtc  t^ilrtt?.,  indefi- 
nite pronoun. 
„    fra'gcnbe  ^iiriv.,  interroga- 
tive pronoun.  [pronoun. 
„    bejucj'Iid)c  j^iii^tt^ort,  relative 
2)agSBerb, —§,;?/.— a,) 

„    3cit'ircrt, 
!2)ie  ^oujucjaticu',  — ,pL — n,conjuga- 
2)ic  ftarfc  ^cnj.,  irregular  conj. 
„    f(^n)ari;e  ^cnj.,  regular  conj. 
2)a6  ^Ifti't'Um,  — §,  active  voice. 
„    ^affi'tum,  — ?,  passive  voice. 
„    mberb',-^,;;/.  — a,      )^    ad- 
„    ^Jeben-orUm'ft^'inb^wcrt,)"  verb. 
2;tc  Ijirci^jcfitiou',        \ 
2)a8  3?or'irort,  ,-  preposition. 

„    ^crl;a(t'ni|3tt  ort,  ) 
3)ie  toniunftion',) 

2)tc  Sntcrjeftion',  )     interjec- 

2)a$  @m^fin'bung6tt)ort,>       tion. 


r'^'^-    [tion. 


Scitcint^cilung* 

5Dic  ©'tDtgfcit,  — ,  eternity. 

„    '^txi,  — ,  pi.  — en,  time. 
2)a§  3abr^un'bert,  — ^,  century. 

„    Sirter,  or  3eit'dter,  age. 

„    ^a\)x,—t^,pl.  3al?re,  year. 
S)er  aWo'nat,  —8,  pi.  — e,  month. 
2)ie  SBo'c^e,  — ,  pi.  — n,  week. 
2)er  Xag,  — e8,  />/.  — e,  day. 
S)ie  gf^ac^t,  — ,  ;?/.  9^od/te,  night. 

„    @tun'be,  — ,  pi.  — n,  hour. 

„    2J?inn'te,  — ,pl.  — n,  minute. 

„    ^cfuu'be,  — ,  pi.  — n,  second. 

„    2)^or'genri5tbe, — ,  dawn. 
3)er  2:a'geSanbrud^,  — e8,  daybreak. 


20,  Divisions  of  Time. 

S)cr  ©onnenauf  gang,  — «,  sunrise. 

„    aJJor'gcn,  — 6,  pi.  — ,  morning. 

„    3?or'mittag,  forenoon. 

„    9J?it'tag,  noon. 

„    9^ac^'  mittag ,  afternoon . 

n    5l'benb,  — ^,  pi.  — e,  evening, 
2)ie  anit'ternad;t,  midnight. 
®e'ftem,  yesterday. 
3?or'geflern,  day  before  yesterday. 
33or  adjt  2;agen,  a  week  ago.       [day 
§entc  iiber  ad)t  S^agc,  a  week  from  to- 
SJicr'gen,  to-morrow. 
Uc'bermcigen,  day  after  to-morrow. 
Sic  Sa^'rc^jeit,  season  o^  the  vear. 

T 


434 


LIST   OF   WORDS. 


2)er  SSin'ter,  — §,  winter. 

25a«  §rut;'ial;v  — 1\ ) 

2)er  ©om'mer,  — c\  sLuiuuer. 

„   §crb[t,  — cs,  fall. 

„    ^a'luiir,  —i,  January. 

„    ge'bruar,  — §,  February. 

„    aj?ar5,—e§,  March. 

„    5lprir,  — §,  April. 

„    2)Jai,— g,  May., 

„    3u'nt,  — g,  June. 

;,   3uU— ^,  July. 

„   5lu3uft\ —eg,  August. 

''^Ci%  S^n'ftent^um,  —8,  Christendom 
S)ie  ^ir'c^e,  — ,  p/.  — n,  church. 
„  2lrmema'mj(^e  ^irc^e,  Armenian 
Church. 
2)er  5trmenia'ner,  Armenian. 
„   SSa^ti'ftifdje  Sirc^e,  Baptist  Ch. 

S)er58a^tt[t',  Baptist. 

„   S3i'f(^DfItc^C    ^irc^e,      Episcopal 

Church.  Qian. 

3)er  @^tg!o^aIta'ner,  Episcopa- 

„  ©rie'c^ifrf)  *  tatf)o'(ifd;e     Str^e, 

Greek-Catholic  Church. 
„   Sut^e'rifc^e  Mrc^e,  Lutheran  Ch. 
®er  2utl;era'ner,  Lutheran. 


2)er  ©e^tem'kr,  - 
„  Otto'ber,  —6, 
„  ^jiooem'ber,  — 
„  ©esem'ber, — 
„  <Sonn'tag,  — ^ 
„  SJiou'tag,  — :•, 
„  2)ten8'tag,  — 
„  3Jiitt'n)od?, — 
S)ie  aJiitt'wcc^e,  - 
2)er  S)on'ners(tag, 
„  grei'tag,— 8, 
,,  @am§'tag,  — i 
„   ©onn'abenb, - 


-6,  September. 

October, 
•8,  November. 
§,  December. 
1,  Sunday. 

Monday. 
g,  Tuesday. 

'  ^  Wednesday, 
'/  ' 

— g,  Thursday. 
Friday. 

Saturday. 


21. 


Religions. 

2)ie  3JJet^obi'ftifc^e  ttr^e,  Methodist 
S)er  aJJet^obift',  Methodist.  [Ch. 
„   3Jeformir'te  liird;e,  Reformed  Ch. 
„   9fJb'mtfd;'^t.itf;o'lijd;e  ^ird^e,  Ro- 
man-Catholic Church, 
2)er  ^at^olif ,  Roman  Catholic. 
„  grei'e  ©emetn'be,  Free  Religious 
Association  (of  Free-thinkers), 
2)a8  3u'bent^um,  Jewry.        [Jewess. 
S)er  Su'be;    bie   3ti'bin,  Jew, 
2)cr  3§'tam,  Mohammedanism,  [dan. 
2)er  9}Za{)omeba'ner,  Mohamme- 
2)a8  ^ei'bent^um,  paganism,  [heathen 
2)er  §ei'be,  — n,  pi.  — n,  pagan, 


^rofcffionctt  unb  ^anbttjerfc*    22.      Professions  and  Trades. 


©CV  Sl^Ot^e'fer,  — §,  apothecary. 
„   5lrjt,  —eg,  i>?.  Slerjte,  physician. 
2)er  SBunb'arjt,  surgeon. 
,,   3^^n'ar3t,  dentist. 
„   S3a'cfer,  —8,  pi.  —,  baker. 
„   33anqmer',  —^,pl.  — g,  banker. 
„    S3arbter',  —9,  pi.  — e,  barber. 
,,   53au'er,  — S,  i?/,  — n,  peasant. 
2)tc  S3au'ertn,  — ,  pi.  — nen,  peasant 

woman. 
S)er  SSau'meifter,- g,/>/.— , architect. 
,,   53tlb'^auer  ,  — g,  pi.  — ,  sculptor. 
„   ^t' jd^of,  — g,  pi.  53ifd;efe,  bishop. 
,,   33ott'c^er,  — ^,pl.  — ,  cooper. 


2)er  S3rau'er,  —^,pl.  —,  brewer. 
„    S3u(^'binber,  — g,  bookbinder. 
„   S3u(^'bru(fer,—eg, ;?/.-, printer. 
„   gabrt!ant',  — en,  pZ,  — en,  manu- 
„    gcirber, — ^,pl. — ,  dyer,[facturer. 
„    ^ifc^'bcinbler,  — g,  fishmonger. 
„   glei'fc^er,  — g,  pi.  — ,  butcher. 
„   ^ul^r'mann  — eg,;>Z.  *leute,  coach- 
„    ©er'ber, — ^,pl. — ,  tanner,  [man. 
„    ©la'fer,  — g,  pi.  — ,  glazier. 
„   ^trt,  — tx\.,pl.  — en,  shepherd. 
„    ^aub'Ier,  — g,  pi.  — ,  tradesman. 
2)er33ud)'bcinbler,book-merchant 
„   Ob[t'(;anbter,  fruit-merchant 


LIST    OF    WORDS. 


435 


Die  Obft'^anbterin,  fruit-woman. 

2)er  '•43fcr'fel;antilcr,  horse-dealer. 

„   iucl/l;anDler,dry-good8iner- 

chaut. 

2)cr  3un)elier',  —8,  pi.  — e,  jeweller. 

,,   ilii'fer,  — ^,pl.  — ,  cooper. 

„   ^iinft'ler,  — «,  pi.—,  artist. 
S)ie  ilunft'lerin,  —,pl.  — ncn,  artist. 
jEev  i{u'pferfted;er,  — §,  engraver. 

„   I'eb'rer,  — g,  pi.  —,  teacher. 

„   ^d;urie^rer,  school-teacher. 
2)ie  td)xtxm,—,pl.  —ncn,  teacher. 
2)er  2)fau'rer,  —^,pl.  —,  mason. 
2)er  j^rei'maurcr,  free-mason. 

„   3}Ze^'ger,  —«,/>/.  — ,  butcher. 

„    a)iuner,— 8,^/.  ~,  miller. 

„  2)iu'fitcr,  —8,  pL  —,  musician. 
2)ic  ^^\)txm,pl.  —ncn,  seamstress. 
2)er  9?atur'forfd;er,  —8,  naturalist. 

„   ^abft,  — e8,/>/.  ^db'fte,  pope. 

„    ^far'rer,  — §,  ;^/.  — ,  vicar. 

„   ^(nlofo^^',  —en,;?/,  —en,  philos- 

„    ^rc'biger,  —8,  preacher,  [opher. 

„   ^^rieTter,  — 8,/>/.  — ,  priest. 

„   9?ebafteur',  —8,  pi.  — e,  editor. 

„  $Hcb'ner,  —9, pi.  —,  orator. 

„    ©att'ter,  —8,  />/.  — ,  saddler. 


2)cr  iSd^au'f^ieler,  — 9,  pi.  — ,  actor. 
2)ie  <Sd;au'fpielcrin,;>/. — nen,  actress. 
S)er  (^d;ldcV'ter,  —^,pl.  — ,  butcher. 
„    @d;lof  fcr,  — 8,  p/.  — ,  locksmith. 
„  @d;nueb,  — e8,  pi.  — e,  smith, 
blacksmith. 
2)er  @olb'fd.)mteb  goldsmith. 
„   ^uf  fd;mieb,  horseshoer. 
, ,  ^u' |)f er f d^miet ,coi)persmith . 
„   aJief  jerfd^mieb,  cutler. 
„    SliSanenfd^mieb,  armorer. 
„  @c^nci'ber,  — 8,  pi.  — ,  tailor. 
„   @c^orn'fteinfeger,chimney-sweep. 
,,   @d;vift'ftetter,  —%,pl.  — ,  author. 
„    Xag'Io(;ner,  —^,pl.—,  day-labor- 
er, [maker. 
„   Sifd^'tcr,   —8,  pi.  —,    cubinet- 
„   ^^a^ejie'rer,  —8,  pi.  —,  uphol- 
sterer. 
„  U^r'ma^er,  —8,  pi.  — ,  watch- 
maker. 
„   SBerfaf  fer,  — 8,  pi.  — ,  author. 
„    2Bed)8'Ier,  —8,  pi.  —,   money- 
changer. 
„    5Sin'jer,  — %,pl. — ,  vine-dresser. 
„  3tm'mermann,— 8,;>;.  3i«i'incr=' 
lente,  carpenter. 


i^rcmbtobrtcr*  23*  Foreign  Words. 

2)er  ?(n'ter,  anchor  (from  Latin,  ^ncora  ;   Greek,  dyicvpa).  [China). 

2)ie  ?l>felftnc,  orange  (from  Dutch,  appelsina;    French,  pomme  de  Sine  = 

tr    3tu'ftcr,  oyster  (from  Latin,  dstreum ;   Greek,  oarptov). 

tt    33ut'ter,  butter  (from  Latin,  butyrum ;    Greek,  (3ovrvpov). 
3^cr  j^racf,  dress-coat  (from  French,  frac;  ioi^-Z/Cf^in,  froccus= woolen  stuff). 
2)ie  3n'fel,  island  (from  Latin,  insula), 
^o'ften,  to  cost  (from  Italian,  costare ;  Latin,  constare). 
3^er  ^o'rc>c,  lion  (from  Latin,  leo;   Greek,  X'eiov). 

'^dQ  ^^ferb,  horse  (from  Late  Latin,  paraveredus^^an  extra  post-horse). 
2)ie  %^fir'fid;,  peach  (from  I^itin,  persicum  malum  ^Persian  apple). 
2)er  9Jei8,  rice  (from  French,  ris;  Latin,  oryza;  Greek,  opv^a  ;  Arabic,  aruz) 
2)a8  (Sd^ad),  chess  (from  Persian,  shah— king). 
S)ie  Stra'j^e,  street  (from  Latin,  via  strata =paved  road). 

„    %a\\t,  cup  (from  French,  tasse  ;  Arabic,  tas). 

n    Xor'tC,  tart  (from  Low-Latin,  torta  ;  iMtin,  tortus = twisted). 

r;    XuI'^C,  tulip  (from  French,  tulipe  ;    Turkish,  tulban  =  turban). 
2)er  *^\t'^t\,  tile  (from  Latin,  tegula;  from  te'gere=to  cover). 


VI.  GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


Abbreviations. 


adj.,  adjective. 
adv.,  adverb. 
conj.  or  c. ,  conjunction. 
indeci. ,  indeclinable. 
int.,  interjection. 
part.,  participle. 
pL,  plural. 
prep.,  preposition. 


pron.,  pronoun. 
demon. ,  demonstrative. 
V.  auz.,  auxiliary  verb. 
v.imp.,  impersonal  verb. 
V.  ivtr.,  intransitive  verb. 
V.  ir.,  irregular  verb. 
V.  refl.,  reflexive  verb. 
V.  tr..  transitive  verb. 


21. 


2)er  5l'bcnb,  —^,pl.  — c,  evening. 
®ag  ^2l'benbe[fen,— g,  supper. 

S)a8  ^^'beiiteuer,  — ^,pL. — ,  adventure 

2l'6er,  conj.  (§  265),  but,  however. 

2)er  5l'berglaube,  — iig,  superstition. 

^b'brennen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  burn  down. 

2)ie  5t()'fat;rt,  — ,  pi.  — en,  sailing. 

^b'feuern,  v.  tr.,  to  fire  off. 

?lb'geben,  v.  ir.  tr. ,  to  deliver. 

^b'belfen,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  remedy. 

3lb'Ieiten,  v.  tr.,  to  derive. 

?lb'reifen,  v.  intr.,  to  leave,  depart. 

2)te  3lb'reife,  — ,  pi.  — en,  departure. 

9lb'fege(n,  v.  intr.,  to  sail  (away). 

2)er  ?lb'fal5,— e«,/>/.3lbfa^e,stop,heel. 

5lb'fd;re(fen,  v.  tr.,  to  frighten  away. 

2lb'fd;reiben,  v.  tr.  ir.,  to  copy,  tran- 
scribe [purpose,  aim,  view. 

2)ie  ^b'fic^t,  — ,  pi.  —en,  intention, 
5lb'itd;ttt(^,  adj.  intentional. 

^IB'ft^mtnen,  v.  intr.,  to  be  descended. 

5lb' flatten,  v.fr.,  to  perform,  discharge. 
(Sinen  S3efnd/  ab'f^^tten,  to  pay  a 

3lb'trocfnen,  v.  intr.,  to  dry  up.  [visit. 

^b'triinntg,  adj.,  faithless  (to). 

5ld)t,  eight. 

2)ie  5ld)t,  — ,  care,  attention ;  fic^  in 
%&}{  ne()'men,  to  take  care,  be  on 
one's  guard. 


"^xt  5tc^'tung,  — ,  respect. 
5ltieu',  int.,  good-by,  farewell. 
3)te  Slbreffe, —,/>/.  — n,  address. 

Slbreffi'rcn,  to  address  (letters^. 
5lef)n'ttd;,  adj.,  similar,  like. 

2)te  2lebn'Iid;teit,  — ,  similarity. 
S)cr  %\'\t,  — n,  pi.  — n,  ape. 
®a§  5l'i]io,  — 8,  premium  (on  coin). 
S)te  Slftie,  — ,pl.  — n,  share,    [pany. 
„    3irtten*®efell'fd;aft,  stock  com- 
2)er  Slftionar',  — ^,pl. — e,  sharehold- 
?lltein',  co/i/.,  but,  only.  [cr. 

%V\tX,pron.,  all,  every. 

%Viixlt\' ,  indeci.  ao?;*.,  of  all  kinds. 
Slttgemein',  etc?/.,  general,  common. 
5lUma'tig,  adj.,  gradual. 
2)ag  ^ll'mofen,  — §,  pi.  —,  alms. 
3tlg,  con/.,  when,  as,  than,  except,  but. 
%Woann',adv.,  then. 
%V\o,  adv.,  so,  thus;  conj.,  therefore. 
Wi'in,  adv.,  quite  too. 
2)er  Slltar',  —^,pl  5ltta're,  altar. 
2)ag  WttX,  —8,  pi.  — ,  age,  old  age. 
2)ag  ?irtert{)um,  — «,  pi.  4bumer,  ai> 

mt,  adj.,  old.  [tiquity. 

5)cr  Slm'Bog,  — e8,  pi.  — fe,  anvil. 
3)a8  3lmt,  —t§,pl.  Stem'ter,  office. 
2ln,  2)rep.,  on,  at,   by,  to   about  in 

adv.,  on,  forward. 


VOCABULARY. 


437 


5lii'bictcn,  v.  ir.^  to  offer,  hold  out  to. 
5lll' Der, /vro/j,,  other. 

Stn'DersS,  adv.^  otherwise. 

5lu't>erSiD0,  adc.^  elsewhere. 
2iii'bertl;alb  (§  103,  2). 
Slii'beiiten,  v.  tr.,  to  show. 
5)ie  %mlt>o'tt,—,pl.  —n,  anecdote. 
S)er  %n'\ai\^,—^,pL  *fani}C,beginning. 

Slu'fancjen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  begin, 
commence. 
lUii'feinbcn,  v.  tr.,  to  treat  hostilely. 
^lu'j^eben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  give. 
%n'QtWi(i),adj.,  pretended. 
Slti'geboren,  adj.,  hereditary. 
Slii'gc{)eu,  V.  ir.  intr.,  to  concern. 
2)ie  '^n'gclegeu^eit,  — ,/>/. — en,  affair. 
3lu'gcue^m,  adj.,  agreeable,  pleasant. 
S)a3  3ln'gefid?t,  — e3,  pi.  — er,  face, 

countenance. 

3ln'gefld;t^,/)re;A,  in  view  of 
S)ie  ?tng[t,  — ,  pi.  Slcng'ftcn,  anxiety, 

fear,  anguish,  terror. 
3lengft'Iid^,  adj.,  anxious.  [ue. 

9tu'()alten,  v.  ir.,  to  hold  fast,  contin- 
Stn'^eben,  v. intr.,  to  begin,  commence; 

V.  tr.,  to  lift  up,  raise. 
3)er  2tii'fer,  — 8,  pi.  — ,  anchor. 

2)ie  ''2lu'ferul;r,  anchor-watch. 
3lii'flagen,  v.  tr.,  accuse,  charge, 
^lu'tommcn,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  arrive. 
^^ii'tiiuben,  au'filnbigcn,  v.  tr.,  to  pro- 

chiim,  announce,  i)ublish. 
Sie  Slu'fuuft,  — ,  arrival. 
2ln'lad;cn,  v.  intr. ,  to  smile  or  laugh  at. 
2)ic  '^In'Ici^c,  — ,  pi.  — n,  loan. 
Sllt'nebmen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  accept;  v.  re/l. 

to  interest  one's  self,  take  interest. 
3lil' retell,  v.  tr.,  to  accost,  address. 

Sie  ^^lii'rebe,  — ,/>/.  — ,  address. 
Stii'riibren,  v.  tr.,  to  touch. 
5lil'fdjaffcn,  v.  tr.,  procure,  obtain,  get. 
^tl'fd^aucn,  v.  tr.,  to  view,  to  look  at. 
Sln'febcn,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  view,  behold. 

2)ie  ?ln'fid)t, — ,  pl.—zn,  opinion, 
point  of  view. 


?tn'f^rcc^cn,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  address, 

@inen  urn  ttxiw^  au'jpred;en,  to 

ask  or  claim  a  tliiug  of  a  person. 
2)cr  ^ilue'iprud;,  — e«s,  pi.  *jprud^e, 

claim. 
2)ie  '^n']taU,—,pl.  —n,  preparation. 

establishment. 
%l\\tatt' , prep,  (with  gen.),  instead  of; 

conj.,  instead  of. 
^tn'fto^en,  v.  tr.,  to  hit  against,  strike. 
2)er  Slii'ftoO,  — ei>,  pi.  '5{ln'fti3§e,  hit, 

blow,  ofiense. 
Sln'ftrengeu,  v.  tr.,  to  exert,  strain. 

Sln'ftrengenb,  adj.,  exhausting. 

2)ic  "^ii'ftrengung,  — ,  exertion. 
2)er  ':ttutiquar',  — ^,  pL' — e,  dealer  in 

second-hand  books;    Sliitiviuar'* 

(Sjemplar',  second-hand  copy. 
Sln'tburmen,  v.  intr.,  to  rise  like  tow- 
ers (overtower). 
2)ic  ^nt'roort,  — ,  pi.  — en,  answer. 

'^Jliit'irorten,  v.  intr.,  to  answer. 
3tit'n.'>ad)fcu,  v.  intr.,  to  grow  on. 
Die  'ilu'weifung, — ,pl.  ^n,  note. 
Die  ^In'wenbung,  — ,  application, 
^n'rocfcnb,  ac^".,  present. 
^In'jeigen,  v.  tr.,  to  notify,  advertise. 

Die  5ln'jeige,  — ,  j)l.  — n,  adver- 
tisement, 
"^n'^ief^en,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  draw  on,  to  at< 

tract,  interest,  to  put  on, 

Der  Sln'jug,  suit  of  clothes. 
Der  Wp\d,  — S,  pi.  Wp\d,  apple. 

Der  Sl'pfelmein,  cider,       [shop. 
Die  5tpotbe'te, — ,pl.  — n,  apothecary 

Der  ?lpctbe'ter,  apothecary. 
Die  Slr'beit,  — ,  pi.  — en,  labor,  work 

3lr'bciten,  v.  intr.,  to  labor,  work. 

Der  5lr'beitcr,  laborer. 

Str'beitfam,  adj.,  laborious. 
Der  %px\V,  —8,  April. 
Die  2lrc^aologie',  — ,  archaeology. 
%xm,  adj..,  poor. 

Die  ^Ir'mutf), — ,  poverty. 
Der  %xm,  — e6,  pi.  — t,  arm. 


438 


VOCABULARY. 


jDer  Sler'ttiel,  —9,  pi  —,  sleeve. 

S)ie  Slrmee',  — ,  pi.  5lrme'en,  army. 
„    5lrt,  — ,  pi'  — en,  species,  kind, 
way,  nature. 

5lr'ttg,  adj.,  of  a  kind,  agreeable. 
(Sin  ar'tx^eg  ^inb,  a  well-behaved 
child. 

2)er  5lrti'!et,  —^,pl.  —,  article. 

SDie  Slrjnet',  — ,  /j^.  —en,  medicine. 
„    %\&ii,  — ,  ashes. 
„   3lftronomie',  — ,  astronomy. 
S)er  Slftronom',  — en,  astronomer. 
2l[trono'mtj(^,  astronomical. 

S)cr  21't^em,  — 8,  breath,  respiration. 
5ltt)'men,  v.  tr.,  to  breathe. 
„    ?lt'(a«,  — je8,  jo^.  — fe,  satin. 

Slucf),  coTy .,  also,  too,  even. 

2luf ,  />re/>. ,  on,  upon,  at,  to,  towards  ; 
auf  einma(,  all  at  once,  at  once ; 
auf  ba|3,  c,  so  that,  in  order  that. 

5lufbliif)en,  v.  intr.,  to  expand,  to 
blossom.  [in  succession. 

Slufetnan'ber,  adv.,  one  after  another, 

2)er  2lufentl;alt,  — g,  stay,  sojourn, 
abode.  [the  dead. 

3luferftef)en,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  rise  from 

2)te  Sluf  erfte^ung,  — ,  resurrection. 

2luf' fattenb,  adj.,  striking,  strange. 

2)ie  ^luf'gabe,  — ,  pi.  — n,  exercise. 

2)er  ^Kuf'gang, — t^,pl.  ^^gange,  rising. 

Sluf  geben,  V.  ir.  tr.,  to  give  up,  to  sur- 
render, [stay. 

5tuf'^alten,  v.  ir.  refl,.,  to  stop,  delay, 

3Iuf'£)i3ren,  v.  intr.,  to  cease,  discon- 
tinue. 

2)te  ?luf  (age,  — ,  pi.  — n,  edition. 

2luf  mad;en,  to  open. 

^Jlufmerfen,  v.  tr.,  to  observe,  notice. 
3luf'merfjam,  adj.,  attentive. 
Sluf  merffamtett,  — ,  attention. 

S)ie  2luf  D^ferung,  — ,  sacrifice. 

Sluf  re^t,  upright,  erect. 

'^ufregen,  v.  tr.,  to  excite. 

S)er  5luf'ruf,  — g,  call,  appeal,  sum- 
mon. 


Sluf  fte^en,  v.  ir.  intr. ,  to  rise  up,  ta 
rise. 

5luf'[teigen,  v.  intr.,  to  mount,  ascend. 

3luf 'tvagen,  v.  tr. ,  to  carry  up,  put  on. 

2)er  ^tuf  trag,  —eg,  pi.  ^rcige, 

commission.  [ken. 

5luf  toa^en,  v. intr.,  to  wake  up,  awa- 

5luf'n)avten,  v.  intr.,  to  wait  upon, 
©inem  feine  ^ilufn)artung  mad;en, 
to  pay  one's  respects  to  a  per- 

2lnf'n?ecfen,  v.  tr.,  to  awaken,     [son. 

^luf'sie^en,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  draw  up,  raise 
up,  rear,  educate. 

2)ag  2luge,  — §,  pi.  —en,  eye. 

2)er  3lu'genbli(f,  moment,    [ous. 
3lu'genblicfltd;,  adj.,  instantane- 
®ic  Slu'genbrane,  — ,  eyebrow. 
3)ag  5lu'genleiben, — 8,  disease  of 

the  eyes. 
Slu'genfc^einlic^,  ac?/*.,  apparent. 

2)er  Sluguft',  — g,  August. 

5tug,  prep.,  out,  out  of,  from,  of;  adv, 
out,  over,  at  an  end,  finished. 

3lng'Be[fern,  v.  tr.,  to  mend. 

2lug'bred;en,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  break  out. 

5lug'brettcn,  v.  intr.,  to  spread  out,  ex- 
pand, [agation. 
2)ie21[ug'6rettung,extension,prop- 

2)tC  5lug'bauer,  — ,  endurance. 

5lug'bebnen,  v.  tr.,  to  stretch,  expand. 
2)te  2tug'bc^nung,  — ,  expansion. 

3(ug'bru(fen,  v.  tr.,  to  press  out,  ex- 
press, [expression. 
S)er  5lng'bru(J,  —eg,  pi.  -briicfc, 
?lngbrii(f 'Ud;,  adj.,  explicit. 

Slugeinan'ber,  adv.,  asunder,  apart. 

51ug'erftefen  (antiquated  and  irregu- 
lar verb,  imperfect  ang'erlor, 
participle  aug'erforen),  to  choose, 
select. 

Stug'fil^ren,  v.  tr.,  to  execute 

S)te  Slug'fii^rnng,  — ,  execution. 

S)te  5lug'gabe,  — ,  pi.  — n,  edition. 

Slng'ge^en,  v.  ir.  intr. ^to  go  out. 
Ser  Slng'gang,  —eg,  exit. 


VOCABULARY. 


4311 


3lu§'f)altcn,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  hold  out. 
2)a8  ^^US'lanb,  foreign  countries. 

^ilug'lant)ijct;,  adj.,  foreign. 
%n^'m[)ttKl\,  V.  ir.  tr.,  to  except. 

2lu«^'nel;menb,  adv.,  remarkably. 

2)ic  3luo'na^me,  -^,  pi.  —n,  ex- 
ception, [enough. 
■iJtuei'reid^en,  v.   intr.,    suffice,    have 
^^u^'fpred^en,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  pronounce, 

speak  out.  [tion. 

2)ie  '^ilu^'fprac^e,  — ,  pronuncia- 
3lu8'fc^en,  V.  ir.  intr.,  to  look  out. 

2)ie  %u^'\id)tf  — ,  prospect,  view. 
Slu'^erijalb,  ;)rep.,  outside  of,  beyond, 
^lu'iierorbentlicl;,  adj.,  extraordinary. ' 


?lcu'^crfl,  adv.,  extremely. 
3lu«S'[telleu,  V.  tr.,  to  exhibit. 

2)ie  ^iluo'fteUuiiij,  — ,  exhibition. 
5lu«J'[trecfen,  v.  tr.,  to  stretch  out. 
2)ie  ^lu^'trocfnung,  — ,  drying  up. 
2lu8't>erfaiifcn,  v.  tr.,  to  sell  out. 
'^uS'wa^len,  v.  tr.,  to  select. 
2)ie  SluS'tuo^t,  — ,pL — en,  selection. 
2lu§'n?anbern,  v.  intr.,  to  emigrate. 
^uS'ireilbig,  adj.,  from  memory,  bj 

heart. 
'SuS'sa^Ien,  v.  tr.,  to  pay  out. 
^u§'5eid;nen,  v.  tr.,  to  distinguish. 

^lu^'gejcic^net,  adj.,  excellent. 
S)ic  2lyt,  — ,  pi.  Slejte,  axe,  hatchet. 


»« 


S3aar(orbar),ar(;".,  bare,  pure;  baarcS 

@elb,  cash;    baare   33ejd;Iuug, 

cash  payment. 

SBar'fufj,  adj.,  barefoot. 
S)cr  ^a(i),—t§,pl.  i8a'd;e,  brook. 
2)i€  33a(fc,  — ,  pi.  — n,  cheek. 
SBa'dfcn,  v.  tr.,  to  bake. 

2)er  33a'cfcr,  baker. 
2)a«  Sab,  —eg,  ;>/.  SSS'ber,  bath,  wa- 
tering-place, [bathe. 

SBa'bcn,  V.  tr.,  intr.,  and  re/l.,  to 
S)te  58abn,  — ,  ^/.  — en,  the  road,  way. 
2)er  Sal^u'bof,  railroad  station. 
SBalb,  adv.,  soon,  early. 

33arbig  adj.,  early,  speedy. 
2)er  53arfen,  —6, ;?/.  — ,  beam. 
2)er  SBatt,  —eg,  pi.  Sal'Ie,  (1)  ball, 

sphere  ;  (2)  ball,  festive  dance. 
jDie  SSalla'bc,  — ,  pi.  — n,  ballad. 
2)ag  Sanb,  —eg,;?/.  53an'ber,  ribbon. 
2)cr  33anb,  — e§,  pi.  S3an'be,  volume. 

33an'btgen,  y«  tr.,  to  tame.  [sive. 

S3an'ge,  adj.,  anxious,  apprehen- 
2)ie  53ant,— ,p/.  53an'!e, bench, bank. 

5)ie  53iiif'notc,  — ,pl.  — en,  bank- 
note, [banker. 

3)er   33anquier',  — «,    pi.  —8, 
JBan'nen,  v.  tr.,  to  banish. 


58ar,  adj.  (see  baar). 

2)ie  33arntbcr'sigfeit,  — ,  mercy,  pity. 

2)er  33aron',  —^, pl.—c, haron. 

2)ic  33aro'ntn,— ,ij/.— ncn,  baro 

ness, 
2)er  SBcir,  — cn,;>/.  —en,  bear. 
„    SSart,  — e§,  ;>/.  S3ar'te,  beard. 

SBcir'tig,  ac//.,  bearded. 

S3art'(o8,  adj.,  beardless. 
„   33a§,  — ffeg,  pi.  ^Bcif  fc,  bass,  basa 
33auen,  v.  tr.,  to  build,  cultivate. 

2)er  58au'er, — 8,/?/. — n,  peasant. 

2)ie  33dn'erin,  peasant  woman. 

2)ie  S3au'funft,  — ,  architecture. 

2)er  SBau'meiftcr,  architect. 
2)er  33aum,— c«, pi.  33au'me,  tree. 
^    2)a§  33aum'c^en,— §,  small  trea 

S3anm'Ieer,  adj.,  treeless. 

2)ie  S3aum'troUe,  — ,  cotton. 
53car'beiten,  v.  tr.,  to  work  over,  revise 

2)te  33ear'bettung,  — ,  revision. 
53e'bcn,  v.  intr.,  to  tremble. 
Scban'fcn,  v.  refl.,  to  give  thanks. 
Scban'ent,  v.  ir.,  to  regret,  to  pity. 
3?cbccf'en,  v.  tr.,  to  cover. 
35obcn'fen,  v.  rejl.,  to  deliberate. 

SSebenf  lid),  adj.,  criticnl. 

58ebenritd;tcit,  anxious  thought. 


440 


VOCABULARY. 


SBcbie'nen,  v.  tr.^  to  serve,  use ;  v. reft.  ^ 
to  help  one's  self. 

^ebeu'teil,  v.  intr.^  to  signify,  mean, 
2)ie  ^ebeu'tuiig,  — ,  meaning. 
S3ebeu'tenb,  adj.^  important. 

SS^btn'gen,  v.<r.,to  stipulate,  condition. 
S)ie  Sebtng'ung,  — ,  condition. 

SSebiir'f en,  v.  ir.  tr. ,  to  need. 

SSebiirfttg,  adj.,  needy,  wanting. 

SScei'len,  v.  reft.,  to  hasten. 

2)ie  t^eeu'oicjuug,  — ,  end,  ending. 

Sie  ^ee're,  — ,pl.  — n,  berry. 

SBefe^'leu,  v,  tr.,  to  order,  command. 
2)er  SSefe^r,  —t§,  pi.  — e,  com- 
mand, [to  be. 

S3c'|iirt>en,  V.  ir.  reft.,  to  find  one's  self, 

S3eflei'j3en,  y.  ir.  re/?.,)  to  apply  one's 

SSefleif'figeii,  y.re/?.,  >  self. 

SSefor'bern,  v.  tr.,  to  promote. 

S)er  ^cfbr'Derer,  — g,  promoter,  [self). 

^ege'ben,  v.  ir.  reft.,  to  betake  (one's 
S)te  33ege'l)en^ett,  — ,  pi.  — en, 

S3egeg'nen,  v.  ir.  tr. ,  to  meet,  [event. 

S)ie  ''Begier'be,  — ,  desire,  wish. 

^egte'rtg,  adj.,  desirous,  eager. 

S3egin'nen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  begin,  com- 
mence. 

^eglet'ten,  v.  tr.,  to  accompany. 

S3egrei'fen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  comprehend,  un- 
derstand. 

^ZQXt\\'l\6},adj.,  comprehensible. 
S)er  53egrtff ,  — g,  pi.  — e,  idea, 
conception. 

SBcgriln'ben,  v.  tr.,  to  found,  establish. 

33egril'Ben,  v.  tr.,  to  greet,  salute. 

53ebarten,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  retain,  keep. 

S3ekn'beln,  v.  tr.,  to  handle,  treat. 

^eban^'ten,  v.  tr.,  to  assert,  affirm. 

$ef)erfen,  v.  ir.  reji.,  to  help  one's  self. 
3?ef)illflid),  adj.,  serviceable,  con- 
ferring help. 

9^e()en'be,  adj.,  agile,  nimble,  quick. 

3)te  S3e()orbe,  — ,  pi.  —n,  authority. 

53et,  jorf/>.,  near,  at,  with,  by. 

53etbe,  adj.  (pi.),  both. 


2)a8  53ein,  —eg,  pi.  — e,  leg,  bone. 

2)te  ^ein'tleiDer  (;>/.),  pantaloons, 
trowsers. 
3)ag  Sei'f^iel,  — g,^/.  — e,  example. 

^ei'j^ielgtoei'fe,  adv.,  by  way  of 

example. 
Sei'^en,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  bite. 

^ei'^ig,  adj.,  biting.  [sist 

^ei'fte^en,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  stand  by,  as- 

2)er  S3ei'[tanb,  —eg,  assistance. 
S3et'fttmnien,  v.  intr.,   to  agree  with 

one,  to  coincide  with  one's  views, 
^ei'tragcn,  v.  ir.  tr.,  contribute. 
53ci'n)c^nen,  v.  intr.,  to  be  present  at, 

attend. 
^z\\Vi\ni\part.from  Beten'nen),  known 
2)er  or  bie  ^e!ann'te,  — n,  pi.  — n, 

acquaintance  (a  person). 

S)ie  ^efannt'fd^aft,  acquaintance 
33e!Ia'gen,  v.  reft.,  to  complain. 
:  ^efom'men,  v.  ir.  tr. ,  to  get,  obtain, 

procure.  [self. 

3Se!iim'mern,  v.  reft.,  to  trouble  one's 
S3ela'gern,  f.  ^r. ,  to  besiege,     [siege, 

S)te  33eta'gerung,  — ,  pi.  —en, 
SBelau'ten,  v.  reft.,  to  amount. 
S3ele'gen,  v.  tr.,  to  overlay,  cover. 
53elei'bigen,  v.  tr.,  tooft'end. 

2)te  53elet'btgung,  — ,  pi.  —en, 
offense,  wrong,  injury. 
33e{ie'fcen,  v.  intr.,  to  wish,  have  the 

kindness,  please. 
iBel'ten,  v.  intr.,  to  bark. 
33emad/tigen,  v.  reft.,)  to  take  posses^ 
iBemet'ftern,  v.  reft.,  /  sion  of,  seize, 

get  the  mastery  over. 
S3emer'fen,  v.  tr.,  to  observe,  notice. 

3)te  53emer'fnng,  — ,pl.  — n,  re- 
mark, observation. 
2)te  S3enen'nung,  — ,  naming. 
53eni5'tf)tgt,  adj.,  in  need  of,  needing. 
$8eob'ad)ten,  v.  tr.,  to  observe,     [ous. 
53equem',  adj.,  convenient,  commodi 
S3erett',  adj.,  ready,  prepared, 
^ereitg',  adv.,  already. 


VOCABULARY. 


44  i 


25tc  S3eva'tl;ung,  — ,  pi.  —en,  consul- 
tation, council. 
58erau'ben,  v.  tr.,  to  rob. 
2)er  ^erg,  — c^,  pL  — e,  mountain. 

lycv'flicj,  adj.,  mountainous. 

2)ic  ^evij'fette, — ,pl. — n,  moun- 
tain range. 
2)ag  58er<5'mer!,  — c«,  />/.  — e,  mine. 
jDer  iBevic^t',  — eS,  />/.  — c,  report, 
'         notice,  advice. 
Sevilbnit',  adj.,  famous,  celebrated. 
3)ic  !^eru(;'rung,  — ,  contact. 
S3efd;at'tigen,  v.  tr.,  to  occupy,  busy, 

employ. 
53cfd;ei'DCU,  adj.,  modest.         [ment. 
2)cr  ^^efr^Iag',  — 8,   seizure,  attach- 
SBcjd^Ue'^en,  v.  ir.  reji.,  to  conclude. 

2)er  5i3eid;hi6',  — e8,  pi.  -jc^lilffe, 
conclusion. 
33cf(^rau'ten,  y.  <r.,  to  limit. 
S3efd;rei'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  describe. 

2)ie  43cfc^rei'bung,  — ,  pi  —en, 
description.  [scription. 

33cfd)reib'Iic^,  adj.,  capable  of  de- 
SSefdjul'Dii^en,  v.  tr.,  to  accuse,  charge. 
2)er  ^^efd^ii'^cr, — ^,pl. — ,  protector. 
SBefdwe'reii,  v.  reji.,  to  complain. 
SBefin'ncn,  v.  reji.,  to  recollect,  collect 

one's  thoughts,  deliberate. 
S3efet}'en,  v.  tr.,  to  occupy.         [tion. 
2)cr  5Be[i§',  — e^,  possession,  occupa- 
SBejon'ber,  adj.,  particular. 

^cfon'berS,  adv.,  particularly. 
S3erfer,  beft  (see  §  92). 
33efta'iiv]cit,  v.  tr.,  to  confirm. 
33ei'te'(;cil,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  consist ;  tr.,  to 

contest. 
S3cftcr(cn,  V.  tr.,  to  order,  engage. 
33eftim'meii,  v.  tr.,  to  appoint,  fix. 
S3efu'd;en,  v.  tr.,  to  visit. 

^er  33efuc^',  — e«,  pi.  — c,  visit. 
53etrviri)'tcn,  v.  tr.,  to  consider. 

^ctrdc^t'Iid;,  adj.,  considerable. 

2)ie  33ctrad;'tung,  — ,  pi.  —en, 
reflection. 

T 


53etreffen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  concern. 

iBetrieb'jam,  adj.,  diligent. 

2)ie  33etrub'hi|3,  — ,  ]>l.  — c,  sorrow. 

2)ie  ^etrun'fenl^eit,  — ,  drunkenness. 

2)a8  iBett,  — e8,  pi.  —en,  bed. 

2)viS  ^ett'tuci^,  —i^^l.  4ud;cr,  sheet. 

^et'teln,  v.  intr.,  to  beg,  ask  alms. 

2)er  ^ett'Ier,  — «,  ;>/.—,  beggar. 

33et'telarm,  at(/".,  beggarly  poor. 

2)er  iBet'telftab,  — esi,  extreme 
33eiJor',  conj.,  before,  ere.  [poverty. 
2)ic  2i3en)e'guug,  — ,  pi.  — cu,  motion, 

exercise, 
^eicei'fen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  prove.      [ant. 
2)er  33en)Dt)'ner,  — S,  /^/.  — ,  inhabit- 
iBeWUU'Dcrn,  v.  tr.,  admire. 
iBeWU^t',  adj.,  conscious,  known. 
58e5a{>'(en,  v.  tr.,  to  pay. 

2)ie  Sejal/lung,  — ,  payment. 
S3ejte'ben,r.  ir.  ^r.,  to  draw  over,  enter; 

reji.,  to  refer. 

2)ie  ^ejic'^nng,  — ,  relation. 
^Bcstnei'feln,  v.  tr.,  to  doubt. 
2)ie  53i'bd,  — ,  ;j/.  — n,  Bible. 

2)ie  33i'beliiberiet5ung,  translation 
of  the  Bible. 
2)ie  33tbUot(^et',  — ,  ;>/.  — en,  library. 

2)er  33ibaot^etar',  pi.  — c,  libra- 
33ieg'fam,  ac?/.,  pliable.  [rian. 

2)a8  53ier,  — e3,  />/.  — e,  beer. 
„    S3itb,  — eS,  /)/.  — er,  form,  image. 

SBil'ben,  v.  tr.,   to  form,  shape, 
cultivate.  [zation. 

2)ie  Q3irbung,  — ,  culture,  civili- 
„  53irbung6gcjd;id;te,    history 
of  formation. 
3)a§  33ittet',  —8,  ;n'.  — e,  ticket,  note, 
^il'lig,  arf;'.,  just,  reasonable,  cheap. 

33triigen,u.<r.,  to  approve,  grant. 

3)ie  ^il'Iigfeit,  — ,  cheapness. 
'j3in'bcn,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  bind,  tie,  fasten. 

2)ie  i^in'be, — ,pl.  — n,bandaga 

2)a8  58in'bett)ort, — 8,conjunction 
2)ie  53ir'nc,  — ,  pi.  — n,  pear. 
S3in'nen,;>re^.,  within  (of  time). 

2 


442 


VOCABULARY. 


^\9,prep.,  adv.,  and  conj.,  till,  until, 

as  far,  as  to. 

^iel)ei',  adv.,  hitherto,  up  to  this 
time,  as  far,  up  to. 
2)cr  W\^ol—t^,pL  ^tfc^b'fe, bishop, 
^it'ten,  V.  ir.  tr.,  to  request,  ask,  beg. 
ii5\X'iiX,adj.,  bitter. 
Sla'fen,  v.  ir.  tr.  and  intr.,  to  blow. 
S3Iafj,  ac/y,,  pale.  [sheet. 

2)ag   ^latt,  — e§,  pi.  S3Iat'ter,  leaf, 
S31ail,  adj.,  blue. 
2)a§  'Bid,  —c^,  lead. 

^id'txn,adj.,  leaden,  of  lead. 

S)er  SSIei'ftift,  — e§,  lead-pencil. 
SBlei'beu,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  remain,  stay. 
2)er  58tt(f,  — c§,/>/.  — e,  glance,  look. 
5i)liub,ac(/.,  blind. 
2)er  ^Blil?,  — e§,  ;^^.  — C,  lightning. 

S3li'^en,  u.  i?2fr. ,  to  lighten,  flash. 

S3lii5'fd;nett,  adj.,  quick  as  a  flash 
of  lightning. 
93to§,  adj.,  bare,  naked ;  adv.,  only. 
SBIiiVen,  V.  intr.,  to  bloom. 
S)ie  iBIu'me,  — ,  pi.  —n,  flower. 

2)ag  33Iiim'ri;en,  — §,  floweret. 

2)er  S3tu'menfIor^— 8,  field  cov- 
ered with  flowers. 
2)a8  SBIut,  — e§,  blood. 

S3tu'tig,  adj.,  bloody.  [skin. 

2)ag  33ocfrtet[,  —eg,  />/.  — e,  goat's 
2)er  So'ben,  — §,  />/.  ^o'ben,  ground, 

soil,  floor. 
„    53o'gcn,  — §,  bow,  leaf,  sheet. 
2)tc  S3of)'ne,  — ,  />/.  — n,  bean. 
!iDa§  33oot,  —t^,pl.  Wit,  boat. 
58or'gen,  v.  ^r.,  to  borrow. 
SBB'je,  «(//*.,  bad,  ill,  wicked,  angry. 
S)er  33o'fen)ict)t,  — i?>,pl.  — c,  villain, 

knave.  [land. 

S)a§  iBrad^'fetb,  — e§,  pi.  — cr,  fallow 
Sra'ten,  r.  ir.  tr.,  to  roast. 
S3rau'd)ett,  v.  tr.,  to  use,  need. 
SBraun,  adj.,  brown. 
S3rau'jeu,  v.  intr.,  to  rush,  roar. 
S3re'(^en,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  break. 


2)cr  S3rct,  — c§,  broth, 
^rett,  adj.,  broad,  wide. 
Srei'ten,  y.  reji.,  to  spread, 
■ijren'lteit,  y.  ir.  tr.  and  intr.,  to  bum. 
?5renn'bar,  ac?/.,  that  can  be  burned. 
2)a8  ^renn'^olj,  — t^,  firewood. 
2)er  33ricf,  —t^,pl.  — e,  letter. 

2)ic  ^arief  mai1e,  — ,  >    postage- 
S)er^nef[tem^el,  — ,)"   stamp. 
„    Sneftrciger,  —8,  /»/.—,  let- 
ter-carrier. 
33nng'en,  u.  ir.  <r. ,  to  bring. 
35ag  33rob,  —,pl.  — e,  bread,  loaf. 
2)te  3?rit'(fe,  — ,  pi.  —n,  bridge,    [er. 
2)er  sBru'bcr,  — §,  />/.  'li^rii'ber,  broth- 

^^irii'berlid;,  adj.,  fraternal. 
S)ie  Sruft,  —,;?'.  ^Brii'fte,  breast. 
2)a8  SSud^),  — e§,  />/.  SSit'c^cr,  book, 
squire. 

2)er  33u^'6tnber,  book-binder. 
,,    33urf)'[;anb(er,  book-seller. 
S)ie  SSuc^'^anblung,  book-store, 
r;   53ud;brU(ferei', printing  estab- 
lishment. 
„   53ud;'bru(jEerfunft,    art     of 
printing.  [book. 

S)a§  33ild/Ietn,  — §,  />?.  — ,  small 
S)te  ^u'd;e,  — ,  ;>/.  — n,  beech. 
2)er  35ud?'[tabc,  — n,  pl.—n,  letter. 
2)tC  93uc^'ft^^^^f^^^ft/  writing  in  let- 
ters. 
2)er  58u^'tt)etJCtt,  —8,  buckwheat. 
„   53uitb,   —eg,  pi.    — e,  bundle, 

league,  confederacy. 
„    33un'beggeno^,  —en, pl.—n,  ally. 
S)te  55un'begfeftung, fortification  of  the 

(German)  Confederation. 
58unt,   a<(/.,   gay,  bright   and  varie- 
gated. 
S)te  33urg,  — ,  pi.  — eti,  castle. 
2)er  S3iir'ger,  — g,  ;>/.  — ,  citizen. 

35iir'gerltd),  adj.,  civil,  ag  a  citi- 
2)tc  SSut'ter,  — ,  butter.  [zen. 

2)a«  33ut'terbrob,  bread  and  but 
ter,. 


VOCABULARY. 


443 


e. 


S)cr  Saltoinift',— cn,/>/.— cn,calvini8t 
,;    Santon',  — ^,pl.  — c,  canton. 

2)a^  (iapitar,  — S,  pi.  — icn,  capital 
(money);  />/.  (jo^itd'Icr,  capital 
(of  a  pillar). 

2)ie  ^e'bev,  —,pl.—\\,  cedar. 

(Seremoniell',  a^".,  ceremonial,  [acter. 

2)er  (£l)arat'ter,  — g,  pi  — te're,  char- 
„  St^arlatan',  — 8,  />»/. — e,  charlatan 
rf    S^cf,  — 0,  pi — ^,  chief, principal. 

2)ie  (£l)cmic',  — ,  chemistry,  [singers. 

S)er  S^or,  — e8,  />/.  (£^i)re,  chorus  of 


2)08  (S^or,  — e8,  pi.  e^ij're,  choir  ca 
place  in  church  for  singers). 

2)cr  (£l}nft,  —en,  />/.  — eu,  Christian. 

S)a«  St)ri'ftcnt^um,  —8,  Christianity. 

Slaj'fifd;,  adj.,  classical. 

®a8  Concert',  — e8,  pi.  —t,  concert. 

©iJir,  afl(;'.,  civil. 

2)aS  Sou^e',  — g,  p/.  — S,  coupe',  divi- 
sion of  a  coach  or  railroad  car. 

2)a§  Souraiit',  — ce,  currency. 

5)ie  Soufi'nc,  — ,  pi.  —w,  cousin. 


2). 


2)a,  a(/y.,   there,   here,  then,    now; 

conj.,  as,  when. 
2)abci',  a Jy., thereby, by  that, by  them. 
S)a8  2)ad;,  — c8,  ;>/.  S)d'c^er,  roof. 
2)at>urd^',  aJy., thereby,  by  that  means 
jDafilr',  adv.,  for  or  instead  of  this  or 

that. 
25agc'gcn,  arfy.,"  against  that. 
SDa^cr',  adv.,  thence,  from  thence. 
SDa^cr',  conj.,  thence,  for  that  reason, 

therefore. 
2)a'{>tn,  adv.,  thither,  so  far;  ba^in', 

away,  gone. 
2)a'mal8,  adv.,  then,  at  that  time. 
2)ie  2)a'me,  — ,pl. — n,  lady,  woman. 
2)amtt',  adv..  therewith,  with  it,  with 

that;  conj.,  that,  in  order  that. 
2)cr  2)am^f,  — e8,  steam,  vapor.    ' 

3)a«  2)ani^f'boot,  steam-boat. 

2)er  2)am>fer,— 8 ,;>/.— ,steamer 
„    2)anipf'tcffel,  boiler,    [gine. 

SHe  3)anH)f'mafd;ine,    steam-en- 
„    2)am^f' miihic,  steam-mill. 

S)a8  2)am^rfd)iff,  steam-boat. 
2)cr  jDanf,—c8,  thanks,  gratitude,  re- 

2)anf'bar,  adj. ,  thankful,  [ward, 
2)ann,  adv.,  then,  at  that  time ;  bann 

unb  tDann,  now  and  then, 
2)aran',  adv.,  thereon,  on  it,  in  it. 


jDarauf,   adv.,   thereupon,  on  that, 

after  that.  [from  that. 

3)arau8',    adv.,    thence,    therefrom, 
3)ar'bictcn,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  offer,     [sent. 
3)ar'fteflen,  v.  tr.,  to  produce,  repre- 
2)ariiad^',  adv.,  according  to  that. 
2)arnie'bcrlicgen,  v.  intr.,  to  lie  sick, 
3)arii'ber,  aJy, ,  thereupon,  about  that. 
2)arum'  adv.,  therefore,  for  that. 
3)a8  (see  bcr), 

2)a^,  conj.,  that,  in  order  that, 
£ic  2)au'er,  — ,  duration  of  time. 

2)au'crn,  v.  intr.,  to  endure,  last. 

3)au'erl)aft,  adj.,  durable. 
2)ai)on',  a c/y., thereof,  therefrom,  of  it. 
S)a3U',  adv.,  thereto,  in  addition  to. 
2)er  2)ieb'fta^I,  —8,  pi.  *ftd^Ic,  theft. 
2)ecf'en,  v.  tr.,  to  cover.  (let. 

2)cr  2)e(f 'cl,  —8,  pi.  ^,  cover- 

2)ie  2)ecf'c,  — ,  pl.—n,  coverlet, 
blanket.  [a  ship), 

2)a6  2)c(f,  — C8,  pl.—z,  deck  (of 
S)cin,  jwrow.,  thy  (§109), 
2)ie  2)c'mut^,  — ,  humility,  meeknese. 
2)en'ten,  y.  <r,  and  tw<r.,  to  think. 

2)cnf'bar,  a<//'.  (thinkable). 
3)cnn,  co/y.,  for,  because,  then,  than. 
2)cn'nod^,  con/.,  yet,  however,  still. 
S)te  jDc^e'jc^C,  — ,  ;>/.  — n,  dispatch. 


444 


VOCABULARY. 


2)er,  big,  ba9,  art.,  the;  c?em,  ;?ron. 

(§  111,  2),  this,  that;  re/,  pron. 

(§  114,  2),  who,  which,  what. 
X)er3lci'd)cn,a£//'.  indecL,  such  as  that 

or  those. 
iDerje'nige,  dern.  pron.  that  (§111,  3). 
2)erferbe,  dem.  pron.  (§  111,  4). 
S)e§'^alb  or  beji'^alb,  conj.  \    there- 
2)e§'it)egeu  or  be^'tvegen,     I    fore. 
2)e'[to,  conj.  (so  much  the). 
2)eut'lid;,  at/;'.,  plain. 
2)id;'tcu,  v.  intr.,  to  make  poetry. 

2)er  2)ic^'ter,  — g, ;?/.  — ,  poet. 
„    2)td/terfilrft,  prince  of  poets. 

5)i(^'terifd;,  adj.,  poetic. 

2)ie  2)ic^t'fun[t,  — ,  poetry. 

2>ie  S)id;'tung,  — ,pl.  — en,  poem 
S)tcf,  adj.,  thick. 
2)er  2)ieb,  — e§,  ;>/.  — c,  thief,  [theft. 

S)er  2)teb'[tat)I,  — g,  pL  ^ta^Ie, 
©ie'nen,  v.  <r.,  to  serve. 

3)er  S)ie'ner,  — §,  ;;>/. — ,  servant. 
„    S)ien[t,  — z^fpl.  — e,  service. 
2)ie'jer,;>»ron.,  this,  that. 

2)ie§'jett,  i)re/».,  on  this  side  of. 

2)tee'fett&,  adv.,  on  this  side. 
S)ie  2)tn'te,  — ,  _?>/.  — n,  Ink. 
2)irett',  adj.,  direct.  [director. 

2)er  2)irei'tor,  —8,  i?/.  4o'ren, 
S)er  3)tgfon'to,  — §,  discount. 
5)od),  conj.,  yet,  however. 
Xer  2)ot'tor,  —  g,  pi.  4o'ren,  doctor. 
„   2)oId;,  —  e§,/>Z.  — e,  dagger. 
f,    2)om,  — eg,  J9/.  — e,  cathedral. 
„   Son'ner,  — 8,  pi.  — ,  thunder. 

2)on'nern,  v.  intr.,  to  thunder. 
S)o))'^)dt,  adj  ,  doubled,  double. 


2)a§  3)ort,  —t§,pl.  Sor'fer,  village. 

2)ag  2)orf'(t)en,  — 8,  hamlet. 
S)er  2)orri,— cg,p/.  —en,  thorns. 
Sort,  ac/y.,  yonder,  there. 
2)ag  S)ra'ma, — §,/>/.  Sra'meii,  drama 

S)er  2)rama' titer,— g,  dramatist. 

®rama'tijd;,  ac?;'.,  dramatic. 
S)er  S)raug,  — e§,  impulse,  pressure. 
2)ret,  three. 

S)rei'§tg,  thirty. 

Sin  S)rei'^iger,  — g,  a  man  be- 
tween thirty  and  forty  years 
old.  [years. 

2)rei'^igiatjrig,  adj. ,  lasting  thirty 

3)ret'sel;n,  thirteen. 

2)rtt'te,  third. 

3)ag  2)rit'tel,  — «,  third  part. 
S)re'f(^en,  v.  »>.  ir.,  to  thresh. 
S)ie  2)ro'f)ung,  — ,pl.  — en,  menace. 
2)er  2)ru(!,  — e§,  /?/.  S)ril'(f e,  pressura 

S)ru'cten,  v.  tr.,  to  print. 
'^M,  pron.,  thou. 

2)er  2)uft  — e8,  /;/.  3)iif  te,  fragrance. 
Ste  3)ii'ne, — ,;>»/.  — n,  down. 
2)un'!el,  adj.,  dark. 

S)nn'fetblan,  acf;'.,  deep  blue. 
S)nrc^,i>r^p.,  through,  by  means  of. 

S)urd;aug',  ac?y.,  throughout,  by 
all  means.  [through. 

S)nrd;'fiibren,  v.  tr.,    to   carry 

S)er  2)urd/ gang, passage  through. 

3)nrd}'reifen,  v.  tr.,  to  traverse. 

S)urd;'fe^en,  u.  tr.  fr.,  to  look 
through. 

2)er  2)urd/fd)nitt,  — e0,  average. 
2)er  S)urft,  —eg,  thirst. 
2)ag  S)u^'cnb,  — g,  i?/.  — -e,  dozeo. 


S)te  (gb'be,  — ,  ;j?.  — n,  ebb,  ebb  tide. 
(S'ben,  adj.,  even,  level;  ac?y.,  just,  ex- 
(Sd;t,  ac?;. ,  genuine,  pure,  fast,  [actly. 
(S'bel,  ac?/.,  noble,  honorable. 

2)er  (g'belmann,  — eg, ;>/.  — leute, 
nobleman. 


(g'belmiitbtg,  ac?/.,  noble  hearted. 
2)er  (S'belftein,  — eg,  pi. — e,  precious 
(g'^e,  a(iy.,  ere,  before.  [stone. 

2)ie  (St/re,  — ,  pi.  — n,  honor,  good 

(S^'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  honor,     [name. 

(g^'rent>olI,  ac/;'.,  honorable. 


VOCABULARY. 


445 


S^i)x'ii6),  adj.,  honorable. 

2)ie  Sl;r'Iicl;tcit,  honesty. 

(5()r'lO'^,  adj.,  without  honor. 

2)er  St^r'geij,  — e§,  ambition. 
S)ag  (Si,  — c§,  /jL  — cr,  egg. 

2)er  @i'ertud;en,  omelet. 
S)ic  (5i'ci;e,  — ,  j?/.  — n,  oak. 
*£)«  (SiD,  — cd,y>/.  — e,  oath. 
r;    (Si'fer,  — ^,  zeal,  ardor. 

(Sifri^,  adj.,  zealous, 
©i'gen,  adj.,  own. 

(Si'cjeiltlic^,    adj.,   proper,    real; 
adv.,  strictly  speaking. 
S)ie  (Si'Ie,  — ,  haste. 
(Sin,  ar^  (§  54),  a,  an ;  num.  (§  89), 

one;  adv.,  in.  [each  other. 

©inau'ber,  pron.,  one  another, 
3)16  (Sin'bilbung,  — ,  imagination. 
(Sin'brcincjen,  v.  intr.,  to  press  in. 
©inerlei',  indecl.  adj.,  of  one  kind,  in- 
Sin'tad;,  adj.,  simple,  plain,  [different. 
2)er  (Sin'flu^,  — es,  j>l.  — fiaffc,  influ- 
„  (Sin'gaiig, — c8,  entrance,  [ence. 
©iu'iicben!,  ao?/.,  mindfull,  remember- 
@i'nii]er, /jrow.,  some,  any.  [ing. 

2)ae  Sin'fcmmen,  — 8,  income. 
©in'Iaben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  invite,    [tion. 
S)ie  Siu'labung,  — ,  pi.  — en,  invita- 
<Sin'mal,  adv.,  once, 
^in'pacfen,  v.  tr.,  to  pack  up. 
(Sin' jam,  adj.,  solitary,  secluded. 

2)ie  (Sin'famfcit,  — ,  solitude,  se- 
clusion. 
(Stn'fd;ncBcn,  v.  ir.  tr. ,  to  inclose. 
(Sin'fd^rcinfen,  v.  tr.,  to  limit,  restrict. 
(Sin'fd)rciben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  write  down, 
Sin'fe^en,  v.  ir.tr.,  to  perceive. [enter, 
©in  ftelten,  v.  refl.,  to  appear  (at  the 

appointed  time). 
(Stn'ftimmig,  adj.,  unanimous. 
S)er  eiu'tritt,— e§,  pi.  — e,  entrance. 
6in'trir!en,  v.  tr.,  to  influence. 

S)ie  (Sin'n)irfung,  — ,pl.  — en,  in- 
fluence, [ant. 
J)er  (Sin'tDol?ner,  —8,  pi.  —,  inhabit- 


©tn'jeln,  adj.,  single,  individuaL 

©in'jig,  adj.,  sole,  simple. 
3)a8  (Sis,  — e«,  ice. 

2)cr  (Sie'bar,  polar  bear. 
2)a8  (gi')en,  — ?,  iron. 

(Si'fern,  «</;'.,  of  iron.         [road. 

5)te  (Si'jcnbal;n,— ,j9/.— en,  rail- 

2)er  gi'fenba()nfa^r|}Ian,  railro;id 
Si'tel,  rtc^*.,  vain,  idle.       [time-table. 

3)ie  (Si'telteit,  — ,  vanity. 
(S'lenb^  «^^".,  miserable. 
2)tc  eiegie',  — , ;;/.  (glegi'cn,  elegy. 
Slf ,  eleven. 

3)ie  eric, —,/>/. —n,  ell. 
Sie  (Sl'tern  (>/.  j,  parents. 
(SniVfang'en,  u.  >.  <r.,  to  receive. 

2)cr  (Sm^iang'fd)ein,  receipt. 
(Sm^jfcb'ten,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  recommend. 

j£)ie  Gm^^fct/Iung,  — ,  pi.  —en, 
recommendation. 
(Sni;>)fin'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  perceive,  feel. 

Sm^finb'Iic^,  adj..  sensitive. 
@m^or',  adv.,  on  mgii,  above. 
5)te  (gm^ij'rung,—,/?/.  — en,conspir. 

acy,  revolt. 
2)a8  (Sn'De,  —8,  />/.  —a,  end. 
@n'ben,  v.  intr.,  to  end. 

(Snb'ticb.r<(;-.,  final. 
(Sng  or  eng'e,  ac?/.,  narrow,  close. 
2)er  (Sng'el,  —^,pl.  —,  angel. 

,f    @n'!el,  — ^,pl- — ,  grandson. 
5)ie  Sn'telin,  — ,  pi.  — nen,  grands 

daughter.  [along  without. 

-Sntbeb'ren,  v.tr.,  to  dispense  with,  get 
SntHn'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  unbind,  re- 
lease. 
(Sntbecf'en,  v.  tr.,  to  uncover,  discover. 

2)te  (Sntbecf'ung,  — ,  pi.  — en, 

discovery.  [tance). 

(Sntfcr'nen,  v.  tr.,  to  remove  (to  a  dis- 

(Sntfernf,  adj.,  distant,  removed. 
(Sntflieb'en,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  escape, 
©ntge'gen,  prep.,  and  adv.,   against, 

contrary  to,  opposed  to,  toward. 
(Sntgc'gcnge^en,  to  go  to  meet. 


446 


VOCABULARY. 


Sntge'gcnfotttmen,  to  come  to  meet, 
©ntge'genfe^en,  to  oppose. 
(Sutge'^en,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  escape. 
(Sntijal'tcn,  v.  ir.  tr.^  to  contain. 
(Sut^e'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.^  to  take  away,  dis- 
charge from.  [charge. 
(Sntlaf'fen,  v.  ir.  tr.^  to  dismiss,  dis- 
entle^'nen,  v.  tr.,  to  borrow. 
(Sntra't^en,  v.  tr.,  to  dispense  with. 
Sntfc^ei'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  decide. 
©ntfci;ie'ben,  adj.,  decided. 
(Siltjd)rte'J3en,  v.  ir.  rejl.,  to  decide. 

2)cr  @ntjd;tuB',  — eS,  pi.  — iiffe, 
decision, 
©ntfc^urbtgen,  v.  tr.,  to  excuse. 
@nt[iu'nen,  v.  reJl.,  to  recollect, 
©iitfet'sen,  v.  tr.,  to  remove. 
(gntf)3re'd)cn,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  correspond. 
Slltftc'()en,  V.  ir.  intr.,  to  arise,  spring, 

originate,  descend  from. 
S)te  @!it[te&'ung,  — ,  source,  formation 
^nta^e'Der,  conj.,  either. 
(Sntwer'fen,  u.zV.^r.,  to  project,  design. 
3)er  (Sntmurf ,  — e,%  pi.  '-triirfe,  plan, 
(Sntmitf ' ein,  v.  refl. ,  to  develop,  [design. 
Sntjirei'en,  v.  refl.,  to  fall  out  with 

each  other. 
S)ie  (S))o'(i)e,  — ,  pi. — n,  epoch. 
I5)ag  iS':|)08,  — ,  pi.  S'ipen,  epic  poem. 
3)ie  (Squi^a'ge,  — ,  pi.  — n,  equipage, 
^.X ,  pron. ,  \ie.  [carriage. 

^Srbar'men,  v.  refl.,  to  pity,  have  mercy 
'SrMicE'en,  v.  tr.,  to  see. 
S)ie  Grb'fe,  — ,  pi.  —en,  pea. 
„    (5-r'be,  — ,  />/.— n,  earth. 
„   iSrb'beere, —,/)/.— n,  strawberry 
!!£)a§  (Srb'bebcn,— 8, ;)/.—,  earthquake 
(Srbul'ben,  v.  tr.,  to  suffer. 
(Sretg'nen,  y.  re/?.,  to  take  place. 

S)ag  (gr|tg'm^,  —e8,i)Z.—e,  event 
(Srfab'ren,  y.  ^>.  fr.,  to  experience. 

2)te  (Sr^at/rung,  —,/>/.  —en,  ex- 
perience. 
Erfin'beu,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  invent.       [or. 

2)er  (Srfiubcr,— 8.a?/.  — ,  invent- 1 


S)tc  Srfln'bung,  — ,  pl.—m,  in* 
vention. 

S)er  Srfolg',  —i^,pl.  — e,  success. 

(Srfreu'en,  v.  refl.,  to  rejoice  over,  pos- 
sess, [ment. 

2)te  (grfiiriung,  — ,  pi.  —en,  fulfill- 

(Srge'ben,  y.  ir.  intr.,  to  overtake,  hap- 
pen ;  refl.,  to  surrender. 

^rge'ben,  adj.,  obedient. 

ergrei'fen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  lay  hold  on, 

©r^a'ben,  adj.,  sublime.  [seize. 

(Srbol'ten,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  receive. 

@r(;e'ben,  v.  ir.  refl.,  to  rise,  spread. 

(grt)Ob'ett,  V.  tr.,  to  raise,  exalt. 

(Srin'nern,  y.  refl.,  to  remember, 
S)ie  (Srin'nerung,  — ,  pi.  — en, 
remembrance.        [memory, 
^dn'nerlic^,  adj.,  present  to  the 

(grfat'ten,  v.  refl.,  to  take  cold.  [iag). 

(Srfam':|)fen,  v.  tr.,  to  gain  (by  fight- 

©rfen'nen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  recognize. 

(Srtlci'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  explain. 
@r!(ar'Iid;,  adj.,  explicable. 
2)tc  ©rflci'rung, — ,  ^/.— en,  ex- 
planation. 

©rlau'ben,  v.  tr.,  to  allow,  permit. 

©rle'gen,  v.  tr.,  to  kill. 

S)ie  erleic^'terung,  — ,  pl.—tn,  relief. 

(Srtte'gen,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  sink. 

(Srio'fen,  v.  tr.,  to  deliver,  redeem. 

Srman'gein,  v.  intr.,  to  be  in  want. 

(Srmor'bcn,  v.  tr.,  to  murder. 

(Srncib'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  support. 

(Sriien'nen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  appoint. 

(Srnft,  adj.,  earnest. 

2)ie  Srn'te,  — ,  pi.  — n,  harvest 
Srn'tCu,  or  ernbten,  v.  tr.,  to  reap. 

3)tc  (Sro'berung,  — ,  conquest. 

S)te  (Srnd)'lung, — ,  erection,  founding 

(Srrtn'gen,  y.  ir.,  to  gain  (by  force). 

(Srfc^et'nen,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  appear. 
S)te  erfd;ct'niing,  — ,  joZ.  —en 
appearance. 

(5rfd)ie'|3en,  v.ir.  tr.,  to  shoot. 

@rfc'£>en,  y.  ir.  ^r.,  to  see,  find  out. 


VOCABULARY. 


447 


(grft.firstCarfy.,  only) ;  crftcn«,  firstly. 
Srftau'nen,  v.  tr.,  to  astonish. 

Srftaun'lic^,  adj.,  iistonishing. 
(Srfteb'en,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  arise. 
@rta^'))en,  v.  tr.,  to  catch,  surprise. 
©rtt^ei'Ien,  v.  tr.,  to  communicate. 
iSvtra'ijen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  bear,  sutler. 
(Srivarl/fen,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  grow  up. 

Srtt>ad/fen,  adj.,  adult. 
(ErtDa(/Ieii,  v.  tr.,  tochoose. 
(5rivab'iicn,  v.  tr.,  to  mention. 
Snr»ar'ten,  v.  tr.,  to  await. 
2)er  Srtccrb',  — eS,  business,  gain. 
Srwie'Dern,  v.  intr.,  to  reply. 


Grjaf^'fcu,  v.  tr.,  to  relate. 
©erCSrj'marfd^aU,  — e«,  pi.  ^fdjattc, 
(^^,  pron.,  it.  [lord  high  marshal. 

(Sfjen.  y.  tr.  <r.,  to  eat. 
2)er  ^Sl'fiiJ,  — «,  vinegar. 
(i.t' i'ld},  pron.,  some,  any.  [thinj?. 

Qt'tXiaii,  indecl.  pron.,  something,  any 
!J)ie  (gtl^molovjie',  — ,  etymology. 
@u'cr,  pron.,  your. 
(Swaiige'lifd;,  ac//'.,  evangelical. 
@'ir>ig,  adj.,  eternal. 

S)ie  (S'luigfcit,  — ,  eternity. 
2)a§  (Syem^lar',  — S,  pi.  — e,  copy. 
2)ie  (gjiften^',  — ,  existence. 


3f^ 


2)ic  5a'6cr,  — ,  pi.  —n,  fable. 

^a'belbaft,  a(//.,  ftibulous. 
2)ie  5^^^nf',  — ,  pi. — en,  manufactory. 
^ac^'mwixt' ,  part.,  figured  (of  cloths), 
t^a'bifl,  adj.,  capable,  fit,  apt.       [ent. 

S)ic  ^a'biO^^i^^f  — ^  capabihty,  tal- 
2)ie  5^^'ue,  — ,  pi.  — n,  flag,  banner, 
ga^'rcn,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  travel,  ride. 

2)ic  S^i^rt,  — ,  pi.  — en,  journey. 

3)a8  ^a^r^elb,  fare,  toll, 
g.irien,  V.  ir.  intr.,  to  fall.  [case. 

2)er  $aa,  — e«,  ;>/.  ^cil'Ic,  fall, 

2)tc  gatt'fuc^t,  — ,  epilepsy. 
^:iV)ii),adj.,  iiilse. 
S)ie  ^ami'Iie,  —,/>/.  — n,  family, 
gan'ijen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  catch. 
2)ie  (5-^^'^Cf  — f  /^^-  — "f  color. 
2)a«  Jag,  —eg,  pi.  gaffer,  cask. 
§a^,  ac/y.,  almost,  nearly, 
ged^'ten,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  fight,  fence. 
2)ic  ge'Der,  — ,  pi.  — n,  feather,  pen. 

2)aS  ge'bcmieffer,  penknife. 
2)ie  ^ZZ,  — ,  pi.  — n,  fairy. 

3)a8  ge'entanb,  fairyland, 
gcb'ten,  V.  intr.,  to  fail,  miss. 
3)er  Jcb'lcr, — ^,pl. — ,  fault,  mistake, 
gcil,  adj.,  for  sale, 
gein,  adj.,  fine. 
®cr  geinb,  — e8,  pi.  — c,  enemy. 


j^einb'Iic^,  adj.,  hostile. 

2)aS  gelb,  —zii,pl.  — er,  field,  ground. 

2)er    gelb'berr,    commander-in- 
chief 
„  gel b' mar fd;at(,  field-marshal, 
gei'crlic^,  adj.,  solemn. 
2)a8  geU,  —eg,  pi.  — e,  skin,  hide. 
2)cr  gerfeii,  — c8,  /?^.  —en,  rock,  cliff. 
®a8  gen'fter,  —Q,pl.  — n,  window. 
jDcr  gelb'jug,  campaign. 
2)ie  ge'rien  (pi.),  vacation, 
gern,  adj.,  far,  distant. 

S)ic  gcr'nc,  — ,  distance, 
ger'tigcn,  v.tr. ,  to  prepare,  make  ready 
ger'ticj,  adj.,  ready,  prepared,  done. 
gef  fein,  v.  tr.,  to  chain, 
geft,  af//.,  fast,  fixed,  permanent. 

3)er  geft'tav^,  festival  day. 

S)ie  geft'ftimmun^',  lesilve  feeling 

2)ie  ge'ftnny],  — ,  pi.  —en,  castle, 
fortress,  stronghold. 

3)ag  ge'ftungSmert,  fortification. 
2)a3  gcu'er,  —8,  77/.  — ,  fire. 

2)ie  gen'erSbrunft,- ,  jfl.  briinftc, 
conflagration. 

geu'erfeft,  adj,,  fire-proof 

2)ag  geu'crrobr,  gun,  rifle. 

2)ie  geu'crroe^r,  — ,  fire-company 
2)er  gia'ter, — ^,pL  —,  hackney-coach 


448 


VOCABULARY. 


2)ag  ^te'ljcr,  — §,  pi  — ,  fever. 
gigiir'Iic^,  adj.,  figurative, 
^^in'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  find. 
2)er  ging'er,  — ,%  pi.  — ,  finger. 

2)er  gtng'erl;ut,  thimble, 
^in'ftet:,  adj.,  dark,  obscure. 
S)er  ijifd;,  — e«,  pi.  — e,  fish. 

gi'fd;en,  v.  intr.,  to  fish. 

2)ev  gt'fd;er,  —6,  fisherman, 
glad),  adj.,  flat,  plain. 

S)ie  gla'd;e,  — ,  pi.  —n,  surface. 
SHe  glam'me,  — ,  pi.  —n,  flame. 

„    §la' jd;e,  —t,pl.  — n,  flask,  bottle. 
§Ied/ten,  v.  ir.  int.,  to  twist,  braid. 
2)ag  gidfd),  — e§,  flesh,  meat. 

2)er  5lei'fd;er,  — g,  /?/.  — ,  butcher 
S)er  gleifj,  — e«,  diligence,  industry. 

glei'fjtg,  adj.,  industrious, 
glie'gen,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  fly. 
gUe'iien,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  flow. 
'^i\,adj.,  afloat. 
2)ie  ^(ud)t,  — ,  flight. 

glild/tig,  adj.,  fleeting,  rapid. 

2)er  gliic^t'Iing,  — e§,  />/.— e,  fu- 
ller ^lii'gel,  — §,/?/. — ,  wing,  [gitive. 

ff    ?5lu{3,  —eg, ;:»/.  gtiif  fe,  river. 
2)a§  g(uf3'd;en,  — §,;>/. — ,  rivulet. 
S)te  ghit^, — ,;>Z. — en,  tide,  high  tide, 
gorgeit,  V.  intr.,  to  follow,     [quence. 

S)ic  ^ol'ge,  — ,  pi.  — n,  conse- 

gotge  leiften,  to  comply  with. 

golglid;,  ac?y.,  consequently, 
gorbern,  v.  tr.,  to  demand. 
3)ie  gorerie,  — ,  pi  — n,  trout. 
S)te  gorm,  — ,  pi.  —en,  form. 
5£)a§  format',  — e§,/5Z.  — e,  size  and 

shape  (of  a  book), 
gor'fd;eit,  v.  tr.,  to  investigate. 

2)ie  gor'f^ung,  — ,pl.  — en,  in- 
vestigation, 
gort,  aaj.,  forth,  away,  gone,  off. 
gort'fa^ren,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  continue. 
S)er  ^ort'fd^rttt,  — e8,/?/.— e,  progress 
gort'ttjcibrenb,  adv.,  continually. 
S)ie  grad)t,  pZ.  —en,  freight,  cargo. 


5)er  gracf,  — e§,  ;>/.  — c  (and  gradt) 

dress  coat, 
i^ra'gen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  ask. 

2)te  gra'ge,  — ,7^/.  — n,  question, 
granti'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  prepay, 
gran'fo,  adv.,  post-paid. 
S)ie  gran,  — ,  ;>/.  — en,  woman,  wife, 

lady  (Madame,  Mrs  ).  [(Miss). 
S)ag  grau'letn,  — ^,pl — ,  young  lady 
grei,  adj.,  free. 

2)ie  grei'^eit,  — ,  freedom. 

grei'l>rec^en,  to  acquit, 
gremb,  ac?/.,  foreign,  strange. 

2)a§  gremb'mort,  foreign  word. 
3)ie  greu'be,— ,  ;>/.— n,  joy,  pleasure, 
greu'en,  v.  rejl.,  to  rejoice,  be  gla-,', 
2)er  gveunb,  — e§,  ;?/.  — e,  friend 

2)te  greunb'in,   — ,    pi  — nen, 
friend. 

grennb'lid;,  ac?;*.,  friendly,  kind. 

3)ie  greunb'fc^aft,  — ,  friendship. 

f^rennb'jd;aftltd;,  adj.,  friendly. 
2)er  grie'be,  or^'^rie'ben, — cu§,  peace. 
3)er  i^rieb'rtdjSb'or,  — §,  pi—,  Fred- 
eric d'or. 
grie'ren,  v.  ir.  tr.,  andinir.,  to  freeze, 
^rifc^,  adj.,  fresh.  [ness. 

S)ie  gri'fdje,  — ,  freshness,  liveli- 
grob,  ac?/'.,  happy,  joyous,  glad, 
gromm,  adj.,  pious. 
Die  5rud;t,  — ,  pi  "^xMfit,  fruit. 

|^rud;t'bar,  adj.,  fruitful, 
gritt),  adj.,  early,  in  the  morning. 

3)er  ^riil/Itng, — eg,;^Z. — e,spring 

3)ag  grii^'ial)r,  spring, 
^ril'^er,  ac?u.,  formerly. 
2)ag  griiO'ftitcf,  —eg,  breakfast. 

grilt/ftiicEcn,  v.  intr.,  tobreakfiist 
2)er  ^riil/jng,  early  train. 
3)er  gud^g,  —tQ,pl  giid/fe,  fox. 
git^'Ien,  ?;.  <r.,  to  feel, 
gii^'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  guide,  lead,  conduct 
3)te  prie,  — ,  fulness, 
pflen,  y.  tr.,  to  fill 
Pnf,  five. 


VOCABULARY. 


449 


^i\x, prep.,  for,  in  favor  of,  instead  of. 
2)ag  5ur'tt)ort,  pronoun. 
2)ic  gurd;t,  — ,  feai. 

i^ilrd;'ten,  v.  tr.,  to  fear. 

(^urd/terlic^,  adj.,  fearful. 

gurc^t'fam,  adj.,  fearful. 


3)er  ^i^rfl,  — en,  pi.  — en,  prince. 

2)ie  giirft'in,  pi.  — nen,  princess. 
2)cr  gu§,  —eg,  jj/.  gii^c,  foot. 
2)a8  gut'ter,  —^,pl.  —,  lining, 
giit'tern,  to  line. 


S)te  ©a'bc,  — ,  ;>/.  — n,  gift. 

„   ©a'bel,  — ,  ^/.  — n,  fork,     [bet, 

2)cr  ©al'gen,  — 8,  i?/. — ,  gallows,  gib- 

r    ®ang,  — e8,  />/.  ©dn'ge,  going, 

walking. 

©ancj'bar,  adj.,  passable. 
Sl^.e  ®an8,  — ,  pi.  ©an'fe,  goose. 

2)er  ©dnje'fiel,  goose-quill, 
^ang,  adj.,  whole,  entire,  complete ; 

adv.,  quite,  entirely,  wholly. 

3fni  ©au'jen,  on  the  Wiole. 

®h\l'\\&},adj.,  entire, 
^ar,  adj.,  finished,  ready,  done;  adv., 

quite,  very,  at  all. 
Sag  @arn,  — e«,  /?/.  — c,  yam. 
2)ic  ©arni'runcj,  — ,  trimming. 
S)cr  ©ar'ten,  — 8,;?/.  ©drten,  garden. 

2)er  ©drt'ncr, — g,;;?/.—,  garden- 
ias ®a§,  — C8,  pZ.  — e,  gas.         [er. 
2)te  ©af'fe,  — ,  pi. — n,  street,  lane. 
2)er  ©aft,  — e«,  pi  ©ci'fte,  guest. 

2)a8  @aft'I;aug,>  hotel,  inn,  pub- 

S)er  ®aft'(;of,    ]"      lie  house. 
SDic  ©at'tung,  — ,  pi.  — en,  sort,  spe- 
cies, kind, 
©ebd'ren,  v.  ir.  intr.,   to   bear,  give 

birth  to.  [edifice. 

!5)aS  ©cbdu'bc,— e§,  pi.  —,  building, 
©e'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  give. 

®er  ©e'bcr,  — §,  pi.  — ,  giver, 
©etjirtet,  adj.,  cultivated,  refined. 
S)a3  ©cbirg'  or  ©ebir'gc,  — §,  pi.  — c, 

mountain    range,    mountainous 
country, 
©cbo'vcit  {part,  of  gcBd'rcn),  born. 
2)er  ©cbrauc^',  — t^,pl.  ©ebrciu'c^e, 

use,  custom. 


2)ic  ©ebrit'bcr,  {pi'),  brothers,  bretn- 
©ebiil/reu,  v.  intr.,  to  be  due,  [ren. 
2)ie  ©eburt',  — ,  birth. 

2)er  ©eburts'tag,  birthday. 
©Cbci'l;en,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  thrive,  grow, 
©ebcn'ten,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  be  mindful, 
remember. 

2)er  ©ebent'tag,  memorable  day. 
„    ©eban'fe,    — n§,  pi    — n, 
thought. 
2)a8  ©ebad;t'm^,  — cS,  memory. 
3)a«  ©ebid^t',  — e§,  pi  — e,  poem. 

„    ©cbrdn'ge,  — e«,  pi  — e,  throng, 
2)ie  ©ebiitb',  — ,  patience.       [crowd, 

„    ©cfa^r',  — ,  pi.  — en,  danger, 
©cfal'len,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  please. 

©efal'Itg,  adj.,  pleasing,  agreea- 
ble, courteous. 
©e^dl'Iigft,  adv.  (if  you  please). 
2)er  ©efan'gene,  —x[,pl — n,  prisoner, 

captive, 
2)a6  ©cfcing'm^,  — eg, /»/, — e,  prison. 
„    ©cfol'ge,  — 8,  retinue,  consequent 
„    ©efror'ne,  — n,  ice-cream,    [ces. 
„    ©efiiljt',   — eS,  pi  — e,   feeling, 
sense. 
©e'gen,7>rep.,  against,  toward. 

@cgenti'ber,j3re/>,,  opposite  to. 
3)te  ©e'genb,  — ,  />/.  —en,  region. 
!5)a9  ©e'gengtft,  antidote. 
I^er  ©e'genfa^,  contrariety,  contrast. 
2)er  ©e'genfd;Iag,  blow  in  j;etum. 
'3)er  ©e'genftanb,  —z^,pl.  *ftanbe,  ob- 
Ta§  ©egentbcit,  contrary  part.     [ject. 
!3)te  ©e'gentrart,  — ,  presence. 

©c'gentDdrtig,  adv.,  at  present. 
S)a9  ©c^alt',  — e8,  contents,  Balary. 


450 


VOCABULARY. 


©e^etm',  adj.,  secret.  Fpecret. 

Sag  (^e^eim'iii^,  —eg,  pL  — e, 
(S;t'i)Zn,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  go. 
@e()or'd;etl,  v.  intr.,  to  obey. 

®tt)Ox'\am,adj.,  obedient. 
@ef;i3'ren,  v.  intr.,  to  belong. 
2)er  @eift,  —eg,  /»/.— er,  spirit,  ghost, 
-eg,  avarice. 


©elang'en,  v.  intr.,  to  attain  to. 

©elciu'fiij,  adj.,  current,  fluent. 

@elb,  adj.,  yellow. 

©elbrot^,  adj.,  orange-colored. 

2)ag  @elb,  — eg,  pi.  — er,  money. 

(S)tk\)Xt',adj.,  learned. 

©ele'geil,  adj.,  convenient,  important. 
Sie  (^ele'genl;eit,— ,;^/.— en,  op- 
portunity. 

S)a§  i3tki'\i,  — g,  pi.  — n,  track. 

©eling'en,  v.  ir.  intr.  (i?npers.),  to  suc- 
ceed, [value. 

©el'teu,  V.  ir.  intr.  (impers.),  to  be  of 
©eltenb  mad;en,  to  carry  out. 

3)ag  (Semcirbe,  — g,  pi.  — ,  painting. 

@emein',  «<//■.,  common.  [tual. 

©emetn'fam,  adj.,  common,  mu- 

2)te  ©em'fe,  — ,  pi.  — n,  chamois. 

Sag  ©emii'fe,  — g,  pL  — ,  vegetables, 
greens, 
r,    @emiit()',  —eg,  pi.  — er,  mind, 
soul,  heart,  nature,  mood. 

Ste  ©emiltbg'ftimmung,  — ,  temper, 
disposition  of  mind,  [mentioned. 

@enannt'(/'«?'^.ofuen'nen), «(//., above 

(Sitnau' ,  adj.,  exact,  close. 

®er  ©enerar,  — ^,pl.  — e,  general. 

®enc'fen,u.  ir.  intr.,  to  recover. 

Oenie'iscn,  v.  ir.  Ir.,  to  enjoy. 

®enucj',/;row.  indecl  and  adv.,  enough. 

©era' be,  adj.,  straight,  direct ;  adv., 
exactly,  just. 

®ercd;t',  a^'.,  just,  righteous,  [tence. 

Sag  ©erid;t',  — eg,  jo/.  — e,  court,  sen- 

®ern,  adv.,  willingly,  gladly,  cheer- 
fully ;  gent  f^aben,  to  like. 

Ser  ©ejang',  — eg,j»/.  ©efang'e, song. 


Sag  ©efd^aft',  — c§,  pi.  — c .  business, 

occupation,  trade. 
©ejd;e't)eit,  v.  ir.  tr.  {impers.},  to  hap- 
pen, take  place,  occur. 
Sic  @efd^id/te,  — ,  pi.  —w,  history, 

story.  [historian. 

Ser  @ef  c^tc^tg'  f  djretber ,— g  ,pl.  —, 
Sag  ©efc^en!',  — eg,i?^.  — e,  present. 
„    ©e]d;Ied;t',  — eg,  pi.  — er    sex, 

gender,  race. 
Sev  ©efd^macf',  — g,  taste. 
Sag  ®efd)rei',  — eg,  clamor,  cry   Qery . 
„    ®efd;ii^',  — eg,  pi.  — e,  gun,  artil 
Ste  @efd;m'[ter  {pi),  brothers  and 

sisters. 
„    ® efett'  jd}aft,  — ,  pi.  —en,  society. 
Sag  ®eje^',  —eg,  pi.  — e,  law. 

®eje^'gebenb,  adj.,  legislative. 

Ser  ®efe^'geber,  — g,  lawgiver. 
„    ®eftd;t,  —eg,  pi  — er,  sight,  face. 
„    ®ef^en[t',  —t^,pl.—zx,  spectre. 
Ste  ®eftatt',  —,pl.  —en,  form,  shape, 

figure,  stature.  [formation. 

Ste  ®eftartung,  — ,  moulding, 
®eftat'ten,  v.  tr.,  to  allow. 
®e'ftern,  adv.,  yesterday. 

®  e'ftrtg,  ac/;'.,  of  yesterday. 
®efunb',  adj.,  healthy. 

Sie  ®efunb'I;eit,  —,  health. 
®ett)a^r',  adj.,  aware  of,  preceiving. 
®en)af)'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  procure,  give. 
Ste  ®eir>att',  — ,  power,  violence. 

®en3a{t'fam,  adj. , violent,  forcible. 
®en3aribt'  {part,  from  wenbcn),  adj., 

quick,  active,  dexterous. 
®emar'ttg,  ac?;*.,  waiting,  expecting. 
Sag  ®en)arfer,  — g,  pi.  — ,  waters, 

flood. 
Sag  @emtd;t',  —eg,  pi.  — c,  weight. 
®ett)in'ncn,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  win,  gain. 
(§)tm^' ,  adj.,  sure,  certain. 

Sag  ®etDif fen,  — g,  conscience. 

®etoiffen^ft,  adj.,  conscientious. 
Sag  ®ett)it'ter,  — g,  pi.  — ,  tempestj 

storm,  thunder-storm. 


VOCAEULARY. 


451 


(SetoO^'ucn,  v.  tr. ,  to  accustom ;  v.  refl. , 

to  accustom  one's  self. 

2)ie  @ciDol;n'I;eit,  — ,  custom, 

©ciubbn'Iid;,  adj.,  customary. 
S)a8  @cix)i3Ibc,  —«,/>/.— n,  arch,  vault 
2)ie  @id^t,  — ,  gout, 
©ie'^en,  v.  ir.  tr,^  to  pour. 
2)ie  (i)ift,  — ,  pi.  —en,  gift,  dowry. 
i)a«  ©ift,  — ,  i)/.  — e,  poison. 
3)er  ©ip'fel, — §,/>/. — ,  summit,  peak, 
©laa'jen,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  glitter,  shine. 
'i)ai  i^ia^,  — e«,  pi.  (^la'fer,  glass. 

2)ie  (i^Ia«'fd;eibe,— ,pane  of  glass. 
„  C^IaS'jc^crbe, — e,  broken  glass 

®"®J""',^-"f''f  faith,  belief. 

©lau'ben,  y.  <r.,  to  believe. 
@Ieic^,  adj.,  hke,  equal,  level,  even; 

adv.y  immediately. 

3)er  @Ieid;'miit^,  equanimity. 

2)a8  @lcict^'m|3,—e«,j9/.—c,  like- 
ness, comparison,  allegory. 

©Ictc^'fam,  con/.,  as  it  were,  as  if. 
2)ic  ©lod'c,  — ,  pi.  —n,  bell, 
©(or'reic^,  ac(;'.,  glorious. 
2)a8  ©liicf,  — e«,  fortune,  good  luck. 

@Iiicf'lirf),  adj.,  fortunate,  happy. 

SDer  ©liicf 'rounfd;,  congratulation 
3)ic  ©na'be,  — ,pl.  — n,  grace,  favor. 

©nd'big,  adj.,  gracious,  merciful. 
2)a«  Oolb,  — c«,  gold. 

©ol'ben,  adj.,  golden,  of  gold. 
@o't^ifc^,a(/;'.,  Gothic. 
2)cv  @ott,  — c8,  />/.  ©iJtter,  God. 

2) er  ©ot'tcSbtenft,  divine  worship. 
®ra'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  dig.  [grave. 

2)a«  @rab,  — e8,  pi.  ©id'ber, 

2)er  ©ra'bcn,  — «,  pi.  ©vci'ben, 

3)ie  ®  ru'  be,—,/)/.  — n  ,hole.  [ditch 
5)cr  ®rab,  — e8,  />/.  — e,  degree. 


2)er  ®rfiu'cI,—g,;?Z.—, abomination, 

horror,  horrible  crime. 
2)er  ©rvif,  —en,  /?/.  —en,  count. 
3^ic  ©ramma'tif,—,  grammar,    [ical. 

©ramniatifa'lifd;,  adj.,  grammat. 
2)aS  @ra«,  — eS,  jo/.  (i^rd' jer,  grass. 
©rd^'Iid;,  adj.,  hideous,  terrible, 
©ratult'reu,  v.  tr.,  to  congratulate, 
©rail,  adj.,  gray, 
©rei'feu,  V.  ir.  tr.,  to  grasp,  seize. 
2)tc  ©ren'se,  — ,  pi.  — u,  boundary, 

limit. 

2)aS  ©rcns'Ianb,  boundary-land, 
©rob,  a(/;*.,  coarse,  rough. 
2)er  @ro'fd;cn,— 8,/)/.  — n,  groshen 
@ro^,  ac?/.,  great,  large,  tall. 

2)ie  ©ri5'f3e,  — ,  size,  height. 

2)er  ©rc^'toatcr,  grandfather. 

2)te  ©ro^'muttev,  grandmother. 
„    ©ro^'mutb,  magnanimity. 

®rof3'miitl)ic5,  a^//'.,  magnanimous 

@ro^'tentl)ciI«,  adv.,  chiefly. 
®riln,  adj.,  green. 
®er  ©rmib,  — e«,/)/.©riln'be,grouna, 

land,  foundation,  reason,      [lish. 

©riin'ben,  v.  tr.,  to  found,  estab- 

2)a8    ©nmb'Iod;,    hole    in    tho 
ground. 

2)er  ©runb'ftein,  corner-stone. 
!Der  ®ni^,—z^,pl.  ®ril'{3c,  salutation 

©ril'fjcn,  V.  tr.,  to  greet,  salute, 
©iil'tig,  adj.,  valid,  binding. 
®iin'fttg,arf;'.,  favorable. 
2)k  ®um'inifd;ube  ipl.),  India-rub- 
@ut,  adj. ,  good.  [ber  over-shoe. 

2)ie  ©ii'te,  — ,  goodness. 

2)a8  ®ut,  —t^,pl.  ©il'ter,  posses- 
sions, properly,  landed  estate. 
2)a8  ®l)mna'fium,  — «,  pi.  &\^m\\a.'* 
\         ften,  gj'mnasium. 


2)a8  ^aar,  — e8, ;?/.  — e,  hair, 
^a'bcn,  y.  tV.  tr.,  to  have. 

^ab'^aft,  ac^'.,  in  possession. 


!j5tc  §ab'fud;t,  — ,  avarice, 
^ab'jild^tig,  a<^.,  avaricious. 
2)er  §a'fen,— «,  pi.  ^5'fen,  harbor. 


452 


VOCABULARY. 


'i)er  §a'fer,  — §,  oats. 
„    ^a'gel,  — S,  hail. 

^a'gellt,  v.  intr.  {impers.),  to  hail. 
„    §acf 'en,  — 8,  })l.  — ,  hook, 
^alb,  adj.,  half. 

§aIb'ro^,  adj.,  half  raw. 
^alb'roegg,  adv.,  halfway. 
®te  ^cilf'te,  — ,  half.  [stop, 

^al'teu,  11.  ir.  tr.  and  intr.,  to  hold, 
2)er  ©alt,  —eg,  />/.  — e,  holding, 
stop.  [mer. 

3)er  ^am'mer,— §,/»/. §am'mer,ham- 
S)ie  §anb,  — ,  />/.  ^an'be,  hand. 

3)er  §an'bel,   — g,  trade,    com- 
merce. 
^an'Deln,  v.  ^r.  and  intr.,  to  han- 
dle, trade,  treat,  act. 
2)er  .^anb'ter,  —^,pl.—,  trader. 
^ie  .'p'lnb'Iuug,  — ,  pi.  — en,  ac- 
tion,   deed,   trade,    trading- 
house. 
S)ie  §anb'fd;nft,  manuscript. 
2)er  ^anb'fd)n^,  glove. 
S)ag  ^anb'werf,  trade. 
3)er  §anb'n)erfer,  tradesman. 
3)er  §anf,  — eg,  hemp. 
§ang'en,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  hang. 
^ang'en,  v.  tr.,  to  hang, 
^ar'ren,  v.  intr.,  to  await. 
§art,  «G?/.,  hard. 

S)er  ^a'fe,  — n, ;;/.  — n,  hare.  [nut. 
3)ie  §a'je(nn^,  — ,  ju/.  *nil[fe,  hazle- 
^af'fen,  v.  tr.,  to  hate. 

§aJ3'Urf),  afl?/.,  hateful,  ugly, 
^viu'en,  V.  ir.  tr.,  to  hew,  cut. 
S)er  §an'fe,  —M,i>l.—x{,)  heap, 
„    ^an'fen,  — §,  pi—,  f  mass. 
§au'fig,  a  J;.,  abundant,  frequent. 
®ag  §au^t,  —eg,  pi.  §an^'ter,  head. 
SDie  §au^t'feber,  mainspring. 
„    |)au^t'fe[tung,  chief  fortica- 
tion. 
S)er  .t>vHu^t'Itn0,   — e§,  pi.  — e, 
chieftain,  leader,    [foremost. 
^anpt'Iingg,ac??'., headlong,  head 


2)er  §an)3t'mann,— cg,p/.§au^3t 
leute,  captain. 

S)ie  §au:pt'[tabt,  capital  city. 

2)ag  §au:|)t'n)ort,  noun. 
3)a§  §au8,  — eg,  pi.  §au'fer,  house. 

S)er  §aug'fned;t,  house  servant. 
2)te  §aut,  — ,  pi.  §au'te,  skin. 
§e'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  raise,  lift, 

S)er  §e'bel,  —^,pl.  —,  lever. 
2)er  §ed;t,  — eg,  pi.  — e,  pike. 
2)ag  §eer,  — eg,  pi.  — e,  army. 
§ef'ttg,  adj.,  vehement,  violent. 
2)er  §ei'be, — n,  pi.  — n  ;  bte  §ei'bm 

— ,  pi.  ==nen,  heathen,  pagan. 

2)ag§ei'DeiuMum, — g,  paganism.. 
2)te  §ei'be,  — ,pl.  — n,  heath. 
§ei'Itg,  adj.,  holy. 

§ei'ligen,  v.  ir.,  to  sanctify,  hallow 
§eim,  adv.,  home,  at  home. 

S)ag  §etm, — eg,  home,  residence. 

2)ie  §ei'mat^,  — ,pl.  — en,  native 
place. 

§ei'nufd;,  adj.,  at  home. 
§et'raif)en,  v.  tr.  and  intr.,  to  marry, 
§ei'fer,  ad;.,  hoarse. 
§et^,  adj. ,  hot. 
§ei'^en,  v.  ir.  intr.,   to  be  called,  be 

named,  mean. 
§ei'ter,  adj.,  cheerful,  glad,  joyous.  * 
S)er  §elb,  —en,  pi.  —en,  hero. 

S)er  ^erbengetft,  heroic  spirit. 

^erbenmilt^tg,  adj.,  heroic. 

^et'fen,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  help. 

§ett,  adj.,  clear,  bright. 

3)er  §erier,  — g,  ^/.  — ,  a  copper  coin, 

worth  about  a  quarter  of  a  cent. 
3)er  §etm,  — eg,  pi.  — e,  helmet. 
3)ag  §emb,  —eg,  pi.  —en,  shirt, 
^em'men,    v.  tr.,  to  check,  arrest. 
§er,  adv.,  hither  (§  187,  10). 

§erab',  adv.,  down  (hither). 

.^eran',  adv.,  on,  near,  upward. 

§eranffomnien,  to  come  up,  rise. 

^eranfi>eien,  v.  ir.  tr..,  to  throw 
up. 


VOCABULARY, 


453 


^crauf'tretcn,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  step 

^txan^'  ,adv.,  out  hither.      [up. 

^erauS'fagen,  to  speak  out. 

^erbei',  adv.,  on,  hither,  near. 

^rcin',  a(/y.,  in  hither.  [ter. 

Jpcrein'fommcn,  to  come  in,  eu- 

^crnte'bcr,  adv.^  down  hither, 
^erii'bcrtommen,  to  come  over. 

§erun'ter,  adv. ,  down  hither. 

^erun'terfommen,  to  descend. 

^criim',  adv.,  around. 
35er  |)crbft,  —t9,  pi.  —t,  autumn. 

„    §i'rb,  — C8,  pi.  — e,  hearth. 
2)ic  ^ecr'be,  — ,  pi.  — n,  herd. 
2)cr  ^err,  — ii,  pi.  — en,  master,  lord, 

gentleman ;  Mr. ;  @ott  ber  §err, 

the  Lord  God. 

^ZXx'[i6),adj.,  glorious,  splendid. 

2)ic  §crr'jd;vift,  — ,  pi.  —en,  do- 
minion, authority. 

^err'fc^aftlid;,  adj.,  belonging  to 
a  lord  or  to  a  manor,  noble. 

^err'l'c^en,  v.  intr.,  to  reign,  rule. 

2)a§  §crr' jd)ert{;um,  — S,  govern- 
ment, authority. 
2)a8  ^erj,  — eng,;?/.— en,  heart,  [dial. 

§erj'lic^,  adj.,  affectionate,  cor- 
ner |>ei^'Sog,  — c«,  pi.  §cr'5i5ge,  duke, 
^crnac^',  atiy.,  afterward. 
^ertoor'bred;en,  to  break  out. 
jDaS  §eu,  — eS,  hay. 
.^eu'Ien,  v.  intr.,  to  howl. 
»^eu'te,  adv.,  to-day. 

^eu'tig,  adj.,  of  to-day,  to-day's. 
§icr,  adv.,  here, 
^icrin',  adv.,  herein.  [close  by. 

^iernad^ft',  adv.,  next  this  time, 

^icrfelbft',  adv.,  here. 

^ie'ftg,  adj.,  of  this  place. 
2)er  §im'mel,  —9,  pi.  —,  heaven. 

^imm'Iifc^,  adj.,  heavenly, 
ipin,  acfy.,  thither,  there, 
^inab',  adv.,  down  thither. 
-JpiUviuf ,  adv.,  up  thither, 
^inaufjc^auen,  to  look  up. 


.^tnein',  adv.,  in  thither. 

^inetn'gc()en,  v.  intr.,  to  enter 

iptneiu'gclangcn,  to  ))euetrate. 

^incin'fommcn,  to  come  in. 

^inein'tragen,  v.  tr.,  to  carry  in. 

§in'gcbcn,  v.  tr.,  to  give  up,  sacrifice. 

^inge'gcn,  adv.,  on  the  contrary. 

§ind'bevf^Mingen,  to  leap  over. 

^irtun'terftiirjeu,  v.  intr.,  to  fall  down, 

^inju'fe^cn,  v.  ir.,  to  add. 

^in'bcrn,  v.  tr.,  to  hinder,     [bersome. 
§in'berltd),  adj.,  hindering,  cum- 

§in'ten,  prep.,  behind,  after. 

2)er  ■^irfd),  — eS,  pi.  — ,  stag,  deer. 

3)ie  ^ir'fe, — ,  millet. 

!5)er  ^irt,  — en,  pi.  — en,  shepherd. 

!J)te  §i^'c,  — ,  heat. 

§od;,  adj. ,  high. 

§iJd?ft,  adv.,  very,  extremely. 
2)ie  ^od)'a(^tung,  — ,  esteem,  re- 
spect, [oped. 
§od/gebrad)t,  adj.,  higly  devel- 
§od;'trabcnb, adj.,  high-sounding 
3)ev  §o(^'t)errat^,  high  treason. 
25te  §od/;ieit,  pi.  — en,  wedding. 
„    ^pij'l^e,  — ,  pi.  —en,  height. 

2)er  §of,  —eg,  pi.  .Spi3'fe,  court,  per- 
manent residence,  home. 
^iJf  lic^,  adj.,  courteous,  polite. 

§of'fen,  V. intr., 'to  hope. 

§of'fcntlid;,ac?i'.(itistobehoped) 
!2)ie  ipofj'nung,  — ,  pi.  —en,  hope. 

§0^1,  adj.,  hollow. 

2)ic  ^i5b'Ic,— ,  pi.  — n,  cave,  pit. 

^o'len,  V.  tr.,  to  get,  procure, 

2)ag  ^olj,  — e6,  pi.  .^erjer,  wood, 
^ol'jiern,  adj.,  woody,  of  wood. 

35er  |>o'nig,  —8,  honey. 

§or'c^en,  v.  intr.,  to  listen,  obey. 

^iJ'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  hear. 

2)ie  ^o'fcn  (^pL),  pantaloons,  trowset 

§iib|d;,  adj.,  pretty,  fair. 

2)cr  ^il'gel,  —8,  pi.  — ,  hill. 

§ui' !  interj.,   ho!    quick!    in  etneif 
^\X\' ,  in  the  twinkling  of  an  eye. 


454 


VOCABULARY. 


!J)ic  §iirfe,  — ,  aid. 
S)cr  |)iinb,  — e«,  />/.  — e, 
S)a§  §iinD'c^en,  —^,pt.  - 

little  puppy. 
^uu'Dert,  hundred. 


dog. 

-,  small  dog, 


Ser  §ung'er,  — §,  hunger. 

2)ie§ung'er§not[;,— ,  famine. 
2)er  §ut,  — cs,  ;>/.  — .p'te,  hat. 
2)ic  §ilt'te,  — ,  /)/.  — n,  hut. 
„   ^l^ajin'tlje,  — ,  pi.  — n.  nyacintln 


3. 


^6^,pron.,  I. 

3^V, jt>ro;2.,  her;  their;   3^r,  your. 

2)er,  bie,  bag  3^'nge,  hers;  theirs; 
3i)'rige,  yours. 

-Sm'mev,  adv.^  always,  ever. 

3ni)Jofant',  adj.,  imposing. 

^W,  prep.^  in,  into,  at,  within. 

3ubem',  c,  while,  since,  because. 

3)er  3n'^alt,  — 8,  /?/.  — e,  contents. 

2)ag  3niaub,  — §,  interior  of  a  coun- 
try. 


^n'lcinbifc^,  adj.,  native,  interior. 
3n'ne,  adv.,  within, 
^n'neil,  adv.,  within, 
^n'ner,  adj.,  interior. 
3n'nert)alb,  prep.,  within,  inside  of. 
2)ag  Sitjeft',  —t^fpl.  —en,  insect. 
2)ie  3n'jet,  — ,  pi.  — n,  island. 
^nfou'bertjeit,  adv.,  especially. 
2)a§  Sfnteref  je,  — eg,  interest. 

3ntereffant',  adj.,  interesting, 
^r'reu,  v.  refl.,  to  err,  wander. 


3. 


3a,  ac/y. ,  yes. 

S)ic  3ac!'e,  — ,  /»Z.  — n,  jacket,  vest. 

^a'gen,  v.  tr.,  to  hunt. 

2)te  3agb,  — ,  hunt,  hunting. 
2)er  3a'ger,  — g,  j?/.  — ,  hunter. 
2)ag  3a^r,  — eg,  — e,  year,  [century. 
S)ag  3a^rf;un'bert,  — g,  />/.  — e, 
S)ie  ^a^'regga^I,  — ,  number  of 
the  year. 
„    ^a^'regjett,,— ,;)/.— en,  sea- 
son of  the  year. 
5)er  ^a'nuar,  — g,  January. 
3e,  adv.,  ever  ;  conj.,  the  (see  bejio). 
■Se'ber,  pron.,  every,  each. 


3e'bermann,  pron.,  every  body. 
^ebtce'ber,  pron.  (for  jeber). 
^e'malg,  adv.,  ever. 
3e'manb,  — g,  pron.,  somebody,  any 

body. 
^Z'WZX,  pron.,  that,  that  one. 
^m'\t\!i,prep.  ,the  other  side  of,  beyond 
Seu'jeitg,  adv.,  beyond. 
3e^t,  adv.,  now,  at  present. 

3'e^'ig,  adj.,  present,  existing. 
2)te  ^u'genb,  youth. 
3ung,  adj.,  young,  youthful. 

S)er  ^ung'e,  — n,  pi.  — n,  youth, 
young  man. 


2)ag  ^a.'M,  — g,  pi  — ,  cable. 
„    tabtnett',  —eg,  jo/.  — e,  cabinet, 
small  room. 
'3^er  Sabett',  —en,  pi.  —en,  cadet. 
2)er  tabet'tenofftjier,  — g,  pi.  — e, 
cadet-officer. 
»   taf'fee,  — g,  coffee, 
litabt,  adj.,  bald. 

S)er  tabn,— eg,i9/.  tab'ne,boat,  skiff. 
;/   Sai'fer,  — g,  pi.  — ,  emperor. 


^at'ferlt^,  adj.,  imperial.  [ship). 

S)te  ^ajit'te,  — e,  ;>/.  — n,  cabin  (of  a 
2)ag.'ilaI6,— eg,j9/.  MVhtx,  calf. 

2)er  talbg'braten,  — g,  roast  veal. 

2)ag  .talbg'cotetett,  —eg,  veal  cut^ 
„    Sarb'fteifc^,  — eg,  veal.,  [let. 
2)cr  ^alf,  —eg,  lime. 

2)er  ^alt'felg,    limestone    cliff* 
calcareous  rock. 
^^li^adi.   cold. 


VOCABULARY. 


455 


S)ic  ^al'te,  — ,  cold,  coldness. 

2)er  il'ampf,  — c^,  pi.  Mm'^\t,  battle, 

^am'^fen,  v.  intr.,  to  fight,  [fight. 
n   ^ana'rienoogel, — 8,  Canary  bird. 
2)ic  ^ano'iic,  — ,  pi.  — il,  cannon. 

2)ie  ^ano'netifugel,  cannon-ball. 
2;ev  ilapitaii',  — 8,  pi.  — c,  captain. 
2)ic  ^ap'pc,  — ,  pi.  — en,  cap,  hood. 
2)cr  5tar'^fen,  — 9, pi. — ,  carp. 
Xk  ^ar'te,  — ,  pi.  — n,  chart,  map. 

„   ^'.irtof'fcl,  — ,  pi.  — n,  potato. 
Xtx  ^artoffeladEcr,  — ,  potato  field. 
„    Sid'it,  — e^,  pi.  — ,  cheese. 
„    Catalog',  — e8,  />/.— e,  catalogue. 
„    ^atbof if ,  —en,  pi.  —en,  Catholic. 

^^t\)o'i'\\df,adj.,  catholic. 
„   ^attun',  — e^,  pi.  — e,  calico, 
^au'fcil,  V.  tr.^  to  buy. 

2)er  Saufmann,  — e6,  pi.  Sauf = 
leutc,  merchant. 

Kaufman' nifd;,  adj.^  mercantile, 
^aiim,  a</y.,  scarcely. 
^ef)'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  sweep;  to  turn. 
2)cr  5?eit,  — c8,  pi.  —t,  wedge. 

^eirfijrmig,  adj.,  wedge-shaped; 
adv.,  like  a  wedge. 
^dn,pron.,  no,  not  any,  no  one. 
2)er  ^ett'ncr,  — 8,;>/.  — ,  waiter. 
Scn'ncn,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  know,  to  be  ac- 
quainted with. 
2)er  M\z\,  — S,  pi.  —,  kettle. 
2)ic  ^ct'tc, —,;>/.— n,  chain. 
2)cr  ^iel,  —6,  pi.  — c,  quill. 
'2)a«  Sinb,  — e§,  />/.  — er,  child. 

2)a8  ^inb'd)cn,  —8,  ;>/.  — ,  little 
child,  baby,  infant. 

2)tC  ^inb'^cit,  — ,  childhood. 

.^in'tifd;,  arf;*.,  childish. 
2)tc  ^ir'd^e,  — ,pl. — n,  church,  [tory. 

2)ie  ^ir'd;engefd;td)te,  church  his- 

'J)er  Sird)'tl)urm,  church  tower. 
2)tc  tir'fd^e,  — ,  pi  — n,  cherry. 
2)a«  ^if'fen,  — 8,  pi.  — n,  cushion. 
Jtla'gcn,  v.  intr.,  to  complain. 
2)ie  aia^'|)er,  — ,  pi.  —n,  rattle. 


2)16  ^la^'^erfdblange,  rattlesnake. 

^kr,  «c(;.,  clear. 

2)ic  iilaj'fc,  — ,  ;>/.  — n,  class. 

^(af'fij^,  adj-,  classical. 
2)a3  iilatoier',  — 8,  — e,  piano-forte. 
2)cr  .^tlec,  — e8,  clover. 

2)cr  tlee'acfer,  field  of  clover. 
2)a8  5^leib,  — e«,  j»/.  — er,  garment, 

clothes,  dress. 

^(cl'Den,  V.  tr.,  to  clothe,  dress, 
^lein,  adj.,  small,  little. 
2)a^  mVnu,  —^,  pi.  ^lima'ta,  4c  or 

4eil,  climate. 
^Itng'en,  v.  intr.,  to  sound,  be  heard. 

^(ing'eln,  v. intr.,  to  ring  a  bell, 
^lo'^fen,  V.  intr.,  to  knock  (at  a  door). 
2)a8  ^lo'ftcr,  —^,pl.  ^Ii3'ftev,  cloister, 

convent,  monastery. 
Slug,  adj.,  wise,  sensible,  learned. 
S)er  Sna'be,  — n,  pi.  —w,  boy. 
„    Sued^t,  — C8,  pi.  — e,  servant. 
„    Siio'd}en,  — 9,  ;?/.  — ,  bone. 
„    Sno'teii,  — «,  f»/.  — ,  knot. 
„    ^Q&i,  — e8,  pi.  Si5'd;e,  cook. 

2)ie  Sij'c^iu,  — ,  pi.  *nen,  cook. 
So'd^cn,  V.  tr.  and  intr.,  to  cook,  boil. 
3)er  toHer,  —8,  />/.  — ,  trunk,  chest. 
„    ^q\)\,  — C§,  ;*/.  — e,  cabbage. 

®er  to^t'acfcr,  field  of  cabbages. 
2)ic  to^'Ie,  — ,  pi.  — n,  coal. 
Som'men,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  come. 
So'mifc^,  ac?;.,  comical. 
2)cr  .^ommi§',  — ,  pi.  — ,  clerk. 
2)ieSonfcffiou',  — ,  pi.  —en,  confes- 

si  on  of  faith. 
S)cr  tongre^',  — eS,  pl.—i,  Congress. 
„    Sij'nig,  — §,  lit.  — e,  king. 

Sij'nigiic^,  adj.,  royal. 

2)a8  Sij'nigreid;,  — S,  />^  — e, 

kingdom. 
iJbn'neu,  v.  ir.,  to  be  able. 
2)er  topf,  —t^,pl.  So>fe,  head. 

2)a«  So)}f  we^,  — «,  headijche. 
.  „    Sorb,  —t9,pl.  .Si5r'bc,  b:!>ket. 

2)er  5lorb'mad;er,  basket-maket 


456 


VOCABULARY. 


SDaS  S?orn,  — e?,  pi  lor'ner,  grain, 
®er  .ftor'^er,  — g,  pL  —,  body.  [com. 
^o'ften,  V.  intr.,  to  cost. 

^loft'bar,  adj.,  costly. 

2)te  ^oft'barfeit,  — ,  costliness. 
2)ic  ^raft,    — ,   pi.    ^raf'te,  might, 

strength.  [force. 

^'raft'ooU,  adj.,  energetic,  full  of 
iDer  Hra'gen,  — §,  pi.  —,  or  ^rci'gen, 
4trauf,  adj.,  sick.  [collar. 

2)ie  ^rant'^eit,  — ,  pi.  — eu,  sick- 
ness, [sickness. 

3)a§  ^ran'fenlager,  — ^,  sick-bed, 
2)er  ^rauj,  — eg,  />/.  ^ran'^e,  wreath. 
2)a^  ^raut;  — eS,  /j^.  ^rau'ter,  plant, 
„    kxtwi,  — tx',  pi.  — e,  cross,  [herb. 
2)ie  ^reu3'fat;rt,  — ,  pi.  — en,>^    cru- 
S)er  ^reu^'^ug,  — 8,  pi.  *3Uge,)   sade. 
r/    ^reu'jer,  — 8,  />/.  — ,  creuzer. 
„    ^rieg,  — e«,  ;>/.  — e,  war. 

2)ie  ^riegg'not^,  calamity  of  war. 
^fri'ttfd;,  adj.,  critical. 
2)ie  ^ro'ne,  — ,  pi.  —n,  crown. 

2)er  f  ron':|}rtnj5,  —en,  ;>^.  —en, 
prince  royal.  [mug. 

S)er  ^rng,  —eg,  /»/.  ^riige,  pitcher, 
^rumm,  adj.,  crooked. 


^rnmm"6etntg,  adj.,  bow-legged. 
2)er  ^u'd;en,  — §,  ;>/.  — ,  cakw. 
S)te  iiu'gel,  — ,  />/.  — ii,  ball. 
2)er  ^u'tuf,  — g,  ^/.  — e,  cuckoo. 
3)ie  ^uubfd^aft,  — ,  />/.  —en,  knowl- 
edge, information, 
fiinftig,  adj.,  future. 
2)ie  tunft,  -',pL  tun'fte,  art. 

2)er^un[t'ftci§,  —eg,  artistic  in- 
dustry. 
„    Mnft'ter,  — g,  />/.  — ,  artist. 

^iinft'Iid;,  adj.,  artificial. 

2)er  ^unft'fd^aij,  —z^,pl.  *jd)%, 
artistic  treasure. 

2)ag  ^unft'werf,  work  of  art. 
2)er  f  ur'fiirft,  -en,  ;>/.  -en,  elector, 
tur^,  ac/;*.,  short. 

^urj'njeilig,  adj.,  amusing. 
2)ag  ^u'^fer,  — g,  copper. 

2)ag  .^u^ft^rftedjen,  — g,  engrav- 
ing on  copper. 

3)er  ^u>ter[ted;er,  — g,  ;?/.  — , 
engraver  on  copper. 
S)er  ^u§,  —eg, ;?/.  ^ij'fe,  kiss. 
Mf'fen,  V.  tr.,  to  kiss. 
2)te  ^il'fte,  — ,  pi  — n,  coast. 
S)er  ^ut'fd;er,  — g,  pi  — ,  coachmaB. 


Sa'^en,  v.  intr.,  to  laugh. 

Sci'c^eln,  v.  intr.,  to  smile,     [cal. 

Sa'i^erlid),  ac?/.,  ludicrous,  comi- 
3)er  Sac^g,  —eg,  />/.  Sdc^'fe,  salmon, 
^a'ten,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  load,  ^ing,  cargo. 

S)te  Sa'bung,  — ,  pc.  —en,  lad- 
Sa'ben,  v. tr.,  to  summon,  invite. [shop- 
2)er  ?a'ben,  — g,  pi  Sciben,  shutter, 
2)te  Sa'ge,  — ,  p?.  — n, position,  place. 
2;ag  Sa'ger,  — ^,pl  Sci'ger,  bed,  camp 
So^m,  ac?;'.,  lamo. 

Sab'nien,  t?.  tr.,  to  make  lame. 
I5)ag  Samm,  — t^,pl  Scim  mer,  lamb. 
3)te  Sam'^e,  — e.  pZ. — n,  lamp.  [land. 
S)ag  Sanb,  — eg,  pi  Sdn'ber,  country, 

2)te  Sanbmac^t,  land  forces, army 


®er  Sanb'mann,  countryman. 
„    Sanbg'mann,  (fellow)-couii- 
tryman. 
S)te  Sanb'reifc,  journey  by  land. 
„   Sanb'fd;aft,— ,i?/.— en,land. 
scape.  [painter, 

©er  ?anb'fd?aftgmaTer,  landscape 
tt    Sanb'  f olbat,  land  soldier  v mi- 
litia). 
S)ag  Sanb'botf,  country  people. 
Sanb'martg,  adv.,  landward. 
3)er  $?onb'n)tnb,  land  breeze. 
S)er  2anb'n)trt^,  farmer,  landlord, 
Sang,  adj.,  long. 

Sang'e,  adj.,  a  long  while. 
S)ie  Sdng'e,  — ,  length. 


VOCABULARY. 


457 


I'an^'fain,  adj.,  slow. 

i*aug' weilig,  adj.,  slow. 
2)er  I>^drm,  — c8,  noise,  bustle,  uproar. 
Saf'feu,  V.  ir.  tr.,  to  let,  leave,  permit, 

order,  to  have  (done). 
2)ic  ^aft,  — ,  pi.  —en,  burden. 

2)a8  Saft't^tcr,  beast  of  burden. 
Satei'iiifd;,  adj.,  Latin. 
Sau'fen,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  run. 

2)er  2auf, — c3,  />/.  Sau'fc,  course. 
?Ollt,  ac(;.,  loud,  prep.,  according  to, 

by  virtue  of. 
Siiu'teil,  V.  intr.,  to  sound,  be  rung. 
Se'bCll,  V.  intr.,  to  live. 

2)a8  Sc'ben,  — g,  life. 

Seben'big,  a</;.,  lively,  active. 

Seb'^aft,  adj.,  lively,  active. 

2)ie  ^e'beiiiJart,— ,  style  of  living. 

2)cr2e'beii8lauf,  course  of  life. 

2)te  HiJe'bcnSniittel,  means  of  ex- 
istence, necessaries  of  life. 
S)a3 1'e'ber,  — «,  ;>/.  — ,  leather. 
2eer,  adj. ,  empty,  vacant. 
2)ic  2ec;atton',  — ,  pi.  — en,  legation. 
2e'gcn,  v.  tr.,  to  lay,  put,  place. 

(?ln'Iegen,  toput  on. 

(Sei'Iegcn,  to  give  to. 
Set^'reu,  v.  tr.,  to  teach. 

2)ic  Se^'rc,  — ,  pi. 

2)er  Se^'rer,  —6,  ;;A  — ,  teacher. 

3)ic  Secretin, — ,  p/.  — en,  teacher 

2)a8  Se^r'ja^r,  year  of  study 

Sc^r'rcid'   adj.,  instructive. 
Select,  adj.,  light,  easy.  *  [ry). 

2etb,  adv.  (eg  t^ut  mir  (eib,  I  am  sor- 
Sci'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  suffer.        [grief. 

2)aS  Sei'ben,  —9,  pi.—,  suffering, 

?ei'ben|^aftUd;,  adj.,  passionate. 
S)ie  Sci'cr,  — ,pl.  — n,  lyre. 
?ei^'cn,  V.  ir.  tr.,  to  loan,  lend. 
!£>ie  Sein'wanb,  — ,  linen. 
?ei'fe,  adj.,  low,  soft,  gentle.      [plish- 
Sei'ften,  v.  tr.,  to  do,  perform,  accom- 
Sei'ten,  v.  tr. ,  to  lead,  conduct. 
'S)xt  Settion',  — n,  pi.  —en,  lesson. 


2)tc  Ser'c^c,  — ,  pi.  — n,  laiL 

Ser'ncn,  v.  tr.,  to  learn. 

2e'fen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  read.  [er. 

2)a§^e'febud;,  reading-book,  read 
2e^t,  adj.,  last. 

Setj'tcr,  adj.,  latter. 
2)er  !i!eud;t't^unn,  light-house. 
2)ie  Scu'te  (pi.),  people. 
2)aS  2id;t,— eg,;>/.  — er,  light,  candle. 
Sie'bcn,  v.  tr.,  to  love. 

ikh,  adj.,  dear,  agreeable. 

2)ie  Sie'be,  — ,  love. 

Sie'bcr,  adv.,  rather,  sooner. 

2ieb'li(^,  adj.,  lovely,  charming. 

S)er  2ieb'Iing,  pi.  — c,  favorite. 

Sie'ben§iriirbiv],  adj.,  amiable. 
2)a§  2ieb,  — e§,  pi.  — er,  song. 
Sie'fern,  v.  tr.,  to  deliver. 

3)ie  !i!ie'feiung,  —,pl.  —en,  num- 
ber (of  a  serial  publication). 
Sie'gen,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  lie,  recline. 
2)ie  l^imoua'be,  — ,  lemonade. 
i  2inf,  adj.,  left,  left  hand. 

Siufg,  a(/y.,  to  the  left  hand. 
2)ie  Siteratur',  —,/?/.— en,  literature. 

Sitera'rifd;,  at/;*.,  literary. 
2)a8  Sob,  — e§,  praise. 

So' ben,  v.  tr.,  to  praise, 
n,  doctrine.   2)ag  Soc^,  — e8,  />/.  S5'd;er,  hoie,  cavity 
2ot)'nen,  r.  <r.,  to  reward. 
•DaS  ?oo8,  — e§,  i?/.  — c,  lot. 

2o8,  arf;.,  free  from,  without. 
SB'fcn,  V.  tr.,  to  loosen,  solve. 
®er  25'wc,  — n,  pi.  — n,  lion. 
3)te  Snft,  — ,  pi.  Siif'te,  air. 
Sil'gen,  v.  intr.,  to  lie,  tell  falsehoods. 

2)ic  2u'ge,/)Z.  — n,  lie,  falsehood, 

2)er  Silg'ncr,  — 8,  pi.  — ,  liar. 
2)er  2um>en,  — ,  pi.  —en,  rag,  tatter 

2)aS  Snm'^en^a)>ter,  paper  (made 
of  rags). 
2)te  ?ufl,  — ,  /?/.  Sii'fle,  pleasure,  joy, 

desire,  inclination. 

Sii'ftern,  ac^'.,  longing,  repacious. 

Su'ftig,  adj.,  jolly,  merry. 


u 


458 


VOCABULARY. 


Ma'6)zn,  V.  tr.,  tomcake,  do. 

2)ie  mad)t—,pL))Md}'%might, 
power. 

gjjad/tig,  adj.,  mighty,  powerful, 
having  control. 
9J2abame',  Mrs. 
£)ie  2)iagb,  — ,  pi.  Wd^"Ot,  maid. 

S)a§  9}Zab'd?en,  —^,pl.  —,  girl, 
maid. 
®a§  3)Jal)l,  — e§,  p/.  — e,  repast. 
®er  2Rai,  — g,  May. 
S)ie  9)iaje[tat',  — , ;?/.  — en,  majesty. 
®a§  3JlaI,  —i^,pL  — e,  time. 
2JJa'len,  y.  tr.,  to  paint. 

S)er  aJJa'Ier,  — g,  ;^/.— ,  painter. 

®ie  9J?aterei',  — ,  art  of  painting. 

SJJalerijc^,  adj.,  picturesque. 
'SRcin,  pron.,  one,  a  person,  we,. they. 
W.Cin'<i)tX,  pron.,  many  (a  one). 

^andfmai,  adv.,  many  a  time. 
2JJaug'etn,  y.  Intr.,  to  lack,  foil. 
S)er  'Mann,  —t^,pl.  SO^cin'ner,  man. 

S)ie  2JJann' jc^aft,  —,pl.—n,  body 
of  men,  crew. 
2)er  aJJan'tel,— e§,  2?/.  SJian'tel,  man- 
tle, cloak. 
2)er  SKartt,  — eg,7?;.2J?ar!'te,  market. 
„    9JJarfd),—e§,;?/.3J?ar'fd;e,  march, 

marching  ;  ^u^'marfc^,  going  on 

foot. 

,f    SJJarj,  — e§,  March.        [engine. 

2)te  9}?afdi)t'iTC,  — ,  j»;.  — n,  machine, 

2)er  3}?aft,  —eg,  —en,  mast,     [stuff. 

2)te  3J2ate'rte,  — ,  pi.  —en,  matter, 

r;    SJlat^ema'ti!,  — ,  mathematics. 
®cr  aJJatro'fe,  — n,  pi.  —n,  sailor. 
2)te  SD^au'er,  — ,  pi.  —n,  wall. 
2)a3  3)fanl,  — eS,/?/.  ^Rdu'Ier,  mouth. 

3)ic  2«aund?ette,   — ,  pZ.    — n, 
slap  on  the  mouth  or  face. 
^cr  90?au'rer,  — g,  /;/.  — ,  mason. 
®ie  2I?ebtjin',  — ,  medicine. 
2)ag  gjJeer,  — c§,  — e,  sea.  [bay. 

S)er  3JJeer'bufen,  —?,;>/.   ~,  gulf, 


®ie  SJieer'engc,  —,/>?.— n,straita 
„   aJiee'regflcidje,  — ,  surface  ot 
the  sea. 
S)er  ajJeer'retttg,  — 8,  horseradish. 
2)a§  aJJe^I,  —eg,  flour. 
W.ti)X  (comp.  of  iJtel),  more. 

2Jfel/rere,j9ron.,  several. 

9Jie^r'malg,  arfy.,  several  times. 
SKei'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  avoid. 
2)tc  2)Jerie,  — ,  pi.  —n,  mile. 

2JJei'Ienn)ett,  adv.,  miles  distant. 
3JJetn,  jjrow.,  my.  [mine. 

S)er  ajleine,  o?'  ber  9JJetmge,  pron., 
SRei'nen,  v.  intr.,  to  mean,  think. 

S)te  SWet'nung,  —,  pi.— zn,  opin- 
ion, idea. 
2}Jeift  (superl.  of 'Old) f  most. 

9}Zet'[teng,  ac?y.,  mostly. 
2)er  2Rei'[ter,  — g,  pi.  — ,  master. 

9JJet'[ter^Cift,  adj.,  masterly. 

2)er  SPJei'fterfanger,  master-singer 

2)ag  9JJet'ftcrftii(f ,  masterpiece. 
SJJel'ben,  v.  tr.,  to  announce,   make 

known. 
S)te  9Keng'e,  — ,  pl.—n,  crowd,  quan- 
tity, [man  being. 
2)er  9JJenj(^,  —en,  jaZ.  —en,  man,  hu- 

9}Zenf(^'Itct),  ac?;".,  human. 

3)ag  3Jlen'f(i)en!tnb,  son  of  man, 
human  being. 
SD'Zer'fen,  v.  tr.,  to  mark. 

S)ag  aJiert'mal,  — g, /?/.— e,  char-, 
acteristic  sign. 

2J?ert'n)Urbig,  adj.,  remarkable. 
S)te  SJJef  fe,  — ,  ;?/.  — n,  mass,  fair. 
9Wef' fen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  measure. 
S)ag  3JJef  fer,  — g,^?/.  — ,  knife. 
5)ag  gjJetatt',  — g,  jo?.  — e,  metal. 
SJhe'tben,  y.  «r.,  to  hire,  rent. 
2)ie  2}JtId),  — ,  milk. 

3)ie  2JJiId/ftra^e,  Milky  Way. 
9D?iIb,  of/j.,  mild. 
SJiin'ber,  aJ;'.,  less  ;  muibeft,  least 

2)?in'be[teng^  adv.,  at  least. 


VOCABULARY. 


459 


Dcr  aJiim'ftcr,— S,  pi.—,  minister, 
member  of  the  executive  cabinet, 
ambassador.  [minister, 

2)er  iDJiui'fter^^rafibcnt',  prime- 

S)cr  iliin'nefanger,  — 8,  minnesinger. 

2)ie  aj?inu'te,  — ,  pi.  — w,  minute. 

2J?iJ3'braud^cn,  v.  tr.,  to  misuse,  abuse. 

2)er  iD?i)'fet^citer,—S, ;>/.—,  evil-doer 

^JP^iiB'faUcn,  r.  ir.  intr.,  to  displease. 

9.Uit,y>r<7>.,  with,  by,  at,  in. 

S)er  iOiit'biir^er,  — S,  fellow-citizen. 

9Diit'ije{;en,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  accomjjany, 

3)?it'ncl)men,  v.  ir.  tr.^  to  take  with. 

Tl\t'id}nli!iQ,adj.,  accessory  toacrime. 

2Jiit'f))rcc:^en,  v.  ir.  intr. ,  to  speak  with. 

2)ev  ai)iit'tag,—g,  midday,  noon,  south 

2)ic  2)iit'tc,  — ,  midst,  middle. 

S)a«  Wl'it'td  — §,  pi.—,  middle,  means 

iD^it'tcn,  a</y.,  middle,  central. 

2}2it'tcl^(4el[t),  prep.,  by  means  of. 

2)a^  dJiit'tclalter,  — «,  middle  ages. 

aJlit'telniaOtg,  adj.,  moderate. 

2!;cr  SRIt'tclpuntt,  central  point,  focus. 

Tie  3Jiit'tcrnari}t,  midnight. 

5D?it'tbei(eu,  v.  tr.,  to  communicate. 
9Kit'tbeiIcn§mert(),  adj.,  worth  re- 
peating,      [communication. 
Xk  2Rit'tbeiIung,  — ,  pi.  —en, 

f^^'^'^'r^-'^d  Wednesday. 

2)ie  2Jiit'anrtung, — ,  co-operation,  aid 
3)a«  2Wi5'M,— ,;>/.—,  and  tic  2)?i)'bel, 

— ,  pi.  — n,  piece  of  furniture  (in 

/*/.  furniture). 

aJJcbli'rcn,  v.  tr.,  to  furnish. 
2)ic  SDZo'bc,  — ,  pi.  —n,  fiishion.  • 

aJiebern',  adj.,  modem. 


2)a§  SDZobctl',  — §,  pi.  — c,  model. 
3}ii>'gen,  v.  ir.,  to  be  permitted  (may). 

WoQ'lid),  adj.,  possible. 
2)tc  '^lo\\axA)'u',—,pL  —u,  monarchj? 
2)er  2)io'nat,  — S,  />/.  — e,  month. 

2)?o'nat(id),  adj.,  monthly. 
2)ev  aJioiib,  — cc,  ;>/.  — e,  moon. 
3)er  2)ion'tag,  — «<,  Monday. 
2J2or'ben,y.  tr.,  to  murder. 
2)er  3)?orb,  —eg,  ;>/.  — c,  murder. 

2)er  aJJor'ber,  — §,  murderer. 

2)ie2)Zorb't^at,— ,y.— en,  hom- 
icide, murderous  act. 
2)cr  3Tior'gen,  — g,  p/.  — ,  morning. 

9}?cr'ijcn,  adv.,  to-morrow. 

SJJcr'gcn?,  adv.,  in  the  nionn'ng. 
Tie  9Jii5'toc or  2}ceive, —,/;/.  — n,mew, 

sea-gull. 
„    SDiii'cfe,  — ,  pi.  — ii,  gnat,  midge. 
SJfii'be,  adj.,  weary,  tired. 
Tie  WiiVht,  —,pl.  —  n,  pains,  care. 
„    mixifk,  —,  pi.  — n,  mill. 

Ter  2}iiU;rfidn,  — e«,  mill-stone. 
Ter  SDZimb,  -t^.pl.  93hin'bcr,  mouth, 

Tic  2)]unb'art,— ,/)/.— en,  dialect 

2Jiiiu'big,  adj.,  of  age. 
Tag  3J?ufc'um,  —6,  /?/.  2Jiufe'en,  mu- 
seum. 
Tie  2Hu[it',  — ,  music.  [cian. 

Ter  SPiu'fitcr,  —%,pl.  —,  musi- 
Tcr  aJZuffcIiu',  -  6,  muslin. 
9}?iif'jen,  v.  ir.,  to  be  obliged  (must.) 
Tag  2J?u'fter,  —«,/>/.  — ,  pattern. 
Ter  SD^Utb,  —eg,  mood,  courage,  spirit 

2J?u'tf;ig,  at/;.,  courageous. 
Tic  aWiit'tcr,  — ,  pi.  3J?ut'ter,  mother. 
„   aJJiltj'e,  — ,  pl.—n,  cap. 


SSI. 


S^iad;,  prep.,  after,  behind,  toward, 
according  to.  [copy. 

g^ad)'abmen,  v.  tr.  and  intr.,  to  imitate, 

Ter  9Jadi'bar,  — g  or  — n,  pi.  — n, 
neighbor. 

9ia(!^'bem,  adv.,  aftenvard,  c,  after. 


3^a(^'fotnnten,  v.  intr.,  to  come  after, 
act  in  accordance  with,  accept. 

9iad;'Iaffig,  adj.,  negligent,  careless. 
Tie  gfJad/Iciffigteit,  — ,  negligence 

Ter  5f2ad)'mittag,  — g,  afternoon. 

S^iad^'mittagg    adv.,  in  the  afternoon. 


460 


VOCABULARY. 


2)te  5^ad/rid;t,  — ,  pi  —en,  tidings, 
intelligence,  report. 

S'Zad^'fe^eu,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  examine ;  intr.', 
to  look. 

g^ad/fl^riugeu,  v.  intr.,  to  spring  after. 

2)ie  aia^t,  —,  pL  "^M&i'tt,  night. 

2)ie  9^ad/tigatt,  — ,  pi.  — eu,  nightin- 
gale. 

g^iac^ft,  ao(;"., next ;  ^re/?.,next  to,  next. 

S)er  ^jiacf'en,  — g,  />/.  — ,  neek. 

9la(ft,  ««(/.,  naked. 

S)ie  9ia'Det,  — ,  pi.  — n,  needle. 

S)er  S^a'gel,  — g,  jo/.  Sf^a'get,  nail. 

9^a^  or  na'^e,  a^\,  near,  nigh. 

2)ie  9ia'^e,  — ,  nearness. 

9^a'^en,  y.  *nir.  andreji.,}       to  ap- 

gZci'^ern,  "      "      "      )     proach. 

5JJa'^en,u.  tr.,  to  sew. 

S)ie  ^^al/mafc^tne,    sewing-ma- 
chine. 
f,    ^^ia^'nabel,  sewing  needle. 

3)ic  ^fial/rung, — ,/>Z.— en,food,  nour- 
ishment. 

2)og  ^at/rung^mtttel,  food,  provision. 

^tx^a'rm,-n^,pl.-n,)^^^ 
„    Sfla'nmx,—^,pL—,  ) 
^fla'mentlid),  adv.,  namely. 
SRam'lid),pron.,  the  same. 

S)er  ^f^arr,  —en,  /?/.  —en,  fool,  buf- 
foon. 

2)ie  yia'\t,  — ,pl.  — n,  nose. 

9^a'fen)et8,   adj.,   pert,  forward, 
impertinent,  saucy. 

Sfla^,  adj.,  wet. 

I)te  ^flatten',  — ,  pi.  —en,  nation. 
yiationaV,  adj.,  national. 

S)te  5^atur',  — ,  nature. 

9^atitr'itc^,  adj.,  natural. 

9'^e'ben,  prep.,  near,  by  the  side  of. 
2)er  ^Ze'bennmftanb,    incidental 
circumstance,  particulars. 

jyJeBft,  prep.,  near,  together  with. 

2)er  9^ef'fe,  — n,  pi.  — n,  nephew. 

5^et)'men,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  take. 

S'iein,  adv.,  no. 


2)te  ^^Zerfe,— ,/»/.  —en,  pink. 
S^ien'nen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  name. 
S)a«  ^fie^,  —eg,  />/.  — e,  net. 
^^ien,  ao?;'.,  new. 

®te  9ieu'gterbe,  — ,  curiosity. 

SfJeu'gtertg,  adj.,  curious,  inquisi- 
tive. 

9^eu'lid;,  adv.,  lately,  recently. 
9^enn,  nine. 

^ienn'tcigtg,   adj.,   lasting    nine 
days. 
^l6^t,  adv.,  not. 

^\6^t§,  pron.,  nothing. 
S)te  9^td;'te,  — ,  pi.  — n,  niece. 
'iflxt,  adv.,  never. 

9^ie'mat§,  adv.,  never. 

'^k'mani),  pron.,  nobody. 

5^tm'mer,  adv.,  never. 
9fite'ber,  adj.,  low;  adv.,  low,  down. 

9^te'berbi*ennen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  bum 
down. 

9^ie'berrei^en,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  tear 
down. 
5^0' bet,  adj.,  noble. 
9^od^,  adv.,  still,  yet ;  conj.,  nor. 

en    /J  of  North. 

„    ^fZor'ben,  — S,i 

9^i3rb'Iid;,  ac?;*.,  northern  ;  adv., 
northerly. 

9?orbtceftlid;,  adj. ,  northwestern. 
2)te  9^0'te,  — ,  pl.—n,  bank-note. 
„    9^0t^,  — ,  /)/.  g^Zo't^e,  calamity. 

need,  trouble. 

2)er  9^ot^'faII,  case  of  need. 

gfjo'tbtg,  adj.,  necessary,  needci 

9fZi5'tt)tg  ^aben,  to  need. 
2)er  5^otoem'ber,  —8,  November. 
2)te  5^u'bct,  — ,  pi.  — n,  vermicelli. 

"    ^"'»"^^^-i^^-^^i'U"mber. 
„    gfZnm'mer,  — ,jo/.  — ,) 
Sflnn,  adv.,  now;  well,  well  then. 
Sflm,  adv.,  only. 
g^Zu^'en,  u.  fr.,  to  use. 
I         3)er  g^uljen,  —8,  profit,  use. 
I         g'Mtj'Uc^,  ac//".,  useful. 


VOCABULARY. 


461 


D. 


D  lor  O^!  interj.,  oh! 
Ob,  conj.,  whether,  if. 
D'ben,  adv.,  above,  up  stairs. 

O'berl^alb,  prep.,   above,  on   the 
upper  side  of. 

2)ie  0'berflacl;c,  upper  surface. 

2)a«  O'berfeber,  upper  leather. 

2)er  O'berft,  — cii,  />/.— cn,colonel 
Obgleicb',  conj.,  ahhough. 
5Da«  Obft,  — e^,  fmit. 
2)cr  O'cean,  —9,  pi.  — e,  ocean. 
S)a«  Otta'o',—^, pi.— t  and  *«(,  octavo 
D'bcr,  conj.,  or. 

2)er  O'fen,  —^,pl.  Oe'fcn,  8tove,oven 
£)j'fen,  adj.,  open. 

Offeubar,  adj.,  open,  plain. 


Offcnba'rcn,  v.  tr., to  make  public. 

Oef'tentlic^,  adj.,  public. 

Oeff'ncn,  v.  tr.,  to  open. 
Oft,  adv.,  often. 
£)\)'nt,prep.,  without. 
2)a«  Ocl,  — c«,;>/.  — e,  oil. 
2)aS  O^'fer,  — ,  pi.  — ,  sacrifice. 
Ora'uicn,  — 8  iy^og.),  Orange. 
Orb'uen,  v.  tr.,  to  order,  arrange. 
2)ic  Or'brc,  — ,  or  Or'ber,  — ,  order. 
S)er  Drganift', — cn,;j/. — en,  organist 
„   Ort,  — cS,  pi.  Oer'ter,  pkce. 


zn,  —8,1 


east. 


„  O'ftet 

Ot\i'{\6.},adj.,  eastern. 
2)ie  O'ftcni  {pi.),  Easter. 


?* 


-c8,  pi. 


pair ;    ClU 


2)a8  ^aar,  — 

:|)aar,  a  few. 
S)cr  ^alaft',— e^,;?/.  ^'ala'fle, palace. 
2)ie  ^al'mc, — ,pl.  — n,  palm. 
■5)er  ^an'tber,  —8,  ;>/.  — ,  panther. 
„   ^antoffel,  —8,  p/.  — n,  slipper. 
'^I^an'jcrn,  v.  ir.,  to  furnish  with  a  coat 

of  mail ;  ge))au'5ert,  iron-clad. 
2)a8  papier',— 8, pi.  —t,  paper. 
„   ^arabicj'ma,— 8,2?/.  ^arabig'mcn, 
paradigm. 
2)ie  *'^artie',  — ,  pi.  ^artie'en,  party. 
2)cr  ^af3,  — eS,  ;>/.  ^ciffe,  passport. 

„   ^affagier', — %,pl  — c, passenger, 
^af  fen,  V.  intr.,  to  fit,  become. 

^af'feub,  adj.,  proper,  suitable, 
becoming. 
2)ic  ^crio'be,  — ,  pi.  — n,  period. 
„   ^^erfon',  — ,  pi.  — en,  person, 
'•^erfijn'lid^,  adj.,  personal. 
2)a8  ^^et'fc^aft,  — e8,  pl.—t,  seal. 
2)er  'ijfcf'fer,  —8,  pepper. 

„    %\txCmo^,  — 8,  pi.  — e,  pfennig. 
2)vi8  %^ferb,  — e8,  pi.  — C,  horse. 
2)ie  ^fing'ften,  —8,  Whitsuntide. 
„    ^flan'je,  ~,  pi.  — n,  plant. 


•ipflilcf'cn,  V.  tr.,  to  pluck,  pick. 
2)er  ^flug,— e8,  pi.  ''^flii'ge,  plough. 
'^a^  ''i^fuub,  —t^,  pi.  — e,  pound. 
2)te  ^bilofopf^ie',  — ,  philosophy. 

^^iIcfo'pl;ifc^,  adj.,  philosophical. 
2)ic  ^{)ra'fe,  — ,  pi.,  — n,  phrase. 
2)er  ^^lan,  — c8,  i?/.  — c  or  ^Ici'ne, 

plan. 
„    ''|3Ia^,  — e8,  pi.  ^la^'c,  place. 

^?fa^  ncbmeu,  to  take  a  seat, 
^lotj'Iid;,  adj.,  sudden. 
^Iftn'bern,  v.  tr.,  to  plunder. 
2)ic  '!|?oefie'  — ,  poetry. 
„   ^!J3oIijei',  — ,  pi.  — en,  police. 

2)er  '^Polijei'biener,  policeman, 
^onti'nifc^,  adj.,  Pontine. 
^Qi9i  ^ortemonnaie',— 8,i?/.— 8,pur8€, 

pocket-book. 
2)ie  portion',  — ,  pi.  — en,  portion. 
„   ^oft,  — , pi.  — en,  post,  post-office 

^a^  ^oft'amt,  — e8,  post-office. 
2)ie  ^racijt, — ,  splendor,  magnificenea 

2)er  ^rad^t'anjug,  splendid  suit 
of  clothes. 

^rac^'tig,af//'.,     )      splendid, 

^rad^t'lJoU,  adj.,)    magnificent. 


462 


YOCABULARY. 


2)er  ^raftbent',  —en,  pi.  —en,  presi- 
dent. 
?j3re'bigen,  v.  tr.,  to  preach. 

2)er  ^re'btger,  — §,  preacher. 
2)te  ^re'btgt, — ,pl. — en,  sermon 
S)er  ^'retg,  — e§,  pi.  — e,  price. 
„    ^'ri'ma^2Bect;feI,  — g,  first  bill  of 

exchange. 
„  ^rie'fter,  — e8,  pi.  — ,  priest. 
„   ^rin3,—en,i?/. —en,  prince, 
^robi'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  try. 


!^a§  Cuabrat',  — e§,  pi.  — e,  square. 
2)ie  Ouabrat'meile,  square  mile. 
„   Ouart,  — e§,  pi.  — e,  quart. 
S)te  OueUe,  — , ;»/.  — n,  source. 


3)er  ^rofef for,  —?,  pi  ^rofeffo'ren, 
3)ie  ^^^it^o'fa, — ,  prose.         [professor. 

^rofa'tf(^,  adj.,  prosaic. 
2)a§  ^^robtant'fd;iff,    ship    conveying 

provisions  for  the  army,  transport 
2)ie  ^roiJinj',  — ,  pi.  — en,  province. 
2)er  ^fdm, — t^,pl.  — en,  psalm. 
„    ^ut3,  — z^fpl.  — e,  pulse. 
„   ^un!t,  -eg,  pi.  ^unt'te,  point. 

^unfti'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  point,  dot. 
!  2)ie  ^up'pt,  — ,  pi.  — n,  doll. 

Ouitt,  adj.,  free  (from). 

2)te  Outt'tung,  — ,  receipt. 

2)erOuotient',  —en,  pi.  —en,  quo- 
tient. 


Ser  9?a'be,  — n,  ;>/.  — n,  raven. 
2)ie  9ia'd;e,  — ,  revenge.  [self. 

9ia'ct)en,  y.  re//.,  to  avenge  him- 
9?a'gen,  v.  intr.,  to  reach,  project. 

§erDor'ragen,  to  project. 
S)er  §iang,  —eg,  pi.  ^tcing'e,  rank,  or- 
der, degree,  class. 
$ftafd),  adj.,  quick,  swift,  rash. 
2)er  dlati,  — e?,  counsel,  advice. 

2)er  9tatf),  — e§,;;/.  dla'tt)t,  coun- 
selor. 

S)a§  9?at{)'^au8,  council -house, 
city  hall.  [guess. 

dta'ti^zn,  V.  ir.  intr.,  to  advise, 

2)a§  ^Jcit^'fel,  — g,  js/.  — ,  riddle, 
^er  SJaub,  —eg,  ;?/.  — ,  robbery. 

2)er  9{au'ber,  —^,pl.—,  robber. 
9Jau'(i)en,  v.  tn^r.,  to  smoke. 

2)er  5Rauc^,  —eg,  smoke. 
2)ag  ^{eB'^u^n,  — eg,^?/.  3ieb'P^ner, 

partridge. 
2)ie  9fe'6e,  — ,  /??.  — n,  grape  vine. 
'Siec^'nen,  v.  tr.,  to  reckon.       [count. 

S)te  9ie(^'nung,  — ,  jo/.  —en,  ac- 
„   9le'd;enf(^att,  — ,  account. 
9ted)t,  adj.,  right. 

2)ie  ^cc^'te,   — ,  right  hjnid. 


SJec^tg,  ac/y.,  to  the  right. 
2)ag  9?ec^t,  —eg,  or  bie  ^Jiedjtg'- 
n)iffenfd)aft, — ,  jurisprudence 
9?ecf'en,  v.  tr.  and  reji.,  to  extend. 
9Je'ben,  v.  intr.,  to  speak,  talk. 
9^eb'ItC^,  adj.,  honest,  fair,  brave. 
2)ie  ^Reformation',  — ,  reformation. 
„   Ste'gel,  — ,  pi.  — n,  rule. 

^Re'gelma^ig,  ac?;*.,  regular,    [ty. 
®te  9Je'geIma^ig!ett,  — ,  regulari- 
QfJe'gen,  v.  tr.,  to  stir,  excite. 
2)er  5Re'gen,  — g,  rain,  raining. 

9Reg'nen,  v.  intr.  impers. ,  to  rain. 
S)er  9Je'genbogen,  — g,  rainbow. 
„    9ie'gengu|,  —eg,  pi.  ^iiffe, 

sudden  and  violent  rain. 
„    9fJe'genfc^irm,  —eg,  pi.  — <, 
umbrella. 
2)er  9fegent',  —en,  pi.  —en,  regent. 
S)te  9^egen'ttn,  — ,  pi.  — nen,  re- 
gent. 
9tegie'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  rule,  govern. 

2)ie  9Regte'rung,  —,/?/.— en,  gov- 
ernment, [regiment. 
2)ag  9fJegiment',  — eg,  pi.  — er, 
2)ie  S^e'gnng,  — ,pl. — en,  movement, 
motion. 


VOCABULARY. 


463 


3)a9  $Rc^-  — c«,  pi.  —t,  roe,  deer. 

Diei'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  rub,  grind. 

SReic^,  ac/;'.,  rich. 

2)cr  jReid^'t^um,— e8,p/.4^ilmer, 
riches,  wealth,  opulence. 

2)a8  Dicic^,  — eel,  />/. — c,  reign,  govern- 
ment, kingdom,  empire. 
2)ie  9{eirt;^'DeifanimluiU3,  Assem- 
bly of  the  States  of  the  (Ger- 
man) Empire. 

$Reit,  adj.,  ripe. 

2)ie  l!)iei't;C;  — ,pl. — n,  row,  nmk,  turn 

2)er  ^tm,—z^,pL  — e,  rhyme. 

9iein,  at/;.,  pure,  clean. 

2)ie  9ieiu'l;eit,  — ,  purity. 

?Rci'ne(fc--5udj8,  Keynard  the  fox. 

S)cr  5)iei^,  — c8,  rice,  [rice  pudding. 
2)er  9ici6>ubfcing,  — «,  i?/.  —8, 
S)ic  9?ci0'fup^e,  rice  soup. 

9Jei'fcn,  v.  intr.,  to  travel. 

2)ie  9?eife,  — ,  />/.  —n,  journey. 
2)cr  OJci'fctoffer,  —^,pL  —,  trav- 
eling trunk. 

3Jei'6cn,  V.  ir.  tr.,  to  tear. 

9iei'ten,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  ride  (on  horse- 
back). 

Siei'jcn,  v.  tr.,  to  irritate,  provoke. 

Xk  ^Jeligiou',  — ,  religion. 

?)^')jari'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  repair. 

S)ic  9lc^etir'ubr,  repeating  watch. 

jDcr  9Je^rafentaiit',— en,/j/. — en,  rep- 
resentative. 

Xk  ^tpiibiW,  —,  pi.  —en,  republic. 

S)cr$Reft,  — t^,pl. — e,  rest,  remainder 

9Jet'ten,  v.  tr.,  to  save. 

2)a8  9tet'tung§boot,  life-boat. 

2)cr  9let'tig,  — c«,  p/.  — c,  radish. 
„    9J^euitiati«'mu§,  — ,  rheumatism. 

9?icb'ten,  v.  tr.,  to  adjust,  direct. 
2)cr  9iid;'tcr,  —8,  pi.  —Judge. 
2)ie  9Jid;'tiing, — ,pl.  — en,  direc- 
tion. 
5Rid/tig,  adj., right,  accurate,  true 

S)a8  9?ie§,  — c«,/>/.  — e,  ream. 

S)er  aiie'je,  — n,  />/.  — n,  giant. 


SJic'fengrc^,  adj.,h\rg^  as  a  giant 
2)a«  9tinb,—c6,;)/.—cr, horned  cattlo 

2)er  Oiin'berbraten,  roast  beef. 

!Da6  aeinb'flcifd;,  beef. 
2)cr  9iincj,  — ee,  pi.  — e,  ring. 

9iina  ein,  v.  tr.,  to  provide  with 
rings;  geruig'clt,arrangedin 
rings.  [city. 

2)ie  9ting'maucr,  wall  around  a 

9iing8,  adv.,  around. 
S)er  9?it'ter,  — e,  /./.  — ,  rider,  knight. 

jDaiJ  9iit'tcrgut,  manor. 

9tit'terlid^,  adj.,  chivalry. 
3)er  9?o(f ,  — e^,  /)/.  i)iocI'e,  coat. 

„    9Jog'gen,  — «,  rye.  [reed. 

2)aS  9io{;r,  — c8,  />/.  — e  and  9?ob'rcn, 
2)er  9ionian',  — e«,  pi.  — e,  romance. 

9ioman'tifd;,  ot/;'.,  romantic. 
2;ie  9to'fe,  — ,  pi.  —n,  rose. 

9to'fa,  o<//.,  rose-colored. 

'iRot\),adj.,  red. 
2)ie  9iil'be,  — ,  pi.  — n,  rape. 

2)ie  gelbe  &?il'be,  carrot. 
M  rotbe  9fil'bc,beet. 
„   n?ci0c  &Ju'be,  turnip. 
2)et  SKUcf'en,  —8,  />/.—,  back. 

3n  ben  9iucfcn  fallen,  to  attack 
the  rear. 

2)er  9iiict'bli(f,  — e8,  pi.  — c, 
glance  backward,  retrospect. 

S-ic  9tild'fid;t,  — ,  pi.  —en,  re- 
spect, regard,  consideration. 

9?ilcf'wart8,  adv.,  backward. 
2)a8  5Ru'ber,  —8,  pi.  — ,  rudder. 
5Kii^'men,  r.  reJI.,  to  be  proud,  boast. 

9tn(;m'J?cU,  at//., glorious,  famous 
9Ju'fen,  V.  ir.  tr.,  to  call,  C17  out. 
2)ic  SRn'be,  — ,  rest,  tranciuillity. 

Siu'^en,  V.  intr.,  to  rest,  repose. 
9?il§'ren,  y.  tr.,  to  touch,  beat. 

9Jilt>'rig,    adj.,  stirring,   active, 
nimble. 
Xk  SRui'ne,  — ,  pi.  — n,  ruin. 
9Jnnb,  adj.,  round.  [root. 

2*10  dlii't\)i,  — ,  pi.  — n,  root,  pei-eb* 


464 


VOCABULARY. 


S)cr  Baal,— z9,  pi.  ®a'tc,  parlor,  hall  1 2)a§  8(^au'f^iel,  — c§,  pL  —t,  play, 
2)ie  @a'd^C,  — ,  pi.  —n,  thing,  affair,  drama. 

cause;  pL  goods,  furniture,  bag- 1  ®d;ei'nen,  v.  ir.  inir.,  to  appear. 


gage. 
2)er  @a(f,  — e^,  pi.  ^Bad't,  sack,  bag. 
S>a'en,  v.  tr.,  to  sow. 
S)er  @afftan',  — 8,  morocco  leather. 
S)ie  @a'gc,  — ,  j^/.  — n,  tradition, 
©a'geu,  V.  tr.,  to  say. 
S^te  @a^'ne,  — ,  cream. 
®ag  @al5,— eg,/)/.  — c,  salt. 
S)er  @a'mcn,  —8,  /»/.  — ,  seed. 
©am'mcln,  y.  tr.^  to  collect. 

2)ie  ®amm'(ung,— ,  jo/.— en,  col- 
lection. 
2)er  ©am'met,  — §,  pi.  — e,  velvet. 
@ammt,/>rep.,  with,  together  with, 
2)er  ®anb,  — eg,  sand. 

®an'btg,  adj. ,  sandy. 
Sanft,  ao?/. ,  soft,  gentle,  mild. 
2)ie  Sarbel'le,  — e,  ;>/.  — n,  sardine, 
©att,  adj. , .  satisfied,  satiated. 
2)er  @at'tet,  —8,  />/.  — ,  saddle. 

2)er  ©att'Ier,— g,  />/.—,  saddler. 
S)er  @a^,— eg,;>/.  ©a'lje,  leap,  jump, 
©au'er,  ac//.,  sour.  [sentence. 

2)ie  @au'ce,  — ,  pi.  — n,  sauce,  gravy, 
©au'gen,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  suck,  drink. 

5lug'[augen,  to  drain,  impoverish. 
2)ie  @d;aar,  — ,  pi.  —en,  troop,  host. 
2)er  @d;a'ben,  — g,  ;;/.  — ,  and  @c^a'* 

ben,  loss,  damage,  injury,  harm. 

@C^ab'U(^,  a(//.,  injurious. 
S)ag  B6)a\,  —eg, ;?/.  — e,  sheep. 
3)er  ©(^aft,  —eg,  />/.  @(^af  te,  shaft. 
@(^a'men,  ?^.  re^.,  to  be  ashamed. 
2)ie  @d)an'be,  — ,  disgrace. 

2)ie  Sc^anb'tbat,  deed  of  infamy. 
@(^arf,  ac//.,  sharp. 
S)ei  @c^ar'tac^,— eg,  /?/.  — e,  scarlet. 
.,   @d;at'ten,  — g,  pi.  — ,  shadow. 

S)ic  Sc^atti'rung,  — ,  pi.  —en, 

shade.  [behold. 

©^ctn'en,r.  tr.  and  intr. ^  to  look,  see, 


@d;en'ten,  v.  tr.,  to  present. 
2)ie  ©c^er'be,  — ,  /?/.  — n,  potsherd, 
fragment  of  broken  glass. 
2)ag  ®d;er'bengend;t,  ostracism. 
®d;eu^'Ud;,  adj.,  hideous,  horrible. 
®d)ic!'cn,  v.  tr.,  to  send. 
2)te  ©c^ie'ne,  — ,  pi.  — n,  tire,  rail. 
©c^ie'^en,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  shoot. 
S)ag  @(f)itt,  — eg,  ;>/.  — e,  ship. 
2)er  ®d}if'fer,  — g,  mariner. 
2)ie  @(^iffg1ente  (;>/.),  crew. 
Der  @d)trm,  — eg,  pi.  — e,  screen. 
2)ie  @^Iac?^t,  — ,/)/.- en,  battle,  fight 
2)er  ®(^Iaf,  —eg,  sleep. 

©d^Ia'fen,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  sleep. 
S)ag  (gc^Iaf  simmer,  bedroom. 
®(^ta'gen,  i?.  zV.  tw^r.,  to  strike,  beat; 
\x&l  fc^Iagen  ju,  to  unite  with. 
2)er  @d;tag,  — eg,  />/.  Sd}(a'ge, 
blow,  stroke,  stroke  of  apo- 
plexy, [snake. 
2)tc  ®d;Iang'e,  — ,  pi.  — n,  serpent, 
B&iii&j\,adj.,  bad. 
2)er  @d;(ei'er,  — g, ;?/.  — ,  veil. 
Sc^Ite'§eu,  V.  ir.  tr.,  to  close. 

S)ag  (Sc^toO,  — ,  pi.  ©^loffer, 

lock,  castle. 
2)er  @d;(n{3,  —eg,  />/.  @d)tiif'fe, 

close,  conclusion. 
2)er  ©d^Iiif'fel,  — g,  /jZ.  — ,  key. 
@(?^me(f'en,  y.  «r.,  to  taste.  [able. 

@rf)ma(J'£)aft,  a^^'.,  savory,  palat- 
©C^mer^en,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  melt. 
S)er  ©corners,- eg,;?/,  —en,  pain. 
@(^meq'tt(^,  ac?;'.,  painful. 
<Sd^mer;^'(og,  ac/;'.,  painless. 
S)er  @d)mieb,  —eg,  pi.  — e,  smith, 
©c^miicf'en,  v.  tr.,  to  adorn. 
®d>na^':|)en,  v.  tr. ,  to  snap  at,  catch  at. 
2)er  @(^nee,  — g,  snow. 

@<^nei'en,  ??.  intr.impers.,  tosno^v 


VOCABULARY 


465 


BdfiltVhm,  V.  ir.  intr.y  to  cut. 

2)er  3d;iiei'bcr, — 9, pi. — ,  tailor. 
©d;nell,  adj.^  fast,  rajnd. 

Xtx  2d;neU'5ug,  express  train. 
@c^i3n,  adj.,  beautiful,  fine, 

2)ic  ®d;cii'^eit,  i?/.  — en,  beauty. 
Sd)on,  ac/t'.,  already. 
iSd^o'nen,  v.  tr.,  to  spare. 
2)cr  od?oc^  or3c^c§,— e«,  pZ.  ®(^5'gc, 

lap,  skirt ;  bed  of  a  stream. 
S)ic  ed;rau'be,  — ,  pi.  — n,  screw. 
®d;recf'cn,  v.  tr.,  to  frighten.       [ble. 
©d^recf'lid;,  adj.,  fiightful,  terri- 
©c^rei'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  write. 

2)a8  ®c^reib'^a^ier,writing-paper 
2)ie  ^(^rift,— ,  pi.  —en,  writing. 
„    ^eilige  ©c^rift,  holy  writ. 
„   iSd^rift'f^rad;e,  language  of 
literature, 
©(^rei'en,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  cry,  call. 
3)er  >Sd)ritt,  — e8,  f»/.  — c,  step. 
2)er  @d^ub,  — e8,  />Z.  — e,  shoe. 

2)cr  @d;ulj'mad;er,  —6,  pi.  —, 

shoemaker. 

„   >3d;ul)'mac^ercjcfcn,— en,  p/. 

— en,  journeyman  shoemaker. 

S)ie  ®d)u(b,  — ,  pi.  —en,  debt,  guilt ; 

■Sie  fmb  @c^ulb  baran,  it  is  your 

fault, 
©(^ufbig,  adj.,  guilty,  in  debt. 
3)ie  ®d;u'fe,  — ,  pi.  —en,  school. 
2)cr  ^d^il'ler,— «,7j/.— ,  scholar. 
3)a§  v2d^ur^au8,  school-house. 
2)ic  Sd^nl'ter,  —,/>/.  — n,  shoulder. 

„    ®d)iinel,  —,pl.  — n,  dish,  bowl. 
€d^n>a(^,  adj.,  weak.  [in-law, 

2)er  Sc^wa'ger,  — 8,  ;>?.  — ,  brother- 
2)ie  ©d;n)a'gerin,  — ,  pi.  — nen, 
sister-in-law, 
®c^n?an'fcn,  v.  intr.,  tovacillate,  tot- 
vSdjjwarj,  at//.,  black.  fter. 

@d)lDa'^cn,  V.  intr. ,  to  chatter,  prattle, 
0d>n)ei'fen,  v.  intr.,  to  rove  (extrav- 
agantly), 
©d^njei'gen,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  be  silent. 

u 


2)a8  B^xotm,  —t9,  pi.  — e,  hog. 

2)a3  ®d;wei'nefleifc^,  pork. 
@d;n?erien,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  swell. 

3ln'fd;n?eUen,  to  rise  (in  a  freshet). 
Sc^lDer,  adj.,  heavy,  difficult,  severe. 
2)ic  ®d)We're,  — ,  weight,  heaviness. 

(gt^Wer'lid;,  adv.,  with  difficulty, 

hardly. 
2)aS  ©c^wert,  — e§,  pi.  —tx,  sword. 
2)te  ©c^nje'fter,  — ,  pi.  — n,  sister. 
2)cr  Sc^tvie'gertoater,  =mntter,  *jo^n, 

4od;ter,  father-in-law,  etc. 
®d;ir>ie'ric},  adj.,  difficult. 
@d;tt)im  men,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  swim. 
®d;n)in'ben,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  disappear. 

@d;n>in'beln,  v.  intr.,  to  be  dizzy. 

2)er  ©c^tDin'bct,  — 8,  dizziness. 

@d;tt?inb'Iid^,  adj.,  dizzy, 
2)te  @c^Winb'fud;t,  — ,  consumption. 
@c^tt)0'ren,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  swear. 
@d;n)iil,  adj.,  sultry. 
@ed;8,  six. 

2)er  @ec,  — 8,  ;jZ,  — n,  lake. 
2)ie  @ee,  — ,  pi.  — n,  sea,  ocean, 

2)a8  ©ce'bvib,  — e8,  />/.  *bdbcr, 
sea-bath. 

@ee'tranf,  adj.,  sea-sick. 

2)te  'See'trantbeit, — ,  sea-sickness 
„  (See'mad;t,  naval  power. 
„  ©ce'reifc,  sea-voyage, 

2)er  8ee'ranber,  pirate. 
„    ©ee'folbat,  marine. 

©CC'tilc^tig,  adj.,  seaworthy. 

2)er  vSee'toogcl,  sea-fowl. 
'     jDaS  ©ee'maffer,  sea-water. 

2)er  ©ee'winb,  sea-breeze. 
2)ic  ©ce'Ic,  — ,  pi.  — n,  soul, 
2)a8  ^Se'gcl,  —8,  ;?/.  — ,  sail. 

©c'gein,  v.  intr.,  to  sail. 
!Der  @c'gen,  — 8,  pi.  — ,  blessing. 

©eg'nen,  v.  tr.,  to  bless. 

2)ie  @eg'nnng,  — ,pl. — en.  bless- 
@e'^en,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  see,  [ing. 

(Sebr,  adv.,  very,  greatly,  sorely. 
2)ie  ®ci'be,  — ,  pi.  — n,  silk. 
2 


466 


VOCABULARY. 


2)a§  ©et'bettscug,  — e§,  pi.  —t, 
©ein,  pron.,  his.  [silk  cloth, 

©ein,  V.  ir.  Int7\,  to  be. 
@eit,  prep. ,  since. 
S)te  @ei'te,  — ,  pi.  —n,  side. 
©el'ber,  pro/i.,  self  (§  108,  Bern.  2). 
©eibft,  pron.,  self  (§  108,  i2em.  2); 

at/y.,  even. 

S)er  ©elbft'morb,  suicide, 
©e'lig,  at?/.,  blessed,  happy. 

2)ie  ®e'tigteit, — ,  happiness,  bliss 
©el'ten,  arfy.,  seldom,  rarely. 

©elt'fam,  adj.,  strange,  queer. 
2)ie  ©ern'mel,  — ,  />/.  — n,  roll  (of 

bread), 
©en' feu,  i'.  tr.,  to  let  down,  sink. 
S)er  ©e^tem'ber,  — ^,  i^eptember. 
2)ie  ©ertoiet'te,  — ,  pi.  — n,  napkin, 
©elj'en,  v.  tr.,  to  set,  put,  place ;  v. 

reji. ,  to  take  a  seat,  be  seated. 
S)cr  ©^aml,  — ^,pl. — ^  or  — e,  shawl. 
@ic^,  reJi.  pron.,  one's   self,  himself, 

herself,  itself;    pi.,   themselves, 

yourself. 
©t'd)ern,  v.  tr.,  to  secure,  insure. 
S)ie  @iri)t,  — ,  sight ;   nad;  ©id;t,  at 

sight, 
©ic,  pron. ,  she,  her ;  they,  them ;  you. 
2)ag  ©teb,  — eg,  pi.  — e,  sieve. 

©te'ben,  v.  tr.,  to  sift. 
©ie'ben,  seven. 
2)er  ©leg,  — eg,  pi.  — e,  victory. 

©ie'gen,  v.  tr.,  to  conquer. 

©icg'rci^,  adj.,  victorious. 
2)ag  ©ie'gel,  — g,  />/.  — ,  seal. 

©ie'geln,  v.  tr.,  to  seal. 
S)a§  ©U'ber,  —6,  silver, 
©ing'en,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  sing, 

Ser  ©ing'»DgeI,  bird  of  song. 
S)te  ©it'te,  — ,  pi.  — n,  custom. 
2)er  ©i^,  — eg,  /?^.  — e,  abode,  seat. 

©i^'en,  w.  ir.  intr.,  to  sit. 

S)ie  ©i^'uttg,  — ,pl. — en,  session 
©la'toifc^,  adj.,  Slavic. 
©0,  adv.  and  conj.,  so,  thus,  as. 


©oe'Ben  or  fo  e'fecn,  adj.,  just  now,  just 
then,  just  at  the  time, 
©o'fern,  adv.  and  conj.,  so  far,  if, 

in  case. 
©Ogtet^',afl?y.,  immediately. 

2)te  ©D^'Ie,  — ,  pi.  — n,  sole. 

2)er  ©D^n,  —eg,  />/.  ©c^ne,  son. 

©ot'c^er,  pron.,  such. 

2)er  ©olbat',  — en,/>/.— en,  soldier. 

©ol'Ien,  V.  ir.,  to  be  obliged. 

3)er  ©om'mer,  — g,  ^/.  — ,  summer. 

©on' bent,  conj.,  but. 

S)ie  ©on'ne,  — ,  ;>/.  — n,  sun. 
2)er  ©onuenaufgang,  sunrise. 
„    ©onnenun'tergang,  sunset. 
„    ©on'nenfd;irm,  parasol, 
©on' nig,  adj.,  sunny, 
2)er  ©onn'tag,  — g,  Sunday. 

©onft,ac?y,  and  co7ij.,  formerly,  other- 
wise. 

2)te  ©or'ge,  — ,  pi.  — n,  care. 
©org'fam,  adj.,  careful. 

Xk  ©Ijal'te,  — ,  pi.  — n,  column. 

©:|3a'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  spare,  save, 

©^cit,  adj.  and  adv. ,  late, 

^paik'xzn,  v.intr.  (to  go  for  plensure). 
©.  geben,  to  talk  a  walk,    [riage. 
©.  fa^ren,  to  take  a  ride  in  a  car- 
©.  reiten,  to  take  a  ride  on  horse- 
back, [ment. 

2)tC  ©^ei'je,— e,/>Z,— n,food,  nourish- 
©^ei'fen,  v.  tr.,  to  eat,  dine. 
2)er  ©:|3ei']efaal,  dining-room. 

2)te  ©:j3efnIatton',  —,/>/.— en,  specu- 
lation. 
„    @))^a're,  — ,  pi.  — n,  sphere. 

S)er  ©:|)te'gel, — ^,pl.  — ,  mirror. 

2)ag  ©^iel,  —eg,  pi.  — e,  play, 
©^te'len,  v.  intr. ,  to  play. 

2)er  ©:^ton',  — g,  pi.  — e,  spy. 

2)ag  ©:^ttar,  —t^,pl.  4aler,  hospital, 

2)te  ©^i^'e, — ,  pi. — n,point;  />/.,  lace 
S)er  ©:|)t^'enfc^Ieier,  lace  Aeii. 

©:|JOt'ten,  v.  tr.,  to  deride,  ridicule, 
banter,  make  sport. 


VOCABULARY. 


407 


2)er  (2^i5t'tcr,— 8,/)Z.— ,derider, 

foolish  jester.  [guage. 

2)ie  @pra'd;e,  — ,  jyl. — n,  speech,  lan- 

2)ic  @prad;'bilbung,  — ,   forma- 
tion of  a  language. 

2)er  vSprac^'gebraud^,    laws    of 
usage  in  a  language. 
®^re'(^cn,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  speak,  talk. 

2)ie  epred^'f'^unbc,hour  appointed 
to  receive  calls  on  business. 

2)a8  @^ric^'n?ort,  proverb,  [out. 
@)3rei'jcn,  v.  tr.,  to  stretch  out,  spread 
©preug'en,  V.  tr.,  to  cause  to  burst; 

auSeinan'ber  fpreng'en,  to  scatter 

suddenly. 
2)a§  @pri(^'n)ort,  proverb. 
©pnng'en,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  spring,  leap. 
jTcr  S^mt,  — C9,  spectre.        [house). 
S^Jll'teil,  V.  intr.,  to  be  haunted  (as  a 
®^uf1)aft,  ac/;.,  ghostlike,  imaginary. 
2)ic  iS^ur,  —,p/.— en,  trace,  footstep. 
2)cr  @taat,  — eg,  pi.  — en,  state,  na- 
tion ;    pomp,  magnificent  array, 

fine  dress. 
2)er  Stab,  —z^,pl  Stci'bc,  staflP. 
2)er  Sta'c^el,— 6,;j/.-n,pnckle,  thorn 

2)ie  ®ta'd;clbeere,  gooseberry. 

(Sta'd^elid^t,  adj.,  thorny. 
2)ie  Stabt, — ,p^.  @tab'tc,city.  [city. 

2)a8  ©tdbtc^en,  —8,  ;>/.—,  small 

©tab'tifd^,  adj.,  civic,  municipal. 
2)er  @ta^I,  — e8,  steel.  [pen. 

2)ie  Sta^rfeber,  — ,  pl.~n,  steel 

2)er  ©td^l'ftic^,— e8,  jo/.— c,  steel 
engraving. 
S)er  ®tamm,   — c8,    ;>/.    @tam'me, 

trunk,  body,  stem,  tribe,  family. 

Stam'men,  v.intr.,  to  be  descend- 
ed (from).  [race. 

2)er  ®tamm'i)ater,  father  of  a 
2)cr  ®tanb,  — e8,  pi.  @tan'be,  condi- 
tion, rank, 
©tart,  adj. ,  strong. 
!J)ic  Statt,  — ,  /*/.  ©tSt'te,  place. 

®tatt,  prep.,  instead  of. 


©tatt'finben,  v.  intr.,io  take  place 

©tatt'iid;,  adj.,  stately,  grand. 
©tCCf'en,  V.  tr.,  to  stick,  fasten. 

2)er  8tecf 'brief,  advertisement  for 
the  apprehension  of  a  delin- 
quent  or  criminal. 

©tecf'bricflid;  toerfol'gen,  to  de- 
scribe a  criminal  in  a  ®tecf'« 
brief. 

2)ic  ©tccf'nabel,  — ,  pi.  — n,  pin. 
®te'^en,  v.  ir.  intr..^  to  stand. 
Steb'Ien,  v.ir.  tr.,  to  steal. 
@teif,  adj.,  stiff. 

Stet'gen,  v.  ir.  intr., to  mount,  ascend. 
Steil,  adj.,  steep. 
2)er  Stein,  — ei5,  pi.  — e,  stone. 

Stein'fjart,  arf;'.,  hard  as  stone. 
Stel'ten,  v.  tr.,  to  place,  put,  set  up. 

2)ie  Stel'Ie,  — ,;>/.  — n,  position. 

„   ©teriuncj,  — ,  pi.  — en,  ])osi- 

Ster'ben,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  die.        [tion. 

Sterb'Iid^,  adj.,  mortal. 
S)er  ©tern,  — e§,;>/.  — c,  star. 

2)a8  Stcrn'bilb,  — es,  i?/.  — er, 
constellation. 
Stct  or  ftat,  «fi?/.,  steady,  firm. 

®tet8  or  [tat6,  rtc/y.,  continually 
2)ic  Steu'er,  — ,  pi.  — n,  tax,  duties. 

@teu'cr^ftid;tig,  adj.,  subject  to 
tax  or  duty, 
©ticf'en,  V.  tr.,  to  embroider. 
2)er  ©tie'fel,  — S,  pi.  — ,  boot. 

3)er  Stie'fcltned;t,  boot-jack. 
3)cr  Stief'tjatcr,  ^mutter,  *fobn,  4od^* 

ter,  step-father,  step-mother,  etc. 
©tif'ten,  V.  tr.,  to  found,  establish, 
©till,  adj.,  still. 

2)ie  Stil'Ie, — ,  quietness,  stillness 

@titt'fd)njctgcn,  to  keep  silent. 
2)ie  Stim'mc,  — ,  pi.  — en,  voice. 

t,  Stir'ne,  — ,  pi.  — n,  brow. 
2)er  @tocf,  — c8,  pi.  Stij'de,  stl.k, 

cane ;  story  (of  a  house). 
2)cr  ©toff,  —eg,  pi.  — e,  stuff,  sub- 
@toIj,  ck/;.,  proud.  [stance. 


468 


VOCABULARY. 


@to'^en,  u.  ir.  tr.,  to  hit,  strike. 
2)er  ©trai)t,  — e§,  pi.  — en,  beam  ray. 

@tra^'(en,  v.  intr.,  to   shine,  ra- 
diate, beam. 
S)ie  ©tra'^e,  — ,  pi.  — n,  street. 

2)er  ©tra'^enjunge,  — n,  pi.  —n, 
street-boy,  vagabond  boy. 
S)er  @trau^,  — e§  or  —en,  pi.  — e  or 

— en,  ostrich, 
©tre'ben,  v.  intr.,  to  strive. 
©trecf'en,  v.  rejl.,  to  extend  (itself.) 
2)er  @trei^, — t^,pl. — e,  stroke,  blow 
2)er  ©treit,  — e§,  pi.  — e,  contest. 

@tret'ten,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  contend. 
@treng,  adj.,  strict,  severe, 
^tricf'en,  v.  tr.,  to  knit. 

S)ie  ©tricl'nabel,  knitting-needle. 

2)er  @trom,  — i^,pl.  ©trome,  stream. 

„   @trum:pf,  —eg,  pi.  @tviim>fe, 

stocking. 

2)a§  @trum|)t'banb,  garter. 
!l)te  ©tu'Be,  — ,  pi.  — n,  room.  [room. 

2)a§  ©tiib'd^en,  — §,  />/.—,  small 
S)a§  ©tiicf,  —eg,  /?/.  — e,  piece. 


2)a§@tu'btutn,— S,/?/.®tu'bten,8tudy 

©tubi'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  study. 
2)te  ©tu'fc,  — ,  pi.  — en,  step. 

<Stu'fentDetfe,  adv.,  gradually, 
©tumm,  adj.,  dumb. 
2)ie  ©tun'De, — ,pl. — en,  hour,  lesson 

2)ag  ©tun'bengeben,  — g,  giving 
instruction  or  lessons. 
S)er  Sturm,  —z^,pl.  vgtiir'me,  storm. 
(Stiir'sen,  y.  i«^r.,  to  fall,  plunge. 

^iViX'm\\&i,  adj.,  stormy. 
@u'ci^en,t;.  tr., to  seek;  aug'jud;en,  to 

select. 
S)er  @ilb,  — eg,  or  (Sii'ben,  — §,  south. 

©iib'lid?,  ao?;'.,  southerly,  to  the 
south. 
2)te  ©um'rne,  — ,  pi.  — n,  sum. 
S)er  ©urn^f ,  — t^,pl.  @um':>)te,  swamp 

S)ag  @um))f  lanb,  swampy  land. 
5)ic  @iin'bc,  — ,  pi.  — n,  sin. 

2)er  ©iin'benfatt,  fall  of  our  first 
parents. 
S)te  (su^>e,  — ,  pi.  — n,  soup. 
@u|3,  adj. ,  sweet. 


2:- 


S)er  Sla'baf,  — §,  ;>?.  — e  tobacco. 

2:a'beln,  v.  tr.,  to  blame. 

2)er  2;ag,  —t^,pL  — e,  day.  [break. 

25er  2^a'geganbrud^,  —eg,  day- 

S^ag'Iic^,  ao?;'.,  daily. 
3)te  Sairie,  — ,  i?^.  — n,  waist. 
2)ag  S^alent',  —eg,  pi.  — e,  talent. 

j^alent'toott,  «(/;'.,  talented. 
2)te  jtan'te,  —,;>/.  — n,  aunt. 
Sa^'fer,  adj.,  valiant,  brave. 

2)ic  2;a^'ferleit,  — ,  valor,  bravery 
S)ie  j^a'fc^e,  — ,  />/.  —en,  pocket. 

25er  £a'fd;enbieb,  pick-pocket. 

S)ag  STa'fc^entuc^,  pocket-hand- 
kerchief. 

2)ie  S^a'fc^enubr,  watch. 
S)te  2:affe,  — ,  pi.  — n,  cup. 
Saub,  ac(/'.,  deaf. 

jlaub'ftumm,  adj. ,  deaf  and  dumb 


%<xu'\^tn,  v.tr.,  to  deceive,  disappoint 
2)ie  2;au'fd;ung,  — ,  deception, 
delusion. 

2)ei[^  2:erier,  — g,  j9?.  — ,  plate. 

2)ag  2:^at,  —eg, ;»/.  — e  or  Scaler, 
2)ie  2;^argegenb,  region  of  the  val- 
uer 2:^a'Ier,  — g,  pi.  — ,  thaler,  [ley, 

SL^a'tig,  ac?/.,  active,  diligent. 

2)er  S^ec,  — g,  jo?.  —  and  — g,  tea. 

S)er  2;^eti,  —eg,  i?/.  — e,  part. 
S^bei'ien,  r.  ^r.,  to  divide, 
Sl^eir^aft  or  t^eil'^aftig,  adj., 
participant  (in),  partaking  (of). 
S)ie  Si^eU'natjme,  — ,  participa- 
X^eitg,  ac?y.,  partly.  [tion. 

2:^eu'er,  adj.,  dear. 

S)ag  jlbier,  — eg,  pi.  — e,  animal. 

2)er  2^^cir,  — en,  />Z.  —en,  fool. 

2)te  i^or'I;ett,  — ,  pi.  —en,  foilj 


VOCABULARY. 


469 


2;^b'rid^t,  adj.,  foolish. 

S)ag  %ifcx,  — e8,  pi.  — c,  gate,  door. 

X[}Utt,v.  ir.  tr.,  to  do. 

2)ic  %Wxt,  —,  pi.  — n,  door. 

2)cr  Xburm,  —i^,pl.  Xpr'mc,  tower 

STief,  a</y.,  deep. 

2)ic  jtic'fe,  — ,  depth. 

3)a8  Xief'Ianb,  low  land. 
2)cr  %\.\&i,  — e8,  ;j/.  — e,  table. 

2)er  2:ifci;'kr,—S,jw/.—, cabinet- 
maker. 

2)a8  2:ifd;'tuc^,  table-cloth. 
'iDic  Sod/ter,— ,/j/.2;i5c^'ter,  daughter 

2)ie  2^i5d;'ter jc^ule,  young  ladies' 
school. 
25er  Sob,  — e8,  death. 

2)er  2;o'be§fatt,  death,  decease. 

3)ic  jEo'beSftillc,  stillness  of  death 

2:ob'tcn,  V.  tr..,  to  kill. 
S)cr  jTon,  — CS,  pi.  X'im,  sound,  tone, 
jtra'gcn,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  carry. 
Xxan'tn,  v.  intr.,  to  trust, 
j^rau'rig,  adj.,  sad,  sorrowful. 
2)cr  2^raum,  —t^,pl.  2^rau'me,  dream 


©crXrciu'mcr,— ?,  />/.— ,dream- 
Xref'fen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  meet,  hit.      [er, 
2;rei'6en,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  drive,  urge. 
2)ic  Xxt^i'lpt,  —,  pi.  — n,  stair,  stair- 
way. 
Xxt'itn,  V.  ir.  intr.,  to  tread;  ein'tre* 

ten,  to  enter,  set  in. 
Xreu,  adj.,  true,  faithful. 

!3)ie  Jreu'c,  — ,  faithfulness. 

Sreu'l^crjlg,  adj.,  true-hearted. 

Sreu'toS,  adj.,  faithless. 

2)ie  2;reu'Iofigfcit,  — ,  faithless- 
ness, treachery. 
2)er  %x\th, — t?>,pl. — c,  driving,  force, 

instinct,  impulse. 
Sriu'fen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  drink. 

Srinf'bar,  adj.,  fit  to  drink. 
2!ro(f'en,  adj.,  dry. 
2)ie  2;rom'mc(,  — ,  _p^.  — n,  drum. 
%Xi>'\itX\.,  V.  tr.,  to  console. 
2)a8  Xu(^,  —eg, ;»/.  Sil'd^er,  cloth. 
S)ie  Xu'geub,  — ,pl.  — en,  virtue. 

Xu'genb^aft,  adj.,  virtuous. 
2)er  Xv'^t}U8,  typhus  fever. 


U. 


Ue'bcl,  adj.,  evil,  bad. 

2)a§  Uc'bel,  —8,;?/.  — ,  evil,  ill. 

3)er  Ue'belftanb,  evil,  misfortune. 
Uc'bcn,  V.  tr.,  to  exercise. 

2)ic  Ue'bung, — ,  pi. — en,  exercise 
Uc'ber,  prep.,  over,  above,  upon. 

2)ic  Ue'bcrfabrt,  journey  over. 

2)er  Ue'bergang,  transition. 

Ueberbaulpt',  adv.,  in  general. 

Ueberle'gen,  to  consider,  reflect 
upon. 

2)te  Ue'bermad^t,  superior  force. 

Ue'bermd^ig,  adj.,  excessive,  ex- 
orbitant. 

2)er  Ue'bermut^,  arrogance,  inso- 
lence, [lodge. 

UctJernacb'teit,  to  pass  the  night, 

Ueberncb'men,  to  take  charge  of. 

Ucbcrrc'ben,  to  overpersuade. 


2)cr  Ue'berrod ,  overcoat. 

Ueberje^'en,  to  translate.    Pator. 

S)er  Ueberfetj'er,— g,yv/. — ,  trans- 

2)ie  Ucberfe^'ung,  — ,  pi.  — cii, 
translation. 

Uebertrcffen,  to  surpass,  excel. 

Ucberjte'f)en,  to  cover. 

Ueberjeu'gcn,  v.  tr.,  to  convince. 
Uc'brig,  adj.,  remaining  (over). 

Ue'brigeuS,  conj.,  moreover, 
2)a8  U'fer,  —%,  pi.  — ,  shore,  bank. 
!2)ic  Ubr,  — ,  pi.  — en,  clock,  watch. 

SSaS  tft  bie  Ubr  ?  What  time  is  it? 

S3ig  toier  Ubr,  till  four  o'clock. 
Urn,  prep. ,  around,  about,  at. 

Um'arbeitcn,  v.tr.,  to  work  over, 
remodel,  revise. 

Um'bringcn,  to  kill,  murder. 

2)ct  Uin'fang, — 8,  circumference. 


470 


VOCABULARY. 


Umfaf'jen,  v.  tr. ,  to  embrace. 

2)ieUmge'bun!5,  — ,  pl.—m,  sur- 
rounding, environs. 

Umge'^en,  to  avoid,  evade. 

2)er  Um'gang,  way  around,  inter- 
course. 

Um^er',  adv.,  round  about. 

Um^er'ftveifen,  v.  intr.,  to  rove 
about. 

2)erUm'ftanb,— e§,;^Z.Um'[tanbe, 
condition,  circumstance. 
2)ie  Un'al)&angigteit, — ,  independence. 
Un'angeuetjm,  adj.,  unpleasant. 
Uu'a^ulid;,  adj.,  unlike. 
Uii'aufmerffam,  adj.,  inattentive. 
Un.iuSfiibr'bar,  adj.,  unfeasible,  that 

can  not  be  executed. 
Ull'begievtg,  aJ/.,  undesirous,  unsolicit- 

ous.  [inconceivable. 

Ulil^egreif'Itd^,  adj.,  incomprehensible, 
lliibe|d;a'Dct,  prep.,  without  detriment 

or  injury  to. 
Uiitefd;rcib'Itd;,  adj.,  indescribable, 
lllt'befd^eibcn,  adj.,  immodest. 
Uitb, conj.,  and. 
Uti'Dantbar,  adj.,  unthankful. 
Uiienb'Iti^,  adj.,  endless,  infinite. 
Utl'erfa^ren,  adj.,  inexperienced. 
Uu'eibeblid),  adj.,  inconsiderable,  un- 
important, trifling.  [p^^y- 
Uii'entgeltlid},  adj.  gratuitous,  without 
Uiierme^'Iid;,  at//.,  immeasurable. 
'-^ix  Uu'fall,  —z^,pl.  Un'faHe,  misfor- 
tune, disaster. 
Ull'formlic^,  adj.,i\\  shaped,  ugly. 
Uu'freunbltc^,  adj.,  unfriendly,  unkind 
Uu'gebilbet,  adj.,  uncultivated,  rude. 
Uligefvibr',  adv.,  about,  nearly. 
Uil'gemetn,  adj.,  uncommon. 
Un'getoi^,  adj.,  uncertain. 
Uu'gemb^nltc^,  ac/J. ,  unusual. 
®ag  Uu'gtucf,  — g,  misfortune. 

Un'glit{fltd),ac?;'.,  unhappy,     fly. 

Un'glilcf  lic^crmeif  e,  ac/?^  ,unhappi- 
3)ie  Un'gnabe,  — ,  disgrace,  disfavor. 


Un'^eitbar,  adj.,  incurable. 

2)te  U'niform,  —,  pi.  —en,  uniform. 

S)ie  Unitoerfitdt' ,— ,  pi.  —en,  university 

Un'mittelbar,  adj.,  immediate. 

Un'mi3glt(^,  adj.,  impossible. 

S)a3  Un'red;t,  —eg,  wrong,  injury; 
Uu'rec^t  ^aben,  to  be  wrong. 

Un'rul^ig,  adj.,  restless. 

Vin§,pron.,  us. 

Un'fer,;>ron.,our. 

3)er  Uni'nge,2?ro«.,  ours. 

2)er  Un'finn,  — e8,  />/.  — e,  nonsense. 

Un'fic^tbar,  adj. ,  invisible. 

Un'ftcit,  adj.,  unsteady,  unfixed,  rov- 
ing, nomadic. 

Ult'teu,  adv.,  under,  below,  down. 

Un'ter,  prep.,  under,  among. 

Un'terge^en,  to  go  down,  set. 

3)er  lln'tergang,—e«, going  down, 
setting,  destruction,  [side  of. 

UiVtZX^oXh,  prep.,  below,  on  the  lower 

Uuterbarteii,  to  entertain.  [nean. 

Un'terirbtfci),  under  ground,  subterra- 

Unterneb'men,  to  undertake. 

®ie  Unterne^'mung,  — ,  pi.  —en,  un- 
dertaking. 

Unterfc^ei'ben,  to  distinguish. 

S)ev  Un'terf  c^ieb,  —t^,pL—t,  dif- 

Uuterfii'd^en,  to  investigate,    [ference. 

S)ie  Un'tertaf'je,  — ,  pi. — en,  saucer. 

2)er  Un'tertf;an,  — §  or  —en,  pl.—zn, 
subject. 

UntcrlregS',  adv.,  on  the  way. 

2)te  Un'tertDelt.  lower  regions. 

Un'tiidjttg,  adj.,  unfit,  unqualified. 

Untoerblen'bet,  adj.,  seeing  plainly,  not 
dazzled. 

Un'ternitnftig,  adj.,  unreasonable. 

Un'tjerrtd;tet,  adj.,  unperformed ;  un'* 
ijerric^teter  @a'c^e,  with  purpose 
unaccomplished. 

Un'tr»iEtommen,  adj.,  unwelcome. 

Un'n?if[enb,  adj.,  ignorant. 

Un'tDiirbig,  adj.,  unworthy. 

Un'gufrteben,  adj.,  discontented. 


VOCABULARY. 


471 


Un'jtrctbcutig,  ac^'.,  unequivocal. 
2)er  Ur'grcf^i^atcr ;,  *nnitter,    great- 

grundf.itlier ;  great-grandmother. 
2)ic  Ur'facl;c,  — ,  pi  — n,  cause. 
2)cr  Ur')>ruug, — 6,  origin,  source. 

Ur'j^rilugiic^,  adj.,  original. 


2)aS  Ur't^cil,  —8,  pi.  — c,  judgment, 
decree,  verdict. 
Ur'tt;cilen,  v.tr.  ant/ino-.,  to  judge, 

express  an  opinion  about. 
2)er   Ur't^cilsfpnid;,   — e8,    pi. 
(5^riid;c,  decision,  decree. 


S)ic  93a' fe,  —,  pi.  — n,  vase. 

2)er  9>a'tcr,  — s,  />/.  95a'ter,  father. 
2)a8  sBa'terlaub,  fatherland,  na- 
tive country. 
33d'terlid;,  at/;. ,  paternal. 
2)ie  3>a'terftabt,  native  city. 

2)ic  95crab'rcCung,  — ,pl.  — en,  agree- 
ment, stipulation,  contract. 

S?era'breidjeu,  v.  tr.,  to  deliver,  give, 
hand  over. 

2)ie  iBerdu'Deriing,  — ,  pi. — en,  change 
„   25crar'mung,  — ,  impoverishing. 

35erban'ncn,  v.  tr.,  to  banish. 

X'xt  2$crban'nuncj, — ,  banishment. 

33erbin'ben,  unite ;  bind  wrongly. 
95crbinb'Iid;,  adj.,  obhgatory. 
2)ic  3Serbiub'Iid?teit,  — ,  pL  —en, 

liability,  obligation. 
S)ic  3>erbiu'bung,— ,;>/.— en,  act 
of  uniting;   bie  @'^ei}erbin= 
bung,  marriage. 

3Serbit'tcn,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  decline. 

9?erblei'd;en,  r.  intr.,  to  turn  pale;  bc§ 
XobcS  l^erblcid)en,  to  expire,  die. 

2)cr  9?crbre'd)cr,  — «,  pi  — ,  criminal. 

SSerbiln'ben,  v.  tr.,  to  unite,  ally,  con- 
federate. 

2)er  95erbad;t',  — §,  suspicion. 
93erbdd/ttg,  adj.,  suspicious. 

S)a8  9?erbecf',  — «,  pi.  — e,  quarter- 
deck. 

SSerbcr'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  spoil,  destroy. 
9?crberb'lic^,  adj.,  destructible. 

SScreb'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  honor. 

9?erei'nigen,  v.  tr.,  to  unite. 

S)ie  5>erci'mgung,  — ,  pi.  —en,  union 

SJerci'tcIn,  v.  tr.,  to  frustrate,  baffle. 


2)cr  3SerfaIl', — 8,  decline,  decay,  ruin. 
„    SSerfaf'fer,  —8,  pi.  — ,  author, 

composer.  [persecute. 

SSerforgen,  v.tr.,  to  pursue,  prosecute, 
35ergang'en,  adj.,  past,  gone.      [tory. 

9>ergdng'ltd;,  at/;"., fleeting,  transi- 
3Scrge'ben8,  adv.,  in  vain. 

^ergeb'lid;,  adj.,  useless,  futile. 
55ergef'fen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  forget. 
95erglci'd;en,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  compare. 
2)a8  SSergnii'gen,  — 8,  pi.  — ,  pleasure 
SSergra'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  bury. 
33ergri3'^crn,  v.  tr.,  to  enlarge,     [tion. 
3)a0  SBer()dlt'nif3,— c8,;>/.— e,  propor- 
9>erbee'rcn,  v.  tr.,  to  devastate. 
93er^e^'len,  v.  tr.,  to  hide,  conceal. 
2)er  95crfanf',  —8,  sale. 

95evtau'tcn,  v.  tr.,  to  sell. 
2)er  35erfel)r,  — 8,  traffic,  commerce. 
2)er  9SerIag',  —8,  funds,  publishing 

house. 

'^a^  Scrlag8'n?crf,  publication. 
2?crlang'en,  v.  tr.,  to  desire,  re<iuire. 
SJerlaf'jen,  v.  tr.,  to   leave,  abandon  ; 

fic^  t>erla[fcn,  to  rely  (upon). 
25erle'gcn,  v.  tr.,  to  misplace. 
2)ie  SBerle'gcn^eit,  — ,  embarrassment 
2?crlet'^cn,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  lend,  bestow, 
93erlie'ren,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  lose,    [confer. 

2)er  3SerIu[t',  — e8,  pi.  — c,  loss, 
damage. 
Serlu'fttg,  adj.,  deprived  of,  forfeited. 
SBermcb'ren,  v.  tr.,  to  increase. 
33crmei'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  avoid. 
23ermietben,  v.  tr.,  to  rent. 
25ernut'telft,/>re/?.,  by  means  of. 
25crm5'gen,  to  be  able,  have  the  power. 


472 


VOCABULARY. 


2)a8  33crtnB'gen,  — §,  property. 
35ermu't(;en,  v.  tr.,  to  conjecture. 

33evmut£)'lid;,  adj.,  probable,  that 
may  be  conjectured. 
2)ic  35ernuuft,  — ,  reason. 

„   ^erorb'nung,  — ,  pl.—tn,  decree. 
35er^fltd)'tcn,  v.  tr. ,  to  bind,  pledge. 
2)er  SSerratf)',  — e8,  treason,  perfidy. 

S5errat{;en,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  betray. 
SSerrei'fen,  v.  intr.,  to  go  on  a  journey. 
3Serrtd/ten,  v.  «r.,  to  perform,  conduct, 

dispatch. 
33erfa'gen,  to  refuse,  deny ;  id)  hm  f(^on 

toerfagt,  I  am  already  engaged. 
SScrfat'sen,  v.  tr.,  to  oversalt,  spoil. 
S3erjam'meln,  v.  tr.,  to  collect. 

2)ie  iBerjamm'Iung,  — ,  pi.  —en, 
assembly. 
S5erf(^ie'ben,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  put  off,  delay 
^tx\d)k"Otn,  adj.,  different,  various, 

2)ie  3Serfd;ie't>en^eit,  — ,  pi.  — en, 
difference.  [up. 

SSerfd;Iie't3en,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  inclose,  lock 
35erj(^(n(f'en,  v.  tr.,  to  swallow  up,  ab- 
sorb. 
95er[c^rei'6en,  to  write  out,  prescribe. 
SSerfd)tt)in'bcn,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  disappear 
SSer|e{/cn,  to  provide. 
SSerfi'd;ern,  v.  tr.,  to  assure. 

2)ie  5Bev[i'd;erung,  — ,  pi.  —en, 
assurance,  insurance. 
SSerflnn'Itd^en,  v.  tr.,  to  renderpercep- 

tible  to  the  senses,  illustrate. 
5Berfi3f)'uen,  v.  tr.,  to  reconcile. 
SSerf|)re'c^cn,  to  promise.       [promise. 

S)a§  25erj))re'c^en,  — g,  pi.  —, 
SSerfte'^en,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  understand. 

S)er  iBerftanb', — eg,  understanding 
SSerfto'^fen,  v.  tr.,  to  close  up,  stop. 
SSerfu'd^en,  v.  tr.,  to  attempt,  tempt. 

2)er  33erjuc^',  —eg,  pi.  — e,  at- 
tempt, [temptation. 

2)te  SSerfu'd^ung,  — ,  pi.  -en, 
SSert^et'btgcn,  v.  tr.,  to  defend, 
^ert^ei'len,  v.  tr.,  to  distribute. 


2)er35ertrag',  —t9,pl.  SSertrS'ge,  trea- 
ty, stipulation,  contract. 

^ertra'geu,  v.  tr.,  to  carry  away,  en- 
dure, put  up  with. 

S5ertrau'en,  v.  tr.  and  intr.,  to  intrust, 
put  trust  in  ;  to  open  one's  heart, 
unbosom  one's  self.  [tial. 

5?ertrau'Itd),  adj.,  familiar,  confiden- 

^erii'ben,  v.  tr., to  commit,  perpetrate. 

^^erur't^eilen,  v.  tr.,  to  condemn. 

2)er  35eri)ott'!ommener,  — g,  pi.  — , 
purifier,  perfector. 

55ermanbt'  (mtt),  adj.,  related  (to). 

33ern)et'len,  v.  tr. ,  to  pass  away. 

3)ag  ^erjetc^'m^,  —eg,  pi.  — e,  cata- 
logue. 

2)ag  3Sief),  —eg,;?/.  — e,  cattle. 

33tet,  pron.,  much  ;  adv.,  much,  very. 

3Stetteid;t',  adv.,  perhaps. 

$ier,  four. 

2)ag  ^ter'tet,  — g,  pi—,  quarter. 

3)er  5.^0'get,  — g,  ;)/.  iL^i3'gel,  bird. 

S)ag  33ot!,  —eg,  pi.  ^ol'fer,  people. 
S)er  93or!erftamm,  race. 
2)ie  i^iJl'fertranberung,  migration 

3>oU,  adj. ,  full,  [of  nations. 

^ollbnng'en,to  accomplish,  com- 
plete, perform,  execute  (see 
page  199). 
iPotlen'ben,  to  complete,  finish. 
2)ie  5>otlen'bung,  — ,  completion. 
S?ottfii^'ren,  to  execute,  perform. 
S)te.5BoCfill/nnTg,  — ,  execution. 
S5i5r{tg,  adj.,  full,  complete. 
^cUlom' mm,  adj.,  complete. 
S)er  ^oE'monb,  — e§,  full  moon. 
SSoU'ftSnbig,  adj.,  complete,  per- 
SSottftrecf'en,  to  execute.       [feet. 
SSoUjie'^en,  to  execute,  carry  into 
effect. 

SSon,  prep.,  of,  from,  by,  about. 

33or,  prep.,  before,  from ;  bor  adit  Xa* 
gen,  a  week  ago. 

3Sor'eiItg,  adj.,  hasty,  rash,  precipitate 

^Sor'ent^alten,  to  withhold. 


VOCABULARY. 


473 


S5cr  Scr'fa^r,  —m,pl.—tn,  ancestor. 
2)er  :l>or'taU,— c«,;>/.5Bor'faUe,  event, 

incident,  occurrence. 
3)cr  !iu>r'cjanj5,  — c8,precedence,event 

2)er  33or'gan(jcr,  — 9,pL  — ,  pre- 
2>ov\3eben,  to  feign, pretend. [decessor. 
25or'gcftcrn,  a^i'.,  day  before  yesterday 
2?orber',  at/y.,  previously. 
33o'ri9,  adj.,  previous. 
3?or'fommcn,  to  occur. 
2)ie  $or'tejung,  — ,  pi.  —en,  reading 

before  an  audience;  35or'Ie|ung 

fatten,  to  give  an  address. 
?Sor'(e^t,  adj.,  next  to  the  last. 
2)cr  !iBor'niittag,  — §,  forenoon. 
Xtx  33or>often,  —8,  pi.  —,  outpost, 

advanced  guards. 
2)er  33or'fa^,  — e«,  purpose,  design. 
2)ie  3)or'[id;t,  — ,  foresight,  prudence. 


55or'ft(!^tig,  adj.,  prudent,  cautious. 
2)ic  !i3or'fid;tigfeit,  — ,  prudence. 

5>or'fingcn,  to  sing  to  (one). 

^oi'jpictcn,  to  play  before  (one). 

2)ie  ^Bor'ftabt;  subiu-b. 

2)er  3)or'tl)eil,  — 9,  pi. — c,  advantage. 
3>Dr't()eil^aft,  ac(;'.,  advantageous. 

S5ortrcff'Iid;,  adj.,  excellent. 

SSorii'ber,  adv.,  near,  past,  by. 
3?orU'berftiecjcn,  to  fly  past. 
9Sorii'berge(;en,  to  pass  by. 

2)cr  3>or'n)aub,  — e8,  pi.  l^ov'wSnbc, 

3Sor'tDart§,  adv.,  forward.      [pretext. 

2)er  35or'n)i^,  — e8,  inconsiderate,  cu- 
riosity, pertness,  forwardness. 
SSor'lui^ig,  adj.,  inquisitive,  over- 
curious,  forward. 

3?orjiig'ltc^,  adv.,  especially. 

2)cr  35ulfan',  — 8,  pi.  — e,  volcano. 


2)ic  2Baa'rc,  — ,  pi.  — n,  wares. 
2Bad/fam,  adj.,  watchful. 
SSad/fen,  v.  ir.  intr.,  to  grow. 
SSacf'er,  adj.,  brave,  valiant. 
2)ic  SBaf'fe,  — ,  pi.  — n,  weapon,  arm. 
„   2Ba'ge, — ,  pi.  — n,  scales,  balance 
SSa'gen,  v.  tr.,  to  venture,  dare. 

©eirogt',  adj.,  rash. 
2)er  SSa'gen,  — ^,pL  — ,  wagon,  cart, 

carriage. 
Xk  3Sab(,  — ,  pi. — cn,  choice,  election 

3Sa(/lcn,  v.  tr.,  to  choose,  elect. 
2Ji5a(;r,  adj.,  true,  real. 

aSa^r'^aft,  adj.,  true,  genuine. 

2Ba^r^af' tig,  adj.,  true,  positive. 

S)ie  ^ai)x'idi,  —,  truth. 

SSa^r'ne^mcn,  to  perceive,  [true. 

SSa^r'jc^einltd?,  what  seems  to  be 

SO?al)rfc^etn'(ic^,  adj.,  probable. 
SSd^'rcn,  V.  intr.,  to  last,  endure. 

^d\)'xtnt},prep.,  during,  [forest. 
2)cr  SSalb,  — e«,  pi.  SBciCbcr,  woods, 
2)ic  SSanb,  — ,  pi.  SBan'Dc,  walL 

2)ie  Sa5anb'u(}r,  clock. 


SBan'bern,  v.  intr.,  to  wander,  travel. 
2)ie  SBan'berjabre  (pL),  years  of 
travel  (of  joumeymen). 
2)ic  SBang'e,  — ,  pi.  —ix,  cheek. 
SSann,  arfy.,  when. 
SSan'telmilt^tg,  adj.,  fickle,  inconstant 
SBarm,  adj.,  warm. 

2)te  ^cir'me,  — ,  warmth. 
SBar'ten,  v.  intr.,  to  wait. 
SSarum',  adv.,  why. 
2Sa9,pro7j.,  what. 
SSa'fc^en,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  wash. 
2)a8  SSaf  fer,  — ?,  pi.  —,  water. 

2)a§  SSaf'fergcflilgel,  —8,  water- 
fowls. 
2)ie  SBaf fcr^o^Ic,   cavern    filled 

with  water. 
2)ic  SSaj'ferlcitung,  — ,  pi.  —en, 

aqueduct,  water-works. 
!5)er  5Bancrt>ogcI,  water-fowl. 
2Becb  feln,  y.  #r.,  to  change. 

2)er  2Scd)'fel,  —8.  /'/.—,  change, 

bill  of  exchange. 
2)cr  3Bed;'f  el  brief,  bill  of  exchange 


474 


VOCABULARY. 


2)cr  i85cg,  — e§,  pi.  — c,  way,  road. 

SBe'gen,  prep.^  on  account  of. 
3Beg,  ac/y.,  away,  gone,  off. 

SSeg'gct)en,  to  go  away. 

2Beg'nel;men,  to  take  away. 
SSe^  I  interj.,  woe! 
2Be^  and  tt)e'^e,  ao^'.  awe/  ac?y, ,  causing 

pain ;  totl)  t^un,  to  hurt ;  mtr  tf)Ut 

t>er  3<i^n  ^£^/  iiiy  tooth  aches. 
SBe'^en,  v.  intr.,  to  wave,  blow. 
S)ag  2SciB,  — e§,  i?/.  — er,  woman,  fe- 

SBetb'Iid),  adj.,  feminine,    [male. 
SBeid;,  adj.,  soft,  tender. 
2)ie  ^et'De,  — ,  pi. — n,  pasture-land. 

SBei'ben,  v.  tr.,  to  pasture. 
SSei'bcn,  v.  tr.,  to  consecrate. 

2)ie  iBeiE;'iiad;t,  Christmas,  [eve. 

S)er  2Bei^'ttad;t§aBenb,Christmas- 
SBeil,  con/.,  because,  since. 
S)ie  3Sei'Ie,  — e,  />/.  — en,  a  while. 
3)er  SBein,  — e8,  pi.  — c,  wine. 
SBei'fe,  ac^'.,  wise. 

5)te  SSei'fe,  — e,  ji?/. — n,  way,  manner. 
2SeiJ5,  adj.,  white. 
SSeit,  acf/.,  far,  distant. 
S)er  SBei'sen,  — g,  wheat. 

2)er  SSei'jenader,  wheat-field. 
SSet'd^er,  pron.,  which,  what. 
3)ie  ^cl'Ie,  — ,;;/.  — n,  wave,  billow. 
S)ie  SBett,  — , ;?/.  —en,  world. 

®ag  SBelt'aE,  — §,  universe. 

®tC  3SeIt'gcfd;td)te,  universal  his- 
tory, history  of  the  world. 

SBctt'Iid),  adj.,  mundane,  worldly 
2Ben'&en,  v.  ir.  tr.  and  intr.,  to  turn. 
SKc'llioi,  pron.  and  adv.,  little. 

2Be'ingften§,  adv.,  at  least. 
SKenn,  adv.,  when  ;  conj.,  if. 
^er?/>ron.,  who  ? 
SBer'ben,  to  become. 
SSer'fen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  throw,  hurl. 
3)a8  SBerf,  — e§,  f>Z.  — e,  work. 
3Bert(),  ao?;'.,  worth. 

3)er  SBertb,  — e8,  worth. 

SEcrt^'iJoII,  rtc?/'.,  valuable. 


West. 


S)er  SSefl,  — c 

2)er2Sc'[ten,—g  J  ''"*""'•  [west 

2Bc[t'Uc^,  adj.,  western,  to    th« 
2)te  SBe'fte,  — ,  pi.  — n,  vest. 
SBett'eifern,  v.  intr.,  to  vie  (with). 
2)ag  defter,  — g,  weather. 
Sffiic^'ttg,  adj.,  weighty,  important. 
23i'ber,j3re/>.,  against,  in  opposition  co, 

contrary  to. 

SKiberru'fen,  to  recall,  revoke. 

S)te  Mberfel^'ung,  —,  resistance', 
opposition,  insubordination, 

SStberf^re'^en,  to  contradict. 
SBib'men,  v.  tr.,  to  devote,  dedicate, 
^tb'rig,  adj.,  against,  opposed  to,  of- 
fensive. 
2BtC,  adv.,  how ;  conj.,  as,  like,  than. 
2Bie'ber,at/y.,  again. 

SKie'berbringen,  to  restore. 

SSieberber'fteEeu,  to  restore. 

SBieberbo'Ien,  to  repeat. 

SBte'berfomrnen,  to  return. 

SBie'berf  eben ,  to  see  or  meet  again ; 

auf  2Bte'berjcben(/'V.,  au  re- 

voir),  good-by,  till  we  meet 

again. 

SBte'gcn,  v.  ir.  tr.  and  intr.,  to  weigh. 

Sluf  triegen,  to  outweigh. 
3)te  SBie'je,  — ,  pi.  — n,  meadow. 
2Bttb,arfj.,wild. 

S)a§  SSilb,   — e§,  wild    beasts, 
game,  deer,  venison. 

S)a§  SBilb'pret, — §, venison,  deer 
S)er  SBil'Ie, — X[^,pl. — n,wi]l,  design; 

SBirieng  feiit,  to  have  a  mind,  to 

purpose,  design. 
SBiHtotn'men,  adj. ,  welcome. 
2)er  2Btnb,  — e§,  pi.  —t,  wind. 
SBtn'tcr,  — §,  pi.  —,  winter. 
SStr,  j^ron.,  we. 
SKtr'ten,  v.  tr.,  to  have  an  influence, 

produce  an  effect. 

2Bir!' lid),  adj.,  actual,  real,  true. 

S)tc  SKir'fung,  — ,  pi.  —en,  the 
operation,  force,  effect. 


yOCABULART. 


475 


3)er  SSirt^,  — C8,  pL  —t,  landlord, 

host,  inn-keeper. 

S)ie  ili5irtbjd;aft, — ,pl. — en,econ- 
omy,  husbandry, 

2Birt^'fd)attlid;, adj.,  economical, 

agricultural,  [knowledge  of. 

2Bif  fen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to   know,  have  a 

2)ic  SSiffenfc^aft,  — ,  ;>/.  — eii, 
science,  knowledge,  learning 

2!Si)"fenfd;aftIid;,  adj.,  scientific. 
2)ie  iCit'tcruiicj,  — ,  weather,  tempera- 
ture. 
2)cr  ©ife,  — e§,  wit,  wittiness,  sense. 
23o, af/y., where  {see  §  1 88, 1  ^,Rein.2). 

iSobei',  adv.,  whereby  (see  §  188). 
2)ie  SBo'd^e,  — ,  pi.  —i\,  week. 

23i)'c^ciitlid^,  adj.,  weekly. 
SSoburd;',  adv.,  whereby  (§  188). 
23o()cr'  or  iT>o...(;er',  adv.,  whence. 
SScbiu'  or  tDC.bin',  whither. 
SiBobl,  adv.,  well,  indeed,  certainly. 

illio(;rbebaIten,  adj.,  safe,  in  good 
condition  or  preservation. 

SEJo^rgefallen,  v.  intr.,  to  please. 

3)cr  SfiJobrftanb,  prosperity. 
25o(;'ncu,  V.  intr.,  to  reside. 

S)cr  SS^obn'fi^,  — c8,  pl.—t,  dom- 
icile, abode,  residence. 


I         SBc^n'^aft,  adj.,  resident. 
I         2)ic  ii^ob'iiung,  — ,pl. — en,  resl- 
I  dence. 

1 2)cr  SBoIf,  — c«,  pL  SBSCfe,  wolf. 
2)ic  2Bor!c,  — ,  pl.—tix,  cloud. 
;    „   SBol'le, — t,pl. — 11,  wool. 

iiiJoricn,  at/;'.,  woolen. 
K?ol'Icu,  V.  ir.,  to  be  willing,  desire. 
2)a«  'K^Qxi,  — e«,  pi.   21*cr'tcr   and 
^^or'tc,  word,  Uilk,  promise. 
S)aS  SiJr'tcrlnid;,  dictionary. 
2)ic  Sort'folgc,  order  of  words. 
2)a8  SBort'Icin,  — «,  j9/.  — ,  par- 
ticle, small  word. 
S3?ofc(bft',  a</y. ,  where,  at  which  place, 
2Bot>on',  adv.,  whereof,  from  which, 
25aS  SBun'bcr,  — «,  ;>/.  — ,  wonder, 
©uu'bcrbar,  adj.,  wonderful, 
2Buu'bcrfd)i3n,    adj.,    extremely 
beautiful. 
S)er  SBimjd),  — c«,;>/.  S5>an'jdjc,  wish. 

SBiin'fc^cn,  v.  tr.,  to  wish. 
2)cr  SBurf,  — c8,  ;>/.  a^ur'fc,  throw. 
2)cr  Surf  [peer,  pi.  — c8,  — e, 
javelin. 
2)cr  SBurm,  —t^,pl.  Sttr'mcr,  worm. 
S)ic  S5?ur'5d,  — ,  pi  — n,  root. 
SSiifl,  ac(;.,  desert. 


3* 


3^'iicn,  r.  trj/r.,  to  tremble,  faint. 
2)ie  B^^>^'  — t  P^-  — ^"r  number. 

3vii)'Ien,  V.  fr.,to  number,  count. 

3abrrcid),  at/;,,  numerous. 

!J)ag  3^^^'^*^^*'  numeral. 
3ab'(cu,  V.  tr.,  to  pay. 

'^a\)V^CiX,  adj.,  payable. 
3^ibni,  adj.,  tame. 

3ab'men,  v.  tr.,  to  tame. 
Tcr  3abn,  — e«,  ;j/.  3^^'"^  tooth. 

!2)ic  3abn'bilrfte,  tooth-brush, 
3art,  at/;,,  tender,  delicate. 
Ser  3aum,  — eS,  />/.  3du'me,  bridle. 
„    3aun,  — c8,  />/.  3^"'"^'  hedge, 
2)ic  3«^'^K/  — » P^'  — ^"f  t^-      [fence. 


3cbn,  ten. 

'3)a§  3<^i'^?^"/  — ^»  P^'  — f  ^^K^i  mark. 

3cid)'ncn,  r.  /r.,  to  mark,  draw,  design 

!J)aS  3cit^'ncu,  — «,  art  of  drawing 

2)cr  3ei^'ner, — %,  draughtsman. 

2)ic  3eid?'nung,  — ,  pi.    —en, 

drawing. 

3ci'flCn,  V.  tr.,  to  show,  point  out. 

3ci'^cn,  v.tr.,  to  accuse  of,  charge  with 

2)tc  3fi'^<^f  — f  P^-  ~"'  ^'"^• 
„    3*^^^  — t  P^'  — <^"f  iimei.  [century. 
2)a8  3cit'altcr,  — «,  ju/.  — ,  age, 
3ci'tifl,  adj.,  timely,  early. 
2)ie3cit'lanvl,  period  of  time;  filt 
cine  B^^tiang,  for  a  time. 


476 


vocabulary; 


S)ie  3ttt'rec^nung,  — ,  reckoning 

of  time,  chronology. 
2)ie  ^eit'ic^rift,  — ,  pi.  —en,  pe- 
riodical publication,  journal, 
2)ie  3^i'tuug,  — ,  pi.  — en,  news- 
S)a8  3^^^'^"^^*/  ^^^^'        [paper. 

3)a§  3elt,  —eg,  pi  —z,  tent. 

3crbre'c^en,  to  break  in  pieces. 

3erbrec^'Iid),  ad)'.,  fragile,    [ruin. 

3erf alien,  to  fall  to  pieces,  decay,  go  to 

SDer  3erfall',  —eg,  ruin,  decay. 

3errei'ben,  v.  ir.  <r.,  to  grind,  rub,  pul- 
verize, grind  to  pieces. 

3erftreu'eiT,  v.  tr.,  to  disperse,  scatter. 

2)er  3ct'te(,— g,p/.  — ,  ticket,  check, 
placard,  playbill. 

S)a«  3eug,  — e«,  pi.  — e,  cloth,  stuff. 

S)er  3^u'ge,  —\\,pl.  — n,  witness. 
3eu'gen,  v.  intr.,  to  testify. 

3ie'f;eil,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  draw,  pull ;  v.  in- 
trans.,  to  move,  migrate,  march. 

S)a§  31*^^^  —^^r  pl-  —2,  limit,  bound- 
ary, goal,  aim. 
3ie'Ieu,  V.  intr.,  to  aim. 

3ie'men,  v.  intr.,  to  seem,  become. 
3tcm'lid},aG?;. , becoming,  suitable ; 
adv.,  tolerably,  rather, quite. 

S)ie  ^kx"oz,  — ,  pi.  — en,  ornament. 

2)a§  3^^'"^^^^  ~^f  P^'  —t  room. 
2)er  3ini'mermann,  —^,pl.  3tTn* 
merleute,  carpenter. 

3it'tern,  v.  intr.,  to  tremble. 

2)er  3ott,  —t^,pl.  — e,  inch. 

2)ag  3oa,  — e§,  pZ.  3i5ne,  toll,  duty. 

2)ie  3ooIogte',  — ,  zoology. 

3DolD'gijrf),  ac?;".,  zoological. 

'^\X,prep.,  to,  toward,  in,  at,  by,  for; 

2)er  3«cf'^i^f  —^f  sugar,      [ac^y.,  too. 

3uerft',  adv.,  at  first. 

2)er  3u'fviII,  — eg,  chance. 

3u'faEtg,  ac?;'.,  accidental. 

3uforge,  prep.,  according  to. 

3ufrte'ben,  adj.,  contented,  satisfied. 


2)er'3ug,  — e§,  pi  '^^'c\t,  drawing, 

draught,  pulling,  train. 

2)ag  3  "^B^^MSi-';  draught  animal. 
3u'gebeii,  to  add,  admit. 
3uge'gen,  adj.,  present. 
3ugleid/,  adv.,  at  the  same  tim&, 
S)ie  3u'tuutt,  — ,  futm-e,  futurity. 
3ulel^t',  adv.,  at  last. 
3u'nia4)en,  to  close,  shut. 
S)ie  3""S'^/  ~^r  pl'  —en,  tongue. 
3uriicf',  adv.,  back,  backward. 

3uril(f'brlngen,  to  bring  back. 

3urii(f'ben!en,  v.  refl.,  to  think 
one's  self  back  again. 

3urii(f'gebeix,  to  give  back. 

3unt(f'fel)ren,  v.  intr.,  to  retnm. 

3urii(f'fommen,  to  return,  [on  er. 

3urii(f'Iegen,  to  lay  back,  pass 

3uriic!'3ie^en',  v.  refl.,  to  retire. 
3ufam'men,aafy.,  together,  [coherence. 

2)er  3ufam'men^ang,  connexion, 

3ufam'menna^en,  to  sew  together 

3ujam'menste^en,  to  contract. 
2)cr  3u'jci^,  —eg,  pi  '^Vi'\a\^z,  addi- 
tion, additional  remark. 
2)er  3ll'ftiinb,  —eg,  condition,  [anca 
2)te  3w'i5erf{d)t,  — ,  confidence,  assur- 
3un)ei'Ien,  adv.,  sometimes,  at  times. 
3utX»t'bcr,/?rep.,  contrary  to,  against, 
3U)an'gtg,  twenty.  [repugnant  to. 

3tt>ciV,  adv. , indeed,  it  is  true,  [purpose. 
2)er  3^e^f  — ^^1 P^-  — ^f  aim,  design, 

3tt)ecf'ma^ig,  adj.,  practical. 
3tt)et,  two. 
3foei'beutig,  ac?/. ,  ambiguous. 

2)ie  3it>ei'beuttgfett,  ambiguity. 
3)er  3^ei'fet,  — g,  pi.  — ,  doubt. 

3tt>ei'fel^aft,a(^'.,  doubtful. 
2)er  3^e^9f  — eg,/»/.  — e,  branch,  twig 
3tt)tn'gen,  v.  ir.  tr.,  to  force,  oblige. 
3tt>ifd?en,  ^r^/>.,  between. 

2)ag  3^t'ft^sit^etf ,  steerage. 
3ii?oIf,  twelve. 


Rem.  For  a  few  additional  words,  see  the  addenda  at  the  end. 


VII.  ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY. 


A,  an,  eln,  ci'ucr,  rin. 

Able,  fa'bti]  (see  §  1G8 ;  L.  XXXI). 

Aborigines,;;/.,  bie  Uv'eimDot;ner. 

About,  prep,  (around),  iim  (concern- 
ing), ii'ber;  about  it,  barii'bcr; 
adv.,  berum',  ungefci^r'. 

Above,  ac/y.,  o'beil ;  prep.,  tt'bcr. 

Absent,  ab'iDefenb.  [nung,  — . 

Accent,  ber  ^2lccent',  — S ;  bic  ^eto'* 

Accept,  au' ncl;mcn. 

Accompany,  beglei'tcn,  mit'ge^cn. 

Accomplice,  ber  3)fit'fd;ulbigc. 

According  to,  prep.,  gemciji',  juforgc. 

Account,  bie  ^Red^'uung  ;  on  account 
of,  prep.,  tre'geu  (§  107,  Rem.  2). 

Accusative  (Case),  ber  2lf  htfati^',  — S. 

Accuse,  au'tlagcn,  befrf)urbigen. 

Accustom  (one's  self  to),  fic^  gctDob'* 
ncii  (an). 

Acid,  adj.,  faiier;  noxm,  bic  ©au'rc. 

Acknowledge,  an'ertcnnen. 

Acquaintance,  bie  S3efannt'jd^aft. 

Acquit,  frei'fprcc^en. 

Act,  ^au'beln,  fic^  bene()'mcn. 

Action,  bic  ^anb'lung. 

Active,  t^d'ttg,  leb'^aft. 

Actual,  tiMrf'tic^. 

Adapt,  fid;  fd;i(f'en. 

Admit,  ju'gcben,  ein'raiimen. 

Advertisement,  bie  5ln';^cige. 

Affair,  bie  ^a.'&it,  bie  ^n'gelegen^eit. 

After, /jrep.,  nac^  ;  adv.,  nad^^cr,  fpS* 
ter ;  conj.,  nad^'bem. 

Afternoon,  ber  S^ad^'mittag. 

Afterward,  nac^'ber,  f^a'ter. 

Again,  ti?ie'ber,  nocb'mals.      [ge'gen. 

Against,  ge'gen,  VDi'bcr ;  against  it,  ba* 

Age,  bag  %ViiX. 

Agreeable,  an'gene^m. 


Aim,  bie  $Ri(^'tung,  baS  3^^^^  >  ^-  *"'^m 

Air,  bie  ^utt.  Qie'leiu 

Album,  ba9  5tt'bum,  — ,  pi.  —8. 

Algebra,  bie  ^itl'gebra. 

All,  al'Ier. 

Allow,  erlau'ben. 

Ally,  ber  33un'beggeno§, 

Almost,  fa[t,  bei'nal)e. 

Along,  ;?reij.,  tang«,  entlang'. 

Alphabet,  ba8  ^<aipbabet',— 3. 

Already,  bereits',  jd^on. 

Also,  auc^,  e'benfatts,  noci^. 

Altar,  ber  Slltar',  — e^^,  pi.  %Wxt. 

America,  Hme'rita  (see  page  117). 

Among,  im'ter,  jTOt'jc^en;  to  be  among, 

Ancient,  alt.  [gel^ij'ren  ju. 

And,  unb. 

Answer,  bie  ^KntttJort,  v.,  ant'rcorten. 

Antiquity,  bie  23or'seit,  bas   lifter- 

tbum  ;  antiquities,  f»/., bie  ^rter* 

tbilmer,  3lntiquita'ten. 
Anxiety,  bic  ^ugft.  [«)a«. 

Any  body,  ^c'manb ;   any  thing,  et'- 
Appear,  erjd^ei'ncn,  jd^ci'nen. 
Apartments,  bic  SBo^'nung. 
Apple,  ber  21^'fct. 
April,  ber  ?l^rir. 
Archbishop,  ber  (Srj'bifd^of. 
Architect,  ber  33au'meifter,  ^trd^iteft. 
Architecture,  bic  33au'fmift,  bie  ^trdji* 
Arm,  ber  mrm.  [tettur'. 

Arms,/?/.,  bie  ©af'fen. 
Army,  bie  ^rmee',  baS  $eer. 
Around,  UlTl. 
Arrest,  terbaftcn. 

Arrive,  an'fommcn.  [men,  — S 

Arrival,  bic  ^u'tunft,  — ,  baS  5ln  tcm< 
Art,  bie  ^uiift. 
Artist,  ber  SUnft'ler. 


478 


•VOCABULARY. 


As,  aU,  text,  baS,  h)cU. 

Ask,  frvi'gcn,  t>crian'gen. 

Assembly,  bie  3>erfanim'Iuug. 

Assert,  hd}aup'im. 

Astonishing,  erftaun'Itc^,  erftau'nenb. 

Astronomy,  bie  Slftronomte'. 

At,  an,  ju,  in ;  at  all,  adv.,  gar. 

Attentive,  auf'merfjam. 

August,  ber  Stuguft'. 


Aunt,  bie  Xawti, 

Austria,  De'fteiTeirf). 

Author,  l-icr  il)erfaf' fer. 

Authority,  bie  S3e^6r'bc,  —,pl.  -~en. 

Autumn,  ber  §erbft. 

Avoid,  umge'^eiu 

Aware,  gett)a^r'. 

Away,  adv.,  tteg,  fort. 


B. 


Bad,  jc^tec^t. 
Bake,  barf' en. 
Baker,  ber  33acf'er. 
Ball,  ber  53aE. 
Band,  bag  ^anb. 
Banish,  Derban'nen. 
Bank,  ba§  U'fer ;  bie  S3anf. 
Baron,  ber  S3aron,  ber  grei'^err. 
Barrel,  bag  %a^. 
Basket,  ber  ^orb. 
Basket-maker,  ber  ^orb'mod^er. 
Bath,  bag  33ab,  —eg,  pi.  S3a'ber. 
Battle,  bie  ©c^Iac^t. 
Bavaria,  Sat'eru  (see  page  417). 
Bavarian,  bat'rif^. 
Be,  fein. 
Bear,  ber  53Sr. 
Beat,  fd;(a'gen. 
Beauty,  bie  @d;i5n'^eit. 
Beautiful,  fd)i)n. 
Because,  tt»eit. 
Become,  tt?er'bcn. 
Bed,  bag  58ett,  bag  Sag'er. 
Before,  prep.,  toor  ;  conj.,  e'^C. 
Begin,  an'fangen,  begtn'nen. 
Beginning,  ber  ?ln'fang. 
Behind, ;;rep.,-  ^tn'ter ;  adv.,  bin'ten. 
Believe,  glau'ben.  [un'ten. 

Below,  ;?rg/7.,  un'ter,un'ter^alb ;  adv., 
Berry,  bie  S3ee're. 
Beside,  ne'ben. 
Besides,  au'^er. 
Best  (see  §  92). 
Betake  one's  self,  fic!^  bcgc'ben,  ge'^cn. 


Better  (see  §  92). 

Between,  ^toi'fc^en.  Qen'jettg. 

Beyond,  prep.,  jen'fett,  ii'ber ;   adv., 

Bill  of  exchange,  ber  2Sed/feI. 

Bind,  btn'ben. 

Binding,  ber  (Stn'banb,  —eg. 

Bird,  ber  ^So'gel. 

Bishop,  ber  5Bi'fd;of. 

Bite,  bei'^en. 

Black,  fd^marg. 

Blame,  ta'beln. 

Blessed,  fe'Itg. 

Blue,  blan. 

Boat,  bag  S3oot. 

Bonnet,  ber  ^ut,  ber  S)a'menl^ut. 

Book,  bag  53ud). 

Bookbinder,  ber  33uc^'binber. 

Bookseller,  ber  S3uc^'^anbler. 

Bookstore,  bie  S3uc^'^anblung. 

Boot,  ber  ©tie'fel. 

Born,  gebo'ren. 

Borrow,  bor'gen. 

Boy,  ber  ^na'be. 

Braide,  fled/ten  (v.ir.). 

Brave,  ta^'fer. 

Bread,  bag  53rob. 

Breadth,  bie  ^rei'tc.        [jerbre'c^em 

Break,  bre'd;en ;    to  break  in  pieces, 

Breakfast,    bag    ^X^'\tM ;    v.  intr.f 

friib'Pden. 
Bridge,  bie  33riicf'e. 
Brilliant,  glan'jenb.        [mtt'Brtngen. 
Bring,  brtng'en;  to  bring  with  one, 
Broad,  brctt. 


VOCABULARY. 


479 


Brother,  ber  33ru'ber ;  brother-in-law, 
ber  Bd)\va'Qtx ;  brothers  or  breth- 
ren, bie  ©cbril'ber. 

Brown,  braiin. 

Build,  baii'en. 

Building,  ba^  ®cbau'be. 

Bureau,  bie  ^ommo'bc.  [ncn. 

Burn,  brcu'uen ;  bui-a  down,  ab'breii* 


Business,  baS  Ocfd^a^t' ;  it  is  none  of 
his  business,  e8  gc^t  i^n  gar  nid;t 
an. 

But,  adv.,  tiur ;  conj.,  a'bcr,  alteiu', 
after  a  negative,  fon'bcril. 

Butter,  bie  33ut'ter. 

Buy,  tau'fcn. 

By,  i)on,  burc^,  bei. 


C. 


Cabinet-maker,  ber  Xi\d}'kx. 

Cake,  ber  6iu'ci;eii. 

Call,  ru'fcu  ;  (to  name),  ueu'uen. 

Can,  fiJu'lien. 

Candle,  \>aQ  ^ic^t. 

Cane,  ber  @tocf. 

Cannon,  bie  ^auo'ue. 

Cap,  bie  aWiife'e. 

Capital  (city),  bie  ^au^t'ftabt. 

Captain,  ber  §aiipt'niann,  ^apitSn'. 

Carpenter,  ber  ^ini'mermann. 

Carriage,  ber  -ii^a'gcii,  Die  (gqui^a'ge. 

Castle,  bag  2c^(o^. 

Catch,  fau'gcii,  faf'fen,  ergrei'fcn. 

Cathedral,  ber  2)om,  bie  2)om'tir^e. 

Cattle,  bag  35ief). 

('ause,  bie  Ur'fac^e,  ber  ©rutib. 

Celebrated,  berutjmt'. 

Central  Germany,  aJJit'telbcutfd^Ianb. 

Certain  (ly),  genjig. 

Chair,  ber  <3tU^I. 

Charm,  rei'jen  ;  charming,  rei'^cnb. 

Cheap,  biriig,TOo^rfcit. 

Child,  baS  ^inb. 

Chemistry,  bie  S^emte'. 

Church,  bie  ^ir'c^c. 

(  ircumstance,  ber  Um'f^aitb  ;  to  adapt 

one's  self  to  circumstances,  fic^  in 

bie  Um'ftanbe  fc^id'en. 
City,  bie  ®tabt. 

City  Hall,  bas  9?at(/^an«.  [ben. 

City  authorities, />/.,  bic  Otabt'be^Sr* 
Clean,  vein. 
Clerk,  ber  .^ommi«'. 
Qock,  bic  U^r,  3Banb'u&r. 


Close  by,  ne'ben. 

(  loth,  ba^  3:ud;,  ^tUQ, 

Cloud,  bie  ^liJolte. 

Coarse,  grob. 

Coat,  ber  9io(f. 

Coffee,  v^af'fee. 

Cold,  fait. 

Collar,  ber  ^ra'gcn. 

Collection,  bie  ®amm'lung. 

Colonel,  ber  O'berft. 

Colony,  bie  ^otonie'. 

Color,  bie  i^J^  be. 

Column,  bie  ©pal'te. 

Come,  torn' men  ;  come  down,  ^erun'* 

terfommen ;  come  here,  ^ierber's 
Commence,  an'fangcn.         [fom'men. 
Commencement,  ber  Sln'fang. 
Command,  ber  SSefet)!' ;  v.,  befcb'Ien. 
Common,  gcmein' ;  common  schools, 

bie  5BoIt«'td;uIen.       [oollcu'ben. 
Complete,  biJl'Iig,  t^ottfom'men  ;  v.tr.. 
Comprehend,  bcgret'fcn. 
Concern,  an'gc^en. 
Concert,  ba6  ^on^ert'. 
Conclude,  befd^lie'^en^fid^  cntfd^Uc'gcn, 

fic^  entfc^ei'ben. 
Conduct,  V.  tr.,  fii^'ren,  lei'ten. 
Confederation,  ber  Snnb. 
Congress,  ber  ^ongre{3',  — e6.    [—en. 
Conspiracy,  bie  Smpij'rnng,  — ,  pL 
Consumption,  bie  ©c^winb'jud^t,  — . 
Contam,  entbal'ten.  [ten. 

Contemptible,  ttcrcic^t'Iid^,  ju  toerad;'« 
Contents,  ber  3n'(jalt. 
Convenient,  bequcm'. 


480 


VOCABULARY. 


Cook,  ber  ^oc^,  btc  ^o'c^tn. 

Copy,  bie  (So^te';  v.  tr.,  ab'fdjretben. 

Corner,  bie  Scf'e ;   corner-stone,  ber 

©runb'ftein.  [ren. 

Correspond,  cntf^re'c^ett,  !orref))oubi':^ 
Correspondence,  bic  ^orref|)onben3'. 
Cost,  ber  ^^rei^,  bie  to'fteu  (;>/.) ;  v. 

intr.,  fo'ften ;  costly,  f oft' bar. 
Country,  bag  Sanb. 
Courage,  ber  3}Jut^,  bie  2;a>ter!eit. 
Cousin,  ber  33et'ter,  bie  (Soufi'ne. 
Cover,  bebecf'en. 


Cow,  bie  ^u^. 
Criminal,  ber  58erbrc'(^er, 
Crooked,  !rumm. 
Crown,  Die  Sro'ne;  ber  ^ran^. 
Cry,  wei'nen,  jc^rei'en,  ru'teru 
Crusade,  ber  ^reuj'jug. 
Cultivate,  bebau'en. 
Cultivated,  adj.,  gebtl'bet. 
Culture,  bie  ^il'bung. 
Cup,  bie  £af  fe. 

Custom,  btc  @it'te,  — ,  pi.  — ru 
Cut,  fi^nei'ben. 


Danger,  bic  ©efa^r'. 

Dare,  loa'gen,  biir'teix. 

Dark,  bun'Jel,  fin'[ter. 

Daughter,  bie  Xoc^'ter  ;  daughter-in- 
law,  bie  (Sc^tcie'gertod;ter. 

Day,  ber  XaQ  ;  to  day,  ^eu'te ;  of  to- 
day, to-day's,  adj.,  ^eu'ttg  ;  day- 
before-yesterday,  ijor'geftem. 

Dead,  tobt. 

Deaf,  taub. 

Dear,  t^eu'er,  tieB. 

Death,  ber  Sob,  — e8. 

Debt,  bie  @(^utb. 

Decay,  ber  SBerfatl'. 

Deceive,  tril'gen,  betril'gen. 

Deep,  tief. 

Defendant,  ber  93e!Iag'te. 

Describe,  befc^rei'ben. 

Description,  bie  SSefc^ret'buitg. 

Design,  ber  ^latt,  (Sntttjurf;  v.  tr., 
entttjer'fen. 

Desire,  toitn'fc^en. 

Develop,  enttDttf'cttt. 

Dictionary,  bag  2Bi3r'terBud^,  Sc'jftcon. 

Die,  fter'ben. 

Difficult,  fc^ttjcr,  fd^tDte'rtg. 

Dig,  gra'ben. 

Diligent,  ftet'^ig,  etit'ftg. 

Dine,  ju  9Jiit'tog  ef'fen,  f^et'fen. 

Dinner,  bag  9J?it'tage[fen,  bag  (Sf  fen. 

Direct,  bireft',  gera'bc. 


Directly,  gera'be ;  glet(i^. 

Direction,  bie  Sitc^'tung. 

Director,  ber  2)iref'tor. 

Disagreeable,  un'angene^m. 

Discontented,  un'sufrieben. 

Discount,  ber  9iabatt',  —eg. 

Discover,  entbed'en. 

Discovery,  bie  ^ntbccE'ung. 

Discretion,  bie  35orfic^ttg!eit ;  at  dis- 
cretion,   auf  (Sna'be  unb  lln'^ 

Dish,  bie  ©d^itffct.  [gnabe. 

Dishonesty,  bie  Un'e^rltc^feit. 

Disorder,  bie  Un'orbnung. 

Dispatch,  bie  Se^e'fc^c. 

Disproportion,  bag  9JJtg'ber{)aftm^. 

Disquietude,  bic  lln'ru{)e,3lengft'lic^fett 

Dissimilar,  un'a^ntid),  un'gtet^. 

Distance,  btc  ©ntfcr'nuitg. 

Ditch,  ber  ©ra'bcn. 

Do,  t^un,  tna'djen. 

Doctor,  ber  2)of'tor,  ber  %xiX. 

Dog,  ber  §unb. 

Dollar,  ber  ©otTar,  ber  2:^a'Ier. 

Door,  bie  X^Wxt,  bag  St^or. 

Doubt,  ber  3n)ci'fel ;  v.  tr.,  bcstDci'fcItt 

Dozen,  bag  ©itt'jcnb. 

Down,  nte'ber,  t)crab'. 

Draw,  jic'^en ;  geirf)'neit.  [!iitijl. 

Drawing,  btC  3std>'nuttg,  btc  '^Qx'&itM* 

Dress,  bag  ^Icib,  bie  ^lei'bung,  ber  2ln'* 
gug. 


VOCABULARY. 


481 


Dress  coat,  bcr  %xad,  Scib'rod. 
Drink,  trill' len. 
Drive,  trei'ben. 


Dry,  trod 'en ;  v.  tr. ,  trocf'ncn, 
Dutch  (see  page  417). 
During,  toal^'rcnb. 


£. 


Each,  jc'ber ;  each  other,  etnanber. 
Earn,  »erbie'nen,  eriDer'l^en. 
Earth,  bic  @r'be.  [aegen  O'ftcn. 

East,  cer Oft, O'ftcn;  toward  the  east. 
Eastern,  ton  O'ftCn,  oft'lid?. 
Easy,  (eid^t.  [frcj'fcn). 

Eat,   cfjen  (to  devour  like  animals, 
p:dition,  *;Jlu3'c}abe,  ^^uf  lagc. 
Editor,  ber  i)tcbatteur',  —8,  pi.  — e. 

Iciiding  editorial,  bet  ^eit'arttfel, 
Egg,  ba«$  @i.  [— ^fi?^-  — • 

Egypt  (see  page  417). 
Either,  conj.^  eiltwe'bcr. 
Elect,  ica^'len,  eriva'^len. 
Electric,  elef'trijc^. 

Ell,  bie  enc. 

Embrace,  umar'mcn  ;  to  embrace  an 
opportunity,  ctne  ©ele'ijcnbcit  be* 
Emperor,  ber  ^ai'fer.  [nii'feen. 

Empire,  baS  ^ai'fcrt^um. 
Empty,  leer. 
End,  bag  eii'bc. 
End,  V.  tr.,  en'bigen,  bccn'bigcn. 
Endow,  griln'ben,  ftiftcn,  boti'ren. 
Endure,  bau'em. 
Enemy,  ber  geinb. 


Energetic,  fraft'toKI. 
Engage  (order),  beftel'Ien. 
English  (see  page  4 1 7).  [— e. 

Engraving,  bcr  ^u^jferftid^,  — e8,  pi. 
Enough,  genug'. 
Entire,  ganj,  tooUftcinbig. 
Entirely,  ganj  (unb  gar),  boriig. 
Entrance,  ber  ©m'gang.  [men. 

Escape,  bermei'ben,  entge'^en,  enttom'* 
Especial,  ijor^^iig'Iid^,  ^au^t'fad^lic^. 
Especially,  befon'berS,  torjiig'lid;. 
Even,  adj.,  e'bcn,  gleid; ;   adv.,  auc^, 

fclbft,  gleid/fatls. 
Evening,  ber  ^'beub. 
Ever,  je,  je'nial?. 
Every,  je'ber,  al'Ier. 
Exchange  (bill  of),  ber  33?ed^'fel. 
Execute,  auS'fii^ren.  [roeg'ung. 

Exercise,  bie  ^iluf'gabe,  Ue'buug,  ^e* 
Exhibit,  auS'fteUen. 
Exhibition,  bie  5lug'jteUung. 
Exit,  ber  ^uS'gang,  — e8. 
Expense,  bie  2(u§'gabeii,  bie  ^o'ften, 

(;>/.),  bie  Un'f often. 
Express  train,  ber  (gc^ncH'gng. 
Extraordinaiy,  auOeror'bentlid^. 


Face,  bag  ®efid^t'. 

Faith,  ber  ©lau'be. 

Faithful,  treu,  gctreu'. 

Fall,  fal'Ien ;  to  fall  to  pieces,  tnStilcfc 

fatten,  in  2?erfatt'  gera't^en,  ju 

©run'be  ge'fjen. 
False,  falf(^ ;  falsehood,  bie  galfd^'^cit. 
Family,  bie  ganii'tie. 
Famous,  berii^mt'. 
Fare,  bag  ga^r'gelb. 
Farewell,  lebcn  ®ie  ttJO^I  I 
Fashion^  bie  3JJo'be. 


Fast,  fd^nett.  [<2(!^»ie'gcrt}atet 

Father,    ber    3?a'ter ;     father-in-law, 

Fault,  bcr  ge^'Ier. 

Favor,  bic  ©unft ;  in  favor  of  it,  bafiir'. 

Fear,  bie  gurdjt ;  v.  tr.,  fUrd^'ten. 

February,  ber  ^e'bruar. 

Feel,  fil()'len. 

Fever,  bag  gic'bcr. 

Few,  n?e'nige  ipL). 

Field,  bag  gclb. 

Fight,  fec^'ten,  tam'^fcn. 

Find,  fin' ben. 


482 


VOCABULARY. 


Fine,  fcin,  fd^iJn. 
Finger,  ber  gtng'cr. 
Finish,  tooEeil'beit. 
Fire,  baS  geu'cr. 
First,  er'fte. 
Fish,  gtf(^. 

Fisherman,  ber  ?5^'f(^er. 
Fit,  ^af  fen,  fte'^en. 
Five,  fiiut. 

Flag,  bie  ga^'ne,  gtag'gc 
Flatter,  fd^mei'cl;eln. 
Flee,  flie'^en. 
Fleeting,  ftild/ttg,  fd;nett. 
Floor,  bev  iBo'ben,  gu^'boben. 
Flour,  bag  3JJe^I. 
Flow,  flte'^en. 
Flower,  bie  33Iu'me. 
Fly,  ftie'gen. 

Follow,  fol'gen,  nac^'folgcn. 
Foot,  ber  gu§.  [meil,  benn,  ba. 

For,  prep. ,  fiir,  au'ftatt,  aiif ;  conj. , 
Force,  bie  Sraft,  9JJad;t,  ©etoalt';  v. 
tr.,  jtDing'en,  nS't^igen. 


Foreign,  fremb,  auS'Ianbifd^. 

Forest,  ber  2Batb,  gorft. 

Forget,  Dergef'fen. 

Forgive,  t>erge'ben. 

Form,  bie  gorm. 

Former,  ijo'rig,  i)oran'ge^enb. 

Formerly,  frii'ber,  e'^emalS,  fonjl. 

Fortification,  bie  ge'ftung. 

Found,  griin'ben,  [tif  ten. 

Four,  toier. 

Free,  fret. 

Freight,  bie  Sa'bung,  bie  ©i^'ter  (pi.)  \ 

freight-train,  ber  ©ii'teyjug. 
French  (see  page  417). 
Frequently,  oft,  ofterS. 
Friend,  bcr  greunb  ;  friendly,  frcunb'a 

lic^. 
Friday,  ber  ^ret'tag. 
From,  toon,  au§. 
Fruit,  ba§  Obft,  bie  grudjt 
Full,  i)oIt. 
Furnish,  mobli'ren. 


G. 


Gain,  getutn'nen. 

Gallery,  bie  ©aEerie',  — ,  pi.  — n. 

Garden,  ber  ©ar'ten. 

Gardener,  ber  ©art'nft. 

Garland,  ber  ^ranj. 

Gas,  bag  @a8. 

Gather,  fam'metn. 

General,  ber  ©eneral'. 

Germany  (see  page  417). 

Get,  V.  tr.,  \)o'itn,  fi^  terfc^affen ;  v. 

intr.,  n?er'ben,  !om'men. 
Gift,  bie  @a'be,  ba6  ©efc^enf. 
Girl,  bag  SJZab'd^en. 
Give,  ge'ben,  fc^en'fen. 
Glad,  fro^,  freu'big,  erfreufr,  gladly, 

gem,  mit  SSergnil'gen. 
Glass,  bag  ©tag. 
Glove,  ber  §anb'f^u'^. 
Go,  ge'ben ;  to  go  out,  aug'gc^en  ;  to 

go  away,  toeg'ge^en. 


God,  ber  ©ott. 

Gold,  bag  ©olb. 

Good,  gut ;  good-by,  k'ben  ®te  teo^t/ 

Goodness,  bie  ©ii'te. 

Gout,  bie  ©ic^t,  bag  ^o'bagra. 

Govern,  regte'reu. 

Government,  bie  9tegic'rung. 

Grain,  bag  ^orn. 

Grammar,  bie  ©ratnma'ti!. 

Grammatical,  grammattfa'Iifc^. 

Grand,  gro^,  erba'ben. 

Granddaughter,  bie  (Sn'telin. 

Grandfather,  ber  ©ro^'iJater. 

Grandmother,  bie  ©ro^'mutter. 

Grandson,  ber  @n'fel. 

Grasp,  gret'fen,  faf'fen. 

Grass,  bag  ©rag. 

Gray,  grau. 

Great,  grog. 

Great-grandfather,  ber  Ur'gro|ti;t«f 


VOCABULARY. 


483 


Great-grandmother,  bie  Ur'gro^mut* 
G  reece  (see  page  4 1  b).  [tcr. 

Greeu,  grilu. 


Groschen,  bcr  ©ro'fc^en. 

Grow,  wad;  fen.  let'ten. 

Guide,  bcr  p^'rcr ;  v.  tr.,  ful?  rcu, 


H. 


Habit,  bie  ©cwcbn'^cit.  [gctn. 

Hail,  ber  ^a  ijcl ;  v.  intr.,  to  hail,  ^a* 

Hair,  ba§  ^aar. 

Half,  bie  ^dlf  te ;  adj.,  \)aih, 

Hull,  ter  ^aai,  ber  s^orjaal. 

Hammer, ber  jammer. 

Hand,  Die  §anb. 

Hang,  V.  intr.,  {/aiXQin  ;  v.  <r.,  ^aiicj'eii 

Hapjjy,  gliicf  lid;,  fvo^. 

Happiness,  ba§  ©lilcf. 

Happen,  gefd;e  l;cn,  fid;  cret'gnen. 

Hard,  (;ait ;  hardly,  jd;mer  U^, 

Hat,  ber  §ut. 

Have,  ba'ben. 

Hay,  baS  ^cu. 

He,  cr. 

Head,  bag  ^aii^t,  ber  ^o^f. 

Health,  bie  ©efimb^eit ;  healthy,  ge* 

funb'. 
Hear,  (;i5  rert ;  such  a  thing  has  never 

been  heard  of,  fo  ettoaS  i[t  biS  je^t 

un'er^i5rt  geirc'fcn. 
Heart,  baS  ^erj. 
Heat,  bie  §i^'e. 
Heaven,  bcr  §im'mcl. 


Heavy,  fc^hJCr. 

Hedge,  bie  §e(f  c,  bcr  ^nun. 

Height,  bie  ^i3'^C. 

Here,  ^ier. 

High,  ^oc^. 

Hill,  ber  ^u'gct. 

Hire,  mie't^cu. 

His,  fcin  ;  ber  (Sct'ntgc. 

History,  bic  ®cfd;id;'te. 

Hit,  tref  feii ;  (to  bump),  fto'gcn. 

Hold,  l^arteu. 

Holy,  ^ci'Iig. 

Home,  bag  §au§ ;  at  home,  ju  $au' jc ; 

homeward,  iiad;  ^aii'fe. 
Honest  or  honorable,  cbv'lid;. 
Honor,  bie  (Sb're ;  v.  tr.,  el;'ren. 
Horse,  ba9  ^ferb. 
Hot,  tjet^. 
House,  bag  §au8. 
How  ?  wie  ?  an\  n)etd;e  5Sei'|c, 
However,  bod;,  jebod;',  nid;tgbeftotDe'* 
Hunger,  ber  ^ung'cr.  [ntger. 

Hunt,  ja'gcii ;    hunting,    bie    ^agb; 

hunter,  bcr  3a'gcr. 
Husband,  bcr  2JJami,  (S'^emann. 


I. 


I,  i(^. 

K,  mnn,  tm  ^aU,  falls. 

Image,  bag  33ilb. 

Immediate,  unmittclbat  ♦ 

Immediately,  gleid;,  foglcic^'. 

Imperial,  taiferlic^. 

Important,  bcbcu'tcnb. 

Imposing,  im^ofant'. 

In, in. 

Incapacity,  Un'fa^tgfcit,  Un'tilc^tigfctt. 

Inch,  bcr  3on.  [tiinfte  (;>/.). 

Income,  bag  (gin'tommcn,  bic  Sin* 

Increase,  toac^'fert,  ju'ttc^mcn. 


Indeed,  tt»obI,  frci'flc^,  jtuar. 
Indijl-rubber  over-shoes,  bic  ©um'tni* 

\d)ui)t  (pi). 
Indian,  ber  3nbia'ncr. 
Indolent,  fau(,  Ivif  fii],  tra'gc. 
Industrial,  inbnftricU'. 
Industrious,  flei'fjig,  betrieb'fam. 
Injure,  fd;a'bcn  ;   to  injure  one's  sel^ 

fic^  felbft  fd;a'bcn. 
Injurious,  fd;ab'Ii(^. 
Inside  of,  tn'nerbalb. 
Instead  of,  an'ftiitt. 
Instructive,  le^r'rei(^. 


484 


VOCABULARY. 


Intention,  bie  Stb'fid^t.  [(p^-)' 

Interest,  ba§  ^nteref'fc,  btc  Bin'f^n 
Interesting,  tuteveffaut'. 
Into,  in. 


Invent,  erfttt'ben 
Invite,  ein'laben. 
Iron,  ba§  Si' fen. 


invention,  btc  @r« 

[fin' bung. 


J. 


January,  ber  ^a'nuar  (a^e  page  434). 
John,  ^o^aun'  (see  page  416). 
Journal,  bie  3cit'fcl;vift. 
Journey,  bie  9tei'fe. 
Joy,  bie  greu'be. 


Keep,  be^at'ten,  ^at'ten. 

Key,  bev  i^d^liiffel. 

Kill,  ti3b'ten. 

Kind,  bie  2lvt,  bie  ©at'tung. 

Kind,  adj.,  freunb'Iic^,  gii'ttg. 

King,  ber  ^i)'nig. 

Kiss,  ber  ^uB,  — e§,  pi.  ^ilf'fe. 


July,  ber  3u'Ii  (see  page  43^). 
June,  ber  ^u'ni  (see  page4a^). 
Just,  adj.,  gered;t',  bil  lig. 
Just  (exactly),  adv.,  gera'be; 
now),  e'beu,  foe'ben. 


(just 


K. 


Kiss,  V.  <r. ,  fiif'fen. 

Kitchen,  bie  ^li'd^e,  — ,  pi.  — n. 

Knife,  ba§  2)?ef'fer. 

Knock,  flo^'fen,  fto'^en,  fd;Ia'gen. 

Know,    tr>if'fen;    (to    be    acquainted 

with),  fennen. 
Known  (to  become),  befannt'  trer'beu. 


Labor,  bie  ^r'beit;  v.  intr..,  ar'beiten. 

Lady,  bie  ii^a'b^,  bie  2)a'me. 

Lame,  la^m. 

Lamp,  bie  2am'))e. 

Land,  ba^  Sanb. 

Language,  bie  @^ra'd^e. 

Large,  grojj. 

Last,  ber  le^'te,  ber  too'rige;  adv.,  ju* 

le^t',  5um  le^ten  Tla'U. 
Last,  v.intr.,  bau'ern. 
Late,  fpat,    ^erfpa'tet;    adv.,    fpat; 

lately,    neu'lid^,    un'Idnc^ft,    tor 
Latest,  ber  te^'te.  [tnr'sem. 

Latin,  latei'nifd;. 
Law,  bag  ®efe^'. 

Lay,  le'gen  ;  lay  hold  of,  ergrei'fen. 
Lazy,  fani,  trci'ge,  laf'fig. 
Lead,  bag  33Iet. 
Lead-pencil,  ber  58Iet'[tift. 
Lead,  v.  tr.,  fit^ren,  lei'ten. 
Leader,  ber  gilfj'rer. 
Leap,  f^ring'en. 
Learn,  ler'nen. 


Least,  ber  ^lein'fte;  adv.,  am  2Be'nig^ 
[ten  ;  at  least,  tt)e'nig[ten§ ;  not  in 
the  least,  nid;t  im  ©ering'ften. 

Leather,  bag  Se'ber;  leathern,  atZ;"., 
le'bern. 

Leave,  laf  fen,  bertaf'fen ;  when  do  you 
leave?  n)annrei'fen  @ieab?  when 
does  the  train  leave?  tcann  gci;t 
ber  3ug  ab?  [linfg. 

Left  (hand),    bie  Sin'te  ;    to  the  left, 

Lend,  lei'^en,  tjerlei'^en. 

Length,  bie  l^cing'e. 

Less,  n^e'niger,  gering'er,  !tetn. 

Lesson,  bie  Seftton',  bie  2luf'gabe. 

Let,  laf'fciT,  erian'ben.  [ber  33ud/[tabc. 

Letter,  ber  Sricf ;  (of  the  alphabet), 

Liberty,  bie  grei'(;eit. 

Library,  bie  ^ibliot^e!'. 

Librarian,  ber  iBibliotbefar'. 

Lie,  He'gen  ;  (to  tell  a  falsehood),  tii'ger 

Life,  bag  Se'ben. 

Light,  bag  Sid)t ;  adj.,  Ii(^t,  ^cK,  Ieid;t 
lightly,  Ieid;t. 


VOCABULARY. 


.485 


Lighten,  blit'scn. 
Lightning,  ber  611^,  — c8. 
Like,  adj.,  Qlddf,  dl^n'Uc^. 
Like,  V.  tr.,  cjem  l^a  ben;  how  do  you 
like  the  book?  XDU  gejdUl'  31;  ncn 
Line,  tut'tern.  [ba8  ^ud;  ? 

Lining,  ba«  (^"t'tcr. 
Literature,  bie  Siteratur'. 
Literary,  Itterarifd;. 
Little,  flein,  geriiivj';  a  little,  ein  tue'nig. 
Live,  le'beu  ;  (to  reside),  iDot/ucu. 
Live,  lively,  adj.,  leben'big,  lcb'(>aft. 
Livelihood,  ber  Uu'ter^alt. 


Load,  btc  ?afl,  bie  2a'bung. 

Loan,  btc  ?ln'Icil;e  — ,  pi.  — u. 

Loan,  V.  tr.,  lei'jjcn. 

Lock,  baS  iSd^lc^. 

Lock,  V.  tr.,  jd;lie'^cn. 

Long,  laiti} ;  a  long  time,  (ang'e. 

Look,  jd^au  en,  bli  (fcii ;  it  looks  well, 
C3  fic^t  gut  auig  ;  look  out!  net/* 
men  Z'xt  fid;  in  ^2ld)t  I  look  fur 
(seek),  ju'd;cu ;  (expect),  eni>av  * 

Lose,  t>erlic'rcn,  tcrlc  geii.  [ten. 

Love,  bie  IHe'bc;  v.  tr.^  lie'bcn. 

Low,  uie'Dtiij. 


M. 


Machine,  btC  9D^a|d;i'ne. 

Majesty,  bie  aJ2aj[eftdt'. 

Make,  ma'^en.  [bcr  SJJenfd;. 

Man,  ber  2)iaun  ;  (the  human  beuig), 

Manner,  bic  %xi,  bie  ilBei'fc. 

Manuscript,  bie  §anb'fd;rift. 

Many,  t>ie  le,  man'd;e  (;>/.);  many  a, 

tnand^er;  a  good  many,  fc^r  tielc. 
March,  ber  iZdrj  (see  p.  434). 
March,  ber  a)Zarfd;,  ber  3»9/  y-  »"^^-» 

marfd;i'ren,  jie'^en. 
Mark,  ba«  iKcvf'mat ;  (aim),  baS  ^\d  ; 

V.  tr.,  beseid^'ucn. 
Market,  ber  2)hrtt. 
Marriage,  bic  (S'^c,  bcr  (S'^eftanb ; 

(wedding),  bic  §ci'rat(;,  ^oc^'jcit. 
Marry,  v.  tr.,  ^ei'rat^cn ;  to  get  mar- 
ried, fic^  f  crt)ci'ratbc. 
Matter,  bie  llJiatc'ric,  ber  Ur'floff ;  what 

is  the  matter?  Xoa%  fc^lt?  h?a« 
May,  ber  2)iai  (see  p.  434).  [giebt'S? 
Me,  mic^.  [mei'nen,  ben'tcn. 

Mean,  ac(;.,  gcmcin',  nieb'rig ;  v.  tr., 
Meaning  (of  a  word),  bic  33ebeu'tung. 
Means,  baS  3JJit'tcI. 
Measure,  bag  SD'Zag ;  v.  tr.,  mcf fen. 
JMeat,  ba«  gleifc^. 
Meet,  begeg'nen,  tref'fcn. 
Meeting,    bic    B"!'^"^  ntentiinft,    bie 

^crfamm'Iung. 


Melt,  fd^md'sen. 

Mend,  repari  rcn,  auS'bcffcrn. 

Merchant,  ber  ^auf  maun. 

Metal,  bag  2)ietall',  — c^,  pi.  — c. 

Middle,  bie  9}?it'tc;  adj.,  mit'td. 

Middle  Ages,  baS  2Hit'tda(ter. 

Mild,  milt),  jviuft. 

Mile,  bie  mdlt. 

Milk,  bie  W\\&). 

Mill,  bic  9«ut;'Ic.  [ge. 

Mine,  md'ner,  ber  9}id'ne,bcr  SD^d'ni" 

Mirror,  bcr  (S:|3ie'geL 

Misfortune,  baS  Un'gtilcf. 

Misplace,  \}crlc'gen,  toerfc'^cn. 

Miss,  bag  g'^^i^^fin. 

Mistake,  bcr  ^e^Icr,  bcr  3rr'tbum; 

y.,fct)'kn;  to  be  mistaken  or  to 

make  a  mistake,  fic^  ir'reil. 
Model,  bag  aJiobett'. 
Modem,  mobcrn',  ncu. 
Moment,  ber  ^u'gcnblirf ;  momentary, 

au'gcnblidlid^. 
Money,  bag  @db. 
Month,  bcr  2J2o'nat. 
Moon,  bcr  2)?onb. 
More,  mebr. 
Morning,  bcr  SD^or'gcn. 
Most,  tncift ;  mostly,  mci'flcng. 
Mother,  bic  SDhit'tcr  ;  mother-in-law, 

bic  <Sc^n)ie'fler mutter. 


486 


VOCABULARY. 


Motion,  bic  SSctre'gung. 
Mountain,  ber  ^erg. 
Mouth,  ber  2JiuuD. 
Much,  tiel. 


liiluseum,  bag  SJluk'um. 
Music,  bie  aJiufif, 
Must,  miif'jeiu 
My,  mein. 


N. 


Nail,  ber  9^a'get. 

Name,  ber  9^a'me(Tt),  bic  35encn'nung ; 

V.  tr.,  nen'neu,  benen'nen. 
Narrow,  eng  or  eng'e.  [bcnbei'. 

Near,  adj.,  na'^e ;  prep.,  ne'kn,  ne* 
Nearly,  faft,  ungefa^r',  beina'tje. 
Necessary,  not^'tDenbtg;  necessaries  of 

life,  bie  !i!e'ben§bebiirfmf[e  (pi.); 

it  is  often  necessary  for  us  to — , 

man  tnufit  oft— 
Needle,  bie  9^dt)'nabel.  [fd>aft. 

Neighborhood,  bie  9^a'be,bte  9^ac^'bar* 
Nephew,  ber  ^ief'fe. 
Never,  nie,  nte'malg,  ntm'mer. 
New,  neu,  mobern'. 
News,     bie    9^ad/rid;t ;     (particular 

news),  bie  9^ac^'ri(^ten  ipL), 


Newspaper,  bic  3et'tung,  3^tt'id;rift. 
Next,  nac^ft ;  next  to  the  last,  bor'* 

lefete. 
Niece,  bie  9^id)'tc, 
Night,  bie  9^ad^t. 
Nine,  neuu. 

No,  pron.,  fctn  ;  adv.,  itcill. 
None,  !ein. 

Nonsense,  bcr  Un'ftiin. 
North,  ber  '^Rox'o,  9ior'ben. 
North  Germany,  9^orb'=2)eutfc^lanb. 
Not,  nid;t. 
Nothing,  gfjic^tg. 
Notice,  bemer'fen. 
November,  ber  S'Zobem'ber, 
Now,  je^t,  nun. 
Number,  bie  ^a^,  bie  9^um'mer. 


Obedience,  ber  ©e^or'jam,  — 8. 

Obedient,  ge^Dr'|am. 

Obey,  ge^or'd;en. 

Oblige,  toerbin'ben  ;  I  am  much  obliged 
to  you,  id;  bin  3^'nen  fel;r  r»erbun'^ 
ben;  to  be  obliged  to,  miif'fen,  fol'^ 

Observe,  bemer'fen,  beob'ad^ten.    [len. 

Occasion,  ber  Bi^'f^^,  bie  ©ele'gen^eit. 

O'clock  (at  two),  um  jtDci  U^r. 

October,  ber  Otto'ber  (see  page  434). 

Of,  bon,  ang,  an,  in. 

Often,  oft,  ijf'terg. 

Oil,  bag  OeL 

Old,  ait 

On,  an,  auf,  bet,  ju.  [mat. 

Once,  ein'mal ;  once  more,  no(^  ein'* 

One,  ein. 

Only,  nur,  bIo§. 

Onward,  bor'tnart?. 

Open,  often ;  v.tr.,  off 'nen,  auf mac^en. 

Opiaion,  bie  2Rei'nung. 


Opposite  (to),  gcgenii'ber. 

Or,  o'ber. 

Order,  btc  Drb'nung;  v.  tr.,  orb'nen 
(to  command),  bcfe^'leu ;  (to  en- 
gage), beftel'len. 

Organ,  ba§  Organ',  ba6  SSerfjeug ; 
(musical  instrument),  bie  Or'gel. 

Organist,  ber  Organift',  ber  Or'gelf^ie^ 

Origin,  ber  Ur'f))rnng.  [ier. 

Original  (ly),  ur'f:j3rilngltd). 

Other,  ber  anbere ;  each  other,  einan'* 
ber ;  another,  nod^  einer  ;  the 
other  day,  fiirs'Iid^,  bor  et'nigeu 
^^a'gen.  [selves,  un§. 

Our,  un'fer ;  ours,  bcr  un'frige ;  our- 

Out  (of),  au8,  au'^er^alb,  burc^. 

Outside  of,  au'^er^atb.  [bei'. 

Over,  it'ber;  adv.,  o'ben;  (past),  bor* 

Overcoat,  ber  Ue'berrod . 

Overflowing,  bie  Ueberfd^bjern'mun^. 

Owe,  fd;urbig  fein. 


VOCABULARY. 


487 


Page,  W  ®ct'te ;  (servant),  ber  ^a'gc. 

Paint,  ma'Ieii ;  to  paint  a  house,  eiu 
^auS  au'itrcic^eu. 

Painter,  ber  3Jia'Iev. 

Painting,  baS  ©emcirbc ;  art  of  paint* 
ing,  bie  9JJalcrei'. 

Pair,  baS  ^aar ;  a  pair  of  gloves,  ctn 
^aar  §anb'fd^ul)e;  a  pair  of 
sheai-s,  eine  ®d;ee're. 

Palm,  bic  ^al'me. 

Paper,  baS  ^a^ier';  newspaper,  bic 
3ei'tung  ;  a  daily  paper,  etii  Xa'' 
fleblatt ;  a  weekly  paper,  eiii  2Bo'« 

Parasol,  ber  @on'uen)d;irm.  [d;enblatt. 

Parents,  bie  Sl'tern  {pi). 

Part,  ber  %\)dl. 

Party,  bie  ^;|3artei';  an  evening  compa- 
ny, bie  @ejell'jd;aft,  bie  ^*artie'. 

Passenger,  ber  ^affagier';  passenger 
car,  ber  ^crfo'ncnnjagen. 

Pattern,  ba«  2)Zu'ftcr. 

Pay,  beja^'fen,  jal/Ien. 

Peace,  ber  grie'bc(n). 

Pear,  bie  33ir'nc.  [bie  SSu'erin. 

Peasant,  ber  Sau'cr ;  peasant  woman, 

Pen,  bie  gc'ber. 

Pencil  (lead),  ber  SSrei'fiift. 

Penknife,  bag  ge'bcrmeffer. 

Penny  (pfennig),  bcr  ^fen'nig. 

Perhaps,  bieUeid^t'. 

Permit,  eriau'ben. 

Permission,  bie  (Srlaub'ni^. 

Person,  bie  ^erfon'. 

Personal,  :|)erfi5n'Iid^. 

Philologist,  bet  ^^ilolog'. 

Philology,  bie  ^^itologie'. 

Philosopher,  ber  '!p(;iIo|o^^'. 

Philosophy,  bie  ^^ilofo^^ic'. 

Photograph,  bie  ^^fjotogra^^ie',  — ,  pi. 

Photographer,  ber  ^botogra^^'.  [ — n. 

Photography,  bic  ^^otogra^^ie'. 

Phrase,  bie  ^^J^i^^'fc. 

Physician,  ber  ^Irjt. 


Piano,  bas  ^labier'. 

Pick,  pflUcf  en. 

Pickpocket,  ber  Xi^fc^cnbieb. 

Picture,  baS  33ilb,  ®emarbe. 

Piece,  baS  @tiicf ;  to  go  to  pieces,  in 

<£tii(f  e  ge'^en,  ju  ©run'be  ge'^iciu 
Pin,  bie  ©tecf  itabel. 
Pink,  bie  gfJertc. 
Pit,  bie  ©ru'bc. 
Pitcher,  ber  ^rug. 
Place,  ber  ^la^,  bcr  Ott,  bte  ©tet'le ; 

to  take  place,  ftatt'fiubcn  ;  of  that 

place,  bor'tig  ;  of  this  place,  ^ie'* 
Plan,  ber  ^laii,  ber  Sntmurf.      [fig. 
Platinum,  ba§  ^latin'. 
Play,  bag  <Bpid  ;  v.,  fpie'Ien. 
Pleiisure,  baS  ^ergnil'geii. 
Plough,  ber  ^flug ;  v.,  ^^flii'gcn. 
Pluck,  ))f(il'cfen,  ab>flilcfcn,  ab'brcd)cu 
Pocket,  bie  Xa'\6)t. 
Pocket-book,  baS  ^orte'monnaic,  ba« 

SfJotij'buc^. 
Pocket-handkerchief,  baS  2^o'fd^cntU(^ 
Poem,  baS  @ebid;t',  bic  2)ic^'tung. 
Poet,  ber  2)id;'ter. 
Poetry,  bic  S)id;t'tunfl,  bic  ^ocfie'. 
Point,  bie  ®^i'^e. 
Polar  bear,  ber  ©ig'bar. 
Police,  bie  ^oIi,^ei'. 
Policeman,  ber  ^^^olijci'btcner. 
Poor,  arm. 
Possible,  mcg'Ii(^. 
Post-office,  bie  ^:pofl,  ba8  ^ojl'amt. 
Pound,  ba«  ^43funb. 
Pour,  gic'fjcn. 
Poverty,  bie  3lr'mutb. 
Power,  bie  traft,  bie  SD^ac^t;  full  cf 

power,  fraft'l)oU. 
Praise,  lo'ben. 

Preceding,  to'rig,  V)orf;cr'ge^enb. 
Present,  bag  ©efc^cnf;  v.  tr.,  fd^en'* 

fen ;  adj.,  gegcnicar'tig,  an'tre* 

jenb ;  to  be  present  at,  bei'njo^ncn. 


488 


VOCABULARY. 


President,  ber  ^rafibent,— en,i?/.— eit. 

Price,  bev  ^'rei§. 

Primeval,  ur'f^rungtid; ;  primeval  for- 
est, ber  Ur'tcatb  ;  primeval  man, 
ber  Ur'menfd;.^ 

Prince,  ber  giirft.  [brucf'eu. 

Print,  'ber  2)rucf,  5lb'brucf,  v.  tr., 

Printer,  ber  S)riic!'er. 

Printing  (art  of  ),bie33u^'brucferfunft; 
printing-house,  bie^uc^'brucferei; 
printing-paper,  baS  2)ru(J>a^ier. 

Probable  (probably),  ti3at;rf(^etn'Itd;. 

Procure,  I)olen,  toerjd^af'fen,  an'f(i;affen 

Professor,  ber  ^rofef  for. 

Project,  ber  ^^lan,  ber  (Sntmurf,  ba§ 
^rojett';  v.  tr.,  entirer'ten. 

Promise,  bag  35erf^)re'(i)en,  bie  3Ser== 
f^re'd;ung;  v.  tr,,  ijerj^re'c^en. 


Pronoun,  bo§  ^ilr'ttjort,  baS  ^rono'* 
'Pronounce,  au$5'f^red;en.  [men. 

Pronunciation,  bie  2lu§'f))rac^C. 
Property,  bag  (Si'gent^rim,  baS  ^er* 

mc'gen. 
Proportion,  ba§  SSer^cilt'itt^. 
Prospect,  bie  5lug'f{(^t. 
Proud,  [tolj. 

Proverb,  bag  8:^ri(^'tt)ort.         [^eit. 
Prudence,  bie  ^or'fid;ttgfeit,  bte  ^lug'* 
Prudent,  Dor'fic^tig,  flug. 
Public,  i3f'fentUd;, 
Purpose,  bie  Slb'fic^t,  ber  3^^^;  ^r 

the  purpose  of — ,  um  ju —  ;  for 

what  purpose  ?  mo^u  ? 
Purse,  bag  ^ortemonuaic',  ber  ©elb'* 

beutel,  bie  Ser'fe. 
Put,  je'tjen,  ftetlen,  le'ggn. 


Quart,  bag  Ouart. 
Quarter,  bag  3?ier'tel. 
Queen,  bie  ^i3'ntgtn. 
Question,  bte  ^ra'ge. 


Quick,  leBen'btg,  leB'^afi,  fc^nett. 
Quire,  33uc^. 
Quite,  stem'Itc^,  ganj. 
Quotient,  ber  Ouotteitt'. 


R. 


Railroad,  bte  ©'[enBal^u. 

Rain,  ber  9?e'gen;  v.  irnpers.,  reg'nen. 

Rapid,  jc^neH,  rajc^,  gefc^miub'. 

Rare,  jel'ten,  rar. 

Rather,  lie'ber,  e'^cr,  ijtet'me^r;  (some- 
what), stem'tic^,  et'rcag. 

Rattlesnake,  bie  tla^'^erfd;tange. 

Read,  le'fen  ;  to  read  over,  burdj'Iefen ; 
to  read  over  lightly,  fliic^'tig  le'fen. 

Reader,  ber  Se'fer,  bie  Se'ferin ;  read- 
ing-book, bag  Se'febuc^. 

Reading-room,  bag  Se'fetabinet,  bag 
Se'fejimmer. 

Ready,  fer'ttg,  Bercit'. 

Real  (ly),  n)trf 'lic^. 

Ream  (of  paper),  bag  5Rteg  (^a^ter'). 

Red,  rot^. 

Reed,  bag  'Stohx,  bag  <B6)xl\'xo^x, 

Rejoice,  fic^  freu'en. 


Relation,  bie  S3ejte'^ung ;  relation  to^ 

in  ^e^ug  auf ;  (a  person  related), 

ber  SSerroanb'te. 
Religion,  bte  9?eIigton'. 
Rely  (upon),  fic^  ijcrlaf  jen  (auf). 
Remain,  btei'ben. 
Renowned,  feerilfjmt'. 
Rent,  bie  9}?ie't^e,  bie  ^ang'miet^e ; 

v.,  mie'tben,  i3ermte'tf)en. 
Repair,  re^art'ren,  aug'beffern. 
Report,  ber  33erid)t'. 
Republic,  bie  ^Ee^uBIt!'. 
Reside,  iDo^'nen,  fic^  auf'^atten.  [ort. 
Residence,  bte  SBoB'nung,  ber  2Bobn'* 
Respect,  bie  ^in'ftdjt,  bie  9^ii(f'fic^t; 

(regard),  bie  2td>'tung,  §od/a{^* 

tung ;  to  respect,  eb'ren,  ac^'ten. 
Rest,    bie  9^u'(;e,  9?aft;   to  rest,  fi^ 

aug'rut)en;  the  rest,  bagUeb'rige. 


VOCABULARY. 


489 


Restore,  tijicbcr^er'fleHen. 

Keturn,  ir)ie'&erfcl;reit,  iDie'bcrtommen, 
juriicf  tommen,  *gel;en ;  v.  tr.,  ju* 
riicf'gebeii,  juru(f'fci;icfen. 

Ribbon,  t>a<s  ^ant),  ha^  6ei'benbanb. 

Rice,  bcr  9ieig. 

Rich  (be),  rctd;  (fcin). 

Ride  (on  horseback),  rei'teit ;  to  take 
a  ride,  fpajie'reit  rei'ten;  in  a 
carriage,  fa^'rcn ;  take  a  ride, 
j^jajic'ren  faf^'ren. 


River,  bcr  5^ug. 

Road,  ber  2Beg,  bic  33a^n,  bic  ©tra'^c. 

Roof,  bag  S)ac^,  bie  Se'cfc. 

Room,  bas  3"n'mer,  bic  5tu'be,  bic 

itam'mcr ;  (sffece),  bcr  9iaum. 
Rose,  bic  Oio  jc. 
Ruin,  bie  SRut'nc,  bic  2;rilm'mer ;  to 

go  to  ruin,  bcrfal'Ien,  in  35erfatt' 

gera't(;cn. 
Run,  lau'fen. 
Rye,  bcr  3tog'gcn. 


S. 


Sack,  bcr  <Bad. 

Sad,  trau'rig,  tril'bc,  BctrilBt'. 

Saddle,  bcr  ®at'tcl. 

Saddler,  ber  (Satfler.  [geln. 

Sail,  bag  @e'gcl ;  v.  intr,  fc'gein,  ab'je= 

Salary,  bcr  ©c^alt',  bic  ^cjol'bung. 

Sale,  ber  2?ertauf'. 

Salt,  bag  (Satg. 

Same,  bcrfclbc,  bcr  nSm'Iic^e. 

Sand,  ber  @aub. 

Satin,  ber  3lt'Iag. 

Saturday,  bcr  ©onn'abcnb,  ©amS'tag. 

Sauce,  bie  @auce. 

Saucer,  bic  Un'tertaffc,  bie  Un'terfc^alc. 

Say,  fa'gcn. 

Scandinavian,  ®fanbtna'totfd^. 

School,  bie  Sd^u'Ic. 

Scholar,  ber  (2d;ii'ter. 

School-house,  bag  ©c^ul'^aug. 

School-master,  ber  <B(i}ul'me\^tx;  ber 

Sea,  bag  2J?ecr,  bie  ®ee,  [^d^ul'lc^rcr. 

Sea-bath,  bag  ©cc'bab. 

Second,  ber  3«>ci'te.  [gebraud^f. 

Second-hand,  au8  ber  gteex'tcn  ^anb, 

See,  fc'^cn. 

Seek,  fu'd^cn,  auf'fudjcn. 

Seize,  grct'fcn,  ergret'fcn,  faffen. 

Seldom,  fel'ten. 

Self,  fclbfi  (see  §  108). 

Sell,  toertau'fen. 

Send,  f(^i(f'en,  fen'ben. 

September,  bcr  @e^)tem'ber. 


Servant,  ber  2)tc'ner,  bie  2)ie'ncrin. 
Serve,  bie'nen. 

Session,  btc  @i^'ung.  [terge^cn. 

Set,  fc^'en,  fteCIeu ;  (of  the  sun),  uii* 
Seven,  fie'ben  ;  seven  years',  adj.,  fic'- 

benja^rig. 
Several,  me^'rcrc,  berjd;ie'bcne  (/>/.). 
Sew,    nvH't>cn ;    sewing-machine,    bie 

9'Jab'ma|d;inc. 
Shall,  foricn ;  (/«<•)  tDcr'bcn. 
Shatter,  jerbred^'en,  jerjc^mct'tern. 
She,  fic.  [58o'gen. 

Sheet,  bag  53ett>ud) ;  (of  paper),  bcr 
Shine,  fc^ci'nen,  leud^'tcu,  glan'gcn. 
Ship,  bag  ®d)ift. 
Shoe,  ber  ®^u^. 
Shoot,  fd^ic'jjcn. 
Shore,  bag  U'fer,  bw  ^ronb. 
Short,  turg. 
Should,  fcl'len.  (inf.). 

Shoulder,  bie  ©d^ul'tcr. 

show,  jei'gen. 

Shut,  jc^Iie'^en,  ju'mad^cii 

sick,  franf. 

Side,  bie  ^ci'tc. 

Sight,  bag  ©cfid^t';  at  sight,  Ba*  "Sici^t 

Signify  (mean),  bcbcu'tcn. 

Silk,  btc  ©ct'bc  ;  silken,  fct'bcn. 

Silver,  bag  ©ifber. 

Similar,  afju'Iid^. 

Sin,  bie  (Siin'bc. 

Since,  prep.,  fcit ;  conj.,  feit'tcitl. 


X2 


490 


VOCABULARY. 


Sing,  ftng'en.  [bic  ©d^ma'geritt. 

Sister,   bic  ©c^tDc'ftcr  ;  sister-in-law, 

Sit,  fi^'en. 

Sky,  ber  §tnt'meL 

Sleep,  ber  @d;Iaf ;  >;.,  jc^k'tcn. 

Sleeve,  ber  Sler'meL 

Slipper,  ber  ^aittof  jet. 

Slow(ly),  lang'fam. 

Small,  fletn. 

Smoke,   ber   Staud) ;    r.,  rau'd^en; 

smoking  (noun),  bag  9^au'(^en. 
Snake,  bte  @(^lang'e. 
Snow,  ber  @d^nee;  v.,  fc^nei'eiu 
So,  so,  auf  bie'fe  SSet'fe. 
Society,  bie  ©ejett'fc^aft. 
Sofa,  ber  (or  bag)  ®o':j>f)a  (or  @o'fa). 
Soft,  toddi). 
Soldier,  ber  @oIbat'. 
Solve,  lo'fen,  auf  (ofen» 
Some,  ct'ntge,  etlic^e,  toe  rd)e;  some 

bread,  et'toaS  33rob  ;  somebody, 

^e'ntanb ;  something,  ettcaS. 
Sometimes,  jutoet'Ien,  biStoei'Ien,  bann 

unb  toann. 
Somewhat,  adv.,  et'traS,  Jtem'tt(i^. 
Son,    ber    @o^n;    son-in-law,     ber 

®d)tt)ie'gerfo^n, 
iSong,  ba§  Steb. 
Soon,  balb. 

Soup,  bte  <Bup'pt,  bte  33rii'^c. 
Sour,  fau'er. 

South,  ber  @iib,  ber  ©il'ben. 
Sow,  fa'en. 
Speak,  f^re'c^en. 
Spear,  ber  Bpttx,  bie  San'jc. 
Spin,  f^tn'nen. 

Spire,  ber  2:^urm,  ber  ^ird^'t^urm. 
Spring,  ber  @:|3rut!g  ;   (of  the  year), 

ber  grii^'Iing;  baS  grii^'ja^r. 
Spy,  ber  @))toii'. 
Stand,  v.'intr.,  fte'^ett ;  v.  tr.,\\tVUn ; 

to  stand  by  one,  ei'item  bet'fte^eit, 

et'nem  ^el'fen,  ei'nen  unterftil'i^en ; 

the  standing  by,  bte  §iirfe,  ^et'^ 

ftanb. 


State  (condition),  bcr  3ll'ftaiib ;  (na. 

tion),  ber  @taat.         [^abn'tjof. 
Station  (railroad),   bie  ©tatioii',  bcr 
Steal,  fte^'Ien. 
Steam,    ber    2)am^f;    steamer,    bag 

2)am^f'fd;iff;    steam-boat,     baS 

2)am))f boot ;   steam-engine,    bie 

S)am))fmojc^tne. 
Steep,  fteiL 

Steerage,  bag  B^^'ft^citi'ctf. 
Step,  ber  @d^rttt,  ber  2:rttt;  v.  intr.y 

tre'ten,  fc^rei'ten. 
Step-father,  ber  @tief't>otcr. 
Step-mother,  bie  @ttef  mut'ter. 
Step-son,  ber  ©tieffo^n. 
Step-daughter,  bie  ©tieftoc^ter. 
Stick,  ber  ©todf. 
Still,  adj.,  [tilt,  ru'^tg;  adv.,  no6), 

im'mer,  conj.,  boc^,  ieboc^',  ben'* 
Stone,  ber  @tein.  [nod;. 

Storm,  ber  ©turm,  bag  ©etott'ter,  bag 

Un'gemitter ;  stormy,  [tiir'mifc^. 
Story   (tale),    bie   ©efd^ic^'te ;    (of  a 

house),  ber@to(f,  bag  @tocf'tt)cr!, 

bag  @ef(^o^'. 
Stove,  ber  O'fen. 
Street,  bie  ©tra'ge. 
Strike,  jd;Ia'gen. 
Strong,  ftar!,  !raf  ttg. 
Student,  ber  @tubent'. 
Study,  bag  ©tu'bium,  v.  tr.,  flubi'ren. 
Suburb,  bie  ^Sor'ftabt. 
Such,  fol'djer. 
Sugar,  ber  3u(I'er. 
Sultry,  jc^toilf. 
Summer,  bcr  ©om'mcr. 
Sun,  bie  ©on'ne. 
Sunday,  ber  ©oitn'tag. 
Supper,  bag  5l'benbeffen. 
Surgeon,  ber  SBunb'arjt. 
Surpass,  iibertreffen. 
Surrender,  fid)  erge'beit.  [Sanb'meffer. 
Surveyor  (of  land),  ber   SJ^effer,   bCT 
Sweet,  jii^. 
Swiss,  ber  ©d^toei'jcr  (see  page  4193. 


VOCABULARY. 


491 


T. 


Table,  bcr  Xifc^,  bie  Sa'fcl ;  to  set 
the  table,  ben  Xi\<i)  becf'en. 

Tailor,  ber  i^d^nei'ber. 

Take,  ne^'men ;  to  take  away,  »eg'* 
nc^men ;  to  take  with  one,  mil'* 
nebmen ;  to  take  place,  ftatt'fin* 

Talk,  fpre'c^en,  re' ben.  [ben. 

Tall,  ijro^,  ^oc^. 

Tame,  ja^m. 

Taste,  bag  to'ftcn,  ©c^mecf'cn;  v,  tr., 
fo'ften,  fc^medf'en. 

Tea,  ber  2;^ce. 

Teach,  le^'ren. 

Teacher,  ber  Se^'rcr,  bie  Se^'rerin. 

Tear,  bie  X^ra'ue. 

Tear,  rei'gen,  serrci'fjen. 

Tedious,  lang'wciH^. 

Telegraph,  ber  Xelegra))^'. 

Telegraphic,  telegra'^fjifd^. 

Tell,  fa'gen,  ersal^'leu.     [Un'getritter. 

Tempest,  ber  etumi,  baS  ©ctoit'ter, 

Tempestuous,  flilr'inifc^. 

Thaler,  ber  2:^a'Ier. 

Than,  a(8,  benn. 

Thank,  ber  2)anf ;  y.,  ban'fen. 

That,  pron.,  je'iier,  bie'fet ;  conj.^  ba§. 

The,  bcr,  bie,  bag. 

Then,  adv.,  bann,  a(3bann',  ba'malS; 
now  and  then,  bann  nnb  tt)ann ; 
conj.,  benn,  ba^er',  barum',  al'jo. 

Theology,  bie  X^eologie'.  [ift,  e8  giebt. 

There,  ta,  bort,  bafelbft';  there  is,  c« 

Thereby,  DaDurc^',  bamit'.    [barnm'. 

Therefore,  beS'^alb,  bcs'TOcgen,  ba^er', 

Thin,  biinn. 

Thing,  bie  ©a'd^e,  baS  2)ing. 

Think,  b:n'ten. 

Third,  ber  2)rit'tc. 

Thirst,  Der  2)urft. 

This,  bie'fer. 

Thou,  bu. 

Thread,  ber  f^i^'ben. 

Threat,  bic  2)ro'^ung.  . 


Threaten,  bro'^en. 

Three,  brei. 

Thresh,  bre'f dben.  • 

Thrice,  brei'mal. 

Through,  burc^. 

Throw,  toer'fen. 

Thunder,  ber  2)on'ncr ;  t'.,bon'nern. 

Thunder-storm,  ba§  ©eirtt'ter. 

Thursday,  ber  2)on'ner8tag. 

Thy,  bcin. 

Tie,  bin' ben. 

Till,  prep,  and  conj..,  bi§,  bi§  ju,  anf ; 

till  now,  big  je^t;  till  then,  bis 
Till,  V.  tr.,  bebau'en,  )}P'gen.  [ba^in. 
Time,  bie  B^it. 

To,  prep.,  JU  ;  (with  inf.),  um  gU. 
Tobacco,  bcr  ^^a'bat. 
To-day,  beute ;  to-day's,  adj.,  ^cu'tig. 
To-morrow,  tnor'gen. 
Too,  ju,  aU'ju ;  (also),  au6f. 
Tooth,  ber  ^a^n. 
Toward,  nac^,  ge'gen. 
Towel,  baS  ^anb'tud^. 
Tower,  ber  S^urm. 
Trade,  ber  §an'bel,  SBerfe^r'(ber  $an'* 

bel  unb  33erfe^r'). 
Train,  ber  3^9 ;  bag  ©efol'ge. 
Traitor,  ber  33crra't(;er. 
Translate,  iiberfc^'en. 
Travel,  rei'fen,  eine  9{ei'fe  ma'd^en. 
Traveler,  ber  9iei'fenbe. 
Traverse,  bnrd^rei'fen. 
Tread,  tre'ten,  ge'gen,  fd^rei'ten ;  tread 

to  pieces,  gertre'ten. 
Treason,  ber  SBerrat^',  bie  SSerrSt^erei'. 
Treaty,  ber  SSertrag',  bie  Untcr^anb'* 
Tree,  ber  23aum.  [tung. 

Trout,  bie  gorel'Ie. 
Trip,  bie  9iei'fe,  ga^rt. 
True,  ttjabr,  tea^r'^aft,  too^r^aftig ', 

(faithful),  treu  ;  yours  truly,  auf' 

rid^tig  ber  ^f^'rigc 
Truth,  bic  SSo^r'i^cit,  Xrcu'c. 


492 


VOCABULARY. 


Try,  ijerfu'd^cn,  ^)robi'rcn. 
Tulip,  bie  ZnVpt, 
Twelve,  JtiJOlf. 


Twenty,  gtran'gig. 
Twice,  jtDei'mal. 
Two,  s^Dei. 


U. 


Ugly,  H^'m, 

Umbrella,  ber  9le'genfd^trm» 

Unanimous,  etn'fttmtntg. 

Unbound,  un'gebunben. 

Uncle,  ber  O'^eim,  On'fel. 

Under,  un'ter.  [fen. 

Understand,  i)erfte'f)en,  begret'fen,  faf* 

Undertake,  uitteme^'men. 

Unequal,  un'gtetd^. 

Unite,  V.  tr.,  i)erei'nigen. 

Universal,  att'gemein. 


University,  bic  UntiJerfltcit'  < 

Unlike,  un'd^nlic^. 

Up,i)rep.,auf;  ao?y., l^tnauf,  ^crauf, 

em:|3or',  in  ber  §o'^e,  o'ben. 
Upon,  auf,  iiber. 
Usage,  ber  ©ebrauc^',  — g,  pi.  @e« 

brciu'dje,  bie  ©ett)ot)n'^eit. 
Use,  ber  ©ebrand;',  ber  9^u'^en ;  v. 

trans,,  brau'^en,  gebrau'd^en. 
Usual,  Qt)cooi)n'lx^,  ilblic^,  gebrauc^'* 

li(^. 


V. 


Valiant,  ta':|3fer. 

Various,  i)erfd;tc'ben. 

Vase,  bie  SSa'fc. 

Veil,  ber  <B6)k\'tx, 

Verb,  bas  B^it'tt^ort,  SScr'bum. 

Very,  je^r,  gar. 

Vest,  bie  SBe'fte,  3acf'c» 

Via,  ii'ber. 


Village,  bag  2)orf. 
Vinegar,  ber  @fftg. 
Virtue,  bie  ^^u'genb. 
Visit,  ber  58efud/;  v.  tr.,  befu'djen. 
Voice,  bie  ©tim'me.  [Um'fang. 

Volume,  ber  S3anb ;  (compass),  ber 
Vote,  bie  ©tim'me ;  v.  tr.,  igtim'men 
Voyage,  bie  ©ee'retje.  [gcben. 


W. 


Wagon,  ber  SSa'gen.       » 

Waist,  bie  2:;airie,  ber  Setb. 

Wait,  war' ten. 

Walk,  ba§  ©e'^en,  ber  ©ang  ;  ber 
S^ajier'gang ;  v.,  ge'^en,  \paik'- 
ren ;  to  take  a  walk,  f^ajie'ren 
ge'^en. 

Wall  (of  a  room),  bte  SBanb  ;  (of  a 
city),  bie  Tiau'ix,  bic  SBal'Ie. 

War,  ber  ^rieg. 

Warm,  ttjarm. 

Wash,  h)a'f(^eu;  the  washing  (linen 
to  be  washed),  bte  SBci'fd^e. 

Watch  (guard),  bic  SBa'd^c;  (time- 
piece), bie  U^r,  2;a'fd^enu§r. 


Water,  bag  2Saf  fer. 

Waterworks,  bie  SBof'fcrlettung. 

Wave,  bie  ^d'k. 

Way,  ber  ^eg,  bie  53a^n ;  by  way 

We,  n?ir.     .  [of,  ii'ber. 

Weak,  jc^tDad^. 

Wear,  tra'gen,  an'baben. 

Weather,  baS  SBet'ter,  bie  2Btt'tcrung. 

Week,  bte  aSo'c^c.  [gen. 

Weigh,  V.  intr.,  tt)ie'gen ;  V.  tr.,  tod'* 

Weight,  bag  ®ert)td}t',  bte  @c^tt)e'rc. 

Welcome,  adj.,   tnill'fom'men  ;  noun, 

bag  2BiIltom'men. 
Well,  ber  ^run'nen,  bte  OucI'Ie.  [gut. 
Well,  adj.,  njo^I,  gefunb';  adv.,  too^I, 


VOCABULARY. 


493 


Wet,  na^,  fcuci^t. 
What?  tva«V  njel't^cr? 
Wheat,  ber  aHJci'sen. 
When?  tcann?  conj.,  al9,  tt)cnn. 
Where,  mo. 
Whether,  ob. 

Which  ?  irel'd^er?  rel.  pron.,  toel'c^cr, 
While,  ircib'reut),  inbem'.  [ber. 

Whistle,  ^fci'fen. 
White,  n)ei§. 
VVho?n)cr? 

Whole,  gan3,  boUfom'mcn. 
Why?  iMrum'?nje^^aIb'?  trc^rce'gcn? 
Wide,  brcit. 

Wife,  bie  grau,  (g'^efrau,  ©at'tin. 
Will,  ber  ifiSii'Ic ;  y.,  ttjol'lcn,  wiln'* 
Willingly,  gem.  [fc^cn. 

Win,  gewin'nciu 
Wind,  ber  SSinb. 
Window,  bae  gen'jler. 
Wine,  ber  SBeiii. 
Winter,  ber  SSintcr. 
Wise,  wei'fe,  flug,  »er1tan'big. 
Wish,  ber  SBunjc^ ;  v.  tr.,  toiln'^d^en, 
tuol'lcn. 


With,  mtt.  [ncn,  brinnen. 

Within,  prep.^  tii'iierbalb  ;  adv.,  in  * 
Without,  au'ijerbalb,  au'^cn,  brau'gen. 
Woman,   bic  ^xavL,  baS  SBcib,  ba» 

^rau'enjimnicr. 
Wood,  baS  |)ol5 ;  woods,  ber  SSalb, 

bie  SBal'bung,  ber  %ox^. 
Wool,  bic  Sol'Ic ;  woolen,  ttorien. 
Word,  ba0  SBort. 
Work,  bie  Slr'bcit,  ba«  SBerf ;  work 

done  by  hand,  bie  ^anb'arbcit. 
Work  {verb),  ac'bciten,  toir'fcu  ;   to 

work  over,    bcar'beitcn,    iim'ar* 

beiten. 
World,  bie  SBcIt,  (gr'bc. 
Worth  (value),  bic  iBur'be,  ber  ^rei« ; 

(merit),  baS  25erbicnft'. 
Worth,  adj.,  ItJCrt^. 
Worthy,  tDiir'big.  [ben. 

Wound,  bie  SSun'be ;  i?.  /r.,  tocrwuu'- 
Wreath,  ber  ^xang. 
Write,  fc^rei'bcn. 
Writing,  bie  ©c^rift. 
Wrong,  un'rcd^t,  falfd?,  un'ttja^r  ;  t« 

be  wrong,  Un'rcc^t  ^a'bcn. 


Yard,  bic  ?)arb  (eng'Ufd^e  gl'Ie). 

Yam,  bag  ©aril. 

Ye,it?r. 

Year,  baS  3abr. 

Yearly,  jabr'lici^. 

Yellow,  gelb. 

Yes,  ja,  iaWo^r 


Yesterday,  at/y. ,  ge' jlem. 

Yet,  nid^t ;  not  yet,  nod)  nic^t. 

Yonder,  adv.,foxi ;  adj.,  jc'ucr. 

You,  ibr  (Sic). 

Young,  jung. 

Your,  i^r ;  yours,  ber  3l?'rige. 

Youth,  bic  Ou'genb. 


Addenda. 


5(B,  adv.,  away,  off,  down. 

^^'nen,  v.  tr.  and  intr.,  to  forebode; 
e§  a^'net  tntr,  I  have  a  foreboding. 

Sln'Iac^en,  v.  tr.,  to  laugh  at. 

Sln'ma^eu,  v.  reft.,  to  assume. 

Sluf  ite^meu,  v.  tr.,  to  take  up. 

SBar'fu^,  adj.,  barefoot. 

S3egrii'^en,  to  greet.  [a  name. 

SBeilegen,  v.  tr.,  to  join  to,  to  give  as 

S)er  53etrug,  — eg,  imposture,  decep- 
tion, deceit,  fraud. 

S3ei)i3rfern,  v.  tr.,  to  people,  populate. 

'83en)irt^'fd;aften,  v.  tr.,  to  manage  or 
to  carry  on  (an  estate). 

S)er  S3orb,  — e?,  board;  an  SSorb,  on 
board. 

£)te  SSraut,  —,pl.  SSrau'te,  bride;  ber 
S3rautftaat,  bridal  array  or  dress. 

(S^rtft'U^,  adj..  Christian. 

Sntrci'^en,  to  tear  away. 

©rbfaffen,  v.  intr.,  to  die.  [formance. 

S)te  (Srfitriung,  — ,  fulfilment,  rer- 

®ebo'gen  (part,  of  Bie'gen,  to  tend), 
acii.f  curved,  arched. 


©ering',  adj.,  small,  trifling,  inconsid- 
erable. 

®ttxo\t'  ,adj.,  confident,  courageous. 

§af  ten,  v.  intr.,  to  cling. 

§in'fc^letc^en,  v.  intr.,  to  glide  or  slip 
thither. 

Se^'nen,  v.  intr.,  to  lean. 

2)er  Tlaxlt,  —tQ,pl.  'SflaxVU.  market. 

S)te  ^'f)antafie',  — ,  fancy. 

9itc^'terlid^,  ao?/".,  judicial. 

2)er  9?u^m,  — e§,  fame. 

S)er  ©trauc^,  — e§,  pi.  <Btxavi'6)ttj 
bush,  shrub. 

©d^er'gen,  v.  intr.,  to  sport. 

©C^mac^'ten,  v.  intr.,  to  pine. 

@c^D':^fen,  v.  intr.,  to  draw  (water). 

Un'geftraft,  adj.,  unpunished. 

3Serge'^en,  v.  r.,  to  offend. 

2)er  SSerlcium'ber,  — §,  slanderer. 

3Son  jc^er',  from  time  immemoriaL 

SBaff'nen,  v.  tr.,  to  arm. 

SSal'ku,  V.  intr.,  to  move. 

SBan'betn,  v.  int .,  to  ramble. 

SBci'Icn,  t>.  intr.  fX)  rar4.. 


INDEX 


5lb,  adv.,  §  181,  1.  Separable  Prefix, 
§  151, 1 ;  Lesson  XXXIV.,  2. 

Abbreviations,  page  420. 

5lber,  distinguished  from  allein,  foiibem, 
and  »ielmc^r,  §  265. 

Accent,  §  44-47  j  Less.  II.,  7. 

Accusative,  use  of,  §  83.  Verbs  govern- 
ing, §  177.  Prepositions  with,  §  237- 
243 ;  Less.  VII.,  1.  Prepositions  with 
Ace.  and  Dat.,  §  244-253  j  Less.  X.,  1. 

Adjecti-ves,  formation  of,  §86;  Lesson 
XXXVIII.  Predicative,  §87;  Less. 
XVIII.,1.  Attributive,Less.XVIII., 
8 ;  §  89,  Jiem.  9 ;  §  94.  Old  Declension 
of,  §  88, 1 ;  §  89 ;  Less.  XVIII.  New 
Declension,  §88, 2;  Less.  XX.  Mixed 
Declension,§88,  3;  Less.XXI.  Com- 
parison of,  §  90-92;  Lesson  XXII. 
Governing  Gen.,  §  95 ;  Less.  XXXIX., 
2.  Gov.  Dat.,  §96;  Less.  XXXIX.,  4. 
Gov.  Ace,  §  97;  Less.  XXXIX.,  6. 
Used  as  Noun,  §  89,  Jiem.  10. 

Adverbs,  formation  of,  §  181-188 ;  Com- 
pound, §  188.  Comparison  of,  §  190. 
Syntax,  §192-195;  Less.  L.  Adjec- 
tives used  as,  §  184, 1 ;  Less.  XIV.,  5. 
Position  of,  §  194,2 ;  §  281.  Adverbial 
Conjunctions,  §193;  §260;  §280,3. 
Numeral  Adverbs  §  105. 

Slflcin,  §  265. 

Siacr,§lll.  m§lll,7.  2ine3,  §114, 
4,  ^m.;  Less.XLIII.  To  strengthen 
superlatives,  §  93,  Hem.  3. 

5nd,  distinguished  from  ttJte,  tDCnn,  ttjatW, 
§  266.     m^  bag,  §  266,  1,  Eem.  2. 

^acrbtng^,  §183,1,  i2em.  4. 

2llf  0,  §  269,  Hem.  4. 

Urn,  contraction  of  an  bent,  §  54,  Bern.  2; 
Loss.  XI.,  4.  With  Superlative,  Less. 
XXII.,  7. 


2ln,  §  93 ;  L.  X.,  1.    Idioms  with,  p.  197. 
5lnbcr,  §  112,  l.    For  ber  3wcite,  §  102, 

Jiem.  5.    Slnbert^alb,  §  103,  2. 
Slnftott,  composition,  §  196,  3.     Use  of, 

§  209.     With  the  Infinitive,  §  129,  8, 

Jiem.  1. 
Apposition,  §  85;   Less.  XVI.,  2;  Less. 

XLII.,  1,  Jiem  4. 
Arrangement  of  Words,  §  276-284. 
Articles,  derivation  of,  §  53.     Declen- 
sion of,  §54;  Less.  XV.,  and  XVI. 

Syntax  of,  §  55  ;  Less.  XL. 
5lu(^,§263,l,2.  2Bennau*,§268,ij5em.8. 
5luf,  §  246;    Less.  X.,  1.      5Iut«,   §  54, 

Jiem.  2;  with  Superlative,  §  190,2,  2* 

Idioms  with,  page  197. 
%\Xi,  §  220.     Idioms  with,  page  194. 
5Iu§cr,  §  221.     Idioms  with,  page  194. 

5lu§crbcm,  §  263, 1,  2. 
Auxiliary  Verbs,  §  185.    Auxiliaries  of 

Mode  (see  Potential  Verbs). 
Sar,  Suffix,  §86,2,1 ;  Less.XXXVIII.,1. 
»e=.  Prefix,  §  155, 1;  Less.  XXXV.,  1. 
Set,  §  222. 
f&mx,  §  268,  9. 
g3t«,§237;  Less.  VII.,  1. 
Capital  Letters,  §  48;  Less.  XVIII.,  b. 
Cardinal  Numbers,  §  99;  Less.  XVII. 
Cases,  §  59, 8;  §  80-85;  Less.  VII.-X. 
=*cn,  §  57, 1, 1 ;  Less.  XXXV. 
Collective  Nouns,  §  57, 8, 1 ;  §  63, 2. 
.Comparison  of  Adjectives,  §  90 ;   Less. 

XXII.  Comparison  of  Adverbs,  §  190. 
Compound  Words,  formation  of,  §  50. 

Division  of  Syllables,  §  48, 8.  Aocont 

of,  §  45. 
Compound  Adjectives,  §  86,  8;    Less. 

XXXVIII.,  8. 
Compound  Adverbs,  §  188. 
Compound  Nouns,  §  67 ;  Less.  XXXVI. 


490 


INDEX. 


Compound  Verbs,  §  149 ;  Less.XXXIV. 
and  XXXV. 

Conditional  Mood,  §  125^  Less.  LI. 

Conjunction,  §  259-274;  Less.  L. 

Correlative  Pronouns,  §  114,  4. 

Corresponding  Conjunctions,  §  263, 1,  2. 

2)a,  §  186;  §  195.  Compounded  with 
Prepositions,  §  188, 10,  Bern.  2. 

SDa^er,  and  barum,  §  269  (see  ba). 

Damit  (see  ba).  As  a  Conjunction,  §  267. 

2)ann,  §186;  189,1. 

^arum  (see  ba^er). 

£)a^  (see  ber ).  Used  collectively,  §  115 ; 
%  114:,  4:,  Bern. 

2)a^,  §263,  2.  5(i^ba§,§266,l,i2em.l. 
5tuf  bap,  §  267. 

Dative  Case,  §  82 ;  Less.  IX.  Governed 
by  Prepositions,  §  82, 1;  §  220.  By 
Verbs,  §82, 3, 2;  §179;  Less.XLVII. 
By  Adjectives,  §  82,  3, 1;  §  96;  Less. 
XXXXI.,  4. 

Declension  of  the  Article,  §  54.  Of 
Nouns,  71-79;  Less.  XV.  Of  Adjec- 
tives, §  88-89;  Less.  XVIII.,  XX., 
and  XXI.     Of  Pronouns,  §  107-114. 

Demonstrative  Pronouns,  §  111;  Less. 
XLIII. 

©enn,  §  274. 

^er,  as  Definite  Article,  §  54,  1.  De- 
monstrative Pronoun,  §  111,  Bern.  2. 
Relative  Pronoun,  §  114,  2. 

2)erienige,  §  111,  3;  Less.  XLIII.,  2. 

Derivative  Words,  §  49,  2. 

Derivative  Adjectives,  §  86,  2;  Lesson 
XXXVIII. 

Derivative  Adverbs,  §  187. 

Derivative  Nouns,  §  57 ;  Less.  XXXVII. 

Derivative  Prepositions,  §  196,  2. 

Derivative  Verbs,  §  117,  2. 

©crfclbe,  §  ill,  4;  Less.  XLIII.,  3. 

!DeS{)aIb,  be^tcegen,  §  269. 

2)iefer,  §  ill;  Less.  XV.  :i)tefe^,  Less. 
XLIII.,  4. 

2)te^fett,  bte^felt^,  §  202. 

Dimidiative  Numerals,  §  103,  2. 

Diminutive  Nouns,  §  57,  1, 1 ;  Lesson 
XXXVII.,  3. 

Diphthongs,  §  33,  2;  §  36;  §38, 10-12. 

Distributive  Numerals,  §  103, 1. 


Ti\X,  §  107,  Bern.  4;  Less.  XI.,  2,  2. 

2)urc^,  §238;  Less.  X. 

Durfen,§  118, 3 ;  §  171 ;  Less.XXXIII.,3. 

=e,  =et  (=reij,  Suffixes,  §  57,  2, 1-2. 

(£tn,  as  Indefinite  Article,  §  54,  2 ;  Less. 
XVI.  As  Numeral,  §  100.  As  Prefix 
to  Verbs  §  L51,  1. 

gtnanber,  §  112,  l ;  §  108,  Bern.  1. 

(giniger,  §  112, 2. 

(£mp=  and  ent*,  prefixes  to  Verbs,  §  155, 
2;  Less.  XXXV.,  1. 

^tXi,  Adjective  Suffix,  §  86,  2,  2;  Lesson 
XXXVIII.,  1,  2. 

=enb,  Participial  Ending,  §  130;  §  141, 
Bern.  2. 

gntgegen,  §  224,  §  255,  Exc.  2. 

(£r,  Pronoun,  §  107.  Verbal  Prefix,  § 
155,  8.  Nominal  Suffix,  §  57,  1,  3; 
Less.  XXXVIII.,  2, 1. 

(£^,  §  107,  Bern.  5. 

(£tn)a^,  §  112,  8;  §  114,  4,  Bern. 

Etymology,  §  48;  §  18-19;  §  27-30. 

%aU,  %  271. 

Feminine  Nouns,  §62;  §65. 

Foreign  AVords,  §  19.  Accent  of,  §46. 
Gender  of  Foreign  Nouns,  §  68.  De- 
clension of,  §  77.     Foreign  Verbs,  § 

%m,  §  293. 
139,  3. 

@anj,  §  102,  2,  Bern.  3. 

®e=,  prefix  of  compound  Verbs,  §155,  4. 
Prefix  of  Participles,  §  131,  Bern.  1. 
Prefix  to  Nouns,  §  57,  3, 1;  §  66, 2. 

©egen,  §  240. 

©egeniibcr,  §  225;  §  255,  Exc.  2. 

Gender  of  Nouns,  §  60-70. 

Genitive,  §  80-81.  Prepositions  govern- 
ing, §  202-219.  Verbs  governing, 
§  178 ;  Less.  XL VI.  Adjectives  gov- 
erning, §  95 ;  Less.  XXXIX.,  2.  Ad- 
verbs from  Genitive,  §183, 2;  §184,  2. 

®enu3,  §113,5. 

|)akn,  §135-136. 

4aft,  Suffix,  §  86, 2, 3 ;  Less.XXXVIII., 
1,3. 

^alb,  adj.,  §  104,  2,Bem.%.  ^alb  (M' 
ben,  Hkr),  Prep.,  §203. 

4)ett,  Suffix,  §  57, 2, 3 ;  Less.  XXXVIII^ 
'4,2. 


INDEX. 


497 


ttr^,  §  186.     Prefix  to  Verbs  §  151, 1. 

herein,  ^erau5,  etc,  §  188,  8. 

^ter,  §  186. 

^ierbei,  ^iermit,  etc.,  §  188, 10,  Hem.  1. 

|)ufld,  §  86,  2;  Less.  XXXVIII.,  1,  4. 

|)m,  §  186.     Prefix  to  Verbs,  §  151, 1. 

^intern  §  189, 2.    Winter,  §  247. 

i>0(i),  §  89,  Hem.  13 ;  §  92 ;  §  93,  Hem.  4. 

3d),  §107;  Less.  XI.,  1. 

3mmer,  §188, 11. 

Imperative,  §  126;  Less.  LI. 

Imperfect,  §  133. 

Impersonal  Verbs,  §  160.  Governing  the 

Dative,  §  179,  2,  Jiern.  3. 
3n,  Preposition,  §248;  Less.  X. 
sin   (=inn),  Suffix,  §  67,  1,  4;    Lesson 

XXXVII.,  2,  2. 
Snbem,  §  274,  Rem.  8. 
Indefinite  Pronouns,  §  112 ;  Less.XLII. 
Indicative  Mood,  §  123. 
InfiaitiveMood,§  127-128 ;  Less.XXIX. 
Snnerbalb,  §  204. 

Sndbefonbcrf,  tn^funftigc,  etc.,  §  188, 12. 
Interjections,  §  275. 
Interrogative  Pronouns,  §  113;    Less. 

XLII, 
Srijenb,  8  188, 11. 
Irregular  Verbs,  §  116,  4;    §  142-148; 

Less.  XXIV.-XXVII. 
4fc^,  Suffix,  §  86, 8, 5 ;  Less.  XXXVIII., 
3a,  §  181,  2. 

1,5. 
3e,  §  261,  Hem. 
Seber,  111;  Less.  XX. 
Sebcrmann,  §112,7. 
Semanb,  §112,7. 
Sencr,  §111,  Less.  XX. 
5tcin,§112. 
,U\t,  Suffix,  §  58,  2, 8 ;  §  65, 3 ;  §  75, 1, 2 ; 

Less.  XXXVII.,  4,  2. 
ilonncn  (see  Potential  Verbs),  §  167-168 ; 

Less.  XXXI. 
Saffen,  §  118,  8,i2fem.;  §  128,1;  §  131, 

Jiem.  2.     Idioms  with,  page  198. 
.let  (cincTlri,  et<5.),§103,3. 
-lein,  Suffix,  §57, 1,1;  §66,1;  §74,1,2; 

Less.  XXXVII.,  8. 
Letters  of  Union  (1),  4,  =Ct,  §  107,  Hem. 

2;  (2),  *d,  §  203,  ifem.  4. 


-Uixtc,  Plural  Ending;  Less.  XLVII.,2, 

Hem.  2. 
Aid),  Suffix,  §  86, 2, 6 ;  Loss.  XXXVIII., 

1,6;  §187,3. 
=mal  (einmal,  etc.),  105, 1. 
3«an,  §112,6;  §134,1;  Less.XLII.,!, 

Hem.  3. 
iWanc^er,  §  112,  2,  Hem.  3;   Less.  XX.; 

§  89,  Hem.  2. 
3J?e|)r,  §98.    2«c^rere,§l02,2. 
iOMn,  §  107,  Hem.  l ;  §  109 ;  Less.  XIX. 
mil  §  227;    Less.  IX.     Idioms   with, 

page  195. 
'^Zlttcl,  mittelll  §  208. 
Mixed  Declension  of  Nouns,  §  72,  3;  g 

76;  Less.  XV.    Of  Adjectives,  §88,3; 

Less.  XXI. 
Wo^m  (see  Potential  Verbs),  §  169-170; 

Less.  XXXII. 
Moods,  §  122-128. 
iWuffcn  (see  Potential  Verbs),  173-174; 

Less.  XXXI. 
m*,  §228;  Loss.  IX. 
3lam\id).lU,4:,Hem. 
9?cben,§249.    9Jcbj!,§230. 
5?cm,  §188, 11. 
9itd)t^,  §  1 1 2,  9 ;  §  89,  Hem.  2. 
9iie,  §188, 11. 
9Memanb,  §112, 7. 
-m,  Suffix,  §  57,  2, 4;  §  74,  3, 1. 
Nouns,  §  56. 
Numbers, §59,1;  §74;  §79;  Less. XV., 

2;  §115,  3,  ifem.  2. 
Numerals,  §98-105;  Less.XVII.;  Legs. 

XXIII. 
9fur,  §  263, 1,  2. 
Obgleic^,  objion,  obtoo^I,  §  268. 
O^nc,  §  241;  Less.  VII.     With  Infini- 
tive, §  128,  8,  ifem.  1. 
Ordinal  Numbers,  §  102;  Less.  XXIII. 
Participles,  §  129-131;  Less.  XXX. 
Passive  Voice,  §  134;    §  161;    178,  2, 

Hem.  3;  §  179,  2,  Hem.  1;    Lesson 

XLVIII. 
Perfect  Tense,  §  188;  Less.  VI. 
Personal   Pronouns,  §  107-108;   Lass. 

XI. ;  §  115,  3,  Hem.  2.     Replaced  by 

Article,  §  55, 1,  7«i*m.  1. 
Pluperfect  Tense,  Less.  VI. 


498 


INDEX. 


Plural,  §  59, 1 ;  §74;  §79. 

Possessive  Pronouns,  §109-110;  Less. 
XIX. 

Predicate  of  a  Sentence,  §  277. 

Predicate  Adjectives,  §  87;  Lesson 
XVIII.;  Superlative  used  predica- 
tively,  §  93,  Bmi.  2. 

Prefixes  of  Nouns,  §  57 ;  Less. XXXVII., 
6;  §58,1;  Lesson  XXXVI. 

Prefixes  of  Verbs,  §  149-157;  Lesson 
XXXIV.,  Lesson  XXXV. 

Prepositions,  §  196-258;  Less.  VIII.- 
X.;  Less.  XLIX. ;  Prepositions  con- 
tracted with  the  Article,  §  54;  Less. 
XI.  Idioms  with  Prepositions,  page 
194. 

Primitive  Words,  §  49. 

Pronouns,  §  106-115.  Personal  Pro- 
nouns, Less.  XI.  Personal  and  Pos- 
sessive Pronouns,  Lesson  XLI.  De- 
monstrative and  Relative  Pronouns, 
Less.  XLIII.  Indefinite  and  Inter- 
rogative Pronouns,  Lesson  XLII. 

Proper  Nouns  (declension  of),  §78. 

Reciprocal  Pronouns,  §108. 

Reflexive  Pronouns,  §  108. 

Reflexive  Verbs,  §  158 ;  Lesson  XLIIL 

Relative  Pronouns,  §114;  Less.  XLIII. 

rfal  4*aft  (Suffixes),  §  57,  2;  Lesson 
XXXVII. 

.fam  (Suffix),  §  26,  2;  Less.  XXXVIII. 

©cin,  ase  of,  as  Auxiliary,  §  135 ;  Less. 
XXVIII.  Conjugation  of,  §  137. 

Setn,  Possessive  Pronoun,  §  109. 

©elbfl,  felber,§108,i2em.  2. 

Sentence,  order  of  words  in,  §  276-284. 

Singular,  Nouns  without,  §  79,  3. 

©Dicker,  §111. 

©oncn,  §  118 ;  §  163-164 ;  Less.XXXIII. 

Subject,  position  of,  §  278;  §282. 

Subjunctive  Mood,  §  124;  Lesson  LI. 

Suffixes  of  Nouns,  §  57;  of  Adjectives, 
§86. 

Syntax  of  Article,  §  55 ;  of  Noun,  §  80 ; 


of  Adjective,  §94-95;  of  Pronoun,  § 
115;  of  Verb,  §  175-180;  of  Adverb, 
§192-195. 

Tenses,  §  132-133 ;  Lesson  XII. 

4^um,  Suffix,  §  57,  2. 

Ueber,  §  250. 

Um,§242;  urn  JU,§264. 

Umlaut,  §  83,  §  38 ;  Lesson  II. 

=ung,  Suffix,  §  57, 2. 

Unter,  §251. 

Variative  Numerals,  §  103,  8. 

Verbs,  classification  of,  §  116-120.  Con- 
jugation of,  §  121-134.  Auxiliary 
Verbs,  §  135-138;  Lesson  XXVIII. 
Regular  Verbs,  §  139-141 ;  Less.  IV., 
VI.  and  XII.  Irregular  Verbs,  §  142- 
148;  Lesson  XXIV. -XXVII.  Com- 
pound Verbs,  §  149-157;  Lesson 
XXXIV- XXXV.  Reflexive  Verbs, 
§158-159;  Lesson  XLI.  and  XLIV. 
Impersonal  Verbs,  §  160.  Potential 
Verbs,  §116,  3;  §  181,  ifem.  2 ,-  §162- 
174;  Less.XXXI.-XXxXIII.  Syntax 
of  the  Verb,  §  175-180. 

SRiel,  §112;  §92. 

SBon,  §  234.  Idioms  with  »on,  page  194. 

©or,  §  252. 

Vowels,  §  33-39;  Lesson  I.  and  II. 

SBann,  §  189, 1 ;  §266,3. 

2Barum,  §  113,  1,  Umi.  2,  2;  §  188,  lOj 
Rem.  3. 

2Bag,  §  113-114;  wag  fiir,  §  113, 3. 

SBegen,  §217;  §  107,  i?m.  2. 

SEBel^er,  §  113-114. 

2Bcmg,  §  112. 

2Benn,  §  266, 2. 

SBer,  §  113-114. 

2Berben,  §135;  §138;  Lesson  XII. 

SBie,  §  266,  2. 

2B0,  §  272;  in  Compounds,  §  188,  IL 
iJem.  3. 

SBoUen,  §  166-167 ;  Lesson  XXXII. 

3u,  §  235;  with  Infinitire,  §  128;  Lesa 
XXIX. 


COMFORT'S 

GERMAN  SERIES. 

By  GEORGE  F.  COMFORT,  A.M., 

PROFESSOR  OF  MODERN   LANGUAGES  AND  AESTHETICS,  SYRACUSE 

UNIVERSITY,  NEW  YORK  ;   LATE  PROFESSOR  OF  MODERN 

LANGUAGES,  ALLEGHANY  COLLEGE,  PA. 


A  GERMAN  PRIMER:    Introductory  to  "The  Ger- 
man  Series."     12 mo,  Half  Leather. 

A    FIRST   BOOK   IN   GERMAN:    to  Precede  the 
*'  German  Course."     i2mo,  Half  Leather. 

A    FIRST    GERMAN    READER:    to    Succeed   the 
"  First  Book  in  German."     i2mo,  Cloth. 

A  GERMAN  COURSE,  Adapted  for  Use  in  Colleges, 
Academies,  and  High-Schools.     12  mo.  Half  Leather. 

A  TEACHER'S  COMPANION  to  the  German  Course. 
i2mo.  Cloth. 

A  GERMAN  READER,  with  Notes  and  a  Vocabulary. 
1 2mo,  Half  Leather. 

A    MANUAL    OF    GERMAN    CONVERSATION 

i2mo,  Half  Leather. 


HARPER  6-  BROTHERS,  Publishers,  New  York, 


COMFORT'S  GERMAN  SERIES. 


In  preparing  this  German  Series,  it  has  been  the  aim  of  the  authoi 
to  incorporate  the  most  advanced  views  and  principles  of  linguistic 
instruction,  as  held  by  the  best  writers  upon  philology,  and  the  best 
practical  educators  in  Europe  and  America.  Especial  preference 
has  been  given  to  those  features  of  approved  works  for  the  study  of 
modern  languages  which,  in  Europe  more  especially,  have  stood  the 
test  of  practical  use.  A  few  other  features,  also,  have  been  intro- 
duced which  have  been  adopted  with  eminent  success  by  the  most 
able  professors  of  modern  language  in  their  personal  instruction, 
but  which  have  not  heretofore  found  their  way  into  text-books. 
Care  has  been  taken  to  give  due  relative  prominence  to  each  of 
these  tried  and  approved  principles,  and  to  mould  them  into  a  ho- 
mogeneous system,  adapted  to  the  wants  of  those  schools  in  Amer- 
ica in  which  the  German  language  is  taught. 

On  the  one  hand,  the  aim  has  been  to  incorporate  as  much  in- 
formation concerning  the  grammatical  structure,  the  historical  de- 
velopment, the  linguistic  relations,  and  the  literary  character  of  the 
German  language  as  is  possible  within  the  period  that  is  usually  de- 
voted to  this  study ;  and,  on  the  other,  to  initiate  the  student  into 
the  most  practical  method  of  learning  to  read,  to  write,  and  to  speak 
\he  German  language.  

The  Series  includes  the  following  works : 

FIRST  BOOK  IN  GERMAN:  for  younger  pupils  in  Grammar 
Schools,  Academies,  and  Seminaries.  The  treatment  is  eminently 
practical  ;  the  words  and  sentences  are  such  as  occur  in  familiar 
conversation  ;  the  grammatical  rules  are  stated  in  simple  and  terse 
laiiguage,  and  are  illustrated  by  a  large  number  of  examples ;  and 
the  Lessons  are  followed  by  a  collection  of  Familiar  Conversations, 
which  will  aid  the  pupil  to  express  himself  on  subjects  that  come 
naturally  within  the  range  of  the  juvenile  mind.  Although  intended 
primarily  for  young  classes,  it  may  be  used  with  advantage  as  an  in- 
troductory book  to  the  "German  Course"  by  those  of  a  more  ad- 
vanced age. 

FIRST  GERMAN  READER:  for  the  use  of  pupils  who  have 
studied  the  "  First  Book  in  German."  The  selections,  which  are 
from  the  best  and  most  popular  writings  in  the  charming  juvenile 
literature  of  Germany,  consist  mostly  of  anecdotes,  fables,  tales,  and 
pieces  of  didactic  poetry.  The  style  is  clear,  simple,  and  elevated. 
The  sentences  are  short,  and  the  words  employed  are  those  which 
are  most  familiarly  used  in  the  conversation  of  daily  life.  Abundant 
notes  are  given  for  the  explanation  of  the  text. 

GERMAN  COURSE:  for  beginners  in  the  study  of  the  German 
language  of  a  more  advanced  age  than  those  for  whom  the  "  First 
Book  in  German  "  is  adapted  ;  or  for  those  who  are  already  familiar 
with  that  book.  It  consists  of  four  parts  :  Part  I.  Practical  Lessons 
for  learning  to  read,  write,  and  speak  the  German  language.  Part 
II.  Familiar  Conversations  in  German  and  English,  idioms  and 


Comforts  German  Series . 


synonyms,  models  of  letters,  forms  of  business,  and  selections  from 
German  literature.  Part  III.  A  compend  of  German  Grammar, 
with  an  introduction  on  the  history,  characteristics,  and  dialects  of 
the  language.  Part  IV.  Tables  of  German  moneys,  weights,  and 
measures,  abbreviations,  personal  and  geographical  proper  names, 
and  German-English  and  English-German  vocabularies.  The  book 
is  eminently  philosophic  in  scope  and  practical  in  style,  and  is  well 
adapted  to  the  wants  of  classes  in  our  colleges,  academies,  and  high- 
schools. 

TEACHER'S  COMPANION  to  the  German  Course:  for  the 
use  of  comparatively  inexperienced  teachers,  containing  suggestions 
with  reference  to  methods  of  instruction  in  living  language,  and  espe- 
cially with  reference  to  the  use  of  the  "German  Course."  It  con- 
tains a  key  to  the  exercises  in  the  lessons  of  Part  I.,  with  philological, 
historical,  geographical,  and  explanatory  notes  ;  a  key  and  notes  to 
Part  II.  ;  and  notes  to  Parts  III.  and  IV.  The  teacher  will  find  it 
invaluable. 

GERMAN  READER:  to  follow  the  "German  Course."  The 
selections  are  made  from  the  best  German  writers,  mostly  of  the 
present  century  ;  and,  that  the  student  may  feel  as  definitely  as  pos- 
sible the  spirit  of  the  language,  they  have  reference  to  Germany  and 
illustrate  German  history,  biography,  geography,  mythology,  and  so- 
cial life  and. customs.  Abundant  notes  are  added,  which  contain 
elucidations  of  the  more  difficult  constructions  and  explanations  of 
many  of  the  historical  events  and  social  customs  which  are  alluded 
to  in  the  text.  Copious  references  to  the  "  German  Course  "  are  in- 
terspersed. A  vocabulary  of  all  the  words  that  occur  in  the  text  of 
the  Reader,  and  full  indexes  of  authors  and  subjects  are  given  also. 

MANUAL  OF  GERMAN  CONVERSA  TION:  to  be  used 
alternately  with  the  Reader.  The  conversations  are  on  the  most 
familiar  subjects  of  daily  life  :  selections  from  the  "  Illustrated  Cat- 
echisms of  the  Arts  and  Sciences  ;"  an  extensive  collection  of  idi- 
oms ;  items  from  newspapers ;  advertisements ;  an  extensive  col- 
lection of  classified  words,  phrases,  and  expressions,  referring  to  va- 
rious departments  of  science,  art,  politics,  religion,  trade,  manufac- 
tures, and  daily  life  (with  lists  of  adjectives,  regular  verbs,  homonyms, 
and  compound  words) ;  and  a  number  of  pages  of  German  current 
hand.  The  volume  contains  also  frequent  grammatical  references 
to  the  "  German  Course." 


Commendatory  Testimonials,  Notices,  &c. 

The  following  are  a  few  of  the  commendations  of  the  German 
Series  received  from  prominent  educational  sources : 

From  E.  R.  Ruggles, /'r^jj<7r  of  Modern  Languages  in  Dartmouth 
College,  Hanover,  N.  H 
We  have  adopted  the  Grammar  (German  Course),  and  it  is  now 
in  the  hands  of  about  a  hundred  of  our  students.     It  is  in  my  judg- 
ment, on  the  whole,  the  best  German  Grammar  published  in  this 
country. 
From  J.  H.  Brenneman,  Principal  of  High-School^  Chillicothe,  O. 
It  is  the  best  German  Grammar  in  print 


Comforfs  German  Series-. 


From  C.  P.  Wilcox,  Professor  of  Modern  Lans^uages  in  the  Georgia 
State  University,  Athens. 
It  is  a  somewhat  invidious  task  to  substitute  new  class-books  for 
those  already  in  use.  The  fact  that  I  have  done  so  in  this  instance 
is  a  proof  of  the  value  I  set  upon  Prof.  Comfort's  "  Course."  I  was 
so  struck  with  its  peculiar  adaptedness  to  the  wants  of  our  Ameri- 
can students  that  I  determined  to  introduce  it  into  my  classes. 

From  B.  W.  DwiGHT,  Ph.D.,  Vice-President  American  Philological 
Association. 
Having  taught  German  for  twenty-five  years,  I  have  used  every  one 
of  the  manuals  of  instruction  in  that  noble  language,  and  have  found 
them  each  marked  with  decided  faults — some  in  being  too  minute, 
complicated,  and  voluminous,  and  others  in  being  quite  too  general 
and  vague.  Prof  Comfort's  "Course"  is  happily  free  from  these 
faults,  and  is  scholarly,  practical,  and  well  adapted  to  the  real  wants 
of  those  who  wish  to  learn  the  German  language  rapidly  and  well. 

From  Prof  F.  L.  O.  Roehrig,  formerly  Director  of  the  Polyglot  Bu- 
reau, New  York,  and  now  Professor  in  Cornell  University. 

After  a  careful  examination  of  Prof  Comfort's  work,  I  hasten  to 
express  to  you  my  high  appreciation  of  its  merits.  This  being  the 
first  German  Grammar  in  the  English  language  that  stands  on  the 
solid  foundation  of  true  and  scientific  philology,  its  appearance  ought 
■o  be  hailed  with  delight  by  every  fair  critic. 

The  Germans  can  now  be  proud  of  having  our  beloved  mother 
tongue  presented  to  the  American  public  in  a  worthy  form. 

The  introductory  lessons  are  remarkable  for  the  lucid  and  prac- 
tical manner  in  which  the  elements  of  the  language  are  there  un- 
folded. 

The  idiomatic  accuracy  of  the  German  exercises  is  one  of  the  most 
striking  features  of  this  excellent  work. 

From  G.  F.  Behringer,  Assistant  Professor  of  German,  Cornell  Uni- 
versity. 
We  propose  introducing  Comfort's  "  German  Course  "  into  all  our 
;lasses  next  trimester,  numbering  one  hundred  and  fifty  students. 

From  Rev.  William  Nast,  D.D.,  Editor  of'Der  Christliche  Apolo- 
get,'^  and  President  of  German  Wallace  College,  Berea,  Ohio. 

The  study  of  the  German  language  is  finding  its  proper  place  in 
the  regular  course  of  schools  of  every  grade.  Among  the  text-books 
which  have  lately  been  published  to  facilitate  the  study  of  this  im- 
portant and  somewhat  difficult  language,  Prof  Comfort's  "  German 
Course  "  takes  a  high  rank. 

The  chief  requisite  for  a  practical  Grammar  of  a  living  language 
is  fully  met  by  Prof  Comfort.  The  scholar  is  not  needlessly  bur- 
dened with  theory,  but  is  taught,  by  well-chosen  exercises  and  ex- 
amples, at  the  very  start,  to  make  practical  efforts  himself 

From  Prof  Oscar  Howes,  A.M.,  of  Shurtleff  College,  Upper  Alton,  III. 
I  am  much  pleased  with  Comfort's  "  German  Course,"  and  think 
I  shall  like  it  better  than  any  other. 

From  Mrs.  A.  C.  Knight,  Wilbraham,  Mass. 
I  have  used  the  "  German  Course  "  two  terms,  and  am  well  pleased 
with  it.     I  prefer  it  to  any  Grammar  I  have  yet  used. 


Comforfs  German  Series. 


From  Prof:  Friedrich  Stengel,  School  of  Mines ^  Columbia  College, 
New  York. 

Prof.  Comfort's  "  German  Course  "  rises  above  the  common  mech- 
anism of  modern  text-books. 

This  method  is  well  calculated  to  introduce  the  pupil  gradually  to 
the  difficulties  of  the  language ;  and  the  clear  and  logical  mode  of 
arrangement  contributes  to  facilitate  study  to  such  a  degree  that,  if 
the  instructor  follows  the  practical  hints  given  in  the  "Teacher's 
Companion  to  the  German  Course,"  the  pupil,  with  a  little  perse- 
verance, will  soon  be  able  to  read  our  German  authors,  and  write  and 
speak  with  propriety. 

From   Miss   Rachel   Redford,  Principal  of  Seminary,  Barking 
Ridge,  N.J. 
I  have  no  hesitancy  in  saying  that  Comfort's  "  First  Book  in  Ger- 
man "  is  the  best  on  its  subject  that  I  have  ever  examined. 

From  Prof  T.  B.  Threlkeld,  Salem  College,  Ky. 
I  regard  Comfort's  "  German  Course  "  a  very  superior  work.     It 
renders  easy  the  study  of  the  German  language. 

From  Prof  L.  G.  Marshall,  Harrison  Academy,  Cynthiana,  Ky. 
It  seems  to  me  certainly  the  most  scholarly  production  on  the 
subject  in  our  country,  and  last,  if  not  least,  it  is  the  most  beautifully 
printed. 

From  Pro£  J.  C.  Van  Benschoten,  Wesleyan  University,  Middle- 
town,  Conn. 
I  have  found  Prof  Comfort's  "  German  Course "  the  best  text- 
book in  the  German  language  I  have  ever  used. 

From  Gen.  Franz  Sigel. 

I  have  with  some  care  perused  the  new  English-German  Gram- 
mar of  Prof  Comfort,  and  I  think  it  my  duty  to  write  these  few  lines 
as  an  appreciation  of  the  method  applied  in  the  book.  Such  a  Gram- 
mar and  compendium  is  an  excellent  addition  to  what  we  possess  in 
this  line  of  literature,  and  undoubtedly  will  find  its  way  into  our  En- 
glish and  German-American  schools  where  the  German  language 
has  been  made  a  branch  of  study.  It  is  "  short,  sharp,  and  decisive," 
and  gives  high  proof  of  the  thorough  and  comprehensive  mind  of  its 
author. 

From  Dr.  H.  Von  Holst,  New  York. 

It  gives  me  satisfaction  to  state,  after  a  pretty  careful  examination 
of  Prof  G.  F.  Comfort's  "  German  Course,"  that  I  think  the  book 
may  conscientiously  be  recommended  to  every  teacher.  It  will  be 
found  practical  as  well  as  reliable. 

From  Dr.  J.  B.  Feuling,  Professor  of  Comparative  Philology,  Uni- 
versity of  Wisconsin,  Madison. 
I  consider  Prof  Comfort's  "  German  Course  "  a  very  good  book, 
and  I  will  introduce  it  here  at  the  next  change  of  our  text-books. 

From  F.  Christianer,  County  Superintendent,  Abingdon,  Knox  Co.. 

III. 
After  a  due  examination,  I  conclude  the  "  Course  "  is  easy,  progress- 
i-'c,  and  comprehensible,  and  just  the  thing  for  our  American  students. 
Being  a  German  by  birth  and  education,  I  fully  appreciate  the  work, 
and  shall  with  pleasure  recommend  it  to  our  public  institutions. 


Comforfs  German  Series. 


From  Eugene  Von  Nordhausen,  A.M.,  LL.B.,  late  Professor  of 
Modern  Latiguages,  New  York. 

It  was  with  great  pleasure  that  I  perused  carefully  a  "  German 
Course  "  published  by  Harper  &  Brothers.  Without  criticising  the 
former  works  on  the  subject,  I  must  acknowledge  the  great  superior- 
ity of  this  in  the  mode  of  introducing  this  difficult  language  to  stu- 
dents. 

I  have  no  doubt  that  an  ordinary  good  scholar  may,  alone,  with 
the  help  of  this  book,  learn  enough  of  the  German  language  to  en- 
able him  to  enjoy  its  beauties. 

Frotn  Prof  Joseph  E.  King,  Principal  of  Fort  Edward  Institute,  N.  V. 
Comfort's  "  German  Course  "  has  more  than  realized  our  expect- 
ations. 

From  J.  H.  FoRD,  Principal  of  School,  Jeannerette,  Parish  Iberia,  La. 
It  is  a  "Course"  prepared  with  remarkable  care ;  the  rules  are  con- 
cise and  lucid.     I  have  decided  to  use  it  in  my  future  classes. 

From  Dr.  GEORGE  W.  Erdmann,  Teacher  of  German  in  New  York. 
My  first  judgment  has  not  only  been  fully  justified,  but  I  have 
found  it  answerable  and  useful  far  beyond  my  expectations.     I  shall 
use  Comfort's  "  German  Course  "  exclusively  hereafter. 

From  J.  C.  Brodfuehrer,  Professor  of  Languages,  College  Hill,  O. 
Of  the  many  text-books  with  which  I  am  acquainted,  I  consider 
Comfort's  the  best  for  clearness  of  statement  and  arrangement.  The 
best  recommendation  of  the  work  is  that  it  has  bravely  stood  the  test 
of  the  school-room  and  class  examination.  I  wish  every  instructor 
of  German  could  see  this  book  to  compare  it  with  others  and  judge 
for  himself 

From  Prof  A.  F.  Berhdolt,  Mercersburg  College,  Franklin  Co.,  Pa. 
The  work  commends  itself  to  all  students  of  German.  Teachers 
of  German  have  long  felt  the  want  of  a  Grammar  embodying,  as  this 
does,  at  the  same  time,  the  grammatical  forms  and  the  history  and 
development  of  such  forms.  The  tables  of  the  Comparison  of 
Words  in  the  Indo-European  Languages  are  of  incalculable  benefit 
to  the  student. 

From  Rev.  N.  E.  CoBlJEiGYi,  PresideJtt  of  Eastern  Tennessee  Wesleyan 
University,  Athens. 
I  like  the  "  German  Course  "  better  for  a  text-book  than  any  other 
bi  the  many  it  has  been  my  privilege  to  examine.  For  method,  com- 
pleteness, and  critical  accuracy  I  consider  it  superior  to  any  other  in 
this  country. 

From  Prof  J.  B.  Garritt,  Hanover  College,  Ind. 
I  have  already  carefully  gone  over  the  first  part  of  the  "  German 
Course,"  and  am  so  much  pleased  with  it  that  I  have  decided  to  use 
it  the  next  year  with  my  class. 

From  Prof  Louis  Kistler,  Northwestern  University,  Evanston,  III. 
I  can  conscientiously  recommend  it  as  a  most  suitable  introduc- 
tion into  the  living,  spoken  speech  of  the  German  people,  while  it 
furnishes,  at  the  same  time,  the  essential  principles  necessary  to  lead 
to  an  understanding  of  the  rich  literature  of  Germany.  The 
"  Course  "  will  supply,  in  this  regard,  a  long-felt  want. 


Comfort's  German  Series. 


From  Prof.  T.  W.  Tobey,  Padticah,  Ky. 
The  complete  "German  Course,"  by  G.  F.  Comfort,  A.M.,  is  a 
valuable  work.     It  only  needs  the  trial  of  the  school-room  to  be 
highly  appreciated  by  teachers  of  the  German  language. 

From  Dr.  Wm.  C.  Grossman,  Coyner's  Springs  Female  Institute,  Va. 
It  is  indeed  an  excellent  work,  and  one  we  have  been  long  in  want 
of.     With  such  a  book  in  hand,  it  is  truly  a  delight  to  study  and 
to  teach  the  German  language. 

From  Albert  Jennings,  Principal  of  Union  School,  Lawton,  Mick. 
The  more  I  use  Comfort's  "  Course,"  the  more  I  like  it 

From  Prof.  John  Rosenberg,  Soule  University,  Chappell  Hill,  Texas. 
After  a  thorough  and  candid  study  of  Comfort's  "Course,"  the 
lucid  treatment  of  his  subject,  the  harmonious  combination  of  theory 
and  practice,  with  the  short  though  comprehensive  history  of  the 
language,  have  induced  me  to  recommend  the  "  Course  "  for  adop- 
tion as  a  text-book' of  the  University. 

From  James  T.  Smith,  Wadesboro,  N.  C. 
Knowing,  as  we  do,  that  you  depend  entirely  on  the  merits  of  this 
book  to  secure  popularity,  we  must  congratulate  you  as  the  publish- 
ers of  this  truly  excellent  work.  *  *  *  There  is  one  subject  on  which 
we  all  agree,  viz.,  that  the  third  part  of  Comfort's  "  Course  "  is  the 
most  systematic,  scientific,  and  truly  philosophical  treatise  on  the 
language  in  the  English  language. 

From  Rev.  J.  C.  Pershing,  D.D.,  President  of  Pittsburg  Female 
College. 
It  affords  me  pleasure  to  say  that,  at  the  suggestion  of  our  excel- 
lent teacher  of  German,  your  "  German  Course  "  was  adopted  as  one 
of  our  text-books  at  the  commencement  of  the  present  collegiate 
year. 

From  Rev.  James  Gilmour,  Principal  of  Falley  Seminary,  Fulton, 
New  York. 
Your  "  German  Course,"  by  G.  F.  Comfort,  has  been  examined  by 
our  German  Professor.     He  pronounces  it  "  admirable,"  and  will  in- 
troduce it  to  the  next  class. 

From  Prof  Henry  Oldenhage,  Galena,  III. 
We  find  Comfort's  books  satisfactory.    They  stand  the  test  in  the 
recitation-room. 

From  John  P.  Lacroix,  Ohio  Wesleyan  University,  Delarvare,  O. 
I  have  taken  a  class  of  thirty-eight  through  Comfort's  "  German 
Course,"  and  I  have  no  hesitation  in  placing  it  far  above  any  similar 
work  which  I  have  examined,  both  in  respect  to  clearness  of  state- 
ment and  scientific  arrangement,  and  to  adaptation  to  a  rapid  acquir- 
ing of  a  practical  mastery  of  this  richest  of  all  languages. 

From  Rev.  Alexander  Burns,  Simpson  Centenary  College,  Indianola, 
Iowa. 
I  introduced  your  "  German  Course  "  at  the  beginning  of  the  pres- 
ent collegiate  year,  and  have  been  using  it  ever  since.     I  am  highly 
delighted  with  it.  .     . 


8  Comfort  ^s  German  Series. 

From  Prof.  O.  Howes,  A.M.,  Shurtleff  College,  Upper  Alton,  III. 

I  regard  Comfort's  "  German  Reader"  as  an  excellent  book,  thor- 
oughly edited  and  beautifully  published.     The  selections  are  good, 
well  arranged,  and  unusually  varied  in  their  character,  and,  as  should 
be  the  case  in  an  elementary  reader,  they  are  mostly  in  prose. 
From  John  P.  Lacroix,  Ohio  Wesleyan  University,  Delaware,  O. 

The  "  Reader  "  consists  of  excellent  selections  from  the  best  mod- 
ern authors,  and  is  a  worthy  and  essential  sequel  to  the  "  Grammar." 

From  Prof.  La  Theo.  Jobe,  St.  John's  College,  Little  Rock,  Ark. 

Comfort's  "  German  Reader  "  I  have  examined  with  great  pleas- 
ure. The  judicious  selection  in  its  compilation,  and  its  typograph- 
ical elegance  and  correctness,  highly  recommend  its  introduction 
into  schools  and  colleges. 

From  Prof.  Ernst  Moench,  Bethlehem,  Pa. 
Comfort's  "  German  Reader  "  is,  in  my  opinion,  a  most  excellent 
work. 

From  Prof  A.  B.  Hyde,  Alleghany  College,  Meadville,  Pa. 

I  find  Prof  Comfort's  "  German  Reader  "  fully  worthy  of  his  rep- 
utation, and  his  industry,  taste,  and  learning  combine  to  make  it  a 
most  excellent  book. 

From  C.  H.  ISHAM,  New  York  City. 

Comfort's  "  German  Reader  "  is  first-rate — just  what  I  wanted. 
From  the  "  College  Courant,^''  New  Haven,  Conn. 

The  "  German  Course  "  is  adapted  to  all  tastes.  We  have  here 
the  old  style  of  theoretical  grammar,  and  also  the  new  practical 
methods  that  have  been  devised  for  teaching  language.  *  *  *  The 
treatment  is,  in  general,  full  enough  for  all  practical  purposes.  The 
rules  are  clear,  concise,  well  expressed,  and  at  the  same  time  com- 
prehensive of  the  whole  principle.  There  is  no  useless  verbiage. 
From  the  '' N.  Y.  Tribune:' 

The  great  merit  of  Prof.  Comfort  as  a  teacher  of  languages,  in  the 
present  as  well  as  in  his  former  works,  consists  in  his  remarkable 
power  of  adaptation.  He  evinces  a  rare  sympathy  with  the  intel- 
lectual wants  of  the  pupil,  and  usually  furnishes  him  with  a  key  to 
the  actual  difficulties  of  the  case,  instead  of  increasing  his  perplexities 
by  abstruse  theories  which  belong  to  an  advanced  stage  of  progress. 
From  the  ''Pittsburg  (Pa.)  Gazette:'' 

We  find  the  work  clearly  indicates  an  advanced  position  in  the 
study  of  German,  amd  is  excellently  arranged  for  acquiring  a  thor- 
ough knowledge  of  the  language.  Prof  Comfort  has  incorporated 
the  methods  and  principles  of  the  best  and  most  thorough  educators 
in  Europe  and  America,  and  the  principles  and  features  of  the  best 
minds  are  here  moulded  into  a  system  admirably  adapted  to  the 
wants  of  the  different  grades  of  institutions  of  learning.  *  *  *  The 
work  is  well  suited  for  colleges  and  other  schools,  and  is  worthy  to 
be  introduced  every  where. 


For  Terms ^  &*e.,  address 

HARPER  &   BROTHERS, 

Franklin  Square,  New  York. 


:4^  ^^- 


-/:■..  ' 


'f;;--.; 


m  35708 


